RTL PDF

Run-Time Library (RTL) :
Reference guide.
Free Pascal version 3.0.0:
Reference guide for RTL units.
Document version 3.0
November 2015
Michaël Van Canneyt

Contents
0.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
1 Reference for unit ’BaseUnix’ 113

1.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
1.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
1.3 Constants, types and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
1.3.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
1.3.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
1.4 Procedures and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
1.4.1 CreateShellArgV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
1.4.2 FpAccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
1.4.3 FpAlarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
1.4.4 FpChdir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
1.4.5 FpChmod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
1.4.6 FpChown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
1.4.7 FpClose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
1.4.8 FpClosedir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
1.4.9 FpDup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
1.4.10 FpDup2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
1.4.11 FpExecv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
1.4.12 FpExecve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
1.4.13 FpExit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
1.4.14 FpFcntl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
1.4.15 fpfdfillset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
1.4.16 fpFD_CLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
1.4.17 fpFD_ISSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
1.4.18 fpFD_SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
1.4.19 fpFD_ZERO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
1.4.20 FpFork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
1.4.21 FPFStat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
1.4.22 FpFtruncate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
1
CONTENTS
1.4.23 FpGetcwd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

1.4.24 FpGetegid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
1.4.25 FpGetEnv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
1.4.26 fpgeterrno . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
1.4.27 FpGeteuid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
1.4.28 FpGetgid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
1.4.29 FpGetgroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
1.4.30 FpGetpgrp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
1.4.31 FpGetpid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
1.4.32 FpGetppid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
1.4.33 fpGetPriority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
1.4.34 FpGetRLimit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
1.4.35 FpGetsid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
1.4.36 FpGetuid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
1.4.37 FpIOCtl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
1.4.38 FpKill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
1.4.39 FpLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
1.4.40 FpLseek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
1.4.41 fpLstat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
1.4.42 FpMkdir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
1.4.43 FpMkfifo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
1.4.44 Fpmmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
1.4.45 Fpmunmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
1.4.46 FpNanoSleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
1.4.47 fpNice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
1.4.48 FpOpen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
1.4.49 FpOpendir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
1.4.50 FpPause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
1.4.51 FpPipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
1.4.52 FpPoll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
1.4.53 FppRead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
1.4.54 FppWrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
1.4.55 FpRead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
1.4.56 FpReaddir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
1.4.57 fpReadLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
1.4.58 FpReadV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
1.4.59 FpRename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
1.4.60 FpRmdir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
1.4.61 fpSelect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
1.4.62 fpseterrno . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
2
CONTENTS
1.4.63 FpSetgid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

1.4.64 fpSetPriority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
1.4.65 FpSetRLimit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
1.4.66 FpSetsid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
1.4.67 fpsettimeofday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
1.4.68 FpSetuid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
1.4.69 FPSigaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
1.4.70 FpSigAddSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
1.4.71 FpSigDelSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
1.4.72 FpsigEmptySet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
1.4.73 FpSigFillSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
1.4.74 FpSigIsMember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
1.4.75 FpSignal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
1.4.76 FpSigPending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
1.4.77 FpSigProcMask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
1.4.78 FpSigSuspend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
1.4.79 FpSigTimedWait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
1.4.80 FpSleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
1.4.81 FpStat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
1.4.82 fpSymlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
1.4.83 fpS_ISBLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
1.4.84 fpS_ISCHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
1.4.85 fpS_ISDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
1.4.86 fpS_ISFIFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
1.4.87 fpS_ISLNK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
1.4.88 fpS_ISREG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
1.4.89 fpS_ISSOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
1.4.90 fptime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
1.4.91 FpTimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
1.4.92 FpUmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
1.4.93 FpUname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
1.4.94 FpUnlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
1.4.95 FpUtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
1.4.96 FpWait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
1.4.97 FpWaitPid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
1.4.98 FpWrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
1.4.99 FpWriteV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
1.4.100 FreeShellArgV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
1.4.101 wexitStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
1.4.102 wifexited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
3
CONTENTS
1.4.103 wifsignaled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

1.4.104 wstopsig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
1.4.105 wtermsig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
2 Reference for unit ’character’ 210

2.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
2.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
2.3.1 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
2.4.1 ConvertFromUtf32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
2.4.2 ConvertToUtf32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
2.4.3 GetNumericValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
2.4.4 GetUnicodeCategory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
2.4.5 IsControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
2.4.6 IsDigit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
2.4.7 IsHighSurrogate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
2.4.8 IsLetter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.4.9 IsLetterOrDigit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.4.10 IsLower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.4.11 IsLowSurrogate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.4.12 IsNumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
2.4.13 IsPunctuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
2.4.14 IsSeparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
2.4.15 IsSurrogate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
2.4.16 IsSurrogatePair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
2.4.17 IsSymbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
2.4.18 IsUpper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
2.4.19 IsWhiteSpace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
2.4.20 ToLower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
2.4.21 ToUpper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
2.5 TCharacter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
2.5.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
2.5.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
2.5.3 TCharacter.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
2.5.4 TCharacter.ConvertFromUtf32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
2.5.5 TCharacter.ConvertToUtf32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
2.5.6 TCharacter.GetNumericValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
2.5.7 TCharacter.GetUnicodeCategory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
2.5.8 TCharacter.IsControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
4
CONTENTS
2.5.9 TCharacter.IsDigit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

2.5.10 TCharacter.IsSurrogate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
2.5.11 TCharacter.IsHighSurrogate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
2.5.12 TCharacter.IsLowSurrogate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
2.5.13 TCharacter.IsSurrogatePair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
2.5.14 TCharacter.IsLetter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
2.5.15 TCharacter.IsLetterOrDigit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
2.5.16 TCharacter.IsLower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
2.5.17 TCharacter.IsNumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
2.5.18 TCharacter.IsPunctuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
2.5.19 TCharacter.IsSeparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
2.5.20 TCharacter.IsSymbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
2.5.21 TCharacter.IsUpper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
2.5.22 TCharacter.IsWhiteSpace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
2.5.23 TCharacter.ToLower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
2.5.24 TCharacter.ToUpper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
3 Reference for unit ’charset’ 228

3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
3.2.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
3.2.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
3.3.1 getascii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
3.3.2 getmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
3.3.3 getunicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
3.3.4 loadbinaryunicodemapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
3.3.5 loadunicodemapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
3.3.6 mappingavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
3.3.7 registerbinarymapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
3.3.8 registermapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
4 Reference for unit ’Classes’ 233

4.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
4.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
4.3.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
4.3.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
4.3.3 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
4.4.1 ActivateClassGroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
5
CONTENTS
4.4.2 BeginGlobalLoading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

4.4.3 BinToHex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
4.4.4 Bounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
4.4.5 CheckSynchronize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
4.4.6 ClassGroupOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
4.4.7 CollectionsEqual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
4.4.8 EndGlobalLoading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
4.4.9 ExtractStrings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
4.4.10 FindClass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
4.4.11 FindGlobalComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
4.4.12 FindIdentToInt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
4.4.13 FindIntToIdent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
4.4.14 FindNestedComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
4.4.15 GetClass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
4.4.16 GetFixupInstanceNames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
4.4.17 GetFixupReferenceNames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
4.4.18 GlobalFixupReferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
4.4.19 GroupDescendentsWith . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
4.4.20 HexToBin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
4.4.21 IdentToInt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
4.4.22 InitComponentRes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
4.4.23 InitInheritedComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
4.4.24 IntToIdent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
4.4.25 InvalidPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
4.4.26 LineStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
4.4.27 NotifyGlobalLoading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
4.4.28 ObjectBinaryToText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
4.4.29 ObjectResourceToText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
4.4.30 ObjectTextToBinary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
4.4.31 ObjectTextToResource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
4.4.32 Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
4.4.33 PointsEqual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
4.4.34 ReadComponentRes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
4.4.35 ReadComponentResEx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
4.4.36 ReadComponentResFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
4.4.37 Rect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
4.4.38 RedirectFixupReferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
4.4.39 RegisterClass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
4.4.40 RegisterClassAlias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
4.4.41 RegisterClasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
6
CONTENTS
4.4.42 RegisterComponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

4.4.43 RegisterFindGlobalComponentProc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
4.4.44 RegisterInitComponentHandler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
4.4.45 RegisterIntegerConsts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
4.4.46 RegisterNoIcon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
4.4.47 RegisterNonActiveX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
4.4.48 RemoveFixupReferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
4.4.49 RemoveFixups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
4.4.50 SmallPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
4.4.51 StartClassGroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
4.4.52 UnRegisterClass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
4.4.53 UnRegisterClasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
4.4.54 UnregisterFindGlobalComponentProc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
4.4.55 UnRegisterModuleClasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
4.4.56 WriteComponentResFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
4.5 EBitsError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
4.5.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
4.6 EClassNotFound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
4.6.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
4.7 EComponentError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
4.7.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
4.8 EFCreateError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
4.8.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
4.9 EFilerError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
4.9.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
4.10 EFOpenError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
4.10.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
4.11 EInvalidImage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
4.11.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
4.12 EInvalidOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
4.12.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
4.13 EListError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
4.13.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
4.14 EMethodNotFound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
4.14.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
4.15 EObserver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
4.15.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
4.16 EOutOfResources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
4.16.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
4.17 EParserError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
7
CONTENTS
4.17.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

4.18 EReadError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
4.18.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
4.19 EResNotFound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
4.19.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
4.20 EStreamError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
4.20.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
4.21 EStringListError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
4.21.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
4.22 EThread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
4.22.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
4.23 EThreadDestroyCalled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
4.23.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
4.24 EThreadExternalException . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
4.24.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
4.25 EWriteError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
4.25.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
4.26 IDesignerNotify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
4.26.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
4.26.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
4.26.3 IDesignerNotify.Modified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
4.26.4 IDesignerNotify.Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
4.27 IFPObserved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
4.27.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
4.27.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
4.27.3 IFPObserved.FPOAttachObserver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
4.27.4 IFPObserved.FPODetachObserver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
4.27.5 IFPObserved.FPONotifyObservers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
4.28 IFPObserver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
4.28.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
4.28.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
4.28.3 IFPObserver.FPOObservedChanged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
4.29 IInterfaceComponentReference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
4.29.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
4.29.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
4.29.3 IInterfaceComponentReference.GetComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
4.30 IInterfaceList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
4.30.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
4.30.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
4.30.3 Property overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
8
CONTENTS
4.30.4 IInterfaceList.Get . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

4.30.5 IInterfaceList.GetCapacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
4.30.6 IInterfaceList.GetCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
4.30.7 IInterfaceList.Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
4.30.8 IInterfaceList.SetCapacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
4.30.9 IInterfaceList.SetCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
4.30.10 IInterfaceList.Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
4.30.11 IInterfaceList.Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
4.30.12 IInterfaceList.Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
4.30.13 IInterfaceList.First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
4.30.14 IInterfaceList.IndexOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
4.30.15 IInterfaceList.Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
4.30.16 IInterfaceList.Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
4.30.17 IInterfaceList.Last . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
4.30.18 IInterfaceList.Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
4.30.19 IInterfaceList.Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
4.30.20 IInterfaceList.Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
4.30.21 IInterfaceList.Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
4.30.22 IInterfaceList.Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
4.30.23 IInterfaceList.Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
4.31 IStreamPersist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
4.31.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
4.31.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
4.31.3 IStreamPersist.LoadFromStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
4.31.4 IStreamPersist.SaveToStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
4.32 IStringsAdapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
4.32.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
4.32.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
4.32.3 IStringsAdapter.ReferenceStrings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
4.32.4 IStringsAdapter.ReleaseStrings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
4.33 IVCLComObject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
4.33.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
4.33.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
4.33.3 IVCLComObject.GetTypeInfoCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
4.33.4 IVCLComObject.GetTypeInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
4.33.5 IVCLComObject.GetIDsOfNames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
4.33.6 IVCLComObject.Invoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
4.33.7 IVCLComObject.SafeCallException . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
4.33.8 IVCLComObject.FreeOnRelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
4.34 TAbstractObjectReader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
9
CONTENTS
4.34.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

4.34.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
4.34.3 TAbstractObjectReader.NextValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
4.34.4 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
4.34.5 TAbstractObjectReader.BeginRootComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
4.34.6 TAbstractObjectReader.BeginComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
4.34.7 TAbstractObjectReader.BeginProperty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4.34.8 TAbstractObjectReader.Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4.34.9 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadBinary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4.34.10 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadFloat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4.34.11 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadSingle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
4.34.12 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
4.34.13 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadCurrency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
4.34.14 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadIdent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
4.34.15 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadInt8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
4.34.16 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadInt16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
4.34.19 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
4.34.20 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadSignature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
4.34.21 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
4.34.22 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
4.34.23 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadWideString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
4.34.24 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadUnicodeString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
4.34.25 TAbstractObjectReader.SkipComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
4.34.26 TAbstractObjectReader.SkipValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
4.35 TAbstractObjectWriter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
4.35.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
4.35.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
4.35.3 TAbstractObjectWriter.BeginCollection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
4.35.4 TAbstractObjectWriter.BeginComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
4.35.5 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteSignature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
4.35.6 TAbstractObjectWriter.BeginList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
4.35.7 TAbstractObjectWriter.EndList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
4.35.8 TAbstractObjectWriter.BeginProperty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
4.35.9 TAbstractObjectWriter.EndProperty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
4.35.10 TAbstractObjectWriter.Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
4.35.11 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteBinary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
4.35.12 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteBoolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
4.35.13 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteFloat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
10
CONTENTS
4.35.14 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteSingle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

4.35.15 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
4.35.16 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteCurrency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
4.35.17 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteIdent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
4.35.18 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteInteger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
4.35.19 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteUInt64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
4.35.20 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteVariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
4.35.21 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteMethodName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
4.35.22 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
4.35.23 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
4.35.24 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteWideString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
4.35.25 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteUnicodeString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
4.36 TBasicAction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
4.36.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
4.36.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
4.36.4 TBasicAction.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
4.36.5 TBasicAction.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
4.36.6 TBasicAction.HandlesTarget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
4.36.7 TBasicAction.UpdateTarget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
4.36.8 TBasicAction.ExecuteTarget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
4.36.9 TBasicAction.Execute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
4.36.10 TBasicAction.RegisterChanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
4.36.11 TBasicAction.UnRegisterChanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
4.36.12 TBasicAction.Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
4.36.13 TBasicAction.ActionComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
4.36.14 TBasicAction.OnExecute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
4.36.15 TBasicAction.OnUpdate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
4.37 TBasicActionLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
4.37.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
4.37.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
4.37.4 TBasicActionLink.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
4.37.5 TBasicActionLink.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
4.37.6 TBasicActionLink.Execute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
4.37.7 TBasicActionLink.Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
4.37.8 TBasicActionLink.Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
4.37.9 TBasicActionLink.OnChange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
4.38 TBinaryObjectReader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
4.38.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
11
CONTENTS
4.38.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

4.38.3 TBinaryObjectReader.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
4.38.4 TBinaryObjectReader.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
4.38.5 TBinaryObjectReader.NextValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
4.38.6 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
4.38.7 TBinaryObjectReader.BeginRootComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
4.38.8 TBinaryObjectReader.BeginComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
4.38.9 TBinaryObjectReader.BeginProperty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
4.38.10 TBinaryObjectReader.Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
4.38.11 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadBinary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
4.38.12 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadFloat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
4.38.13 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadSingle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
4.38.14 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
4.38.15 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadCurrency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
4.38.16 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadIdent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
4.38.17 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadInt8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
4.38.18 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadInt16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
4.38.21 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
4.38.22 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadSignature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
4.38.23 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
4.38.24 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
4.38.25 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadWideString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
4.38.26 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadUnicodeString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
4.38.27 TBinaryObjectReader.SkipComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
4.38.28 TBinaryObjectReader.SkipValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
4.39 TBinaryObjectWriter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
4.39.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
4.39.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
4.39.3 TBinaryObjectWriter.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
4.39.4 TBinaryObjectWriter.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
4.39.5 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteSignature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
4.39.6 TBinaryObjectWriter.BeginCollection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
4.39.7 TBinaryObjectWriter.BeginComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
4.39.8 TBinaryObjectWriter.BeginList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
4.39.9 TBinaryObjectWriter.EndList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
4.39.10 TBinaryObjectWriter.BeginProperty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
4.39.11 TBinaryObjectWriter.EndProperty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
4.39.12 TBinaryObjectWriter.Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
12
CONTENTS
4.39.13 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteBinary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

4.39.14 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteBoolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
4.39.15 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteFloat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
4.39.16 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteSingle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
4.39.17 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
4.39.18 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteCurrency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
4.39.19 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteIdent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
4.39.20 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteInteger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
4.39.21 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteUInt64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
4.39.22 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteMethodName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
4.39.23 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
4.39.24 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
4.39.25 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
4.39.26 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteWideString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
4.39.27 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteUnicodeString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
4.39.28 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteVariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
4.40 TBits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
4.40.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
4.40.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
4.40.4 TBits.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
4.40.5 TBits.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
4.40.6 TBits.GetFSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
4.40.7 TBits.SetOn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
4.40.8 TBits.Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
4.40.9 TBits.Clearall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
4.40.10 TBits.AndBits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
4.40.11 TBits.OrBits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
4.40.12 TBits.XorBits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
4.40.13 TBits.NotBits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
4.40.14 TBits.Get . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
4.40.15 TBits.Grow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
4.40.16 TBits.Equals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
4.40.17 TBits.SetIndex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
4.40.18 TBits.FindFirstBit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
4.40.19 TBits.FindNextBit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
4.40.20 TBits.FindPrevBit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
4.40.21 TBits.OpenBit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
4.40.22 TBits.Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
4.40.23 TBits.Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
13
CONTENTS
4.41 TBytesStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

4.41.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
4.41.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
4.41.4 TBytesStream.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
4.41.5 TBytesStream.Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
4.42 TCollection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
4.42.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
4.42.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
4.42.4 TCollection.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
4.42.5 TCollection.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
4.42.6 TCollection.Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
4.42.7 TCollection.Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
4.42.8 TCollection.Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
4.42.9 TCollection.BeginUpdate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
4.42.10 TCollection.Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
4.42.11 TCollection.EndUpdate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
4.42.12 TCollection.Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
4.42.13 TCollection.GetEnumerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
4.42.14 TCollection.GetNamePath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
4.42.15 TCollection.Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
4.42.16 TCollection.FindItemID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
4.42.17 TCollection.Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
4.42.18 TCollection.Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
4.42.19 TCollection.Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
4.42.20 TCollection.ItemClass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
4.42.21 TCollection.Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
4.43 TCollectionEnumerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
4.43.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
4.43.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
4.43.4 TCollectionEnumerator.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
4.43.5 TCollectionEnumerator.GetCurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
4.43.6 TCollectionEnumerator.MoveNext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
4.43.7 TCollectionEnumerator.Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
4.44 TCollectionItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
4.44.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
4.44.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
14
CONTENTS
4.44.4 TCollectionItem.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

4.44.5 TCollectionItem.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
4.44.6 TCollectionItem.GetNamePath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
4.44.7 TCollectionItem.Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
4.44.8 TCollectionItem.ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
4.44.9 TCollectionItem.Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
4.44.10 TCollectionItem.DisplayName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
4.45 TComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
4.45.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
4.45.2 Interfaces overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
4.45.3 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
4.45.5 TComponent.Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
4.45.6 TComponent.WriteState . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
4.45.7 TComponent.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
4.45.8 TComponent.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
4.45.9 TComponent.BeforeDestruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
4.45.10 TComponent.DestroyComponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
4.45.11 TComponent.Destroying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
4.45.12 TComponent.ExecuteAction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
4.45.13 TComponent.FindComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
4.45.14 TComponent.FreeNotification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
4.45.15 TComponent.RemoveFreeNotification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
4.45.16 TComponent.FreeOnRelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
4.45.17 TComponent.GetEnumerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
4.45.18 TComponent.GetNamePath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
4.45.19 TComponent.GetParentComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
4.45.20 TComponent.HasParent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
4.45.21 TComponent.InsertComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
4.45.22 TComponent.RemoveComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
4.45.23 TComponent.SafeCallException . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
4.45.24 TComponent.SetSubComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
4.45.25 TComponent.UpdateAction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
4.45.26 TComponent.IsImplementorOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
4.45.27 TComponent.ReferenceInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
4.45.28 TComponent.ComObject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
4.45.29 TComponent.Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
4.45.30 TComponent.ComponentCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
4.45.31 TComponent.ComponentIndex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
4.45.32 TComponent.ComponentState . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
15
CONTENTS
4.45.33 TComponent.ComponentStyle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

4.45.34 TComponent.DesignInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
4.45.35 TComponent.Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
4.45.36 TComponent.VCLComObject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
4.45.37 TComponent.Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
4.45.38 TComponent.Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
4.46 TComponentEnumerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
4.46.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
4.46.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
4.46.4 TComponentEnumerator.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
4.46.5 TComponentEnumerator.GetCurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
4.46.6 TComponentEnumerator.MoveNext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
4.46.7 TComponentEnumerator.Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
4.47 TCustomMemoryStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
4.47.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
4.47.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
4.47.4 TCustomMemoryStream.Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
4.47.5 TCustomMemoryStream.Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
4.47.6 TCustomMemoryStream.SaveToStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
4.47.7 TCustomMemoryStream.SaveToFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
4.47.8 TCustomMemoryStream.Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
4.48 TDataModule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
4.48.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
4.48.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
4.48.4 TDataModule.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
4.48.5 TDataModule.CreateNew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
4.48.6 TDataModule.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
4.48.7 TDataModule.AfterConstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
4.48.8 TDataModule.BeforeDestruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
4.48.9 TDataModule.DesignOffset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
4.48.10 TDataModule.DesignSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
4.48.11 TDataModule.OnCreate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
4.48.12 TDataModule.OnDestroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
4.48.13 TDataModule.OldCreateOrder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
4.49 TFiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
4.49.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
4.49.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
16
CONTENTS

4.49.4 TFiler.DefineProperty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
4.49.5 TFiler.DefineBinaryProperty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
4.49.6 TFiler.Root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
4.49.7 TFiler.LookupRoot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
4.49.8 TFiler.Ancestor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
4.49.9 TFiler.IgnoreChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
4.50 TFileStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
4.50.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
4.50.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
4.50.4 TFileStream.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
4.50.5 TFileStream.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
4.50.6 TFileStream.FileName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
4.51 TFPList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
4.51.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
4.51.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
4.51.4 TFPList.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
4.51.5 TFPList.AddList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
4.51.6 TFPList.Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
4.51.7 TFPList.Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
4.51.8 TFPList.Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
4.51.9 TFPList.Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
4.51.10 TFPList.Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
4.51.11 TFPList.Expand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
4.51.12 TFPList.Extract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
4.51.13 TFPList.First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
4.51.14 TFPList.GetEnumerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
4.51.15 TFPList.IndexOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
4.51.16 TFPList.IndexOfItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
4.51.17 TFPList.Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
4.51.18 TFPList.Last . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
4.51.19 TFPList.Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
4.51.20 TFPList.Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
4.51.21 TFPList.Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
4.51.22 TFPList.Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
4.51.23 TFPList.Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
4.51.24 TFPList.ForEachCall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
4.51.25 TFPList.Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
17
CONTENTS
4.51.26 TFPList.Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

4.51.27 TFPList.Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
4.51.28 TFPList.List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
4.52 TFPListEnumerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
4.52.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
4.52.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
4.52.4 TFPListEnumerator.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
4.52.5 TFPListEnumerator.GetCurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
4.52.6 TFPListEnumerator.MoveNext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
4.52.7 TFPListEnumerator.Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
4.53 THandleStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
4.53.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
4.53.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
4.53.4 THandleStream.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
4.53.5 THandleStream.Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
4.53.6 THandleStream.Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
4.53.7 THandleStream.Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
4.53.8 THandleStream.Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
4.54 TInterfacedPersistent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
4.54.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
4.54.3 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
4.54.4 TInterfacedPersistent.QueryInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
4.54.5 TInterfacedPersistent.AfterConstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
4.55 TInterfaceList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
4.55.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
4.55.3 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
4.55.5 TInterfaceList.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
4.55.6 TInterfaceList.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
4.55.7 TInterfaceList.Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
4.55.8 TInterfaceList.Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
4.55.9 TInterfaceList.Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
4.55.10 TInterfaceList.First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
4.55.11 TInterfaceList.GetEnumerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
4.55.12 TInterfaceList.IndexOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
4.55.13 TInterfaceList.Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
18
CONTENTS
4.55.14 TInterfaceList.Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

4.55.15 TInterfaceList.Last . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
4.55.16 TInterfaceList.Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
4.55.17 TInterfaceList.Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
4.55.18 TInterfaceList.Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
4.55.19 TInterfaceList.Expand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
4.55.20 TInterfaceList.Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
4.55.21 TInterfaceList.Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
4.55.22 TInterfaceList.Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
4.56 TInterfaceListEnumerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
4.56.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
4.56.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
4.56.4 TInterfaceListEnumerator.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
4.56.5 TInterfaceListEnumerator.GetCurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
4.56.6 TInterfaceListEnumerator.MoveNext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
4.56.7 TInterfaceListEnumerator.Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
4.57 TList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
4.57.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
4.57.3 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
4.57.5 TList.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
4.57.6 TList.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
4.57.7 TList.FPOAttachObserver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
4.57.8 TList.FPODetachObserver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
4.57.9 TList.FPONotifyObservers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
4.57.10 TList.AddList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
4.57.11 TList.Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
4.57.12 TList.Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
4.57.13 TList.Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
4.57.14 TList.Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
4.57.15 TList.Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
4.57.16 TList.Expand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
4.57.17 TList.Extract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
4.57.18 TList.First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
4.57.19 TList.GetEnumerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
4.57.20 TList.IndexOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
4.57.21 TList.Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
4.57.22 TList.Last . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
19
CONTENTS
4.57.23 TList.Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

4.57.24 TList.Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
4.57.25 TList.Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
4.57.26 TList.Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
4.57.27 TList.Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
4.57.28 TList.Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
4.57.29 TList.Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
4.57.30 TList.Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
4.57.31 TList.List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
4.58 TListEnumerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
4.58.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
4.58.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
4.58.4 TListEnumerator.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
4.58.5 TListEnumerator.GetCurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
4.58.6 TListEnumerator.MoveNext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
4.58.7 TListEnumerator.Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
4.59 TMemoryStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
4.59.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
4.59.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
4.59.3 TMemoryStream.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
4.59.4 TMemoryStream.Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
4.59.5 TMemoryStream.LoadFromStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
4.59.6 TMemoryStream.LoadFromFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
4.59.7 TMemoryStream.SetSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
4.59.8 TMemoryStream.Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
4.60 TOwnedCollection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
4.60.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
4.60.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
4.60.3 TOwnedCollection.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
4.61 TOwnerStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
4.61.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
4.61.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
4.61.4 TOwnerStream.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
4.61.5 TOwnerStream.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
4.61.6 TOwnerStream.Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
4.61.7 TOwnerStream.SourceOwner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
4.62 TParser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
4.62.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
20
CONTENTS
4.62.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

4.62.4 TParser.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
4.62.5 TParser.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
4.62.6 TParser.CheckToken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
4.62.7 TParser.CheckTokenSymbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
4.62.8 TParser.Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
4.62.9 TParser.ErrorFmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
4.62.10 TParser.ErrorStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
4.62.11 TParser.HexToBinary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
4.62.12 TParser.NextToken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
4.62.13 TParser.SourcePos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
4.62.14 TParser.TokenComponentIdent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
4.62.15 TParser.TokenFloat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
4.62.16 TParser.TokenInt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
4.62.17 TParser.TokenString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
4.62.18 TParser.TokenWideString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
4.62.19 TParser.TokenSymbolIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
4.62.20 TParser.FloatType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
4.62.21 TParser.SourceLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
4.62.22 TParser.Token . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
4.63 TPersistent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
4.63.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
4.63.3 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
4.63.4 TPersistent.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
4.63.5 TPersistent.Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
4.63.6 TPersistent.FPOAttachObserver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
4.63.7 TPersistent.FPODetachObserver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
4.63.8 TPersistent.FPONotifyObservers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
4.63.9 TPersistent.GetNamePath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
4.64 TProxyStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
4.64.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
4.64.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
4.64.3 TProxyStream.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
4.64.4 TProxyStream.Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
4.64.5 TProxyStream.Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
4.64.6 TProxyStream.Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
4.64.7 TProxyStream.Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
4.65 TReader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
21
CONTENTS
4.65.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

4.65.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
4.65.4 TReader.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
4.65.5 TReader.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
4.65.6 TReader.BeginReferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
4.65.7 TReader.CheckValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
4.65.8 TReader.DefineProperty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
4.65.9 TReader.DefineBinaryProperty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
4.65.10 TReader.EndOfList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
4.65.11 TReader.EndReferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
4.65.12 TReader.FixupReferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
4.65.13 TReader.NextValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
4.65.14 TReader.Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
4.65.15 TReader.ReadBoolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
4.65.16 TReader.ReadChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
4.65.17 TReader.ReadWideChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
4.65.18 TReader.ReadUnicodeChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
4.65.19 TReader.ReadCollection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
4.65.20 TReader.ReadComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
4.65.21 TReader.ReadComponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
4.65.22 TReader.ReadFloat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
4.65.23 TReader.ReadSingle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
4.65.24 TReader.ReadDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
4.65.25 TReader.ReadCurrency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
4.65.26 TReader.ReadIdent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
4.65.27 TReader.ReadInteger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
4.65.28 TReader.ReadInt64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
4.65.29 TReader.ReadSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
4.65.30 TReader.ReadListBegin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
4.65.31 TReader.ReadListEnd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
4.65.32 TReader.ReadRootComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
4.65.33 TReader.ReadVariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
4.65.34 TReader.ReadSignature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
4.65.35 TReader.ReadString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
4.65.36 TReader.ReadWideString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
4.65.37 TReader.ReadUnicodeString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
4.65.38 TReader.ReadValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
4.65.39 TReader.CopyValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
4.65.40 TReader.Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
22
CONTENTS
4.65.41 TReader.Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

4.65.42 TReader.Parent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
4.65.43 TReader.OnError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
4.65.44 TReader.OnPropertyNotFound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
4.65.45 TReader.OnFindMethod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
4.65.46 TReader.OnSetMethodProperty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
4.65.47 TReader.OnSetName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
4.65.48 TReader.OnReferenceName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
4.65.49 TReader.OnAncestorNotFound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
4.65.50 TReader.OnCreateComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
4.65.51 TReader.OnFindComponentClass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
4.65.52 TReader.OnReadStringProperty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
4.66 TRecall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
4.66.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
4.66.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
4.66.4 TRecall.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
4.66.5 TRecall.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
4.66.6 TRecall.Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
4.66.7 TRecall.Forget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
4.66.8 TRecall.Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
4.67 TResourceStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
4.67.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
4.67.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
4.67.3 TResourceStream.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
4.67.4 TResourceStream.CreateFromID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
4.67.5 TResourceStream.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
4.68 TStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
4.68.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
4.68.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
4.68.4 TStream.Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
4.68.5 TStream.Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
4.68.6 TStream.Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
4.68.7 TStream.ReadBuffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
4.68.8 TStream.WriteBuffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
4.68.9 TStream.CopyFrom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
4.68.10 TStream.ReadComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
4.68.11 TStream.ReadComponentRes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
4.68.12 TStream.WriteComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
23
CONTENTS
4.68.13 TStream.WriteComponentRes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

4.68.14 TStream.WriteDescendent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
4.68.15 TStream.WriteDescendentRes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
4.68.16 TStream.WriteResourceHeader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
4.68.17 TStream.FixupResourceHeader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
4.68.18 TStream.ReadResHeader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
4.68.19 TStream.ReadByte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
4.68.20 TStream.ReadWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
4.68.21 TStream.ReadDWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
4.68.22 TStream.ReadQWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
4.68.23 TStream.ReadAnsiString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
4.68.24 TStream.WriteByte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
4.68.25 TStream.WriteWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
4.68.26 TStream.WriteDWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
4.68.27 TStream.WriteQWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
4.68.28 TStream.WriteAnsiString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
4.68.29 TStream.Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
4.68.30 TStream.Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
4.69 TStreamAdapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
4.69.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
4.69.3 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
4.69.5 TStreamAdapter.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
4.69.6 TStreamAdapter.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
4.69.7 TStreamAdapter.Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
4.69.8 TStreamAdapter.Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
4.69.9 TStreamAdapter.Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
4.69.10 TStreamAdapter.SetSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
4.69.11 TStreamAdapter.CopyTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
4.69.12 TStreamAdapter.Commit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
4.69.13 TStreamAdapter.Revert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
4.69.14 TStreamAdapter.LockRegion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
4.69.15 TStreamAdapter.UnlockRegion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
4.69.16 TStreamAdapter.Stat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
4.69.17 TStreamAdapter.Clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
4.69.18 TStreamAdapter.Stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
4.69.19 TStreamAdapter.StreamOwnership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
4.70 TStringList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
4.70.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
24
CONTENTS
4.70.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

4.70.4 TStringList.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
4.70.5 TStringList.Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
4.70.6 TStringList.Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
4.70.7 TStringList.Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
4.70.8 TStringList.Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
4.70.9 TStringList.Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
4.70.10 TStringList.IndexOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
4.70.11 TStringList.Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
4.70.12 TStringList.Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
4.70.13 TStringList.CustomSort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
4.70.14 TStringList.Duplicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
4.70.15 TStringList.Sorted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
4.70.16 TStringList.CaseSensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
4.70.17 TStringList.OnChange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
4.70.18 TStringList.OnChanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
4.70.19 TStringList.OwnsObjects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
4.71 TStrings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
4.71.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
4.71.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
4.71.4 TStrings.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
4.71.5 TStrings.Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
4.71.6 TStrings.AddObject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
4.71.7 TStrings.Append . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
4.71.8 TStrings.AddStrings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
4.71.9 TStrings.AddText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
4.71.10 TStrings.Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
4.71.11 TStrings.BeginUpdate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
4.71.12 TStrings.Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
4.71.13 TStrings.Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
4.71.14 TStrings.EndUpdate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
4.71.15 TStrings.Equals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
4.71.16 TStrings.Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
4.71.17 TStrings.GetEnumerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
4.71.18 TStrings.GetText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
4.71.19 TStrings.IndexOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
4.71.20 TStrings.IndexOfName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
4.71.21 TStrings.IndexOfObject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
25
CONTENTS
4.71.22 TStrings.Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

4.71.23 TStrings.InsertObject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
4.71.24 TStrings.LoadFromFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
4.71.25 TStrings.LoadFromStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
4.71.26 TStrings.Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
4.71.27 TStrings.SaveToFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
4.71.28 TStrings.SaveToStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
4.71.29 TStrings.SetText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
4.71.30 TStrings.GetNameValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
4.71.31 TStrings.ExtractName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
4.71.32 TStrings.TextLineBreakStyle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
4.71.33 TStrings.Delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
4.71.34 TStrings.DelimitedText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
4.71.35 TStrings.LineBreak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
4.71.36 TStrings.StrictDelimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
4.71.37 TStrings.QuoteChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
4.71.38 TStrings.NameValueSeparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
4.71.39 TStrings.ValueFromIndex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
4.71.40 TStrings.Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
4.71.41 TStrings.CommaText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
4.71.42 TStrings.Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
4.71.43 TStrings.Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
4.71.44 TStrings.Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
4.71.45 TStrings.Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
4.71.46 TStrings.Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
4.71.47 TStrings.Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
4.71.48 TStrings.StringsAdapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
4.72 TStringsEnumerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
4.72.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
4.72.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
4.72.4 TStringsEnumerator.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
4.72.5 TStringsEnumerator.GetCurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
4.72.6 TStringsEnumerator.MoveNext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
4.72.7 TStringsEnumerator.Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
4.73 TStringStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
4.73.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
4.73.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
4.73.4 TStringStream.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
26
CONTENTS
4.73.5 TStringStream.Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

4.73.6 TStringStream.ReadString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
4.73.7 TStringStream.Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
4.73.8 TStringStream.Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
4.73.9 TStringStream.WriteString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
4.73.10 TStringStream.DataString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
4.74 TTextObjectWriter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
4.74.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
4.75 TThread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
4.75.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
4.75.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
4.75.4 TThread.Execute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
4.75.5 TThread.Synchronize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
4.75.6 TThread.Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
4.75.7 TThread.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
4.75.8 TThread.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
4.75.9 TThread.CreateAnonymousThread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
4.75.10 TThread.NameThreadForDebugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
4.75.11 TThread.SetReturnValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
4.75.12 TThread.CheckTerminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
4.75.13 TThread.RemoveQueuedEvents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
4.75.14 TThread.SpinWait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
4.75.15 TThread.Sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
4.75.16 TThread.Yield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
4.75.17 TThread.GetSystemTimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
4.75.18 TThread.GetTickCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
4.75.19 TThread.GetTickCount64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
4.75.20 TThread.AfterConstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
4.75.21 TThread.Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
4.75.22 TThread.Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
4.75.23 TThread.Suspend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
4.75.24 TThread.Terminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
4.75.25 TThread.WaitFor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
4.75.26 TThread.CurrentThread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
4.75.27 TThread.ProcessorCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
4.75.28 TThread.IsSingleProcessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
4.75.29 TThread.FreeOnTerminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
4.75.30 TThread.Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
4.75.31 TThread.ExternalThread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
27
CONTENTS
4.75.32 TThread.Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

4.75.33 TThread.Suspended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
4.75.34 TThread.Finished . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
4.75.35 TThread.ThreadID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
4.75.36 TThread.OnTerminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
4.75.37 TThread.FatalException . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
4.76 TThreadList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
4.76.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
4.76.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
4.76.4 TThreadList.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
4.76.5 TThreadList.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
4.76.6 TThreadList.Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
4.76.7 TThreadList.Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
4.76.8 TThreadList.LockList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
4.76.9 TThreadList.Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
4.76.10 TThreadList.UnlockList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
4.76.11 TThreadList.Duplicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
4.77 TWriter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
4.77.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
4.77.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
4.77.4 TWriter.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
4.77.5 TWriter.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
4.77.6 TWriter.DefineProperty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
4.77.7 TWriter.DefineBinaryProperty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
4.77.8 TWriter.Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
4.77.9 TWriter.WriteBoolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
4.77.10 TWriter.WriteCollection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
4.77.11 TWriter.WriteComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
4.77.12 TWriter.WriteChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
4.77.13 TWriter.WriteWideChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
4.77.14 TWriter.WriteDescendent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
4.77.15 TWriter.WriteFloat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
4.77.16 TWriter.WriteSingle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
4.77.17 TWriter.WriteDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
4.77.18 TWriter.WriteCurrency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
4.77.19 TWriter.WriteIdent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
4.77.20 TWriter.WriteInteger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
4.77.21 TWriter.WriteSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
28
CONTENTS
4.77.22 TWriter.WriteListBegin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

4.77.23 TWriter.WriteListEnd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
4.77.24 TWriter.WriteSignature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
4.77.25 TWriter.WriteRootComponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
4.77.26 TWriter.WriteString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
4.77.27 TWriter.WriteWideString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
4.77.28 TWriter.WriteUnicodeString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
4.77.29 TWriter.WriteVariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
4.77.30 TWriter.RootAncestor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
4.77.31 TWriter.OnFindAncestor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
4.77.32 TWriter.OnWriteMethodProperty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
4.77.33 TWriter.OnWriteStringProperty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
4.77.34 TWriter.Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
4.77.35 TWriter.PropertyPath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
5 Reference for unit ’clocale’ 467

5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
6 Reference for unit ’cmem’ 468

6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
6.2.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
6.3.1 CAlloc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
6.3.2 Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
6.3.3 Malloc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
6.3.4 ReAlloc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
7 Reference for unit ’collation_de’ 470

7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
8 Reference for unit ’collation_es’ 471

8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
9 Reference for unit ’collation_fr_ca’ 472

9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
10 Reference for unit ’collation_ja’ 473

10.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
11 Reference for unit ’collation_ko’ 474

11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
29
CONTENTS
12 Reference for unit ’collation_ru’ 475

12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
13 Reference for unit ’collation_sv’ 476

13.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
14 Reference for unit ’collation_zh’ 477

14.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
15 Reference for unit ’cp1250’ 478

15.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

16.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

17.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

18.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

19.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

20.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

21.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

22.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

23.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

24.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

25.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

26.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
30
CONTENTS

27.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

28.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

29.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

30.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
31 Reference for unit ’cp8859_1’ 494

31.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

32.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

33.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

34.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

35.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498

36.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

37.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

38.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
39 Reference for unit ’cpall’ 502

39.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
39.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
40 Reference for unit ’Crt’ 503

40.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
40.2.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
40.2.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
31
CONTENTS
40.2.3 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506

40.3.1 AssignCrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
40.3.2 ClrEol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
40.3.3 ClrScr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
40.3.4 cursorbig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
40.3.5 cursoroff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
40.3.6 cursoron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
40.3.7 Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
40.3.8 DelLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
40.3.9 GotoXY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
40.3.10 HighVideo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
40.3.11 InsLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
40.3.12 KeyPressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
40.3.13 LowVideo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
40.3.14 NormVideo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
40.3.15 NoSound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
40.3.16 ReadKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
40.3.17 Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
40.3.18 TextBackground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
40.3.19 TextColor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
40.3.20 TextMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
40.3.21 WhereX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
40.3.22 WhereY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
40.3.23 Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
41 Reference for unit ’cthreads’ 519

41.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
41.2.1 SetCThreadManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
42 Reference for unit ’ctypes’ 520

42.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
42.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
42.3.1 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
42.4.1 add(clongdouble,Double):Double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
42.4.2 add(Double,clongdouble):Double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
42.4.3 assign(clongdouble):Double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
42.4.4 assign(Double):clongdouble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
32
CONTENTS
42.4.5 divide(clongdouble,Double):Double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

42.4.6 divide(Double,clongdouble):Double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
42.4.7 equal(clongdouble,Double):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
42.4.8 equal(Double,clongdouble):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
42.4.9 greaterthan(clongdouble,Double):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
42.4.10 greaterthan(Double,clongdouble):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
42.4.11 greaterthanorequal(clongdouble,Double):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
42.4.12 greaterthanorequal(Double,clongdouble):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
42.4.13 lessthan(clongdouble,Double):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
42.4.14 lessthan(Double,clongdouble):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
42.4.15 lessthanorequal(clongdouble,Double):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
42.4.16 lessthanorequal(Double,clongdouble):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
42.4.17 multiply(clongdouble,Double):Double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
42.4.18 multiply(Double,clongdouble):Double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
42.4.19 subtract(clongdouble,Double):Double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
42.4.20 subtract(Double,clongdouble):Double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
43 Reference for unit ’cwstring’ 530

43.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
43.2.1 SetCWidestringManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
44 Reference for unit ’dateutils’ 531

44.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
44.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
44.3.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
44.4.1 CompareDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
44.4.2 CompareDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
44.4.3 CompareTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
44.4.4 DateOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
44.4.5 DateTimeToDosDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
44.4.6 DateTimeToJulianDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
44.4.7 DateTimeToMac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
44.4.8 DateTimeToModifiedJulianDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
44.4.9 DateTimeToUnix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
44.4.10 DayOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
44.4.11 DayOfTheMonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
44.4.12 DayOfTheWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
44.4.13 DayOfTheYear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
33
CONTENTS
44.4.14 DaysBetween . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

44.4.15 DaysInAMonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
44.4.16 DaysInAYear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
44.4.17 DaysInMonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
44.4.18 DaysInYear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
44.4.19 DaySpan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
44.4.20 DecodeDateDay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
44.4.21 DecodeDateMonthWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
44.4.22 DecodeDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
44.4.23 DecodeDateWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
44.4.24 DecodeDayOfWeekInMonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
44.4.25 DosDateTimeToDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
44.4.26 EncodeDateDay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
44.4.27 EncodeDateMonthWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
44.4.28 EncodeDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
44.4.29 EncodeDateWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
44.4.30 EncodeDayOfWeekInMonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
44.4.31 EncodeTimeInterval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
44.4.32 EndOfADay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
44.4.33 EndOfAMonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
44.4.34 EndOfAWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
44.4.35 EndOfAYear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
44.4.36 EndOfTheDay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
44.4.37 EndOfTheMonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
44.4.38 EndOfTheWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
44.4.39 EndOfTheYear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
44.4.40 HourOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
44.4.41 HourOfTheDay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
44.4.42 HourOfTheMonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
44.4.43 HourOfTheWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
44.4.44 HourOfTheYear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
44.4.45 HoursBetween . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
44.4.46 HourSpan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
44.4.47 IncDay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
44.4.48 IncHour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
44.4.49 IncMilliSecond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
44.4.50 IncMinute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
44.4.51 IncSecond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
44.4.52 IncWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
44.4.53 IncYear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
34
CONTENTS
44.4.54 InvalidDateDayError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560

44.4.55 InvalidDateMonthWeekError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
44.4.56 InvalidDateTimeError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
44.4.57 InvalidDateWeekError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
44.4.58 InvalidDayOfWeekInMonthError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
44.4.59 IsInLeapYear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
44.4.60 IsPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
44.4.61 IsSameDay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
44.4.62 IsSameMonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
44.4.63 IsToday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
44.4.64 IsValidDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
44.4.65 IsValidDateDay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
44.4.66 IsValidDateMonthWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
44.4.67 IsValidDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
44.4.68 IsValidDateWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
44.4.69 IsValidTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
44.4.70 JulianDateToDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
44.4.71 LocalTimeToUniversal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
44.4.72 MacTimeStampToUnix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
44.4.73 MacToDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
44.4.74 MilliSecondOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
44.4.75 MilliSecondOfTheDay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
44.4.76 MilliSecondOfTheHour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
44.4.77 MilliSecondOfTheMinute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
44.4.78 MilliSecondOfTheMonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
44.4.79 MilliSecondOfTheSecond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
44.4.80 MilliSecondOfTheWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
44.4.81 MilliSecondOfTheYear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
44.4.82 MilliSecondsBetween . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
44.4.83 MilliSecondSpan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
44.4.84 MinuteOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
44.4.85 MinuteOfTheDay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
44.4.86 MinuteOfTheHour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
44.4.87 MinuteOfTheMonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
44.4.88 MinuteOfTheWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
44.4.89 MinuteOfTheYear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
44.4.90 MinutesBetween . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
44.4.91 MinuteSpan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
44.4.92 ModifiedJulianDateToDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
44.4.93 MonthOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
35
CONTENTS
44.4.94 MonthOfTheYear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578

44.4.95 MonthsBetween . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
44.4.96 MonthSpan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
44.4.97 NthDayOfWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
44.4.98 PeriodBetween . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
44.4.99 PreviousDayOfWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
44.4.100 RecodeDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
44.4.101 RecodeDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
44.4.102 RecodeDay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
44.4.103 RecodeHour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
44.4.104 RecodeMilliSecond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
44.4.105 RecodeMinute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
44.4.106 RecodeMonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
44.4.107 RecodeSecond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
44.4.108 RecodeTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
44.4.109 RecodeYear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
44.4.110 SameDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
44.4.111 SameDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
44.4.112 SameTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
44.4.113 ScanDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
44.4.114 SecondOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
44.4.115 SecondOfTheDay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
44.4.116 SecondOfTheHour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
44.4.117 SecondOfTheMinute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
44.4.118 SecondOfTheMonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
44.4.119 SecondOfTheWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
44.4.120 SecondOfTheYear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
44.4.121 SecondsBetween . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
44.4.122 SecondSpan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
44.4.123 StartOfADay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
44.4.124 StartOfAMonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
44.4.125 StartOfAWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
44.4.126 StartOfAYear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
44.4.127 StartOfTheDay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
44.4.128 StartOfTheMonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
44.4.129 StartOfTheWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
44.4.130 StartOfTheYear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
44.4.131 TimeOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
44.4.132 Today . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
44.4.133 Tomorrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
36
CONTENTS
44.4.134 TryEncodeDateDay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601

44.4.135 TryEncodeDateMonthWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
44.4.136 TryEncodeDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
44.4.137 TryEncodeDateWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
44.4.138 TryEncodeDayOfWeekInMonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
44.4.139 TryEncodeTimeInterval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
44.4.140 TryJulianDateToDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
44.4.141 TryModifiedJulianDateToDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
44.4.142 TryRecodeDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
44.4.143 UniversalTimeToLocal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
44.4.144 UnixTimeStampToMac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
44.4.145 UnixToDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
44.4.146 WeekOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
44.4.147 WeekOfTheMonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
44.4.148 WeekOfTheYear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
44.4.149 WeeksBetween . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
44.4.150 WeeksInAYear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
44.4.151 WeeksInYear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
44.4.152 WeekSpan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
44.4.153 WithinPastDays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
44.4.154 WithinPastHours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
44.4.155 WithinPastMilliSeconds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
44.4.156 WithinPastMinutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
44.4.157 WithinPastMonths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
44.4.158 WithinPastSeconds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
44.4.159 WithinPastWeeks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
44.4.160 WithinPastYears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
44.4.161 YearOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
44.4.162 YearsBetween . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
44.4.163 YearSpan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
44.4.164 Yesterday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
45 Reference for unit ’Dos’ 623

45.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
45.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
45.3 System information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
45.4 Process handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
45.5 Directory and disk handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
45.6 File handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
45.7 File open mode constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
37
CONTENTS
45.8 File attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625

45.9.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
45.9.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
45.9.3 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
45.10.1 AddDisk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
45.10.2 DiskFree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
45.10.3 DiskSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
45.10.4 DosExitCode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
45.10.5 DosVersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
45.10.6 DTToUnixDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
45.10.7 EnvCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
45.10.8 EnvStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
45.10.9 Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
45.10.10 FExpand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
45.10.11 FindClose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
45.10.12 FindFirst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
45.10.13 FindNext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
45.10.14 FSearch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
45.10.15 FSplit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
45.10.16 GetCBreak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
45.10.17 GetDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
45.10.18 GetEnv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
45.10.19 GetFAttr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
45.10.20 GetFTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
45.10.21 GetIntVec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
45.10.22 GetLongName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
45.10.23 GetMsCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
45.10.24 GetShortName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
45.10.25 GetTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
45.10.26 GetVerify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
45.10.27 Intr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
45.10.28 Keep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
45.10.29 MSDos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
45.10.30 PackTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
45.10.31 SetCBreak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
45.10.32 SetDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
45.10.33 SetFAttr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
45.10.34 SetFTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
38
CONTENTS
45.10.35 SetIntVec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646

45.10.36 SetTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
45.10.37 SetVerify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
45.10.38 SwapVectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
45.10.39 UnixDateToDt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
45.10.40 UnpackTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
45.10.41 weekday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
46 Reference for unit ’dxeload’ 649

46.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
46.2.1 dxe_load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
47 Reference for unit ’dynlibs’ 650

47.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
47.2.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
47.2.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
47.3.1 FreeLibrary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
47.3.2 GetLoadErrorStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
47.3.3 GetProcAddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
47.3.4 GetProcedureAddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
47.3.5 LoadLibrary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
47.3.6 SafeLoadLibrary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
47.3.7 UnloadLibrary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
48 Reference for unit ’emu387’ 653

48.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
48.2.1 npxsetup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
49 Reference for unit ’errors’ 654

49.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
49.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
49.3.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
49.4.1 PError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
49.4.2 StrError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
50 Reference for unit ’exeinfo’ 656
39
CONTENTS
50.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656

50.2.1 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
50.3.1 CloseExeFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
50.3.2 FindExeSection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
50.3.3 GetModuleByAddr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
50.3.4 OpenExeFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
50.3.5 ReadDebugLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
51 Reference for unit ’fgl’ 659

51.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
51.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
51.3.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
51.3.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
51.4 EListError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
51.4.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
51.5 TFPGInterfacedObjectList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
51.5.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
51.5.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
51.5.4 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
51.5.5 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
51.5.6 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Extract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
51.5.7 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.GetEnumerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
51.5.8 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.IndexOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
51.5.9 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
51.5.10 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
51.5.11 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
51.5.12 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
51.5.13 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
51.5.14 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Last . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
51.5.15 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
51.5.16 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
51.6 TFPGList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
51.6.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
51.6.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
51.6.4 TFPGList.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
40
CONTENTS
51.6.5 TFPGList.Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

51.6.6 TFPGList.Extract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
51.6.7 TFPGList.GetEnumerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
51.6.8 TFPGList.IndexOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
51.6.9 TFPGList.Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
51.6.10 TFPGList.Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
51.6.11 TFPGList.Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
51.6.12 TFPGList.Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
51.6.13 TFPGList.First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
51.6.14 TFPGList.Last . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
51.6.15 TFPGList.Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
51.6.16 TFPGList.List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
51.7 TFPGListEnumerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
51.7.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
51.7.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
51.7.4 TFPGListEnumerator.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
51.7.5 TFPGListEnumerator.MoveNext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
51.7.6 TFPGListEnumerator.Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
51.8 TFPGMap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
51.8.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
51.8.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
51.8.4 TFPGMap.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
51.8.5 TFPGMap.Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
51.8.6 TFPGMap.Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
51.8.7 TFPGMap.IndexOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
51.8.8 TFPGMap.IndexOfData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
51.8.9 TFPGMap.InsertKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
51.8.10 TFPGMap.InsertKeyData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
51.8.11 TFPGMap.Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
51.8.12 TFPGMap.Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
51.8.13 TFPGMap.Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
51.8.14 TFPGMap.KeyData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
51.8.15 TFPGMap.OnCompare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
51.8.16 TFPGMap.OnKeyCompare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
51.8.17 TFPGMap.OnDataCompare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
51.9 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
51.9.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
51.9.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
41
CONTENTS

51.9.4 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
51.9.5 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
51.9.6 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
51.9.7 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.IndexOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
51.9.8 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.IndexOfData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
51.9.9 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.InsertKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
51.9.10 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.InsertKeyData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
51.9.11 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
51.9.12 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
51.9.13 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
51.9.14 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.KeyData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
51.9.15 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.OnCompare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
51.9.16 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.OnKeyCompare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
51.9.17 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.OnDataCompare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
51.10 TFPGObjectList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
51.10.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
51.10.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
51.10.4 TFPGObjectList.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
51.10.5 TFPGObjectList.Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
51.10.6 TFPGObjectList.Extract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
51.10.7 TFPGObjectList.GetEnumerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
51.10.8 TFPGObjectList.IndexOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
51.10.9 TFPGObjectList.Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
51.10.10 TFPGObjectList.Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
51.10.11 TFPGObjectList.Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
51.10.12 TFPGObjectList.Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
51.10.13 TFPGObjectList.First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
51.10.14 TFPGObjectList.Last . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
51.10.15 TFPGObjectList.Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
51.10.16 TFPGObjectList.List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
51.10.17 TFPGObjectList.FreeObjects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
51.11 TFPSList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
51.11.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
51.11.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
51.11.4 TFPSList.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
51.11.5 TFPSList.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
51.11.6 TFPSList.Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
42
CONTENTS
51.11.7 TFPSList.Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

51.11.8 TFPSList.Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
51.11.9 TFPSList.Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
51.11.10 TFPSList.Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
51.11.11 TFPSList.Expand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
51.11.12 TFPSList.Extract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
51.11.13 TFPSList.IndexOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
51.11.14 TFPSList.Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
51.11.15 TFPSList.Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
51.11.16 TFPSList.Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
51.11.17 TFPSList.Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
51.11.18 TFPSList.Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
51.11.19 TFPSList.Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
51.11.20 TFPSList.Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
51.11.21 TFPSList.Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
51.11.22 TFPSList.Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
51.11.23 TFPSList.ItemSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
51.11.24 TFPSList.List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
51.11.25 TFPSList.First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
51.11.26 TFPSList.Last . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
51.12 TFPSMap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
51.12.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
51.12.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
51.12.4 TFPSMap.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
51.12.5 TFPSMap.Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
51.12.6 TFPSMap.Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
51.12.7 TFPSMap.IndexOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
51.12.8 TFPSMap.IndexOfData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
51.12.9 TFPSMap.Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
51.12.10 TFPSMap.InsertKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
51.12.11 TFPSMap.InsertKeyData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
51.12.12 TFPSMap.Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
51.12.13 TFPSMap.Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
51.12.14 TFPSMap.Duplicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
51.12.15 TFPSMap.KeySize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
51.12.16 TFPSMap.DataSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
51.12.17 TFPSMap.Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
51.12.18 TFPSMap.Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
51.12.19 TFPSMap.KeyData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
43
CONTENTS
51.12.20 TFPSMap.Sorted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696

51.12.21 TFPSMap.OnPtrCompare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
51.12.22 TFPSMap.OnKeyPtrCompare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
51.12.23 TFPSMap.OnDataPtrCompare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
52 Reference for unit ’fpwidestring’ 698

52.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
52.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
52.3.1 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
52.4.1 GetActiveCollation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
52.4.2 SetActiveCollation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
53 Reference for unit ’getopts’ 700

53.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
53.2.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
53.2.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
53.2.3 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
53.3.1 GetLongOpts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
53.3.2 GetOpt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
54 Reference for unit ’go32’ 705

54.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
54.2 Real mode callbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
54.3 Executing software interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
54.4 Software interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
54.5 Hardware interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
54.6 Disabling interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
54.7 Creating your own interrupt handlers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
54.8 Protected mode interrupts vs. Real mode interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
54.9 Handling interrupts with DPMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
54.10 Interrupt redirection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
54.11 Processor access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
54.12 I/O port access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
54.13 dos memory access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
54.14 FPC specialities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
54.15 Selectors and descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
54.16 What is DPMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
44
CONTENTS

54.17.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
54.17.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
54.17.3 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
54.18.1 allocate_ldt_descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
54.18.2 allocate_memory_block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
54.18.3 copyfromdos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
54.18.4 copytodos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
54.18.5 create_code_segment_alias_descriptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
54.18.6 disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
54.18.7 dpmi_dosmemfillchar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
54.18.8 dpmi_dosmemfillword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
54.18.9 dpmi_dosmemget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
54.18.10 dpmi_dosmemmove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
54.18.11 dpmi_dosmemput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
54.18.12 enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
54.18.13 free_ldt_descriptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
54.18.14 free_linear_addr_mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
54.18.15 free_memory_block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
54.18.16 free_rm_callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
54.18.17 get_cs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
54.18.18 get_descriptor_access_right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
54.18.19 get_dpmi_version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
54.18.20 get_ds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
54.18.21 get_exception_handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
54.18.22 get_linear_addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
54.18.23 get_meminfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
54.18.24 get_next_selector_increment_value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
54.18.25 get_page_attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
54.18.26 get_page_size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
54.18.27 get_pm_exception_handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
54.18.28 get_pm_interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
54.18.29 get_rm_callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
54.18.30 get_rm_interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
54.18.31 get_run_mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
54.18.32 get_segment_base_address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
54.18.33 get_segment_limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
54.18.34 get_ss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
54.18.35 global_dos_alloc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
45
CONTENTS
54.18.36 global_dos_free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735

54.18.37 inportb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
54.18.38 inportl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
54.18.39 inportw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
54.18.40 lock_code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
54.18.41 lock_data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
54.18.42 lock_linear_region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
54.18.43 map_device_in_memory_block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
54.18.44 outportb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
54.18.45 outportl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
54.18.46 outportw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
54.18.47 realintr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
54.18.48 request_linear_region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
54.18.49 segment_to_descriptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
54.18.50 seg_fillchar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
54.18.51 seg_fillword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
54.18.52 seg_move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
54.18.53 set_descriptor_access_right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
54.18.54 set_exception_handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
54.18.55 set_page_attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
54.18.56 set_pm_exception_handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
54.18.57 set_pm_interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
54.18.58 set_rm_interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
54.18.59 set_segment_base_address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
54.18.60 set_segment_limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
54.18.61 tb_offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
54.18.62 tb_segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
54.18.63 tb_size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
54.18.64 transfer_buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
54.18.65 unlock_code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
54.18.66 unlock_data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
54.18.67 unlock_linear_region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
55 Reference for unit ’gpm’ 749

55.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
55.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
55.3.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
55.3.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
55.3.3 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
46
CONTENTS

55.4.1 Gpm_AnyDouble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
55.4.2 Gpm_AnySingle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
55.4.3 Gpm_AnyTriple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
55.4.4 gpm_close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
55.4.5 gpm_fitvalues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
55.4.6 gpm_fitvaluesM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
55.4.7 gpm_getevent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
55.4.8 gpm_getsnapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
55.4.9 gpm_lowerroi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
55.4.10 gpm_open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
55.4.11 gpm_poproi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
55.4.12 gpm_pushroi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
55.4.13 gpm_raiseroi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
55.4.14 gpm_repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
55.4.15 Gpm_StrictDouble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
55.4.16 Gpm_StrictSingle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
55.4.17 Gpm_StrictTriple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
56 Reference for unit ’Graph’ 760

56.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
56.2 Categorized functions: Text and font handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
56.3 Categorized functions: Filled drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
56.4 Categorized functions: Drawing primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
56.5 Categorized functions: Color management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
56.6 Categorized functions: Screen management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
56.7 Categorized functions: Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
56.8 Target specific issues: Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
56.9 Target specific issues: DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
56.10 A word about mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
56.11 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
56.12.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
56.12.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
56.12.3 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
56.13.1 Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
56.13.2 Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
56.13.3 Bar3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
56.13.4 ClearDevice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
47
CONTENTS
56.13.5 Closegraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794

56.13.6 DetectGraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
56.13.7 DrawPoly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
56.13.8 Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
56.13.9 FillEllipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
56.13.10 FillPoly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
56.13.11 FloodFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
56.13.12 GetArcCoords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
56.13.13 GetAspectRatio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
56.13.14 GetColor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
56.13.15 GetDefaultPalette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
56.13.16 GetDirectVideo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
56.13.17 GetDriverName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
56.13.18 GetFillPattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
56.13.19 GetFillSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
56.13.20 GetGraphMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
56.13.21 GetLineSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
56.13.22 GetMaxColor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
56.13.23 GetMaxMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
56.13.24 GetMaxX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
56.13.25 GetMaxY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
56.13.26 GetModeName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
56.13.27 GetModeRange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
56.13.28 GetPalette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800
56.13.29 GetPaletteSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800
56.13.30 GetTextSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800
56.13.31 GetViewSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800
56.13.32 GetX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
56.13.33 GetY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
56.13.34 GraphDefaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
56.13.35 GraphErrorMsg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
56.13.36 GraphResult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
56.13.37 InitGraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
56.13.38 InstallUserDriver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
56.13.39 InstallUserFont . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
56.13.40 LineRel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
56.13.41 LineTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
56.13.42 MoveRel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
56.13.43 MoveTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
56.13.44 OutText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
48
CONTENTS
56.13.45 PieSlice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

56.13.46 queryadapterinfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
56.13.47 Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
56.13.48 RegisterBGIDriver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
56.13.49 RegisterBGIfont . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
56.13.50 RestoreCrtMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
56.13.51 Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
56.13.52 SetAspectRatio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
56.13.53 SetColor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
56.13.54 SetDirectVideo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
56.13.55 SetFillPattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
56.13.56 SetFillStyle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
56.13.57 SetGraphMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
56.13.58 SetLineStyle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
56.13.59 SetPalette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
56.13.60 SetTextJustify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
56.13.61 SetTextStyle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
56.13.62 SetUserCharSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
56.13.63 SetViewPort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
56.13.64 SetWriteMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
56.13.65 TextHeight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
56.13.66 TextWidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
57 Reference for unit ’heaptrc’ 812

57.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
57.2 Controlling HeapTrc with environment variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
57.3 HeapTrc Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
57.4.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
57.4.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
57.5.1 CheckPointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
57.5.2 DumpHeap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
57.5.3 SetHeapExtraInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
57.5.4 SetHeapTraceOutput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
58 Reference for unit ’ipc’ 818

58.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
58.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
58.3.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
49
CONTENTS
58.3.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820

58.4.1 ftok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
58.4.2 msgctl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
58.4.3 msgget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
58.4.4 msgrcv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
58.4.5 msgsnd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
58.4.6 semctl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
58.4.7 semget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
58.4.8 semop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
58.4.9 shmat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
58.4.10 shmctl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
58.4.11 shmdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
58.4.12 shmget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
59 Reference for unit ’keyboard’ 838

59.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
59.2 Unix specific notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
59.3 Writing a keyboard driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
59.4 Keyboard scan codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
59.5.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
59.5.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
59.6.1 AddSequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
59.6.2 AddSpecialSequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
59.6.3 DoneKeyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
59.6.4 FindSequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
59.6.5 FunctionKeyName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
59.6.6 GetKeyboardDriver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
59.6.7 GetKeyEvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
59.6.8 GetKeyEventChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
59.6.9 GetKeyEventCode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
59.6.10 GetKeyEventFlags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
59.6.11 GetKeyEventShiftState . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
59.6.12 GetKeyEventUniCode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
59.6.13 InitKeyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
59.6.14 IsFunctionKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
59.6.15 KeyEventToString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
59.6.16 KeyPressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
50
CONTENTS
59.6.17 PollKeyEvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857

59.6.18 PollShiftStateEvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
59.6.19 PutKeyEvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
59.6.20 RawReadKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
59.6.21 RawReadString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
59.6.22 RestoreStartMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
59.6.23 SetKeyboardDriver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
59.6.24 ShiftStateToString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
59.6.25 TranslateKeyEvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
59.6.26 TranslateKeyEventUniCode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
60 Reference for unit ’lineinfo’ 862

60.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
60.2.1 CloseStabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
60.2.2 GetLineInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
60.2.3 StabBackTraceStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
61 Reference for unit ’Linux’ 864

61.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
61.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
61.3.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
61.3.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
61.4.1 capget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
61.4.2 capset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881
61.4.3 clock_getres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881
61.4.4 clock_gettime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881
61.4.5 clock_settime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881
61.4.6 clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882
61.4.7 epoll_create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
61.4.8 epoll_ctl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
61.4.9 epoll_wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
61.4.10 fdatasync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
61.4.11 futex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
61.4.12 futex_op . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
61.4.13 inotify_add_watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
61.4.14 inotify_init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
61.4.15 inotify_init1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
61.4.16 inotify_rm_watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
51
CONTENTS
61.4.17 sched_yield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888

61.4.18 setregid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
61.4.19 setreuid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
61.4.20 sync_file_range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
61.4.21 Sysinfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
62 Reference for unit ’lnfodwrf’ 891

62.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
62.2.1 GetLineInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
63 Reference for unit ’math’ 892

63.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
63.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
63.3 Cash flow functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
63.4 Geometrical functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
63.5 Statistical functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
63.6 Number converting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
63.7 Exponential and logarithmic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
63.8 Hyperbolic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
63.9 Trigoniometric functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
63.10 Angle unit conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
63.11 Min/max determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
63.12.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896
63.12.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
63.13.1 arccos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
63.13.2 arccosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
63.13.3 arcosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
63.13.4 arcsin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
63.13.5 arcsinh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
63.13.6 arctan2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
63.13.7 arctanh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
63.13.8 arsinh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
63.13.9 artanh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902
63.13.10 ceil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902
63.13.11 ClearExceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
63.13.12 CompareValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
63.13.13 cosecant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
63.13.14 cosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
52
CONTENTS
63.13.15 cot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904

63.13.16 cotan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
63.13.17 csc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
63.13.18 cycletorad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
63.13.19 DegNormalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
63.13.20 degtograd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
63.13.21 degtorad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
63.13.22 DivMod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
63.13.23 EnsureRange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
63.13.24 floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
63.13.25 Frexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
63.13.26 FutureValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
63.13.27 GetExceptionMask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
63.13.28 GetPrecisionMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
63.13.29 GetRoundMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910
63.13.30 gradtodeg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910
63.13.31 gradtorad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910
63.13.32 hypot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911
63.13.33 ifthen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911
63.13.34 InRange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
63.13.35 InterestRate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
63.13.36 intpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
63.13.37 IsInfinite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913
63.13.38 IsNan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913
63.13.39 IsZero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913
63.13.40 ldexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
63.13.41 lnxp1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
63.13.42 log10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
63.13.43 log2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
63.13.44 logn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
63.13.45 Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
63.13.46 MaxIntValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
63.13.47 maxvalue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
63.13.48 mean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
63.13.49 meanandstddev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
63.13.50 Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
63.13.51 MinIntValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
63.13.52 minvalue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922
63.13.53 momentskewkurtosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
63.13.54 norm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
53
CONTENTS
63.13.55 NumberOfPeriods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925

63.13.56 Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
63.13.57 popnstddev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
63.13.58 popnvariance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
63.13.59 power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
63.13.60 power(Float,Float):Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928
63.13.61 power(Int64,Int64):Int64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928
63.13.62 PresentValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928
63.13.63 radtocycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928
63.13.64 radtodeg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
63.13.65 radtograd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
63.13.66 randg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
63.13.67 RandomFrom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
63.13.68 RandomRange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931
63.13.69 RoundTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931
63.13.70 SameValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931
63.13.71 sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
63.13.72 secant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
63.13.73 SetExceptionMask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
63.13.74 SetPrecisionMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
63.13.75 SetRoundMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
63.13.76 Sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
63.13.77 SimpleRoundTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
63.13.78 sincos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
63.13.79 sinh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934
63.13.80 stddev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934
63.13.81 sum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
63.13.82 sumInt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
63.13.83 sumofsquares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
63.13.84 sumsandsquares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
63.13.85 tan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938
63.13.86 tanh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
63.13.87 totalvariance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
63.13.88 variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
63.14 EInvalidArgument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
63.14.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
64 Reference for unit ’matrix’ 942

64.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
54
CONTENTS
64.2.1 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943

64.3.1 add(Tmatrix2_double,Double):Tmatrix2_double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
64.3.2 add(Tmatrix2_double,Tmatrix2_double):Tmatrix2_double . . . . . . . . 945
64.3.3 add(Tmatrix2_extended,extended):Tmatrix2_extended . . . . . . . . . . 946
64.3.4 add(Tmatrix2_extended,Tmatrix2_extended):Tmatrix2_extended . . . . . 946
64.3.5 add(Tmatrix2_single,single):Tmatrix2_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
64.3.6 add(Tmatrix2_single,Tmatrix2_single):Tmatrix2_single . . . . . . . . . . 946
64.3.19 add(Tvector2_double,Double):Tvector2_double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
64.3.20 add(Tvector2_double,Tvector2_double):Tvector2_double . . . . . . . . . 949
64.3.21 add(Tvector2_extended,extended):Tvector2_extended . . . . . . . . . . . 949
64.3.22 add(Tvector2_extended,Tvector2_extended):Tvector2_extended . . . . . 949
64.3.23 add(Tvector2_single,single):Tvector2_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
64.3.24 add(Tvector2_single,Tvector2_single):Tvector2_single . . . . . . . . . . 950
64.3.37 assign(Tmatrix2_double):Tmatrix2_extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
64.3.38 assign(Tmatrix2_double):Tmatrix2_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
55
CONTENTS
64.3.39 assign(Tmatrix2_double):Tmatrix3_double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953

64.3.45 assign(Tmatrix2_extended):Tmatrix2_double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954
64.3.46 assign(Tmatrix2_extended):Tmatrix2_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954
64.3.48 assign(Tmatrix2_extended):Tmatrix3_extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955
64.3.53 assign(Tmatrix2_single):Tmatrix2_double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956
64.3.54 assign(Tmatrix2_single):Tmatrix2_extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956
64.3.57 assign(Tmatrix2_single):Tmatrix3_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
56
CONTENTS

64.3.109 assign(Tvector2_double):Tvector2_extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
64.3.110 assign(Tvector2_double):Tvector2_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
64.3.111 assign(Tvector2_double):Tvector3_double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
64.3.117 assign(Tvector2_extended):Tvector2_double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
64.3.118 assign(Tvector2_extended):Tvector2_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
57
CONTENTS

64.3.120 assign(Tvector2_extended):Tvector3_extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
64.3.125 assign(Tvector2_single):Tvector2_double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
64.3.126 assign(Tvector2_single):Tvector2_extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
64.3.129 assign(Tvector2_single):Tvector3_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
58
CONTENTS

64.3.181 divide(Tmatrix2_double,Double):Tmatrix2_double . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
64.3.182 divide(Tmatrix2_extended,extended):Tmatrix2_extended . . . . . . . . . 985
64.3.183 divide(Tmatrix2_single,single):Tmatrix2_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
64.3.190 divide(Tvector2_double,Double):Tvector2_double . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986
64.3.191 divide(Tvector2_extended,extended):Tvector2_extended . . . . . . . . . 987
64.3.192 divide(Tvector2_single,single):Tvector2_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
59
CONTENTS
64.3.199 multiply(Tmatrix2_double,Double):Tmatrix2_double . . . . . . . . . . . 988

64.3.200 multiply(Tmatrix2_double,Tmatrix2_double):Tmatrix2_double . . . . . . 988
64.3.201 multiply(Tmatrix2_double,Tvector2_double):Tvector2_double . . . . . . 989
64.3.202 multiply(Tmatrix2_extended,extended):Tmatrix2_extended . . . . . . . . 989
64.3.203 multiply(Tmatrix2_extended,Tmatrix2_extended):Tmatrix2_extended . . 989
64.3.204 multiply(Tmatrix2_extended,Tvector2_extended):Tvector2_extended . . . 989
64.3.205 multiply(Tmatrix2_single,single):Tmatrix2_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990
64.3.206 multiply(Tmatrix2_single,Tmatrix2_single):Tmatrix2_single . . . . . . . 990
64.3.207 multiply(Tmatrix2_single,Tvector2_single):Tvector2_single . . . . . . . 990
64.3.226 multiply(Tvector2_double,Double):Tvector2_double . . . . . . . . . . . 994
64.3.227 multiply(Tvector2_double,Tvector2_double):Tvector2_double . . . . . . 994
64.3.228 multiply(Tvector2_extended,extended):Tvector2_extended . . . . . . . . 995
64.3.229 multiply(Tvector2_extended,Tvector2_extended):Tvector2_extended . . . 995
64.3.230 multiply(Tvector2_single,single):Tvector2_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
64.3.231 multiply(Tvector2_single,Tvector2_single):Tvector2_single . . . . . . . . 995
60
CONTENTS

64.3.244 negative(Tmatrix2_double):Tmatrix2_double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
64.3.245 negative(Tmatrix2_extended):Tmatrix2_extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
64.3.246 negative(Tmatrix2_single):Tmatrix2_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
64.3.253 negative(Tvector2_double):Tvector2_double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999
64.3.254 negative(Tvector2_extended):Tvector2_extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
64.3.255 negative(Tvector2_single):Tvector2_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
64.3.262 power(Tvector2_double,Tvector2_double):Double . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
64.3.263 power(Tvector2_extended,Tvector2_extended):extended . . . . . . . . . 1001
64.3.264 power(Tvector2_single,Tvector2_single):single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
64.3.271 subtract(Tmatrix2_double,Double):Tmatrix2_double . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
64.3.272 subtract(Tmatrix2_double,Tmatrix2_double):Tmatrix2_double . . . . . . 1003
64.3.273 subtract(Tmatrix2_extended,extended):Tmatrix2_extended . . . . . . . . 1003
64.3.274 subtract(Tmatrix2_extended,Tmatrix2_extended):Tmatrix2_extended . . 1004
64.3.275 subtract(Tmatrix2_single,single):Tmatrix2_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
64.3.276 subtract(Tmatrix2_single,Tmatrix2_single):Tmatrix2_single . . . . . . . 1004
61
CONTENTS

64.3.289 subtract(Tvector2_double,Double):Tvector2_double . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
64.3.290 subtract(Tvector2_double,Tvector2_double):Tvector2_double . . . . . . 1007
64.3.291 subtract(Tvector2_extended,extended):Tvector2_extended . . . . . . . . 1007
64.3.292 subtract(Tvector2_extended,Tvector2_extended):Tvector2_extended . . . 1007
64.3.293 subtract(Tvector2_single,single):Tvector2_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
64.3.294 subtract(Tvector2_single,Tvector2_single):Tvector2_single . . . . . . . . 1008
64.3.307 symmetricaldifference(Tvector3_double,Tvector3_double):Tvector3_double1010
64.3.308 symmetricaldifference(Tvector3_extended,Tvector3_extended):Tvector3_extended1011
64.3.309 symmetricaldifference(Tvector3_single,Tvector3_single):Tvector3_single 1011
64.4 Tmatrix2_double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
64.4.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
64.4.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
64.4.3 Tmatrix2_double.init_zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
64.4.4 Tmatrix2_double.init_identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
64.4.5 Tmatrix2_double.init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
64.4.6 Tmatrix2_double.get_column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
64.4.7 Tmatrix2_double.get_row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
64.4.8 Tmatrix2_double.set_column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
62
CONTENTS
64.4.9 Tmatrix2_double.set_row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013

64.4.10 Tmatrix2_double.determinant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
64.4.11 Tmatrix2_double.inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
64.4.12 Tmatrix2_double.transpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
64.5 Tmatrix2_extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
64.5.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
64.5.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
64.5.3 Tmatrix2_extended.init_zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
64.5.4 Tmatrix2_extended.init_identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
64.5.5 Tmatrix2_extended.init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
64.5.6 Tmatrix2_extended.get_column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
64.5.7 Tmatrix2_extended.get_row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
64.5.8 Tmatrix2_extended.set_column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
64.5.9 Tmatrix2_extended.set_row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
64.5.10 Tmatrix2_extended.determinant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
64.5.11 Tmatrix2_extended.inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
64.5.12 Tmatrix2_extended.transpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
64.6 Tmatrix2_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
64.6.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
64.6.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
64.6.3 Tmatrix2_single.init_zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
64.6.4 Tmatrix2_single.init_identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
64.6.5 Tmatrix2_single.init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
64.6.6 Tmatrix2_single.get_column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
64.6.7 Tmatrix2_single.get_row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
64.6.8 Tmatrix2_single.set_column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
64.6.9 Tmatrix2_single.set_row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
64.6.10 Tmatrix2_single.determinant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
64.6.11 Tmatrix2_single.inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
64.6.12 Tmatrix2_single.transpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
64.7 Tmatrix3_double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
64.7.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
64.7.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
63
CONTENTS

64.8.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020
64.8.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020
64.9 Tmatrix3_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
64.9.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
64.9.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023
64.10 Tmatrix4_double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
64.10.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
64.10.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
64
CONTENTS

64.11.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
64.11.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
64.12 Tmatrix4_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029
64.12.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029
64.12.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030
64.13 Tvector2_double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
64.13.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
64.13.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
64.13.3 Tvector2_double.init_zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
64.13.4 Tvector2_double.init_one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
64.13.5 Tvector2_double.init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
64.13.6 Tvector2_double.length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
64.13.7 Tvector2_double.squared_length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
64.14 Tvector2_extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
64.14.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
64.14.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
64.14.3 Tvector2_extended.init_zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
65
CONTENTS
64.14.4 Tvector2_extended.init_one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033

64.14.5 Tvector2_extended.init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
64.14.6 Tvector2_extended.length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
64.14.7 Tvector2_extended.squared_length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
64.15 Tvector2_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
64.15.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
64.15.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
64.15.3 Tvector2_single.init_zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
64.15.4 Tvector2_single.init_one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
64.15.5 Tvector2_single.init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
64.15.6 Tvector2_single.length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
64.15.7 Tvector2_single.squared_length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
64.16 Tvector3_double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
64.16.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
64.16.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
64.17.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036
64.17.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
64.18 Tvector3_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038
64.18.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038
64.18.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038
64.19 Tvector4_double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039
64.19.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039
64.19.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039
66
CONTENTS

64.20.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040
64.20.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040
64.21 Tvector4_single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
64.21.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
64.21.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
65 Reference for unit ’mmx’ 1043

65.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
65.2.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
65.2.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
65.3.1 emms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
65.3.2 femms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
66 Reference for unit ’Mouse’ 1046

66.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046
66.2 Writing a custom mouse driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046
66.3.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
66.3.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
66.3.3 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
66.4.1 DetectMouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
66.4.2 DoneMouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
66.4.3 GetMouseButtons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
67
CONTENTS
66.4.4 GetMouseDriver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052

66.4.5 GetMouseEvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052
66.4.6 GetMouseX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053
66.4.7 GetMouseY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053
66.4.8 HideMouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
66.4.9 InitMouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
66.4.10 PollMouseEvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
66.4.11 PutMouseEvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
66.4.12 SetMouseDriver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
66.4.13 SetMouseXY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1056
66.4.14 ShowMouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1056
67 Reference for unit ’Objects’ 1057

67.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057
67.2.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057
67.2.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059
67.2.3 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
67.3.1 Abstract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
67.3.2 CallPointerConstructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
67.3.3 CallPointerLocal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064
67.3.4 CallPointerMethod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064
67.3.5 CallPointerMethodLocal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064
67.3.6 CallVoidConstructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
67.3.7 CallVoidLocal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
67.3.8 CallVoidMethod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
67.3.9 CallVoidMethodLocal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
67.3.10 DisposeStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
67.3.11 LongDiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
67.3.12 LongMul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
67.3.13 NewStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067
67.3.14 RegisterObjects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067
67.3.15 RegisterType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
67.3.16 SetStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069
67.4 TBufStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070
67.4.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070
67.4.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070
67.4.3 TBufStream.Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070
67.4.4 TBufStream.Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
68
CONTENTS
67.4.5 TBufStream.Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071

67.4.6 TBufStream.Flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
67.4.7 TBufStream.Truncate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
67.4.8 TBufStream.Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
67.4.9 TBufStream.Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
67.4.10 TBufStream.Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
67.4.11 TBufStream.Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
67.5 TCollection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
67.5.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
67.5.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
67.5.3 TCollection.Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
67.5.4 TCollection.Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075
67.5.5 TCollection.Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075
67.5.6 TCollection.At . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076
67.5.7 TCollection.IndexOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076
67.5.8 TCollection.GetItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077
67.5.9 TCollection.LastThat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
67.5.10 TCollection.FirstThat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
67.5.11 TCollection.Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079
67.5.12 TCollection.FreeAll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080
67.5.13 TCollection.DeleteAll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081
67.5.14 TCollection.Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082
67.5.15 TCollection.Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082
67.5.16 TCollection.Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083
67.5.17 TCollection.AtFree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083
67.5.18 TCollection.FreeItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084
67.5.19 TCollection.AtDelete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084
67.5.20 TCollection.ForEach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
67.5.21 TCollection.SetLimit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086
67.5.22 TCollection.Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086
67.5.23 TCollection.AtPut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087
67.5.24 TCollection.AtInsert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087
67.5.25 TCollection.Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088
67.5.26 TCollection.PutItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088
67.6 TDosStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088
67.6.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088
67.6.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
67.6.3 TDosStream.Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
67.6.4 TDosStream.Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
67.6.5 TDosStream.Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090
69
CONTENTS
67.6.6 TDosStream.Truncate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090

67.6.7 TDosStream.Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
67.6.8 TDosStream.Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
67.6.9 TDosStream.Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
67.6.10 TDosStream.Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
67.7 TMemoryStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
67.7.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
67.7.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
67.7.3 TMemoryStream.Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
67.7.4 TMemoryStream.Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094
67.7.5 TMemoryStream.Truncate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094
67.7.6 TMemoryStream.Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
67.7.7 TMemoryStream.Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
67.8 TObject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
67.8.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
67.8.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
67.8.3 TObject.Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
67.8.4 TObject.Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096
67.8.5 TObject.Is_Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096
67.8.6 TObject.Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097
67.9 TPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097
67.9.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097
67.10 TRect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097
67.10.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097
67.10.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097
67.10.3 TRect.Empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098
67.10.4 TRect.Equals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
67.10.5 TRect.Contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
67.10.6 TRect.Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
67.10.7 TRect.Union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
67.10.8 TRect.Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
67.10.9 TRect.Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101
67.10.10 TRect.Grow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102
67.10.11 TRect.Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102
67.11 TResourceCollection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103
67.11.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103
67.11.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103
67.11.3 TResourceCollection.KeyOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103
67.11.4 TResourceCollection.GetItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104
67.11.5 TResourceCollection.FreeItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104
70
CONTENTS
67.11.6 TResourceCollection.PutItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104

67.12 TResourceFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104
67.12.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104
67.12.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
67.12.3 TResourceFile.Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
67.12.4 TResourceFile.Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
67.12.5 TResourceFile.Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
67.12.6 TResourceFile.KeyAt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
67.12.7 TResourceFile.Get . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
67.12.8 TResourceFile.SwitchTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
67.12.9 TResourceFile.Flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
67.12.10 TResourceFile.Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107
67.12.11 TResourceFile.Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107
67.13 TSortedCollection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107
67.13.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107
67.13.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
67.13.3 TSortedCollection.Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
67.13.4 TSortedCollection.Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
67.13.5 TSortedCollection.KeyOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
67.13.6 TSortedCollection.IndexOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
67.13.7 TSortedCollection.Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
67.13.8 TSortedCollection.Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110
67.13.9 TSortedCollection.Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
67.13.10 TSortedCollection.Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
67.14 TStrCollection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
67.14.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
67.14.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
67.14.3 TStrCollection.Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
67.14.4 TStrCollection.GetItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114
67.14.5 TStrCollection.FreeItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114
67.14.6 TStrCollection.PutItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114
67.15 TStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
67.15.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
67.15.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
67.15.3 TStream.Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
67.15.4 TStream.Get . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
67.15.5 TStream.StrRead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116
67.15.6 TStream.GetPos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117
67.15.7 TStream.GetSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117
67.15.8 TStream.ReadStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118
71
CONTENTS
67.15.9 TStream.Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119

67.15.10 TStream.Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
67.15.11 TStream.Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
67.15.12 TStream.Flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120
67.15.13 TStream.Truncate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120
67.15.14 TStream.Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120
67.15.15 TStream.StrWrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
67.15.16 TStream.WriteStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
67.15.17 TStream.Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
67.15.18 TStream.Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
67.15.19 TStream.Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122
67.15.20 TStream.Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122
67.15.21 TStream.CopyFrom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123
67.16 TStringCollection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123
67.16.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123
67.16.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124
67.16.3 TStringCollection.GetItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124
67.16.4 TStringCollection.Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124
67.16.5 TStringCollection.FreeItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
67.16.6 TStringCollection.PutItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
67.17 TStringList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
67.17.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
67.17.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126
67.17.3 TStringList.Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126
67.17.4 TStringList.Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126
67.17.5 TStringList.Get . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126
67.18 TStrListMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127
67.18.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127
67.18.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127
67.18.3 TStrListMaker.Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127
67.18.4 TStrListMaker.Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127
67.18.5 TStrListMaker.Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127
67.18.6 TStrListMaker.Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128
67.19 TUnSortedStrCollection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128
67.19.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128
67.19.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128
67.19.3 TUnSortedStrCollection.Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128
68 Reference for unit ’objpas’ 1130

68.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130
72
CONTENTS

68.2.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130
68.2.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130
69 Reference for unit ’ports’ 1132

69.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132
69.2.1 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132
69.3 tport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133
69.3.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133
69.3.3 tport.pp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133
69.4 tportl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134
69.4.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134
69.4.3 tportl.pp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134
69.5 tportw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134
69.5.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134
69.5.3 tportw.pp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134
70 Reference for unit ’printer’ 1135

70.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135
70.2.1 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135
70.3.1 AssignLst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135
70.3.2 InitPrinter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136
70.3.3 IsLstAvailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136
71 Reference for unit ’sharemem’ 1137

71.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137
72 Reference for unit ’Sockets’ 1138

72.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138
72.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138
72.3.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138
72.3.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159
72.4.1 Accept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163
73
CONTENTS
72.4.2 Bind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164

72.4.3 CloseSocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165
72.4.4 Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165
72.4.5 fpaccept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167
72.4.6 fpbind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168
72.4.7 fpconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169
72.4.8 fpgetpeername . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
72.4.9 fpgetsockname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171
72.4.10 fpgetsockopt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171
72.4.11 fplisten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172
72.4.12 fprecv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172
72.4.13 fprecvfrom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173
72.4.14 fpsend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173
72.4.15 fpsendto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174
72.4.16 fpsetsockopt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174
72.4.17 fpshutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174
72.4.18 fpsocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175
72.4.19 fpsocketpair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175
72.4.20 HostAddrToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176
72.4.21 HostAddrToStr6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176
72.4.22 HostToNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176
72.4.23 htonl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176
72.4.24 htons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177
72.4.25 NetAddrToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177
72.4.26 NetAddrToStr6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177
72.4.27 NetToHost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177
72.4.28 NToHl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
72.4.29 NToHs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
72.4.30 ShortHostToNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
72.4.31 ShortNetToHost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
72.4.32 Sock2File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
72.4.33 Sock2Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
72.4.34 socketerror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
72.4.35 Str2UnixSockAddr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
72.4.36 StrToHostAddr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180
72.4.37 StrToHostAddr6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180
72.4.38 StrToNetAddr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180
72.4.39 StrToNetAddr6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180
73 Reference for unit ’strings’ 1181
74
CONTENTS
73.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181

73.2.1 stralloc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
73.2.2 strcat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
73.2.3 strcomp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182
73.2.4 strcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182
73.2.5 strdispose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183
73.2.6 strecopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183
73.2.7 strend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
73.2.8 stricomp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185
73.2.9 stripos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185
73.2.10 striscan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
73.2.11 strlcat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
73.2.12 strlcomp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
73.2.13 strlcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
73.2.14 strlen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188
73.2.15 strlicomp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188
73.2.16 strlower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189
73.2.17 strmove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189
73.2.18 strnew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190
73.2.19 strpas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
73.2.20 strpcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
73.2.21 strpos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192
73.2.22 strriscan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192
73.2.23 strrscan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1193
73.2.24 strscan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1193
73.2.25 strupper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1193
74 Reference for unit ’strutils’ 1194

74.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194
74.2.1 Resource strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194
74.2.2 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194
74.2.3 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195
74.3.1 AddChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196
74.3.2 AddCharR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196
74.3.3 AnsiContainsStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197
74.3.4 AnsiContainsText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197
74.3.5 AnsiEndsStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197
75
CONTENTS
74.3.6 AnsiEndsText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197

74.3.7 AnsiIndexStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1198
74.3.8 AnsiIndexText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1198
74.3.9 AnsiLeftStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1198
74.3.10 AnsiMatchStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
74.3.11 AnsiMatchText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
74.3.12 AnsiMidStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
74.3.13 AnsiProperCase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
74.3.14 AnsiReplaceStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200
74.3.15 AnsiReplaceText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200
74.3.16 AnsiResemblesText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200
74.3.17 AnsiReverseString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200
74.3.18 AnsiRightStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
74.3.19 AnsiStartsStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
74.3.20 AnsiStartsText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
74.3.21 BinToHex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
74.3.22 Copy2Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202
74.3.23 Copy2SpaceDel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202
74.3.24 Copy2Symb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202
74.3.25 Copy2SymbDel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
74.3.26 Dec2Numb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
74.3.27 DecodeSoundexInt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
74.3.28 DecodeSoundexWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204
74.3.29 DelChars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204
74.3.30 DelSpace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204
74.3.31 DelSpace1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204
74.3.32 DupeString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205
74.3.33 ExtractDelimited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205
74.3.34 ExtractSubstr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205
74.3.35 ExtractWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
74.3.36 ExtractWordPos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
74.3.37 FindPart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
74.3.38 GetCmdLineArg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207
74.3.39 Hex2Dec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207
74.3.40 HexToBin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208
74.3.41 IfThen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208
74.3.42 IntToBin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208
74.3.43 IntToRoman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209
74.3.44 IsEmptyStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209
74.3.45 IsWild . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209
76
CONTENTS
74.3.46 IsWordPresent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1210

74.3.47 LeftBStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1210
74.3.48 LeftStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1210
74.3.49 MidBStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211
74.3.50 MidStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211
74.3.51 NPos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211
74.3.52 Numb2Dec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212
74.3.53 Numb2USA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212
74.3.54 PadCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212
74.3.55 PadLeft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212
74.3.56 PadRight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213
74.3.57 PosEx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213
74.3.58 PosSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213
74.3.59 PosSetEx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213
74.3.60 RandomFrom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214
74.3.61 Removeleadingchars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214
74.3.62 RemovePadChars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214
74.3.63 RemoveTrailingChars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
74.3.64 ReplaceStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
74.3.65 ReplaceText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
74.3.66 ReverseString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
74.3.67 RightBStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216
74.3.68 RightStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216
74.3.69 RomanToInt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216
74.3.70 RomanToIntDef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217
74.3.71 RPos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217
74.3.72 RPosex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217
74.3.73 SearchBuf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217
74.3.74 Soundex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218
74.3.75 SoundexCompare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218
74.3.76 SoundexInt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219
74.3.77 SoundexProc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219
74.3.78 SoundexSimilar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219
74.3.79 SoundexWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220
74.3.80 StringsReplace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220
74.3.81 StuffString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220
74.3.82 Tab2Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221
74.3.83 TrimLeftSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221
74.3.84 TrimRightSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221
74.3.85 TrimSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221
77
CONTENTS
74.3.86 TryRomanToInt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1222

74.3.87 WordCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1222
74.3.88 WordPosition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1222
74.3.89 XorDecode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223
74.3.90 XorEncode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223
74.3.91 XorString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223
75 Reference for unit ’System’ 1224

75.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1224
75.2 Unicode and codepage support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1224
75.3 Miscellaneous functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1225
75.4 Operating System functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1226
75.5 String handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1226
75.6 Mathematical routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227
75.7 Memory management functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228
75.8 File handling functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228
75.9 Run-Time Error behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229
75.10.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229
75.10.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254
75.10.3 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
75.11.1 abs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292
75.11.2 AbstractError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292
75.11.3 AcquireExceptionObject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292
75.11.4 add(variant,variant):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293
75.11.5 AddExitProc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293
75.11.6 Addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293
75.11.7 Align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
75.11.8 AllocMem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
75.11.9 AnsiToUtf8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
75.11.10 Append . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
75.11.11 arctan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
75.11.12 ArrayStringToPPchar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296
75.11.13 Assert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296
75.11.14 Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296
75.11.15 assign(ansistring):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297
75.11.16 assign(ansistring):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297
75.11.17 assign(Boolean):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298
75.11.18 assign(Boolean):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298
78
CONTENTS
75.11.19 assign(Byte):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298

75.11.20 assign(Byte):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298
75.11.21 assign(Char):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298
75.11.22 assign(Char):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
75.11.23 assign(comp):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
75.11.24 assign(comp):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
75.11.25 assign(currency):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
75.11.26 assign(currency):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
75.11.27 assign(Double):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
75.11.28 assign(Double):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
75.11.29 assign(DWord):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
75.11.30 assign(DWord):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
75.11.31 assign(extended):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
75.11.32 assign(extended):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
75.11.33 assign(Int64):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
75.11.34 assign(Int64):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
75.11.35 assign(longbool):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
75.11.36 assign(longbool):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
75.11.37 assign(LongInt):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
75.11.38 assign(LongInt):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
75.11.39 assign(olevariant):ansistring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
75.11.40 assign(olevariant):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302
75.11.41 assign(olevariant):Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302
75.11.42 assign(olevariant):Char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302
75.11.43 assign(olevariant):comp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302
75.11.44 assign(olevariant):currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302
75.11.45 assign(olevariant):Double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302
75.11.46 assign(olevariant):DWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303
75.11.47 assign(olevariant):extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303
75.11.48 assign(olevariant):Int64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303
75.11.49 assign(olevariant):longbool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303
75.11.50 assign(olevariant):LongInt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303
75.11.51 assign(olevariant):QWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303
75.11.52 assign(olevariant):Real . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304
75.11.53 assign(olevariant):ShortInt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304
75.11.54 assign(olevariant):shortstring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304
75.11.55 assign(olevariant):single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304
75.11.56 assign(olevariant):SmallInt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304
75.11.57 assign(olevariant):TDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304
75.11.58 assign(olevariant):TError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
79
CONTENTS
75.11.59 assign(olevariant):UnicodeString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305

75.11.60 assign(olevariant):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
75.11.61 assign(olevariant):WideChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
75.11.62 assign(olevariant):widestring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
75.11.63 assign(olevariant):Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
75.11.64 assign(olevariant):wordbool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306
75.11.65 assign(QWord):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306
75.11.66 assign(QWord):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306
75.11.67 assign(Real):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306
75.11.68 assign(Real):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306
75.11.69 assign(real48):Double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306
75.11.70 assign(real48):extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306
75.11.71 assign(ShortInt):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
75.11.72 assign(ShortInt):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
75.11.73 assign(shortstring):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
75.11.74 assign(shortstring):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
75.11.75 assign(single):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
75.11.76 assign(single):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
75.11.77 assign(SmallInt):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308
75.11.78 assign(SmallInt):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308
75.11.79 assign(TDateTime):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308
75.11.80 assign(TDateTime):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308
75.11.81 assign(TError):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308
75.11.82 assign(TError):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308
75.11.83 assign(UCS4String):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
75.11.84 assign(UnicodeString):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
75.11.85 assign(UnicodeString):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
75.11.86 assign(UTF8String):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
75.11.87 assign(variant):ansistring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
75.11.88 assign(variant):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
75.11.89 assign(variant):Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
75.11.90 assign(variant):Char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310
75.11.91 assign(variant):comp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310
75.11.92 assign(variant):currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310
75.11.93 assign(variant):Double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310
75.11.94 assign(variant):DWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310
75.11.95 assign(variant):extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310
75.11.96 assign(variant):Int64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311
75.11.97 assign(variant):longbool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311
75.11.98 assign(variant):LongInt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311
80
CONTENTS
75.11.99 assign(variant):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311

75.11.100assign(variant):QWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311
75.11.101assign(variant):Real . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311
75.11.102assign(variant):ShortInt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312
75.11.103assign(variant):shortstring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312
75.11.104assign(variant):single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312
75.11.105assign(variant):SmallInt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312
75.11.106assign(variant):TDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312
75.11.107assign(variant):TError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312
75.11.108assign(variant):unicodestring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313
75.11.109assign(variant):UTF8String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313
75.11.110assign(variant):WideChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313
75.11.111assign(variant):widestring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313
75.11.112assign(variant):Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313
75.11.113assign(variant):wordbool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313
75.11.114assign(WideChar):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
75.11.115assign(WideChar):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
75.11.116assign(widestring):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
75.11.117assign(widestring):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
75.11.118assign(Word):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
75.11.119assign(Word):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
75.11.120assign(wordbool):olevariant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
75.11.121assign(wordbool):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
75.11.122Assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
75.11.123BasicEventCreate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316
75.11.124basiceventdestroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316
75.11.125basiceventResetEvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316
75.11.126basiceventSetEvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316
75.11.127basiceventWaitFor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316
75.11.128BeginThread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317
75.11.129BEtoN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317
75.11.130binStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317
75.11.131BlockRead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1318
75.11.132BlockWrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319
75.11.133Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319
75.11.134BsfByte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320
75.11.135BsfDWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321
75.11.136BsfQWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321
75.11.137BsfWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321
75.11.138BsrByte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321
81
CONTENTS
75.11.139BsrDWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322
75.11.140BsrQWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322
75.11.141BsrWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322
75.11.142CaptureBacktrace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322
75.11.143chdir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323
75.11.144chr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323
75.11.145Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324
75.11.146CloseThread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324
75.11.147CompareByte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324
75.11.148CompareChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325
75.11.149CompareChar0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327
75.11.150CompareDWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327
75.11.151CompareWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328
75.11.152Concat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329
75.11.153Continue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330
75.11.154Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331
75.11.155CopyArray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331
75.11.156cos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332
75.11.157Cseg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332
75.11.158Dec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333
75.11.159Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333
75.11.160DefaultAnsi2UnicodeMove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334
75.11.161DefaultAnsi2WideMove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334
75.11.162DefaultUnicode2AnsiMove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334
75.11.163Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334
75.11.164Dispose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335
75.11.165divide(variant,variant):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336
75.11.166DoneCriticalsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336
75.11.167DoneThread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
75.11.168Dseg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
75.11.169DumpExceptionBackTrace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
75.11.170Dump_Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338
75.11.171DynArrayBounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338
75.11.172DynArrayClear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338
75.11.173DynArrayDim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338
75.11.174DynArrayIndex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
75.11.175DynArraySetLength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
75.11.176DynArraySize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
75.11.177EmptyMethod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
75.11.178EndThread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340
82
CONTENTS
75.11.179EnterCriticalsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340
75.11.180EnumResourceLanguages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340
75.11.181EnumResourceNames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341
75.11.182EnumResourceTypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341
75.11.183EOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341
75.11.184EOLn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
75.11.185equal(variant,variant):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343
75.11.186Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343
75.11.187Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344
75.11.188Exclude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344
75.11.189Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345
75.11.190exp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346
75.11.191Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347
75.11.192FilePos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347
75.11.193FileSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348
75.11.194FillByte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1349
75.11.195FillChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1350
75.11.196FillDWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1350
75.11.197FillQWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1351
75.11.198FillWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1351
75.11.199Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1352
75.11.200FinalizeArray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1352
75.11.201FindResource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1352
75.11.202FindResourceEx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1353
75.11.203float_raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1353
75.11.204Flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1353
75.11.205FlushThread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
75.11.206FMADouble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
75.11.207FMAExtended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
75.11.208FMASingle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355
75.11.209fpc_dynarray_rangecheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355
75.11.210fpc_SarInt64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355
75.11.211FPower10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355
75.11.212frac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355
75.11.213Freemem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356
75.11.214Freememory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356
75.11.215FreeResource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
75.11.216GetCPUCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
75.11.217GetCurrentThreadId . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
75.11.218getdir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
83
CONTENTS
75.11.219GetFPCHeapStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358
75.11.220GetHeapStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358
75.11.221GetMem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358
75.11.222GetMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359
75.11.223GetMemoryManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359
75.11.224GetProcessID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359
75.11.225GetResourceManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359
75.11.226GetTextCodePage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
75.11.227GetThreadID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
75.11.228GetThreadManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
75.11.229GetUnicodeStringManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
75.11.230GetVariantManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361
75.11.231GetWideStringManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361
75.11.232get_caller_addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361
75.11.233get_caller_frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361
75.11.234get_caller_stackinfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1362
75.11.235get_cmdline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1362
75.11.236get_frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1362
75.11.237Get_pc_addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1362
75.11.238greaterthan(variant,variant):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363
75.11.239greaterthanorequal(variant,variant):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363
75.11.240halt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363
75.11.241hexStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1364
75.11.242hi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1364
75.11.243High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
75.11.244HINSTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366
75.11.245Inc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366
75.11.246Include . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367
75.11.247IndexByte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367
75.11.248IndexChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368
75.11.249IndexChar0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369
75.11.250IndexDWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369
75.11.251IndexQWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1370
75.11.252Indexword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1370
75.11.253InitCriticalSection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371
75.11.254Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371
75.11.255InitializeArray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373
75.11.256InitThread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
75.11.257InitThreadVars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
75.11.258Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
84
CONTENTS
75.11.259int . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375
75.11.260intdivide(variant,variant):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375
75.11.261InterlockedCompareExchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375
75.11.262InterLockedDecrement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1376
75.11.263InterLockedExchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1376
75.11.264InterLockedExchangeAdd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377
75.11.265InterLockedIncrement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377
75.11.266IOResult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377
75.11.267IsDynArrayRectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379
75.11.268IsMemoryManagerSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379
75.11.269Is_IntResource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379
75.11.270KillThread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379
75.11.271LeaveCriticalsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
75.11.272leftshift(variant,variant):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
75.11.273Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
75.11.274lessthan(variant,variant):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381
75.11.275lessthanorequal(variant,variant):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381
75.11.276LEtoN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382
75.11.277ln . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382
75.11.278lo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382
75.11.279LoadResource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383
75.11.280LockResource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383
75.11.281logicaland(variant,variant):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1384
75.11.282logicalnot(variant):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1384
75.11.283logicalor(variant,variant):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1384
75.11.284logicalxor(variant,variant):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
75.11.285longjmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
75.11.286Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
75.11.287lowerCase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386
75.11.288MakeLangID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386
75.11.289MemSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386
75.11.290mkdir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
75.11.291modulus(variant,variant):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
75.11.292Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
75.11.293MoveChar0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1388
75.11.294multiply(variant,variant):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1388
75.11.295negative(variant):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389
75.11.296New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389
75.11.297NtoBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389
75.11.298NtoLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390
85
CONTENTS
75.11.299Null . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390
75.11.300OctStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390
75.11.301odd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391
75.11.302Ofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391
75.11.303Ord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1392
75.11.304Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1392
75.11.305Paramcount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
75.11.306ParamStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
75.11.307pi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394
75.11.308PopCnt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394
75.11.309Pos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394
75.11.310Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395
75.11.311power(variant,variant):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1396
75.11.312Pred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1396
75.11.313prefetch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397
75.11.314ptr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397
75.11.315RaiseList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397
75.11.316Random . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1398
75.11.317Randomize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1398
75.11.318Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399
75.11.319ReadBarrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399
75.11.320ReadDependencyBarrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400
75.11.321ReadLn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400
75.11.322ReadStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400
75.11.323ReadWriteBarrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401
75.11.324Real2Double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401
75.11.325ReAllocMem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402
75.11.326ReAllocMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402
75.11.327ReleaseExceptionObject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402
75.11.328Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403
75.11.329Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403
75.11.330ResumeThread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404
75.11.331Rewrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404
75.11.332rightshift(variant,variant):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
75.11.333rmdir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406
75.11.334RolByte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406
75.11.335RolDWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407
75.11.336RolQWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407
75.11.337RolWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407
75.11.338RorByte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407
86
CONTENTS
75.11.339RorDWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408
75.11.340RorQWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408
75.11.341RorWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408
75.11.342round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409
75.11.343RTLEventCreate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409
75.11.344RTLeventdestroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409
75.11.345RTLeventResetEvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410
75.11.346RTLeventSetEvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410
75.11.347RTLeventWaitFor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410
75.11.348RunError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410
75.11.349SarInt64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
75.11.350SarLongint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
75.11.351SarShortint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
75.11.352SarSmallint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412
75.11.353Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412
75.11.354SeekEOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413
75.11.355SeekEOLn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413
75.11.356Seg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1414
75.11.357SemaphoreDestroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1414
75.11.358SemaphoreInit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415
75.11.359SemaphorePost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415
75.11.360SemaphoreWait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415
75.11.361SetCodePage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1416
75.11.362Setjmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1416
75.11.363SetLength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417
75.11.364SetMemoryManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417
75.11.365SetMultiByteConversionCodePage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417
75.11.366SetMultiByteFileSystemCodePage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418
75.11.367SetMultiByteRTLFileSystemCodePage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418
75.11.368SetResourceManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419
75.11.369SetString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419
75.11.370SetTextBuf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419
75.11.371SetTextCodePage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1420
75.11.372SetTextLineEnding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
75.11.373SetThreadManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
75.11.374SetUnicodeStringManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
75.11.375SetVariantManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422
75.11.376SetWideStringManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422
75.11.377ShortCompareText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422
75.11.378sin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1423
87
CONTENTS
75.11.379SizeOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1423
75.11.380SizeofResource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424
75.11.381Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424
75.11.382Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424
75.11.383Sptr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425
75.11.384sqr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425
75.11.385sqrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1426
75.11.386Sseg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1426
75.11.387StackTop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1426
75.11.388Str . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427
75.11.389StringCodePage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427
75.11.390StringElementSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1428
75.11.391StringOfChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1428
75.11.392StringRefCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429
75.11.393StringToPPChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429
75.11.394StringToUnicodeChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429
75.11.395StringToWideChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430
75.11.396strlen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430
75.11.397strpas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430
75.11.398subtract(variant,variant):variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430
75.11.399Succ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431
75.11.400SuspendThread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431
75.11.401Swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431
75.11.402SwapEndian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1432
75.11.403SysAllocMem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1432
75.11.404SysAssert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1432
75.11.405SysBackTraceStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433
75.11.406SysFlushStdIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433
75.11.407SysFreemem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433
75.11.408SysFreememSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433
75.11.409SysGetFPCHeapStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434
75.11.410SysGetHeapStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434
75.11.411SysGetmem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434
75.11.412SysInitExceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434
75.11.413SysInitFPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
75.11.414SysInitStdIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
75.11.415SysMemSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
75.11.416SysReAllocMem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
75.11.417SysResetFPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
75.11.418SysSetCtrlBreakHandler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436
88
CONTENTS
75.11.419SysTryResizeMem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436
75.11.420ThreadGetPriority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436
75.11.421ThreadSetPriority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436
75.11.422ThreadSwitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
75.11.423ToSingleByteFileSystemEncodedFileName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
75.11.424trunc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
75.11.425Truncate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438
75.11.426TryEnterCriticalsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438
75.11.427TypeInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439
75.11.428TypeOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439
75.11.429UCS4StringToUnicodeString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439
75.11.430UCS4StringToWideString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439
75.11.431Unassigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439
75.11.432UnicodeCharLenToString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1440
75.11.433UnicodeCharLenToStrVar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1440
75.11.434UnicodeCharToString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1440
75.11.435UnicodeCharToStrVar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
75.11.436UnicodeStringToUCS4String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
75.11.437UnicodeToUtf8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
75.11.438UniqueString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
75.11.439UnlockResource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
75.11.440UnPack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
75.11.441upCase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
75.11.442Utf8CodePointLen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443
75.11.443UTF8Decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443
75.11.444UTF8Encode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444
75.11.445Utf8ToAnsi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444
75.11.446Utf8ToUnicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444
75.11.447Val . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445
75.11.448VarArrayGet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445
75.11.449VarArrayPut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446
75.11.450VarArrayRedim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446
75.11.451VarCast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446
75.11.452WaitForThreadTerminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447
75.11.453WideCharLenToString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447
75.11.454WideCharLenToStrVar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447
75.11.455WideCharToString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1448
75.11.456WideCharToStrVar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1448
75.11.457WideStringToUCS4String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1448
75.11.458Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1448
89
CONTENTS
75.11.459WriteBarrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449
75.11.460WriteLn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449
75.11.461WriteStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450
75.12 TDoubleRec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1451
75.12.1 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1451
75.12.3 TDoubleRec.Mantissa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1452
75.12.4 TDoubleRec.Fraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1452
75.12.5 TDoubleRec.Exponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1452
75.12.6 TDoubleRec.SpecialType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1452
75.12.7 TDoubleRec.Sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1452
75.12.8 TDoubleRec.Exp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
75.12.9 TDoubleRec.Frac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
75.13 TExtended80Rec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
75.13.1 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
75.13.3 TExtended80Rec.Mantissa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
75.13.4 TExtended80Rec.Fraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
75.13.5 TExtended80Rec.Exponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
75.13.6 TExtended80Rec.SpecialType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
75.13.7 TExtended80Rec.Sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
75.13.8 TExtended80Rec.Exp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
75.14 TSingleRec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
75.14.1 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456
75.14.3 TSingleRec.Mantissa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456
75.14.4 TSingleRec.Fraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456
75.14.5 TSingleRec.Exponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1457
75.14.6 TSingleRec.SpecialType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1457
75.14.7 TSingleRec.Sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1457
75.14.8 TSingleRec.Exp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1457
75.14.9 TSingleRec.Frac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1457
75.15 IDispatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
75.15.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
75.15.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
75.15.3 IDispatch.GetTypeInfoCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
75.15.4 IDispatch.GetTypeInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
75.15.5 IDispatch.GetIDsOfNames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
75.15.6 IDispatch.Invoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
75.16 IEnumerable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459
90
CONTENTS
75.16.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459

75.16.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459
75.16.3 IEnumerable.GetEnumerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459
75.17 IEnumerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459
75.17.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459
75.17.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
75.17.4 IEnumerator.GetCurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
75.17.5 IEnumerator.MoveNext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
75.17.6 IEnumerator.Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
75.17.7 IEnumerator.Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
75.18 IInvokable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
75.18.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
75.19 IUnknown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
75.19.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
75.19.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
75.19.3 IUnknown.QueryInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462
75.19.4 IUnknown._AddRef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462
75.19.5 IUnknown._Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462
75.20 TAggregatedObject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462
75.20.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462
75.20.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462
75.20.4 TAggregatedObject.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463
75.20.5 TAggregatedObject.Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463
75.21 TContainedObject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463
75.21.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463
75.22 TInterfacedObject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463
75.22.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463
75.22.3 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464
75.22.5 TInterfacedObject.AfterConstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464
75.22.6 TInterfacedObject.BeforeDestruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464
75.22.7 TInterfacedObject.NewInstance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464
75.22.8 TInterfacedObject.RefCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465
75.23 TObject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465
75.23.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465
75.23.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466
91
CONTENTS
75.23.3 TObject.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466

75.23.4 TObject.Destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467
75.23.5 TObject.newinstance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467
75.23.6 TObject.FreeInstance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467
75.23.7 TObject.SafeCallException . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467
75.23.8 TObject.DefaultHandler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1468
75.23.9 TObject.Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1468
75.23.10 TObject.InitInstance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1468
75.23.11 TObject.CleanupInstance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1468
75.23.12 TObject.ClassType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469
75.23.13 TObject.ClassInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469
75.23.14 TObject.ClassName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469
75.23.15 TObject.ClassNameIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469
75.23.16 TObject.ClassParent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470
75.23.17 TObject.InstanceSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470
75.23.18 TObject.InheritsFrom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470
75.23.19 TObject.StringMessageTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470
75.23.20 TObject.MethodAddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
75.23.21 TObject.MethodName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
75.23.22 TObject.FieldAddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
75.23.23 TObject.AfterConstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
75.23.24 TObject.BeforeDestruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472
75.23.25 TObject.DefaultHandlerStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472
75.23.26 TObject.Dispatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472
75.23.27 TObject.DispatchStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472
75.23.28 TObject.GetInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473
75.23.29 TObject.GetInterfaceByStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473
75.23.30 TObject.GetInterfaceWeak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473
75.23.31 TObject.GetInterfaceEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
75.23.32 TObject.GetInterfaceEntryByStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
75.23.33 TObject.GetInterfaceTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
75.23.34 TObject.UnitName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
75.23.35 TObject.Equals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
75.23.36 TObject.GetHashCode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
75.23.37 TObject.ToString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
76 Reference for unit ’sysutils’ 1476

76.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476
76.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476
76.3 Localization support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476
92
CONTENTS
76.4 Unicode and codepage awareness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1477

76.5 Miscellaneous conversion routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1478
76.6 Date/time routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1479
76.7 FileName handling routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1479
76.8 File input/output routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1480
76.9 PChar related functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481
76.10 Date and time formatting characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1482
76.11 Formatting strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483
76.12 String functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483
76.13.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484
76.13.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491
76.13.3 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500
76.14.1 AbandonSignalHandler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1504
76.14.2 Abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505
76.14.3 AddDisk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505
76.14.4 AddTerminateProc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505
76.14.5 AdjustLineBreaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1506
76.14.6 AnsiCompareFileName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1506
76.14.7 AnsiCompareStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507
76.14.8 AnsiCompareText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1508
76.14.9 AnsiDequotedStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509
76.14.10 AnsiExtractQuotedStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509
76.14.11 AnsiLastChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509
76.14.12 AnsiLowerCase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510
76.14.13 AnsiLowerCaseFileName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511
76.14.14 AnsiPos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511
76.14.15 AnsiQuotedStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511
76.14.16 AnsiSameStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511
76.14.17 AnsiSameText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1512
76.14.18 AnsiStrComp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1512
76.14.19 AnsiStrIComp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1513
76.14.20 AnsiStrLastChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514
76.14.21 AnsiStrLComp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514
76.14.22 AnsiStrLIComp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1515
76.14.23 AnsiStrLower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1516
76.14.24 AnsiStrPos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1516
76.14.25 AnsiStrRScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1517
76.14.26 AnsiStrScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1517
93
CONTENTS
76.14.27 AnsiStrUpper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1517

76.14.28 AnsiUpperCase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518
76.14.29 AnsiUpperCaseFileName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1519
76.14.30 AppendStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1519
76.14.31 ApplicationName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1519
76.14.32 AssignStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1520
76.14.33 BCDToInt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1520
76.14.34 Beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521
76.14.35 BoolToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521
76.14.36 BytesOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521
76.14.37 ByteToCharIndex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522
76.14.38 ByteToCharLen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522
76.14.39 ByteType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522
76.14.40 CallTerminateProcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522
76.14.41 ChangeFileExt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1523
76.14.42 CharInSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1523
76.14.43 CharToByteLen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1523
76.14.44 CodePageNameToCodePage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524
76.14.45 CodePageToCodePageName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524
76.14.46 CompareMem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524
76.14.47 CompareMemRange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524
76.14.48 CompareStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1525
76.14.49 CompareText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1526
76.14.50 ComposeDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1526
76.14.51 ConcatPaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
76.14.52 CreateDir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
76.14.53 CreateGUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1528
76.14.54 CurrentYear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1528
76.14.55 CurrToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529
76.14.56 CurrToStrF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529
76.14.57 Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529
76.14.58 DateTimeToFileDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1530
76.14.59 DateTimeToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1530
76.14.60 DateTimeToString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1531
76.14.61 DateTimeToSystemTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1532
76.14.62 DateTimeToTimeStamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1533
76.14.63 DateToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1533
76.14.64 DayOfWeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1534
76.14.65 DecodeDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1534
76.14.66 DecodeDateFully . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1535
94
CONTENTS
76.14.67 DecodeTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1535

76.14.68 DeleteFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1536
76.14.69 DirectoryExists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1536
76.14.70 DiskFree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537
76.14.71 DiskSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537
76.14.72 DisposeStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538
76.14.73 DoDirSeparators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538
76.14.74 EncodeDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1539
76.14.75 EncodeTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1539
76.14.76 ExceptAddr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
76.14.77 ExceptFrameCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
76.14.78 ExceptFrames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
76.14.79 ExceptionErrorMessage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
76.14.80 ExceptObject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
76.14.81 ExcludeLeadingPathDelimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
76.14.82 ExcludeTrailingBackslash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1542
76.14.83 ExcludeTrailingPathDelimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1542
76.14.84 ExecuteProcess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543
76.14.85 ExeSearch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543
76.14.86 ExpandFileName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543
76.14.87 ExpandFileNameCase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544
76.14.88 ExpandUNCFileName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545
76.14.89 ExtractFileDir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545
76.14.90 ExtractFileDrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546
76.14.91 ExtractFileExt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546
76.14.92 ExtractFileName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1547
76.14.93 ExtractFilePath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1547
76.14.94 ExtractRelativepath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1547
76.14.95 ExtractShortPathName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1548
76.14.96 FileAge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1548
76.14.97 FileClose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
76.14.98 FileCreate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1550
76.14.99 FileDateToDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551
76.14.100FileExists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551
76.14.101FileGetAttr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1552
76.14.102FileGetDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1553
76.14.103FileIsReadOnly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1554
76.14.104FileOpen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1554
76.14.105FileRead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555
76.14.106FileSearch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555
95
CONTENTS
76.14.107FileSeek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1556
76.14.108FileSetAttr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1557
76.14.109FileSetDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1557
76.14.110FileTruncate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1558
76.14.111FileWrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1558
76.14.112FindClose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1558
76.14.113FindCmdLineSwitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1559
76.14.114FindFirst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1559
76.14.115FindNext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1560
76.14.116FloattoCurr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561
76.14.117FloatToDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561
76.14.118FloatToDecimal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561
76.14.119FloatToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1562
76.14.120FloatToStrF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1563
76.14.121FloatToText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1565
76.14.122FloatToTextFmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1566
76.14.123FmtStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1566
76.14.124ForceDirectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1567
76.14.125Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1567
76.14.126FormatBuf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574
76.14.127FormatCurr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574
76.14.128FormatDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1575
76.14.129FormatFloat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1575
76.14.130FreeAndNil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1577
76.14.131GetAppConfigDir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1577
76.14.132GetAppConfigFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1578
76.14.133GetCurrentDir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1578
76.14.134GetDirs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1579
76.14.135GetEnvironmentString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1580
76.14.136GetEnvironmentVariable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1580
76.14.137GetEnvironmentVariableCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1580
76.14.138GetFileHandle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1581
76.14.139GetLastOSError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1581
76.14.140GetLocalTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1581
76.14.141GetLocalTimeOffset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1582
76.14.142GetModuleName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1582
76.14.143GetTempDir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1582
76.14.144GetTempFileName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1583
76.14.145GetTickCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1583
76.14.146GetTickCount64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1583
96
CONTENTS
76.14.147GetUserDir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1584
76.14.148GuidCase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1584
76.14.149GUIDToString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1584
76.14.150HashName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1584
76.14.151HookSignal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1585
76.14.152IncAMonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1585
76.14.153IncludeLeadingPathDelimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1585
76.14.154IncludeTrailingBackslash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1586
76.14.155IncludeTrailingPathDelimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1586
76.14.156IncMonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1586
76.14.157InquireSignal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1587
76.14.158IntToHex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1587
76.14.159IntToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1588
76.14.160IsDelimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1589
76.14.161IsEqualGUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1589
76.14.162IsLeapYear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1589
76.14.163IsPathDelimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1590
76.14.164IsValidIdent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1590
76.14.165LastDelimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591
76.14.166LeftStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591
76.14.167LoadStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1592
76.14.168LowerCase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1592
76.14.169MSecsToTimeStamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1592
76.14.170NewStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1593
76.14.171Now . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1593
76.14.172OutOfMemoryError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1594
76.14.173QuotedStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1594
76.14.174RaiseLastOSError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1595
76.14.175RemoveDir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1595
76.14.176RenameFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1595
76.14.177ReplaceDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1596
76.14.178ReplaceTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1596
76.14.179RightStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1596
76.14.180SafeLoadLibrary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1597
76.14.181SameFileName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1597
76.14.182SameText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1597
76.14.183SetCurrentDir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1598
76.14.184SetDirSeparators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1598
76.14.185ShowException . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1598
76.14.186Sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599
97
CONTENTS
76.14.187SScanf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599
76.14.188StrAlloc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1600
76.14.189StrBufSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1600
76.14.190StrByteType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
76.14.191strcat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
76.14.192StrCharLength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
76.14.193strcomp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602
76.14.194StrCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602
76.14.195StrDispose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
76.14.196strecopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
76.14.197strend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
76.14.198StrFmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604
76.14.199stricomp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
76.14.200StringReplace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
76.14.201StringToGUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606
76.14.202strlcat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606
76.14.203strlcomp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607
76.14.204StrLCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607
76.14.205StrLen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1608
76.14.206StrLFmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1608
76.14.207strlicomp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609
76.14.208strlower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609
76.14.209strmove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1610
76.14.210strnew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611
76.14.211StrNextChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611
76.14.212StrPas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611
76.14.213StrPCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1612
76.14.214StrPLCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1612
76.14.215strpos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1612
76.14.216strrscan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1613
76.14.217strscan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1613
76.14.218StrToBool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1613
76.14.219StrToBoolDef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1614
76.14.220StrToCurr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1614
76.14.221StrToCurrDef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1614
76.14.222StrToDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615
76.14.223StrToDateDef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615
76.14.224StrToDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616
76.14.225StrToDateTimeDef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1617
76.14.226StrToFloat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1617
98
CONTENTS
76.14.227StrToFloatDef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1618
76.14.228StrToInt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1618
76.14.229StrToInt64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1619
76.14.230StrToInt64Def . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1620
76.14.231StrToIntDef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1620
76.14.232StrToQWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621
76.14.233StrToQWordDef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621
76.14.234StrToTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621
76.14.235StrToTimeDef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
76.14.236strupper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
76.14.237Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
76.14.238SysErrorMessage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623
76.14.239SystemTimeToDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623
76.14.240TextToFloat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1624
76.14.241Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625
76.14.242TimeStampToDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626
76.14.243TimeStampToMSecs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626
76.14.244TimeToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627
76.14.245Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627
76.14.246TrimLeft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
76.14.247TrimRight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
76.14.248TryEncodeDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1629
76.14.249TryEncodeTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1629
76.14.250TryFloatToCurr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630
76.14.251TryStringToGUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630
76.14.252TryStrToBool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630
76.14.253TryStrToCurr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631
76.14.254TryStrToDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631
76.14.255TryStrToDateTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631
76.14.256TryStrToFloat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632
76.14.257TryStrToInt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632
76.14.258TryStrToInt64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633
76.14.259TryStrToQWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633
76.14.260TryStrToTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633
76.14.261UnhookSignal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1634
76.14.262UpperCase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1634
76.14.263VendorName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1634
76.14.264WideCompareStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1635
76.14.265WideCompareText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1635
76.14.266WideFmtStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1635
99
CONTENTS
76.14.267WideFormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1636
76.14.268WideFormatBuf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1636
76.14.269WideLowerCase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1636
76.14.270WideSameStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1637
76.14.271WideSameText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1637
76.14.272WideUpperCase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1637
76.14.273WrapText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1637
76.15 EAbort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638
76.15.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638
76.16 EAbstractError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638
76.16.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638
76.17 EAccessViolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638
76.17.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638
76.18 EArgumentException . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638
76.18.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638
76.19 EArgumentOutOfRangeException . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638
76.19.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638
76.20 EAssertionFailed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
76.20.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
76.21 EBusError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
76.21.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
76.22 EControlC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
76.22.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
76.23 EConvertError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
76.23.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
76.24 EDivByZero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
76.24.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
76.25 EExternal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
76.25.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
76.26 EExternalException . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
76.26.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
76.27 EFormatError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640
76.27.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640
76.28 EHeapMemoryError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640
76.28.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640
76.28.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640
76.28.3 EHeapMemoryError.FreeInstance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640
76.29 EInOutError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640
76.29.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640
76.30 EInterror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640
100
CONTENTS
76.30.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640

76.31 EIntfCastError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641
76.31.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641
76.32 EIntOverflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641
76.32.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641
76.33 EInvalidCast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641
76.33.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641
76.34 EInvalidContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641
76.34.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641
76.35 EInvalidInsert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641
76.35.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641
76.36 EInvalidOp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641
76.36.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641
76.37 EInvalidPointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641
76.37.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641
76.38 EMathError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
76.38.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
76.39 ENoConstructException . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
76.39.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
76.40 ENoThreadSupport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
76.40.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
76.41 ENotImplemented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
76.41.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
76.42 ENoWideStringSupport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
76.42.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
76.43 EObjectCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
76.43.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
76.44 EOSError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
76.44.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
76.45 EOutOfMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
76.45.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
76.46 EOverflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
76.46.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
76.47 EPackageError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
76.47.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
76.48 EPrivilege . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
76.48.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
76.49 EPropReadOnly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
76.49.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
76.50 EPropWriteOnly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
101
CONTENTS
76.50.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644

76.51 ERangeError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
76.51.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
76.52 ESafecallException . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
76.52.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
76.53 EStackOverflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
76.53.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
76.54 EUnderflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
76.54.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
76.55 EVariantError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
76.55.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
76.55.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
76.55.3 EVariantError.CreateCode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
76.56 Exception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
76.56.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
76.56.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
76.56.4 Exception.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
76.56.5 Exception.CreateFmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1646
76.56.6 Exception.CreateRes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1646
76.56.7 Exception.CreateResFmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1646
76.56.8 Exception.CreateHelp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1646
76.56.9 Exception.CreateFmtHelp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647
76.56.10 Exception.CreateResHelp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647
76.56.11 Exception.CreateResFmtHelp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647
76.56.12 Exception.ToString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647
76.56.13 Exception.HelpContext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648
76.56.14 Exception.Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648
76.57 EZeroDivide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648
76.57.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648
76.58 IReadWriteSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648
76.58.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648
76.59 TMultiReadExclusiveWriteSynchronizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648
76.59.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648
76.60 TSimpleRWSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1649
76.60.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1649
77 Reference for unit ’Types’ 1650
102
CONTENTS
77.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650

77.2.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650
77.2.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1655
77.3.1 Bounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1661
77.3.2 CenterPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1661
77.3.3 EqualRect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1662
77.3.4 InflateRect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1662
77.3.5 IntersectRect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1662
77.3.6 IsRectEmpty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1662
77.3.7 OffsetRect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1663
77.3.8 Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1663
77.3.9 PtInRect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1663
77.3.10 Rect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1663
77.3.11 Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1664
77.3.12 UnionRect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1664
77.4 IClassFactory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1664
77.4.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1664
77.4.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1664
77.4.3 IClassFactory.CreateInstance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1664
77.4.4 IClassFactory.LockServer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665
77.5 ISequentialStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665
77.5.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665
77.5.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665
77.5.3 ISequentialStream.Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665
77.5.4 ISequentialStream.Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665
77.6 IStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665
77.6.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665
77.6.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1666
77.6.3 IStream.Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1666
77.6.4 IStream.SetSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1666
77.6.5 IStream.CopyTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1666
77.6.6 IStream.Commit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1667
77.6.7 IStream.Revert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1667
77.6.8 IStream.LockRegion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1667
77.6.9 IStream.UnlockRegion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1667
77.6.10 IStream.Stat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1668
77.6.11 IStream.Clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1668
103
CONTENTS
78 Reference for unit ’typinfo’ 1669

78.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1669
78.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1669
78.3 Auxiliary functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1669
78.4 Getting or setting property values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1670
78.5 Examining published property information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1670
78.6.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1671
78.6.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1672
78.7.1 FindPropInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1686
78.7.2 GetEnumName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1687
78.7.3 GetEnumNameCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1688
78.7.4 GetEnumProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1688
78.7.5 GetEnumValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1689
78.7.6 GetFloatProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1689
78.7.7 GetInt64Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1690
78.7.8 GetInterfaceProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1691
78.7.9 GetMethodProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1691
78.7.10 GetObjectProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1693
78.7.11 GetObjectPropClass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1694
78.7.12 GetOrdProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1695
78.7.13 GetPropInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1696
78.7.14 GetPropInfos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1696
78.7.15 GetPropList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1697
78.7.16 GetPropValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1698
78.7.17 GetRawInterfaceProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1699
78.7.18 GetSetProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1699
78.7.19 GetStrProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1700
78.7.20 GetTypeData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1701
78.7.21 GetUnicodeStrProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1702
78.7.22 GetVariantProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1702
78.7.23 GetWideStrProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1702
78.7.24 IsPublishedProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1703
78.7.25 IsStoredProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1703
78.7.26 PropIsType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1704
78.7.27 PropType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1705
78.7.28 SetEnumProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1706
78.7.29 SetFloatProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1706
78.7.30 SetInt64Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1707
104
CONTENTS
78.7.31 SetInterfaceProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1707

78.7.32 SetMethodProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1708
78.7.33 SetObjectProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1708
78.7.34 SetOrdProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709
78.7.35 SetPropValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709
78.7.36 SetRawInterfaceProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709
78.7.37 SetSetProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710
78.7.38 SetStrProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710
78.7.39 SetToString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711
78.7.40 SetUnicodeStrProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712
78.7.41 SetVariantProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712
78.7.42 SetWideStrProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712
78.7.43 StringToSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1713
78.8 TProcedureSignature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1713
78.8.1 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1713
78.8.2 TProcedureSignature.GetParam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1713
78.9 EPropertyConvertError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1714
78.9.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1714
78.10 EPropertyError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1714
78.10.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1714
79 Reference for unit ’unicodedata’ 1715

79.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1715
79.2.1 Resource strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716
79.2.2 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716
79.2.3 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1719
79.3.1 CanonicalOrder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1721
79.3.2 CompareSortKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722
79.3.3 ComputeSortKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722
79.3.4 FindCollation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722
79.3.5 FreeCollation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1723
79.3.6 FromUCS4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1723
79.3.7 GetCollationCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1723
79.3.8 GetProps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1723
79.3.9 GetPropUCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1724
79.3.10 IncrementalCompareString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1724
79.3.11 LoadCollation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1724
79.3.12 NormalizeNFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1725
105
CONTENTS
79.3.13 PrepareCollation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1725

79.3.14 RegisterCollation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1725
79.3.15 ToUCS4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1726
79.3.16 UnicodeIsHighSurrogate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1726
79.3.17 UnicodeIsLowSurrogate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1726
79.3.18 UnicodeIsSurrogatePair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1727
79.3.19 UnicodeToLower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1727
79.3.20 UnicodeToUpper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1727
79.3.21 UnregisterCollation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1728
79.3.22 UnregisterCollations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1728
79.4 TUCA_DataBook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1728
79.4.1 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1729
79.4.2 TUCA_DataBook.IsVariable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1729
79.5 TUCA_PropItemContextRec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1729
79.5.1 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1729
79.5.2 TUCA_PropItemContextRec.GetCodePoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1729
79.5.3 TUCA_PropItemContextRec.GetWeights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1730
79.6 TUCA_PropItemContextTreeNodeRec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1730
79.6.1 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1730
79.6.2 TUCA_PropItemContextTreeNodeRec.GetLeftNode . . . . . . . . . . . 1730
79.6.3 TUCA_PropItemContextTreeNodeRec.GetRightNode . . . . . . . . . . . 1730
79.7 TUCA_PropItemContextTreeRec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1730
79.7.1 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1731
79.7.3 TUCA_PropItemContextTreeRec.GetData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1731
79.7.4 TUCA_PropItemContextTreeRec.Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1731
79.7.5 TUCA_PropItemContextTreeRec.Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1731
79.8 TUCA_PropItemRec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1732
79.8.1 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1732
79.8.3 TUCA_PropItemRec.HasCodePoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733
79.8.4 TUCA_PropItemRec.IsValid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733
79.8.5 TUCA_PropItemRec.GetWeightArray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733
79.8.6 TUCA_PropItemRec.GetSelfOnlySize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733
79.8.7 TUCA_PropItemRec.GetContextual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733
79.8.8 TUCA_PropItemRec.GetContext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733
79.8.9 TUCA_PropItemRec.IsDeleted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1734
79.8.10 TUCA_PropItemRec.IsWeightCompress_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1734
79.8.11 TUCA_PropItemRec.IsWeightCompress_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1734
79.8.12 TUCA_PropItemRec.CodePoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1734
106
CONTENTS
79.8.13 TUCA_PropItemRec.Contextual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1734

79.9 TUC_Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1734
79.9.2 TUC_Prop.Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1735
79.9.3 TUC_Prop.WhiteSpace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1735
79.9.4 TUC_Prop.HangulSyllable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1736
79.9.5 TUC_Prop.NumericValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1736
79.10 TUInt24Rec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1736
79.10.1 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1739
79.10.2 TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):Cardinal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1740
79.10.3 TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):LongInt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1740
79.10.4 TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1740
79.10.5 TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1740
79.10.6 TUInt24Rec.implicit(Cardinal):TUInt24Rec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1741
79.10.7 TUInt24Rec.equal(TUInt24Rec,TUInt24Rec):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . 1741
79.10.8 TUInt24Rec.equal(TUInt24Rec,Cardinal):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . 1741
79.10.9 TUInt24Rec.equal(Cardinal,TUInt24Rec):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . 1741
79.10.10 TUInt24Rec.equal(TUInt24Rec,LongInt):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1741
79.10.11 TUInt24Rec.equal(LongInt,TUInt24Rec):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1742
79.10.12 TUInt24Rec.equal(TUInt24Rec,Word):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1742
79.10.13 TUInt24Rec.equal(Word,TUInt24Rec):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1742
79.10.14 TUInt24Rec.equal(TUInt24Rec,Byte):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1742
79.10.15 TUInt24Rec.equal(Byte,TUInt24Rec):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1742
79.10.16 TUInt24Rec.notequal(TUInt24Rec,TUInt24Rec):Boolean . . . . . . . . . 1742
79.10.17 TUInt24Rec.notequal(TUInt24Rec,Cardinal):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . 1743
79.10.18 TUInt24Rec.notequal(Cardinal,TUInt24Rec):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . 1743
79.10.19 TUInt24Rec.greaterthan(TUInt24Rec,TUInt24Rec):Boolean . . . . . . . 1743
79.10.20 TUInt24Rec.greaterthan(TUInt24Rec,Cardinal):Boolean . . . . . . . . . 1743
79.10.21 TUInt24Rec.greaterthan(Cardinal,TUInt24Rec):Boolean . . . . . . . . . 1743
79.10.22 TUInt24Rec.greaterthanorequal(TUInt24Rec,TUInt24Rec):Boolean . . . 1744
79.10.23 TUInt24Rec.greaterthanorequal(TUInt24Rec,Cardinal):Boolean . . . . . 1744
79.10.24 TUInt24Rec.greaterthanorequal(Cardinal,TUInt24Rec):Boolean . . . . . 1744
79.10.25 TUInt24Rec.lessthan(TUInt24Rec,TUInt24Rec):Boolean . . . . . . . . . 1744
79.10.26 TUInt24Rec.lessthan(TUInt24Rec,Cardinal):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . 1744
79.10.27 TUInt24Rec.lessthan(Cardinal,TUInt24Rec):Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . 1745
79.10.28 TUInt24Rec.lessthanorequal(TUInt24Rec,TUInt24Rec):Boolean . . . . . 1745
79.10.29 TUInt24Rec.lessthanorequal(TUInt24Rec,Cardinal):Boolean . . . . . . . 1745
79.10.30 TUInt24Rec.lessthanorequal(Cardinal,TUInt24Rec):Boolean . . . . . . . 1745
80 Reference for unit ’unicodeducet’ 1746
107
CONTENTS
80.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1746
81 Reference for unit ’Unix’ 1747

81.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1747
81.2.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1747
81.2.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1754
81.2.3 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1763
81.3.1 AssignPipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1763
81.3.2 AssignStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1764
81.3.3 FpExecL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1765
81.3.4 FpExecLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1766
81.3.5 FpExecLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1767
81.3.6 FpExecLPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1768
81.3.7 FpExecV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1768
81.3.8 FpExecVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1769
81.3.9 FpExecVPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1770
81.3.10 fpFlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1771
81.3.11 fpfStatFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1771
81.3.12 fpfsync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1772
81.3.13 fpgettimeofday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1772
81.3.14 fpStatFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1772
81.3.15 fpSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1773
81.3.16 FSearch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1773
81.3.17 GetDomainName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1774
81.3.18 GetHostName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1774
81.3.19 GetLocalTimezone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1775
81.3.20 GetTimezoneFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1775
81.3.21 PClose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1776
81.3.22 POpen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1776
81.3.23 ReadTimezoneFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1777
81.3.24 ReReadLocalTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1777
81.3.25 SeekDir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1778
81.3.26 SelectText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1778
81.3.27 SigRaise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1778
81.3.28 TellDir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1779
81.3.29 WaitProcess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1779
81.3.30 WIFSTOPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1780
81.3.31 W_EXITCODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1780
108
CONTENTS
81.3.32 W_STOPCODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1780
82 Reference for unit ’unixcp’ 1781

82.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1781
82.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1781
82.3.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1781
82.3.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782
82.4.1 GetCodepageByName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782
82.4.2 GetCodepageData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782
82.4.3 GetSystemCodepage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782
83 Reference for unit ’unixtype’ 1784

83.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1784
83.2.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1784
83.2.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1786
84 Reference for unit ’unixutil’ 1799

84.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799
84.2.1 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799
84.2.2 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799
84.3.1 ArrayStringToPPchar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1800
84.3.2 EpochToLocal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1800
84.3.3 GetFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1801
84.3.4 GregorianToJulian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1801
84.3.5 JulianToGregorian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1802
84.3.6 LocalToEpoch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1802
84.3.7 StringToPPChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1802
85 Reference for unit ’video’ 1804

85.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1804
85.2 Examples utility unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1805
85.3 Writing a custom video driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1805
85.4.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1809
85.4.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1813
85.4.3 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1815
109
CONTENTS

85.5.1 ClearScreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1816
85.5.2 DefaultErrorHandler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1816
85.5.3 DoneVideo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1817
85.5.4 GetCapabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1817
85.5.5 GetCursorType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1818
85.5.6 GetLockScreenCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1819
85.5.7 GetVideoDriver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1820
85.5.8 GetVideoMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1820
85.5.9 GetVideoModeCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1821
85.5.10 GetVideoModeData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1822
85.5.11 InitVideo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1822
85.5.12 LockScreenUpdate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1822
85.5.13 SetCursorPos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1823
85.5.14 SetCursorType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1824
85.5.15 SetVideoDriver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1824
85.5.16 SetVideoMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1825
85.5.17 UnlockScreenUpdate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1825
85.5.18 UpdateScreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1825
86 Reference for unit ’wincrt’ 1827

86.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1827
86.2.1 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1827
86.3.1 delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1827
86.3.2 keypressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1827
86.3.3 nosound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1828
86.3.4 readkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1828
86.3.5 sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1828
86.3.6 textmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1828
87 Reference for unit ’windirs’ 1829

87.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1829
87.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1829
87.3.1 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1829
87.4.1 GetWindowsSpecialDir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1832
88 Reference for unit ’x86’ 1833
110
CONTENTS
88.1 Used units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1833

88.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1833
88.3.1 fpIOperm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1833
88.3.2 fpIoPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1834
88.3.3 ReadPort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1834
88.3.4 ReadPortB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1834
88.3.5 ReadPortL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1835
88.3.6 ReadPortW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1835
88.3.7 WritePort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1835
88.3.8 WritePortB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1836
88.3.9 WritePortl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1836
88.3.10 WritePortW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1836
111
CONTENTS
About this guide

This document describes all constants, types, variables, functions and procedures as they are declared
in the units that come standard with the Free Pascal Run-Time library (RTL).
Throughout this document, we will refer to functions, types and variables with typewriter font.
Functions and procedures gave their own subsections, and for each function or procedure we have
the following topics:
Declaration The exact declaration of the function.
Description What does the procedure exactly do ?

Errors What errors can occur.
See Also Cross references to other related functions/commands.
0.1 Overview
The Run-Time Library is the basis of all Free Pascal programs. It contains the basic units that most
programs will use, and are made available on all platforms supported by Free pascal (well, more or
less).
There are units for compatibility with the Turbo Pascal Run-Time library, and there are units for
compatibility with Delphi.
On top of these two sets, there are also a series of units to handle keyboard/mouse and text screens
in a cross-platform way.
Other units include platform specific units that implement the specifics of a platform, these are usu-
ally needed to support the Turbo Pascal or Delphi units.
Units that fall outside the above outline do not belong in the RTL, but should be included in the
packages, or in the FCL.
112
Chapter 1
Reference for unit ’BaseUnix’
1.1 Used units
Table 1.1: Used units by unit ’BaseUnix’
Name Page
System 1224
unixtype 1784
1.2 Overview
The BaseUnix unit was implemented by Marco Van de Voort. It contains basic unix functionality.
It supersedes the Linux unit of version 1.0.X of the compiler, but only implements a cleaned up,
portable subset of that unit.
For porting FPC to new unix-like platforms, it should be sufficient to implement the functionality in
this unit for the new platform.
1.3 Constants, types and variables

1.3.1 Constants
ARG_MAX = UnixType . ARG_MAX
Maximum number of arguments to a program.
BITSINWORD = 8 * (cuLong)
Number of bits in a word.
ESysE2BIG = 7
System error: Argument list too long
ESysEACCES = 13
113
CHAPTER 1. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’BASEUNIX’
System error: Permission denied
ESysEADDRINUSE = 98
System error: Address already in use
ESysEADDRNOTAVAIL = 99
System error: Cannot assign requested address
ESysEADV = 68
System error: Advertise error
ESysEAFNOSUPPORT = 97
System error: Address family not supported by protocol
ESysEAGAIN = 11
System error: Try again
ESysEALREADY = 114
System error: Operation already in progress
ESysEBADE = 52
System error: Invalid exchange
ESysEBADF = 9
System error: Bad file number
ESysEBADFD = 77
System error: File descriptor in bad state
ESysEBADMSG = 74
System error: Not a data message
ESysEBADR = 53
System error: Invalid request descriptor
ESysEBADRQC = 56
System error: Invalid request code
ESysEBADSLT = 57
114
System error: Invalid slot
ESysEBFONT = 59
System error: Bad font file format
ESysEBUSY = 16
System error: Device or resource busy
ESysECANCELED = 125
Operation canceled
ESysECHILD = 10
System error: No child processes
ESysECHRNG = 44
System error: Channel number out of range
ESysECOMM = 70
System error: Communication error on send
ESysECONNABORTED = 103
System error: Software caused connection abort
ESysECONNREFUSED = 111
System error: Connection refused
ESysECONNRESET = 104
System error: Connection reset by peer
ESysEDEADLK = 35
System error: Resource deadlock would occur
ESysEDEADLOCK = ESysEDEADLK
System error: File locking deadlock error
ESysEDESTADDRREQ = 89
System error: Destination address required
ESysEDOM = 33
115
System error: Math argument out of domain of func
ESysEDOTDOT = 73
System error: RFS specific error
ESysEDQUOT = 122
System error: Quota exceeded
ESysEEXIST = 17
System error: File exists
ESysEFAULT = 14
System error: Bad address
ESysEFBIG = 27
System error: File too large
ESysEHOSTDOWN = 112
System error: Host is down
ESysEHOSTUNREACH = 113
System error: No route to host
ESysEIDRM = 43
System error: Identifier removed
ESysEILSEQ = 84
System error: Illegal byte sequence
ESysEINPROGRESS = 115
System error: Operation now in progress
ESysEINTR = 4
System error: Interrupted system call
ESysEINVAL = 22
System error: Invalid argument
ESysEIO = 5
116
System error: I/O error
ESysEISCONN = 106
System error: Transport endpoint is already connected
ESysEISDIR = 21
System error: Is a directory
ESysEISNAM = 120
System error: Is a named type file
ESysEKEYEXPIRED = 127
Key has expired (linux kernel module)
ESysEKEYREJECTED = 129
Key was rejected by service (linux kernel module)
ESysEKEYREVOKED = 128
Key has been revoked (linux kernel module)
ESysEL2HLT = 51
System error: Level 2 halted
ESysEL2NSYNC = 45
System error: Level 2 not synchronized
ESysEL3HLT = 46
System error: Level 3 halted
ESysEL3RST = 47
System error: Level 3 reset
ESysELIBACC = 79
System error: Can not access a needed shared library
ESysELIBBAD = 80
System error: Accessing a corrupted shared library
ESysELIBEXEC = 83
117
System error: Cannot exec a shared library directly
ESysELIBMAX = 82
System error: Attempting to link in too many shared libraries
ESysELIBSCN = 81
System error: .lib section in a.out corrupted
ESysELNRNG = 48
System error: Link number out of range
ESysELOOP = 40
System error: Too many symbolic links encountered
ESysEMEDIUMTYPE = 124
Wrong medium type
ESysEMFILE = 24
System error: Too many open files
ESysEMLINK = 31
System error: Too many links
ESysEMSGSIZE = 90
System error: Message too long
ESysEMULTIHOP = 72
System error: Multihop attempted
ESysENAMETOOLONG = 36
System error: File name too long
ESysENAVAIL = 119
System error: No XENIX semaphores available
ESysENETDOWN = 100
System error: Network is down
ESysENETRESET = 102
118
System error: Network dropped connection because of reset
ESysENETUNREACH = 101
System error: Network is unreachable
ESysENFILE = 23
System error: File table overflow
ESysENOANO = 55
System error: No anode
ESysENOBUFS = 105
System error: No buffer space available
ESysENOCSI = 50
System error: No CSI structure available
ESysENODATA = 61
System error: No data available
ESysENODEV = 19
System error: No such device
ESysENOENT = 2
System error: No such file or directory
ESysENOEXEC = 8
System error: Exec format error
ESysENOKEY = 126
Required key not available (linux kernel module)
ESysENOLCK = 37
System error: No record locks available
ESysENOLINK = 67
System error: Link has been severed
ESysENOMEDIUM = 123
119
No medium present
ESysENOMEM = 12
System error: Out of memory
ESysENOMSG = 42
System error: No message of desired type
ESysENONET = 64
System error: Machine is not on the network
ESysENOPKG = 65
System error: Package not installed
ESysENOPROTOOPT = 92
System error: Protocol not available
ESysENOSPC = 28
System error: No space left on device
ESysENOSR = 63
System error: Out of streams resources
ESysENOSTR = 60
System error: Device not a stream
ESysENOSYS = 38
System error: Function not implemented
ESysENOTBLK = 15
System error: Block device required
ESysENOTCONN = 107
System error: Transport endpoint is not connected
ESysENOTDIR = 20
System error: Not a directory
ESysENOTEMPTY = 39
120
System error: Directory not empty
ESysENOTNAM = 118
System error: Not a XENIX named type file
ESysENOTRECOVERABLE = 131
State not recoverable (mutexes)
ESysENOTSOCK = 88
System error: Socket operation on non-socket
ESysENOTTY = 25
System error: Not a typewriter
ESysENOTUNIQ = 76
System error: Name not unique on network
ESysENXIO = 6
System error: No such device or address
ESysEOPNOTSUPP = 95
System error: Operation not supported on transport endpoint
ESysEOVERFLOW = 75
System error: Value too large for defined data type
ESysEOWNERDEAD = 130
Owner died (mutexes)
ESysEPERM = 1
System error: Operation not permitted.
ESysEPFNOSUPPORT = 96
System error: Protocol family not supported
ESysEPIPE = 32
System error: Broken pipe
ESysEPROTO = 71
121
System error: Protocol error
ESysEPROTONOSUPPORT = 93
System error: Protocol not supported
ESysEPROTOTYPE = 91
System error: Protocol wrong type for socket
ESysERANGE = 34
System error: Math result not representable
ESysEREMCHG = 78
System error: Remote address changed
ESysEREMOTE = 66
System error: Object is remote
ESysEREMOTEIO = 121
System error: Remote I/O error
ESysERESTART = 85
System error: Interrupted system call should be restarted
ESysERFKILL = 132
Operation not possible due to RF-Kill (wireless)
ESysEROFS = 30
System error: Read-only file system
ESysESHUTDOWN = 108
System error: Cannot send after transport endpoint shutdown
ESysESOCKTNOSUPPORT = 94
System error: Socket type not supported
ESysESPIPE = 29
System error: Illegal seek
ESysESRCH = 3
122
System error: No such process
ESysESRMNT = 69
System error: Srmount error
ESysESTALE = 116
System error: Stale NFS file handle
ESysESTRPIPE = 86
System error: Streams pipe error
ESysETIME = 62
System error: Timer expired
ESysETIMEDOUT = 110
System error: Connection timed out
ESysETOOMANYREFS = 109
System error: Too many references: cannot splice
ESysETXTBSY = 26
System error: Text (code segment) file busy
ESysEUCLEAN = 117
System error: Structure needs cleaning
ESysEUNATCH = 49
System error: Protocol driver not attached
ESysEUSERS = 87
System error: Too many users
ESysEWOULDBLOCK = ESysEAGAIN
System error: Operation would block
ESysEXDEV = 18
System error: Cross-device link
ESysEXFULL = 54
123
System error: Exchange full
FD_MAXFDSET = 1024
Maximum elements in a TFDSet (149) array.
FPE_FLTDIV = 3
Value signalling floating point divide by zero in case of SIGFPE signal
FPE_FLTINV = 7
Value signalling floating point invalid operation in case of SIGFPE signal
FPE_FLTOVF = 4
Value signalling floating point overflow in case of SIGFPE signal
FPE_FLTRES = 6
Value signalling floating point inexact result in case of SIGFPE signal
FPE_FLTSUB = 8
Value signalling floating point subscript out of range in case of SIGFPE signal
FPE_FLTUND = 5
Value signalling floating point underflow in case of SIGFPE signal
FPE_INTDIV = 1
Value signalling integer divide in case of SIGFPE signal
FPE_INTOVF = 2
Value signalling integer overflow in case of SIGFPE signal
F_GetFd = 1
fpFCntl (164) command: Get close-on-exec flag
F_GetFl = 3
fpFCntl (164) command: Get filedescriptor flags
F_GetLk = 5
fpFCntl (164) command: Get lock
F_GetOwn = 9
124
fpFCntl (164) command: get owner of filedescriptor events
F_OK = 0
fpAccess (155) call test: file exists.
F_SetFd = 2
fpFCntl (164) command: Set close-on-exec flag
F_SetFl = 4
fpFCntl (164) command: Set filedescriptor flags
F_SetLk = 6
fpFCntl (164) command: Set lock
F_SetLkW = 7
fpFCntl (164) command: Test lock
F_SetOwn = 8
fpFCntl (164) command: Set owner of filedescriptor events
ln2bitmask = 1 shl ln2bitsinword - 1
Last bit in word.
ln2bitsinword = 5
Power of 2 number of bits in word.
MAP_ANON = MAP_ANONYMOUS
Anonymous memory mapping (data private to application)
MAP_ANONYMOUS = $20
FpMMap (178) map type: Don’t use a file
MAP_DENYWRITE = $800
FpMMap (178) option: Ignored.
MAP_EXECUTABLE = $1000
FpMMap (178) option: Ignored.
MAP_FAILED = (-1)
125
Memory mapping failed error code
MAP_FIXED = $10
FpMMap (178) map type: Interpret addr exactly
MAP_GROWSDOWN = $100
FpMMap (178) option: Memory grows downward (like a stack)
MAP_LOCKED = $2000
FpMMap (178) option: lock the pages in memory.
MAP_NORESERVE = $4000
FpMMap (178) option: Do not reserve swap pages for this memory.
MAP_PRIVATE = $2
FpMMap (178) map type: Changes are private
MAP_SHARED = $1
FpMMap (178) map type: Share changes
MAP_TYPE = $f
FpMMap (178) map type: Bitmask for type of mapping
NAME_MAX = UnixType . NAME_MAX
Maximum filename length.
O_APPEND = $400
fpOpen (181) file open mode: Append to file
O_CREAT = $40
fpOpen (181) file open mode: Create if file does not yet exist.
O_DIRECT = $4000
fpOpen (181) file open mode: Minimize caching effects
O_DIRECTORY = $10000
fpOpen (181) file open mode: File must be directory.
O_EXCL = $80
126
fpOpen (181) file open mode: Open exclusively
O_NDELAY = O_NONBLOCK
fpOpen (181) file open mode: Alias for O_NonBlock (127)
O_NOCTTY = $100
fpOpen (181) file open mode: No TTY control.
O_NOFOLLOW = $20000
fpOpen (181) file open mode: Fail if file is symbolic link.
O_NONBLOCK = $800
fpOpen (181) file open mode: Open in non-blocking mode
O_RDONLY = 0
fpOpen (181) file open mode: Read only
O_RDWR = 2
fpOpen (181) file open mode: Read/Write
O_SYNC = $1000
fpOpen (181) file open mode: Write to disc at once
O_TRUNC = $200
fpOpen (181) file open mode: Truncate file to length 0
O_WRONLY = 1
fpOpen (181) file open mode: Write only
PATH_MAX = UnixType . PATH_MAX
Maximum pathname length.
POLLERR = $0008
Error condition on output file descriptor
POLLHUP = $0010
Hang up
POLLIN = $0001
127
Data is available for reading
POLLNVAL = $0020
Invalid request, file descriptor not open.
POLLOUT = $0004
Writing data will not block the write call
POLLPRI = $0002
Urgent data is available for reading.
POLLRDBAND = $0080
Priority data ready for reading.
POLLRDNORM = $0040
Same as POLLIN.
POLLWRBAND = $0200
Priority data my be written.
POLLWRNORM = $0100
Equivalent to POLLOUT.
PRIO_PGRP = UnixType . PRIO_PGRP
Easy access alias for unixtype.PRIO_PGRP (1784)
PRIO_PROCESS = UnixType . PRIO_PROCESS
Easy access alias for unixtype.PRIO_PROCESS (1784)
PRIO_USER = UnixType . PRIO_USER
Easy access alias for unixtype.PRIO_USER (1784)
PROT_EXEC = $4
FpMMap (178) memory access: page can be executed
PROT_NONE = $0
FpMMap (178) memory access: page can not be accessed
PROT_READ = $1
128
FpMMap (178) memory access: page can be read
PROT_WRITE = $2
FpMMap (178) memory access: page can be written
RLIMIT_AS = 9
RLimit request address space limit
RLIMIT_CORE = 4
RLimit request max core file size
RLIMIT_CPU = 0
RLimit request CPU time in ms
RLIMIT_DATA = 2
RLimit request max data size
RLIMIT_FSIZE = 1
Rlimit request maximum filesize
RLIMIT_LOCKS = 10
RLimit request maximum file locks held
RLIMIT_MEMLOCK = 8
RLimit request max locked-in-memory address space
RLIMIT_NOFILE = 7
RLimit request max number of open files
RLIMIT_NPROC = 6
RLimit request max number of processes
RLIMIT_RSS = 5
RLimit request max resident set size
RLIMIT_STACK = 3
RLimit request max stack size
R_OK = 4
129
fpAccess (155) call test: read allowed
SA_INTERRUPT = $20000000
Sigaction options: ?
SA_NOCLDSTOP = 1
Sigaction options: Do not receive notification when child processes stop
SA_NOCLDWAIT = 2
Sigaction options: ?
SA_NODEFER = $40000000
Sigaction options: Do not mask signal in its own signal handler
SA_NOMASK = SA_NODEFER
Sigaction options: Do not prevent the signal from being received when it is handled.
SA_ONESHOT = SA_RESETHAND
Sigaction options: Restore the signal action to the default state.
SA_ONSTACK = $08000000
SA_ONSTACK is used in the fpsigaction (193) to indicate the signal handler must be called on an
alternate signal stack provided by sigaltstack(2) If an alternate stack is not available, the default
stack will be used.
SA_RESETHAND = $80000000
Sigaction options: Restore signal action to default state when signal handler exits.
SA_RESTART = $10000000
Sigaction options: Provide behaviour compatible with BSD signal semantics
SA_RESTORER = $04000000
Signal restorer handler
SA_SIGINFO = 4
Sigaction options: The signal handler takes 3 arguments, not one.
SEEK_CUR = 1
fpLSeek (175) option: Set position relative to current position.
130
SEEK_END = 2
fpLSeek (175) option: Set position relative to end of file.
SEEK_SET = 0
fpLSeek (175) option: Set absolute position.
SIGABRT = 6
Signal: ABRT (Abort)
SIGALRM = 14
Signal: ALRM (Alarm clock)
SIGBUS = 7
Signal: BUS (bus error)
SIGCHLD = 17
Signal: CHLD (child status changed)
SIGCONT = 18
Signal: CONT (Continue)
SIGFPE = 8
Signal: FPE (Floating point error)
SIGHUP = 1
Signal: HUP (Hangup)
SIGILL = 4
Signal: ILL (Illegal instruction)
SIGINT = 2
Signal: INT (Interrupt)
SIGIO = 29
Signal: IO (I/O operation possible)
SIGIOT = 6
Signal: IOT (IOT trap)
131
SIGKILL = 9
Signal: KILL (unblockable)
SIGPIPE = 13
Signal: PIPE (Broken pipe
SIGPOLL = SIGIO
Signal: POLL (Pollable event)
SIGPROF = 27
Signal: PROF (Profiling alarm)
SIGPWR = 30
Signal: PWR (power failure restart)
SIGQUIT = 3
Signal: QUIT
SIGSEGV = 11
Signal: SEGV (Segmentation violation)
SIGSTKFLT = 16
Signal: STKFLT (Stack Fault)
SIGSTOP = 19
Signal: STOP (Stop, unblockable)
SIGTERM = 15
Signal: TERM (Terminate)
SIGTRAP = 5
Signal: TRAP (Trace trap)
SIGTSTP = 20
Signal: TSTP (keyboard stop)
SIGTTIN = 21
Signal: TTIN (Terminal input, background)
132
SIGTTOU = 22
Signal: TTOU (Terminal output, background)
SIGUNUSED = 31
Signal: Unused
SIGURG = 23
Signal: URG (Socket urgent condition)
SIGUSR1 = 10
Signal: USR1 (User-defined signal 1)
SIGUSR2 = 12
Signal: USR2 (User-defined signal 2)
SIGVTALRM = 26
Signal: VTALRM (Virtual alarm clock)
SIGWINCH = 28
Signal: WINCH (Window/Terminal size change)
SIGXCPU = 24
Signal: XCPU (CPU limit exceeded)
SIGXFSZ = 25
Signal: XFSZ (File size limit exceeded)
SIG_BLOCK = 0
Sigprocmask flags: Add signals to the set of blocked signals.
SIG_DFL = 0
Signal handler: Default signal handler
SIG_ERR = -1
Signal handler: error
SIG_IGN = 1
Signal handler: Ignore signal
133
SIG_MAXSIG = UnixType . SIG_MAXSIG
Maximum system signal number.
SIG_SETMASK = 2
Sigprocmask flags: Set of blocked signals is given.
SIG_UNBLOCK = 1
Sigprocmask flags: Remove signals from the set set of blocked signals.
SI_PAD_SIZE = 128 div (longint) - 3
Signal information pad size.
SYS_NMLN = UnixType . SYS_NMLN
Max system name length.
S_IFBLK = 24576
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Block device
S_IFCHR = 8192
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Character device
S_IFDIR = 16384
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Directory
S_IFIFO = 4096
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: FIFO
S_IFLNK = 40960
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Link
S_IFMT = 61440
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: File type bit mask
S_IFREG = 32768
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Regular file
S_IFSOCK = 49152
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Socket
134
S_IRGRP = %0000100000
Mode flag: Read by group.
S_IROTH = %0000000100
Mode flag: Read by others.
S_IRUSR = %0100000000
Mode flag: Read by owner.
S_IRWXG = S_IRGRP or S_IWGRP or S_IXGRP
Mode flag: Read, write, execute by groups.
S_IRWXO = S_IROTH or S_IWOTH or S_IXOTH
Mode flag: Read, write, execute by others.
S_IRWXU = S_IRUSR or S_IWUSR or S_IXUSR
Mode flag: Read, write, execute by user.
S_IWGRP = %0000010000
Mode flag: Write by group.
S_IWOTH = %0000000010
Mode flag: Write by others.
S_IWUSR = %0010000000
Mode flag: Write by owner.
S_IXGRP = %0000001000
Mode flag: Execute by group.
S_IXOTH = %0000000001
Mode flag: Execute by others.
S_IXUSR = %0001000000
Mode flag: Execute by owner.
UTSNAME_DOMAIN_LENGTH = UTSNAME_LENGTH
Max length of utsname (155) domain name.
135
UTSNAME_LENGTH = SYS_NMLN
Max length of utsname (155) system name, release, version, machine.
UTSNAME_NODENAME_LENGTH = UTSNAME_LENGTH
Max length of utsname (155) node name.
WNOHANG = 1
#rtl.baseunix.fpWaitpid (206) option: Do not wait for processes to terminate.
wordsinfdset = FD_MAXFDSET div BITSINWORD
Number of words in a TFDSet (149) array
wordsinsigset = SIG_MAXSIG div BITSINWORD
Number of words in a signal set.
WUNTRACED = 2
#rtl.baseunix.fpWaitpid (206) option: Also report children wich were stopped but not yet reported
W_OK = 2
fpAccess (155) call test: write allowed
X_OK = 1
fpAccess (155) call test: execute allowed
_STAT_VER = _STAT_VER_LINUX
Stat version number
_STAT_VER_KERNEL = 0
Current version of stat record
_STAT_VER_LINUX = 1
Version of linux stat record
1.3.2 Types
Blkcnt64_t = cuint64
64-bit block count
136
Blkcnt_t = cuint
Block count type.
Blksize_t = cuint
Block size type.
cbool = UnixType.cbool
Boolean type
cchar = UnixType.cchar
Alias for #rtl.UnixType.cchar (1786)
cdouble = UnixType.cdouble
Double precision real format.
cfloat = UnixType.cfloat
Floating-point real format
cint = UnixType.cint
C type: integer (natural size)
cint16 = UnixType.cint16
C type: 16 bits sized, signed integer.
clock_t = UnixType.clock_t
Clock ticks type
clong = UnixType.clong
C type: long signed integer (double sized)
137
clonglong = UnixType.clonglong
C type: 64-bit (double long) signed integer.
coff_t = UnixType.TOff
Character offset type
cschar = UnixType.cschar
Signed character type
cshort = UnixType.cshort
C type: short signed integer (half sized)
csigned = UnixType.csigned
csigned is an alias for cint (137).
csint = UnixType.csint
Signed integer
csize_t = UnixType.size_t
Character size type
cslong = UnixType.cslong
The size is CPU dependent.
cslonglong = UnixType.cslonglong
cslonglong is an alias for clonglong (138).
csshort = UnixType.csshort
Short signed integer type
cuchar = UnixType.cuchar
Alias for #rtl.UnixType.cuchar (1787)
cuint = UnixType.cuint
C type: unsigned integer (natural size)
cuint16 = UnixType.cuint16
C type: 16 bits sized, unsigned integer.
138
culong = UnixType.culong
C type: long unsigned integer (double sized)
culonglong = UnixType.culonglong
C type: 64-bit (double long) unsigned integer.
cunsigned = UnixType.cunsigned
Alias for #rtl.unixtype.cunsigned (1788)
cushort = UnixType.cushort
C type: short unsigned integer (half sized)
dev_t = UnixType.dev_t
Device descriptor type.
Dir = record
dd_fd : Integer;
dd_loc : LongInt;
dd_size : Integer;
dd_buf : pDirent;
dd_nextoff : Cardinal;
dd_max : Integer;
dd_lock : pointer;
end
Record used in fpOpenDir (183) and fpReadDir (187) calls
Dirent = record
d_fileno : ino64_t;
d_off : off_t;
d_reclen : cushort;
d_type : cuchar;
d_name : Array[0..4095-sizeof(ino64_t)-sizeof(off_t)-sizeof(cushort)-sizeof(cuchar)
end
139
Record used in the fpReadDir (187) function to return files in a directory.
FLock = record
l_type : cshort;
l_whence : cshort;
l_start : kernel_off_t;
l_len : kernel_off_t;
l_pid : pid_t;
end
Lock description type for fpFCntl (164) lock call.
gid_t = UnixType.gid_t
Group ID type.
ino_t = UnixType.ino_t
Inode type.
iovec = record
iov_base : pointer;
iov_len : size_t;
end
iovec is used in fpreadv (188) for IO to multiple buffers to describe a buffer location.
kernel_gid_t = cuint
kernel_gid_t may differ from the libc type used to describe group IDs.
kernel_loff_t = clonglong
Long kernel offset type
kernel_mode_t = cuint
kernel_mode_t may differ from the libc type used to describe file modes.
kernel_off_t = clong
Kernel offset type
kernel_uid_t = cuint
kernel_uid_t may differ from the libc type used to describe user IDs.
mode_t = UnixType.mode_t
140
Inode mode type.
nlink_t = UnixType.nlink_t
Number of links type.
off_t = UnixType.off_t
Offset type.
PBlkCnt = ^Blkcnt_t
pointer to TBlkCnt (149) type.
PBlkSize = ^Blksize_t
Pointer to TBlkSize (149) type.
pcbool = UnixType.pcbool
Pointer to boolean type cbool (137)
pcchar = UnixType.pcchar
Alias for #rtl.UnixType.pcchar (1789)
pcdouble = UnixType.pcdouble
Pointer to cdouble (137) type.
pcfloat = UnixType.pcfloat
Pointer to cfloat (137) type.
pcint = UnixType.pcint
Pointer to cInt (137) type.
pcint16 = UnixType.pcint16
Pointer to 16-bit signed integer type
Pointer to signed 32-bit integer type
141
Pointer to 8-bits signed integer type
pClock = UnixType.pClock
Pointer to TClock (149) type.
pclong = UnixType.pclong
Pointer to cLong (137) type.
pclonglong = UnixType.pclonglong
Pointer to longlong type.
pcschar = UnixType.pcschar
Pointer to character type cschar (138).
pcshort = UnixType.pcshort
Pointer to cShort (138) type.
pcsigned = UnixType.pcsigned
Pointer to signed integer type csigned (138).
pcsint = UnixType.pcsint
Pointer to signed integer type csint (138)
pcsize_t = UnixType.psize_t
Pointer to csize_t
pcslong = UnixType.pcslong
Pointer ot the signed long cslong (138)
pcslonglong = UnixType.pcslonglong
Pointer to Signed longlong type cslonglong (138)
pcsshort = UnixType.pcsshort
Pointer to short signed integer type csshort (138)
pcuchar = UnixType.pcuchar
Alias for #rtl.UnixType.pcuchar (1791)
pcuint = UnixType.pcuint
142
Pointer to cUInt (138) type.
pcuint16 = UnixType.pcuint16
Pointer to 16-bit unsigned integer type
Pointer to unsigned 32-bit integer type
Pointer to 8-bits unsigned integer type
pculong = UnixType.pculong
Pointer to cuLong (139) type.
pculonglong = UnixType.pculonglong
Unsigned longlong type
pcunsigned = UnixType.pcunsigned
Alias for #rtl.unixtype.pcunsigned (1791)
pcushort = UnixType.pcushort
Pointer to cuShort (139) type.
pDev = UnixType.pDev
Pointer to TDev (149) type.
pDir = ^Dir
Pointer to TDir (149) record
pDirent = ^Dirent
Pointer to TDirent (149) record.
pFDSet = ^TFDSet
Pointer to TFDSet (149) type.
pFilDes = ^TFilDes
143
Pointer to TFilDes (149) type.
pfpstate = ^tfpstate
Pointer to tfpstate (149) record.
pGid = UnixType.pGid
Pointer to TGid (150) type.
pGrpArr = ^TGrpArr
Pointer to TGrpArr (150) array.
pid_t = UnixType.pid_t
Process ID type.
pIno = UnixType.pIno
Pointer to TIno (150) type.
piovec = ^tiovec
pointer to a iovec (140) record
pMode = UnixType.pMode
Pointer to TMode (150) type.
pnLink = UnixType.pnLink
Pointer to TnLink (151) type.
pOff = UnixType.pOff
Pointer to TOff (151) type.
pollfd = record
fd : cint;
events : cshort;
revents : cshort;
end
pollfd is used in the fpPoll (185) call to describe the various actions.
pPid = UnixType.pPid
Pointer to TPid (151) type.
144
ppollfd = ^pollfd
Pointer to tpollfd.
PRLimit = ^TRLimit
Pointer to TRLimit (151) record
psigactionrec = ^sigactionrec
Pointer to SigActionRec (147) record type.
PSigContext = ^TSigContext
Pointer to #rtl.baseunix.TSigContext (152) record type.
psiginfo = ^tsiginfo
Pointer to #rtl.baseunix.TSigInfo (153) record type.
psigset = ^tsigset
Pointer to SigSet (147) type.
pSize = UnixType.pSize
Pointer to TSize (153) type.
pSize_t = UnixType.pSize_t
Pointer to Size_t
pSocklen = UnixType.pSocklen
Pointer to TSockLen (153) type.
psSize = UnixType.psSize
Pointer to TsSize (153) type
PStat = ^Stat
Pointer to TStat (153) type.
pstatfs = UnixType.PStatFs
This is an alias for the type defined in the #rtl.unixtype (1784) unit.
pthread_cond_t = UnixType.pthread_cond_t
Thread conditional variable type.
145
pthread_mutex_t = UnixType.pthread_mutex_t
Thread mutex type.
pthread_t = UnixType.pthread_t
Posix thread type.
pTime = UnixType.pTime
Pointer to TTime (154) type.
ptimespec = UnixType.ptimespec
Pointer to timespec (150) type.
ptimeval = UnixType.ptimeval
Pointer to timeval (150) type.
ptimezone = ^timezone
Pointer to TimeZone (150) record.
ptime_t = UnixType.ptime_t
Pointer to time_t (150) type.
PTms = ^tms
Pointer to TTms (154) type.
Pucontext = ^Tucontext
Pointer to TUContext (154) type.
pUid = UnixType.pUid
Pointer to TUid (154) type.
pUtimBuf = ÛTimBuf
Pointer to TUTimBuf (154) type.
PUtsName = ^TUtsName
Pointer to TUtsName (154) type.
rlim_t = culong
rlim_t is used as the type for the various fields in the TRLimit (151) record.
146
sigactionhandler = sigactionhandler_t
When installing a signal handler, the actual signal handler must be of type SigActionHandler.
sigactionhandler_t = procedure(signal: LongInt;info: psiginfo;

context: PSigContext)
Standard signal action handler prototype
sigactionrec = record
sa_handler : sigactionhandler_t;
sa_flags : culong;
sa_restorer : sigrestorerhandler_t;
sa_mask : sigset_t;
end
Record used in fpSigAction (193) call.
signalhandler = signalhandler_t
Simple signal handler prototype
signalhandler_t = procedure(signal: LongInt)
Standard signal handler prototype
sigrestorerhandler = sigrestorerhandler_t
Alias for sigrestorerhandler_t (147) type.
sigrestorerhandler_t = procedure
Standard signal action restorer prototype
sigset = sigset_t
Signal set type
sigset_t = Array[0..wordsinsigset-1] of culong
Signal set type
size_t = UnixType.size_t
Size specification type.
socklen_t = UnixType.socklen_t
Socket address length type.
147
ssize_t = UnixType.ssize_t
Small size type.
Stat = packed record

case Byte of
0: (
dev : QWorddeprecated;
__pad0 : Array[0..3] of Bytedeprecated;
__ino : Cardinaldeprecated;
mode : Cardinaldeprecated;
nlink : Cardinaldeprecated;
uid : Cardinaldeprecated;
gid : Cardinaldeprecated;
rdev : QWorddeprecated;
__pad3 : Array[0..3] of Bytedeprecated;
size : QWorddeprecated;
blksize : Cardinaldeprecated;
blocks : QWorddeprecated;
atime : Cardinaldeprecated;
atime_nsec : Cardinaldeprecated;
mtime : Cardinaldeprecated;
mtime_nsec : Cardinaldeprecated;
ctime : Cardinaldeprecated;
ctime_nsec : Cardinaldeprecated;
ino : QWorddeprecated;
);
1: (
st_dev : QWord;
__pad0_ : Array[0..3] of Byte;
__st_ino_ : Cardinal;
st_mode : Cardinal;
st_nlink : Cardinal;
st_uid : Cardinal;
st_gid : Cardinal;
st_rdev : QWord;
__pad3_ : Array[0..3] of Byte;
st_size : QWord;
st_blksize : Cardinal;
st_blocks : QWord;
st_atime : Cardinal;
st_atime_nsec : Cardinal;
st_mtime : Cardinal;
st_mtime_nsec : Cardinal;
st_ctime : Cardinal;
st_ctime_nsec : Cardinal;
st_ino : QWord;
);
end
Record describing an inode (file) in the FPFstat (166) call.
TBlkCnt = Blkcnt_t
148
Alias for Blkcnt_t (137) type.
TBlkSize = Blksize_t
Alias for blksize_t (137) type.
TClock = UnixType.TClock
Alias for clock_t (137) type.
TDev = UnixType.TDev
Alias for dev_t (139) type.
TDir = Dir
Alias for Dir (139) type.
TDirent = Dirent
Alias for Dirent (140) type.
TFDSet = Array[0..(FD_MAXFDSETdivBITSINWORD)-1] of culong
File descriptor set for fpSelect (190) call.
TFilDes = Array[0..1] of cint
Array of file descriptors as used in fpPipe (184) call.
tfpreg = record
significand : Array[0..3] of Word;
exponent : Word;
end
Record describing floating point register in signal handler.
tfpstate = record
cw : Cardinal;
sw : Cardinal;
tag : Cardinal;
ipoff : Cardinal;
cssel : Cardinal;
dataoff : Cardinal;
datasel : Cardinal;
st : Array[0..7] of tfpreg;
status : Cardinal;
end
Record describing floating point unit in signal handler.
149
TGid = UnixType.TGid
Alias for gid_t (140) type.
TGrpArr = Array[0..0] of TGid
Array of gid_t (140) IDs
timespec = UnixType.timespec
Short time specification type.
timeval = UnixType.timeval
Time specification type.
timezone = record
tz_minuteswest : cint;
tz_dsttime : cint;
end
Record describing a timezone
time_t = UnixType.time_t
Time span type
TIno = UnixType.TIno
Alias for ino_t (140) type.
TIOCtlRequest = UnixType.TIOCtlRequest
Easy access alias for unixtype.TIOCtlRequest (1796)
tiovec = iovec
Alias for the iovec (140) record type.
TMode = UnixType.TMode
Alias for mode_t (141) type.
tms = record
tms_utime : clock_t;
tms_stime : clock_t;
tms_cutime : clock_t;
tms_cstime : clock_t;
end
150
Record containing timings for fpTimes (203) call.
TnLink = UnixType.TnLink
Alias for nlink_t (141) type.
TOff = UnixType.TOff
Alias for off_t (141) type.
TPid = UnixType.TPid
Alias for pid_t (144) type.
tpollfd = pollfd
Alias for pollfd type
TRLimit = record
rlim_cur : rlim_t;
rlim_max : rlim_t;
end
TRLimit is the structure used by the kernel to return resource limit information in.
tsigactionhandler = sigactionhandler_t
Alias for sigactionhandler_t (147) type.
tsigaltstack = record
ss_sp : pointer;
ss_flags : LongInt;
ss_size : LongInt;
end
Provide the location of an alternate signal handler stack.
TSigContext = record
gs : Word;
__gsh : Word;
fs : Word;
__fsh : Word;
es : Word;
__esh : Word;
ds : Word;
__dsh : Word;
edi : Cardinal;
esi : Cardinal;
ebp : Cardinal;
esp : Cardinal;
151
ebx : Cardinal;
edx : Cardinal;
ecx : Cardinal;
eax : Cardinal;
trapno : Cardinal;
err : Cardinal;
eip : Cardinal;
cs : Word;
__csh : Word;
eflags : Cardinal;
esp_at_signal : Cardinal;
ss : Word;
__ssh : Word;
fpstate : pfpstate;
oldmask : Cardinal;
cr2 : Cardinal;
end
This type is CPU dependent. Cross-platform code should not use the contents of this record.
tsiginfo = record
si_signo : LongInt;
si_errno : LongInt;
si_code : LongInt;
_sifields : record
case LongInt of
0: (
_pad : Array[0..(SI_PAD_SIZE)-1] of LongInt;
);
1: (
_kill : record
_pid : pid_t;
_uid : uid_t;
end;
);
2: (
_timer : record
_timer1 : DWord;
_timer2 : DWord;
end;
);
3: (
_rt : record
_pid : pid_t;
_uid : uid_t;
_sigval : pointer;
end;
);
4: (
_sigchld : record
_pid : pid_t;
_uid : uid_t;
_status : LongInt;
152
_utime : clock_t;
_stime : clock_t;
end;
);
5: (
_sigfault : record
_addr : pointer;
end;
);
6: (
_sigpoll : record
_band : LongInt;
_fd : LongInt;
end;
);
end;
end
This type describes the signal that occurred.
tsignalhandler = signalhandler_t
Alias for signalhandler_t (147) type.
tsigrestorerhandler = sigrestorerhandler_t
Alias for sigrestorerhandler_t (147) type.
tsigset = sigset_t
Alias for SigSet (147) type.
TSize = UnixType.TSize
Alias for size_t (147) type
TSocklen = UnixType.TSocklen
Alias for socklen_t (147) type.
TsSize = UnixType.TsSize
Alias for ssize_t (148) type
TStat = Stat
Alias for Stat (148) type.
tstatfs = UnixType.TStatFs
Record describing a file system in the unix.fpstatfs (113) call.
153
TTime = UnixType.TTime
Alias for TTime (154) type.
Ttimespec = UnixType.Ttimespec
Alias for TimeSpec (150) type.
TTimeVal = UnixType.TTimeVal
Alias for timeval (150) type.
TTimeZone = timezone
Alias for TimeZone (150) record.
TTms = tms
Alias for Tms (151) record type.
TUcontext = record
uc_flags : Cardinal;
uc_link : Pucontext;
uc_stack : tsigaltstack;
uc_mcontext : TSigContext;
uc_sigmask : tsigset;
end
This structure is used to describe the user context in a program or thread. It is not used in this unit,
but is provided for completeness.
TUid = UnixType.TUid
Alias for uid_t (154) type.
TUtimBuf = UTimBuf
Alias for UtimBuf (155) type.
TUtsName = UtsName
Alias for UtsName (155) type.
uid_t = UnixType.uid_t
User ID type
UTimBuf = record
actime : time_t;
modtime : time_t;
end
154
Record used in fpUtime (205) to set file access and modification times.
UtsName = record
Sysname : Array[0..UTSNAME_LENGTH-1] of Char;
Nodename : Array[0..UTSNAME_NODENAME_LENGTH-1] of Char;
Release : Array[0..UTSNAME_LENGTH-1] of Char;
Version : Array[0..UTSNAME_LENGTH-1] of Char;
Machine : Array[0..UTSNAME_LENGTH-1] of Char;
Domain : Array[0..UTSNAME_DOMAIN_LENGTH-1] of Charplatform;
end
The elements of this record are null-terminated C style strings, you cannot access them directly. Note
that the Domain field is a GNU extension, and may not be available on all platforms.
1.4 Procedures and functions

1.4.1 CreateShellArgV
Synopsis: Create a null-terminated array of strings from a command-line string
Declaration: function CreateShellArgV(const prog: string) : PPChar
function CreateShellArgV(const prog: Ansistring) : PPChar
Visibility: default
Description: CreateShellArgV creates a command-line string for executing a shell command using ’sh -c’.
The result is a null-terminated array of null-terminated strings suitable for use in fpExecv (162) and
friends.
Errors: If no more memory is available, a heap error may occur.
See also: fpExecv (162), FreeShellArgV (207)
1.4.2 FpAccess
Synopsis: Check file access
Declaration: function FpAccess(pathname: PChar;aMode: cint) : cint
function FpAccess(const pathname: RawByteString;aMode: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpAccess tests user’s access rights on the specified file. Mode is a mask existing of one or more
of the following:
R_OKUser has read rights.

W_OKUser has write rights.
X_OKUser has execute rights.
F_OKFile exists.
The test is done with the real user ID, instead of the effective user ID. If the user has the requested
rights, zero is returned. If access is denied, or an error occurred, a nonzero value is returned.
Errors: Extended error information can be retrieved using fpGetErrno (169).
155
sys_eaccessThe requested access is denied, either to the file or one of the directories in its path.
sys_einvalMode was incorrect.
sys_enoentA directory component in Path doesn’t exist or is a dangling symbolic link.
sys_enotdirA directory component in Path is not a directory.
sys_enomemInsufficient kernel memory.
sys_eloopPath has a circular symbolic link.
See also: FpChown (158), FpChmod (157)
Listing: ./bunixex/ex26.pp
Program Example26 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Access f u n c t i o n . }
Uses BaseUnix ;
begin
i f fpAccess ( ’ / e t c / passwd ’ ,W_OK) = 0 then
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ B e t t e r check your system . ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ I can w r i t e t o t h e / e t c / passwd f i l e ! ’ ) ;
end ;
end .
1.4.3 FpAlarm
Synopsis: Schedule an alarm signal to be delivered
Declaration: function FpAlarm(seconds: cuint) : cuint
Visibility: default
Description: FpAlarm schedules an alarm signal to be delivered to your process in Seconds seconds. When
Seconds seconds have elapsed, the system will send a SIGALRM signal to the current process. If
Seconds is zero, then no new alarm will be set. Whatever the value of Seconds, any previous
alarm is cancelled.
The function returns the number of seconds till the previously scheduled alarm was due to be deliv-
ered, or zero if there was none. A negative value indicates an error.
See also: fpSigAction (193), fpPause (184)
Program Example59 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Alarm f u n c t i o n . }
Uses BaseUnix ;
Procedure AlarmHandler ( Sig : c i n t ) ; cdecl ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Got t o alarm h a n d l e r ’ ) ;
end ;
156
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ S e t t i n g alarm h a n d l e r ’ ) ;
f p S i g n a l (SIGALRM, S i g n a l H a n d l e r ( @AlarmHandler ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Scheduling Alarm i n 1 0 seconds ’ ) ;
fpAlarm ( 1 0 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Pausing ’ ) ;
fpPause ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Pause r e t u r n e d ’ ) ;
end .
1.4.4 FpChdir
Synopsis: Change current working directory.
Declaration: function FpChdir(path: PChar) : cint
function FpChdir(const path: RawByteString) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: fpChDir sets the current working directory to Path.
It returns zero if the call was succesful, -1 on error.
Note: There exist a portable alterative to fpChDir: system.chdir. Please use fpChDir only if you are
writing Unix specific code. System.chdir will work on all operating systems.
See also: fpGetCwd (168)
1.4.5 FpChmod
Synopsis: Change file permission bits
Declaration: function FpChmod(path: PChar;Mode: TMode) : cint
function FpChmod(const path: RawByteString;Mode: TMode) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: fpChmod sets the Mode bits of the file in Path to Mode. Mode can be specified by ’or’-ing the
following values:
S_ISUIDSet user ID on execution.

S_ISGIDSet Group ID on execution.
S_ISVTXSet sticky bit.
S_IRUSRRead by owner.
S_IWUSRWrite by owner.
S_IXUSRExecute by owner.
S_IRGRPRead by group.
S_IWGRPWrite by group.
S_IXGRPExecute by group.
S_IROTHRead by others.
S_IWOTHWrite by others.
157
S_IXOTHExecute by others.
S_IRWXORead, write, execute by others.
S_IRWXGRead, write, execute by groups.
S_IRWXURead, write, execute by user.
If the function is successful, zero is returned. A nonzero return value indicates an error.
Errors: The following error codes are returned:
sys_epermThe effective UID doesn’t match the ownership of the file, and is not zero. Owner or
group were not specified correctly.
sys_eaccessOne of the directories in Path has no search (=execute) permission.
sys_enoentA directory entry in Path does not exist or is a symbolic link pointing to a non-existent
directory.
sys_erofsThe file is on a read-only filesystem.
sys_eloopPath has a reference to a circular symbolic link, i.e. a symbolic link, whose expansion
points to itself.
See also: fpChown (158), fpAccess (155)
Program Example23 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Chmod f u n c t i o n . }
Uses BaseUnix , Unix ;
Var F : Text ;
begin
{ Create a f i l e }
Assign ( f , ’ t e s t e x 2 1 ’ ) ;
Rewrite ( F ) ;
W r i t e l n ( f , ’ # ! / b i n / sh ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( f , ’ echo Some t e x t f o r t h i s f i l e ’ ) ;
Close ( F ) ;
fpChmod ( ’ t e s t e x 2 1 ’ , & 7 7 7 ) ;
{ F i l e i s now e x e c u t a b l e }
fpexecl ( ’ . / testex21 ’ , [ ] ) ;
end .
1.4.6 FpChown
Synopsis: Change owner of file
Declaration: function FpChown(path: PChar;owner: TUid;group: TGid) : cint
function FpChown(const path: RawByteString;owner: TUid;group: TGid)
: cint
Visibility: default
158
Description: fpChown sets the User ID and Group ID of the file in Path to Owner,Group.
The function returns zero if the call was succesfull, a nonzero return value indicates an error.
sys_epermThe effective UID doesn’t match the ownership of the file, and is not zero. Owner or
group were not specified correctly.
directory.
sys_erofsThe file is on a read-only filesystem.
sys_eloopPath has a reference to a circular symbolic link, i.e. a symbolic link, whose expansion
points to itself.
See also: fpChmod (157), fpAccess (155)
Program Example24 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Chown f u n c t i o n . }
Uses BaseUnix ;
Var UID : TUid ;

GID : TGid ;
F : Text ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ T h i s w i l l o n l y work i f you are r o o t . ’ ) ;

Write ( ’ E n t e r a UID : ’ ) ; readln ( UID ) ;
Write ( ’ E n t e r a GID : ’ ) ; readln ( GID ) ;
Assign ( f , ’ t e s t . t x t ’ ) ;
Rewrite ( f ) ;
W r i t e l n ( f , ’ The owner o f t h i s f i l e should become : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( f , ’ UID : ’ , UID ) ;
W r i t e l n ( f , ’ GID : ’ , GID ) ;
Close ( F ) ;
i f fpChown ( ’ t e s t . t x t ’ , UID , GID) < >0 then
i f f p g e t e r r n o =ESysEPERM then
W r i t e l n ( ’ You are n o t r o o t ! ’ )
else
W r i t e l n ( ’Chmod f a i l e d w i t h e x i t code : ’ , f p g e t e r r n o )
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ Changed owner s u c c e s s f u l l y ! ’ ) ;
end .
1.4.7 FpClose
Synopsis: Close file descriptor
Declaration: function FpClose(fd: cint) : cint
159
Visibility: default
Description: FpClose closes a file with file descriptor Fd. The function returns zero if the file was closed
successfully, a nonzero return value indicates an error.
For an example, see FpOpen (181).

See also: FpOpen (181), FpRead (186), FpWrite (207), FpFTruncate (168), FpLSeek (175)
1.4.8 FpClosedir
Synopsis: Close directory file descriptor
Declaration: function FpClosedir(var dirp: Dir) : cint

Visibility: default
Description: FpCloseDir closes the directory pointed to by dirp. It returns zero if the directory was closed
succesfully, -1 otherwise.
For an example, see fpOpenDir (183).

See also: FpOpenDir (183), FpReadDir (187)
1.4.9 FpDup
Synopsis: Duplicate a file handle
Declaration: function FpDup(fildes: cint) : cint

function FpDup(var oldfile: text;var newfile: text) : cint
function FpDup(var oldfile: File;var newfile: File) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpDup returns a file descriptor that is a duplicate of the file descriptor fildes.
The second and third forms make NewFile an exact copy of OldFile, after having flushed the
buffer of OldFile in case it is a Text file or untyped file. Due to the buffering mechanism of Pascal,
these calls do not have the same functionality as the dup call in C. The internal Pascal buffers are not
the same after this call, but when the buffers are flushed (e.g. after output), the output is sent to the
same file. Doing an lseek will, however, work as in C, i.e. doing a lseek will change the fileposition
in both files.
The function returns a negative value in case of an error, a positive value is a file handle, and indicates
succes.
Errors: A negative value can be one of the following error codes:
sys_ebadfOldFile hasn’t been assigned.

sys_emfileMaximum number of open files for the process is reached.
See also: fpDup2 (161)
160
program Example31 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Dup f u n c t i o n . }
uses baseunix ;
var f : t e x t ;
begin
i f fpdup ( o u t p u t , f )= −1 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Dup F a i l e d ! ’ ) ;
writeln ( ’ This i s w r i t t e n to stdout . ’ ) ;
w r i t e l n ( f , ’ T h i s i s w r i t t e n t o t h e dup f i l e , and f l u s h e d ’ ) ; f l u s h ( f ) ;
writeln
end .
1.4.10 FpDup2
Synopsis: Duplicate one filehandle to another
Declaration: function FpDup2(fildes: cint;fildes2: cint) : cint
function FpDup2(var oldfile: text;var newfile: text) : cint
function FpDup2(var oldfile: File;var newfile: File) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: Makes fildes2 or NewFile an exact copy of fildes or OldFile, after having flushed the
buffer of OldFile in the case of text or untyped files.
After a call to fdup2, the 2 file descriptors point to the same physical device (a file, socket, or a
terminal).
NewFile can be an assigned file. If newfile or fildes was open, it is closed first. Due to the
buffering mechanism of Pascal, this has not the same functionality as the dup2 call in C. The internal
Pascal buffers are not the same after this call, but when the buffers are flushed (e.g. after output), the
output is sent to the same file. Doing an lseek will, however, work as in C, i.e. doing a lseek will
change the fileposition in both files.
The function returns the new file descriptor number, on error -1 is returned, and the error can be
retrieved with fpgeterrno (169)
Errors: In case of error, the following error codes can be reported:
sys_ebadfOldFile (or fildes) hasn’t been assigned.

sys_emfileMaximum number of open files for the process is reached.
See also: fpDup (160)
program Example32 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e FpDup2 f u n c t i o n . }
uses BaseUnix ;
var f : t e x t ;
161
i : longint ;
begin
Assign ( f , ’ t e x t . t x t ’ ) ;
Rewrite ( F ) ;
For i : = 1 to 1 0 do w r i t e l n ( F , ’ L i n e : ’ , i ) ;
i f fpdup2 ( o u t p u t , f )= −1 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Dup2 F a i l e d ! ’ ) ;
writeln ( ’ This i s w r i t t e n to stdout . ’ ) ;
w r i t e l n ( f , ’ T h i s i s w r i t t e n t o t h e dup f i l e , and f l u s h e d ’ ) ;
flush ( f ) ;
writeln ;
{ Remove f i l e . Comment t h i s i f you want t o check f l u s h i n g . }
fpUnlink ( ’ text . t x t ’ ) ;
end .
1.4.11 FpExecv
Synopsis: Execute process
Declaration: function FpExecv(path: PChar;argv: PPChar) : cint
function FpExecv(const path: RawByteString;argv: PPChar) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: Replaces the currently running program with the program, specified in path. It gives the program
the options in argvp. This is a pointer to an array of pointers to null-terminated strings. The last
pointer in this array should be nil. The current environment is passed to the program. On success,
execv does not return.
Errors: On error, -1 is returned. Extended error information can be retrieved with fpGetErrNo (169)
sys_eaccesFile is not a regular file, or has no execute permission. A compononent of the path has no
search permission.
sys_epermThe file system is mounted \textit{noexec}.
sys_e2bigArgument list too big.
sys_enoexecThe magic number in the file is incorrect.
sys_enoentThe file does not exist.
sys_enomemNot enough memory for kernel.
sys_enotdirA component of the path is not a directory.
sys_eloopThe path contains a circular reference (via symlinks).
See also: fpExecve (163), fpFork (166)
Program Example8 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Execv f u n c t i o n . }
Uses Unix , s t r i n g s ;
Const Arg0 : PChar = ’ / b i n / l s ’ ;

Arg1 : Pchar = ’− l ’ ;
162
Var PP : PPchar ;
begin
GetMem ( PP, 3 ∗ SizeOf ( Pchar ) ) ;
PP [ 0 ] : = Arg0 ;
PP [ 1 ] : = Arg1 ;
PP [ 3 ] : = N i l ;
{ Execute ’ / b i n / l s − l ’ , w i t h c u r r e n t environment }
fpExecv ( ’ / b i n / l s ’ , pp ) ;
end .
1.4.12 FpExecve
Synopsis: Execute process using environment
Declaration: function FpExecve(path: PChar;argv: PPChar;envp: PPChar) : cint
function FpExecve(const path: RawByteString;argv: PPChar;envp: PPChar)
: cint
Visibility: default
Description: Replaces the currently running program with the program, specified in path. It gives the program
the options in argv, and the environment in envp. They are pointers to an array of pointers to
null-terminated strings. The last pointer in this array should be nil. On success, execve does not
return.
Errors: Extended error information can be retrieved with fpGetErrno (169), and includes the following:
search permission.
sys_epermThe file system is mounted \textit{noexec}.
See also: fpExecv (162), fpFork (166)
Program Example7 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Execve f u n c t i o n . }
Uses BaseUnix , s t r i n g s ;

Arg1 : Pchar = ’− l ’ ;
Var PP : PPchar ;
163
begin
PP [ 0 ] : = Arg0 ;
PP [ 1 ] : = Arg1 ;
PP [ 3 ] : = N i l ;
{ Envp i s d e f i n e d i n system . i n c }
fpExecVe ( ’ / b i n / l s ’ , pp , envp ) ;
end .
1.4.13 FpExit
Synopsis: Exit the current process
Declaration: procedure FpExit(Status: cint)

Visibility: default
Description: FpExit exits the currently running process, and report Status as the exit status.
Remark: If this call is executed, the normal unit finalization code will not be executed. This may lead to
unexpected errors and stray files on your system. It is therefore recommended to use the Halt call
instead.
Errors: None.
See also: FpFork (166), FpExecve (163)
1.4.14 FpFcntl
Synopsis: File control operations.
Declaration: function FpFcntl(fildes: cint;cmd: cint) : cint
function FpFcntl(fildes: cint;cmd: cint;arg: cint) : cint
function FpFcntl(fildes: cint;cmd: cint;var arg: FLock) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: Read/set a file’s attributes. Fildes a valid file descriptor. Cmd speciefies what to do, and is one of
the following:
F_GetFdRead the close_on_exec flag. If the low-order bit is 0, then the file will remain open across
execve calls.
F_GetFlRead the descriptor’s flags.
F_GetOwnGet the Process ID of the owner of a socket.
F_SetFdSet the close_on_exec flag of fildes. (only the least siginificant bit is used).
F_GetLkReturn the flock record that prevents this process from obtaining the lock, or set the
l_type field of the lock of there is no obstruction. Arg is the flock record.
F_SetLkSet the lock or clear it (depending on l_type in the flock structure). if the lock is held
by another process, an error occurs.
F_GetLkwSame as for F_Setlk, but wait until the lock is released.
F_SetOwnSet the Process or process group that owns a socket.
164
The function returns 0 if successful, -1 otherwise.

Errors: On error, -1 is returned. Use fpGetErrno (169) for extended error information.
sys_ebadfFd has a bad file descriptor.

sys_eagain or sys_eaccessFor \textbf{F_SetLk}, if the lock is held by another process.
1.4.15 fpfdfillset
Synopsis: Set all filedescriptors in the set.
Declaration: function fpfdfillset(var nset: TFDSet) : cint

Visibility: default
Description: fpfdfillset sets all filedescriptors in nset.
See also: FpSelect (190), FpFD_ZERO (166), FpFD_IsSet (165), FpFD_Clr (165), FpFD_Set (166)
1.4.16 fpFD_CLR
Synopsis: Clears a filedescriptor in a set
Declaration: function fpFD_CLR(fdno: cint;var nset: TFDSet) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpFD_Clr clears file descriptor fdno in filedescriptor set nset.

For an example, see FpSelect (190).
Errors: None.
See also: FpSelect (190), FpFD_ZERO (166), FpFD_Set (166), FpFD_IsSet (165)
1.4.17 fpFD_ISSET
Synopsis: Check whether a filedescriptor is set
Declaration: function fpFD_ISSET(fdno: cint;const nset: TFDSet) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpFD_Set Checks whether file descriptor fdNo in filedescriptor set fds is set. It returns zero if
the descriptor is not set, 1 if it is set. If the number of the filedescriptor it wrong, -1 is returned.
Errors: If an invald file descriptor number is passed, -1 is returned.
See also: FpSelect (190), FpFD_ZERO (166), FpFD_Clr (165), FpFD_Set (166)
165
1.4.18 fpFD_SET
Synopsis: Set a filedescriptor in a set
Declaration: function fpFD_SET(fdno: cint;var nset: TFDSet) : cint

Visibility: default
Description: FpFD_Set sets file descriptor fdno in filedescriptor set nset.
Errors: None.
See also: FpSelect (190), FpFD_ZERO (166), FpFD_Clr (165), FpFD_IsSet (165)
1.4.19 fpFD_ZERO
Synopsis: Clear all file descriptors in set
Declaration: function fpFD_ZERO(out nset: TFDSet) : cint

Visibility: default
Description: FpFD_ZERO clears all the filedescriptors in the file descriptor set nset.
Errors: None.
See also: FpSelect (190), FpFD_Clr (165), FpFD_Set (166), FpFD_IsSet (165)
1.4.20 FpFork
Synopsis: Create child process
Declaration: function FpFork : TPid

Visibility: default
Description: FpFork creates a child process which is a copy of the parent process. FpFork returns the process
ID in the parent process, and zero in the child’s process. (you can get the parent’s PID with fpGetPPid
(171)).
Errors: On error, -1 is returned to the parent, and no child is created.
sys_eagainNot enough memory to create child process.
See also: fpExecve (163), #rtl.linux.Clone (882)
1.4.21 FPFStat
Synopsis: Retrieve file information about a file descriptor.
Declaration: function FpFStat(fd: cint;var sb: Stat) : cint
function FPFStat(var F: Text;var Info: Stat) : Boolean
function FPFStat(var F: File;var Info: Stat) : Boolean
Visibility: default
166
Description: FpFStat gets information about the file specified in one of the following:
Fda valid file descriptor.

Fan opened text file or untyped file.
and stores it in Info, which is of type stat (148). The function returns zero if the call was succesfull,
a nonzero return value indicates failure.
sys_enoentPath does not exist.
See also: FpStat (198), FpLStat (176)
program example28 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e F S t a t f u n c t i o n . }
uses BaseUnix ;
var f : t e x t ;
i : byte ;
info : stat ;
begin
{ Make a f i l e }
assign ( f , ’ t e s t . f i l ’ ) ;
rewrite ( f ) ;
f o r i : = 1 to 1 0 do w r i t e l n ( f , ’ T e s t l i n e # ’ , i ) ;
close ( f ) ;
{ Do t h e c a l l on made f i l e . }
i f f p s t a t ( ’ t e s t . f i l ’ , i n f o ) < >0 then
begin
w r i t e l n ( ’ F s t a t f a i l e d . Errno : ’ , f p g e t e r r n o ) ;
halt ( 1 ) ;
end ;
writeln ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ R e s u l t o f f s t a t on f i l e ’ ’ t e s t . f i l ’ ’ . ’ ) ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ Inode : ’ , info . st_ino ) ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ Mode : ’ , i n f o . st_mode ) ;
writeln ( ’ nlink : ’ , info . st_nlink );
writeln ( ’ uid : ’ , info . st_uid ) ;
writeln ( ’ gid : ’ , info . st_gid ) ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ rdev : ’ , i n f o . st_rdev ) ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ Size : ’ , info . st_size ) ;
writeln ( ’ Blksize : ’ , info . st_blksize ) ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ Blocks : ’ , info . st_blocks ) ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ atime : ’ , i n f o . st_atime ) ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ mtime : ’ , i n f o . st_mtime ) ;
writeln ( ’ ctime : ’ , i n f o . st_ctime ) ;
{ Remove f i l e }
erase ( f ) ;
end .
167
1.4.22 FpFtruncate
Synopsis: Truncate file on certain size.
Declaration: function FpFtruncate(fd: cint;flength: TOff) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpFTruncate sets the length of a file in fd on flength bytes, where flength must be less
than or equal to the current length of the file in fd.
The function returns zero if the call was successful, a nonzero return value indicates that an error
occurred.
See also: FpOpen (181), FpClose (159), FpRead (186), FpWrite (207), FpLSeek (175)
1.4.23 FpGetcwd
Synopsis: Retrieve the current working directory.
Declaration: function FpGetcwd(path: PChar;siz: TSize) : PChar
function FpGetcwd : RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: fpgetCWD returns the current working directory of the running process. It is returned in Path,
which points to a memory location of at least siz bytes.
If the function is succesful, a pointer to Path is returned, or a string with the result. On error Nil
or an empty string are returned.
Errors: On error Nil or an empty string are returned.
See also: FpGetPID (171), FpGetUID (173)
1.4.24 FpGetegid
Synopsis: Return effective group ID
Declaration: function FpGetegid : TGid
Visibility: default
Description: FpGetegid returns the effective group ID of the currently running process.
Errors: None.
See also: FpGetGid (170), FpGetUid (173), FpGetEUid (169), FpGetPid (171), FpGetPPid (171), fpSetUID
(193), FpSetGid (191)
Program Example18 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GetGid and GetEGid f u n c t i o n s . }
Uses BaseUnix ;
begin
w r i t e l n ( ’ Group I d = ’ , f p g e t g i d , ’ E f f e c t i v e group I d = ’ , f p g e t e g i d ) ;
end .
168
1.4.25 FpGetEnv
Synopsis: Return value of environment variable.
Declaration: function FpGetEnv(name: PChar) : PChar

function FpGetEnv(name: string) : PChar
Visibility: default
Description: FPGetEnv returns the value of the environment variable in Name. If the variable is not defined, nil
is returned. The value of the environment variable may be the empty string. A PChar is returned to
accomodate for strings longer than 255 bytes, TERMCAP and LS_COLORS, for instance.
Errors: None.
Program Example41 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GetEnv f u n c t i o n . }
Uses BaseUnix ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Path i s : ’ , fpGetenv ( ’PATH ’ ) ) ;
end .
1.4.26 fpgeterrno
Synopsis: Retrieve extended error information.
Declaration: function fpgeterrno : LongInt

Visibility: default
Description: fpgeterrno returns extended information on the latest error. It is set by all functions that com-
municate with the kernel or C library.
Errors: None.
See also: fpseterrno (191)
1.4.27 FpGeteuid
Synopsis: Return effective user ID
Declaration: function FpGeteuid : TUid

Visibility: default
Description: FpGeteuid returns the effective user ID of the currently running process.
Errors: None.
See also: FpGetUid (173), FpGetGid (170), FpGetEGid (168), FpGetPid (171), FpGetPPid (171), fpSetUID
(193), FpSetGid (191)
169
Program Example17 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GetUid and GetEUid f u n c t i o n s . }
Uses BaseUnix ;
begin
w r i t e l n ( ’ User I d = ’ , f p g e t u i d , ’ E f f e c t i v e user I d = ’ , f p g e t e u i d ) ;
end .
1.4.28 FpGetgid
Synopsis: Return real group ID
Declaration: function FpGetgid : TGid
Visibility: default
Description: FpGetgid returns the real group ID of the currently running process.
Errors: None.
See also: FpGetEGid (168), FpGetUid (173), FpGetEUid (169), FpGetPid (171), FpGetPPid (171), fpSetUID
(193), FpSetGid (191)
Program Example18 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GetGid and GetEGid f u n c t i o n s . }
Uses BaseUnix ;
begin
w r i t e l n ( ’ Group I d = ’ , f p g e t g i d , ’ E f f e c t i v e group I d = ’ , f p g e t e g i d ) ;
end .
1.4.29 FpGetgroups
Synopsis: Get the list of supplementary groups.
Declaration: function FpGetgroups(gidsetsize: cint;var grouplist: TGrpArr) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpGetgroups returns up to gidsetsize groups in GroupList

If the function is successful, then number of groups that were stored is returned. On error, -1 is
returned.
See also: FpGetpgrp (171), FpGetGID (170), FpGetEGID (168)
170
1.4.30 FpGetpgrp
Synopsis: Get process group ID
Declaration: function FpGetpgrp : TPid

Visibility: default
Description: FpGetpgrp returns the process group ID of the current process.
Errors: None.
See also: fpGetPID (171), fpGetPPID (171), FpGetGID (170), FpGetUID (173)
1.4.31 FpGetpid
Synopsis: Return current process ID
Declaration: function FpGetpid : TPid
Visibility: default
Description: FpGetpid returns the process ID of the currently running process.
Note: There exist a portable alterative to fpGetpid: system.GetProcessID. Please use fpGetpid only
if you are writing Unix specific code. System.GetProcessID will work on all operating systems.
Errors: None.
See also: FpGetPPid (171)
Program Example16 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GetPid , GetPPid f u n c t i o n . }
Uses BaseUnix ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Process I d = ’ , f p g e t p i d , ’ Parent process I d = ’ , f p g e t p p i d ) ;
end .
1.4.32 FpGetppid
Synopsis: Return parent process ID
Declaration: function FpGetppid : TPid

Visibility: default
Description: FpGetppid returns the Process ID of the parent process.
Errors: None.
See also: FpGetPid (171)
171
Program Example16 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GetPid , GetPPid f u n c t i o n . }
Uses BaseUnix ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Process I d = ’ , f p g e t p i d , ’ Parent process I d = ’ , f p g e t p p i d ) ;
end .
1.4.33 fpGetPriority
Synopsis: Return process priority
Declaration: function fpGetPriority(Which: cint;Who: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: GetPriority returns the priority with which a process is running. Which process(es) is determined by
the Which and Who variables. Which can be one of the pre-defined Prio_Process, Prio_PGrp,
Prio_User, in which case Who is the process ID, Process group ID or User ID, respectively.
For an example, see FpNice (181).
Errors: Error information is returned solely by the FpGetErrno (169) function: a priority can be a positive
or negative value.
sys_esrchNo process found using which and who.

sys_einvalWhich was not one of Prio_Process, Prio_Grp or Prio_User.
See also: FpSetPriority (192), FpNice (181)
1.4.34 FpGetRLimit
Synopsis: Get process resource limits
Declaration: function FpGetRLimit(resource: cint;rlim: PRLimit) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpGetRLimit gets the resource limits for the current process: resource determines the resource
of which the kernel should return the limits (one of the many RLIMIT_* constants). rlim should
point to a TRLimit (151) record and on success will contain the resource limits.
The function returns zero if the resource limits were correctly returned.
Errors: On error, -1 is returned and fpgeterrno (169) can be used to retrieve the error code.
See also: FpSetRLimit (192)
1.4.35 FpGetsid
Synopsis: Get current session ID
Declaration: function FpGetsid(pid: TPid) : TPid
Visibility: default
172
Description: FpGetsid returns the session ID of the process pid. The return value is the session ID of the
process. (it equals the PID of the session leader). The process pid must be in the same session as the
current process.
Errors: On error, -1 is returned, and extended error information can be obtained with fpGetErrno.
See also: FpGetpgrp (171), FpGetpid (171), FpGetPpid (171)
1.4.36 FpGetuid
Synopsis: Return current user ID
Declaration: function FpGetuid : TUid
Visibility: default
Description: FpGetuid returns the real user ID of the currently running process.
Errors: None.
See also: FpGetGid (170), FpGetEUid (169), FpGetEGid (168), FpGetPid (171), FpGetPPid (171), fpSetUID
(193)
Program Example17 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GetUid and GetEUid f u n c t i o n s . }
Uses BaseUnix ;
begin
w r i t e l n ( ’ User I d = ’ , f p g e t u i d , ’ E f f e c t i v e user I d = ’ , f p g e t e u i d ) ;
end .
1.4.37 FpIOCtl
Synopsis: General kernel IOCTL call.
Declaration: function FpIOCtl(Handle: cint;Ndx: TIOCtlRequest;Data: Pointer) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: This is a general interface to the Unix/ linux ioctl call. It performs various operations on the
filedescriptor Handle. Ndx describes the operation to perform. Data points to data needed for
the Ndx function. The structure of this data is function-dependent, so we don’t elaborate on this
here. For more information on this, see various manual pages under linux.
Program Example54 ;
uses BaseUnix , Termio ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e I O C t l f u n c t i o n . }
173
var
t i o s : Termios ;
begin
{ $ i f d e f FreeBSD }
f p I O C t l ( 1 ,TIOCGETA, @tios ) ; / / these c o n s t a n t s are v e r y OS dependant .
/ / see t h e t c g e t a t t r example f o r a b e t t e r way
{ $endif }
WriteLn ( ’ I n p u t Flags : $’ , hexstr ( tios . c_iflag ,8));
WriteLn ( ’ Output Flags : $’ , hexstr ( tios . c_oflag ,8));
WriteLn ( ’ L i n e Flags : $’ , hexstr ( tios . c_lflag ,8));
WriteLn ( ’ C o n t r o l Flags : $’ , hexstr ( tios . c_cflag ,8));
end .
1.4.38 FpKill
Synopsis: Send a signal to a process
Declaration: function FpKill(pid: TPid;sig: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: fpKill sends a signal Sig to a process or process group. If Pid>0 then the signal is sent to Pid,
if it equals -1, then the signal is sent to all processes except process 1. If Pid<-1 then the signal is
sent to process group -Pid.
The return value is zero, except in case three, where the return value is the number of processes to
which the signal was sent.
Errors: Extended error information can be retrieved using fpGetErrno (169):
sys_einvalAn invalid signal is sent.

sys_esrchThe Pid or process group don’t exist.
sys_epermThe effective userid of the current process doesn’t math the one of process Pid.
See also: FpSigAction (193), FpSignal (196)
1.4.39 FpLink
Synopsis: Create a hard link to a file
Declaration: function FpLink(existing: PChar;newone: PChar) : cint

function FpLink(const existing: RawByteString;
const newone: RawByteString) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: fpLink makes NewOne point to the same file als Existing. The two files then have the same
inode number. This is known as a ’hard’ link. The function returns zero if the call was succesfull,
and returns a non-zero value if the call failed.
sys_exdevExisting and NewOne are not on the same filesystem.

sys_epermThe filesystem containing Existing and NewOne doesn’t support linking files.
174
sys_eaccessWrite access for the directory containing NewOne is disallowed, or one of the directories
in Existing or NewOne has no search (=execute) permission.
sys_enoentA directory entry in Existing or NewOne does not exist or is a symbolic link pointing
to a non-existent directory.
sys_enotdirA directory entry in Existing or NewOne is nor a directory.
sys_erofsThe files are on a read-only filesystem.
sys_eexistNewOne already exists.
sys_emlinkExisting has reached maximal link count.
sys_eloopexisting or NewOne has a reference to a circular symbolic link, i.e. a symbolic link,
whose expansion points to itself.
sys_enospcThe device containing NewOne has no room for another entry.
sys_epermExisting points to . or .. of a directory.
See also: fpSymLink (199), fpUnLink (204)
Program Example21 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e L i n k and UnLink f u n c t i o n s . }
Uses BaseUnix ;
Var F : Text ;
S : String ;
begin
Assign ( F , ’ t e s t . t x t ’ ) ;
Rewrite ( F ) ;
Writeln ( F , ’ This i s w r i t t e n to t e s t . t x t ’ ) ;
Close ( f ) ;
{ new . t x t and t e s t . t x t are now t h e same f i l e }
i f f p L i n k ( ’ t e s t . t x t ’ , ’ new . t x t ’ ) < >0 then
w r i t e l n ( ’ E r r o r when l i n k i n g ! ’ ) ;
{ Removing t e s t . t x t s t i l l l e a v e s new . t x t }
I f f p U n l i n k ( ’ t e s t . t x t ’ ) < >0 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ E r r o r when u n l i n k i n g ! ’ ) ;
Assign ( f , ’ new . t x t ’ ) ;
Reset ( F ) ;
While not EOF( f ) do
begin
Readln ( F , S ) ;
Writeln ( ’ > ’ , s ) ;
end ;
Close ( f ) ;
{ Remove new . t x t a l s o }
I f not FPUnlink ( ’ new . t x t ’ ) < >0 then
end .
1.4.40 FpLseek
Synopsis: Set file pointer position.
175
Declaration: function FpLseek(fd: cint;offset: TOff;whence: cint) : TOff

Visibility: default
Description: FpLSeek sets the current fileposition of file fd to Offset, starting from Whence, which can be
one of the following:
Seek_SetOffset is the absolute position in the file.

Seek_CurOffset is relative to the current position.
Seek_endOffset is relative to the end of the file.
The function returns the new fileposition, or -1 of an error occurred.

For an example, see FpOpen (181).
See also: FpOpen (181), FpWrite (207), FpClose (159), FpRead (186), FpFTruncate (168)
1.4.41 fpLstat
Synopsis: Return information about symbolic link. Do not follow the link
Declaration: function fpLstat(path: PChar;Info: PStat) : cint
function fpLstat(const path: RawByteString;Info: PStat) : cint
function fpLstat(path: PChar;var Info: Stat) : cint
function fpLstat(const Filename: RawByteString;var Info: Stat) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpLstat gets information about the link specified in Path (or FileName, and stores it in Info,
which points to a record of type TStat. Contrary to FpFstat (166), it stores information about the
link, not about the file the link points to. The function returns zero if the call was succesful, a nonzero
return value indicates failure. failed.
Errors: Extended error information is returned by the FpGetErrno (169) function.
See also: FpFStat (166), #rtl.unixtype.TStatFS (1797)
Listing: ./unixex/ex29.pp
program example29 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e L S t a t f u n c t i o n . }
uses BaseUnix , Unix ;
var f : t e x t ;
i : byte ;
info : stat ;
begin
{ Make a f i l e }
assign ( f , ’ t e s t . f i l ’ ) ;
rewrite ( f ) ;
176
close ( f ) ;
begin
halt ( 1 ) ;
end ;
writeln ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ R e s u l t o f s t a t on f i l e ’ ’ t e s t . f i l ’ ’ . ’ ) ;
If fpSymLink ( ’ t e s t . f i l ’ , ’ t e s t . l n k ’ ) < >0 then

w r i t e l n ( ’ L i n k f a i l e d ! Errno : ’ , f p g e t e r r n o ) ;
if f p l s t a t ( ’ t e s t . l n k ’ , @info ) < >0 then

begin
w r i t e l n ( ’ L S t a t f a i l e d . Errno : ’ , f p g e t e r r n o ) ;
halt ( 1 ) ;
end ;
writeln ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ R e s u l t o f f s t a t on f i l e ’ ’ t e s t . l n k ’ ’ . ’ ) ;
{ Remove f i l e and l i n k }
erase ( f ) ;
fpunlink ( ’ test . lnk ’ ) ;
end .
1.4.42 FpMkdir
Synopsis: Create a new directory
Declaration: function FpMkdir(path: PChar;Mode: TMode) : cint
function FpMkdir(const path: RawByteString;Mode: TMode) : cint
Visibility: default
177
Description: FpMkDir creates a new directory Path, and sets the new directory’s mode to Mode. Path can be
an absolute path or a relative path. Note that only the last element of the directory will be created,
higher level directories must already exist, and must be writeable by the current user.
On succes, 0 is returned. if the function fails, -1 is returned.
Note: There exist a portable alterative to fpMkDir: system.mkdir. Please use fpMkDir only if you
are writing Unix specific code. System.mkdir will work on all operating systems.
See also: fpGetCWD (168), fpChDir (157)
1.4.43 FpMkfifo
Synopsis: Create FIFO (named pipe) in file system
Declaration: function FpMkfifo(path: PChar;Mode: TMode) : cint
function FpMkfifo(const path: RawByteString;Mode: TMode) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: fpMkFifo creates named a named pipe in the filesystem, with name Path and mode Mode.
The function returns zero if the command was succesful, and nonzero if it failed.
Errors: The error codes include:
sys_emfileToo many file descriptors for this process.

sys_enfileThe system file table is full.
1.4.44 Fpmmap
Synopsis: Create memory map of a file
Declaration: function Fpmmap(start: pointer;len: size_t;prot: cint;flags: cint;

fd: cint;offst: off_t) : pointer
Visibility: default
Description: FpMMap maps or unmaps files or devices into memory. The different arguments determine what
and how the file is mapped:
adrAddress where to mmap the device. This address is a hint, and may not be followed.
lenSize (in bytes) of area to be mapped.
protProtection of mapped memory. This is a OR-ed combination of the following constants:
PROT_EXECThe memory can be executed.
PROT_READThe memory can be read.
PROT_WRITEThe memory can be written.
PROT_NONEThe memory can not be accessed.
flagsContains some options for the mmap call. It is an OR-ed combination of the following constants:
MAP_FIXEDDo not map at another address than the given address. If the address cannot be
used, MMap will fail.
MAP_SHAREDShare this map with other processes that map this object.
MAP_PRIVATECreate a private map with copy-on-write semantics.
178
MAP_ANONYMOUSfd does not have to be a file descriptor.

One of the options MAP_SHARED and MAP_PRIVATE must be present, but not both at the
same time.
fdFile descriptor from which to map.
offOffset to be used in file descriptor fd.
The function returns a pointer to the mapped memory, or a -1 in case of en error.

Errors: On error, -1 is returned and extended error information is returned by the FpGetErrno (169) function.
Sys_EBADFfd is not a valid file descriptor and MAP_ANONYMOUS was not specified.
Sys_EACCESMAP_PRIVATE was specified, but fd is not open for reading. Or MAP_SHARED was
asked and PROT_WRITE is set, fd is not open for writing
Sys_EINVALOne of the record fields Start, length or offset is invalid.
Sys_ETXTBUSYMAP_DENYWRITE was set but the object specified by fd is open for writing.
Sys_EAGAINfd is locked, or too much memory is locked.
Sys_ENOMEMNot enough memory for this operation.
See also: FpMUnMap (180)
Program Example66 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e MMap f u n c t i o n . }
Var S : String ;
fd : cint ;
Len : longint ;
// args : tmmapargs ;
P : PChar ;
begin
s := ’ This i s the s t r i n g ’ ;
Len : = Length (S ) ;
f d : = fpOpen ( ’ t e s t f i l e . t x t ’ , O_wrOnly or o _ c r e a t ) ;
I f f d =−1 then
Halt ( 1 ) ;
I f f p W r i t e ( fd , S [ 1 ] , Len)= −1 then
Halt ( 2 ) ;
fpClose ( fd ) ;
f d : = fpOpen ( ’ t e s t f i l e . t x t ’ , O_rdOnly ) ;
i f f d =−1 then
Halt ( 3 ) ;
P: = Pchar ( fpmmap ( n i l , l e n + 1 ,PROT_READ or PROT_WRITE, MAP_PRIVATE, fd , 0 ) ) ;
I f l o n g i n t (P)= −1 then
Halt ( 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Read i n memory : ’ ,P ) ;
fpclose ( fd ) ;
i f fpMUnMap ( P , Len ) < >0 Then
Halt ( fpgeterrno ) ;
end .
179
1.4.45 Fpmunmap
Synopsis: Unmap previously mapped memory block
Declaration: function Fpmunmap(start: pointer;len: size_t) : cint

Visibility: default
Description: FpMUnMap unmaps the memory block of size Len, pointed to by Adr, which was previously
allocated with FpMMap (178).
The function returns True if successful, False otherwise.
For an example, see FpMMap (178).
Errors: In case of error the function returns a nonzero value, extended error information is returned by the
FpGetErrno (169) function. See FpMMap (178) for possible error values.
See also: FpMMap (178)
1.4.46 FpNanoSleep
Synopsis: Suspend process for a short time
Declaration: function FpNanoSleep(req: ptimespec;rem: ptimespec) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpNanoSleep suspends the process till a time period as specified in req has passed. Then the
function returns. If the call was interrupted (e.g. by some signal) then the function may return earlier,
and rem will contain the remaining time till the end of the intended period. In this case the return
value will be -1, and ErrNo will be set to EINTR
If the function returns without error, the return value is zero.
Errors: If an error occurred or the call was interrupted, -1 is returned. Extended error information can be
retrieved using fpGetErrno (169).
See also: FpPause (184), FpAlarm (156)
program example72 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e NanoSleep f u n c t i o n . }
uses BaseUnix ;
Var
Req ,Rem : TimeSpec ;
Res : L o n g i n t ;
begin
With Req do
begin
tv_sec :=10;
tv_nsec : = 1 0 0 ;
end ;
Write ( ’ NanoSleep r e t u r n e d : ’ ) ;
Flush ( Output ) ;
Res : = ( fpNanoSleep (@Req,@rem ) ) ;
180
Writeln ( res ) ;
I f ( res < >0) then
With rem do
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Remaining seconds : ’ , tv_sec ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Remaining nanoseconds : ’ , tv_nsec ) ;
end ;
end .
1.4.47 fpNice
Synopsis: Set process priority
Declaration: function fpNice(N: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: Nice adds -N to the priority of the running process. The lower the priority numerically, the less the
process is favored. Only the superuser can specify a negative N, i.e. increase the rate at which the
process is run.
If the function is succesful, zero is returned. On error, a nonzero value is returned.
sys_epermA non-superuser tried to specify a negative N, i.e. do a priority increase.
See also: FpGetPriority (172), FpSetPriority (192)
Program Example15 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Nice and Get / S e t P r i o r i t y f u n c t i o n s . }
begin
writeln ( ’ Setting p r i o r i t y to 5 ’ ) ;
f p s e t p r i o r i t y ( prio_process , fpgetpid , 5 ) ;
w r i t e l n ( ’New p r i o r i t y = ’ , f p g e t p r i o r i t y ( p r i o _ p r o c e s s , f p g e t p i d ) ) ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ Doing n i c e 1 0 ’ ) ;
fpnice ( 1 0 ) ;
w r i t e l n ( ’New P r i o r i t y = ’ , f p g e t p r i o r i t y ( p r i o _ p r o c e s s , f p g e t p i d ) ) ;
end .
1.4.48 FpOpen
Synopsis: Open file and return file descriptor
Declaration: function FpOpen(path: PChar;flags: cint;Mode: TMode) : cint
function FpOpen(path: PChar;flags: cint) : cint
function FpOpen(const path: RawByteString;flags: cint) : cint
function FpOpen(const path: RawByteString;flags: cint;Mode: TMode)
: cint
function FpOpen(path: ShortString;flags: cint) : cint
function FpOpen(path: ShortString;flags: cint;Mode: TMode) : cint
181
Visibility: default
Description: FpOpen opens a file in Path with flags flags and mode Mode One of the following:
O_RdOnlyFile is opened Read-only

O_WrOnlyFile is opened Write-only
O_RdWrFile is opened Read-Write
The flags may beOR-ed with one of the following constants:
O_CreatFile is created if it doesn’t exist.

O_ExclIf the file is opened with O_Creat and it already exists, the call wil fail.
O_NoCttyIf the file is a terminal device, it will NOT become the process’ controlling terminal.
O_TruncIf the file exists, it will be truncated.
O_Appendthe file is opened in append mode. Before each write, the file pointer is positioned at the
end of the file.
O_NonBlockThe file is opened in non-blocking mode. No operation on the file descriptor will cause
the calling process to wait till.
O_NDelayIdem as O_NonBlock
O_SyncThe file is opened for synchronous IO. Any write operation on the file will not return untill
the data is physically written to disk.
O_NoFollowif the file is a symbolic link, the open fails. (linux 2.1.126 and higher only)
O_Directoryif the file is not a directory, the open fails. (linux 2.1.126 and higher only)
Path can be of type PChar or String. The optional mode argument specifies the permissions
to set when opening the file. This is modified by the umask setting. The real permissions are Mode
and not umask. The return value of the function is the filedescriptor, or a negative value if there
was an error.
See also: FpClose (159), FpRead (186), FpWrite (207), FpFTruncate (168), FpLSeek (175)
Program Example19 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e fdOpen , f d w r i t e and fdCLose f u n c t i o n s . }
Uses BaseUnix ;
Const L i n e : S t r i n g [ 8 0 ] = ’ T h i s i s easy w r i t i n g ! ’ ;
Var FD : C i n t ;
begin
FD: = fpOpen ( ’ Test . d a t ’ , O_WrOnly or O_Creat ) ;
i f FD>0 then
begin
i f length ( L i n e )<> f p w r i t e ( FD, L i n e [ 1 ] , Length ( L i n e ) ) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ E r r o r when w r i t i n g t o f i l e ! ’ ) ;
f p C l o s e (FD ) ;
end ;
end .
182
1.4.49 FpOpendir
Synopsis: Open a directory for reading
Declaration: function FpOpendir(dirname: PChar) : pDir
function FpOpendir(const dirname: RawByteString) : pDir
function FpOpendir(dirname: ShortString) : pDir
Visibility: default
Description: FpOpenDir opens the directory DirName, and returns a pdir pointer to a Dir (139) record, which
can be used to read the directory structure. If the directory cannot be opened, nil is returned.
See also: FpCloseDir (160), FpReadDir (187)
Program Example35 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e
OpenDir , ReadDir , SeekDir and T e l l D i r f u n c t i o n s . }
Uses BaseUnix ;
Var TheDir : PDir ;

ADirent : PDirent ;
Entry : Longint ;
begin
TheDir : = fpOpenDir ( ’ . / . ’ ) ;
Repeat
// E n t r y : = f p T e l l D i r ( TheDir ) ;
A D i r e n t : = fpReadDir ( TheDir ^ ) ;
I f ADirent <> N i l then
With A D i r e n t ^ do
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ E n t r y No : ’ , E n t r y ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Inode : ’ , d_fileno ) ;
// Writeln ( ’ Offset : ’ , d_off ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Reclen : ’ , d_reclen ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Name : ’ , pchar (@d_name [ 0 ] ) ) ;
end ;
Until ADirent=Nil ;
Repeat
Write ( ’ E n t r y No . you would l i k e t o see again ( − 1 t o s t o p ) : ’ ) ;
ReadLn ( E n t r y ) ;
I f Entry <>−1 then
begin
// f p S e e k D i r ( TheDir , E n t r y ) ; / / n o t implemented f o r v a r i o u s p l a t f o r m s
A D i r e n t : = fpReadDir ( TheDir ^ ) ;
I f ADirent <> N i l then
With A D i r e n t ^ do
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ E n t r y No : ’ , E n t r y ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Inode : ’ , d_fileno ) ;
// Writeln ( ’ Offset : ’ , off );
W r i t e l n ( ’ Reclen : ’ , d_reclen ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Name : ’ , pchar (@d_name [ 0 ] ) ) ;
183
end ;
end ;
U n t i l E n t r y =−1;
f p C l o s e D i r ( TheDir ^ ) ;
end .
1.4.50 FpPause
Synopsis: Wait for a signal to arrive
Declaration: function FpPause : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpPause puts the process to sleep and waits until the application receives a signal. If a signal
handler is installed for the received sigal, the handler will be called and after that pause will return
control to the process.
For an example, see fpAlarm (156).
1.4.51 FpPipe
Synopsis: Create a set of pipe file handlers
Declaration: function FpPipe(var fildes: TFilDes) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpPipe creates a pipe, i.e. two file objects, one for input, one for output. The filehandles are
returned in the array fildes. The input handle is in the 0-th element of the array, the output handle
is in the 1-st element.
The function returns zero if everything went succesfully, a nonzero return value indicates an error.
Errors: In case the function fails, the following return values are possible:

See also: #rtl.unix.POpen (1776), fpMkFifo (178)
Program Example36 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e AssignPipe f u n c t i o n . }
Var p i p i , p i p o : Text ;
s : String ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ A s s i g n i n g Pipes . ’ ) ;
I f a s s i g n p i p e ( p i p i , p i p o ) < >0 then
Writeln ( ’ Error assigning pipes ! ’ , fpgeterr no ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ W r i t i n g t o pipe , and f l u s h i n g . ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( pipo , ’ T h i s i s a t e x t s t r i n g ’ ) ; c l o s e ( p i p o ) ;
184
W r i t e l n ( ’ Reading from p i p e . ’ ) ;
While not eof ( p i p i ) do
begin
Readln ( p i p i , s ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Read from p i p e : ’ , s ) ;
end ;
close ( p i p i ) ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ Closed p i p e s . ’ ) ;
writeln
end .
1.4.52 FpPoll
Synopsis: Poll a file descriptor for events.
Declaration: function FpPoll(fds: ppollfd;nfds: cuint;timeout: clong) : cint

Visibility: default
Description: fpPoll waits for events on file descriptors. fds points to an array of tpollfd records, each of
these records describes a file descriptor on which to wait for events. The number of file descriptors
is given by nfds. >timeout specifies the maximum time (in milliseconds) to wait for events.
On timeout, the result value is 0. If an event occurred on some descriptors, then the return value is the
number of descriptors on which an event (or error) occured. The revents field of the tpollfd
records will contain the events for the file descriptor it described.
See also: tpollfd (151)
1.4.53 FppRead
Synopsis: Positional read: read from file descriptor at a certain position.
Declaration: function FpPRead(fd: cint;buf: PChar;nbytes: TSize;offset: TOff)
: TsSize
function FppRead(fd: cint;var buf;nbytes: TSize;offset: TOff) : TsSize
Visibility: default
Description: FpPRead reads nbytes bytes from file descriptor fd into buffer buf starting at offset offset.
Offset is measured from the start of the file. This function can only be used on files, not on pipes
or sockets (i.e. any seekable file descriptor).
The function returns the number of bytes actually read, or -1 on error.
Errors: On error, -1 is returned.
See also: FpReadV (188), FpPWrite (185)
1.4.54 FppWrite
Synopsis: Positional write: write to file descriptor at a certain position.
Declaration: function FpPWrite(fd: cint;buf: PChar;nbytes: TSize;offset: TOff)

: TsSize
function FppWrite(fd: cint;const buf;nbytes: TSize;offset: TOff)
: TsSize
185
Visibility: default
Description: FpPWrite writes nbytes bytes from buffer buf into file descriptor fd starting at offset offset.
Offset is measured from the start of the file. This function can only be used on files, not on pipes
or sockets (i.e. any seekable file descriptor).
The function returns the number of bytes actually written, or -1 on error.

See also: FpPRead (185), FpWriteV (207)
1.4.55 FpRead
Synopsis: Read data from file descriptor
Declaration: function FpRead(fd: cint;buf: PChar;nbytes: TSize) : TsSize

function FpRead(fd: cint;var buf;nbytes: TSize) : TsSize
Visibility: default
Description: FpdRead reads at most nbytes bytes from the file descriptor fd, and stores them in buf.
The function returns the number of bytes actually read, or -1 if an error occurred. No checking on
the length of buf is done.
See also: FpOpen (181), FpClose (159), FpWrite (207), FpFTruncate (168), FpLSeek (175)
Program Example20 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e fdRead and f d T r u n c a t e f u n c t i o n s . }
Uses BaseUnix ;
Const Data : s t r i n g [ 1 0 ] = ’ 1234567890 ’ ;
Var FD : c i n t ;
l : longint ;
begin
FD: = fpOpen ( ’ t e s t . d a t ’ , o_wronly or o_creat , & 6 6 6 ) ;
i f fd >0 then
begin
{ F i l l f i l e w i t h data }
f o r l : = 1 to 1 0 do
i f f p W r i t e ( FD, Data [ 1 ] , 1 0 ) < > 1 0 then
begin
w r i t e l n ( ’ E r r o r when w r i t i n g ! ’ ) ;
halt ( 1 ) ;
end ;
FD: = fpOpen ( ’ t e s t . d a t ’ , o _ r d o n l y ) ;
{ Read data again }
I f FD>0 then
begin
For l : = 1 to 5 do
186
i f fpRead ( FD, Data [ 1 ] , 1 0 ) < > 1 0 then

begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ E r r o r when Reading ! ’ ) ;
Halt ( 2 ) ;
end ;
{ Truncating f i l e at 6 0 bytes }
{ For t r u n c a t i n g , f i l e must be open o r w r i t e }
FD: = fpOpen ( ’ t e s t . d a t ’ , o_wronly , & 6 6 6 ) ;
i f FD>0 then
begin
i f f p f T r u n c a t e (FD,60) < >0 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ E r r o r when t r u n c a t i n g ! ’ ) ;
f p C l o s e ( FD ) ;
end ;
end ;
end ;
end .
1.4.56 FpReaddir
Synopsis: Read entry from directory
Declaration: function FpReaddir(var dirp: Dir) : pDirent
Visibility: default
Description: FpReadDir reads the next entry in the directory pointed to by dirp. It returns a pdirent pointer
to a dirent (140) record describing the entry. If the next entry can’t be read, Nil is returned.
For an example, see FpOpenDir (183).
See also: FpCloseDir (160), FpOpenDir (183)
1.4.57 fpReadLink
Synopsis: Read destination of symbolic link
Declaration: function fpReadLink(name: PChar;linkname: PChar;maxlen: size_t) : cint
function fpReadLink(const Name: RawByteString) : RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: FpReadLink returns the file the symbolic link name is pointing to. The first form of this function
accepts a buffer linkname of length maxlen where the filename will be stored. It returns the
actual number of characters stored in the buffer.
The second form of the function returns simply the name of the file.
Errors: On error, the first form of the function returns -1; the second one returns an empty string. Extended
error information is returned by the FpGetErrno (169) function.
SYS_ENOTDIRA part of the path in Name is not a directory.

SYS_EINVALmaxlen is not positive, or the file is not a symbolic link.
SYS_ENAMETOOLONGA pathname, or a component of a pathname, was too long.
187
SYS_ENOENTthe link name does not exist.

SYS_EACCESNo permission to search a directory in the path
SYS_ELOOPToo many symbolic links were encountered in translating the pathname.
SYS_EIOAn I/O error occurred while reading from the file system.
SYS_EFAULTThe buffer is not part of the process’s memory space.
SYS_ENOMEMNot enough kernel memory was available.
See also: FpSymLink (199)
Program Example62 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e ReadLink f u n c t i o n . }
Var F : Text ;
S : String ;
begin
Assign ( F , ’ t e s t . t x t ’ ) ;
Rewrite ( F ) ;
Close ( f ) ;
i f fpSymLink ( ’ t e s t . t x t ’ , ’ new . t x t ’ ) < >0 then
w r i t e l n ( ’ E r r o r when s y m l i n k i n g ! ’ ) ;
S: = fpReadLink ( ’ new . t x t ’ ) ;
I f S= ’ ’ then
Writeln ( ’ Error reading l i n k ! ’ )
Else
W r i t e l n ( ’ L i n k p o i n t s t o : ’ ,S ) ;
{ Now remove l i n k s }
I f f p U n l i n k ( ’ new . t x t ’ ) < >0 then
end .
1.4.58 FpReadV
Synopsis: Vector read: Read into multiple buffers
Declaration: function FpReadV(fd: cint;const iov: piovec;iovcnt: cint) : TsSize
Visibility: default
Description: FpReadV reads data from file descriptor fd and writes it into iovcnt buffers described by the
tiovec (150) buffers pointed to by iov. It works like fpRead (186) only on multiple buffers.
See also: FpWriteV (207), FpPWrite (185), FpPRead (185)
188
1.4.59 FpRename
Synopsis: Rename file
Declaration: function FpRename(old: PChar;newpath: PChar) : cint
function FpRename(const old: RawByteString;const newpath: RawByteString)
: cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpRename renames the file Old to NewPath. NewPath can be in a different directory than Old,
but it cannot be on another partition (device). Any existing file on the new location will be replaced.
If the operation fails, then the Old file will be preserved.
The function returns zero on succes, a nonzero value indicates failure.
Note: There exist a portable alterative to fpRename: system.rename. Please use fpRename only if
you are writing Unix specific code. System.rename will work on all operating systems.
sys_eisdirNewPath exists and is a directory, but Old is not a directory.
sys_exdevNewPath and Old are on different devices.
sys_enotempty or sys_eexistNewPath is an existing, non-empty directory.
sys_ebusyOld or NewPath is a directory and is in use by another process.
sys_einvalNewPath is part of Old.
sys_emlinkOldPath or NewPath already have tha maximum amount of links pointing to them.
sys_enotdirpart of Old or NewPath is not directory.
sys_efaultFor the pchar case: One of the pointers points to an invalid address.
sys_eaccessaccess is denied when attempting to move the file.
sys_enametoolongEither Old or NewPath is too long.
sys_enoenta directory component in Old or NewPath didn’t exist.
sys_enomemnot enough kernel memory.
sys_erofsNewPath or Old is on a read-only file system.
sys_elooptoo many symbolic links were encountered trying to expand Old or NewPath
sys_enospcthe filesystem has no room for the new directory entry.
See also: FpUnLink (204)
1.4.60 FpRmdir
Synopsis: Remove a directory.
Declaration: function FpRmdir(path: PChar) : cint
function FpRmdir(const path: RawByteString) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpRmdir removes the directory Path from the system. The directory must be empty for this call
to succeed, and the user must have the necessary permissions in the parent directory. Only the last
component of the directory is removed, i.e. higher-lying directories are not removed.
On success, zero is returned. A nonzero return value indicates failure.
Note: There exist a portable alterative to fpRmDir: system.rmdir. Please use fpRmDir only if you
are writing Unix specific code. System.rmdir will work on all operating systems.
189
1.4.61 fpSelect
Synopsis: Wait for events on file descriptors
Declaration: function FPSelect(N: cint;readfds: pFDSet;writefds: pFDSet;

exceptfds: pFDSet;TimeOut: ptimeval) : cint
function fpSelect(N: cint;readfds: pFDSet;writefds: pFDSet;
exceptfds: pFDSet;TimeOut: cint) : cint
function fpSelect(var T: Text;TimeOut: ptimeval) : cint
function fpSelect(var T: Text;TimeOut: time_t) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpSelect checks one of the file descriptors in the FDSets to see if the following I/O operation
on the file descriptors will block.
readfds, writefds and exceptfds are pointers to arrays of 256 bits. If you want a file
descriptor to be checked, you set the corresponding element in the array to 1. The other elements
in the array must be set to zero. Three arrays are passed : The entries in readfds are checked to
see if the following read operation will block. The entries in writefds are checked to see if the
following write operation will block, while entries in exceptfds are cheked to see if an exception
occorred on them.
You can use the functions fpFD_ZERO (166), fpFD_Clr (165), fpFD_Set (166) or fpFD_IsSet (165)
to manipulate the individual elements of a set.
The pointers can be Nil.
N is the value of the largest file descriptor in one of the sets, + 1. In other words, it is the position of
the last bit which is set in the array of bits.
TimeOut can be used to set a time limit. If TimeOut can be two types :
1.TimeOut is of type ptimeval and contains a zero time, the call returns immediately. If
TimeOut is Nil, the kernel will wait forever, or until a status changed.
2.TimeOut is of type cint. If it is -1, this has the same effect as a Timeout of type PTime
which is Nil. Otherwise, TimeOut contains a time in milliseconds.
When the TimeOut is reached, or one of the file descriptors has changed, the Select call returns.
On return, it will have modified the entries in the array which have actually changed, and it returns
the number of entries that have been changed. If the timout was reached, and no decsriptor changed,
zero is returned; The arrays of indexes are undefined after that. On error, -1 is returned.
The variant with the text file will execute the FpSelect call on the file descriptor associated with
the text file T
Errors: On error, the function returns -1. Extended error information can be retrieved using fpGetErrno
(169).
SYS_EBADFAn invalid descriptor was specified in one of the sets.

SYS_EINTRA non blocked signal was caught.
SYS_EINVALN is negative or too big.
SYS_ENOMEMSelect was unable to allocate memory for its internal tables.
See also: fpFD_ZERO (166), fpFD_Clr (165), fpFD_Set (166), fpFD_IsSet (165)
190
Program Example33 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e S e l e c t f u n c t i o n . }
Uses BaseUnix ;
Var FDS : T f d s e t ;
begin
f p f d _ z e r o (FDS ) ;
f p f d _ s e t ( 0 ,FDS ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Press t h e <ENTER> t o c o n t i n u e t h e program . ’ ) ;
{ Wait u n t i l F i l e d e s c r i p t o r 0 ( = I n p u t ) changes }
f p S e l e c t ( 1 ,@FDS, n i l , n i l , n i l ) ;
{ Get r i d o f <ENTER> i n b u f f e r }
readln ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Press <ENTER> key i n l e s s than 2 seconds . . . ’ ) ;
Fpfd_zero (FDS ) ;
FpFd_set ( 0 , FDS ) ;
i f f p S e l e c t ( 1 ,@FDS, n i l , n i l , 2 0 0 0 ) > 0 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Thank you ! ’ )
{ FD_ISSET ( 0 ,FDS ) would be t r u e here . }
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ Too l a t e ! ’ ) ;
end .
1.4.62 fpseterrno
Synopsis: Set extended error information.
Declaration: procedure fpseterrno(err: LongInt)
Visibility: default
Description: fpseterrno sets the extended information on the latest error. It is called by all functions that
communicate with the kernel or C library.
Unless a direct kernel call is performed, there should never be any need to call this function.
See also: fpgeterrno (169)
1.4.63 FpSetgid
Synopsis: Set the current group ID
Declaration: function FpSetgid(gid: TGid) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: fpSetUID sets the group ID of the current process. This call will only work if it is executed as
root, or the program is setgid root.
On success, zero is returned, on error -1 is returned.
Errors: Extended error information can be retrieved with fpGetErrNo (169).
See also: FpSetUid (193), FpGetGid (170), FpGetUid (173), FpGetEUid (169), FpGetEGid (168), FpGetPid
(171), FpGetPPid (171)
191
1.4.64 fpSetPriority
Synopsis: Set process priority
Declaration: function fpSetPriority(Which: cint;Who: cint;What: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: fpSetPriority sets the priority with which a process is running. Which process(es) is deter-
mined by the Which and Who variables. Which can be one of the pre-defined constants:
Prio_ProcessWho is interpreted as process ID

Prio_PGrpWho is interpreted as process group ID
Prio_UserWho is interpreted as user ID
Prio is a value in the range -20 to 20.

For an example, see FpNice (181).
The function returns zero on success, -1 on failure
sys_esrchNo process found using which and who.

sys_einvalWhich was not one of Prio_Process, Prio_Grp or Prio_User.
sys_epermA process was found, but neither its effective or real user ID match the effective user ID
of the caller.
sys_eaccesA non-superuser tried to a priority increase.
See also: FpGetPriority (172), FpNice (181)
1.4.65 FpSetRLimit
Synopsis: Set process resource limits
Declaration: function FpSetRLimit(Resource: cint;rlim: PRLimit) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpGetRLimit sets the resource limits for the current process: resource determines the resource
of which the kernel should set the limits (one of the many RLIMIT_* constants). rlim should point
to a TRLimit (151) record which contains the new limits for the resource indicated in resource.
The function returns zero if the resource limits were successfully set.
Errors: On error, -1 is returned and fpgeterrno (169) can be used to retrieve the error code.
See also: FpGetRLimit (172)
1.4.66 FpSetsid
Synopsis: Create a new session.
Declaration: function FpSetsid : TPid
Visibility: default
Description: FpSetsid creates a new session (process group). It returns the new process group id (as returned
by FpGetpgrp (171). This call will fail if the current process is already the process group leader.
192
1.4.67 fpsettimeofday
Synopsis: Set kernel time
Declaration: function fpsettimeofday(tp: ptimeval;tzp: ptimezone) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpSetTimeOfDay sets the kernel time to the number of seconds since 00:00, January 1 1970,
GMT specified in the tp record. This time NOT corrected any way, not taking into account time-
zones, daylight savings time and so on.
It is simply a wrapper to the kernel system call.
See also: #rtl.unix.FPGetTimeOfDay (1772)
1.4.68 FpSetuid
Synopsis: Set the current user ID
Declaration: function FpSetuid(uid: TUid) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: fpSetUID sets the user ID of the current process. This call will only work if it is executed as root,
or the program is setuid root.
On success, zero is returned, on error -1 is returned.
Errors: Extended error information can be retrieved with fpGetErrNo (169).
See also: FpGetGid (170), FpGetUid (173), FpGetEUid (169), FpGetEGid (168), FpGetPid (171), FpGetPPid
(171), FpSetGid (191)
1.4.69 FPSigaction
Synopsis: Install signal handler
Declaration: function FPSigaction(sig: cint;act: psigactionrec;oact: psigactionrec)
: cint
Visibility: default
Description: FPSigaction changes the action to take upon receipt of a signal. Act and Oact are pointers to
a SigActionRec (147) record. Sig specifies the signal, and can be any signal except SIGKILL or
SIGSTOP.
If Act is non-nil, then the new action for signal Sig is taken from it. If OAct is non-nil, the old
action is stored there. Sa_Handler may be SIG_DFL for the default action or SIG_IGN to ignore
the signal. Sa_Mask Specifies which signals should be ignord during the execution of the signal
handler. Sa_Flags Speciefies a series of flags which modify the behaviour of the signal handler.
You can ’or’ none or more of the following :
SA_NOCLDSTOPIf sig is SIGCHLD do not receive notification when child processes stop.
SA_ONESHOT or SA_RESETHANDRestore the signal action to the default state once the signal
handler has been called.
SA_RESTARTFor compatibility with BSD signals.
SA_NOMASK or SA_NODEFERDo not prevent the signal from being received from within its
own signal handler.
193
sys_einvalan invalid signal was specified, or it was SIGKILL or SIGSTOP.

sys_efaultAct,OldAct point outside this process address space
sys_eintrSystem call was interrupted.
See also: FpSigProcMask (197), FpSigPending (196), FpSigSuspend (197), FpKill (174)
Program example57 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e S i g A c t i o n f u n c t i o n . }
{
do a k i l l −USR1 p i d from a n o t h e r t e r m i n a l t o see what happens .
r e p l a c e p i d w i t h t h e r e a l p i d o f t h i s program .
You can g e t t h i s p i d by r u n n i n g ’ ps ’ .
}
uses BaseUnix ;
Var
oa , na : PSigActionRec ;
Procedure DoSig ( s i g : c i n t ) ; cdecl ;
begin
writeln ( ’ Receiving s i g n a l : ’ , sig ) ;
end ;
begin
new( na ) ;
new( oa ) ;
na ^ . sa_Handler : = S i g A c t i o n H a n d l e r ( @DoSig ) ;
f i l l c h a r ( na ^ . Sa_Mask , s i z e o f ( na ^ . sa_mask ) , # 0 ) ;
na ^ . Sa_Flags : = 0 ;
{ $ i f d e f Linux } / / Linux s p e c i f i c
na ^ . Sa_Restorer : = N i l ;
{ $endif }
i f f p S i g A c t i o n ( SigUsr1 , na , oa ) < >0 then
begin
writeln ( ’ Error : ’ , fpgeterrno , ’ . ’ ) ;
halt ( 1 ) ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Send USR1 s i g n a l o r press <ENTER> t o e x i t ’ ) ;
readln ;
end .
1.4.70 FpSigAddSet
Synopsis: Set a signal in a signal set.
Declaration: function FpSigAddSet(var nset: tsigset;signo: cint) : cint

Visibility: default
194
Description: FpSigAddSet adds signal Signo to the signal set nset. The function returns 0 on success.
Errors: If an invalid signal number is given, -1 is returned.
See also: FpSigEmptySet (195), FpSigFillSet (195), FpSigDelSet (195), FpSigIsMember (195)
1.4.71 FpSigDelSet
Synopsis: Remove a signal from a signal set.
Declaration: function FpSigDelSet(var nset: tsigset;signo: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpSigDelSet removes signal Signo to the signal set nset. The function returns 0 on success.
See also: FpSigEmptySet (195), FpSigFillSet (195), FpSigAddSet (194), FpSigIsMember (195)
1.4.72 FpsigEmptySet
Synopsis: Clear all signals from signal set.
Declaration: function FpsigEmptySet(var nset: tsigset) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpSigEmptySet clears all signals from the signal set nset.
Errors: None. This function always returns zero.
See also: FpSigFillSet (195), FpSigAddSet (194), FpSigDelSet (195), FpSigIsMember (195)
1.4.73 FpSigFillSet
Synopsis: Set all signals in signal set.
Declaration: function FpSigFillSet(var nset: tsigset) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpSigFillSet sets all signals in the signal set nset.
Errors: None. This function always returns zero.
See also: FpSigEmptySet (195), FpSigAddSet (194), FpSigDelSet (195), FpSigIsMember (195)
1.4.74 FpSigIsMember
Synopsis: Check whether a signal appears in a signal set.
Declaration: function FpSigIsMember(const nset: tsigset;signo: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpSigIsMember checks whether SigNo appears in the set nset. If it is a member, then 1 is
returned. If not, zero is returned.
See also: FpSigEmptySet (195), FpSigFillSet (195), FpSigAddSet (194), FpSigDelSet (195)
195
1.4.75 FpSignal
Synopsis: Install signal handler (deprecated)
Declaration: function FpSignal(signum: LongInt;Handler: signalhandler)
: signalhandler
Visibility: default
Description: FPSignal installs a new signal handler (specified by Handler) for signal SigNum.
This call has a subset of the functionality provided by the FpSigAction (193) call. The return value
for FpSignal is the old signal handler, or nil on error.
SIG_ERRAn error occurred.
See also: FpSigAction (193), FpKill (174)
Program example58 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e S i g n a l f u n c t i o n . }
{
do a k i l l −USR1 p i d from a n o t h e r t e r m i n a l t o see what happens .
r e p l a c e p i d w i t h t h e r e a l p i d o f t h i s program .
You can g e t t h i s p i d by r u n n i n g ’ ps ’ .
}
uses BaseUnix ;
Procedure DoSig ( s i g : c i n t ) ; cdecl ;
begin
end ;
begin
i f f p S i g n a l ( SigUsr1 , S i g n a l H a n d l e r ( @DoSig ) ) = s i g n a l h a n d l e r ( SIG_ERR ) then
begin
w r i t e l n ( ’ E r r o r : ’ , fpGetErrno , ’ . ’ ) ;
halt ( 1 ) ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Send USR1 s i g n a l o r press <ENTER> t o e x i t ’ ) ;
readln ;
end .
1.4.76 FpSigPending
Synopsis: Return set of currently pending signals
Declaration: function FpSigPending(var nset: tsigset) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: fpSigpending allows the examination of pending signals (which have been raised while blocked.)
The signal mask of pending signals is returned.
196
Errors: None
See also: fpSigAction (193), fpSigProcMask (197), fpSigSuspend (197), fpSignal (196), fpKill (174)
1.4.77 FpSigProcMask
Synopsis: Set list of blocked signals
Declaration: function FpSigProcMask(how: cint;nset: psigset;oset: psigset) : cint
function FpSigProcMask(how: cint;constref nset: tsigset;
var oset: tsigset) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: Changes the list of currently blocked signals. The behaviour of the call depends on How :
SIG_BLOCKThe set of blocked signals is the union of the current set and the nset argument.
SIG_UNBLOCKThe signals in nset are removed from the set of currently blocked signals.
SIG_SETMASKThe list of blocked signals is set so nset.
If oset is non-nil, then the old set is stored in it.

Errors: Errno is used to report errors.
sys_efaultoset or nset point to an adress outside the range of the process.

sys_eintrSystem call was interrupted.
See also: fpSigAction (193), fpSigPending (196), fpSigSuspend (197), fpKill (174)
1.4.78 FpSigSuspend
Synopsis: Set signal mask and suspend process till signal is received
Declaration: function FpSigSuspend(const sigmask: tsigset) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: fpSigSuspend temporarily replaces the signal mask for the process with the one given in SigMask,
and then suspends the process until a signal is received.
Errors: None
See also: fpSigAction (193), fpSigProcMask (197), fpSigPending (196), fpSignal (196), fpKill (174)
1.4.79 FpSigTimedWait
Synopsis: Wait for signal, with timeout
Declaration: function FpSigTimedWait(const sigset: tsigset;info: psiginfo;
timeout: ptimespec) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpSigTimedWait will suspend the current thread and wait for one of the signals in sigset to
be delivered. information on the delivered signal is placed in the location provided by info (or in
info itself, if the Var variant of the call is used). If the signal is not delivered within the time limit
set in timeout, then the call will return -1, and fpGetErrno will return EAGAIN.
On success, the signal number is returned.
197
Errors: On error, -1 is returned, and extended error information can be obtained with fpGetErrno.
See also: FpSigSuspend (197)
1.4.80 FpSleep
Synopsis: Suspend process for several seconds
Declaration: function FpSleep(seconds: cuint) : cuint

Visibility: default
Description: FpSleep suspends the process till a time period as specified in seconds has passed, then the
function returns. If the call was interrupted (e.g. by some signal) then the function may return
earlier, and the return value is the remaining time till the end of the intended period.
If the function returns without error, the return value is zero.
See also: fpPause (184), fpAlarm (156), fpNanoSleep (180)
program example73 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e FpSleep f u n c t i o n . }
uses BaseUnix ;
Var
Res : L o n g i n t ;
begin
Write ( ’ Sleep r e t u r n e d : ’ ) ;
Flush ( Output ) ;
Res : = ( f p S l e e p ( 1 0 ) ) ;
Writeln ( res ) ;
I f ( res < >0) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Remaining seconds : ’ , res ) ;
end .
1.4.81 FpStat
Synopsis: Retrieve file information about a file descriptor.
Declaration: function FpStat(path: PChar;var buf: Stat) : cint
function FpStat(const path: RawByteString;var buf: Stat) : cint
function FpStat(path: ShortString;var buf: Stat) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpFStat gets information about the file specified in Path, and stores it in Info, which is of
type stat (148). The function returns zero if the call was succesfull, a nonzero return value indicates
failure.
198
See also: FpStat (198), FpLStat (176)
program example28 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e F S t a t f u n c t i o n . }
uses BaseUnix ;
var f : t e x t ;
i : byte ;
info : stat ;
begin
{ Make a f i l e }
assign ( f , ’ t e s t . f i l ’ ) ;
rewrite ( f ) ;
close ( f ) ;
begin
halt ( 1 ) ;
end ;
writeln ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ R e s u l t o f f s t a t on f i l e ’ ’ t e s t . f i l ’ ’ . ’ ) ;
{ Remove f i l e }
erase ( f ) ;
end .
1.4.82 fpSymlink
Synopsis: Create a symbolic link
Declaration: function fpSymlink(oldname: PChar;newname: PChar) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: SymLink makes NewName point to the file in OldName, which doesn’t necessarily exist. The two
files DO NOT have the same inode number. This is known as a ’soft’ link.
The permissions of the link are irrelevant, as they are not used when following the link. Ownership
of the file is only checked in case of removal or renaming of the link.
The function returns zero if the call was succesful, a nonzero value if the call failed.
199
sys_epermThe filesystem containing oldpath and newpath does not support linking files.
sys_eaccessWrite access for the directory containing Newpath is disallowed, or one of the directo-
ries in OldPath or NewPath has no search (=execute) permission.
sys_enoentA directory entry in OldPath or NewPath does not exist or is a symbolic link pointing
to a non-existent directory.
sys_enotdirA directory entry in OldPath or NewPath is nor a directory.
sys_erofsThe files are on a read-only filesystem.
sys_eexistNewPath already exists.
sys_eloopOldPath or NewPath has a reference to a circular symbolic link, i.e. a symbolic link,
whose expansion points to itself.
sys_enospcThe device containing NewPath has no room for another entry.
See also: FpLink (174), FpUnLink (204), FpReadLink (187)
Program Example22 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e SymLink and UnLink f u n c t i o n s . }
Uses baseunix , Unix ;
Var F : Text ;
S : String ;
begin
Assign ( F , ’ t e s t . t x t ’ ) ;
Rewrite ( F ) ;
Close ( f ) ;
i f fpSymLink ( ’ t e s t . t x t ’ , ’ new . t x t ’ ) < >0 then
w r i t e l n ( ’ E r r o r when s y m l i n k i n g ! ’ ) ;
{ Removing t e s t . t x t s t i l l l e a v e s new . t x t
P o i n t i n g now t o a non−e x i s t e n t f i l e ! }
Assign ( f , ’ new . t x t ’ ) ;
{ T h i s should f a i l , s i n c e t h e s y m b o l i c l i n k
p o i n t s t o a non−e x i s t e n t f i l e ! }
{ $ i −}
Reset ( F ) ;
{ $i+}
I f IOResult =0 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ T h i s shouldn ’ ’ t happen ’ ) ;
{ Now remove new . t x t a l s o }
I f f p U n l i n k ( ’ new . t x t ’ ) < >0 then
end .
200
1.4.83 fpS_ISBLK
Synopsis: Is file a block device
Declaration: function fpS_ISBLK(m: TMode) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: FpS_ISBLK checks the file mode m to see whether the file is a block device file. If so it returns
True.
See also: FpFStat (166), FpS_ISLNK (202), FpS_ISREG (202), FpS_ISDIR (201), FpS_ISCHR (201), FpS_ISFIFO
(201), FpS_ISSOCK (203)
1.4.84 fpS_ISCHR
Synopsis: Is file a character device
Declaration: function fpS_ISCHR(m: TMode) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: FpS_ISCHR checks the file mode m to see whether the file is a character device file. If so it returns
True.
See also: FpFStat (166), FpS_ISLNK (202), FpS_ISREG (202), FpS_ISDIR (201), FpS_ISBLK (200), FpS_ISFIFO
(201), FpS_ISSOCK (203)
1.4.85 fpS_ISDIR
Synopsis: Is file a directory
Declaration: function fpS_ISDIR(m: TMode) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: fpS_ISDIR checks the file mode m to see whether the file is a directory. If so, it returns True
See also: FpFStat (166), FpS_ISLNK (202), FpS_ISREG (202), FpS_ISCHR (201), FpS_ISBLK (200), fpS_ISFIFO
(201), FpS_ISSOCK (203)
1.4.86 fpS_ISFIFO
Synopsis: Is file a FIFO
Declaration: function fpS_ISFIFO(m: TMode) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: FpS_ISFIFO checks the file mode m to see whether the file is a fifo (a named pipe). If so it returns
True.
See also: FpFStat (166), FpS_ISLNK (202), FpS_ISREG (202), FpS_ISCHR (201), FpS_ISBLK (200), FpS_ISDIR
(201), FpS_ISSOCK (203)
201
1.4.87 fpS_ISLNK
Synopsis: Is file a symbolic link
Declaration: function fpS_ISLNK(m: TMode) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: FpS_ISLNK checks the file mode m to see whether the file is a symbolic link. If so it returns True
See also: FpFStat (166), FpS_ISFIFO (201), FpS_ISREG (202), FpS_ISCHR (201), FpS_ISBLK (200), FpS_ISDIR
(201), FpS_ISSOCK (203)
Program Example53 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e S_ISLNK f u n c t i o n . }
Var I n f o : S t a t ;
begin
i f f p L S t a t ( paramstr ( 1 ) , @info ) = 0 then
begin
i f fpS_ISLNK ( i n f o . st_mode ) then
Writeln ( ’ F i l e i s a l i n k ’ ) ;
i f fpS_ISREG ( i n f o . st_mode ) then
Writeln ( ’ F i l e i s a r e g u l a r f i l e ’ ) ;
i f fpS_ISDIR ( i n f o . st_mode ) then
Writeln ( ’ F i l e i s a d i r e c t o r y ’ ) ;
i f fpS_ISCHR ( i n f o . st_mode ) then
Writeln ( ’ F i l e i s a character device f i l e ’ ) ;
i f fpS_ISBLK ( i n f o . st_mode ) then
Writeln ( ’ F i l e i s a block device f i l e ’ ) ;
i f fpS_ISFIFO ( i n f o . st_mode ) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ F i l e i s a named p i p e ( FIFO ) ’ ) ;
i f fpS_ISSOCK ( i n f o . st_mode ) then
Writeln ( ’ F i l e i s a socket ’ ) ;
end ;
end .
1.4.88 fpS_ISREG
Synopsis: Is file a regular file
Declaration: function fpS_ISREG(m: TMode) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: FpS_ISREG checks the file mode m to see whether the file is a regular file. If so it returns True
See also: FpFStat (166), FpS_ISFIFO (201), FpS_ISLNK (202), FpS_ISCHR (201), FpS_ISBLK (200), FpS_ISDIR
(201), FPS_ISSOCK (203)
202
1.4.89 fpS_ISSOCK
Synopsis: Is file a unix socket
Declaration: function fpS_ISSOCK(m: TMode) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: FpS_ISSOCK checks the file mode m to see whether the file is a socket. If so it returns True.
See also: FpFStat (166), FpS_ISFIFO (201), FpS_ISLNK (202), FpS_ISCHR (201), FpS_ISBLK (200), FpS_ISDIR
(201), FpS_ISREG (202)
1.4.90 fptime
Synopsis: Return the current unix time
Declaration: function FpTime(var tloc: TTime) : TTime
function fptime : time_t
Visibility: default
Description: FpTime returns the number of seconds since 00:00:00 GMT, january 1, 1970. it is adjusted to the
local time zone, but not to DST. The result is also stored in tloc, if it is specified.
Errors: On error, -1 is returned. Extended error information can be retrieved using fpGetErrno (169).
Program Example1 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e f p t i m e f u n c t i o n . }
Uses baseunix ;
begin
Write ( ’ Secs p a s t t h e s t a r t o f t h e Epoch ( 0 0 : 0 0 1 / 1 / 1 9 8 0 ) : ’ ) ;
Writeln ( fptime ) ;
end .
1.4.91 FpTimes
Synopsis: Return execution times for the current process
Declaration: function FpTimes(var buffer: tms) : TClock
Visibility: default
Description: fpTimes stores the execution time of the current process and child processes in buffer.
The return value (on linux) is the number of clock ticks since boot time. On error, -1 is returned, and
extended error information can be retrieved with fpGetErrno (169).
See also: fpUTime (205)
203
1.4.92 FpUmask
Synopsis: Set file creation mask.
Declaration: function FpUmask(cmask: TMode) : TMode
Visibility: default
Description: fpUmask changes the file creation mask for the current user to cmask. The current mask is re-
turned.
See also: fpChmod (157)
Program Example27 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Umask f u n c t i o n . }
Uses BaseUnix ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Old Umask was : ’ , fpUmask ( & 1 1 1 ) ) ;
WRiteln ( ’New Umask i s : ’ ,&111);
end .
1.4.93 FpUname
Synopsis: Return system name.
Declaration: function FpUname(var name: UtsName) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: Uname gets the name and configuration of the current linux kernel, and returns it in the name
record.
On success, 0 is returned, on error, -1 is returned.
See also: FpUTime (205)
1.4.94 FpUnlink
Synopsis: Unlink (i.e. remove) a file.
Declaration: function FpUnlink(path: PChar) : cint
function FpUnlink(const path: RawByteString) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpUnlink decreases the link count on file Path. Path can be of type AnsiString or PChar.
If the link count is zero, the file is removed from the disk.
The function returns zero if the call was succesfull, a nonzero value indicates failure.
Note: There exist a portable alterative to erase files: system.erase. Please use fpUnlink only if you
are writing Unix specific code. System.erase will work on all operating systems.
For an example, see FpLink (174).
204
sys_eaccessYou have no write access right in the directory containing Path, or you have no search
permission in one of the directory components of Path.
sys_epermThe directory containing pathname has the sticky-bit set and the process’s effective uid is
neither the uid of the file to be deleted nor that of the directory containing it.
sys_enoentA component of the path doesn’t exist.
sys_enotdirA directory component of the path is not a directory.
sys_eisdirPath refers to a directory.
sys_erofsPath is on a read-only filesystem.
See also: FpLink (174), FpSymLink (199)
1.4.95 FpUtime
Synopsis: Set access and modification times of a file (touch).
Declaration: function FpUtime(path: PChar;times: pUtimBuf) : cint
function FpUtime(const path: RawByteString;times: pUtimBuf) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpUtime sets the access and modification times of the file specified in Path. the times record
contains 2 fields, actime, and modtime, both of type time_t (commonly a longint). They
should be filled with an epoch-like time, specifying, respectively, the last access time, and the last
modification time. For some filesystem (most notably, FAT), these times are the same.
The function returns zero on success, a nonzero return value indicates failure.

directory.
Other errors may occur, but aren’t documented.

See also: FpTime (203), FpChown (158), FpAccess (155)
Program Example25 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e UTime f u n c t i o n . }
Uses Dos , BaseUnix , Unix , U n i x U t i l ;
Var u t i m : u t i m b u f ;
dow , msec , year , month , day , hour , minute , second : Word ;
begin
{ Set access and m o d i f i c a t i o n t i m e o f e x e c u t a b l e source }
GetTime ( hour , minute , second , msec ) ;
GetDate ( year , month , day , dow ) ;
u t i m . actime : = LocalToEpoch ( year , month , day , hour , minute , second ) ;
205
u t i m . modtime : = u t i m . actime ;
i f Fputime ( ’ ex25 . pp ’ , @utim) < >0 then
w r i t e l n ( ’ C a l l t o UTime f a i l e d ! ’ )
else
begin
Write ( ’ Set access and m o d i f i c a t i o n t i m e s t o : ’ );
Write ( Hour : 2 , ’ : ’ , minute : 2 , ’ : ’ , second , ’ , ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Day : 2 , ’ / ’ , month : 2 , ’ / ’ , year : 4 ) ;
end ;
end .
1.4.96 FpWait
Synopsis: Wait for a child to exit.
Declaration: function FpWait(var stat_loc: cint) : TPid

Visibility: default
Description: fpWait suspends the current process and waits for any child to exit or stop due to a signal. It
reports the exit status of the exited child in stat_loc.
The return value of the function is the process ID of the child that exited, or -1 on error.
Errors: Extended error information can be retrieved using fpgetErrno (169).
See also: fpFork (166), fpExecve (163), fpWaitPid (206)
1.4.97 FpWaitPid
Synopsis: Wait for a process to terminate
Declaration: function FpWaitpid(pid: TPid;stat_loc: pcint;options: cint) : TPid
function FpWaitPid(pid: TPid;var Status: cint;Options: cint) : TPid
Visibility: default
Description: fpWaitPid waits for a child process with process ID Pid to exit. The value of Pid can be one of
the following:
Pid < -1Causes fpWaitPid to wait for any child process whose process group ID equals the abso-
lute value of pid.
Pid = -1Causes fpWaitPid to wait for any child process.
Pid = 0Causes fpWaitPid to wait for any child process whose process group ID equals the one of
the calling process.
Pid > 0Causes fpWaitPid to wait for the child whose process ID equals the value of Pid.
The Options parameter can be used to specify further how fpWaitPid behaves:
WNOHANGCauses fpWaitpid to return immediately if no child hasexited.

WUNTRACEDCauses fpWaitPid to return also for children which are stopped, but whose status
has not yet been reported.
__WCLONECauses fpWaitPid also to wait for threads created by the #rtl.linux.Clone (882) call.
206
The exit status of the process that caused fpWaitPID is reported in stat_loc or Status.
Upon return, it returns the process id of the process that exited, 0 if no process exited, or -1 in case
of failure.
For an example, see fpFork (166).
Errors: Extended error information can be retrieved using fpgetErrno (169).

See also: fpFork (166), fpExecve (163), fpWait (206)
1.4.98 FpWrite
Synopsis: Write data to file descriptor
Declaration: function FpWrite(fd: cint;buf: PChar;nbytes: TSize) : TsSize
function FpWrite(fd: cint;const buf;nbytes: TSize) : TsSize
Visibility: default
Description: FpWrite writes at most nbytes bytes from buf to file descriptor fd.
The function returns the number of bytes actually written, or -1 if an error occurred.

See also: FpOpen (181), FpClose (159), FpRead (186), FpFTruncate (168), FpLSeek (175)
1.4.99 FpWriteV
Synopsis: Vector write: Write from multiple buffers to a file descriptor
Declaration: function FpWriteV(fd: cint;const iov: piovec;iovcnt: cint) : TsSize

Visibility: default
Description: FpWriteV writes data to file descriptor fd. The data is taken from iovcnt buffers described by
the tiovec (150) buffers pointed to by iov. It works like fpWrite (207) only from multiple buffers.

See also: FpReadV (188), FpPWrite (185), FpPRead (185)
1.4.100 FreeShellArgV
Synopsis: Free the result of a CreateShellArgV (155) function
Declaration: procedure FreeShellArgV(p: PPChar)

Visibility: default
Description: FreeShellArgV frees the memory pointed to by P, which was allocated by a call to CreateShel-
lArgV (155).
Errors: None.
See also: CreateShellArgV (155)
207
1.4.101 wexitStatus
Synopsis: Extract the exit status from the fpWaitPID (206) result.
Declaration: function wexitStatus(Status: cint) : cint

Visibility: default
Description: WEXITSTATUS can be used to extract the exit status from Status, the result of the FpWaitPID
(206) call.
See also: FpWaitPID (206), WTERMSIG (209), WSTOPSIG (208), WIFEXITED (208), WIFSIGNALED
(208)
1.4.102 wifexited
Synopsis: Check whether the process exited normally
Declaration: function wifexited(Status: cint) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: WIFEXITED checks Status and returns True if the status indicates that the process terminated
normally, i.e. was not stopped by a signal.
See also: FpWaitPID (206), WTERMSIG (209), WSTOPSIG (208), WIFSIGNALED (208), WEXITSTATUS
(208)
1.4.103 wifsignaled
Synopsis: Check whether the process was exited by a signal.
Declaration: function wifsignaled(Status: cint) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: WIFSIGNALED returns True if Status indicates that the process exited because it received a
signal.
See also: FpWaitPID (206), WTERMSIG (209), WSTOPSIG (208), WIFEXITED (208), WEXITSTATUS
(208)
1.4.104 wstopsig
Synopsis: Return the exit code from the process.
Declaration: function wstopsig(Status: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: WSTOPSIG is an alias for WEXITSTATUS (208).

See also: FpWaitPID (206), WTERMSIG (209), WIFEXITED (208), WIFSIGNALED (208), WEXITSTA-
TUS (208)
208
1.4.105 wtermsig
Synopsis: Return the signal that caused a process to exit.
Declaration: function wtermsig(Status: cint) : cint

Visibility: default
Description: WTERMSIG extracts from Status the signal number which caused the process to exit.
See also: FpWaitPID (206), WSTOPSIG (208), WIFEXITED (208), WIFSIGNALED (208), WEXITSTATUS
(208)
209
Chapter 2
Reference for unit ’character’
2.1 Used units
Table 2.1: Used units by unit ’character’
Name Page
System 1224
unicodedata 1715
2.2 Overview
The character unit contains the TCharacter (217) class, which consists mainly of class functions. It
should not be constructed, but its class methods can be used. All class methods also exist as regular
methods.
Many routines depend on unicode collation data to be present in the binary (or distributed on disc
with the application. This data can be loaded using the routines in the unicodedata (1715) unit.. The
FPC project distributes some unicode collation data in .bco files which can be loaded using the
LoadCollation (1724) routine from that unit.

2.3.1 Types
TCharacterOption = (coIgnoreInvalidSequence)
Table 2.2: Enumeration values for type TCharacterOption
Value Explanation
coIgnoreInvalidSequence Ignore invalid unicodecode sequences
TCharacterOption is used in the toUpper (217) and toLower (217) functions to control the
behaviour of the function.
210
CHAPTER 2. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’CHARACTER’
TCharacterOptions = Set of TCharacterOption
TCharacterOptions is the set of TCharacterOption, used in toUpper (217) and toLower

(217) functions to control the behaviour of the function.
TUnicodeCategory = (ucUppercaseLetter,ucLowercaseLetter,
ucTitlecaseLetter,ucModifierLetter,ucOtherLetter,
ucNonSpacingMark,ucCombiningMark,ucEnclosingMark,
ucDecimalNumber,ucLetterNumber,ucOtherNumber,
ucConnectPunctuation,ucDashPunctuation,
ucOpenPunctuation,ucClosePunctuation,
ucInitialPunctuation,ucFinalPunctuation,
ucOtherPunctuation,ucMathSymbol,ucCurrencySymbol,
ucModifierSymbol,ucOtherSymbol,ucSpaceSeparator,
ucLineSeparator,ucParagraphSeparator,ucControl,
ucFormat,ucSurrogate,ucPrivateUse,ucUnassigned)
Table 2.3: Enumeration values for type TUnicodeCategory
Value Explanation
ucClosePunctuation Punctuation, close (Pe)
ucCombiningMark Mark, spacing combining (Mc)
ucConnectPunctuation Punctuation, connector (Pc)
ucControl Other, control (Cc)
ucCurrencySymbol Symbol, currency (Sc)
ucDashPunctuation Punctuation, dash (Pd)
ucDecimalNumber Number, decimal digit (Nd)
ucEnclosingMark Mark, enclosing (Me)
ucFinalPunctuation Punctuation, final quote (Pf, may behave like Ps or Pe depending on usage)
ucFormat Other, format (Cf)
ucInitialPunctuation Punctuation, initial quote (Pi, may behave like Ps or Pe depending on usage)
ucLetterNumber Number, letter (Nl)
ucLineSeparator Separator, line (Zl)
ucLowercaseLetter Letter, lowercase (Ll)
ucMathSymbol Symbol, math (Sm)
ucModifierLetter Letter, modifier (Lm)
ucModifierSymbol Symbol, modifier (Sk)
ucNonSpacingMark Mark, nonspacing (Mn)
ucOpenPunctuation Punctuation, open (Ps)
ucOtherLetter Letter, other (Lo)
ucOtherNumber Number, other (No)
ucOtherPunctuation Punctuation, other (Po)
ucOtherSymbol Symbol, other (So)
ucParagraphSeparator Separator, paragraph (Zp)
ucPrivateUse Other, private use (Co)
ucSpaceSeparator Separator, space (Zs)
ucSurrogate Other, surrogate (Cs)
ucTitlecaseLetter Letter, titlecase (Lt)
ucUnassigned Other, not assigned (including noncharacters) (Cn)
ucUppercaseLetter Letter, uppercase (Lu)
211
This enumeration type contains the characterization of all possible unicode characters. It is used in
the GetUnicodeCategory (213) and TCharacter.GetUnicodeCategory (220) functions.
TUnicodeCategorySet = Set of TUnicodeCategory
TUnicodeCategorySet is the set of TUnicodeCategory (211). It is used internally in the TChar-

acter (217) class.

2.4.1 ConvertFromUtf32
Synopsis: alias for TCharacter.ConvertFromUtf32
Declaration: function ConvertFromUtf32(AChar: UCS4Char) : UnicodeString
Visibility: default
Description: ConvertFromUtf32 is a shortcut for TCharacter.ConvertFromUtf32 (218).

See also: TCharacter.ConvertFromUtf32 (218)
2.4.2 ConvertToUtf32
Synopsis: alias for TCharacter.ConvertToUtf32
Declaration: function ConvertToUtf32(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)

: UCS4Char; Overload
function ConvertToUtf32(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer;
out ACharLength: Integer) : UCS4Char; Overload
function ConvertToUtf32(const AHighSurrogate: UnicodeChar;
const ALowSurrogate: UnicodeChar) : UCS4Char
; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: ConvertToUtf32 is a shortcut for TCharacter.ConvertToUtf32 (219).
See also: TCharacter.ConvertToUtf32 (219)
2.4.3 GetNumericValue
Synopsis: Alias for TCharacter.GetNumericValue
Declaration: function GetNumericValue(AChar: UnicodeChar) : Double; Overload
function GetNumericValue(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
: Double; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: GetNumericValue is a shortcut for TCharacter.GetNumericValue (219).
See also: TCharacter.GetNumericValue (219)
212
2.4.4 GetUnicodeCategory
Synopsis: Alias for TCharacter.GetUnicodeCategory
Declaration: function GetUnicodeCategory(AChar: UnicodeChar) : TUnicodeCategory

; Overload
function GetUnicodeCategory(const AString: UnicodeString;
AIndex: Integer) : TUnicodeCategory
; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: GetUnicodeCategory is a shortcut for TCharacter.GetUnicodeCategory (220).
See also: TCharacter.GetUnicodeCategory (220)
2.4.5 IsControl
Synopsis: Alias for TCharacter.IsControl
Declaration: function IsControl(AChar: UnicodeChar) : Boolean; Overload
function IsControl(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
: Boolean; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: IsControl is a shortcut for TCharacter.IsControl (220).
See also: TCharacter.IsControl (220)
2.4.6 IsDigit
Synopsis: Alias for TCharacter.IsDigit
Declaration: function IsDigit(AChar: UnicodeChar) : Boolean; Overload

function IsDigit(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer) : Boolean
; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: IsDigit is a shortcut for TCharacter.IsDigit (220).

See also: TCharacter.IsDigit (220)
2.4.7 IsHighSurrogate
Synopsis: Alias for TCharacter.IsHighSurrogate
Declaration: function IsHighSurrogate(AChar: UnicodeChar) : Boolean; Overload

function IsHighSurrogate(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
: Boolean; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: IsHighSurrogate is a shortcut for TCharacter.IsHighSurrogate (221)

See also: TCharacter.IsHighSurrogate (221)
213
2.4.8 IsLetter
Synopsis: Alias for TCharacter.IsLetter
Declaration: function IsLetter(AChar: UnicodeChar) : Boolean; Overload

function IsLetter(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
: Boolean; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: IsLetter is a shortcut for TCharacter.IsLetter (222)

See also: TCharacter.IsLetter (222)
2.4.9 IsLetterOrDigit
Synopsis: Alias for TCharacter.IsLetterOrDigit
Declaration: function IsLetterOrDigit(AChar: UnicodeChar) : Boolean; Overload

function IsLetterOrDigit(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
: Boolean; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: IsLetterOrDigit is a shortcut for TCharacter.IsLetterOrDigit (223).
See also: TCharacter.IsLetterOrDigit (223)
2.4.10 IsLower
Synopsis: Alias for TCharacter.IsLower
Declaration: function IsLower(AChar: UnicodeChar) : Boolean; Overload
function IsLower(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer) : Boolean
; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: IsLower is a shortcut for TCharacter.IsLower (223)
See also: TCharacter.IsLower (223)
2.4.11 IsLowSurrogate
Synopsis: Alias for TCharacter.IsLowSurrogate
Declaration: function IsLowSurrogate(AChar: UnicodeChar) : Boolean; Overload
function IsLowSurrogate(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
: Boolean; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: IsLowSurrogate is a shortcut for TCharacter.IsLowSurrogate (222)
See also: TCharacter.IsLowSurrogate (222)
214
2.4.12 IsNumber
Synopsis: Alias for TCharacter.IsNumber
Declaration: function IsNumber(AChar: UnicodeChar) : Boolean; Overload

function IsNumber(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
: Boolean; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: IsNumber is a shortcut for TCharacter.IsNumber (224)

See also: TCharacter.IsNumber (224)
2.4.13 IsPunctuation
Synopsis: Alias for TCharacter.IsPunctuation
Declaration: function IsPunctuation(AChar: UnicodeChar) : Boolean; Overload

function IsPunctuation(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
: Boolean; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: IsPunctuation is a shortcut for TCharacter.IsPunctuation (224)
See also: TCharacter.IsPunctuation (224)
2.4.14 IsSeparator
Synopsis: Alias for TCharacter.IsSeparator
Declaration: function IsSeparator(AChar: UnicodeChar) : Boolean; Overload
function IsSeparator(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
: Boolean; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: IsSeparator is a shortcut for TCharacter.IsSeparator (224)
See also: TCharacter.IsSeparator (224)
2.4.15 IsSurrogate
Synopsis: Alias for TCharacter.IsSurrogate
Declaration: function IsSurrogate(AChar: UnicodeChar) : Boolean; Overload
function IsSurrogate(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
: Boolean; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: IsSurrogate is a shortcut for TCharacter.IsSurrogate (221).
See also: TCharacter.IsSurrogate (221)
215
2.4.16 IsSurrogatePair
Synopsis: Alias for TCharacter.IsSurrogatePair
Declaration: function IsSurrogatePair(const AHighSurrogate: UnicodeChar;

const ALowSurrogate: UnicodeChar) : Boolean
; Overload
function IsSurrogatePair(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
: Boolean; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: IsSurrogatePair is a shortcut for TCharacter.IsSurrogatePair (222)
See also: TCharacter.IsSurrogatePair (222)
2.4.17 IsSymbol
Synopsis: Alias for TCharacter.IsSymbol
Declaration: function IsSymbol(AChar: UnicodeChar) : Boolean; Overload
function IsSymbol(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
: Boolean; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: IsSymbol is a shortcut for TCharacter.IsSymbol (225)
See also: TCharacter.IsSymbol (225)
2.4.18 IsUpper
Synopsis: Alias for TCharacter.IsUpper
Declaration: function IsUpper(AChar: UnicodeChar) : Boolean; Overload

function IsUpper(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer) : Boolean
; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: IsUpper is a shortcut for TCharacter.IsUpper (225)

See also: TCharacter.IsUpper (225)
2.4.19 IsWhiteSpace
Synopsis: Alias for TCharacter.IsWhiteSpace
Declaration: function IsWhiteSpace(AChar: UnicodeChar) : Boolean; Overload

function IsWhiteSpace(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
: Boolean; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: IsWhiteSpace is a shortcut for TCharacter.IsWhiteSpace (226)

See also: TCharacter.IsWhiteSpace (226)
216
2.4.20 ToLower
Synopsis: Alias for TCharacter.ToLower
Declaration: function ToLower(AChar: UnicodeChar) : UnicodeChar; Overload

function ToLower(const AString: UnicodeString) : UnicodeString
; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: ToLower is a shortcut for TCharacter.ToLower (226)

See also: TCharacter.ToLower (226)
2.4.21 ToUpper
Synopsis: Alias for TCharacter.ToUpper
Declaration: function ToUpper(AChar: UnicodeChar) : UnicodeChar; Overload

function ToUpper(const AString: UnicodeString) : UnicodeString
; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: ToUpper is a shortcut for TCharacter.ToUpper (226)
See also: TCharacter.ToUpper (226)
2.5 TCharacter
2.5.1 Description
TCharacter is provided for Delphi compatibility. All it’s class functions and methods are also
available as regular functions.
217
2.5.2 Method overview

Page Method Description
218 ConvertFromUtf32 Convert a UTF32 character to UnicodeString
219 ConvertToUtf32 Convert a UTF16 character to a UTF32 character
218 Create Constructor (do not call)
219 GetNumericValue Get the numeric value of the character
220 GetUnicodeCategory Get the unicode category of a character
220 IsControl Check whether a unicode character is a unicode control character
220 IsDigit Check whether a unicode character is a digit
221 IsHighSurrogate Check whether a unicode character is a surrogate in the high range
222 IsLetter Check if a unicode character is a letter.
223 IsLetterOrDigit Check if a unicode character is a letter or digit
223 IsLower Check if a unicode character is a lowercase letter
222 IsLowSurrogate Check whether a unicode character is a surrogate in the low range
224 IsNumber Check if a unicode character is a number
224 IsPunctuation Check if a unicode character is a punctuation character
224 IsSeparator Check if a unicode character is a separator character
221 IsSurrogate Check whether a unicode character is a surrogate
222 IsSurrogatePair Check if a pair of characters is a set of high/low surrorgate char-
acters
225 IsSymbol Check if a unicode character is a symbol character
225 IsUpper Check whether a unicode character is an uppercase letter
226 IsWhiteSpace Check whether a unicode character is a whitespace character
226 ToLower Convert a character or string to lowercase
226 ToUpper Convert a character or string to uppercase
2.5.3 TCharacter.Create
Synopsis: Constructor (do not call)
Declaration: constructor Create
Visibility: public
Description: Create is provided for completeness and Delphi compatibility, but should not be called in FPC
code, it will raise an exception.
Errors: Any attempt to call Create will result in an exception being raised.
2.5.4 TCharacter.ConvertFromUtf32
Synopsis: Convert a UTF32 character to UnicodeString
Declaration: class function ConvertFromUtf32(AChar: UCS4Char); Static
Visibility: public
Description: TCharacter.ConvertFromUtf32 converts a single UTF32 character AChar to a UTF16
string. This is the opposite of TCharacter.ConvertToUtf32 (219).
The result is a string, since multiple UTF16 characters can be needed to encode a single UTF32
character.
Errors: If AChar is not in the valid range of UTF32 characters, an EArgumentOutOfRangeException (210)
exception is raised.
See also: EArgumentOutOfRangeException (210), TCharacter.ConvertToUtf32 (219)
218
2.5.5 TCharacter.ConvertToUtf32
Synopsis: Convert a UTF16 character to a UTF32 character
Declaration: class function ConvertToUtf32(const AString: UnicodeString;

AIndex: Integer); Overload; Static
class function ConvertToUtf32(const AString: UnicodeString;
AIndex: Integer;out ACharLength: Integer)
; Overload; Static
class function ConvertToUtf32(const AHighSurrogate: UnicodeChar;
const ALowSurrogate: UnicodeChar)
; Overload; Static
Visibility: public
Description: TCharacter.ConvertToUtf32 converts a UTF16-encoded unicode character to a Unicode32

character. This is the opposite of TCharacter.ConvertFromUtf32 (218). The function exists in several
overloaded versions, to be able to present the unicode character in one of 2 ways:
1.As a position AIndex (in unicodechar units) in a string AString to a Unicode32 charac-
ter. The source is a string, since multiple UTF16 characters can be needed to encode a single
UTF32 character. In this form, Optionally, the character length (1 or 2) can be returned in
ACharLength.
2.As 2 UTF16 unicode characters, representing the high and low surrogate pairs: AHighSurrogate
and ALowSurrogate.
Errors: If AIndex is not a valid character index in the string AString, an EArgumentOutOfRangeExcep-
tion (210) exception is raised. If the character at that position is not complete, an EArgumentExcep-
tion (210) exception is raised.
See also: TCharacter.ConvertFromUtf32 (218), EArgumentOutOfRangeException (210), EArgumentExcep-
tion (210)
2.5.6 TCharacter.GetNumericValue
Synopsis: Get the numeric value of the character
Declaration: class function GetNumericValue(AChar: UnicodeChar); Overload; Static
class function GetNumericValue(const AString: UnicodeString;
Visibility: public
Description: TCharacter.GetNumericValue returns the numerical value (ID) of the unicode character.
The character can be presented in 2 ways: AChar, a UTF16 unicode character, or a surrogate pair in
a unicode string AString starting at position AIndex.
See also: TCharacter.GetUnicodeCategory (220)
219
2.5.7 TCharacter.GetUnicodeCategory
Synopsis: Get the unicode category of a character
Declaration: class function GetUnicodeCategory(AChar: UnicodeChar); Overload

; Static
class function GetUnicodeCategory(const AString: UnicodeString;
Visibility: public
Description: TCharacter.GetUnicodeCategory returns the unicode category of a character. The charac-
ter can be presented in 2 ways: AChar, a UTF16 unicode character, or a surrogate pair in a unicode
string AString starting at position AIndex.
See also: TUnicodeCategory (211)
2.5.8 TCharacter.IsControl
Synopsis: Check whether a unicode character is a unicode control character
Declaration: class function IsControl(AChar: UnicodeChar); Overload; Static

class function IsControl(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
; Overload; Static
Visibility: public
Description: IsControl returns True if a unicode character has category ucControl. The character can be
specified as a UTF16 character AChar or a UTF16 encoded character starting at position AIndex
in string AString.
See also: GetUnicodeCategory (220), IsDigit (220), IsSurrogate (221), IsHighSurrogate (221), IsLowSurro-
gate (222), IsSurrogatePair (222), IsLetter (222), IsLetterOrDigit (223), IsLower (223), IsNumber
(224), IsPunctuation (224), IsSeparator (224), IsSymbol (225), IsUpper (225), IsWhiteSpace (226)
2.5.9 TCharacter.IsDigit
Synopsis: Check whether a unicode character is a digit
Declaration: class function IsDigit(AChar: UnicodeChar); Overload; Static
class function IsDigit(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
; Overload; Static
Visibility: public
Description: IsDigit returns True if a unicode character has category ucDecimalNumber. The character
can be specified as a UTF16 character AChar or a UTF16 encoded character starting at position
AIndex in string AString.
220
See also: IsControl (220), IsDigit (220), IsSurrogate (221), IsHighSurrogate (221), IsLowSurrogate (222), Is-
SurrogatePair (222), IsLetter (222), IsLetterOrDigit (223), IsLower (223), IsNumber (224), IsPunc-
tuation (224), IsSeparator (224), IsSymbol (225), IsUpper (225), IsWhiteSpace (226)
2.5.10 TCharacter.IsSurrogate
Synopsis: Check whether a unicode character is a surrogate
Declaration: class function IsSurrogate(AChar: UnicodeChar); Overload; Static
class function IsSurrogate(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
; Overload; Static
Visibility: public
Description: IsSurrogate returns True if a unicode character has category ucSurrogate. The character
can be specified as a UTF16 character AChar or a UTF16 encoded character starting at position
See also: EArgumentException (210), IsControl (220), IsDigit (220), IsHighSurrogate (221), IsLowSurrogate
(222), IsLetter (222), IsLetterOrDigit (223), IsLower (223), IsNumber (224), IsPunctuation (224),
IsSymbol (225), IsUpper (225), IsWhiteSpace (226)
2.5.11 TCharacter.IsHighSurrogate
Synopsis: Check whether a unicode character is a surrogate in the high range
Declaration: class function IsHighSurrogate(AChar: UnicodeChar); Overload; Static
class function IsHighSurrogate(const AString: UnicodeString;
Visibility: public
Description: IsHighSurrogate returns True if a unicode character has category ucSurrogate and is in
the high range of the surrogate characters (between HIGH_SURROGATE_BEGIN and HIGH_SURROGATE_END).
The character can be specified as a UTF16 character AChar or a UTF16 encoded character starting
at position AIndex in string AString.
See also: EArgumentException (210), IsControl (220), IsDigit (220), IsSurrogate (221), IsLowSurrogate (222),
IsLetter (222), IsLetterOrDigit (223), IsLower (223), IsNumber (224), IsPunctuation (224), IsSym-
bol (225), IsUpper (225), IsWhiteSpace (226)
221
2.5.12 TCharacter.IsLowSurrogate
Synopsis: Check whether a unicode character is a surrogate in the low range
Declaration: class function IsLowSurrogate(AChar: UnicodeChar); Overload; Static

class function IsLowSurrogate(const AString: UnicodeString;
Visibility: public
Description: IsLowSurrogate returns True if a unicode character has category ucSurrogate and is in the
low range of the surrogate characters (between LOW_SURROGATE_BEGIN and LOW_SURROGATE_END).
See also: EArgumentException (210), IsControl (220), IsDigit (220), IsSurrogate (221), IsHighSurrogate
(221), IsLetter (222), IsLetterOrDigit (223), IsLower (223), IsNumber (224), IsPunctuation (224),
2.5.13 TCharacter.IsSurrogatePair
Synopsis: Check if a pair of characters is a set of high/low surrorgate characters
Declaration: class function IsSurrogatePair(const AHighSurrogate: UnicodeChar;
; Overload; Static
class function IsSurrogatePair(const AString: UnicodeString;
Visibility: public
Description: IsSurrogatePair returns True if AHighSurrogate and ALowSurrogate form a valid
unicode surrogate pair. (AHighSurrogate is a high surrogate and ALowSurrogate a matching
low surrogate) The character can be specified as a UTF16 character AChar or a pair of UTF16
encoded characters starting at position AIndex in string AString.
(221), IsLowSurrogate (222), IsLetter (222), IsLetterOrDigit (223), IsLower (223), IsNumber (224),
IsPunctuation (224), IsSymbol (225), IsUpper (225), IsWhiteSpace (226)
2.5.14 TCharacter.IsLetter
Synopsis: Check if a unicode character is a letter.
Declaration: class function IsLetter(AChar: UnicodeChar); Overload; Static

class function IsLetter(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
; Overload; Static
Visibility: public
222
Description: IsLetter returns True if a unicode character has category that is one of the letter categories
(ucUppercaseLetter, ucLowercaseLetter, ucTitlecaseLetter, ucModifierLetter,
ucOtherLetter). The character can be specified as a UTF16 character AChar or a UTF16 en-
coded character starting at position AIndex in string AString.
tion (210) exception is raised. If the character at that position is not complete, an
(221), IsLowSurrogate (222), IsSurrogatePair (222), IsLetter (222), IsLetterOrDigit (223), IsLower
(223), IsNumber (224), IsPunctuation (224), IsSymbol (225), IsUpper (225), IsWhiteSpace (226)
2.5.15 TCharacter.IsLetterOrDigit
Synopsis: Check if a unicode character is a letter or digit
Declaration: class function IsLetterOrDigit(AChar: UnicodeChar); Overload; Static
class function IsLetterOrDigit(const AString: UnicodeString;
Visibility: public
Description: IsLetterOrDigit returns True if a unicode character has category that is one of the letter cate-
gories (ucUppercaseLetter, ucLowercaseLetter, ucTitlecaseLetter, ucModifierLetter,
ucOtherLetter,ucDecimalNumber,ucLetterNumber). The character can be specified as
a UTF16 character AChar or a UTF16 encoded character starting at position AIndex in string
AString.
See also: IsControl (220), IsDigit (220), IsSurrogate (221), IsHighSurrogate (221), IsLowSurrogate (222),
IsSurrogatePair (222), IsLetter (222), IsLower (223), IsNumber (224), IsPunctuation (224), IsSymbol
(225), IsUpper (225), IsWhiteSpace (226)
2.5.16 TCharacter.IsLower
Synopsis: Check if a unicode character is a lowercase letter
Declaration: class function IsLower(AChar: UnicodeChar); Overload; Static
class function IsLower(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
; Overload; Static
Visibility: public
Description: IsLower returns True if a unicode character has category ucLowercaseLetter. The charac-
ter can be specified as a UTF16 character AChar or a UTF16 encoded character starting at position
See also: IsControl (220), IsDigit (220), IsSurrogate (221), IsHighSurrogate (221), IsLowSurrogate (222),
IsSurrogatePair (222), IsLetter (222), IsLetterOrDigit (223), IsNumber (224), IsPunctuation (224),
223
2.5.17 TCharacter.IsNumber
Synopsis: Check if a unicode character is a number
Declaration: class function IsNumber(AChar: UnicodeChar); Overload; Static

class function IsNumber(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
; Overload; Static
Visibility: public
Description: IsNumber returns True if a unicode character has category that is one of the number categories
(ucDecimalNumber, ucLetterNumber, ucOtherNumber). The character can be specified
as a UTF16 character AChar or a UTF16 encoded character starting at position AIndex in string
AString.
tuation (224), IsSymbol (225), IsUpper (225), IsWhiteSpace (226)
2.5.18 TCharacter.IsPunctuation
Synopsis: Check if a unicode character is a punctuation character
Declaration: class function IsPunctuation(AChar: UnicodeChar); Overload; Static
class function IsPunctuation(const AString: UnicodeString;
Visibility: public
Description: IsPunctuation returns True if a unicode character has category that is one of the punctua-
tion categories (ucConnectPunctuation, ucDashPunctuation, ucOpenPunctuation,
ucClosePunctuation, ucInitialPunctuation, ucFinalPunctuation, ucOtherPunctuation).
SurrogatePair (222), IsLetter (222), IsLetterOrDigit (223), IsLower (223), IsNumber (224), IsSymbol
(225), IsUpper (225), IsWhiteSpace (226)
2.5.19 TCharacter.IsSeparator
Synopsis: Check if a unicode character is a separator character
Declaration: class function IsSeparator(AChar: UnicodeChar); Overload; Static

class function IsSeparator(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
; Overload; Static
Visibility: public
224
Description: IsSeparator returns True if a unicode character has category that is one of the separator cat-
egories (ucSpaceSeparator, ucLineSeparator, ucParagraphSeparator). The char-
acter can be specified as a UTF16 character AChar or a UTF16 encoded character starting at position
tuation (224), IsSymbol (225), IsUpper (225), IsWhiteSpace (226)
2.5.20 TCharacter.IsSymbol
Synopsis: Check if a unicode character is a symbol character
Declaration: class function IsSymbol(AChar: UnicodeChar); Overload; Static
class function IsSymbol(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
; Overload; Static
Visibility: public
Description: IsSymbol returns True if a unicode character has category that is one of the symbol categories
(ucMathSymbol, ucCurrencySymbol, ucModifierSymbol, ucOtherSymbol). The char-
acter can be specified as a UTF16 character AChar or a UTF16 encoded character starting at position
tuation (224), IsSeparator (224), IsUpper (225), IsWhiteSpace (226)
2.5.21 TCharacter.IsUpper
Synopsis: Check whether a unicode character is an uppercase letter
Declaration: class function IsUpper(AChar: UnicodeChar); Overload; Static
class function IsUpper(const AString: UnicodeString;AIndex: Integer)
; Overload; Static
Visibility: public
Description: IsUpper returns True if a unicode character has category ucUppercaseLetter. The charac-
ter can be specified as a UTF16 character AChar or a UTF16 encoded character starting at position
tuation (224), IsSeparator (224), IsSymbol (225), IsWhiteSpace (226)
225
2.5.22 TCharacter.IsWhiteSpace
Synopsis: Check whether a unicode character is a whitespace character
Declaration: class function IsWhiteSpace(AChar: UnicodeChar); Overload; Static

class function IsWhiteSpace(const AString: UnicodeString;
Visibility: public
Description: IsUpper returns True if a unicode character has is a whitespace character. It checks the char-
acter properties. The character can be specified as a UTF16 character AChar or a UTF16 encoded
character starting at position AIndex in string AString.
tuation (224), IsSeparator (224), IsSymbol (225), IsUpper (225)
2.5.23 TCharacter.ToLower
Synopsis: Convert a character or string to lowercase
Declaration: class function ToLower(AChar: UnicodeChar); Overload; Static
class function ToLower(const AString: UnicodeString); Overload; Static
class function ToLower(const AString: UnicodeString;
const AOptions: TCharacterOptions); Overload
; Static
Visibility: public
Description: ToLower converts the unicode character AChar or string AString to lowercase. Options de-
termines the behaviour of the conversion: if AOptions contains coIgnoreInvalidSequence
then no exception will be raised when the string or character contains an invalid unicode sequence.
The default behaviour is to raise an EArgumentException (210) exception when this happens.
Errors: If an invalid character is encountered, an EArgumentException (210) exception is raised, unless
coIgnoreInvalidSequence is specified in the options.
See also: TCharacter.ToUpper (226), TCharacter.IsLower (223), TCharacter.IsUpper (225)
2.5.24 TCharacter.ToUpper
Synopsis: Convert a character or string to uppercase
Declaration: class function ToUpper(AChar: UnicodeChar); Overload; Static
class function ToUpper(const AString: UnicodeString); Overload; Static
class function ToUpper(const AString: UnicodeString;
const AOptions: TCharacterOptions); Overload
; Static
Visibility: public
226
Description: ToUpper converts the unicode character AChar or string AString to uppercase. Options de-
termines the behaviour of the conversion: if AOptions contains coIgnoreInvalidSequence
then no exception will be raised when the string or character contains an invalid unicode sequence.
The default behaviour is to raise an EArgumentException (210) exception when this happens.
Errors: If an invalid character is encountered, an EArgumentException (210) exception is raised, unless
coIgnoreInvalidSequence is specified in the options.
See also: TCharacter.ToUpper (226), TCharacter.IsLower (223), TCharacter.IsUpper (225)
227
Chapter 3
Reference for unit ’charset’
3.1 Overview
The charset unit can be used to load single-byte character set (code page) descriptions. It is used
in the fpwidestring (228) unit to add support for converting single-byte codepage strings to unicode
strings (and vice versa).
Data of a code page may be included using one of the ready-made units, or can be loaded (in a binary
form) at runtime with the loadbinaryunicodemapping (231) function. The binary files have the .bcm
extension and are produced by the creumap utility distributed with Free Pascal.
Pre-made units are available for the following codepages: cp895 (228), cp932 (228), cp936 (228),
cp949 (228) and cp950 (228).

3.2.1 Constants
BINARY_MAPPING_FILE_EXT = ’.bcm’
BINARY_MAPPING_FILE_EXT contains the default extension of a file containing a binary-coded

map.
3.2.2 Types
preversecharmapping = ^treversecharmapping
Pointer to treversecharmapping
punicodecharmapping = ^tunicodecharmapping
Pointer to tunicodecharmapping
punicodemap = ^tunicodemap
Pointer to tunicodemap
228
CHAPTER 3. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’CHARSET’
treversecharmapping = packed record

unicode : tunicodechar;
char1 : Byte;
char2 : Byte;
end
treversecharmapping describes how a unicode character can be created in terms of single-byte

characters.
TSerializedMapHeader = packed record

cpName : string;
cp : UInt16;
mapLength : UInt32;
lastChar : Int32;
reverseMapLength : UInt32;
end
TSerializedMapHeader is a record describing the binary map data file. The contents of this
record can be found at offset zero of a (.bcm) file containing a single-byte unicode map.
tunicodechar = Word
tunicodechar is a type used to represent unicode characters in this file, it should not be used for
other unicode routines.
tunicodecharmapping = packed record

unicode : tunicodechar;
flag : tunicodecharmappingflag;
reserved : Byte;
end
tunicodecharmapping describes a unicode character. An array of these mappings is built for

each character in the single-byte character set,
tunicodecharmappingflag = (umf_noinfo,umf_leadbyte,umf_undefined,
umf_unused)
Table 3.1: Enumeration values for type tunicodecharmappingflag
Value Explanation
umf_leadbyte Unicode character uses leading byte
umf_noinfo No extra information about unicode character
umf_undefined Currently unused
umf_unused Unused position in code page
tunicodecharmappingflag contains various Flags describing information about a unicode

character.
229
tunicodemap = record
cpname : string;
cp : Word;
map : punicodecharmapping;
lastchar : LongInt;
reversemap : preversecharmapping;
reversemaplength : LongInt;
next : punicodemap;
internalmap : Boolean;
end
tunicodemap describes a complete mapping between a single-byte code page and a unicode char-
acter set. It contains both a forward and backward mapping.
tunicodestring = ^tunicodechar
tunicodestring is a type used to represent unicode strings in this file, it should not be used for
other unicode routines.

3.3.1 getascii
Synopsis: Convert unicode character or string to single-byte character or string.
Declaration: function getascii(c: tunicodechar;p: punicodemap) : string
function getascii(c: tunicodechar;p: punicodemap;ABuffer: PAnsiChar;
ABufferLen: LongInt) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: getascii converts a unicode character c to one or more single-byte characters according to the
map in p. The result can be a string containing up to 2 characters, or the number of characters copied
to the buffer ABuffer with length ABufferLen.
Errors: If the character cannot be translated, ASCII character 63 is returned (or copied to the buffer). In the
case of the buffer variant of the function, -1 is then returned. If the buffer is not large enough, -1 is
returned.
See also: getunicode (231)
3.3.2 getmap
Synopsis: Find a codepage map
Declaration: function getmap(const s: string) : punicodemap
function getmap(cp: Word) : punicodemap
Visibility: default
Description: getmap looks in the registered codepage mappings and returns the mapping for the requested code-
page. The codepage can be specified using a name s or a numerical identifier cp. The search is case
sensitive.
Errors: if the requested map is not found, Nil is returned.
See also: registermapping (232), registerbinarymapping (232), mappingavailable (232)
230
3.3.3 getunicode
Synopsis: Map single-byte character to unicode character.
Declaration: function getunicode(c: Char;p: punicodemap) : tunicodechar

function getunicode(AAnsiStr: pansichar;AAnsiLen: LongInt;
AMap: punicodemap;ADest: tunicodestring) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: The first form of getunicode will map a single character c to its unicode equivalent for mapping
p. If no equivalent can be found, 0 is returned.
The second form of getunicode will transform a string (specified using a pointer AAnsiStr to a
buffer with length AAnsiLen) to a unicode string using single byte codepage map AMap. It returns
the number of unicode characters. If ADest is Nil then just the number of characters is returned.
If ADest is not nil, it must point to a buffer large enough to contain the unicode string, and the
converted string will be copied to it.
Errors: No checking on the validity of the buffers is done.
See also: getascii (230)
3.3.4 loadbinaryunicodemapping
Synopsis: Load binary single-byte codepage to unicode map from file or memory
Declaration: function loadbinaryunicodemapping(const directory: string;
const cpname: string) : punicodemap
; Overload
function loadbinaryunicodemapping(const filename: string) : punicodemap
; Overload
function loadbinaryunicodemapping(const AData: Pointer;
const ADataLength: Integer)
: punicodemap; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: loadbinaryunicodemapping loads a binary description of a single-byte unicode mapping.

The mapping can reside in a file, in which case the file to load can be specified using a filename
filename or using a directory directory and codepage name cpname. In the latter case, a
suffix consisting of _le or _be depending on the endianness of the current platform will be appended,
and the filename extension is .bcm. Note that the file names may be case sensitive.
The data can also be loaded from a memory block AData with size ADataLength.
It will produce an in-memory map of the file. It returns a pointer to the map, or Nil if something
went wrong. The resulting mapping can be registered using registermapping (232).
Errors: On error, Nil is returned.
See also: loadunicodemapping (231), registermapping (232)
3.3.5 loadunicodemapping
Synopsis: Load textual single-byte codepage to unicode map from file
Declaration: function loadunicodemapping(const cpname: string;const f: string;
cp: Word) : punicodemap
231
Visibility: default
Description: loadunicodemapping loads a text description of a single-byte unicode mapping. It will analyse
the textual description in file f, and produce an in-memory map of the file. It returns a pointer to the
map, or Nil if something went wrong. The unicode map name must be specified in cpName, and
the numerical identifier in cp
The resulting mapping can be registered using registermapping (232).
See also: loadbinaryunicodemapping (231), registermapping (232)
3.3.6 mappingavailable
Synopsis: Check if a mapping is available for a specified code page.
Declaration: function mappingavailable(const s: string) : Boolean
function mappingavailable(cp: Word) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: mappingavailable returns True if a mapping for a specified code page (using name s or
numerical identifier cp) is available, or False if it is not.
See also: registermapping (232), registerbinarymapping (232), getmap (230)
3.3.7 registerbinarymapping
Synopsis: Load and register binary single-byte codepage to unicode map from file
Declaration: function registerbinarymapping(const directory: string;

const cpname: string) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: registerbinarymapping calls loadbinaryunicodemapping (231) using directory and cpname
and registers the resulting mapping, if any was succesfully loaded, using registermapping (232). It
returns True if the operation was succesful.
Errors: On error, False is returned.
See also: loadbinaryunicodemapping (231), registermapping (232)
3.3.8 registermapping
Synopsis: Register mapping
Declaration: procedure registermapping(p: punicodemap)
Visibility: default
Description: RegisterMapping registers mapping p in the registry of single-byte codepages. No attempt is

made to avoid double registrations. In case of doubles, the last registered mapping will be used first.
See also: loadunicodemapping (231), loadbinaryunicodemapping (231), registerbinarymapping (232)
232
Chapter 4
Reference for unit ’Classes’
4.1 Used units
Table 4.1: Used units by unit ’Classes’
Name Page
rtlconsts ??
System 1224
sysutils 1476
Types 1650
typinfo 1669
4.2 Overview
This documentation describes the FPC classes unit. The Classes unit contains basic classes for the
Free Component Library (FCL):
• a TList (369) class for maintaining lists of pointers,

• TStringList (423) for lists of strings,
• TCollection (319) to manage collections of objects
• TStream (408) classes to support streaming.
Furthermore it introduces methods for object persistence, and classes that understand an owner-
owned relationship, with automatic memory management.

4.3.1 Constants
BITSHIFT = 5
Used to calculate the size of a bits array
233
CHAPTER 4. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’CLASSES’
dupAccept = Types . dupAccept
Duplicate values can be added to the list.
dupError = Types . dupError
If an attempt is made to add a duplicate value to the list, an EStringListError (268) exception is
raised.
dupIgnore = Types . dupIgnore
Duplicate values will not be added to the list, but no error will be triggered.
FilerSignature : Array[1..4] of Char = ’TPF0’
Constant that is found at the start of a binary stream containing a streamed component.
fmCreate = $FF00
TFileStream.Create (349) creates a new file if needed.
fmOpenRead = 0
TFileStream.Create (349) opens a file with read-only access.
fmOpenReadWrite = 2
TFileStream.Create (349) opens a file with read-write access.
fmOpenWrite = 1
TFileStream.Create (349) opens a file with write-only access.
MASK = 31
Bitmask with all bits on.
MaxBitFlags = $7FFFFFE0
Maximum number of bits in TBits collection.
MaxBitRec = MaxBitFlags div ((cardinal) * 8)
Maximum number of bit records in TBits.
MaxListSize = Maxint div 16
This constant sets the maximum number of elements in a TList (369).
scAlt = $8000
234
Indicates ALT key in a keyboard shortcut.
scCtrl = $4000
indicates CTRL key in a keyboard shortcut.
scNone = 0
Indicates no special key is presed in a keyboard shortcut.
scShift = $2000
Indicates Shift key in a keyboard shortcut.
SGUIDObserved = ’{663C603C-3F3C-4CC5-823C-AC8079F979E5}’
Observed interface GUID as a string
SGUIDObserver = ’{BC7376EA-199C-4C2A-8684-F4805F0691CA}’
Observer interface GUID as a string
soFromBeginning = 0
Seek (410) starts relative to the stream origin.
soFromCurrent = 1
Seek (410) starts relative to the current position in the stream.
soFromEnd = 2
Seek (410) starts relative to the stream end.
toEOF = (0)
Value returned by TParser.Token (388) when the end of the input stream was reached.
toFloat = (4)
Value returned by TParser.Token (388) when a floating point value was found in the input stream.
toInteger = (3)
Value returned by TParser.Token (388) when an integer was found in the input stream.
toString = (2)
Value returned by TParser.Token (388) when a string was found in the input stream.
toSymbol = (1)
Value returned by TParser.Token (388) when a symbol was found in the input stream.
toWString = (5)
Value returned by TParser.Token (388) when a widestring was found in the input stream.
235
4.3.2 Types
HMODULE = PtrInt
FPC doesn’t support modules yet, so this is a dummy type.
HRSRC = TFPResourceHandle deprecated
This type is provided for Delphi compatibilty, it is used for resource streams.
PPointerList = ^TPointerList
Pointer to an array of pointers.
PStringItem = ^TStringItem
Pointer to a TStringItem (247) record.
PStringItemList = ^TStringItemList
Pointer to a TStringItemList (247).
TActiveXRegType = (axrComponentOnly,axrIncludeDescendants)
Table 4.2: Enumeration values for type TActiveXRegType
Value Explanation
axrComponentOnly
axrIncludeDescendants
This type is provided for compatibility only, and is currently not used in Free Pascal.
TAlignment = (taLeftJustify,taRightJustify,taCenter)
Table 4.3: Enumeration values for type TAlignment
Value Explanation
taCenter Text is displayed centered.
taLeftJustify Text is displayed aligned to the left
taRightJustify Text is displayed aligned to the right.
The TAlignment type is used to specify the alignment of the text in controls that display a text.
TAncestorNotFoundEvent = procedure(Reader: TReader;

const ComponentName: string;
ComponentClass: TPersistentClass;
var Component: TComponent) of object
236
This event occurs when an ancestor component cannot be found.
TBasicActionClass = Class of TBasicAction
TBasicAction (294) class reference.
TBasicActionLinkClass = Class of TBasicActionLink
TBasicActionLink (298) class reference.
TBiDiMode = (bdLeftToRight,bdRightToLeft,bdRightToLeftNoAlign,
bdRightToLeftReadingOnly)
Table 4.4: Enumeration values for type TBiDiMode
Value Explanation
bdLeftToRight Texts read from left to right.
bdRightToLeft Texts read from right to left.
bdRightToLeftNoAlign Texts read from right to left, but not right-aligned
bdRightToLeftReadingOnly Texts read from right to left
TBiDiMode describes bi-directional support for displaying texts.
TBitArray = Array[0..MaxBitRec-1] of Cardinal
Array to store bits.
TCollectionItemClass = Class of TCollectionItem
TCollectionItemClass is used by the TCollection.ItemClass (325) property of TCollection

(319) to identify the descendent class of TCollectionItem (327) which should be created and man-
aged.
TCollectionNotification = (cnAdded,cnExtracting,cnDeleting)
Table 4.5: Enumeration values for type TCollectionNotification
Value Explanation
cnAdded An item is added to the collection.
cnDeleting An item is deleted from the collection.
cnExtracting An item is extracted from the collection.
TCollectionNotification is used in the TCollection (319) class to send notifications about

changes to the collection.
TCollectionSortCompare = function(Item1: TCollectionItem;

Item2: TCollectionItem) : Integer
237
TCollectionSortCompare is the prototype for a callback used in the TCollection.Sort (324)

method. The procedure should compare Item1 and Item2 and return an integer:
Result < 0 if Item1 comes before Item2

Result = 0 if Item1 is at the same level as Item2
Result > 0 if Item1 comes after Item2
TComponentClass = Class of TComponent
The TComponentClass type is used when constructing TComponent (329) descendent instances
and when registering components.
TComponentName = String
Names of components are of type TComponentName. By specifying a different type, the Object
inspector can handle this property differently than a standard string property.
TComponentState= Set of (csLoading,csReading,csWriting,csDestroying,

csDesigning,csAncestor,csUpdating,csFixups,
csFreeNotification,csInline,csDesignInstance)
Table 4.6: Enumeration values for type
Value Explanation
csAncestor The component is being streamed as part of a frame (?)
csDesigning The component is being designed in an IDE.
csDesignInstance ??
csDestroying The component is being destroyed.
csFixups The component’s references to other components are being fixed.
csFreeNotification Indicates whether the component has freenotifications
csInline Component is part of a frame (?).
csLoading The component is being loaded from the stream.
csReading Properties are being read from the stream.
csUpdating The component is being updated.
csWriting Properties are being written to the stream.
The following values are possible:
csLoading The component (and all child components) are being loaded from a stream. This means
that a TReader (393) instance is reading properties from this and child components from a
stream and is applying the values found in the stream to the properties.
csReading The properties of this component are being read from a stream. This means that a
TReader (393) instance is reading properties from this component from a stream and is ap-
plying the values.
csWriting The properties of this component are being written to a stream. This means that a TWriter
(459) instance is writing properties from this component to a stream.
csDestroying The component is being destroyed.
238
csDesigning The component is being designed in an IDE.

csAncestor The component has a design ancestor. This is used to record differences between a com-
ponent and it’s design ancestor. For example a form TForm2 inherited from a form TForm1.
TForm1 and all its components are copied to TForm2. TForm2 and all its inherited compo-
nents have csAncestor set. Only differences between TForm1 and TForm2 are stored in
the stream of TForm2. The child components of a frame put onto a form have csAncestor
too.
csInline The component is a nested top level component. For example a frame on a form. The
children of the frame do not have csInline, unless they are other frames.
csDesignInstance The component is designed (csDesigning) and is a root component, meaning

it has no owner (Owner=nil).
csFixups The component’s references to other components are being fixed. While reading a compo-
nent from stream, it can happen that the stream contains a component reference property with
a name of a component that was not yet created and read from the stream. Such properties
are saved, and the missing references are resolved when the complete stream was read. This
resolving step is called fixing up references, and the csFixups flags is set during this step.
csFreeNotification This flag indicates that the component has free notifications registered with
TComponent.FreeNotification (333)
TComponentStyle= Set of (csInheritable,csCheckPropAvail,csSubComponent,

csTransient)
Value Explanation
csCheckPropAvail ??
csInheritable The component can be on inherited forms.
csSubComponent Subcomponent - streamed as part of the owning component
csTransient Transient component
Describes the style of the component.
TCreateComponentEvent = procedure(Reader: TReader;

ComponentClass: TComponentClass;
var Component: TComponent) of object
Event handler type, occurs when a component instance must be created when a component is read
from a stream.
TDataModuleClass = Class of TDataModule
TDataModuleClass defines the class pointer for TDataModule (343).
TDuplicates = Types.TDuplicates
Type to describe what to do with duplicate values in a TStringlist (423).
239
TExceptionClass = Class of Exception
TExceptionClass is the class pointer for the Exception (1645) class, defined in the SysUtils
(1476) unit.
TFilerFlag = (ffInherited,ffChildPos,ffInline)
Table 4.8: Enumeration values for type TFilerFlag
Value Explanation
ffChildPos The position of the child on it’s parent is included.
ffInherited Stored object is an inherited object.
ffInline Used for frames.
The TFiler class uses this enumeration type to decide whether the streamed object was streamed
as part of an inherited form or not.
TFilerFlags = Set of TFilerFlag
Set of TFilerFlag (240)
TFindAncestorEvent = procedure(Writer: TWriter;Component: TComponent;

const Name: string;
var Ancestor: TComponent;
var RootAncestor: TComponent) of object
Event that occurs w
TFindComponentClassEvent = procedure(Reader: TReader;

const ClassName: string;
var ComponentClass: TComponentClass)
of object
Event handler type, occurs when a component class pointer must be found when reading a component
from a stream.
TFindGlobalComponent = function(const Name: string) : TComponent
TFindGlobalComponent is a callback used to find a component in a global scope. It is used

when the streaming system needs to find a component which is not part of the component which is
currently being streamed. It should return the component with name Name, or Nil if none is found.
The variable FindGlobalComponent (253) is a callback of type TFindGlobalComponent. It can
be set by the IDE when an unknown reference is found, to offer the designer to redirect the link to a
new component.
TFindMethodEvent = procedure(Reader: TReader;const MethodName: string;

var Address: CodePointer;
var Error: Boolean) of object
240
If a TReader (393) instance needs to locate a method and it doesn’t find it in the streamed form, then
the OnFindMethod (403) event handler will be called, if one is installed. This event can be assigned
in order to use different locating methods. If a method is found, then its address should be returned
in Address. The Error should be set to True if the reader should raise an exception after the
event was handled. If it is set to False no exception will be raised, even if no method was found.
On entry, Error will be set to True.
TFPObservedOperation = (ooChange,ooFree,ooAddItem,ooDeleteItem,ooCustom)
Table 4.9: Enumeration values for type TFPObservedOperation
Value Explanation
ooAddItem An item is added to the observed object (generally a list).
ooChange The observed object has changed.
ooCustom Custom event.
ooDeleteItem An item is deleted from the observed object (generally a list).
ooFree The observed object is being freed.
TFPObservedOperation enumerates the possible operations that can be reported to an observer.

Which of these operations is reported depends on the implementation of the observed object.
TGetChildProc = procedure(Child: TComponent) of object
Callback used when obtaining child components.
TGetStrProc = procedure(const S: string) of object
This event is used as a callback to retrieve string values. It is used, among other things, to pass along
string properties in property editors.
THandle = System.THandle
This type is used as the handle for THandleStream (359) stream descendents
THelpContext = -MaxLongint..MaxLongint
Range type to specify help contexts.
THelpEvent = function(Command: Word;Data: LongInt;var CallHelp: Boolean)

: Boolean of object
This event is used for display of online help.
THelpType = (htKeyword,htContext)
Table 4.10: Enumeration values for type THelpType
Value Explanation
htContext Help type: Context ID help.
htKeyword Help type: Keyword help
241
Enumeration type specifying the kind of help requested.
TIdentMapEntry = record
Value : Integer;
Name : string;
end
TIdentMapEntry is used internally by the IdentToInt (255) and IntToIdent (256) calls to store the
mapping between the identifiers and the integers they represent.
TIdentToInt = function(const Ident: string;var Int: LongInt) : Boolean
TIdentToInt is a callback used to look up identifiers (Ident) and return an integer value cor-
responding to this identifier (Int). The callback should return True if a value corresponding to
integer Ident was found, False if not.
A callback of type TIdentToInt should be specified when an integer is registered using the Reg-
isterIntegerConsts (261) call.
TInitComponentHandler = function(Instance: TComponent;

RootAncestor: TClass) : Boolean
TInitComponentHandler is a callback type. It is used in the InitInheritedComponent (256)

call to initialize a component. Callbacks of this type are registered with the RegisterInitComponen-
tHandler (261) call.
TIntToIdent = function(Int: LongInt;var Ident: string) : Boolean
TIdentToInt is a callback used to look up integers (Ident) and return an identifier (Ident)
that can be used to represent this integer value in an IDE. The callback should return True if a value
corresponding to integer Ident was found, False if not.
A callback of type TIntToIdent should be specified when an integer is registered using the Reg-
isterIntegerConsts (261) call.
TLeftRight = taLeftJustify..taRightJustify
TLeftRight is a subrange type based on the TAlignment (236) enumerated type. It contains only
the left and right alignment constants.
TListAssignOp = (laCopy,laAnd,laOr,laXor,laSrcUnique,laDestUnique)
Table 4.11: Enumeration values for type TListAssignOp
Value Explanation
laAnd Remove all elements not first second list
laCopy Clear list and copy all strings from second list.
laDestUnique Keep all elements that exists only in list2
laOr Add all elements from second (and optional third) list, eliminate duplicates
laSrcUnique Just keep all elements that exist only in source list
laXor Remove elements in second lists, Add all elements from second list not in first list
This type determines what operation TList.Assign (375) or TFPList.assign (355) performs.
242
TListCallback = Types.TListCallback
TListCallback is the method callback prototype for the function that is passed to the TF-
PList.ForEachCall (356) call. The data argument will be filled with all the pointers in the list
(one per call) and the arg argument is the Arg argument passed to the ForEachCall call.
TListNotification = (lnAdded,lnExtracted,lnDeleted)
Table 4.12: Enumeration values for type TListNotification
Value Explanation
lnAdded List change notification: Element added to the list.
lnDeleted List change notification: Element deleted from the list.
lnExtracted List change notification: Element extracted from the list.
Kind of list notification event.
TListSortCompare = function(Item1: Pointer;Item2: Pointer) : Integer
Callback type for the list sort algorithm.
TListStaticCallback = Types.TListStaticCallback
TListCallback is the procedurald callback prototype for the function that is passed to the TF-
PList.ForEachCall (356) call. The data argument will be filled with all the pointers in the list (one
per call) and the arg argument is the Arg argument passed to the ForEachCall call.
TNotifyEvent = procedure(Sender: TObject) of object
Most event handlers are implemented as a property of type TNotifyEvent. When this is set to
a certain method of a class, when the event occurs, the method will be called, and the class that
generated the event will pass itself along as the Sender argument.
TObjectTextEncoding = (oteDFM,oteLFM)
Table 4.13: Enumeration values for type TObjectTextEncoding
Value Explanation
oteDFM Characters are in DFM (Delphi) format: widechar encoded.
oteLFM Characters are in LFM format: UTF-8 encoded.
TObjectTextEncoding is an enumerated type which denotes the encoding of non ascii charac-
ters in an object stream file. It is needed for correct encoding when reading string values in the text
stream.
TOperation = (opInsert,opRemove)
243
Table 4.14: Enumeration values for type TOperation
Value Explanation
opInsert A new component is being inserted in the child component list.
opRemove A component is being removed from the child component list.
Operation of which a component is notified.
TPersistentClass = Class of TPersistent
TPersistentClass is the class reference type for the TPersistent (389) class.
TPoint = Types.TPoint
This record describes a coordinate. It is used to handle the Top (329) and Left (329) properties of
TComponent (329).
X represents the X-Coordinate of the point described by the record. Y represents the Y-Coordinate of
the point described by the record.
TPointerList = Array[0..MaxListSize-1] of Pointer
Type for an Array of pointers.
TPropertyNotFoundEvent = procedure(Reader: TReader;

Instance: TPersistent;
var PropName: string;IsPath: Boolean;
var Handled: Boolean;
var Skip: Boolean) of object
TPropertyNotFoundEvent is the prototype for the TReader.OnPropertyNotFound (403) event.

Reader is the sender of the event, Instance is the instance that is being streamed. PropInfo
is a pointer to the RTTI information for the property being read. Handled should be set to True
if the handler redirected the unknown property succesfully, and Skip should be set to True if the
value should be skipped. IsPath determines whether the property refers to a sub-property.
TReadComponentsProc = procedure(Component: TComponent) of object
Callback type when reading a component from a stream
TReaderError = procedure(Reader: TReader;const Message: string;

var Handled: Boolean) of object
Event handler type, called when an error occurs during the streaming.
TReaderProc = procedure(Reader: TReader) of object
The TReaderProc reader procedure is a callback procedure which will be used by a TPersistent
(389) descendent to read user properties from a stream during the streaming process. The Reader
argument is the writer object which can be used read properties from the stream.
244
TReadWriteStringPropertyEvent = procedure(Sender: TObject;

const Instance: TPersistent;
PropInfo: PPropInfo;
var Content: string) of object
TReadWriteStringPropertyEvent is the prototype for the TReader.OnReadStringProperty

(405) event handler. Reader is the sender of the event, Instance is the instance that is being
streamed. PropInfo is a pointer to the RTTI information for the property being read. Content is
the string as it was read from the stream.
TRect = Types.TRect
TRect describes a rectangle in space with its upper-left (in (Top,Left>)) and lower-right (in
(Bottom ,Right)) corners.
TReferenceNameEvent = procedure(Reader: TReader;var Name: string)

of object
Occurs when a named object needs to be looked up.
TSeekOrigin = (soBeginning,soCurrent,soEnd)
Table 4.15: Enumeration values for type TSeekOrigin
Value Explanation
soBeginning Offset is interpreted relative to the start of the stream.
soCurrent Offset is interpreted relative to the current position in the stream.
soEnd Offset is interpreted relative to the end of the stream.
Specifies the origin of the TStream.Seek (410) method.
TSetMethodPropertyEvent = procedure(Reader: TReader;

const TheMethodName: string;
TSetMethodPropertyEvent is the prototype for the TReader.OnSetMethodProperty (404) event.

Reader is the sender of the event, Instance is the instance that is being streamed. PropInfo
is a pointer to the RTTI information for the property being read, and TheMethodName is the name
of the method that the property should be set to. Handled should be set to True if the handler set
the property succesfully.
TSetNameEvent = procedure(Reader: TReader;Component: TComponent;

var Name: string) of object
Occurs when the reader needs to set a component’s name.
TShiftState = Set of TShiftStateEnum
245
This type is used when describing a shortcut key or when describing what special keys are pressed
on a keyboard when a key event is generated.
The set contains the special keys that can be used in combination with a ’normal’ key.
TShiftStateEnum = (ssShift,ssAlt,ssCtrl,ssLeft,ssRight,ssMiddle,
ssDouble,ssMeta,ssSuper,ssHyper,ssAltGr,ssCaps,ssNum,
ssScroll,ssTriple,ssQuad,ssExtra1,ssExtra2)
Table 4.16: Enumeration values for type TShiftStateEnum
Value Explanation
ssAlt Alt key pressed
ssAltGr Alt-GR key pressed.
ssCaps Caps lock key pressed
ssCtrl Ctrl key pressed
ssDouble Double mouse click.
ssExtra1 Extra key 1
ssExtra2 Extra key 2
ssHyper Hyper key pressed.
ssLeft Left mouse button pressed.
ssMeta Meta key pressed.
ssMiddle Middle mouse button pressed.
ssNum Num lock key pressed
ssQuad Quadruple mouse click
ssRight Right mouse button pressed.
ssScroll Scroll lock key pressed
ssShift Shift key pressed
ssSuper Super key pressed.
ssTriple Triple mouse click
Keyboard/Mouse shift state enumerator
TShortCut = (Word)..(Word)
Enumeration type to identify shortcut key combinations.
TSmallPoint = record
x : SmallInt;
y : SmallInt;
end
Same as TPoint (244), only the X and Y ranges are limited to 2-byte integers instead of 4-byte
integers.
TStreamOwnership = (soReference,soOwned)
246
Table 4.17: Enumeration values for type TStreamOwnership
Value Explanation
soOwned Stream is owned: it will be freed when the adapter is freed.
soReference Stream is referenced only, it is not freed by the adapter
The ownership of a streamadapter determines what happens with the stream on which a TStrea-
mAdapter (418) acts, when the adapter is freed.
TStreamProc = procedure(Stream: TStream) of object
Procedure type used in streaming.
TStringItem = record
FString : string;
FObject : TObject;
end
The TStringItem is used to store the string and object items in a TStringList (423) string list
instance. It should never be used directly.
TStringItemList = Array[0..MaxListSize] of TStringItem
This declaration is provided for Delphi compatibility, it is not used in Free Pascal.
TStringListSortCompare = function(List: TStringList;Index1: Integer;

Index2: Integer) : Integer
Callback type used in stringlist compares.
TSynchronizeProcVar = procedure
Synchronize callback type
TThreadMethod = procedure of object
Procedure variable used when synchronizing threads.
TThreadPriority = (tpIdle,tpLowest,tpLower,tpNormal,tpHigher,tpHighest,
tpTimeCritical)
Table 4.18: Enumeration values for type TThreadPriority
Value Explanation
tpHigher Thread runs at high priority
tpHighest Thread runs at highest possible priority.
tpIdle Thread only runs when other processes are idle.
tpLower Thread runs at a lower priority.
tpLowest Thread runs at the lowest priority.
tpNormal Thread runs at normal process priority.
tpTimeCritical Thread runs at realtime priority.
247
Enumeration specifying the priority at which a thread runs.
TValueType = (vaNull,vaList,vaInt8,vaInt16,vaInt32,vaExtended,vaString,
vaIdent,vaFalse,vaTrue,vaBinary,vaSet,vaLString,vaNil,
vaCollection,vaSingle,vaCurrency,vaDate,vaWString,vaInt64,
vaUTF8String,vaUString,vaQWord)
Table 4.19: Enumeration values for type TValueType
Value Explanation
vaBinary Binary data follows.
vaCollection Collection follows
vaCurrency Currency value follows
vaDate Date value follows
vaExtended Extended value.
vaFalse Boolean False value.
vaIdent Identifier.
vaInt16 Integer value, 16 bits long.
vaList Identifies the start of a list of values
vaLString Ansistring data follows.
vaNil Nil pointer.
vaNull Empty value. Ends a list.
vaQWord QWord (64-bit word) value
vaSet Set data follows.
vaSingle Single type follows.
vaString String value.
vaTrue Boolean True value.
vaUString UnicodeString value
vaUTF8String UTF8 encoded unicode string.
vaWString Widestring value follows.
Enumerated type used to identify the kind of streamed property
TWriteMethodPropertyEvent = procedure(Writer: TWriter;

const MethodValue: TMethod;
const DefMethodValue: TMethod;
TWriteMethodPropertyEvent is the prototype for the TWriter.OnWriteMethodProperty (465)

event. Writer is the sender of the event, Instance is the instance that is being streamed.
PropInfo is a pointer to the RTTI information for the property being written, and MethodValue
is the value of the method that the property was set to. DefMethodCodeValue is set to the default
value of the property (Nil or the parent value). Handled should be set to True if the handler set
the property succesfully.
TWriterProc = procedure(Writer: TWriter) of object
248
The TWriterProc writer procedure is a callback procedure which will be used by a TPersistent
(389) descendent to write user properties from a stream during the streaming process. The Writer
argument is the writer object which can be used write properties to the stream.
4.3.3 Variables
AddDataModule : procedure(DataModule: TDataModule) of object
AddDataModule can be set by an IDE or a streaming mechanism to receive notification when a

new instance of a TDataModule (343) descendent is created.
ApplicationHandleException : procedure(Sender: TObject) of object
ApplicationHandleException can be set by an application object to handle any exceptions

that may occur when a TDataModule (343) is created.
ApplicationShowException : procedure(E: Exception) of object
Unused.
CreateVCLComObjectProc : procedure(Component: TComponent) = Nil
CreateVCLComObjectProc is called by TComponent if it needs to create a IVCLComObject

interface for itself (when the ComObject property is read). It passes itself as the Component pa-
rameter.
GlobalNameSpace : IReadWriteSync
An interface protecting the global namespace. Used when reading/writing to the global namespace
list during streaming of forms.
MainThreadID : TThreadID
ID of main thread. Unused at this point.
RegisterComponentsProc : procedure(const Page: string;ComponentClasses: Array of TCom
RegisterComponentsProc can be set by an IDE to be notified when new components are being
registered. Application programmers should never have to set RegisterComponentsProc
RegisterNoIconProc : procedure(ComponentClasses: Array of TComponentClass)
RegisterNoIconProc can be set by an IDE to be notified when new components are being
registered, and which do not need an Icon in the component palette. Application programmers should
never have to set RegisterComponentsProc
RemoveDataModule : procedure(DataModule: TDataModule) of object
RemoveDataModule can be set by an IDE or a streaming mechanism to receive notification when

an instance of a TDataModule (343) descendent is freed.
249
WakeMainThread : TNotifyEvent = Nil
WakeMainThread is a handler, which, when set, is called by the TThread.Synchronize (448) rou-
tine to signal the main thread that a synchronization routine is waiting in the queue.
This handler is by default empty. An actual implementation depends on the main program logic
(usually an event loop) and must be provided by the event loop logic: the event loop will normally call
CheckSynchronize (251) at regular intervals. The WakeMainThread can make sure this happens
as soon as possible.
While this handle should alert the main program thread that a thread is waiting for synchronization,
the call is executed by the thread, and should therefore NOT synchronize the thread, but should
somehow signal the main thread that a thread is waiting for synchronization. For example, by sending
a message.

4.4.1 ActivateClassGroup
Synopsis: Activates a class group
Declaration: function ActivateClassGroup(AClass: TPersistentClass) : TPersistentClass
Visibility: default
Description: ActivateClassGroup activates the group of classes to which AClass belongs. The function
returns the class that was last used to activate the class group.
The class registration and streaming mechanism allows to organize the classes in groups. This allows
an IDE to form groups of classes, which can be enabled or disabled. It is not needed at Run-Time.
Errors: If AClass does not belong to a class group, an exception is raised.
See also: StartClassGroup (263), GroupDescendentsWith (255), ClassGroupOf (251)
4.4.2 BeginGlobalLoading
Synopsis: Not yet implemented
Declaration: procedure BeginGlobalLoading
Visibility: default
Description: Not yet implemented
4.4.3 BinToHex
Synopsis: Convert a binary buffer to a hexadecimal string
Declaration: procedure BinToHex(BinValue: PChar;HexValue: PChar;BinBufSize: Integer)
Visibility: default
Description: BinToHex converts the byte values in BinValue to a string consisting of 2-charachter hex-
adecimal strings in HexValue. BufSize specifies the length of BinValue, which means that
HexValue must have size 2*BufSize.
For example a buffer containing the byte values 255 and 0 will be converted to FF00.
250
Errors: No length checking is done, so if an invalid size is specified, an exception may follow.
See also: HexToBin (255)
4.4.4 Bounds
Synopsis: Returns a TRect structure with the bounding rect of the given location and size.
Declaration: function Bounds(ALeft: Integer;ATop: Integer;AWidth: Integer;
AHeight: Integer) : TRect
Visibility: default
Description: Bounds returns a TRect (245) record with the given origin (ALeft,ATop) and dimensions
(AWidth,AHeight) filled in. The bottom-right corner is calculated by adding AWidth to ALeft
and AHeight to ATop. As a result, a rectangle with width/height set to 0 is exactly 1 pixel.
See also: Rect (259)
4.4.5 CheckSynchronize
Synopsis: Check whether there are any synchronize calls in the synchronize queue.
Declaration: function CheckSynchronize(timeout: LongInt) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: CheckSynchronize should be called regularly by the main application thread to handle any
TThread.Synchronize (448) calls that may be waiting for execution by the main thread. If any such
calls are waiting for execution by the main thread, they are executed at once, in the order that they
were scheduled.
The function returns True if any Synchronize method was executed.
TimeOut is the maximum amount of time (in milliseconds) that the CheckSynchronize routine
will wait for synchronisation requests to appear in the queue.
Calling this routine more often will ensure that synchronize requests are handled faster.
This routine may not be called from any thread other than the main thread, as it will execute the
waiting requests.
Threads may call the WakeMainThread (250) to signal the main thread that the synchronisation queue
contains items, and thus speed up the execution of the synchronize calls.
See also: TThread.Synchronize (448), WakeMainThread (250)
4.4.6 ClassGroupOf
Synopsis: Returns the class group to which an instance or class belongs
Declaration: function ClassGroupOf(AClass: TPersistentClass) : TPersistentClass
function ClassGroupOf(Instance: TPersistent) : TPersistentClass
Visibility: default
Description: ClassGroupOf returns the class group to which AClass or Instance belongs.
Errors: The result is Nil if no matching class group is found.
See also: StartClassGroup (263), ActivateClassGroup (250), GroupDescendentsWith (255)
251
4.4.7 CollectionsEqual
Synopsis: Returns True if two collections are equal.
Declaration: function CollectionsEqual(C1: TCollection;C2: TCollection) : Boolean

function CollectionsEqual(C1: TCollection;C2: TCollection;
Owner1: TComponent;Owner2: TComponent)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: CollectionsEqual is not yet implemented. It simply returns False
4.4.8 EndGlobalLoading
Synopsis: Not yet implemented.
Declaration: procedure EndGlobalLoading
Visibility: default
Description: Not yet implemented.
4.4.9 ExtractStrings
Synopsis: Split a string in different words.
Declaration: function ExtractStrings(Separators: TSysCharSet;WhiteSpace: TSysCharSet;

Content: PChar;Strings: TStrings;
AddEmptyStrings: Boolean) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: ExtractStrings splits Content (a null-terminated string) into words, and adds the words to
the Strings stringlist. The words are separated by Separators and any characters in whitespace
are stripped from the strings. The space and CR/LF characters are always considered whitespace.
Errors: No length checking is performed on Content. If no null-termination character is present, an access
violation may occur. Likewise, if Strings is not valid, an access violation may occur.
4.4.10 FindClass
Synopsis: Returns the class pointer of a class with given name.
Declaration: function FindClass(const AClassName: string) : TPersistentClass
Visibility: default
Description: FindClass searches for the class named ClassName in the list of registered classes and returns a
class pointer to the definition. If no class with the given name could be found, an exception is raised.
The GetClass (254) function does not raise an exception when it does not find the class, but returns a
Nil pointer instead.
See also: RegisterClass (260), GetClass (254)
252
4.4.11 FindGlobalComponent
Synopsis: Callback used when a component must be found.
Declaration: function FindGlobalComponent(const Name: string) : TComponent

Visibility: default
Description: FindGlobalComponent is a callback of type TFindGlobalComponent (240). It can be set by the
IDE when an unknown reference is found, to offer the user to redirect the link to a new component.
It is a callback used to find a component in a global scope. It is used when the streaming system
needs to find a component which is not part of the component which is currently being streamed. It
should return the component with name Name, or Nil if none is found.
See also: TFindGlobalComponent (240)
4.4.12 FindIdentToInt
Synopsis: Return the string to integer converter for an integer type
Declaration: function FindIdentToInt(AIntegerType: Pointer) : TIdentToInt
Visibility: default
Description: FindIdentToInt returns the handler that handles the conversion of a string representation to an
integer that can be used in component streaming, when IdentToInt (255) is called.
Errors: Nil is returned if no handler is registered for the given type.
4.4.13 FindIntToIdent
Synopsis: Return the integer to string converter for an integer type
Declaration: function FindIntToIdent(AIntegerType: Pointer) : TIntToIdent

Visibility: default
Description: FindIntToIdent returns the handler that handles the conversion of an integer to a string repre-
sentation that can be used in component streaming, when IntToIdent (256) is called.
Errors: Nil is returned if no handler is registered for the given type.

See also: IntToIdent (256), TIntToIdent (242), FindIdentToInt (253)
4.4.14 FindNestedComponent
Synopsis: Finds the component with name path starting at the indicated root component.
Declaration: function FindNestedComponent(Root: TComponent;APath: string;

CStyle: Boolean) : TComponent
Visibility: default
Description: FindNestedComponent will descend through the list of owned components (starting at Root)
and will return the component whose name path matches NamePath. As a path separator the char-
acters . (dot), - (dash) and > (greater than) can be used
See also: GlobalFixupReferences (254)
253
4.4.15 GetClass
Synopsis: Returns the class pointer of a class with given name.
Declaration: function GetClass(const AClassName: string) : TPersistentClass
Visibility: default
Description: GetClass searches for the class named ClassName in the list of registered classes and returns a
class pointer to the definition. If no class with the given name could be found, Nil is returned.
The FindClass (252) function will raise an exception if the does not find the class.
See also: RegisterClass (260), GetClass (254)
4.4.16 GetFixupInstanceNames
Synopsis: Returns the names of elements that need to be resolved for the root component, whose reference
contains ReferenceRootName
Declaration: procedure GetFixupInstanceNames(Root: TComponent;
const ReferenceRootName: string;
Names: TStrings)
Visibility: default
Description: GetFixupInstanceNames examines the list of unresolved references and returns the names of
classes that contain unresolved references to the Root component in the list Names. The list is not
cleared prior to filling it.
See also: GetFixupReferenceNames (254), GlobalFixupReferences (254)
4.4.17 GetFixupReferenceNames
Synopsis: Returns the names of elements that need to be resolved for the root component.
Declaration: procedure GetFixupReferenceNames(Root: TComponent;Names: TStrings)
Visibility: default
Description: GetFixupReferenceNames examines the list of unresolved references and returns the names
of properties that must be resolved for the component Root in the list Names. The list is not cleared
prior to filling it.
See also: GetFixupInstanceNames (254), GlobalFixupReferences (254)
4.4.18 GlobalFixupReferences
Synopsis: Called to resolve unresolved references after forms are loaded.
Declaration: procedure GlobalFixupReferences
Visibility: default
Description: GlobalFixupReferences runs over the list of unresolved references and tries to resolve them.
This routine should under normal circumstances not be called in an application programmer’s code.
It is called automatically by the streaming system after a component has been instantiated and its
properties read from a stream. It will attempt to resolve references to other global components.
See also: GetFixupReferenceNames (254), GetFixupInstanceNames (254)
254
4.4.19 GroupDescendentsWith
Synopsis: Add class to the group of another class.
Declaration: procedure GroupDescendentsWith(AClass: TPersistentClass;
AClassGroup: TPersistentClass)
Visibility: default
Description: GroupDescendentsWith adds AClass to the group that AClassGroup belongs to. If AClassGroup
belongs to more than 1 group, then it is added to the group which contains the nearest ancestor.
See also: StartClassGroup (263), ActivateClassGroup (250), ClassGroupOf (251)
4.4.20 HexToBin
Synopsis: Convert a hexadecimal string to a binary buffer
Declaration: function HexToBin(HexValue: PChar;BinValue: PChar;BinBufSize: Integer)
: Integer
Visibility: default
Description: HexToBin scans the hexadecimal string representation in HexValue and transforms every 2 char-
acter hexadecimal number to a byte and stores it in BinValue. The buffer size is the size of the
binary buffer. Scanning will stop if the size of the binary buffer is reached or when an invalid char-
acter is encountered. The return value is the number of stored bytes.
See also: BinToHex (250)
4.4.21 IdentToInt
Synopsis: Looks up an integer value in a integer-to-identifier map list.
Declaration: function IdentToInt(const Ident: string;var Int: LongInt;
const Map: Array of TIdentMapEntry) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IdentToInt searches Map for an entry whose Name field matches Ident and returns the corre-
sponding integer value in Int. If a match was found, the function returns True, otherwise, False
is returned.
See also: TIdentToInt (242), TIntToIdent (242), IntToIdent (256), TIdentMapEntry (242)
4.4.22 InitComponentRes
Synopsis: Provided for Delphi compatibility only
Declaration: function InitComponentRes(const ResName: string;Instance: TComponent)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: This function is provided for Delphi compatibility. It always returns false.
See also: ReadComponentRes (258)
255
4.4.23 InitInheritedComponent
Synopsis: Initializes a component descending from RootAncestor
Declaration: function InitInheritedComponent(Instance: TComponent;

RootAncestor: TClass) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: InitInheritedComponent should be called from a constructor to read properties of the com-
ponent Instance from the streaming system. The RootAncestor class is the root class from
which Instance is a descendent. This must be one of TDatamodule, TCustomForm or TFrame.
The function returns True if the properties were successfully read from a stream or False if some
error occurred.
See also: ReadComponentRes (258), ReadComponentResEx (259), ReadComponentResFile (259)
4.4.24 IntToIdent
Synopsis: Looks up an identifier for an integer value in a identifier-to-integer map list.
Declaration: function IntToIdent(Int: LongInt;var Ident: string;
const Map: Array of TIdentMapEntry) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IdentToInt searches Map for an entry whose Value field matches Int and returns the corre-
sponding identifier in Ident. If a match was found, the function returns True, otherwise, False
is returned.
See also: TIdentToInt (242), TintToIdent (242), IdentToInt (255), TIdentMapEntry (242)
4.4.25 InvalidPoint
Synopsis: Check whether a point is invalid.
Declaration: function InvalidPoint(X: Integer;Y: Integer) : Boolean
function InvalidPoint(const At: TPoint) : Boolean
function InvalidPoint(const At: TSmallPoint) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: InvalidPoint returns True if the X and Y coordinates (of the TPoint or TSmallPoint
records, if one of these versions is used) are -1.
See also: TPoint (244), TSmallPoint (246), PointsEqual (258)
4.4.26 LineStart
Synopsis: Finds the start of a line in Buffer before BufPos.
Declaration: function LineStart(Buffer: PChar;BufPos: PChar) : PChar
Visibility: default
Description: LineStart reversely scans Buffer starting at BufPos for a linefeed character. It returns a
pointer at the linefeed character.
256
4.4.27 NotifyGlobalLoading
Synopsis: Not yet implemented.
Declaration: procedure NotifyGlobalLoading

Visibility: default
4.4.28 ObjectBinaryToText
Synopsis: Converts an object stream from a binary to a text format.
Declaration: procedure ObjectBinaryToText(Input: TStream;Output: TStream;
Encoding: TObjectTextEncoding)
procedure ObjectBinaryToText(Input: TStream;Output: TStream)
Visibility: default
Description: ObjectBinaryToText reads an object stream in binary format from Input and writes the
object stream in text format to Output. No components are instantiated during the process, this is a
pure conversion routine.
See also: ObjectTextToBinary (257)
4.4.29 ObjectResourceToText
Synopsis: Converts an object stream from a (windows) resource to a text format.
Declaration: procedure ObjectResourceToText(Input: TStream;Output: TStream)
Visibility: default
Description: ObjectResourceToText reads the resource header from the Input stream and then passes the
streams to ObjectBinaryToText (257)
See also: ObjectBinaryToText (257), ObjectTextToResource (257)
4.4.30 ObjectTextToBinary
Synopsis: Converts an object stream from a text to a binary format.
Declaration: procedure ObjectTextToBinary(Input: TStream;Output: TStream)

Visibility: default
Description: Converts an object stream from a text to a binary format.
4.4.31 ObjectTextToResource
Synopsis: Converts an object stream from a text to a (windows) resource format.
Declaration: procedure ObjectTextToResource(Input: TStream;Output: TStream)
Visibility: default
257
Description: ObjectTextToResource reads an object stream in text format from Input and writes a re-
source stream to Output.
Note that for the current implementation of this method in Free Pascal, the output stream should
support positioning. (e.g. it should not be a pipe)
See also: ObjectBinaryToText (257), ObjectResourceToText (257)
4.4.32 Point
Synopsis: Returns a TPoint record with the given coordinates.
Declaration: function Point(AX: Integer;AY: Integer) : TPoint
Visibility: default
Description: Point returns a TPoint (244) record with the given coordinates AX and AY filled in.
See also: TPoint (244), SmallPoint (263), Rect (259), Bounds (251)
4.4.33 PointsEqual
Synopsis: Check whether two TPoint variables are equal.
Declaration: function PointsEqual(const P1: TPoint;const P2: TPoint) : Boolean

function PointsEqual(const P1: TSmallPoint;const P2: TSmallPoint)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: PointsEqual compares the P1 and P2 points (of type TPoint (244) or TSmallPoint (246)) and
returns True if the X and Y coordinates of the points are equal, or False otherwise.
See also: TPoint (244), TSmallPoint (246), InvalidPoint (256)
4.4.34 ReadComponentRes
Synopsis: Read component properties from a resource in the current module
Declaration: function ReadComponentRes(const ResName: string;Instance: TComponent)

: TComponent
Visibility: default
Description: ReadComponentRes will read the component’s properties from the resource ResName in the
current module (always program module). It returns Nil if the resource was not found. It returns
Instance if the resource was found and successfully applied to the component.
Errors: The function may raise an exception if the stream contains wrong data.
See also: ReadComponentResEx (259)
258
4.4.35 ReadComponentResEx
Synopsis: Read component properties from a resource in the specified module
Declaration: function ReadComponentResEx(HInstance: THandle;const ResName: string)

: TComponent
Visibility: default
Description: ReadComponentRes will locate the resource ResName in instance HInstance (the current
program, normally). It returns Nil if the resource was not found. It returns an instantiated compo-
nent with all properties found in the stream, applied. This requires that the component is registered
using registerclass.
Errors: The function may raise an exception if the stream contains wrong data.
See also: ReadComponentRes (258)
4.4.36 ReadComponentResFile
Synopsis: Read component properties from a specified resource file
Declaration: function ReadComponentResFile(const FileName: string;
Instance: TComponent) : TComponent
Visibility: default
Description: ReadComponentResFile starts reading properties for Instance from the file FileName. It
creates a filestream from FileName and then calls the TStream.ReadComponentRes (412) method
to read the state of the component from the stream.
See also: TStream.ReadComponentRes (412), WriteComponentResFile (264)
4.4.37 Rect
Synopsis: Returns a TRect record with the given coordinates.
Declaration: function Rect(ALeft: Integer;ATop: Integer;ARight: Integer;
ABottom: Integer) : TRect
Visibility: default
Description: Rect returns a TRect (245) record with the given top-left (ALeft,ATop) and bottom-right
(ABottom,ARight) corners filled in.
No checking is done to see whether the coordinates are valid.
See also: TRect (245), Point (258), SmallPoint (263), Bounds (251)
4.4.38 RedirectFixupReferences
Synopsis: Redirects references under the root object from OldRootName to NewRootName
Declaration: procedure RedirectFixupReferences(Root: TComponent;
const OldRootName: string;
const NewRootName: string)
Visibility: default
259
Description: RedirectFixupReferences examines the list of unresolved references and replaces refer-
ences to a root object named OldRootName with references to root object NewRootName.
An application programmer should never need to call RedirectFixupReferences. This func-
tion can be used by an IDE to support redirection of broken component links.
See also: RemoveFixupReferences (262)
4.4.39 RegisterClass
Synopsis: Registers a class with the streaming system.
Declaration: procedure RegisterClass(AClass: TPersistentClass)
Visibility: default
Description: RegisterClass registers the class AClass in the streaming system. After the class has been
registered, it can be read from a stream when a reference to this class is encountered.
See also: RegisterClasses (260), RegisterClassAlias (260), RegisterComponents (260), UnregisterClass (263)
4.4.40 RegisterClassAlias
Synopsis: Registers a class alias with the streaming system.
Declaration: procedure RegisterClassAlias(AClass: TPersistentClass;
const Alias: string)
Visibility: default
Description: RegisterClassAlias registers a class alias in the streaming system. If a reference to a class
Alias is encountered in a stream, then an instance of the class AClass will be created instead by
the streaming code.
See also: RegisterClass (260), RegisterClasses (260), RegisterComponents (260), UnregisterClass (263)
4.4.41 RegisterClasses
Synopsis: Registers multiple classes with the streaming system.
Declaration: procedure RegisterClasses(AClasses: Array of TPersistentClass)
Visibility: default
Description: RegisterClasses registers the specified classes AClass in the streaming system. After the
classes have been registered, they can be read from a stream when a reference to this class is encoun-
tered.
See also: RegisterClass (260), RegisterClassAlias (260), RegisterComponents (260), UnregisterClass (263)
4.4.42 RegisterComponents
Synopsis: Registers components for the component palette.
Declaration: procedure RegisterComponents(const Page: string;
ComponentClasses: Array of TComponentClass)
Visibility: default
260
Description: RegisterComponents registers the component on the appropriate component page. The com-
ponent pages can be used by an IDE to display the known components so an application programmer
may pick and use the components in his programs.
Registercomponents inserts the component class in the correct component page. If the RegisterComponentsProc
procedure is set, this is called as well. Note that this behaviour is different from Delphi’s behaviour
where an exception will be raised if the procedural variable is not set.
See also: RegisterClass (260), RegisterNoIcon (262)
4.4.43 RegisterFindGlobalComponentProc
Synopsis: Register a component searching handler
Declaration: procedure RegisterFindGlobalComponentProc
(AFindGlobalComponent: TFindGlobalComponent)
Visibility: default
Description: RegisterFindGlobalComponentProc registers a global component search callback AFindGlobalComponent.
When FindGlobalComponent (253) is called, then this callback will be used to search for the com-
ponent.
Errors: None.
See also: FindGlobalComponent (253), UnRegisterFindGlobalComponentProc (264)
4.4.44 RegisterInitComponentHandler
Synopsis: Register a component initialization handler
Declaration: procedure RegisterInitComponentHandler(ComponentClass: TComponentClass;

Handler: TInitComponentHandler)
Visibility: default
Description: RegisterInitComponentHandler registers a component initialization handler Handler

for the component ComponentClass. This handler will be used to initialize descendents of
ComponentClass in the InitInheritedComponent (256) call.
See also: InitInheritedComponent (256), TInitComponentHandler (242)
4.4.45 RegisterIntegerConsts
Synopsis: Registers some integer-to-identifier mappings.
Declaration: procedure RegisterIntegerConsts(IntegerType: Pointer;
IdentToIntFn: TIdentToInt;
IntToIdentFn: TIntToIdent)
Visibility: default
Description: RegisterIntegerConsts registers a pair of callbacks to be used when an integer of type

IntegerType must be mapped to an identifier (using IntToIdentFn) or when an identifier
must be mapper to an integer (using IdentToIntFn).
Component programmers can use RegisterIntegerConsts to associate a series of identifier
strings with integer values for a property. A necessary condition is that the property should have a
261
separate type declared using the type integer syntax. If a type of integer is defined in this way,
an IDE can show symbolic names for the values of these properties.
The IntegerType should be a pointer to the type information of the integer type. The IntToIdentFn
and IdentToIntFn are two callbacks that will be used when converting between the identifier and
integer value and vice versa. The functions IdentToInt (255) and IntToIdent (256) can be used to
implement these callback functions.
See also: TIdentToInt (242), TIntToIdent (242), IdentToInt (255), IntToIdent (256)
4.4.46 RegisterNoIcon
Synopsis: Registers components that have no icon on the component palette.
Declaration: procedure RegisterNoIcon(ComponentClasses: Array of TComponentClass)
Visibility: default
Description: RegisterNoIcon performs the same function as RegisterComponents (260) except that it calls
RegisterNoIconProc (249) instead of RegisterComponentsProc (249)
See also: RegisterNoIconProc (249), RegisterComponents (260)
4.4.47 RegisterNonActiveX
Synopsis: Register non-activex component.
Declaration: procedure RegisterNonActiveX(ComponentClasses: Array of TComponentClass;
AxRegType: TActiveXRegType)
Visibility: default
Description: Not yet implemented in Free Pascal
4.4.48 RemoveFixupReferences
Synopsis: Removes references to rootname from the fixup list.
Declaration: procedure RemoveFixupReferences(Root: TComponent;const RootName: string)
Visibility: default
Description: RemoveFixupReferences examines the list of unresolved references and removes references
to a root object pointing at Root or a root component named RootName.
An application programmer should never need to call RemoveFixupReferences. This function
can be used by an IDE to support removal of broken component links.
See also: RedirectFixupReferences (259)
4.4.49 RemoveFixups
Synopsis: Removes Instance from the fixup list.
Declaration: procedure RemoveFixups(Instance: TPersistent)

Visibility: default
262
Description: RemoveFixups removes all entries for component Instance from the list of unresolved refer-
ences.a
See also: RedirectFixupReferences (259), RemoveFixupReferences (262)
4.4.50 SmallPoint
Synopsis: Returns a TSmallPoint record with the given coordinates.
Declaration: function SmallPoint(AX: SmallInt;AY: SmallInt) : TSmallPoint

Visibility: default
Description: SmallPoint returns a TSmallPoint (246) record with the given coordinates AX and AY filled in.
See also: TSmallPoint (246), Point (258), Rect (259), Bounds (251)
4.4.51 StartClassGroup
Synopsis: Start new class group.
Declaration: procedure StartClassGroup(AClass: TPersistentClass)
Visibility: default
Description: StartClassGroup starts a new class group and adds AClass to it.
See also: GroupDescendentsWith (255), ActivateClassGroup (250), ClassGroupOf (251)
4.4.52 UnRegisterClass
Synopsis: Unregisters a class from the streaming system.
Declaration: procedure UnRegisterClass(AClass: TPersistentClass)
Visibility: default
Description: UnregisterClass removes the class AClass from the class definitions in the streaming system.
See also: UnRegisterClasses (263), UnRegisterModuleClasses (264), RegisterClass (260)
4.4.53 UnRegisterClasses
Synopsis: Unregisters multiple classes from the streaming system.
Declaration: procedure UnRegisterClasses(AClasses: Array of TPersistentClass)

Visibility: default
Description: UnregisterClasses removes the classes in AClasses from the class definitions in the stream-
ing system.
263
4.4.54 UnregisterFindGlobalComponentProc
Synopsis: Remove a previously registered component searching handler.
Declaration: procedure UnregisterFindGlobalComponentProc

(AFindGlobalComponent: TFindGlobalComponen
Visibility: default
Description: UnRegisterFindGlobalComponentProc unregisters the previously registered global com-
ponent search callback AFindGlobalComponent. After this call, when FindGlobalComponent
(253) is called, then this callback will be no longer be used to search for the component.
Errors: None.
See also: FindGlobalComponent (253), RegisterFindGlobalComponentProc (261)
4.4.55 UnRegisterModuleClasses
Synopsis: Unregisters classes registered by module.
Declaration: procedure UnRegisterModuleClasses(Module: HMODULE)
Visibility: default
Description: UnRegisterModuleClasses unregisters all classes which reside in the module Module. For
each registered class, the definition pointer is checked to see whether it resides in the module, and if
it does, the definition is removed.
See also: UnRegisterClass (263), UnRegisterClasses (263), RegisterClasses (260)
4.4.56 WriteComponentResFile
Synopsis: Write component properties to a specified resource file
Declaration: procedure WriteComponentResFile(const FileName: string;
Instance: TComponent)
Visibility: default
Description: WriteComponentResFile starts writing properties of Instance to the file FileName. It

creates a filestream from FileName and then calls TStream.WriteComponentRes (413) method to
write the state of the component to the stream.
See also: TStream.WriteComponentRes (413), ReadComponentResFile (259)
4.5 EBitsError
4.5.1 Description
When an index of a bit in a TBits (312) is out of the valid range (0 to Count-1) then a EBitsError
264
4.6 EClassNotFound
4.6.1 Description
When the streaming system needs to create a component, it looks for the class pointer (VMT) in the
list of registered classes by its name. If this name is not found, then an EClassNotFound is raised.
See also: EFilerError (265)
4.7 EComponentError
4.7.1 Description
When an error occurs during the registration of a component, or when naming a component, then a
EComponentError is raised. Possible causes are:
1. An name with an illegal character was assigned to a component.
2. A component with the same name and owner already exists.

3. The component registration system isn’t set up properly.
See also: TComponent (329), TComponent.Name (339)
4.8 EFCreateError
4.8.1 Description
When the operating system reports an error during creation of a new file in the Filestream Constructor
(349), a EFCreateError is raised.
See also: EStreamError (267), EFOpenError (265)
4.9 EFilerError
4.9.1 Description
This class serves as an ancestor class for exceptions that are raised when an error occurs during
component streaming. A EFilerError exception is raised when a class is registered twice.
See also: EStreamError (267), EReadError (267)
4.10 EFOpenError
4.10.1 Description
When the operating system reports an error during the opening of a file in the Filestream Constructor
(349), a EFOpenError is raised.
See also: EStreamError (267), EFCreateError (265)
265
4.11 EInvalidImage
4.11.1 Description
This exception is not used by Free Pascal but is provided for Delphi compatibility.
4.12 EInvalidOperation
4.12.1 Description
This exception is not used in Free Pascal, it is defined for Delphi compatibiliy purposes only.
4.13 EListError
4.13.1 Description
If an error occurs in one of the TList (369) or TStrings (428) methods, then a EListError excep-
tion is raised. This can occur in one of the following cases:
1. There is not enough memory to expand the list.

2. The list tried to grow beyond its maximal capacity.
3. An attempt was made to reduce the capacity of the list below the current element count.
4. An attempt was made to set the list count to a negative value.
5. A non-existent element of the list was referenced. (i.e. the list index was out of bounds)
6. An attempt was made to move an item to a position outside the list’s bounds.
See also: TList (369), TStrings (428)
4.14 EMethodNotFound
4.14.1 Description
This exception is no longer used in the streaming system. This error is replaced by a EReadError
(267).
See also: EFilerError (265), EReadError (267)
4.15 EObserver
4.15.1 Description
EObserver is an error that is raised when an object is registered as an observer, and it does not
implement the IFPObserver (271) interface.
See also: IFPObserver (271), IFPObserved.FPOAttachObserver (270)
266
4.16 EOutOfResources
4.16.1 Description
This exception is not used in Free Pascal, it is defined for Delphi compatibiliy purposes only.
4.17 EParserError
4.17.1 Description
When an error occurs during the parsing of a stream, an EParserError is raised. Usually this
indicates that an invalid token was found on the input stream, or the token read from the stream
wasn’t the expected token.
See also: TParser (382)
4.18 EReadError
4.18.1 Description
If an error occurs when reading from a stream, a EReadError exception is raised. Possible causes
for this are:
1. Not enough data is available when reading from a stream

2. The stream containing a component’s data contains invalid data. this will occurr only when
reading a component from a stream.
See also: EFilerError (265), EWriteError (268)
4.19 EResNotFound
4.19.1 Description
This exception is not used by Free Pascal but is provided for Delphi compatibility.
4.20 EStreamError
4.20.1 Description
An EStreamError is raised when an error occurs during reading from or writng to a stream:
Possible causes are
1. Not enough data is available in the stream.

2. Trying to seek beyond the beginning or end of the stream.
3. Trying to set the capacity of a memory stream and no memory is available.
4. Trying to write to a read-only stream, such as a resource stream.
5. Trying to read from a write-only stream.
See also: EFCreateError (265)
267
4.21 EStringListError
4.21.1 Description
When an error occurs in one of the methods of TStrings (428) then an EStringListError is
raised. This can have one of the following causes:
1. There is not enough memory to expand the list.

2. The list tried to grow beyond its maximal capacity.
3. A non-existent element of the list was referenced. (i.e. the list index was out of bounds)
4. An attempt was made to add a duplicate entry to a TStringList (423) when TStringList.Duplicates
(426) is False.
See also: TStrings (428), TStringList (423)
4.22 EThread
4.22.1 Description
Thread error exception.
4.23 EThreadDestroyCalled
4.23.1 Description
Exception raised when a thread is destroyed illegally.
4.24 EThreadExternalException
4.24.1 Description
EThreadExternalException is raised by for example TThread.CheckTerminated (450) and
TThread.SetReturnValue (450) when the thread was not created by the Free Pascal program, but by
an external code base (for example a DLL, or the calling application in a DLL).
See also: TThread.CheckTerminated (450), TThread.SetReturnValue (450)
4.25 EWriteError
4.25.1 Description
If an error occurs when writing to a stream, a EWriteError exception is raised. Possible causes
for this are:
1. The stream doesn’t allow writing.

2. An error occurred when writing a property to a stream.
See also: EFilerError (265), EReadError (267)
268
4.26 IDesignerNotify
4.26.1 Description
IDesignerNotify is an interface that can be used to communicate changes to a designer mech-
anism. It offers functionality for detecting changes, and notifications when the component is de-
stroyed.

269 Modified Notify that the component is modified.
269 Notification Notification of owner changes
4.26.3 IDesignerNotify.Modified
Synopsis: Notify that the component is modified.
Declaration: procedure Modified
Visibility: default
Description: Modified can be used to notify a designer of changes, indicating that components should be
streamed.
4.26.4 IDesignerNotify.Notification
Synopsis: Notification of owner changes
Declaration: procedure Notification(AnObject: TPersistent;Operation: TOperation)
Visibility: default
Description: Notification is the interface counterpart of TComponent.Notification (331) which is used to
communicate adds to the components.
See also: TComponent.Notification (331)
4.27 IFPObserved
4.27.1 Description
IFPObserved is an interface which can be implemented in objects that must be observable. Ob-
jects that wish to observe the object can register themselves with the FPOAttachObserver (233) call,
and must be detached using the FPODetachObserver (233) call.
This interface is not reference counted, so care must be taken that the ooFree message is sent with
FPONotifyObservers (233) when the object is freed.
See also: FPONotifyObservers (233)
269

270 FPOAttachObserver Attach a new observer to the object
270 FPODetachObserver Remove an observer from the list of observers.
270 FPONotifyObservers Notify all observers
4.27.3 IFPObserved.FPOAttachObserver
Synopsis: Attach a new observer to the object
Declaration: procedure FPOAttachObserver(AObserver: TObject)
Visibility: default
Description: FPOAttachObserver must be called with an object instance AObserver that implements the
IFPObserver (271) interface. The FPOObservedChanged (271) method of the interface will be called
whenever FPONotifyObservers (233) is used to notify observers of a change. Objects implementing
this interface should check that AObserver actually implements the IFPObserver (271) interface.
Do not make assumptions on how the interface behaves if FPOAttachObserver is called more
than once with the same interface. It may add the object to the list of observers unconditionally (in
which case it will be notified twice) or it may check that it is not yet in the list.
Errors: If AObserver does not implement the IFPObserver (271) interface, an EObserver (266) exception
must be raised. No other errors should be raised, other than a possible out of memory error.
See also: IFPObserver (271), FPOObservedChanged (271), FPONotifyObservers (233)
4.27.4 IFPObserved.FPODetachObserver
Synopsis: Remove an observer from the list of observers.
Declaration: procedure FPODetachObserver(AObserver: TObject)
Visibility: default
Description: FPODetachObserver removes the AObserver object from the list of observers. If it was not
in the list, then this is silently accepted. Once removed, it will no longer receive notifications when
FPOObservedChanged (271) is called.
If the object was added more than once using FPOAttachObserver (233), then it depends on the
implementor of the interface whether or FPODetachObserver must be called an equal number
of times.
See also: IFPObserver (271), FPOObservedChanged (271), FPONotifyObservers (233), FPOAttachObserver
(233)
4.27.5 IFPObserved.FPONotifyObservers
Synopsis: Notify all observers
Declaration: procedure FPONotifyObservers(ASender: TObject;

AOperation: TFPObservedOperation;
Data: Pointer)
Visibility: default
270
Description: FPONotifyObservers notifies all observers of the object that a change has occurred. It calls
FPOObservedChanged (271) on the IFPObserver (271) interface of all attached objects, and passes
on ASender (normally this is Self), AOperation and Data. What Data is, depends on the
implementor of the interface.
There is no guaranteed order in which the change notifications are delivered to the observers. This is
an implementation-specific detail, which should not be relied upon in any way.
See also: IFPObserver (271), FPOObservedChanged (271), FPODetachObserver (233), FPOAttachObserver
(233)
4.28 IFPObserver
4.28.1 Description
IFPObserver is the interface an object must implement if it wishes to receive change notifications
from another object. The presence of this interface will be checked when the object registers itself
using IFPObserver.FPOAttachObserver (271). The change notifications arrive because the FPOOb-
servedChanged (233) method is called by the observed object.
See also: IFPObserved (269), FPOAttachObserver (270)

271 FPOObservedChanged Entry point for change notifications
4.28.3 IFPObserver.FPOObservedChanged
Synopsis: Entry point for change notifications
Declaration: procedure FPOObservedChanged(ASender: TObject;
Operation: TFPObservedOperation;
Data: Pointer)
Visibility: default
Description: FPOObservedChanged is the method that is called by an observed object (IFPObserved (269))
when it calls FPONotifyObservers (270) The Sender is the object under observation, the Operation
and Data are the parameters used in the call to FPONotifyObservers.
See also: IFPObserved (269), FPONotifyObservers (270)
4.29 IInterfaceComponentReference
4.29.1 Description
IInterfaceComponentReference is an interface to return the component that implements a
given interface. It is implemented by TComponent (329).
See also: TComponent (329)
271

272 GetComponent Return component instance
4.29.3 IInterfaceComponentReference.GetComponent
Synopsis: Return component instance
Declaration: function GetComponent : TComponent

Visibility: default
Description: GetComponent returns the component instance.
Errors: None.
4.30 IInterfaceList
4.30.1 Description
IInterfaceList is an interface for maintaining a list of interfaces, strongly resembling the stan-
dard TList (369) class. It offers the same list of public methods as TList, with the exception that it
uses interfaces instead of pointers.
All interfaces in the list should descend from IUnknown.
More detailed descriptions of how the various methods behave can be found in the TList reference.
See also: TList (369)

275 Add Add an interface to the list
274 Clear Clear the list
274 Delete Remove an interface from the list
275 Exchange Exchange 2 interfaces in the list
275 First Return the first non-empty interface in the list.
273 Get Retrieve an interface pointer from the list.
273 GetCapacity Return the capacity of the list.
273 GetCount Return the current number of elements in the list.
275 IndexOf Return the index of an interface.
275 Insert Insert an interface in the list.
276 Last Returns the last non-nil interface in the list.
276 Lock Lock the list
273 Put Write an item to the list
276 Remove Remove an interface from the list
274 SetCapacity Set the capacity of the list
274 SetCount Set the number of items in the list
276 Unlock Unlock the list.
272
4.30.3 Property overview

Page Properties Access Description
276 Capacity rw Capacity of the list
277 Count rw Current number of elements in the list.
277 Items rw Provides Index-based, sequential, access to the interfaces in the
list.
4.30.4 IInterfaceList.Get
Synopsis: Retrieve an interface pointer from the list.
Declaration: function Get(i: Integer) : IUnknown
Visibility: default
Description: Get returns the interface pointer at position i in the list. It serves as the Read method for the Items
(277) property.
See also: IInterfaceList.Items (277), TList.Items (376)
4.30.5 IInterfaceList.GetCapacity
Synopsis: Return the capacity of the list.
Declaration: function GetCapacity : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: GetCapacity returns the current capacity of the list. It serves as the Read method for the Capac-
ity (276) property.
See also: IInterfaceList.Capacity (276), TList.Capacity (376)
4.30.6 IInterfaceList.GetCount
Synopsis: Return the current number of elements in the list.
Declaration: function GetCount : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: It serves as the Read method for the Count (277) property.
See also: IInterfaceList.Count (277), TList.Count (376)
4.30.7 IInterfaceList.Put
Synopsis: Write an item to the list
Declaration: procedure Put(i: Integer;item: IUnknown)
Visibility: default
Description: Put writes the interface Item at position I in the list. It servers as the Write method for the Items
(277) property.
See also: IInterfaceList.Items (277), TList.Items (376)
273
4.30.8 IInterfaceList.SetCapacity
Synopsis: Set the capacity of the list
Declaration: procedure SetCapacity(NewCapacity: Integer)

Visibility: default
Description: SetCapacity sets the capacity of the list to NewCapacity. It serves as the Write method for
the Capacity (276) property.
See also: IInterfaceList.Capacity (276), TList.Capacity (376)
4.30.9 IInterfaceList.SetCount
Synopsis: Set the number of items in the list
Declaration: procedure SetCount(NewCount: Integer)
Visibility: default
Description: SetCount sets the count of the list to NewCount. It serves as the Write method for the Capacity
(276)
See also: IInterfaceList.Count (277), TList.Count (376)
4.30.10 IInterfaceList.Clear
Synopsis: Clear the list
Declaration: procedure Clear
Visibility: default
Description: Clear removes all interfaces from the list. All interfaces in the list will be cleared (i.e. their
reference count will decrease with 1)
See also: TList.Clear (372)
4.30.11 IInterfaceList.Delete
Synopsis: Remove an interface from the list
Declaration: procedure Delete(index: Integer)

Visibility: default
Description: Delete removes the interface at position Index from the list. It does this by explicitly clearing
the interface and then removing the slot.
See also: TList.Clear (372), IInterfaceList.Add (275), IInterfaceList.Delete (274), IInterfaceList.Insert (275)
274
4.30.12 IInterfaceList.Exchange
Synopsis: Exchange 2 interfaces in the list
Declaration: procedure Exchange(index1: Integer;index2: Integer)
Visibility: default
Description: Exchange exchanges 2 interfaces in the list at locations index1 and Index2.
See also: TList.Exchange (372), IInterfaceList.Add (275), IInterfaceList.Delete (274), IInterfaceList.Insert
(275)
4.30.13 IInterfaceList.First
Synopsis: Return the first non-empty interface in the list.
Declaration: function First : IUnknown
Visibility: default
Description: First returns the first non-empty interface in the list.
See also: TList.First (373), IInterfaceList.IndexOf (275), IInterfaceList.Last (276)
4.30.14 IInterfaceList.IndexOf
Synopsis: Return the index of an interface.
Declaration: function IndexOf(item: IUnknown) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: IndexOf returns the location in the list of the interface Item. If there is no such interface in the
list, then -1 is returned.
See also: TList.IndexOf (374), IInterfaceList.First (275), IInterfaceList.Last (276)
4.30.15 IInterfaceList.Add
Synopsis: Add an interface to the list
Declaration: function Add(item: IUnknown) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: Add adds the interface Item to the list, and returns the position at which it has been added.
See also: TList.Add (371), IInterfaceList.Insert (275), IInterfaceList.Delete (274)
4.30.16 IInterfaceList.Insert
Synopsis: Insert an interface in the list.
Declaration: procedure Insert(i: Integer;item: IUnknown)
Visibility: default
Description: Insert inserts the interface Item in the list, at position I, shifting all items one position.
See also: TList.Insert (374), IInterfaceList.Add (275), IInterfaceList.Delete (274)
275
4.30.17 IInterfaceList.Last
Synopsis: Returns the last non-nil interface in the list.
Declaration: function Last : IUnknown
Visibility: default
Description: Last returns the last non-empty interface in the list.
See also: TList.Last (374), IInterfaceList.First (275), IInterfaceList.IndexOf (275)
4.30.18 IInterfaceList.Remove
Declaration: function Remove(item: IUnknown) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: Remove searches for the first occurrence of Item in the list and deletes it.
See also: TList.Remove (375), IInterfaceList.Delete (274), IInterfaceList.IndexOf (275)
4.30.19 IInterfaceList.Lock
Synopsis: Lock the list
Declaration: procedure Lock
Visibility: default
Description: Lock locks the list. After a call to lock, the object list can only be accessed by the current thread,
untill UnLock (276) is called.
See also: TInterfaceList.Lock (366), IInterfaceList.Unlock (276)
4.30.20 IInterfaceList.Unlock
Synopsis: Unlock the list.
Declaration: procedure Unlock
Visibility: default
Description: Unlock unlocks a locked list. After a call to UnLock, other threads are again able to access the
list.
See also: TInterfaceList.UnLock (366), IInterfaceList.Lock (276)
4.30.21 IInterfaceList.Capacity
Synopsis: Capacity of the list
Declaration: Property Capacity : Integer
Visibility: default
Access: Read,Write
276
Description: Capacity is the maximum number of elements the list can hold without needing to reallocate
memory for the list. It can be set to improve speed when adding a lot of items to the list.
See also: TList.Capacity (376), IInterfaceList.Count (277)
4.30.22 IInterfaceList.Count
Synopsis: Current number of elements in the list.
Declaration: Property Count : Integer

Visibility: default
Access: Read,Write
Description: Count is the current number of elements in the list. Setting it to a larger number will allocate empty
slots. Setting it to a smaller number will clear any interfaces that fall outside the new border.
See also: IInterfaceList.Capacity (276), TList.Count (376)
4.30.23 IInterfaceList.Items
Synopsis: Provides Index-based, sequential, access to the interfaces in the list.
Declaration: Property Items[index: Integer]: IUnknown; default

Visibility: default
Access: Read,Write
Description: Items is the default property of the interface list and provides index-based array access to the
interfaces in the list. Allowed values for Index include 0 to Count-1
See also: IInterfaceList.Count (277), TList.Items (376)
4.31 IStreamPersist
4.31.1 Description
IStreamPersist defines an interface for object persistence streaming to a stream. Any class
implementing this interface is expected to be able to save or load it’s state from or to a stream.
See also: TPersistent (389), TComponent (329), TStream (408)

278 LoadFromStream Load persistent data from stream.
278 SaveToStream Save persistent data to stream.
277
4.31.3 IStreamPersist.LoadFromStream
Synopsis: Load persistent data from stream.
Declaration: procedure LoadFromStream(Stream: TStream)

Visibility: default
Description: LoadFromStream is the method called when the object should load it’s state from the stream
stream. It should be able to read the data which was written using the SavetoStream method.
See also: TPersistent (389), TComponent (329), TStream (408), IStreamPersist.SaveToStream (278)
4.31.4 IStreamPersist.SaveToStream
Synopsis: Save persistent data to stream.
Declaration: procedure SaveToStream(Stream: TStream)
Visibility: default
Description: SaveFromStream is the method called when the object should load it’s state from the stream
stream. The data written by this method should be readable by the LoadFromStream method.
See also: TPersistent (389), TComponent (329), TStream (408), IStreamPersist.LoadFromStream (278)
4.32 IStringsAdapter
4.32.1 Description
Is not yet supported in Free Pascal.
See also: TStrings (428)

278 ReferenceStrings Add a reference to the indicated strings.
278 ReleaseStrings Release the reference to the strings.
4.32.3 IStringsAdapter.ReferenceStrings
Synopsis: Add a reference to the indicated strings.
Declaration: procedure ReferenceStrings(S: TStrings)
Visibility: default
4.32.4 IStringsAdapter.ReleaseStrings
Synopsis: Release the reference to the strings.
Declaration: procedure ReleaseStrings
Visibility: default
278
4.33 IVCLComObject
4.33.1 Description
IVCLComObject is used by TComponent to implement the IUnknown interface used by COM
automation servers. Partially, it is the translation to pascal of the IDispatch interface definition by
Microsoft. If TComponent needs to return an IUnknown interface, it creates a IVCLComObject
interface instead.
See also: TComponent.VCLComObject (339)

280 FreeOnRelease Is called by TComponent.FreeOnRelease
280 GetIDsOfNames The IDispatch:GetIDsOfNames call for automation servers.
279 GetTypeInfo The IDispatch:GetTypeInfo call for automation servers
279 GetTypeInfoCount The IDispatch:GetTypeInfoCount call for automation servers
280 Invoke The IDispatch:Invoke call for automation servers.
280 SafeCallException This method can be invoked if an exception occurs during Invoke
4.33.3 IVCLComObject.GetTypeInfoCount
Synopsis: The IDispatch:GetTypeInfoCount call for automation servers
Declaration: function GetTypeInfoCount(out Count: Integer) : HRESULT
Visibility: default
Description: GetTypeInfoCount must return in Count either 0 or 1 to indicate that it provides type infor-
mation (1) or not (0).
Errors: On error, a nonzero (different from S_OK) return value must be returned.
See also: IVCLComObject.GetTypeInfo (279)
4.33.4 IVCLComObject.GetTypeInfo
Synopsis: The IDispatch:GetTypeInfo call for automation servers
Declaration: function GetTypeInfo(Index: Integer;LocaleID: Integer;out TypeInfo)
: HRESULT
Visibility: default
Description: GetTypeInfo must return the Index-th entry in the type information of the component in TypeInfo.
The LocaleID argument can be used to indicate the locale of the caller, as different type informa-
tion can be returned depending on the locale.
See also: IVCLComObject.GetTypeInfoCount (279)
279
4.33.5 IVCLComObject.GetIDsOfNames
Synopsis: The IDispatch:GetIDsOfNames call for automation servers.
Declaration: function GetIDsOfNames(const IID: TGuid;Names: Pointer;

NameCount: Integer;LocaleID: Integer;
DispIDs: Pointer) : HRESULT
Visibility: default
Description: GetIDsOfNames must return in DispIDs the dispatch Ids for the NameCount names of the
methods listed in Names. The LocaleID indicates the locale of the caller.
See also: IVCLComObject.Invoke (280)
4.33.6 IVCLComObject.Invoke
Synopsis: The IDispatch:Invoke call for automation servers.
Declaration: function Invoke(DispID: Integer;const IID: TGuid;LocaleID: Integer;
Flags: Word;var Params;VarResult: Pointer;
ExcepInfo: Pointer;ArgErr: Pointer) : HRESULT
Visibility: default
Description: Invoke must invoke the method designated by DispID. IID can be ignored. LocaleID is
used by the caller to indicate the locale it is using. The Flags argument describes the context in
which Invoke is called: a method, or property getter/setter. The Params argument contains the
parameters to the call. The result should be in VarResult. On error, ExcepInfo and ArgError
should be filled.
The function should return 0 (S_OK) if all went well.
See also: IVCLComObject.GetIDsOfNames (280)
4.33.7 IVCLComObject.SafeCallException
Synopsis: This method can be invoked if an exception occurs during Invoke
Declaration: function SafeCallException(ExceptObject: TObject;

ExceptAddr: CodePointer) : HRESULT
Visibility: default
Description: SafeCallException is called to handle an exception during invocation of the Invoke method.
The TObject implementation of this method returns E_UNEXPECTED.
See also: IVCLComObject.Invoke (280)
4.33.8 IVCLComObject.FreeOnRelease
Synopsis: Is called by TComponent.FreeOnRelease
Declaration: procedure FreeOnRelease

Visibility: default
280
Description: FreeOnRelease is called by TComponent.FreeOnRelease (334) for the IVCLComObject in-

terface implemented by TComponent.
See also: TComponent.FreeOnRelease (334)
4.34 TAbstractObjectReader
4.34.1 Description
The Free Pascal streaming mechanism, while compatible with Delphi’s mechanism, differs from
it in the sense that the streaming mechanism uses a driver class when streaming components. The
TAbstractObjectReader class is the base driver class for reading property values from streams.
It consists entirely of abstract methods, which must be implemented by descendent classes.
Different streaming mechanisms can be implemented by making a descendent from TAbstractObjectReader.
The TBinaryObjectReader (300) class is such a descendent class, which streams data in binary (Del-
phi compatible) format.
All methods described in this class, mustbe implemented by descendent classes.
See also: TBinaryObjectReader (300)

282 BeginComponent Marks the reading of a new component.
283 BeginProperty Marks the reading of a property value.
282 BeginRootComponent Starts the reading of the root component.
281 NextValue Returns the type of the next value in the stream.
283 Read Read raw data from stream
283 ReadBinary Read binary data from the stream.
284 ReadCurrency Read a currency value from the stream.
284 ReadDate Read a date value from the stream.
283 ReadFloat Read a float value from the stream.
285 ReadIdent Read an identifier from the stream.
285 ReadInt16 Read a 16-bit integer from the stream.
285 ReadInt8 Read an 8-bit integer from the stream.
286 ReadSet Reads a set from the stream.
287 ReadSignature
284 ReadSingle Read a single (real-type) value from the stream.
287 ReadStr Read a shortstring from the stream
287 ReadString Read a string of type StringType from the stream.
288 ReadUnicodeString Read a unicode string value
282 ReadValue Reads the type of the next value.
288 ReadWideString Read a widestring value from the stream.
288 SkipComponent Skip till the end of the component.
288 SkipValue Skip the current value.
4.34.3 TAbstractObjectReader.NextValue
Synopsis: Returns the type of the next value in the stream.
281
Declaration: function NextValue : TValueType; Virtual; Abstract

Visibility: public
Description: This function should return the type of the next value in the stream, but should not read the actual
value, i.e. the stream position should not be altered by this method. This is used to ’peek’ in the
stream what value is next.
See also: TAbstractObjectReader.ReadValue (282)
4.34.4 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadValue
Synopsis: Reads the type of the next value.
Declaration: function ReadValue : TValueType; Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: This function returns the type of the next value in the stream and reads it. i.e. after the call to this
method, the stream is positioned to read the value of the type returned by this function.
See also: TAbstractObjectReader.ReadValue (282)
4.34.5 TAbstractObjectReader.BeginRootComponent
Synopsis: Starts the reading of the root component.
Declaration: procedure BeginRootComponent; Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: This function can be used to initialize the driver class for reading a component. It is called once at
the beginning of the read process, and is immediately followed by a call to BeginComponent (282).
See also: TAbstractObjectReader.BeginComponent (282)
4.34.6 TAbstractObjectReader.BeginComponent
Synopsis: Marks the reading of a new component.
Declaration: procedure BeginComponent(var Flags: TFilerFlags;var AChildPos: Integer;

var CompClassName: string;var CompName: string)
; Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: This method is called when the streaming process wants to start reading a new component.
Descendent classes should override this method to read the start of a component new component
definition and return the needed arguments. Flags should be filled with any flags that were found
at the component definition, as well as AChildPos. The CompClassName should be filled with
the class name of the streamed component, and the CompName argument should be filled with the
name of the component.
AChildPos is used to change the ordering in which components appear below their parent compo-
nent when streaming descendent forms.
See also: TAbstractObjectReader.BeginRootComponent (282), TAbstractObjectReader.BeginProperty (283)
282
4.34.7 TAbstractObjectReader.BeginProperty
Synopsis: Marks the reading of a property value.
Declaration: function BeginProperty : string; Virtual; Abstract

Visibility: public
Description: BeginProperty is called by the streaming system when it wants to read a new property. The
return value of the function is the name of the property which can be read from the stream.
See also: TAbstractObjectReader.BeginComponent (282)
4.34.8 TAbstractObjectReader.Read
Synopsis: Read raw data from stream
Declaration: procedure Read(var Buf;Count: LongInt); Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: Read is introduced for Delphi compatibility to read raw data from the component stream. This
should not be used in production code as it will totally mess up the streaming.
See also: TBinaryObjectReader.Read (303), TReader.Read (397)
4.34.9 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadBinary
Synopsis: Read binary data from the stream.
Declaration: procedure ReadBinary(const DestData: TMemoryStream); Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: ReadBinary is called when binary data should be read from the stream (i.e. after ReadValue (282)
returned a valuetype of vaBinary). The data should be stored in the DestData memory stream
by descendent classes.
See also: TAbstractObjectReader.ReadFloat (283), TAbstractObjectReader.ReadDate (284), TAbstractObjec-
tReader.ReadSingle (284), TAbstractObjectReader.ReadIdent (285), TAbstractObjectReader.ReadInt8
(285), TAbstractObjectReader.ReadInt16 (285), TAbstractObjectReader.ReadInt32 (286), TAbstrac-
tObjectReader.ReadInt64 (286), TabstractObjectReader.ReadSet (286), TabstractObjectReader.ReadStr
(287), TabstractObjectReader.ReadString (287)
4.34.10 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadFloat
Synopsis: Read a float value from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadFloat : Extended; Virtual; Abstract

Visibility: public
Description: ReadFloat is called by the streaming system when it wants to read a float from the stream (i.e.
after ReadValue (282) returned a valuetype of vaExtended). The return value should be the value
of the float.
283

4.34.11 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadSingle
Synopsis: Read a single (real-type) value from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadSingle : Single; Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: ReadSingle is called by the streaming system when it wants to read a single-type float from the
stream (i.e. after ReadValue (282) returned a valuetype of vaSingle). The return value should be
the value of the float.
4.34.12 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadDate
Synopsis: Read a date value from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadDate : TDateTime; Virtual; Abstract

Visibility: public
Description: ReadDate is called by the streaming system when it wants to read a date/time value from the
stream (i.e. after ReadValue (282) returned a valuetype of vaDate). The return value should be the
date/time value. (This value can be stored as a float, since TDateTime is nothing but a float.)
See also: TAbstractObjectReader.ReadFloat (283), TAbstractObjectReader.ReadSingle (284), TAbstractOb-

jectReader.ReadIdent (285), TAbstractObjectReader.ReadInt8 (285), TAbstractObjectReader.ReadInt16
(285), TAbstractObjectReader.ReadInt32 (286), TAbstractObjectReader.ReadInt64 (286), Tabstrac-
tObjectReader.ReadSet (286), TabstractObjectReader.ReadStr (287), TabstractObjectReader.ReadString
(287)
4.34.13 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadCurrency
Synopsis: Read a currency value from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadCurrency : Currency; Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: ReadCurrency is called when a currency-typed value should be read from the stream. This
abstract method should be overidden by descendent classes, and should return the currency value
read from the stream.
See also: TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteCurrency (292)
284
4.34.14 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadIdent
Synopsis: Read an identifier from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadIdent(ValueType: TValueType) : string; Virtual; Abstract

Visibility: public
Description: ReadIdent is called by the streaming system if it expects to read an identifier of type ValueType
from the stream after a call to ReadValue (282) returned vaIdent. The identifier should be returned
as a string. Note that in some cases the identifier does not actually have to be in the stream. The
following table indicates which identifiers must actually be read:
Table 4.20:
ValueType Expected value
vaIdent Read from stream.
vaNil ’Nil’. This does not have to be read from the stream.
vaFalse ’False’. This does not have to be read from the stream.
vaTrue ’True’. This does not have to be read from the stream.
vaNull ’Null’. This does not have to be read from the stream.

tReader.ReadSingle (284), TAbstractObjectReader.ReadInt8 (285), TAbstractObjectReader.ReadInt16
(287)
4.34.15 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadInt8
Synopsis: Read an 8-bit integer from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadInt8 : ShortInt; Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: ReadInt8 is called by the streaming process if it expects to read an integer value with a size of
8 bits (1 byte) from the stream (i.e. after ReadValue (282) returned a valuetype of vaInt8). The
return value is the value if the integer. Note that the size of the value in the stream does not actually
have to be 1 byte.
(287)
Synopsis: Read a 16-bit integer from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadInt16 : SmallInt; Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
285
16 bits (2 bytes) from the stream (i.e. after ReadValue (282) returned a valuetype of vaInt16). The
have to be 2 bytes.
(287)
Declaration: function ReadInt32 : LongInt; Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
32 bits (4 bytes) from the stream (i.e. after ReadValue (282) returned a valuetype of vaInt32). The
return value is the value of the integer. Note that the size of the value in the stream does not actually
have to be 4 bytes.
(287)
Declaration: function ReadInt64 : Int64; Virtual; Abstract

Visibility: public
Description: ReadInt64 is called by the streaming process if it expects to read an int64 value with a size of 64
bits (8 bytes) from the stream (i.e. after ReadValue (282) returned a valuetype of vaInt64). The
have to be 8 bytes.
(287)
4.34.19 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadSet
Synopsis: Reads a set from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadSet(EnumType: Pointer) : Integer; Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
286
Description: This method is called by the streaming system if it expects to read a set from the stream (i.e. after
ReadValue (282) returned a valuetype of vaSet). The return value is the contents of the set, encoded
in a bitmask the following way:
For each (enumerated) value in the set, the bit corresponding to the ordinal value of the enumerated
value should be set. i.e. as 1 shl ord(value).

tObjectReader.ReadInt64 (286), TabstractObjectReader.ReadStr (287), TabstractObjectReader.ReadString
(287)
4.34.20 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadSignature
Declaration: procedure ReadSignature; Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
4.34.21 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadStr
Synopsis: Read a shortstring from the stream
Declaration: function ReadStr : string; Virtual; Abstract

Visibility: public
Description: ReadStr is called by the streaming system if it expects to read a string from the stream (i.e. after
ReadValue (282) returned a valuetype of vaLString,vaWstring or vaString). The return
value is the string.
tObjectReader.ReadInt64 (286), TabstractObjectReader.ReadSet (286), TabstractObjectReader.ReadString
(287)
4.34.22 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadString
Synopsis: Read a string of type StringType from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadString(StringType: TValueType) : string; Virtual
; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: ReadStr is called by the streaming system if it expects to read a string from the stream (i.e. after
ReadValue (282) returned a valuetype of vaLString,vaWstring or vaString). The return
value is the string.

(287)
287
4.34.23 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadWideString
Synopsis: Read a widestring value from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadWideString : WideString; Virtual; Abstract

Visibility: public
Description: ReadWideString is called when a widestring-typed value should be read from the stream. This
abstract method should be overidden by descendent classes.
See also: TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteWideString (293)
4.34.24 TAbstractObjectReader.ReadUnicodeString
Synopsis: Read a unicode string value
Declaration: function ReadUnicodeString : UnicodeString; Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: ReadUnicodeString should read a UnicodeString value from the stream. (indicated by the
vaUString value type).
Descendent classes should override this method to actually read a UnicodeString value.
See also: TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteUnicodeString (311), TAbstractObjectReader.ReadWideString (288)
4.34.25 TAbstractObjectReader.SkipComponent
Synopsis: Skip till the end of the component.
Declaration: procedure SkipComponent(SkipComponentInfos: Boolean); Virtual
; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: This method is used to skip the entire declaration of a component in the stream. Each descendent of
TAbstractObjectReader should implement this in a way which is optimal for the implemented
stream format.
See also: TAbstractObjectReader.BeginComponent (282), TAbstractObjectReader.SkipValue (288)
4.34.26 TAbstractObjectReader.SkipValue
Synopsis: Skip the current value.
Declaration: procedure SkipValue; Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: SkipValue should be used when skipping a value in the stream; The method should determine the
type of the value which should be skipped by itself, if this is necessary.
See also: TAbstractObjectReader.SkipComponent (288)
288
4.35 TAbstractObjectWriter
4.35.1 Description
Abstract driver class for writing component data.

289 BeginCollection Start writing a collection.
289 BeginComponent Start writing a component
290 BeginList Start writing a list.
290 BeginProperty Start writing a property
290 EndList Mark the end of a list.
290 EndProperty Marks the end of writing of a property.
290 Write Write raw data to stream
291 WriteBinary Writes binary data to the stream.
291 WriteBoolean Writes a boolean value to the stream.
292 WriteCurrency Write a currency value to the stream
291 WriteDate Writes a date type to the stream.
291 WriteFloat Writes a float value to the stream.
292 WriteIdent Writes an identifier to the stream.
292 WriteInteger Writes an integer value to the stream
293 WriteMethodName Writes a methodname to the stream.
293 WriteSet Writes a set value to the stream.
290 WriteSignature
291 WriteSingle Writes a single-type real value to the stream.
293 WriteString Writes a string value to the stream.
292 WriteUInt64 Write an unsigned 64-bit integer
293 WriteUnicodeString Write a unicode string to the stream.
292 WriteVariant Write a variant to the stream
293 WriteWideString Write a widestring value to the stream
4.35.3 TAbstractObjectWriter.BeginCollection
Synopsis: Start writing a collection.
Declaration: procedure BeginCollection; Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: Start writing a collection.
4.35.4 TAbstractObjectWriter.BeginComponent
Synopsis: Start writing a component
Declaration: procedure BeginComponent(Component: TComponent;Flags: TFilerFlags;
ChildPos: Integer); Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: Start writing a component
289
4.35.5 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteSignature
Declaration: procedure WriteSignature; Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
4.35.6 TAbstractObjectWriter.BeginList
Synopsis: Start writing a list.
Declaration: procedure BeginList; Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: Start writing a list.
4.35.7 TAbstractObjectWriter.EndList
Synopsis: Mark the end of a list.
Declaration: procedure EndList; Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: Mark the end of a list.
4.35.8 TAbstractObjectWriter.BeginProperty
Synopsis: Start writing a property
Declaration: procedure BeginProperty(const PropName: string); Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: Start writing a property
4.35.9 TAbstractObjectWriter.EndProperty
Synopsis: Marks the end of writing of a property.
Declaration: procedure EndProperty; Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: Marks the end of writing of a property.
4.35.10 TAbstractObjectWriter.Write
Synopsis: Write raw data to stream
Declaration: procedure Write(const Buffer;Count: LongInt); Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: Write is introduced for Delphi compatibility to write raw data to the component stream. This
should not be used in new production code as it will totally mess up the streaming.
See also: TBinaryObjectWriter.Write (309), TWriter.Write (461)
290
4.35.11 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteBinary
Synopsis: Writes binary data to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteBinary(const Buffer;Count: LongInt); Virtual; Abstract

Visibility: public
Description: Writes binary data to the stream.
4.35.12 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteBoolean
Synopsis: Writes a boolean value to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteBoolean(Value: Boolean); Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: Writes a boolean value to the stream.
4.35.13 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteFloat
Synopsis: Writes a float value to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteFloat(const Value: Extended); Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: Writes a float value to the stream.
4.35.14 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteSingle
Synopsis: Writes a single-type real value to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteSingle(const Value: Single); Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: Writes a single-type real value to the stream.
4.35.15 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteDate
Synopsis: Writes a date type to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteDate(const Value: TDateTime); Virtual; Abstract

Visibility: public
Description: Writes a date type to the stream.
291
4.35.16 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteCurrency
Synopsis: Write a currency value to the stream
Declaration: procedure WriteCurrency(const Value: Currency); Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: WriteCurrency is called when a currency-typed value should be written to the stream. This
See also: TAbstractObjectReader.ReadCurrency (284)
4.35.17 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteIdent
Synopsis: Writes an identifier to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteIdent(const Ident: string); Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: Writes an identifier to the stream.
4.35.18 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteInteger
Synopsis: Writes an integer value to the stream
Declaration: procedure WriteInteger(Value: Int64); Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: Writes an integer value to the stream
4.35.19 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteUInt64
Synopsis: Write an unsigned 64-bit integer
Declaration: procedure WriteUInt64(Value: QWord); Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: WriteUInt64 must be overridden by descendent classes to write a 64-bit unsigned Value (val-
uetype vaQWord) to the stream.
Errors: None.
See also: TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteUInt64 (310)
4.35.20 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteVariant
Synopsis: Write a variant to the stream
Declaration: procedure WriteVariant(const Value: Variant); Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: WriteVariant must be overridden by descendent classes to write a simple variant type to the
stream. WriteVariant does not write arrays types or complex types.
See also: TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteVariant (312)
292
4.35.21 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteMethodName
Synopsis: Writes a methodname to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteMethodName(const Name: string); Virtual; Abstract

Visibility: public
Description: Writes a methodname to the stream.
4.35.22 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteSet
Synopsis: Writes a set value to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteSet(Value: LongInt;SetType: Pointer); Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: Writes a set value to the stream.
4.35.23 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteString
Synopsis: Writes a string value to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteString(const Value: string); Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: Writes a string value to the stream.
4.35.24 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteWideString
Synopsis: Write a widestring value to the stream
Declaration: procedure WriteWideString(const Value: WideString); Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: WriteCurrency is called when a currency-typed value should be written to the stream. This
See also: TAbstractObjectReader.ReadWideString (288)
4.35.25 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteUnicodeString
Synopsis: Write a unicode string to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteUnicodeString(const Value: UnicodeString); Virtual
; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: WriteUnicodeString must be overridden by descendent classes to write a unicodestring (val-

uetype vaUString) value to the stream.
See also: TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteUnicodeString (311)
293
4.36 TBasicAction
4.36.1 Description
TBasicAction implements a basic action class from which all actions are derived. It introduces all
basic methods of an action, and implements functionality to maintain a list of clients, i.e. components
that are connected with this action.
Do not create instances of TBasicAction. Instead, create a descendent class and create an instance
of this class instead.
See also: TBasicActionLink (298), TComponent (329)

294 Create Creates a new instance of a TBasicAction (294) class.
294 Destroy Destroys the action.
296 Execute Triggers the OnExecute (297) event
295 ExecuteTarget Executes the action on the Target object
295 HandlesTarget Determines whether Target can be handled by this action
296 RegisterChanges Registers a new client with the action.
296 UnRegisterChanges Unregisters a client from the list of clients
296 Update Triggers the OnUpdate (297) event
295 UpdateTarget Notify client controls when the action updates itself.

297 ActionComponent rw Returns the component that initiated the action.
297 OnExecute rw Event triggered when the action executes.
297 OnUpdate rw Event trigged when the application is idle.
4.36.4 TBasicAction.Create
Synopsis: Creates a new instance of a TBasicAction (294) class.
Declaration: constructor Create(AOwner: TComponent); Override

Visibility: public
Description: Create calls the inherited constructor, and then initializes the list of clients controls (or action
lists).
Under normal circumstances it should not be necessary to create a TBasicAction descendent
manually, actions are created in an IDE.
See also: Destroy (294), AssignClient (294)
4.36.5 TBasicAction.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys the action.
Declaration: destructor Destroy; Override
294
Visibility: public
Description: Destroy cleans up the list of client controls and then calls the inherited destructor.
An application programmer should not call Destroy directly; Instead Free should be called, if it
needs to be called at all. Normally the controlling class (e.g. a TActionList) will destroy the action.
4.36.6 TBasicAction.HandlesTarget
Synopsis: Determines whether Target can be handled by this action
Declaration: function HandlesTarget(Target: TObject) : Boolean; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: HandlesTarget returns True if Target is a valid client for this action and if so, if it is
in a suitable state to execute the action. An application programmer should never need to call
HandlesTarget directly, it will be called by the action itself when needed.
In TBasicAction this method is empty; descendent classes should override this method to imple-
ment appropriate checks.
See also: UpdateTarget (295), ExecuteTarget (295)
4.36.7 TBasicAction.UpdateTarget
Synopsis: Notify client controls when the action updates itself.
Declaration: procedure UpdateTarget(Target: TObject); Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: UpdateTarget should update the client control specified by Target when the action updates
itself. In TBasicAction, the implementation of UpdateTarget is empty. Descendent classes
should override and implement UpdateTarget to actually update the Target object.
An application programmer should never need to call HandlesTarget directly, it will be called
by the action itself when needed.
See also: HandlesTarget (295), ExecuteTarget (295)
4.36.8 TBasicAction.ExecuteTarget
Synopsis: Executes the action on the Target object
Declaration: procedure ExecuteTarget(Target: TObject); Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: ExecuteTarget performs the action on the Target object. In TBasicAction this method
does nothing. Descendent classes should implement the action to be performed. For instance an
action to post data in a dataset could call the Post method of the dataset.
An application programmer should never call ExecuteTarget directly.
See also: HandlesTarget (295), UpdateTarget (295), Execute (296)
295
4.36.9 TBasicAction.Execute
Synopsis: Triggers the OnExecute (297) event
Declaration: function Execute : Boolean; Dynamic

Visibility: public
Description: Execute triggers the OnExecute event, if one is assigned. It returns True if the event handler
was called, False otherwise.
4.36.10 TBasicAction.RegisterChanges
Synopsis: Registers a new client with the action.
Declaration: procedure RegisterChanges(Value: TBasicActionLink)
Visibility: public
Description: RegisterChanges adds Value to the list of clients.

See also: UnregisterChanges (296)
4.36.11 TBasicAction.UnRegisterChanges
Synopsis: Unregisters a client from the list of clients
Declaration: procedure UnRegisterChanges(Value: TBasicActionLink)

Visibility: public
Description: UnregisterChanges removes Value from the list of clients. This is called for instance when
the action is destroyed, or when the client is assigned a new action.
See also: UnregisterChanges (296), Destroy (294)
4.36.12 TBasicAction.Update
Synopsis: Triggers the OnUpdate (297) event
Declaration: function Update : Boolean; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: Update triggers the OnUpdate event, if one is assigned. It returns True if the event was triggered,
or False if no event was assigned.
Application programmers should never run Update directly. The Update method is called auto-
matically by the action mechanism; Normally this is in the Idle time of an application. An application
programmer should assign the OnUpdate (297) event, and perform any checks in that handler.
See also: OnUpdate (297), Execute (296), UpdateTarget (295)
296
4.36.13 TBasicAction.ActionComponent
Synopsis: Returns the component that initiated the action.
Declaration: Property ActionComponent : TComponent

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: ActionComponent is set to the component that caused the action to execute, e.g. a toolbutton or
a menu item. The property is set just before the action executes, and is reset to nil after the action
was executed.
See also: Execute (296), OnExecute (297)
4.36.14 TBasicAction.OnExecute
Synopsis: Event triggered when the action executes.
Declaration: Property OnExecute : TNotifyEvent
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: OnExecute is the event triggered when the action is activated (executed). The event is triggered
e.g. when the user clicks e.g. on a menu item or a button associated to the action. The application
programmer should provide a OnExecute event handler to execute whatever code is necessary
when the button is pressed or the menu item is chosen.
Note that assigning an OnExecute handler will result in the Execute (296) method returning a
True value. Predefined actions (such as dataset actions) will check the result of Execute and will
not perform their normal task if the OnExecute handler was called.
See also: Execute (296), OnUpdate (297)
4.36.15 TBasicAction.OnUpdate
Synopsis: Event trigged when the application is idle.
Declaration: Property OnUpdate : TNotifyEvent

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: OnUpdate is the event triggered when the application is idle, and the action is being updated. The
OnUpdate event can be used to set the state of the action, for instance disable it if the action cannot
be executed at this point in time.
See also: Update (296), OnExecute (297)
297
4.37 TBasicActionLink
4.37.1 Description
TBasicActionLink links an Action to its clients. With each client for an action, a TBasicActionLink
class is instantiated to handle the communication between the action and the client. It passes events
between the action and its clients, and thus presents the action with a uniform interface to the clients.
An application programmer should never use a TBasicActionLink instance directly; They are
created automatically when an action is associated with a component. Component programmers
should create specialized descendents of TBasicActionLink which communicate changes in the
action to the component.
See also: TBasicAction (294)

298 Create Creates a new instance of the TBasicActionLink class
298 Destroy Destroys the TBasicActionLink instance.
299 Execute Calls the action’s Execute method.
299 Update Calls the action’s Update method

299 Action rw The action to which the link was assigned.
300 OnChange rw Event handler triggered when the action’s properties change
4.37.4 TBasicActionLink.Create
Synopsis: Creates a new instance of the TBasicActionLink class
Declaration: constructor Create(AClient: TObject); Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: Create creates a new instance of a TBasicActionLink and assigns AClient as the client of
the link.
Application programmers should never instantiate TBasicActionLink classes directly. An in-
stance is created automatically when an action is assigned to a control (client).
Component programmers can override the create constructor to initialize further properties.
See also: Destroy (298)
4.37.5 TBasicActionLink.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys the TBasicActionLink instance.
Visibility: public
298
Description: Destroy unregisters the TBasicActionLink with the action, and then calls the inherited de-
structor.
Application programmers should never call Destroy directly. If a link should be destroyed at all,
the Free method should be called instead.
See also: Create (298)
4.37.6 TBasicActionLink.Execute
Synopsis: Calls the action’s Execute method.
Declaration: function Execute(AComponent: TComponent) : Boolean; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: Execute sets the ActionComponent (297) property of the associated Action (299) to AComponent
and then calls the Action’s execute (296) method. After the action has executed, the ActionComponent
property is cleared again.
The return value of the function is the return value of the Action’s execute method.
Application programmers should never call Execute directly. This method will be called automat-
ically when the associated control is activated. (e.g. a button is clicked on)
Component programmers should call Execute whenever the action should be activated.
See also: Action (299), TBasicAction.ActionComponent (297), TBasicAction.Execute (296), TBasicAction.onExecute
(297)
4.37.7 TBasicActionLink.Update
Synopsis: Calls the action’s Update method
Declaration: function Update : Boolean; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: Update calls the associated Action’s Update (296) methoda.

Component programmers can override the Update method to provide additional processing when
the Update method occurs.
4.37.8 TBasicActionLink.Action
Synopsis: The action to which the link was assigned.
Declaration: Property Action : TBasicAction

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Action represents the Action (294) which was assigned to the client. Setting this property will
unregister the client at the old action (if one existed) and registers the client at the new action.
See also: TBasicAction (294)
299
4.37.9 TBasicActionLink.OnChange
Synopsis: Event handler triggered when the action’s properties change
Declaration: Property OnChange : TNotifyEvent

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: OnChange is the event triggered when the action’s properties change.
Application programmers should never need to assign this event. Component programmers can
assign this event to have a client control reflect any changes in an Action’s properties.
See also: Change (298), TBasicAction.Change (294)
4.38 TBinaryObjectReader
4.38.1 Description
The TBinaryObjectReader class reads component data stored in binary form in a file. For
this, it overrides or implements all abstract methods from TAbstractObjectReader (281). No new
functionality is added by this class, it is a driver class for the streaming system.
It should never be necessary to create an instance of this class directly. Instead, the TStream.WriteComponent
(413) call should be used.
See also: TAbstractObjectReader (281), TBinaryObjectWriter (307)
300

302 BeginComponent Start reading a component.
302 BeginProperty Start reading a property.
302 BeginRootComponent Start reading the root component.
301 Create Creates a new binary data reader instance.
301 Destroy Destroys the binary data reader.
302 NextValue Return the type of the next value.
303 ReadBinary Start reading a binary value.
303 ReadDate Read a date.
303 ReadFloat Read a float value
304 ReadIdent Read an identifier
304 ReadInt16 Read a 16-bits integer.
304 ReadInt8 Read an 8-bits integer.
305 ReadSet Read a set
305 ReadSignature
303 ReadSingle Read a single-size float value
305 ReadStr Read a short string
306 ReadString Read a string
306 ReadUnicodeString Read a unicode string value
302 ReadValue Read the next value in the stream
306 ReadWideString Read a widestring value from the stream.
306 SkipComponent Skip a component’s data
307 SkipValue Skip a value’s data
4.38.3 TBinaryObjectReader.Create
Synopsis: Creates a new binary data reader instance.
Declaration: constructor Create(Stream: TStream;BufSize: Integer)
Visibility: public
Description: Create instantiates a new binary component data reader. The Stream stream is the stream from
which data will be read. The BufSize argument is the size of the internal buffer that will be used
by the reader. This can be used to optimize the reading process.
See also: TAbstractObjectReader (281)
4.38.4 TBinaryObjectReader.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys the binary data reader.
Visibility: public
Description: Destroy frees the buffer allocated when the instance was created. It also positions the stream on
the last used position in the stream (the buffering may cause the reader to read more bytes than were
actually used.)
See also: TBinaryObjectReader.Create (301)
301
4.38.5 TBinaryObjectReader.NextValue
Synopsis: Return the type of the next value.
Declaration: function NextValue : TValueType; Override
Visibility: public
Description: NextValue returns the type of the next value in a binary stream, but does not read the value.
This method is simply the implementation for a binary stream of the abstract method introduced in
TAbstractObjectReader (281)
4.38.6 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadValue
Synopsis: Read the next value in the stream
Declaration: function ReadValue : TValueType; Override
Visibility: public
Description: NextValue reads the next value in a binary stream and returns the type of the read value.
4.38.7 TBinaryObjectReader.BeginRootComponent
Synopsis: Start reading the root component.
Declaration: procedure BeginRootComponent; Override
Visibility: public
Description: BeginRootComponent starts reading the root component in a binary stream.
4.38.8 TBinaryObjectReader.BeginComponent
Synopsis: Start reading a component.
Declaration: procedure BeginComponent(var Flags: TFilerFlags;var AChildPos: Integer;
var CompClassName: string;var CompName: string)
; Override
Visibility: public
Description: This method is simply the implementation for a binary stream of the abstract method introduced in
4.38.9 TBinaryObjectReader.BeginProperty
Synopsis: Start reading a property.
Declaration: function BeginProperty : string; Override
Visibility: public
Description: This method is simply the implementation for a binary stream of the abstract method introduced in
302
4.38.10 TBinaryObjectReader.Read
Declaration: procedure Read(var Buf;Count: LongInt); Override

Visibility: public
should not be used in production code as it will totally mess up the streaming.
See also: TAbstractObjectReader.Read (283), TReader.Read (397)
4.38.11 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadBinary
Synopsis: Start reading a binary value.
Declaration: procedure ReadBinary(const DestData: TMemoryStream); Override
Visibility: public
Description: ReadBinary reads a binary valye from a binary stream.
4.38.12 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadFloat
Synopsis: Read a float value
Declaration: function ReadFloat : Extended; Override
Visibility: public
Description: ReadFloat reads a float value from a binary stream.

4.38.13 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadSingle
Synopsis: Read a single-size float value
Declaration: function ReadSingle : Single; Override

Visibility: public
Description: ReadSingle reads a single-sized float value from a binary stream.
4.38.14 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadDate
Synopsis: Read a date.
Declaration: function ReadDate : TDateTime; Override
Visibility: public
303
Description: ReadDate reads a date value from a binary stream.

4.38.15 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadCurrency
Declaration: function ReadCurrency : Currency; Override

Visibility: public
Description: var>ReadCurrency reads a currency-typed value from a binary stream. It is the implementation
of the method introduced in TAbstractObjectReader (281).
See also: TAbstractObjectReader.ReadCurrency (284), TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteCurrency (310)
4.38.16 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadIdent
Synopsis: Read an identifier
Declaration: function ReadIdent(ValueType: TValueType) : string; Override
Visibility: public
Description: ReadIdent reads an identifier from a binary stream.
4.38.17 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadInt8
Synopsis: Read an 8-bits integer.
Declaration: function ReadInt8 : ShortInt; Override
Visibility: public
Description: Read8Int reads an 8-bits signed integer from a binary stream.

Synopsis: Read a 16-bits integer.
Declaration: function ReadInt16 : SmallInt; Override

Visibility: public
Description: Read16Int reads a 16-bits signed integer from a binary stream.
304
Declaration: function ReadInt32 : LongInt; Override

Visibility: public
Declaration: function ReadInt64 : Int64; Override
Visibility: public
4.38.21 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadSet
Synopsis: Read a set
Declaration: function ReadSet(EnumType: Pointer) : Integer; Override
Visibility: public
Description: ReadSet reads a set from a binary stream.
4.38.22 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadSignature
Declaration: procedure ReadSignature; Override
Visibility: public
4.38.23 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadStr
Synopsis: Read a short string
Declaration: function ReadStr : string; Override
Visibility: public
Description: ReadStr reads a short string from a binary stream.

305
4.38.24 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadString
Synopsis: Read a string
Declaration: function ReadString(StringType: TValueType) : string; Override

Visibility: public
Description: ReadStr reads a string of type StringType from a binary stream.
4.38.25 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadWideString
Synopsis: Read a widestring value from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadWideString : WideString; Override
Visibility: public
Description: var>ReadWideString reads a widestring-typed value from a binary stream. It is the implemen-
tation of the method introduced in TAbstractObjectReader (281).
See also: TAbstractObjectReader.ReadWideString (288), TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteWideString (311)
4.38.26 TBinaryObjectReader.ReadUnicodeString
Synopsis: Read a unicode string value
Declaration: function ReadUnicodeString : UnicodeString; Override
Visibility: public
Description: ReadUnicodeString is overridden by TBinaryObjectReaderto read a UnicodeString value

from the binary stream.
See also: TAbstractObjectReader.ReadUnicodeString (288)
4.38.27 TBinaryObjectReader.SkipComponent
Synopsis: Skip a component’s data
Declaration: procedure SkipComponent(SkipComponentInfos: Boolean); Override

Visibility: public
Description: SkipComponent skips the data of a component in a binary stream.
TAbstractObjectReader (281).
306
4.38.28 TBinaryObjectReader.SkipValue
Synopsis: Skip a value’s data
Declaration: procedure SkipValue; Override

Visibility: public
Description: SkipComponent skips the data of the next value in a binary stream.
4.39 TBinaryObjectWriter
4.39.1 Description
Driver class which stores component data in binary form.

308 BeginCollection Start writing a collection.
308 BeginComponent Start writing a component
308 BeginList Start writing a list.
309 BeginProperty Start writing a property
307 Create Creates a new instance of a binary object writer.
308 Destroy Destroys an instance of the binary object writer.
308 EndList Mark the end of a list.
309 EndProperty Marks the end of writing of a property.
309 WriteBinary Writes binary data to the stream.
309 WriteBoolean Writes a boolean value to the stream.
310 WriteCurrency Write a currency-valued type to a stream
310 WriteDate Writes a date type to the stream.
309 WriteFloat Writes a float value to the stream.
310 WriteIdent Writes an identifier to the stream.
310 WriteInteger Writes an integer value to the stream.
311 WriteMethodName Writes a methodname to the stream.
311 WriteSet Writes a set value to the stream.
308 WriteSignature
310 WriteSingle Writes a single-type real value to the stream.
311 WriteStr Write a string to the binary stream
311 WriteString Writes a string value to the stream.
310 WriteUInt64 Write an unsigned 64-bit integer
311 WriteWideString Write a widestring-valued type to a stream
4.39.3 TBinaryObjectWriter.Create
Synopsis: Creates a new instance of a binary object writer.
307
Visibility: public
Description: Creates a new instance of a binary object writer.
4.39.4 TBinaryObjectWriter.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys an instance of the binary object writer.

Visibility: public
Description: Destroys an instance of the binary object writer.
4.39.5 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteSignature
Declaration: procedure WriteSignature; Override
Visibility: public
4.39.6 TBinaryObjectWriter.BeginCollection
Synopsis: Start writing a collection.
Declaration: procedure BeginCollection; Override
Visibility: public
4.39.7 TBinaryObjectWriter.BeginComponent
Synopsis: Start writing a component
Declaration: procedure BeginComponent(Component: TComponent;Flags: TFilerFlags;
ChildPos: Integer); Override
Visibility: public
4.39.8 TBinaryObjectWriter.BeginList
Synopsis: Start writing a list.
Declaration: procedure BeginList; Override
Visibility: public
4.39.9 TBinaryObjectWriter.EndList
Synopsis: Mark the end of a list.
Declaration: procedure EndList; Override
Visibility: public
308
4.39.10 TBinaryObjectWriter.BeginProperty
Synopsis: Start writing a property
Declaration: procedure BeginProperty(const PropName: string); Override

Visibility: public
4.39.11 TBinaryObjectWriter.EndProperty
Synopsis: Marks the end of writing of a property.
Declaration: procedure EndProperty; Override

Visibility: public
4.39.12 TBinaryObjectWriter.Write
Declaration: procedure Write(const Buffer;Count: LongInt); Override

Visibility: public
See also: TAbstractObjectWriter.Write (290), TWriter.Write (461)
4.39.13 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteBinary
Synopsis: Writes binary data to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteBinary(const Buffer;Count: LongInt); Override
Visibility: public
4.39.14 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteBoolean
Synopsis: Writes a boolean value to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteBoolean(Value: Boolean); Override
Visibility: public
4.39.15 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteFloat
Synopsis: Writes a float value to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteFloat(const Value: Extended); Override
Visibility: public
309
4.39.16 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteSingle
Synopsis: Writes a single-type real value to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteSingle(const Value: Single); Override
Visibility: public
4.39.17 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteDate
Synopsis: Writes a date type to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteDate(const Value: TDateTime); Override
Visibility: public
4.39.18 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteCurrency
Synopsis: Write a currency-valued type to a stream
Declaration: procedure WriteCurrency(const Value: Currency); Override
Visibility: public
Description: WriteCurrency writes a currency-typed value to a binary stream. It is the implementation of the
method introduced in TAbstractObjectWriter (289).
See also: TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteCurrency (292)
4.39.19 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteIdent
Synopsis: Writes an identifier to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteIdent(const Ident: string); Override
Visibility: public
4.39.20 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteInteger
Synopsis: Writes an integer value to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteInteger(Value: Int64); Override
Visibility: public
4.39.21 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteUInt64
Synopsis: Write an unsigned 64-bit integer
Declaration: procedure WriteUInt64(Value: QWord); Override
Visibility: public
Description: WriteUInt64 is overridden by TBinaryObjectWriter to write an unsigned 64-bit integer
(QWord) to the stream. It tries to use the smallest possible storage for the value that is passed.
(largest valuetype will be vaQWord).
See also: TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteUInt64 (292)
310
4.39.22 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteMethodName
Synopsis: Writes a methodname to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteMethodName(const Name: string); Override
Visibility: public
4.39.23 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteSet
Synopsis: Writes a set value to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteSet(Value: LongInt;SetType: Pointer); Override
Visibility: public
4.39.24 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteStr
Synopsis: Write a string to the binary stream
Declaration: procedure WriteStr(const Value: string)
Visibility: public
Description: WriteStr writes a string value to the binary stream. It is exposed so it can be used in DefineProperties.
4.39.25 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteString
Synopsis: Writes a string value to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteString(const Value: string); Override
Visibility: public
4.39.26 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteWideString
Synopsis: Write a widestring-valued type to a stream
Declaration: procedure WriteWideString(const Value: WideString); Override
Visibility: public
Description: WriteWidestring writes a widestring-typed value to a binary stream. It is the implementation
of the method introduced in TAbstractObjectWriter (289).
See also: TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteWidestring (293)
4.39.27 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteUnicodeString
Declaration: procedure WriteUnicodeString(const Value: UnicodeString); Override
Visibility: public
Description: WriteUnicodeString is overridden TBinaryObjectWriter to write a unicodestring (val-
uetype vaUString) value to the stream. It simply writes the character length and then all widechar-
acters.
See also: TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteUnicodeString (293)
311
4.39.28 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteVariant
Declaration: procedure WriteVariant(const VarValue: Variant); Override

Visibility: public
Description: WriteVariant is overridden by TBinaryObjectWriter to write a simple variant type to the
stream. WriteVariant does not write arrays types or complex types. Only null, integer (ordinal)
float and string types are written.
Errors: If a non-supported type is written, then an EWriteError exception is.
4.40 TBits
4.40.1 Description
TBits can be used to store collections of bits in an indexed array. This is especially useful for
storing collections of booleans: Normally the size of a boolean is the size of the smallest enumerated
type, i.e. 1 byte. Since a bit can take 2 values it can be used to store a boolean as well. Since TBits
can store 8 bits in a byte, it takes 8 times less space to store an array of booleans in a TBits class then
it would take to store them in a conventional array.
TBits introduces methods to store and retrieve bit values, apply masks, and search for bits.

314 AndBits Performs an and operation on the bits.
314 Clear Clears a particular bit.
314 Clearall Clears all bits in the array.
313 Create Creates a new bits collection.
313 Destroy Destroys a bit collection
316 Equals Determines whether the bits of 2 arrays are equal.
316 FindFirstBit Find first bit with a particular value
317 FindNextBit Searches the next bit with a particular value.
317 FindPrevBit Searches the previous bit with a particular value.
315 Get Retrieve the value of a particular bit
313 GetFSize Returns the number of records used to store the bits.
316 Grow Expands the bits array to the requested size.
315 NotBits Performs a not operation on the bits.
317 OpenBit Returns the position of the first bit that is set to False.
314 OrBits Performs an or operation on the bits.
316 SetIndex Sets the start position for FindNextBit (317) and FindPrevBit (317)
313 SetOn Turn a particular bit on.
315 XorBits Performs a xor operation on the bits.

318 Bits rw Access to all bits in the array.
318 Size rw Current size of the array of bits.
312
4.40.4 TBits.Create
Synopsis: Creates a new bits collection.
Declaration: constructor Create(TheSize: LongInt); Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: Create creates a new bit collection with initial size TheSize. The size of the collection can be
changed later on.
All bits are initially set to zero.
4.40.5 TBits.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys a bit collection
Visibility: public
Description: Destroy destroys a previously created bit collection and releases all memory used to store the bit
collection.
Destroy should never be called directly, Free should be used instead.
Errors: None.
See also: Create (313)
4.40.6 TBits.GetFSize
Synopsis: Returns the number of records used to store the bits.
Declaration: function GetFSize : LongInt
Visibility: public
Description: GetFSize returns the number of records used to store the current number of bits.
Errors: None.
See also: Size (318)
4.40.7 TBits.SetOn
Synopsis: Turn a particular bit on.
Declaration: procedure SetOn(Bit: LongInt)
Visibility: public
Description: SetOn turns on the bit at position bit, i.e. sets it to 1. If bit is at a position bigger than the
current size, the collection is expanded to the required size using Grow (316).
Errors: If bit is larger than the maximum allowed bits array size or is negative, an EBitsError (264) excep-
tion is raised.
See also: Bits (318), Clear (314)
313
4.40.8 TBits.Clear
Synopsis: Clears a particular bit.
Declaration: procedure Clear(Bit: LongInt)
Visibility: public
Description: Clear clears the bit at position bit. If the array If bit is at a position bigger than the current size,
the collection is expanded to the required size using Grow (316).
Errors: If bit is larger than the maximum allowed bits array size or is negative, an EBitsError (264) excep-
tion is raised.
See also: Bits (318), seton (314)
4.40.9 TBits.Clearall
Synopsis: Clears all bits in the array.
Declaration: procedure Clearall
Visibility: public
Description: ClearAll clears all bits in the array, i.e. sets them to zero. ClearAll works faster than clearing
all individual bits, since it uses the packed nature of the bits.
Errors: None.
See also: Bits (318), clear (314)
4.40.10 TBits.AndBits
Synopsis: Performs an and operation on the bits.
Declaration: procedure AndBits(BitSet: TBits)
Visibility: public
Description: andbits performs an and operation on the bits in the array with the bits of array BitSet. If
BitSet contains less bits than the current array, then all bits which have no counterpart in BitSet
are cleared.
Errors: None.
See also: ClearAll (314), OrBits (314), XOrBits (315), NotBits (315)
4.40.11 TBits.OrBits
Synopsis: Performs an or operation on the bits.
Declaration: procedure OrBits(BitSet: TBits)
Visibility: public
Description: andbits performs an or operation on the bits in the array with the bits of array BitSet.
If BitSet contains less bits than the current array, then all bits which have no counterpart in
BitSet are left untouched.
If the current array contains less bits than BitSet then it is grown to the size of BitSet before the
or operation is performed.
314
Errors: None.
See also: ClearAll (314), andBits (314), XOrBits (315), NotBits (315)
4.40.12 TBits.XorBits
Synopsis: Performs a xor operation on the bits.
Declaration: procedure XorBits(BitSet: TBits)

Visibility: public
Description: XorBits performs a xor operation on the bits in the array with the bits of array BitSet.
If the current array contains less bits than BitSet then it is grown to the size of BitSet before the
xor operation is performed.
Errors: None.
See also: ClearAll (314), andBits (314), OrBits (314), NotBits (315)
4.40.13 TBits.NotBits
Synopsis: Performs a not operation on the bits.
Declaration: procedure NotBits(BitSet: TBits)
Visibility: public
Description: NotBits performs a not operation on the bits in the array with the bits of array Bitset.
Errors: None.
See also: ClearAll (314), andBits (314), OrBits (314), XOrBits (315)
4.40.14 TBits.Get
Synopsis: Retrieve the value of a particular bit
Declaration: function Get(Bit: LongInt) : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: Get returns True if the bit at position bit is set, or False if it is not set.
Errors: If bit is not a valid bit index then an EBitsError (264) exception is raised.
See also: Bits (318), FindFirstBit (316), seton (313)
315
4.40.15 TBits.Grow
Synopsis: Expands the bits array to the requested size.
Declaration: procedure Grow(NBit: LongInt)

Visibility: public
Description: Grow expands the bit array so it can at least contain nbit bits. If nbit is less than the current size,
nothing happens.
Errors: If there is not enough memory to complete the operation, then an EBitsError (264)is raised.
4.40.16 TBits.Equals
Synopsis: Determines whether the bits of 2 arrays are equal.
Declaration: function Equals(Obj: TObject) : Boolean; Override; Overload

function Equals(BitSet: TBits) : Boolean; Overload
Visibility: public
Description: equals returns True if all the bits in BitSet are the same as the ones in the current BitSet; if
not, False is returned.
If the sizes of the two BitSets are different, the arrays are still reported equal when all the bits in the
larger set, which are not present in the smaller set, are zero.
Errors: None.
See also: ClearAll (314), andBits (314), OrBits (314), XOrBits (315)
4.40.17 TBits.SetIndex
Synopsis: Sets the start position for FindNextBit (317) and FindPrevBit (317)
Declaration: procedure SetIndex(Index: LongInt)
Visibility: public
Description: SetIndex sets the search start position forFindNextBit (317) and FindPrevBit (317) to Index.
This means that these calls will start searching from position Index.
This mechanism provides an alternative to FindFirstBit (316) which can also be used to position for
the FindNextBit and FindPrevBit calls.
Errors: None.
See also: FindNextBit (317), FindPrevBit (317), FindFirstBit (316), OpenBit (317)
4.40.18 TBits.FindFirstBit
Synopsis: Find first bit with a particular value
Declaration: function FindFirstBit(State: Boolean) : LongInt

Visibility: public
316
Description: FindFirstBit searches for the first bit with value State. It returns the position of this bit, or
-1 if no such bit was found.
The search starts at position 0 in the array. If the first search returned a positive result, the found
position is saved, and the FindNextBit (317) and FindPrevBit (317) will use this position to resume
the search. To start a search from a certain position, the start position can be set with the SetIndex
(316) instead.
Errors: None.
See also: FindNextBit (317), FindPrevBit (317), OpenBit (317), SetIndex (316)
4.40.19 TBits.FindNextBit
Synopsis: Searches the next bit with a particular value.
Declaration: function FindNextBit : LongInt

Visibility: public
Description: FindNextBit resumes a previously started search. It searches for the next bit with the value
specified in the FindFirstBit (316). The search is done towards the end of the array and starts at the
position last reported by one of the Find calls or at the position set with SetIndex (316).
If another bit with the same value is found, its position is returned. If no more bits with the same
value are present in the array, -1 is returned.
Errors: None.
See also: FindFirstBit (316), FindPrevBit (317), OpenBit (317), SetIndex (316)
4.40.20 TBits.FindPrevBit
Synopsis: Searches the previous bit with a particular value.
Declaration: function FindPrevBit : LongInt
Visibility: public
Description: FindPrevBit resumes a previously started search. It searches for the previous bit with the value
specified in the FindFirstBit (316). The search is done towards the beginning of the array and starts
at the position last reported by one of the Find calls or at the position set with SetIndex (316).
If another bit with the same value is found, its position is returned. If no more bits with the same
value are present in the array, -1 is returned.
Errors: None.
See also: FindFirstBit (316), FindNextBit (317), OpenBit (317), SetIndex (316)
4.40.21 TBits.OpenBit
Synopsis: Returns the position of the first bit that is set to False.
Declaration: function OpenBit : LongInt

Visibility: public
317
Description: OpenBit returns the position of the first bit whose value is 0 (False), or -1 if no open bit was
found. This call is equivalent to FindFirstBit(False), except that it doesn’t set the position
for the next searches.
Errors: None.
See also: FindNextBit (316), FindPrevBit (317), FindFirstBit (316), SetIndex (316)
4.40.22 TBits.Bits
Synopsis: Access to all bits in the array.
Declaration: Property Bits[Bit: LongInt]: Boolean; default
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Bits allows indexed access to all of the bits in the array. It gives True if the bit is 1, False
otherwise; Assigning to this property will set, respectively clear the bit.
Errors: If an index is specified which is out of the allowed range then an EBitsError (264) exception is
raised.
4.40.23 TBits.Size
Synopsis: Current size of the array of bits.
Declaration: Property Size : LongInt
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Size is the current size of the bit array. Setting this property will adjust the size; this is equivalent
to calling Grow(Value-1)
Errors: If an invalid size (negative or too large) is specified, a EBitsError (264) exception is raised.
See also: Bits (318)
4.41 TBytesStream
4.41.1 Description
TBytesStream is a stream that uses an array of byte (TBytes (233)) to keep the stream data. it
overrides the TMemoryStream (378) memory allocation routine to use the array of bytes. The array
of bytes is exposed through the Bytes (233) property.
See also: TBytes (233), TMemoryStream (378), Bytes (233)

319 Create Create a new instance of the stream, initializing it with an array of bytes
318

319 Bytes r The stream data as an array of bytes.
4.41.4 TBytesStream.Create
Synopsis: Create a new instance of the stream, initializing it with an array of bytes
Declaration: constructor Create(const ABytes: TBytes); Overload
Visibility: public
Description: Create creates a new instance and initializes the memory with the data in ABytes.
See also: TBytes (233), TMemoryStream (378), Bytes (233)
4.41.5 TBytesStream.Bytes
Synopsis: The stream data as an array of bytes.
Declaration: Property Bytes : TBytes

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Bytes provides byte-sized access to the array of bytes that represent the stream data. As a pointer
value, it equals TCustomMemoryStream.Memory (343), meaning that Memory points to the first
byte in the array.
See also: TBytes (233), TMemoryStream (378), TCustomMemoryStream.Memory (343)
4.42 TCollection
4.42.1 Description
TCollection implements functionality to manage a collection of named objects. Each of these
objects needs to be a descendent of the TCollectionItem (327) class. Exactly which type of object is
managed can be seen from the TCollection.ItemClass (325) property.
Normally, no TCollection is created directly. Instead, a descendents of TCollection and
TCollectionItem (327) are created as a pair.
See also: TCollectionItem (327)
319

321 Add Creates and adds a new item to the collection.
321 Assign Assigns one collection to another.
321 BeginUpdate Start an update batch.
322 Clear Removes all items from the collection.
320 Create Creates a new collection.
322 Delete Delete an item from the collection.
320 Destroy Destroys the collection and frees all the objects it manages.
322 EndUpdate Ends an update batch.
324 Exchange Exchange 2 items in the collection
323 FindItemID Searches for an Item in the collection, based on its TCollectionItem.ID
(328) property.
323 GetEnumerator Create an IEnumerator instance
323 GetNamePath Overrides TPersistent.GetNamePath (391) to return a proper pathname.
323 Insert Insert an item in the collection.
321 Owner Owner of the collection.
324 Sort Sort the items in the collection

324 Count r Number of items in the collection.
325 ItemClass r Class pointer for each item in the collection.
325 Items rw Indexed array of items in the collection.
4.42.4 TCollection.Create
Synopsis: Creates a new collection.
Declaration: constructor Create(AItemClass: TCollectionItemClass)
Visibility: public
Description: Create instantiates a new instance of the TCollection class which will manage objects of class
AItemClass. It creates the list used to hold all objects, and stores the AItemClass for the adding
of new objects to the collection.
See also: TCollection.ItemClass (325), TCollection.Destroy (320)
4.42.5 TCollection.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys the collection and frees all the objects it manages.

Visibility: public
Description: Destroy first clears the collection, and then frees all memory allocated to this instance.
Don’t call Destroy directly, call Free instead.
See also: TCollection.Create (320)
320
4.42.6 TCollection.Owner
Synopsis: Owner of the collection.
Declaration: function Owner : TPersistent

Visibility: public
Description: Owner returns a reference to the owner of the collection. This property is required by the object
inspector to be able to show the collection.
4.42.7 TCollection.Add
Synopsis: Creates and adds a new item to the collection.
Declaration: function Add : TCollectionItem
Visibility: public
Description: Add instantiates a new item of class TCollection.ItemClass (325) and adds it to the list. The newly
created object is returned.
See also: TCollection.ItemClass (325), TCollection.Clear (322)
4.42.8 TCollection.Assign
Synopsis: Assigns one collection to another.
Declaration: procedure Assign(Source: TPersistent); Override

Visibility: public
Description: Assign assigns the contents of one collection to another. It does this by clearing the items list, and
adding as much elements as there are in the Source collection; it assigns to each created element
the contents of it’s counterpart in the Source element.
Two collections cannot be assigned to each other if instances of the ItemClass classes cannot be
assigned to each other.
Errors: If the objects in the collections cannot be assigned to one another, then an EConvertError is
raised.
See also: TPersistent.Assign (390), TCollectionItem (327)
4.42.9 TCollection.BeginUpdate
Synopsis: Start an update batch.
Declaration: procedure BeginUpdate; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: BeginUpdate is called at the beginning of a batch update. It raises the update count with 1.
Call BeginUpdate at the beginning of a series of operations that will change the state of the
collection. This will avoid the call to TCollection.Update (319) for each operation. At the end of the
operations, a corresponding call to EndUpdate must be made. It is best to do this in the context of
a Try ... finally block:
321
With MyCollection Do
try
BeginUpdate;
// Some Lengthy operations
finally
EndUpdate;
end;
This insures that the number of calls to BeginUpdate always matches the number of calls to
TCollection.EndUpdate (322), even in case of an exception.
See also: TCollection.EndUpdate (322), TCollection.Changed (319), TCollection.Update (319)
4.42.10 TCollection.Clear
Synopsis: Removes all items from the collection.

Visibility: public
Description: Clear will clear the collection, i.e. each item in the collection is destroyed and removed from
memory. After a call to Clear, Count is zero.
See also: TCollection.Add (321), TCollectionItem.Destroy (327), TCollection.Destroy (320)
4.42.11 TCollection.EndUpdate
Synopsis: Ends an update batch.
Declaration: procedure EndUpdate; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: EndUpdate signals the end of a series of operations that change the state of the collection, possibly
triggering an update event. It does this by decreasing the update count with 1 and calling TCollec-
tion.Changed (319) it should always be used in conjunction with TCollection.BeginUpdate (321),
preferably in the Finally section of a Try ... Finally block.
See also: TCollection.BeginUpdate (321), TCollection.Changed (319), TCollection.Update (319)
4.42.12 TCollection.Delete
Synopsis: Delete an item from the collection.
Declaration: procedure Delete(Index: Integer)
Visibility: public
Description: Delete deletes the item at (zero based) position Index from the collection. This will result in a
cnDeleted notification.
Errors: If an invalid index is specified, an EListError exception is raised.
See also: TCollection.Items (325), TCollection.Insert (323), TCollection.Clear (322)
322
4.42.13 TCollection.GetEnumerator
Synopsis: Create an IEnumerator instance
Declaration: function GetEnumerator : TCollectionEnumerator

Visibility: public
Description: GetEnumerator is the implementation of the IEnumerable (1459) interface for TCollection.
It creates a TCollectionEnumerator (325) instance and returns it’s IEnumerator (1459) interface.
See also: TCollectionEnumerator (325), IEnumerator (1459), IEnumerable (1459)
4.42.14 TCollection.GetNamePath
Synopsis: Overrides TPersistent.GetNamePath (391) to return a proper pathname.
Declaration: function GetNamePath : string; Override
Visibility: public
Description: GetNamePath returns the name path for this collection. If the following conditions are satisfied:
1.There is an owner object.

2.The owner object returns a non-empty name path.
3.The TCollection.Propname (319) property is not empty
collection has an owner and the owning object has a name, then the function returns the owner name,
followed by the propname. If one of the conditions is not satisfied, then the classname is returned.
See also: TCollection.GetOwner (319), TCollection.Propname (319)
4.42.15 TCollection.Insert
Synopsis: Insert an item in the collection.
Declaration: function Insert(Index: Integer) : TCollectionItem
Visibility: public
Description: Insert creates a new item instance and inserts it in the collection at position Index, and returns
the new instance.
In contrast, TCollection.Add (321) adds a new item at the end.
Errors: None.
See also: TCollection.Add (321), TCollection.Delete (322), TCollection.Items (325)
4.42.16 TCollection.FindItemID
Synopsis: Searches for an Item in the collection, based on its TCollectionItem.ID (328) property.
Declaration: function FindItemID(ID: Integer) : TCollectionItem
Visibility: public
323
Description: FindItemID searches through the collection for the item that has a value of ID for its TCollec-
tionItem.ID (328) property, and returns the found item. If no such item is found in the collection,
Nil is returned.
The routine performs a linear search, so this can be slow on very large collections.
See also: TCollection.Items (325), TCollectionItem.ID (328)
4.42.17 TCollection.Exchange
Synopsis: Exchange 2 items in the collection
Declaration: procedure Exchange(const Index1: Integer;const index2: Integer)
Visibility: public
Description: Exchange exchanges the items at indexes Index1 and Index2 in the collection.
Errors: If one of the two indexes is invalid (less than zero or larger than the number of items) an EListError
See also: Items (325), TCollectionItem.Index (329)
4.42.18 TCollection.Sort
Synopsis: Sort the items in the collection
Declaration: procedure Sort(const Compare: TCollectionSortCompare)
Visibility: public
Description: Sort sorts the items in the collection, and uses the Compare procedure to compare 2 items in the
collection. It is more efficient do use this method than to perform the sort manually, because the list
items are manipulated directly.
For more information on how the Compare function should behave, see the TCollectionSortCom-
pare (238) type.
See also: TCollectionSortCompare (238)
4.42.19 TCollection.Count
Synopsis: Number of items in the collection.
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Count contains the number of items in the collection.
Remark: The items in the collection are identified by their TCollectionItem.Index (329) property, which is a
zero-based index, meaning that it can take values between 0 and Count-1, borders included.
See also: TCollectionItem.Index (329), TCollection.Items (325)
324
4.42.20 TCollection.ItemClass
Synopsis: Class pointer for each item in the collection.
Declaration: Property ItemClass : TCollectionItemClass

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: ItemClass is the class pointer with which each new item in the collection is created. It is the
value that was passed to the collection’s constructor when it was created, and does not change during
the lifetime of the collection.
See also: TCollectionItem (327), TCollection.Items (325)
4.42.21 TCollection.Items
Synopsis: Indexed array of items in the collection.
Declaration: Property Items[Index: Integer]: TCollectionItem
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Items provides indexed access to the items in the collection. Since the array is zero-based, Index
should be an integer between 0 and Count-1.
It is possible to set or retrieve an element in the array. When setting an element of the array, the
object that is assigned should be compatible with the class of the objects in the collection, as given
by the TCollection.ItemClass (325) property.
Adding an element to the array can be done with the TCollection.Add (321) method. The array can
be cleared with the TCollection.Clear (322) method. Removing an element of the array should be
done by freeing that element.
See also: TCollection.Count (324), TCollection.ItemClass (325), TCollection.Clear (322), TCollection.Add
(321)
4.43 TCollectionEnumerator
4.43.1 Description
TCollectionEnumerator implements the #rtl.system.IEnumerator (1459) interface for the TCol-
lection (319) class, so the TCollection class can be used in a for ... in loop. It is returned
by the TCollection.GetEnumerator (323) method of TCollection.
See also: TCollection (319), TCollection.GetEnumerator (323), #rtl.system.IEnumerator (1459)

326 Create Initialize a new instance of TCollectionEnumerator
326 GetCurrent Return the current pointer in the list
326 MoveNext Move the position of the enumerator to the next position in the collection.
325

326 Current r Current pointer in the list
4.43.4 TCollectionEnumerator.Create
Synopsis: Initialize a new instance of TCollectionEnumerator
Declaration: constructor Create(ACollection: TCollection)
Visibility: public
Description: Create initializes a new instance of TCollectionEnumerator and keeps a reference to the
collection ACollection that will be enumerated.
See also: TCollection (319)
4.43.5 TCollectionEnumerator.GetCurrent
Synopsis: Return the current pointer in the list
Declaration: function GetCurrent : TCollectionItem
Visibility: public
Description: GetCurrent returns the current TCollectionItem (327) instance in the enumerator.
Errors: No checking is done on the validity of the current position.
See also: MoveNext (326), TCollectionItem (327)
4.43.6 TCollectionEnumerator.MoveNext
Synopsis: Move the position of the enumerator to the next position in the collection.
Declaration: function MoveNext : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: MoveNext puts the pointer on the next item in the collection, and returns True if this succeeded,
or False if the pointer is past the last element in the list.
Errors: Note that if False is returned, calling GetCurrent will result in an exception.
See also: GetCurrent (326)
4.43.7 TCollectionEnumerator.Current
Synopsis: Current pointer in the list
Declaration: Property Current : TCollectionItem
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Current redefines GetCurrent (326) as a property.
326
4.44 TCollectionItem
4.44.1 Description
TCollectionItem and TCollection (319) form a pair of base classes that manage a collection
of named objects. The TCollectionItem is the named object that is managed, it represents one
item in the collection. An item in the collection is represented by three properties: TCollection-
Item.DisplayName (329), TCollection.Index (319) and TCollectionItem.ID (328).
A TCollectionItem object is never created directly. To manage a set of named items, it is
necessary to make a descendent of TCollectionItem to which needed properties and methods
are added. This descendant can then be managed with a TCollection (319) class. The managing
collection will create and destroy it’s items by itself, it should therefore never be necessary to create
TCollectionItem descendents manually.

327 Create Creates a new instance of this collection item.
327 Destroy Destroyes this collection item.
328 GetNamePath Returns the namepath of this collection item.

328 Collection rw Pointer to the collection managing this item.
329 DisplayName rw Name of the item, displayed in the object inspector.
328 ID r Initial index of this item.
329 Index rw Index of the item in its managing collection TCollection.Items
(325) property.
4.44.4 TCollectionItem.Create
Synopsis: Creates a new instance of this collection item.
Declaration: constructor Create(ACollection: TCollection); Virtual

Visibility: public
Description: Create instantiates a new item in a TCollection (319). It is called by the TCollection.Add (321)
function and should under normal circumstances never be called directly. called
See also: TCollectionItem.Destroy (327)
4.44.5 TCollectionItem.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroyes this collection item.
Visibility: public
327
Description: Destroy removes the item from the managing collection and Destroys the item instance.
This is the only way to remove items from a collection;
See also: TCollectionItem.Create (327)
4.44.6 TCollectionItem.GetNamePath
Synopsis: Returns the namepath of this collection item.
Visibility: public
Description: GetNamePath overrides the TPersistent.GetNamePath (391) method to return the name of the
managing collection and appends its TCollectionItem.Index (329) property.
See also: TCollectionItem.Collection (328), TPersistent.GetNamePath (391), TCollectionItem.Index (329)
4.44.7 TCollectionItem.Collection
Synopsis: Pointer to the collection managing this item.
Declaration: Property Collection : TCollection
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Collection points to the collection managing this item. This property can be set to point to a
new collection. If this is done, the old collection will be notified that the item should no longer be
managed, and the new collection is notified that it should manage this item as well.
4.44.8 TCollectionItem.ID
Synopsis: Initial index of this item.
Declaration: Property ID : Integer

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: ID is the initial value of TCollectionItem.Index (329); it doesn’t change after the index changes. It
can be used to uniquely identify the item. The ID property doesn’t change as items are added and
removed from the collection.
While the TCollectionItem.Index (329) property forms a continuous series, ID does not. If items are
removed from the collection, their ID is not used again, leaving gaps. Only when the collection is
initialiiy created, the ID and Index properties will be equal.
See also: TCollection.Items (325), TCollectionItem.Index (329)
328
4.44.9 TCollectionItem.Index
Synopsis: Index of the item in its managing collection TCollection.Items (325) property.
Declaration: Property Index : Integer
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Index is the current index of the item in its managing collection’s TCollection.Items (325) property.
This property may change as items are added and removed from the collection.
The index of an item is zero-based, i.e. the first item has index zero. The last item has index
Count-1 where Count is the number of items in the collection.
The Index property of the items in a collection form a continuous series ranging from 0 to Count-1.
The TCollectionItem.ID (328) property does not form a continuous series, but can also be used to
identify an item.
See also: TCollectionItem.ID (328), TCollection.Items (325)
4.44.10 TCollectionItem.DisplayName
Synopsis: Name of the item, displayed in the object inspector.
Declaration: Property DisplayName : string
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: DisplayName contains the name of this item as shown in the object inspector. For TCollectionItem
this returns always the class name of the managing collection, followed by the index of the item.
TCollectionItem does not implement any functionality to store the DisplayName property.
The property can be set, but this will have no effect other than that the managing collection is no-
tified of a change. The actual displayname will remain unchanged. To store the DisplayName
property,TCollectionItem descendants should override the TCollectionItem.SetDisplayName
(327) and TCollectionItem.GetDisplayName (327) to add storage functionality.
See also: TCollectionItem.Index (329), TCollectionItem.ID (328), TCollectionItem.GetDisplayName (327),
TCollectionItem.SetDisplayName (327)
4.45 TComponent
4.45.1 Description
TComponent is the base class for any set of classes that needs owner-owned functionality, and
which needs support for property streaming. All classes that should be handled by an IDE (Inte-
grated Development Environment) must descend from TComponent, as it includes all support for
streaming all its published properties.
Components can ’own’ other components. TComponent introduces methods for enumerating the
child components. It also allows to name the owned components with a unique name. Furthermore,
functionality for sending notifications when a component is removed from the list or removed from
memory alltogether is also introduced in TComponent
TComponent introduces a form of automatic memory management: When a component is de-
stroyed, all its child components will be destroyed first.
329
4.45.2 Interfaces overview

Page Interfaces Description
271 IInterfaceComponentReference Interface for checking component references
1461 IUnknown Basic interface for all COM-based interfaces

332 BeforeDestruction Overrides standard BeforeDestruction.
331 Create Creates a new instance of the component.
332 Destroy Destroys the instance of the component.
332 DestroyComponents Destroy child components.
332 Destroying Called when the component is being destroyed
333 ExecuteAction Standard action execution method.
333 FindComponent Finds and returns the named component in the owned compo-
nents.
333 FreeNotification Ask the component to notify called when it is being destroyed.
334 FreeOnRelease Part of the IVCLComObject interface.
334 GetNamePath Returns the name path of this component.
334 GetParentComponent Returns the parent component.
335 HasParent Does the component have a parent ?
335 InsertComponent Insert the given component in the list of owned components.
336 IsImplementorOf Checks if the current component is the implementor of the
interface
331 Notification Called by components that are freed and which received a
FreeNotification.
336 ReferenceInterface Interface implementation of Notification
335 RemoveComponent Remove the given component from the list of owned compo-
nents.
333 RemoveFreeNotification Remove a component from the Free Notification list.
335 SafeCallException Part of the IVCLComObject Interface.
336 SetSubComponent Sets the csSubComponent style.
336 UpdateAction Updates the state of an action.
331 WriteState Writes the component to a stream.

337 ComObject r Interface reference implemented by the component
337 ComponentCount r Count of owned components
337 ComponentIndex rw Index of component in it’s owner’s list.
337 Components r Indexed list (zero-based) of all owned components.
338 ComponentState r Current component’s state.
338 ComponentStyle r Current component’s style.
338 DesignInfo rw Information for IDE designer.
339 Name rws Name of the component.
339 Owner r Owner of this component.
339 Tag rw Tag value of the component.
339 VCLComObject rw Not implemented.
330
4.45.5 TComponent.Notification
Synopsis: Called by components that are freed and which received a FreeNotification.
Declaration: procedure Notification(AComponent: TComponent;Operation: TOperation)

; Virtual
Visibility: protected
Description: Notification is called whenever a child component is destroyed, inserted or removed from the
list of owned component. Components that were requested to send a notification when they are freed
((with FreeNotification (333)) will also call Notification when they are freed.
The AComponent parameter specifies which component sends the notification, and Operation
specifies whether the component is being inserted into or removed from the child component list, or
whether it is being destroyed.
Descendents of TComponent can use FreeNotification (333) to request notification of the destruc-
tion of another object. By overriding the Notification method, they can do special process-
ing (typically, set a reference to this component to Nil) when this component is destroyed. The
Notification method is called quite often in the streaming process, so speed should be a con-
sideration when overriding this method.
See also: TOperation (244), TComponent.FreeNotification (333), TComponent.RemoveFreeNotification (333)
4.45.6 TComponent.WriteState
Synopsis: Writes the component to a stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteState(Writer: TWriter); Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: WriteState writes the component’s current state to a stream through the writer (459) object
writer. Values for all published properties of the component can be written to the stream. Normally
there is no need to call WriteState directly. The streaming system calls WriteState itself.
The TComponent (329) implementation of WriteState simply calls TWriter.WriteData (459).
Descendent classes can, however, override WriteStateto provide additional processing of stream
data.
See also: ReadState (329), TStream.WriteComponent (413), TWriter.WriteData (459)
4.45.7 TComponent.Create
Synopsis: Creates a new instance of the component.
Declaration: constructor Create(AOwner: TComponent); Virtual

Visibility: public
Description: Create creates a new instance of a TComponent class. If AOwner is not Nil, the new compo-
nent attempts to insert itself in the list of owned components of the owner.
See also: Insert (329), Owner (339)
331
4.45.8 TComponent.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys the instance of the component.
Visibility: public
Description: Destroy sends a opRemove notification to all components in the free-notification list. After that,
all owned components are destroyed by calling DestroyComponents (332) (and hence removed from
the list of owned components). When this is done, the component removes itself from its owner’s
child component list. After that, the parent’s destroy method is called.
See also: Notification (331), Owner (339), DestroyComponents (332), Components (337)
4.45.9 TComponent.BeforeDestruction
Synopsis: Overrides standard BeforeDestruction.
Declaration: procedure BeforeDestruction; Override
Visibility: public
Description: BeforeDestruction is overridden by TComponent to set the csDestroying flag in TCom-
ponent.ComponentState (338)
See also: TComponent.ComponentState (338)
4.45.10 TComponent.DestroyComponents
Synopsis: Destroy child components.
Declaration: procedure DestroyComponents
Visibility: public
Description: DestroyComponents calls the destructor of all owned components, till no more components are
left in the Components (337) array.
Calling the destructor of an owned component has as the effect that the component will remove itself
from the list of owned components, if nothing has disrupted the sequence of destructors.
Errors: If an overridden ’destroy’ method does not call it’s intherited destructor or raises an exception, it’s
TComponent.Destroy (332) destructor will not be called, which may result in an endless loop.
See also: Destroy (332), Components (337)
4.45.11 TComponent.Destroying
Synopsis: Called when the component is being destroyed
Declaration: procedure Destroying
Visibility: public
Description: Destroying sets the csDestroying flag in the component’s state (329) property, and does the
same for all owned components.
It is not necessary to call Destroying directly, the destructor Destroy (332) does this automatically.
See also: State (329), Destroy (332)
332
4.45.12 TComponent.ExecuteAction
Synopsis: Standard action execution method.
Declaration: function ExecuteAction(Action: TBasicAction) : Boolean; Dynamic

Visibility: public
Description: ExecuteAction checks whether Action handles the current component, and if yes, calls the
ExecuteAction method, passing itself as a parameter. The function returns True if the action
handles the current component.
See also: TBasicAction (294), TBasicAction.ExecuteAction (294), TBasicAction.HandlesTarget (295), TCom-
ponent.UpdateAction (336)
4.45.13 TComponent.FindComponent
Synopsis: Finds and returns the named component in the owned components.
Declaration: function FindComponent(const AName: string) : TComponent

Visibility: public
Description: FindComponent searches the component with name AName in the list of owned components. If
AName is empty, then Nil is returned.
See also: Components (337), Name (339)
4.45.14 TComponent.FreeNotification
Synopsis: Ask the component to notify called when it is being destroyed.
Declaration: procedure FreeNotification(AComponent: TComponent)
Visibility: public
Description: FreeNotification inserts AComponent in the freenotification list. When the component is
destroyed, the Notification (331) method is called for all components in the freenotification list.
See also: Components (337), Notification (331), TComponent.RemoveFreeNotification (333)
4.45.15 TComponent.RemoveFreeNotification
Synopsis: Remove a component from the Free Notification list.
Declaration: procedure RemoveFreeNotification(AComponent: TComponent)
Visibility: public
Description: RemoveFreeNotification removes AComponent from the freenotification list.

See also: TComponent.FreeNotification (333)
333
4.45.16 TComponent.FreeOnRelease
Synopsis: Part of the IVCLComObject interface.
Declaration: procedure FreeOnRelease

Visibility: public
Description: Provided for Delphi compatibility, but is not yet implemented.
4.45.17 TComponent.GetEnumerator
Declaration: function GetEnumerator : TComponentEnumerator
Visibility: public
Description: GetEnumerator is the implementation of the IEnumerable (1459) interface for TComponent. It
creates a TComponentEnumerator (340) instance and returns it’s IEnumerator (1459) interface. The
enumerator enumerates all child components of the component instance.
See also: TComponentEnumerator (340), IEnumerator (1459), IEnumerable (1459)
4.45.18 TComponent.GetNamePath
Synopsis: Returns the name path of this component.
Visibility: public
Description: GetNamePath returns the name of the component as it will be shown in the object inspector.
TComponent overrides GetNamePath so it returns the Name (339) property of the component.
See also: Name (339), TPersistent.GetNamePath (391)
4.45.19 TComponent.GetParentComponent
Synopsis: Returns the parent component.
Declaration: function GetParentComponent : TComponent; Dynamic

Visibility: public
Description: GetParentComponent can be implemented to return the parent component of this component.
The implementation of this method in TComponent always returns Nil. Descendent classes must
override this method to return the visual parent of the component.
See also: HasParent (335), Owner (339)
334
4.45.20 TComponent.HasParent
Synopsis: Does the component have a parent ?
Declaration: function HasParent : Boolean; Dynamic

Visibility: public
Description: HasParent can be implemented to return whether the parent of the component exists. The im-
plementation of this method in TComponent always returns False, and should be overridden by
descendent classes to return True when a parent is available. If HasParent returns True, then
GetParentComponent (334) will return the parent component.
See also: HasParent (335), Owner (339)
4.45.21 TComponent.InsertComponent
Synopsis: Insert the given component in the list of owned components.
Declaration: procedure InsertComponent(AComponent: TComponent)

Visibility: public
Description: InsertComponent attempts to insert AComponent in the list with owned components. It first
calls ValidateComponent (329) to see whether the component can be inserted. It then checks whether
there are no name conflicts by calling ValidateRename (329). If neither of these checks have raised
an exception the component is inserted, and notified of the insert.
See also: RemoveComponent (335), Insert (329), ValidateContainer (329), ValidateRename (329), Notifica-
tion (331)
4.45.22 TComponent.RemoveComponent
Synopsis: Remove the given component from the list of owned components.
Declaration: procedure RemoveComponent(AComponent: TComponent)
Visibility: public
Description: RemoveComponent will send an opRemove notification to AComponent and will then proceed
to remove AComponent from the list of owned components.
See also: InsertComponent (335), Remove (329), ValidateRename (329), Notification (331)
4.45.23 TComponent.SafeCallException
Synopsis: Part of the IVCLComObject Interface.
Declaration: function SafeCallException(ExceptObject: TObject;

ExceptAddr: CodePointer) : HRESULT; Override
Visibility: public
Description: Provided for Delphi compatibility, but not implemented.
335
4.45.24 TComponent.SetSubComponent
Synopsis: Sets the csSubComponent style.
Declaration: procedure SetSubComponent(ASubComponent: Boolean)

Visibility: public
Description: SetSubComponent includes csSubComponent in the ComponentStyle (338) property if ASubComponent
is True, and excludes it again if ASubComponent is False.
See also: TComponent.ComponentStyle (338)
4.45.25 TComponent.UpdateAction
Synopsis: Updates the state of an action.
Declaration: function UpdateAction(Action: TBasicAction) : Boolean; Dynamic
Visibility: public
Description: UpdateAction checks whether Action handles the current component, and if yes, calls the
UpdateTarget method, passing itself as a parameter. The function returns True if the action
handles the current component.
See also: TBasicAction (294), TBasicAction.UpdateTarget (295), TBasicAction.HandlesTarget (295), TBasi-

cAction.ExecuteAction (294)
4.45.26 TComponent.IsImplementorOf
Synopsis: Checks if the current component is the implementor of the interface
Declaration: function IsImplementorOf(const Intf: IInterface) : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: IsImplementorOf returns True if the current component implements the given interface. The
interface should descend from IInterfaceComponentReference (271) and the GetComponent method
should return the current instance.
See also: IInterfaceComponentReference (271)
4.45.27 TComponent.ReferenceInterface
Synopsis: Interface implementation of Notification
Declaration: procedure ReferenceInterface(const intf: IInterface;op: TOperation)
Visibility: public
Description: ReferenceInterface can be used to notify an interface of a component operation: it is the

equivalent of the TComponent.Notification (331) method of TComponent for interfaces. If the
interface implements IInterfaceComponentReference (271), then the component that implements the
interface is notified of the given operation Op.
Errors: None.
See also: TComponent.Notification (331), IInterfaceComponentReference (271)
336
4.45.28 TComponent.ComObject
Synopsis: Interface reference implemented by the component
Declaration: Property ComObject : IUnknown

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: ComObject returns the COM interface represented by the component. If the component does not
represent a COM interface, reading this property will raise an EComponentError (265).
See also: EComponentError (265)
4.45.29 TComponent.Components
Synopsis: Indexed list (zero-based) of all owned components.
Declaration: Property Components[Index: Integer]: TComponent

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Components provides indexed access to the list of owned components. Index can range from 0
to ComponentCount-1 (337).
See also: ComponentCount (337), Owner (339)
4.45.30 TComponent.ComponentCount
Synopsis: Count of owned components
Declaration: Property ComponentCount : Integer

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: ComponentCount returns the number of components that the current component owns. It can be
used to determine the valid index range in the Component (337) array.
See also: Components (337), Owner (339)
4.45.31 TComponent.ComponentIndex
Synopsis: Index of component in it’s owner’s list.
Declaration: Property ComponentIndex : Integer

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: ComponentIndex is the index of the current component in its owner’s list of components. If the
component has no owner, the value of this property is -1.
See also: Components (337), ComponentCount (337), Owner (339)
337
4.45.32 TComponent.ComponentState
Synopsis: Current component’s state.
Declaration: Property ComponentState : TComponentState
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: ComponentState indicates the current state of the component. It is a set of flags which indicate
the various stages in the lifetime of a component. The following values can occur in this set:
Table 4.21: Component states
Flag Meaning
csLoading The component is being loaded from stream
csReading Component properties are being read from stream.
csWriting Component properties are weing written to stream.
csDestroying The component or one of it’s owners is being destoyed.
csAncestor The component is being streamed as part of a frame
csUpdating The component is being updated
csFixups References to other components are being resolved
csFreeNotification The component has freenotifications.
csInline The component is being loaded as part of a frame
csDesignInstance ? not used.
The component state is set by various actions such as reading it from stream, destroying it etc.
See also: SetAncestor (329), SetDesigning (329), SetInline (329), SetDesignInstance (329), Updating (329),
Updated (329), Loaded (329)
4.45.33 TComponent.ComponentStyle
Synopsis: Current component’s style.
Declaration: Property ComponentStyle : TComponentStyle
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Current component’s style.
4.45.34 TComponent.DesignInfo
Synopsis: Information for IDE designer.
Declaration: Property DesignInfo : LongInt
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: DesignInformation can be used by an IDE to store design information in the component. It
should not be used by an application programmer.
See also: Tag (339)
338
4.45.35 TComponent.Owner
Synopsis: Owner of this component.
Declaration: Property Owner : TComponent
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Owner returns the owner of this component. The owner cannot be set except by explicitly inserting
the component in another component’s owned components list using that component’s InsertCom-
ponent (335) method, or by removing the component from it’s owner’s owned component list using
the RemoveComponent (335) method.
See also: Components (337), InsertComponent (335), RemoveComponent (335)
4.45.36 TComponent.VCLComObject
Synopsis: Not implemented.
Declaration: Property VCLComObject : Pointer
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: VCLComObject is not yet implemented in Free Pascal.
4.45.37 TComponent.Name
Synopsis: Name of the component.
Declaration: Property Name : TComponentName
Visibility: published
Access: Read,Write
Description: Name is the name of the component. This name should be a valid identifier, i.e. must start with
a letter or underscore, and can contain only letters, numbers and the underscore character. When
attempting to set the name of a component, the name will be checked for validity. Furthermore,
when a component is owned by another component, the name must be either empty or must be
unique among the child component names.
By "letters", 7-bit letters are meant.
Errors: Attempting to set the name to an invalid value will result in an exception being raised.
See also: ValidateRename (329), Owner (339)
4.45.38 TComponent.Tag
Synopsis: Tag value of the component.
Declaration: Property Tag : PtrInt
Access: Read,Write
339
Description: Tag can be used to store an integer value in the component. This value is streamed together with all
other published properties. It can be used for instance to quickly identify a component in an event
handler.
See also: Name (339)
4.46 TComponentEnumerator
4.46.1 Description
TComponentEnumerator implements the #rtl.system.IEnumerator (1459) interface for the TCom-
ponent (329) class, so the TComponent class can be used in a for ... in loop over the
TComponent.Components (337) child components of the component. It is returned by the TCompo-
nent.GetEnumerator (334) method of TComponent.
See also: TComponent (329), TComponent.GetEnumerator (334), #rtl.system.IEnumerator (1459)

340 Create Initialize a new instance of TComponentEnumerator
341 MoveNext Move the position of the enumerator to the next position in the children of
the component.

4.46.4 TComponentEnumerator.Create
Synopsis: Initialize a new instance of TComponentEnumerator
Declaration: constructor Create(AComponent: TComponent)
Visibility: public
Description: Create initializes a new instance of TComponentEnumerator and keeps a reference to the
component AComponent that will be enumerated.
4.46.5 TComponentEnumerator.GetCurrent
Declaration: function GetCurrent : TComponent
Visibility: public
Description: GetCurrent returns the current TComponent (329) child component instance in the enumerator.
See also: MoveNext (341), TComponent.Components (337)
340
4.46.6 TComponentEnumerator.MoveNext
Synopsis: Move the position of the enumerator to the next position in the children of the component.

Visibility: public
Description: MoveNext puts the pointer on the next child in the components child components, and returns
True if this succeeded, or False if the pointer is past the last child in the list.
4.46.7 TComponentEnumerator.Current
Declaration: Property Current : TComponent

Visibility: public
Access: Read

4.47 TCustomMemoryStream
4.47.1 Description
TCustomMemoryStream is the parent class for streams that stored their data in memory. It intro-
duces all needed functions to handle reading from and navigating through the memory, and introduces
a Memory (343) property which points to the memory area where the stream data is kept.
The only thing which TCustomMemoryStream does not do is obtain memory to store data when
writing data or the writing of data. This functionality is implemented in descendent streams such
as TMemoryStream (378). The reason for this approach is that this way it is possible to create e.g.
read-only descendents of TCustomMemoryStream that point to a fixed part in memory which can
be read from, but not written to.
Remark: Since TCustomMemoryStream is an abstract class, do not create instances of TMemoryStream
directly. Instead, create instances of descendents such as TMemoryStream (378).
See also: TMemoryStream (378), TStream (408)

342 Read Reads Count bytes from the stream into buffer.
343 SaveToFile Writes the contents of the stream to a file.
342 SaveToStream Writes the contents of the memory stream to another stream.
342 Seek Sets a new position in the stream.
341

343 Memory r Pointer to the data kept in the memory stream.
4.47.4 TCustomMemoryStream.Read
Synopsis: Reads Count bytes from the stream into buffer.
Declaration: function Read(var Buffer;Count: LongInt) : LongInt; Override
Visibility: public
Description: Read reads Count bytes from the stream into the memory pointed to by buffer. It returns the
number of bytes actually read.
This method overrides the TStream.Read (409) method of TStream (408). It will read as much bytes
as are still available in the memory area pointer to by Memory (343). After the bytes are read, the
internal stream position is updated.
See also: TCustomMemoryStream.Memory (343), TStream.Read (409)
4.47.5 TCustomMemoryStream.Seek
Synopsis: Sets a new position in the stream.
Declaration: function Seek(const Offset: Int64;Origin: TSeekOrigin) : Int64
; Override
Visibility: public
Description: Seek overrides the abstract TStream.Seek (410) method. It simply updates the internal stream
position, and returns the new position.
Errors: No checking is done whether the new position is still a valid position, i.e. whether the position is
still within the range 0..Size. Attempting a seek outside the valid memory range of the stream
may result in an exception at the next read or write operation.
See also: TStream.Position (417), TStream.Size (418), TCustomMemoryStream.Memory (343)
4.47.6 TCustomMemoryStream.SaveToStream
Synopsis: Writes the contents of the memory stream to another stream.
Declaration: procedure SaveToStream(Stream: TStream)
Visibility: public
Description: SaveToStream writes the contents of the memory stream to Stream. The content of Stream is
not cleared first. The current position of the memory stream is not changed by this action.
Remark: This method will work much faster than the use of the TStream.CopyFrom (412) method:
Seek(0,soFromBeginning);
Stream.CopyFrom(Self,Size);
because the CopyFrom method copies the contents in blocks, while SaveToStream writes the
contents of the memory as one big block.
Errors: If an error occurs when writing to Stream an EStreamError (267) exception will be raised.
See also: TCustomMemoryStream.SaveToFile (343), TStream.CopyFrom (412)
342
4.47.7 TCustomMemoryStream.SaveToFile
Synopsis: Writes the contents of the stream to a file.
Declaration: procedure SaveToFile(const FileName: string)
Visibility: public
Description: SaveToFile writes the contents of the stream to a file with name FileName. It simply creates a
filestream and writes the contents of the memorystream to this file stream using TCustomMemoryS-
tream.SaveToStream (342).
Remark: This method will work much faster than the use of the TStream.CopyFrom (412) method:
Stream:=TFileStream.Create(fmCreate,FileName);
Stream.CopyFrom(Self,Size);
because the CopyFrom method copies the contents in blocks, while SaveToFile writes the con-
tents of the memory as one big block.
Errors: If an error occurs when creating or writing to the file, an EStreamError (267) exception may occur.
See also: TCustomMemoryStream.SaveToStream (342), TFileStream (349), TStream.CopyFrom (412)
4.47.8 TCustomMemoryStream.Memory
Synopsis: Pointer to the data kept in the memory stream.
Declaration: Property Memory : Pointer
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Memory points to the memory area where stream keeps it’s data. The property is read-only, so the
pointer cannot be set this way.
Remark: Do not write to the memory pointed to by Memory, since the memory content may be read-only,
and thus writing to it may cause errors.
See also: TStream.Size (418)
4.48 TDataModule
4.48.1 Description
TDataModule is a container for non-visual objects which can be used in an IDE to group non-
visual objects which can be used by various other containers (forms) in a project. Notably, data
access components are typically stored on a datamodule. Web components and services can also be
implemented as descendents of datamodules.
TDataModule introduces some events which make it easier to program, and provides the needed
streaming capabilities for persistent storage.
An IDE will typically allow to create a descendent of TDataModule which contains non-visual
components in it’s published property list.
See also: TDataModule.OnCreate (346)
343

345 AfterConstruction Overrides standard TObject (1465) behaviour.
345 BeforeDestruction
344 Create Create a new instance of a TDataModule.
344 CreateNew
344 Destroy Destroys the TDataModule instance.

345 DesignOffset rw Position property needed for manipulation in an IDE.
346 DesignSize rw Size property needed for manipulation in an IDE.
346 OldCreateOrder rw Determines when OnCreate and OnDestroy are trig-
gered.
346 OnCreate rw Event handler, called when the datamodule is created.
346 OnDestroy rw Event handler, called when the datamodule is destroyed.
4.48.4 TDataModule.Create
Synopsis: Create a new instance of a TDataModule.
Declaration: constructor Create(AOwner: TComponent); Override
Visibility: public
Description: Create creates a new instance of the TDatamodule and calls TDatamodule.CreateNew (344).
After that it reads the published properties from a stream using InitInheritedComponent (256) if
a descendent class is instantiated. If the OldCreateOrder (346) property is True, the TDataMod-
ule.OnCreate (346) event is called.
Errors: An exception can be raised during the streaming operation.
See also: TDataModule.CreateNew (344)
4.48.5 TDataModule.CreateNew
Synopsis:
Declaration: constructor CreateNew(AOwner: TComponent)
constructor CreateNew(AOwner: TComponent;CreateMode: Integer); Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: CreateNew creates a new instance of the class, but bypasses the streaming mechanism. The
CreateMode parameter (by default zero) is not used in TDataModule. If the AddDataModule
(249) handler is set, then it is called, with the newly created instance as an argument.
See also: TDataModule.Create (344), AddDataModule (249), TDataModule.OnCreate (346)
4.48.6 TDataModule.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys the TDataModule instance.
344
Visibility: public
Description: Destroy destroys the TDataModule instance. If the OldCreateOrder (346) property is True the
OnDestroy (346) event handler is called prior to destroying the data module.
Before calling the inherited destroy, the RemoveDataModule (249) handler is called if it is set, and
Self is passed as a parameter.
Errors: An event can be raised during the OnDestroy event handler.

See also: TDataModule.OnDestroy (346), RemoveDataModule (249)
4.48.7 TDataModule.AfterConstruction
Synopsis: Overrides standard TObject (1465) behaviour.
Declaration: procedure AfterConstruction; Override

Visibility: public
Description: AfterConstruction calls the OnCreate (346) handler if the OldCreateOrder (346) property is
False.
See also: TDataModule.OldCreateOrder (346), TDataModule.OnCreate (346)
4.48.8 TDataModule.BeforeDestruction
Synopsis:
Visibility: public
Description: BeforeDestruction calls the OnDestroy (346) handler if the OldCreateOrder (346) property is
False.
See also: TDataModule.OldCreateOrder (346), TDataModule.OnDestroy (346)
4.48.9 TDataModule.DesignOffset
Synopsis: Position property needed for manipulation in an IDE.
Declaration: Property DesignOffset : TPoint
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: DesignOffset is the position of the datamodule when displayed in an IDE. It is streamed to the
form file, and should not be used at run-time.
See also: TDataModule.DesignSize (346)
345
4.48.10 TDataModule.DesignSize
Synopsis: Size property needed for manipulation in an IDE.
Declaration: Property DesignSize : TPoint

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: DesignSize is the size of the datamodule when displayed in an IDE. It is streamed to the form
file, and should not be used at run-time.
See also: TDataModule.DesignOffset (345)
4.48.11 TDataModule.OnCreate
Synopsis: Event handler, called when the datamodule is created.
Declaration: Property OnCreate : TNotifyEvent

Access: Read,Write
Description: The OnCreate event is triggered when the datamodule is created and streamed. The exact moment
of triggering is dependent on the value of the OldCreateOrder (346) property.
See also: TDataModule.Create (344), TDataModule.CreateNew (344), TDataModule.OldCreateOrder (346)
4.48.12 TDataModule.OnDestroy
Synopsis: Event handler, called when the datamodule is destroyed.
Declaration: Property OnDestroy : TNotifyEvent

Access: Read,Write
Description: The OnDestroy event is triggered when the datamodule is destroyed The exact moment of trig-
gering is dependent on the value of the OldCreateOrder (346) property.
See also: TDataModule.Destroy (344), TDataModule.OnCreate (346), TDataModule.Create (344), TData-
Module.CreateNew (344), TDataModule.OldCreateOrder (346)
4.48.13 TDataModule.OldCreateOrder
Synopsis: Determines when OnCreate and OnDestroy are triggered.
Declaration: Property OldCreateOrder : Boolean

Access: Read,Write
346
Description: OldCreateOrder determines when exactly the OnCreate (346) and OnDestroy (346) event han-
dlers are called.
If set to True, then the OnCreate event handler is called after the data module was streamed. If it
is set to False, then the handler is called prior to the streaming process.
If set to True, then the OnDestroy event handler is called before the data module is removed from
the streaming system. If it is set to False, then the handler is called after the data module was
removed from the streaming process.
See also: TDataModule.OnDestroy (346), TDataModule.OnCreate (346), TDataModule.Destroy (344), TData-
Module.Create (344), TDataModule.CreateNew (344), TDataModule.OldCreateOrder (346)
4.49 TFiler
4.49.1 Description
Class responsible for streaming of components.

347 DefineBinaryProperty
347 DefineProperty

348 Ancestor rw Ancestor component from which an inherited component is
streamed.
348 IgnoreChildren rw Determines whether children will be streamed as well.
348 LookupRoot r Component used to look up ancestor components.
348 Root rw The root component is the initial component which is being
streamed.
4.49.4 TFiler.DefineProperty
Synopsis:
Declaration: procedure DefineProperty(const Name: string;ReadData: TReaderProc;

WriteData: TWriterProc;HasData: Boolean)
; Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description:
4.49.5 TFiler.DefineBinaryProperty
Synopsis:
Declaration: procedure DefineBinaryProperty(const Name: string;ReadData: TStreamProc;
WriteData: TStreamProc;HasData: Boolean)
; Virtual; Abstract
347
Visibility: public
Description:
4.49.6 TFiler.Root
Synopsis: The root component is the initial component which is being streamed.
Declaration: Property Root : TComponent
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: The streaming process will stream a component and all the components which it owns. The Root
component is the component which is initially streamed.
See also: LookupRoot (348)
4.49.7 TFiler.LookupRoot
Synopsis: Component used to look up ancestor components.
Declaration: Property LookupRoot : TComponent
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: When comparing inherited component’s values against parent values, the values are compared with
the component in LookupRoot. Initially, it is set to Root (348).
See also: Root (348)
4.49.8 TFiler.Ancestor
Synopsis: Ancestor component from which an inherited component is streamed.
Declaration: Property Ancestor : TPersistent
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: When streaming a component, this is the parent component. Only properties that differ from the
parent’s property value will be streamed.
See also: Root (348), LookupRoot (348)
4.49.9 TFiler.IgnoreChildren
Synopsis: Determines whether children will be streamed as well.
Declaration: Property IgnoreChildren : Boolean
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: By default, all children (i.e. owned objects) will also be streamed when streaming a component.
This property can be used to prevent owned objects from being streamed.
348
4.50 TFileStream
4.50.1 Description
TFileStream is a TStream (408) descdendent that stores or reads it’s data from a named file in
the filesystem of the operating system.
To this end, it overrides some of the methods in TStream and implements them for the case of files
on disk, and it adds the FileName (350) property to the list of public properties.
See also: TFileStream.Create (349), TStream (408)

349 Create Creates a file stream.
349 Destroy Destroys the file stream.

350 FileName r The filename of the stream.
4.50.4 TFileStream.Create
Synopsis: Creates a file stream.
Declaration: constructor Create(const AFileName: string;Mode: Word)
constructor Create(const AFileName: string;Mode: Word;Rights: Cardinal)
Visibility: public
Description: Create creates a new instance of a TFileStream class. It opens the file AFileName with
mode Mode, which can have one of the following values:
Table 4.22:
fmCreate TFileStream.Create (349) creates a new file if needed.
fmOpenRead TFileStream.Create (349) opens a file with read-only access.
fmOpenWrite TFileStream.Create (349) opens a file with write-only access.
fmOpenReadWrite TFileStream.Create (349) opens a file with read-write access.
After the file has been opened in the requested mode and a handle has been obtained from the oper-
ating system, the inherited constructor is called.
Errors: If the file could not be opened in the requested mode, an EFOpenError (265) exception is raised.
See also: TStream (408), TFileStream.FileName (350), THandleStream.Create (360)
4.50.5 TFileStream.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys the file stream.
349

Visibility: public
Description: Destroy closes the file (causing possible buffered data to be written to disk) and then calls the
inherited destructor.
Do not call destroy directly, instead call the Free method. Destroy does not check whether Self
is nil, while Free does.
See also: TFileStream.Create (349)
4.50.6 TFileStream.FileName
Synopsis: The filename of the stream.
Declaration: Property FileName : string

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: FileName is the name of the file that the stream reads from or writes to. It is the name as passed in
the constructor of the stream; it cannot be changed. To write to another file, the stream must be freed
and created again with the new filename.
See also: TFileStream.Create (349)
4.51 TFPList
4.51.1 Description
TFPList is a class that can be used to manage collections of pointers. It introduces methods and
properties to store the pointers, search in the list of pointers, sort them. It manages its memory by
itself, no intervention for that is needed. Contrary to TList (369), TFPList has no notification
mechanism. If no notification mechanism is used, it is better to use TFPList instead of TList, as
the performance of TFPList is much higher.
To manage collections of strings, it is better to use a TStrings (428) descendent such as TStringList
(423). To manage general objects, a TCollection (319) class exists, from which a descendent can be
made to manage collections of various kinds.
See also: TStrings (428), TCollection (319)
350

352 Add Adds a new pointer to the list.
351 AddList Add all pointers from another list
355 Assign Assign performs the given operation on the list.
352 Clear Clears the pointer list.
352 Delete Removes a pointer from the list.
351 Destroy Destroys the list and releases the memory used to store the list elements.
352 Error Raises an EListError (266) exception.
353 Exchange Exchanges two pointers in the list.
353 Expand Increases the capacity of the list if needed.
353 Extract Remove the first occurrence of a pointer from the list.
353 First Returns the first non-nil pointer in the list.
356 ForEachCall Call a procedure or method for each pointer in the list.
354 IndexOf Returns the index of a given pointer.
354 IndexOfItem Search an item in the list
354 Insert Inserts a new pointer in the list at a given position.
355 Last Returns the last non-nil pointer in the list.
355 Move Moves a pointer from one position in the list to another.
356 Pack Removes Nil pointers from the list and frees unused memory.
355 Remove Removes a value from the list.
356 Sort Sorts the pointers in the list.

357 Capacity rw Current capacity (i.e. number of pointers that can be stored) of the
list.
357 Count rw Current number of pointers in the list.
357 Items rw Provides access to the pointers in the list.
357 List r Memory array where pointers are stored.
4.51.4 TFPList.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys the list and releases the memory used to store the list elements.
Visibility: public
Description: Destroy destroys the list and releases the memory used to store the list elements. The elements
themselves are in no way touched, i.e. any meomory they point to must be explicitly released before
calling the destructor.
4.51.5 TFPList.AddList
Synopsis: Add all pointers from another list
Declaration: procedure AddList(AList: TFPList)

Visibility: public
351
Description: AddList adds all pointers from AList to the list. If a pointer is already present, it is added a
second time.
See also: TFPList.Assign (355), TList.AddList (371)
4.51.6 TFPList.Add
Synopsis: Adds a new pointer to the list.
Declaration: function Add(Item: Pointer) : Integer

Visibility: public
Description: Add adds a new pointer to the list after the last pointer (i.e. at position Count, thus increasing the
item count with 1. If the list is at full capacity, the capacity of the list is expanded, using the Expand
(353) method.
To insert a pointer at a certain position in the list, use the Insert (354) method instead.
See also: Delete (352), Grow (369), Insert (354)
4.51.7 TFPList.Clear
Synopsis: Clears the pointer list.
Visibility: public
Description: Clear removes all pointers from the list, and sets the capacity to 0, thus freeing any memory
allocated to maintain the list.
4.51.8 TFPList.Delete
Synopsis: Removes a pointer from the list.
Visibility: public
Description: Delete removes the pointer at position Index from the list, shifting all following pointers one
position up (or to the left).
The memory the pointer is pointing to is not deallocated.
4.51.9 TFPList.Error
Synopsis: Raises an EListError (266) exception.
Declaration: class procedure Error(const Msg: string;Data: PtrInt)
Visibility: public
Description: Error raises an EListError (266) exception, with a message formatted with Msg and Data.
352
4.51.10 TFPList.Exchange
Synopsis: Exchanges two pointers in the list.
Declaration: procedure Exchange(Index1: Integer;Index2: Integer)

Visibility: public
Description: Exchange exchanges the pointers at positions Index1 and Index2. Both pointers must be
withing the current range of the list, or an EListError (266) exception will be raised.
4.51.11 TFPList.Expand
Synopsis: Increases the capacity of the list if needed.
Declaration: function Expand : TFPList
Visibility: public
Description: Expand increases the capacity of the list if the current element count matches the current list ca-
pacity.
The capacity is increased according to the following algorithm:
1.If the capacity is less than 3, the capacity is increased with 4.

2.If the capacity is larger than 3 and less than 8, the capacity is increased with 8.
3.If the capacity is larger than 8, the capacity is increased with 16.
The return value is Self.

See also: Capacity (357)
4.51.12 TFPList.Extract
Synopsis: Remove the first occurrence of a pointer from the list.
Declaration: function Extract(Item: Pointer) : Pointer
Visibility: public
Description: Extract searches for the first occurrence of Item in the list and deletes it from the list. If Item
was found, it’s value is returned. If Item was not found, Nil is returned.
See also: TFPList.Delete (352)
4.51.13 TFPList.First
Synopsis: Returns the first non-nil pointer in the list.
Declaration: function First : Pointer

Visibility: public
Description: First returns the value of the first non-nil pointer in the list.
If there are no pointers in the list or all pointers equal Nil, then Nil is returned.
See also: Last (355)
353
4.51.14 TFPList.GetEnumerator
Declaration: function GetEnumerator : TFPListEnumerator

Visibility: public
Description: GetEnumerator is the implementation of the IEnumerable (1459) interface for TFPList. It
creates a TFPListEnumerator (358) instance and returns it’s IEnumerator (1459) interface.
See also: TFPListEnumerator (358), IEnumerator (1459), IEnumerable (1459)
4.51.15 TFPList.IndexOf
Synopsis: Returns the index of a given pointer.
Declaration: function IndexOf(Item: Pointer) : Integer
Visibility: public
Description: IndexOf searches for the pointer Item in the list of pointers, and returns the index of the pointer,
if found.
If no pointer with the value Item was found, -1 is returned.
4.51.16 TFPList.IndexOfItem
Synopsis: Search an item in the list
Declaration: function IndexOfItem(Item: Pointer;Direction: TDirection) : Integer
Visibility: public
Description: IndexOfItem has the same function as the IndexOf (233) function: it searches for Item in the
list, and returns the index of the first found matching pointer. If none is found, -1 is returned.
In difference with the IndexOf function, it accepts a parameter Direction indicating the search
direction: from the beginning of the list till the end of the list, or from the end of the list till the
beginning. The IndexOf function starts at the beginning of the list. The search direction is only
important if the item can appear multiple times in the list.
See also: TFPList.TDirection (??), TFPList.IndexOf (354)
4.51.17 TFPList.Insert
Synopsis: Inserts a new pointer in the list at a given position.
Declaration: procedure Insert(Index: Integer;Item: Pointer)
Visibility: public
Description: Insert inserts pointer Item at position Index in the list. All pointers starting from Index are
shifted to the right.
If Index is not a valid position, then a EListError (266) exception is raised.
See also: Add (352), Delete (352)
354
4.51.18 TFPList.Last
Synopsis: Returns the last non-nil pointer in the list.
Declaration: function Last : Pointer

Visibility: public
Description: Last returns the value of the last non-nil pointer in the list.
See also: First (353)
4.51.19 TFPList.Move
Synopsis: Moves a pointer from one position in the list to another.
Declaration: procedure Move(CurIndex: Integer;NewIndex: Integer)
Visibility: public
Description: Move moves the pointer at position CurIndex to position NewIndex. This is done by storing the
value at position CurIndex, deleting the pointer at position CurIndex, and reinserting the value
at position NewIndex
If CurIndex or Newindex are not inside the valid range of indices, an EListError (266) exception
is raised.
See also: Exchange (353)
4.51.20 TFPList.Assign
Synopsis: Assign performs the given operation on the list.
Declaration: procedure Assign(ListA: TFPList;AOperator: TListAssignOp;ListB: TFPList)

Visibility: public
Description: Assign can be used to merge or assign lists It is an extended version of the usual TPersistent.Assign
mechanism. The arguments ListA and ListB are used as sources of pointers to add or remove el-
ements from the current list, depending on the operation AOperation. The available operations
are documented in the TListAssignOp (242) type.
See also: TFPList.Add (352), TFPList.Clear (352)
4.51.21 TFPList.Remove
Synopsis: Removes a value from the list.
Declaration: function Remove(Item: Pointer) : Integer

Visibility: public
Description: Remove searches Item in the list, and, if it finds it, deletes the item from the list. Only the first
occurrence of Item is removed.
See also: Delete (352), IndexOf (354), Insert (354)
355
4.51.22 TFPList.Pack
Synopsis: Removes Nil pointers from the list and frees unused memory.
Declaration: procedure Pack

Visibility: public
Description: Pack removes all nil pointers from the list. The capacity of the list is then set to the number of
pointers in the list. This method can be used to free unused memory if the list has grown to very large
sizes and has a lot of unneeded nil pointers in it.
See also: TFPList.Clear (352)
4.51.23 TFPList.Sort
Synopsis: Sorts the pointers in the list.
Declaration: procedure Sort(Compare: TListSortCompare)

Visibility: public
Description: Sort> sorts the pointers in the list. Two pointers are compared by passing them to the Compare
function. The result of this function determines how the pointers will be sorted:
•If the result of this function is negative, the first pointer is assumed to be ’less’ than the second
and will be moved before the second in the list.
•If the function result is positive, the first pointer is assumed to be ’greater than’ the second and
will be moved after the second in the list.
•if the function result is zero, the pointers are assumed to be ’equal’ and no moving will take
place.
The sort is done using a quicksort algorithm.
4.51.24 TFPList.ForEachCall
Synopsis: Call a procedure or method for each pointer in the list.
Declaration: procedure ForEachCall(proc2call: TListCallback;arg: pointer)
procedure ForEachCall(proc2call: TListStaticCallback;arg: pointer)
Visibility: public
Description: ForEachCall iterates over all pointers in the list and calls proc2call, passing it the pointer
and the additional arg data pointer. Proc2Call can be a method or a static procedure.
Errors: None.
See also: TListStaticCallback (243), TListCallback (243)
356
4.51.25 TFPList.Capacity
Synopsis: Current capacity (i.e. number of pointers that can be stored) of the list.
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Capacity contains the number of pointers the list can store before it starts to grow.
If a new pointer is added to the list using add (352) or insert (354), and there is not enough memory
to store the new pointer, then the list will try to allocate more memory to store the new pointer.
Since this is a time consuming operation, it is important that this operation be performed as little as
possible. If it is known how many pointers there will be before filling the list, it is a good idea to
set the capacity first before filling. This ensures that the list doesn’t need to grow, and will speed up
filling the list.
See also: SetCapacity (350), Count (357)
4.51.26 TFPList.Count
Synopsis: Current number of pointers in the list.
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Count is the current number of (possibly Nil) pointers in the list. Since the list is zero-based, the
index of the largest pointer is Count-1.
4.51.27 TFPList.Items
Synopsis: Provides access to the pointers in the list.
Declaration: Property Items[Index: Integer]: Pointer; default
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Items is used to access the pointers in the list. It is the default property of the TFPList class, so
it can be omitted.
The list is zero-based, so Index must be in the range 0 to Count-1.
4.51.28 TFPList.List
Synopsis: Memory array where pointers are stored.
Declaration: Property List : PPointerList
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: List points to the memory space where the pointers are stored. This can be used to quickly copy
the list of pinters to another location.
357
4.52 TFPListEnumerator
4.52.1 Description
TFPListEnumerator implements the #rtl.system.IEnumerator (1459) interface for the TFPList
(350) class, so the TFPList class can be used in a for ... in loop. It is returned by the
TFPList.GetEnumerator (354) method of TFPList.
See also: TFPList (350), TFPList.GetEnumerator (354), #rtl.system.IEnumerator (1459)

358 Create Initialize a new instance of TFPListEnumerator
358 MoveNext Move the position of the enumerator to the next position in the list.

4.52.4 TFPListEnumerator.Create
Synopsis: Initialize a new instance of TFPListEnumerator
Declaration: constructor Create(AList: TFPList)
Visibility: public
Description: Create initializes a new instance of TFPListEnumerator and keeps a reference to the list
AList that will be enumerated.
See also: TFPList (350)
4.52.5 TFPListEnumerator.GetCurrent
Declaration: function GetCurrent : Pointer

Visibility: public
Description: GetCurrent returns the current pointer in the enumerator.

See also: MoveNext (358)
4.52.6 TFPListEnumerator.MoveNext
Synopsis: Move the position of the enumerator to the next position in the list.
358
Visibility: public
Description: MoveNext puts the pointer on the next item in the list, and returns True if this succeeded, or
False if the pointer is past the last element in the list.
4.52.7 TFPListEnumerator.Current
Declaration: Property Current : Pointer
Visibility: public
Access: Read
4.53 THandleStream
4.53.1 Description
THandleStream is an abstract descendent of the TStream (408) class that provides methods for
a stream to handle all reading and writing to and from a handle, provided by the underlying OS. To
this end, it overrides the Read (360) and Write (360) methods of TStream.
Remark:
• ThandleStream does not obtain a handle from the OS by itself, it just handles reading and
writing to such a handle by wrapping the system calls for reading and writing; Descendent
classes should obtain a handle from the OS by themselves and pass it on in the inherited
constructor.
• Contrary to Delphi, no seek is implemented for THandleStream, since pipes and sockets
do not support this. The seek is implemented in descendent methods that support it.
See also: TStream (408), TFileStream (349)

360 Create Create a handlestream from an OS Handle.
360 Read Overrides standard read method.
360 Seek Overrides the Seek method.
360 Write Overrides standard write method.

361 Handle r The OS handle of the stream.
359
4.53.4 THandleStream.Create
Synopsis: Create a handlestream from an OS Handle.
Declaration: constructor Create(AHandle: THandle)

Visibility: public
Description: Create creates a new instance of a THandleStream class. It stores AHandle in an internal
variable and then calls the inherited constructor.
See also: TStream (408)
4.53.5 THandleStream.Read
Synopsis: Overrides standard read method.
Visibility: public
Description: Read overrides the Read (409) method of TStream. It uses the Handle (361) property to read the
Count bytes into Buffer
If no error occurs while reading, the number of bytes actually read will be returned.
Errors: If the operating system reports an error while reading from the handle, -1 is returned.
See also: TStream.Read (409), THandleStream.Write (360), THandleStream.Handle (361)
4.53.6 THandleStream.Write
Synopsis: Overrides standard write method.
Declaration: function Write(const Buffer;Count: LongInt) : LongInt; Override

Visibility: public
Description: Write overrides the Write (410) method of TStream. It uses the Handle (361) property to write
the Count bytes from Buffer.
If no error occurs while writing, the number of bytes actually written will be returned.
Errors: If the operating system reports an error while writing to the handle, 0 is returned.
See also: TStream.Read (409), THandleStream.Write (360), THandleStream.Handle (361)
4.53.7 THandleStream.Seek
Synopsis: Overrides the Seek method.

; Override
Visibility: public
Description: seek uses the FileSeek (1556) method to position the stream on the desired position. Note that
handle stream descendents (notably pipes) can override the method to prevent the seek.
360
4.53.8 THandleStream.Handle
Synopsis: The OS handle of the stream.
Declaration: Property Handle : THandle

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Handle represents the Operating system handle to which reading and writing is done. The handle
can be read only, i.e. it cannot be set after the THandlestream instance was created. It should be
passed to the constructor THandleStream.Create (360)
See also: THandleStream (359), THandleStream.Create (360)
4.54 TInterfacedPersistent
4.54.1 Description
TInterfacedPersistent is a direct descendent of TPersistent (389) which implements the
#rtl.system.IInterface (1256) interface. In particular, it implements the QueryInterface as a
public method.
See also: IInterface (1256)

1256 IInterface Basic interface for all COM based interfaces

362 AfterConstruction Overrides the standard AfterConstruction method.
361 QueryInterface Implementation of IInterface.QueryInterface
4.54.4 TInterfacedPersistent.QueryInterface
Synopsis: Implementation of IInterface.QueryInterface
Declaration: function QueryInterface(const IID: TGuid;out Obj) : HRESULT; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: QueryInterface simply calls GetInterface using the specified IID, and returns the correct
values.
See also: TObject.GetInterface (1473)
361
4.54.5 TInterfacedPersistent.AfterConstruction
Synopsis: Overrides the standard AfterConstruction method.

Visibility: public
Description: AfterConstruction is overridden to do some extra interface housekeeping: a reference to the
IInterface interface of the owning class is obtained (if it exists).
4.55 TInterfaceList
4.55.1 Description
TInterfaceList is a standard implementation of the IInterfaceList (272) interface. It uses a
TThreadList (456) instance to store the list of interfaces.
See also: IInterfaceList (272), TList (369)

272 IInterfaceList Interface for maintaining a list of interfaces.

365 Add Add an interface to the list
363 Clear Removes all interfaces from the list.
363 Create Create a new instance of TInterfaceList
363 Delete Delete an interface from the list.
363 Destroy Destroys the list of interfaces
364 Exchange Exchange 2 interfaces in the list
366 Expand Expands the list
364 First Returns the first non-Nil element in the list.
364 IndexOf Returns the index of an interface.
365 Insert Insert an interface to the list
365 Last Returns the last non-Nil element in the list.
366 Lock Lock the list
365 Remove Remove an interface from the list
366 Unlock UnLocks a locked list

366 Capacity rw The current capacity of the list.
367 Count rw The current number of elements in the list.
367 Items rw Array-based access to the list’s items.
362
4.55.5 TInterfaceList.Create
Synopsis: Create a new instance of TInterfaceList

Visibility: public
Description: Create creates a new instance of the TInterfaceList class. It sets up the internal structures
needed to store the list of interfaces.
4.55.6 TInterfaceList.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys the list of interfaces
Visibility: public
Description: Destroy first calls Clear (363) and then frees the TInterfaceList instance from memory.
Note that the Clear method decreases the reference count of all interfaces.
See also: Create (363), Clear (363)
4.55.7 TInterfaceList.Clear
Synopsis: Removes all interfaces from the list.
Visibility: public
Description: Clear is the implementation of the IInterfaceList.Clear (274) method. It removes all interfaces
from the list. It does this by setting each element in the list to Nil, in this way the reference count
of each interface in the list is descreased.
See also: IInterfaceList.Clear (274), Add (365), Destroy (363), TList.Clear (372), TFPList.Clear (352)
4.55.8 TInterfaceList.Delete
Synopsis: Delete an interface from the list.
Declaration: procedure Delete(index: Integer)
Visibility: public
Description: Delete is the implementation of the IInterfaceList.Delete (274) method. It clears the slot first and
then removes the element from the list.
See also: IInterfaceList.Delete (274), TInterfaceList.Remove (365), TInterfaceList.Add (365), TList.Delete
(372), TFPList.Delete (352)
363
4.55.9 TInterfaceList.Exchange
Synopsis: Exchange 2 interfaces in the list
Declaration: procedure Exchange(index1: Integer;index2: Integer)

Visibility: public
Description: Exchange is the implementation of the IInterfaceList.Exchange (275) method. It exchanges the
position of 2 interfaces in the list.
See also: IInterfaceList.Exchange (275), TInterfaceList.Delete (363), TInterfaceList.Add (365), TList.Exchange

(372), TFPList.Exchange (353)
4.55.10 TInterfaceList.First
Synopsis: Returns the first non-Nil element in the list.
Declaration: function First : IUnknown

Visibility: public
Description: First is the implementation of the IInterfaceList.First (275) method. It returns the first non-Nil
element from the list.
See also: IInterfaceList.First (275), TList.First (373)
4.55.11 TInterfaceList.GetEnumerator
Declaration: function GetEnumerator : TInterfaceListEnumerator
Visibility: public
Description: GetEnumerator is the implementation of the IEnumerable (1459) interface for TInterfaceList.
It creates a TInterfaceListEnumerator (367) instance and returns it’s IEnumerator (1459) interface.
The enumerator enumerates all interfaces in the list.
See also: TInterfaceListEnumerator (367), IEnumerator (1459), IEnumerable (1459)
4.55.12 TInterfaceList.IndexOf
Synopsis: Returns the index of an interface.
Declaration: function IndexOf(item: IUnknown) : Integer
Visibility: public
Description: IndexOf is the implementation of the IInterfaceList.IndexOf (275) method. It returns the zero-
based index in the list of the indicated interface, or -1 if the index is not in the list.
See also: IInterfaceList.IndexOf (275), TList.IndexOf (374)
364
4.55.13 TInterfaceList.Add
Synopsis: Add an interface to the list
Declaration: function Add(item: IUnknown) : Integer

Visibility: public
Description: Add is the implementation of the IInterfaceList.Add (275) method. It adds an interface to the list,
and returns the location of the new element in the list. This operation will increment the reference
count of the interface.
See also: IInterfaceList.Add (275), TInterfaceList.Delete (363), TInterfaceList.Insert (365), TList.Add (371),
TFPList.Add (352)
4.55.14 TInterfaceList.Insert
Synopsis: Insert an interface to the list
Declaration: procedure Insert(i: Integer;item: IUnknown)

Visibility: public
Description: Insert is the implementation of the IInterfaceList.Insert (275) method. It inserts an interface in
the list at the indicated position. This operation will increment the reference count of the interface.
See also: IInterfaceList.Insert (275), TInterfaceList.Delete (363), TInterfaceList.Add (365), TList.Insert (374),
TFPList.Insert (354)
4.55.15 TInterfaceList.Last
Synopsis: Returns the last non-Nil element in the list.
Declaration: function Last : IUnknown

Visibility: public
Description: Last is the implementation of the IInterfaceList.Last (276) method. It returns the last non-Nil
element from the list.
See also: IInterfaceList.Last (276), TInterfaceList.First (364), TList.Last (374), TFPList.Last (355)
4.55.16 TInterfaceList.Remove
Declaration: function Remove(item: IUnknown) : Integer
Visibility: public
Description: Remove is the implementation of the IInterfaceList.Remove (276) method. It removes the first
occurrence of the interface from the list.
See also: IInterfaceList.Remove (276), TInterfaceList.Delete (363), TInterfaceList.IndexOf (364), TList.Remove
(375), TFPList.Remove (355)
365
4.55.17 TInterfaceList.Lock
Synopsis: Lock the list
Declaration: procedure Lock

Visibility: public
Description: Lock locks the list. It is the implementation of the IInterfaceList.Lock (276) method. It limits
access to the list to the current thread.
See also: IInterfaceList.Lock (276), TInterfaceList.UnLock (366), TThreadList.LockList (458)
4.55.18 TInterfaceList.Unlock
Synopsis: UnLocks a locked list
Declaration: procedure Unlock
Visibility: public
Description: UnLock unlocks the list. It is the implementation of the IInterfaceList.UnLock (276) method. After
a call to unlock, the current thread releases the list for manipulation by other threads.
See also: IInterfaceList.UnLock (276), TInterfaceList.Lock (366), TThreadList.UnLockList (458)
4.55.19 TInterfaceList.Expand
Synopsis: Expands the list
Declaration: function Expand : TInterfaceList
Visibility: public
Description: Expand calls the expand method from the internally used list. It returns itself.
See also: TList.Expand (372)
4.55.20 TInterfaceList.Capacity
Synopsis: The current capacity of the list.

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Capacity is the number of elements that the list can contain without needing to allocate more
memory.
See also: IInterfaceList.Capacity (276), TInterfaceList.Count (367), TList.Capacity (376), TFPList.Capacity
(357)
366
4.55.21 TInterfaceList.Count
Synopsis: The current number of elements in the list.

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Count is the number of elements in the list. This can include Nil elements. Note that the elements
are zero-based, and thus are indexed from 0 to Count-1.
See also: IInterfaceList.Count (277), TInterfaceList.Items (367), TInterfaceList.Capacity (366), TList.Count
(376), TFPList.Count (357)
4.55.22 TInterfaceList.Items
Synopsis: Array-based access to the list’s items.
Declaration: Property Items[Index: Integer]: IUnknown; default
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Items provides indexed access to the elements in the list. Note that the elements are zero-based,
and thus are indexed from 0 to Count-1. The items are read-write. It is not possible to add elements
to the list by accessing an element with index larger or equal to Count (367).
See also: IInterfaceList.Items (277), TInterfaceList.Count (367), TList.Items (376), TFPList.Items (357)
4.56 TInterfaceListEnumerator
4.56.1 Description
TInterfaceListEnumerator implements the #rtl.system.IEnumerator (1459) interface for the
TInterfaceList (362) class, so the TInterfaceList class can be used in a for ... in loop
over the TInterfaceList.Components (362) child components of the component. It is returned by the
TInterfaceList.GetEnumerator (364) method of TInterfaceList.
See also: TInterfaceList (362), TInterfaceList.GetEnumerator (364), #rtl.system.IEnumerator (1459)

368 Create Initialize a new instance of TInterfaceListEnumerator
368 MoveNext Move the position of the enumerator to the next position in the children of
the component.

367
4.56.4 TInterfaceListEnumerator.Create
Synopsis: Initialize a new instance of TInterfaceListEnumerator
Declaration: constructor Create(AList: TInterfaceList)

Visibility: public
Description: Create initializes a new instance of TInterfaceListEnumerator and keeps a reference to
the component AComponent that will be enumerated.
See also: TInterfaceList (362)
4.56.5 TInterfaceListEnumerator.GetCurrent
Declaration: function GetCurrent : IUnknown
Visibility: public
Description: GetCurrent returns the current interface in the TInterfaceList (362) list.
See also: MoveNext (368), TInterfaceList.Components (362)
4.56.6 TInterfaceListEnumerator.MoveNext
Synopsis: Move the position of the enumerator to the next position in the children of the component.
Visibility: public
Description: MoveNext puts the pointer on the next interface in the list, and returns True if this succeeded, or
False if the pointer is past the last interface in the list.
4.56.7 TInterfaceListEnumerator.Current
Declaration: Property Current : IUnknown
Visibility: public
Access: Read
368
4.57 TList
4.57.1 Description
TList is a class that can be used to manage collections of pointers. It introduces methods and
properties to store the pointers, search in the list of pointers, sort them. It manages its memory by
itself, no intervention for that is needed. It has an event notification mechanism which allows to
notify of list changes. This slows down some of TList mechanisms, and if no notification is used,
TFPList (350) may be used instead.
To manage collections of strings, it is better to use a TStrings (428) descendent such as TStringList
(423). To manage general objects, a TCollection (319) class exists, from which a descendent can be
made to manage collections of various kinds.
See also: TStrings (428), TCollection (319)

269 IFPObserved Interface implemented by an object that can be observed.

371 Add Adds a new pointer to the list.
371 AddList Add all pointers from another list
375 Assign Copy the contents of other lists.
372 Clear Clears the pointer list.
370 Create Class to manage collections of pointers.
372 Delete Removes a pointer from the list.
370 Destroy Destroys the list and releases the memory used to store the list
elements.
372 Error Raises an EListError (266) exception.
372 Exchange Exchanges two pointers in the list.
372 Expand Increases the capacity of the list if needed.
373 Extract Remove the first occurrence of a pointer from the list.
373 First Returns the first non-nil pointer in the list.
370 FPOAttachObserver Add an observer to the list of observers
370 FPODetachObserver Remove an observer from the list of observers
371 FPONotifyObservers Notify observers of changes in the list
374 IndexOf Returns the index of a given pointer.
374 Insert Inserts a new pointer in the list at a given position.
374 Last Returns the last non-nil pointer in the list.
374 Move Moves a pointer from one position in the list to another.
375 Pack Removes Nil pointers from the list and frees unused memory.
375 Remove Removes a value from the list.
375 Sort Sorts the pointers in the list.
369

376 Capacity rw Current capacity (i.e. number of pointers that can be stored) of the
list.
376 Count rw Current number of pointers in the list.
376 Items rw Provides access to the pointers in the list.
377 List r Memory array where pointers are stored.
4.57.5 TList.Create
Synopsis: Class to manage collections of pointers.

Visibility: public
Description: TList.Create creates a new instance of TList. It clears the list and prepares it for use.
See also: TList (369), TList.Destroy (370)
4.57.6 TList.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys the list and releases the memory used to store the list elements.
Visibility: public
Description: Destroy destroys the list and releases the memory used to store the list elements. The elements
themselves are in no way touched, i.e. any meomory they point to must be explicitly released before
calling the destructor.
4.57.7 TList.FPOAttachObserver
Synopsis: Add an observer to the list of observers

Visibility: public
Description: FPOAttachObserver is part of the implementation of the IFPObserved (269) interface in Tlist.
It adds a new observer to the list of observers. Calling this multiple times will add the observed object
multiple times to the list.
Errors: An EObserver exception may be raised if AObject does not implement the IFPObserver (271)
interface.
See also: IFPObserver (271), IFPObserved.FPOAttachObserver (270), IFPObserved (269)
4.57.8 TList.FPODetachObserver
Synopsis: Remove an observer from the list of observers
Visibility: public
370
Description: FPODetachObserver is part of the implementation of the IFPObserved (269) interface in Tlist.
It removes the first found instance of the observer from the list of observers.
See also: IFPObserved (269), IFPObserved.FPODetachObserver (270), IFPObserver (271)
4.57.9 TList.FPONotifyObservers
Synopsis: Notify observers of changes in the list

Data: Pointer)
Visibility: public
Description: FPONotifyObservers is called to notify observers of changes in the list. The following notifi-
cations are sent:
ooAddItemwhen a pointer is added. Data is the pointer that is added.

ooDeleteItemwhen a pointer is deleted or extracted. Data is the pointer that is deleted or extracted.
ooChangecalled when 2 pointers are exchanged.
ooFreeCalled when the list is freed.
See also: FPODetachObserver (233), FPOAttachObserver (233), Add (233), Exchange (233), Delete (233),
Extract (233)
4.57.10 TList.AddList
Synopsis: Add all pointers from another list
Declaration: procedure AddList(AList: TList)
Visibility: public
Description: AddList adds all pointers from AList to the list. If a pointer is already present, it is added a
second time.
See also: TList.Assign (375), TFPList.AddList (351)
4.57.11 TList.Add
Synopsis: Adds a new pointer to the list.

Visibility: public
Description: Add adds a new pointer to the list after the last pointer (i.e. at position Count, thus increasing the
item count with 1. If the list is at full capacity, the capacity of the list is expanded, using the Grow
(369) method.
To insert a pointer at a certain position in the list, use the Insert (374) method instead.
See also: Delete (372), Grow (369), Insert (374)
371
4.57.12 TList.Clear
Synopsis: Clears the pointer list.
Declaration: procedure Clear; Virtual

Visibility: public
Description: Clear removes all pointers from the list, and sets the capacity to 0, thus freeing any memory
allocated to maintain the list.
4.57.13 TList.Delete
Synopsis: Removes a pointer from the list.
Visibility: public
Description: Delete removes the pointer at position Index from the list, shifting all following pointers one
position up (or to the left).
The memory the pointer is pointing to is not deallocated.
4.57.14 TList.Error
Synopsis: Raises an EListError (266) exception.
Declaration: class procedure Error(const Msg: string;Data: PtrInt); Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: Error raises an EListError (266) exception, with a message formatted with Msg and Data.
4.57.15 TList.Exchange
Synopsis: Exchanges two pointers in the list.
Visibility: public
Description: Exchange exchanges the pointers at positions Index1 and Index2. Both pointers must be
withing the current range of the list, or an EListError (266) exception will be raised.
4.57.16 TList.Expand
Synopsis: Increases the capacity of the list if needed.
Declaration: function Expand : TList

Visibility: public
Description: Expand increases the capacity of the list if the current element count matches the current list ca-
pacity.
The capacity is increased according to the following algorithm:
372
1.If the capacity is less than 3, the capacity is increased with 4.

2.If the capacity is larger than 3 and less than 8, the capacity is increased with 8.
3.If the capacity is larger than 8, the capacity is increased with 16.
The return value is Self.

See also: Capacity (376)
4.57.17 TList.Extract
Synopsis: Remove the first occurrence of a pointer from the list.
Declaration: function Extract(item: Pointer) : Pointer
Visibility: public
Description: Extract searched for an occurrence of item, and if a match is found, the match is deleted from
the list. If no match is found, nothing is deleted. If Item was found, the result is Item. If Item
was not found, the result is Nil. A lnExtracted notification event is triggered if an element is
extracted from the list.
See also: TList.Delete (372), TList.IndexOf (374), TList.Remove (375)
4.57.18 TList.First
Synopsis: Returns the first non-nil pointer in the list.
Declaration: function First : Pointer
Visibility: public
Description: First returns the value of the first non-nil pointer in the list.
See also: Last (374)
4.57.19 TList.GetEnumerator
Declaration: function GetEnumerator : TListEnumerator

Visibility: public
Description: GetEnumerator is the implementation of the IEnumerable (1459) interface for TList. It creates
a TListEnumerator (377) instance and returns it’s IEnumerator (1459) interface.
See also: TListEnumerator (377), IEnumerator (1459), IEnumerable (1459)
373
4.57.20 TList.IndexOf
Synopsis: Returns the index of a given pointer.

Visibility: public
Description: IndexOf searches for the pointer Item in the list of pointers, and returns the index of the pointer,
if found.
If no pointer with the value Item was found, -1 is returned.
4.57.21 TList.Insert
Synopsis: Inserts a new pointer in the list at a given position.
Visibility: public
Description: Insert inserts pointer Item at position Index in the list. All pointers starting from Index are
shifted to the right.
If Index is not a valid position, then a EListError (266) exception is raised.
See also: Add (371), Delete (372)
4.57.22 TList.Last
Synopsis: Returns the last non-nil pointer in the list.
Declaration: function Last : Pointer
Visibility: public
Description: Last returns the value of the last non-nil pointer in the list.
See also: First (373)
4.57.23 TList.Move
Synopsis: Moves a pointer from one position in the list to another.
Visibility: public
Description: Move moves the pointer at position CurIndex to position NewIndex. This is done by storing the
If CurIndex or Newindex are not inside the valid range of indices, an EListError (266) exception
is raised.
374
4.57.24 TList.Assign
Synopsis: Copy the contents of other lists.
Declaration: procedure Assign(ListA: TList;AOperator: TListAssignOp;ListB: TList)

Visibility: public
Description: Assign can be used to merge or assign lists It is an extended version of the usual TPersistent.Assign
mechanism. The arguments ListA and ListB are used as sources of pointers to add or remove el-
ements from the current list, depending on the operation AOperation. The available operations
are documented in the TListAssignOp (242) type.
4.57.25 TList.Remove
Synopsis: Removes a value from the list.

Visibility: public
Description: Remove searches Item in the list, and, if it finds it, deletes the item from the list. Only the first
occurrence of Item is removed.
See also: Delete (372), IndexOf (374), Insert (374)
4.57.26 TList.Pack
Synopsis: Removes Nil pointers from the list and frees unused memory.
Visibility: public
Description: Pack removes all nil pointers from the list. The capacity of the list is then set to the number of
pointers in the list. This method can be used to free unused memory if the list has grown to very large
sizes and has a lot of unneeded nil pointers in it.
4.57.27 TList.Sort
Synopsis: Sorts the pointers in the list.
Declaration: procedure Sort(Compare: TListSortCompare)
Visibility: public
Description: Sort> sorts the pointers in the list. Two pointers are compared by passing them to the Compare
•If the result of this function is negative, the first pointer is assumed to be ’less’ than the second
and will be moved before the second in the list.
•If the function result is positive, the first pointer is assumed to be ’greater than’ the second and
will be moved after the second in the list.
375
place.
4.57.28 TList.Capacity
Synopsis: Current capacity (i.e. number of pointers that can be stored) of the list.
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Capacity contains the number of pointers the list can store before it starts to grow.
If a new pointer is added to the list using add (371) or insert (374), and there is not enough memory
to store the new pointer, then the list will try to allocate more memory to store the new pointer.
Since this is a time consuming operation, it is important that this operation be performed as little as
possible. If it is known how many pointers there will be before filling the list, it is a good idea to
set the capacity first before filling. This ensures that the list doesn’t need to grow, and will speed up
filling the list.
See also: SetCapacity (369), Count (376)
4.57.29 TList.Count
Synopsis: Current number of pointers in the list.
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Count is the current number of (possibly Nil) pointers in the list. Since the list is zero-based, the
index of the largest pointer is Count-1.
4.57.30 TList.Items
Synopsis: Provides access to the pointers in the list.
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Items is used to access the pointers in the list. It is the default property of the TList class, so it
can be omitted.
The list is zero-based, so Index must be in the range 0 to Count-1.
376
4.57.31 TList.List
Synopsis: Memory array where pointers are stored.
Declaration: Property List : PPointerList
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: List points to the memory space where the pointers are stored. This can be used to quickly copy
the list of pinters to another location.
4.58 TListEnumerator
4.58.1 Description
TListEnumerator implements the #rtl.system.IEnumerator (1459) interface for the TList (369)
class, so the TList class can be used in a for ... in loop. It is returned by the TList.GetEnumerator
(373) method of TList.
See also: TList (369), TList.GetEnumerator (373), #rtl.system.IEnumerator (1459)

377 Create Initialize a new instance of TListEnumerator

4.58.4 TListEnumerator.Create
Synopsis: Initialize a new instance of TListEnumerator
Declaration: constructor Create(AList: TList)
Visibility: public
Description: Create initializes a new instance of TListEnumerator and keeps a reference to the list AList
that will be enumerated.
4.58.5 TListEnumerator.GetCurrent
Declaration: function GetCurrent : Pointer
Visibility: public
377
Description: GetCurrent returns the current pointer in the enumerator.

See also: MoveNext (378)
4.58.6 TListEnumerator.MoveNext
Visibility: public
Description: MoveNext puts the pointer on the next item in the list, and returns True if this succeeded, or
4.58.7 TListEnumerator.Current
Declaration: Property Current : Pointer
Visibility: public
Access: Read

4.59 TMemoryStream
4.59.1 Description
TMemoryStream is a TStream (408) descendent that stores it’s data in memory. It descends directly
from TCustomMemoryStream (341) and implements the necessary to allocate and de-allocate mem-
ory directly from the heap. It implements the Write (380) method which is missing in TCustomMemoryStream.
TMemoryStream also introduces methods to load the contents of another stream or a file into the
memory stream.
It is not necessary to do any memory management manually, as the stream will allocate or de-allocate
memory as needed. When the stream is freed, all allocated memory will be freed as well.
See also: TCustomMemoryStream (341), TStream (408)
378

379 Clear Zeroes the position, capacity and size of the stream.
379 Destroy Frees any allocated memory and destroys the memory stream.
380 LoadFromFile Loads the contents of a file into memory.
379 LoadFromStream Loads the contents of a stream into memory.
380 SetSize Sets the size for the memory stream.
380 Write Writes data to the stream’s memory.
4.59.3 TMemoryStream.Destroy
Synopsis: Frees any allocated memory and destroys the memory stream.
Visibility: public
Description: Destroy clears the memory stream, thus in effect freeing any memory allocated for it, and then
frees the memory stream.
4.59.4 TMemoryStream.Clear
Synopsis: Zeroes the position, capacity and size of the stream.
Visibility: public
Description: Clear sets the position and size to 0, and sets the capacity of the stream to 0, thus freeing all
memory allocated for the stream.
See also: TStream.Size (418), TStream.Position (417), TCustomMemoryStream.Memory (343)
4.59.5 TMemoryStream.LoadFromStream
Synopsis: Loads the contents of a stream into memory.
Declaration: procedure LoadFromStream(Stream: TStream)
Visibility: public
Description: LoadFromStream loads the contents of Stream into the memorybuffer of the stream. Any
previous contents of the memory stream are overwritten. Memory is allocated as needed.
Remark: The LoadFromStream uses the Size (418) property of Stream to determine how much memory
must be allocated. Some streams do not allow the stream size to be determined, so care must be taken
when using this method.
This method will work much faster than the use of the TStream.CopyFrom (412) method:
CopyFrom(Stream,Stream.Size);
because the CopyFrom method copies the contents in blocks, while LoadFromStream reads the
contents of the stream as one big block.
Errors: If an error occurs when reading from the stream, an EStreamError (267) may occur.
See also: TStream.CopyFrom (412), TMemoryStream.LoadFromFile (380)
379
4.59.6 TMemoryStream.LoadFromFile
Synopsis: Loads the contents of a file into memory.
Declaration: procedure LoadFromFile(const FileName: string)

Visibility: public
Description: LoadFromFile loads the contents of the file with name FileName into the memory stream. The
current contents of the memory stream is replaced by the contents of the file. Memory is allocated as
needed.
The LoadFromFile method simply creates a filestream and then calls the TMemoryStream.LoadFromStream
(379) method.
See also: TMemoryStream.LoadFromStream (379)
4.59.7 TMemoryStream.SetSize
Synopsis: Sets the size for the memory stream.
Declaration: procedure SetSize(NewSize: LongInt); Override
Visibility: public
Description: SetSize sets the size of the memory stream to NewSize. This will set the capacity of the stream
to NewSize and correct the current position in the stream when needed.
See also: TStream.Position (417), TStream.Size (418)
4.59.8 TMemoryStream.Write
Synopsis: Writes data to the stream’s memory.

Visibility: public
Description: Write writes Count bytes from Buffer to the stream’s memory, starting at the current position in
the stream. If more memory is needed than currently allocated, more memory will be allocated. Any
contents in the memory stream at the current position will be overwritten. The function returns the
number of bytes actually written (which should under normal circumstances always equal Count).
This method overrides the TStream.Write (410) method.
Errors: If no more memory could be allocated, then an exception will be raised.
See also: TCustomMemoryStream.Read (342)
4.60 TOwnedCollection
4.60.1 Description
TOwnedCollection automatically maintains owner information, so it can be displayed in an IDE.
Collections that should be displayed in an IDE should descend from TOwnedCollection or must
implement a GetOwner function.
380

381 Create Create a new TOwnerCollection instance.
4.60.3 TOwnedCollection.Create
Synopsis: Create a new TOwnerCollection instance.
Declaration: constructor Create(AOwner: TPersistent;AItemClass: TCollectionItemClass)

Visibility: public
Description: Create creates a new instance of TOwnedCollection and stores the AOwner references. It
will the value returned in the TCollection.Owner (321) property of the collection. The ItemClass
class reference is passed on to the inherited constructor, and will be used to create new instances in
the Insert (323) and Add (321) methods.
See also: TCollection.Create (320), TCollection.Owner (321)
4.61 TOwnerStream
4.61.1 Description
TOwnerStream can be used when creating stream chains such as when using encryption and com-
pression streams. It keeps a reference to the source stream and will automatically free the source
stream when ready (if the SourceOwner (382) property is set to True).
See also: TStream (408), TOwnerStream.Source (382), TOwnerStream.SourceOwner (382)

381 Create Create a new instance of TOwnerStream.
382 Destroy Destroys the TOwnerStream instance and the source stream.

382 Source r Reference to the source stream.
382 SourceOwner rw Indicates whether the ownerstream owns it’s source
4.61.4 TOwnerStream.Create
Synopsis: Create a new instance of TOwnerStream.
Declaration: constructor Create(ASource: TStream)
Visibility: public
Description: Create instantiates a new instance of TOwnerStream and stores the reference to AStream. If
SourceOwner is True, the soure stream will also be freed when the instance is destroyed.
See also: TOwnerStream.Destroy (382), TOwnerStream.Source (382), TOwnerStream.SourceOwner (382)
381
4.61.5 TOwnerStream.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys the TOwnerStream instance and the source stream.
Visibility: public
Description: Destroy frees the source stream if the SourceOwner property is True.
See also: TOwnerStream.Create (381), TOwnerStream.Source (382), TOwnerStream.SourceOwner (382)
4.61.6 TOwnerStream.Source
Synopsis: Reference to the source stream.
Declaration: Property Source : TStream
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Source is the source stream. It should be used by descendent streams to access the source stream
to read from or write to.
Do not free the Source reference directly if SourceOwner is True. In that case the owner stream
instance will free the source stream itself.
See also: TOwnerStream.Create (381)
4.61.7 TOwnerStream.SourceOwner
Synopsis: Indicates whether the ownerstream owns it’s source
Declaration: Property SourceOwner : Boolean
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: SourceOwner indicates whether the TOwnerStream owns it’s Source stream or not. If this
property is True then the Source stream is freed when the TOwnerStream instance is freed.
See also: TOwnerStream.Source (382), TOwnerStream.Destroy (382)
4.62 TParser
4.62.1 Description
This class breaks a stream of text data in tokens. Its primary use is to help reading the contents of
a form file (usually a file with dfm, xfm or lfm extension), and for this reason it isn’t suitable to be
used as a general parser.
The parser is always positioned on a certain token, whose type is stored in the Token (388) property.
Various methods are provided to obtain the token value in the desired format.
To advance to the next token, invoke NextToken (385) method.
See also: TParser.Token (388), TParser.NextToken (385)
382

384 CheckToken Checks whether the token if of the given type.
384 CheckTokenSymbol Checks whether the token equals the given symbol
383 Create Creates a new parser instance.
383 Destroy Destroys the parser instance.
384 Error Raises an EParserError (267) exception with the given message
384 ErrorFmt Raises an EParserError (267) exception and formats the mes-
sage.
384 ErrorStr Raises an EParserError (267) exception with the given message
385 HexToBinary Writes hexadecimal data to a stream.
385 NextToken Reads the next token and returns its type.
385 SourcePos Returns the current position in the stream.
386 TokenComponentIdent Returns the path of a subcomponent starting from the current
token.
386 TokenFloat Returns the current token as a float.
386 TokenInt Returns the current token as an integer.
387 TokenString Returns the current token as a string.
387 TokenSymbolIs Returns True if the token equals the given symbol.
387 TokenWideString Returns the current token as a widestring

388 FloatType r The type of a float token.
388 SourceLine r Current source line number.
388 Token r The type of the current token.
4.62.4 TParser.Create
Synopsis: Creates a new parser instance.
Declaration: constructor Create(Stream: TStream)
Visibility: public
Description: Create creates a new TParser instance, using Stream as the stream to read data from, and
reads the first token from the stream.
Errors: If an error occours while parsing the first token, an EParserError (267) exception is raised.
See also: TParser.NextToken (385), TParser.Token (388)
4.62.5 TParser.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys the parser instance.
Visibility: public
Description: Destroys the parser instance.

Errors: None.
383
4.62.6 TParser.CheckToken
Synopsis: Checks whether the token if of the given type.
Declaration: procedure CheckToken(T: Char)

Visibility: public
Description: Checks whether the token if of the given type.
Errors: If current token isn’t of type T, an EParserError (267) exception is raised.

See also: TParser.Token (388)
4.62.7 TParser.CheckTokenSymbol
Synopsis: Checks whether the token equals the given symbol
Declaration: procedure CheckTokenSymbol(const S: string)
Visibility: public
Description: CheckTokenSymbol performs a case-insensitive comparison of current token value with S.
Current token must be of type toSymbol (235), otherwise an EParserError (267) exception is raised.
Errors: If the comparison fails, or current token isn’t a symbol, an EParserError (267) exception is raised.
See also: TParser.TokenSymbolIs (387), toSymbol (235)
4.62.8 TParser.Error
Synopsis: Raises an EParserError (267) exception with the given message
Declaration: procedure Error(const Ident: string)
Visibility: public
Description: Raises an EParserError (267) exception with the given message
4.62.9 TParser.ErrorFmt
Synopsis: Raises an EParserError (267) exception and formats the message.
Declaration: procedure ErrorFmt(const Ident: string;const Args: Array of const)

Visibility: public
Description: Raises an EParserError (267) exception and formats the message.
4.62.10 TParser.ErrorStr
Synopsis: Raises an EParserError (267) exception with the given message
Declaration: procedure ErrorStr(const Message: string)
Visibility: public
Description: Raises an EParserError (267) exception with the given message
384
4.62.11 TParser.HexToBinary
Synopsis: Writes hexadecimal data to a stream.
Declaration: procedure HexToBinary(Stream: TStream)

Visibility: public
Description: HexToBinary reads a sequence of hexadecimal characters from the input stream and converts
them to a sequence of bytes which is written to Stream. Each byte is represented by two contiguous
hexadecimal characters.
Whitespace is allowed between hexadecimal characters if it doesn’t appear between two characters
that form the same byte.
HexToBinary stops when the first non-hexadecimal and non-whitespace character is found, or the
end of the input stream is reached.
Remark: This method begins reading after the current token: that is, current token, even if it’s a valid hex-
adecimal value, isn’t included.
Errors: If a single hexadecimal character is found, an EParserError (267) exception is raised.
4.62.12 TParser.NextToken
Synopsis: Reads the next token and returns its type.
Declaration: function NextToken : Char

Visibility: public
Description: NextToken parses the next token in the stream and returns its type. The type of the token can also
be retrieved later reading Token (388) property.
If the end of the stream is reached, toEOF (235) is returned.
For details about token types, see TParser.Token (388)
Errors: If an error occours while parsing the token, an EParserError (267) exception is raised.
See also: TParser.Token (388)
4.62.13 TParser.SourcePos
Synopsis: Returns the current position in the stream.
Declaration: function SourcePos : LongInt
Visibility: public
Description:
Remark: This is not the character position relative to the current source line, but the byte offset from the
beginning of the stream.
Errors: None.
See also: TParser.SourceLine (388)
385
4.62.14 TParser.TokenComponentIdent
Synopsis: Returns the path of a subcomponent starting from the current token.
Declaration: function TokenComponentIdent : string
Visibility: public
Description: If current token is toSymbol (235), TokenComponentIdent tries to find subcomponent names
separated by a dot (.). The returned string is the longest subcomponent path found. If there are no
subcomponents, current symbol is returned.
Remark: After this method has been called, subsequent calls to TokenString (387) or TokenWideString (387)
return the same value returned by TokenComponentIdent.
Example
If source stream contains a.b.c and TParser is positioned on the first token (a), this method
returns a.b.c.
Errors: If Token (388) isn’t toSymbol (235), or no valid symbol is found after a dot, an EParserError (267)
See also: TParser.NextToken (385), TParser.Token (388), TParser.TokenString (387), TParser.TokenWideString
(387), toSymbol (235)
4.62.15 TParser.TokenFloat
Synopsis: Returns the current token as a float.
Declaration: function TokenFloat : Extended
Visibility: public
Description: If current token type is toFloat (235), this method returns the token value as a float.
To specify a negative number, no space must exist between unary minus and number.
Floating point numbers can be postfixed with a character that specifies the floating point type. See
FloatType (388) for further information.
Remark: In the input stream the decimal separator, if present, must be a dot (.).
Errors: If Token (388) isn’t toFloat (235), an EParserError (267) exception is raised.
See also: TParser.FloatType (388), TParser.NextToken (385), TParser.Token (388), toFloat (235)
4.62.16 TParser.TokenInt
Synopsis: Returns the current token as an integer.
Declaration: function TokenInt : Int64
Visibility: public
Description: If current token type is toInteger (235), this method returns the token value as an integer.
In the input stream an integer can be an hexadecimal (prefixed by ’$’ character) or decimal number.
Decimal numbers can be prefixed by an unary minus: if this is the case, no space must exist between
minus and number.
Errors: If Token (388) isn’t toInteger (235), an EConvertError (233) exception is raised.
See also: TParser.NextToken (385), TParser.Token (388), toInteger (235)
386
4.62.17 TParser.TokenString
Synopsis: Returns the current token as a string.
Declaration: function TokenString : string

Visibility: public
Description: If current token type is toString (235) or toWString (235), this method returns the contents of the
string. That is, enclosing quotes are removed, embedded quotes are unescaped and control strings
are converted to the appropriate sequence of characters.
If current token type isn’t a string, a string containing the token representation in the input stream is
returned, without any conversion: hexadecimal integers are returned with the leading $, and floating
point suffixes like s, c or d are kept. For tokens whose type isn’t a special type, return value of
TokenString equals Token (388).
Remark: If Token (388) is toWString (235), TokenWideString (387) should be used instead.
Errors: None.
See also: TParser.NextToken (385), TParser.TokenWideString (387), TParser.Token (388), toString (235),
toWString (235)
4.62.18 TParser.TokenWideString
Synopsis: Returns the current token as a widestring
Declaration: function TokenWideString : WideString
Visibility: public
Description: If current token type is toWString (235), this method returns the contents of the string. That is,
enclosing quotes are removed, embedded quotes are unescaped and control strings are converted to
the appropriate sequence of characters.
If current token isn’t a widestring, TokenWideString behaviour is the same as TokenString (387).
Errors: None.
See also: TParser.NextToken (385), TokenString (387), TParser.Token (388), toWString (235)
4.62.19 TParser.TokenSymbolIs
Synopsis: Returns True if the token equals the given symbol.
Declaration: function TokenSymbolIs(const S: string) : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: TokenSymbolIs performs a case-insensitive comparison of current token value with S.
If current token isn’t of type toSymbol (235), or comparison fails, False is returned.
Errors: None.
See also: TParser.CheckTokenSymbol (384), TParser.Token (388)
387
4.62.20 TParser.FloatType
Synopsis: The type of a float token.
Declaration: Property FloatType : Char

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Floating point numbers can be postfixed with a character specifying the type of floating point value.
When specified, this property holds the character postfixed to the number.
It can be one of the following values:
Table 4.23:
s or S Value is a single.
c or C Value is a currency.
d or D Value is a date.
If Token (388) isn’t toFloat (235) or one of the above characters wasn’t specified, FloatType is
the null character (zero).
See also: TParser.NextToken (385), TParser.Token (388), TParser.TokenFloat (386), toFloat (235)
4.62.21 TParser.SourceLine
Synopsis: Current source line number.
Declaration: Property SourceLine : Integer

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Current source line number.
See also: TParser.SourcePos (385)
4.62.22 TParser.Token
Synopsis: The type of the current token.
Declaration: Property Token : Char
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: This property holds the type of the current token. When Token isn’t one of the special token types
(whose value can be retrieved with specific methods) it is the character representing the current token.
Special token types:
388
Table 4.24:
toEOF (235) Value returned by TParser.Token (388) when the end of the input stream was reached.
toSymbol (235) Value returned by TParser.Token (388) when a symbol was found in the input stream.
toString (235) Value returned by TParser.Token (388) when a string was found in the input stream.
toInteger (235) Value returned by TParser.Token (388) when an integer was found in the input stream.
toFloat (235) Value returned by TParser.Token (388) when a floating point value was found in the input stream.
toWString (235) Value returned by TParser.Token (388) when a widestring was found in the input stream.
To advance to the next token, use NextToken (385) method.
See also: TParser.CheckToken (384), TParser.NextToken (385), TParser.TokenComponentIdent (386), TParser.TokenFloat

(386), TParser.TokenInt (386), TParser.TokenString (387), TParser.TokenWideString (387)
4.63 TPersistent
4.63.1 Description
TPersistent is the basic class for the streaming system. Since it is compiled in the {$M+} state,
the compiler generates RTTI (Run-Time Type Information) for it and all classes that descend from
it. This information can be used to stream all properties of classes.
It also introduces functionality to assign the contents of 2 classes to each other.
TPersistent implements the IFPObserved (269) interface for the benefit of descendent classes,
but does not call IFPObserved.FPONotifyObservers (270). Descendents such as TStrings (428) and
TCollection (319) and TCollectionItem (327) do use it.
See also: TComponent (329), IFPObserved (269), TStrings (428), TCollection (319), TCollectionItem (327)

269 IFPObserved Interface implemented by an object that can be observed.

390 Assign Assign the contents of one class to another.
389 Destroy Destroys the TPersistent instance.
390 FPOAttachObserver Add an observer to the list of observers.
391 FPODetachObserver Remove an observer from the list of observers
391 FPONotifyObservers Notify observers of changes.
391 GetNamePath Returns a string that can be used to identify the class instance.
4.63.4 TPersistent.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys the TPersistent instance.
389
Visibility: public
Description: Destroy disposes of the persistent object. This method should never be called directly. Instead the
Free method should be used.
4.63.5 TPersistent.Assign
Synopsis: Assign the contents of one class to another.
Declaration: procedure Assign(Source: TPersistent); Virtual

Visibility: public
Description: Assign copies the contents of Source to Self, if the classes of the destination and source classes
are compatible.
The TPersistent implementation of Assign does nothing but calling the AssignTo (389) method
of source. This means that if the destination class does not know how to assign the contents of the
source class, the source class instance is asked to assign itself to the destination class. This means
that it is necessary to implement only one of the two methods so that two classes can be assiged to
one another.
Remark: In general, a statement of the form
Destination:=Source;
(where Destination and Source are classes) does not achieve the same as a statement of the
form
Destination.Assign(Source);
After the former statement, both Source and Destination will point to the same object. The
latter statemtent will copy the contents of the Source class to the Destination class.
See also: AssignTo (389)
4.63.6 TPersistent.FPOAttachObserver
Synopsis: Add an observer to the list of observers.
Visibility: public
Description: FPOAttachObserver is part of the implementation of the IFPObserved (269) interface in TPersistent.
It adds a new observer to the list of observers. Calling this multiple times will add the observed object
multiple times to the list.
Errors: An EObserver exception may be raised if AObject does not implement the IFPObserver (271)
interface.
See also: IFPObserver (271), IFPObserved.FPOAttachObserver (270), IFPObserved (269)
390
4.63.7 TPersistent.FPODetachObserver
Synopsis: Remove an observer from the list of observers

Visibility: public
Description: FPODetachObserver is part of the implementation of the IFPObserved (269) interface in TPersistent.
It removes the first found instance of the observer from the list of observers.
See also: IFPObserved (269), IFPObserved.FPODetachObserver (270), IFPObserver (271)
4.63.8 TPersistent.FPONotifyObservers
Synopsis: Notify observers of changes.
Data: Pointer)
Visibility: public
Description: FPONotifyObservers can be called to notify observers of changes in the object. This method
simply passes on the parameters that it receives to all attached IFPObserver (271) interfaces.
TPersistent does not call FPONotifyObservers. It is implemented for the benefit of de-
scendant classes.
See also: IFPObserved (269), IFPObserved.FPONotifyObservers (270), IFPObserver (271)
4.63.9 TPersistent.GetNamePath
Synopsis: Returns a string that can be used to identify the class instance.
Declaration: function GetNamePath : string; Virtual

Visibility: public
Description: GetNamePath returns a string that can be used to identify the class instance. This can be used to
display a name for this instance in a Object designer.
GetNamePath constructs a name by recursively prepending the Classname of the Owner in-
stance to the Classname of this instance, separated by a dot.
See also: TPersistent.GetOwner (389)
4.64 TProxyStream
4.64.1 Description
TProxyStream is a proxy class for the #rtl.types.IStream (1665) interface. It implements all
stream methods by relaying them to the IStream interface.
See also: #rtl.types.IStream (1665), TStreamAdapter (418)
391

392 Check Check errors
392 Create Create a new instance of the TProxyStream class.
392 Read
392 Seek
392 Write
4.64.3 TProxyStream.Create
Synopsis: Create a new instance of the TProxyStream class.
Declaration: constructor Create(const Stream: IStream)
Visibility: public
Description: Create initializes a new instance of the TProxyStream class. It saves var stream for use in the
other methods.
See also: #rtl.types.IStream (1665)
4.64.4 TProxyStream.Read
Visibility: public
4.64.5 TProxyStream.Write
Visibility: public
4.64.6 TProxyStream.Seek
; Override
Visibility: public
4.64.7 TProxyStream.Check
Synopsis: Check errors
Declaration: procedure Check(err: Integer); Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: Check will check the result of the IStream interface. This method must be overridden by descen-
dent classes to return interface-specific errors.
See also: #rtl.types.IStream (1665)
392
4.65 TReader
4.65.1 Description
The TReader class is a reader class that implements generic component streaming capabilities,
independent of the format of the data in the stream. It uses a driver class TAbstractObjectReader
(281) to do the actual reading of data. The interface of the TReader class should be identical to the
interface in Delphi.
Note that the TReader design is such that it can read a single component from a stream. It will read
all children of this component, but it is not designed to read multiple components in succession from
one stream.
It should never be necessary to create an instance of this class directly. Instead, the TStream.ReadComponent
See also: TFiler (347), TWriter (459), TAbstractObjectReader (281)
393

395 BeginReferences Initializes the component referencing mechanism.
396 CheckValue Raises an exception if the next value in the stream is not of type
Value
402 CopyValue Copy a value to a writer.
395 Create Creates a new reader class
396 DefineBinaryProperty Reads a user-defined binary property from the stream.
396 DefineProperty Reads a user-defined property from the stream.
395 Destroy Destroys a reader class.
396 EndOfList Returns true if the stream contains an end-of-list marker.
396 EndReferences Finalizes the component referencing mechanism.
397 FixupReferences Tries to resolve all unresolved component references.
397 NextValue Returns the type of the next value.
397 ReadBoolean Reads a boolean from the stream.
397 ReadChar Reads a character from the stream.
398 ReadCollection Reads a collection from the stream.
398 ReadComponent Starts reading a component from the stream.
398 ReadComponents Starts reading child components from the stream.
399 ReadDate Reads a date from the stream
399 ReadFloat Reads a float from the stream.
399 ReadIdent Reads an identifier from the stream.
400 ReadInt64 Reads a 64-bit integer from the stream.
400 ReadInteger Reads an integer from the stream
400 ReadListBegin Checks for the beginning of a list.
400 ReadListEnd Checks for the end of a list.
401 ReadRootComponent Starts reading a root component.
400 ReadSet Read a set value from the stream
401 ReadSignature
399 ReadSingle Reads a single-type real from the stream.
401 ReadString Reads a string from the stream.
398 ReadUnicodeChar Read unicode character
402 ReadUnicodeString Read a UnicodeString value from the stream
402 ReadValue Reads the next value type from the stream.
401 ReadVariant Read a variant from the stream
398 ReadWideChar Read widechar from the stream
401 ReadWideString Read a WideString value from the stream.
394

402 Driver r The driver in use for streaming the data.
404 OnAncestorNotFound rw Handler called when the ancestor component cannot
be found.
404 OnCreateComponent rw Handler called when a component needs to be cre-
ated.
403 OnError rw Handler called when an error occurs.
405 OnFindComponentClass rw Handler called when a component class reference
needs to be found.
403 OnFindMethod rw Handler to find or change a method address.
403 OnPropertyNotFound rw Handler for treating missing properties.
405 OnReadStringProperty rw Handler for translating strings when read from the
stream.
404 OnReferenceName rw Handler called when another component is refer-
enced.
404 OnSetMethodProperty rw Handler for setting method properties.
404 OnSetName rw Handler called when setting a component name.
402 Owner rw Owner of the component being read
403 Parent rw Parent of the component being read.
4.65.4 TReader.Create
Synopsis: Creates a new reader class
Visibility: public
Description: Creates a new reader class
4.65.5 TReader.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys a reader class.
Visibility: public
Description: Destroys a reader class.
4.65.6 TReader.BeginReferences
Synopsis: Initializes the component referencing mechanism.
Declaration: procedure BeginReferences
Visibility: public
Description: When streaming components, the streaming mechanism keeps a list of existing components that can
be referenced to. This method initializes up that system.
395
4.65.7 TReader.CheckValue
Synopsis: Raises an exception if the next value in the stream is not of type Value
Declaration: procedure CheckValue(Value: TValueType)

Visibility: public
Description: Raises an exception if the next value in the stream is not of type Value
4.65.8 TReader.DefineProperty
Synopsis: Reads a user-defined property from the stream.
Declaration: procedure DefineProperty(const Name: string;AReadData: TReaderProc;
WriteData: TWriterProc;HasData: Boolean)
; Override
Visibility: public
Description: Reads a user-defined property from the stream.
4.65.9 TReader.DefineBinaryProperty
Synopsis: Reads a user-defined binary property from the stream.
Declaration: procedure DefineBinaryProperty(const Name: string;
AReadData: TStreamProc;
WriteData: TStreamProc;HasData: Boolean)
; Override
Visibility: public
Description: Reads a user-defined binary property from the stream.
4.65.10 TReader.EndOfList
Synopsis: Returns true if the stream contains an end-of-list marker.
Declaration: function EndOfList : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: Returns true if the stream contains an end-of-list marker.
4.65.11 TReader.EndReferences
Synopsis: Finalizes the component referencing mechanism.
Declaration: procedure EndReferences
Visibility: public
Description: When streaming components, the streaming mechanism keeps a list of existing components that can
be referenced to. This method cleans up that system.
396
4.65.12 TReader.FixupReferences
Synopsis: Tries to resolve all unresolved component references.
Declaration: procedure FixupReferences

Visibility: public
Description: Tries to resolve all unresolved component references.
4.65.13 TReader.NextValue
Synopsis: Returns the type of the next value.
Declaration: function NextValue : TValueType
Visibility: public
Description: Returns the type of the next value.
4.65.14 TReader.Read
Declaration: procedure Read(var Buf;Count: LongInt); Virtual
Visibility: public
See also: TAbstractObjectReader.Read (283), TBinaryObjectReader.Read (303)
4.65.15 TReader.ReadBoolean
Synopsis: Reads a boolean from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadBoolean : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: Reads a boolean from the stream.
4.65.16 TReader.ReadChar
Synopsis: Reads a character from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadChar : Char
Visibility: public
Description: Reads a character from the stream.
397
4.65.17 TReader.ReadWideChar
Synopsis: Read widechar from the stream
Declaration: function ReadWideChar : WideChar

Visibility: public
Description: TReader.ReadWideChar reads a widechar from the stream. This actually reads a widestring
and returns the first character.
See also: TReader.ReadWideString (401), TWriter.WriteWideChar (462)
4.65.18 TReader.ReadUnicodeChar
Synopsis: Read unicode character
Declaration: function ReadUnicodeChar : UnicodeChar
Visibility: public
Description: ReadUnicodeChar reads a single unicode character from the stream. It does this by reading a
UnicodeString string from the stream and returning the first character.
Errors: If the string has a length different from 1, an EReadError exception will occur.
See also: TReader.ReadUnicodeString (402)
4.65.19 TReader.ReadCollection
Synopsis: Reads a collection from the stream.
Declaration: procedure ReadCollection(Collection: TCollection)
Visibility: public
Description: Reads a collection from the stream.
4.65.20 TReader.ReadComponent
Synopsis: Starts reading a component from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadComponent(Component: TComponent) : TComponent
Visibility: public
Description: Starts reading a component from the stream.
4.65.21 TReader.ReadComponents
Synopsis: Starts reading child components from the stream.
Declaration: procedure ReadComponents(AOwner: TComponent;AParent: TComponent;

Proc: TReadComponentsProc)
Visibility: public
Description: Starts reading child components from the stream.
398
4.65.22 TReader.ReadFloat
Synopsis: Reads a float from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadFloat : Extended

Visibility: public
Description: Reads a float from the stream.
4.65.23 TReader.ReadSingle
Synopsis: Reads a single-type real from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadSingle : Single
Visibility: public
Description: Reads a single-type real from the stream.
4.65.24 TReader.ReadDate
Synopsis: Reads a date from the stream
Declaration: function ReadDate : TDateTime
Visibility: public
Description: Reads a date from the stream
4.65.25 TReader.ReadCurrency
Declaration: function ReadCurrency : Currency
Visibility: public
Description: ReadCurrency reads a currency typed value from the stream and returns the result. This method
does nothing except call the driver method of the driver being used.
See also: TWriter.WriteCurrency (463)
4.65.26 TReader.ReadIdent
Synopsis: Reads an identifier from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadIdent : string
Visibility: public
Description: Reads an identifier from the stream.
399
4.65.27 TReader.ReadInteger
Synopsis: Reads an integer from the stream
Declaration: function ReadInteger : LongInt

Visibility: public
Description: Reads an integer from the stream
4.65.28 TReader.ReadInt64
Synopsis: Reads a 64-bit integer from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadInt64 : Int64
Visibility: public
Description: Reads a 64-bit integer from the stream.
4.65.29 TReader.ReadSet
Synopsis: Read a set value from the stream
Declaration: function ReadSet(EnumType: Pointer) : Integer
Visibility: public
Description: ReadSet reads a set of elements with type EnumType and returns them as an integer where each
element is encoded in a bit of the integer. Thus, at most an enumerated type with 32 elements can be
read with this function.
Errors: No checking is performed on the validity of EnumType. It is assumed to be a valid PTypeInfo
pointer.
See also: TWriter.WriteSet (463)
4.65.30 TReader.ReadListBegin
Synopsis: Checks for the beginning of a list.
Declaration: procedure ReadListBegin
Visibility: public
Description: Checks for the beginning of a list.
4.65.31 TReader.ReadListEnd
Synopsis: Checks for the end of a list.
Declaration: procedure ReadListEnd

Visibility: public
Description: Checks for the end of a list.
400
4.65.32 TReader.ReadRootComponent
Synopsis: Starts reading a root component.
Declaration: function ReadRootComponent(ARoot: TComponent) : TComponent

Visibility: public
Description: Starts reading a root component.
4.65.33 TReader.ReadVariant
Synopsis: Read a variant from the stream
Declaration: function ReadVariant : Variant
Visibility: public
Description: ReadVariant reads the next value from the stream and returns it as a variant. No variant array
can be read from the stream, only single values.
Errors: If no variant manager is installed, the function will raise an EReadError exception. If the next
value is not a simple value, again an EReadError exception is raised. exception is
See also: TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteVariant (312)
4.65.34 TReader.ReadSignature
Declaration: procedure ReadSignature
Visibility: public
4.65.35 TReader.ReadString
Synopsis: Reads a string from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadString : string

Visibility: public
Description: Reads a string from the stream.
4.65.36 TReader.ReadWideString
Synopsis: Read a WideString value from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadWideString : WideString
Visibility: public
Description: ReadWidestring reads a widestring typed value from the stream and returns the result. This
method does nothing except call the driver method of the driver being used.
See also: TWriter.WriteWideString (464)
401
4.65.37 TReader.ReadUnicodeString
Synopsis: Read a UnicodeString value from the stream
Declaration: function ReadUnicodeString : UnicodeString

Visibility: public
Description: ReadUnicodeString reads a UnicodeString string from the stream. The stream can contain
a string from any type, it will be converted to UniCodeString.
See also: TAbstractObjectReader.ReadUnicodeString (288), TWriter.WriteUnicodeString (464)
4.65.38 TReader.ReadValue
Synopsis: Reads the next value type from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadValue : TValueType
Visibility: public
Description: Reads the next value type from the stream.
4.65.39 TReader.CopyValue
Synopsis: Copy a value to a writer.
Declaration: procedure CopyValue(Writer: TWriter)

Visibility: public
Description: CopyValue reads the next value from the reader stream, and writes it to the passed Writer.
4.65.40 TReader.Driver
Synopsis: The driver in use for streaming the data.
Declaration: Property Driver : TAbstractObjectReader
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: The driver in use for streaming the data.
4.65.41 TReader.Owner
Synopsis: Owner of the component being read
Declaration: Property Owner : TComponent
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Owner of the component being read
402
4.65.42 TReader.Parent
Synopsis: Parent of the component being read.
Declaration: Property Parent : TComponent

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Parent of the component being read.
4.65.43 TReader.OnError
Synopsis: Handler called when an error occurs.
Declaration: Property OnError : TReaderError
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Handler called when an error occurs.
4.65.44 TReader.OnPropertyNotFound
Synopsis: Handler for treating missing properties.
Declaration: Property OnPropertyNotFound : TPropertyNotFoundEvent

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: OnPropertyNotFound can be used to take appropriate action when a property is read from a
stream and no such property is found in the RTTI information of the Instance that is being read from
the stream. It can be set at runtime, or at designtime by an IDE.
For more information about the meaning of the various arguments to the event handler, see TProper-
tyNotFoundEvent (244).
See also: TPropertyNotFoundEvent (244), TReader.OnSetMethodProperty (404), TReader.OnReadStringProperty

(405)
4.65.45 TReader.OnFindMethod
Synopsis: Handler to find or change a method address.
Declaration: Property OnFindMethod : TFindMethodEvent
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Handler to find or change a method address.
403
4.65.46 TReader.OnSetMethodProperty
Synopsis: Handler for setting method properties.
Declaration: Property OnSetMethodProperty : TSetMethodPropertyEvent
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: OnSetMethodProperty can be set to handle the setting of method properties. This handler can
be used by an IDE to prevent methods from actually being assigned when an object is being streamed
in the designer.
See also: TReader.OnReadStringProperty (405), TReader.OnPropertyNotFound (403)
4.65.47 TReader.OnSetName
Synopsis: Handler called when setting a component name.
Declaration: Property OnSetName : TSetNameEvent
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Handler called when setting a component name.
4.65.48 TReader.OnReferenceName
Synopsis: Handler called when another component is referenced.
Declaration: Property OnReferenceName : TReferenceNameEvent
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Handler called when another component is referenced.
4.65.49 TReader.OnAncestorNotFound
Synopsis: Handler called when the ancestor component cannot be found.
Declaration: Property OnAncestorNotFound : TAncestorNotFoundEvent
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Handler called when the ancestor component cannot be found.
4.65.50 TReader.OnCreateComponent
Synopsis: Handler called when a component needs to be created.
Declaration: Property OnCreateComponent : TCreateComponentEvent
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Handler called when a component needs to be created.
404
4.65.51 TReader.OnFindComponentClass
Synopsis: Handler called when a component class reference needs to be found.
Declaration: Property OnFindComponentClass : TFindComponentClassEvent

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Handler called when a component class reference needs to be found.
4.65.52 TReader.OnReadStringProperty
Synopsis: Handler for translating strings when read from the stream.
Declaration: Property OnReadStringProperty : TReadWriteStringPropertyEvent
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: OnReadStringProperty is called whenever a string property is read from the stream. It can be
used e.g. by a translation mechanism to translate the strings on the fly, when a form is loaded. See
TReadWriteStringPropertyEvent (245) for a description of the various parameters.
See also: TReader.OnPropertyNotFound (403), TReader.OnSetMethodProperty (404), TReadWriteStringProp-

ertyEvent (245)
4.66 TRecall
4.66.1 Description
TRecall is a helper class used to copy published properties of a class (the reference object) in
another class (the storage object). The reference object and storage object must be assignable to each
other.
The TRecall can be used to store the state of a persistent class, and restore it at a later time.
When a TRecall object is created, it gets passed a reference instance and a storage instance. It
immediately stores the properties of the reference object in the storage object.
The Store (406) method can be called throughout the lifetime of the reference object to update the
stored properties.
When the TRecall instance is destroyed then the properties are copied from the storage object to
the reference object. The storage object is freed automatically.
If the properties should not be copied back from the storage to the reference object, the Forget (407)
can be called.
See also: TRecall.Create (406), TRecall.Destroy (406), TRecall.Forget (407), TRecall.Store (406), TPersis-
tent.Assign (390)
405

406 Create Creates a new instance of TRecall.
406 Destroy Copies the stored properties to the reference object and destroys the TRecall
instance.
407 Forget Clear the reference property.
406 Store Assigns the reference instance to the storage instance.

407 Reference r The reference object.
4.66.4 TRecall.Create
Synopsis: Creates a new instance of TRecall.
Declaration: constructor Create(AStorage: TPersistent;AReference: TPersistent)
Visibility: public
Description: Create creates a new instance of TRecall and initializes the Reference and Storage instances. It
calls Store (406) to assign the reference object properties to the storage instance.
See also: TRecall.Store (406), TRecall.Destroy (406)
4.66.5 TRecall.Destroy
Synopsis: Copies the stored properties to the reference object and destroys the TRecall instance.
Visibility: public
Description: Destroy assigns the storage instance to the reference instance, if the latter is still valid. After this,
it frees the storage and calls the inherited destroy.
Errors: Destroy does not check whether the reference (407) instance is still valid. If the reference pointer
was invalidated, call TRecall.Forget (407) to clear the reference instance.
See also: TRecall.Store (406), TRecall.Forget (407)
4.66.6 TRecall.Store
Synopsis: Assigns the reference instance to the storage instance.
Declaration: procedure Store
Visibility: public
Description: Store assigns the reference instance to the storage instance. This will only work if the two classes
can be assigned to each other.
This method can be used to refresh the storage.
Errors: Store does not check whether the reference (407) instance is still valid. If the reference pointer
was invalidated, call TRecall.Forget (407) to clear the reference instance.
406
4.66.7 TRecall.Forget
Synopsis: Clear the reference property.
Declaration: procedure Forget

Visibility: public
Description: Forget sets the Reference (407) property to Nil. When the TRecall instance is destroyed, the
reference instance will not be restored.
Note that after a call to Forget, a call to Store (406) has no effect.
Errors: None.
See also: TRecall.Reference (407), TRecall.Store (406), TRecall.Destroy (406)
4.66.8 TRecall.Reference
Synopsis: The reference object.
Declaration: Property Reference : TPersistent
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Reference is the instance of the reference object. Do not free the reference directly. Call Forget
(407) to clear the reference and then free the reference object.
See also: TRecall.Forget (407)
4.67 TResourceStream
4.67.1 Description
Stream that reads its data from a resource object.

407 Create Creates a new instance of a resource stream.
408 CreateFromID Creates a new instance of a resource stream with a resource
408 Destroy Destroys the instance of the resource stream.
4.67.3 TResourceStream.Create
Synopsis: Creates a new instance of a resource stream.
Declaration: constructor Create(Instance: TFPResourceHMODULE;const ResName: string;

ResType: PChar)
Visibility: public
Description: Creates a new instance of a resource stream.
407
4.67.4 TResourceStream.CreateFromID
Synopsis: Creates a new instance of a resource stream with a resource
Declaration: constructor CreateFromID(Instance: TFPResourceHMODULE;ResID: Integer;

ResType: PChar)
Visibility: public
Description: The resource is loaded from the loaded module (identified by the handle Instance), identifier
ResID and type ResType.
4.67.5 TResourceStream.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys the instance of the resource stream.
Visibility: public
Description: Destroys the instance of the resource stream.
4.68 TStream
4.68.1 Description
TStream is the base class for all streaming classes. It defines methods for reading (409), writing
(410) from and to streams, as well as functions to determine the size of the stream as well as the
current position of the stream.
Descendent classes such as TMemoryStream (378) or TFileStream (349) then override these methods
to write streams to memory or file.
See also: TMemoryStream (378), TFileStream (349), TStringStream (445)
408

412 CopyFrom Copy data from one stream to another
414 FixupResourceHeader Not implemented in FPC
409 Read Reads data from the stream to a buffer and returns the number of
bytes read.
416 ReadAnsiString Read an ansistring from the stream and return its value.
411 ReadBuffer Reads data from the stream to a buffer
414 ReadByte Read a byte from the stream and return its value.
412 ReadComponent Reads component data from a stream
412 ReadComponentRes Reads component data and resource header from a stream
415 ReadDWord Read a DWord from the stream and return its value.
415 ReadQWord Read a QWord value from the stream and return its value
414 ReadResHeader Read a resource header from the stream.
415 ReadWord Read a word from the stream and return its value.
410 Seek Sets the current position in the stream
410 Write Writes data from a buffer to the stream and returns the number
of bytes written.
417 WriteAnsiString Write an ansistring to the stream.
411 WriteBuffer Writes data from a buffer to the stream
416 WriteByte Write a byte to the stream.
413 WriteComponent Write component data to the stream
413 WriteComponentRes Write resource header and component data to a stream
413 WriteDescendent Write component data to a stream, relative to an ancestor
413 WriteDescendentRes Write resource header and component data to a stream, relative
to an ancestor
416 WriteDWord Write a DWord to the stream.
417 WriteQWord Write a QWord value to the stream
414 WriteResourceHeader Write resource header to the stream
416 WriteWord Write a word to the stream.

417 Position rw The current position in the stream.
418 Size rw The current size of the stream.
4.68.4 TStream.Read
Synopsis: Reads data from the stream to a buffer and returns the number of bytes read.
Declaration: function Read(var Buffer;Count: LongInt) : LongInt; Virtual

Visibility: public
Description: Read attempts to read Count from the stream to Buffer and returns the number of bytes actually
read.
This method should be used when the number of bytes is not determined. If a specific number of
bytes is expected, use TSTream.ReadBuffer (411) instead.
As implemented in TStream, Read does nothing but raises an EStreamError (267) exception to
indicate that reading is not supported. Descendent classes that allow reading must override this
method to do the actual reading.
409
Descendent classes should (if they don’t explicitly raise an exception) return a positive value (>=0),
where zero indicates an error.
Errors: In case a descendent class does not allow reading from the stream, an exception is raised.
See also: TStream.Write (410), TStream.ReadBuffer (411)
4.68.5 TStream.Write
Synopsis: Writes data from a buffer to the stream and returns the number of bytes written.
Declaration: function Write(const Buffer;Count: LongInt) : LongInt; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: Write attempts to write Count bytes from Buffer to the stream. It returns the actual number of
bytes written to the stream.
This method should be used when the number of bytes that should be written is not determined. If a
specific number of bytes should be written, use TSTream.WriteBuffer (411) instead.
As implemented in TStream, Write does nothing but raises EStreamError (267) exception to in-
dicate that writing is not supported. Descendent classes that allow writing must override this method
to do the actual writing.
Descendent classes should (if they don’t explicitly raise an exception) return a positive value (>=0),
where zero indicates an error.
Errors: In case a descendent class does not allow writing to the stream, an exception is raised.
See also: TStream.Read (409), TStream.WriteBuffer (411)
4.68.6 TStream.Seek
Synopsis: Sets the current position in the stream
Declaration: function Seek(Offset: LongInt;Origin: Word) : LongInt; Virtual
; Overload
function Seek(const Offset: Int64;Origin: TSeekOrigin) : Int64; Virtual
; Overload
Visibility: public
Description: Seek sets the position of the stream to Offset bytes from Origin. There is a 32-bit variant
of this function and a 64-bit variant. The difference can be made by choosing the correct Offset
parameter: the integer-typed parameter selects the 32-bit variant, the parameter of type TSeekOrigin
(245) selects the 64-bit variant of the function.
The Origin parameter for the 32-bit version can have one of the following values:
Table 4.25:
Constant Meaning
soFromBeginning Set the position relative to the start of the stream.
soFromCurrent Set the position relative to the current position in the stream.
soFromEnd Set the position relative to the end of the stream.
These values are defined in the SysUtils (233) unit.
410
The Origin parameter for the 64-bit version has one of the following values:
Table 4.26:
Value Meaning
soBeginning Offset is interpreted relative to the start of the stream.
soCurrent Offset is interpreted relative to the current position in the stream.
soEnd Offset is interpreted relative to the end of the stream.
Offset should be negative when the origin is SoFromEnd (soEnd). It should be positive for
soFromBeginning and can have both signs for soFromCurrent
This is an abstract method, which must be overridden by descendent classes. They may choose not
to implement this method for all values of Origin and Offset.
Remark: Internally, all calls are re-routed to the 64-bit version of the call. When creating a descendent of
TStream, the 64-bit version of the call should be overridden.
Errors: An exception may be raised if this method is called with an invalid pair of Offset,Origin values.
e.g. a negative offset for soFromBeginning (or soBeginning).
See also: TStream.Position (417)
4.68.7 TStream.ReadBuffer
Synopsis: Reads data from the stream to a buffer
Declaration: procedure ReadBuffer(var Buffer;Count: LongInt)
Visibility: public
Description: ReadBuffer reads Count bytes of the stream into Buffer. If the stream does not contain
Count bytes, then an exception is raised.
ReadBuffer should be used to read in a fixed number of bytes, such as when reading structures or
the content of variables. If the number of bytes is not determined, use TStream.Read (409) instead.
ReadBuffer uses Read internally to do the actual reading.
Errors: If the stream does not allow to read Count bytes, then an exception is raised.
See also: TStream.Read (409), TStream.WriteBuffer (411)
4.68.8 TStream.WriteBuffer
Synopsis: Writes data from a buffer to the stream
Declaration: procedure WriteBuffer(const Buffer;Count: LongInt)
Visibility: public
Description: WriteBuffer writes Count bytes to the stream from Buffer. If the stream does not allow
Count bytes to be written, then an exception is raised.
WriteBuffer should be used to write a fixed number of bytes, such as when writing structures or
the content of variables. If the number of bytes is not determined, use TStream.Write (410) instead.
WriteBuffer uses Write internally to do the actual writing.
Errors: If the stream does not allow to write Count bytes, then an exception is raised.
See also: TStream.Write (410), TStream.ReadBuffer (411)
411
4.68.9 TStream.CopyFrom
Synopsis: Copy data from one stream to another
Declaration: function CopyFrom(Source: TStream;Count: Int64) : Int64

Visibility: public
Description: CopyFrom reads Count bytes from Source and writes them to the current stream. This updates
the current position in the stream. After the action is completed, the number of bytes copied is
returned. If Count is zero, then the whole contents of the Source stream is copied. It is positioned
on the first byte of data, and Size bytes are copied. Note that this cannot be used with streams that
do not allow seeking or do not allow determining the size of the stream.
This can be used to quickly copy data from one stream to another or to copy the whole contents of
the stream.
See also: TStream.Read (409), TStream.Write (410)
4.68.10 TStream.ReadComponent
Synopsis: Reads component data from a stream
Declaration: function ReadComponent(Instance: TComponent) : TComponent
Visibility: public
Description: ReadComponent reads a component state from the stream and transfers this state to Instance.
If Instance is nil, then it is created first based on the type stored in the stream. ReadComponent
returns the component as it is read from the stream.
ReadComponent simply creates a TReader (393) object and calls its ReadRootComponent (401)
method.
Errors: If an error occurs during the reading of the component, an EFilerError (265) exception is raised.
See also: TStream.WriteComponent (413), TStream.ReadComponentRes (412), TReader.ReadRootComponent
(401)
4.68.11 TStream.ReadComponentRes
Synopsis: Reads component data and resource header from a stream
Declaration: function ReadComponentRes(Instance: TComponent) : TComponent
Visibility: public
Description: ReadComponentRes reads a resource header from the stream, and then calls ReadComponent
(412) to read the component state from the stream into Instance.
This method is usually called by the global streaming method when instantiating forms and datamod-
ules as created by an IDE. It should be used mainly on Windows, to store components in Windows
resources.
Errors: If an error occurs during the reading of the component, an EFilerError (265) exception is raised.
See also: TStream.ReadComponent (412), TStream.WriteComponentRes (413)
412
4.68.12 TStream.WriteComponent
Synopsis: Write component data to the stream
Declaration: procedure WriteComponent(Instance: TComponent)
Visibility: public
Description: WriteComponent writes the published properties of Instance to the stream, so they can later
be read with TStream.ReadComponent (412). This method is intended to be used by an IDE, to
preserve the state of a form or datamodule as designed in the IDE.
WriteComponent simply calls WriteDescendent (413) with Nil ancestor.
See also: TStream.ReadComponent (412), TStream.WriteComponentRes (413)
4.68.13 TStream.WriteComponentRes
Synopsis: Write resource header and component data to a stream
Declaration: procedure WriteComponentRes(const ResName: string;Instance: TComponent)
Visibility: public
Description: WriteComponentRes writes a ResName resource header to the stream and then calls Write-
Component (413) to write the published properties of Instance to the stream.
This method is intened for use by an IDE that can use it to store forms or datamodules as designed
in a Windows resource stream.
See also: TStream.WriteComponent (413), TStream.ReadComponentRes (412)
4.68.14 TStream.WriteDescendent
Synopsis: Write component data to a stream, relative to an ancestor
Declaration: procedure WriteDescendent(Instance: TComponent;Ancestor: TComponent)
Visibility: public
Description: WriteDescendent writes the state of Instance to the stream where it differs from Ancestor,
i.e. only the changed properties are written to the stream.
WriteDescendent creates a TWriter (459) object and calls its WriteDescendent (462) object.
The writer is passed a binary driver object (307) by default.
4.68.15 TStream.WriteDescendentRes
Synopsis: Write resource header and component data to a stream, relative to an ancestor
Declaration: procedure WriteDescendentRes(const ResName: string;Instance: TComponent;
Ancestor: TComponent)
Visibility: public
Description: WriteDescendentRes writes a ResName resource header, and then calls WriteDescendent
(413) to write the state of Instance to the stream where it differs from Ancestor, i.e. only
the changed properties are written to the stream.
This method is intened for use by an IDE that can use it to store forms or datamodules as designed
in a Windows resource stream.
413
4.68.16 TStream.WriteResourceHeader
Synopsis: Write resource header to the stream
Declaration: procedure WriteResourceHeader(const ResName: string;
var FixupInfo: LongInt)
Visibility: public
Description: WriteResourceHeader writes a resource-file header for a resource called ResName. It returns
in FixupInfo the argument that should be passed on to TStream.FixupResourceHeader (414).
WriteResourceHeader should not be used directly. It is called by the TStream.WriteComponentRes
(413) and TStream.WriteDescendentRes (413) methods.
See also: TStream.FixupResourceHeader (414), TStream.WriteComponentRes (413), TStream.WriteDescendentRes
(413)
4.68.17 TStream.FixupResourceHeader
Synopsis: Not implemented in FPC
Declaration: procedure FixupResourceHeader(FixupInfo: LongInt)
Visibility: public
Description: FixupResourceHeader is used to write the size of the resource after a component was written
to stream. The size is determined from the current position, and it is written at position FixupInfo.
After that the current position is restored.
FixupResourceHeader should never be called directly; it is handled by the streaming system.
See also: TStream.WriteResourceHeader (414), TStream.WriteComponentRes (413), TStream.WriteDescendentRes
(413)
4.68.18 TStream.ReadResHeader
Synopsis: Read a resource header from the stream.
Declaration: procedure ReadResHeader
Visibility: public
Description: ReadResourceHeader reads a reasource file header from the stream. It positions the stream just
beyond the header.
ReadResourceHeader should not be called directly, it is called by the streaming system when
needed.
Errors: If the resource header is invalid an EInvalidImage (266) exception is raised.
See also: TStream.ReadComponentRes (412), EInvalidImage (266)
4.68.19 TStream.ReadByte
Synopsis: Read a byte from the stream and return its value.
Declaration: function ReadByte : Byte
Visibility: public
414
Description: ReadByte reads one byte from the stream and returns its value.
Errors: If the byte cannot be read, a EStreamError (267) exception will be raised. This is a utility function
which symply calls the Read (409) function.
See also: TStream.Read (409), TStream.WriteByte (416), TStream.ReadWord (415), TStream.ReadDWord
(415), TStream.ReadAnsiString (416)
4.68.20 TStream.ReadWord
Synopsis: Read a word from the stream and return its value.
Declaration: function ReadWord : Word
Visibility: public
Description: ReadWord reads one Word (i.e. 2 bytes) from the stream and returns its value. This is a utility
function which symply calls the Read (409) function.
Errors: If the word cannot be read, a EStreamError (267) exception will be raised.
See also: TStream.Read (409), TStream.WriteWord (416), TStream.ReadByte (414), TStream.ReadDWord
4.68.21 TStream.ReadDWord
Synopsis: Read a DWord from the stream and return its value.
Declaration: function ReadDWord : Cardinal
Visibility: public
Description: ReadDWord reads one DWord (i.e. 4 bytes) from the stream and returns its value. This is a utility
function which simply calls the Read (409) function.
Errors: If the DWord cannot be read, a EStreamError (267) exception will be raised.
See also: TStream.Read (409), TStream.WriteDWord (416), TStream.ReadByte (414), TStream.ReadWord

4.68.22 TStream.ReadQWord
Synopsis: Read a QWord value from the stream and return its value
Declaration: function ReadQWord : QWord
Visibility: public
Description: ReadQWord reads a QWord value (8 bytes) from the stream and returns it’s value.
Errors: If not enough bytes are available on the stream, an EStreamError (267) exception will be raised.
See also: TStream.Read (409), TStream.WriteByte (416), TStream.ReadWord (415), TStream.ReadDWord

415
4.68.23 TStream.ReadAnsiString
Synopsis: Read an ansistring from the stream and return its value.
Declaration: function ReadAnsiString : string

Visibility: public
Description: ReadAnsiString reads an ansistring from the stream and returns its value. This is a utility func-
tion which simply calls the read function several times. The Ansistring should be stored as 4 bytes
(a DWord) representing the length of the string, and then the string value itself. The WriteAnsiString
(417) function writes an ansistring in such a format.
Errors: If the AnsiString cannot be read, a EStreamError (267) exception will be raised.
See also: TStream.Read (409), TStream.WriteAnsiString (417), TStream.ReadByte (414), TStream.ReadWord
(415), TStream.ReadDWord (415)
4.68.24 TStream.WriteByte
Synopsis: Write a byte to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteByte(b: Byte)
Visibility: public
Description: WriteByte writes the byte B to the stream. This is a utility function which simply calls the Write
(410) function. The byte can be read from the stream using the ReadByte (414) function.
Errors: If an error occurs when attempting to write, an EStreamError (267) exception will be raised.
See also: TStream.Write (410), TStream.ReadByte (414), TStream.WriteWord (416), TStream.WriteDWord
(416), TStream.WriteAnsiString (417)
4.68.25 TStream.WriteWord
Synopsis: Write a word to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteWord(w: Word)
Visibility: public
Description: WriteWord writes the word W (i.e. 2 bytes) to the stream. This is a utility function which simply
calls the Write (410) function. The word can be read from the stream using the ReadWord (415)
function.
See also: TStream.Write (410), TStream.ReadWord (415), TStream.WriteByte (416), TStream.WriteDWord

4.68.26 TStream.WriteDWord
Synopsis: Write a DWord to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteDWord(d: Cardinal)

Visibility: public
416
Description: WriteDWord writes the DWord D (i.e. 4 bytes) to the stream. This is a utility function which simply
calls the Write (410) function. The DWord can be read from the stream using the ReadDWord (415)
function.
See also: TStream.Write (410), TStream.ReadDWord (415), TStream.WriteByte (416), TStream.WriteWord
4.68.27 TStream.WriteQWord
Synopsis: Write a QWord value to the stream
Declaration: procedure WriteQWord(q: QWord)
Visibility: public
Description: WriteQWord writes the word W (i.e. 8 bytes) to the stream. This is a utility function which simply
calls the Write (410) function. The word can be read from the stream using the ReadQWord (415)
function.
See also: TStream.Write (410), TStream.ReadByte (414), TStream.WriteWord (416), TStream.WriteDWord
4.68.28 TStream.WriteAnsiString
Synopsis: Write an ansistring to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteAnsiString(const S: string)
Visibility: public
Description: WriteAnsiString writes the AnsiString S (i.e. 4 bytes) to the stream. This is a utility function
which simply calls the Write (410) function. The ansistring is written as a 4 byte length specifier,
followed by the ansistring’s content. The ansistring can be read from the stream using the ReadAn-
siString (416) function.
See also: TStream.Write (410), TStream.ReadAnsiString (416), TStream.WriteByte (416), TStream.WriteWord
(416), TStream.WriteDWord (416)
4.68.29 TStream.Position
Synopsis: The current position in the stream.
Declaration: Property Position : Int64
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Position can be read to determine the current position in the stream. It can be written to set the
(absolute) position in the stream. The position is zero-based, so to set the position at the beginning
of the stream, the position must be set to zero.
Remark: Not all TStream descendants support setting the position in the stream, so this should be used with
care.
417
Errors: Some descendents may raise an EStreamError (267) exception if they do not support setting the
stream position.
See also: TStream.Size (418), TStream.Seek (410)
4.68.30 TStream.Size
Synopsis: The current size of the stream.
Declaration: Property Size : Int64

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Size can be read to determine the stream size or to set the stream size.
Remark: Not all descendents of TStream support getting or setting the stream size; they may raise an
exception if the Size property is read or set.
See also: TStream.Position (417), TStream.Seek (410)
4.69 TStreamAdapter
4.69.1 Description
Implements IStream for TStream (408) descendents

1665 IStream COM stream abstraction

422 Clone Clone the stream
421 Commit Commit data to the stream
420 CopyTo Copy data to destination stream
419 Create Create a new instance of TStreamAdapter
419 Destroy Free the TStreamAdapter instance
421 LockRegion Lock a region of the stream
419 Read Read from the stream.
421 Revert Revert operations on the stream
420 Seek Set the stream position
420 SetSize Set the stream size
422 Stat Return statistical data about the stream
421 UnlockRegion Unlock a region of the stream
419 Write Write to the stream
418

422 Stream r Stream on which adaptor works
422 StreamOwnership rw Determines what happens with the stream when the adap-
tor is freed
4.69.5 TStreamAdapter.Create
Synopsis: Create a new instance of TStreamAdapter
Declaration: constructor Create(Stream: TStream;Ownership: TStreamOwnership)
Visibility: public
Description: Create creates a new instance of TStreamAdaptor. It initializes TStreamAdapter.Stream (422)
with Stream and initializes StreamOwnerShip (422) with Ownership.
TStreamAdapter is an abstract class: descendents must be created that implement the actual
functionality.
See also: StreamOwnerShip (422), TStreamAdapter.Stream (422)
4.69.6 TStreamAdapter.Destroy
Synopsis: Free the TStreamAdapter instance
Visibility: public
Description: Explicitly free the TStreamAdapter instance. Normally, this is done automatically if a reference
to the IStream interface is freed.
4.69.7 TStreamAdapter.Read
Synopsis: Read from the stream.
Declaration: function Read(pv: Pointer;cb: DWORD;pcbRead: PDWord) : HRESULT; Virtual

Visibility: public
Description: Read implements #rtl.types.ISequentialStream.Read (1665) by reading from the stream specified at
creation.
Errors: This function must be overridden and will raise a runerror 217 when called directly.
See also: #rtl.types.ISequentialStream.Read (1665)
4.69.8 TStreamAdapter.Write
Synopsis: Write to the stream
Declaration: function Write(pv: Pointer;cb: DWORD;pcbWritten: PDWord) : HRESULT

; Virtual
Visibility: public
419
Description: Write implements #rtl.types.ISequentialStream.Write (1665) by writing to the stream specified at

creation.
See also: #rtl.types.ISequentialStream.Write (1665)
4.69.9 TStreamAdapter.Seek
Synopsis: Set the stream position
Declaration: function Seek(dlibMove: Largeint;dwOrigin: LongInt;
out libNewPosition: Largeint) : HRESULT; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: Seek implements #rtl.types.IStream.Seek (1666) by setting the position of the stream specified at
creation.
See also: #rtl.types.IStream.Seek (1666)
4.69.10 TStreamAdapter.SetSize
Synopsis: Set the stream size
Declaration: function SetSize(libNewSize: Largeint) : HRESULT; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: SetSize implements #rtl.types.IStream.Setsize (1666) by setting the size of the stream specified
at creation.
See also: #rtl.types.IStream.Setsize (1666)
4.69.11 TStreamAdapter.CopyTo
Synopsis: Copy data to destination stream
Declaration: function CopyTo(stm: IStream;cb: Largeint;out cbRead: Largeint;
out cbWritten: Largeint) : HRESULT; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: CopyTo implements #rtl.types.IStream.CopyTo (1666).
420
4.69.12 TStreamAdapter.Commit
Synopsis: Commit data to the stream
Declaration: function Commit(grfCommitFlags: LongInt) : HRESULT; Virtual

Visibility: public
Description: Commit implements #rtl.types.IStream.Commit (1667).
See also: #rtl.types.IStream.Commit (1667)
4.69.13 TStreamAdapter.Revert
Synopsis: Revert operations on the stream
Declaration: function Revert : HRESULT; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: Revert implements #rtl.types.IStream.Revert (1667).
See also: #rtl.types.IStream.Revert (1667)
4.69.14 TStreamAdapter.LockRegion
Synopsis: Lock a region of the stream
Declaration: function LockRegion(libOffset: Largeint;cb: Largeint;
dwLockType: LongInt) : HRESULT; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: LockRegion implements #rtl.types.IStream.LockRegion (1667).
See also: #rtl.types.IStream.LockRegion (1667)
4.69.15 TStreamAdapter.UnlockRegion
Synopsis: Unlock a region of the stream
Declaration: function UnlockRegion(libOffset: Largeint;cb: Largeint;
dwLockType: LongInt) : HRESULT; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: UnLockRegion implements #rtl.types.IStream.UnLockRegion (1667).
See also: #rtl.types.IStream.UnLockRegion (1667)
421
4.69.16 TStreamAdapter.Stat
Synopsis: Return statistical data about the stream
Declaration: function Stat(out statstg: TStatStg;grfStatFlag: LongInt) : HRESULT

; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: Stat implements #rtl.types.IStream.Stat (1668).
See also: #rtl.types.IStream.Stat (1668)
4.69.17 TStreamAdapter.Clone
Synopsis: Clone the stream
Declaration: function Clone(out stm: IStream) : HRESULT; Virtual

Visibility: public
Description: Clone implements #rtl.types.IStream.Clone (1668).
See also: #rtl.types.IStream.Clone (1668)
4.69.18 TStreamAdapter.Stream
Synopsis: Stream on which adaptor works
Declaration: Property Stream : TStream
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: This is the stream on which the adaptor works. It was specified at rreation.
4.69.19 TStreamAdapter.StreamOwnership
Synopsis: Determines what happens with the stream when the adaptor is freed
Declaration: Property StreamOwnership : TStreamOwnership
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: StreamOwnership determines what happens when the adaptor
422
4.70 TStringList
4.70.1 Description
TStringList is a descendent class of TStrings (428) that implements all of the abstract methods
introduced there. It also introduces some additional methods:
• Sort the list, or keep the list sorted at all times

• Special handling of duplicates in sorted lists
• Notification of changes in the list
See also: TStrings (428), TStringList.Duplicates (426), TStringList.Sorted (426)

424 Add Implements the TStrings.Add (429) function.
424 Clear Implements the TStrings.Clear (431) function.
426 CustomSort Sort the stringlist using a custom sort algorithm
424 Delete Implements the TStrings.Delete (432) function.
423 Destroy Destroys the stringlist.
424 Exchange Implements the TStrings.Exchange (433) function.
425 Find Locates the index for a given string in sorted lists.
425 IndexOf Overrides the TStrings.IndexOf (433) property.
425 Insert Overrides the TStrings.Insert (434) method.
425 Sort Sorts the strings in the list.

427 CaseSensitive rw
426 Duplicates rw Describes the behaviour of a sorted list with respect to dupli-
cate strings.
427 OnChange rw Event triggered after the list was modified.
427 OnChanging rw Event triggered when the list is about to be modified.
427 OwnsObjects rw Determines whether the stringlist owns it’s objects or not.
426 Sorted rw Determines whether the list is sorted or not.
4.70.4 TStringList.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys the stringlist.
Visibility: public
Description: Destroy clears the stringlist, release all memory allocated for the storage of the strings, and then
calls the inherited destroy method.
Remark: Any objects associated to strings in the list will not be destroyed; it is the responsability of the caller
to destroy all objects associated with strings in the list.
423
4.70.5 TStringList.Add
Synopsis: Implements the TStrings.Add (429) function.
Declaration: function Add(const S: string) : Integer; Override

Visibility: public
Description: Add will add S to the list. If the list is sorted and the string S is already present in the list and
TStringList.Duplicates (426) is dupError then an EStringListError (268) exception is raised. If
Duplicates is set to dupIgnore then the return value is the index of the previous entry.
If the list is sorted, new strings will not necessarily be added to the end of the list, rather they will be
inserted at their alphabetical position.
Errors: If the list is sorted and the string S is already present in the list and TStringList.Duplicates (426) is
dupError then an EStringListError (268) exception is raised.
See also: TStringList.Insert (425), TStringList.Duplicates (426)
4.70.6 TStringList.Clear
Synopsis: Implements the TStrings.Clear (431) function.
Declaration: procedure Clear; Override
Visibility: public
Description: Implements the TStrings.Clear (431) function.
4.70.7 TStringList.Delete
Synopsis: Implements the TStrings.Delete (432) function.
Declaration: procedure Delete(Index: Integer); Override

Visibility: public
Description: Implements the TStrings.Delete (432) function.
4.70.8 TStringList.Exchange
Synopsis: Implements the TStrings.Exchange (433) function.
Declaration: procedure Exchange(Index1: Integer;Index2: Integer); Override
Visibility: public
Description: Exchange will exchange two items in the list as described in TStrings.Exchange (433).
Remark: Exchange will not check whether the list os sorted or not; if Exchange is called on a sorted list
and the strings are not identical, the sort order of the list will be destroyed.
See also: TStringList.Sorted (426), TStrings.Exchange (433)
424
4.70.9 TStringList.Find
Synopsis: Locates the index for a given string in sorted lists.
Declaration: function Find(const S: string;out Index: Integer) : Boolean; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: Find returns True if the string S is present in the list. Upon exit, the Index parameter will contain
the position of the string in the list. If the string is not found, the function will return False and
Index will contain the position where the string will be inserted if it is added to the list.
Remark:
1.Use this method only on sorted lists. For unsorted lists, use TStringList.IndexOf (425) instead.
2.Find uses a binary search method to locate the string
4.70.10 TStringList.IndexOf
Synopsis: Overrides the TStrings.IndexOf (433) property.
Declaration: function IndexOf(const S: string) : Integer; Override
Visibility: public
Description: IndexOf overrides the ancestor method TStrings.indexOf (433). It tries to optimize the search by
executing a binary search if the list is sorted. The function returns the position of S if it is found in
the list, or -1 if the string is not found in the list.
See also: TStrings.IndexOf (433), TStringList.Find (425)
4.70.11 TStringList.Insert
Synopsis: Overrides the TStrings.Insert (434) method.
Declaration: procedure Insert(Index: Integer;const S: string); Override
Visibility: public
Description: Insert will insert the string S at position Index in the list. If the list is sorted, an EStringListError
(268) exception will be raised instead. Index is a zero-based position.
Errors: If Index contains an invalid value (less than zero or larger than Count, or the list is sorted, an
EStringListError (268) exception will be raised.
See also: TStringList.Add (424), TStrings.Insert (434), TStrings.InsertObject (435)
4.70.12 TStringList.Sort
Synopsis: Sorts the strings in the list.
Declaration: procedure Sort; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: Sort will sort the strings in the list using the quicksort algorithm. If the list has its TStringList.Sorted
(426) property set to True then nothing will be done.
See also: TStringList.Sorted (426)
425
4.70.13 TStringList.CustomSort
Synopsis: Sort the stringlist using a custom sort algorithm
Declaration: procedure CustomSort(CompareFn: TStringListSortCompare); Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: CustomSort sorts the stringlist with a custom comparison function. The function should compare
2 elements in the list, and return a negative number if the first item is before the second. It should
return 0 if the elements are equal, and a positive result indicates that the second elements should be
before the first.
See also: TStringList.Sorted (426), TStringList.Sort (425)
4.70.14 TStringList.Duplicates
Synopsis: Describes the behaviour of a sorted list with respect to duplicate strings.
Declaration: Property Duplicates : TDuplicates
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Duplicates describes what to do in case a duplicate value is added to the list:
Table 4.27:
dupIgnore Duplicate values will not be added to the list, but no error will be triggered.
dupError If an attempt is made to add a duplicate value to the list, an EStringListError (268) exception is raised.
dupAccept Duplicate values can be added to the list.
If the stringlist is not sorted, the Duplicates setting is ignored.
4.70.15 TStringList.Sorted
Synopsis: Determines whether the list is sorted or not.
Declaration: Property Sorted : Boolean
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Sorted can be set to True in order to cause the list of strings to be sorted. Further additions to the
list will be inserted at the correct position so the list remains sorted at all times. Setting the property
to False has no immediate effect, but will allow strings to be inserted at any position.
Remark:
1.When Sorted is True, TStringList.Insert (425) cannot be used. For sorted lists, TStringList.Add
(424) should be used instead.
2.If Sorted is True, the TStringList.Duplicates (426) setting has effect. This setting is ignored
when Sorted is False.
See also: TStringList.Sort (425), TStringList.Duplicates (426), TStringList.Add (424), TstringList.Insert (425)
426
4.70.16 TStringList.CaseSensitive
Synopsis:
Declaration: Property CaseSensitive : Boolean
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Indicates whether locating strings happens in a case sensitive manner.
4.70.17 TStringList.OnChange
Synopsis: Event triggered after the list was modified.
Declaration: Property OnChange : TNotifyEvent
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: OnChange can be assigned to respond to changes that have occurred in the list. The handler is
called whenever strings are added, moved, modified or deleted from the list.
The Onchange event is triggered after the modification took place. When the modification is about
to happen, an TstringList.OnChanging (427) event occurs.
See also: TStringList.OnChanging (427)
4.70.18 TStringList.OnChanging
Synopsis: Event triggered when the list is about to be modified.
Declaration: Property OnChanging : TNotifyEvent
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: OnChanging can be assigned to respond to changes that will occurred in the list. The handler is
called whenever strings will be added, moved, modified or deleted from the list.
The Onchanging event is triggered before the modification will take place. When the modification
has happened, an TstringList.OnChange (427) event occurs.
See also: TStringList.OnChange (427)
4.70.19 TStringList.OwnsObjects
Synopsis: Determines whether the stringlist owns it’s objects or not.
Declaration: Property OwnsObjects : Boolean
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: OwnsObjects can be set to true to let the stringlist instance own the objects in the list: if an
element is removed from the list, the associated object (if there is any) will be freed as well. The
same is true if the list is cleared or destroyed.
See also: TStrings.Objects (441)
427
4.71 TStrings
4.71.1 Description
TStrings implements an abstract class to manage an array of strings. It introduces methods to set
and retrieve strings in the array, searching for a particular string, concatenating the strings and so on.
It also allows an arbitrary object to be associated with each string.
It also introduces methods to manage a series of name=value settings, as found in many configu-
ration files.
An instance of TStrings is never created directly, instead a descendent class such as TStringList
(423) should be created. This is because TStrings is an abstract class which does not imple-
ment all methods; TStrings also doesn’t store any strings, this is the functionality introduced in
descendents such as TStringList (423).
TStrings implements the IFPObserved (269) interface: when the stringlist is changed, a ooChanged
notification is sent to all observers.
See also: TStringList (423), IFPObserved (269)

429 Add Add a string to the list
429 AddObject Add a string and associated object to the list.
430 AddStrings Add contents of another stringlist to this list.
430 AddText Add text to the string list.
430 Append Add a string to the list.
431 Assign Assign the contents of another stringlist to this one.
431 BeginUpdate Mark the beginning of an update batch.
431 Clear Removes all strings and associated objects from the list.
432 Delete Delete a string from the list.
429 Destroy Frees all strings and objects, and removes the list from memory.
432 EndUpdate Mark the end of an update batch.
432 Equals Compares the contents of two stringlists.
433 Exchange Exchanges two strings in the list.
437 ExtractName Extract the name part of a string
437 GetNameValue Return both name and value of a name,value pair based on it’s index.
433 GetText Returns the contents as a PChar
433 IndexOf Find a string in the list and return its position.
434 IndexOfName Finds the index of a name in the name-value pairs.
434 IndexOfObject Finds an object in the list and returns its index.
434 Insert Insert a string in the list.
435 InsertObject Insert a string and associated object in the list.
435 LoadFromFile Load the contents of a file as a series of strings.
435 LoadFromStream Load the contents of a stream as a series of strings.
435 Move Move a string from one place in the list to another.
436 SaveToFile Save the contents of the list to a file.
436 SaveToStream Save the contents of the string to a stream.
437 SetText Set the contents of the list from a PChar.
428

440 Capacity rw Capacity of the list, i.e. number of strings that the list
can currently hold before it tries to expand.
440 CommaText rw Contents of the list as a comma-separated string.
441 Count r Number of strings in the list.
438 DelimitedText rw Get or set all strings in the list in a delimited form.
438 Delimiter rw Delimiter character used in DelimitedText (438).
438 LineBreak rw
441 Names r Name parts of the name-value pairs in the list.
439 NameValueSeparator rw Value of the character used to separate name,value pairs
441 Objects rw Indexed access to the objects associated with the strings
in the list.
439 QuoteChar rw Quote character used in DelimitedText (438).
439 StrictDelimiter rw Should only the delimiter character be considered a de-
limiter
442 Strings rw Indexed access to the strings in the list.
443 StringsAdapter rw Not implemented in Free Pascal.
443 Text rw Contents of the list as one big string.
437 TextLineBreakStyle rw Determines which line breaks to use in the Text (443)
property
439 ValueFromIndex rw Return the value part of a string based on it’s index.
442 Values rw Value parts of the name-value pairs in the list.
4.71.4 TStrings.Destroy
Synopsis: Frees all strings and objects, and removes the list from memory.
Visibility: public
Description: Destroy is the destructor of TStrings it does nothing except calling the inherited destructor.
4.71.5 TStrings.Add
Synopsis: Add a string to the list
Declaration: function Add(const S: string) : Integer; Virtual; Overload

function Add(const Fmt: string;const Args: Array of const) : Integer
; Overload
Visibility: public
Description: Add adds S at the end of the list and returns the index of S in the list (which should equal Tstrings.Count
(441)
See also: TStrings.Objects (441), TStrings.AddObject (429), TStrings.Insert (434), TStrings.Delete (432),
TStrings.Strings (442), TStrings.Count (441)
4.71.6 TStrings.AddObject
Synopsis: Add a string and associated object to the list.
429
Declaration: function AddObject(const S: string;AObject: TObject) : Integer; Virtual

; Overload
function AddObject(const Fmt: string;Args: Array of const;
AObject: TObject) : Integer; Overload
Visibility: public
Description: AddObject adds S to the list of strings, and associates AObject with it. It returns the index of S.
Remark: An object added to the list is not automatically destroyed by the list of the list is destroyed or the
string it is associated with is deleted. It is the responsibility of the application to destroy any objects
associated with strings.
See also: TStrings.Add (429), TStrings.Strings (442), TStrings.Objects (441), TStrings.InsertObject (435)
4.71.7 TStrings.Append
Synopsis: Add a string to the list.
Declaration: procedure Append(const S: string)
Visibility: public
Description: Append does the same as TStrings.Add (429), only it does not return the index of the inserted
string.
See also: TStrings.Add (429)
4.71.8 TStrings.AddStrings
Synopsis: Add contents of another stringlist to this list.
Declaration: procedure AddStrings(TheStrings: TStrings); Virtual; Overload
procedure AddStrings(const TheStrings: Array of string); Virtual
; Overload
Visibility: public
Description: AddStrings adds the contents of TheStrings to the stringlist. Any associated objects are
added as well.
See also: TStrings.Add (429), TStrings.Assign (431)
4.71.9 TStrings.AddText
Synopsis: Add text to the string list.
Declaration: procedure AddText(const S: string); Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: AddText adds S to the strings. It is identical in function to setting Text (233) but does not clear the
list of strings first: S is split into lines, and each line is added to the list.
See also: TString.Text (233)
430
4.71.10 TStrings.Assign
Synopsis: Assign the contents of another stringlist to this one.
Declaration: procedure Assign(Source: TPersistent); Override
Visibility: public
Description: Assign replaces the contents of the stringlist with the contents of Source if Source is also of
type TStrings. Any associated objects are copied as well.
See also: TStrings.Add (429), TStrings.AddStrings (430), TPersistent.Assign (390)
4.71.11 TStrings.BeginUpdate
Synopsis: Mark the beginning of an update batch.
Declaration: procedure BeginUpdate
Visibility: public
Description: BeginUpdate increases the update count by one. It is advisable to call BeginUpdate before
lengthy operations on the stringlist. At the end of these operation, TStrings.EndUpdate (432) should
be called to mark the end of the operation. Descendent classes may use this information to perform
optmizations. e.g. updating the screen only once after many strings were added to the list.
All TStrings methods that modify the string list call BeginUpdate before the actual operation,
and call endUpdate when the operation is finished. Descendent classes should also call these
methods when modifying the string list.
Remark: Always put the corresponding call to TStrings.EndUpdate (432) in the context of a Finally block,
to ensure that the update count is always descreased at the end of the operation, even if an exception
occurred:
With MyStrings do
try
BeginUpdate;
// Some lengthy operation.
Finally
EndUpdate
end;
See also: TStrings.EndUpdate (432)
4.71.12 TStrings.Clear
Synopsis: Removes all strings and associated objects from the list.
Declaration: procedure Clear; Virtual; Abstract
Visibility: public
Description: Clear will remove all strings and their associated objects from the list. After a call to clear,
TStrings.Count (441) is zero.
Since it is an abstract method, TStrings itself does not implement Clear. Descendent classes
such as TStringList (423) implement this method.
See also: TStrings.Objects (441), TStrings.Strings (442), TStrings.Delete (432), TStrings.Count (441)
431
4.71.13 TStrings.Delete
Synopsis: Delete a string from the list.
Declaration: procedure Delete(Index: Integer); Virtual; Abstract

Visibility: public
Description: Delete deletes the string at position Index from the list. The associated object is also removed
from the list, but not destroyed. Index is zero-based, and should be in the range 0 to Count-1.
Since it is an abstract method, TStrings itself does not implement Delete. Descendent classes
such as TStringList (423) implement this method.
Errors: If Index is not in the allowed range, an EStringListError (268) is raised.
See also: TStrings.Insert (434), TStrings.Objects (441), TStrings.Strings (442), TStrings.Clear (431)
4.71.14 TStrings.EndUpdate
Synopsis: Mark the end of an update batch.
Declaration: procedure EndUpdate
Visibility: public
Description: EndUpdate should be called at the end of a lengthy operation on the stringlist, but only if there was
a call to BeginUpdate before the operation was started. It is best to put the call to EndUpdate
in the context of a Finally block, so it will be called even if an exception occurs.
For more information, see TStrings.BeginUpdate (431).
TStrings implements the IFPObserved (269) interface: when EndUpdate is called, a ooChanged
notification is sent to all observers.
See also: TStrings.BeginUpdate (431), IFPObserved (269)
4.71.15 TStrings.Equals
Synopsis: Compares the contents of two stringlists.
Declaration: function Equals(Obj: TObject) : Boolean; Override; Overload

function Equals(TheStrings: TStrings) : Boolean; Overload
Visibility: public
Description: Equals compares the contents of the stringlist with the contents of TheStrings. If the contents
match, i.e. the stringlist contain an equal amount of strings, and all strings match, then True is
returned. If the number of strings in the lists is unequal, or they contain one or more different strings,
False is returned.
Remark:
1.The strings are compared case-insensitively.
2.The associated objects are not compared
See also: TStrings.Objects (441), TStrings.Strings (442), TStrings.Count (441), TStrings.Assign (431)
432
4.71.16 TStrings.Exchange
Synopsis: Exchanges two strings in the list.
Declaration: procedure Exchange(Index1: Integer;Index2: Integer); Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: Exchange exchanges the strings at positions Index1 and Index2. The associated objects are
also exchanged.
Both indexes must be in the range of valid indexes, i.e. must have a value between 0 and Count-1.
Errors: If either Index1 or Index2 is not in the range of valid indexes, an EStringListError (268) excep-
tion is raised.
See also: TStrings.Move (435), TStrings.Strings (442), TStrings.Count (441)
4.71.17 TStrings.GetEnumerator
Declaration: function GetEnumerator : TStringsEnumerator
Visibility: public
Description: GetEnumerator is the implementation of the IEnumerable (1459) interface for TStrings. It
creates a TStringsEnumerator (443) instance and returns it’s IEnumerator (1459) interface.
See also: TStringsEnumerator (443), IEnumerator (1459), IEnumerable (1459)
4.71.18 TStrings.GetText
Synopsis: Returns the contents as a PChar
Declaration: function GetText : PChar; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: GetText allocates a memory buffer and compies the contents of the stringlist to this buffer as a
series of strings, separated by an end-of-line marker. The buffer is zero terminated.
Remark: The caller is responsible for freeing the returned memory buffer.
4.71.19 TStrings.IndexOf
Synopsis: Find a string in the list and return its position.
Declaration: function IndexOf(const S: string) : Integer; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: IndexOf searches the list for S. The search is case-insensitive. If a matching entry is found, its
position is returned. if no matching string is found, -1 is returned.
Remark:
1.Only the first occurrence of the string is returned.
2.The returned position is zero-based, i.e. 0 indicates the first string in the list.
See also: TStrings.IndexOfObject (434), TStrings.IndexOfName (434), TStrings.Strings (442)
433
4.71.20 TStrings.IndexOfName
Synopsis: Finds the index of a name in the name-value pairs.
Declaration: function IndexOfName(const Name: string) : Integer; Virtual

Visibility: public
Description: IndexOfName searches in the list of strings for a name-value pair with name part Name. If such
a pair is found, it returns the index of the pair in the stringlist. If no such pair is found, the function
returns -1. The search is done case-insensitive.
Remark:
1.Only the first occurrence of a matching name-value pair is returned.
See also: TStrings.IndexOf (433), TStrings.IndexOfObject (434), TStrings.Strings (442)
4.71.21 TStrings.IndexOfObject
Synopsis: Finds an object in the list and returns its index.
Declaration: function IndexOfObject(AObject: TObject) : Integer; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: IndexOfObject searchs through the list of strings till it find a string associated with AObject,
and returns the index of this string. If no such string is found, -1 is returned.
Remark:
1.Only the first occurrence of a string with associated object AObject is returned; if more strings
in the list can be associated with AObject, they will not be found by this routine.
4.71.22 TStrings.Insert
Synopsis: Insert a string in the list.
Declaration: procedure Insert(Index: Integer;const S: string); Virtual; Abstract

Visibility: public
Description: Insert inserts the string S at position Index in the list. Index is a zero-based position, and can
have values from 0 to Count. If Index equals Count then the string is appended to the list.
Remark:
1.All methods that add strings to the list use Insert to add a string to the list.
2.If the string has an associated object, use TStrings.InsertObject (435) instead.
Errors: If Index is less than zero or larger than Count then an EStringListError (268) exception is raised.
See also: TStrings.Add (429), TStrings.InsertObject (435), TStrings.Append (430), TStrings.Delete (432)
434
4.71.23 TStrings.InsertObject
Synopsis: Insert a string and associated object in the list.
Declaration: procedure InsertObject(Index: Integer;const S: string;AObject: TObject)

Visibility: public
Description: InsertObject inserts the string S and its associated objectAObject at position Index in the
list. Index is a zero-based position, and can have values from 0 to Count. If Index equals Count
then the string is appended to the list.
Errors: If Index is less than zero or larger than Count then an EStringListError (268) exception is raised.
See also: TStrings.Insert (434), TStrings.AddObject (429), TStrings.Append (430), TStrings.Delete (432)
4.71.24 TStrings.LoadFromFile
Synopsis: Load the contents of a file as a series of strings.
Declaration: procedure LoadFromFile(const FileName: string); Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: LoadFromFile loads the contents of a file into the stringlist. Each line in the file (as marked
by the end-of-line marker of the particular OS the application runs on) becomes one string in the
stringlist. This action replaces the contents of the stringlist, it does not append the strings to the
current content.
LoadFromFile simply creates a file stream (349) with the given filename, and then executes
TStrings.LoadfromStream (435); after that the file stream object is destroyed again.
See also: TStrings.LoadFromStream (435), TStrings.SaveToFile (436), Tstrings.SaveToStream (436)
4.71.25 TStrings.LoadFromStream
Synopsis: Load the contents of a stream as a series of strings.
Declaration: procedure LoadFromStream(Stream: TStream); Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: LoadFromStream loads the contents of Stream into the stringlist. Each line in the stream (as
marked by the end-of-line marker of the particular OS the application runs on) becomes one string in
the stringlist. This action replaces the contents of the stringlist, it does not append the strings to the
current content.
See also: TStrings.LoadFromFile (435), TStrings.SaveToFile (436), Tstrings.SaveToStream (436)
4.71.26 TStrings.Move
Synopsis: Move a string from one place in the list to another.
Declaration: procedure Move(CurIndex: Integer;NewIndex: Integer); Virtual
Visibility: public
435
Description: Move moves the string at position CurIndex so it has position NewIndex after the move opera-
tion. The object associated to the string is also moved. CurIndex and NewIndex should be in the
range of 0 to Count-1.
Remark: NewIndex is not the position in the stringlist before the move operation starts. The move operation
1.removes the string from position CurIndex

2.inserts the string at position NewIndex
This may not lead to the desired result if NewIndex is bigger than CurIndex. Consider the
following example:
With MyStrings do
begin
Clear;
Add(’String 0’);
Move(1,3);
end;
After the Move operation has completed, ’String 1’ will be between ’String 3’ and ’String 4’.
Errors: If either CurIndex or NewIndex is outside the allowed range, an EStringListError (268) is raised.
See also: TStrings.Exchange (433)
4.71.27 TStrings.SaveToFile
Synopsis: Save the contents of the list to a file.
Declaration: procedure SaveToFile(const FileName: string); Virtual

Visibility: public
Description: SaveToFile saves the contents of the stringlist to the file with name FileName. It writes the
strings to the file, separated by end-of-line markers, so each line in the file will contain 1 string from
the stringlist.
SaveToFile creates a file stream (349) with name FileName, calls TStrings.SaveToStream (436)
and then destroys the file stream object.
Errors: An EStreamError (267) exception can be raised if the file FileName cannot be opened, or if it
cannot be written to.
See also: TStrings.SaveToStream (436), Tstrings.LoadFromStream (435), TStrings.LoadFromFile (435)
4.71.28 TStrings.SaveToStream
Synopsis: Save the contents of the string to a stream.
Declaration: procedure SaveToStream(Stream: TStream); Virtual
Visibility: public
436
Description: SaveToStream saves the contents of the stringlist to Stream. It writes the strings to the stream,
separated by end-of-line markers, so each ’line’ in the stream will contain 1 string from the stringlist.
Errors: An EStreamError (267) exception can be raised if the stream cannot be written to.
See also: TStrings.SaveToFile (436), Tstrings.LoadFromStream (435), TStrings.LoadFromFile (435)
4.71.29 TStrings.SetText
Synopsis: Set the contents of the list from a PChar.
Declaration: procedure SetText(TheText: PChar); Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: SetText parses the contents of TheText and fills the stringlist based on the contents. It regards
TheText as a series of strings, separated by end-of-line markers. Each of these strings is added to
the stringlist.
See also: TStrings.Text (443)
4.71.30 TStrings.GetNameValue
Synopsis: Return both name and value of a name,value pair based on it’s index.
Declaration: procedure GetNameValue(Index: Integer;out AName: string;
out AValue: string)
Visibility: public
Description: Return both name and value of a name,value pair based on it’s index.
4.71.31 TStrings.ExtractName
Synopsis: Extract the name part of a string
Declaration: function ExtractName(const S: string) : string
Visibility: public
Description: ExtractName returns the name part (the part before the NameValueSeparator (439) character) of
the string. If the character is not present, an empty string is returned. The resulting string is not
trimmed, it can end or start with spaces.
See also: NameValueSeparator (439)
4.71.32 TStrings.TextLineBreakStyle
Synopsis: Determines which line breaks to use in the Text (443) property
Declaration: Property TextLineBreakStyle : TTextLineBreakStyle
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: TextLineBreakStyle determines which linebreak style is used when constructing the Text
property: the same rules are used as in the writing to text files:
437
tlbsLFLines are separated with a linefeed character #10.

tlbsCRLFLines are separated with a carriage-return/linefeed character pair: #13#10.
tlbsCRLines are separated with a carriage-return character #13.
It has no effect when setting the text property.

See also: Text (443)
4.71.33 TStrings.Delimiter
Synopsis: Delimiter character used in DelimitedText (438).
Declaration: Property Delimiter : Char
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Delimiter is the delimiter character used to separate the different strings in the stringlist when
they are read or set through the DelimitedText (438) property.
See also: TStrings.DelimitedText (438)
4.71.34 TStrings.DelimitedText
Synopsis: Get or set all strings in the list in a delimited form.
Declaration: Property DelimitedText : string
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: DelimitedText returns all strings, properly quoted with QuoteChar (439) and separated by the
Delimiter (438) character.
Strings are quoted if they contain a space or any character with ASCII value less than 32.
The CommaText (440) property is a special case of delimited text where the delimiter character is a
comma and the quote character is a double quote.
If StrictDelimiter (439) is set to True, then no quoting is done (The QuoteChar property is dis-
regarded completely): the returned text will contain the items in the stringlist, separated by the
Delimiter character. When writing the DelimitedText property, the text will be split at all
occurrences of the Delimiter character; however, when reading, the QuoteChar property will
be taken into account.
See also: TStrings.Delimiter (438), TStrings.Text (443), TStrings.QuoteChar (439), TStrings.CommaText (440)
4.71.35 TStrings.LineBreak
Declaration: Property LineBreak : string
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
438
4.71.36 TStrings.StrictDelimiter
Synopsis: Should only the delimiter character be considered a delimiter
Declaration: Property StrictDelimiter : Boolean
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: StrictDelimiter can be used to indicate that only the delimiter character should be considered
a delimiter when setting DelimitedText (438): under normal circumstances, quotes and spaces are
considered specially (see the TStrings.CommaText (440) property for more information).
When StrictDelimiter is set to True then only the Delimiter (438) character is considered
when splitting the text in items: no quoting whatsoever is performed when writing the DelimitedText
property. However, when reading the DelimitedText property, quoted strings are taken into ac-
count (so a quoted string can contain a delimiter that is treated as text instead of a delimiter).
See also: DelimitedText (438), CommaText (440), Delimiter (438)
4.71.37 TStrings.QuoteChar
Synopsis: Quote character used in DelimitedText (438).
Declaration: Property QuoteChar : Char
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: QuoteChar is the character used by the DelimitedText (438) property to quote strings that have a
space or non-printing character in it.
4.71.38 TStrings.NameValueSeparator
Synopsis: Value of the character used to separate name,value pairs
Declaration: Property NameValueSeparator : Char
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: NameValueSeparator is the character used to separate name,value pair. By default, this is the
equal sign (=), resulting in Name=Value pairs.
It can be set to a colon for Name : Value pairs.
4.71.39 TStrings.ValueFromIndex
Synopsis: Return the value part of a string based on it’s index.
Declaration: Property ValueFromIndex[Index: Integer]: string
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: ValueFromIndex returns the value part of a string based on the string index. The value part
are all characters in the string after the NameValueSeparator (439) character, or all characters if the
NameValueSeparator character is not present.
439
4.71.40 TStrings.Capacity
Synopsis: Capacity of the list, i.e. number of strings that the list can currently hold before it tries to expand.
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Capacity is the number of strings that the list can hold before it tries to allocate more memory.
TStrings returns TStrings.Count (441) when read. Trying to set the capacity has no effect. De-
scendent classes such as TStringlist (423) can override this property such that it actually sets the new
capacity.
See also: TStringList (423), TStrings.Count (441)
4.71.41 TStrings.CommaText
Synopsis: Contents of the list as a comma-separated string.
Declaration: Property CommaText : string
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: CommaText represents the stringlist as a single string, consisting of a comma-separated concate-
nation of the strings in the list. If one of the strings contains spaces, comma’s or quotes it will be
enclosed by double quotes. Any double quotes in a string will be doubled. For instance the following
strings:
Comma,string
Quote"string
Space string
NormalSttring
is converted to
"Comma,string","Quote""String","Space string",NormalString
Conversely, when setting the CommaText property, the text will be parsed according to the rules
outlined above, and the strings will be set accordingly. Note that spaces will in this context be
regarded as string separators, unless the string as a whole is contained in double quotes. Spaces that
occur next to a delimiter will be ignored. The following string:
"Comma,string" , "Quote""String",Space string,, NormalString
Will be converted to
Comma,String
Quote"String
Space
String
NormalString
This is a special case of the TStrings.DelimitedText (438) property where the quote character is
always the double quote, and the delimiter is always the colon.
See also: TStrings.Text (443), TStrings.SetText (437)
440
4.71.42 TStrings.Count
Synopsis: Number of strings in the list.
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Count is the current number of strings in the list. TStrings does not implement this property;
descendent classes should override the property read handler to return the correct value.
Strings in the list are always uniquely identified by their Index; the index of a string is zero-based,
i.e. it’s supported range is 0 to Count-1. trying to access a string with an index larger than or equal
to Count will result in an error. Code that iterates over the list in a stringlist should always take into
account the zero-based character of the list index.
See also: TStrings.Strings (442), TStrings.Objects (441), TStrings.Capacity (440)
4.71.43 TStrings.Names
Synopsis: Name parts of the name-value pairs in the list.
Declaration: Property Names[Index: Integer]: string
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Names provides indexed access to the names of the name-value pairs in the list. It returns the name
part of the Index-th string in the list.
Remark: The index is not an index based on the number of name-value pairs in the list. It is the name part of
the name-value pair a string Index in the list. If the string at position Index is not a name-value
pair (i.e. does not contain the equal sign (=)), then an empty name is returned.
See also: TStrings.Values (442), TStrings.IndexOfName (434)
4.71.44 TStrings.Objects
Synopsis: Indexed access to the objects associated with the strings in the list.
Declaration: Property Objects[Index: Integer]: TObject
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Objects provides indexed access to the objects associated to the strings in the list. Index is a
zero-based index and must be in the range of 0 to Count-1.
Setting the objects property will not free the previously associated object, if there was one. The
caller is repsonsible for freeing the object that was previously associated to the string.
TStrings does not implement any storage for objects. Reading the Objects property will always
return Nil, Setting the property will have no effect. It is the responsability of the descendent classes
to provide storage for the associated objects.
Errors: If an Index outside the valid range is specified, an EStringListError (268) exception will be raised.
See also: TStrings.Strings (442), TStrings.IndexOfObject (434), TStrings.Names (441), TStrings.Values (442)
441
4.71.45 TStrings.Values
Synopsis: Value parts of the name-value pairs in the list.
Declaration: Property Values[Name: string]: string

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Values represents the value parts of the name-value pairs in the list.
When reading this property, if there is a name-value pair in the list of strings that has name part
Name, then the corresponding value is returned. If there is no such pair, an empty string is returned.
When writing this value, first it is checked whether there exists a name-value pair in the list with
name Name. If such a pair is found, it’s value part is overwritten with the specified value. If no such
pair is found, a new name-value pair is added with the specified Name and value.
Remark:
1.Names are compared case-insensitively.
2.Any character, including whitespace, up till the first equal (=) sign in a string is considered part
of the name.
See also: TStrings.Names (441), TStrings.Strings (442), TStrings.Objects (441)
4.71.46 TStrings.Strings
Synopsis: Indexed access to the strings in the list.
Declaration: Property Strings[Index: Integer]: string; default
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Strings is the default property of TStrings. It provides indexed read-write access to the list of
strings. Reading it will return the string at position Index in the list. Writing it will set the string at
position Index.
Index is the position of the string in the list. It is zero-based, i.e. valued values range from 0 (the
first string in the list) till Count-1 (the last string in the list). When browsing through the strings in
the list, this fact must be taken into account.
To access the objects associated with the strings in the list, use the TStrings.Objects (441) property.
The name parts of name-value pairs can be accessed with the TStrings.Names (441) property, and
the values can be set or read through the TStrings.Values (442) property.
Searching through the list can be done using the TStrings.IndexOf (433) method.
Errors: If Index is outside the allowed range, an EStringListError (268) exception is raised.
See also: TStrings.Count (441), TStrings.Objects (441), TStrings.Names (441), TStrings.Values (442), TStrings.IndexOf
(433)
442
4.71.47 TStrings.Text
Synopsis: Contents of the list as one big string.
Declaration: Property Text : string

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Text returns, when read, the contents of the stringlist as one big string consisting of all strings in
the list, separated by an end-of-line marker. When this property is set, the string will be cut into
smaller strings, based on the positions of end-of-line markers in the string. Any previous content of
the stringlist will be lost.
Remark: If any of the strings in the list contains an end-of-line marker, then the resulting string will ap-
pear to contain more strings than actually present in the list. To avoid this ambiguity, use the
TStrings.CommaText (440) property instead.
See also: TStrings.Strings (442), TStrings.Count (441), TStrings.CommaText (440)
4.71.48 TStrings.StringsAdapter
Synopsis: Not implemented in Free Pascal.
Declaration: Property StringsAdapter : IStringsAdapter

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Not implemented in Free Pascal.
4.72 TStringsEnumerator
4.72.1 Description
TStringsEnumerator implements the #rtl.system.IEnumerator (1459) interface for the TStrings
(428) class, so the TStrings class can be used in a for ... in loop. It is returned by the
TStrings.GetEnumerator (433) method of TStrings.
See also: TStrings (428), TStrings.GetEnumerator (433), #rtl.system.IEnumerator (1459)

444 Create Initialize a new instance of TStringsEnumerator

443
4.72.4 TStringsEnumerator.Create
Synopsis: Initialize a new instance of TStringsEnumerator
Declaration: constructor Create(AStrings: TStrings)

Visibility: public
Description: Create initializes a new instance of TStringsEnumerator and keeps a reference to the stringlist
AStrings that will be enumerated.
See also: TStrings (428)
4.72.5 TStringsEnumerator.GetCurrent
Declaration: function GetCurrent : string
Visibility: public
Description: GetCurrent returns the current string item in the enumerator.
See also: MoveNext (444), TStringItem (247)
4.72.6 TStringsEnumerator.MoveNext
Visibility: public
Description: MoveNext puts the pointer on the next item in the stringlist, and returns True if this succeeded, or
4.72.7 TStringsEnumerator.Current
Declaration: Property Current : string
Visibility: public
Access: Read
444
4.73 TStringStream
4.73.1 Description
TStringStream stores its data in an ansistring. The contents of this string is available as the
DataString (446) property. It also introduces some methods to read or write parts of the stringstream’s
data as a string.
The main purpose of a TStringSTream is to be able to treat a string as a stream from which can
be read.
See also: TStream (408), TStringStream.DataString (446), TStringStream.ReadString (446), TStringStream.WriteString

(446)

445 Create Creates a new stringstream and sets its initial content.
445 Read Reads from the stream.
446 ReadString Reads a string of length Count
446 Seek Sets the position in the stream.
446 Write Write overries the TStream.Write (410) method.
446 WriteString WriteString writes a string to the stream.

446 DataString r Contains the contents of the stream in string form
4.73.4 TStringStream.Create
Synopsis: Creates a new stringstream and sets its initial content.
Declaration: constructor Create(const AString: string)
Visibility: public
Description: Create creates a new TStringStream instance and sets its initial content to Astring. The
position is still 0 but the size of the stream will equal the length of the string.
See also: TStringStream.DataString (446)
4.73.5 TStringStream.Read
Synopsis: Reads from the stream.
Visibility: public
Description: Read overrides the Read (409) from TStream (408). It tries to read Count bytes into Buffer. It
returns the number of bytes actually read. The position of the stream is advanced with the number of
bytes actually read; When the reading has reached the end of the DataString (446), then the reading
stops, i.e. it is not possible to read beyond the end of the datastring.
See also: TStream.Read (409), TStringStream.Write (446), TStringStream.DataString (446)
445
4.73.6 TStringStream.ReadString
Synopsis: Reads a string of length Count
Declaration: function ReadString(Count: LongInt) : string

Visibility: public
Description: ReadString reads Count bytes from the stream and returns the read bytes as a string. If less
than Count bytes were available, the string has as many characters as bytes could be read.
The ReadString method is a wrapper around the Read (445) method. It does not do the same
stringas the TStream.ReadAnsiString (416) method, which first reads a length integer to determine
the length of the string to be read.
See also: TStringStream.Read (445), TStream.ReadAnsiString (416)
4.73.7 TStringStream.Seek
Synopsis: Sets the position in the stream.
Declaration: function Seek(Offset: LongInt;Origin: Word) : LongInt; Override
Visibility: public
Description: Seek implements the abstract Seek (410) method.
4.73.8 TStringStream.Write
Synopsis: Write overries the TStream.Write (410) method.
Visibility: public
Description: Write overries the TStream.Write (410) method.
4.73.9 TStringStream.WriteString
Synopsis: WriteString writes a string to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteString(const AString: string)
Visibility: public
Description: WriteString writes a string to the stream.
4.73.10 TStringStream.DataString
Synopsis: Contains the contents of the stream in string form
Declaration: Property DataString : string

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Contains the contents of the stream in string form
446
4.74 TTextObjectWriter
4.74.1 Description
Not yet implemented.
4.75 TThread
4.75.1 Description
The TThread class encapsulates the native thread support of the operating system. To create a
thread, declare a descendent of the TThread object and override the Execute (448) method. In this
method, the tthread’s code should be executed. To run a thread, create an instance of the tthread
descendent, and call it’s execute method.
See also: EThread (268), TThread.Execute (448)

452 AfterConstruction Code to be executed after construction but before execute.
450 CheckTerminated Check if the current thread has finished executing.
449 Create Creates a new thread.
449 CreateAnonymousThread Execute code in an anonymous thread
449 Destroy Destroys the thread object.
448 Execute Execute method. Must be overridden in a descendent
thread.
451 GetSystemTimes Return CPU stats
452 GetTickCount Return tick count (32-bit)
452 GetTickCount64 Return tick count (64-bit)
449 NameThreadForDebugging Set a thread name
448 Queue Queue a method for execution in the main thread
450 RemoveQueuedEvents Remove methods scheduled for execution from queue
452 Resume Resumes the thread’s execution. Deprecated, see
TThread.Start
450 SetReturnValue Set return value of a thread
451 Sleep Prevent thread execution
451 SpinWait Prevent thread execution in a spin-wait loop
452 Start Starts a thread that was created in a suspended state.
453 Suspend Suspends the thread’s execution.
448 Synchronize Synchronizes the thread by executing the method in the
main thread.
453 Terminate Signals the thread it should terminate.
453 WaitFor Waits for the thread to terminate and returns the exit status.
451 Yield Yield execution to other threads
447

453 CurrentThread r Return current thread instance
455 ExternalThread r Is the thread instance an external thread ?
456 FatalException r Exception that occured during thread execution
455 Finished r Has the thread finished executing
454 FreeOnTerminate rw Indicates whether the thread should free itself when it stops
executing.
454 Handle r Returns the thread handle.
454 IsSingleProcessor r Is the current system single processor or not
456 OnTerminate rw Event called when the thread terminates.
455 Priority rw Returns the thread priority.
454 ProcessorCount r Return the processor count for this system
455 Suspended rw Indicates whether the thread is suspended.
456 ThreadID r Returns the thread ID.
4.75.4 TThread.Execute
Synopsis: Execute method. Must be overridden in a descendent thread.
Declaration: procedure Execute; Virtual; Abstract
Description: Execute is a method that must be overridden in descendent classes of the thread. It must con-
tain the code that must execute in the thread. The Execute method is responsible for checking
Terminated (233) at regular intervals: when it is set to True the execute method must exit.
See also: Terminated (233)
4.75.5 TThread.Synchronize
Synopsis: Synchronizes the thread by executing the method in the main thread.
Declaration: procedure Synchronize(AMethod: TThreadMethod)
class procedure Synchronize(AThread: TThread;AMethod: TThreadMethod)
Description: Synchronizes the thread by executing the method in the main thread.
4.75.6 TThread.Queue
Synopsis: Queue a method for execution in the main thread
Declaration: procedure Queue(aMethod: TThreadMethod)
class procedure Queue(aThread: TThread;aMethod: TThreadMethod); Static
Description: Queue schedules a method aMethod for execution in the main thread. In difference with TThread.Synchronize
(448), Queue just posts the method for execution in a queue, and does not wait for it to be executed,
so this call returns at once.
448
In the class procedure overloaded version of this call, the thread for which the method must be posted
is the first argument. In the protected version of this call (used in the tthread instance), this argument
is not there, and the thread instance is used.
When a thread finishes it’s execution, all its queued calls are removed from the queue list.
See also: TThread.Synchronize (448), TThread.RemoveQueuedEvents (450)
4.75.7 TThread.Create
Synopsis: Creates a new thread.
Declaration: constructor Create(CreateSuspended: Boolean;const StackSize: SizeUInt)
Visibility: public
Description: Creates a new thread.
4.75.8 TThread.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys the thread object.
Visibility: public
Description: Destroys the thread object.
4.75.9 TThread.CreateAnonymousThread
Synopsis: Execute code in an anonymous thread
Declaration: class function CreateAnonymousThread(aProc: TProcedure); Static

Visibility: public
Description: CreateAnonymousThread will create an instance of a TThread descendent and calls aProc
in this procedure. This can be used to quickly execute a method in another thread without having to
expliticly declare a thread for such purposes. It returns the created TThread instance, which can be
checked for termination etc.
Note that this method differs slightly from Delphi in that FPC does not yet support anonymous
methods, so the signature of aProc differs slightly.
See also: TThread.CheckTerminated (450)
4.75.10 TThread.NameThreadForDebugging
Synopsis: Set a thread name
Declaration: class procedure NameThreadForDebugging(aThreadName: UnicodeString;
aThreadID: TThreadID); Static
class procedure NameThreadForDebugging(aThreadName: AnsiString;
aThreadID: TThreadID); Static
Visibility: public
449
Description: NameThreadForDebugging sets the name of thread aThreadID to aThreadName. The

thread name can be unicode or ansistring. This is mainly useful for debugging purposes, as thread
names are more easily recognizable than IDs.
Note that this requires OS support. Currently this is not implemented for any FPC platform and is
supported for Delphi compatibility only.
4.75.11 TThread.SetReturnValue
Synopsis: Set return value of a thread
Declaration: class procedure SetReturnValue(aValue: Integer); Static
Visibility: public
Description: TThread.SetReturnValue sets the return value of an internally created thread.

Errors: If the thread was not created by the FPC program, an EThreadExternalException (268) exception is
raised.
See also: EThreadExternalException (268), TThread.CheckTerminated (450)
4.75.12 TThread.CheckTerminated
Synopsis: Check if the current thread has finished executing.
Declaration: class function CheckTerminated; Static
Visibility: public
Description: TThread.CheckTerminated can be used to check if the current thread has finished executing
(i.e. Execute has finished. This can be called from methods in other classes where the current
thread instance is not available.
Errors: If the thread was not created by the FPC program, an EThreadExternalException (268) exception is
raised.
See also: EThreadExternalException (268), TThread.SetReturnValue (450)
4.75.13 TThread.RemoveQueuedEvents
Synopsis: Remove methods scheduled for execution from queue
Declaration: class procedure RemoveQueuedEvents(aThread: TThread;
aMethod: TThreadMethod); Static
class procedure RemoveQueuedEvents(aMethod: TThreadMethod); Static
class procedure RemoveQueuedEvents(aThread: TThread); Static
Visibility: public
Description: RemoveQueuedEvents removes methods from the list of methods waiting for execution in the
main thread. If only aThread is specified, all methods scheduled for execution by that thread are
removed. If only aMethod is specified, then all calls to that method are removed, regardless of the
thread. If both arguments are specified, then all calls to the given method by the given thread are
removed.
See also: TThread.Synchronize (448), TThread.Queue (448)
450
4.75.14 TThread.SpinWait
Synopsis: Prevent thread execution in a spin-wait loop
Declaration: class procedure SpinWait(aIterations: LongWord); Static

Visibility: public
Description: SpinWait blocks the execution of the thread in a spin-wait loop: it simply executes some simple
instructions.
This can be used to create short time delays without an immediate thread switch (e.g. SysUtils.Sleep
(233) can cause a thread switch). The input parameter (aIterations) specifies the number of spin
loops.
See also: SysUtils.Sleep (233), TThread.Sleep (451)
4.75.15 TThread.Sleep
Synopsis: Prevent thread execution
Declaration: class procedure Sleep(aMilliseconds: Cardinal); Static
Visibility: public
Description: Sleep blocks the execution of the thread for aMilliseconds. This function simply calls sysu-
tils.sleep (233)
In difference with TThread.SpinWait (451), a thread switch may occur during the sleep.
See also: SysUtils.Sleep (233), TThread.SpinWait (451)
4.75.16 TThread.Yield
Synopsis: Yield execution to other threads
Declaration: class procedure Yield; Static
Visibility: public
Description: TThread.Yield yields the processor to other threads. It can be called from methods outside the
thread class itself.
4.75.17 TThread.GetSystemTimes
Synopsis: Return CPU stats
Declaration: class procedure GetSystemTimes(out aSystemTimes: TSystemTimes); Static
Visibility: public
Description: GetSystemTimes is provided for Delphi compatibility only, it currently returns empty values
only.
See also: TSystemTimes (233)
451
4.75.18 TThread.GetTickCount
Synopsis: Return tick count (32-bit)
Declaration: class function GetTickCount; Static
Visibility: public
Description: GetTickCount is deprecated and should not be used. Use TThread.GetTickCount64 (452) in-
stead.
See also: TThread.GetTickCount64 (452)
4.75.19 TThread.GetTickCount64
Synopsis: Return tick count (64-bit)
Declaration: class function GetTickCount64; Static
Visibility: public
Description: GetTickCount64 simply calls SysUtils.GetTickCount64 (233) and is implemented for Delphi
compatibility only.
See also: SysUtils.GetTickCount64 (233)
4.75.20 TThread.AfterConstruction
Synopsis: Code to be executed after construction but before execute.
Visibility: public
Description: AfterConstruction is overridden in TThread, it starts the thread if it was created in a sus-
pended state. When overriding this method, the inherited method must be called.
4.75.21 TThread.Start
Synopsis: Starts a thread that was created in a suspended state.
Declaration: procedure Start
Visibility: public
Description: The effect of this method is currently the same as calling TThread.Resume after creating a thread
in a suspended state. This method was added for Delphi-compatibility, where it was introduced after
TThread.Suspend and TThread.Resume were deprecated.
See also: TThread.Create (449)
4.75.22 TThread.Resume
Synopsis: Resumes the thread’s execution. Deprecated, see TThread.Start
Declaration: procedure Resume
Visibility: public
Description: Resumes the thread’s execution. Deprecated, see TThread.Start
See also: TThread.Start (452), TThread.Suspend (453)
452
4.75.23 TThread.Suspend
Synopsis: Suspends the thread’s execution.
Declaration: procedure Suspend

Visibility: public
Description: On non-Windows platforms, a thread can only suspend itself. Other threads can wake up a suspended
thread by calling TThread.Start.
See also: TThread.Resume (452), TThread.Start (452)
4.75.24 TThread.Terminate
Synopsis: Signals the thread it should terminate.
Declaration: procedure Terminate
Visibility: public
Description: Signals the thread it should terminate.
4.75.25 TThread.WaitFor
Synopsis: Waits for the thread to terminate and returns the exit status.
Declaration: function WaitFor : Integer

Visibility: public
Description: Waits for the thread to terminate and returns the exit status.
4.75.26 TThread.CurrentThread
Synopsis: Return current thread instance
Declaration: Property CurrentThread : TThread
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: TThread.CurrentThread can be used to get the current thread instance. This is useful in code
that is not inside a TThread implementation, but which needs access to the current thread.
For threads that were created outside of FPC code (DLLs or a calling program) this will return a
dummy TThread instance.
See also: TThread.ExternalThread (455)
453
4.75.27 TThread.ProcessorCount
Synopsis: Return the processor count for this system
Declaration: Property ProcessorCount : LongWord

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: ProcessorCount returns the processor count for this system.

Whether this is the number of cores or the number of CPUs present in the hardware, is deliberately
unspecified. The number of cores can also vary during the lifetime of the program, and the FPC
implementation does not guarantee that this will always match, the value is set at program start.
As such, the number specified should only be used as an indication of how many threads can be
executed at once by the system.
See also: TThread.IsSingleProcessor (454)
4.75.28 TThread.IsSingleProcessor
Synopsis: Is the current system single processor or not
Declaration: Property IsSingleProcessor : Boolean
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Thread.IsSingleProcessor returns True if TThread.ProcessorCount (454) is less than or
equal to 1, False otherwise.
See also: TThread.ProcessorCount (454)
4.75.29 TThread.FreeOnTerminate
Synopsis: Indicates whether the thread should free itself when it stops executing.
Declaration: Property FreeOnTerminate : Boolean
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Indicates whether the thread should free itself when it stops executing.
4.75.30 TThread.Handle
Synopsis: Returns the thread handle.
Declaration: Property Handle : TThreadID
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Returns the thread handle.
454
4.75.31 TThread.ExternalThread
Synopsis: Is the thread instance an external thread ?
Declaration: Property ExternalThread : Boolean

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: ExternalThread returns True if the thread is an externally created thread. If the thread was
created by the FPC program, this returns False. This is useful for examining instances returned by
TThread.CurrentThread (453).
See also: TThread.CurrentThread (453)
4.75.32 TThread.Priority
Synopsis: Returns the thread priority.
Declaration: Property Priority : TThreadPriority
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Returns the thread priority.
4.75.33 TThread.Suspended
Synopsis: Indicates whether the thread is suspended.
Declaration: Property Suspended : Boolean
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Indicates whether the thread is suspended.
4.75.34 TThread.Finished
Synopsis: Has the thread finished executing
Declaration: Property Finished : Boolean
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Finished is True when TThread.Execue (447) has finished executing, but the thread is still
cleaning up (calling OnTerminate, etc).
See also: TThread.Execue (447), TThread.OnTerminate (456)
455
4.75.35 TThread.ThreadID
Synopsis: Returns the thread ID.
Declaration: Property ThreadID : TThreadID

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Returns the thread ID.
4.75.36 TThread.OnTerminate
Synopsis: Event called when the thread terminates.
Declaration: Property OnTerminate : TNotifyEvent
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Event called when the thread terminates.
4.75.37 TThread.FatalException
Synopsis: Exception that occured during thread execution
Declaration: Property FatalException : TObject

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: FatalException contains the exception that occurred during the thread’s execution.
4.76 TThreadList
4.76.1 Description
TThreadList is a thread-safe Tlist (369) implementation. Unlike TList, it can be accessed read-
write by multiple threads: the list implementation will take care of locking the list when adding or
removing items from the list.

457 Add Adds an element to the list.
457 Clear Removes all emements from the list.
457 Create Creates a new thread-safe list.
457 Destroy Destroys the list instance.
458 LockList Locks the list for exclusive access.
458 Remove Removes an item from the list.
458 UnlockList Unlocks the list after it was locked.
456

458 Duplicates rw Describes what to do with duplicates
4.76.4 TThreadList.Create
Synopsis: Creates a new thread-safe list.
Visibility: public
Description: Create instantiates a new TThreadList instance. It initializes a critical section and an internal
list object.
See also: TThreadList.Destroy (457)
4.76.5 TThreadList.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys the list instance.

Visibility: public
Description: Destroy finalizes the critical section, clears the internal list object and calls the inherited destruc-
tor.
See also: TThreadList.Create (457)
4.76.6 TThreadList.Add
Synopsis: Adds an element to the list.
Declaration: procedure Add(Item: Pointer)
Visibility: public
Description: Add attempts to lock the list and adds the pointer Item to the list. After the pointer was added, the
list is unlocked again.
See also: LockList (458), Clear (457), Remove (458), UnlockList (458)
4.76.7 TThreadList.Clear
Synopsis: Removes all emements from the list.
Visibility: public
Description: Clear attempts to lock the list and then clears the list; all items are removed from the list. After
the list is cleared, it is again unlocked.
See also: LockList (458), Add (457), Remove (458), UnlockList (458)
457
4.76.8 TThreadList.LockList
Synopsis: Locks the list for exclusive access.
Declaration: function LockList : TList

Visibility: public
Description: LockList locks the list for exclusive access. Locklist uses an internal critical section, so all rules
for multiple locking of critical sections apply to locklist/unlocklist as well.
See also: Clear (457), Add (457), Remove (458), UnlockList (458)
4.76.9 TThreadList.Remove
Synopsis: Removes an item from the list.
Declaration: procedure Remove(Item: Pointer)
Visibility: public
Description: Remove attempts to lock the list and then removes Item from the list. After the item is removed,
the list is again unlocked.
See also: LockList (458), Add (457), Clear (457), UnlockList (458)
4.76.10 TThreadList.UnlockList
Synopsis: Unlocks the list after it was locked.
Declaration: procedure UnlockList
Visibility: public
Description: UnLockList unlocks the list when it was locked for exclusive access. UnLocklist and LockList
use an internal critical section, so all rules for multiple locking/unlocking of critical sections apply.
See also: Clear (457), Add (457), Remove (458), lockList (458)
4.76.11 TThreadList.Duplicates
Synopsis: Describes what to do with duplicates

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Duplicates describes what the threadlist should do when a duplicate pointer is added to the list.
It is identical in behaviour to the Duplicates (426) property of TStringList (423).
See also: TDuplicates (239)
458
4.77 TWriter
4.77.1 Description
The TWriter class is a writer class that implements generic component streaming capabilities,
independent of the format of the data in the stream. It uses a driver class TAbstractObjectWriter
(289) to do the actual reading of data. The interface of the TWriter class should be identical to the
interface in Delphi.
Note that the TWriter design is such that it will write a single component to a stream. It will write
all children of this component, but it is not designed to write multiple components in succession to
one stream.
It should never be necessary to create an instance of this class directly. Instead, the TStream.WriteComponent
See also: TFiler (347), TWriter (459), TAbstractObjectReader (281)

460 Create Creates a new Writer with a stream and bufsize.
460 DefineBinaryProperty Callback used when defining and streaming custom properties.
460 DefineProperty Callback used when defining and streaming custom properties.
460 Destroy Destroys the writer instance.
461 WriteBoolean Write boolean value to the stream.
461 WriteChar Write a character to the stream.
461 WriteCollection Write a collection to the stream.
461 WriteComponent Stream a component to the stream.
463 WriteCurrency Write a currency value to the stream
462 WriteDate Write a date to the stream.
462 WriteDescendent Write a descendent component to the stream.
462 WriteFloat Write a float to the stream.
463 WriteIdent Write an identifier to the stream.
463 WriteInteger Write an integer to the stream.
463 WriteListBegin Write a start-of-list marker to the stream.
464 WriteListEnd Write an end-of-list marker to the stream.
464 WriteRootComponent Write a root component to the stream.
463 WriteSet Write a set value to the stream
464 WriteSignature
462 WriteSingle Write a single-type real to the stream.
464 WriteString Write a string to the stream.
462 WriteWideChar Write widechar to stream
464 WriteWideString Write a widestring value to the stream
459

466 Driver r Driver used when writing to the stream.
465 OnFindAncestor rw Event occurring when an ancestor component must
be found.
465 OnWriteMethodProperty rw Handler from writing method properties.
466 OnWriteStringProperty rw Event handler for translating strings written to
stream.
466 PropertyPath r Path to the property that is currently being written
465 RootAncestor rw Ancestor of root component.
4.77.4 TWriter.Create
Synopsis: Creates a new Writer with a stream and bufsize.
Declaration: constructor Create(ADriver: TAbstractObjectWriter)
constructor Create(Stream: TStream;BufSize: Integer)
Visibility: public
Description: Creates a new Writer with a stream and bufsize.
4.77.5 TWriter.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroys the writer instance.

Visibility: public
Description: Destroys the writer instance.
4.77.6 TWriter.DefineProperty
Synopsis: Callback used when defining and streaming custom properties.
Declaration: procedure DefineProperty(const Name: string;ReadData: TReaderProc;
AWriteData: TWriterProc;HasData: Boolean)
; Override
Visibility: public
Description: Callback used when defining and streaming custom properties.
4.77.7 TWriter.DefineBinaryProperty
Synopsis: Callback used when defining and streaming custom properties.
Declaration: procedure DefineBinaryProperty(const Name: string;ReadData: TStreamProc;
AWriteData: TStreamProc;HasData: Boolean)
; Override
Visibility: public
Description: Callback used when defining and streaming custom properties.
460
4.77.8 TWriter.Write
Declaration: procedure Write(const Buffer;Count: LongInt); Virtual

Visibility: public
See also: TBinaryObjectWriter.Write (309), TAbstractObjectWriter.Write (290)
4.77.9 TWriter.WriteBoolean
Synopsis: Write boolean value to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteBoolean(Value: Boolean)
Visibility: public
Description: Write boolean value to the stream.
4.77.10 TWriter.WriteCollection
Synopsis: Write a collection to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteCollection(Value: TCollection)

Visibility: public
Description: Write a collection to the stream.
4.77.11 TWriter.WriteComponent
Synopsis: Stream a component to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteComponent(Component: TComponent)
Visibility: public
Description: Stream a component to the stream.
4.77.12 TWriter.WriteChar
Synopsis: Write a character to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteChar(Value: Char)
Visibility: public
Description: Write a character to the stream.
461
4.77.13 TWriter.WriteWideChar
Synopsis: Write widechar to stream
Declaration: procedure WriteWideChar(Value: WideChar)

Visibility: public
Description: WriteWideChar writes a widechar to the stream. This actually writes a widestring of length 1.
See also: TReader.ReadWideChar (398), TWriter.WriteWideString (464)
4.77.14 TWriter.WriteDescendent
Synopsis: Write a descendent component to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteDescendent(ARoot: TComponent;AAncestor: TComponent)
Visibility: public
Description: Write a descendent component to the stream.
4.77.15 TWriter.WriteFloat
Synopsis: Write a float to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteFloat(const Value: Extended)
Visibility: public
Description: Write a float to the stream.
4.77.16 TWriter.WriteSingle
Synopsis: Write a single-type real to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteSingle(const Value: Single)

Visibility: public
Description: Write a single-type real to the stream.
4.77.17 TWriter.WriteDate
Synopsis: Write a date to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteDate(const Value: TDateTime)
Visibility: public
Description: Write a date to the stream.
462
4.77.18 TWriter.WriteCurrency
Synopsis: Write a currency value to the stream
Declaration: procedure WriteCurrency(const Value: Currency)
Visibility: public
Description: WriteCurrency writes a currency typed value to the stream. This method does nothing except
call the driver method of the driver being used.
See also: TReader.ReadCurrency (399)
4.77.19 TWriter.WriteIdent
Synopsis: Write an identifier to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteIdent(const Ident: string)
Visibility: public
Description: Write an identifier to the stream.
4.77.20 TWriter.WriteInteger
Synopsis: Write an integer to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteInteger(Value: LongInt); Overload
procedure WriteInteger(Value: Int64); Overload
Visibility: public
Description: Write an integer to the stream.
4.77.21 TWriter.WriteSet
Synopsis: Write a set value to the stream
Declaration: procedure WriteSet(Value: LongInt;SetType: Pointer)
Visibility: public
Description: WriteSet writes a set Value consisting of elements with type EnumType. The set must be
encoded as an integer where each element is encoded in a bit of the integer. Thus, at most an
enumerated type with 32 elements can be written with this method.
Errors: No checking is performed on the validity of EnumType. It is assumed to be a valid PTypeInfo
pointer.
See also: TReader.ReadSet (400)
4.77.22 TWriter.WriteListBegin
Synopsis: Write a start-of-list marker to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteListBegin
Visibility: public
Description: Write a start-of-list marker to the stream.
463
4.77.23 TWriter.WriteListEnd
Synopsis: Write an end-of-list marker to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteListEnd
Visibility: public
Description: Write an end-of-list marker to the stream.
4.77.24 TWriter.WriteSignature
Declaration: procedure WriteSignature
Visibility: public
4.77.25 TWriter.WriteRootComponent
Synopsis: Write a root component to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteRootComponent(ARoot: TComponent)
Visibility: public
Description: Write a root component to the stream.
4.77.26 TWriter.WriteString
Synopsis: Write a string to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteString(const Value: string)
Visibility: public
Description: Write a string to the stream.
4.77.27 TWriter.WriteWideString
Synopsis: Write a widestring value to the stream
Declaration: procedure WriteWideString(const Value: WideString)
Visibility: public
Description: WriteWidestring writes a currency typed value to the stream. This method does nothing except
call the driver method of the driver being used.
See also: TReader.ReadWideString (401)
4.77.28 TWriter.WriteUnicodeString
Declaration: procedure WriteUnicodeString(const Value: UnicodeString)
Visibility: public
Description: WriteUnicodeString writes Value, a UnicodeString string to the stream. It simply passes the
string on to the WriteUnicodeString method of the writer driver class.
See also: TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteUnicodeString (311), TReader.ReadUnicodeString (402)
464
4.77.29 TWriter.WriteVariant
Declaration: procedure WriteVariant(const VarValue: Variant)

Visibility: public
Description: WriteVariant writes Value, a simple variant, o the stream. It simply passes the string on to the
WriteVariant method of the writer driver class.
See also: TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteVariant (312), TReader.ReadVariant (401)
4.77.30 TWriter.RootAncestor
Synopsis: Ancestor of root component.
Declaration: Property RootAncestor : TComponent
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Ancestor of root component.
4.77.31 TWriter.OnFindAncestor
Synopsis: Event occurring when an ancestor component must be found.
Declaration: Property OnFindAncestor : TFindAncestorEvent
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Event occurring when an ancestor component must be found.
4.77.32 TWriter.OnWriteMethodProperty
Synopsis: Handler from writing method properties.
Declaration: Property OnWriteMethodProperty : TWriteMethodPropertyEvent
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: OnWriteMethodProperty can be set by an IDE or some streaming mechanism which han-
dles dummy values for method properties; It can be used to write a real value to the stream which
will be interpreted correctly when the stream is read. See TWriteMethodPropertyEvent (248) for a
description of the arguments.
See also: TWriteMethodPropertyEvent (248), TReader.OnSetMethodProperty (404)
465
4.77.33 TWriter.OnWriteStringProperty
Synopsis: Event handler for translating strings written to stream.
Declaration: Property OnWriteStringProperty : TReadWriteStringPropertyEvent

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: OnWriteStringProperty is called whenever a string property is written to the stream. It can
be used e.g. by a translation mechanism to translate the strings on the fly, when a form is written.
See TReadWriteStringPropertyEvent (245) for a description of the various parameters.
See also: TReader.OnPropertyNotFound (403), TReader.OnSetMethodProperty (404), TReadWriteStringProp-
ertyEvent (245)
4.77.34 TWriter.Driver
Synopsis: Driver used when writing to the stream.
Declaration: Property Driver : TAbstractObjectWriter
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Driver used when writing to the stream.
4.77.35 TWriter.PropertyPath
Synopsis: Path to the property that is currently being written
Declaration: Property PropertyPath : string

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: PropertyPath is set to the property name of the class currently being written to stream. This is
only done when TPersistent (389) descendent class properties are written.
466
Chapter 5
Reference for unit ’clocale’
5.1 Overview
The clocale offers no API by itself: it just initializes the internationalization settings of the sysutils
(1476) unit with the values provided by the C library found on most Unix or Linux systems that are
POSIX compliant.
The clocale should simply be included in the uses clause of the program, preferably as one of the
first units, and the initialization section of the unit will do all the work.
Note that including this unit, links your program to the C library of the system.
It makes no sense to use this unit on a non-posix system: Windows, OS/2 or DOS - therefore it should
always be between an ifdef statement:
program myprogram;
uses
{$ifdef unix}clocale{$endif},
classes, sysutils;
467
Chapter 6
Reference for unit ’cmem’
6.1 Overview
The cmem memory manager sets the system units memory manager to a C-based memory manager:
all memory management calls are shunted through to the C memory manager, using Malloc (469),
Free (468) and ReAlloc (469). For this reason, the cmem unit should be the first unit of the uses
clause of the program.
The unit also offers the C memory calls directly as external declarations from the C library, but it is
recommended to use the normal FPC routines for this.
Obviously, including this unit links your program to the C library.

6.2.1 Constants
LibName = ’c’
LibName is the name of the library that is actually used. On most systems, this is simply "libc.so".

6.3.1 CAlloc
Synopsis: Allocate memory based on item size and count
Declaration: function CAlloc(unitSize: ptruint;UnitCount: ptruint) : pointer
Visibility: default
Description: Calloc allocates memory to hold UnitCount units of size UnitSize each. The memory is one
block of memory. It returns a pointer to the newly allocated memory block.
See also: Malloc (469), Free (468), Realloc (469)
6.3.2 Free
Synopsis: Free a previously allocated block
468
CHAPTER 6. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’CMEM’
Declaration: procedure Free(P: pointer)

Visibility: default
Description: Free returns the memory block pointed to by P to the system. After Free was called, the pointer
P is no longer valid.
See also: Malloc (469), ReAlloc (469)
6.3.3 Malloc
Synopsis: Malloc external declaration.
Declaration: function Malloc(Size: ptruint) : Pointer
Visibility: default
Description: Malloc is the external declaration of the C librarys malloc call. It accepts a size parameter,
and returns a pointer to a memory block of the requested size or Nil if no more memory could be
allocated.
See also: Free (468), ReAlloc (469)
6.3.4 ReAlloc
Synopsis: Reallocates a memory block
Declaration: function ReAlloc(P: Pointer;Size: ptruint) : pointer
Visibility: default
Description: ReAlloc re-allocates a block of memory pointed to by p. The new block will have size Size, and
as much data as was available or as much data as fits is copied from the old to the new location.
See also: Malloc (469), Free (468)
469
Chapter 7
Reference for unit ’collation_de’
7.1 Overview
The collation_de unit registers the German Unicode collation (de). This collation bases itself on the
DUCET collation, so that collation will be included as well.
This unit does not contain any routines. It simply registers the collation in the initialization section
of the unit, so including the unit in the uses clause of the program is sufficient.
470
Chapter 8
Reference for unit ’collation_es’
8.1 Overview
The collation_es unit registers the Spanish Unicode collation (de). This collation bases itself on the
471
Chapter 9
Reference for unit ’collation_fr_ca’
9.1 Overview
The collation_fr_ca unit registers the French Unicode collation (fr). This collation bases itself on
the DUCET collation, so that collation will be included as well.
472
Chapter 10
Reference for unit ’collation_ja’
10.1 Overview
The collation_ja unit registers the Japanese Unicode collation (ja). This collation bases itself on the
473
Chapter 11
Reference for unit ’collation_ko’
11.1 Overview
The collation_ko unit registers the Korean Unicode collation (ko). This collation bases itself on the
474
Chapter 12
Reference for unit ’collation_ru’
12.1 Overview
The collation_ru unit registers the Russian Unicode collation (ru). This collation bases itself on the
475
Chapter 13
Reference for unit ’collation_sv’
13.1 Overview
The collation_sv unit registers the Swedish Unicode collation (sv). This collation bases itself on the
476
Chapter 14
Reference for unit ’collation_zh’
14.1 Overview
The collation_zh unit registers the Chinese Unicode collation (zh). This collation bases itself on the
477
Chapter 15
Reference for unit ’cp1250’
15.1 Overview
The cp1250 unit registers single-byte codepage 1250. This is necessary to convert single-byte
strings using codepage 1250 to unicode strings.
This unit does not contain any routines. It simply registers the code page data in the initialization
section of the unit, so including the unit in the uses clause of the program is sufficient.
478
Chapter 16
16.1 Overview
479
Chapter 17
17.1 Overview
480
Chapter 18
18.1 Overview
481
Chapter 19
19.1 Overview
482
Chapter 20
20.1 Overview
483
Chapter 21
21.1 Overview
484
Chapter 22
22.1 Overview
485
Chapter 23
23.1 Overview
486
Chapter 24
24.1 Overview
The cp437 unit registers single-byte codepage 437. This is necessary to convert single-byte strings
using codepage 437 to unicode strings.
487
Chapter 25
25.1 Overview
488
Chapter 26
26.1 Overview
489
Chapter 27
27.1 Overview
490
Chapter 28
28.1 Overview
491
Chapter 29
29.1 Overview
492
Chapter 30
30.1 Overview
493
Chapter 31
Reference for unit ’cp8859_1’
31.1 Overview
The cp8859_1 unit registers single-byte codepage 8859-1. This is necessary to convert single-byte
strings using codepage 8859-1 to unicode strings.
494
Chapter 32
32.1 Overview
495
Chapter 33
33.1 Overview
496
Chapter 34
34.1 Overview
497
Chapter 35
35.1 Overview
498
Chapter 36
36.1 Overview
499
Chapter 37
37.1 Overview
500
Chapter 38
38.1 Overview
501
Chapter 39
Reference for unit ’cpall’
39.1 Used units
Table 39.1: Used units by unit ’cpall’
Name Page
cp1250 478
cp1251 479
cp1252 480
cp1253 481
cp1254 482
cp1255 483
cp1256 484
cp1257 485
cp1258 486
cp437 487
cp646 488
cp850 489
cp852 490
cp856 491
cp866 492
cp874 493
cp8859_1 494
cp8859_2 495
cp8859_5 496
System 1224
39.2 Overview
The cpall unit registers all known single-byte codepages: 1251 (502), 866 (502), ISO 8856-5
(502) (cyrillic), 8859-1 (502), 8859-2 (502), 1253 (502) (greek), 850 (502), 437 (502), 1252 (502),
646 (502), 874 (502), 856 (502), 1250 (502), 1254 (502), 1255 (502), 1256 (502), 1257 (502), 1258
(502), 852 (502).
This unit does not contain any routines. It simply uses the other units so all corresponding code pages
are registered.
502
Chapter 40
Reference for unit ’Crt’
40.1 Overview
This chapter describes the CRT unit for Free Pascal, both under dos linux and Windows. The unit was
first written for dos by Florian klaempfl. The unit was ported to linux by Mark May and enhanced
by Michael Van Canneyt and Peter Vreman. It works on the linux console, and in xterm and rxvt
windows under X-Windows. The functionality for both is the same, except that under linux the use of
an early implementation (versions 0.9.1 and earlier of the compiler) the crt unit automatically cleared
the screen at program startup.
There are some caveats when using the CRT unit:
• Programs using the CRT unit will not be usable when input/output is being redirected on the
command-line.
• For similar reasons they are not usable as CGI-scripts for use with a webserver.
• The use of the CRT unit and the graph unit may not always be supported.
• The CRT unit is not thread safe.
• On linux or other unix OSes , executing other programs that expect special terminal behaviour
(using one of the special functions in the linux unit) will not work. The terminal is set in RAW
mode, which will destroy most terminal emulation settings.
• The CRT unit stems from the TP/Dos area. It is designed to work with single-byte character
sets, where 1 char = 1 byte. That means that widestrings or UTF-8 encoded (ansi)strings will
not correctly work.

40.2.1 Constants
Black = 0
Black color attribute
Blink = 128
Blink attribute
503
CHAPTER 40. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’CRT’
Blue = 1
Blue color attribute
Brown = 6
Brown color attribute
BW40 = 0
40 columns black and white screen mode.
BW80 = 2
80 columns black and white screen mode.
C40 = CO40
40 columns color screen mode.
C80 = CO80
CO40 = 1
CO80 = 3
ConsoleMaxX = 1024
ConsoleMaxY = 1024
Cyan = 3
Cyan color attribute
DarkGray = 8
Dark gray color attribute
Flushing = False
Font8x8 = 256
Internal ROM font mode
504
Green = 2
Green color attribute
LightBlue = 9
Light Blue color attribute
LightCyan = 11
Light cyan color attribute
LightGray = 7
Light gray color attribute
LightGreen = 10
Light green color attribute
LightMagenta = 13
Light magenta color attribute
LightRed = 12
Light red color attribute
Magenta = 5
Magenta color attribute
Mono = 7
Monochrome screen mode (hercules screens)
Red = 4
Red color attribute
ScreenHeight : LongInt = 25
Current screen height.
ScreenWidth : LongInt = 80
Current screen width
White = 15
White color attribute
Yellow = 14
Yellow color attribute
505
40.2.2 Types
PConsoleBuf = ^TConsoleBuf
TCharAttr = packed record

ch : Char;
attr : Byte;
end
TConsoleBuf = Array[0..ConsoleMaxX*ConsoleMaxY-1] of TCharAttr
tcrtcoord = 1..255
tcrtcoord is a subrange type for denoting CRT coordinates. It supports coordinates ranging from
1 to 255. Using this type together with range-checking turned on can be used to debug CRT code.
40.2.3 Variables
CheckBreak : Boolean
Check for CTRL-Break keystroke. Not used.
CheckEOF : Boolean
Check for EOF on standard input. Not used.
CheckSnow : Boolean
Check snow on CGA screens. Not used.
ConsoleBuf : PConsoleBuf
DirectVideo : Boolean
The DirectVideo variable controls the writing to the screen. If it is True, the cursor is set via
direct port access. If False, then the BIOS is used. This is defined under dos only.
LastMode : Word = 3
The Lastmode variable tells you which mode was last selected for the screen. It is defined on DOS
only.
TextAttr : Byte = $07
The TextAttr variable controls the attributes with which characters are written to screen.
WindMax : Word = $184f
506
The upper byte of WindMax contains the Y coordinate while the lower byte contains the X coordi-
nate. The use of this variable is deprecated, use WindMaxX and WindMaxY instead.
WindMaxX : DWord
X coordinate of lower right corner of the defined window
WindMaxY : DWord
Y coordinate of lower right corner of the defined window
WindMin : Word = $0
The upper byte of WindMin contains the Y coordinate while the lower byte contains the X coordi-
nate. The use of this variable is deprecated, use WindMinX and WindMinY instead.
WindMinX : DWord
X coordinate of upper left corner of the defined window
WindMinY : DWord
Y coordinate of upper left corner of the defined window

40.3.1 AssignCrt
Synopsis: Assign file to CRT.
Declaration: procedure AssignCrt(var F: Text)
Visibility: default
Description: AssignCrt Assigns a file F to the console. Everything written to the file F goes to the console
instead. If the console contains a window, everything is written to the window instead.
Errors: None.
See also: Window (518)
Listing: ./crtex/ex1.pp
Program Example1 ;
uses C r t ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e A s s i g n C r t f u n c t i o n . }
var
F : Text ;
begin
AssignCrt ( F ) ;
Rewrite ( F ) ; { Don ’ t f o r g e t t o open f o r o u t p u t ! }
WriteLn ( F , ’ T h i s i s w r i t t e n t o t h e Assigned F i l e ’ ) ;
Close ( F ) ;
end .
507
40.3.2 ClrEol
Synopsis: Clear from cursor position till end of line.
Declaration: procedure ClrEol

Visibility: default
Description: ClrEol clears the current line, starting from the cursor position, to the end of the window. The
cursor doesn’t move
Errors: None.
See also: DelLine (510), InsLine (512), ClrScr (508)
Program Example9 ;
uses C r t ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e C l r E o l f u n c t i o n . }
var
I , J : integer ;
begin
For I : = 1 to 1 5 do
For J : = 1 to 8 0 do
begin
gotoxy ( j , i ) ;
Write ( j mod 1 0 ) ;
end ;
Window ( 5 , 5 , 7 5 , 1 2 ) ;
Write ( ’ T h i s l i n e w i l l be c l e a r e d from ’ ,
’ here t i l l t h e r i g h t o f t h e window ’ ) ;
GotoXY ( 2 7 ,WhereY ) ;
ReadKey ;
ClrEol ;
WriteLn ;
end .
40.3.3 ClrScr
Synopsis: Clear current window.
Declaration: procedure ClrScr
Visibility: default
Description: ClrScr clears the current window (using the current colors), and sets the cursor in the top left
corner of the current window.
Errors: None.
508
Program Example8 ;
uses C r t ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e C l r S c r f u n c t i o n . }
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Press any key t o c l e a r t h e screen ’ ) ;
ReadKey ;
ClrScr ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Have f u n w i t h t h e c l e a r e d screen ’ ) ;
end .
40.3.4 cursorbig
Synopsis: Show big cursor
Declaration: procedure cursorbig
Visibility: default
Description: CursorBig makes the cursor a big rectangle. Not implemented on unixes.
Errors: None.
See also: CursorOn (509), CursorOff (509)
40.3.5 cursoroff
Synopsis: Hide cursor
Declaration: procedure cursoroff

Visibility: default
Description: CursorOff switches the cursor off (i.e. the cursor is no longer visible). Not implemented on
unixes.
Errors: None.
See also: CursorOn (509), CursorBig (509)
40.3.6 cursoron
Synopsis: Display cursor
Declaration: procedure cursoron

Visibility: default
Description: CursorOn switches the cursor on. Not implemented on unixes.
Errors: None.
See also: CursorBig (509), CursorOff (509)
509
40.3.7 Delay
Synopsis: Delay program execution.
Declaration: procedure Delay(MS: Word)

Visibility: default
Description: Delay waits a specified number of milliseconds. The number of specified seconds is an approxi-
mation, and may be off a lot, if system load is high.
Errors: None
See also: Sound (515), NoSound (514)
Program Example15 ;
uses C r t ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Delay f u n c t i o n . }

var
i : longint ;
begin
WriteLn ( ’ Counting Down ’ ) ;
f o r i : = 1 0 downto 1 do
begin
WriteLn ( i ) ;
Delay ( 1 0 0 0 ) ; { Wait one second }
end ;
WriteLn ( ’BOOM ! ! ! ’ ) ;
end .
40.3.8 DelLine
Synopsis: Delete line at cursor position.
Declaration: procedure DelLine
Visibility: default
Description: DelLine removes the current line. Lines following the current line are scrolled 1 line up, and an
empty line is inserted at the bottom of the current window. The cursor doesn’t move.
Errors: None.
See also: ClrEol (508), InsLine (512), ClrScr (508)
Program Example10 ;
uses C r t ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e I n s L i n e f u n c t i o n . }
begin
ClrScr ;
WriteLn ;
WriteLn ( ’ L i n e 1 ’ ) ;
510
WriteLn ( ’ Line 2 ’ ) ;
WriteLn ;
WriteLn ( ’ Oops , L i n e 2 i s l i s t e d t w i c e , ’ ,
’ l e t ’ ’ s delete the l i n e at the cursor postion ’ ) ;
GotoXY ( 1 , 3 ) ;
ReadKey ;
DelLine ;
GotoXY ( 1 , 1 0 ) ;
end .
40.3.9 GotoXY
Synopsis: Set cursor position on screen.
Declaration: procedure GotoXY(X: tcrtcoord;Y: tcrtcoord)
Visibility: default
Description: GotoXY positions the cursor at (X,Y), X in horizontal, Y in vertical direction relative to the origin
of the current window. The origin is located at (1,1), the upper-left corner of the window.
Errors: None.
See also: WhereX (517), WhereY (517), Window (518)
Program Example6 ;
uses C r t ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GotoXY f u n c t i o n . }
begin
ClrScr ;
GotoXY ( 1 0 , 1 0 ) ;
Write ( ’ 10 ,10 ’ ) ;
GotoXY ( 7 0 , 2 0 ) ;
Write ( ’ 70 ,20 ’ ) ;
GotoXY ( 1 , 2 2 ) ;
end .
40.3.10 HighVideo
Synopsis: Switch to highlighted text mode
Declaration: procedure HighVideo
Visibility: default
Description: HighVideo switches the output to highlighted text. (It sets the high intensity bit of the video
attribute)
Errors: None.
See also: TextColor (516), TextBackground (515), LowVideo (513), NormVideo (513)
511
Program Example14 ;
uses C r t ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e LowVideo , HighVideo , NormVideo f u n c t i o n s . }
begin
LowVideo ;
WriteLn ( ’ T h i s i s w r i t t e n w i t h LowVideo ’ ) ;
HighVideo ;
WriteLn ( ’ T h i s i s w r i t t e n w i t h HighVideo ’ ) ;
NormVideo ;
WriteLn ( ’ T h i s i s w r i t t e n w i t h NormVideo ’ ) ;
end .
40.3.11 InsLine
Synopsis: Insert an empty line at cursor position
Declaration: procedure InsLine
Visibility: default
Description: InsLine inserts an empty line at the current cursor position. Lines following the current line are
scrolled 1 line down, causing the last line to disappear from the window. The cursor doesn’t move.
Errors: None.
See also: ClrEol (508), DelLine (510), ClrScr (508)
Program Example10 ;
uses C r t ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e I n s L i n e f u n c t i o n . }
begin
ClrScr ;
WriteLn ;
WriteLn ;
WriteLn ( ’ Oops , f o r g o t L i n e 2 , l e t ’ ’ s i n s e r t a t t h e c u r s o r p o s t i o n ’ ) ;
GotoXY ( 1 , 3 ) ;
ReadKey ;
InsLine ;
Write ( ’ L i n e 2 ’ ) ;
GotoXY ( 1 , 1 0 ) ;
end .
40.3.12 KeyPressed
Synopsis: Check if there is a keypress in the keybuffer
Declaration: function KeyPressed : Boolean
512
Visibility: default
Description: Keypressed scans the keyboard buffer and sees if a key has been pressed. If this is the case, True
is returned. If not, False is returned. The Shift, Alt, Ctrl keys are not reported. The key is
not removed from the buffer, and can hence still be read after the KeyPressed function has been
called.
Errors: None.
See also: ReadKey (514)
Program Example2 ;
uses C r t ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e KeyPressed f u n c t i o n . }
begin
WriteLn ( ’ W a i t i n g u n t i l a key i s pressed ’ ) ;
repeat
u n t i l KeyPressed ;
{ The key i s n o t Read ,
so i t should a l s o be o u t p u t t e d a t t h e commandline }
end .
40.3.13 LowVideo
Synopsis: Switch to low intensity colors.
Declaration: procedure LowVideo
Visibility: default
Description: LowVideo switches the output to non-highlighted text. (It clears the high intensity bit of the video
attribute)
For an example, see HighVideo (511)
Errors: None.
See also: TextColor (516), TextBackground (515), HighVideo (511), NormVideo (513)
40.3.14 NormVideo
Synopsis: Return to normal (startup) modus
Declaration: procedure NormVideo
Visibility: default
Description: NormVideo switches the output to the defaults, read at startup. (The defaults are read from the
cursor position at startup)
For an example, see HighVideo (511)
Errors: None.
See also: TextColor (516), TextBackground (515), LowVideo (513), HighVideo (511)
513
40.3.15 NoSound
Synopsis: Stop system speaker
Declaration: procedure NoSound
Visibility: default
Description: NoSound stops the speaker sound. This call is not supported on all operating systems.
Errors: None.
See also: Sound (515)
Program Example16 ;
uses C r t ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Sound and NoSound f u n c t i o n . }
var
i : longint ;
begin
WriteLn ( ’ You w i l l hear some tones from your speaker ’ ) ;
while ( i <15000) do
begin
inc ( i , 5 0 0 ) ;
Sound ( i ) ;
Delay ( 1 0 0 ) ;
end ;
WriteLn ( ’ Q u i e t now ! ’ ) ;
NoSound ; { Stop n o i s e }
end .
40.3.16 ReadKey
Synopsis: Read key from keybuffer
Declaration: function ReadKey : Char
Visibility: default
Description: ReadKey reads 1 key from the keyboard buffer, and returns this. If an extended or function key has
been pressed, then the zero ASCII code is returned. You can then read the scan code of the key with
a second ReadKey call.
Key mappings under Linux can cause the wrong key to be reported by ReadKey, so caution is
needed when using ReadKey.
Errors: None.
See also: KeyPressed (512)
Program Example3 ;
uses C r t ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e ReadKey f u n c t i o n . }
514
var
ch : char ;
begin
w r i t e l n ( ’ Press L e f t / Right , Esc= Q u i t ’ ) ;
repeat
ch : = ReadKey ;
case ch of
# 0 : begin
ch : = ReadKey ; { Read ScanCode }
case ch of
# 7 5 : WriteLn ( ’ L e f t ’ ) ;
# 7 7 : WriteLn ( ’ R i g h t ’ ) ;
end ;
end ;
# 2 7 : WriteLn ( ’ESC ’ ) ;
end ;
u n t i l ch =#27 { Esc }
end .
40.3.17 Sound
Synopsis: Sound system speaker
Declaration: procedure Sound(Hz: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: Sound sounds the speaker at a frequency of hz. Under Windows, a system sound is played and the
frequency parameter is ignored. On other operating systems, this routine may not be implemented.
Errors: None.
See also: NoSound (514)
40.3.18 TextBackground
Synopsis: Set text background
Declaration: procedure TextBackground(Color: Byte)
Visibility: default
Description: TextBackground sets the background color to CL. CL can be one of the predefined color con-
stants.
Errors: None.
See also: TextColor (516), HighVideo (511), LowVideo (513), NormVideo (513)
Program Example13 ;
uses C r t ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e TextBackground f u n c t i o n . }
begin
515
T e x t C o l o r ( White ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ T h i s i s w r i t t e n i n w i t h t h e d e f a u l t background c o l o r ’ ) ;
TextBackground ( Green ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ T h i s i s w r i t t e n i n w i t h a Green background ’ ) ;
TextBackground ( Brown ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ T h i s i s w r i t t e n i n w i t h a Brown background ’ ) ;
TextBackground ( Black ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ Back w i t h a b l a c k background ’ ) ;
end .
40.3.19 TextColor
Synopsis: Set text color
Declaration: procedure TextColor(Color: Byte)
Visibility: default
Description: TextColor sets the foreground color to CL. CL can be one of the predefined color constants.
Errors: None.
See also: TextBackground (515), HighVideo (511), LowVideo (513), NormVideo (513)
Program Example12 ;
uses C r t ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e T e x t C o l o r f u n c t i o n . }
begin
WriteLn ( ’ T h i s i s w r i t t e n i n the d e f a u l t c o l o r ’ ) ;
T e x t C o l o r ( Red ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ T h i s i s w r i t t e n i n Red ’ ) ;
T e x t C o l o r ( White ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ T h i s i s w r i t t e n i n White ’ ) ;
TextColor ( LightBlue ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ T h i s i s w r i t t e n i n L i g h t Blue ’ ) ;
end .
40.3.20 TextMode
Synopsis: Set screen mode.
Declaration: procedure TextMode(Mode: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: TextMode sets the textmode of the screen (i.e. the number of lines and columns of the screen).
The lower byte is use to set the VGA text mode.
This procedure is only implemented on dos.
Errors: None.
516
40.3.21 WhereX
Synopsis: Return X (horizontal) cursor position
Declaration: function WhereX : tcrtcoord

Visibility: default
Description: WhereX returns the current X-coordinate of the cursor, relative to the current window. The origin
is (1,1), in the upper-left corner of the window.
Errors: None.
See also: GotoXY (511), WhereY (517), Window (518)
Program Example7 ;
uses C r t ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e WhereX and WhereY f u n c t i o n s . }
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Cursor p o s t i o n : X= ’ ,WhereX , ’ Y= ’ ,WhereY ) ;
end .
40.3.22 WhereY
Synopsis: Return Y (vertical) cursor position
Declaration: function WhereY : tcrtcoord
Visibility: default
Description: WhereY returns the current Y-coordinate of the cursor, relative to the current window. The origin is
(1,1), in the upper-left corner of the window.
Errors: None.
See also: GotoXY (511), WhereX (517), Window (518)
Program Example7 ;
uses C r t ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e WhereX and WhereY f u n c t i o n s . }
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Cursor p o s t i o n : X= ’ ,WhereX , ’ Y= ’ ,WhereY ) ;
end .
517
40.3.23 Window
Synopsis: Create new window on screen.
Declaration: procedure Window(X1: Byte;Y1: Byte;X2: Byte;Y2: Byte)

Visibility: default
Description: Window creates a window on the screen, to which output will be sent. (X1,Y1) are the coordinates
of the upper left corner of the window, (X2,Y2) are the coordinates of the bottom right corner of the
window. These coordinates are relative to the entire screen, with the top left corner equal to (1,1).
Further coordinate operations, except for the next Window call, are relative to the window’s top left
corner.
Errors: None.
See also: GotoXY (511), WhereX (517), WhereY (517), ClrScr (508)
Program Example5 ;
uses C r t ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Window f u n c t i o n . }
begin
ClrScr ;
WriteLn ( ’ C r e a t i n g a window from 3 0 , 1 0 t o 5 0 , 2 0 ’ ) ;
Window ( 3 0 , 1 0 , 5 0 , 2 0 ) ;
WriteLn ( ’We are now w r i t i n g i n t h i s s m a l l window we j u s t created , we ’ +
’ can ’ ’ t g e t o u t s i d e i t when w r i t i n g l o n g l i n e s l i k e t h i s one ’ ) ;
Write ( ’ Press any key t o c l e a r t h e window ’ ) ;
ReadKey ;
ClrScr ;
Write ( ’ The window i s c l e a r e d , press any key t o r e s t o r e t o f u l l s c r e e n ’ ) ;
ReadKey ;
{ F u l l Screen i s 8 0 x25 }
Window ( 1 , 1 , 8 0 , 2 5 ) ;
Clrscr ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Back i n F u l l Screen ’ ) ;
end .
518
Chapter 41
Reference for unit ’cthreads’
41.1 Overview
The CThreads unit initializes the system unit’s thread management routines with an implementation
based on the POSIX thread managing routines in the C library. This assures that C libraries that are
thread-aware still work if they are linked to by a FPC program.
It doesn’t offer any API by itself: the initialization section of the unit just initializes the ThreadManager
record in the System (1224) unit. This is done using the SetCThreadManager (519) call
The cthreads unit simply needs to be included in the uses clause of the program, preferably the very
first unit, and the initialization section of the unit will do all the work.
Note that including this unit links your program to the C library of the system.
It makes no sense to use this unit on a non-posix system: Windows, OS/2 or DOS, therefor it should
always between an ifdef statement:
program myprogram;
uses
{$ifdef unix}cthreads{$endif},
classes, sysutils;
The Lazarus IDE inserts this conditional automatically for each new started program.

41.2.1 SetCThreadManager
Synopsis: Sets the thread manager to the C thread manager
Declaration: procedure SetCThreadManager
Visibility: default
Description: SetCThreadManager actually sets the thread manager to the C thread manager. It can be called
to re-set the thread manager if the thread manager was set to some other thread manager during the
life-time of the program.
519
Chapter 42
Reference for unit ’ctypes’
42.1 Used units
Table 42.1: Used units by unit ’ctypes’
Name Page
System 1224
unixtype 1784
42.2 Overview
The ctypes unit contains the definitions of commonly found C types. It can be used when interfaces
to C libraries need to be defined. The types here are correct on all platforms, 32 or 64 bit.
The main advantage of using this file is to make sure that all C header import units use the same
definitions for basic C types.
The h2pas program can include the ctypes unit automatically in the units it generates. The -C
command-line switch can be used for this.

42.3.1 Types
C boolean (longbool)
C character type (No signedness specification, 8 bit integer)
Double precision floating point type (double)
520
CHAPTER 42. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’CTYPES’
Single precision floating point type (single)
C integer (commonly 32 bit)
16-bit signed integer.
32-bit signed integer (commonly: int)
64-bit integer
8-bit signed integer
long integer (32/64 bit, depending on CPU register size)
clongdouble = packed Array[0..15] of Byte
Long precision floating point type (extended/double, depending on CPU)
Long (64-bit) integer
Generic type to indicate offset
C signed character type (8 bit signed integer)
Short integer (16 bit)
Signed integer (commonly 32 bit)
521
Signed integer (commonly 32 bit)
Generic type to contain a size of all kinds of structures
Signed long integer (32/64 bit, depending on CPU register size)
Signed long (64-bit) integer
Short signed integer (16 bit)
C unsigned character type (8 bit unsigned integer).
Unsigned integer (commonly 32 bit)
16-bit unsigned integer.
32-bit unsigned integer
Unsigned 64-bit integer
8-bit unsigned integer
Unsigned long integer (32/64 bit, depending on CPU register size)
Unsigned long (64-bit) integer
522
Unsigned integer (commonly 32 bit)
Short unsigned integer (16 bit)
Pointer to cbool (520) type.
Pointer to cchar (520) type.
Pointer to cint (521) type.
Pointer to cint16 (521) type.
Pointer to clong (521) type.
Pclongdouble = ^clongdouble
Pointer to clongdouble (521) type.
523
Pointer to clonglong (521) type.
Pointer to cschar (521) type.
Pointer to cshort (521) type.
Pointer to csigned (521) type.
Pointer to csint (522) type.
Pointer to generic size type
Pointer to cslong (522) type.
Pointer to cslonglong (522) type.
Pointer to csshort (522) type.
Pointer to cuchar (522) type.
Pointer to cuint (522) type.
Pointer to cuint16 (522) type.
524
Pointer to culong (522) type.
Pointer to culonglong (522) type.
Pointer to cunsigned (523) type.
Pointer to cushort (523) type.

42.4.1 add(clongdouble,Double):Double
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator +(const c: clongdouble;const e: Double) : Double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows to add clongdouble and double typed values. The result is a double
typed value.
42.4.2 add(Double,clongdouble):Double
Synopsis: Implement addition of clongdouble and double.
Declaration: operator +(const e: Double;const c: clongdouble) : Double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows to add double and clongdouble typed values. The result is a double
typed value.
42.4.3 assign(clongdouble):Double
Synopsis: Implement assignment of a clongdouble to a double type.
Declaration: operator :=(const v: clongdouble) : Double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows to assign a clongdouble to a Double type.
525
42.4.4 assign(Double):clongdouble
Synopsis: Implement assignment of a double to a clongdouble type.
Declaration: operator :=(const v: Double) : clongdouble

Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows to assign a double to a clongdouble type.
42.4.5 divide(clongdouble,Double):Double
Synopsis: Implement division of double and clongdouble.
Declaration: operator /(const c: clongdouble;const e: Double) : Double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows to divide a clongdouble typed value by a double typed value. the result
is a double typed value.
42.4.6 divide(Double,clongdouble):Double
Synopsis: Implement division of clongdouble and double.
Declaration: operator /(const e: Double;const c: clongdouble) : Double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows to divide a double typed value by a clongdouble typed value. the result
is a double typed value.
42.4.7 equal(clongdouble,Double):Boolean
Synopsis: Implement equality of clongdouble and double.
Declaration: operator =(const c: clongdouble;const e: Double) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: This operator compares the values of a double typed value and a clongdouble typed value, and
returns True if the values are equal (only double precision is used).
42.4.8 equal(Double,clongdouble):Boolean
Synopsis: Implement equality of double and clongdouble.
Declaration: operator =(const e: Double;const c: clongdouble) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: This operator compares the values of a clongdouble typed value and a double typed value, and
returns True if the values are equal (only double precision is used).
526
42.4.9 greaterthan(clongdouble,Double):Boolean
Synopsis: Implement greater than comparison between double and clongdouble.
Declaration: operator >(const c: clongdouble;const e: Double) : Boolean

Visibility: default
returns True if the clongdouble value is greater than the double value.
42.4.10 greaterthan(Double,clongdouble):Boolean
Synopsis: Implement greater than comparison between clongdouble and double.
Declaration: operator >(const e: Double;const c: clongdouble) : Boolean
Visibility: default
returns True if the double value is greater than the clongdouble value.
42.4.11 greaterthanorequal(clongdouble,Double):Boolean
Synopsis: Implement greater than or equal comparison between double and clongdouble.
Declaration: operator >=(const c: clongdouble;const e: Double) : Boolean
Visibility: default
returns True if the clongdouble value is greater than or equal to the double value.
42.4.12 greaterthanorequal(Double,clongdouble):Boolean
Synopsis: Implement greater than or equal comparison between clongdouble and double.
Declaration: operator >=(const e: Double;const c: clongdouble) : Boolean
Visibility: default
returns True if the double value is greater than or equal to the clongdouble value.
42.4.13 lessthan(clongdouble,Double):Boolean
Synopsis: Implement less than comparison between double and clongdouble.
Declaration: operator <(const c: clongdouble;const e: Double) : Boolean
Visibility: default
returns True if the clongdouble value is less than the double value.
527
42.4.14 lessthan(Double,clongdouble):Boolean
Synopsis: Implement less than comparison between clongdouble and double.
Declaration: operator <(const e: Double;const c: clongdouble) : Boolean

Visibility: default
returns True if the double value is less than the clongdouble value.
42.4.15 lessthanorequal(clongdouble,Double):Boolean
Synopsis: Implement greater than or equal comparison between double and clongdouble.
Declaration: operator <=(const c: clongdouble;const e: Double) : Boolean
Visibility: default
returns True if the clongdouble value is less than or equal to the double value.
42.4.16 lessthanorequal(Double,clongdouble):Boolean
Synopsis: Implement less than or equal comparison between clongdouble and double.
Declaration: operator <=(const e: Double;const c: clongdouble) : Boolean
Visibility: default
returns True if the double value is less than or equal to the clongdouble value.
42.4.17 multiply(clongdouble,Double):Double
Synopsis: Implement multiplication of clongdouble and double.
Declaration: operator *(const c: clongdouble;const e: Double) : Double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows to multiply a double typed value with a clongdouble typed value. the
result is a double typed value.
42.4.18 multiply(Double,clongdouble):Double
Synopsis: Implement multiplication of double and clongdouble.
Declaration: operator *(const e: Double;const c: clongdouble) : Double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows to multiply a clongdouble typed value with a double typed value. The
528
42.4.19 subtract(clongdouble,Double):Double
Synopsis: Implement subtraction of double and clongdouble.
Declaration: operator -(const c: clongdouble;const e: Double) : Double

Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows to subtract a double typed value from a clongdouble typed value. The
42.4.20 subtract(Double,clongdouble):Double
Synopsis: Implement subtraction of clongdouble and double.
Declaration: operator -(const e: Double;const c: clongdouble) : Double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows to subtract a clongdouble typed value from a double typed value. The
529
Chapter 43
Reference for unit ’cwstring’
43.1 Overview
The cwstring unit offers no API by itself: it just initializes the widestring manager record of the
system (1224) unit with an implementation that uses collation and conversion routines which are
provided by the C library found on most Unix or Linux systems that are POSIX compliant.
The cwstring should simply be included in the uses clause of the program, preferably as one of the
first units, and the initialization section of the unit will do all the work.
Note that including this unit links your program to the C library of the system.
It makes no sense to use this unit on a non-POSIX system like Windows, OS/2 or DOS. Therefor it
should always be enclosed with an ifdef statement:
program myprogram;
uses
{$ifdef unix}cwstring,{$endif}
classes, sysutils;

43.2.1 SetCWidestringManager
Synopsis: Set the Widestring manager of the system unit to the C version
Declaration: procedure SetCWidestringManager
Visibility: default
Description: SetCWidestringManager actually sets the widestring manager record of the system unit. It is
called automatically by the initialization section of the unit.
530
Chapter 44
Reference for unit ’dateutils’
44.1 Used units
Table 44.1: Used units by unit ’dateutils’
Name Page
math 892
System 1224
sysutils 1476
44.2 Overview
DateUtils contains a large number of date/time manipulation routines, all based on the TDateTime
type. There are routines for date/time math, for comparing dates and times, for composing dates and
decomposing dates in their constituent parts.

44.3.1 Constants
ApproxDaysPerMonth : Double = 30.4375
Average number of days in a month, measured over a year. Used in MonthsBetween (578).
ApproxDaysPerYear : Double = 365.25
Average number of days in a year, measured over 4 years. Used in YearsBetween (620).
DayFriday = 5
ISO day number for Friday
DayMonday = 1
531
CHAPTER 44. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’DATEUTILS’
ISO day number for Monday
DaySaturday = 6
ISO day number for Saturday
DaysPerWeek = 7
Number of days in a week.
DaysPerYear : Array[Boolean] of Word = (365, 366)
Array with number of days in a year. The boolean index indicates whether it is a leap year or not.
DaySunday = 7
ISO day number for Sunday
DayThursday = 4
ISO day number for Thursday
DayTuesday = 2
ISO day number for Tuesday
DayWednesday = 3
ISO day number for Wednesday
MonthsPerYear = 12
Number of months in a year
OneHour = (1) / HoursPerDay
One hour as a fraction of a day (suitable for TDateTime)
OneMillisecond = (1) / MSecsPerDay
One millisecond as a fraction of a day (suitable for TDateTime)
OneMinute = (1) / MinsPerDay
One minute as a fraction of a day (suitable for TDateTime)
OneSecond = (1) / SecsPerDay
One second as a fraction of a day (suitable for TDateTime)
RecodeLeaveFieldAsIs = (Word)
532
Bitmask deciding what to do with each TDateTime field in recode routines
WeeksPerFortnight = 2
Number of weeks in fortnight
YearsPerCentury = 100
Number of years in a century
YearsPerDecade = 10
Number of years in a decade
YearsPerMillennium = 1000
Number of years in a millenium

44.4.1 CompareDate
Synopsis: Compare 2 dates, disregarding the time of day
Declaration: function CompareDate(const A: TDateTime;const B: TDateTime)
: TValueRelationship
Visibility: default
Description: CompareDate compares the date parts of two timestamps A and B and returns the following re-
sults:
< 0if the day part of A is earlier than the day part of B.
0if A and B are the on same day (times may differ) .
> 0if the day part of A is later than the day part of B.
See also: CompareTime (535), CompareDateTime (534), SameDate (588), SameTime (590), SameDateTime
(589)
Listing: ./datutex/ex99.pp
Program Example99 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e CompareDate f u n c t i o n }
Uses S y s U t i l s , D a t e U t i l s ;
Const
Fmt = ’ dddd dd mmmm yyyy ’ ;
Procedure Test ( D1 , D2 : TDateTime ) ;
Var
Cmp : I n t e g e r ;
533
begin
Write ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , D1 ) , ’ i s ’ );
Cmp: = CompareDate ( D1 , D2 ) ;
I f Cmp<0 then
w r i t e ( ’ e a r l i e r than ’ )
else i f Cmp>0 then
Write ( ’ l a t e r than ’ )
else
Write ( ’ equal t o ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , D2 ) ) ;
end ;
Var
D, N : TDateTime ;
Begin
D: = Today ;
N: =Now;
Test (D,D ) ;
Test (N,N ) ;
Test (D+1 ,D ) ;
Test (D−1,D ) ;
Test (D+OneSecond ,D ) ;
Test (D−OneSecond ,D ) ;
Test (N+OneSecond ,N ) ;
Test (N−OneSecond ,N ) ;
End .
44.4.2 CompareDateTime
Synopsis: Compare 2 dates, taking into account the time of day
Declaration: function CompareDateTime(const A: TDateTime;const B: TDateTime)
Visibility: default
Description: CompareDateTime compares two timestamps A and B and returns the following results:
< 0if A is earlier in date/time than B.

0if A and B are the same date/time .
> 0if A is later in date/time than B.
See also: CompareTime (535), CompareDate (533), SameDate (588), SameTime (590), SameDateTime (589)
Program Example98 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e CompareDateTime f u n c t i o n }
Const
Fmt = ’ dddd dd mmmm yyyy hh : nn : ss . zzz ’ ;
534
Var
begin
Write ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , D1 ) , ’ i s ’ );
Cmp: = CompareDateTime ( D1 , D2 ) ;
I f Cmp<0 then
w r i t e ( ’ e a r l i e r than ’ )
else i f Cmp>0 then
Write ( ’ l a t e r than ’ )
else
Write ( ’ equal t o ’ ) ;
end ;
Var
D, N : TDateTime ;
Begin
D: = Today ;
N: =Now;
Test (D,D ) ;
Test (N,N ) ;
Test (D+1 ,D ) ;
Test (D−1,D ) ;
Test (D+OneSecond ,D ) ;
Test (D−OneSecond ,D ) ;
End .
44.4.3 CompareTime
Synopsis: Compares two times of the day, disregarding the date part.
Declaration: function CompareTime(const A: TDateTime;const B: TDateTime)
Visibility: default
Description: CompareTime compares the time parts of two timestamps A and B and returns the following
results:
< 0if the time part of A is earlier than the time part of B.
0if A and B have the same time part (dates may differ) .
> 0if the time part of A is later than the time part of B.
See also: CompareDateTime (534), CompareDate (533), SameDate (588), SameTime (590), SameDateTime
(589)
535
Program Example100 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e CompareTime f u n c t i o n }
Const
Var
begin
Write ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , D1 ) , ’ has ’ ) ;
Cmp: = CompareDateTime ( D1 , D2 ) ;
I f Cmp<0 then
w r i t e ( ’ e a r l i e r t i m e than ’ )
else i f Cmp>0 then
Write ( ’ l a t e r t i m e than ’ )
else
Write ( ’ equal t i m e w i t h ’ ) ;
end ;
Var
D, N : TDateTime ;
Begin
D: = Today ;
N: =Now;
Test (D,D ) ;
Test (N,N ) ;
Test (N+1 ,N ) ;
Test (N−1,N ) ;
End .
44.4.4 DateOf
Synopsis: Extract the date part from a DateTime indication.
Declaration: function DateOf(const AValue: TDateTime) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: DateOf extracts the date part from AValue and returns the result.
Since the TDateTime is actually a double with the date part encoded in the integer part, this oper-
ation corresponds to a call to Trunc.
See also: TimeOf (600), YearOf (619), MonthOf (578), DayOf (538), HourOf (553), MinuteOf (574), Secon-
dOf (591), MilliSecondOf (569)
536
Program Example1 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DateOf f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Date i s : ’ , DateTimeToStr ( DateOf (Now ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.5 DateTimeToDosDateTime
Synopsis: Convert TDateTime format to DOS date/time format
Declaration: function DateTimeToDosDateTime(const AValue: TDateTime) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: DateTimeToDosDatetime takes Value, a TDateTime formatted timestamp, and recodes it
to a MS-DOS encoded date/time value. This is a longint with the date/time encoded in the bits as:
0-4Seconds divided by 2
5-10Minutes
11-15Hours
16-20Day
21-24Month
25-31Years since 1980
See also: DosDateTimeToDateTime (546)
44.4.6 DateTimeToJulianDate
Synopsis: Converts a TDateTime value to a Julian date representation
Declaration: function DateTimeToJulianDate(const AValue: TDateTime) : Double
Visibility: default
Description: DateTimeToJulianDate converts the AValue date/time indication to a julian (as opposed to
Gregorian) date.
See also: JulianDateToDateTime (568), TryJulianDateToDateTime (605), DateTimeToModifiedJulianDate (538),
TryModifiedJulianDateToDateTime (605)
44.4.7 DateTimeToMac
Synopsis: Convert a TDateTime timestamp to a Mac timestamp
Declaration: function DateTimeToMac(const AValue: TDateTime) : Int64
Visibility: default
Description: DateTimeToMac converts the TDateTime value AValue to a valid Mac timestamp indication
and returns the result.
537
Errors: None.
See also: UnixTimeStampToMac (606), MacToDateTime (569), MacTimeStampToUnix (569)
44.4.8 DateTimeToModifiedJulianDate
Synopsis: Convert a TDateTime value to a modified Julian date representation
Declaration: function DateTimeToModifiedJulianDate(const AValue: TDateTime) : Double

Visibility: default
Errors: Currently, trying to use this function will raise an exception.
See also: DateTimeToJulianDate (537), JulianDateToDateTime (568), TryJulianDateToDateTime (605), Try-

ModifiedJulianDateToDateTime (605)
44.4.9 DateTimeToUnix
Synopsis: Convert a TDateTime value to Unix epoch time
Declaration: function DateTimeToUnix(const AValue: TDateTime) : Int64

Visibility: default
Description: DateTimeToUnix converts a TDateTime value to a epoch time (i.e. the number of seconds
elapsed since 1/1/1970).
See also: UnixToDateTime (607)
44.4.10 DayOf
Synopsis: Extract the day (of month) part from a DateTime value
Declaration: function DayOf(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: DayOf returns the day of the month part of the AValue date/time indication. It is a number between
1 and 31.
For an example, see YearOf (619)
See also: YearOf (619), WeekOf (607), MonthOf (578), HourOf (553), MinuteOf (574), SecondOf (591),
MilliSecondOf (569)
44.4.11 DayOfTheMonth
Synopsis: Extract the day (of month) part of a DateTime value
Declaration: function DayOfTheMonth(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
538
Description: DayOfTheMonth returns the number of days that have passed since the start of the month till the
moment indicated by AValue. This is a one-based number, i.e. the first day of the month will return
1.
For an example, see the WeekOfTheMonth (607) function.
See also: DayOfTheYear (539), WeekOfTheMonth (607), HourOfTheMonth (554), MinuteOfTheMonth (575),
SecondOfTheMonth (592), MilliSecondOfTheMonth (571)
44.4.12 DayOfTheWeek
Synopsis: Extracts the day of the week from a DateTime value
Declaration: function DayOfTheWeek(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: DayOfTheWeek returns the number of days that have passed since the start of the week till the
moment indicated by AValue. This is a one-based number, i.e. the first day of the week will return
1.
See also: DayOfTheYear (539), DayOfTheMonth (538), HourOfTheWeek (554), MinuteOfTheWeek (575),
SecondOfTheWeek (593), MilliSecondOfTheWeek (571)
Program Example42 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e WeekOfTheMonth f u n c t i o n }
Var
N : TDateTime ;
Begin
N: =Now;
Writeln ( ’ Day o f t h e Week : ’ , DayOfTheWeek (N ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Hour o f t h e Week : ’ , HourOfTheWeek (N ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Minute o f t h e Week : ’ , MinuteOfTheWeek (N ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Second o f t h e Week : ’ , SecondOfTheWeek (N ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ M i l l i S e c o n d o f t h e Week : ’ ,
MilliSecondOfTheWeek (N ) ) ;
End .
44.4.13 DayOfTheYear
Synopsis: Extracts the day of the year from a TDateTime value
Declaration: function DayOfTheYear(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: DayOfTheYear returns the number of days that have passed since the start of the year till the
moment indicated by AValue. This is a one-based number, i.e. January 1 will return 1.
For an example, see the WeekOfTheYear (608) function.
See also: WeekOfTheYear (608), HourOfTheYear (555), MinuteOfTheYear (575), SecondOfTheYear (593),
MilliSecondOfTheYear (572)
539
44.4.14 DaysBetween
Synopsis: Number of whole days between two DateTime values.
Declaration: function DaysBetween(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime)

: Integer
Visibility: default
Description: DaysBetween returns the number of whole days between ANow and AThen. This means the
fractional part of a day (hours, minutes, etc.) is dropped.
See also: YearsBetween (620), MonthsBetween (578), WeeksBetween (608), HoursBetween (555), Minutes-
Between (576), SecondsBetween (593), MilliSecondsBetween (572)
Program Example58 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DaysBetween f u n c t i o n }
Procedure Test (ANow, AThen : TDateTime ) ;
begin
Write ( ’ Number o f days between ’ ) ;
Write ( DateTimeToStr ( AThen ) , ’ and ’ , DateTimeToStr (ANow ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ : ’ , DaysBetween (ANow, AThen ) ) ;
end ;
Var
D1 , D2 : TDateTime ;
Begin
D1: =Now;
D2: = Today −23/24;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −1;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −25/24;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −26/24;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −5.4;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −2.5;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
End .
44.4.15 DaysInAMonth
Synopsis: Number of days in a month of a certain year.
Declaration: function DaysInAMonth(const AYear: Word;const AMonth: Word) : Word

Visibility: default
540
Description: DaysInYMonth returns the number of days in the month AMonth in the yearAYear. The return
value takes leap years into account.
See also: WeeksInAYear (609), WeeksInYear (610), DaysInYear (542), DaysInAYear (541), DaysInMonth
(542)
Program Example17 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DaysInAMonth f u n c t i o n }
Var
Y ,M : Word ;
Begin
For Y: = 1 9 9 2 to 2 0 1 0 do
For M: = 1 to 1 2 do
W r i t e l n ( LongMonthNames [m] , ’ ’ ,Y , ’ has ’ , DaysInAMonth ( Y ,M) , ’ days . ’ ) ;
End .
44.4.16 DaysInAYear
Synopsis: Number of days in a particular year.
Declaration: function DaysInAYear(const AYear: Word) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: DaysInAYear returns the number of weeks in the year AYear. The return value is either 365 or
366.
See also: WeeksInAYear (609), WeeksInYear (610), DaysInYear (542), DaysInMonth (542), DaysInAMonth
(540)
Program Example15 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DaysInAYear f u n c t i o n }
Var
Y : Word ;
Begin
For Y: = 1 9 9 2 to 2 0 1 0 do
W r i t e l n ( Y , ’ has ’ , DaysInAYear (Y ) , ’ days . ’ ) ;
End .
541
44.4.17 DaysInMonth
Synopsis: Return the number of days in the month in which a date occurs.
Declaration: function DaysInMonth(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: DaysInMonth returns the number of days in the month in which AValue falls. The return value
takes leap years into account.
See also: WeeksInAYear (609), WeeksInYear (610), DaysInYear (542), DaysInAYear (541), DaysInAMonth
(540)
Program Example16 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DaysInMonth f u n c t i o n }
Var
Y ,M : Word ;
Begin
For Y: = 1 9 9 2 to 2 0 1 0 do
W r i t e l n ( LongMonthNames [m] , ’ ’ ,Y , ’ has ’ , DaysInMonth ( EncodeDate ( Y ,M, 1 ) ) , ’ days . ’ ) ;
End .
44.4.18 DaysInYear
Synopsis: Return the number of days in the year in which a date occurs.
Declaration: function DaysInYear(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: daysInYear returns the number of days in the year part of AValue. The return value is either
365 or 366.
See also: WeeksInAYear (609), WeeksInYear (610), DaysInAYear (541), DaysInMonth (542), DaysInAMonth
(540)
Program Example14 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DaysInYear f u n c t i o n }
Var
Y : Word ;
Begin
For Y: = 1 9 9 2 to 2 0 1 0 do
W r i t e l n ( Y , ’ has ’ , DaysInYear ( EncodeDate ( Y , 1 , 1 ) ) , ’ days . ’ ) ;
End .
542
44.4.19 DaySpan
Synopsis: Calculate the approximate number of days between two DateTime values.
Declaration: function DaySpan(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime) : Double

Visibility: default
Description: DaySpan returns the number of Days between ANow and AThen, including any fractional parts of
a Day.
See also: YearSpan (621), MonthSpan (579), WeekSpan (610), HourSpan (556), MinuteSpan (577), Sec-
ondSpan (594), MilliSecondSpan (573), DaysBetween (540)
Program Example66 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DaySpan f u n c t i o n }
begin
Write ( ’ Number o f days between ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ : ’ , DaySpan (ANow, AThen ) ) ;
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: =Now;
D2: = Today −23/24;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −1;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −25/24;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −26/24;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −5.4;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −2.5;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
End .
44.4.20 DecodeDateDay
Synopsis: Decode a DateTime value in year and year of day.
Declaration: procedure DecodeDateDay(const AValue: TDateTime;out AYear: Word;
out ADayOfYear: Word)
Visibility: default
543
Description: DecodeDateDay decomposes the date indication in AValue and returns the various components
in AYear, ADayOfYear.
See also: EncodeDateTime (547), EncodeDateMonthWeek (547), EncodeDateWeek (548), EncodeDateDay
(547), DecodeDateTime (545), DecodeDateWeek (545), DecodeDateMonthWeek (544)
Program Example83 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DecodeDateDay f u n c t i o n }
Var
Y , DoY : Word ;
TS : TDateTime ;
Begin
DecodeDateDay (Now, Y , DoY ) ;
TS: = EncodeDateDay ( Y , DoY ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Today i s : ’ , DateToStr ( TS ) ) ;
End .
44.4.21 DecodeDateMonthWeek
Synopsis: Decode a DateTime value in a month, week of month and day of week
Declaration: procedure DecodeDateMonthWeek(const AValue: TDateTime;out AYear: Word;
out AMonth: Word;out AWeekOfMonth: Word;
out ADayOfWeek: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: DecodeDateMonthWeek decomposes the date indication in AValue and returns the various
components in AYear, AMonthAWeekOfMonth and ADayOfWeek.
(547), DecodeDateTime (545), DecodeDateWeek (545), DecodeDateDay (543)
Program Example85 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DecodeDateMonthWeek f u n c t i o n }
Var
Y ,M,Wom, Dow : Word ;
TS : TDateTime ;
Begin
DecodeDateMonthWeek (Now, Y ,M,WoM,DoW) ;
TS: = EncodeDateMonthWeek ( Y ,M,WoM, Dow ) ;
End .
544
44.4.22 DecodeDateTime
Synopsis: Decode a datetime value in a date and time value
Declaration: procedure DecodeDateTime(const AValue: TDateTime;out AYear: Word;

out AMonth: Word;out ADay: Word;out AHour: Word;
out AMinute: Word;out ASecond: Word;
out AMilliSecond: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: DecodeDateTime decomposes the date/time indication in AValue and returns the various com-
ponents in AYear, AMonth, ADay, AHour, AMinute, ASecond, AMilliSecond
(547), DecodeDateWeek (545), DecodeDateDay (543), DecodeDateMonthWeek (544)
Program Example79 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DecodeDateTime f u n c t i o n }
Var
Y , Mo, D, H, Mi , S ,MS : Word ;
TS : TDateTime ;
Begin
DecodeDateTime (Now, Y , Mo, D, H, Mi , S ,MS) ;
TS: = EncodeDateTime ( Y , Mo, D, H, Mi , S ,MS) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Now i s : ’ , DateTimeToStr ( TS ) ) ;
End .
44.4.23 DecodeDateWeek
Synopsis: Decode a DateTime value in a week of year and day of week.
Declaration: procedure DecodeDateWeek(const AValue: TDateTime;out AYear: Word;

out AWeekOfYear: Word;out ADayOfWeek: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: DecodeDateWeek decomposes the date indication in AValue and returns the various compo-
nents in AYear, AWeekOfYear, ADayOfWeek.

(547), DecodeDateTime (545), DecodeDateDay (543), DecodeDateMonthWeek (544)
Program Example81 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DecodeDateWeek f u n c t i o n }
545
Var
Y ,W, Dow : Word ;
TS : TDateTime ;
Begin
DecodeDateWeek (Now, Y ,W, Dow ) ;
TS: = EncodeDateWeek ( Y ,W, Dow ) ;
End .
44.4.24 DecodeDayOfWeekInMonth
Synopsis: Decode a DateTime value in year, month, day of week parts
Declaration: procedure DecodeDayOfWeekInMonth(const AValue: TDateTime;
out AYear: Word;out AMonth: Word;
out ANthDayOfWeek: Word;
out ADayOfWeek: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: DecodeDayOfWeekInMonth decodes the date AValue in a AYear, AMonth, ADayOfweek
and ANthDayOfweek. (This is the N-th time that this weekday occurs in the month, e.g. the third
saturday of the month.)
See also: NthDayOfWeek (580), EncodeDateMonthWeek (547), #rtl.sysutils.DayOfWeek (1534), Encode-
DayOfWeekInMonth (548), TryEncodeDayOfWeekInMonth (604)
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DecodeDayOfWeekInMonth f u n c t i o n }
Var
Y ,M,NDoW,DoW : Word ;
D : TDateTime ;
Begin
DecodeDayOfWeekInMonth ( Date , Y ,M,NDoW,DoW) ;
D: = EncodeDayOfWeekInMonth ( Y ,M,NDoW,DoW) ;
Write ( DateToStr (D) , ’ i s t h e ’ ,NDow, ’−t h ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( formatdateTime ( ’ dddd ’ ,D) , ’ o f t h e month . ’ ) ;
End .
44.4.25 DosDateTimeToDateTime
Synopsis: Convert DOS date/time format to TDateTime format
Declaration: function DosDateTimeToDateTime(AValue: LongInt) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: DosDateTimeToDateTime takes a DOS encoded date/time AValue and recodes it as a TDateTime
value.
The bit encoding of the DOS date/time is explained in the DateTimeToDosDateTime (537) function.
546
See also: DateTimeToDosDateTime (537)
44.4.26 EncodeDateDay
Synopsis: Encodes a year and day of year to a DateTime value
Declaration: function EncodeDateDay(const AYear: Word;const ADayOfYear: Word)
: TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: EncodeDateDay encodes the values AYear and ADayOfYear to a date value and returns this
value.
For an example, see DecodeDateDay (543).
Errors: If any of the arguments is not valid, then an EConvertError exception is raised.
See also: EncodeDateMonthWeek (547), DecodeDateDay (543), EncodeDateTime (547), EncodeDateWeek
(548), TryEncodeDateTime (602), TryEncodeDateMonthWeek (601), TryEncodeDateWeek (603)
44.4.27 EncodeDateMonthWeek
Synopsis: Encodes a year, month, week of month and day of week to a DateTime value
Declaration: function EncodeDateMonthWeek(const AYear: Word;const AMonth: Word;

const AWeekOfMonth: Word;
const ADayOfWeek: Word) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: EncodeDateTime encodes the values AYearAMonth, WeekOfMonth,ADayOfWeek, to a date

value and returns this value.
For an example, see DecodeDateMonthWeek (544).
See also: DecodeDateMonthWeek (544), EncodeDateTime (547), EncodeDateWeek (548), EncodeDateDay

(547), TryEncodeDateTime (602), TryEncodeDateWeek (603), TryEncodeDateMonthWeek (601),
TryEncodeDateDay (601), NthDayOfWeek (580)
44.4.28 EncodeDateTime
Synopsis: Encodes a DateTime value from all its parts
Declaration: function EncodeDateTime(const AYear: Word;const AMonth: Word;

const ADay: Word;const AHour: Word;
const AMinute: Word;const ASecond: Word;
const AMilliSecond: Word) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: EncodeDateTime encodes the values AYearAMonth, ADay,AHour, AMinute,ASecond and

AMilliSecond to a date/time valueand returns this value.
For an example, see DecodeDateTime (545).
547
See also: DecodeDateTime (545), EncodeDateMonthWeek (547), EncodeDateWeek (548), EncodeDateDay

(547), TryEncodeDateTime (602), TryEncodeDateWeek (603), TryEncodeDateDay (601), TryEn-
codeDateMonthWeek (601)
44.4.29 EncodeDateWeek
Synopsis: Encode a TDateTime value from a year, week and day of week triplet
Declaration: function EncodeDateWeek(const AYear: Word;const AWeekOfYear: Word;
function EncodeDateWeek(const AYear: Word;const AWeekOfYear: Word)
: TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: EncodeDateWeek encodes the values AYear, AWeekOfYear and ADayOfWeek to a date
value and returns this value.
For an example, see DecodeDateWeek (545).
See also: EncodeDateMonthWeek (547), DecodeDateWeek (545), EncodeDateTime (547), EncodeDateDay
(547), TryEncodeDateTime (602), TryEncodeDateWeek (603), TryEncodeDateMonthWeek (601)
44.4.30 EncodeDayOfWeekInMonth
Synopsis: Encodes a year, month, week, day of week specification to a TDateTime value
Declaration: function EncodeDayOfWeekInMonth(const AYear: Word;const AMonth: Word;
const ANthDayOfWeek: Word;
Visibility: default
Description: EncodeDayOfWeekInMonth encodes AYear, AMonth, ADayOfweek and ANthDayOfweek
to a valid date stamp and returns the result.
ANthDayOfweekis the N-th time that this weekday occurs in the month, e.g. the third saturday of
the month.
For an example, see DecodeDayOfWeekInMonth (546).
Errors: If any of the values is not in range, then an EConvertError exception will be raised.
See also: NthDayOfWeek (580), EncodeDateMonthWeek (547), #rtl.sysutils.DayOfWeek (1534), Decode-
DayOfWeekInMonth (546), TryEncodeDayOfWeekInMonth (604)
44.4.31 EncodeTimeInterval
Synopsis: Encode an interval as a TDateTime value.
Declaration: function EncodeTimeInterval(Hour: Word;Minute: Word;Second: Word;
MilliSecond: Word) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: EncodeTimeInterval encodes a time interval expressed in Hour, Min, Sec, MSec as a
TDateTime value and returns the value in Time.
548
Errors: If Min, Sec, MSec do not contain a valid time indication, then an EConvertError exception is
raised.
See also: TryEncodeTimeInterval (604)
44.4.32 EndOfADay
Synopsis: Calculates a DateTime value representing the end of a specified day
Declaration: function EndOfADay(const AYear: Word;const AMonth: Word;
const ADay: Word) : TDateTime; Overload
function EndOfADay(const AYear: Word;const ADayOfYear: Word) : TDateTime
; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: EndOfADay returns a TDateTime value with the date/time indication of the last moment (23:59:59.999)
of the day given by AYear, AMonth, ADay.
The day may also be indicated with a AYear, ADayOfYear pair.
See also: StartOfTheDay (598), StartOfADay (595), StartOfTheWeek (599), StartOfAWeek (596), StartOfA-
Month (596), StartOfTheMonth (598), EndOfTheWeek (552), EndOfAWeek (550), EndOfTheYear
(553), EndOfAYear (551), EndOfTheMonth (552), EndOfAMonth (549), EndOfTheDay (551)
Program Example39 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e EndOfADay f u n c t i o n }
Const
Fmt = ’ " End o f t h e day : " dd mmmm yyyy hh : nn : ss ’ ;
Var
Y ,M, D : Word ;
Begin
Y: = YearOf ( Today ) ;
M: = MonthOf ( Today ) ;
D: = DayOf ( Today ) ;
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , EndOfADay ( Y ,M,D ) ) ) ;
DecodeDateDay ( Today , Y ,D ) ;
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , EndOfADay ( Y ,D ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.33 EndOfAMonth
Synopsis: Calculate a datetime value representing the last day of the indicated month
Declaration: function EndOfAMonth(const AYear: Word;const AMonth: Word) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: EndOfAMonth e returns a TDateTime value with the date of the last day of the month indicated
by the AYear, AMonth pair.
549
See also: StartOfTheMonth (598), StartOfAMonth (596), EndOfTheMonth (552), EndOfTheYear (553), End-
OfAYear (551), StartOfAWeek (596), StartOfTheWeek (599)
Program Example31 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e EndOfAMonth f u n c t i o n }
Const
Fmt = ’ " L a s t day o f t h i s month : " dd mmmm yyyy ’ ;
Var
Y ,M : Word ;
Begin
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , EndOfAMonth ( Y ,M ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.34 EndOfAWeek
Synopsis: Return the last moment of day of the week, given a year and a week in the year.
Declaration: function EndOfAWeek(const AYear: Word;const AWeekOfYear: Word;
function EndOfAWeek(const AYear: Word;const AWeekOfYear: Word)
: TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: EndOfAWeek returns a TDateTime value with the date of the last moment (23:59:59:999) on the
indicated day of the week indicated by the AYear, AWeek, ADayOfWeek values.
The default value for ADayOfWeek is 7.
See also: StartOfTheWeek (599), EndOfTheWeek (552), EndOfAWeek (550), StartOfAMonth (596), End-
OfTheYear (553), EndOfAYear (551), EndOfTheMonth (552), EndOfAMonth (549)
Program Example35 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e EndOfAWeek f u n c t i o n }
Const
Fmt = ’ " L a s t day o f t h i s week : " dd mmmm yyyy hh : nn : ss ’ ;
Fmt2 = ’ " Last −1 day o f t h i s week : " dd mmmm yyyy hh : nn : ss ’ ;
Var
Y ,W : Word ;
Begin
550
W: = WeekOf ( Today ) ;
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , EndOfAWeek ( Y ,W) ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt2 , EndOfAWeek ( Y ,W, 6 ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.35 EndOfAYear
Synopsis: Calculate a DateTime value representing the last day of a year
Declaration: function EndOfAYear(const AYear: Word) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: StartOfAYear returns a TDateTime value with the date of the last day of the year AYear
(December 31).
See also: StartOfTheYear (599), EndOfTheYear (553), EndOfAYear (551), EndOfTheMonth (552), EndOfA-
Month (549), StartOfAWeek (596), StartOfTheWeek (599)
Program Example27 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e EndOfAYear f u n c t i o n }
Const
Fmt = ’ " L a s t day o f t h i s year : " dd mmmm yyyy ’ ;
Begin
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , EndOfAYear ( YearOf ( Today ) ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.36 EndOfTheDay
Synopsis: Calculate a datetime value that represents the end of a given day.
Declaration: function EndOfTheDay(const AValue: TDateTime) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: EndOfTheDay extracts the date part of AValue and returns a TDateTime value with the date/-
time indication of the last moment (23:59:59.999) of this day.
See also: StartOftheDay (598), StartOfADay (595), StartOfTheWeek (599), StartOfAWeek (596), StartOfA-
Month (596), StartOfTheMonth (598), EndOfTheWeek (552), EndOfAWeek (550), EndOfTheYear
(553), EndOfAYear (551), EndOfTheMonth (552), EndOfAMonth (549), EndOfADay (549)
Program Example37 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e EndOfTheDay f u n c t i o n }
551
Const
Fmt = ’ " End o f t h e day : " dd mmmm yyyy hh : nn : ss ’ ;
Begin
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , EndOfTheDay ( Today ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.37 EndOfTheMonth
Synopsis: Calculate a DateTime value representing the last day of the month, given a day in that month.
Declaration: function EndOfTheMonth(const AValue: TDateTime) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: EndOfTheMonth extracts the year and month parts of AValue and returns a TDateTime value
with the date of the first day of that year and month as the EndOfAMonth (549) function.
See also: StartOfAMonth (596), StartOfTheMonth (598), EndOfAMonth (549), EndOfTheYear (553), EndO-
fAYear (551), StartOfAWeek (596), StartOfTheWeek (599)
Program Example29 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e EndOfTheMonth f u n c t i o n }
Const
Fmt = ’ " l a s t day o f t h i s month : " dd mmmm yyyy ’ ;
Begin
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , EndOfTheMonth ( Today ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.38 EndOfTheWeek
Synopsis: Calculate a DateTime value which represents the end of a week, given a date in that week.
Declaration: function EndOfTheWeek(const AValue: TDateTime) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: EndOfTheWeek extracts the year and week parts of AValue and returns a TDateTime value
with the date of the last day of that week as the EndOfAWeek (550) function.
See also: StartOfAWeek (596), StartOfTheWeek (599), EndOfAWeek (550), StartOfAMonth (596), EndOfTheYear
(553), EndOfAYear (551), EndOfTheMonth (552), EndOfAMonth (549)
552
Program Example33 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e EndOfTheWeek f u n c t i o n }
Const
Fmt = ’ " l a s t day o f t h i s week : " dd mmmm yyyy ’ ;
Begin
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , EndOfTheWeek ( Today ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.39 EndOfTheYear
Synopsis: Calculate a DateTime value representing the last day of a year, given a date in that year.
Declaration: function EndOfTheYear(const AValue: TDateTime) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: EndOfTheYear extracts the year part of AValue and returns a TDateTime value with the date
of the last day of that year (December 31), as the EndOfAYear (551) function.
See also: StartOfAYear (597), StartOfTheYear (599), EndOfTheMonth (552), EndOfAMonth (549), StartO-
fAWeek (596), StartOfTheWeek (599), EndOfAYear (551)
Program Example25 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e EndOfTheYear f u n c t i o n }
Const
Fmt = ’ " L a s t day o f t h i s year : " dd mmmm yyyy ’ ;
Begin
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , EndOfTheYear ( Today ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.40 HourOf
Synopsis: Extract the hour part from a DateTime value.
Declaration: function HourOf(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: HourOf returns the hour of the day part of the AValue date/time indication. It is a number between
0 and 23.
See also: YearOf (619), WeekOf (607), MonthOf (578), DayOf (538), MinuteOf (574), SecondOf (591), Mil-
liSecondOf (569)
553
44.4.41 HourOfTheDay
Synopsis: Calculate the hour of a given DateTime value
Declaration: function HourOfTheDay(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word

Visibility: default
Description: HourOfTheDay returns the number of hours that have passed since the start of the day till the
moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number, i.e. 00:59:59 will return 0.
See also: HourOfTheYear (555), HourOfTheMonth (554), HourOfTheWeek (554), MinuteOfTheDay (574),
SecondOfTheDay (591), MilliSecondOfTheDay (570)
Program Example43 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e HourOfTheDay f u n c t i o n }
Var
N : TDateTime ;
Begin
N: =Now;
Writeln ( ’ Hour o f t h e Day : ’ , HourOfTheDay (N ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Minute o f t h e Day : ’ , MinuteOfTheDay (N ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Second o f t h e Day : ’ , SecondOfTheDay (N ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ M i l l i S e c o n d o f t h e Day : ’ ,
MilliSecondOfTheDay (N ) ) ;
End .
44.4.42 HourOfTheMonth
Synopsis: Calculate the number of hours passed since the start of the month.
Declaration: function HourOfTheMonth(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: HourOfTheMonth returns the number of hours that have passed since the start of the month till
the moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number, i.e. 00:59:59 on the first day of the
month will return 0.
See also: WeekOfTheMonth (607), DayOfTheMonth (538), MinuteOfTheMonth (575), SecondOfTheMonth
(592), MilliSecondOfTheMonth (571)
44.4.43 HourOfTheWeek
Synopsis: Calculate the number of hours elapsed since the start of the week.
Declaration: function HourOfTheWeek(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
554
Description: HourOfTheWeek returns the number of hours that have passed since the start of the Week till the
moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number, i.e. 00:59:59 on the first day of the
week will return 0.
For an example, see the DayOfTheWeek (539) function.
See also: HourOfTheYear (555), HourOfTheMonth (554), HourOfTheDay (554), DayOfTheWeek (539), Min-
uteOfTheWeek (575), SecondOfTheWeek (593), MilliSecondOfTheWeek (571)
44.4.44 HourOfTheYear
Synopsis: Calculate the number of hours passed since the start of the year.
Declaration: function HourOfTheYear(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: HourOfTheYear returns the number of hours that have passed since the start of the year (January
1, 00:00:00) till the moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number, i.e. January 1
00:59:59 will return 0.
See also: WeekOfTheYear (608), DayOfTheYear (539), MinuteOfTheYear (575), SecondOfTheYear (593),
MilliSecondOfTheYear (572)
44.4.45 HoursBetween
Synopsis: Calculate the number of whole hours between two DateTime values.
Declaration: function HoursBetween(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime)
: Int64
Visibility: default
Description: HoursBetween returns the number of whole hours between ANow and AThen. This means the
fractional part of an hour (minutes,seconds etc.) is dropped.
See also: YearsBetween (620), MonthsBetween (578), WeeksBetween (608), DaysBetween (540), Minutes-
Program Example59 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e HoursBetween f u n c t i o n }
begin
Write ( ’ Number o f hours between ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ : ’ , HoursBetween (ANow, AThen ) ) ;
end ;
Var
555
Begin
D1: =Now;
D2: =D1−(59∗OneMinute ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: =D1−(5.4∗OneHour ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: =D1−(2.5∗OneHour ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
End .
44.4.46 HourSpan
Synopsis: Calculate the approximate number of hours between two DateTime values.
Declaration: function HourSpan(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime) : Double
Visibility: default
Description: HourSpan returns the number of Hours between ANow and AThen, including any fractional parts
of a Hour.
See also: YearSpan (621), MonthSpan (579), WeekSpan (610), DaySpan (543), MinuteSpan (577), Sec-
ondSpan (594), MilliSecondSpan (573), HoursBetween (555)
Program Example67 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e HourSpan f u n c t i o n }
begin
Write ( ’ Number o f hours between ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ : ’ , HourSpan (ANow, AThen ) ) ;
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: =Now;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
556
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: =D1−(5.4∗OneHour ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: =D1−(2.5∗OneHour ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
End .
44.4.47 IncDay
Synopsis: Increase a DateTime value with a number of days.
Declaration: function IncDay(const AValue: TDateTime;const ANumberOfDays: Integer)
: TDateTime
function IncDay(const AValue: TDateTime) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: IncDay adds ANumberOfDays days to AValue and returns the resulting date/time.ANumberOfDays
can be positive or negative.
See also: IncYear (560), #rtl.sysutils.IncMonth (1586), IncWeek (559), IncHour (557), IncMinute (558), Inc-
Second (559), IncMilliSecond (558)
Program Example74 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e IncDay f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ One Day from today i s ’ , DateToStr ( IncDay ( Today , 1 ) ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ One Day ago from today i s ’ , DateToStr ( IncDay ( Today , − 1 ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.48 IncHour
Synopsis: Increase a DateTime value with a number of hours.
Declaration: function IncHour(const AValue: TDateTime;const ANumberOfHours: Int64)
: TDateTime
function IncHour(const AValue: TDateTime) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: IncHour adds ANumberOfHours hours to AValue and returns the resulting date/time.ANumberOfHours
See also: IncYear (560), #rtl.sysutils.IncMonth (1586), IncWeek (559), IncDay (557), IncMinute (558), Inc-
557
Program Example75
;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e IncHour f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ One Hour from now i s ’ , DateTimeToStr ( IncHour (Now, 1 ) ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ One Hour ago from now i s ’ , DateTimeToStr ( IncHour (Now, − 1 ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.49 IncMilliSecond
Synopsis: Increase a DateTime value with a number of milliseconds.
Declaration: function IncMilliSecond(const AValue: TDateTime;
const ANumberOfMilliSeconds: Int64) : TDateTime
function IncMilliSecond(const AValue: TDateTime) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: IncMilliSecond adds ANumberOfMilliSeconds milliseconds to AValue and returns the
resulting date/time.ANumberOfMilliSeconds can be positive or negative.
See also: IncYear (560), #rtl.sysutils.IncMonth (1586), IncWeek (559), IncDay (557), IncHour (557), IncSec-
ond (559), IncMilliSecond (558)
Program Example78 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e I n c M i l l i S e c o n d f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ One M i l l i S e c o n d from now i s ’ , TimeToStr ( I n c M i l l i S e c o n d (Now, 1 ) ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ One M i l l i S e c o n d ago from now i s ’ , TimeToStr ( I n c M i l l i S e c o n d (Now, − 1 ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.50 IncMinute
Synopsis: Increase a DateTime value with a number of minutes.
Declaration: function IncMinute(const AValue: TDateTime;
const ANumberOfMinutes: Int64) : TDateTime
function IncMinute(const AValue: TDateTime) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: IncMinute adds ANumberOfMinutes minutes to AValue and returns the resulting date/-
time.ANumberOfMinutes can be positive or negative.
558
Program Example76 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e I n c M i n u t e f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ One Minute from now i s ’ , TimeToStr ( I n c M i n u t e ( Time , 1 ) ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ One Minute ago from now i s ’ , TimeToStr ( I n c M i n u t e ( Time , − 1 ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.51 IncSecond
Synopsis: Increase a DateTime value with a number of seconds.
Declaration: function IncSecond(const AValue: TDateTime;
const ANumberOfSeconds: Int64) : TDateTime
function IncSecond(const AValue: TDateTime) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: IncSecond adds ANumberOfSeconds seconds to AValue and returns the resulting date/-
time.ANumberOfSeconds can be positive or negative.
Program Example77 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e IncSecond f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ One Second from now i s ’ , TimeToStr ( IncSecond ( Time , 1 ) ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ One Second ago from now i s ’ , TimeToStr ( IncSecond ( Time , − 1 ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.52 IncWeek
Synopsis: Increase a DateTime value with a number of weeks.
Declaration: function IncWeek(const AValue: TDateTime;const ANumberOfWeeks: Integer)
: TDateTime
function IncWeek(const AValue: TDateTime) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: IncWeek adds ANumberOfWeeks weeks to AValue and returns the resulting date/time.ANumberOfWeeks
See also: IncYear (560), #rtl.sysutils.IncMonth (1586), IncDay (557), IncHour (557), IncMinute (558), Inc-
559
Program Example73 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e IncWeek f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ One Week from today i s ’ , DateToStr ( IncWeek ( Today , 1 ) ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ One Week ago from today i s ’ , DateToStr ( IncWeek ( Today , − 1 ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.53 IncYear
Synopsis: Increase a DateTime value with a number of years.
Declaration: function IncYear(const AValue: TDateTime;const ANumberOfYears: Integer)
: TDateTime
function IncYear(const AValue: TDateTime) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: IncYear adds ANumberOfYears years to AValue and returns the resulting date/time. ANumberOfYears
See also: #rtl.sysutils.IncMonth (1586), IncWeek (559), IncDay (557), IncHour (557), IncMinute (558), Inc-
Program Example71 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e IncYear f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ One year from today i s ’ , DateToStr ( IncYear ( Today , 1 ) ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ One year ago from today i s ’ , DateToStr ( IncYear ( Today , − 1 ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.54 InvalidDateDayError
Synopsis: Raise an EConvertError exception when a day is not a valid day of a year.
Declaration: procedure InvalidDateDayError(const AYear: Word;const ADayOfYear: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: InvalidDateDayError raises an EConvertError (1639) exception and formats the error mes-
sage with an appropriate description made up from the parts AYear and ADayOfYear.
Normally this function should not be needed, the conversion routines call it when they have received
invalid arguments.
See also: InvalidDateWeekError (561), InvalidDateTimeError (561), InvalidDateMonthWeekError (561), In-
validDayOfWeekInMonthError (562)
560
44.4.55 InvalidDateMonthWeekError
Synopsis: Raise an EConvertError exception when a Year,Month,WeekOfMonth,DayofWeek is invalid.
Declaration: procedure InvalidDateMonthWeekError(const AYear: Word;

const AMonth: Word;
const ADayOfWeek: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: InvalidDateMonthWeekError raises an EConvertError (1639) exception and formats the er-
ror message with an appropriate description made up from the parts AYear, Amonth, AWeekOfMonth
and ADayOfWeek.
invalid arguments.
See also: InvalidDateWeekError (561), InvalidDateTimeError (561), InvalidDateDayError (560), InvalidDay-
OfWeekInMonthError (562)
44.4.56 InvalidDateTimeError
Synopsis: Raise an EConvertError about an invalid date-time specification.
Declaration: procedure InvalidDateTimeError(const AYear: Word;const AMonth: Word;

const AMilliSecond: Word;
const ABaseDate: TDateTime)
procedure InvalidDateTimeError(const AYear: Word;const AMonth: Word;
const AMilliSecond: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: InvalidDateTimeError raises an EConvertError (1639) exception and formats the error mes-
sage with an appropriate description made up from the parts AYear, AMonth, ADay,AHour,
AMinute, ASecond and AMilliSecond.
invalid arguments.
See also: InvalidDateWeekError (561), InvalidDateDayError (560), InvalidDateMonthWeekError (561), In-

44.4.57 InvalidDateWeekError
Synopsis: Raise an EConvertError with an invalid Year, WeekOfyear and DayOfWeek specification
Declaration: procedure InvalidDateWeekError(const AYear: Word;
const AWeekOfYear: Word;
Visibility: default
561
Description: InvalidDateWeekError raises an EConvertError (1639) exception and formats the error mes-
sage with an appropriate description made up from the parts AYear, AWeek, ADayOfWeek
invalid arguments.
See also: InvalidDateTimeError (561), InvalidDateDayError (560), InvalidDateMonthWeekError (561), In-
44.4.58 InvalidDayOfWeekInMonthError
Synopsis: Raise an EConvertError exception when a Year,Month,NthDayofWeek,DayofWeek is invalid.
Declaration: procedure InvalidDayOfWeekInMonthError(const AYear: Word;
const AMonth: Word;
Visibility: default
Description: InvalidDayOfWeekInMonthError raises an EConvertError (1639) exception and formats the
error message with an appropriate description made up from the parts AYear, Amonth, ANthDayOfWeek
and ADayOfWeek.
invalid arguments.
See also: InvalidDateWeekError (561), InvalidDateTimeError (561), InvalidDateDayError (560), InvalidDate-
MonthWeekError (561)
44.4.59 IsInLeapYear
Synopsis: Determine whether a date is in a leap year.
Declaration: function IsInLeapYear(const AValue: TDateTime) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IsInLeapYear returns True if the year part of AValue is leap year, or False if not.
See also: YearOf (619), IsPM (563), IsToday (564), IsSameDay (563)
Program Example3 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e IsInLeapYear f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ C u r r e n t year i s l e a p year : ’ , IsInLeapYear ( Date ) ) ;
End .
562
44.4.60 IsPM
Synopsis: Determine whether a time is PM or AM.
Declaration: function IsPM(const AValue: TDateTime) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IsPM returns True if the time part of AValue is later then 12:00 (PM, or afternoon).
See also: YearOf (619), IsInLeapYear (562), IsToday (564), IsSameDay (563)
Program Example4 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e IsPM f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ C u r r e n t t i m e i s PM : ’ , IsPM (Now ) ) ;
End .
44.4.61 IsSameDay
Synopsis: Check if two date/time indications are the same day.
Declaration: function IsSameDay(const AValue: TDateTime;const ABasis: TDateTime)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IsSameDay checks whether AValue and ABasis have the same date part, and returns True if
they do, False if not.
See also: Today (600), Yesterday (621), Tomorrow (600), IsToday (564)
Program Example21 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e IsSameDay f u n c t i o n }
Var
I : Integer ;
D : TDateTime ;
Begin
For I : = 1 to 3 do
begin
D: = Today+Random(3) −1;
Write ( FormatDateTime ( ’ dd mmmm yyyy " i s today : " ’ ,D ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( IsSameDay (D, Today ) ) ;
end ;
End .
563
44.4.62 IsSameMonth
Synopsis: Check if 2 dates are in the same month.
Declaration: function IsSameMonth(const Avalue: TDateTime;const ABasis: TDateTime)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IsSameMonth will return True if the two dates Avalue and ABasis occur in the same year
and month. (i.e. if their month and year parts match). Otherwise, False is returned.
See also: IsSameDay (563), IsToday (564), SameDate (588)
44.4.63 IsToday
Synopsis: Check whether a given date is today.
Declaration: function IsToday(const AValue: TDateTime) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IsToday returns True if AValue is today’s date, and False otherwise.
See also: Today (600), Yesterday (621), Tomorrow (600), IsSameDay (563)
Program Example20 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e IsToday f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Today : ’ , IsToday ( Today ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Tomorrow : ’ , IsToday ( Tomorrow ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Yesterday : ’ , IsToday ( Yesterday ) ) ;
End .
44.4.64 IsValidDate
Synopsis: Check whether a set of values is a valid date indication.
Declaration: function IsValidDate(const AYear: Word;const AMonth: Word;
const ADay: Word) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IsValidDate returns True when the values AYear, AMonth, ADay form a valid date indica-
tion. If one of the values is not valid (e.g. the day is invalid or does not exist in that particular month),
False is returned.
AYear must be in the range 1..9999 to be valid.
See also: IsValidTime (568), IsValidDateTime (566), IsValidDateDay (565), IsValidDateWeek (567), IsValid-
DateMonthWeek (565)
564
Program Example5 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e I s V a l i d D a t e f u n c t i o n }
Var
Y ,M, D : Word ;
Begin
For Y: = 2 0 0 0 to 2 0 0 4 do
For D: = 1 to 3 1 do
I f Not I s V a l i d D a t e ( Y ,M,D ) then
W r i t e l n (D, ’ i s n o t a v a l i d day i n ’ ,Y , ’ / ’ ,M) ;
End .
44.4.65 IsValidDateDay
Synopsis: Check whether a given year/day of year combination is a valid date.
Declaration: function IsValidDateDay(const AYear: Word;const ADayOfYear: Word)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IsValidDateDay returns True if AYear and ADayOfYear form a valid date indication, or
False otherwise.
The ADayOfYear value is checked to see whether it falls within the valid range of dates for AYear.
See also: IsValidDate (564), IsValidTime (568), IsValidDateTime (566), IsValidDateWeek (567), IsValidDate-
MonthWeek (565)
Program Example9 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e Is V al id D at eD a y f u n c t i o n }
Var
Y : Word ;
Begin
For Y: = 1 9 9 6 to 2 0 0 4 do
i f I sV al i dD at e Da y ( Y , 3 6 6 ) then
W r i t e l n ( Y , ’ i s a l e a p year ’ ) ;
End .
44.4.66 IsValidDateMonthWeek
Synopsis: Check whether a given year/month/week/day of the week combination is a valid day
565
Declaration: function IsValidDateMonthWeek(const AYear: Word;const AMonth: Word;

const ADayOfWeek: Word) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IsValidDateMonthWeek returns True if AYear, AMonthAWeekOfMonth and ADayOfWeek

form a valid date indication, or False otherwise.
The AWeekOfMonth,ADayOfWeek values are checked to see whether the combination falls within
the valid range of weeks for the AYear,AMonth combination.
See also: IsValidDate (564), IsValidTime (568), IsValidDateTime (566), IsValidDateDay (565), IsValidDate-
Week (567)
Program Example11 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e IsValidDateMonthWeek f u n c t i o n }
Var
Y ,W, D : Word ;
B : Boolean ;
Begin
For Y: = 2 0 0 0 to 2 0 0 4 do
begin
B: = True ;
For W: = 4 to 6 do
For D: = 1 to 7 do
I f B then
begin
B: = IsValidDateMonthWeek ( Y, 1 2 ,W,D ) ;
I f Not B then
i f ( D= 1 ) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ December ’ ,Y , ’ has e x a c t l y ’ ,W, ’ weeks . ’ )
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ December ’ ,Y , ’ has ’ ,W, ’ weeks and ’ ,D−1, ’ days . ’ ) ;
end ;
end ;
End .
44.4.67 IsValidDateTime
Synopsis: Check whether a set of values is a valid date and time indication.
Declaration: function IsValidDateTime(const AYear: Word;const AMonth: Word;

const AMilliSecond: Word) : Boolean
Visibility: default
566
Description: IsValidTime returns True when the values AYear, AMonth, ADay, AHour, AMinute, ASecond
and AMilliSecond form a valid date and time indication. If one of the values is not valid (e.g. the
seconds are larger than 60), False is returned.
See also: IsValidDate (564), IsValidTime (568), IsValidDateDay (565), IsValidDateWeek (567), IsValidDate-
MonthWeek (565)
Program Example7 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e I s V a l i d D a t e T i m e f u n c t i o n }
Var
Y , Mo,D : Word ;
H,M, S ,MS : Word ;
I : Integer ;
Begin
For I : = 1 to 1 0 do
begin
Y:=2000+Random ( 5 ) ;
Mo: =Random ( 1 5 ) ;
D: =Random ( 4 0 ) ;
H: =Random ( 3 2 ) ;
M: =Random ( 9 0 ) ;
S: =Random ( 9 0 ) ;
MS: =Random( 1 5 0 0 ) ;
I f Not I s V a l i d D a t e T i m e ( Y , Mo, D, H,M, S ,MS) then
W r i t e l n ( Y , ’− ’ ,Mo, ’− ’ ,D, ’ ’ ,H, ’ : ’ ,M, ’ : ’ ,S , ’ . ’ ,MS, ’ i s n o t a v a l i d date / t i m e . ’ ) ;
end ;
End .
44.4.68 IsValidDateWeek
Synopsis: Check whether a given year/week/day of the week combination is a valid day.
Declaration: function IsValidDateWeek(const AYear: Word;const AWeekOfYear: Word;
const ADayOfWeek: Word) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IsValidDateWeek returns True if AYear, AWeekOfYear and ADayOfWeek form a valid
date indication, or False otherwise.
The ADayOfWeek,ADayOfWeek values are checked to see whether the combination falls within
the valid range of weeks for AYear.
See also: IsValidDate (564), IsValidTime (568), IsValidDateTime (566), IsValidDateDay (565), IsValidDate-
MonthWeek (565)
567
Program Example10 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e IsValidDateWeek f u n c t i o n }
Var
Y ,W, D : Word ;
B : Boolean ;
Begin
For Y: = 2 0 0 0 to 2 0 0 4 do
begin
B: = True ;
For W: = 5 1 to 5 4 do
For D: = 1 to 7 do
I f B then
begin
B: = IsValidDateWeek ( Y ,W,D ) ;
I f Not B then
i f ( D= 1 ) then
W r i t e l n ( Y , ’ has e x a c t l y ’ ,W, ’ weeks . ’ )
else
W r i t e l n ( Y , ’ has ’ ,W, ’ weeks and ’ ,D−1, ’ days . ’ ) ;
end ;
end ;
End .
44.4.69 IsValidTime
Synopsis: Check whether a set of values is a valid time indication.
Declaration: function IsValidTime(const AHour: Word;const AMinute: Word;
const ASecond: Word;const AMilliSecond: Word)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Check whether a set of values is a valid time indication.
44.4.70 JulianDateToDateTime
Synopsis: Convert a Julian date representation to a TDateTime value.
Declaration: function JulianDateToDateTime(const AValue: Double) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: JulianDateToDateTime converts the Julian AValue date/time indication to a regular TDateTime
date/time indication.
See also: DateTimeToJulianDate (537), TryJulianDateToDateTime (605), DateTimeToModifiedJulianDate (538),
568
44.4.71 LocalTimeToUniversal
Synopsis: Convert local time to UTC time
Declaration: function LocalTimeToUniversal(LT: TDateTime) : TDateTime
function LocalTimeToUniversal(LT: TDateTime;TZOffset: Integer)
: TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: UniversalTimeToLocal converts a local time indication to a universal time indication: it un-
does the TZOffset timezone offset from the UT Universal time (UTC). If no TZOffset is speci-
fied, the local time offset as returned by GetLocalTimeOffset (531) is used.
See also: GetLocalTimeOffset (531), UniversalTimeToLocal (606)
44.4.72 MacTimeStampToUnix
Synopsis: Convert a Mac timestamp to a Unix timestamp
Declaration: function MacTimeStampToUnix(const AValue: Int64) : Int64
Visibility: default
Description: MacTimeStampToUnix converts the Mac timestamp indication in AValue to a unix timestamp
indication (epoch time)
Errors: None.
See also: UnixTimeStampToMac (606), DateTimeToMac (537), MacToDateTime (569)
44.4.73 MacToDateTime
Synopsis: Convert a Mac timestamp to a TDateTime timestamp
Declaration: function MacToDateTime(const AValue: Int64) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: MacToDateTime converts the Mac timestamp indication in AValue to a valid TDateTime in-
dication.
Errors: None.
See also: UnixTimeStampToMac (606), DateTimeToMac (537), MacTimeStampToUnix (569)
44.4.74 MilliSecondOf
Synopsis: Extract the millisecond part from a DateTime value.
Declaration: function MilliSecondOf(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: MillisecondOf returns the second of the minute part of the AValue date/time indication. It is
a number between 0 and 999.
See also: YearOf (619), WeekOf (607), MonthOf (578), DayOf (538), HourOf (553), MinuteOf (574), Mil-
liSecondOf (569)
569
44.4.75 MilliSecondOfTheDay
Synopsis: Calculate the number of milliseconds elapsed since the start of the day
Declaration: function MilliSecondOfTheDay(const AValue: TDateTime) : LongWord

Visibility: default
Description: MilliSecondOfTheDay returns the number of milliseconds that have passed since the start of
the Day (00:00:00.000) till the moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number, i.e.
00:00:00.000 will return 0.
For an example, see the HourOfTheDay (554) function.
See also: MilliSecondOfTheYear (572), MilliSecondOfTheMonth (571), MilliSecondOfTheWeek (571), Mil-
liSecondOfTheHour (570), MilliSecondOfTheMinute (570), MilliSecondOfTheSecond (571), HourOfThe-
Day (554), MinuteOfTheDay (574), SecondOfTheDay (591)
44.4.76 MilliSecondOfTheHour
Synopsis: Calculate the number of milliseconds elapsed since the start of the hour
Declaration: function MilliSecondOfTheHour(const AValue: TDateTime) : LongWord
Visibility: default
Description: MilliSecondOfTheHour returns the number of milliseconds that have passed since the start of
the Hour (HH:00:00.000) till the moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number, i.e.
HH:00:00.000 will return 0.
For an example, see the MinuteOfTheHour (574) function.

liSecondOfTheDay (570), MilliSecondOfTheMinute (570), MilliSecondOfTheSecond (571), Minu-
teOfTheHour (574), SecondOfTheHour (592)
44.4.77 MilliSecondOfTheMinute
Synopsis: Calculate the number of milliseconds elapsed since the start of the minute
Declaration: function MilliSecondOfTheMinute(const AValue: TDateTime) : LongWord

Visibility: default
Description: MilliSecondOfTheMinute returns the number of milliseconds that have passed since the start
of the Minute (HH:MM:00.000) till the moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number,
i.e. HH:MM:00.000 will return 0.
For an example, see the SecondOfTheMinute (592) function.
liSecondOfTheDay (570), MilliSecondOfTheHour (570), MilliSecondOfTheMinute (570), MilliSec-
ondOfTheSecond (571), SecondOfTheMinute (592)
570
44.4.78 MilliSecondOfTheMonth
Synopsis: Calculate number of milliseconds elapsed since the start of the month.
Declaration: function MilliSecondOfTheMonth(const AValue: TDateTime) : LongWord

Visibility: default
Description: MilliSecondOfTheMonth returns the number of milliseconds that have passed since the start
of the month (00:00:00.000) till the moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number, i.e.
00:00:00.000 on the first of the month will return 0.
See also: WeekOfTheMonth (607), DayOfTheMonth (538), HourOfTheMonth (554), MinuteOfTheMonth
(575), SecondOfTheMonth (592), MilliSecondOfTheMonth (571)
44.4.79 MilliSecondOfTheSecond
Synopsis: Calculate the number of milliseconds elapsed since the start of the second
Declaration: function MilliSecondOfTheSecond(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: MilliSecondOfTheSecond returns the number of milliseconds that have passed since the start
of the second (HH:MM:SS.000) till the moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number,
i.e. HH:MM:SS.000 will return 0.
liSecondOfTheDay (570), MilliSecondOfTheHour (570), MilliSecondOfTheMinute (570), Second-
OfTheMinute (592)
Program Example46 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e MilliSecondOfTheSecond f u n c t i o n }
Var
N : TDateTime ;
Begin
N: =Now;
W r i t e l n ( ’ M i l l i S e c o n d o f t h e Second : ’,
MilliSecondOfTheSecond (N ) ) ;
End .
44.4.80 MilliSecondOfTheWeek
Synopsis: Calculate the number of milliseconds elapsed since the start of the week
Declaration: function MilliSecondOfTheWeek(const AValue: TDateTime) : LongWord

Visibility: default
571
Description: MilliSecondOfTheWeek returns the number of milliseconds that have passed since the start of
the Week (00:00:00.000) till the moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number, i.e.
00:00:00.000 on the first of the Week will return 0.
See also: MilliSecondOfTheYear (572), MilliSecondOfTheMonth (571), MilliSecondOfTheDay (570), Mil-
liSecondOfTheHour (570), MilliSecondOfTheMinute (570), MilliSecondOfTheSecond (571), Day-
OfTheWeek (539), HourOfTheWeek (554), MinuteOfTheWeek (575), SecondOfTheWeek (593)
44.4.81 MilliSecondOfTheYear
Synopsis: Calculate the number of milliseconds elapsed since the start of the year.
Declaration: function MilliSecondOfTheYear(const AValue: TDateTime) : Int64
Visibility: default
Description: MilliSecondOfTheYear returns the number of milliseconds that have passed since the start
of the year (January 1, 00:00:00.000) till the moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based
number, i.e. January 1 00:00:00.000 will return 0.
See also: WeekOfTheYear (608), DayOfTheYear (539), HourOfTheYear (555), MinuteOfTheYear (575), Sec-
ondOfTheYear (593), MilliSecondOfTheYear (572)
44.4.82 MilliSecondsBetween
Synopsis: Calculate the number of whole milliseconds between two DateTime values.
Declaration: function MilliSecondsBetween(const ANow: TDateTime;
const AThen: TDateTime) : Int64
Visibility: default
Description: MillisSecondsBetween returns the number of whole milliseconds between ANow and AThen.
This means a fractional part of a millisecond is dropped.
See also: YearsBetween (620), MonthsBetween (578), WeeksBetween (608), DaysBetween (540), HoursBe-
tween (555), MinutesBetween (576), SecondsBetween (593)
Program Example62 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e MilliSecondsBetween f u n c t i o n }
begin
Write ( ’ Number o f m i l l i s e c o n d s between ’ ) ;
Write ( TimeToStr ( AThen ) , ’ and ’ , TimeToStr (ANow ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ : ’ , MilliSecondsBetween (ANow, AThen ) ) ;
end ;
Var
572
Begin
D1: =Now;
D2: =D1−(0.9∗ OneMilliSecond ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
End .
44.4.83 MilliSecondSpan
Synopsis: Calculate the approximate number of milliseconds between two DateTime values.
Declaration: function MilliSecondSpan(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime)
: Double
Visibility: default
Description: MilliSecondSpan returns the number of milliseconds between ANow and AThen. Since mil-
lisecond is the smallest fraction of a TDateTime indication, the returned number will always be an
integer value.
See also: YearSpan (621), MonthSpan (579), WeekSpan (610), DaySpan (543), HourSpan (556), MinuteSpan
(577), SecondSpan (594), MilliSecondsBetween (572)
Program Example70 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e MilliSecondSpan f u n c t i o n }
begin
Write ( ’ Number o f m i l l i s e c o n d s between ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ : ’ , MilliSecondSpan (ANow, AThen ) ) ;
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: =Now;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
573

Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
End .
44.4.84 MinuteOf
Synopsis: Extract the minute part from a DateTime value.
Declaration: function MinuteOf(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: MinuteOf returns the minute of the hour part of the AValue date/time indication. It is a number
between 0 and 59.
See also: YearOf (619), WeekOf (607), MonthOf (578), DayOf (538), HourOf (553), SecondOf (591), Mil-
liSecondOf (569)
44.4.85 MinuteOfTheDay
Synopsis: Calculate the number of minutes elapsed since the start of the day
Declaration: function MinuteOfTheDay(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: MinuteOfTheDay returns the number of minutes that have passed since the start of the Day
(00:00:00) till the moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number, i.e. 00:00:59 will
return 0.
See also: MinuteOfTheYear (575), MinuteOfTheMonth (575), MinuteOfTheWeek (575), MinuteOfTheHour
(574), HourOfTheDay (554), SecondOfTheDay (591), MilliSecondOfTheDay (570)
44.4.86 MinuteOfTheHour
Synopsis: Calculate the number of minutes elapsed since the start of the hour
Declaration: function MinuteOfTheHour(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word

Visibility: default
Description: MinuteOfTheHour returns the number of minutes that have passed since the start of the Hour
(HH:00:00) till the moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number, i.e. HH:00:59 will
return 0.
See also: MinuteOfTheYear (575), MinuteOfTheMonth (575), MinuteOfTheWeek (575), MinuteOfTheDay
(574), SecondOfTheHour (592), MilliSecondOfTheHour (570)
574
Program Example44 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e MinuteOfTheHour f u n c t i o n }
Var
N : TDateTime ;
Begin
N: =Now;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Minute o f t h e Hour : ’ , MinuteOfTheHour (N ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Second o f t h e Hour : ’ , SecondOfTheHour (N ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ M i l l i S e c o n d o f t h e Hour : ’ ,
MilliSecondOfTheHour (N ) ) ;
End .
44.4.87 MinuteOfTheMonth
Synopsis: Calculate number of minutes elapsed since the start of the month.
Declaration: function MinuteOfTheMonth(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: MinuteOfTheMonth returns the number of minutes that have passed since the start of the Month
(00:00:00) till the moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number, i.e. 00:00:59 on the
first day of the month will return 0.
(575), SecondOfTheMonth (592), MilliSecondOfTheMonth (571)
44.4.88 MinuteOfTheWeek
Synopsis: Calculate the number of minutes elapsed since the start of the week
Declaration: function MinuteOfTheWeek(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: MinuteOfTheWeek returns the number of minutes that have passed since the start of the week
(00:00:00) till the moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number, i.e. 00:00:59 on the
first day of the week will return 0.
See also: MinuteOfTheYear (575), MinuteOfTheMonth (575), MinuteOfTheDay (574), MinuteOfTheHour
(574), DayOfTheWeek (539), HourOfTheWeek (554), SecondOfTheWeek (593), MilliSecondOfThe-
Week (571)
44.4.89 MinuteOfTheYear
Synopsis: Calculate the number of minutes elapsed since the start of the year
Declaration: function MinuteOfTheYear(const AValue: TDateTime) : LongWord
575
Visibility: default
Description: MinuteOfTheYear returns the number of minutes that have passed since the start of the year
(January 1, 00:00:00) till the moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number, i.e. Jan-
uary 1 00:00:59 will return 0.
44.4.90 MinutesBetween
Synopsis: Calculate the number of whole minutes between two DateTime values.
Declaration: function MinutesBetween(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime)
: Int64
Visibility: default
Description: MinutesBetween returns the number of whole minutes between ANow and AThen. This means
the fractional part of a minute (seconds, milliseconds etc.) is dropped.
tween (555), SecondsBetween (593), MilliSecondsBetween (572)
Program Example60 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e MinutesBetween f u n c t i o n }
begin
Write ( ’ Number o f minutes between ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ : ’ , MinutesBetween (ANow, AThen ) ) ;
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: =Now;
D2: =D1−(59∗OneSecond ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: =D1−(5.4∗ OneMinute ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
End .
576
44.4.91 MinuteSpan
Synopsis: Calculate the approximate number of minutes between two DateTime values.
Declaration: function MinuteSpan(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime)
: Double
Visibility: default
Description: MinuteSpan returns the number of minutes between ANow and AThen, including any fractional
parts of a minute.
See also: YearSpan (621), MonthSpan (579), WeekSpan (610), DaySpan (543), HourSpan (556), SecondSpan
(594), MilliSecondSpan (573), MinutesBetween (576)
Program Example68 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e MinuteSpan f u n c t i o n }
begin
Write ( ’ Number o f minutes between ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ : ’ , MinuteSpan (ANow, AThen ) ) ;
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: =Now;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
End .
44.4.92 ModifiedJulianDateToDateTime
Synopsis: Convert a modified Julian date representation to a TDateTime value.
Declaration: function ModifiedJulianDateToDateTime(const AValue: Double) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
577

See also: DateTimeToJulianDate (537), JulianDateToDateTime (568), TryJulianDateToDateTime (605), Date-
TimeToModifiedJulianDate (538), TryModifiedJulianDateToDateTime (605)
44.4.93 MonthOf
Synopsis: Extract the month from a given date.
Declaration: function MonthOf(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word

Visibility: default
Description: MonthOf returns the month part of the AValue date/time indication. It is a number between 1 and
12.
See also: YearOf (619), DayOf (538), WeekOf (607), HourOf (553), MinuteOf (574), SecondOf (591), Mil-
liSecondOf (569)
44.4.94 MonthOfTheYear
Synopsis: Extract the month of a DateTime indication.
Declaration: function MonthOfTheYear(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: MonthOfTheYear extracts the month part of Avalue and returns it. It is an alias for MonthOf
(578), and is provided for completeness only, corresponding to the other PartOfTheYear func-
tions.
See also: MonthOf (578), WeekOfTheYear (608), DayOfTheYear (539), HourOfTheYear (555), MinuteOfTheYear
(575), SecondOfTheYear (593), MilliSecondOfTheYear (572)
44.4.95 MonthsBetween
Synopsis: Calculate the number of whole months between two DateTime values
Declaration: function MonthsBetween(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime)
: Integer
Visibility: default
Description: MonthsBetween returns the number of whole months between ANow and AThen. This number is
an approximation, based on an average number of days of 30.4375 per month (average over 4 years).
This means the fractional part of a month is dropped.
See also: YearsBetween (620), WeeksBetween (608), DaysBetween (540), HoursBetween (555), MinutesBe-
tween (576), SecondsBetween (593), MilliSecondsBetween (572)
578
Program Example56 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e MonthsBetween f u n c t i o n }
begin
Write ( ’ Number o f months between ’ ) ;
Write ( DateToStr ( AThen ) , ’ and ’ , DateToStr (ANow ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ : ’ , MonthsBetween (ANow, AThen ) ) ;
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: = Today ;
D2: = Today −364;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −365;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −366;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −390;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −368;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −1000;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
End .
44.4.96 MonthSpan
Synopsis: Calculate the approximate number of months between two DateTime values.
Declaration: function MonthSpan(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime)
: Double
Visibility: default
Description: MonthSpan returns the number of month between ANow and AThen, including any fractional
parts of a month. This number is an approximation, based on an average number of days of 30.4375
per month (average over 4 years).
See also: YearSpan (621), WeekSpan (610), DaySpan (543), HourSpan (556), MinuteSpan (577), SecondSpan
(594), MilliSecondSpan (573), MonthsBetween (578)
Program Example64 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e MonthSpan f u n c t i o n }
579
begin
Write ( ’ Number o f months between ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ : ’ , MonthSpan (ANow, AThen ) ) ;
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: = Today ;
D2: = Today −364;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −365;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −366;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −390;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −368;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −1000;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
End .
44.4.97 NthDayOfWeek
Synopsis: Calculate which occurrence of weekday in the month a given day represents
Declaration: function NthDayOfWeek(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: NthDayOfWeek returns the occurrence of the weekday of AValue in the month. This is the N-th
time that this weekday occurs in the month (e.g. the third saturday of the month).
See also: EncodeDateMonthWeek (547), #rtl.sysutils.DayOfWeek (1534), DecodeDayOfWeekInMonth (546),
EncodeDayOfWeekInMonth (548), TryEncodeDayOfWeekInMonth (604)
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e NthDayOfWeek f u n c t i o n }
Begin
Write ( ’ Today i s t h e ’ , NthDayOfWeek ( Today ) , ’−t h ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( formatdateTime ( ’ dddd ’ , Today ) , ’ o f t h e month . ’ ) ;
End .
580
44.4.98 PeriodBetween
Synopsis: Return the period (in years, months, days) between two dates
Declaration: procedure PeriodBetween(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime;

out Years: Word;out months: Word;out days: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: PeriodBetween returns the timespan between 2 dates (ANow and AThen), expressed as a num-
ber of years, months and days in the parameters Years, months and days. Only complete years,
months and days are reported.
If ANow is before AThen, their values are reversed so the result is always positive.
See also: YearsBetween (620), MonthsBetween (578), WeeksBetween (608), DaysBetween (540)
44.4.99 PreviousDayOfWeek
Synopsis: Given a day of the week, return the previous day of the week.
Declaration: function PreviousDayOfWeek(DayOfWeek: Word) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: PreviousDayOfWeek returns the previous day of the week. If the current day is the first day of
the week (1) then the last day will be returned (7).
Remark: Note that the days of the week are in ISO notation, i.e. 1-based.
See also: Yesterday (621)
Program Example22 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e PreviousDayOfWeek f u n c t i o n }
Var
D : Word ;
Begin
For D: = 1 to 7 do
W r i t e l n ( ’ P r e v i o u s day o f ’ ,D, ’ i s : ’ , PreviousDayOfWeek (D ) ) ;
End .
44.4.100 RecodeDate
Synopsis: Replace date part of a TDateTime value with another date.
Declaration: function RecodeDate(const AValue: TDateTime;const AYear: Word;
const AMonth: Word;const ADay: Word) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: RecodeDate replaces the date part of the timestamp AValue with the date specified in AYear,
AMonth, ADay. All other parts (the time part) of the date/time stamp are left untouched.
581
Errors: If one of the AYear, AMonth, ADay values is not within a valid range then an EConvertError
See also: RecodeYear (587), RecodeMonth (585), RecodeDay (583), RecodeHour (583), RecodeMinute (585),
RecodeSecond (586), RecodeDate (581), RecodeTime (587), RecodeDateTime (582)
Program Example94 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e RecodeDate f u n c t i o n }
Const
Fmt = ’ dddd dd mmmm yyyy hh : nn : ss ’ ;
Var
S : AnsiString ;
Begin
S: = FormatDateTime ( Fmt , RecodeDate (Now, 2 0 0 1 , 1 , 1 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ T h i s moment on t h e f i r s t o f t h e m i l l e n i u m : ’ ,S ) ;
End .
44.4.101 RecodeDateTime
Synopsis: Replace selected parts of a TDateTime value with other values
Declaration: function RecodeDateTime(const AValue: TDateTime;const AYear: Word;
const AMonth: Word;const ADay: Word;
const AHour: Word;const AMinute: Word;
const ASecond: Word;const AMilliSecond: Word)
: TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: RecodeDateTime replaces selected parts of the timestamp AValue with the date/time values
specified in AYear, AMonth, ADay, AHour, AMinute, ASecond and AMilliSecond. If any
of these values equals the pre-defined constant RecodeLeaveFieldAsIs (533), then the corresponding
part of the date/time stamp is left untouched.
Errors: If one of the values AYear, AMonth, ADay, AHour, AMinute, ASecondAMilliSecond is
not within a valid range (RecodeLeaveFieldAsIs excepted) then an EConvertError excep-
tion is raised.
RecodeSecond (586), RecodeMilliSecond (584), RecodeDate (581), RecodeTime (587), TryRecode-
DateTime (605)
Program Example96 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e RecodeDateTime f u n c t i o n }
582
Const
Var
S : AnsiString ;
D : TDateTime ;
Begin
D: =Now;
D: = RecodeDateTime (D, 2 0 0 0 , 2 , RecodeLeaveFieldAsIs , 0 , 0 , 0 , 0 ) ;
S: = FormatDateTime ( Fmt ,D ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ T h i s moment i n f e b r u a r i 2 0 0 0 : ’ ,S ) ;
End .
44.4.102 RecodeDay
Synopsis: Replace day part of a TDateTime value with another day.
Declaration: function RecodeDay(const AValue: TDateTime;const ADay: Word) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: RecodeDay replaces the Day part of the timestamp AValue with ADay. All other parts of the
date/time stamp are left untouched.
Errors: If the ADay value is not within a valid range (1 till the number of days in the month) then an
EConvertError exception is raised.
See also: RecodeYear (587), RecodeMonth (585), RecodeHour (583), RecodeMinute (585), RecodeSecond
(586), RecodeMilliSecond (584), RecodeDate (581), RecodeTime (587), RecodeDateTime (582)
Program Example89 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e RecodeDay f u n c t i o n }
Const
Var
S : AnsiString ;
Begin
S: = FormatDateTime ( Fmt , RecodeDay (Now, 1 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ T h i s moment on t h e f i r s t o f t h e month : ’ ,S ) ;
End .
44.4.103 RecodeHour
Synopsis: Replace hours part of a TDateTime value with another hour.
Declaration: function RecodeHour(const AValue: TDateTime;const AHour: Word)
: TDateTime
583
Visibility: default
Description: RecodeHour replaces the Hour part of the timestamp AValue with AHour. All other parts of the
Errors: If the AHour value is not within a valid range (0..23) then an EConvertError exception is raised.
See also: RecodeYear (587), RecodeMonth (585), RecodeDay (583), RecodeMinute (585), RecodeSecond
Program Example90 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e RecodeHour f u n c t i o n }
Const
Var
S : AnsiString ;
Begin
S: = FormatDateTime ( Fmt , RecodeHour (Now, 0 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Today , i n t h e f i r s t hour : ’ ,S ) ;
End .
44.4.104 RecodeMilliSecond
Synopsis: Replace milliseconds part of a TDateTime value with another millisecond.
Declaration: function RecodeMilliSecond(const AValue: TDateTime;
Visibility: default
Description: RecodeMilliSecond replaces the millisecond part of the timestamp AValue with AMilliSecond.
All other parts of the date/time stamp are left untouched.
Errors: If the AMilliSecond value is not within a valid range (0..999) then an EConvertError excep-
tion is raised.
RecodeSecond (586), RecodeDate (581), RecodeTime (587), RecodeDateTime (582)
Program Example93 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e RecodeMilliSecond f u n c t i o n }
Const
584
Var
S : AnsiString ;
Begin
S: = FormatDateTime ( Fmt , RecodeMilliSecond (Now, 0 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ T h i s moment , m i l l i s e c o n d s s t r i p p e d : ’ ,S ) ;
End .
44.4.105 RecodeMinute
Synopsis: Replace minutse part of a TDateTime value with another minute.
Declaration: function RecodeMinute(const AValue: TDateTime;const AMinute: Word)
: TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: RecodeMinute replaces the Minute part of the timestamp AValue with AMinute. All other
parts of the date/time stamp are left untouched.
Errors: If the AMinute value is not within a valid range (0..59) then an EConvertError exception is
raised.
See also: RecodeYear (587), RecodeMonth (585), RecodeDay (583), RecodeHour (583), RecodeSecond (586),
RecodeMilliSecond (584), RecodeDate (581), RecodeTime (587), RecodeDateTime (582)
Program Example91 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e RecodeMinute f u n c t i o n }
Const
Var
S : AnsiString ;
Begin
S: = FormatDateTime ( Fmt , RecodeMinute (Now, 0 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ T h i s moment i n t h e f i r s t minute o f t h e hour : ’ ,S ) ;
End .
44.4.106 RecodeMonth
Synopsis: Replace month part of a TDateTime value with another month.
Declaration: function RecodeMonth(const AValue: TDateTime;const AMonth: Word)
: TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: RecodeMonth replaces the Month part of the timestamp AValue with AMonth. All other parts
of the date/time stamp are left untouched.
585
Errors: If the AMonth value is not within a valid range (1..12) then an EConvertError exception is
raised.
See also: RecodeYear (587), RecodeDay (583), RecodeHour (583), RecodeMinute (585), RecodeSecond (586),
Program Example88 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e RecodeMonth f u n c t i o n }
Const
Var
S : AnsiString ;
Begin
S: = FormatDateTime ( Fmt , RecodeMonth (Now, 5 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ T h i s moment i n May : ’ ,S ) ;
End .
44.4.107 RecodeSecond
Synopsis: Replace seconds part of a TDateTime value with another second.
Declaration: function RecodeSecond(const AValue: TDateTime;const ASecond: Word)
: TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: RecodeSecond replaces the Second part of the timestamp AValue with ASecond. All other
parts of the date/time stamp are left untouched.
Errors: If the ASecond value is not within a valid range (0..59) then an EConvertError exception is
raised.
Program Example92 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e RecodeSecond f u n c t i o n }
Const
Var
S : AnsiString ;
586
Begin
S: = FormatDateTime ( Fmt , RecodeSecond (Now, 0 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ T h i s moment , seconds s t r i p p e d : ’ ,S ) ;
End .
44.4.108 RecodeTime
Synopsis: Replace time part of a TDateTime value with another time.
Declaration: function RecodeTime(const AValue: TDateTime;const AHour: Word;
Visibility: default
Description: RecodeTime replaces the time part of the timestamp AValue with the date specified in AHour,
AMinute, ASecond and AMilliSecond. All other parts (the date part) of the date/time stamp
are left untouched.
Errors: If one of the values AHour, AMinute, ASecondAMilliSecond is not within a valid range then
an EConvertError exception is raised.
RecodeSecond (586), RecodeMilliSecond (584), RecodeDate (581), RecodeDateTime (582)
Program Example95 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e RecodeTime f u n c t i o n }
Const
Var
S : AnsiString ;
Begin
S: = FormatDateTime ( Fmt , RecodeTime (Now, 8 , 0 , 0 , 0 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Today , 8 AM : ’ ,S ) ;
End .
44.4.109 RecodeYear
Synopsis: Replace year part of a TDateTime value with another year.
Declaration: function RecodeYear(const AValue: TDateTime;const AYear: Word)
: TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: RecodeYear replaces the year part of the timestamp AValue with AYear. All other parts of the
587
Errors: If the AYear value is not within a valid range (1..9999) then an EConvertError exception is
raised.
See also: RecodeMonth (585), RecodeDay (583), RecodeHour (583), RecodeMinute (585), RecodeSecond
Program Example87 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e RecodeYear f u n c t i o n }
Const
Var
S : AnsiString ;
Begin
S: = FormatDateTime ( Fmt , RecodeYear (Now, 1 9 9 9 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ T h i s moment i n 1 9 9 9 : ’ ,S ) ;
End .
44.4.110 SameDate
Synopsis: Check whether two TDateTime values have the same date part.
Declaration: function SameDate(const A: TDateTime;const B: TDateTime) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: SameDate compares the date parts of two timestamps A and B and returns True if they are equal,
False if they are not.
The function simply checks whether CompareDate (533) returns zero.
See also: CompareDateTime (534), CompareDate (533), CompareTime (535), SameDateTime (589), Same-
Time (590)
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e SameDate f u n c t i o n }
Const
begin
Write ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , D1 ) , ’ i s t h e same date as ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , D2 ) , ’ : ’ , SameDate ( D1 , D2 ) ) ;
end ;
588
Var
D, N : TDateTime ;
Begin
D: = Today ;
N: =Now;
Test (D,D ) ;
Test (N,N ) ;
Test (N+1 ,N ) ;
Test (N−1,N ) ;
End .
44.4.111 SameDateTime
Synopsis: Check whether two TDateTime values have the same date and time parts.
Declaration: function SameDateTime(const A: TDateTime;const B: TDateTime) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: SameDateTime compares the date/time parts of two timestamps A and B and returns True if they
are equal, False if they are not.
The function simply checks whether CompareDateTime (534) returns zero.
See also: CompareDateTime (534), CompareDate (533), CompareTime (535), SameDate (588), SameTime
(590)
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e SameDateTime f u n c t i o n }
Const
begin
Write ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , D1 ) , ’ i s t h e same d a t e t i m e as ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , D2 ) , ’ : ’ , SameDateTime ( D1 , D2 ) ) ;
end ;
Var
D, N : TDateTime ;
Begin
D: = Today ;
N: =Now;
Test (D,D ) ;
Test (N,N ) ;
Test (N+1 ,N ) ;
589
Test (N−1,N ) ;
End .
44.4.112 SameTime
Synopsis: Check whether two TDateTime values have the same time part.
Declaration: function SameTime(const A: TDateTime;const B: TDateTime) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: SameTime compares the time parts of two timestamps A and B and returns True if they are equal,
False if they are not.
The function simply checks whether CompareTime (535) returns zero.
See also: CompareDateTime (534), CompareDate (533), CompareTime (535), SameDateTime (589), Same-
Date (588)
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e SameTime f u n c t i o n }
Const
begin
Write ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , D1 ) , ’ i s t h e same t i m e as ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , D2 ) , ’ : ’ , SameTime ( D1 , D2 ) ) ;
end ;
Var
D, N : TDateTime ;
Begin
D: = Today ;
N: =Now;
Test (D,D ) ;
Test (N,N ) ;
Test (N+1 ,N ) ;
Test (N−1,N ) ;
End .
44.4.113 ScanDateTime
Synopsis: Scans a string for a DateTime pattern and returns the date/time
590
Declaration: function ScanDateTime(const Pattern: string;const s: string;

const fmt: TFormatSettings;startpos: Integer)
: TDateTime; Overload
function ScanDateTime(const Pattern: string;const s: string;
startpos: Integer) : TDateTime; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: ScanDateTime scans string S for the date/time pattern Pattern, starting at position StartPos
(default 1). Optionally, the format settings fmt can be specified.
In effect, this function does the opposite of what FormatDateTime (1575) does. The Pattern
variable must contain a valid date/time pattern: note that not all possible formatdatetime patterns can
be recognized, e.g., hn cannot be detected properly.
Errors: In case of an error, a EConvertError (1639) exception is raised.
See also: FormatDateTime (1575)
44.4.114 SecondOf
Synopsis: Extract the second part from a DateTime value.
Declaration: function SecondOf(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: SecondOf returns the second of the minute part of the AValue date/time indication. It is a number
between 0 and 59.
See also: YearOf (619), WeekOf (607), MonthOf (578), DayOf (538), HourOf (553), MinuteOf (574), Mil-
liSecondOf (569)
44.4.115 SecondOfTheDay
Synopsis: Calculate the number of seconds elapsed since the start of the day
Declaration: function SecondOfTheDay(const AValue: TDateTime) : LongWord
Visibility: default
Description: SecondOfTheDay returns the number of seconds that have passed since the start of the Day
(00:00:00) till the moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number, i.e. 00:00:00.999
return 0.
See also: SecondOfTheYear (593), SecondOfTheMonth (592), SecondOfTheWeek (593), SecondOfTheHour
(592), SecondOfTheMinute (592), HourOfTheDay (554), MinuteOfTheDay (574), MilliSecond-
OfTheDay (570)
591
44.4.116 SecondOfTheHour
Synopsis: Calculate the number of seconds elapsed since the start of the hour
Declaration: function SecondOfTheHour(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word

Visibility: default
Description: SecondOfTheHour returns the number of seconds that have passed since the start of the Hour
(HH:00:00) till the moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number, i.e. HH:00:00.999
return 0.
For an example, see the MinuteOfTheHour (574) function.
See also: SecondOfTheYear (593), SecondOfTheMonth (592), SecondOfTheWeek (593), SecondOfTheDay
(591), SecondOfTheMinute (592), MinuteOfTheHour (574), MilliSecondOfTheHour (570)
44.4.117 SecondOfTheMinute
Synopsis: Calculate the number of seconds elapsed since the start of the minute
Declaration: function SecondOfTheMinute(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: SecondOfTheMinute returns the number of seconds that have passed since the start of the
minute (HH:MM:00) till the moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number, i.e.
HH:MM:00.999 return 0.
See also: SecondOfTheYear (593), SecondOfTheMonth (592), SecondOfTheWeek (593), SecondOfTheDay
(591), SecondOfTheHour (592), MilliSecondOfTheMinute (570)
Program Example45 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e SecondOfTheMinute f u n c t i o n }
Var
N : TDateTime ;
Begin
N: =Now;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Second o f t h e Minute : ’ , SecondOfTheMinute (N ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ M i l l i S e c o n d o f t h e Minute : ’ ,
Mi lli Sec on dOf The Min ute (N ) ) ;
End .
44.4.118 SecondOfTheMonth
Synopsis: Calculate number of seconds elapsed since the start of the month.
Declaration: function SecondOfTheMonth(const AValue: TDateTime) : LongWord
Visibility: default
592
Description: SecondOfTheMonth returns the number of seconds that have passed since the start of the month
(00:00:00) till the moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number, i.e. 00:00:00.999 on
the first day of the month will return 0.
(575), MilliSecondOfTheMonth (571)
44.4.119 SecondOfTheWeek
Synopsis: Calculate the number of seconds elapsed since the start of the week
Declaration: function SecondOfTheWeek(const AValue: TDateTime) : LongWord
Visibility: default
Description: SecondOfTheWeek returns the number of seconds that have passed since the start of the week
(00:00:00) till the moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number, i.e. 00:00:00.999 on
the first day of the week will return 0.
See also: SecondOfTheYear (593), SecondOfTheMonth (592), SecondOfTheDay (591), SecondOfTheHour

(592), SecondOfTheMinute (592), DayOfTheWeek (539), HourOfTheWeek (554), MinuteOfThe-
Week (575), MilliSecondOfTheWeek (571)
44.4.120 SecondOfTheYear
Synopsis: Calculate the number of seconds elapsed since the start of the year.
Declaration: function SecondOfTheYear(const AValue: TDateTime) : LongWord

Visibility: default
Description: SecondOfTheYear returns the number of seconds that have passed since the start of the year
(January 1, 00:00:00) till the moment indicated by AValue. This is a zero-based number, i.e. Jan-
uary 1 00:00:00.999 will return 0.
44.4.121 SecondsBetween
Synopsis: Calculate the number of whole seconds between two DateTime values.
Declaration: function SecondsBetween(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime)
: Int64
Visibility: default
Description: SecondsBetween returns the number of whole seconds between ANow and AThen. This means
the fractional part of a second (milliseconds etc.) is dropped.
tween (555), MinutesBetween (576), MilliSecondsBetween (572)
593
Program Example61 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e SecondsBetween f u n c t i o n }
begin
Write ( ’ Number o f seconds between ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ : ’ , SecondsBetween (ANow, AThen ) ) ;
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: =Now;
D2: =D1−(999∗ OneMilliSecond ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: =D1−(5.4∗OneSecond ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
End .
44.4.122 SecondSpan
Synopsis: Calculate the approximate number of seconds between two DateTime values.
Declaration: function SecondSpan(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime)
: Double
Visibility: default
Description: SecondSpan returns the number of seconds between ANow and AThen, including any fractional
parts of a second.
See also: YearSpan (621), MonthSpan (579), WeekSpan (610), DaySpan (543), HourSpan (556), MinuteSpan
(577), MilliSecondSpan (573), SecondsBetween (593)
Program Example69 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e SecondSpan f u n c t i o n }
594
begin
Write ( ’ Number o f seconds between ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ : ’ , SecondSpan (ANow, AThen ) ) ;
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: =Now;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
End .
44.4.123 StartOfADay
Synopsis: Return the start of a day as a DateTime value, given a day indication
Declaration: function StartOfADay(const AYear: Word;const AMonth: Word;
const ADay: Word) : TDateTime; Overload
function StartOfADay(const AYear: Word;const ADayOfYear: Word)
: TDateTime; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: StartOfADay returns a TDateTime value with the date/time indication of the start (0:0:0.000)
of the day given by AYear, AMonth, ADay.
The day may also be indicated with a AYear, ADayOfYear pair.
See also: StartOfTheDay (598), StartOfTheWeek (599), StartOfAWeek (596), StartOfAMonth (596), StartOfThe-
Month (598), EndOfTheWeek (552), EndOfAWeek (550), EndOfTheYear (553), EndOfAYear (551),
EndOfTheMonth (552), EndOfAMonth (549), EndOfTheDay (551), EndOfADay (549)
Program Example38 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e StartOfADay f u n c t i o n }
Const
Fmt = ’ " S t a r t o f t h e day : " dd mmmm yyyy hh : nn : ss ’ ;
595
Var
Y ,M, D : Word ;
Begin
D: = DayOf ( Today ) ;
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , StartOfADay ( Y ,M,D ) ) ) ;
DecodeDateDay ( Today , Y ,D ) ;
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , StartOfADay ( Y ,D ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.124 StartOfAMonth
Synopsis: Return first date of month, given a year/month pair.
Declaration: function StartOfAMonth(const AYear: Word;const AMonth: Word) : TDateTime

Visibility: default
Description: StartOfAMonth e returns a TDateTime value with the date of the first day of the month indi-
cated by the AYear, AMonth pair.
See also: StartOfTheMonth (598), EndOfTheMonth (552), EndOfAMonth (549), EndOfTheYear (553), End-
OfAYear (551), StartOfAWeek (596), StartOfTheWeek (599)
Program Example30 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e StartOfAMonth f u n c t i o n }
Const
Fmt = ’ " F i r s t day o f t h i s month : " dd mmmm yyyy ’ ;
Var
Y ,M : Word ;
Begin
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , StartOfAMonth ( Y ,M ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.125 StartOfAWeek
Synopsis: Return a day of the week, given a year, week and day in the week.
Declaration: function StartOfAWeek(const AYear: Word;const AWeekOfYear: Word;
function StartOfAWeek(const AYear: Word;const AWeekOfYear: Word)
: TDateTime
Visibility: default
596
Description: StartOfAWeek returns a TDateTime value with the date of the indicated day of the week indi-
cated by the AYear, AWeek, ADayOfWeek values.
The default value for ADayOfWeek is 1.
See also: StartOfTheWeek (599), EndOfTheWeek (552), EndOfAWeek (550), StartOfAMonth (596), End-
OfTheYear (553), EndOfAYear (551), EndOfTheMonth (552), EndOfAMonth (549)
Program Example34 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e StartOfAWeek f u n c t i o n }
Const
Fmt = ’ " F i r s t day o f t h i s week : " dd mmmm yyyy hh : nn : ss ’ ;
Fmt2 = ’ " Second day o f t h i s week : " dd mmmm yyyy hh : nn : ss ’ ;
Var
Y ,W : Word ;
Begin
W: = WeekOf ( Today ) ;
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , StartOfAWeek ( Y ,W) ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt2 , StartOfAWeek ( Y ,W, 2 ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.126 StartOfAYear
Synopsis: Return the first day of a given year.
Declaration: function StartOfAYear(const AYear: Word) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: StartOfAYear returns a TDateTime value with the date of the first day of the year AYear
(January 1).
See also: StartOfTheYear (599), EndOfTheYear (553), EndOfAYear (551), EndOfTheMonth (552), EndOfA-
Program Example26 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e StartOfAYear f u n c t i o n }
Const
Fmt = ’ " F i r s t day o f t h i s year : " dd mmmm yyyy ’ ;
Begin
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , StartOfAYear ( YearOf ( Today ) ) ) ) ;
End .
597
44.4.127 StartOfTheDay
Synopsis: Calculate the start of the day as a DateTime value, given a moment in the day.
Declaration: function StartOfTheDay(const AValue: TDateTime) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: StartOfTheDay extracts the date part of AValue and returns a TDateTime value with the
date/time indication of the start (0:0:0.000) of this day.
See also: StartOfADay (595), StartOfTheWeek (599), StartOfAWeek (596), StartOfAMonth (596), StartOfThe-
Month (598), EndOfTheWeek (552), EndOfAWeek (550), EndOfTheYear (553), EndOfAYear (551),
EndOfTheMonth (552), EndOfAMonth (549), EndOftheDay (551), EndOfADay (549)
Program Example36 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e StartOfTheDay f u n c t i o n }
Const
Fmt = ’ " S t a r t o f t h e day : " dd mmmm yyyy hh : nn : ss ’ ;
Begin
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , StartOfTheDay ( Today ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.128 StartOfTheMonth
Synopsis: Calculate the first day of the month, given a date in that month.
Declaration: function StartOfTheMonth(const AValue: TDateTime) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: StartOfTheMonth extracts the year and month parts of AValue and returns a TDateTime
value with the date of the first day of that year and month as the StartOfAMonth (596) function.
See also: StartOfAMonth (596), EndOfTheYear (553), EndOfAYear (551), EndOfTheMonth (552), EndOfA-
Program Example28 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e StartOfTheMonth f u n c t i o n }
Const
Fmt = ’ " F i r s t day o f t h i s month : " dd mmmm yyyy ’ ;
Begin
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , StartOfTheMonth ( Today ) ) ) ;
End .
598
44.4.129 StartOfTheWeek
Synopsis: Return the first day of the week, given a date.
Declaration: function StartOfTheWeek(const AValue: TDateTime) : TDateTime

Visibility: default
Description: StartOfTheWeek extracts the year and week parts of AValue and returns a TDateTime value
with the date of the first day of that week as the StartOfAWeek (596) function.
See also: StartOfAWeek (596), EndOfTheWeek (552), EndOfAWeek (550), StartOfAMonth (596), EndOfTheYear
(553), EndOfAYear (551), EndOfTheMonth (552), EndOfAMonth (549)
Program Example32 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e StartOfTheWeek f u n c t i o n }
Const
Fmt = ’ " F i r s t day o f t h i s week : " dd mmmm yyyy ’ ;
Begin
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , StartOfTheWeek ( Today ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.130 StartOfTheYear
Synopsis: Return the first day of the year, given a date in this year.
Declaration: function StartOfTheYear(const AValue: TDateTime) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: StartOfTheYear extracts the year part of AValue and returns a TDateTime value with the
date of the first day of that year (January 1), as the StartOfAYear (597) function.
See also: StartOfAYear (597), EndOfTheYear (553), EndOfAYear (551)
Program Example24 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e StartOfTheYear f u n c t i o n }
Const
Fmt = ’ " F i r s t day o f t h i s year : " dd mmmm yyyy ’ ;
Begin
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( Fmt , StartOfTheYear ( Today ) ) ) ;
End .
599
44.4.131 TimeOf
Synopsis: Extract the time part from a DateTime indication.
Declaration: function TimeOf(const AValue: TDateTime) : TDateTime

Visibility: default
Description: TimeOf extracts the time part from AValue and returns the result.
Since the TDateTime is actually a double with the time part encoded in the fractional part, this
operation corresponds to a call to Frac.
See also: DateOf (536), YearOf (619), MonthOf (578), DayOf (538), HourOf (553), MinuteOf (574), Secon-
dOf (591), MilliSecondOf (569)
Program Example2 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e TimeOf f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Time i s : ’ , TimeToStr ( TimeOf (Now ) ) ) ;
End .
44.4.132 Today
Synopsis: Return the current date
Declaration: function Today : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: Today is an alias for the Date (1529) function in the sysutils (1476) unit.
For an example, see Yesterday (621)
See also: Date (1529), Yesterday (621), Tomorrow (600)
44.4.133 Tomorrow
Synopsis: Return the next day
Declaration: function Tomorrow : TDateTime

Visibility: default
Description: Tomorrow returns tomorrow’s date. Tomorrow is determined from the system clock, i.e. it is Today
(600) +1.
See also: Today (600), Yesterday (621)
600
Program Example19 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e Tomorrow f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( ’ " Today i s " dd mmmm yyyy ’ , Today ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( ’ " Tomorrow w i l l be " dd mmmm yyyy ’ , Tomorrow ) ) ;
End .
44.4.134 TryEncodeDateDay
Synopsis: Encode a year and day of year to a TDateTime value
Declaration: function TryEncodeDateDay(const AYear: Word;const ADayOfYear: Word;
out AValue: TDateTime) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: TryEncodeDateDay encodes the values AYear and ADayOfYear to a date value and returns
this value in AValue.
If the encoding was succcesful, True is returned. False is returned if any of the arguments is not
valid.
See also: EncodeDateDay (547), EncodeDateTime (547), EncodeDateMonthWeek (547), EncodeDateWeek
(548), TryEncodeDateTime (602), TryEncodeDateMonthWeek (601), TryEncodeDateWeek (603)
Program Example84 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e TryEncodeDateDay f u n c t i o n }
Var
Y , DoY : Word ;
TS : TDateTime ;
Begin
DecodeDateDay (Now, Y , DoY ) ;
I f TryEncodeDateDay ( Y , DoY , TS ) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Today i s : ’ , DateToStr ( TS ) )
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ Wrong year / day o f year i n d i c a t i o n ’ ) ;
End .
44.4.135 TryEncodeDateMonthWeek
Synopsis: Encode a year, month, week of month and day of week to a TDateTime value
Declaration: function TryEncodeDateMonthWeek(const AYear: Word;const AMonth: Word;
const ADayOfWeek: Word;
601
Visibility: default
Description: TryEncodeDateTime encodes the values AYearAMonth, WeekOfMonth,ADayOfWeek, to
a date value and returns this value in AValue.
If the encoding was succesful, True is returned, False if any of the arguments is not valid.
See also: DecodeDateMonthWeek (544), EncodeDateTime (547), EncodeDateWeek (548), EncodeDateDay

(547), EncodeDateMonthWeek (547), TryEncodeDateTime (602), TryEncodeDateWeek (603), TryEn-
codeDateDay (601), NthDayOfWeek (580)
Program Example86 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e TryEncodeDateMonthWeek f u n c t i o n }
Var
Y ,M,Wom, Dow : Word ;
TS : TDateTime ;
Begin
DecodeDateMonthWeek (Now, Y ,M,WoM,DoW) ;
I f TryEncodeDateMonthWeek ( Y ,M,WoM, Dow, TS ) then
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ I n v a l i d year / month / week / dow i n d i c a t i o n ’ ) ;
End .
44.4.136 TryEncodeDateTime
Synopsis: Encode a Year, Month, Day, Hour, minute, seconds, milliseconds tuplet to a TDateTime value
Declaration: function TryEncodeDateTime(const AYear: Word;const AMonth: Word;
const AMilliSecond: Word;
Visibility: default
Description: EncodeDateTime encodes the values AYearAMonth, ADay,AHour, AMinute,ASecond and
AMilliSecond to a date/time valueand returns this value in AValue.
If the date was encoded succesfully, True is returned, False is returned if one of the arguments is
not valid.
(547), TryEncodeDateDay (601), TryEncodeDateWeek (603), TryEncodeDateMonthWeek (601)
Program Example79 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e TryEncodeDateTime f u n c t i o n }
602
Var
Y , Mo, D, H, Mi , S ,MS : Word ;
TS : TDateTime ;
Begin
DecodeDateTime (Now, Y , Mo, D, H, Mi , S ,MS) ;
I f TryEncodeDateTime ( Y , Mo, D, H, Mi , S ,MS, TS ) then
W r i t e l n ( ’Now i s : ’ , DateTimeToStr ( TS ) )
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ Wrong date / t i m e i n d i c a t i o n ’ ) ;
End .
44.4.137 TryEncodeDateWeek
Synopsis: Encode a year, week and day of week triplet to a TDateTime value
Declaration: function TryEncodeDateWeek(const AYear: Word;const AWeekOfYear: Word;
out AValue: TDateTime;const ADayOfWeek: Word)
: Boolean
function TryEncodeDateWeek(const AYear: Word;const AWeekOfYear: Word;
Visibility: default
Description: TryEncodeDateWeek encodes the values AYear, AWeekOfYear and ADayOfWeek to a date
value and returns this value in AValue.
If the encoding was succcesful, True is returned. False is returned if any of the arguments is not
valid.
See also: EncodeDateMonthWeek (547), EncodeDateWeek (548), EncodeDateTime (547), EncodeDateDay

(547), TryEncodeDateTime (602), TryEncodeDateMonthWeek (601), TryEncodeDateDay (601)
Program Example82 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e TryEncodeDateWeek f u n c t i o n }
Var
Y ,W, Dow : Word ;
TS : TDateTime ;
Begin
DecodeDateWeek (Now, Y ,W, Dow ) ;
I f TryEncodeDateWeek ( Y ,W, TS , Dow ) then
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ I n v a l i d date / week i n d i c a t i o n ’ ) ;
End .
603
44.4.138 TryEncodeDayOfWeekInMonth
Synopsis: Encode a year, month, week, day of week triplet to a TDateTime value
Declaration: function TryEncodeDayOfWeekInMonth(const AYear: Word;const AMonth: Word;

const ADayOfWeek: Word;
Visibility: default
Description: EncodeDayOfWeekInMonth encodes AYear, AMonth, ADayOfweek and ANthDayOfweek
to a valid date stamp and returns the result in AValue.
ANthDayOfweekis the N-th time that this weekday occurs in the month, e.g. the third saturday of
the month.
The function returns True if the encoding was succesful, False if any of the values is not in range.
See also: NthDayOfWeek (580), EncodeDateMonthWeek (547), #rtl.sysutils.DayOfWeek (1534), Decode-
DayOfWeekInMonth (546), EncodeDayOfWeekInMonth (548)
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DecodeDayOfWeekInMonth f u n c t i o n }
Var
Y ,M,NDoW,DoW : Word ;
D : TDateTime ;
Begin
DecodeDayOfWeekInMonth ( Date , Y ,M,NDoW,DoW) ;
I f TryEncodeDayOfWeekInMonth ( Y ,M,NDoW,DoW,D ) then
begin
Write ( DateToStr (D) , ’ i s t h e ’ ,NDow, ’−t h ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( formatdateTime ( ’ dddd ’ ,D) , ’ o f t h e month . ’ ) ;
end
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ I n v a l i d year / month / NthDayOfweek c o m bi n a ti o n ’ ) ;
End .
44.4.139 TryEncodeTimeInterval
Synopsis: Try to encode an interval as a TDateTime value.
Declaration: function TryEncodeTimeInterval(Hour: Word;Min: Word;Sec: Word;

MSec: Word;out Time: TDateTime) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: TryEncodeTimeInterval encodes a time interval expressed in Hour, Min, Sec, MSec as a
TDateTime value and returns the value in Time. It returns True if Min, Sec, MSec contain valid
time values (i.e. less than 60, 60 resp. MSec). The number of hours may be larger than 24.
See also: EncodeTimeInterval (548)
604
44.4.140 TryJulianDateToDateTime
Synopsis: Convert a Julian date representation to a TDateTime value.
Declaration: function TryJulianDateToDateTime(const AValue: Double;
out ADateTime: TDateTime) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Try to convert a Julian date to a regular TDateTime date/time representation.
See also: DateTimeToJulianDate (537), JulianDateToDateTime (568), DateTimeToModifiedJulianDate (538),
44.4.141 TryModifiedJulianDateToDateTime
Synopsis: Convert a modified Julian date representation to a TDateTime value.
Declaration: function TryModifiedJulianDateToDateTime(const AValue: Double;
out ADateTime: TDateTime)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
See also: DateTimeToJulianDate (537), JulianDateToDateTime (568), TryJulianDateToDateTime (605), Date-
TimeToModifiedJulianDate (538), ModifiedJulianDateToDateTime (577)
44.4.142 TryRecodeDateTime
Synopsis: Replace selected parts of a TDateTime value with other values
Declaration: function TryRecodeDateTime(const AValue: TDateTime;const AYear: Word;
const AMonth: Word;const ADay: Word;
const AHour: Word;const AMinute: Word;
const ASecond: Word;const AMilliSecond: Word;
out AResult: TDateTime) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: TryRecodeDateTime replaces selected parts of the timestamp AValue with the date/time val-
ues specified in AYear, AMonth, ADay, AHour, AMinute, ASecond and AMilliSecond.
If any of these values equals the pre-defined constant RecodeLeaveFieldAsIs (533), then the corre-
sponding part of the date/time stamp is left untouched.
The resulting date/time is returned in AValue.
The function returns True if the encoding was succesful. It returns False if one of the values
AYear, AMonth, ADay, AHour, AMinute, ASecondAMilliSecond is not within a valid
range.
RecodeSecond (586), RecodeMilliSecond (584), RecodeDate (581), RecodeTime (587), Recode-
DateTime (582)
605
Program Example97 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e TryRecodeDateTime f u n c t i o n }
Const
Var
S : AnsiString ;
D : TDateTime ;
Begin
I f TryRecodeDateTime (Now, 2 0 0 0 , 2 , RecodeLeaveFieldAsIs , 0 , 0 , 0 , 0 ,D ) then
begin
S: = FormatDateTime ( Fmt ,D ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ T h i s moment i n f e b r u a r i 2 0 0 0 : ’ ,S ) ;
end
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ T h i s moment d i d / does n o t e x i s t i n f e b r u a r i 2000 ’ ) ;
End .
44.4.143 UniversalTimeToLocal
Synopsis: Convert UTC time to local time
Declaration: function UniversalTimeToLocal(UT: TDateTime) : TDateTime

function UniversalTimeToLocal(UT: TDateTime;TZOffset: Integer)
: TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: UniversalTimeToLocal converts a universal time indication to a local time: it applies the
TZOffset timezone offset to the UT Universal time (UTC). If no TZOffset is specified, the local
time offset as returned by GetLocalTimeOffset (531) is used.
See also: GetLocalTimeOffset (531), LocalTimeToUniversal (569)
44.4.144 UnixTimeStampToMac
Synopsis: Convert Unix Timestamp to a Mac Timestamp
Declaration: function UnixTimeStampToMac(const AValue: Int64) : Int64
Visibility: default
Description: UnixTimeStampToMac converts the unix epoch time in AValue to a valid Mac timestamp indi-
cation and returns the result.
Errors: None.
See also: DateTimeToMac (537), MacToDateTime (569), MacTimeStampToUnix (569)
606
44.4.145 UnixToDateTime
Synopsis: Convert Unix epoch time to a TDateTime value
Declaration: function UnixToDateTime(const AValue: Int64) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: UnixToDateTime converts epoch time (seconds elapsed since 1/1/1970) to a TDateTime value.
See also: DateTimeToUnix (538)
44.4.146 WeekOf
Synopsis: Extract week (of the year) from a given date.
Declaration: function WeekOf(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: WeekOf returns the week-of-the-year part of the AValue date/time indication. It is a number
between 1 and 53.
See also: YearOf (619), DayOf (538), MonthOf (578), HourOf (553), MinuteOf (574), SecondOf (591), Mil-
liSecondOf (569)
44.4.147 WeekOfTheMonth
Synopsis: Extract the week of the month (and optionally month and year) from a DateTime value
Declaration: function WeekOfTheMonth(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word; Overload
function WeekOfTheMonth(const AValue: TDateTime;out AYear: Word;
out AMonth: Word) : Word; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: WeekOfTheMonth extracts the week of the month from Avalue and returns it, and optionally
returns the year and month as well (in AYear, AMonth respectively).
Remark: Note that weeks are numbered from 1 using the ISO 8601 standard, and the day of the week as well.
This means that the year and month may not be the same as the year part of the date, since the week
may start in the previous year as the first week of the year is the week with at least 4 days in it.
See also: WeekOfTheYear (608), DayOfTheMonth (538), HourOfTheMonth (554), MinuteOfTheMonth (575),
SecondOfTheMonth (592), MilliSecondOfTheMonth (571)
Program Example41 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e WeekOfTheMonth f u n c t i o n }
Var
N : TDateTime ;
Begin
607
N: =Now;
Writeln ( ’Week o f t h e Month : ’ , WeekOfTheMonth (N ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Day o f t h e Month : ’ , DayOfTheMonth (N ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Hour o f t h e Month : ’ , HourOfTheMonth (N ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Minute o f t h e Month : ’ , MinuteOfTheMonth (N ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Second o f t h e Month : ’ , SecondOfTheMonth (N ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ M i l l i S e c o n d o f t h e Month : ’ ,
MilliSecondOfTheMonth (N ) ) ;
End .
44.4.148 WeekOfTheYear
Synopsis: Extract the week of the year (and optionally year) of a DateTime indication.
Declaration: function WeekOfTheYear(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word; Overload
function WeekOfTheYear(const AValue: TDateTime;out AYear: Word) : Word
; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: WeekOfTheYear extracts the week of the year from Avalue and returns it, and optionally returns
the year as well. It returns the same value as WeekOf (607).
Remark: Note that weeks are numbered from 1 using the ISO 8601 standard, and the day of the week as well.
This means that the year may not be the same as the year part of the date, since the week may start
in the previous year as the first week of the year is the week with at least 4 days in it.
See also: WeekOf (607), MonthOfTheYear (578), DayOfTheYear (539), HourOfTheYear (555), MinuteOfTheYear
(575), SecondOfTheYear (593), MilliSecondOfTheYear (572)
Program Example40 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e WeekOfTheYear f u n c t i o n }
Var
N : TDateTime ;
Begin
N: =Now;
Writeln ( ’ Month o f t h e year : ’ , MonthOfTheYear (N ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’Week o f t h e year : ’ , WeekOfTheYear (N ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Day o f t h e year : ’ , DayOfTheYear (N ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Hour o f t h e year : ’ , HourOfTheYear (N ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Minute o f t h e year : ’ , MinuteOfTheYear (N ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Second o f t h e year : ’ , SecondOfTheYear (N ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ M i l l i S e c o n d o f t h e year : ’ ,
MilliSecondOfTheYear (N ) ) ;
End .
44.4.149 WeeksBetween
Synopsis: Calculate the number of whole weeks between two DateTime values
608
Declaration: function WeeksBetween(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime)

: Integer
Visibility: default
Description: WeeksBetween returns the number of whole weeks between ANow and AThen. This means the
fractional part of a Week is dropped.
See also: YearsBetween (620), MonthsBetween (578), DaysBetween (540), HoursBetween (555), Minutes-
Program Example57 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e WeeksBetween f u n c t i o n }
begin
Write ( ’ Number o f weeks between ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ : ’ , WeeksBetween (ANow, AThen ) ) ;
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: = Today ;
D2: = Today −7;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −8;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −14;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −35;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −36;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −17;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
End .
44.4.150 WeeksInAYear
Synopsis: Return the number of weeks in a given year
Declaration: function WeeksInAYear(const AYear: Word) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: WeeksInAYear returns the number of weeks in the year AYear. The return value is either 52 or
53.
Remark: The first week of the year is determined according to the ISO 8601 standard: It is the first week that
has at least 4 days in it, i.e. it includes a thursday.
609
See also: WeeksInYear (610), DaysInYear (542), DaysInAYear (541), DaysInMonth (542), DaysInAMonth
(540)
Program Example13 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e WeeksInAYear f u n c t i o n }
Var
Y : Word ;
Begin
For Y: = 1 9 9 2 to 2 0 1 0 do
W r i t e l n ( Y , ’ has ’ , WeeksInAYear (Y ) , ’ weeks . ’ ) ;
End .
44.4.151 WeeksInYear
Synopsis: return the number of weeks in the year, given a date
Declaration: function WeeksInYear(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: WeeksInYear returns the number of weeks in the year part of AValue. The return value is either
52 or 53.
Remark: The first week of the year is determined according to the ISO 8601 standard: It is the first week that
has at least 4 days in it, i.e. it includes a thursday.
See also: WeeksInAYear (609), DaysInYear (542), DaysInAYear (541), DaysInMonth (542), DaysInAMonth
(540)
Program Example12 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e WeeksInYear f u n c t i o n }
Var
Y : Word ;
Begin
For Y: = 1 9 9 2 to 2 0 1 0 do
W r i t e l n ( Y , ’ has ’ , WeeksInYear ( EncodeDate ( Y , 2 , 1 ) ) , ’ weeks . ’ ) ;
End .
44.4.152 WeekSpan
Synopsis: Calculate the approximate number of weeks between two DateTime values.
Declaration: function WeekSpan(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime) : Double
610
Visibility: default
Description: WeekSpan returns the number of weeks between ANow and AThen, including any fractional parts
of a week.
See also: YearSpan (621), MonthSpan (579), DaySpan (543), HourSpan (556), MinuteSpan (577), SecondSpan
(594), MilliSecondSpan (573), WeeksBetween (608)
Program Example57 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e WeekSpan f u n c t i o n }
begin
Write ( ’ Number o f weeks between ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ : ’ ,WeekSpan (ANow, AThen ) ) ;
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: = Today ;
D2: = Today −7;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −8;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −14;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −35;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −36;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −17;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
End .
44.4.153 WithinPastDays
Synopsis: Check whether two datetimes are only a number of days apart
Declaration: function WithinPastDays(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime;
const ADays: Integer) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: WithinPastDays compares the timestamps ANow and AThen and returns True if the difference
between them is at most ADays days apart, or False if they are further apart.
Remark: Since this function uses the DaysBetween (540) function to calculate the difference in days, this
means that fractional days do not count, and the fractional part is simply dropped, so for two dates
actually 2 and a half days apart, the result will also be True
611
See also: WithinPastYears (618), WithinPastMonths (615), WithinPastWeeks (617), WithinPastHours (612),
WithinPastMinutes (614), WithinPastSeconds (616), WithinPastMilliSeconds (613)
Program Example50 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e WithinPastDays f u n c t i o n }
Procedure Test (ANow, AThen : TDateTime ; ADays : I n t e g e r ) ;
begin
Write ( ’ are w i t h i n ’ , ADays , ’ days : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( WithinPastDays (ANow, AThen , ADays ) ) ;
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: =Now;
D2: = Today −23/24;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
D2: = Today −1;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
D2: = Today −25/24;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
D2: = Today −26/24;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 5 ) ;
D2: = Today −5.4;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 5 ) ;
D2: = Today −2.5;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 3 ) ;
End .
44.4.154 WithinPastHours
Synopsis: Check whether two datetimes are only a number of hours apart
Declaration: function WithinPastHours(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime;
const AHours: Int64) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: WithinPastHours compares the timestamps ANow and AThen and returns True if the differ-
ence between them is at most AHours hours apart, or False if they are further apart.
Remark: Since this function uses the HoursBetween (555) function to calculate the difference in Hours, this
means that fractional hours do not count, and the fractional part is simply dropped, so for two dates
actually 2 and a half hours apart, the result will also be True
See also: WithinPastYears (618), WithinPastMonths (615), WithinPastWeeks (617), WithinPastDays (611),
612
Program Example51 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e WithinPastHours f u n c t i o n }
Procedure Test (ANow, AThen : TDateTime ; AHours : I n t e g e r ) ;
begin
Write ( ’ are w i t h i n ’ , AHours , ’ hours : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( WithinPastHours (ANow, AThen , AHours ) ) ;
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: =Now;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 5 ) ;
D2: =D1−(5.4∗OneHour ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 5 ) ;
D2: =D1−(2.5∗OneHour ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 3 ) ;
End .
44.4.155 WithinPastMilliSeconds
Synopsis: Check whether two datetimes are only a number of milliseconds apart
Declaration: function WithinPastMilliSeconds(const ANow: TDateTime;

const AThen: TDateTime;
const AMilliSeconds: Int64) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: WithinPastMilliSeconds compares the timestamps ANow and AThen and returns True if
the difference between them is at most AMilliSeconds milliseconds apart, or False if they are
further apart.
Remark: Since this function uses the MilliSecondsBetween (572) function to calculate the difference in mil-
liseconds, this means that fractional milliseconds do not count, and the fractional part is simply
dropped, so for two dates actually 2 and a half milliseconds apart, the result will also be True
WithinPastHours (612), WithinPastMinutes (614), WithinPastSeconds (616)
613
Program Example54 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e W i t h i n P a s t M i l l i S e c o n d s f u n c t i o n }
Procedure Test (ANow, AThen : TDateTime ; A M i l l i S e c o n d s : I n t e g e r ) ;
begin
Write ( ’ are w i t h i n ’ , A M i l l i S e c o n d s , ’ m i l l i s e c o n d s : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( W i t h i n P a s t M i l l i S e c o n d s (ANow, AThen , A M i l l i S e c o n d s ) ) ;
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: =Now;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 3 ) ;
End .
44.4.156 WithinPastMinutes
Synopsis: Check whether two datetimes are only a number of minutes apart
Declaration: function WithinPastMinutes(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime;
const AMinutes: Int64) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: WithinPastMinutes compares the timestamps ANow and AThen and returns True if the dif-
ference between them is at most AMinutes minutes apart, or False if they are further apart.
Remark: Since this function uses the MinutesBetween (576) function to calculate the difference in Minutes,
this means that fractional minutes do not count, and the fractional part is simply dropped, so for two
dates actually 2 and a half minutes apart, the result will also be True
WithinPastHours (612), WithinPastSeconds (616), WithinPastMilliSeconds (613)
Program Example52 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e W i t h i n P a s t M i n u t e s f u n c t i o n }
614
Procedure Test (ANow, AThen : TDateTime ; AMinutes : I n t e g e r ) ;
begin
Write ( ’ are w i t h i n ’ , AMinutes , ’ Minutes : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( W i t h i n P a s t M i n u t e s (ANow, AThen , AMinutes ) ) ;
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: =Now;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 5 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 5 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 3 ) ;
End .
44.4.157 WithinPastMonths
Synopsis: Check whether two datetimes are only a number of months apart
Declaration: function WithinPastMonths(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime;
const AMonths: Integer) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: WithinPastMonths compares the timestamps ANow and AThen and returns True if the differ-
ence between them is at most AMonths months apart, or False if they are further apart.
Remark: Since this function uses the MonthsBetween (578) function to calculate the difference in Months,
this means that fractional months do not count, and the fractional part is simply dropped, so for two
dates actually 2 and a half months apart, the result will also be True
See also: WithinPastYears (618), WithinPastWeeks (617), WithinPastDays (611), WithinPastHours (612),
Program Example48 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e WithinPastMonths f u n c t i o n }
615
Procedure Test (ANow, AThen : TDateTime ; AMonths : I n t e g e r ) ;
begin
Write ( ’ are w i t h i n ’ , AMonths , ’ months : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( WithinPastMonths (ANow, AThen , AMonths ) ) ;
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: = Today ;
D2: = Today −364;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 2 ) ;
D2: = Today −365;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 2 ) ;
D2: = Today −366;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 2 ) ;
D2: = Today −390;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 2 ) ;
D2: = Today −368;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 1 ) ;
D2: = Today −1000;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 3 1 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 3 2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 3 3 ) ;
End .
44.4.158 WithinPastSeconds
Synopsis: Check whether two datetimes are only a number of seconds apart
Declaration: function WithinPastSeconds(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime;
const ASeconds: Int64) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: WithinPastSeconds compares the timestamps ANow and AThen and returns True if the dif-
ference between them is at most ASeconds seconds apart, or False if they are further apart.
Remark: Since this function uses the SecondsBetween (593) function to calculate the difference in seconds,
this means that fractional seconds do not count, and the fractional part is simply dropped, so for two
dates actually 2 and a half seconds apart, the result will also be True
WithinPastHours (612), WithinPastMinutes (614), WithinPastMilliSeconds (613)
Program Example53 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e WithinPastSeconds f u n c t i o n }
Procedure Test (ANow, AThen : TDateTime ; ASeconds : I n t e g e r ) ;
616
begin
Write ( ’ are w i t h i n ’ , ASeconds , ’ seconds : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( WithinPastSeconds (ANow, AThen , ASeconds ) ) ;
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: =Now;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 5 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 5 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 3 ) ;
End .
44.4.159 WithinPastWeeks
Synopsis: Check whether two datetimes are only a number of weeks apart
Declaration: function WithinPastWeeks(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime;
const AWeeks: Integer) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: WithinPastWeeks compares the timestamps ANow and AThen and returns True if the differ-
ence between them is at most AWeeks weeks apart, or False if they are further apart.
Remark: Since this function uses the WeeksBetween (608) function to calculate the difference in Weeks, this
means that fractional Weeks do not count, and the fractional part is simply dropped, so for two dates
actually 2 and a half weeks apart, the result will also be True
See also: WithinPastYears (618), WithinPastMonths (615), WithinPastDays (611), WithinPastHours (612),
Program Example49 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e WithinPastWeeks f u n c t i o n }
Procedure Test (ANow, AThen : TDateTime ; AWeeks : I n t e g e r ) ;
begin
617
Write ( ’ are w i t h i n ’ ,AWeeks , ’ weeks : ’ ) ;

W r i t e l n ( WithinPastWeeks (ANow, AThen , AWeeks ) ) ;
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: = Today ;
D2: = Today −7;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
D2: = Today −8;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
D2: = Today −14;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
D2: = Today −35;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 5 ) ;
D2: = Today −36;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 5 ) ;
D2: = Today −17;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 3 ) ;
End .
44.4.160 WithinPastYears
Synopsis: Check whether two datetimes are only a number of years apart
Declaration: function WithinPastYears(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime;
const AYears: Integer) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: WithinPastYears compares the timestamps ANow and AThen and returns True if the differ-
ence between them is at most AYears years apart, or False if they are further apart.
Remark: Since this function uses the YearsBetween (620) function to calculate the difference in years, this
means that fractional years do not count, and the fractional part is simply dropped, so for two dates
actually 2 and a half years apart, the result will also be True
See also: WithinPastMonths (615), WithinPastWeeks (617), WithinPastDays (611), WithinPastHours (612),
Program Example47 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e Wi th i nP as tY e ar s f u n c t i o n }
Procedure Test (ANow, AThen : TDateTime ; AYears : I n t e g e r ) ;
begin
Write ( ’ are w i t h i n ’ , AYears , ’ years : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( W it hi n Pa st Ye ar s (ANow, AThen , AYears ) ) ;
618
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: = Today ;
D2: = Today −364;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
D2: = Today −365;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
D2: = Today −366;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
D2: = Today −390;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
D2: = Today −368;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
D2: = Today −1000;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 1 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 2 ) ;
Test ( D1 , D2 , 3 ) ;
End .
44.4.161 YearOf
Synopsis: Extract the year from a given date.
Declaration: function YearOf(const AValue: TDateTime) : Word

Visibility: default
Description: YearOf returns the year part of the AValue date/time indication. It is a number between 1 and
9999.
See also: MonthOf (578), DayOf (538), WeekOf (607), HourOf (553), MinuteOf (574), SecondOf (591),
MilliSecondOf (569)
Program Example23 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e YearOf f u n c t i o n }
Var
D : TDateTime ;
Begin
D: =Now;
Writeln ( ’ Year : ’ , YearOf (D ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Month : ’ , MonthOf (D ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Day : ’ , DayOf (D ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’Week : ’ , WeekOf (D ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Hour : ’ , HourOf (D ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Minute : ’ , MinuteOf (D ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Second : ’ , SecondOf (D ) ) ;
619
Writeln ( ’ MilliSecond : ’ , M i l l i S e c o n d O f (D ) ) ;
End .
44.4.162 YearsBetween
Synopsis: Calculate the number of whole years between two DateTime values
Declaration: function YearsBetween(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime)
: Integer
Visibility: default
Description: YearsBetween returns the number of whole years between ANow and AThen. This number is an
approximation, based on an average number of days of 365.25 per year (average over 4 years). This
means the fractional part of a year is dropped.
See also: MonthsBetween (578), WeeksBetween (608), DaysBetween (540), HoursBetween (555), Minutes-
Between (576), SecondsBetween (593), MilliSecondsBetween (572), YearSpan (621)
Program Example55 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e YearsBetween f u n c t i o n }
begin
Write ( ’ Number o f years between ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ : ’ , YearsBetween (ANow, AThen ) ) ;
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: = Today ;
D2: = Today −364;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −365;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −366;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −390;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −368;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −1000;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
End .
620
44.4.163 YearSpan
Synopsis: Calculate the approximate number of years between two DateTime values.
Declaration: function YearSpan(const ANow: TDateTime;const AThen: TDateTime) : Double

Visibility: default
Description: YearSpan returns the number of years between ANow and AThen, including any fractional parts
of a year. This number is an approximation, based on an average number of days of 365.25 per year
(average over 4 years).
See also: MonthSpan (579), WeekSpan (610), DaySpan (543), HourSpan (556), MinuteSpan (577), Sec-
ondSpan (594), MilliSecondSpan (573), YearsBetween (620)
Program Example63 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e YearSpan f u n c t i o n }
begin
Write ( ’ Number o f years between ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ : ’ , YearSpan (ANow, AThen ) ) ;
end ;
Var
Begin
D1: = Today ;
D2: = Today −364;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −365;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −366;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −390;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −368;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
D2: = Today −1000;
Test ( D1 , D2 ) ;
End .
44.4.164 Yesterday
Synopsis: Return the previous day.
Declaration: function Yesterday : TDateTime

Visibility: default
621
Description: Yesterday returns yesterday’s date. Yesterday is determined from the system clock, i.e. it is
Today (600) -1.
See also: Today (600), Tomorrow (600)
Program Example18 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e Yesterday f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( ’ " Today i s " dd mmmm yyyy ’ , Today ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( FormatDateTime ( ’ " Yesterday was " dd mmmm yyyy ’ , Yesterday ) ) ;
End .
622
Chapter 45
Reference for unit ’Dos’
45.1 Used units
Table 45.1: Used units by unit ’Dos’
Name Page
BaseUnix 113
System 1224
45.2 Overview
The DOS unit gives access to some operating system calls related to files, the file system, date and
time. Except for the PalmOS target, this unit is available to all supported platforms.
The unit was first written for dos by Florian Klaempfl. It was ported to linux by Mark May and
enhanced by Michael Van Canneyt. The Amiga version was ported by Nils Sjoholm.
Under non-DOS systems, some of the functionality is lost, as it is either impossible or meaningless
to implement it. Other than that, the functionality is the same for all operating systems.
Because the DOS unit is a Turbo Pascal compatibility unit, it is no longer actively developed: the
interface is frozen and it is maintained only for the purpose of porting Turbo Pascal programs. For
new development, it is recommended to use the sysutils (1476) unit instead.
45.3 System information

Functions for retrieving and setting general system information such as date and time.
623
CHAPTER 45. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’DOS’
Table 45.2:
Name Description
DosVersion (1) Get OS version
GetCBreak (638) Get setting of control-break handling flag
GetDate (638) Get system date
GetIntVec (641) Get interrupt vector status
GetTime (642) Get system time
GetVerify (643) Get verify flag
Intr (643) Execute an interrupt
Keep (643) Keep process in memory and exit
MSDos (644) Execute MS-dos function call
PackTime (644) Pack time for file time
SetCBreak (645) Set control-break handling flag
SetDate (645) Set system date
SetIntVec (646) Set interrupt vectors
SetTime (647) Set system time
SetVerify (647) Set verify flag
SwapVectors (647) Swap interrupt vectors
UnPackTime (648) Unpack file time
45.4 Process handling

Functions to handle process information and starting new processes.
Table 45.3:
Name Description
DosExitCode (1) Exit code of last executed program
EnvCount (633) Return number of environment variables
EnvStr (634) Return environment string pair
Exec (634) Execute program
GetEnv (639) Return specified environment string
45.5 Directory and disk handling

Routines to handle disk information.
Table 45.4:
Name Description
AddDisk (630) Add disk to list of disks (UNIX only)
DiskFree (631) Return size of free disk space
DiskSize (631) Return total disk size
624
45.6 File handling

Routines to handle files on disk.
Table 45.5:
Name Description
FExpand (635) Expand filename to full path
FindClose (635) Close finfirst/findnext session
FindFirst (635) Start find of file
FindNext (636) Find next file
FSearch (636) Search for file in a path
FSplit (637) Split filename in parts
GetFAttr (639) Return file attributes
GetFTime (640) Return file time
GetLongName (641) Convert short filename to long filename (DOS only)
GetShortName (642) Convert long filename to short filename (DOS only)
SetFAttr (645) Set file attributes
SetFTime (646) Set file time
45.7 File open mode constants.

These constants are used in the Mode field of the TextRec record. Gives information on the file-
mode of the text I/O. For their definitions consult the following table:
Table 45.6: Possible mode constants

Constant Description Value
fmclosed File is closed $D7B0
fminput File is read only $D7B1
fmoutput File is write only $D7B2
fminout File is read and write $D7B3
45.8 File attributes

The File Attribute constants are used in FindFirst (635), FindNext (636) to determine what type of
special file to search for in addition to normal files. These flags are also used in the SetFAttr (645) and
GetFAttr (639) routines to set and retrieve attributes of files. For their definitions consult fileattributes
(625).
625
Table 45.7: Possible file attributes

Constant Description Value
readonly Read-Only file attribute $01
hidden Hidden file attribute $02
sysfile System file attribute $04
volumeid Volumd ID file attribute $08
directory Directory file attribute $10
archive Archive file attribute $20
anyfile Match any file attribute $3F

45.9.1 Constants
anyfile = $3F
Match any file attribute
archive = $20
Archive file attribute
directory = $10
Directory file attribute
fauxiliary = $0010
CPU auxiliary flag. Not used.
fcarry = $0001
CPU carry flag. Not used.
FileNameLen = 255
Maximum length of a filename
fmclosed = $D7B0
File is closed
fminout = $D7B3
File is read and write
fminput = $D7B1
626
File is read only
fmoutput = $D7B2
File is write only
foverflow = $0800
CPU overflow flag. Not used.
fparity = $0004
CPU parity flag. Not used.
fsign = $0080
CPU sign flag. Not used.
fzero = $0040
CPU zero flag. Not used.
hidden = $02
Hidden file attribute
readonly = $01
Read-Only file attribute
sysfile = $04
System file attribute
volumeid = $08
Volumd ID file attribute
45.9.2 Types
ComStr = string
Command-line string type
DateTime = packed record

Year : Word;
Month : Word;
Day : Word;
Hour : Word;
Min : Word;
Sec : Word;
end
627
The DateTime type is used in PackTime (644) and UnPackTime (648) for setting/reading file times
with GetFTime (640) and SetFTime (646).
DirStr = string
Full directory string type.
ExtStr = string
Filename extension string type.
NameStr = string
Fill filename string type.
PathStr = string
Full File path string type.
Registers = packed record

case i : Integer of
0: (
ax : Word;
f1 : Word;
bx : Word;
f2 : Word;
cx : Word;
f3 : Word;
dx : Word;
f4 : Word;
bp : Word;
f5 : Word;
si : Word;
f51 : Word;
di : Word;
f6 : Word;
ds : Word;
f7 : Word;
es : Word;
f8 : Word;
flags : Word;
fs : Word;
gs : Word;
);
1: (
al : Byte;
ah : Byte;
f9 : Byte;
f10 : Byte;
bl : Byte;
bh : Byte;
f11 : Byte;
628
f12 : Byte;
cl : Byte;
ch : Byte;
f13 : Byte;
f14 : Byte;
dl : Byte;
dh : Byte;
);
2: (
eax : LongInt;
ebx : LongInt;
ecx : LongInt;
edx : LongInt;
ebp : LongInt;
esi : LongInt;
edi : LongInt;
);
end
This structure is only defined on a i386 compatible 32-bit platform, and is not used anywhere: it is
defined for Turbo Pascal backwards compatibility only.
SearchRec = packed record

SearchPos : TOff;
SearchNum : LongInt;
DirPtr : Pointer;
SearchType : Byte;
SearchAttr : Byte;
Mode : Word;
Fill : Array[1..1] of Byte;
Attr : Byte;
Time : LongInt;
Size : LongInt;
Reserved : Word;
Name : string;
SearchSpec : string;
NamePos : Word;
end
SearchRec is filled by the FindFirst (635) call and can be used in subsequent FindNext (636) calls
to search for files. The structure of this record depends on the platform. Only the following fields are
present on all platforms:
Attr File attributes.

Time File modification time.
Size File size
Name File name (name part only, no path)

Mode File access mode (linux only)
629
45.9.3 Variables
DosError : Integer
The DosError variable is used by the procedures in the dos unit to report errors. It can have the
following values :
Table 45.8: Dos error codes

Value Meaning
2 File not found.
3 Path not found.
5 Access denied.
6 Invalid handle.
8 Not enough memory.
10 Invalid environment.
11 Invalid format.
18 No more files.
Other values are possible, but are not documented.

45.10.1 AddDisk
Synopsis: Add disk definition to list if drives (Unix only)
Declaration: function AddDisk(const path: string) : Byte
Visibility: default
Description: AddDisk adds a filename S to the internal list of disks. It is implemented for systems which do not
use DOS type drive letters. This list is used to determine which disks to use in the DiskFree (631) and
DiskSize (631) calls. The DiskFree (631) and DiskSize (631) functions need a file on the specified
drive, since this is required for the statfs system call. The names are added sequentially. The dos
initialization code presets the first three disks to:
•’.’ for the current drive,

•’/fd0/.’ for the first floppy-drive (linux only).
•’/fd1/.’ for the second floppy-drive (linux only).
•’/’ for the first hard disk.
The first call to AddDisk will therefore add a name for the second harddisk, The second call for the
third drive, and so on until 23 drives have been added (corresponding to drives ’D:’ to ’Z:’)
Errors: None
See also: DiskFree (631), DiskSize (631)
630
45.10.2 DiskFree
Synopsis: Get free size on Disk.
Declaration: function DiskFree(drive: Byte) : Int64
Visibility: default
Description: DiskFree returns the number of free bytes on a disk. The parameter Drive indicates which disk
should be checked. This parameter is 1 for floppy a:, 2 for floppy b:, etc. A value of 0 returns the
free space on the current drive.
Remark: For Unices: The diskfree and disksize functions need a file on the specified drive, since this
is required for the statfs system call. These filenames are set in the initialization of the dos unit,
and have been preset to :

There is room for 1-26 drives. You can add a drive with the AddDisk (630) procedure. These settings
can be coded in dos.pp, in the initialization part.
Errors: -1 when a failure occurs, or an invalid drive number is given.
See also: DiskSize (631), AddDisk (630)
Listing: ./dosex/ex6.pp
Program Example6 ;
uses Dos ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e D i s k S i z e and DiskFree f u n c t i o n . }
begin
WriteLn ( ’ T h i s p a r t i t i o n s i z e has ’ , DiskSize ( 0 ) , ’ b y t e s ’ ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ C u r r e n t l y ’ , DiskFree ( 0 ) , ’ b y t e s are f r e e ’ ) ;
end .
45.10.3 DiskSize
Synopsis: Get total size of disk.
Declaration: function DiskSize(drive: Byte) : Int64
Visibility: default
Description: DiskSize returns the total size (in bytes) of a disk. The parameter Drive indicates which disk
should be checked. This parameter is 1 for floppy a:, 2 for floppy b:, etc. A value of 0 returns the
size of the current drive.
Remark: For unix only: The diskfree and disksize functions need a file on the specified drive, since
this is required for the statfs system call. These filenames are set in the initialization of the dos
unit, and have been preset to :

631

There is room for 1-26 drives. You can add a drive with the AddDisk (630) procedure. These settings
can be coded in dos.pp, in the initialization part.
For an example, see DiskFree (631).
Errors: -1 when a failure occurs, or an invalid drive number is given.
See also: DiskFree (631), AddDisk (630)
45.10.4 DosExitCode
Synopsis: Exit code of last executed program.
Declaration: function DosExitCode : Word
Visibility: default
Description: DosExitCode contains (in the low byte) the exit-code of a program executed with the Exec call.
Errors: None.
See also: Exec (634)
Program Example5 ;
uses Dos ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Exec and DosExitCode f u n c t i o n . }
begin
{ $IFDEF Unix }
WriteLn ( ’ E x e c u t i n g / b i n / l s − l a ’ ) ;
Exec ( ’ / b i n / l s ’ , ’−l a ’ ) ;
{ $ELSE }
WriteLn ( ’ E x e c u t i n g D i r ’ ) ;
Exec ( GetEnv ( ’COMSPEC ’ ) , ’ /C d i r ’ ) ;
{ $ENDIF }
WriteLn ( ’ Program r e t u r n e d w i t h ExitCode ’ , Lo ( DosExitCode ) ) ;
end .
45.10.5 DosVersion
Synopsis: Current OS version
Declaration: function DosVersion : Word
Visibility: default
Description: DosVersion returns the operating system or kernel version. The low byte contains the major
version number, while the high byte contains the minor version number.
Remark: On systems where versions consists of more then two numbers, only the first two numbers will be
returned. For example Linux version 2.1.76 will give you DosVersion 2.1. Some operating systems,
such as FreeBSD, do not have system calls to return the kernel version, in that case a value of 0 will
be returned.
632
Errors: None.
Program Example1 ;
uses Dos ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e DosVersion f u n c t i o n . }
var
OS : string [ 3 2 ] ;
V e r s i o n : word ;
begin
{ $IFDEF LINUX }
OS: = ’ L i n u x ’ ;
{ $ENDIF }
{ $ i f d e f FreeBSD }
OS: = ’ FreeBSD ’ ;
{ $endif }
{ $ i f d e f NetBSD }
OS: = ’ NetBSD ’ ;
{ $endif }
{ $ifdef Solaris }
OS: = ’ S o l a r i s ’ ;
{ $endif }
{ $ i f d e f QNX}
OS: = ’QNX ’ ;
{ $endif }
{ $IFDEF DOS}
OS: = ’ Dos ’ ;
{ $ENDIF }
V e r s i o n : = DosVersion ;
WriteLn ( ’ C u r r e n t ’ ,OS, ’ v e r s i o n i s ’ , Lo ( V e r s i o n ) , ’ . ’ , Hi ( V e r s i o n ) ) ;
end .
45.10.6 DTToUnixDate
Synopsis: Convert a DateTime to unix timestamp
Declaration: function DTToUnixDate(DT: DateTime) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: DTToUnixDate converts the DateTime value in DT to a unix timestamp. It is an internal function,
implemented on Unix platforms, and should not be used.
Errors: None.
See also: UnixDateToDT (648), PackTime (644), UnpackTime (648), GetTime (642), SetTime (647)
45.10.7 EnvCount
Synopsis: Return the number of environment variables
Declaration: function EnvCount : LongInt
633
Visibility: default
Description: EnvCount returns the number of environment variables.
Errors: None.
See also: EnvStr (634), GetEnv (639)
45.10.8 EnvStr
Synopsis: Return environment variable by index
Declaration: function EnvStr(Index: LongInt) : string
Visibility: default
Description: EnvStr returns the Index-th Name=Value pair from the list of environment variables. The index
of the first pair is zero.
Errors: The length is limited to 255 characters.
See also: EnvCount (633), GetEnv (639)
Program Example13 ;
uses Dos ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e EnvCount and EnvStr f u n c t i o n . }
var
i : Longint ;
begin
WriteLn ( ’ C u r r e n t Environment i s : ’ ) ;
f o r i : = 1 to EnvCount do
WriteLn ( EnvStr ( i ) ) ;
end .
45.10.9 Exec
Synopsis: Execute another program, and wait for it to finish.
Declaration: procedure Exec(const path: PathStr;const comline: ComStr)
Visibility: default
Description: Exec executes the program in Path, with the options given by ComLine. The program name
should not appear again in ComLine, it is specified in Path. Comline contains only the parameters
that are passed to the program.
After the program has terminated, the procedure returns. The Exit value of the program can be
consulted with the DosExitCode function.
For an example, see DosExitCode (1)
Errors: Errors are reported in DosError.

See also: DosExitCode (1)
634
45.10.10 FExpand
Synopsis: Expand a relative path to an absolute path
Declaration: function FExpand(const path: PathStr) : PathStr
Visibility: default
Description: FExpand takes its argument and expands it to a complete filename, i.e. a filename starting from the
root directory of the current drive, prepended with the drive-letter or volume name (when supported).
Remark: On case sensitive file systems (such as unix and linux), the resulting name is left as it is, otherwise
it is converted to uppercase.
Errors: FSplit (637)
Program Example11 ;
uses Dos ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e FExpand f u n c t i o n . }
begin
WriteLn ( ’ Expanded Name o f t h i s program i s ’ , FExpand ( ParamStr ( 0 ) ) ) ;
end .
45.10.11 FindClose
Synopsis: Dispose resources allocated by a FindFirst (635)/FindNext (636) sequence.
Declaration: procedure FindClose(var f: SearchRec)
Visibility: default
Description: FindClose frees any resources associated with the search record F.
This call is needed to free any internal resources allocated by the FindFirst (635) or FindNext (636)
calls.
The unix implementation of the dos unit therefore keeps a table of open directories, and when the
table is full, closes one of the directories, and reopens another. This system is adequate but slow if
you use a lot of searchrecs.
So, to speed up the findfirst/findnext system, the FindClose call was implemented. When you
don’t need a searchrec any more, you can tell this to the dos unit by issuing a FindClose call.
The directory which is kept open for this searchrec is then closed, and the table slot freed.
Remark: It is recommended to use the linux call Glob when looking for files on linux.
See also: FindFirst (635), FindNext (636)
45.10.12 FindFirst
Synopsis: Start search for one or more files.
Declaration: procedure FindFirst(const path: PathStr;attr: Word;var f: SearchRec)
Visibility: default
635
Description: FindFirst searches the file specified in Path. Normal files, as well as all special files which
have the attributes specified in Attr will be returned.
It returns a SearchRec record for further searching in F. Path can contain the wildcard characters
? (matches any single character) and * (matches 0 ore more arbitrary characters). In this case
FindFirst will return the first file which matches the specified criteria. If DosError is different
from zero, no file(s) matching the criteria was(were) found.
Remark: On os/2, you cannot issue two different FindFirst calls. That is, you must close any previous
search operation with FindClose (635) before starting a new one. Failure to do so will end in a
Run-Time Error 6 (Invalid file handle)
See also: FindNext (636), FindClose (635)
Program Example7 ;
uses Dos ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e F i n d F i r s t and FindNext f u n c t i o n . }
var
D i r : SearchRec ;
begin
FindFirst ( ’ ∗.∗ ’ , archive , Dir ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ FileName ’ +Space ( 3 2 ) , ’ F i l e S i z e ’ : 9 ) ;
while ( DosError = 0 ) do
begin
W r i t e l n ( D i r .Name+Space(40−Length ( D i r .Name ) ) , D i r . Size : 9 ) ;
FindNext ( D i r ) ;
end ;
FindClose ( D i r ) ;
end .
45.10.13 FindNext
Synopsis: Find next matching file after FindFirst (635)
Declaration: procedure FindNext(var f: SearchRec)
Visibility: default
Description: FindNext takes as an argument a SearchRec from a previous FindNext call, or a FindFirst
call, and tries to find another file which matches the criteria, specified in the FindFirst call. If
DosError is different from zero, no more files matching the criteria were found.
For an example, see FindFirst (635).
Errors: DosError is used to report errors.
See also: FindFirst (635), FindClose (635)
45.10.14 FSearch
Synopsis: Search a file in searchpath
Declaration: function FSearch(path: PathStr;dirlist: string) : PathStr
636
Visibility: default
Description: FSearch searches the file Path in all directories listed in DirList. The full name of the found
file is returned. DirList must be a list of directories, separated by semi-colons. When no file is
found, an empty string is returned.
Remark: On unix systems, DirList can also be separated by colons, as is customary on those environments.
Errors: None.
See also: FExpand (635)
program Example10 ;
uses Dos ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e FSearch f u n c t i o n . }
var s : p a t h s t r ;
begin
s : = FSearch ( ParamStr ( 1 ) , GetEnv ( ’PATH ’ ) ) ;
i f s= ’ ’ then
WriteLn ( ParamStr ( 1 ) , ’ n o t Found i n PATH ’ )
else
W r i t e l n ( ParamStr ( 1 ) , ’ Found i n PATH a t ’ , s ) ;
end .
45.10.15 FSplit
Synopsis: Split a full-path filename in parts.
Declaration: procedure FSplit(path: PathStr;var dir: DirStr;var name: NameStr;
var ext: ExtStr)
Visibility: default
Description: FSplit splits a full file name into 3 parts : A Path, a Name and an extension (in ext.) The
extension is taken to be all letters after the last dot (.). For dos, however, an exception is made when
LFNSupport=False, then the extension is defined as all characters after the first dot.
Errors: None.
See also: FSearch (636)
program Example12 ;
uses Dos ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e F S p l i t f u n c t i o n . }
var d i r : d i r s t r ;
name : namestr ;
ext : e x t s t r ;
637
begin
F S p l i t ( ParamStr ( 1 ) , d i r , name, e x t ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ S p l i t t e d ’ , ParamStr ( 1 ) , ’ i n : ’ ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ Path : ’ , dir );
WriteLn ( ’Name : ’ ,name ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ E x t e n s i o n : ’ , e x t ) ;
end .
45.10.16 GetCBreak
Synopsis: Get control-Break flag
Declaration: procedure GetCBreak(var breakvalue: Boolean)
Visibility: default
Description: GetCBreak gets the status of CTRL-Break checking under dos and Amiga. When BreakValue
is false, then dos only checks for the CTRL-Break key-press when I/O is performed. When it is
set to True, then a check is done at every system call.
Remark: Under non-dos and non-Amiga operating systems, BreakValue always returns True.
Errors: None
See also: SetCBreak (645)
45.10.17 GetDate
Synopsis: Get the current date
Declaration: procedure GetDate(var year: Word;var month: Word;var mday: Word;
var wday: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: GetDate returns the system’s date. Year is a number in the range 1980..2099.mday is the day of
the month, wday is the day of the week, starting with Sunday as day 0.
Errors: None.
See also: GetTime (642), SetDate (645)
Program Example2 ;
uses Dos ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GetDate f u n c t i o n . }
const
DayStr : array [ 0 . . 6 ] of s t r i n g [ 3 ] = ( ’ Sun ’ , ’Mon ’ , ’ Tue ’ , ’Wed ’ , ’ Thu ’ , ’ F r i ’ , ’ Sat ’ ) ;
MonthStr : array [ 1 . . 1 2 ] of s t r i n g [ 3 ] = ( ’ Jan ’ , ’ Feb ’ , ’ Mar ’ , ’ Apr ’ , ’ May ’ , ’ Jun ’ ,
’ J u l ’ , ’ Aug ’ , ’ Sep ’ , ’ Oct ’ , ’ Nov ’ , ’ Dec ’ ) ;
var
Year , Month , Day ,WDay : word ;
begin
GetDate ( Year , Month , Day ,WDay ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ C u r r e n t date ’ ) ;
WriteLn ( DayStr [WDay] , ’ , ’ , Day , ’ ’ , MonthStr [ Month ] , ’ ’ , Year , ’ . ’ ) ;
end .
638
45.10.18 GetEnv
Synopsis: Get environment variable by name.
Declaration: function GetEnv(envvar: string) : string

Visibility: default
Description: Getenv returns the value of the environment variable EnvVar. When there is no environment
variable EnvVar defined, an empty string is returned.
Remark: Under some operating systems (such as unix), case is important when looking for EnvVar.
Errors: None.
See also: EnvCount (633), EnvStr (634)
Program Example14 ;
uses Dos ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GetEnv f u n c t i o n . }
begin
WriteLn ( ’ C u r r e n t PATH i s ’ , GetEnv ( ’PATH ’ ) ) ;
end .
45.10.19 GetFAttr
Synopsis: Get file attributes
Declaration: procedure GetFAttr(var f;var attr: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: GetFAttr returns the file attributes of the file-variable f. F can be a untyped or typed file, or of
type Text. f must have been assigned, but not opened. The attributes can be examined with the
following constants :
•ReadOnly
•Hidden
•SysFile
•VolumeId
•Directory
•Archive
Under linux, supported attributes are:
•Directory
•ReadOnly if the current process doesn’t have access to the file.
•Hidden for files whose name starts with a dot (’.’).
Errors: Errors are reported in DosError

See also: SetFAttr (645)
639
Program Example8 ;
uses Dos ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e G e t F A t t r f u n c t i o n . }
var
A t t r : Word ;
f : File ;
begin
Assign ( f , ParamStr ( 1 ) ) ;
GetFAttr ( f , A t t r ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ F i l e ’ , ParamStr ( 1 ) , ’ has a t t r i b u t e ’ , A t t r ) ;
i f ( A t t r and a r c h i v e ) < >0 then WriteLn ( ’ − A r c h i v e ’ ) ;
i f ( A t t r and d i r e c t o r y ) < >0 then WriteLn ( ’ − D i r e c t o r y ’ ) ;
i f ( A t t r and r e a d o n l y ) < >0 then WriteLn ( ’ − Read−Only ’ ) ;
i f ( A t t r and s y s f i l e ) < >0 then WriteLn ( ’ − System ’ ) ;
i f ( A t t r and hidden ) < >0 then WriteLn ( ’ − Hidden ’ ) ;
end .
45.10.20 GetFTime
Synopsis: Get file last modification time.
Declaration: procedure GetFTime(var f;var time: LongInt)
Visibility: default
Description: GetFTime returns the modification time of a file. This time is encoded and must be decoded with
UnPackTime. F must be a file type, which has been assigned, and opened.
See also: SetFTime (646), PackTime (644), UnPackTime (648)
Program Example9 ;
uses Dos ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GetFTime f u n c t i o n . }
Function L0 (w: word ) : s t r i n g ;

var
s : string ;
begin
S t r (w, s ) ;
i f w<10 then
L0 : = ’ 0 ’ +s
else
L0 : = s ;
end ;
var
f : File ;
Time : L o n g i n t ;
DT : DateTime ;
640
begin
i f Paramcount >0 then
Assign ( f , ParamStr ( 1 ) )
else
Assign ( f , ’ ex9 . pp ’ ) ;
Reset ( f ) ;
GetFTime ( f , Time ) ;
Close ( f ) ;
UnPackTime ( Time , DT ) ;
Write ( ’ F i l e ’ , ParamStr ( 1 ) , ’ i s l a s t m o d i f i e d on ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( L0 (DT . Month ) , ’− ’ , L0 (DT . Day ) , ’− ’ ,DT . Year ,
’ a t ’ , L0 (DT . Hour ) , ’ : ’ , L0 (DT . Min ) ) ;
end .
45.10.21 GetIntVec
Synopsis: Get interrupt vector
Declaration: procedure GetIntVec(intno: Byte;var vector: pointer)
Visibility: default
Description: GetIntVec returns the address of interrupt vector IntNo.
Remark: This call does nothing, it is present for compatibility only. Modern systems do not allow low level
access to the hardware.
Errors: None.
See also: SetIntVec (646)
45.10.22 GetLongName
Synopsis: Get the long filename of a DOS 8.3 filename.
Declaration: function GetLongName(var p: string) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: This function is only implemented in the GO32V2 and Win32 versions of Free Pascal.
GetLongName changes the filename p to a long filename if the API call to do this is successful.
The resulting string is the long file name corresponding to the short filename p.
The function returns True if the API call was successful, False otherwise.
This function should only be necessary when using the DOS extender under Windows 95 and higher.
Errors: If the API call was not succesfull, False is returned.
See also: GetShortName (642)
45.10.23 GetMsCount
Synopsis: Number of milliseconds since a starting point.
Declaration: function GetMsCount : Int64
Visibility: default
641
Description: GetMSCount returns a number of milliseconds elapsed since a certain moment in time. This
moment in time is implementation dependent. This function is used for timing purposes: Substracting
the results of 2 subsequent calls to this function returns the number of milliseconds elapsed between
the two calls.
This call is not very reliable, it is recommended to use some system specific calls for timings.
See also: GetTime (642)
45.10.24 GetShortName
Synopsis: Get the short (8.3) filename of a long filename.
Declaration: function GetShortName(var p: string) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: This function is only implemented in the GO32V2 and Win32 versions of Free Pascal.
GetShortName changes the filename p to a short filename if the API call to do this is successful.
The resulting string is the short file name corresponding to the long filename p.
The function returns True if the API call was successful, False otherwise.
This function should only be necessary when using the DOS extender under Windows 95 and higher.
Errors: If the API call was not successful, False is returned.
See also: GetLongName (641)
45.10.25 GetTime
Synopsis: Return the current time
Declaration: procedure GetTime(var hour: Word;var minute: Word;var second: Word;
var sec100: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: GetTime returns the system’s time. Hour is a on a 24-hour time scale. sec100 is in hundredth
of a second.
Remark: Certain operating systems (such as Amiga), always set the sec100 field to zero.
Errors: None.
See also: GetDate (638), SetTime (647)
Program Example3 ;
uses Dos ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GetTime f u n c t i o n . }
Function L0 (w: word ) : s t r i n g ;

var
s : string ;
begin
S t r (w, s ) ;
i f w<10 then
642
L0 : = ’ 0 ’ +s
else
L0 : = s ;
end ;
var
Hour , Min , Sec , HSec : word ;
begin
GetTime ( Hour , Min , Sec , HSec ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ C u r r e n t t i m e ’ ) ;
WriteLn ( L0 ( Hour ) , ’ : ’ , L0 ( Min ) , ’ : ’ , L0 ( Sec ) ) ;
end .
45.10.26 GetVerify
Synopsis: Get verify flag
Declaration: procedure GetVerify(var verify: Boolean)
Visibility: default
Description: GetVerify returns the status of the verify flag under dos. When Verify is True, then dos
checks data which are written to disk, by reading them after writing. If Verify is False, then data
written to disk are not verified.
Remark: Under non-dos systems (excluding os/2 applications running under vanilla DOS), Verify is always
True.
Errors: None.
See also: SetVerify (647)
45.10.27 Intr
Synopsis: Execute interrupt
Declaration: procedure Intr(intno: Byte;var regs: Registers)
Visibility: default
Description: Intr executes a software interrupt number IntNo (must be between 0 and 255), with processor
registers set to Regs. After the interrupt call returned, the processor registers are saved in Regs.
Remark: Under non-dos operating systems, this call does nothing.
Errors: None.
See also: MSDos (644)
45.10.28 Keep
Synopsis: Terminate and stay resident.
Declaration: procedure Keep(exitcode: Word)
Visibility: default
643
Description: Keep terminates the program, but stays in memory. This is used for TSR (Terminate Stay Resident)
programs which catch some interrupt. ExitCode is the same parameter as the Halt function takes.
Remark: This call does nothing, it is present for compatibility only.
Errors: None.
45.10.29 MSDos
Synopsis: Execute MS-DOS system call
Declaration: procedure MSDos(var regs: Registers)
Visibility: default
Description: MSDos executes an operating system call. This is the same as doing a Intr call with the interrupt
number for an os call.
Remark: Under non-dos operating systems, this call does nothing. On DOS systems, this calls interrupt $21.
Errors: None.
See also: Intr (643)
45.10.30 PackTime
Synopsis: Pack DateTime value to a packed-time format.
Declaration: procedure PackTime(var t: DateTime;var p: LongInt)
Visibility: default
Description: UnPackTime converts the date and time specified in T to a packed-time format which can be fed
to SetFTime.
Errors: None.
See also: SetFTime (646), FindFirst (635), FindNext (636), UnPackTime (648)
Program Example4 ;
uses Dos ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e PackTime and UnPackTime f u n c t i o n s . }
var
DT : DateTime ;
Time : l o n g i n t ;
begin
with DT do
begin
Year : = 2 0 0 8 ;
Month : = 1 1 ;
Day : = 1 1 ;
Hour : = 1 1 ;
Min : = 1 1 ;
Sec : = 1 1 ;
end ;
PackTime (DT, Time ) ;
644
WriteLn ( ’ Packed Time : ’ , Time ) ;

UnPackTime ( Time , DT ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ Unpacked Again : ’ ) ;
with DT do
begin
WriteLn ( ’ Year ’ , Year ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ Month ’ , Month ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ Day ’ , Day ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ Hour ’ , Hour ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ Min ’ , Min ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ Sec ’ , Sec ) ;
end ;
end .
45.10.31 SetCBreak
Synopsis: Set Control-Break flag status
Declaration: procedure SetCBreak(breakvalue: Boolean)
Visibility: default
Description: SetCBreak sets the status of CTRL-Break checking. When BreakValue is false, then dos
only checks for the CTRL-Break key-press when I/O is performed. When it is set to True, then a
check is done at every system call.
Remark: Under non-dos and non-Amiga operating systems, this call does nothing.
Errors: None.
See also: GetCBreak (638)
45.10.32 SetDate
Synopsis: Set system date
Declaration: procedure SetDate(year: Word;month: Word;day: Word)

Visibility: default
Description: SetDate sets the system’s internal date. Year is a number between 1980 and 2099.
Remark: On a unix machine, there must be root privileges, otherwise this routine will do nothing. On other
unix systems, this call currently does nothing.
Errors: None.
See also: GetDate (638), SetTime (647)
45.10.33 SetFAttr
Synopsis: Set file attributes
Declaration: procedure SetFAttr(var f;attr: Word)
Visibility: default
645
Description: SetFAttr sets the file attributes of the file-variable F. F can be a untyped or typed file, or of type
Text. F must have been assigned, but not opened. The attributes can be a sum of the following
constants:
•ReadOnly
•Hidden
•SysFile
•VolumeId
•Directory
•Archive
Remark: Under unix like systems (such as linux and BeOS) the call exists, but is not implemented, i.e. it does
nothing.
See also: GetFAttr (639)
45.10.34 SetFTime
Synopsis: Set file modification time.
Declaration: procedure SetFTime(var f;time: LongInt)
Visibility: default
Description: SetFTime sets the modification time of a file, this time is encoded and must be encoded with
PackTime. F must be a file type, which has been assigned, and opened.
Remark: Under unix like systems (such as linux and BeOS) the call exists, but is not implemented, i.e. it does
nothing.
See also: GetFTime (640), PackTime (644), UnPackTime (648)
45.10.35 SetIntVec
Synopsis: Set interrupt vector
Declaration: procedure SetIntVec(intno: Byte;vector: pointer)
Visibility: default
Description: SetIntVec sets interrupt vector IntNo to Vector. Vector should point to an interrupt proce-
dure.
Remark: This call does nothing, it is present for compatibility only.
Errors: None.
See also: GetIntVec (641)
646
45.10.36 SetTime
Synopsis: Set system time
Declaration: procedure SetTime(hour: Word;minute: Word;second: Word;sec100: Word)

Visibility: default
Description: SetTime sets the system’s internal clock. The Hour parameter is on a 24-hour time scale.
Remark: On a linux machine, there must be root privileges, otherwise this routine will do nothing. On other
unix systems, this call currently does nothing.
Errors: None.
See also: GetTime (642), SetDate (645)
45.10.37 SetVerify
Synopsis: Set verify flag
Declaration: procedure SetVerify(verify: Boolean)
Visibility: default
Description: SetVerify sets the status of the verify flag under dos. When Verify is True, then dos checks
data which are written to disk, by reading them after writing. If Verify is False, then data written
to disk are not verified.
Remark: Under non-dos operating systems (excluding os/2 applications running under vanilla dos), Verify is
always True.
Errors: None.
See also: SetVerify (647)
45.10.38 SwapVectors
Synopsis: Swap interrupt vectors
Declaration: procedure SwapVectors
Visibility: default
Description: SwapVectors swaps the contents of the internal table of interrupt vectors with the current contents
of the interrupt vectors. This is called typically in before and after an Exec call.
Remark: Under certain operating systems, this routine may be implemented as an empty stub.
Errors: None.
See also: Exec (634), SetIntVec (646)
647
45.10.39 UnixDateToDt
Synopsis: Convert a unix timestamp to a DateTime record
Declaration: procedure UnixDateToDt(SecsPast: LongInt;var Dt: DateTime)

Visibility: default
Description: DTToUnixDate converts the unix timestamp value in SecsPast to a DateTime representation in
DT. It is an internal function, implemented on Unix platforms, and should not be used.
Errors: None.
See also: DTToUnixDate (633), PackTime (644), UnpackTime (648), GetTime (642), SetTime (647)
45.10.40 UnpackTime
Synopsis: Unpack packed file time to a DateTime value
Declaration: procedure UnpackTime(p: LongInt;var t: DateTime)

Visibility: default
Description: UnPackTime converts the file-modification time in p to a DateTime record. The file-modification
time can be returned by GetFTime, FindFirst or FindNext calls.
For an example, see PackTime (644).
Errors: None.
See also: GetFTime (640), FindFirst (635), FindNext (636), PackTime (644)
45.10.41 weekday
Synopsis: Return the day of the week
Declaration: function weekday(y: LongInt;m: LongInt;d: LongInt) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: WeekDay returns the day of the week on which the day Y/M/D falls. Sunday is represented by 0,
Saturday is 6.
See also: PackTime (644), UnpackTime (648), GetTime (642), SetTime (647)
648
Chapter 46
Reference for unit ’dxeload’
46.1 Overview
The dxeload unit was implemented by Pierre Mueller for dos, it allows to load a DXE file (an object
file with 1 entry point) into memory and return a pointer to the entry point.
It exists only for dos.

46.2.1 dxe_load
Synopsis: Load DXE file in memory
Declaration: function dxe_load(filename: string) : pointer
Visibility: default
Description: dxe_load loads the contents of the file filename into memory. It performs the necessary relo-
cations in the object code, and returns then a pointer to the entry point of the code.
For an example, see the emu387 (653) unit in the RTL.
Errors: If an error occurs during the load or relocations, Nil is returned.
649
Chapter 47
Reference for unit ’dynlibs’
47.1 Overview
The Dynlibs unit provides support for dynamically loading shared libraries. It is available only on
those platforms that support shared libraries. The functionality available here may only be a part of
the functionality available on each separate platform, in the interest of portability.
On unix platforms, using this unit will cause the program to be linked to the C library, as most shared
libraries are implemented in C and the dynamical linker too.

47.2.1 Constants
NilHandle = (0)
Correctly typed Nil handle - returned on error by LoadLibrary (652)
SharedSuffix = ’so’
SharedSuffix contains the extension of a shared library (dynamically loadable library) on the
current platform. It does not contain the . (dot) character. This can be used to determine the name of
a shared library in a platform independent way.
47.2.2 Types
HModule = TLibHandle
Alias for TLibHandle (650) type.
TLibHandle = PtrInt
TLibHandle should be considered an opaque type. It is defined differently on various platforms.

The definition shown here depends on the platform for which the documentation was generated.
TOrdinalEntry = SizeUInt
650
CHAPTER 47. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’DYNLIBS’
TOrdinalEntry is mainly used on Windows and OS/2 operating systems to retrieve the address
of a procedure using the index (ordinal) of the procedure. On these operating systems, entry points
can be loaded using name or ordinal value.

47.3.1 FreeLibrary
Synopsis: For compatibility with Delphi/Windows: Unload a library
Declaration: function FreeLibrary(Lib: TLibHandle) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: FreeLibrary provides the same functionality as UnloadLibrary (652), and is provided for com-
patibility with Delphi.
See also: UnloadLibrary (652)
47.3.2 GetLoadErrorStr
Synopsis: Return a textual description of the last load error
Declaration: function GetLoadErrorStr : string
Visibility: default
Description: GetLoadErrorStr returns a textual description of the last library loading or unloading error. No
other system calls may be made between the load call and the call of GetLoadErrorStr
See also: LoadLibrary (652)
47.3.3 GetProcAddress
Synopsis: For compatibility with Delphi/Windows: Get the address of a procedure
Declaration: function GetProcAddress(Lib: TLibHandle;const ProcName: AnsiString)
: Pointer
Visibility: default
Description: GetProcAddress provides the same functionality as GetProcedureAddress (651), and is pro-
vided for compatibility with Delphi.
See also: GetProcedureAddress (651)
47.3.4 GetProcedureAddress
Synopsis: Get the address of a procedure or symbol in a dynamic library.
Declaration: function GetProcedureAddress(Lib: TLibHandle;const ProcName: AnsiString)
: Pointer
function GetProcedureAddress(Lib: TLibHandle;Ordinal: TOrdinalEntry)
: Pointer
Visibility: default
651
CHAPTER 47. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’DYNLIBS’
Description: GetProcedureAddress returns a pointer to the location in memory of the symbol ProcName
or ordinal value Ordinal in the dynamically loaded library specified by it’s handle lib. If the
symbol cannot be found or the handle is invalid, Nil is returned.
On Windows, only an exported procedure or function can be searched this way. On Unix platforms
the location of any exported symbol can be retrieved this way.
Only windows and OS/2 support getting the address of a function using an ordinal value.
Errors: If the symbol cannot be found, Nil is returned.
See also: LoadLibrary (652), UnLoadLibrary (652)
47.3.5 LoadLibrary
Synopsis: Load a dynamic library and return a handle to it.
Declaration: function LoadLibrary(const Name: RawByteString) : TLibHandle
function LoadLibrary(const Name: UnicodeString) : TLibHandle
Visibility: default
Description: LoadLibrary loads a dynamic library in file Name and returns a handle to it. If the library cannot
be loaded, NilHandle (650) is returned.
No assumptions should be made about the location of the loaded library if a relative pathname is
specified. The behaviour is dependent on the platform. Therefore it is best to specify an absolute
pathname if possible.
Errors: On error, NilHandle (650) is returned.
See also: UnloadLibrary (652), GetProcedureAddress (651)
47.3.6 SafeLoadLibrary
Synopsis: Saves the control word and loads a library
Declaration: function SafeLoadLibrary(const Name: RawByteString) : TLibHandle
function SafeLoadLibrary(const Name: UnicodeString) : TLibHandle
Visibility: default
Description: SafeLoadLibary saves the FPU control word, and calls LoadLibrary (652) with library name
Name. After that function has returned, the FPU control word is saved again. (only on Intel i386
CPUS).
See also: LoadLibrary (652)
47.3.7 UnloadLibrary
Synopsis: Unload a previously loaded library
Declaration: function UnloadLibrary(Lib: TLibHandle) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: UnloadLibrary unloads a previously loaded library (specified by the handle lib). The call
returns True if succesful, False otherwisa.
See also: LoadLibrary (652), GetProcedureAddress (651)
652
Chapter 48
Reference for unit ’emu387’
48.1 Overview
The emu387 unit was written by Pierre Mueller for dos. It sets up the coprocessor emulation for
FPC under dos. It is not necessary to use this unit on other OS platforms because they either simply
do not run on a machine without coprocessor, or they provide the coprocessor emulation themselves.
It shouldn’t be necessary to use the function in this unit, it should be enough to place this unit in the
uses clause of your program to enable the coprocessor emulation under dos. The unit initialization
code will try and load the coprocessor emulation code and initialize it.

48.2.1 npxsetup
Synopsis: Set up coprocessor emulation.
Declaration: procedure npxsetup(prog_name: string)
Visibility: default
Description: npxsetup checks whether a coprocessor is found. If not, it loads the file wmemu387.dxe into
memory and initializes the code in it.
If the environment variable 387 is set to N, then the emulation will be loaded, even if there is a
coprocessor present. If the variable doesn’t exist, or is set to any other value, the unit will try to
detect the presence of a coprocessor unit.
The function searches the file wmemu387.dxe in the following way:
1.If the environment variable EMU387 is set, then it is assumed to point at the wmemu387.dxe
file.
2.if the environment variable EMU387 does not exist, then the function will take the path part of
prog_name and look in that directory for the file wmemu387.dxe.
It should never be necessary to call this function, because the initialization code of the unit contains
a call to the function with as an argument paramstr(0). This means that you should deliver the
file wmemu387.dxe together with your program.
Errors: If there is an error, an error message is printed to standard error, and the program is halted, since any
floating-point code is bound to fail anyhow.
653
Chapter 49
Reference for unit ’errors’
49.1 Used units
Table 49.1: Used units by unit ’errors’
Name Page
System 1224
unixtype 1784
49.2 Overview
The errors unit contains routines to convert a unix system call error code to an error message: StrError
(655). It is only available on unix platforms.

49.3.1 Constants
sys_errlist : Array[0..sys_errn-1] of PChar = (’Success’, ’Operation not permitted’,
sys_errn is an array with then error codes for the current operating system. It should not be used
directly, instead use StrError (655).
sys_errn = 125
sys_errn is the number of error codes for the current operating system. It should not be used
directly, instead use StrError (655).

49.4.1 PError
Synopsis: Print error on standard error routput
654
CHAPTER 49. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’ERRORS’
Declaration: procedure PError(const s: string;Errno: cint)

Visibility: default
Description: PError will print the error message S followed by the errNo and the result for StrError(errNo)
for ErrNo on standard output.
Errors: None.
See also: StrError (655)
49.4.2 StrError
Synopsis: Convert an error code to a string
Declaration: function StrError(err: cint) : string

Visibility: default
Description: StrError will convert the error code err to a string.
Errors: If the error code is unknown or out of bounds, an ’Unknown error (err)’ string will be returned.
See also: PError (654)
655
Chapter 50
Reference for unit ’exeinfo’
50.1 Overview
The exeinfo unit implements some cross-platform routines to examine the contents of an executable:
information about sections, mapping addresses to loaded modules etc.
It is mainly used by the lineinfo (862) and lnfodwrf (891) unit to examine the binary for debug info.

50.2.1 Types
TExeFile = record
f : File;
size : Int64;
isopen : Boolean;
nsects : LongInt;
sechdrofs : ptruint;
secstrofs : ptruint;
processaddress : ptruint;
FunctionRelative : Boolean;
ImgOffset : ptruint;
filename : string;
buf : Array[0..4095] of Byte;
bufsize : LongInt;
bufcnt : LongInt;
end
TExeFile is a record used in the various calls of this unit. It contains a file descriptor, and various
fields that describe the executable.
The structure of TExeFile is opaque, that is, one shouldn’t rely on the exactness of this structure,
it may change any time in the future.
656
CHAPTER 50. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’EXEINFO’

50.3.1 CloseExeFile
Synopsis: Close a previously opened file.
Declaration: function CloseExeFile(var e: TExeFile) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: CloseExeFile closes an executable file image previously opened with OpenExeFile (657), and
represented by e.
The function returns True if the file was closed succesfully, or False if something went wrong.
Errors: In case of an error, False is returned.
See also: OpenExeFile (657)
50.3.2 FindExeSection
Synopsis: Find a section in the binary image.
Declaration: function FindExeSection(var e: TExeFile;const secname: string;
var secofs: LongInt;var seclen: LongInt)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: FindExeSection examines the binary that was opened with OpenExeFile (657) (represented by
e) and searches for the section named secname. If found, the section offset is returned in secofs
and the section length (in bytes) is returned in seclen.
The function returns True if the section was found, False if not.
See also: OpenExeFile (657)
50.3.3 GetModuleByAddr
Synopsis: Return the module name by address
Declaration: procedure GetModuleByAddr(addr: pointer;var baseaddr: pointer;

var filename: string)
Visibility: default
Description: GetModuleByAddr returns the name of the module that contains address addr. If succesful, it
returns True and returns the filename in FileName and the base address at which it is loaded in
BaseAddr.
50.3.4 OpenExeFile
Synopsis: Open an executable file
Declaration: function OpenExeFile(var e: TExeFile;const fn: string) : Boolean
Visibility: default
657
CHAPTER 50. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’EXEINFO’
Description: OpenExeFile opens the executable file fn and initializes the structure e for subsequent calls to
routines in the exeinfo unit.
The function returns True if the file was opened succesfully, false otherwise.
See also: FindExeSection (657), CloseExeFile (657), ReadDebugLink (658)
50.3.5 ReadDebugLink
Synopsis: Read the location of a debug info filename
Declaration: function ReadDebugLink(var e: TExeFile;var dbgfn: string) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: ReadDebugLink examines the .gnu_debuglink section to see if the debug information is
stored in an external file. If so, then the name of the file with the debug information is returned in the
dbgfn parameter.
The function returns false if there is no external debug information file, or if the file with debug
information does not exist. It is searched next to the binary file or in the current directory.
See also: OpenExeFile (657), CloseExeFile (657)
658
Chapter 51
Reference for unit ’fgl’
51.1 Used units
Table 51.1: Used units by unit ’fgl’
Name Page
System 1224
sysutils 1476
Types 1650
51.2 Overview
The fgl unit contains some basic list-related generic classes.

51.3.1 Constants
MaxGListSize = MaxInt div 1024
MaxGListSize is the maximum number of elements in the TFPGList (664) list.
MaxListSize = Maxint div 16
MaxListSize is the maximum number of elements a list can contain before the memory runs out.
51.3.2 Types
TFPSListCompareFunc = function(Key1: Pointer;Key2: Pointer) : Integer
of object
TFPSListCompareFunc is used in the TFPSList.Sort (688) method to compare 2 elements. The

list passes 2 pointers to the actual items to the compare function. The result of this function deter-
mines how the pointers will be sorted:
659
CHAPTER 51. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’FGL’
• If the result of this function is negative, the first key (key1) is assumed to be ’less’ than the
second key (key2) and will be moved before the second in the list.
• If the function result is positive, the first key (key1) pointer is assumed to be ’greater than’
the second key (key2)and will be moved after the second in the list.
• if the function result is zero, the keys are assumed to be ’equal’ and no moving will take place.
51.4 EListError
51.4.1 Description
EListError is the exception used in the TFPSList (683) class to indicate errors such as a list index
out of bounds, wrong capacity etc.
See also: TFPSList.Capacity (689), TFPSList.Exchange (686), TFPSList.Items (689)
51.5 TFPGInterfacedObjectList
51.5.1 Description
TFPGList can be used to specialize a list for any class type T that requires reference counting (all
objects that implement IInterface or IUnknown)). It will specialize to a list with the same
methods as TFPSList (683) or classes.TFPList (659) or TFPObjectList
Classes that implement IInterface or IUnknown require special care to maintain the reference
count. The TFPGInterfacedObjectList list provides the necessary functionality to deal with
this.
See also: TFPSList (683), classes.TFPList (659)

661 Add Add new object of class T to the list.
662 Assign Copy objects from Source list
661 Create Instantiate a new interfaced object list.
661 Extract Extract an item from the list
661 GetEnumerator Return a list enumerator for T
662 IndexOf Index of object
662 Insert Insert a new object in the list
662 Remove Remove an object from the list.
663 Sort Sort the objects in the list

663 First rw First non-nil object
664 Items rw Indexed access to objects in the list.
663 Last rw Last non-Nil object
664 List r Internal list pointer
660
51.5.4 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Create
Synopsis: Instantiate a new interfaced object list.

Visibility: public
Description: Create instantiates a new object list. It will simply call the inherited constructor with the correct
item size.
See also: TFPSList.Destroy (684)
51.5.5 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Add
Synopsis: Add new object of class T to the list.
Declaration: function Add(const Item: T) : Integer
Visibility: public
Description: Add adds a new item Item of class type T to the list and returns the position at which the item was
added. Add will increase the reference count of the object.
Errors: If the item could not be added, an EListError (660) exception is raised.
See also: TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Extract (661), TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Items (664), TFPGInterface-

dObjectList.IndexOf (662)
51.5.6 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Extract
Synopsis: Extract an item from the list
Declaration: function Extract(const Item: T) : T
Visibility: public
Description: Extract removes Item from the list and returns the removed item, or Nil if it was not found.
The extracted object will not be destroyed.
Errors: None.
See also: TFPSList.Delete (685)
51.5.7 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.GetEnumerator
Synopsis: Return a list enumerator for T
Declaration: function GetEnumerator : TFPGListEnumeratorSpec
Visibility: public
Description: GetEnumerator returns an enumerator for the elements in the list. It is a specialized version of
TFPGListEnumerator (668).
See also: TFPGListEnumerator (668)
661
51.5.8 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.IndexOf
Synopsis: Index of object
Declaration: function IndexOf(const Item: T) : Integer
Visibility: public
Description: IndexOf returns the index of Item in the list, or -1 if the object does not appear in the list.
Errors: None.
See also: TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Items (664), TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Insert (662), TFPGInterfacedOb-
jectList.Add (661)
51.5.9 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Insert
Synopsis: Insert a new object in the list
Declaration: procedure Insert(Index: Integer;const Item: T)
Visibility: public
Description: Insert inserts a new object (Item) in the list at position Index. The index is zero based and
must be less than Count (689).
Errors: If an invalid index is specified, an EListError (660) exception is raised.
See also: TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Items (664), TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Add (661)
51.5.10 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Assign
Synopsis: Copy objects from Source list
Declaration: procedure Assign(Source: TFPGInterfacedObjectList)
Visibility: public
Description: Assign clears the list and copies all items in Source to the list. The source list must be of the
same type as the destination list.
See also: TFPSList.Clear (685), TFPGObjectList.Add (679)
51.5.11 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Remove
Synopsis: Remove an object from the list.
Declaration: function Remove(const Item: T) : Integer
Visibility: public
Description: Remove removes the object Item from the list, and returns the index of the removed item. If no
item was removed, -1 is returned. Only the first object is removed.
Removing an object from the list may cause the object to be freed.
Errors: None.
See also: TFPGInterfacedObjectList.IndexOf (662), TFPSList.Delete (685), TFPGInterfacedObjectList.FreeObjects
(660)
662
51.5.12 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Sort
Synopsis: Sort the objects in the list
Declaration: procedure Sort(Compare: TCompareFunc)

Visibility: public
Description: Sort sorts the elements in the list using the provided Compare function. The list passes 2 items
to the compare function. The result of this function determines how the items will be sorted:
•If the result of this function is negative, the first object (Item1) is assumed to be ’less’ than
the second object (Item2) and will be moved before the second in the list.
•If the function result is positive, the first object (Item1) is assumed to be ’greater than’ the
second object (Item2)and will be moved after the second in the list.
•if the function result is zero, the objects are assumed to be ’equal’ and no moving will take
place.
Errors: None.
See also: TFPSList.Sorted (683)
51.5.13 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.First
Synopsis: First non-nil object
Declaration: Property First : T
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: First returns the first non-nil object. If no such element is present, Nil is returned.
See also: TFPSList.First (690), TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Last (663), TFPSList.Pack (688)
51.5.14 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Last
Synopsis: Last non-Nil object
Declaration: Property Last : T

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Last returns the last non-Nil object. If no such element is present, Nil is returned.
See also: TFPGInterfacedObjectList.First (663), TFPSList.Last (690)
663
51.5.15 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Items
Synopsis: Indexed access to objects in the list.
Declaration: Property Items[Index: Integer]: T; default

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Items provides indexed access to the objects in the list. The objects can be get or set.
The index Index is zero based, and has a maximum value of Count-1 (689).
The previous object at position Index may be freed when setting the property, depending on its
reference count.
Errors: If an invalid index is used, an EListError (660) exception is raised.
See also: TFPSList.Count (689)
51.5.16 TFPGInterfacedObjectList.List
Synopsis: Internal list pointer
Declaration: Property List : PTypeList
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: List is the internal list of objects. It should not be used directly.
See also: TFPGInterfacedObjectList.Items (664)
51.6 TFPGList
51.6.1 Description
TFPGList can be used to specialize a list for any type T that does not require reference counting
(such as interfaced objects). It will specialize to a list with the same methods as TFPSList (683) or
classes.TFPList (659)

665 Add Add new item of type T to the list.
666 Assign Copy elements from Source list
665 Create Instantiate a new list
665 GetEnumerator Return a list enumerator for T.
666 IndexOf Index of item
666 Insert Insert a new item in the list
666 Remove Remove an item from the list.
667 Sort Sort the list
664

667 First rw First non-empty item
667 Items rw Indexed access to items in the list
667 Last rw Last non-empty item
668 List r Internal list object
51.6.4 TFPGList.Create
Synopsis: Instantiate a new list
Visibility: public
Description: Create instantiates a new list. It will simply call the inherited constructor with the correct item
size: sizeof(T).
51.6.5 TFPGList.Add
Synopsis: Add new item of type T to the list.
Visibility: public
Description: Add adds a new item Item of generic type T to the list and returns the position at which the item
was added.
See also: TFPGList.Extract (665), TFPGList.Items (667), TFPGList.IndexOf (666)
51.6.6 TFPGList.Extract
Visibility: public
Description: Extract removes Item from the list and returns the removed item, or an expression equivalent to
T(0) if it was not found.
Errors: None.
51.6.7 TFPGList.GetEnumerator
Synopsis: Return a list enumerator for T.
Visibility: public
665
51.6.8 TFPGList.IndexOf
Synopsis: Index of item

Visibility: public
Description: IndexOf returns the index of Item in the list, or -1 if the item does not appear in the list.
Errors: None.
See also: TFPGList.Items (667), TFPGList.Insert (666), TFPSList.Add (685)
51.6.9 TFPGList.Insert
Synopsis: Insert a new item in the list
Visibility: public
Description: Insert inserts a new item in the list at position Index. The index is zero based and must be less
than Count (689).
51.6.10 TFPGList.Assign
Synopsis: Copy elements from Source list
Declaration: procedure Assign(Source: TFPGList)
Visibility: public
See also: TFPSList.Clear (685), TFPGList.Add (665)
51.6.11 TFPGList.Remove
Synopsis: Remove an item from the list.
Visibility: public
Description: Remove removes the item Item from the list, and returns the index of the removed item. If no item
was removed, -1 is returned. Only the first item is removed.
Errors: None.
See also: TFPGList.IndexOf (666)
666
51.6.12 TFPGList.Sort
Synopsis: Sort the list

Visibility: public
•If the result of this function is negative, the first item (Item1) is assumed to be ’less’ than the
second item (Item2) and will be moved before the second in the list.
•If the function result is positive, the first item (Item1) is assumed to be ’greater than’ the
second item (Item2)and will be moved after the second in the list.
•if the function result is zero, the items are assumed to be ’equal’ and no moving will take place.
51.6.13 TFPGList.First
Synopsis: First non-empty item

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: First returns the first non-empty item, which means the first item not equal to T(0). If no such
element is present, T(0). is returned.
See also: TFPSList.First (690), TFPGList.Last (667)
51.6.14 TFPGList.Last
Synopsis: Last non-empty item

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Last returns the last non-empty item, which means the last item not equal to T(0). If no such
element is present, T(0). is returned.
See also: TFPGList.First (667), TFPSList.Last (690)
51.6.15 TFPGList.Items
Synopsis: Indexed access to items in the list

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
667
Description: Items provides indexed access to the items in the list. The items can be get or set.
See also: TFPSList.Count (689)
51.6.16 TFPGList.List
Synopsis: Internal list object
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: List is the internal list of items. It should not be used directly.
See also: TFPGList.Items (667)
51.7 TFPGListEnumerator
51.7.1 Description
TFPGListEnumerator is a generic list enumerator. It is used in the TFPGList (664) class to
implement the enumerator for the list.
Normally there should be no need to instantiate or use this class directly.
See also: TFPGList (664)

668 Create Create a new list enumerator
669 MoveNext Move to next element in the list

669 Current r Current enumerated element
51.7.4 TFPGListEnumerator.Create
Synopsis: Create a new list enumerator
Declaration: constructor Create(AList: TFPSList)
Visibility: public
Description: Create is called by the list AList to initialize a new enumerator. There should be no need to call
this directly.
See also: TFPGList (664)
668
51.7.5 TFPGListEnumerator.MoveNext
Synopsis: Move to next element in the list

Visibility: public
Description: MoveNext moves to the next element in the list.
See also: TFPGListEnumerator.Current (669)
51.7.6 TFPGListEnumerator.Current
Synopsis: Current enumerated element
Declaration: Property Current : T
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Current returns the currently enumerated element. It is only valid after TFPGListEnumera-
tor.MoveNext (669) was called and returned True.
See also: TFPGListEnumerator.MoveNext (669)
51.8 TFPGMap
51.8.1 Description
TFPGMap is a generic map class. It can be used to specialize a map for any key type and data type
that do not require manual reference counting: For reference counted interface objects, TFPGMap-
InterfacedObjectData (674) must be used.
See also: TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData (674)

670 Add Add a key and value to the map
670 Create Create a new instance of the map
670 Find Find item based on key
671 IndexOf Find index of a key in the list.
671 IndexOfData Find index of data value in the list.
671 InsertKey Insert a new key in the list
671 InsertKeyData Insert a new key with associated data in the list
672 Remove Remove a key from the list
669

672 Data rw Indexed access to the data in the list
672 KeyData rw Access to data based on key
672 Keys rw Indexed access to the keys in the list.
673 OnCompare rw Alias for OnKeyCompare
673 OnDataCompare rw Compare function for data values.
673 OnKeyCompare rw Compare function for key values.
51.8.4 TFPGMap.Create
Synopsis: Create a new instance of the map
Visibility: public
Description: Create instantiates a new map. It mainly initializes the TFPSMap (691) parent with the sized of
the key and data.
See also: TFPSMap.Create (691)
51.8.5 TFPGMap.Add
Synopsis: Add a key and value to the map
Declaration: function Add(const AKey: TKey;const AData: TData) : Integer

function Add(const AKey: TKey) : Integer
Visibility: public
Description: Add adds a new key AKey of generic type TKey with data value AData to the list and returns the
position at which the key was added.
Errors: If the item could not be added, an EListError (660) exception is raised. If Duplicates (694) is set to
dupError and a duplicate key is added, an EListError (660) exception is raised.
See also: TFPGMap.Keys (672), TFPGMap.IndexOf (671), TFPGMap.KeyData (672), TFPGMap.Data (672),
TFPSMap.Duplicates (694)
51.8.6 TFPGMap.Find
Synopsis: Find item based on key
Declaration: function Find(const AKey: TKey;out Index: Integer) : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: Find will search the first key smaller than or equal to AKey and return its index in AIndex. If the
key was not found then -1 is returned. The return value of the function is True if an exact match for
AKey is found, False otherwise.
See also: TFPGMap.IndexOf (671), TFPGMap.IndexOfData (671)
670
51.8.7 TFPGMap.IndexOf
Synopsis: Find index of a key in the list.
Declaration: function IndexOf(const AKey: TKey) : Integer
Visibility: public
Description: IndexOf returns the index of AKey in the list, or -1 if the key was not found in the list.
Errors: None.
See also: TFPGMap.Find (670), TFPGMap.IndexOfData (671)
51.8.8 TFPGMap.IndexOfData
Synopsis: Find index of data value in the list.
Declaration: function IndexOfData(const AData: TData) : Integer
Visibility: public
Description: IndexOfData returns the index of AData in the list, or -1 if the data was not found in the list.
Errors: None.
See also: TFPGMap.Find (670), TFPGMap.IndexOf (671)
51.8.9 TFPGMap.InsertKey
Synopsis: Insert a new key in the list
Declaration: procedure InsertKey(Index: Integer;const AKey: TKey)
Visibility: public
Description: InsertKey inserts key AKey at position Index in the list. It is not allowed to insert a key in a
sorted list.
Errors: If the index AIndex is out of range [0..Count-1], or the list is sorted, an EListError (660) exception
will be raised.
See also: TFPGMap.InsertKeyData (671), TFPGMap.Add (670), TFPSMap.Delete (691), TFPSMap.Remove
(694)
51.8.10 TFPGMap.InsertKeyData
Synopsis: Insert a new key with associated data in the list
Declaration: procedure InsertKeyData(Index: Integer;const AKey: TKey;
const AData: TData)
Visibility: public
Description: InsertKey inserts key AKey with associated data AData at position Index in the list. It is not
allowed to insert a key in a sorted list.
will be raised.
See also: TFPGMap.InsertKey (671), TFPGMap.Add (670), TFPSMap.Delete (691), TFPGMap.Remove (672)
671
51.8.11 TFPGMap.Remove
Synopsis: Remove a key from the list
Declaration: function Remove(const AKey: TKey) : Integer
Visibility: public
Description: Remove removes the key AKey from the list, together with its associated data. The function returns
the index of AKey prior to removal from the list, or -1 if AKey was not present in the list.
Errors: None.
See also: TFPGMap.InsertKey (671), TFPGMap.InsertKeyData (671), TFPGMap.Add (670), TFPSMap.Delete
(691)
51.8.12 TFPGMap.Keys
Synopsis: Indexed access to the keys in the list.
Declaration: Property Keys[Index: Integer]: TKey
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Keys provides indexed access to the key values in the list. Valid values for Index are in the range
[0..Count-1]. Key values can always be read, but can only be written if the list is unsorted.
Errors: If the index AIndex is out of range [0..Count-1], an EListError (660) exception will be raised. The
same exception is raised if a key is written and the list is sorted.
See also: TFPSList.Count (689), TFPGMap.Data (672), TFPGMap.KeyData (672)
51.8.13 TFPGMap.Data
Synopsis: Indexed access to the data in the list
Declaration: Property Data[Index: Integer]: TData
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Data provides indexed access to the data values in the list. Valid values for Index are in the range
[0..Count-1]. Data can always be read or written.
Errors: If the index AIndex is out of range [0..Count-1], an EListError (660) exception will be raised.
See also: TFPSList.Count (689), TFPGMap.Keys (672), TFPGMap.KeyData (672)
51.8.14 TFPGMap.KeyData
Synopsis: Access to data based on key
Declaration: Property KeyData[AKey: TKey]: TData; default
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
672
Description: KeyData allows access to the data based on the key value AKey. The data can be read and written.
When writing, writing using an existing key will overwrite the current data. If it does not exist yet, it
will be created. When reading, if the key is not present, an EListError (660) will be raised.
Errors: If the key does not exist, an EListError (660) exception will be raised.
See also: TFPSList.Count (689), TFPGMap.Keys (672), TFPGMap.Data (672)
51.8.15 TFPGMap.OnCompare
Synopsis: Alias for OnKeyCompare
Declaration: Property OnCompare : TKeyCompareFunc
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: OnCompare is a deprecated property, use TFPGMap.OnKeyCompare (673) instead.
See also: TFPGMap.OnKeyCompare (673)
51.8.16 TFPGMap.OnKeyCompare
Synopsis: Compare function for key values.
Declaration: Property OnKeyCompare : TKeyCompareFunc
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: OnKeyCompare can be set to a function that compares key values. The default value for this event
is a function that compares keys based on a byte-by-byte comparison of the memory block. The
function must have the following semantics:
•If the result of this function is negative, the first key (key1) is assumed to be ’less’ than the
•If the function result is positive, the first key (key1) pointer is assumed to be ’greater than’ the
second key (key2)and will be moved after the second in the list.
•if the function result is zero, the keys are assumed to be ’equal’ and no moving will take place.
See also: TFPGMap.OnDataCompare (673)
51.8.17 TFPGMap.OnDataCompare
Synopsis: Compare function for data values.
Declaration: Property OnDataCompare : TDataCompareFunc
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: OnDataCompare can be set to a function that compares data values. The default value for this
event is a function that compares data based on a byte-by-byte comparison of the memory block.
The function must have the following semantics:
673
•If the result of this function is negative, the first data item (Data1) is assumed to be ’less’ than
the second data item (Data2) and will be moved before the second in the list.
•If the function result is positive, the first data item (Data1) pointer is assumed to be ’greater
than’ the second data item (Data2)and will be moved after the second in the list.
•if the function result is zero, the data items are assumed to be ’equal’ and no moving will take
place.
See also: TFPGMap.OnKeyCompare (673)
51.9 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData
51.9.1 Description
TFPGInterfacedObjectMap is a generic map class. It can be used to specialize a map for
any key type, with associated data type that requires manual reference counting: any type which
implements IInterface. For non-reference counted objects, TFPGMap (669) should be used.
This map class is entirely equivalend to TFPGMap (669), but operates on data items that require
additional reference counting code on the data.
See also: TFPGMap (669)

675 Add Add a key and value to the map
674 Create Create a new instance of the map
675 Find Find item based on key
675 IndexOf Find index of a key in the list.
676 IndexOfData Find index of data value in the list.
676 InsertKey Insert a new key in the list
676 InsertKeyData Insert a new key with associated data in the list
676 Remove Remove a key from the list

677 Data rw Indexed access to the data in the list
677 KeyData rw Access to data based on key
677 Keys rw Indexed access to the keys in the list.
678 OnCompare rw Alias for OnKeyCompare
678 OnDataCompare rw Compare function for data values.
678 OnKeyCompare rw Compare function for key values.
51.9.4 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Create
Synopsis: Create a new instance of the map
Visibility: public
674
Description: Create instantiates a new map. It mainly initializes the TFPSMap (691) parent with the sized of
the key and data.
See also: TFPSMap.Create (691)
51.9.5 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Add
Synopsis: Add a key and value to the map
Declaration: function Add(const AKey: TKey;const AData: TData) : Integer

function Add(const AKey: TKey) : Integer
Visibility: public
Description: Add adds a new key AKey of generic type TKey with data value AData to the list and returns the
position at which the key was added.
Errors: If the item could not be added, an EListError (660) exception is raised. If Duplicates (694) is set to
dupError and a duplicate key is added, an EListError (660) exception is raised.
See also: TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Keys (677), TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.IndexOf (675), TFPGMap-
InterfacedObjectData.KeyData (677), TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Data (677), TFPS.Duplicates
(659)
51.9.6 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Find
Synopsis: Find item based on key
Declaration: function Find(const AKey: TKey;out Index: Integer) : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: Find will search the first key smaller than or equal to AKey and return its index in AIndex. If the
key was not found then -1 is returned. The return value of the function is True if an exact match for
AKey is found, False otherwise.
See also: TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.IndexOf (675), TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.IndexOfData (676)
51.9.7 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.IndexOf
Synopsis: Find index of a key in the list.
Declaration: function IndexOf(const AKey: TKey) : Integer
Visibility: public
Description: IndexOf returns the index of AKey in the list, or -1 if the key was not found in the list.
Errors: None.
See also: TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Find (675), TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.IndexOfData (676)
675
51.9.8 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.IndexOfData
Synopsis: Find index of data value in the list.
Declaration: function IndexOfData(const AData: TData) : Integer
Visibility: public
Description: IndexOfData returns the index of AData in the list, or -1 if the data was not found in the list.
Errors: None.
See also: TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Find (675), TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.IndexOf (675)
51.9.9 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.InsertKey
Synopsis: Insert a new key in the list
Declaration: procedure InsertKey(Index: Integer;const AKey: TKey)
Visibility: public
Description: InsertKey inserts key AKey at position Index in the list. It is not allowed to insert a key in a
sorted list.
will be raised.
See also: TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.InsertKeyData (676), TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Add (675),
TFPSMapInterfacedObjectData.Delete (659), TFPSMapInterfacedObjectData.Remove (659)
51.9.10 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.InsertKeyData
Synopsis: Insert a new key with associated data in the list
Declaration: procedure InsertKeyData(Index: Integer;const AKey: TKey;
const AData: TData)
Visibility: public
Description: InsertKey inserts key AKey with associated data AData at position Index in the list. It is not
allowed to insert a key in a sorted list.
will be raised.
See also: TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.InsertKey (676), TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Add (675), TF-
PSMapInterfacedObjectData.Delete (659), TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Remove (676)
51.9.11 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Remove
Synopsis: Remove a key from the list
Declaration: function Remove(const AKey: TKey) : Integer
Visibility: public
Description: Remove removes the key AKey from the list, together with its associated data. The function returns
the index of AKey prior to removal from the list, or -1 if AKey was not present in the list.
676
Errors: None.
See also: TFPGMap.InsertKey (671), TFPGMap.InsertKeyData (671), TFPGMap.Add (670), TFPGMapIn-
terfacedObjectData.Delete (674)
51.9.12 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Keys
Synopsis: Indexed access to the keys in the list.
Declaration: Property Keys[Index: Integer]: TKey
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Keys provides indexed access to the key values in the list. Valid values for Index are in the range
[0..Count-1]. Key values can always be read, but can only be written if the list is unsorted.
Errors: If the index AIndex is out of range [0..Count-1], an EListError (660) exception will be raised. The
same exception is raised if a key is written and the list is sorted.
See also: TFPSList.Count (689), TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Data (677), TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.KeyData
(677)
51.9.13 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Data
Synopsis: Indexed access to the data in the list
Declaration: Property Data[Index: Integer]: TData
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Data provides indexed access to the data values in the list. Valid values for Index are in the range
[0..Count-1]. Data can always be read or written.
Errors: If the index AIndex is out of range [0..Count-1], an EListError (660) exception will be raised.
See also: TFPSList.Count (689), TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Keys (677), TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.KeyData
(677)
51.9.14 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.KeyData
Synopsis: Access to data based on key
Declaration: Property KeyData[AKey: TKey]: TData; default
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: KeyData allows access to the data based on the key value AKey. The data can be read and written.
When writing, writing using an existing key will overwrite the current data. If it does not exist yet, it
will be created. When reading, if the key is not present, an EListError (660) will be raised.
Errors: If the key does not exist, an EListError (660) exception will be raised.
See also: TFPSList.Count (689), TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Keys (677), TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.Data
(677)
677
51.9.15 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.OnCompare
Synopsis: Alias for OnKeyCompare
Declaration: Property OnCompare : TKeyCompareFunc
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: OnCompare is a deprecated property, use TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.OnKeyCompare (678)
instead.
See also: TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.OnKeyCompare (678)
51.9.16 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.OnKeyCompare
Synopsis: Compare function for key values.
Declaration: Property OnKeyCompare : TKeyCompareFunc
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: OnKeyCompare can be set to a function that compares key values. The default value for this event
is a function that compares keys based on a byte-by-byte comparison of the memory block. The
function must have the following semantics:
•If the result of this function is negative, the first key (key1) is assumed to be ’less’ than the
•If the function result is positive, the first key (key1) pointer is assumed to be ’greater than’ the
second key (key2)and will be moved after the second in the list.
•if the function result is zero, the keys are assumed to be ’equal’ and no moving will take place.
See also: TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.OnDataCompare (678)
51.9.17 TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.OnDataCompare
Synopsis: Compare function for data values.
Declaration: Property OnDataCompare : TDataCompareFunc
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: OnDataCompare can be set to a function that compares data values. The default value for this
event is a function that compares data based on a byte-by-byte comparison of the memory block.
The function must have the following semantics:
•If the result of this function is negative, the first data item (Data1) is assumed to be ’less’ than
the second data item (Data2) and will be moved before the second in the list.
•If the function result is positive, the first data item (Data1) pointer is assumed to be ’greater
than’ the second data item (Data2)and will be moved after the second in the list.
•if the function result is zero, the data items are assumed to be ’equal’ and no moving will take
place.
See also: TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData.OnKeyCompare (678)
678
51.10 TFPGObjectList
51.10.1 Description
TFPGList can be used to specialize a list for any class type T that does not require reference
counting (such as interfaced objects). It will specialize to a list with the same methods as TFPSList
(683) or classes.TFPList (659) or TFPObjectList

679 Add Add new object of class T to the list.
681 Assign Copy objects from Source list
679 Create Instantiate a new object list.
680 GetEnumerator Return a list enumerator for T.
680 IndexOf Index of item
681 Insert Insert a new object in the list
681 Remove Remove an object from the list.
681 Sort Sort the objects in the list

682 First rw First non-nil item
683 FreeObjects rw Does the list own the objects or not?
682 Items rw Indexed access to objects in the list.
682 Last rw Last non-Nil object
51.10.4 TFPGObjectList.Create
Synopsis: Instantiate a new object list.
Declaration: constructor Create(FreeObjects: Boolean)
Visibility: public
Description: Create instantiates a new object list. It will simply call the inherited constructor with the correct
item size and will initialize TFPGObjectList.FreeObjects (683) with FreeObjects.
If FreeObjects is true, then the list owns the objects. Freeing or clearing the list will remove all
objects from memory by calling the destructor. Deleting or removing an item from the list will also
dispose of the element.
See also: TFPGObjectList.FreeObjects (683)
51.10.5 TFPGObjectList.Add
Synopsis: Add new object of class T to the list.
679
Visibility: public
Description: Add adds a new item Item of class type T to the list and returns the position at which the item was
added.
See also: TFPGObjectList.Extract (680), TFPGObjectList.Items (682), TFPGObjectList.IndexOf (680)
51.10.6 TFPGObjectList.Extract
Visibility: public
Description: Extract removes Item from the list and returns the removed item, or Nil if it was not found.
The extracted object will not be destroyed even if the list owns the objects.
Errors: None.
51.10.7 TFPGObjectList.GetEnumerator
Synopsis: Return a list enumerator for T.
Visibility: public
51.10.8 TFPGObjectList.IndexOf
Synopsis: Index of item
Visibility: public
Description: IndexOf returns the index of Item in the list, or -1 if the item does not appear in the list.
Errors: None.
See also: TFPGObjectList.Items (682), TFPGObjectList.Insert (681), TFPGObjectList.Add (679)
680
51.10.9 TFPGObjectList.Insert
Synopsis: Insert a new object in the list

Visibility: public
Description: Insert inserts a new object (Item) in the list at position Index. The index is zero based and
must be less than Count (689).

51.10.10 TFPGObjectList.Assign
Synopsis: Copy objects from Source list
Declaration: procedure Assign(Source: TFPGObjectList)

Visibility: public
Take care if both the list owns the objects (i.e. have TFPGObjectList.FreeObjects (683) set to True),
this may result to access violations.
See also: TFPSList.Clear (685), TFPGObjectList.Add (679)
51.10.11 TFPGObjectList.Remove
Synopsis: Remove an object from the list.

Visibility: public
Description: Remove removes the object Item from the list, and returns the index of the removed item. If no
item was removed, -1 is returned. Only the first object is removed.
If the list owns the objects, (TFPGObjectList.FreeObjects (683) is set to True) then the object is
freed.
Errors: None.
See also: TFPGObjectList.IndexOf (680), TFPSList.Delete (685), TFPGObjectList.FreeObjects (683)
51.10.12 TFPGObjectList.Sort
Synopsis: Sort the objects in the list
Visibility: public
681
•If the result of this function is negative, the first object (Item1) is assumed to be ’less’ than
the second object (Item2) and will be moved before the second in the list.
•If the function result is positive, the first object (Item1) is assumed to be ’greater than’ the
second object (Item2)and will be moved after the second in the list.
•if the function result is zero, the objects are assumed to be ’equal’ and no moving will take
place.
Errors: None.
51.10.13 TFPGObjectList.First
Synopsis: First non-nil item
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: First returns the first non-nil item. If no such element is present, Nil is returned.
See also: TFPSList.First (690), TFPGList.Last (667), TFPSList.Pack (688)
51.10.14 TFPGObjectList.Last
Synopsis: Last non-Nil object
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Last returns the last non-Nil object. If no such element is present, Nil. is returned.
See also: TFPGObjectList.First (682), TFPSList.Last (690)
51.10.15 TFPGObjectList.Items
Synopsis: Indexed access to objects in the list.

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Items provides indexed access to the objects in the list. The objects can be get or set.
If the list owns the objects, (TFPGObjectList.FreeObjects (683) is set to True) then the previous
object at position Index is freed when setting the property.
See also: TFPSList.Count (689), TFPGObjectList.FreeObjects (683)
682
51.10.16 TFPGObjectList.List

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: List is the internal list of objects. It should not be used directly.
See also: TFPGObjectList.Items (682)
51.10.17 TFPGObjectList.FreeObjects
Synopsis: Does the list own the objects or not?
Declaration: Property FreeObjects : Boolean
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: FreeObjects indicates whether the list owns the objects or not. If set to True, freeing or clearing
the list will remove all objects from memory by calling the destructor. Deleting or removing an item
from the list will also dispose of the element.
The initial value for this property is set in the constructor and is True by default.
See also: TFPGObjectList.FreeObjects (683)
51.11 TFPSList
51.11.1 Description
TFPSList can be seen as the generalized equivalent of the classes unit TFPList (659) list. It is used
as a base class for the TFPGList (664), TFPGMap (669), TFPGObjectList (679), TFPGInterface-
dObjectList (660) and TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData (674) generic classes.
This list is not meant to be used directly, it is an auxiliary class for the actual generic list classes.
See also: classes.TFPList (659), TFPGMap (669), TFPGObjectList (679), TFPGInterfacedObjectList (660),
TFPGMapInterfacedObjectData (674)
683

685 Add Add a new item to the list
687 Assign Copy one list to another
685 Clear Clear the list
684 Create Create a new instance of TFPSList
685 Delete Delete an item from the list
684 Destroy Destroy the list instance.
685 Error Raise an EListError exception.
686 Exchange Exchange two items in the list
686 Expand Expand the capacity of the list
686 Extract delete an element from the list
686 IndexOf Search an item in the list
687 Insert Insert a new item in the list.
687 Move Moves an item from one position in the list to another.
688 Pack Remove empty items from the list
688 Remove Remove the item from the list
688 Sort Sort the list

689 Capacity rw Current capacity of the list
689 Count rw Current element count
690 First rw Pointer to first non-empty item in the list
689 Items rw Items in the list
690 ItemSize r Size of the items in the list
690 Last rw Pointer to last non-empty item in the list
51.11.4 TFPSList.Create
Synopsis: Create a new instance of TFPSList
Declaration: constructor Create(AItemSize: Integer)
Visibility: public
Description: Create creates a new instance of TFPSList, and initializes the item size to ItemSize, which
defaults to the size of a pointer.
See also: TFPSList.ItemSize (690), TFPSList.Destroy (684)
51.11.5 TFPSList.Destroy
Synopsis: Destroy the list instance.
Visibility: public
Description: Destroy clears and cleans up the list instance. Depending on the descendant, this may also remove
the items in the list from memory.
See also: TFPSList.Clear (685)
684
51.11.6 TFPSList.Add
Synopsis: Add a new item to the list

Visibility: public
Description: Add adds the item pointed to by Item to the list. It is not the pointer Item itself which is added to
the list, but rather the TFPSList.ItemSize (690) bytes of memory to which Item is pointing.
The function returns the index of the newly added item.
Errors: If the maximum list size is reached, an EListError (660) is raised.
See also: TFPSList.Delete (685), TFPSList.Items (689), TFPSList.Clear (685)
51.11.7 TFPSList.Clear
Synopsis: Clear the list
Visibility: public
Description: Clear removes all the items in the list. Depending on the descendent, the list items themselves
may be cleared as well.
See also: TFPSList.Delete (685), TFPSList.Items (689), TFPSList.Add (685)
51.11.8 TFPSList.Delete
Synopsis: Delete an item from the list

Visibility: public
Description: Delete deletes the item at position Index from the list. Depending on the descendent, the list
items itself may be cleared as well.
Errors: If Index is out of bounds, an EListError (660) exception is raised.

See also: TFPSList.Clear (685), TFPSList.Items (689), TFPSList.Add (685)
51.11.9 TFPSList.Error
Synopsis: Raise an EListError exception.
Declaration: class procedure Error(const Msg: string;Data: PtrInt)
Visibility: public
Description: Error is an auxiliary routine which raises an EListError (660) exception formatted from Msg and
Data.
See also: EListError (660)
685
51.11.10 TFPSList.Exchange
Synopsis: Exchange two items in the list

Visibility: public
Description: Exchange will exchange 2 items at positions Index1 and Index2 in the list.
Errors: If Index1 or Index2 are out of bounds, an EListError (660) exception is raised.
51.11.11 TFPSList.Expand
Synopsis: Expand the capacity of the list
Declaration: function Expand : TFPSList
Visibility: public
Description: Expand will expand the capacity of the list, and returns itself.
Errors: If the size will become larger than MaxListSize (659) an EListError (660) exception will be raised.
See also: MaxListSize (659), TFPSList.Capacity (689)
51.11.12 TFPSList.Extract
Synopsis: delete an element from the list
Declaration: procedure Extract(Item: Pointer;ResultPtr: Pointer)
Visibility: public
Description: Extract removes the item pointed to by Item from the list. It returns a pointer to the actually
removed item from the list. The item is searched using TFPSList.IndexOf (686). If the item is not
found, nil is returned.
Some descendents own the items in the list. Extract will not dispose of the item, as TFP-
SList.Delete (685) does.
Errors: None.
See also: TFPSList.Delete (685), TFPSList.Add (685), TFPSList.IndexOf (686)
51.11.13 TFPSList.IndexOf
Synopsis: Search an item in the list
Visibility: public
Description: IndexOf searches in the list for the item pointed to by Item, and returns the position (0-based in-
dex) of the item in the list, or -1 if it was not found. The items are compared using system.CompareMem
(659), so an exact memory layout match.
See also: TFPSList.Extract (686)
686
51.11.14 TFPSList.Insert
Synopsis: Insert a new item in the list.

function Insert(Index: Integer) : Pointer
Visibility: public
Description: Insert comes in 2 overloaded version. The version without Item creates a slot for a new item
at position Index in the list, and returns a pointer to the new slot. The slot will be of size TFP-
SList.ItemSize (690).
The version with Item argument will allocate a slot in the list at position Index and will copy the
item pointed to by Item to the slot in the list.
In both cases, Index must be 0-based.
Errors: If Index is invalid, an EListError (660) exception will be raised.

See also: TFPSList.Add (685), TFPSList.Delete (685), TFPSList.Extract (686)
51.11.15 TFPSList.Move
Synopsis: Moves an item from one position in the list to another.

Visibility: public
Description: Move moves the item at position CurIndex to position NewIndex. This is done by storing the
Errors: If CurIndex or Newindex are not inside the valid range of indices, an EListError (660) exception
is raised.
51.11.16 TFPSList.Assign
Synopsis: Copy one list to another
Declaration: procedure Assign(Obj: TFPSList)
Visibility: public
Description: Assign clears the list and will add all items from Obj to the list. The items are copied one by one.
Errors: If the TFPSList.ItemSize (690) differs for the two lists, an EListError (660) exception is raised.
See also: TFPSList.Add (685)
687
51.11.17 TFPSList.Remove
Synopsis: Remove the item from the list

Visibility: public
Description: Remove searches Item in the list, and deletes it from the list. It returns the index of the item that
was removed, or -1 if it was not found. Only the first match is removed.
If a descendent of TFPSList owns the object of the list, the item is removed from memory. If this
is not desired, then TFPSList.Extract (686) must be used instead.
See also: TFPSList.Extract (686), TFPSList.IndexOf (686)
51.11.18 TFPSList.Pack
Synopsis: Remove empty items from the list
Visibility: public
Description: Pack will remove all empty items from the list. An item is considered to be empty if the memory
location where the item is stored contains only zero bytes.
See also: TFPSList.Clear (685), TFPSList.Sort (688)
51.11.19 TFPSList.Sort
Synopsis: Sort the list
Declaration: procedure Sort(Compare: TFPSListCompareFunc)
Visibility: public
Description: Sort> sorts the items in the list. Two pointers are compared by passing them to the Compare
•If the result of this function is negative, the first item is assumed to be ’less’ than the second
and will be moved before the second item in the list.
•If the function result is positive, the first item is assumed to be ’greater than’ the second and
will be moved after the second item in the list.
place.

See also: TFPSListCompareFunc (659)
688
51.11.20 TFPSList.Capacity
Synopsis: Current capacity of the list

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Capacity is the current capacity (maximum amount of elements) of the list. The list capacity
will expand automatically if an item is added and the capacity is reached (i.e. TFPSList.Count
(689) equals capacity. Expanding the list is an expensive operation involving reallocation of
memory and moving of list data in memort, so capacity can be set to a large amount to avoid frequent
reallocations.
See also: TFPSList.Count (689), TFPSList.Expand (686), TFPSList.Items (689)
51.11.21 TFPSList.Count
Synopsis: Current element count
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Count is the current amount of elements in the list. It is initially zero. A valid item index is always
a value between zero and Count-1.
See also: TFPSList.Items (689), TFPSList.Capacity (689)
51.11.22 TFPSList.Items
Synopsis: Items in the list
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Items provides indexed access to the items in the list, the returned pointers are not the actual list
items, but pointers to the elements in the list. The items can be get or set.
When assigning to the Items property, the memory area pointed to by the assigned pointer is copied
to the list. Exactly TFPSList.ItemSize (690) bytes are copied.
See also: TFPSList.ItemSize (690), TFPSList.Count (689)
689
51.11.23 TFPSList.ItemSize
Synopsis: Size of the items in the list
Declaration: Property ItemSize : Integer

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: ItemSize is the memory size of the items in the list. It is specified in the constructor and cannot
be changed during the lifetime of the list.
See also: TFPSList.Create (684)
51.11.24 TFPSList.List
Declaration: Property List : PByte

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: List is a pointer to the memory area used for the items in the list. It should not be manipulated.
51.11.25 TFPSList.First
Synopsis: Pointer to first non-empty item in the list
Declaration: Property First : Pointer
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: First returns the value of the first non-empty item in the list. An item is considered empty if
consists of TFPSList.ItemSize (690) zero bytes.
If there are no non-empty items in the list, then Nil is returned.
See also: TFPSList.Last (690), TFPSList.Pack (688)
51.11.26 TFPSList.Last
Synopsis: Pointer to last non-empty item in the list
Declaration: Property Last : Pointer
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Last returns the value of the last non-empty item in the list. An item is considered empty if consists
of TFPSList.ItemSize (690) zero bytes.
If there are no non-empty items in the list, then Nil is returned.
See also: TFPSList.Last (690), TFPSList.Pack (688)
690
51.12 TFPSMap
51.12.1 Description
TFPSMap can be used to create a map for any type T that does not require reference counting (such
as interfaced objects). It will specialize to a map which is a generalized list with an arbitrary type as
the list index (called the key).
This class should normally not be used directly, instead use one of the generic map objects such as
TFPGMap (669).
See also: TFPGMap (669)

692 Add Add a key, value pair to the map.
691 Create Create a new map with given key and data size.
692 Find Find data using the associated key
692 IndexOf Index of key pointed to by AKey
693 IndexOfData Index of data item AData
693 Insert Insert a new slot for key and associated data item in the list
693 InsertKey Insert a key in the list
693 InsertKeyData Insert a key and associated in the list
694 Remove Remove a key/value pair from the map.
694 Sort Sort the list according to key

695 Data rw Indexed access to the locations of all data items
695 DataSize r Size (in bytes) for the data associated with keys
694 Duplicates rw What to do with duplicate key values
696 KeyData rw Access to data locations using key
695 Keys rw Indexed access to the locations of all keys
695 KeySize r Size (in bytes) for the key
697 OnDataPtrCompare rw Callback to compare 2 data items
696 OnKeyPtrCompare rw Callback to compare 2 keys
696 OnPtrCompare rw Alias for OnKeyPtrCompare
696 Sorted rw Is the map permanently sorted on key ?
51.12.4 TFPSMap.Create
Synopsis: Create a new map with given key and data size.
Declaration: constructor Create(AKeySize: Integer;ADataSize: Integer)
Visibility: public
Description: Create instantiates a new TFPSMap instance and initializes TFPSMap.KeySize (695) and TF-
PSMap.DataSize (695) with AKeySize and ADataSize, respectively. It also initializes the TF-
PSMap.OnDataPtrCompare (697) and TFPSMap.OnKeyPtrCompare (696) properties to functions
that compare memory blocks.
Errors: None.
691
See also: TFPSMap.Destroy (691), TFPSMap.KeySize (695), TFPSMap.DataSize (695), TFPSMap.OnDataPtrCompare

(697), TFPSMap.OnKeyPtrCompare (696)
51.12.5 TFPSMap.Add
Synopsis: Add a key, value pair to the map.
Declaration: function Add(AKey: Pointer;AData: Pointer) : Integer
function Add(AKey: Pointer) : Integer
Visibility: public
Description: Add adds the memory pointed to by AData to the map using the memory pointed to by AKey as
the key. If no data is specified, it allocates a slot fot AKey and returns a pointer to that slot.
Errors: If the maximum amount of values is reached, Add will raise an EListError (660) exception.
See also: TFPSMap.Insert (693), TFPSMap.IndexOf (692)
51.12.6 TFPSMap.Find
Synopsis: Find data using the associated key
Declaration: function Find(AKey: Pointer;out Index: Integer) : Boolean

Visibility: public
Description: Find searches for the first key less than or equal to AKey and returns its index in the list in Index.
It returns True if an exact match for the key was found. It returns False if the key was not found,
and Index is then set to -1
This function performs a binary search using the key comparing function specified in OnKeyPtrCom-
pare (696).
Errors: if OnKeyPtrCompare is not set, an access violation will occur.
See also: TFPSMap.OnKeyPtrCompare (696)
51.12.7 TFPSMap.IndexOf
Synopsis: Index of key pointed to by AKey
Declaration: function IndexOf(AKey: Pointer) : Integer
Visibility: public
Description: IndexOf returns the index of the element with a key pointed to by AKey. It returns -1 if the key
was not found.
If the list is sorted, then a binary search is performed, otherwise a linear search is used to find the
key.
Errors: None.
See also: TFPSMap.Find (692), TFPSMap.IndexOfData (693), TFPSMap.Keys (695), TFPSMap.Data (695)
692
51.12.8 TFPSMap.IndexOfData
Synopsis: Index of data item AData
Declaration: function IndexOfData(AData: Pointer) : Integer
Visibility: public
Description: IndexOfData returns the index of the element with data pointed to by AData. It returns -1 if the
data item was not found. The search is always performed using a linear search.
See also: TFPSMap.Find (692), TFPSMap.IndexOf (692), TFPSMap.Keys (695), TFPSMap.Data (695)
51.12.9 TFPSMap.Insert
Synopsis: Insert a new slot for key and associated data item in the list
Declaration: function Insert(Index: Integer) : Pointer
procedure Insert(Index: Integer;out AKey: Pointer;out AData: Pointer)
Visibility: public
Description: Insert will allocate a new slot in the list. It returns a pointer to the new slot. If Akey and AData
are given, then they will point to the positions in the slot for the key and data items.
Errors: If the maximum amount of values is reached or an invalid index is specified, Insert will raise an
EListError (660) exception.
See also: TFPSMap.Add (692), TFPSMap.InsertKey (693), TFPSMap.InsertKeyData (693)
51.12.10 TFPSMap.InsertKey
Synopsis: Insert a key in the list
Declaration: procedure InsertKey(Index: Integer;AKey: Pointer)
Visibility: public
Description: InsertKey will allocate a new slot in the list for a key value as pointed to by AKey, and copy the
key pointed to by AKey to the slot.
Errors: If the maximum amount of values is reached or an invalid index is specified, InsertKey will raise
an EListError (660) exception.
See also: TFPSMap.Add (692), TFPSMap.Insert (693), TFPSMap.InsertKeyData (693)
51.12.11 TFPSMap.InsertKeyData
Synopsis: Insert a key and associated in the list
Declaration: procedure InsertKeyData(Index: Integer;AKey: Pointer;AData: Pointer)
Visibility: public
Description: InsertKeyData will allocate a new slot in the list for a key value as pointed to by AKey, and
copy the key pointed to by AKey as well as the data pointed to by AData to the newly allocated slot.
Errors: If the maximum amount of values is reached or an invalid index is specified, InsertKeyData
will raise an EListError (660) exception.
See also: TFPSMap.Add (692), TFPSMap.Insert (693), TFPSMap.InsertKey (693)
693
51.12.12 TFPSMap.Remove
Synopsis: Remove a key/value pair from the map.
Declaration: function Remove(AKey: Pointer) : Integer

Visibility: public
Description: Remove removes the key/value pair pointing to by AKey from the map. It returns the index of
Akey prior to removal from the list. If AKey was not found, -1 is returned.
Errors: None.
See also: TFPSList.Delete (685), TFPSMap.IndexOf (692)
51.12.13 TFPSMap.Sort
Synopsis: Sort the list according to key
Declaration: procedure Sort

Visibility: public
Description: Sort sorts the list according to the key value, using the compare function provided in TFPSMap.OnKeyPtrCompare
(696)
Errors: None.
See also: TFPSMap.OnKeyPtrCompare (696), TFPSMap.OnDataPtrCompare (697)
51.12.14 TFPSMap.Duplicates
Synopsis: What to do with duplicate key values

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Duplicates can be set to determine what to do with duplicate key values in the map:
dupIgnoreIgnore the new item, do not add it to the list.

dupAcceptAccept duplicates, adding them to the list.
dupErrorRaise an error when an attempt is made to add a duplicate.
The value is ignored if Sorted (696) is False.

See also: TFPSMap.Sorted (696), types.TDuplicates (659)
694
51.12.15 TFPSMap.KeySize
Synopsis: Size (in bytes) for the key
Declaration: Property KeySize : Integer
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: KeySize is the size (in bytes) for the keys in the map. This size is initialized during list construction
and defaults to the size of a pointer.
See also: TFPSMap.Create (691), TFPSMap.DataSize (695), TFPSMap.Keys (695), TFPSMap.KeyData (696)
51.12.16 TFPSMap.DataSize
Synopsis: Size (in bytes) for the data associated with keys
Declaration: Property DataSize : Integer
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: DataSize is the size (in bytes) for the data in the map. This size is initialized during list construc-
tion and defaults to the size of a pointer.
See also: TFPSMap.Create (691), TFPSMap.KeySize (695), TFPSMap.Keys (695), TFPSMap.KeyData (696),
TFPSMap.Data (695)
51.12.17 TFPSMap.Keys
Synopsis: Indexed access to the locations of all keys
Declaration: Property Keys[Index: Integer]: Pointer
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Keys provides indexed access to all keys. It does not return the key, but returns a pointer to the key
value. When setting the Keys property, a pointer to the key value must be set, and the key value is
copied from the pointer.
See also: TFPSMap.KeySize (695), TFPSMap.KeyData (696), TFPSMap.Data (695)
51.12.18 TFPSMap.Data
Synopsis: Indexed access to the locations of all data items
Declaration: Property Data[Index: Integer]: Pointer
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Data provides indexed access to all data. It does not return the actual data, but returns a pointer to
the data. When setting the Data property, a pointer to the data value must be set, and the data value
is copied from the pointer.
See also: TFPSMap.DataSize (695), TFPSMap.KeyData (696), TFPSMap.Keys (695)
695
51.12.19 TFPSMap.KeyData
Synopsis: Access to data locations using key
Declaration: Property KeyData[Key: Pointer]: Pointer; default

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: KeyData provides access to the data items, using their key value (as pointed to by AKey) as an
index. When reading a non-existent key value, Nil is returned. If the key is found, a pointer to the
associated data’s location is returned. When writing, the key pointed to by Key is added if it was not
present, and the data data is copied from the written pointer.
See also: TFPSMap.DataSize (695), TFPSMap.KeyData (696), TFPSMap.Data (695), TFPSMap.Keys (695),
TFPSMap.KeySize (695)
51.12.20 TFPSMap.Sorted
Synopsis: Is the map permanently sorted on key ?
Declaration: Property Sorted : Boolean
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Sorted can be set to true to keep the map permanently sorted on key value. The sorting happens
using TFPSMap.OnKeyPtrCompare (696).
See also: TFPSMap.OnKeyPtrCompare (696), TFPSMap.Sort (694), TFPSMap.Duplicates (694)
51.12.21 TFPSMap.OnPtrCompare
Synopsis: Alias for OnKeyPtrCompare
Declaration: Property OnPtrCompare : TFPSListCompareFunc
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: OnPtrCompare is a deprecated alias for OnKeyPtrCompare (696).
See also: TFPSMap.OnKeyPtrCompare (696), TFPSMap.OnDataPtrCompare (697)
51.12.22 TFPSMap.OnKeyPtrCompare
Synopsis: Callback to compare 2 keys
Declaration: Property OnKeyPtrCompare : TFPSListCompareFunc
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
696
Description: OnKeyPtrCompare is used to compare the values of 2 keys. By default it simply compares the
byte values of the key memory block. It can be set to any function that performs another comparison.
(e.g. a function that treats the memory blocks as a string pointer and compare the actual strings).
This function is used to sort the list or find a key.
See also: TFPSListCompareFunc (659), TFPSMap.OnDataPtrCompare (697), TFPSMap.Sort (694), TFPSMap.Find
(692), TFPSMap.IndexOf (692)
51.12.23 TFPSMap.OnDataPtrCompare
Synopsis: Callback to compare 2 data items
Declaration: Property OnDataPtrCompare : TFPSListCompareFunc
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: OnKeyPtrCompare is used to compare the values of 2 keys. By default it simply compares the
byte values of the key memory block. It can be set to any function that performs another comparison.
(e.g. a function that treats the memory blocks as a string pointer and compare the actual strings).
This function is used to find a data item (IndexOf (693)).
See also: TFPSListCompareFunc (659), TFPSMap.OnKeyPtrCompare (696), TFPSMap.IndexOfData (693)
697
Chapter 52
Reference for unit ’fpwidestring’
52.1 Used units
Table 52.1: Used units by unit ’fpwidestring’
Name Page
System 1224
unicodedata 1715
52.2 Overview
fpwidestring implements unicode string support for the Free Pascal RTL using native Object
Pascal routines. It is meant to be used on operating systems where the operating system does not
natively support Unicode transformations and operations.
In general, it is sufficient to include the unit in the uses clause of a program. The initialization code
of the unit will set the unicode string manager of the system unit to the object pascal implementation
contained in this unit.
This unit needs unicode collation and character set tables in order to be able to do its work correctly.
These must be registered using the routines of the unicodedata (698) unit: the FPC project distributes
some unicode collation data in .bco files which can be loaded using the LoadCollation (1724)
routine.
In order for sorting and comparing of strings to work, a collation must be used. The collation in
general depends on the internationalization of the application. Since the system unit does not know
about collations, the collation must be set in the fpWideString unit using the SetActiveCollation
(699) function. The collation can be set on a per-thread basis.
New threads get DefaultCollationName (699) as the active collation name.
The fpwidestring unit performs conversions between unicode and single-byte ansistring conversions
(excluding UTF8). Support for various single-byte encodings are based on the charset (698) unit.
This unit can be used to load single byte code pages. Various code page units such as cp895, cp932,
cp950 are provided by the "rtl-unicode" package.
The fpwidestring requires at least the Default Unicode Collation Element Table to be registered
(called DUCET). The DUCET encoding is provided by the unicodeducet unit. More information
can be found in the unicodedata (698) unit.
698
CHAPTER 52. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’FPWIDESTRING’

52.3.1 Variables
DefaultCollationName : TCollationName = ’’
DefaultCollationName is the collation name for new threads. It is empty by default.

52.4.1 GetActiveCollation
Synopsis: Return the currently active collation for the current thread
Declaration: function GetActiveCollation : PUCA_DataBook

Visibility: default
Description: GetActiveCollation returns the currently active collation, for the current thread, as set using
the SetActiveCollation (699) function.
New threads get DefaultCollationName (699) as the active collation name. The collation can be
changed per thread using the SetActiveCollation (699) function.
Errors: None.
See also: SetActiveCollation (699), DefaultCollationName (699)
52.4.2 SetActiveCollation
Synopsis: Set the active collation for the current thread.
Declaration: function SetActiveCollation(const AName: TCollationName) : Boolean
function SetActiveCollation(const ACollation: PUCA_DataBook) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: SetActiveCollation sets the collation used in the current thread of the application. This can
be done using the name of the collation (AName) as registered or in the unicodedata (698) unit or
using the actual collation data (ACollation).
Errors: If the collation AName was not found, or ACollation is nil, then False is returned.
See also: GetActiveCollation (699), DefaultCollationName (699)
699
Chapter 53
Reference for unit ’getopts’
53.1 Overview
This document describes the GETOPTS unit for Free Pascal. It was written for linux by Michael Van
Canneyt. It now also works for all supported platforms.
The getopts unit provides a mechanism to handle command-line options in a structured way, much
like the GNU getopts mechanism. It allows you to define the valid options for you program, and the
unit will then parse the command-line options for you, and inform you of any errors.

53.2.1 Constants
EndOfOptions = #255
Returned by getopt (702),getlongopts (702) to indicate that there are no more options.
No_Argument = 0
Specifies that a long option does not take an argument.
Optional_Argument = 2
Specifies that a long option optionally takes an argument.
OptSpecifier : Set of Char = [’-’]
Character indicating an option on the command-line.
Required_Argument = 1
Specifies that a long option needs an argument.
700
CHAPTER 53. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’GETOPTS’
53.2.2 Types
Orderings = (require_order,permute,return_in_order)
Table 53.1: Enumeration values for type Orderings
Value Explanation
permute Change command-line options.
require_order Don’t touch the ordering of the command-line options
return_in_order Return options in the correct order.
Command-line ordering options.
POption = ^TOption
Pointer to TOption (701) record.
TOption = record
Name : string;
Has_arg : Integer;
Flag : PChar;
Value : Char;
end
The TOption type is used to communicate the long options to GetLongOpts (702). The Name field
is the name of the option. Has_arg specifies if the option wants an argument, Flag is a pointer to
a char, which is set to Value, if it is non-nil.
53.2.3 Variables
OptArg : string
Set to the argument of an option, if the option needs one.
OptErr : Boolean
Indicates whether getopt() prints error messages.
OptInd : LongInt
when all options have been processed, optind is the index of the first non-option parameter. This
is a read-only variable. Note that it can become equal to paramcount+1.
OptOpt : Char
In case of an error, contains the character causing the error.
701

53.3.1 GetLongOpts
Synopsis: Return next long option.
Declaration: function GetLongOpts(ShortOpts: string;LongOpts: POption;
var Longind: LongInt) : Char
Visibility: default
Description: Returns the next option found on the command-line, taking into account long options as well. If no
more options are found, returns EndOfOptions. If the option requires an argument, it is returned
in the OptArg variable.
ShortOptions is a string containing all possible one-letter options. (see Getopt (702) for its
description and use) LongOpts is a pointer to the first element of an array of Option records, the
last of which needs a name of zero length.
The function tries to match the names even partially (i.e. -app will match e.g. the append op-
tion), but will report an error in case of ambiguity. If the option needs an argument, set Has_arg to
Required_argument, if the option optionally has an argument, set Has_arg to Optional_argument.
If the option needs no argument, set Has_arg to zero.
Required arguments can be specified in two ways :
1.Pasted to the option : -option=value

2.As a separate argument : -option value
Optional arguments can only be specified through the first method.

Errors: see Getopt (702).
See also: Getopt (702)
53.3.2 GetOpt
Synopsis: Get next short option.
Declaration: function GetOpt(ShortOpts: string) : Char
Visibility: default
Description: Returns the next option found on the command-line. If no more options are found, returns EndOfOptions.
If the option requires an argument, it is returned in the OptArg variable.
ShortOptions is a string containing all possible one-letter options. If a letter is followed by a
colon (:), then that option needs an argument. If a letter is followed by 2 colons, the option has
an optional argument. If the first character of shortoptions is a ’+’ then options following
a non-option are regarded as non-options (standard Unix behavior). If it is a ’-’, then all non-
options are treated as arguments of a option with character #0. This is useful for applications that
require their options in the exact order as they appear on the command-line. If the first character of
shortoptions is none of the above, options and non-options are permuted, so all non-options are
behind all options. This allows options and non-options to be in random order on the command line.
Errors: Errors are reported through giving back a ’?’ character. OptOpt then gives the character which
caused the error. If OptErr is True then getopt prints an error-message to stdout.
See also: GetLongOpts (702)
702
Listing: ./optex/optex.pp
program t e s t o p t ;
{ Program t o depmonstrate t h e g e t o p t s f u n c t i o n . }
{
V a l i d c a l l s t o t h i s program are
optex −−verbose −−add me −− d e l e t e you
optex −−append −− c r e a t e c h i l d
optex −ab −c me −d you
and so on
}
uses g e t o p t s ;
var c : char ;
optionindex : Longint ;
t h e o p t s : array [ 1 . . 7 ] of TOption ;
begin
with t h e o p t s [ 1 ] do
begin
name: = ’ add ’ ;
has_arg : = 1 ;
f l a g := n i l ;
value :=#0;
end ;
begin
name: = ’ append ’ ;
has_arg : = 0 ;
f l a g := n i l ;
value :=#0;
end ;
begin
name: = ’ d e l e t e ’ ;
has_arg : = 1 ;
f l a g := n i l ;
value :=#0;
end ;
begin
name: = ’ verbose ’ ;
has_arg : = 0 ;
f l a g := n i l ;
value :=#0;
end ;
begin
name: = ’ c r e a t e ’ ;
has_arg : = 1 ;
f l a g := n i l ;
value := ’ c ’
end ;
begin
name: = ’ f i l e ’ ;
has_arg : = 1 ;
703
f l a g := n i l ;
value :=#0;
end ;
begin
name: = ’ ’ ;
has_arg : = 0 ;
f l a g := n i l ;
end ;
c :=#0;
repeat
c : = g e t l o n g o p t s ( ’ abc : d :012 ’ , @theopts [ 1 ] , o p t i o n i n d e x ) ;
case c of
’1 ’ , ’2 ’ , ’3 ’ , ’4 ’ , ’5 ’ , ’6 ’ , ’7 ’ , ’8 ’ , ’9 ’ :
begin
w r i t e l n ( ’ Got o p t i n d : ’ , c )
end ;
# 0 : begin
w r i t e ( ’ Long o p t i o n : ’ , t h e o p t s [ o p t i o n i n d e x ] . name ) ;
i f t h e o p t s [ o p t i o n i n d e x ] . has_arg >0 then
w r i t e l n ( ’ With v a l u e : ’ , optarg )
else
writeln
end ;
’ a ’ : w r i t e l n ( ’ Option a . ’ ) ;
’ b ’ : w r i t e l n ( ’ Option b . ’ ) ;
’ c ’ : w r i t e l n ( ’ Option c : ’ , o p t a r g ) ;
’ d ’ : w r i t e l n ( ’ Option d : ’ , o p t a r g ) ;
’ ? ’ , ’ : ’ : writeln ( ’ Error with opt : ’ , optopt ) ;
end ; { case }
u n t i l c= e n d o f o p t i o n s ;
i f o p t i n d <=paramcount then
begin
w r i t e ( ’ Non o p t i o n s : ’ ) ;
while o p t i n d <=paramcount do
begin
w r i t e ( paramstr ( o p t i n d ) , ’ ’ ) ;
inc ( o p t i n d )
end ;
writeln
end
end .
704
Chapter 54
Reference for unit ’go32’
54.1 Overview
This document describes the GO32 unit for the Free Pascal compiler under dos. It was donated by
Thomas Schatzl (tom_at_work@geocities.com), for which my thanks. This unit was first written for
dos by Florian Klaempfl.
Only the GO32V2 DPMI mode is discussed by me here due to the fact that new applications shouldn’t
be created with the older GO32V1 model. The go32v2 version is much more advanced and better.
Additionally a lot of functions only work in DPMI mode anyway. I hope the following explanations
and introductions aren’t too confusing at all. If you notice an error or bug send it to the FPC mailing
list or directly to me. So let’s get started and happy and error free coding I wish you.... Thomas
Schatzl, 25. August 1998
54.2 Real mode callbacks

The callback mechanism can be thought of as the converse of calling a real mode procedure (i.e.
interrupt), which allows your program to pass information to a real mode program, or obtain services
from it in a manner that’s transparent to the real mode program. In order to make a real mode callback
available, you must first get the real mode callback address of your procedure and the selector and
offset of a register data structure. This real mode callback address (this is a segment:offset address)
can be passed to a real mode program via a software interrupt, a dos memory block or any other
convenient mechanism. When the real mode program calls the callback (via a far call), the DPMI
host saves the registers contents in the supplied register data structure, switches into protected mode,
and enters the callback routine with the following settings:
• interrupts disabled
• %CS:%EIP = 48 bit pointer specified in the original call to get_rm_callback (729)
• %DS:%ESI = 48 bit pointer to real mode SS:SP
• %ES:%EDI = 48 bit pointer of real mode register data structure.
• %SS:%ESP = locked protected mode stack
• All other registers undefined
The callback procedure can then extract its parameters from the real mode register data structure
and/or copy parameters from the real mode stack to the protected mode stack. Recall that the segment
705
CHAPTER 54. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’GO32’
register fields of the real mode register data structure contain segment or paragraph addresses that
are not valid in protected mode. Far pointers passed in the real mode register data structure must be
translated to virtual addresses before they can be used with a protected mode program. The callback
procedure exits by executing an IRET with the address of the real mode register data structure in
%ES:%EDI, passing information back to the real mode caller by modifying the contents of the real
mode register data structure and/or manipulating the contents of the real mode stack. The callback
procedure is responsible for setting the proper address for resumption of real mode execution into the
real mode register data structure; typically, this is accomplished by extracting the return address from
the real mode stack and placing it into the %CS:%EIP fields of the real mode register data structure.
After the IRET, the DPMI host switches the CPU back into real mode, loads ALL registers with the
contents of the real mode register data structure, and finally returns control to the real mode program.
All variables and code touched by the callback procedure MUST be locked to prevent page faults.
See also: get_rm_callback (729), free_rm_callback (724), lock_code (737), lock_data (737)
54.3 Executing software interrupts

Simply execute a realintr() call with the desired interrupt number and the supplied register data
structure. But some of these interrupts require you to supply them a pointer to a buffer where they
can store data to or obtain data from in memory. These interrupts are real mode functions and so
they only can access the first Mb of linear address space, not FPC’s data segment. For this reason
FPC supplies a pre-initialized dos memory location within the GO32 unit. This buffer is internally
used for dos functions too and so it’s contents may change when calling other procedures. It’s size
can be obtained with tb_size (747) and it’s linear address via transfer_buffer (747). Another way is
to allocate a completely new dos memory area via the global_dos_alloc (734) function for your use
and supply its real mode address.
See also: tb_size (747), transfer_buffer (747), global_dos_alloc (734), global_dos_free (735), realintr (740)
Listing: ./go32ex/softint.pp
uses
go32 ;
var
r : trealregs ;
begin
r . ah : = $30 ;
r . a l : = $01 ;
r e a l i n t r ( $21 , r ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’DOS v ’ , r . a l , ’ . ’ , r . ah , ’ d e t e c t e d ’ ) ;
end .
Listing: ./go32ex/rmpmint.pp
uses
crt ,
go32 ;
var
r : trealregs ;
axreg : Word ;
oldint21h : tseginfo ;
706
newint21h : t s e g i n f o ;
procedure i n t 2 1 h _ h a n d l e r ; assembler ;
asm
cmpw $0x3001 , % ax
jne . LCallOld
movw $0x3112 , % ax
iret
. LCallOld :
l j m p %cs : o l d i n t 2 1 h
end ;
procedure resume ;
begin
Writeln ;
Write ( ’ −− press any key t o resume −− ’ ) ; readkey ;
gotoxy ( 1 , wherey ) ; c l r e o l ;
end ;
begin
clrscr ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ E x e c u t i n g r e a l mode i n t e r r u p t ’ ) ;
resume ;
r . ah : = $30 ; r . a l : = $01 ; r e a l i n t r ( $21 , r ) ;
resume ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ E x e c u t i n g p r o t e c t e d mode i n t e r r u p t w i t h o u t our own ’ ,
’ handler ’ ) ;
Writeln ;
asm
movb $0x30 , % ah
movb $0x01 , % a l
i n t $0x21
movw %ax , axreg
end ;
resume ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ As you can see t h e DPMI h o s t s d e f a u l t p r o t e c t e d mode ’ ,
’ handler ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ s i m p l y r e d i r e c t s i t t o t h e r e a l mode h a n d l e r ’ ) ;
resume ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Now exchanging t h e p r o t e c t e d mode i n t e r r u p t w i t h our ’ ,
’ own h a n d l e r ’ ) ;
resume ;
newint21h . o f f s e t : = @int21h_handler ;
newint21h . segment : = get_cs ;
g e t _ p m _ i n t e r r u p t ( $21 , o l d i n t 2 1 h ) ;
s e t _ p m _ i n t e r r u p t ( $21 , newint21h ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ E x e c u t i n g r e a l mode i n t e r r u p t again ’ ) ;
resume ;
r . ah : = $30 ; r . a l : = $01 ; r e a l i n t r ( $21 , r ) ;
Writeln ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ See , i t d i d n ’ ’ t change i n any way . ’ ) ;
resume ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Now c a l l i n g p r o t e c t e d mode i n t e r r u p t ’ ) ;
707
resume ;
asm
movb $0x30 , % ah
movb $0x01 , % a l
i n t $0x21
movw %ax , axreg
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’DOS v ’ , l o ( axreg ) , ’ . ’ , h i ( axreg ) , ’ d e t e c t e d ’ ) ;
Writeln ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Now you can see t h a t t h e r e ’ ’ s a d i s t i n c t i o n between ’ ,
’ t h e two ways o f c a l l i n g i n t e r r u p t s . . . ’ ) ;
s e t _ p m _ i n t e r r u p t ( $21 , o l d i n t 2 1 h ) ;
end .
54.4 Software interrupts

Ordinarily, a handler installed with set_pm_interrupt (744) only services software interrupts that are
executed in protected mode; real mode software interrupts can be redirected by set_rm_interrupt
(745).
See also: set_rm_interrupt (745), get_rm_interrupt (732), set_pm_interrupt (744), get_pm_interrupt (728),
lock_data (737), lock_code (737), enable (723), disable (721), outportb (738)
54.5 Hardware interrupts

Hardware interrupts are generated by hardware devices when something unusual happens; this could
be a keypress or a mouse move or any other action. This is done to minimize CPU time, else the CPU
would have to check all installed hardware for data in a big loop (this method is called ’polling’) and
this would take much time. A standard IBM-PC has two interrupt controllers, that are responsible for
these hardware interrupts: both allow up to 8 different interrupt sources (IRQs, interrupt requests).
The second controller is connected to the first through IRQ 2 for compatibility reasons, e.g. if
controller 1 gets an IRQ 2, he hands the IRQ over to controller 2. Because of this up to 15 different
hardware interrupt sources can be handled. IRQ 0 through IRQ 7 are mapped to interrupts 8h to
Fh and the second controller (IRQ 8 to 15) is mapped to interrupt 70h to 77h. All of the code and
data touched by these handlers MUST be locked (via the various locking functions) to avoid page
faults at interrupt time. Because hardware interrupts are called (as in real mode) with interrupts
disabled, the handler has to enable them before it returns to normal program execution. Additionally
a hardware interrupt must send an EOI (end of interrupt) command to the responsible controller; this
is acomplished by sending the value 20h to port 20h (for the first controller) or A0h (for the second
controller). The following example shows how to redirect the keyboard interrupt.
Listing: ./go32ex/keyclick.pp
{$ASMMODE ATT }
{$MODE FPC}
uses
crt ,
go32 ;
const
k b d i n t = $9 ;
708
var
oldint9_handler : tseginfo ;
newint9_handler : t s e g i n f o ;
clickproc : pointer ;
backupDS : Word ; e x t e r n a l name ’ _ _ _ v 2 p r t 0 _ d s _ a l i a s ’ ;
procedure i n t 9 _ h a n d l e r ; assembler ;
asm
cli
p u s h l %ds
p u s h l %es
pushl % f s
p u s h l %gs
pushal
movw %cs : backupDS , % ax
movw %ax , % ds
movw %ax , % es
movw dosmemselector , % ax
movw %ax , % f s
call ∗ clickproc
popal
p o p l %gs
popl % f s
p o p l %es
p o p l %ds
l j m p %cs : o l d i n t 9 _ h a n d l e r
end ;
procedure int9_dummy ; begin end ;
procedure c l i c k e r ;
begin
sound ( 5 0 0 ) ; d e l a y ( 1 0 ) ; nosound ;
end ;
procedure clicker_dummy ; begin end ;
procedure i n s t a l l _ c l i c k ;
begin
c l i c k p r o c : = @clicker ;
lock_data ( clickproc , sizeof ( c l i c k p r o c ) ) ;
l o c k _ d a t a ( dosmemselector , s i z e o f ( dosmemselector ) ) ;
lock_code ( @clicker ,
l o n g i n t ( @clicker_dummy ) − l o n g i n t ( @ c l i c k e r ) ) ;
lock_code ( @int9_handler ,
l o n g i n t ( @int9_dummy)− l o n g i n t ( @int9_handler ) ) ;
n e w i n t 9 _ h a n d l e r . o f f s e t : = @int9_handler ;
n e w i n t 9 _ h a n d l e r . segment : = get_cs ;
get_pm_interrupt ( kbdint , oldint9_handler ) ;
set_pm_interrupt ( kbdint , newint9_handler ) ;
end ;
procedure r e m o v e _ c l i c k ;
begin
set_pm_interrupt ( kbdint , oldint9_handler ) ;
u nl o ck _ da t a ( dosmemselector , s i z e o f ( dosmemselector ) ) ;
u nl o ck _ da t a ( c l i c k p r o c , s i z e o f ( c l i c k p r o c ) ) ;
709
unlock_code ( @clicker ,
l o n g i n t ( @clicker_dummy)− l o n g i n t ( @ c l i c k e r ) ) ;
unlock_code ( @int9_handler ,
l o n g i n t ( @int9_dummy)− l o n g i n t ( @int9_handler ) ) ;
end ;
var
ch : char ;
begin
install_click ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ E n t e r any message . Press r e t u r n when f i n i s h e d ’ ) ;
while ( ch < > # 1 3 ) do begin
ch : = readkey ; w r i t e ( ch ) ;
end ;
remove_click ;
end .
54.6 Disabling interrupts

The GO32 unit provides the two procedures disable() and enable() to disable and enable all interrupts.
54.7 Creating your own interrupt handlers

Interrupt redirection with FPC pascal is done via the set_pm_interrupt() for protected mode interrupts
or via the set_rm_interrupt() for real mode interrupts.
54.8 Protected mode interrupts vs. Real mode interrupts

As mentioned before, there’s a distinction between real mode interrupts and protected mode inter-
rupts; the latter are protected mode programs, while the former must be real mode programs. To
call a protected mode interrupt handler, an assembly ’int’ call must be issued, while the other is
called via the realintr() or intr() function. Consequently, a real mode interrupt then must either re-
side in dos memory (<1MB) or the application must allocate a real mode callback address via the
get_rm_callback() function.
54.9 Handling interrupts with DPMI

The interrupt functions are real-mode procedures; they normally can’t be called in protected mode
without the risk of an protection fault. So the DPMI host creates an interrupt descriptor table for the
application. Initially all software interrupts (except for int 31h, 2Fh and 21h function 4Ch) or external
hardware interrupts are simply directed to a handler that reflects the interrupt in real-mode, i.e. the
DPMI host’s default handlers switch the CPU to real-mode, issue the interrupt and switch back to
protected mode. The contents of general registers and flags are passed to the real mode handler and
the modified registers and flags are returned to the protected mode handler. Segment registers and
stack pointer are not passed between modes.
710
54.10 Interrupt redirection

Interrupts are program interruption requests, which in one or another way get to the processor; there’s
a distinction between software and hardware interrupts. The former are explicitely called by an ’int’
instruction and are a bit comparable to normal functions. Hardware interrupts come from external
devices like the keyboard or mouse. Functions that handle hardware interrupts are called handlers.
54.11 Processor access

These are some functions to access various segment registers (%cs, %ds, %ss) which makes your
work a bit easier.
See also: get_cs (724), get_ds (725), get_ss (734)
54.12 I/O port access

The I/O port access is done via the various inportb (736), outportb (738) functions which are avail-
able. Additionally Free Pascal supports the Turbo Pascal PORT[]-arrays but it is by no means
recommened to use them, because they’re only for compatibility purposes.
See also: outportb (738), inportb (736)
54.13 dos memory access

Dos memory is accessed by the predefined dosmemselector selector; the GO32 unit additionally
provides some functions to help you with standard tasks, like copying memory from heap to dos
memory and the likes. Because of this it is strongly recommened to use them, but you are still free
to use the provided standard memory accessing functions which use 48 bit pointers. The third, but
only thought for compatibility purposes, is using the mem[]-arrays. These arrays map the whole 1
Mb dos space. They shouldn’t be used within new programs. To convert a segment:offset real mode
address to a protected mode linear address you have to multiply the segment by 16 and add its offset.
This linear address can be used in combination with the DOSMEMSELECTOR variable.
See also: dosmemget (713), dosmemput (713), dosmemmove (713), dosmemfillchar (712), dosmemfillword
(713), seg_move (742), seg_fillchar (741), seg_fillword (742)
54.14 FPC specialities

The %ds and %es selector MUST always contain the same value or some system routines may crash
when called. The %fs selector is preloaded with the DOSMEMSELECTOR variable at startup, and
it MUST be restored after use, because again FPC relys on this for some functions. Luckily we asm
programmers can still use the %gs selector for our own purposes, but for how long ?
See also: get_cs (724), get_ds (725), get_ss (734), allocate_ldt_descriptors (718), free_ldt_descriptor (723),
segment_to_descriptor (741), get_next_selector_increment_value (727), get_segment_base_address
(733), set_segment_base_address (745), set_segment_limit (746), create_code_segment_alias_descriptor
(721)
711
54.15 Selectors and descriptors

Descriptors are a bit like real mode segments; they describe (as the name implies) a memory area
in protected mode. A descriptor contains information about segment length, its base address and
the attributes of it (i.e. type, access rights, ...). These descriptors are stored internally in a so-called
descriptor table, which is basically an array of such descriptors. Selectors are roughly an index into
this table. Because these ’segments’ can be up to 4 GB in size, 32 bits aren’t sufficient anymore
to describe a single memory location like in real mode. 48 bits are now needed to do this, a 32
bit address and a 16 bit sized selector. The GO32 unit provides the tseginfo record to store such a
pointer. But due to the fact that most of the time data is stored and accessed in the %ds selector, FPC
assumes that all pointers point to a memory location of this selector. So a single pointer is still only
32 bits in size. This value represents the offset from the data segment base address to this memory
location.
54.16 What is DPMI

The dos Protected Mode Interface helps you with various aspects of protected mode programming.
These are roughly divided into descriptor handling, access to dos memory, management of interrupts
and exceptions, calls to real mode functions and other stuff. Additionally it automatically provides
swapping to disk for memory intensive applications. A DPMI host (either a Windows dos box or
CWSDPMI.EXE) provides these functions for your programs.

54.17.1 Constants
auxcarryflag = $010
Check for auxiliary carry flag in trealregs (717)
carryflag = $001
Check for carry flag in trealregs (717)
directionflag = $400
Check for direction flag in trealregs (717)
dosmemfillchar : procedure(seg: Word;ofs: Word;count: LongInt;c: Char) = @dpmi_dosmem
Sets a region of dos memory to a specific byte value.

Parameters:
seg real mode segment.

ofs real mode offset.
count number of bytes to set.
c value to set memory to.
712
Notes: No range check is performed.
dosmemfillword : procedure(seg: Word;ofs: Word;count: LongInt;w: Word) = @dpmi_dosmem
Sets a region of dos memory to a specific word value.

Parameters:
seg real mode segment.

ofs real mode offset.
count number of words to set.
w value to set memory to.
Notes: No range check is performed.
dosmemget : procedure(seg: Word;ofs: Word;var data;count: LongInt) = @dpmi_dosmemget
Copies data from the dos memory onto the heap.

Parameters:
seg source real mode segment.

ofs source real mode offset.
data destination.
count number of bytes to copy.
Notes: No range checking is performed.

For an example, see global_dos_alloc (734).
dosmemmove : procedure(sseg: Word;sofs: Word;dseg: Word;dofs: Word;count: LongInt) =
Copies count bytes of data between two dos real mode memory locations.
Parameters:
sseg source real mode segment.

sofs source real mode offset.
dseg destination real mode segment.
dofs destination real mode offset.
Notes: No range check is performed in any way.
dosmemput : procedure(seg: Word;ofs: Word;var data;count: LongInt) = @dpmi_dosmemput
Copies heap data to dos real mode memory.

Parameters:
713
seg destination real mode segment.

ofs destination real mode offset.
data source.
Notes: No range checking is performed.

interruptflag = $200
Check for interrupt flag in trealregs (717)
overflowflag = $800
Check for overflow flag in trealregs (717)
parityflag = $004
Check for parity flag in trealregs (717)
rm_dpmi = 4
get_run_mode (732) return value: DPMI (e.g. dos box or 386Max)
rm_raw = 1
get_run_mode (732) return value: raw (without HIMEM)
rm_unknown = 0
get_run_mode (732) return value: Unknown runmode
rm_vcpi = 3
get_run_mode (732) return value: VCPI (with HIMEM and EMM386)
rm_xms = 2
get_run_mode (732) return value: XMS (with HIMEM, without EMM386)
signflag = $080
Check for sign flag in trealregs (717)
trapflag = $100
Check for trap flag in trealregs (717)
zeroflag = $040
Check for zero flag in trealregs (717)
714
54.17.2 Types
registers = trealregs
Alias for trealregs (717)
tdpmiversioninfo = record
major : Byte;
minor : Byte;
flags : Word;
cpu : Byte;
master_pic : Byte;
slave_pic : Byte;
end
tdpmiversioninfo describes the dpmi version information, as returned by get_dpmi_version

(725). The CPU field can have the following values:
$02H 80286
$03H 80386
$04H 80486
$05H- Newer than 80486
The flags field is a bitmask with the following bits:
0 0 for 16 bit DPMI, 1 for 32-bit

1 0 for virtual 86 mode for reflected interrupts, 1 for return to real mode.
2 0 for no virtual memory support, 1 for virtual memory support.
tmeminfo = record
available_memory : LongInt;
available_pages : LongInt;
available_lockable_pages : LongInt;
linear_space : LongInt;
unlocked_pages : LongInt;
available_physical_pages : LongInt;
total_physical_pages : LongInt;
free_linear_space : LongInt;
max_pages_in_paging_file : LongInt;
reserved0 : LongInt;
end
tmeminfo Holds information about the memory allocation, etc.

NOTE: The value of a field is -1 (0ffffffffh) if the value is unknown, it’s only guaranteed, that
available_memory contains a valid value. The size of the pages can be determined by the
get_page_size() function.
715
trealregs = record
case Integer of
1: (
EDI : LongInt;
ESI : LongInt;
EBP : LongInt;
Res : LongInt;
EBX : LongInt;
EDX : LongInt;
ECX : LongInt;
EAX : LongInt;
Flags : Word;
ES : Word;
DS : Word;
FS : Word;
GS : Word;
IP : Word;
CS : Word;
SP : Word;
SS : Word;
);
2: (
DI : Word;
DI2 : Word;
SI : Word;
SI2 : Word;
BP : Word;
BP2 : Word;
R1 : Word;
R2 : Word;
BX : Word;
BX2 : Word;
DX : Word;
DX2 : Word;
CX : Word;
CX2 : Word;
AX : Word;
AX2 : Word;
);
3: (
stuff : Array[1..4] of LongInt;
BL : Byte;
BH : Byte;
BL2 : Byte;
BH2 : Byte;
DL : Byte;
DH : Byte;
DL2 : Byte;
DH2 : Byte;
CL : Byte;
CH : Byte;
CL2 : Byte;
CH2 : Byte;
AL : Byte;
716
AH : Byte;
AL2 : Byte;
AH2 : Byte;
);
4: (
RealEDI : LongInt;
RealESI : LongInt;
RealEBP : LongInt;
RealRES : LongInt;
RealEBX : LongInt;
RealEDX : LongInt;
RealECX : LongInt;
RealEAX : LongInt;
RealFlags : Word;
RealES : Word;
RealDS : Word;
RealFS : Word;
RealGS : Word;
RealIP : Word;
RealCS : Word;
RealSP : Word;
RealSS : Word;
);
end
The trealregs type contains the data structure to pass register values to a interrupt handler or real
mode callback.
tseginfo = record
offset : pointer;
segment : Word;
end
This record is used to store a full 48-bit pointer. This may be either a protected mode selector:offset
address or in real mode a segment:offset address, depending on application.
See also: Selectors and descriptors, dos memory access, Interrupt redirection
54.17.3 Variables
dosmemselector : Word
Selector to the dos memory. The whole dos memory is automatically mapped to this single descriptor
at startup. This selector is the recommened way to access dos memory.
int31error : Word
This variable holds the result of a DPMI interrupt call. Any nonzero value must be treated as a critical
failure.
717

54.18.1 allocate_ldt_descriptors
Synopsis: Allocate a number of descriptors
Declaration: function allocate_ldt_descriptors(count: Word) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: Allocates a number of new descriptors.

Parameters:
count:\specifies the number of requested unique descriptors.
Return value: The base selector.

Remark: Notes: The descriptors allocated must be initialized by the application with other function calls.
This function returns descriptors with a limit and size value set to zero. If more than one descriptor
was requested, the function returns a base selector referencing the first of a contiguous array of
descriptors. The selector values for subsequent descriptors in the array can be calculated by adding
the value returned by the get_next_selector_increment_value (727) function.
Errors: Check the int31error (717) variable.

See also: free_ldt_descriptor (723), get_next_selector_increment_value (727), segment_to_descriptor (741),
create_code_segment_alias_descriptor (721), set_segment_limit (746), set_segment_base_address
(745)
Listing: ./go32ex/seldes.pp
{ $mode d e l p h i }
uses
crt ,
go32 ;
const
maxx = 8 0 ;
maxy = 2 5 ;
bytespercell = 2;
s c r e e n s i z e = maxx ∗ maxy ∗ b y t e s p e r c e l l ;
l i n B 8 0 0 0 = $B800 ∗ 1 6 ;
type
string80 = string [ 8 0 ] ;
var
t e x t _ s a v e : array [ 0 . . s c r e e n s i z e −1] of b y t e ;
t e x t _ o l d x , t e x t _ o l d y : Word ;
t e x t _ s e l : Word ;
procedure s t a t u s ( s : s t r i n g 8 0 ) ;
begin
gotoxy ( 1 , 1 ) ; c l r e o l ; w r i t e ( s ) ; readkey ;
end ;
procedure s e l i n f o ( s e l : Word ) ;
718
begin
gotoxy ( 1 , 2 4 ) ;
c l r e o l ; w r i t e l n ( ’ D e s c r i p t o r base address : $ ’ ,
h e x s t r ( get_segment_base_address ( s e l ) , 8 ) ) ;
clreol ; write ( ’ Descriptor l i m i t : ’ , get_segment_limit ( sel ) ) ;
end ;
function makechar ( ch : char ; c o l o r : b y t e ) : Word ;

begin
r e s u l t : = b y t e ( ch ) or ( c o l o r shl 8 ) ;
end ;
begin
seg_move ( dosmemselector , linB8000 , get_ds , l o n g i n t ( @text_save ) ,
screensize ) ;
t e x t _ o l d x : = wherex ; t e x t _ o l d y : = wherey ;
s e g _ f i l l w o r d ( dosmemselector , linB8000 , s c r e e n s i z e div 2 ,
makechar ( ’ ’ , Black or ( Black shl 4 ) ) ) ;
status ( ’ Creating selector ’ ’ t e x t _ s e l ’ ’ to a part of ’ +
’ t e x t screen memory ’ ) ;
text_sel : = allocate_ldt_descriptors (1);
set_segment_base_address ( t e x t _ s e l ,
l i n B 8 0 0 0 + b y t e s p e r c e l l ∗ maxx ∗ 1 ) ;
set_segment_limit ( text_sel , screensize − 1 − bytespercell ∗
maxx ∗ 3 ) ;
selinfo ( text_sel ) ;
s t a t u s ( ’ and c l e a r i n g e n t i r e memory s e l e c t e d by ’ ’ t e x t _ s e l ’ ’ ’ +
’ descriptor ’ ) ;
s e g _ f i l l w o r d ( t e x t _ s e l , 0 , ( g e t _ s e g m e n t _ l i m i t ( t e x t _ s e l ) + 1 ) div 2 ,
makechar ( ’ ’ , L i g h t B l u e shl 4 ) ) ;
s t a t u s ( ’ N o t i c e t h a t o n l y t h e memory d e s c r i b e d by t h e ’ +
’ d e s c r i p t o r changed , n o t h i n g e l s e ’ ) ;
s t a t u s ( ’Now r e d u c i n g i t ’ ’ s l i m i t and base and s e t t i n g i t ’ ’ s ’ +

’ d e s c r i b e d memory ’ ) ;
set_segment_base_address ( t e x t _ s e l ,
get_segment_base_address ( t e x t _ s e l ) + b y t e s p e r c e l l ∗ maxx ) ;
set_segment_limit ( text_sel ,
g e t _ s e g m e n t _ l i m i t ( t e x t _ s e l ) − b y t e s p e r c e l l ∗ maxx ∗ 2 ) ;
selinfo ( text_sel ) ;
s t a t u s ( ’ N o t i c e t h a t t h e base addr i n c r e a s e d by one l i n e b u t ’ +
’ t h e l i m i t decreased by 2 l i n e s ’ ) ;
s t a t u s ( ’ T h i s should g i v e you t h e h i n t t h a t t h e l i m i t i s ’ +
’ r e l a t i v e t o t h e base ’ ) ;
s e g _ f i l l w o r d ( t e x t _ s e l , 0 , ( g e t _ s e g m e n t _ l i m i t ( t e x t _ s e l ) + 1 ) div 2 ,
makechar ( # 1 7 6 , LightMagenta or Brown shl 4 ) ) ;
s t a t u s ( ’Now l e t ’ ’ s g e t c r a z y and copy 1 0 l i n e s o f data from ’ +

’ t h e p r e v i o u s l y saved screen ’ ) ;
seg_move ( get_ds , l o n g i n t ( @text_save ) , t e x t _ s e l ,
maxx ∗ b y t e s p e r c e l l ∗ 2 , maxx ∗ b y t e s p e r c e l l ∗ 1 0 ) ;
s t a t u s ( ’ At l a s t f r e e i n g t h e d e s c r i p t o r and r e s t o r i n g t h e o l d ’ +
’ screen c o n t e n t s . . ’ ) ;
s t a t u s ( ’ I hope t h i s l i t t l e program may g i v e you some h i n t s on ’ +
’ working w i t h d e s c r i p t o r s ’ ) ;
719
free_ldt_descriptor ( text_sel ) ;
seg_move ( get_ds , l o n g i n t ( @text_save ) , dosmemselector ,
linB8000 , s c r e e n s i z e ) ;
gotoxy ( t e x t _ o l d x , t e x t _ o l d y ) ;
end .
54.18.2 allocate_memory_block
Synopsis: Allocate a block of linear memory
Declaration: function allocate_memory_block(size: LongInt) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Allocates a block of linear memory.

Parameters:
size:Size of requested linear memory block in bytes.
Returned values: blockhandle - the memory handle to this memory block. Linear address of the
requested memory.
Remark: warning According to my DPMI docs this function is not implemented correctly. Normally you
should also get a blockhandle to this block after successful operation. This handle can then be
used to free the memory block afterwards or use this handle for other purposes. Since the function
isn’t implemented correctly, and doesn’t return a blockhandle, the block can’t be deallocated and is
hence unusuable ! This function doesn’t allocate any descriptors for this block, it’s the applications
resposibility to allocate and initialize for accessing this memory.
See also: free_memory_block (724)
54.18.3 copyfromdos
Synopsis: Copy data from DOS to heap
Declaration: procedure copyfromdos(var addr;len: LongInt)
Visibility: default
Description: Copies data from the pre-allocated dos memory transfer buffer to the heap.
Parameters:
addrdata to copy to.

lennumber of bytes to copy to heap.
Notes: Can only be used in conjunction with the dos memory transfer buffer.
See also: tb_size (747), transfer_buffer (747), copytodos (721)
720
54.18.4 copytodos
Synopsis: Copy data from heap to DOS memory
Declaration: procedure copytodos(var addr;len: LongInt)

Visibility: default
Description: Copies data from heap to the pre-allocated dos memory buffer.
Parameters:
addrdata to copy from.

lennumber of bytes to copy to dos memory buffer.
Notes: This function fails if you try to copy more bytes than the transfer buffer is in size. It can only
be used in conjunction with the transfer buffer.
See also: tb_size (747), transfer_buffer (747), copyfromdos (720)
54.18.5 create_code_segment_alias_descriptor
Synopsis: Create new descriptor from existing descriptor
Declaration: function create_code_segment_alias_descriptor(seg: Word) : Word

Visibility: default
Description: Creates a new descriptor that has the same base and limit as the specified descriptor.
Parameters:
segDescriptor.
Return values: The data selector (alias).

Notes: In effect, the function returns a copy of the descriptor. The descriptor alias returned by this
function will not track changes to the original descriptor. In other words, if an alias is created with
this function, and the base or limit of the original segment is then changed, the two descriptors will
no longer map the same memory.
See also: allocate_ldt_descriptors (718), set_segment_limit (746), set_segment_base_address (745)
54.18.6 disable
Synopsis: Disable hardware interrupts
Declaration: procedure disable
Visibility: default
Description: Disables all hardware interrupts by execution a CLI instruction.

Errors: None.
See also: enable (723)
721
54.18.7 dpmi_dosmemfillchar
Synopsis: Fill DOS memory with a character
Declaration: procedure dpmi_dosmemfillchar(seg: Word;ofs: Word;count: LongInt;

c: Char)
Visibility: default
Description: dpmi_dosmemfillchar fills the DOS memory reagion indicated by seg,ofs with count
characters c.
See also: dpmi_dosmemput (723), dpmi_dosmemget (722), dpmi_dosmemmove (722), dpmi_dosmemfillword
(722)
54.18.8 dpmi_dosmemfillword
Synopsis: Fill DOS memory with a word value
Declaration: procedure dpmi_dosmemfillword(seg: Word;ofs: Word;count: LongInt;

w: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: dpmi_dosmemfillword fills the DOS memory reagion indicated by seg,ofs with count
words W.
See also: dpmi_dosmemput (723), dpmi_dosmemget (722), dpmi_dosmemfillchar (722), dpmi_dosmemmove
(722)
54.18.9 dpmi_dosmemget
Synopsis: Move data from DOS memory to DPMI memory
Declaration: procedure dpmi_dosmemget(seg: Word;ofs: Word;var data;count: LongInt)

Visibility: default
Description: dpmi_dosmemput moves count bytes of data from the DOS memory location indicated by seg
and ofs to DPMI memory indicated by data.
See also: dpmi_dosmemput (723), dpmi_dosmemmove (722), dpmi_dosmemfillchar (722), dpmi_dosmemfillword

(722)
54.18.10 dpmi_dosmemmove
Synopsis: Move DOS memory
Declaration: procedure dpmi_dosmemmove(sseg: Word;sofs: Word;dseg: Word;dofs: Word;

count: LongInt)
Visibility: default
Description: dpmi_dosmemmove moves count bytes from DOS memory sseg,sofs to dseg,dofs.
See also: dpmi_dosmemput (723), dpmi_dosmemget (722), dpmi_dosmemfillchar (722), dpmi_dosmemfillword

(722)
722
54.18.11 dpmi_dosmemput
Synopsis: Move data from DPMI memory to DOS memory.
Declaration: procedure dpmi_dosmemput(seg: Word;ofs: Word;var data;count: LongInt)
Visibility: default
Description: dpmi_dosmemput moves count bytes of data from data to the DOS memory location indicated
by seg and ofs.
See also: dpmi_dosmemget (722), dpmi_dosmemmove (722), dpmi_dosmemfillchar (722), dpmi_dosmemfillword
(722)
54.18.12 enable
Synopsis: Enable hardware interrupts
Declaration: procedure enable
Visibility: default
Description: Enables all hardware interrupts by executing a STI instruction.
Errors: None.
See also: disable (721)
54.18.13 free_ldt_descriptor
Synopsis: Free a descriptor
Declaration: function free_ldt_descriptor(d: Word) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Frees a previously allocated descriptor.
Parameters:
desThe descriptor to be freed.
Return value: True if successful, False otherwise. Notes: After this call this selector is invalid
and must not be used for any memory operations anymore. Each descriptor allocated with allo-
cate_ldt_descriptors (718) must be freed individually with this function, even if it was previously
allocated as a part of a contiguous array of descriptors.
For an example, see allocate_ldt_descriptors (718).
See also: allocate_ldt_descriptors (718), get_next_selector_increment_value (727)
54.18.14 free_linear_addr_mapping
Synopsis: ? No description available
Declaration: function free_linear_addr_mapping(linear_addr: dword) : Boolean
Visibility: default
723
54.18.15 free_memory_block
Synopsis: Free allocated memory block
Declaration: function free_memory_block(blockhandle: LongInt) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: Frees a previously allocated memory block.
Parameters:
blockhandlethe handle to the memory area to free.
Return value: True if successful, false otherwise. Notes: Frees memory that was previously
allocated with allocate_memory_block (720) . This function doesn’t free any descriptors mapped to
this block, it’s the application’s responsibility.
Errors: Check int31error (717) variable.

See also: allocate_memory_block (720)
54.18.16 free_rm_callback
Synopsis: Release real mode callback.
Declaration: function free_rm_callback(var intaddr: tseginfo) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: Releases a real mode callback address that was previously allocated with the get_rm_callback (729)
function.
Parameters:
intaddrreal mode address buffer returned by get_rm_callback (729) .
Return values: True if successful, False if not

For an example, see get_rm_callback (729).

See also: set_rm_interrupt (745), get_rm_callback (729)
54.18.17 get_cs
Synopsis: Get CS selector
Declaration: function get_cs : Word

Visibility: default
Description: Returns the cs selector.
Return value: The content of the cs segment register.
For an example, see set_pm_interrupt (744).
Errors: None.
See also: get_ds (725), get_ss (734)
724
54.18.18 get_descriptor_access_right
Synopsis: Get descriptor’s access rights
Declaration: function get_descriptor_access_right(d: Word) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Gets the access rights of a descriptor.
Parameters:
dselector to descriptor.
Return value: Access rights bit field.

See also: set_descriptor_access_right (743)
54.18.19 get_dpmi_version
Synopsis: Return DPMI information
Declaration: function get_dpmi_version(var version: tdpmiversioninfo) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: get_dpmi_version returns version information (Int $31 Function $0400) in Version and
returns True if the information was retrieved successfully, false if the call failed.
Errors: The call returns false if the information could not be retrieved.
See also: tdpmiversioninfo (715)
54.18.20 get_ds
Synopsis: Get DS Selector
Declaration: function get_ds : Word
Visibility: default
Description: Returns the ds selector.
Return values: The content of the ds segment register.
Errors: None.
See also: get_cs (724), get_ss (734)
54.18.21 get_exception_handler
Synopsis: Return current exception handler
Declaration: function get_exception_handler(e: Byte;var intaddr: tseginfo) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: get_exception_handler returns the exception handler for exception E in intaddr. It re-
turns True if the call was successful, False if not.
See also: set_exception_handler (743), get_pm_exception_handler (728)
725
54.18.22 get_linear_addr
Synopsis: Convert physical to linear address
Declaration: function get_linear_addr(phys_addr: LongInt;size: LongInt) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Converts a physical address into a linear address.
Parameters:
phys_addrphysical address of device.

sizeSize of region to map in bytes.
Return value: Linear address that can be used to access the physical memory. Notes: It’s the ap-
plications resposibility to allocate and set up a descriptor for access to the memory. This function
shouldn’t be used to map real mode addresses.
See also: allocate_ldt_descriptors (718), set_segment_limit (746), set_segment_base_address (745)
54.18.23 get_meminfo
Synopsis: Return information on the available memory
Declaration: function get_meminfo(var meminfo: tmeminfo) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Returns information about the amount of available physical memory, linear address space, and disk
space for page swapping.
Parameters:
meminfobuffer to fill memory information into.
Return values: Due to an implementation bug this function always returns False, but it always
succeeds.
Remark: Notes: Only the first field of the returned structure is guaranteed to contain a valid value. Any fields
that are not supported by the DPMI host will be set by the host to -1 (0FFFFFFFFH) to indicate
that the information is not available. The size of the pages used by the DPMI host can be obtained
with the get_page_size (728) function.
See also: get_page_size (728)
Listing: ./go32ex/meminfo.pp
uses
go32 ;
var
meminfo : tmeminfo ;
begin
get_meminfo ( meminfo ) ;
i f ( i n t 3 1 e r r o r < > 0 ) then begin
726
W r i t e l n ( ’ E r r o r g e t t i n g DPMI memory i n f o r m a t i o n . . . H a l t i n g ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ DPMI e r r o r number : ’ , i n t 3 1 e r r o r ) ;
end else begin
with meminfo do begin
Writeln ( ’ Largest a v a i l a b l e f r e e block : ’ ,
available_memory div 1 0 2 4 , ’ k b y t e s ’ ) ;
i f ( a v a i l a b l e _ p a g e s < > −1) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Maximum a v a i l a b l e unlocked pages : ’ ,
available_pages ) ;
i f ( a v a i l a b l e _ l o c k a b l e _ p a g e s < > −1) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Maximum l o c k a b l e a v a i l a b l e pages : ’ ,
available_lockable_pages ) ;
i f ( l i n e a r _ s p a c e < > −1) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ L i n e a r address space s i z e : ’ ,
l i n e a r _ s p a c e ∗ get_page_size div 1 0 2 4 , ’ k b y t e s ’ ) ;
i f ( unlocked_pages < > −1) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ T o t a l number o f unlocked pages : ’ ,
unlocked_pages ) ;
i f ( a v a i l a b l e _ p h y s i c a l _ p a g e s < > −1) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ T o t a l number o f f r e e pages : ’ ,
available_physical_pages ) ;
i f ( t o t a l _ p h y s i c a l _ p a g e s < > −1) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ T o t a l number o f p h y s i c a l pages : ’ ,
total_physical_pages ) ;
i f ( f r e e _ l i n e a r _ s p a c e < > −1) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Free l i n e a r address space : ’ ,
f r e e _ l i n e a r _ s p a c e ∗ get_page_size div 1 0 2 4 ,
’ kbytes ’ ) ;
i f ( max_p ages_ in_pa ging_ file < > −1) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Maximum s i z e o f paging f i l e : ’ ,
max _page s_in_ pagi ng_fi le ∗ get_page_size div 1 0 2 4 ,
’ kbytes ’ ) ;
end ;
end ;
end .
54.18.24 get_next_selector_increment_value
Synopsis: Return selector increment value
Declaration: function get_next_selector_increment_value : Word
Visibility: default
Description: Returns the selector increment value when allocating multiple subsequent descriptors via allocate_ldt_descriptors
(718).
Return value: Selector increment value.
Remark: Notes: Because allocate_ldt_descriptors (718) only returns the selector for the first descriptor and so
the value returned by this function can be used to calculate the selectors for subsequent descriptors
in the array.
See also: allocate_ldt_descriptors (718), free_ldt_descriptor (723)
727
54.18.25 get_page_attributes
Declaration: function get_page_attributes(handle: dword;offset: dword;
pagecount: dword;buf: pointer) : Boolean
Visibility: default
54.18.26 get_page_size
Synopsis: Return the page size
Declaration: function get_page_size : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Returns the size of a single memory page.
Return value: Size of a single page in bytes.
Remark: The returned size is typically 4096 bytes.
For an example, see get_meminfo (726).
See also: get_meminfo (726)
54.18.27 get_pm_exception_handler
Synopsis: Get protected mode exception handler
Declaration: function get_pm_exception_handler(e: Byte;var intaddr: tseginfo)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: get_pm_exception_handler returns the protected mode exception handler for exception E
in intaddr. It returns True if the call was successful, False if not.
See also: get_exception_handler (725), set_pm_exception_handler (744)
54.18.28 get_pm_interrupt
Synopsis: Return protected mode interrupt handler
Declaration: function get_pm_interrupt(vector: Byte;var intaddr: tseginfo) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Returns the address of a current protected mode interrupt handler.
Parameters:
vectorinterrupt handler number you want the address to.

intaddrbuffer to store address.
Return values: True if successful, False if not.

Remark: The returned address is a protected mode selector:offset address.
For an example, see set_pm_interrupt (744).
728

See also: set_pm_interrupt (744), set_rm_interrupt (745), get_rm_interrupt (732)
54.18.29 get_rm_callback
Synopsis: Return real mode callback
Declaration: function get_rm_callback(pm_func: pointer;const reg: trealregs;
var rmcb: tseginfo) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Returns a unique real mode segment:offset address, known as a "real mode callback," that will
transfer control from real mode to a protected mode procedure.
Parameters:
pm_funcpointer to the protected mode callback function.

regsupplied registers structure.
rmcbbuffer to real mode address of callback function.
Return values: True if successful, otherwise False.

Remark: Callback addresses obtained with this function can be passed by a protected mode program for
example to an interrupt handler, device driver, or TSR, so that the real mode program can call pro-
cedures within the protected mode program or notify the protected mode program of an event. The
contents of the supplied regs structure is not valid after function call, but only at the time of the actual
callback.
See also: free_rm_callback (724)
Listing: ./go32ex/callback.pp
{$ASMMODE ATT }
{$MODE FPC}
uses
crt ,
go32 ;
const
mouseint = $33 ;
var
mouse_regs : t r e a l r e g s ; e x t e r n a l name ’ ___v2prt0_rmcb_regs ’ ;
mouse_seginfo : t s e g i n f o ;
var
mouse_numbuttons : l o n g i n t ;
mouse_action : word ;
mouse_x , mouse_y : Word ;
mouse_b : Word ;
u s e r p r o c _ i n s t a l l e d : Longbool ;
userproc_length : Longint ;
729
u se r pr o c_ pr o c : p o i n t e r ;
procedure c a l l b a c k _ h a n d l e r ; assembler ;
asm
pushw %ds
p u s h l %eax
movw %es , % ax
movw %ax , % ds
cmpl $1 , USERPROC_INSTALLED
j n e . LNoCallback
pushal
movw DOSmemSELECTOR, % ax
movw %ax , % f s
c a l l ∗USERPROC_PROC
popal
. LNoCallback :
p o p l %eax
popw %ds
p u s h l %eax
movl (% e s i ) , % eax
movl %eax , % es : 4 2 ( % e d i )
addw $4 , % es :46(% e d i )
p o p l %eax
iret
end ;
procedure mouse_dummy ; begin end ;
procedure t e x t u s e r p r o c ;
begin
mouse_b : = mouse_regs . bx ;
mouse_x : = ( mouse_regs . cx shr 3 ) + 1 ;
mouse_y : = ( mouse_regs . dx shr 3 ) + 1 ;
end ;
procedure i n s t a l l _ m o u s e ( u s e r p r o c : p o i n t e r ; u s e r p r o c l e n : l o n g i n t ) ;
var r : t r e a l r e g s ;
begin
r . eax : = $0 ; r e a l i n t r ( mouseint , r ) ;
i f ( r . eax < > $FFFF ) then begin
W r i t e l n ( ’No M i c r o s o f t c o m p a t i b l e mouse found ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’A M i c r o s o f t c o m p a t i b l e mouse d r i v e r i s necessary ’ ,
’ t o run t h i s example ’ ) ;
halt ;
end ;
i f ( r . bx = $ f f f f ) then mouse_numbuttons : = 2
else mouse_numbuttons : = r . bx ;
W r i t e l n ( mouse_numbuttons , ’ b u t t o n M i c r o s o f t c o m p a t i b l e mouse ’ ,
’ found . ’ ) ;
i f ( u s e r p r o c < > n i l ) then begin
u se r pr o c_ pr o c : = u s e r p r o c ;
userproc_installed : = true ;
userproc_length : = userproclen ;
lock_code ( userproc_proc , u s e r p r o c _ l e n g t h ) ;
end else begin
u se r pr o c_ pr o c : = n i l ;
730
userproc_length : = 0 ;
userproc_installed : = false ;
end ;
l o c k _ d a t a ( mouse_x , s i z e o f ( mouse_x ) ) ;
l o c k _ d a t a ( mouse_y , s i z e o f ( mouse_y ) ) ;
l o c k _ d a t a ( mouse_b , s i z e o f ( mouse_b ) ) ;
l o c k _ d a t a ( mouse_action , s i z e o f ( mouse_action ) ) ;
lock_data ( userproc_installed , sizeof ( us erp ro c_i nst all ed ) ) ;

l o c k _ d a t a ( userproc_proc , s i z e o f ( u se r pr o c_ p ro c ) ) ;
l o c k _ d a t a ( mouse_regs , s i z e o f ( mouse_regs ) ) ;
l o c k _ d a t a ( mouse_seginfo , s i z e o f ( mouse_seginfo ) ) ;
lock_code ( @callback_handler ,
l o n g i n t (@mouse_dummy)− l o n g i n t ( @callback_handler ) ) ;
g e t _ r m _ c a l l b a c k ( @callback_handler , mouse_regs , mouse_seginfo ) ;
r . eax : = $0c ; r . ecx : = $ 7 f ;
r . edx : = l o n g i n t ( mouse_seginfo . o f f s e t ) ;
r . es : = mouse_seginfo . segment ;
r e a l i n t r ( mouseint , r ) ;
r . eax : = $01 ;
end ;
procedure remove_mouse ;
var
r : trealregs ;
begin
r . eax : = $02 ; r e a l i n t r ( mouseint , r ) ;
r . eax : = $0c ; r . ecx : = 0 ; r . edx : = 0 ; r . es : = 0 ;
f r e e _ r m _ c a l l b a c k ( mouse_seginfo ) ;
i f ( u s e r p r o c _ i n s t a l l e d ) then begin
unlock_code ( userproc_proc , u s e r p r o c _ l e n g t h ) ;
u se r pr o c_ pr o c : = n i l ;
userproc_length : = 0 ;
userproc_installed : = false ;
end ;
u nl o ck _ da t a ( mouse_x , s i z e o f ( mouse_x ) ) ;
u nl o ck _ da t a ( mouse_y , s i z e o f ( mouse_y ) ) ;
u nl o ck _ da t a ( mouse_b , s i z e o f ( mouse_b ) ) ;
u nl o ck _ da t a ( mouse_action , s i z e o f ( mouse_action ) ) ;
u nl o ck _ da t a ( userproc_proc , s i z e o f ( u se r pr o c_ p ro c ) ) ;
u nl o ck _ da t a ( u s e r p r o c _ i n s t a l l e d , s i z e o f ( u s e r p r o c _ i n s t a l l e d ) ) ;
u nl o ck _ da t a ( mouse_regs , s i z e o f ( mouse_regs ) ) ;
u nl o ck _ da t a ( mouse_seginfo , s i z e o f ( mouse_seginfo ) ) ;
unlock_code ( @callback_handler ,
l o n g i n t (@mouse_dummy)− l o n g i n t ( @callback_handler ) ) ;
f i l l c h a r ( mouse_seginfo , s i z e o f ( mouse_seginfo ) , 0 ) ;
end ;
begin
i n s t a l l _ m o u s e ( @textuserproc , 4 0 0 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Press any key t o e x i t . . . ’ ) ;
while ( not keypressed ) do begin
731
gotoxy ( 1 , wherey ) ;
w r i t e ( ’ MouseX : ’ , mouse_x : 2 , ’ MouseY : ’ , mouse_y : 2 ,
’ B u t t o n s : ’ , mouse_b : 2 ) ;
end ;
remove_mouse ;
end .
54.18.30 get_rm_interrupt
Synopsis: Get real mode interrupt vector
Declaration: function get_rm_interrupt(vector: Byte;var intaddr: tseginfo) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Returns the contents of the current machine’s real mode interrupt vector for the specified interrupt.
Parameters:
vectorinterrupt vector number.

intaddrbuffer to store real mode segment:offset address.
Return values: True if successful, False otherwise.

Remark: The returned address is a real mode segment address, which isn’t valid in protected mode.
See also: set_rm_interrupt (745), set_pm_interrupt (744), get_pm_interrupt (728)
54.18.31 get_run_mode
Synopsis: Return current run mode
Declaration: function get_run_mode : Word
Visibility: default
Description: Returns the current mode your application runs with.

Return values: One of the constants used by this function.
Errors: None.
See also: get_run_mode (732)
Listing: ./go32ex/getrunmd.pp
uses
go32 ;
begin
case ( get_run_mode ) of
rm_unknown :
W r i t e l n ( ’ Unknown environment found ’ ) ;
rm_raw :
W r i t e l n ( ’ You are c u r r e n t l y r u n n i n g i n raw mode ’ ,
’ ( w i t h o u t HIMEM) ’ ) ;
rm_xms :
732
W r i t e l n ( ’ You are c u r r e n t l y u s i n g HIMEM . SYS o n l y ’ ) ;

rm_vcpi :
W r i t e l n ( ’ VCPI s e r v e r d e t e c t e d . You ’ ’ r e u s i n g HIMEM and ’ ,
’EMM386 ’ ) ;
rm_dpmi :
W r i t e l n ( ’ DPMI d e t e c t e d . You ’ ’ r e u s i n g a DPMI h o s t l i k e ’ ,
’ a windows DOS box o r CWSDPMI ’ ) ;
end ;
end .
54.18.32 get_segment_base_address
Synopsis: Return base address from descriptor table
Declaration: function get_segment_base_address(d: Word) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Returns the 32-bit linear base address from the descriptor table for the specified segment.
Parameters:
dselector of the descriptor you want the base address of.
Return values: Linear base address of specified descriptor.


See also: allocate_ldt_descriptors (718), set_segment_base_address (745), allocate_ldt_descriptors (718), set_segment_limit
(746), get_segment_limit (733)
54.18.33 get_segment_limit
Synopsis: Return segment limite from descriptor
Declaration: function get_segment_limit(d: Word) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Returns a descriptors segment limit.
Parameters:
dselector.
Return value: Limit of the descriptor in bytes.

Errors: Returns zero if descriptor is invalid.
See also: allocate_ldt_descriptors (718), set_segment_limit (746), set_segment_base_address (745), get_segment_base_address

(733)
733
54.18.34 get_ss
Synopsis: Return SS selector
Declaration: function get_ss : Word
Visibility: default
Description: Returns the ss selector.
Return values: The content of the ss segment register.
Errors: None.
See also: get_ds (725), get_cs (724)
54.18.35 global_dos_alloc
Synopsis: Allocate DOS real mode memory
Declaration: function global_dos_alloc(bytes: LongInt) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Allocates a block of dos real mode memory.
Parameters:
bytessize of requested real mode memory.
Return values: The low word of the returned value contains the selector to the allocated dos memory
block, the high word the corresponding real mode segment value. The offset value is always zero.
This function allocates memory from dos memory pool, i.e. memory below the 1 MB boundary
that is controlled by dos. Such memory blocks are typically used to exchange data with real mode
programs, TSRs, or device drivers. The function returns both the real mode segment base address
of the block and one descriptor that can be used by protected mode applications to access the block.
This function should only used for temporary buffers to get real mode information (e.g. interrupts
that need a data structure in ES:(E)DI), because every single block needs an unique selector. The
returned selector should only be freed by a global_dos_free (735) call.
See also: global_dos_free (735)
Listing: ./go32ex/buffer.pp
uses
go32 ;
procedure d o s a l l o c ( var s e l e c t o r : word ;

var segment : word ; s i z e : l o n g i n t ) ;
var
res : l o n g i n t ;
begin
res : = global_dos_alloc ( size ) ;
s e l e c t o r : = word ( r e s ) ;
segment : = word ( r e s shr 1 6 ) ;
end ;
procedure d o s f r e e ( s e l e c t o r : word ) ;
begin
734
global_dos_free ( selector ) ;
end ;
type
VBEInfoBuf = packed record
S i g n a t u r e : array [ 0 . . 3 ] of char ;
V e r s i o n : Word ;
r e s e r v e d : array [ 0 . . 5 0 5 ] of b y t e ;
end ;
var
selector ,
segment : Word ;
r : trealregs ;
i n f o b u f : VBEInfoBuf ;
begin
f i l l c h a r ( r , sizeof ( r ) , 0 ) ;
f i l l c h a r ( i n f o b u f , s i z e o f ( VBEInfoBuf ) , 0 ) ;
d o s a l l o c ( s e l e c t o r , segment , s i z e o f ( VBEInfoBuf ) ) ;
i f ( i n t 3 1 e r r o r < >0) then begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ E r r o r w h i l e a l l o c a t i n g r e a l mode memory , h a l t i n g ’ ) ;
halt ;
end ;
i n f o b u f . S i g n a t u r e : = ’VBE2 ’ ;
dosmemput ( segment , 0 , i n f o b u f , s i z e o f ( i n f o b u f ) ) ;
r . ax : = $4f00 ; r . es : = segment ;
r e a l i n t r ( $10 , r ) ;
dosmemget ( segment , 0 , i n f o b u f , s i z e o f ( i n f o b u f ) ) ;
dosfree ( s e l e c t o r ) ;
i f ( r . ax < > $ 4 f ) then begin
W r i t e l n ( ’VBE BIOS e x t e n s i o n n o t a v a i l a b l e , f u n c t i o n c a l l ’ ,
’ failed ’ );
halt ;
end ;
i f ( i n f o b u f . s i g n a t u r e [ 0 ] = ’V ’ ) and
( i n f o b u f . s i g n a t u r e [ 1 ] = ’E ’ ) and
( i n f o b u f . s i g n a t u r e [ 2 ] = ’S ’ ) and
( i n f o b u f . s i g n a t u r e [ 3 ] = ’A ’ ) then begin
W r i t e l n ( ’VBE v e r s i o n ’ , h i ( i n f o b u f . v e r s i o n ) , ’ . ’ ,
lo ( i n f o b u f . version ) , ’ detected ’ ) ;
end ;
end .
54.18.36 global_dos_free
Synopsis: Free DOS memory block
Declaration: function global_dos_free(selector: Word) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Frees a previously allocated dos memory block.
Parameters:
selectorselector to the dos memory block.
735
Return value: True if successful, False otherwise.

Remark: The descriptor allocated for the memory block is automatically freed and hence invalid for further
use. This function should only be used for memory allocated by global_dos_alloc (734).
See also: global_dos_alloc (734)
54.18.37 inportb
Synopsis: Read byte from I/O port
Declaration: function inportb(port: Word) : Byte
Visibility: default
Description: Reads 1 byte from the selected I/O port.
Parameters:
portthe I/O port number which is read.
Return values: Current I/O port value.

Errors: None.
See also: outportb (738), inportw (736), inportl (736)
54.18.38 inportl
Synopsis: Read longint from I/O port
Declaration: function inportl(port: Word) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Reads 1 longint from the selected I/O port.
Parameters:

Errors: None.
See also: outportb (738), inportb (736), inportw (736)
54.18.39 inportw
Synopsis: Read word from I/O port
Declaration: function inportw(port: Word) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: Reads 1 word from the selected I/O port.
Parameters:
736
Errors: None.
See also: outportw (739), inportb (736), inportl (736)
54.18.40 lock_code
Synopsis: Lock code memory range
Declaration: function lock_code(functionaddr: pointer;size: LongInt) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: Locks a memory range which is in the code segment selector.
Parameters:
functionaddraddress of the function to be locked.

sizesize in bytes to be locked.


See also: lock_linear_region (738), lock_data (737), unlock_linear_region (748), unlock_data (748), unlock_code
(747)
54.18.41 lock_data
Synopsis: Lock data memory range
Declaration: function lock_data(var data;size: LongInt) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Locks a memory range which resides in the data segment selector.
Parameters:
dataaddress of data to be locked.

sizelength of data to be locked.

See also: lock_linear_region (738), lock_code (737), unlock_linear_region (748), unlock_data (748), unlock_code
(747)
737
54.18.42 lock_linear_region
Synopsis: Lock linear memory region
Declaration: function lock_linear_region(linearaddr: LongInt;size: LongInt) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: Locks a memory region to prevent swapping of it.
Parameters:
linearaddrthe linear address of the memory are to be locked.

sizesize in bytes to be locked.

See also: lock_data (737), lock_code (737), unlock_linear_region (748), unlock_data (748), unlock_code
(747)
54.18.43 map_device_in_memory_block
Synopsis: Map a device into program’s memory space
Declaration: function map_device_in_memory_block(handle: LongInt;offset: LongInt;

pagecount: LongInt;device: LongInt)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: map_device_in_memory_block allows to map a device in memory. This function is a direct

call of the extender. For more information about it’s arguments, see the extender documentation.
54.18.44 outportb
Synopsis: Write byte to I/O port
Declaration: procedure outportb(port: Word;data: Byte)
Visibility: default
Description: Sends 1 byte of data to the specified I/O port.
Parameters:
portthe I/O port number to send data to.

datavalue sent to I/O port.
Return values: None.

Errors: None.
See also: inportb (736), outportl (739), outportw (739)
Listing: ./go32ex/outport.pp
738
uses
crt ,
go32 ;
begin
o u t p o r t b ( $61 , $ f f ) ;
delay ( 5 0 ) ;
o u t p o r t b ( $61 , $0 ) ;
end .
54.18.45 outportl
Synopsis: Write longint to I/O port
Declaration: procedure outportl(port: Word;data: LongInt)
Visibility: default
Description: Sends 1 longint of data to the specified I/O port.

Parameters:


For an example, see outportb (738).
Errors: None.
See also: inportl (736), outportw (739), outportb (738)
54.18.46 outportw
Synopsis: Write word to I/O port
Declaration: procedure outportw(port: Word;data: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: Sends 1 word of data to the specified I/O port.

Parameters:


For an example, see outportb (738).
Errors: None.
See also: inportw (736), outportl (739), outportb (738)
739
54.18.47 realintr
Synopsis: Simulate interrupt
Declaration: function realintr(intnr: Word;var regs: trealregs) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: Simulates an interrupt in real mode.
Parameters:
intnrinterrupt number to issue in real mode.

regsregisters data structure.
Return values: The supplied registers data structure contains the values that were returned by the real
mode interrupt. True if successful, False if not.
Remark: The function transfers control to the address specified by the real mode interrupt vector of intnr. The
real mode handler must return by executing an IRET.
Listing: ./go32ex/flags.pp
uses
go32 ;
var
r : trealregs ;
begin
r . ax : = $5300 ;
r . bx : = 0 ;
r e a l i n t r ( $15 , r ) ;
i f ( ( r . f l a g s and c a r r y f l a g ) = 0 ) then begin
W r i t e l n ( ’APM v ’ , ( r . ah and $ f ) , ’ . ’ ,
( r . a l shr 4 ) , ( r . a l and $ f ) , ’ d e t e c t e d ’ ) ;
end else
W r i t e l n ( ’APM n o t p r e s e n t ’ ) ;
end .
54.18.48 request_linear_region
Synopsis: Request linear address region.
Declaration: function request_linear_region(linearaddr: LongInt;size: LongInt;
var blockhandle: LongInt) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: request_linear_region requests a linear range of addresses of size Size, starting at linearaddr.
If successful, True is returned, and a handle to the address region is returned in blockhandle.
740
54.18.49 segment_to_descriptor
Synopsis: Map segment address to descriptor
Declaration: function segment_to_descriptor(seg: Word) : Word

Visibility: default
Description: Maps a real mode segment (paragraph) address onto an descriptor that can be used by a protected
mode program to access the same memory.
Parameters:
segthe real mode segment you want the descriptor to.
Return values: Descriptor to real mode segment address.

Remark: The returned descriptors limit will be set to 64 kB. Multiple calls to this function with the same
segment address will return the same selector. Descriptors created by this function can never be
modified or freed. Programs which need to examine various real mode addresses using the same
selector should use the function allocate_ldt_descriptors (718) and change the base address as nec-
essary.
For an example, see seg_fillchar (741).

See also: allocate_ldt_descriptors (718), free_ldt_descriptor (723), set_segment_base_address (745)
54.18.50 seg_fillchar
Synopsis: Fill segment with byte value
Declaration: procedure seg_fillchar(seg: Word;ofs: LongInt;count: LongInt;c: Char)

Visibility: default
Description: Sets a memory area to a specific value.
Parameters:
segselector to memory area.

ofsoffset to memory.
countnumber of bytes to set.
cbyte data which is set.

Notes: No range check is done in any way.
Errors: None.
See also: seg_move (742), seg_fillword (742), dosmemfillchar (712), dosmemfillword (713), dosmemget (713),
dosmemput (713), dosmemmove (713)
Listing: ./go32ex/vgasel.pp
741
uses
go32 ;
var
v g a s e l : Word ;
r : trealregs ;
begin
r . eax : = $13 ; r e a l i n t r ( $10 , r ) ;
v g a s e l : = s e g m e n t _ t o _ d e s c r i p t o r ( $A000 ) ;
s e g _ f i l l c h a r ( vgasel , 0 , 6 4 0 0 0 , # 1 5 ) ;
readln ;
r . eax : = $3 ; r e a l i n t r ( $10 , r ) ;
end .
54.18.51 seg_fillword
Synopsis: Fill segment with word value
Declaration: procedure seg_fillword(seg: Word;ofs: LongInt;count: LongInt;w: Word)

Visibility: default
Description: Sets a memory area to a specific value.
Parameters:
segselector to memory area.

ofsoffset to memory.
countnumber of words to set.
wword data which is set.

Notes: No range check is done in any way.
Errors: None.
See also: seg_move (742), seg_fillchar (741), dosmemfillchar (712), dosmemfillword (713), dosmemget (713),
dosmemput (713), dosmemmove (713)
54.18.52 seg_move
Synopsis: Move data between 2 locations
Declaration: procedure seg_move(sseg: Word;source: LongInt;dseg: Word;dest: LongInt;
count: LongInt)
Visibility: default
Description: Copies data between two memory locations.
Parameters:
ssegsource selector.
742
sourcesource offset.
dsegdestination selector.
destdestination offset.
countsize in bytes to copy.

Remark: Overlapping is only checked if the source selector is equal to the destination selector. No range
check is done.
Errors: None.
See also: seg_fillchar (741), seg_fillword (742), dosmemfillchar (712), dosmemfillword (713), dosmemget
(713), dosmemput (713), dosmemmove (713)
54.18.53 set_descriptor_access_right
Synopsis: Set access rights to memory descriptor
Declaration: function set_descriptor_access_right(d: Word;w: Word) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: set_descriptor_access_right sets the access rights for descriptor d to w
54.18.54 set_exception_handler
Synopsis: Set exception handler
Declaration: function set_exception_handler(e: Byte;const intaddr: tseginfo)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: set_exception_handler sets the exception handler for exception E to intaddr. It returns
True if the call was successful, False if not.
See also: get_exception_handler (725), set_pm_exception_handler (744)
54.18.55 set_page_attributes
Declaration: function set_page_attributes(handle: dword;offset: dword;
pagecount: dword;buf: pointer) : Boolean
Visibility: default
743
54.18.56 set_pm_exception_handler
Synopsis: Set protected mode exception handler
Declaration: function set_pm_exception_handler(e: Byte;const intaddr: tseginfo)

: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: set_pm_exception_handler sets the protected mode exception handler for exception E to
intaddr. It returns True if the call was successful, False if not.
See also: set_exception_handler (743), get_pm_exception_handler (728)
54.18.57 set_pm_interrupt
Synopsis: Set protected mode interrupt handler
Declaration: function set_pm_interrupt(vector: Byte;const intaddr: tseginfo)

: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Sets the address of the protected mode handler for an interrupt.
Parameters:
vectornumber of protected mode interrupt to set.

intaddrselector:offset address to the interrupt vector.

Remark: The address supplied must be a valid selector:offset protected mode address.
See also: get_pm_interrupt (728), set_rm_interrupt (745), get_rm_interrupt (732)
Listing: ./go32ex/intpm.pp
uses
crt ,
go32 ;
const
i n t 1 c = $1c ;
var
oldint1c : tseginfo ;
newint1c : t s e g i n f o ;
int1c_counter : Longint ;
i n t 1 c _ d s : Word ; e x t e r n a l name ’ _ _ _ v 2 p r t 0 _ d s _ a l i a s ’ ;
procedure i n t 1 c _ h a n d l e r ; assembler ;
asm
cli
pushw %ds
pushw %ax
744
movw %cs : i n t 1 c _ d s , % ax
movw %ax , % ds
i n c l int1c_counter
popw %ax
popw %ds
sti
iret
end ;
var i : L o n g i n t ;
begin
newint1c . o f f s e t : = @int1c_handler ;
newint1c . segment : = get_cs ;
get_pm_interrupt ( int1c , oldint1c ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ −− Press any key t o e x i t −− ’ ) ;
s e t _ p m _ i n t e r r u p t ( i n t 1 c , newint1c ) ;
while ( not keypressed ) do begin
gotoxy ( 1 , wherey ) ;
w r i t e ( ’ Number o f i n t e r r u p t s occured : ’ , int1c_counter ) ;
end ;
set_pm_interrupt ( int1c , oldint1c ) ;
end .
54.18.58 set_rm_interrupt
Synopsis: Set real mode interrupt handler
Declaration: function set_rm_interrupt(vector: Byte;const intaddr: tseginfo)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Sets a real mode interrupt handler.
Parameters:
vectorthe interrupt vector number to set.

intaddraddress of new interrupt vector.
Return values: True if successful, otherwise False.

Remark: The address supplied MUST be a real mode segment address, not a selector:offset address.
So the interrupt handler must either reside in dos memory (below 1 Mb boundary) or the application
must allocate a real mode callback address with get_rm_callback (729).
See also: get_rm_interrupt (732), set_pm_interrupt (744), get_pm_interrupt (728), get_rm_callback (729)
54.18.59 set_segment_base_address
Synopsis: Set descriptor’s base address
Declaration: function set_segment_base_address(d: Word;s: LongInt) : Boolean
Visibility: default
745
Description: Sets the 32-bit linear base address of a descriptor.

Parameters:
dselector.
snew base address of the descriptor.

See also: allocate_ldt_descriptors (718), get_segment_base_address (733), allocate_ldt_descriptors (718), set_segment_limit
(746), get_segment_base_address (733), get_segment_limit (733)
54.18.60 set_segment_limit
Synopsis: Set descriptor limit
Declaration: function set_segment_limit(d: Word;s: LongInt) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Sets the limit of a descriptor.
Parameters:
dselector.
snew limit of the descriptor.
Return values: Returns True if successful, else False.

Remark: The new limit specified must be the byte length of the segment - 1. Segment limits bigger than or
equal to 1MB must be page aligned, they must have the lower 12 bits set.
See also: allocate_ldt_descriptors (718), set_segment_base_address (745), get_segment_limit (733), set_segment_limit
(746)
54.18.61 tb_offset
Synopsis: Return DOS transfer buffer offset
Declaration: function tb_offset : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: tb_offset returns the DOS transfer buffer segment.
See also: transfer_buffer (747), tb_segment (746), tb_size (747)
54.18.62 tb_segment
Synopsis: Return DOS transfer buffer segment
Declaration: function tb_segment : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: tb_segment returns the DOS transfer buffer segment.
See also: transfer_buffer (747), tb_offset (746), tb_size (747)
746
54.18.63 tb_size
Synopsis: Return DOS transfer memory buffer size
Declaration: function tb_size : LongInt

Visibility: default
Description: Returns the size of the pre-allocated dos memory buffer.
Return values: The size of the pre-allocated dos memory buffer. This block always seems to be 16k
in size, but don’t rely on this.
Errors: None.
See also: transfer_buffer (747), copyfromdos (720), copytodos (721)
54.18.64 transfer_buffer
Synopsis: Return offset of DOS transfer buffer
Declaration: function transfer_buffer : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: transfer_buffer returns the offset of the transfer buffer.
Errors: None.
See also: tb_size (747)
54.18.65 unlock_code
Synopsis: Unlock code segment
Declaration: function unlock_code(functionaddr: pointer;size: LongInt) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: Unlocks a memory range which resides in the code segment selector.
Parameters:
functionaddraddress of function to be unlocked.

sizesize bytes to be unlocked.


See also: unlock_linear_region (748), unlock_data (748), lock_linear_region (738), lock_data (737), lock_code
(737)
747
54.18.66 unlock_data
Synopsis: Unlock data segment
Declaration: function unlock_data(var data;size: LongInt) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: Unlocks a memory range which resides in the data segment selector.
Parameters:
dataaddress of memory to be unlocked.


See also: unlock_linear_region (748), unlock_code (747), lock_linear_region (738), lock_data (737), lock_code
(737)
54.18.67 unlock_linear_region
Synopsis: Unlock linear memory region
Declaration: function unlock_linear_region(linearaddr: LongInt;size: LongInt)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Unlocks a previously locked linear region range to allow it to be swapped out again if needed.
Parameters:
linearaddrlinear address of the memory to be unlocked.


See also: unlock_data (748), unlock_code (747), lock_linear_region (738), lock_data (737), lock_code (737)
748
Chapter 55
Reference for unit ’gpm’
55.1 Used units
Table 55.1: Used units by unit ’gpm’
Name Page
BaseUnix 113
System 1224
55.2 Overview
The GPM unit implements an interface to libgpm, the console program for mouse handling. This
unit was created by Peter Vreman, and is only available on linux.
When this unit is used, your program is linked to the C libraries, so you must take care of the C
library version. Also, it will only work with version 1.17 or higher of the libgpm library.

55.3.1 Constants
GPM_BOT = 2
Bottom of area.
GPM_B_LEFT = 4
Left mouse button identifier.
GPM_B_MIDDLE = 2
Middle mouse button identifier.
GPM_B_RIGHT = 1
749
CHAPTER 55. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’GPM’
Right mouse button identifier.
GPM_DOUBLE = 32
Mouse double click event.
GPM_DOWN = 4
Mouse button down event.
GPM_DRAG = 2
Mouse drag event.
GPM_ENTER = 512
Enter area event.
GPM_HARD = 256
GPM_LEAVE = 1024
Leave area event.
GPM_LFT = 4
Left side of area.
GPM_MAGIC = $47706D4C
Constant identifying GPM in Gpm_Open (757).
GPM_MFLAG = 128
Motion flag.
GPM_MOVE = 1
Mouse move event.
GPM_NODE_CTL = GPM_NODE_DEV
Control socket
GPM_NODE_DEV = ’/dev/gpmctl’
Device socket filename
GPM_NODE_DIR = _PATH_VARRUN
750
Where to write socket.
GPM_NODE_DIR_MODE = 0775
Mode of socket.
GPM_NODE_FIFO = ’/dev/gpmdata’
FIFO name
GPM_NODE_PID = ’/var/run/gpm.pid’
Name of PID file.
GPM_RGT = 8
Right side of area.
GPM_SINGLE = 16
Mouse single click event.
GPM_TOP = 1
Top of area.
GPM_TRIPLE = 64
Mouse triple click event.
GPM_UP = 8
Mouse button up event.
_PATH_DEV = ’/dev/’
Location of /dev directory.
_PATH_VARRUN = ’/var/run/’
Location of run PID files directory.
55.3.2 Types
Pgpmconnect = Pgpm_connect
Pointer to TGpmConnect (752) record.
Pgpmevent = Pgpm_event
751
Pointer to TGpmEvent (752) record
Pgpmroi = Pgpm_roi
Pointer to TGpmRoi (752) record.
Pgpm_connect = ^TGpm_connect
Pointer to TGpm_Connect (753) record.
Pgpm_event = ^Tgpm_event
Pointer to TGpm_Event (753) record
Pgpm_roi = ^Tgpm_roi
Pointer to Tgpm_roi (753) record.
Tgpmconnect = Tgpm_connect
Alias for TGpm_Connect (753) record.
TGpmEtype = LongInt
Type for event type.
Tgpmevent = Tgpm_event
Alias for TGPM_EVent (753) record
TGpmHandler = function(var event: Tgpmevent;clientdata: pointer)

: LongInt
Mouse event handler callback.
TGpmMargin = LongInt
Type to hold area margin.
Tgpmroi = Tgpm_roi
Alias for TGpm_roi (753)Record
Tgpm_connect = record
eventMask : Word;
defaultMask : Word;
minMod : Word;
maxMod : Word;
pid : LongInt;
vc : LongInt;
end
752
GPM server connection information.
Tgpm_event = record
buttons : Byte;
modifiers : Byte;
vc : Word;
dx : Word;
dy : Word;
x : Word;
y : Word;
EventType : TGpmEtype;
clicks : LongInt;
margin : TGpmMargin;
wdx : Word;
wdy : Word;
end
Tgpm_event describes the events that are reported by GPM.
Tgpm_roi = record
xmin : Integer;
xmax : Integer;
ymin : Integer;
ymax : Integer;
minmod : Word;
maxmod : Word;
eventmask : Word;
owned : Word;
handler : TGpmHandler;
clientdata : pointer;
prev : Pgpm_roi;
next : Pgpm_roi;
end
Record used to define regions of interest.
55.3.3 Variables
gpm_current_roi : Pgpm_roi
Internal gpm library variable. Do not use.
gpm_handler : TGpmHandler
gpm_roi : Pgpm_roi
gpm_roi_data : pointer
753
gpm_roi_handler : TGpmHandler

55.4.1 Gpm_AnyDouble
Synopsis: Check whether event has double click event.
Declaration: function Gpm_AnyDouble(EventType: LongInt) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: Gpm_AnyDouble returns True if EventType contains the GPM_DOUBLE flag, False other-
wise.
Errors: None.
See also: Gpm_StrictSingle (759), Gpm_AnySingle (754), Gpm_StrictDouble (759), Gpm_StrictTriple (759),
Gpm_AnyTriple (754)
55.4.2 Gpm_AnySingle
Synopsis: Check whether event has a single click event.
Declaration: function Gpm_AnySingle(EventType: LongInt) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Gpm_AnySingle returns True if EventType contains the GPM_SINGLE flag, False other-
wise.
Errors: None.
See also: Gpm_StrictSingle (759), Gpm_AnyDouble (754), Gpm_StrictDouble (759), Gpm_StrictTriple (759),
Gpm_AnyTriple (754)
55.4.3 Gpm_AnyTriple
Synopsis: Check whether event has a triple click event.
Declaration: function Gpm_AnyTriple(EventType: LongInt) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Gpm_AnySingle returns True if EventType contains the GPM_TRIPLE flag, False other-
wise.
Errors: None.
See also: Gpm_StrictSingle (759), Gpm_AnyDouble (754), Gpm_StrictDouble (759), Gpm_StrictTriple (759),
Gpm_AnySingle (754)
754
55.4.4 gpm_close
Synopsis: Close connection to GPM server.
Declaration: function gpm_close : LongInt

Visibility: default
Description: Gpm_Close closes the current connection, and pops the connection stack; this means that the
previous connection becomes active again.
The function returns -1 if the current connection is not the last one, and it returns 0 if the current
connection is the last one.
for an example, see Gpm_GetEvent (755).
Errors: None.
See also: Gpm_Open (757)
55.4.5 gpm_fitvalues
Synopsis: Change coordinates to fit physical screen.
Declaration: function gpm_fitvalues(var x: LongInt;var y: LongInt) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Gpm_fitValues changes x and y so they fit in the visible screen. The actual mouse pointer is
not affected by this function.
Errors: None.
See also: Gpm_FitValuesM (755)
55.4.6 gpm_fitvaluesM
Synopsis: Change coordinates to fit margin.
Declaration: function gpm_fitvaluesM(var x: LongInt;var y: LongInt;margin: LongInt)
: LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Gpm_FitValuesM changes x and y so they fit in the margin indicated by margin. If margin is
-1, then the values are fitted to the screen. The actual mouse pointer is not affected by this function.
Errors: None.
See also: Gpm_FitValues (755)
55.4.7 gpm_getevent
Synopsis: Get event from event queue.
Declaration: function gpm_getevent(var event: Tgpm_event) : LongInt
Visibility: default
755
Description: Gpm_GetEvent Reads an event from the file descriptor gpm_fd. This file is only for internal use
and should never be called by a client application.
It returns 1 on succes, and -1 on failue.
See also: Gpm_GetSnapshot (757)
Listing: ./gpmex/gpmex.pp
program gpmex ;
{
Example program t o demonstrate t h e use o f t h e gpm u n i t .
}
uses gpm ;
var
connect : TGPMConnect ;
event : tgpmevent ;
begin
connect . EventMask : =GPM_MOVE or GPM_DRAG or GPM_DOWN or GPM_UP;
connect . DefaultMask : = 0 ;
connect . MinMod : = 0 ;
connect . MaxMod : = 0 ;
i f Gpm_Open( connect ,0)= −1 then
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’No mouse h a n d l e r p r e s e n t . ’ ) ;
Halt ( 1 ) ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ C l i c k r i g h t b u t t o n t o end . ’ ) ;
Repeat
gpm_getevent ( Event ) ;
With Event do
begin
Write ( ’ Pos = ( ’ ,X , ’ , ’ ,Y , ’ ) B u t t o n s : ( ’ ) ;
i f ( b u t t o n s and Gpm_b_left ) < >0 then
write ( ’ l e f t ’ ) ;
i f ( b u t t o n s and Gpm_b_right ) < >0 then
write ( ’ r i g h t ’ ) ;
i f ( b u t t o n s and Gpm_b_middle ) < >0 then
Write ( ’ middle ’ ) ;
Write ( ’ ) Event : ’ ) ;
Case EventType and $F of
GPM_MOVE : w r i t e ( ’ Move ’ ) ;
GPM_DRAG : w r i t e ( ’ Drag ’ ) ;
GPM_DOWN: w r i t e ( ’Down ’ ) ;
GPM_UP : w r i t e ( ’Up ’ ) ;
end ;
Writeln ;
end ;
U n t i l ( Event . B u t t o n s and gpm_b_right ) < >0;
gpm_close ;
end .
756
55.4.8 gpm_getsnapshot
Synopsis: Return servers’ current image of mouse state.
Declaration: function gpm_getsnapshot(eptr: Pgpmevent) : LongInt

function gpm_getsnapshot(var eptr: Tgpmevent) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Gpm_GetSnapshot returns the picture that the server has of the current situation in Event. This
call will not read the current situation from the mouse file descriptor, but returns a buffered version.
The function returns the number of mouse buttons, or -1 if this information is not available.
Errors: None.
See also: Gpm_GetEvent (755)
55.4.9 gpm_lowerroi
Synopsis: Lower a region of interest in the stack.
Declaration: function gpm_lowerroi(which: Pgpm_roi;after: Pgpm_roi) : Pgpm_roi
Visibility: default
Description: Gpm_LowerRoi lowers the region of interest which after after. If after is Nil, the region
of interest is moved to the bottom of the stack.
The return value is the new top of the region-of-interest stack.
Errors: None.
See also: Gpm_RaiseRoi (758), Gpm_PopRoi (758), Gpm_PushRoi (758)
55.4.10 gpm_open
Synopsis: Open connection to GPM server.
Declaration: function gpm_open(var conn: Tgpm_connect;flag: LongInt) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Gpm_Open opens a new connection to the mouse server. The connection is described by the fields
of the conn record of type TGPMConnect (752).
if Flag is 0, then the application only receives events that come from its own terminal device. If it
is negative it will receive all events. If the value is positive then it is considered a console number to
which to connect.
The return value is -1 on error, or the file descriptor used to communicate with the client. Under an
X-Term the return value is -2.
for an example, see Gpm_GetEvent (755).
Errors: On Error, the return value is -1.
See also: Gpm_Open (757)
757
55.4.11 gpm_poproi
Synopsis: Pop region of interest from the stack.
Declaration: function gpm_poproi(which: Pgpm_roi) : Pgpm_roi
Visibility: default
Description: Gpm_PopRoi pops the topmost region of interest from the stack. It returns the next element on the
stack, or Nil if the current element was the last one.
Errors: None.
See also: Gpm_RaiseRoi (758), Gpm_LowerRoi (757), Gpm_PushRoi (758)
55.4.12 gpm_pushroi
Synopsis: Push region of interest on the stack.
Declaration: function gpm_pushroi(x1: LongInt;y1: LongInt;x2: LongInt;y2: LongInt;
mask: LongInt;fun: TGpmHandler;xtradata: pointer)
: Pgpm_roi
Visibility: default
Description: Gpm_PushRoi puts a new region of interest on the stack. The region of interest is defined by a
rectangle described by the corners (X1,Y1) and (X2,Y2).
The mask describes which events the handler {fun} will handle; ExtraData will be put in the
xtradata field of the {TGPM_Roi} record passed to the fun handler.
Errors: None.
See also: Gpm_RaiseRoi (758), Gpm_PopRoi (758), Gpm_LowerRoi (757)
55.4.13 gpm_raiseroi
Synopsis: Raise region of interest in the stack.
Declaration: function gpm_raiseroi(which: Pgpm_roi;before: Pgpm_roi) : Pgpm_roi
Visibility: default
Description: Gpm_RaiseRoi raises the region of interestwhich till it is on top of region before. If before
is nil then the region is put on top of the stack. The returned value is the top of the stack.
Errors: None.
See also: Gpm_PushRoi (758), Gpm_PopRoi (758), Gpm_LowerRoi (757)
55.4.14 gpm_repeat
Synopsis: Check for presence of mouse event.
Declaration: function gpm_repeat(millisec: LongInt) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Gpm_Repeat returns 1 of no mouse event arrives in the next millisec miiliseconds, it returns 0
otherwise.
758
Errors: None.
See also: Gpm_GetEvent (755)
55.4.15 Gpm_StrictDouble
Synopsis: Check whether event contains only a double-click event.
Declaration: function Gpm_StrictDouble(EventType: LongInt) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: Gpm_StrictDouble returns true if EventType contains only a doubleclick event, False oth-
erwise.
Errors: None.
See also: Gpm_StrictSingle (759), Gpm_AnyTriple (754), Gpm_AnyDouble (754), Gpm_StrictTriple (759),
Gpm_AnySingle (754)
55.4.16 Gpm_StrictSingle
Synopsis: Check whether event contains only a single-click event.
Declaration: function Gpm_StrictSingle(EventType: LongInt) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: Gpm_StrictDouble returns True if EventType contains only a singleclick event, False
otherwise.
Errors: None.
See also: Gpm_AnyTriple (754), Gpm_StrictDouble (759), Gpm_AnyDouble (754), Gpm_StrictTriple (759),
Gpm_AnySingle (754)
55.4.17 Gpm_StrictTriple
Synopsis: Check whether event contains only a triple-click event.
Declaration: function Gpm_StrictTriple(EventType: LongInt) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Gpm_StrictTriple returns true if EventType contains only a triple click event, False oth-
erwise.
Errors: None.
See also: Gpm_AnyTriple (754), Gpm_StrictDouble (759), Gpm_AnyDouble (754), Gpm_StrictSingle (759),
Gpm_AnySingle (754)
759
Chapter 56
Reference for unit ’Graph’
56.1 Overview
This document describes the GRAPH unit for Free Pascal, for all platforms. The unit was first written
for dos by Florian Klaempfl, but was later completely rewritten by Carl-Eric Codere to be completely
portable. The unit is provided for compatibility only: It is recommended to use more modern graph-
ical systems. The graph unit will allow to recompile old programs. They will work to some extent,
but if the application has heavy graphical needs, it’s recommended to use another set of graphical
routines, suited to the platform the program should work on.
56.2 Categorized functions: Text and font handling

Functions to set texts on the screen.
Table 56.1:
Name Description
GetTextSettings (800) Get current text settings
InstallUserFont (803) Install a new font
OutText (804) Write text at current cursor position
OutTextXY (792) Write text at coordinates X,Y
RegisterBGIFont (806) Register a new font
SetTextJustify (809) Set text justification
SetTextStyle (809) Set text style
SetUserCharSize (810) Set text size
TextHeight (811) Calculate height of text
TextWidth (811) Calculate width of text
56.3 Categorized functions: Filled drawings

Functions for drawing filled regions.
760
CHAPTER 56. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’GRAPH’
Table 56.2:
Name Description
Bar3D (793) Draw a filled 3D-style bar
Bar (793) Draw a filled rectangle
FloodFill (795) Fill starting from coordinate
FillEllipse (795) Draw a filled ellipse
FillPoly (795) Draw a filled polygone
GetFillPattern (797) Get current fill pattern
GetFillSettings (797) Get current fill settings
SetFillPattern (807) Set current fill pattern
SetFillStyle (807) Set current fill settings
56.4 Categorized functions: Drawing primitives

Functions for simple drawing.
Table 56.3:
Name Description
Arc (793) Draw an arc
Circle (790) Draw a complete circle
DrawPoly (794) Draw a polygone with N points
Ellipse (795) Draw an ellipse
GetArcCoords (796) Get arc coordinates
GetLineSettings (798) Get current line drawing settings
Line (792) Draw line between 2 points
LineRel (803) Draw line relative to current position
LineTo (804) Draw line from current position to absolute position
MoveRel (804) Move cursor relative to current position
MoveTo (804) Move cursor to absolute position
PieSlice (805) Draw a pie slice
PutPixel (792) Draw 1 pixel
Rectangle (805) Draw a non-filled rectangle
Sector (806) Draw a sector
SetLineStyle (808) Set current line drawing style
56.5 Categorized functions: Color management

All functions related to color management.
761
Table 56.4:
Name Description
GetBkColor (791) Get current background color
GetColor (796) Get current foreground color
GetDefaultPalette (796) Get default palette entries
GetMaxColor (798) Get maximum valid color
GetPaletteSize (800) Get size of palette for current mode
GetPixel (791) Get color of selected pixel
GetPalette (800) Get palette entry
SetAllPalette (792) Set all colors in palette
SetBkColor (792) Set background color
SetColor (807) Set foreground color
SetPalette (809) Set palette entry
SetRGBPalette (793) Set palette entry with RGB values
56.6 Categorized functions: Screen management

General drawing screen management functions.
Table 56.5:
Name Description
ClearViewPort (791) Clear the current viewport
GetImage (791) Copy image from screen to memory
GetMaxX (799) Get maximum X coordinate
GetMaxY (799) Get maximum Y coordinate
GetX (801) Get current X position
GetY (801) Get current Y position
ImageSize (791) Get size of selected image
GetViewSettings (800) Get current viewport settings
PutImage (792) Copy image from memory to screen
SetActivePage (792) Set active video page
SetAspectRatio (806) Set aspect ratio for drawing routines
SetViewPort (810) Set current viewport
SetVisualPage (793) Set visual page
SetWriteMode (811) Set write mode for screen operations
56.7 Categorized functions: Initialization

Initialization of the graphics screen.
762
Table 56.6:
Name Description
ClearDevice (794) Empty the graphics screen
CloseGraph (794) Finish drawing session, return to text mode
DetectGraph (794) Detect graphical modes
GetAspectRatio (796) Get aspect ratio of screen
GetModeRange (799) Get range of valid modes for current driver
GraphDefaults (1) Set defaults
GetDriverName (797) Return name of graphical driver
GetGraphMode (798) Return current or last used graphics mode
GetMaxMode (798) Get maximum mode for current driver
GetModeName (799) Get name of current mode
GraphErrorMsg (1) String representation of graphical error
GraphResult (1) Result of last drawing operation
InitGraph (802) Initialize graphics drivers
InstallUserDriver (803) Install a new driver
RegisterBGIDriver (805) Register a new driver
RestoreCRTMode (806) Go back to text mode
SetGraphMode (808) Set graphical mode
56.8 Target specific issues: Linux

There are several issues on Linux that need to be taken care of:
The Linux version of the Graph unit uses the libvga library. This library works on the console, not
under X.
If you get an error similar to
/usr/bin/ld: cannot find -lvga
This can mean one of two things: either libvga and it’s development package is not installed properly,
or the directory where it is installed is not in the linker path.
To remedy the former, you should install both the libvga package and libvga-devel package (or com-
pile and install from scratch).
To remedy the latter, you should add the path to the compiler command-line using the -Fl option.
Programs using libvga need root privileges to run. You can make them setuid root with the following
command:
chown root.root myprogram

chmod u+s myprogram
The libvga library will give up the root privileges after it is initialized.
there is an experimental version of the Graphics library available that uses GGI to do all the drawing,
but it is not well tested. It’s called ggigraph and is distributed in source form only.
Do not use the CRT unit together with the Graph unit: the console may end up in an unusable state.
Instead, the ncurses unit may function fine.
763
56.9 Target specific issues: DOS

VESA modes (i.e., anything but 320x200x256 and 640x480x16) do not work under most installations
of Windows NT, Windows 2000 and Windows XP. They also do not work for some people under
Windows 98 and Windows ME, depending on their graphics drivers. However, the graph unit cannot
detect this, because no errors are returned from the system. In such cases, the screen simply turns
black, or will show garbage.
Nothing can be done about this, the reason is missing or buggy support in the graphics drivers of the
operating system.
56.10 A word about mode selection

The graph unit was implemented for compatibility with the old Turbo Pascal graph unit. For this
reason, the mode constants as they were defined in the Turbo Pascal graph unit are retained.
However, since
1. Video cards have evolved very much

2. Free Pascal runs on multiple platforms
it was decided to implement new mode and graphic driver constants, which are more independent of
the specific platform the program runs on.
In this section we give a short explanation of the new mode system. the following drivers were
defined:
D1bit = 11;
D2bit = 12;
D4bit = 13;
D6bit = 14; { 64 colors Half-brite mode - Amiga }
D8bit = 15;
D12bit = 16; { 4096 color modes HAM mode - Amiga }
D15bit = 17;
D16bit = 18;
D24bit = 19; { not yet supported }
lowNewDriver = 11;
highNewDriver = 21;
Each of these drivers specifies a desired color-depth.

The following modes have been defined:
detectMode = 30000;
m320x200 = 30001;
m320x256 = 30002; { amiga resolution (PAL) }
m320x400 = 30003; { amiga/atari resolution }
m512x384 = 30004; { mac resolution }
m640x200 = 30005; { vga resolution }
m640x256 = 30006; { amiga resolution (PAL) }
m640x350 = 30007; { vga resolution }
764
m640x400 = 30008;
m640x480 = 30009;
m800x600 = 30010;
m832x624 = 30011; { mac resolution }
m1024x768 = 30012;
m1280x1024 = 30013;
m1600x1200 = 30014;
m2048x1536 = 30015;
lowNewMode = 30001;
highNewMode = 30015;
These modes start at 30000 because Borland specified that the mode number should be ascending
with increasing X resolution, and the new constants shouldn’t interfere with the old ones.
The above constants can be used to set a certain color depth and resultion, as demonstrated in the
below example.
If other modes than the ones above are supported by the graphics card, you will not be able to select
them with this mechanism.
For this reason, there is also a ’dynamic’ mode number, which is assigned at run-time. This number
increases with increasing X resolution. It can be queried with the getmoderange call. This
call will return the range of modes which are valid for a certain graphics driver. The numbers are
guaranteed to be consecutive, and can be used to search for a certain resolution, as in the second
example below.
Thus, the getmoderange function can be used to detect all available modes and drivers, as in the
third example below:
Listing: ./graphex/inigraph1.pp
Program i n i g r a p h 1 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate s t a t i c g r a p h i c s mode s e l e c t i o n }
uses graph ;
const
TheLine = ’We are now i n 6 4 0 x 4 8 0 x 2 5 6 c o l o r s ! ’ +
’ ( press < Return > t o c o n t i n u e ) ’ ;
var
gd , gm , lo , hi , e r r o r , tw , t h : i n t e g e r ;
found : boolean ;
begin
{ We want an 8 b i t mode }
gd : = D 8 b i t ;
gm : = m640x480 ;
i n i t g r a p h ( gd , gm, ’ ’ ) ;
{ Make sure you always check g r a p h r e s u l t ! }
e r r o r : = gr a p hR e s ul t ;
i f ( e r r o r < > grOk ) Then
begin
w r i t e l n ( ’ 640x480x256 i s n o t supported ! ’ ) ;
halt (1)
end ;
{ We are now i n 640 x480x256 }
765
s e t C o l o r ( cyan ) ;
r e c t a n g l e ( 0 , 0 , getmaxx , getmaxy ) ;
{ W r i t e a n i c e message i n t h e c e n t e r o f t h e screen }
setTextStyle ( defaultFont , horizDir , 1 ) ;
tw : = TextWidth ( TheLine ) ;
t h : = T e x t H e i g h t ( TheLine ) ;
outTextXY ( ( getMaxX − TW) div 2 ,
( getMaxY − TH ) div 2 , TheLine ) ;
{ Wait f o r r e t u r n }
readln ;
{ Back t o t e x t mode }
c l o s e g r a ph ;
end .
Listing: ./graphex/inigraph2.pp
Program i n i g r a p h 2 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate dynamic g r a p h i c s mode s e l e c t i o n }
uses graph ;
const
TheLine = ’We are now i n 6 4 0 x 4 8 0 x 2 5 6 c o l o r s ! ’ +
’ ( press < Return > t o c o n t i n u e ) ’ ;
var
th , tw , gd , gm , lo , hi , e r r o r : i n t e g e r ;
found : boolean ;
begin
{ We want an 8 b i t mode }
gd : = D 8 b i t ;
{ Get a l l a v a i l a b l e r e s o l u t i o n s f o r t h i s b i t d e p t h }
getmoderange ( gd , lo , h i ) ;
{ I f t h e h i g h e s t a v a i l a b l e mode number i s −1 ,
no r e s o l u t i o n s are supported f o r t h i s b i t d e p t h }
i f h i = − 1 then
begin
w r i t e l n ( ’ no 8 b i t modes supported ! ’ ) ;
halt
end ;
found : = f a l s e ;
{ Search a l l r e s o l u t i o n s f o r 640 x480 }
f o r gm : = l o to h i do
begin
i n i t g r a p h ( gd , gm, ’ ’ ) ;
{ Make sure you always check g r a p h r e s u l t ! }
e r r o r : = gr a p hR e s ul t ;
i f ( e r r o r = grOk ) and
( getmaxx = 6 3 9 ) and ( getmaxy = 4 7 9 ) then
begin
found : = t r u e ;
break ;
end ;
end ;
i f not found then
CloseGraph ( ) ;
begin
766
w r i t e l n ( ’ 640x480x256 i s n o t supported ! ’ ) ;
halt (1)
end ;
{ We are now i n 640 x480x256 }
s e t C o l o r ( cyan ) ;
r e c t a n g l e ( 0 , 0 , getmaxx , getmaxy ) ;
{ W r i t e a n i c e message i n t h e c e n t e r o f t h e screen }
TW: = TextWidth ( TheLine ) ;
TH: = T e x t H e i g h t ( TheLine ) ;
( getMaxY − TH ) div 2 , TheLine ) ;
{ Wait f o r r e t u r n }
readln ;
{ Back t o t e x t mode }
c l o s e g r a ph ;
end .
Listing: ./graphex/modrange.pp
Program GetModeRange_Example ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates how t o f i n d a l l a v a i l a b l e graph modes }
uses graph ;
const
{ C u r r e n t l y , o n l y 4 , 8 , 1 5 and 1 6 b i t modes are supported
b u t t h i s may change i n t h e f u t u r e }
gdnames : array [ D 4 b i t . . D 1 6 b i t ] of s t r i n g [ 6 ] =
( ’ 4 b i t ’ , ’ 6 b i t ’ , ’ 8 b i t ’ , ’ 12 b i t ’ , ’ 15 b i t ’ , ’ 16 b i t ’ ) ;
procedure WriteRes ( const depth : i n t e g e r ) ;

var
tw , t h : i n t e g e r ;
v , t e x t : String ;
begin
t e x t : = ’ C u r r e n t r e s o l u t i o n i s ’ ; s t r ( getmaxx + 1 , v ) ;
t e x t : = t e x t + v + ’ x ’ ; s t r ( getmaxy + 1 , v ) ;
t e x t : = t e x t + v + ’ x ’ + gdnames [ depth ] ;
TW: = TextWidth ( t e x t ) ;
TH: = T e x t H e i g h t ( t e x t ) ;
( getMaxY − TH ) div 2 , t e x t ) ;
end ;
var
t : text ;
l i n e : string ;
gd , c , low , high , r e s : i n t e g e r ;
begin
a s s i g n ( t , ’ modes . t x t ’ ) ;
rewrite ( t ) ;
close ( t ) ;
f o r gd : = D 4 b i t to D 1 6 b i t do
begin
{ Get t h e a v a i l a b l e mode numbers f o r t h i s d r i v e r }
767
getModeRange ( gd , low , high ) ;

append ( t ) ;
w r i t e ( t , gdnames [ gd ] ) ;
W r i t e l n ( t , ’ : low modenr = ’ , low , ’ , h i g h modenr = ’ , high ) ;
close ( t ) ;
{ I f h i g h i s −1 ,
no r e s o l u t i o n s are supported f o r t h i s b i t d e p t h }
i f high = − 1 then
begin
append ( t ) ;
w r i t e l n ( t , ’ No modes supported ! ’ ) ;
writeln ( t ) ;
close ( t ) ;
end
else
{ E n t e r a l l supported r e s o l u t i o n s f o r t h i s b i t d e p t h
and w r i t e t h e i r c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s t o t h e f i l e }
f o r c : = low to high do
begin
append ( t ) ;
w r i t e l n ( t , ’ t e s t i n g mode n r ’ , c ) ;
close ( t ) ;
i n i t g r a p h ( gd , c , ’ ’ ) ;
res : = g r a p h r e s u l t ;
append ( t ) ;
{ An e r r o r o c c u r r e d when e n t e r i n g t h e mode ? }
i f r e s < > grok then
w r i t e l n ( t , grapherrormsg ( r e s ) )
else
begin
w r i t e ( t , ’ maxx : ’ , getmaxx , ’ , maxy : ’ , getmaxy ) ;
W r i t e l n ( t , ’ , maxcolor : ’ , getmaxcolor ) ;
c l os e g r a ph ;
end ;
writeln ( t ) ;
WriteRes ( gd ) ;
close ( t ) ;
end ;
append ( t ) ;
writeln ( t ) ;
close ( t ) ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ A l l supported modes are l i s t e d i n modes . t x t f i l e s ’ ) ;
end .
56.11 Requirements
The unit Graph exports functions and procedures for graphical output. It requires at least a VGA-
compatible Card or a VGA-Card with software-driver (min. 512Kb video memory).
768

56.12.1 Constants
AndPut = 3
Draw operation: use AND
AnsiToASCIITransTable : TCharsetTransTable = (#$00, #$01, #$02, #$03, #$04, #$05, #$0
Default ansi transliteration table.
BkSlashFill = 5
Fill style: Diagonal (backslash) lines
black = 0
Color code: black.
blue = 1
Color code: blue
BoldFont = 10
Font number: Bold font.
BottomText = 0
Vertical text alignment: Align text to bottom
brown = 6
Color code: brown
CenterLn = 2
Line style: centered line
CenterText = 1
Horizontal text alignment: Center text
CGA = 1
Graphic driver for CGA cards
CGAC0 = 0
CGA Graphic driver mode C0
769
CGAC1 = 1
CGAC2 = 2
CGAC3 = 3
CGAHi = 4
CGA Graphic driver Hi-res mode
ClipOff = False
Viewport clipping off
ClipOn = True
Viewport clipping on
CloseDotFill = 11
Fill style: Closely spaced dotted lines
CopyPut = 0
Draw operation: use Copy
CurrentDriver = -128
Currently used driver
cyan = 3
Color code: Cyan
D12bit = 16
Mode: Depth 12 bit
D15bit = 17
Mode: Depth 15 bit
D16bit = 18
Mode: Depth 16 bit
770
D1bit = 11
Mode: Depth 1 bit
D24bit = 19
Mode: Depth 24 bit
D2bit = 12
Mode: Depth 2 bit
D32bit = 20
Mode: Depth 32 bit
D4bit = 13
Mode: Depth 4 bit
D64bit = 21
Mode: Depth 64 bit
D6bit = 14
Mode: Depth 6 bit
D8bit = 15
Mode: Depth 8 bit
darkgray = 8
Color code: Dark gray
DashedLn = 3
Line style: dashed line
Default = 0
Default mode
DefaultFont = 0
Font number: Normal font
Detect = 0
Mode: Detect mode.
771
detectMode = 30000
Mode: Autodetect optimal mode
DottedLn = 1
Line style: Dotted line
DrawTextBackground : Boolean = False
Should the background of texts be drawn or should it be left untouched ?
EGA = 3
Graphic driver for EGA cards
EGA64 = 4
Graphic driver for EGA 64 cards
EGA64Hi = 1
EGA64 graphic driver high resolution mode
EGA64Lo = 0
EGA64 graphic driver low resolution mode
EGABlack = 0
Color code: EGA Black
EGABlue = 1
Color code: EGA blue
EGABrown = 20
Color code: EGA brown
EGACyan = 3
Color code: EGA cyan
EGADarkgray = 56
Color code: EGA dark gray
EGAGreen = 2
Color code: EGA green
772
EGAHi = 1
EGA graphic driver high resolution mode
EGALightblue = 57
Color code: EGA Light blue
EGALightcyan = 59
Color code: EGA Light cyan
EGALightgray = 7
Color code: EGA Light gray
EGALightgreen = 58
Color code: EGA Light green
EGALightmagenta = 61
Color code: EGA light magenta
EGALightred = 60
Color code: EGA light red
EGALo = 0
EGA graphic driver low resolution mode
EGAMagenta = 5
Color code: EGA magenta
EGAMono = 5
Graphic driver for EGA monochrome cards
EGAMonoHi = 3
EGAMono graphic driver high resolution mode
EGARed = 4
Color code: EGA red
EGAWhite = 63
Color code: EGA white
773
EGAYellow = 62
Color code: EGA yellow
EmptyFill = 0
Fill style: Do not fill
EuroFont = 9
Font number: ?
fillpatternTable : Array[0..12] of FillPatternType = (($00, $00, $00, $00, $00, $00,
Table with standard fill patterns
G1024x768x16 = 30
Mode: Resolution 1024x768, 16 colors
G1024x768x16M = 25
Mode: Resolution 1024x768, 16M colors
G1024x768x16M32 = 36
Mode: Resolution 1024x758, 16M 32-bit colors
G1024x768x256 = 12
G1024x768x32K = 23
Mode: Resolution 1024x768, 32K colors
G1024x768x64K = 24
G1152x864x16 = 38
G1152x864x16M = 42
G1152x864x16M32 = 43
Mode: Resolution 1152x864, 16M 32-bitcolors
774
G1152x864x256 = 39
G1152x864x32K = 40
G1152x864x64K = 41
G1280x1024x16 = 31
G1280x1024x16M = 28
G1280x1024x16M32 = 37
G1280x1024x256 = 13
G1280x1024x32K = 26
G1280x1024x64K = 27
G1600x1200x16 = 44
G1600x1200x16M = 48
G1600x1200x16M32 = 49
G1600x1200x256 = 45
775
G1600x1200x32K = 46
G1600x1200x64K = 47
G320x200x16 = 1
Mode: Resulution 320x200, 16 colors
G320x200x16M = 16
G320x200x16M32 = 33
G320x200x256 = 5
G320x200x32K = 14
G320x200x64K = 15
G320x240x256 = 6
G320x400x256 = 7
G360x480x256 = 8
G640x200x16 = 2
Mode: Resolution x, colors
G640x350x16 = 3
776
G640x480x16 = 4
G640x480x16M = 19
G640x480x16M32 = 34
G640x480x2 = 9
G640x480x256 = 10
G640x480x32K = 17
G640x480x64K = 18
G720x348x2 = 32
G800x600x16 = 29
G800x600x16M = 22
G800x600x16M32 = 35
G800x600x256 = 11
G800x600x32K = 20
777
G800x600x64K = 21
GothicFont = 4
Font number: Gothic font
GraphStringTransTable : PCharsetTransTable = Nil
Table used when transliterating strings.
green = 2
Color code: green
grError = -11
Error: Unknown error.
grFileNotFound = -3
Error: File for driver not found.
grFontNotFound = -8
Error: font description file not found.
grInvalidDriver = -4
Error: Invalid driver specified
grInvalidFont = -13
Error: Invalid font description
grInvalidFontNum = -14
Error: Invalid font number
grInvalidMode = -10
Error: Invalid mode specified.
grInvalidVersion = -18
Error: Invalid version.
grIOerror = -12
Error: Unspecified Input/Output error.
778
grNoFloodMem = -7
Error: Could not allocate memory for flood operation.
grNoFontMem = -9
Error: Not enough memory to load font.
grNoInitGraph = -1
Error: Graphical system not initialized
grNoLoadMem = -5
Error: Memory error.
grNoScanMem = -6
Error: Could not allocate memory for scan
grNotDetected = -2
Error: Graphics device not detected.
grOk = 0
Graphical operation went OK.
HatchFill = 7
Fill style: Hatch lines
HercMono = 7
Mode: Hercules, mono color
HercMonoHi = 0
Mode: Hercules card, monochrome, high resolution
highNewDriver = 21
Mode: highest number for new driver
highNewMode = m2048x1536
Mode: Highest possible value of the new modes.
HorizDir = 0
Text write direction: Horizontal
779
InterleaveFill = 9
Fill style: Interleaving lines
LCOMFont = 8
Font number: ?
LeftText = 0
Horizontal text alignment: Align text left
lightblue = 9
Color code: Light blue
lightcyan = 11
Color code: Light cyan
lightgray = 7
Color code: Light gray
lightgreen = 10
Color code: Light green
lightmagenta = 13
Color code: Light magenta
lightred = 12
Color code: Light red
LineFill = 2
Fill style: Fill using horizontal lines
lowNewDriver = 11
Mode: lowest number for new driver
lowNewMode = m320x200
Mode: Lowest possible value of the new modes.
LowRes = 6
Mode: Low resolution.
780
LtBkSlashFill = 6
Fill style: Light diagonal (backslash) lines
LtSlashFill = 3
Fill style: Light diagonal (slash) lines
m1024x768 = detectMode + 12
Mode: Resolution 1024x768
781
magenta = 5
Color code: Magenta
MaxColors = 255
Max amount of colors in a palette
maxsmallint = (smallint)
Maximum value for smallint type
MCGA = 2
Graphic driver for MCGA cards
MCGAC0 = 0
MCGA Graphic driver mode C0
MCGAC1 = 1
MCGAC2 = 2
MCGAC3 = 3
MCGAHi = 5
MCGA Graphic driver high resolution mode
782
MCGAMed = 4
MCGA Graphic driver medium resolution mode
NormalPut = 0
Draw operation: Use Normal (copy) operation
NormWidth = 1
Line width: Normal width
NotPut = 4
Draw operation: use NOT
OrPut = 2
Draw operation: use OR
red = 4
Color code: Red
resolutions : Array[lowNewMode..highNewMode] of TResolutionRec = ((x: 320; y: 200), (
Array with actual resolutions of the new modes
RightText = 2
Horizontal text alignment: Align text right
SansSerifFont = 3
Font number: Sans Serif font
ScriptFont = 5
Font number: Script font
SimpleFont = 6
Font number: Simple font
SlashFill = 4
Fill style: Diagonal (slash) lines
SmallFont = 2
Font number: Small font
783
SolidFill = 1
Fill style: Solid fill.
SolidLn = 0
Line style: Solid line
ThickWidth = 3
Line width: double width
TopOff = False
Top off
TopOn = True
Top on
TopText = 2
Vertical text alignment: Align text to top
TriplexFont = 1
Font number: Triplex font
TSCRFont = 7
Font number: Terminal font
UserBitLn = 4
Line style: User defined
UserCharSize = 0
User character size
UserFill = 12
Fill style: User-defined fill.
VertDir = 1
Text write direction: Vertical
VESA = 10
Mode: VESA graphics adaptor.
784
VGA = 9
Mode: VGA graphics adaptor.
VGAHi = 2
Mode: VGA high resolution (640x480)
VGALo = 0
Mode: VGA low resolution (640x200)
VGAMed = 1
Mode: VGA medium resolution (640x350)
white = 15
Color code: White
WideDotFill = 10
Fill style: Widely spaced dotted lines
XHatchFill = 8
Fill style: Heavy hatch lines
XORPut = 1
Draw operation: use XOR
yellow = 14
Color code: Yellow
56.12.2 Types
ArcCoordsType = record
x : SmallInt;
y : SmallInt;
xstart : SmallInt;
ystart : SmallInt;
xend : SmallInt;
yend : SmallInt;
end
Describe the last arc which was drawn on screen
CircleProc = procedure(X: SmallInt;Y: SmallInt;Radius: Word)
785
Standard circle drawing routine prototype.
clrviewproc = procedure
Standard clearviewport routine prototype
defpixelproc = procedure(X: SmallInt;Y: SmallInt)
This is the standard putpixel routine used by all function drawing routines, it will use the viewport
settings, as well as clip, and use the current foreground color to plot the desired pixel.
ellipseproc = procedure(X: SmallInt;Y: SmallInt;XRadius: Word;

YRadius: Word;stAngle: Word;EndAngle: Word;
fp: patternlineproc)
Standard ellipse drawing routine prototype.
FillPatternType = Array[1..8] of Byte
Bit pattern used when drawing lines. Set bits are drawn.
FillSettingsType = record
pattern : Word;
color : Word;
end
Record describing fill mode
GetBkColorProc = function : Word
GetBkColorProc is the procedure prototype for the GetBkColor (791) method handler in TMod-
eInfo (790). The function should return the color code of the background color.
getimageproc = procedure(X1: SmallInt;Y1: SmallInt;X2: SmallInt;

Y2: SmallInt;var Bitmap)
Standard GetImage (791) procedure prototype.
getpixelproc = function(X: SmallInt;Y: SmallInt) : Word
Standard pixel fetching routine prototype
getrgbpaletteproc = procedure(ColorNum: SmallInt;var RedValue: SmallInt;

var GreenValue: SmallInt;
var BlueValue: SmallInt)
This routine prototype is a hook for GetRGBPalette (791)
getscanlineproc = procedure(X1: SmallInt;X2: SmallInt;Y: SmallInt;

var data)
786
This routine is used for FloodFill (795) It returns an entire screen scan line with a word for each pixel
in the scanline. Also handy for GetImage.
graphfreememprc = procedure(var P: Pointer;size: Word)
Procedure prototype, used when heap memory is freed by the graph routines.
graphgetmemprc = procedure(var P: pointer;size: Word)
Procedure prototype, used when heap memory is needed by the graph routines.
graph_float = single
The platform’s preferred floating point size for fast graph operations
hlineproc = procedure(x: SmallInt;x2: SmallInt;y: SmallInt)
Standard procedure prototype to draw a single horizontal line
imagesizeproc = function(X1: SmallInt;Y1: SmallInt;X2: SmallInt;

Y2: SmallInt) : LongInt
Standard ImageSize (791) calculation procedure prototype.
initmodeproc = procedure
Standard routine prototype to initialize a mode.
lineproc = procedure(X1: SmallInt;Y1: SmallInt;X2: SmallInt;

Y2: SmallInt)
Standard line drawing routine prototype.
LineSettingsType = record
linestyle : Word;
pattern : Word;
thickness : Word;
end
Record describing current line drawing mode
OutTextXYProc = procedure(x: SmallInt;y: SmallInt;

const TextString: string)
This routine prototype is a hook for OutTextXY (792)
PaletteType = record
Size : LongInt;
Colors : Array[0..MaxColors] of RGBRec;
end
787
Record describing palette.
patternlineproc = procedure(x1: SmallInt;x2: SmallInt;y: SmallInt)
Standard procedure prototype to draw a patterned line
PCharsetTransTable = ^TCharsetTransTable
Pointer to TCharsetTransTable (789) array.
PModeInfo = ^TModeInfo
Pointer to TModeInfo (790) record
PointType = record
x : SmallInt;
y : SmallInt;
end
Record describing a point in a 2 dimensional plane
putimageproc = procedure(X: SmallInt;Y: SmallInt;var Bitmap;

BitBlt: Word)
Standard PutImage (792) procedure prototype.
putpixelproc = procedure(X: SmallInt;Y: SmallInt;Color: Word)
Standard pixel drawing routine prototype
restorestateproc = procedure
Standard routine prototype to restore the graphical state at a closegraph call.
RGBRec = packed record

Red : SmallInt;
Green : SmallInt;
Blue : SmallInt;
end
Record describing palette RGB color
savestateproc = procedure
Standard routine prototype to save the graphical state before a mode is set.
setactivepageproc = procedure(page: Word)
Standard SetActivePage (792) procedure prototype.
788
SetAllPaletteProc = procedure(const Palette: PaletteType)
This routine prototype is a hook for SetAllPalette (792)
SetBkColorProc = procedure(ColorNum: Word)
SetBkColorProc is the procedure prototype for the SetBkColor (792) method handler in TMod-
eInfo (790). The procedure gets passed the color code for the color to set as background color.
setrgbpaletteproc = procedure(ColorNum: SmallInt;RedValue: SmallInt;

GreenValue: SmallInt;BlueValue: SmallInt)
This routine prototype is a hook for SetRGBPalette (793)
setvisualpageproc = procedure(page: Word)
Standard SetVisualPage (793) procedure prototype.
TCharsetTransTable = Array[Char] of Char
Character transliteration table, with entries for 256 characters
TextSettingsType = record
font : Word;
direction : Word;
charsize : Word;
horiz : Word;
vert : Word;
end
Record describing how texts are drawn.
TModeInfo = record
DriverNumber : SmallInt;
ModeNumber : SmallInt;
internModeNumber : SmallInt;
MaxColor : LongInt;
PaletteSize : LongInt;
XAspect : Word;
YAspect : Word;
MaxX : Word;
MaxY : Word;
DirectColor : Boolean;
Hardwarepages : Byte;
ModeName : string;
DirectPutPixel : defpixelproc;
GetPixel : getpixelproc;
PutPixel : putpixelproc;
SetRGBPalette : setrgbpaletteproc;
GetRGBPalette : getrgbpaletteproc;
SetAllPalette : SetAllPaletteProc;
789
SetVisualPage : setvisualpageproc;
SetActivePage : setactivepageproc;
ClearViewPort : clrviewproc;
PutImage : putimageproc;
GetImage : getimageproc;
ImageSize : imagesizeproc;
GetScanLine : getscanlineproc;
Line : lineproc;
InternalEllipse : ellipseproc;
PatternLine : patternlineproc;
HLine : hlineproc;
VLine : vlineproc;
Circle : CircleProc;
InitMode : initmodeproc;
OutTextXY : OutTextXYProc;
SetBKColor : SetBkColorProc;
GetBKColor : GetBkColorProc;
next : PModeInfo;
end
Record describing a graphical mode.
TResolutionRec = record
x : LongInt;
y : LongInt;
end
Record describing resolution
ViewPortType = record
x1 : SmallInt;
y1 : SmallInt;
x2 : SmallInt;
y2 : SmallInt;
Clip : Boolean;
end
Record describing a viewport
vlineproc = procedure(x: SmallInt;y: SmallInt;y2: SmallInt)
Standard procedure prototype to draw a single vertical line
56.12.3 Variables
Circle : CircleProc
Circle draws a complete circle with center at (X,Y), radius radius.
ClearViewPort : clrviewproc
790
Clears the current viewport. The current background color is used as filling color. The pointer is set
at (0,0).
DirectPutPixel : defpixelproc
Hook to directly draw a pixel on the screen.
GetBkColor : GetBkColorProc
GetBkColor returns the current background color (the palette entry).
GetImage : getimageproc
GetImage Places a copy of the screen area (X1,Y1) to X2,Y2 in BitMap
GetPixel : getpixelproc
GetPixel returns the color of the point at (X,Y)
GetRGBPalette : getrgbpaletteproc
Hook to set a RGB palette entries.
GetScanLine : getscanlineproc
Hook to get a scan line from the screen.
GraphFreeMemPtr : graphfreememprc
Hook to free heap memory.
GraphGetMemPtr : graphgetmemprc
Hook to get heap memory
HLine : hlineproc
Hook to draw a solid horizontal line
ImageSize : imagesizeproc
ImageSize returns the number of bytes needed to store the image in the rectangle defined by
(X1,Y1) and (X2,Y2).
InternalEllipse : ellipseproc
Hook to draw an ellipse
Line : lineproc
791
Line draws a line starting from (X1,Y1 to (X2,Y2), in the current line style and color. The
current position is put to (X2,Y2)
OutTextXY : OutTextXYProc
OutText puts TextString on the screen, at position (X,Y), using the current font and text
settings. The current position is moved to the end of the text.
PatternLine : patternlineproc
Hook to draw a patterned line
PutImage : putimageproc
PutImage Places the bitmap in Bitmap on the screen at (X1,Y1). How determines how the
bitmap will be placed on the screen. Possible values are:
• CopyPut
• XORPut
• ORPut
• AndPut
• NotPut
PutPixel : putpixelproc
Puts a point at (X,Y) using color Color
RestoreVideoState : restorestateproc
Hook to restore a saved video mode
SaveVideoState : savestateproc
Hook to save the current video state
SetActivePage : setactivepageproc
Sets Page as the active page for all graphical output.
SetAllPalette : SetAllPaletteProc
Sets the current palette to Palette. Palette is an untyped variable, usually pointing to a record
of type PaletteType
SetBkColor : SetBkColorProc
Sets the background color to Color.
SetRGBPalette : setrgbpaletteproc
792
SetRGBPalette sets the ColorNr-th entry in the palette to the color with RGB-values Red,
Green Blue.
SetVisualPage : setvisualpageproc
SetVisualPage sets the video page to page number Page.
VLine : vlineproc
Hook to draw a solid vertical line

56.13.1 Arc
Synopsis: Draw part of a circle
Declaration: procedure Arc(X: SmallInt;Y: SmallInt;StAngle: Word;EndAngle: Word;
Radius: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: Arc draws part of a circle with center at (X,Y), radius radius, starting from angle start,
stopping at angle stop. These angles are measured counterclockwise.
Errors: None.
See also: Circle (790), Ellipse (795), GetArcCoords (796), PieSlice (805), Sector (806)
56.13.2 Bar
Synopsis: Draw filled rectangle
Declaration: procedure Bar(x1: SmallInt;y1: SmallInt;x2: SmallInt;y2: SmallInt)
Visibility: default
Description: Draws a rectangle with corners at (X1,Y1) and (X2,Y2) and fills it with the current color and
fill-style.
Errors: None.
See also: Bar3D (793), Rectangle (805)
56.13.3 Bar3D
Synopsis: Draw filled 3-dimensional rectangle
Declaration: procedure Bar3D(x1: SmallInt;y1: SmallInt;x2: SmallInt;y2: SmallInt;
depth: Word;top: Boolean)
Visibility: default
Description: Bar3d draws a 3-dimensional Bar with corners at (X1,Y1) and (X2,Y2) and fills it with the
current color and fill-style. Depth specifies the number of pixels used to show the depth of the bar.
If Top is true; then a 3-dimensional top is drawn.
Errors: None.
See also: Bar (793), Rectangle (805)
793
56.13.4 ClearDevice
Synopsis: Clear the complete screen
Declaration: procedure ClearDevice

Visibility: default
Description: Clears the graphical screen (with the current background color), and sets the pointer at (0,0).
Errors: None.
See also: ClearViewPort (791), SetBkColor (792)
56.13.5 Closegraph
Synopsis: Close graphical system.
Declaration: procedure Closegraph
Visibility: default
Description: Closes the graphical system, and restores the screen modus which was active before the graphical
modus was activated.
Errors: None.
See also: InitGraph (802)
56.13.6 DetectGraph
Synopsis: Detect correct graphical driver to use
Declaration: procedure DetectGraph(var GraphDriver: SmallInt;var GraphMode: SmallInt)
Visibility: default
Description: DetectGraph checks the hardware in the PC and determines the driver and screen-modus to
be used. These are returned in Driver and Modus, and can be fed to InitGraph. See the
InitGraph for a list of drivers and modi.
Errors: None.
56.13.7 DrawPoly
Synopsis: Draw a polygone
Declaration: procedure DrawPoly(NumPoints: Word;var polypoints)

Visibility: default
Description: DrawPoly draws a polygone with NumberOfPoints corner points, using the current color and
line-style. PolyPoints is an array of type PointType (788).
Errors: None.
See also: Bar (793), Bar3D (793), Rectangle (805)
794
56.13.8 Ellipse
Synopsis: Draw an ellipse
Declaration: procedure Ellipse(X: SmallInt;Y: SmallInt;stAngle: Word;EndAngle: Word;
XRadius: Word;YRadius: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: Ellipse draws part of an ellipse with center at (X,Y). XRadius and Yradius are the horizon-
tal and vertical radii of the ellipse. Start and Stop are the starting and stopping angles of the part
of the ellipse. They are measured counterclockwise from the X-axis (3 o’clock is equal to 0 degrees).
Only positive angles can be specified.
Errors: None.
See also: Arc (793), Circle (790), FillEllipse (795)
56.13.9 FillEllipse
Synopsis: Draw and fill an ellipse
Declaration: procedure FillEllipse(X: SmallInt;Y: SmallInt;XRadius: Word;
YRadius: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: Ellipse draws an ellipse with center at (X,Y). XRadius and Yradius are the horizontal and
vertical radii of the ellipse. The ellipse is filled with the current color and fill-style.
Errors: None.
See also: Arc (793), Circle (790), GetArcCoords (796), PieSlice (805), Sector (806)
56.13.10 FillPoly
Synopsis: Draw, close and fill a polygone
Declaration: procedure FillPoly(NumPoints: Word;var PolyPoints)
Visibility: default
Description: FillPoly draws a polygone with NumberOfPoints corner points and fills it using the current
color and line-style. PolyPoints is an array of type PointType.
Errors: None.
See also: Bar (793), Bar3D (793), Rectangle (805)
56.13.11 FloodFill
Synopsis: Fill an area with a given color
Declaration: procedure FloodFill(x: SmallInt;y: SmallInt;Border: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: Fills the area containing the point (X,Y), bounded by the color BorderColor.
Errors: None
See also: SetColor (807), SetBkColor (792)
795
56.13.12 GetArcCoords
Synopsis: Return coordinates of last drawn arc or ellipse.
Declaration: procedure GetArcCoords(var ArcCoords: ArcCoordsType)

Visibility: default
Description: GetArcCoords returns the coordinates of the latest Arc or Ellipse call.
Errors: None.
See also: Arc (793), Ellipse (795)
56.13.13 GetAspectRatio
Synopsis: Return screen resolution
Declaration: procedure GetAspectRatio(var Xasp: Word;var Yasp: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: GetAspectRatio determines the effective resolution of the screen. The aspect ration can then be
calculated as Xasp/Yasp.
Errors: None.
See also: InitGraph (802), SetAspectRatio (806)
56.13.14 GetColor
Synopsis: Return current drawing color
Declaration: function GetColor : Word
Visibility: default
Description: GetColor returns the current drawing color (the palette entry).
Errors: None.
See also: GetColor (796), SetBkColor (792)
56.13.15 GetDefaultPalette
Synopsis: Return default palette
Declaration: procedure GetDefaultPalette(var Palette: PaletteType)
Visibility: default
Description: GetDefaultPalette returns the current palette in Palette.

Errors: None.
See also: GetColor (796), GetBkColor (791)
796
56.13.16 GetDirectVideo
Synopsis: Determine whether direct video mode is active.
Declaration: function GetDirectVideo : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: Determine whether direct video mode is active.
56.13.17 GetDriverName
Synopsis: Return current driver name
Declaration: function GetDriverName : string
Visibility: default
Description: GetDriverName returns a string containing the name of the current driver.
Errors: None.
See also: GetModeName (799), InitGraph (802)
56.13.18 GetFillPattern
Synopsis: Return current fill pattern
Declaration: procedure GetFillPattern(var FillPattern: FillPatternType)

Visibility: default
Description: GetFillPattern returns an array with the current fill-pattern in FillPattern
Errors: None
See also: SetFillPattern (807)
56.13.19 GetFillSettings
Synopsis: Return current fill settings
Declaration: procedure GetFillSettings(var Fillinfo: FillSettingsType)
Visibility: default
Description: GetFillSettings returns the current fill-settings in FillInfo
Errors: None.
See also: SetFillPattern (807)
797
56.13.20 GetGraphMode
Synopsis: Get current graphical modus
Declaration: function GetGraphMode : SmallInt

Visibility: default
Description: GetGraphMode returns the current graphical modus
Errors: None.
56.13.21 GetLineSettings
Synopsis: Get current line drawing settings
Declaration: procedure GetLineSettings(var ActiveLineInfo: LineSettingsType)
Visibility: default
Description: GetLineSettings returns the current Line settings in LineInfo
Errors: None.
See also: SetLineStyle (808)
56.13.22 GetMaxColor
Synopsis: return maximum number of colors
Declaration: function GetMaxColor : Word
Visibility: default
Description: GetMaxColor returns the maximum color-number which can be set with SetColor. Contrary
to Turbo Pascal, this color isn’t always guaranteed to be white (for instance in 256+ color modes).
Errors: None.
See also: SetColor (807), GetPaletteSize (800)
56.13.23 GetMaxMode
Synopsis: Return biggest mode for the current driver
Declaration: function GetMaxMode : SmallInt
Visibility: default
Description: GetMaxMode returns the highest modus for the current driver.
Errors: None.
798
56.13.24 GetMaxX
Synopsis: Return maximal X coordinate
Declaration: function GetMaxX : SmallInt

Visibility: default
Description: GetMaxX returns the maximum horizontal screen length
Errors: None.
See also: GetMaxY (799)
56.13.25 GetMaxY
Synopsis: Return maximal Y coordinate
Declaration: function GetMaxY : SmallInt
Visibility: default
Description: GetMaxY returns the maximum number of screen lines
Errors: None.
See also: GetMaxY (799)
56.13.26 GetModeName
Synopsis: Return description a modus
Declaration: function GetModeName(ModeNumber: SmallInt) : string
Visibility: default
Description: GetModeName Returns a string with the name of modus Modus
Errors: None.
See also: GetDriverName (797), InitGraph (802)
56.13.27 GetModeRange
Synopsis: Return lowest and highest modus of current driver
Declaration: procedure GetModeRange(GraphDriver: SmallInt;var LoMode: SmallInt;
var HiMode: SmallInt)
Visibility: default
Description: GetModeRange returns the Lowest and Highest modus of the currently installed driver. If no
modes are supported for this driver, HiModus will be -1.
Errors: None.
799
56.13.28 GetPalette
Synopsis: Return current palette
Declaration: procedure GetPalette(var Palette: PaletteType)

Visibility: default
Description: GetPalette returns in Palette the current palette.
Errors: None.
See also: GetPaletteSize (800), SetPalette (809)
56.13.29 GetPaletteSize
Synopsis: Return maximal number of entries in current palette
Declaration: function GetPaletteSize : SmallInt
Visibility: default
Description: GetPaletteSize returns the maximum number of entries in the current palette.
Errors: None.
See also: GetPalette (800), SetPalette (809)
56.13.30 GetTextSettings
Synopsis: Return current text style
Declaration: procedure GetTextSettings(var TextInfo: TextSettingsType)
Visibility: default
Description: GetTextSettings returns the current text style settings : The font, direction, size and placement
as set with SetTextStyle and SetTextJustify
Errors: None.
See also: SetTextStyle (809), SetTextJustify (809)
56.13.31 GetViewSettings
Synopsis: Return current viewport
Declaration: procedure GetViewSettings(var viewport: ViewPortType)
Visibility: default
Description: GetViewSettings returns the current viewport and clipping settings in ViewPort.
Errors: None.
See also: SetViewPort (810)
800
56.13.32 GetX
Synopsis: Return current cursor X position
Declaration: function GetX : SmallInt

Visibility: default
Description: GetX returns the X-coordinate of the current position of the graphical pointer
Errors: None.
See also: GetY (801)
56.13.33 GetY
Synopsis: Return current cursor Y position
Declaration: function GetY : SmallInt
Visibility: default
Description: GetY returns the Y-coordinate of the current position of the graphical pointer
Errors: None.
See also: GetX (801)
56.13.34 GraphDefaults
Synopsis: Reset graphical mode to defaults
Declaration: procedure GraphDefaults
Visibility: default
Description: GraphDefaults resets all settings for viewport, palette, foreground and background pattern, line-
style and pattern, filling style, filling color and pattern, font, text-placement and text size.
Errors: None.
See also: SetViewPort (810), SetFillStyle (807), SetColor (807), SetBkColor (792), SetLineStyle (808)
56.13.35 GraphErrorMsg
Synopsis: Return a description of an error
Declaration: function GraphErrorMsg(ErrorCode: SmallInt) : string
Visibility: default
Description: GraphErrorMsg returns a string describing the error Errorcode. This string can be used to let
the user know what went wrong.
Errors: None.
See also: GraphResult (1)
801
56.13.36 GraphResult
Synopsis: Result of last graphical operation
Declaration: function GraphResult : SmallInt
Visibility: default
Description: GraphResult returns an error-code for the last graphical operation. If the returned value is zero,
all went well. A value different from zero means an error has occurred. besides all operations which
draw something on the screen, the following procedures also can produce a GraphResult different
from zero:
•InstallUserFont (803)
•SetLineStyle (808)
•SetWriteMode (811)
•SetFillStyle (807)
•SetTextJustify (809)
•SetGraphMode (808)
•SetTextStyle (809)
Errors: None.
See also: GraphErrorMsg (1)
56.13.37 InitGraph
Synopsis: Initialize grpahical system
Declaration: procedure InitGraph(var GraphDriver: SmallInt;var GraphMode: SmallInt;
const PathToDriver: string)
Visibility: default
Description: InitGraph initializes the graph package. GraphDriver has two valid values: GraphDriver=0
which performs an auto detect and initializes the highest possible mode with the most colors. 1024x768x64K
is the highest possible resolution supported by the driver, if you need a higher resolution, you must
edit MODES.PPI. If you need another mode, then set GraphDriver to a value different from
zero and graphmode to the mode you wish (VESA modes where 640x480x256 is 101h etc.).
PathToDriver is only needed, if you use the BGI fonts from Borland. Free Pascal does not offer
BGI fonts like Borland, these must be obtained separately.
Example code:
var
gd,gm : integer;
PathToDriver : string;
begin
gd:=detect; { highest possible resolution }
gm:=0; { not needed, auto detection }
PathToDriver:=’C:\PP\BGI’; { path to BGI fonts,
drivers aren’t needed }
InitGraph(gd,gm,PathToDriver);
if GraphResult<>grok then
halt; ..... { whatever you need }
CloseGraph; { restores the old graphics mode }
end.
802
Errors: None.
See also: Modes (764), DetectGraph (794), CloseGraph (794), GraphResult (1)
56.13.38 InstallUserDriver
Synopsis: Install a user driver
Declaration: function InstallUserDriver(Name: string;AutoDetectPtr: Pointer)

: SmallInt
Visibility: default
Description: InstallUserDriver adds the device-driver DriverPath to the list of .BGI drivers. AutoDetectPtr
is a pointer to a possible auto-detect function.
Errors: None.
See also: InitGraph (802), InstallUserFont (803)
56.13.39 InstallUserFont
Synopsis: Install a user-defined font
Declaration: function InstallUserFont(const FontFileName: string) : SmallInt

Visibility: default
Description: InstallUserFont adds the font in FontPath to the list of fonts of the .BGI system.
Errors: None.
See also: InitGraph (802), InstallUserDriver (803)
56.13.40 LineRel
Synopsis: Draw a line starting from current position in given direction
Declaration: procedure LineRel(Dx: SmallInt;Dy: SmallInt)
Visibility: default
Description: LineRel draws a line starting from the current pointer position to the point(DX,DY), relative to
the current position, in the current line style and color. The Current Position is set to the endpoint of
the line.
Errors: None.
See also: Line (792), LineTo (804)
803
56.13.41 LineTo
Synopsis: Draw a line starting from current position to a given point
Declaration: procedure LineTo(X: SmallInt;Y: SmallInt)

Visibility: default
Description: LineTo draws a line starting from the current pointer position to the point(DX,DY), relative to
the current position, in the current line style and color. The Current position is set to the end of the
line.
Errors: None.
See also: LineRel (803), Line (792)
56.13.42 MoveRel
Synopsis: Move cursor relative to current position
Declaration: procedure MoveRel(Dx: SmallInt;Dy: SmallInt)
Visibility: default
Description: MoveRel moves the pointer to the point (DX,DY), relative to the current pointer position
Errors: None.
See also: MoveTo (804)
56.13.43 MoveTo
Synopsis: Move cursor to absolute position.
Declaration: procedure MoveTo(X: SmallInt;Y: SmallInt)

Visibility: default
Description: MoveTo moves the pointer to the point (X,Y).
Errors: None.
See also: MoveRel (804)
56.13.44 OutText
Synopsis: Write text on the screen at the current location.
Declaration: procedure OutText(const TextString: string)
Visibility: default
Description: OutText puts TextString on the screen, at the current pointer position, using the current font
and text settings. The current position is moved to the end of the text.
Errors: None.
See also: OutTextXY (792)
804
56.13.45 PieSlice
Synopsis: Draw a pie-slice
Declaration: procedure PieSlice(X: SmallInt;Y: SmallInt;stangle: SmallInt;

endAngle: SmallInt;Radius: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: PieSlice draws and fills a sector of a circle with center (X,Y) and radius Radius, starting at
angle Start and ending at angle Stop.
Errors: None.
See also: Arc (793), Circle (790), Sector (806)
56.13.46 queryadapterinfo
Synopsis: Function called to retrieve the current video adapter settings.
Declaration: function queryadapterinfo : PModeInfo
Visibility: default
56.13.47 Rectangle
Synopsis: Draw a rectangle on the screen.
Declaration: procedure Rectangle(x1: SmallInt;y1: SmallInt;x2: SmallInt;y2: SmallInt)
Visibility: default
Description: Draws a rectangle with corners at (X1,Y1) and (X2,Y2), using the current color and style.
Errors: None.
See also: Bar (793), Bar3D (793)
56.13.48 RegisterBGIDriver
Synopsis: Register a new BGI driver.
Declaration: function RegisterBGIDriver(driver: pointer) : SmallInt

Visibility: default
Description: Registers a user-defined BGI driver
Errors: None.
See also: InstallUserDriver (803), RegisterBGIFont (806)
805
56.13.49 RegisterBGIfont
Synopsis: Register a new BGI font
Declaration: function RegisterBGIfont(font: pointer) : SmallInt

Visibility: default
Description: Registers a user-defined BGI driver
Errors: None.
See also: InstallUserFont (803), RegisterBGIDriver (805)
56.13.50 RestoreCrtMode
Synopsis: Restore text screen
Declaration: procedure RestoreCrtMode
Visibility: default
Description: Restores the screen modus which was active before the graphical modus was started.
To get back to the graph mode you were last in, you can use SetGraphMode(GetGraphMode)
Errors: None.
56.13.51 Sector
Synopsis: Draw and fill a sector of an ellipse
Declaration: procedure Sector(x: SmallInt;y: SmallInt;StAngle: Word;EndAngle: Word;
XRadius: Word;YRadius: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: Sector draws and fills a sector of an ellipse with center (X,Y) and radii XRadius and YRadius,
starting at angle Start and ending at angle Stop.
Errors: None.
See also: Arc (793), Circle (790), PieSlice (805)
56.13.52 SetAspectRatio
Synopsis: Set aspect ration of the screen
Declaration: procedure SetAspectRatio(Xasp: Word;Yasp: Word)

Visibility: default
Description: Sets the aspect ratio of the current screen to Xasp/Yasp.
Errors: None
See also: InitGraph (802), GetAspectRatio (796)
806
56.13.53 SetColor
Synopsis: Set foreground drawing color
Declaration: procedure SetColor(Color: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: Sets the foreground color to Color.
Errors: None.
See also: GetColor (796), SetBkColor (792), SetWriteMode (811)
56.13.54 SetDirectVideo
Synopsis: Attempt to enter direct video mode.
Declaration: procedure SetDirectVideo(DirectAccess: Boolean)
Visibility: default
Description: SetDirectVideo attempts to enter direct video mode. In that mode, everything is drawn straight
in the video buffer.
56.13.55 SetFillPattern
Synopsis: Set drawing fill pattern
Declaration: procedure SetFillPattern(Pattern: FillPatternType;Color: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: SetFillPattern sets the current fill-pattern to FillPattern, and the filling color to Color
The pattern is an 8x8 raster, corresponding to the 64 bits in FillPattern.
Errors: None
See also: GetFillPattern (797), SetFillStyle (807), SetWriteMode (811)
56.13.56 SetFillStyle
Synopsis: Set drawing fill style
Declaration: procedure SetFillStyle(Pattern: Word;Color: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: SetFillStyle sets the filling pattern and color to one of the predefined filling patterns. Pattern
can be one of the following predefined constants :
EmptyFillUses backgroundcolor.
SolidFillUses filling color
LineFillFills with horizontal lines.
ltSlashFillFills with lines from left-under to top-right.
SlashFillIdem as previous, thick lines.
BkSlashFillFills with thick lines from left-Top to bottom-right.
807
LtBkSlashFillIdem as previous, normal lines.

HatchFillFills with a hatch-like pattern.
XHatchFillFills with a hatch pattern, rotated 45 degrees.
InterLeaveFill
WideDotFillFills with dots, wide spacing.
CloseDotFillFills with dots, narrow spacing.
UserFillFills with a user-defined pattern.
Errors: None.
See also: SetFillPattern (807), SetWriteMode (811)
56.13.57 SetGraphMode
Synopsis: Set graphical mode
Declaration: procedure SetGraphMode(Mode: SmallInt)

Visibility: default
Description: SetGraphMode sets the graphical mode and clears the screen.
Errors: None.
56.13.58 SetLineStyle
Synopsis: Set line drawing style
Declaration: procedure SetLineStyle(LineStyle: Word;Pattern: Word;Thickness: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: SetLineStyle sets the drawing style for lines. You can specify a LineStyle which is one of
the following pre-defined constants:
Solidlndraws a solid line.

DottedlnDraws a dotted line.
Centerlndraws a non-broken centered line.
Dashedlndraws a dashed line.
UserBitlnDraws a User-defined bit pattern.
If UserBitln is specified then Pattern contains the bit pattern. In all another cases, Pattern
is ignored. The parameter Width indicates how thick the line should be. You can specify one of the
following pre-defined constants:
NormWidthNormal line width

ThickWidthDouble line width
Errors: None.
See also: GetLineSettings (798), SetWriteMode (811)
808
56.13.59 SetPalette
Synopsis: Set palette entry using color constant
Declaration: procedure SetPalette(ColorNum: Word;Color: ShortInt)
Visibility: default
Description: SetPalette changes the ColorNr-th entry in the palette to NewColor
Errors: None.
See also: SetAllPalette (792), SetRGBPalette (793)
56.13.60 SetTextJustify
Synopsis: Set text placement style
Declaration: procedure SetTextJustify(horiz: Word;vert: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: SetTextJustify controls the placement of new text, relative to the (graphical) cursor position.
Horizontal controls horizontal placement, and can be one of the following pre-defined constants:
LeftTextText is set left of the pointer.

CenterTextText is set centered horizontally on the pointer.
RightTextText is set to the right of the pointer.
Vertical controls the vertical placement of the text, relative to the (graphical) cursor position. Its
value can be one of the following pre-defined constants :
BottomTextText is placed under the pointer.

CenterTextText is placed centered vertically on the pointer.
TopTextText is placed above the pointer.
Errors: None.
See also: OutText (804), OutTextXY (792)
56.13.61 SetTextStyle
Synopsis: Set text style
Declaration: procedure SetTextStyle(font: Word;direction: Word;charsize: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: SetTextStyle controls the style of text to be put on the screen. pre-defined constants for Font
are:
DefaultFontThe default font

TriplexFontA special font
SmallFontA smaller font
SansSerifFontA sans-serif font (like Arial)
GothicFontA gothic font
809
ScriptFontA script font

SimpleFontA simple font
TSCRFontTerminal screen font
LCOMFont?
EuroFont?
BoldFontA bold typeface font
Pre-defined constants for Direction are :
HorizDirWrite horizontal
VertDirWrite vertical
Errors: None.
See also: GetTextSettings (800)
56.13.62 SetUserCharSize
Synopsis: Set user character size for vector font
Declaration: procedure SetUserCharSize(Multx: Word;Divx: Word;Multy: Word;Divy: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: Sets the width and height of vector-fonts. The horizontal size is given by Xasp1/Xasp2, and the
vertical size by Yasp1/Yasp2.
Errors: None.
See also: SetTextStyle (809)
56.13.63 SetViewPort
Synopsis: Set the graphical drawing window
Declaration: procedure SetViewPort(X1: SmallInt;Y1: SmallInt;X2: SmallInt;
Y2: SmallInt;Clip: Boolean)
Visibility: default
Description: Sets the current graphical viewport (window) to the rectangle defined by the top-left corner (X1,Y1)
and the bottom-right corner (X2,Y2). If Clip is true, anything drawn outside the viewport (win-
dow) will be clipped (i.e. not drawn). Coordinates specified after this call are relative to the top-left
corner of the viewport.
Errors: None.
See also: GetViewSettings (800)
810
56.13.64 SetWriteMode
Synopsis: Specify binary operation to perform when drawing on screen
Declaration: procedure SetWriteMode(WriteMode: SmallInt)

Visibility: default
Description: SetWriteMode controls the drawing of lines on the screen. It controls the binary operation used
when drawing lines on the screen. Mode can be one of the following pre-defined constants:
CopyPutDraw as specified using current bitmask and color

XORPutDraw XOR-ing current bitmask and color
Errors: None.
See also: SetColor (807), SetBkColor (792), SetLineStyle (808), SetFillStyle (807)
56.13.65 TextHeight
Synopsis: Return height (in pixels) of the given string
Declaration: function TextHeight(const TextString: string) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: TextHeight returns the height (in pixels) of the string S in the current font and text-size.
Errors: None.
See also: TextWidth (811)
56.13.66 TextWidth
Synopsis: Return width (in pixels) of the given string
Declaration: function TextWidth(const TextString: string) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: TextHeight returns the width (in pixels) of the string S in the current font and text-size.
Errors: None.
See also: TextHeight (811)
811
Chapter 57
Reference for unit ’heaptrc’
57.1 Overview
This document describes the HEAPTRC unit for Free Pascal. It was written by Pierre Muller. It is
system independent, and works on all supported systems.
The HEAPTRC unit can be used to debug your memory allocation/deallocation. It keeps track of the
calls to getmem/freemem, and, implicitly, of New/Dispose statements.
When the program exits, or when you request it explicitly. It displays the total memory used, and
then dumps a list of blocks that were allocated but not freed. It also displays where the memory was
allocated.
If there are any inconsistencies, such as memory blocks being allocated or freed twice, or a memory
block that is released but with wrong size, this will be displayed also.
The information that is stored/displayed can be customized using some constants.
57.2 Controlling HeapTrc with environment variables

The HeapTrc unit can be controlled with the HEAPTRC environment variable. The contents of this
variable controls the initial setting of some constants in the unit. HEAPTRC consists of one or more
of the following strings, separated by spaces:
keepreleased If this string occurs, then the KeepReleased (814) variable is set to True
disabled If this string occurs, then the UseHeapTrace (815) variable is set to False and the heap
trace is disabled. It does not make sense to combine this value with other values.
nohalt If this string occurs, then the HaltOnError (814) variable is set to False, so the program
continues executing even in case of a heap error.
log=filename If this string occurs, then the output of heaptrc is sent to the specified Filename.
(see also SetHeapTraceOutput (817))
The following are valid values for the HEAPTRC variable:
HEAPTRC=disabled
HEAPTRC="keepreleased log=heap.log"
HEAPTRC="log=myheap.log nohalt"
Note that these strings are case sensitive, and the name of the variable too.
812
CHAPTER 57. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’HEAPTRC’
57.3 HeapTrc Usage

All that you need to do is to include heaptrc in the uses clause of your program. Make sure that it is
the first unit in the clause, otherwise memory allocated in initialization code of units that precede the
heaptrc unit will not be accounted for, causing an incorrect memory usage report.
If you use the -gh switch, the compiler will insert the unit by itself, so you don’t have to include it
in your uses clause.
The below example shows how to use the heaptrc unit.
This is the memory dump shown when running this program in a standard way:
Marked memory at 0040FA50 invalid

Wrong size : 128 allocated 64 freed
0x00408708
0x0040CB49
0x0040C481
Call trace for block 0x0040FA50 size 128
0x0040CB3D
0x0040C481
If you use the lineinfo unit (or use the -gl switch) as well, then heaptrc will also give you the
filenames and line-numbers of the procedures in the backtrace:
Marked memory at 00410DA0 invalid

Wrong size : 128 allocated 64 freed
0x004094B8
0x0040D8F9 main, line 25 of heapex.pp
0x0040D231
Call trace for block 0x00410DA0 size 128
0x0040D8ED main, line 23 of heapex.pp
0x0040D231
If lines without filename/line-number occur, this means there is a unit which has no debug info
included.
Listing: ./heapex/heapex.pp
Program heapex ;
{ Program used t o demonstrate t h e usage o f h e a p t r c u n i t }
Uses h e a p t r c ;
Var P1 : ^ L o n g i n t ;
P2 : P o i n t e r ;
I : longint ;
begin
New( P1 ) ;
/ / causes p r e v i o u s a l l o c a t i o n n o t t o be de−a l l o c a t e d
New( P1 ) ;
Dispose ( P1 ) ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 do
begin
GetMem ( P2 , 1 2 8 ) ;
/ / When I i s even , d e a l l o c a t e b l o c k . We l o o s e 5 t i m e s 128
813
/ / b y t e s t h i s way .
I f ( I mod 2 ) = 0 Then FreeMem ( P2 , 1 2 8 ) ;
end ;
GetMem( P2 , 1 2 8 ) ;
/ / T h i s w i l l provoke an e r r o r and a memory dump
Freemem ( P2 , 6 4 ) ;
end .

57.4.1 Constants
add_tail : Boolean = True
If add\_tail is True (the default) then a check is also performed on the memory location just
behind the allocated memory.
HaltOnError : Boolean = True
If HaltOnError is set to True then an illegal call to FreeMem will cause the memory manager
to execute a halt(1) instruction, causing a memory dump. By Default it is set to True.
HaltOnNotReleased : Boolean = False
HaltOnNotReleased can be set to True to make the DumpHeap (816) procedure halt (exit
code 203) the program if any memory was not released when the dump is made. If it is False (the
default) then DumpHeap just returns.
keepreleased : Boolean = False
If keepreleased is set to true, then a list of freed memory blocks is kept. This is useful if you
suspect that the same memory block is released twice. However, this option is very memory intensive,
so use it sparingly, and only when it’s really necessary.
maxprintedblocklength : Integer = 128
maxprintedblocklength determines the maximum number of bytes written by a memory

block dump, as produced when printleakedblock (815) or printfaultyblock (814) are true. If the
size of the memory block is larger than this size, then only the first maxprintedblocklength
will be included in the dump.
printfaultyblock : Boolean = False
printleakedblock can be set to True to print a memory dump of daulty memory blocks (in
case a memory override occurs) The block is printed as a series of hexadecimal numbers, representing
the bytes in the memory block. At most maxprintedblocklength (814) bytes of the memory block will
be printed.
printleakedblock : Boolean = False
814
printleakedblock can be set to True to print a memory dump of unreleased blocks when the
heaptrc unit produces a summary of memory leaks. The block is printed as a series of hexadecimal
numbers, representing the bytes in the memory block. At most maxprintedblocklength (814) bytes
of the memory block will be printed.
quicktrace : Boolean = True
Quicktrace determines whether the memory manager checks whether a block that is about to be
released is allocated correctly. This is a rather time consuming search, and slows program execution
significantly, so by default it is set to True.
tracesize = 8
Tracesize specifies how many levels of calls are displayed of the call stack during the mem-
ory dump. If you specify keepreleased:=True then half the TraceSize is reserved for
the GetMem call stack, and the other half is reserved for the FreeMem call stack. For example,
the default value of 8 will cause eight levels of call frames to be dumped for the getmem call if
keepreleased is False. If KeepReleased is true, then 4 levels of call frames will be dumped
for the GetMem call and 4 frames wil be dumped for the FreeMem call. If you want to change this
value, you must recode the heaptrc unit.
usecrc : Boolean = True
If usecrc is True (the default) then a crc check is performed on locations before and after the
allocated memory. This is useful to detect memory overwrites.
useheaptrace : Boolean = True
This variable must be set at program startup, through the help of an environment variable.
57.4.2 Types
tdisplayextrainfoProc = procedure(var ptext: text;p: pointer)
The TDisplayExtraInfoType is a procedural type used in the SetHeapExtraInfo (816) call to

display a memory location which was previously filled with TFillExtraInfoProc (815)
tFillExtraInfoProc = procedure(p: pointer)
The TFillExtraInfoProc is a procedural type used in the SetHeapExtraInfo (816) call to fill a
memory location with extra data for displaying.

57.5.1 CheckPointer
Synopsis: Check if a pointer is in the address range of the application
Declaration: procedure CheckPointer(p: pointer)
Visibility: default
Description: CheckPointer checks if the pointer is in the address range of the application, more specifically,
if it is in the heap. if not, it prints an error and stops the program with aruntime error 204.
815
57.5.2 DumpHeap
Synopsis: Dump memory usage report to stderr.
Declaration: procedure DumpHeap

Visibility: default
Description: DumpHeap dumps to standard output a summary of memory usage. It is called automatically by
the heaptrc unit when your program exits (by installing an exit procedure), but it can be called at any
time.
Errors: None.
57.5.3 SetHeapExtraInfo
Synopsis: Store extra information in blocks.
Declaration: procedure SetHeapExtraInfo(size: ptruint;fillproc: tFillExtraInfoProc;

displayproc: tdisplayextrainfoProc)
Visibility: default
Description: You can use SetHeapExtraInfo to store extra info in the blocks that the heaptrc unit reserves
when tracing getmem calls. Size indicates the size (in bytes) that the trace mechanism should
reserve for your extra information. For each call to getmem, FillProc will be called, and passed
a pointer to the memory reserved.
When dumping the memory summary, the extra info is shown by calling displayproc and passing
it the memory location which was filled by fillproc. It should write the information in readable
form to the text file provided in the call to displayproc
Errors: You can only call SetHeapExtraInfo if no memroy has been allocated yet. If memory was
already allocated prior to the call to SetHeapExtraInfo, then an error will be displayed on
standard error output, and a DumpHeap (816) is executed.
See also: DumpHeap (816), SetHeapTraceOutput (817)
Listing: ./heapex/setinfo.pp
Program heapex ;
{ Program used t o demonstrate t h e usage o f h e a p t r c u n i t }
Uses h e a p t r c ;
Var P1 : ^ L o n g i n t ;
P2 : P o i n t e r ;
I : longint ;
Marker : L o n g i n t ;
Procedure SetMarker ( P : p o i n t e r ) ;
Type PLongint = ^ L o n g i n t ;
begin
PLongint (P ) ^ : = Marker ;
end ;
816
Procedure Part1 ;
begin
/ / Blocks a l l o c a t e d here are marked w i t h $FFAAFFAA = −5570646
Marker : = $FFAAFFAA ;
New( P1 ) ;
New( P1 ) ;
Dispose ( P1 ) ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 do
begin
GetMem ( P2 , 1 2 8 ) ;
end ;
GetMem( P2 , 1 2 8 ) ;
end ;
Procedure Part2 ;
begin
/ / Blocks a l l o c a t e d here are marked w i t h $FAFAFAFA = −84215046
Marker : = $FAFAFAFA ;
New( P1 ) ;
New( P1 ) ;
Dispose ( P1 ) ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 do
begin
GetMem ( P2 , 1 2 8 ) ;
end ;
GetMem( P2 , 1 2 8 ) ;
end ;
begin
S e t E x t r a I n f o ( SizeOf ( Marker ) , @SetMarker ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Part 1 ’ ) ;
part1 ;
Writeln ( ’ Part 2 ’ ) ;
part2 ;
end .
57.5.4 SetHeapTraceOutput
Synopsis: Specify filename for heap trace output.
Declaration: procedure SetHeapTraceOutput(const name: string); Overload
procedure SetHeapTraceOutput(var ATextOutput: Text); Overload
Visibility: default
Description: SetHeapTraceOutput sets the filename into which heap trace info will be written. By default
information is written to standard output, this function allows you to redirect the information to a file
with full filename name.
Errors: If the file cannot be written to, errors will occur when writing the trace.
See also: SetHeapExtraInfo (816)
817
Chapter 58
Reference for unit ’ipc’
58.1 Used units
Table 58.1: Used units by unit ’ipc’
Name Page
BaseUnix 113
System 1224
unixtype 1784
58.2 Overview
This document describes the IPC unit for Free Pascal. It was written for linux by Michael Van
Canneyt. It gives all the functionality of System V Inter-Process Communication: shared memory,
semaphores and messages. It works only on the linux operating system.
Many constants here are provided for completeness only, and should under normal circumstances not
be used by the programmer.

58.3.1 Constants
IPC_CREAT = 1 shl 9
Create if key is nonexistent
IPC_EXCL = 2 shl 9
fail if key exists
IPC_INFO = 3
For ipcs call
818
CHAPTER 58. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’IPC’
IPC_NOWAIT = 4 shl 9
return error on wait
IPC_RMID = 0
Remove resource
IPC_SET = 1
set ipc_perm options
IPC_STAT = 2
get ipc_perm options
MSG_NOERROR = 1 shl 12
Internal Message control code. Do not use
SEM_A = 2 shl 6
Constant to describe alter permissions on Semaphores
SEM_R = 4 shl 6
Constant to describe read permissions on Semaphores
SEM_UNDO = 1 shl 12
Constant for use in semop (833)
SHM_LOCK = 11
This constant is used in the shmctl (834) call.
SHM_R = IPC_R
SHM_RDONLY = 1 shl 12
SHM_RND = 2 shl 12
SHM_UNLOCK = 12
SHM_W = IPC_W
819
58.3.2 Types
key_t = TKey
Alias for TKey (821) type
msglen_t = culong
Message length type
msgqnum_t = culong
Message queue number type
PIPC_Perm = ^TIPC_Perm
Pointer to TIPC_Perm (821) record.
PMSG = ^TMSG
Pointer to TMSG (821) record
PMSGbuf = ^TMSGbuf
Pointer to TMsgBuf (821) rcord
PMSGinfo = ^TMSGinfo
Pointer to TMSGinfo (822) record
PMSQid_ds = ^TMSQid_ds
Pointer to TMSQid_ds (822)
PSEM = ^TSEM
Pointer to TSEM
PSEMbuf = ^TSEMbuf
Pointer to TSembuf (822) record.
PSEMid_ds = ^TSEMid_ds
Pointer to TSEMid_ds (823) record.
PSEMinfo = ^TSEMinfo
Pointer to TSEMinfo (823) record.
PSEMun = ^TSEMun
820
Pointer to TSEMun (823) record
PShmid_DS = ^TShmid_ds
Pointer to TSHMid_ds (818) record.
PSHMinfo = ^TSHMinfo
TIPC_Perm = record
key : TKey;
uid : kernel_uid_t;
gid : kernel_gid_t;
cuid : kernel_uid_t;
cgid : kernel_gid_t;
mode : kernel_mode_t;
seq : cushort;
end
TIPC_Perm is used in all IPC systems to specify the permissions. It should never be used directly.
TKey = cint
Type returned by the ftok (823) key generating function.
TMSG = record
end
Record used in the handling of message queues. Do not use directly.
TMSGbuf = record
mtype : clong;
mtext : Array[0..0] of Char;
end
The TMSGbuf record is a record containing the data of a record. you should never use this record
directly, instead you should make your own record that follows the structure of the TMSGbuf record,
but that has a size that is big enough to accomodate your messages. The mtype field should always
be present, and should always be filled.
TMSGinfo = record
msgmax : cint;
msgmni : cint;
msgmnb : cint;
msgtql : cint;
msgssz : cint;
msgseg : cint;
end
821
Internal message system record. Do not use directly.
TMSQid_ds = record
msg_perm : TIPC_Perm;
msg_first : PMSG;
msg_last : PMSG;
msg_cbytes : msglen_t;
msg_qnum : msgqnum_t;
msg_qbytes : msglen_t;
msg_lspid : pid_t;
msg_lrpid : pid_t;
msg_stime : time_t;
msg_pad1 : clong;
msg_rtime : time_t;
msg_pad2 : clong;
msg_ctime : time_t;
msg_pad3 : clong;
msg_pad4 : Array[0..3] of clong;
end
This record should never be used directly, it is an internal kernel record. It’s fields may change at any
time.
TSEM = record
end
TSEM is a semaphore description record. It should be considered opaque, it’s structure is highly OS
and CPU dependent.
TSEMbuf = record
sem_num : cushort;
sem_op : cshort;
sem_flg : cshort;
end
The TSEMbuf record is used in the semop (833) call, and is used to specify which operations you
want to do.
TSEMid_ds = record
sem_perm : TIPC_Perm;
sem_base : PSEM;
sem_nsems : cushort;
sem_otime : time_t;
sem_pad1 : cint;
sem_ctime : time_t;
sem_pad2 : cint;
sem_pad3 : Array[0..3] of cint;
end
822
Structure returned by the semctl (828) call, contains all data of a semahore
TSEMinfo = record
semmap : cint;
semmni : cint;
semmns : cint;
semmnu : cint;
semmsl : cint;
semopm : cint;
semume : cint;
semusz : cint;
semvmx : cint;
semaem : cint;
end
Internal semaphore system record. Do not use.
TSEMun = record
case cint of
0: (
val : cint;
);
1: (
buf : PSEMid_ds;
);
2: (
arr : PWord;
);
end
Record used in semctl (828) call.
TSHMinfo = record
shmmax : cint;
shmmin : cint;
shmmni : cint;
shmseg : cint;
shmall : cint;
end
Record used by the shared memory system, Do not use directly.

58.4.1 ftok
Synopsis: Create token from filename
Declaration: function ftok(Path: PChar;ID: cint) : TKey
823
Visibility: default
Description: ftok returns a key that can be used in a semget (833)shmget (837) or msgget (826) call to access a
new or existing IPC resource.
Path is the name of a file in the file system, ID is a character of your choice. The ftok call does the
same as it’s C couterpart, so a pascal program and a C program will access the same resource if they
use the same Path and ID
For an example, see msgctl (824), semctl (828) or shmctl (834).
Errors: ftok returns -1 if the file in Path doesn’t exist.
See also: semget (833), shmget (837), msgget (826)
58.4.2 msgctl
Synopsis: Perform various operations on a message queue
Declaration: function msgctl(msqid: cint;cmd: cint;buf: PMSQid_ds) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: msgctl performs various operations on the message queue with id ID. Which operation is per-
formed, depends on the cmd parameter, which can have one of the following values:
IPC_STATIn this case, the msgctl call fills the TMSQid_ds structure with information about the
message queue.
IPC_SETin this case, the msgctl call sets the permissions of the queue as specified in the ipc_perm
record inside buf.
IPC_RMIDIf this is specified, the message queue will be removed from the system.
buf contains the data that are needed by the call. It can be Nil in case the message queue should
be removed.
The function returns True if successfull, False otherwise.
Errors: On error, False is returned, and IPCerror is set accordingly.
See also: msgget (826), msgsnd (827), msgrcv (827)
Listing: ./ipcex/msgtool.pp
program msgtool ;
Uses i p c , baseunix ;
Type
PMyMsgBuf = ^ TMyMsgBuf ;
TMyMsgBuf = record
mtype : Longint ;
mtext : string [ 2 5 5 ] ;
end ;
Procedure DoError ( Const Msg : s t r i n g ) ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( msg , ’ r e t u r n e d an e r r o r : ’ , fpgeterrno ) ;
halt ( 1 ) ;
824
end ;
Procedure SendMessage ( I d : L o n g i n t ;
Var Buf : TMyMsgBuf ;
MType : L o n g i n t ;
Const MText : S t r i n g ) ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Sending message . ’ ) ;
Buf . mtype : = mtype ;
Buf . Mtext : = mtext ;
I f msgsnd ( Id , PMsgBuf ( @Buf) ,256 ,0)= −1 then
DoError ( ’ msgsnd ’ ) ;
end ;
Procedure ReadMessage ( ID : L o n g i n t ;
Var Buf : TMyMsgBuf ;
MType : l o n g i n t ) ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Reading message . ’ ) ;
Buf . MType : = MType ;
I f msgrcv ( ID , PMSGBuf ( @Buf) , 2 5 6 , mtype ,0) < > −1 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Type : ’ , b u f . mtype , ’ Text : ’ , b u f . mtext )
else
DoError ( ’ msgrcv ’ ) ;
end ;
Procedure RemoveQueue ( ID : L o n g i n t ) ;
begin
I f m s g c t l ( i d , IPC_RMID , N i l )<>−1 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Removed Queue w i t h i d ’ , I d ) ;
end ;
Procedure ChangeQueueMode ( ID , mode : l o n g i n t ) ;
Var QueueDS : TMSQid_ds ;
begin
I f m s g c t l ( Id , IPC_STAT ,@QueueDS)= −1 then
DoError ( ’ m s g c t l : s t a t ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Old p e r m i s s i o n s : ’ ,QueueDS . msg_perm . mode ) ;
QueueDS . msg_perm . mode: =Mode ;
i f m s g c t l ( ID , IPC_SET ,@QueueDS) = 0 then
W r i t e l n ( ’New p e r m i s s i o n s : ’ ,QueueDS . msg_perm . mode )
else
DoError ( ’ m s g c t l : IPC_SET ’ ) ;
end ;
procedure usage ;
begin
Writeln ( ’ Usage : msgtool s ( end ) <type > < t e x t > ( max 2 5 5 c h a r a c t e r s ) ’ ) ;
Writeln ( ’ r ( e c e i v e ) < type > ’ ) ;
Writeln ( ’ d( elete ) ’ ) ;
Writeln ( ’ m( ode ) < decimal mode> ’ ) ;
halt ( 1 ) ;
825
end ;
Function S t r T o I n t ( S : S t r i n g ) : l o n g i n t ;
Var M : l o n g i n t ;
C : Integer ;
begin
v a l ( S ,M,C ) ;
I f C< >0 Then DoError ( ’ S t r T o I n t : ’ +S ) ;
S t r T o I n t : =M;
end ;
Var
Key : TKey ;
ID : l o n g i n t ;
Buf : TMyMsgBuf ;
const i p c k e y = ’ . ’ # 0 ;
begin
I f Paramcount <1 then Usage ;
key : = Ftok ( @ipckey [ 1 ] , ord ( ’M ’ ) ) ;
ID : = msgget ( key , IPC_CREAT or 4 3 8 ) ;
I f ID <0 then DoError ( ’ MsgGet ’ ) ;
Case upCase ( Paramstr ( 1 ) [ 1 ] ) of
’S ’ : I f ParamCount< >3 then
Usage
else
SendMessage ( i d , Buf , S t r T o I n t ( Paramstr ( 2 ) ) , paramstr ( 3 ) ) ;
’R ’ : I f ParamCount< >2 then
Usage
else
ReadMessage ( i d , buf , s t r t o i n t ( Paramstr ( 2 ) ) ) ;
’D ’ : I f ParamCount< >1 then
Usage
else
RemoveQueue ( ID ) ;
’M ’ : I f ParamCount< >2 then
Usage
else
ChangeQueueMode ( i d , s t r t o i n t ( paramstr ( 2 ) ) ) ;
else
Usage
end ;
end .
58.4.3 msgget
Synopsis: Return message queue ID, possibly creating the queue
Declaration: function msgget(key: TKey;msgflg: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: msgget returns the ID of the message queue described by key. Depending on the flags in msgflg,
a new queue is created.
826
msgflg can have one or more of the following values (combined by ORs):
IPC_CREATThe queue is created if it doesn’t already exist.

IPC_EXCLIf used in combination with IPC_CREAT, causes the call to fail if the queue already
exists. It cannot be used by itself.
Optionally, the flags can be ORed with a permission mode, which is the same mode that can be used
in the file system.
For an example, see msgctl (824).
Errors: On error, -1 is returned, and IPCError is set.
See also: ftok (823), msgsnd (827), msgrcv (827), msgctl (824)
58.4.4 msgrcv
Synopsis: Retrieve a message from the queue
Declaration: function msgrcv(msqid: cint;msgp: PMSGbuf;msgsz: size_t;msgtyp: clong;
msgflg: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: msgrcv retrieves a message of type msgtyp from the message queue with ID msqid. msgtyp
corresponds to the mtype field of the TMSGbuf record. The message is stored in the MSGbuf
structure pointed to by msgp.
The msgflg parameter can be used to control the behaviour of the msgrcv call. It consists of an
ORed combination of the following flags:
0No special meaning.

IPC_NOWAITif no messages are available, then the call returns immediately, with the ENOMSG
error.
MSG_NOERRORIf the message size is wrong (too large), no error is generated, instead the message
is truncated. Normally, in such cases, the call returns an error (E2BIG)
The function returns True if the message was received correctly, False otherwise.
Errors: In case of error, False is returned, and IPCerror is set.
See also: msgget (826), msgsnd (827), msgctl (824)
58.4.5 msgsnd
Synopsis: Send a message to the messague queue
Declaration: function msgsnd(msqid: cint;msgp: PMSGbuf;msgsz: size_t;msgflg: cint)
: cint
Visibility: default
Description: msgsend sends a message to a message queue with ID msqid. msgp is a pointer to a message
buffer, that should be based on the TMsgBuf type. msgsiz is the size of the message (NOT of the
message buffer record !)
The msgflg can have a combination of the following values (ORed together):
827
0No special meaning. The message will be written to the queue. If the queue is full, then the process
is blocked.
IPC_NOWAITIf the queue is full, then no message is written, and the call returns immediately.
The function returns True if the message was sent successfully, False otherwise.
Errors: In case of error, the call returns False, and IPCerror is set.
See also: msgget (826), msgrcv (827), msgctl (824)
58.4.6 semctl
Synopsis: Perform various control operations on a semaphore set
Declaration: function semctl(semid: cint;semnum: cint;cmd: cint;var arg: TSEMun)
: cint
Visibility: default
Description: semctl performs various operations on the semaphore semnum w ith semaphore set id ID.
The arg parameter supplies the data needed for each call. This is a variant record that should be
filled differently, according to the command:
Type
TSEMun = record
case longint of
0 : ( val : longint );
1 : ( buf : PSEMid_ds );
2 : ( arr : PWord );
3 : ( padbuf : PSeminfo );
4 : ( padpad : pointer );
end;
Which operation is performed, depends on the cmd parameter, which can have one of the following
values:
IPC_STATIn this case, the arg record should have it’s buf field set to the address of a TSEMid_ds
record. The semctl call fills this TSEMid_ds structure with information about the semaphore
set.
IPC_SETIn this case, the arg record should have it’s buf field set to the address of a TSEMid_ds
record. The semctl call sets the permissions of the queue as specified in the ipc_perm
record.
IPC_RMIDIf this is specified, the semaphore set is removed from from the system.
GETALLIn this case, the arr field of arg should point to a memory area where the values of the
semaphores will be stored. The size of this memory area is \var{SizeOf(Word)* Number of
semaphores in the set}. This call will then fill the memory array with all the values of the
semaphores.
GETNCNTThis will fill the val field of the arg union with the number of processes waiting for
resources.
GETPIDsemctl returns the process ID of the process that performed the last semop (833) call.
GETVALsemctl returns the value of the semaphore with number semnum.
828
GETZCNTsemctl returns the number of processes waiting for semaphores that reach value zero.
SETALLIn this case, the arr field of arg should point to a memory area where the values of
the semaphores will be retrieved from. The size of this memory area is \var{SizeOf(Word)*
Number of semaphores in the set}. This call will then set the values of the semaphores from
the memory array.
SETVALThis will set the value of semaphore semnum to the value in the val field of the arg
parameter.
The function returns -1 on error.

Errors: The function returns -1 on error, and IPCerror is set accordingly.
See also: semget (833), semop (833)
Listing: ./ipcex/semtool.pp
Program semtool ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e use o f semaphores }
Uses i p c , baseunix ;
Const MaxSemValue = 5 ;
Procedure DoError ( Const Msg : S t r i n g ) ;

var
error : cint ;
begin
e r r o r := fpgeterrno ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ E r r o r : ’ ,msg , ’ Code : ’ , e r r o r ) ;
Halt ( 1 ) ;
end ;
Function getsemval ( ID , Member : l o n g i n t ) : l o n g i n t ;
Var S : TSEMun ;
begin
GetSemVal : = SemCtl ( i d , member , SEM_GETVAL, S ) ;
end ;
Procedure DispVal ( ID , member : l o n g i n t ) ;
begin
w r i t e l n ( ’ Value f o r member ’ ,member , ’ i s ’ , GetSemVal ( ID , Member ) ) ;
end ;
Function GetMemberCount ( ID : L o n g i n t ) : l o n g i n t ;
Var o p t s : TSEMun ;
semds : TSEMid_ds ;
begin
o p t s . b u f : =@semds ;
I f s e m c t l ( Id , 0 , IPC_STAT , o p t s )<>−1 then
GetMemberCount : = semds . sem_nsems
else
GetMemberCount := −1;
829
end ;
Function OpenSem ( Key : TKey ) : L o n g i n t ;
begin
OpenSem: = semget ( Key , 0 , 4 3 8 ) ;
I f OpenSem=−1 then
DoError ( ’OpenSem ’ ) ;
end ;
Function CreateSem ( Key : TKey ; Members : L o n g i n t ) : L o n g i n t ;
Var Count : L o n g i n t ;
Semopts : TSemun ;
begin
/ / t h e semmsl c o n s t a n t seems k e r n e l s p e c i f i c
{ I f members>semmsl then
DoError ( ’ Sorry , maximum number o f semaphores i n s e t exceeded ’ ) ;
}
W r i t e l n ( ’ T r y i n g t o c r e a t e a new semaphore s e t w i t h ’ , members , ’ members . ’ ) ;
CreateSem : = semget ( key , members , IPC_CREAT or IPC_Excl or 4 3 8 ) ;
I f CreateSem=−1 then
DoError ( ’ Semaphore s e t a l r e a d y e x i s t s . ’ ) ;
Semopts . v a l : = MaxSemValue ; { I n i t i a l v a l u e o f semaphores }
For Count : = 0 to Members−1 do
s e m c t l ( CreateSem , count , SEM_SETVAL, semopts ) ;
end ;
Procedure lockSem ( ID , Member : L o n g i n t ) ;
Var l o c k : TSEMbuf ;
begin
With l o c k do
begin
sem_num : = 0 ;
sem_op:= −1;
sem_flg : =IPC_NOWAIT ;
end ;
i f ( member < 0 ) or ( member>GetMemberCount ( ID ) − 1) then
DoError ( ’ semaphore member o u t o f range ’ ) ;
i f getsemval ( ID , member ) = 0 then
DoError ( ’ Semaphore r e s o u r c e s exhausted ( no l o c k ) ’ ) ;
l o c k . sem_num: = member ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ A t t e m p t i n g t o l o c k member ’ ,member , ’ o f semaphore ’ , ID ) ;
i f semop ( Id , @lock ,1)= −1 then
DoError ( ’ Lock f a i l e d ’ )
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ Semaphore r e s o u r c e s decremented by one ’ ) ;
d i s p v a l ( ID , Member ) ;
end ;
Procedure UnlockSem ( ID , Member : L o n g i n t ) ;
Var Unlock : TSEMbuf ;
begin
830
With Unlock do
begin
sem_num : = 0 ;
sem_op : = 1 ;
sem_flg : =IPC_NOWAIT ;
end ;
i f ( member < 0 ) or ( member>GetMemberCount ( ID ) − 1) then
DoError ( ’ semaphore member o u t o f range ’ ) ;
i f getsemval ( ID , member)= MaxSemValue then
DoError ( ’ Semaphore n o t l o c k e d ’ ) ;
Unlock . sem_num: = member ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ A t t e m p t i n g t o u n l o c k member ’ ,member , ’ o f semaphore ’ , ID ) ;
i f semop ( Id , @unlock ,1)= −1 then
DoError ( ’ Unlock f a i l e d ’ )
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ Semaphore r e s o u r c e s incremented by one ’ ) ;
d i s p v a l ( ID , Member ) ;
end ;
Procedure RemoveSem ( ID : l o n g i n t ) ;
var S : TSemun ;
begin
I f s e m c t l ( Id , 0 , IPC_RMID , s)<>−1 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Semaphore removed ’ )
else
DoError ( ’ Couldn ’ ’ t remove semaphore ’ ) ;
end ;
Procedure ChangeMode ( ID , Mode : l o n g i n t ) ;
Var r c : l o n g i n t ;
o p t s : TSEMun ;
semds : TSEMid_ds ;
begin
o p t s . b u f : =@semds ;
I f not s e m c t l ( Id , 0 , IPC_STAT , o p t s )<>−1 then
DoError ( ’ Couldn ’ ’ t s t a t semaphore ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Old p e r m i s s i o n s were : ’ , semds . sem_perm . mode ) ;
semds . sem_perm . mode: =mode ;
I f s e m c t l ( i d , 0 , IPC_SET , o p t s )<>−1 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Set p e r m i s s i o n s t o ’ ,mode )
else
DoError ( ’ Couldn ’ ’ t s e t p e r m i s s i o n s ’ ) ;
end ;
Procedure PrintSem ( ID : l o n g i n t ) ;
Var I , c n t : l o n g i n t ;
begin
c n t : = getmembercount ( ID ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Semaphore ’ , ID , ’ has ’ , cnt , ’ Members ’ ) ;
For I : = 0 to cnt −1 Do
DispVal ( i d , i ) ;
831
end ;
Procedure USage ;
begin
Writeln ( ’ Usage : semtool c ( r e a t e ) < count > ’ ) ;
Writeln ( ’ l ( ock ) < member> ’ ) ;
Writeln ( ’ u ( n l o c k ) < member> ’ ) ;
Writeln ( ’ d( elete ) ’ ) ;
Writeln ( ’ m( ode ) < mode> ’ ) ;
Writeln ( ’ p( rint ) ’ );
halt ( 1 ) ;
end ;
Function S t r T o I n t ( S : S t r i n g ) : l o n g i n t ;
Var M : l o n g i n t ;
C : Integer ;
begin
v a l ( S ,M,C ) ;
I f C< >0 Then DoError ( ’ S t r T o I n t : ’ +S ) ;
S t r T o I n t : =M;
end ;
Var Key : TKey ;

ID : L o n g i n t ;
const i p c k e y = ’ . ’ # 0 ;
begin
I f ParamCount <1 then USage ;
key : = f t o k ( @ipckey [ 1 ] ,ORD( ’ s ’ ) ) ;
Case UpCase ( Paramstr ( 1 ) [ 1 ] ) of
’C ’ : begin
i f paramcount < >2 then usage ;
CreateSem ( key , s t r t o i n t ( paramstr ( 2 ) ) ) ;
end ;
’ L ’ : begin
ID : =OpenSem ( key ) ;
LockSem ( ID , s t r t o i n t ( paramstr ( 2 ) ) ) ;
end ;
’U ’ : begin
UnLockSem ( ID , s t r t o i n t ( paramstr ( 2 ) ) ) ;
end ;
’M ’ : begin
ChangeMode ( ID , s t r t o i n t ( paramstr ( 2 ) ) ) ;
end ;
’D ’ : Begin
ID : =OpenSem( Key ) ;
RemoveSem( I d ) ;
end ;
832
’P ’ : begin
ID : =OpenSem( Key ) ;
PrintSem ( I d ) ;
end ;
else
Usage
end ;
end .
58.4.7 semget
Synopsis: Return the ID of a semaphore set, possibly creating the set
Declaration: function semget(key: TKey;nsems: cint;semflg: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: msgget returns the ID of the semaphore set described by key. Depending on the flags in semflg,
a new queue is created.
semflg can have one or more of the following values (combined by ORs):

IPC_EXCLIf used in combination with IPC_CREAT, causes the call to fail if the set already exists.
It cannot be used by itself.
in the file system.
if a new set of semaphores is created, then there will be nsems semaphores in it.

See also: ftok (823), semop (833), semctl (828)
58.4.8 semop
Synopsis: Perform semaphore operation.
Declaration: function semop(semid: cint;sops: PSEMbuf;nsops: cuint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: semop performs a set of operations on a message queue. sops points to an array of type TSEMbuf.
The array should contain nsops elements.
The fields of the TSEMbuf (822) structure
TSEMbuf = record
sem_num : word;
sem_op : integer;
sem_flg : integer;
should be filled as follows:
sem_numThe number of the semaphore in the set on which the operation must be performed.
833
sem_opThe operation to be performed. The operation depends on the sign of sem_op: A positive
number is simply added to the current value of the semaphore. If 0 (zero) is specified, then
the process is suspended until the specified semaphore reaches zero. If a negative number
is specified, it is substracted from the current value of the semaphore. If the value would
become negative then the process is suspended until the value becomes big enough, unless
IPC_NOWAIT is specified in the sem_flg.
sem_flgOptional flags: if IPC_NOWAIT is specified, then the calling process will never be sus-
pended.
The function returns True if the operations were successful, False otherwise.
Errors: In case of error, False is returned, and IPCerror is set.
See also: semget (833), semctl (828)
58.4.9 shmat
Synopsis: Attach a shared memory block.
Declaration: function shmat(shmid: cint;shmaddr: pointer;shmflg: cint) : pointer
Visibility: default
Description: shmat attaches a shared memory block with identified shmid to the current process. The function
returns a pointer to the shared memory block.
If shmaddr is Nil, then the system chooses a free unmapped memory region, as high up in memory
space as possible.
If shmaddr is non-nil, and SHM_RND is in shmflg, then the returned address is shmaddr,
rounded down to SHMLBA. If SHM_RND is not specified, then shmaddr must be a page-aligned
address.
The parameter shmflg can be used to control the behaviour of the shmat call. It consists of a
ORed combination of the following constants:
SHM_RNDThe suggested address in shmaddr is rounded down to SHMLBA.

SHM_RDONLYthe shared memory is attached for read access only. Otherwise the memory is
attached for read-write. The process then needs read-write permissions to access the shared
memory.
For an example, see shmctl (834).

Errors: If an error occurs, -1 is returned, and IPCerror is set.
See also: shmget (837), shmdt (837), shmctl (834)
58.4.10 shmctl
Synopsis: Perform control operations on a shared memory block.
Declaration: function shmctl(shmid: cint;cmd: cint;buf: PShmid_DS) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: shmctl performs various operations on the shared memory block identified by identifier shmid.
The buf parameter points to a TSHMid_ds record. The cmd parameter is used to pass which
operation is to be performed. It can have one of the following values :
834
IPC_STATshmctl fills the TSHMid_ds record that buf points to with the available information
about the shared memory block.
IPC_SETapplies the values in the ipc_perm record that buf points to, to the shared memory
block.
IPC_RMIDthe shared memory block is destroyed (after all processes to which the block is attached,
have detached from it).
If successful, the function returns True, False otherwise.

Errors: If an error occurs, the function returns False, and IPCerror is set.
See also: shmget (837), shmat (834), shmdt (837)
Listing: ./ipcex/shmtool.pp
Program shmtool ;
uses i p c , s t r i n g s , Baseunix ;
Const SegSize = 1 0 0 ;
var key : Tkey ;

shmid , c n t r : l o n g i n t ;
s e g p t r : pchar ;
Procedure USage ;
begin
Writeln ( ’ Usage : shmtool w( r i t e ) t e x t ’ ) ;
writeln ( ’ r ( ead ) ’ ) ;
writeln ( ’ d( elete ) ’ ) ;
writeln ( ’ m( ode change ) mode ’ ) ;
halt ( 1 ) ;
end ;
Procedure Writeshm ( ID : L o n g i n t ; p t r : pchar ; S : s t r i n g ) ;
begin
strpcopy ( ptr , s ) ;
end ;
Procedure Readshm ( ID : l o n g i n t ; p t r : pchar ) ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Read : ’ , ptr ) ;
end ;
Procedure removeshm ( ID : L o n g i n t ) ;
begin
s h m c t l ( ID , IPC_RMID , N i l ) ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ Shared memory marked f o r d e l e t i o n ’ ) ;
end ;
Procedure CHangeMode ( ID : l o n g i n t ; mode : S t r i n g ) ;
Var m : word ;
code : i n t e g e r ;
835
data : TSHMid_ds ;
begin
v a l ( mode ,m, code ) ;
i f code < >0 then
usage ;
I f s h m c t l ( shmid , IPC_STAT , @data)= −1 then
begin
writeln ( ’ Error : shmctl : ’ , fpgeterrno ) ;
halt ( 1 ) ;
end ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ Old p e r m i s s i o n s : ’ , data . shm_perm . mode ) ;
data . shm_perm . mode: =m;
I f s h m c t l ( shmid , IPC_SET , @data)= −1 then
begin
writeln ( ’ Error : shmctl : ’ , fpgeterrno ) ;
halt ( 1 ) ;
end ;
w r i t e l n ( ’New p e r m i s s i o n s : ’ , data . shm_perm . mode ) ;
end ;
const f t o k p a t h = ’ . ’ # 0 ;
begin
i f paramcount <1 then usage ;
key : = f t o k ( pchar ( @ftokpath [ 1 ] ) , ord ( ’S ’ ) ) ;
shmid : = shmget ( key , segsize , IPC_CREAT or IPC_EXCL or 4 3 8 ) ;
I f shmid=−1 then
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Shared memory e x i s t s . Opening as c l i e n t ’ ) ;
shmid : = shmget ( key , segsize , 0 ) ;
I f shmid = − 1 then
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ shmget : E r r o r ! ’ , f p g e t e r r n o ) ;
halt ( 1 ) ;
end
end
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ C r e a t i n g new shared memory segment . ’ ) ;
s e g p t r : = shmat ( shmid , n i l , 0 ) ;
i f l o n g i n t ( s e g p t r )= −1 then
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Shmat : e r r o r ! ’ , f p g e t e r r n o ) ;
halt ( 1 ) ;
end ;
case upcase ( paramstr ( 1 ) [ 1 ] ) of
’W’ : writeshm ( shmid , s e g p t r , paramstr ( 2 ) ) ;
’R ’ : readshm ( shmid , s e g p t r ) ;
’D ’ : removeshm ( shmid ) ;
’M ’ : changemode ( shmid , paramstr ( 2 ) ) ;
else
begin
w r i t e l n ( paramstr ( 1 ) ) ;
usage ;
end ;
end ;
end .
836
58.4.11 shmdt
Synopsis: Detach shared memory block.
Declaration: function shmdt(shmaddr: pointer) : cint

Visibility: default
Description: shmdt detaches the shared memory at address shmaddr. This shared memory block is unavailable
to the current process, until it is attached again by a call to shmat (834).
The function returns True if the memory block was detached successfully, False otherwise.
Errors: On error, False is returned, and IPCerror is set.
See also: shmget (837), shmat (834), shmctl (834)
58.4.12 shmget
Synopsis: Return the ID of a shared memory block, possibly creating it
Declaration: function shmget(key: TKey;size: size_t;flag: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: shmget returns the ID of a shared memory block, described by key. Depending on the flags in
flag, a new memory block is created.
flag can have one or more of the following values (combined by ORs):

IPC_EXCLIf used in combination with IPC_CREAT, causes the call to fail if the queue already
exists. It cannot be used by itself.
in the file system.
if a new memory block is created, then it will have size Size bytes in it.
837
Chapter 59
Reference for unit ’keyboard’
59.1 Overview
The Keyboard unit implements a keyboard access layer which is system independent. It can be used
to poll the keyboard state and wait for certain events. Waiting for a keyboard event can be done with
the GetKeyEvent (852) function, which will return a driver-dependent key event. This key event can
be translated to a interpretable event by the TranslateKeyEvent (861) function. The result of this
function can be used in the other event examining functions.
A custom keyboard driver can be installed using the SetKeyboardDriver (860) function. The current
keyboard driver can be retrieved using the GetKeyboardDriver (852) function. The last section of
this chapter demonstrates how to make a keyboard driver.
59.2 Unix specific notes

On Unix, applications run on a "terminal", and the application writes to the screen and reads from
the keyboard by communicating with the terminal. Unix keyboard handling is mostly backward
compatible with the DEC vt100 and vt220 terminals from tens of years ago. The vt100 and vt220
had very different keyboards than todays PC’s and this is where the problems start. To make it worse
the protocol of both terminals has not been very well designed.
Because of this, the keyboard unit on Unix operating systems does a best effort to provide keyboard
functionality. An implementation with full keyboard facilities like on other operating systems is not
possible.
The exception is the Linux kernel. The terminal emulation of the Linux kernel is from a PC keyboard
viewpoint hopeless as well, but unlike other terminal emulators it is configurable. On the Linux
console, the Free Pascal keyboard unit tries to implement full functionality.
Users of applications using the keyboard unit should expect the following:
• Full functionality on the Linux console. It must be the bare console, SSH into another machine
will kill the full functionality.
• Limited functionality otherwise.
Notes about Linux full functionality:
• The keyboard is reprogrammed. If the keyboard is for whatever reason not restored in its
original state, please load your keymap to reinitialize it.
838
CHAPTER 59. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’KEYBOARD’
• Alt+function keys generate keycodes for those keys. To switch virtual consoles, use ctrl+alt+function
key.
• Unlike what you’re used to with other Unix software, escape works as you intuitively expect,
it generates the keycode for an escape key without a delay.
The limited functionality does include these quirks:
• Escape must be pressed two times before it has effect.

• On the Linux console, when the users runs the program by logging into another machine:
– Shift+F1 and Shift+F12 will generate keycodes for F11 and F12.
– Shift+arrow keys, shift+ins, shift+del, shift+home, shift+end do not work. The same is
true about the control and alt combinations.
– Alt+function keys will switch virtual consoles instead of generating the right key se-
quences.
– Ctrl+function keys will generate the keycodes for the function keys without ctrl
• In Xterm:
– Shift+insert pastes the x clipboard, no keycode will be generated.
• In Konsole:
– Shift+insert pastes the x clipboard, no keycode will be generated.

– Shift+arrow keys doesn’t work, nor does ctrl+arrow keys
If you have a non-standard terminal, some keys may not work at all. When in limited functionality
mode, the user can work around using an escape prefix:
• Esc+1 = F1, Esc+2 = F2.

• Esc before another key is equal to alt+key.
In such cases, if the terminal does output an escape sequence for those keys, please submit a bug
report so we can add them.
59.3 Writing a keyboard driver

Writing a keyboard driver means that hooks must be created for most of the keyboard unit functions.
The TKeyBoardDriver record contains a field for each of the possible hooks:
TKeyboardDriver = Record
InitDriver : Procedure;
DoneDriver : Procedure;
GetKeyEvent : Function : TKeyEvent;
PollKeyEvent : Function : TKeyEvent;
GetShiftState : Function : Byte;
TranslateKeyEvent : Function (KeyEvent: TKeyEvent): TKeyEvent;
TranslateKeyEventUniCode: Function (KeyEvent: TKeyEvent): TKeyEvent;
end;
839
The meaning of these hooks is explained below:
InitDriver Called to initialize and enable the driver. Guaranteed to be called only once. This should
initialize all needed things for the driver.
DoneDriver Called to disable and clean up the driver. Guaranteed to be called after a call to
initDriver. This should clean up all things initialized by InitDriver.
GetKeyEvent Called by GetKeyEvent (852). Must wait for and return the next key event. It should
NOT store keys.
PollKeyEvent Called by PollKeyEvent (857). It must return the next key event if there is one.
Should not store keys.
GetShiftState Called by PollShiftStateEvent (858). Must return the current shift state.
TranslateKeyEvent Should translate a raw key event to a cOrrect key event, i.e. should fill in the
shiftstate and convert function key scancodes to function key keycodes. If the TranslateKeyEvent
is not filled in, a default translation function will be called which converts the known scancodes
from the tables in the previous section to a correct keyevent.
TranslateKeyEventUniCode Should translate a key event to a unicode key representation.
Strictly speaking, only the GetKeyEvent and PollKeyEvent hooks must be implemented for
the driver to function correctly.
The example unit demonstrates how a keyboard driver can be installed. It takes the installed driver,
and hooks into the GetKeyEvent function to register and log the key events in a file. This driver
can work on top of any other driver, as long as it is inserted in the uses clause after the real driver
unit, and the real driver unit should set the driver record in its initialization section.
Note that with a simple extension of this unit could be used to make a driver that is capable of
recording and storing a set of keyboard strokes, and replaying them at a later time, so a ’keyboard
macro’ capable driver. This driver could sit on top of any other driver.
Listing: ./kbdex/logkeys.pp
unit logkeys ;
interface
Procedure St ar tK ey Log gi ng ;
Procedure StopKeyLogging ;
Function IsKeyLogging : Boolean ;
Procedure SetKeyLogFileName ( FileName : S t r i n g ) ;
implementation
uses s y s u t i l s , keyboard ;
var
NewKeyBoardDriver ,
OldKeyBoardDriver : TKeyboardDriver ;
A c t i v e , Logging : Boolean ;
LogFileName : S t r i n g ;
KeyLog : Text ;
Function TimeStamp : S t r i n g ;
840
begin
TimeStamp : = FormatDateTime ( ’ hh : nn : ss ’ , Time ( ) ) ;
end ;
Procedure St ar tK ey Log gi ng ;
begin
Logging : = True ;
W r i t e l n ( KeyLog , ’ S t a r t l o g g i n g k e y s t r o k e s a t : ’ , TimeStamp ) ;
end ;
Procedure StopKeyLogging ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( KeyLog , ’ Stop l o g g i n g k e y s t r o k e s a t : ’ , TimeStamp ) ;
Logging : = False ;
end ;
Function IsKeyLogging : Boolean ;
begin
IsKeyLogging : = Logging ;
end ;
Function LogGetKeyEvent : TKeyEvent ;
Var
K : TKeyEvent ;
begin
K: = O l d k e y b o a r d D r i v e r . GetKeyEvent ( ) ;
I f Logging then
begin
Write ( KeyLog , TimeStamp , ’ : Key event : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( KeyLog , KeyEventToString ( TranslateKeyEvent (K ) ) ) ;
end ;
LogGetKeyEvent : =K ;
end ;
Procedure Lo gI ni tK eyB oa rd ;
begin
OldKeyBoardDriver . I n i t D r i v e r ( ) ;
Assign ( KeyLog , logFileName ) ;
Rewrite ( KeyLog ) ;
A c t i v e : = True ;
S t a r t K ey Log gi ng ;
end ;
Procedure LogDoneKeyBoard ;
begin
StopKeyLogging ;
Close ( KeyLog ) ;
A c t i v e : = False ;
OldKeyBoardDriver . DoneDriver ( ) ;
end ;
841
Procedure SetKeyLogFileName ( FileName : S t r i n g ) ;
begin
I f Not A c t i v e then
LogFileName : = FileName ;
end ;
Initialization
GetKeyBoardDriver ( OldKeyBoardDriver ) ;
NewKeyBoardDriver : = OldKeyBoardDriver ;
NewKeyBoardDriver . GetKeyEvent : = @LogGetKeyEvent ;
NewKeyBoardDriver . I n i t D r i v e r : = @LogInitKeyboard ;
NewKeyBoardDriver . DoneDriver : = @LogDoneKeyboard ;
LogFileName : = ’ keyboard . l o g ’ ;
Logging : = False ;
SetKeyboardDriver ( NewKeyBoardDriver ) ;
end .
Listing: ./kbdex/ex9.pp
program example9 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e l o g k e y s u n i t }
uses keyboard , l o g k e y s ;
Var
K : TKeyEvent ;
begin
InitKeyBoard ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Press keys , press " q " t o end , " s " t o g g l e s l o g g i n g . ’ ) ;
Repeat
K: = GetKeyEvent ;
K: = TranslateKeyEvent (K ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Got key : ’ , KeyEventToString (K ) ) ;
i f GetKeyEventChar (K)= ’ s ’ then
i f IsKeyLogging then
StopKeyLogging
else
St ar tK ey Log gi ng ;
U n t i l ( GetKeyEventChar (K)= ’ q ’ ) ;
DoneKeyBoard ;
end .
59.4 Keyboard scan codes

Special physical keys are encoded with the DOS scan codes for these keys in the second byte of
the TKeyEvent (849) type. A complete list of scan codes can be found in the below table. This
is the list of keys that is used by the default key event translation mechanism. When writing a
keyboard driver, either these constants should be returned by the various key event functions, or the
TranslateKeyEvent hook should be implemented by the driver.
842
Table 59.1: Key Scancodes
Code Key Code Key Code Key

00 NoKey 3D F3 70 ALT-F9
01 ALT-Esc 3E F4 71 ALT-F10
02 ALT-Space 3F F5 72 CTRL-PrtSc
04 CTRL-Ins 40 F6 73 CTRL-Left
05 SHIFT-Ins 41 F7 74 CTRL-Right
06 CTRL-Del 42 F8 75 CTRL-end
07 SHIFT-Del 43 F9 76 CTRL-PgDn
08 ALT-Back 44 F10 77 CTRL-Home
09 ALT-SHIFT-Back 47 Home 78 ALT-1
0F SHIFT-Tab 48 Up 79 ALT-2
10 ALT-Q 49 PgUp 7A ALT-3
11 ALT-W 4B Left 7B ALT-4
12 ALT-E 4C Center 7C ALT-5
13 ALT-R 4D Right 7D ALT-6
14 ALT-T 4E ALT-GrayPlus 7E ALT-7
15 ALT-Y 4F end 7F ALT-8
16 ALT-U 50 Down 80 ALT-9
17 ALT-I 51 PgDn 81 ALT-0
18 ALT-O 52 Ins 82 ALT-Minus
19 ALT-P 53 Del 83 ALT-Equal
1A ALT-LftBrack 54 SHIFT-F1 84 CTRL-PgUp
1B ALT-RgtBrack 55 SHIFT-F2 85 F11
1E ALT-A 56 SHIFT-F3 86 F12
1F ALT-S 57 SHIFT-F4 87 SHIFT-F11
20 ALT-D 58 SHIFT-F5 88 SHIFT-F12
21 ALT-F 59 SHIFT-F6 89 CTRL-F11
22 ALT-G 5A SHIFT-F7 8A CTRL-F12
23 ALT-H 5B SHIFT-F8 8B ALT-F11
24 ALT-J 5C SHIFT-F9 8C ALT-F12
25 ALT-K 5D SHIFT-F10 8D CTRL-Up
26 ALT-L 5E CTRL-F1 8E CTRL-Minus
27 ALT-SemiCol 5F CTRL-F2 8F CTRL-Center
28 ALT-Quote 60 CTRL-F3 90 CTRL-GreyPlus
29 ALT-OpQuote 61 CTRL-F4 91 CTRL-Down
2B ALT-BkSlash 62 CTRL-F5 94 CTRL-Tab
2C ALT-Z 63 CTRL-F6 97 ALT-Home
2D ALT-X 64 CTRL-F7 98 ALT-Up
2E ALT-C 65 CTRL-F8 99 ALT-PgUp
2F ALT-V 66 CTRL-F9 9B ALT-Left
30 ALT-B 67 CTRL-F10 9D ALT-Right
31 ALT-N 68 ALT-F1 9F ALT-end
32 ALT-M 69 ALT-F2 A0 ALT-Down
33 ALT-Comma 6A ALT-F3 A1 ALT-PgDn
34 ALT-Period 6B ALT-F4 A2 ALT-Ins
35 ALT-Slash 6C ALT-F5 A3 ALT-Del
37 ALT-GreyAst 6D ALT-F6 A5 ALT-Tab
3B F1 6E ALT-F7
3C F2 6F ALT-F8
843
A list of scan codes for special keys and combinations with the SHIFT, ALT and CTRL keys can be
found in the following table: They are for quick reference only.
Table 59.2: Special keys scan codes
Key Code SHIFT-Key CTRL-Key Alt-Key

NoKey 00
F1 3B 54 5E 68
F2 3C 55 5F 69
F3 3D 56 60 6A
F4 3E 57 61 6B
F5 3F 58 62 6C
F6 40 59 63 6D
F7 41 5A 64 6E
F8 42 5B 65 6F
F9 43 5C 66 70
F10 44 5D 67 71
F11 85 87 89 8B
F12 86 88 8A 8C
Home 47 77 97
Up 48 8D 98
PgUp 49 84 99
Left 4B 73 9B
Center 4C 8F
Right 4D 74 9D
end 4F 75 9F
Down 50 91 A0
PgDn 51 76 A1
Ins 52 05 04 A2
Del 53 07 06 A3
Tab 8 0F 94 A5
GreyPlus 90 4E

59.5.1 Constants
AltPrefix : Byte = 0
Keycode for alternate prefix key for Alt key. Unix Only
CtrlPrefix : Byte = 0
Keycode for alternate prefix key for Ctrl key. Unix only
errKbdBase = 1010
Base of keyboard routine error reporting constants.
errKbdInitError = errKbdBase + 0
844
Failed to initialize keyboard driver
errKbdNotImplemented = errKbdBase + 1
Keyboard driver not implemented.
kbAlt = 8
Alt key modifier
kbASCII = $00
Ascii code key event
kbCtrl = 4
Control key modifier
kbdApps = $FF17
Application key (popup-menu) pressed.
kbdDelete = $FF2A
Delete key pressed
kbdDown = $FF27
Arrow down key pressed
kbdEnd = $FF26
End key pressed
kbdF1 = $FF01
F1 function key pressed.
kbdF10 = $FF0A
kbdF11 = $FF0B
kbdF12 = $FF0C
kbdF13 = $FF0D
845
kbdF14 = $FF0E
kbdF15 = $FF0F
kbdF16 = $FF10
kbdF17 = $FF11
kbdF18 = $FF12
kbdF19 = $FF13
kbdF2 = $FF02
kbdF20 = $FF14
kbdF3 = $FF03
kbdF4 = $FF04
kbdF5 = $FF05
kbdF6 = $FF06
kbdF7 = $FF07
846
kbdF8 = $FF08
kbdF9 = $FF09
kbdHome = $FF20
Home key pressed
kbdInsert = $FF29
Insert key pressed
kbdLeft = $FF23
Arrow left key pressed
kbdLWin = $FF15
Left windows key pressed.
kbdMiddle = $FF24
Middle key pad key pressed (numerical 5)
kbdPgDn = $FF28
Page down key pressed
kbdPgUp = $FF22
Page Up key pressed
kbdRight = $FF25
Arrow right key pressed
kbdRWin = $FF16
Right windows key pressed.
kbdUp = $FF21
Arrow up key pressed
kbFnKey = $02
847
function key pressed.
kbLeftShift = 1
Left shift key modifier
kbPhys = $03
Physical key code event
kbReleased = $04
Key release event (not implemented in FPC)
kbRightShift = 2
Right shift key modifier
kbShift = kbLeftShift or kbRightShift
Shift key modifier
kbUniCode = $01
Unicode code key event
SAnd : string = ’AND’
This constant is used as the ’And’ word in key descriptions. This constant is used by the key event
description routines. It can be changed to localize the key descriptions when needed.
ShiftPrefix : Byte = 0
Keycode for alternate prefix key for Shift key. Unix Only
SKeyPad : Array[0..($FF2F-kbdHome)] of string = (’Home’, ’Up’, ’PgUp’, ’Left’, ’Middl
This constant describes all keypad keys. This constant is used by the key event description routines.
It can be changed to localize the key descriptions when needed.
SLeftRight : Array[1..2] of string = (’LEFT’, ’RIGHT’)
This constant contains strings to describe left and right keys. This constant is used by the key event
SScanCode : string = ’Key with scancode ’
This constant contains a string to denote a scancode key event. This constant is used by the key event
SShift : Array[1..3] of string = (’SHIFT’, ’CTRL’, ’ALT’)
848
This constant describes the various modifier keys. This constant is used by the key event description
routines. It can be changed to localize the key descriptions when needed.
SUnicodeChar : string = ’Unicode character ’
This constant contains a string to denote a unicode key event. This constant is used by the key event
SUnknownFunctionKey : string = ’Unknown function key : ’
This constant contains a string to denote that an unknown function key was found. This constant is
used by the key event description routines. It can be changed to localize the key descriptions when
needed.
59.5.2 Types
PTreeElement = ^TTreeElement
Pointer to TTreeElement (850) record
TKeyboardDriver = record
InitDriver : procedure;
DoneDriver : procedure;
GetKeyEvent : function : TKeyEvent;
PollKeyEvent : function : TKeyEvent;
GetShiftState : function : Byte;
TranslateKeyEvent : function(KeyEvent: TKeyEvent) : TKeyEvent;
TranslateKeyEventUniCode : function(KeyEvent: TKeyEvent) : TKeyEvent;
end
The TKeyboardDriver record can be used to install a custom keyboard driver with the SetKey-
boardDriver (860) function.
The various fields correspond to the different functions of the keyboard unit interface. For more
information about this record see kbddriver (839)
TKeyEvent = Cardinal
The TKeyEvent type is the base type for all keyboard events.
The key stroke is encoded in the 4 bytes of the TKeyEvent type. The various fields of the key stroke
encoding can be obtained by typecasting the TKeyEvent type to the TKeyRecord (849) type.
TKeyRecord = packed record

Flags : Byte;
ShiftState : Byte;
KeyCode : Word;
end
The structure of a TKeyRecord structure is explained in the following table:
849
Table 59.3: Structure of TKeyRecord
Field Meaning
KeyCode Depending on flags either the physical representation of a key (under DOS scancode, ascii code pair), or the t
ShiftState Shift-state when this key was pressed (or shortly after)
Flags Determine how to interpret KeyCode
The shift-state can be checked using the various shift-state constants, and the flags in the last byte
can be checked using one of the kbASCII, kbUniCode, kbFnKey, kbPhys, kbReleased constants.
If there are two keys returning the same char-code, there’s no way to find out which one was pressed
(Gray+ and Simple+). If it needs to be known which was pressed, the untranslated keycodes must
be used, but these are system dependent. System dependent constants may be defined to cover those,
with possibily having the same name (but different value).
Tprocedure = procedure
Procedure prototype
TTreeElement = record
Next : PTreeElement;
Parent : PTreeElement;
Child : PTreeElement;
CanBeTerminal : Boolean;
char : Byte;
ScanValue : Byte;
CharValue : Byte;
SpecialHandler : Tprocedure;
end
TTreeELement is used to describe key scancode sequences, and is used to handle special key
combinations in AddSpecialSequence (850) on unix platforms. There should be no need to handle
records of this type.

59.6.1 AddSequence
Declaration: procedure AddSequence(const St: string;AChar: Byte;AScan: Byte)
Visibility: default
59.6.2 AddSpecialSequence
Synopsis: Add a handler for a special key sequence
Declaration: function AddSpecialSequence(const St: string;Proc: Tprocedure)
: PTreeElement
Visibility: default
850
Description: AddSpecialSequence adds a sequence of key combinations to the keyboard handler. When the
key combination specified in st is encountered, then Proc will be executed. The function returns
the element in the special key sequence handling tree which handles st.
See also: AddSequence (850)
59.6.3 DoneKeyboard
Synopsis: Deactivate keyboard driver.
Declaration: procedure DoneKeyboard
Visibility: default
Description: DoneKeyboard de-initializes the keyboard interface if the keyboard driver is active. If the key-
board driver is not active, the function does nothing.
This will cause the keyboard driver to clear up any allocated memory, or restores the console or
terminal the program was running in to its initial state before the call to InitKeyBoard (856). This
function should be called on program exit. Failing to do so may leave the terminal or console window
in an unusable state. Its exact action depends on the platform on which the program is running.
On Unix the default keyboard driver restores the line ending of system.output to #10.
For an example, see most other functions.
Errors: None.
See also: InitKeyBoard (856)
59.6.4 FindSequence
Declaration: function FindSequence(const St: string;var AChar: Byte;var Ascan: Byte)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
59.6.5 FunctionKeyName
Synopsis: Return string representation of a function key code.
Declaration: function FunctionKeyName(KeyCode: Word) : string
Visibility: default
Description: FunctionKeyName returns a string representation of the function key with code KeyCode. This
can be an actual function key, or one of the cursor movement keys.
Errors: In case KeyCode does not contain a function code, the SUnknownFunctionKey string is re-
turned, appended with the KeyCode.
See also: ShiftStateToString (861), KeyEventToString (857)
851
Program Example8 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e FunctionKeyName f u n c t i o n . }
Uses keyboard ;
Var
K : TkeyEvent ;
begin
InitKeyboard ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Press f u n c t i o n keys , press " q " t o end . ’ ) ;
Repeat
K: = GetKeyEvent ;
I f I s F u n c t i o n K e y ( k ) then
begin
Write ( ’ Got f u n c t i o n key : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( FunctionKeyName ( TkeyRecord (K ) . KeyCode ) ) ;
end ;
DoneKeyboard ;
end .
59.6.6 GetKeyboardDriver
Synopsis: Return the current keyboard driver record.
Declaration: procedure GetKeyboardDriver(var Driver: TKeyboardDriver)
Visibility: default
Description: GetKeyBoardDriver returns in Driver the currently active keyboard driver. This function can
be used to enhance an existing keyboarddriver.
For more information on getting and setting the keyboard driver kbddriver (839).
Errors: None.
See also: SetKeyboardDriver (860)
59.6.7 GetKeyEvent
Synopsis: Get the next raw key event, wait if needed.
Declaration: function GetKeyEvent : TKeyEvent
Visibility: default
Description: GetKeyEvent returns the last keyevent if it is available, or waits for one if none is available. A
non-blocking version is available in PollKeyEvent (857).
The returned key is encoded as a TKeyEvent type variable, and is normally the physical key scan
code, (the scan code is driver dependent) which can be translated with one of the translation functions
TranslateKeyEvent (861) or TranslateKeyEventUniCode (861). See the types section for a descrip-
tion of how the key is described.
Errors: If no key became available (e.g. when the driver does not support it), 0 is returned.
852
See also: PutKeyEvent (859), PollKeyEvent (857), TranslateKeyEvent (861), TranslateKeyEventUniCode (861)
program example1 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e GetKeyEvent f u n c t i o n }
uses keyboard ;
Var
K : TKeyEvent ;
begin
InitKeyBoard ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Press keys , press " q " t o end . ’ ) ;
Repeat
K: = GetKeyEvent ;
Write ( ’ Got key event w i t h ’ ) ;
Case GetKeyEventFlags (K ) of
kbASCII : W r i t e l n ( ’ ASCII key ’ ) ;
kbUniCode : W r i t e l n ( ’ Unicode key ’ ) ;
kbFnKey : W r i t e l n ( ’ F u n c t i o n key ’ ) ;
kbPhys : W r i t e l n ( ’ P h y s i c a l key ’ ) ;
kbReleased : W r i t e l n ( ’ Released key event ’ ) ;
end ;
DoneKeyBoard ;
end .
59.6.8 GetKeyEventChar
Synopsis: Get the character key part of a key event.
Declaration: function GetKeyEventChar(KeyEvent: TKeyEvent) : Char

Visibility: default
Description: GetKeyEventChar returns the charcode part of the given KeyEvent, if it contains a translated
character key keycode. The charcode is simply the ascii code of the character key that was pressed.
It returns the null character if the key was not a character key, but e.g. a function key.
For an example, see GetKeyEvent (852)
Errors: None.
See also: GetKeyEventUniCode (855), GetKeyEventShiftState (855), GetKeyEventFlags (854), GetKeyEvent-
Code (853), GetKeyEvent (852)
59.6.9 GetKeyEventCode
Synopsis: Translate function key part of a key event code.
Declaration: function GetKeyEventCode(KeyEvent: TKeyEvent) : Word
853
Visibility: default
Description: GetKeyEventCode returns the translated function keycode part of the given KeyEvent, if it con-
tains a translated function key.
If the key pressed was not a function key, the null character is returned.
Errors: None.
See also: GetKeyEventUniCode (855), GetKeyEventShiftState (855), GetKeyEventFlags (854), GetKeyEventChar
(853), GetKeyEvent (852)
Program Example2 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GetKeyEventCode f u n c t i o n . }
Uses keyboard ;
Var
K : TKeyEvent ;
begin
InitKeyBoard ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Press f u n c t i o n keys , o r press " q " t o end . ’ ) ;
Repeat
K: = GetKeyEvent ;
I f ( GetKeyEventFlags (K)<> KbfnKey ) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Not a f u n c t i o n key ’ )
else
begin
Write ( ’ Got key ( ’ , GetKeyEventCode (K ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ ) : ’ , KeyEventToString (K ) ) ;
end ;
DoneKeyboard ;
end .
59.6.10 GetKeyEventFlags
Synopsis: Extract the flags from a key event.
Declaration: function GetKeyEventFlags(KeyEvent: TKeyEvent) : Byte
Visibility: default
Description: GetKeyEventFlags returns the flags part of the given KeyEvent.

Errors: None.
See also: GetKeyEventUniCode (855), GetKeyEventShiftState (855), GetKeyEventCode (853), GetKeyEventChar

854
59.6.11 GetKeyEventShiftState
Synopsis: Return the current state of the shift keys.
Declaration: function GetKeyEventShiftState(KeyEvent: TKeyEvent) : Byte

Visibility: default
Description: GetKeyEventShiftState returns the shift-state values of the given KeyEvent. This can be
used to detect which of the modifier keys Shift, Alt or Ctrl were pressed. If none were pressed,
zero is returned.
Note that this function does not always return expected results; In a unix X-Term, the modifier keys
do not always work.
Errors: None.
See also: GetKeyEventUniCode (855), GetKeyEventFlags (854), GetKeyEventCode (853), GetKeyEventChar

Program Example3 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e G e t K e y E v e n t S h i f t S t a t e f u n c t i o n . }
Uses keyboard ;
Var
K : TKeyEvent ;
S : Byte ;
begin
InitKeyBoard ;
Write ( ’ Press keys combined w i t h CTRL / SHIFT / ALT ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ , o r press " q " t o end . ’ ) ;
Repeat
K: = GetKeyEvent ;
S: = G e t K e y E v e n t S h i f t S t a t e (K ) ;
I f ( S= 0 ) then
W r i t e l n ( ’No s p e c i a l keys pressed ’ )
else
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Detected s p e c i a l keys : ’ , S h i f t S t a t e T o S t r i n g ( K , False ) ) ;
end ;
DoneKeyboard ;
end .
59.6.12 GetKeyEventUniCode
Synopsis: Return the unicode key event.
Declaration: function GetKeyEventUniCode(KeyEvent: TKeyEvent) : Word

Visibility: default
855
Description: GetKeyEventUniCode returns the unicode part of the given KeyEvent if it contains a trans-
lated unicode character.
Errors: None.
See also: GetKeyEventShiftState (855), GetKeyEventFlags (854), GetKeyEventCode (853), GetKeyEventChar
59.6.13 InitKeyboard
Synopsis: Initialize the keyboard driver.
Declaration: procedure InitKeyboard
Visibility: default
Description: InitKeyboard initializes the keyboard driver. If the driver is already active, it does nothing.
When the driver is initialized, it will do everything necessary to ensure the functioning of the key-
board, including allocating memory, initializing the terminal etc.
This function should be called once, before using any of the keyboard functions. When it is called,
the DoneKeyboard (851) function should also be called before exiting the program or changing the
keyboard driver with SetKeyboardDriver (860).
On Unix, the default keyboard driver sets terminal in raw mode. In raw mode the line feed behaves
as an actual linefeed, i.e. the cursor is moved down one line. while the x coordinate does not change.
To compensate, the default keyboard sets driver line ending of system.output to #13#10.
Errors: None.
See also: DoneKeyboard (851), SetKeyboardDriver (860)
59.6.14 IsFunctionKey
Synopsis: Check whether a given event is a function key event.
Declaration: function IsFunctionKey(KeyEvent: TKeyEvent) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IsFunctionKey returns True if the given key event in KeyEvent was a function key or not.
Errors: None.
See also: GetKeyEvent (852)
program example1 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e GetKeyEvent f u n c t i o n }
uses keyboard ;
Var
K : TKeyEvent ;
begin
856
InitKeyBoard ;
Repeat
K: = GetKeyEvent ;
I f I s F u n c t i o n K e y (K ) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Got f u n c t i o n key : ’ , KeyEventToString (K ) )
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ n o t a f u n c t i o n key . ’ ) ;
DoneKeyBoard ;
end .
59.6.15 KeyEventToString
Synopsis: Return a string describing the key event.
Declaration: function KeyEventToString(KeyEvent: TKeyEvent) : string
Visibility: default
Description: KeyEventToString translates the key event in KeyEvent to a human-readable description of
the pressed key. It will use the constants described in the constants section to do so.
Errors: If an unknown key is passed, the scancode is returned, prefixed with the SScanCode string.
See also: FunctionKeyName (851), ShiftStateToString (861)
59.6.16 KeyPressed
Synopsis: Check event queue for key press
Declaration: function KeyPressed : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: KeyPressed checks the keyboard event queue to see whether a key event is present, and returns
True if a key event is available. This function simply calls PollKeyEvent (857) and checks for a
valid result.
Errors: None.
See also: PollKeyEvent (857), GetKeyEvent (852)
59.6.17 PollKeyEvent
Synopsis: Get next key event, but does not wait.
Declaration: function PollKeyEvent : TKeyEvent
Visibility: default
Description: PollKeyEvent checks whether a key event is available, and returns it if one is found. If no event
is pending, it returns 0.
Note that this does not remove the key from the pending keys. The key should still be retrieved from
the pending key events list with the GetKeyEvent (852) function.
857
Errors: None.
See also: PutKeyEvent (859), GetKeyEvent (852)
program example4 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e PollKeyEvent f u n c t i o n }
uses keyboard ;
Var
K : TKeyEvent ;
begin
InitKeyBoard ;
Repeat
K: = PollKeyEvent ;
I f k < >0 then
begin
K: = GetKeyEvent ;
writeln ;
end
else
write ( ’ . ’ ) ;
DoneKeyBoard ;
end .
59.6.18 PollShiftStateEvent
Synopsis: Check current shift state.
Declaration: function PollShiftStateEvent : TKeyEvent
Visibility: default
Description: PollShiftStateEvent returns the current shiftstate in a keyevent. This will return 0 if there is
no key event pending.
Errors: None.
program example6 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e P o l l S h i f t S t a t e E v e n t f u n c t i o n }
uses keyboard ;
Var
K : TKeyEvent ;
858
begin
InitKeyBoard ;
Repeat
K: = PollKeyEvent ;
I f k < >0 then
begin
K: = P o l l S h i f t S t a t e E v e n t ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Got s h i f t s t a t e : ’ , S h i f t S t a t e T o S t r i n g ( K , False ) ) ;
/ / Consume t h e key .
K: = GetKeyEvent ;
end
{ else
write ( ’ . ’ ) } ;
DoneKeyBoard ;
end .
59.6.19 PutKeyEvent
Synopsis: Put a key event in the event queue.
Declaration: procedure PutKeyEvent(KeyEvent: TKeyEvent)
Visibility: default
Description: PutKeyEvent adds the given KeyEvent to the input queue. Please note that depending on the
implementation this can hold only one value, i.e. when calling PutKeyEvent multiple times, only
the last pushed key will be remembered.
Errors: None
program example5 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e PutKeyEvent f u n c t i o n }
uses keyboard ;
Var
K , k2 : TKeyEvent ;
begin
InitKeyBoard ;
K2 : = 0 ;
Repeat
K: = GetKeyEvent ;
I f k < >0 then
begin
i f ( k2 mod 2 ) = 0 then
K2 : =K+1
else
859
K2 : = 0 ;
i f ( K2< >0) then
begin
PutKeyEvent ( k2 ) ;
K2 : = TranslateKeyEVent ( K2 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Put key : ’ , KeyEventToString ( K2 ) )
end
end
DoneKeyBoard ;
end .
59.6.20 RawReadKey
Declaration: function RawReadKey : Char
Visibility: default
59.6.21 RawReadString
Declaration: function RawReadString : string
Visibility: default
59.6.22 RestoreStartMode
Declaration: procedure RestoreStartMode
Visibility: default
59.6.23 SetKeyboardDriver
Synopsis: Set a new keyboard driver.
Declaration: function SetKeyboardDriver(const Driver: TKeyboardDriver) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: SetKeyBoardDriver sets the keyboard driver to Driver, if the current keyboard driver is not
yet initialized. If the current keyboard driver is initialized, then SetKeyboardDriver does noth-
ing. Before setting the driver, the currently active driver should be disabled with a call to DoneKey-
board (851).
The function returns True if the driver was set, False if not.
For more information on setting the keyboard driver, see kbddriver (839).
Errors: None.
See also: GetKeyboardDriver (852), DoneKeyboard (851)
860
59.6.24 ShiftStateToString
Synopsis: Return description of key event shift state
Declaration: function ShiftStateToString(KeyEvent: TKeyEvent;UseLeftRight: Boolean)

: string
Visibility: default
Description: ShiftStateToString returns a string description of the shift state of the key event KeyEvent.
This can be an empty string.
The shift state is described using the strings in the SShift constant.
For an example, see PollShiftStateEvent (858).
Errors: None.
See also: FunctionKeyName (851), KeyEventToString (857)
59.6.25 TranslateKeyEvent
Synopsis: Translate raw event to ascii key event
Declaration: function TranslateKeyEvent(KeyEvent: TKeyEvent) : TKeyEvent
Visibility: default
Description: TranslateKeyEvent performs ASCII translation of the KeyEvent. It translates a physical key
to a function key if the key is a function key, and translates the physical key to the ordinal of the ascii
character if there is an equivalent character key.
Errors: None.
See also: TranslateKeyEventUniCode (861)
59.6.26 TranslateKeyEventUniCode
Synopsis: Translate raw event to UNICode key event
Declaration: function TranslateKeyEventUniCode(KeyEvent: TKeyEvent) : TKeyEvent

Visibility: default
Description: TranslateKeyEventUniCode performs Unicode translation of the KeyEvent. It is not yet
implemented for all platforms.
Errors: If the function is not yet implemented, then the ErrorCode of the system unit will be set to
errKbdNotImplemented
See also: TranslateKeyEvent (861)
861
Chapter 60
Reference for unit ’lineinfo’
60.1 Overview
The lineinfo provides a routine that reads the debug information of an executable (if any exists) and
returns source code information about this address. It works with Stabs debug information. Note
that this unit is not thread-safe, and that its behaviour is undefined if multiple threads try to write a
backtrace at the same time.
For DWARF debug information, the lnfodwrf (891) unit must be used.

60.2.1 CloseStabs
Declaration: procedure CloseStabs
Visibility: default
60.2.2 GetLineInfo
Synopsis: Return source line information about an address.
Declaration: function GetLineInfo(addr: ptruint;var func: string;var source: string;
var line: LongInt) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: GetLineInfo returns source line information about the address addr. It searches this informa-
tion in the stabs debugging information found in the binary: If the file was compiled without debug
information, nothing will be returned. Upon succesful retrieval of the debug information, True is
returned, and the func parameter is filled with the name of the function in which the address is lo-
cated. The source parameter contains the name of the file in which the function was implemented,
and line contains the line number in the source file for addr.
Errors: If no debug information is found, False is returned.
60.2.3 StabBackTraceStr
Declaration: function StabBackTraceStr(addr: CodePointer) : string
862
CHAPTER 60. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’LINEINFO’
Visibility: default
863
Chapter 61
Reference for unit ’Linux’
61.1 Used units
Table 61.1: Used units by unit ’Linux’
Name Page
BaseUnix 113
System 1224
unixtype 1784
61.2 Overview
The linux unit contains linux specific operating system calls.
The platform independent functionality of the FPC 1.0.X version of the linux unit has been split out
over the unix (1747), baseunix (113) and unixutil (1799) units.
The X86-specific parts have been moved to the X86 (1833) unit.

61.3.1 Constants
CAP_AUDIT_CONTROL = 30
Allow manipulation of kernel auditing features
CAP_AUDIT_WRITE = 29
Allow writing to kernel audit log
CAP_CHOWN = 0
Perform chown operation
864
CHAPTER 61. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’LINUX’
CAP_DAC_OVERRIDE = 1
Bypass file operation (rwx) checks
CAP_DAC_READ_SEARCH = 2
Bypass file read-only operation checks
CAP_FOWNER = 3
Bypass owner ID checks
CAP_FSETID = 4
Do not clear SUID/GUID bits on modified files
CAP_FS_MASK = $1f
CAP_IPC_LOCK = 14
Allow memory locking calls
CAP_IPC_OWNER = 15
Bypass permission checks on IPC operations
CAP_KILL = 5
Bypass permission checks for sending signals
CAP_LEASE = 28
Allow file leases
CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE = 9
Allow setting ext2 file attributes
CAP_MKNOD = 27
Allow creation of special files through mknod calls
CAP_NET_ADMIN = 12
Allow network operations (e.g. setting socket options)
CAP_NET_BIND_SERVICE = 10
Allow binding to ports less than 1024
865
CAP_NET_BROADCAST = 11
Allow socket broadcast operations
CAP_NET_RAW = 13
Allow use of RAW and PACKET sockets
CAP_SETGID = 6
Allow GID manipulations
CAP_SETPCAP = 8
Allow to set other process’ capabilities
CAP_SETUID = 7
Allow process ID manipulations
CAP_SYS_ADMIN = 21
Allow various system administration calls
CAP_SYS_BOOT = 22
Allow reboot calls
CAP_SYS_CHROOT = 18
Allow chroot calls.
CAP_SYS_MODULE = 16
Allow loading/unloading of kernel modules
CAP_SYS_NICE = 23
Allowing raising process and thread priorities
CAP_SYS_PACCT = 20
Allow acct calls
CAP_SYS_PTRACE = 19
Allow ptrace calls
CAP_SYS_RAWIO = 17
Allow raw I/O port operations
866
CAP_SYS_RESOURCE = 24
Allow use of special resources or raising of resource limits
CAP_SYS_TIME = 25
Allow system or real-time clock modification
CAP_SYS_TTY_CONFIG = 26
Allow vhangup calls
CLOCKS_MASK = CLOCK_REALTIME or CLOCK_MONOTONIC
Mask for supported clocks
CLOCKS_MONO = CLOCK_MONOTONIC
Monotonic clocks mask
CLOCK_MONOTONIC = 1
Monotonic system time since some undetermined start point. Can change if time is set.
CLOCK_MONOTONIC_COARSE = 6
Less precise (but faster) version of CLOCK_MONOTONIC
CLOCK_MONOTONIC_RAW = 4
Like CLOCK_MONOTONIC, not subject to NTP adjustments
CLOCK_PROCESS_CPUTIME_ID = 2
Processs-specific high-resolution timer from the CPU.
CLOCK_REALTIME = 0
System wide real-time clock. Can only be set by root.
CLOCK_REALTIME_COARSE = 5
Less precise (but faster) version of CLOCK_REALTIME
CLOCK_SGI_CYCLE = 10
High resolution timer
CLOCK_THREAD_CPUTIME_ID = 3
Thread-specific high-resolution timer from the CPU.
867
CLONE_CHILD_CLEARTID = $00200000
Clone option: Erase child thread ID in child memory space when child exits.
CLONE_CHILD_SETTID = $01000000
Clone option: Store child thread ID in child memory.
CLONE_DETACHED = $00400000
Clone option: Start clone detached.
CLONE_FILES = $00000400
Clone (882) option: open files shared between processes
CLONE_FS = $00000200
Clone (882) option: fs info shared between processes
CLONE_NEWNS = $00020000
Clone options: Start child in new (filesystem) namespace.
CLONE_PARENT = $00008000
Clone options: Set child parent to parent of calling process.
CLONE_PARENT_SETTID = $00100000
Clone option: Store child thread ID in memory in both parent and child.
CLONE_PID = $00001000
Clone (882) option: PID shared between processes
CLONE_PTRACE = $00002000
Clone options: if parent is traced, trace child also
CLONE_SETTLS = $00080000
Clone option: The newtls parameter is the TLS descriptor of the child
CLONE_SIGHAND = $00000800
Clone (882) option: signal handlers shared between processes
CLONE_STOPPED = $02000000
Clone option: Start child in stopped state.
868
CLONE_SYSVSEM = $00040000
Clone option: Caller and child share the same semaphore undo values
CLONE_THREAD = $00010000
Clone options: Set child in thread group of calling process.
CLONE_UNTRACED = $00800000
Clone option: Do not allow a ptrace call on this clone.
CLONE_VFORK = $00004000
Clone options: suspend parent till child execs
CLONE_VM = $00000100
Clone (882) option: VM shared between processes
CSIGNAL = $000000ff
Clone (882) option: Signal mask to be sent at exit
EPOLLERR = $08
event_wait error condition on file descriptor
EPOLLET = $80000000
Set event_wait edge trigger behaviour on file descriptor
EPOLLHUP = $10
event_wait hang up event
EPOLLIN = $01
event_wait input file descriptor ready event
EPOLLONESHOT = $40000000
Set single-shot behaviour on epoll_wait.
EPOLLOUT = $04
event_wait output file descriptor ready event
EPOLLPRI = $02
event_wait high priority data available on input file descriptor
869
EPOLL_CTL_ADD = 1
Add filedescriptor to list of events
EPOLL_CTL_DEL = 2
Delete event for filedescriptor
EPOLL_CTL_MOD = 3
Modify event for filedescriptor
FUTEX_CMP_REQUEUE = 4
Futex option: requeue waiting processes on other futex, but check it’s value first
FUTEX_FD = 2
Futex option: Associate file descriptor with futex.
FUTEX_LOCK_PI = 6
Futex option: Undocumented
FUTEX_OP_ADD = 1
Futex operation: Undocumented
FUTEX_OP_ANDN = 3
FUTEX_OP_CMP_EQ = 0
FUTEX_OP_CMP_GE = 5
FUTEX_OP_CMP_GT = 4
FUTEX_OP_CMP_LE = 3
FUTEX_OP_CMP_LT = 2
870
FUTEX_OP_CMP_NE = 1
FUTEX_OP_OPARG_SHIFT = 8
FUTEX_OP_OR = 2
FUTEX_OP_SET = 0
FUTEX_OP_XOR = 4
FUTEX_REQUEUE = 3
Futex option: requeue waiting processes on other futex.
FUTEX_TRYLOCK_PI = 8
FUTEX_UNLOCK_PI = 7
FUTEX_WAIT = 0
Futex option: Wait on futex till wake call arrives.
FUTEX_WAKE = 1
Futex option: wakes any waiting processes on this futex
FUTEX_WAKE_OP = 5
GIO_CMAP = $4B70
IOCTL: Get colour palette on VGA+
GIO_FONT = $4B60
IOCTL: Get font in expanded form.
871
GIO_FONTX = $4B6B
IOCTL: Get font in consolefontdesc record.
GIO_SCRNMAP = $4B40
IOCTL: get screen mapping from kernel
GIO_UNIMAP = $4B66
IOCTL: get unicode-to-font mapping from kernel
GIO_UNISCRNMAP = $4B69
IOCTL: get full Unicode screen mapping
IN_ACCESS = $00000001
Data was read from file.
IN_ALL_EVENTS = IN_ACCESS or IN_MODIFY or IN_ATTRIB or IN_CLOSE or IN_OPEN or IN_MOVE
All possible events OR-ed together.
IN_ATTRIB = $00000004
File attributes changed.
IN_CLOEXEC = &02000000
IN_CLOEXEC can be set to indicate that the inotify file handle must be closed on exec.
IN_CLOSE = IN_CLOSE_WRITE or IN_CLOSE_NOWRITE
File was closed (read or write)
IN_CLOSE_NOWRITE = $00000010
File opened for read was closed
IN_CLOSE_WRITE = $00000008
File opened for write was closed
IN_CREATE = $00000100
A file was created in the directory.
IN_DELETE = $00000200
A file was deleted from the directory.
872
IN_DELETE_SELF = $00000400
Directory or file under observation was deleted.
IN_DONT_FOLLOW = $02000000
Do not follow symlinks
IN_IGNORED = $00008000
Watch was ignored (removed). Only reported.
IN_ISDIR = $40000000
Event subject is a directory (reported only)
IN_MASK_ADD = $20000000
Add events to existing watch (OR-ing the sets) if one exists.
IN_MODIFY = $00000002
Data was written to file.
IN_MOVE = IN_MOVED_FROM or IN_MOVED_TO
File was moved (in or out of directory)
IN_MOVED_FROM = $00000040
File was moved away from watched directory
IN_MOVED_TO = $00000080
File was moved into watched directory
IN_MOVE_SELF = $00000800
Directory or file under observation was moved.
IN_NONBLOCK = &00004000
IN_NONBLOCK can be set to indicate that the inotify file handle should not block read operations.
IN_ONESHOT = $80000000
Only report one event, then remove the watch.
IN_ONLYDIR = $01000000
Only watch filename if it is a directory.
873
IN_OPEN = $00000020
File was opened
IN_Q_OVERFLOW = $00004000
Queue overflowed. Only reported.
IN_UNMOUNT = $00002000
File system on which file resides was unmounted. Only reported.
KB_101 = 2
IOCTL: Keyboard types: 101 keys
KB_84 = 1
IOCTL: Keyboard types: 84 keys
KB_OTHER = 3
IOCTL: Keyboard types: other type
KDADDIO = $4B34
IOCTL: add i/o port as valid
KDDELIO = $4B35
IOCTL: delete i/o port as valid
KDDISABIO = $4B37
IOCTL: disable i/o to video board
KDENABIO = $4B36
IOCTL: enable i/o to video board
KDFONTOP = $4B72
IOCTL: font operations
KDGETKEYCODE = $4B4C
IOCTL: read kernel keycode table entry
KDGETLED = $4B31
IOCTL: return current led state
874
KDGETMODE = $4B3B
IOCTL: get current mode
KDGKBDIACR = $4B4A
IOCTL: read kernel accent table
KDGKBTYPE = $4B33
IOCTL: get keyboard type
KDMAPDISP = $4B3C
IOCTL: map display into address space
KDMKTONE = $4B30
IOCTL: generate tone
KDSETKEYCODE = $4B4D
IOCTL: write kernel keycode table entry
KDSETLED = $4B32
IOCTL: set led state
KDSETMODE = $4B3A
IOCTL: set text/graphics mode
KDSIGACCEPT = $4B4E
IOCTL: accept kbd generated signals
KDSKBDIACR = $4B4B
IOCTL: write kernel accent table
KDUNMAPDISP = $4B3D
IOCTL: unmap display from address space
KD_GRAPHICS = 1
IOCTL: Tty modes: graphics mode
KD_TEXT = 0
IOCTL: Tty modes: Text mode
875
KD_TEXT0 = 2
IOCTL: Tty modes: Text mode (obsolete)
KD_TEXT1 = 3
IOCTL: Tty modes: Text mode (obsolete)
KIOCSOUND = $4B2F
IOCTL: start/stop sound generation (0 for off)
LED_CAP = 4
IOCTL: LED_CAP : caps lock led
LED_NUM = 2
IOCTL: LED_SCR : Num lock led
LED_SCR = 1
IOCTL: LED_SCR : scroll lock led
LINUX_CAPABILITY_VERSION = $19980330
Current capability version in use by kernel
MAP_DENYWRITE = $800
Read-only
MAP_EXECUTABLE = $1000
Memory area is marked as executable
MAP_GROWSDOWN = $100
Memory map grows down, like stack
MAP_LOCKED = $2000
Memory pages are locked
MAP_NORESERVE = $4000
Do not check for reservations
MAX_CLOCKS = 16
Maximum number of clocks in the system
876
PIO_CMAP = $4B71
IOCTL: Set colour palette on VGA+
PIO_FONT = $4B61
IOCTL: Use font in expanded form.
PIO_FONTRESET = $4B6D
IOCTL: Reset to default font
PIO_FONTX = $4B6C
IOCTL: Set font in consolefontdesc record.
PIO_SCRNMAP = $4B41
IOCTL: put screen mapping table in kernel
PIO_UNIMAP = $4B67
IOCTL: put unicode-to-font mapping in kernel
PIO_UNIMAPCLR = $4B68
IOCTL: clear table, possibly advise hash algorithm
PIO_UNISCRNMAP = $4B6A
IOCTL: set full Unicode screen mapping
POLLMSG = $0400
Unused in linux
POLLRDHUP = $2000
Peer Shutdown/closed writing half of connection
POLLREMOVE = $1000
Undocumented linux extension of Poll
SPLICE_F_GIFT = 8
Pages spliced in are a gift
SPLICE_F_MORE = 4
Expect more data
877
SPLICE_F_MOVE = 1
Move pages instead of copying
SPLICE_F_NONBLOCK = 2
Don’t block on pipe splicing operations
SYNC_FILE_RANGE_WAIT_AFTER = 4
Wait upon write-out of specified pages in the range after performing any write.
SYNC_FILE_RANGE_WAIT_BEFORE = 1
Wait for write-out of previously-submitted specified pages before writing more data.
SYNC_FILE_RANGE_WRITE = 2
Initiate write of all dirty pages in the specified range.
61.3.2 Types
clockid_t = cint
Clock id type
EPoll_Data = record
case Integer of
0: (
ptr : pointer;
);
1: (
fd : cint;
);
2: (
u32 : cuint;
);
3: (
u64 : cuint64;
);
end
Data structure used in EPOLL IOCTL call.
EPoll_Event = record
Events : cuint32;
Data : TEPoll_Data;
end
Structure used in epoll_ctl (884) call.
878
inotify_event = record
wd : cint;
mask : cuint32;
cookie : cuint32;
len : cuint32;
name : Char;
end
inotify_event is the structure used to report changes in a directory. When reading a inotify file
descriptor, one or more inotify_event records can be read from the file descriptor.
PEPoll_Data = ÊPoll_Data
Pointer to EPoll_Data (878) record
PEpoll_Event = ÊPoll_Event
Pointer to EPoll_Event (878) type
Pinotify_event = înotify_event
Pointer to inotify_event (879) structure.
PSysInfo = ^TSysInfo
Pointer to TSysInfo (880) record.
Puser_cap_data = ûser_cap_data
Pointer to user_cap_data (880) record
Puser_cap_header = ûser_cap_header
Pointer to user_cap_header (880) record
TCloneFunc = function(args: pointer) : LongInt
Clone function prototype.
TEPoll_Data = EPoll_Data
Alias for EPoll_Data (878) type
TEPoll_Event = EPoll_Event
Alias for EPoll_Event (878) type
879
TSysInfo = record
uptime : clong;
loads : Array[0..2] of culong;
totalram : culong;
freeram : culong;
sharedram : culong;
bufferram : culong;
totalswap : culong;
freeswap : culong;
procs : cushort;
pad : cushort;
totalhigh : culong;
freehigh : culong;
mem_unit : cuint;
_f : Array[0..19-2*sizeof(clong)-sizeof(cint)] of cchar;
end
Record with system information, used by the SysInfo (889) call.
user_cap_data = record
effective : cuint32;
permitted : cuint32;
inheritable : cuint32;
end
user_cap_data describes the set of capabilities for the indicated thread.
user_cap_header = record
version : cuint32;
pid : cint;
end
user_cap_header describes the root user capabilities for the current thread, as set by capget
(880) and capset (881)

61.4.1 capget
Synopsis: Return the capabilities for the indicated thread
Declaration: function capget(header: Puser_cap_header;data: Puser_cap_data) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: capget returns the capabilities of the indicated thread in header. The thread is identified by the
process ID, or -1 for all caller (and child) process ID’s.
Refer to the linux man pages (7 capabilities) for more info.
Errors: On success, zero is returned, on error -1 is returned, and fperrno is set to the error.
See also: capset (881)
880
61.4.2 capset
Synopsis: Set the capabilities for the indicated thread
Declaration: function capset(header: Puser_cap_header;data: Puser_cap_data) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: capget sets the capabilities of the indicated thread in header. The thread is identified by the
process ID, or -1 for all caller (and child) process ID’s.
Refer to the linux man pages (7 capabilities) for more info.
Errors: On success, zero is returned, on error -1 is returned, and fperrno is set to the error.
See also: capget (880)
61.4.3 clock_getres
Synopsis: Get clock resolution
Declaration: function clock_getres(clk_id: clockid_t;res: ptimespec) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: clock_getres returns the resolution of the clock specified in clk_id in the res structure. It
can be Nil. if the clock exists and the resolution can be retrieved, 0 is returned.
Errors: On Error, -1 is returned. fpgeterrno can be used to get more detailed error information.
See also: clock_gettime (881), clock_settime (881)
61.4.4 clock_gettime
Synopsis: Get the time of a clock
Declaration: function clock_gettime(clk_id: clockid_t;tp: ptimespec) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: clock_gettime returns the current time of the clock specified in clk_id in the tp structure. If
the clock exists and the time can be retrieved, 0 is returned.
See also: clock_getres (881), clock_settime (881)
61.4.5 clock_settime
Synopsis: Set the time of a clock
Declaration: function clock_settime(clk_id: clockid_t;tp: ptimespec) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: clock_settime sets the current time of the clock specified in clk_id. The time is specified in
the tp structure. If the clock exists and the time can be retrieved, 0 is returned. The resolution is
truncated to the resolution supported by the specified clock. Note that not all clocks can be set.
See also: clock_getres (881), clock_gettime (881)
881
61.4.6 clone
Synopsis: Clone current process (create new thread)
Declaration: function clone(func: TCloneFunc;sp: pointer;flags: LongInt;

args: pointer) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Clone creates a child process which is a copy of the parent process, just like FpFork (166) does. In
difference with Fork, however, the child process shares some parts of it’s execution context with its
parent, so it is suitable for the implementation of threads: many instances of a program that share the
same memory.
When the child process is created, it starts executing the function Func, and passes it Args. The
return value of Func is either the explicit return value of the function, or the exit code of the child
process.
The sp pointer points to the memory reserved as stack space for the child process. This address
should be the top of the memory block to be used as stack.
The Flags determine the behaviour of the Clone call. The low byte of the Flags contains the
number of the signal that will be sent to the parent when the child dies. This may be bitwise OR’ed
with the following constants:
CLONE_VMParent and child share the same memory space, including memory (un)mapped with
subsequent mmap calls.
CLONE_FSParent and child have the same view of the filesystem; the chroot, chdir and umask
calls affect both processes.
CLONE_FILESthe file descriptor table of parent and child is shared.
CLONE_SIGHANDthe parent and child share the same table of signal handlers. The signal masks
are different, though.
CLONE_PIDPArent and child have the same process ID.
Clone returns the process ID in the parent process, and -1 if an error occurred.
Errors: On error, -1 is returned to the parent, and no child is created.
sys_eagainToo many processes are running.

sys_enomemNot enough memory to create child process.
See also: #rtl.baseunix.FpFork (166)
Listing: ./linuxex/ex71.pp
program TestC { l o n e } ;
{ $ i f d e f Linux }
/ / c l o s e i s v e r y L i n u x s p e c i f i c . 1 . 9 . x t h r e a d i n g i s done v i a p t h r e a d s .
uses
Linux , E r r o r s , c r t ;
const
Ready : Boolean = f a l s e ;
aChar : Char = ’a ’ ;
function CloneProc ( Arg : P o i n t e r ) : L o n g I n t ; Cdecl ;
882
begin
WriteLn ( ’ H e l l o from t h e c l o n e ’ , PChar ( Arg ) ) ;
repeat
Write ( aChar ) ;
Select (0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,600);
u n t i l Ready ;
WriteLn ( ’ Clone f i n i s h e d . ’ ) ;
CloneProc : = 1 ;
end ;
var
PID : L o n g I n t ;
procedure MainProc ;
begin
WriteLn ( ’ cloned process PID : ’ , PID ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ Press <ESC> t o k i l l . . . ’ ) ;
repeat
Write ( ’ . ’ ) ;
Select (0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,300);
i f KeyPressed then
case ReadKey of
# 2 7 : Ready : = t r u e ;
’ a ’ : aChar : = ’A ’ ;
’A ’ : aChar : = ’ a ’ ;
’ b ’ : aChar : = ’ b ’ ;
’B ’ : aChar : = ’B ’ ;
end ;
u n t i l Ready ;
WriteLn ( ’ Ready . ’ ) ;
end ;
const
StackSze = 1 6 3 8 4 ;
t h e F l a g s = CLONE_VM+CLONE_FS+CLONE_FILES+CLONE_SIGHAND ;
aMsg : PChar = ’ Oops ! ’ ;
var
theStack : Pointer ;
E x i t S t a t : LongInt ;
begin
GetMem( theStack , StackSze ) ;
PID : = Clone ( @CloneProc ,
P o i n t e r ( L o n g I n t ( t h e S t a c k )+ StackSze ) ,
theFlags ,
aMsg ) ;
i f PID < 0 then
WriteLn ( ’ E r r o r : ’ , L i n u x E r r o r , ’ when c l o n i n g . ’ )
else
begin
MainProc ;
case WaitPID ( 0 , @ExitStat , Wait_Untraced or w a i t _ c l o n e ) of
−1: WriteLn ( ’ e r r o r : ’ , L i n u x E r r o r , ’ ; ’ , S t r E r r o r ( L i n u x E r r o r ) ) ;
0 : WriteLn ( ’ e r r o r : ’ , L i n u x E r r o r , ’ ; ’ , S t r E r r o r ( L i n u x E r r o r ) ) ;
else
WriteLn ( ’ Clone e x i t e d w i t h : ’ , E x i t S t a t shr 8 ) ;
end ;
883
end ;
FreeMem ( theStack , StackSze ) ;
{ $else }
begin
{ $endif }
end .
61.4.7 epoll_create
Synopsis: Create new epoll file descriptor
Declaration: function epoll_create(size: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: epoll_create creates a new epoll file descriptor. The size argument indicates to the kernel
approximately how many structures should be allocated, but is by no means an upper limit.
On success, a file descriptor is returned that can be used in subsequent epoll_ctl (884) or epoll_wait
(885) calls, and should be closed using the fpClose (159) call.
Errors: On error, -1 is returned, and errno (169) is set.
See also: epoll_ctl (884), epoll_wait (885), fpClose (159)
61.4.8 epoll_ctl
Synopsis: Modify an epoll file descriptor
Declaration: function epoll_ctl(epfd: cint;op: cint;fd: cint;event: PEpoll_Event)
: cint
Visibility: default
Description: epoll_ctl performs the op operation on epoll file descriptor epfd. The operation will be moni-
tored on file descriptor fd, and is optionally controlled by event.
op can be one of the following values:
EPOLL_CTL_ADDAdd filedescriptor to list of events

EPOLL_CTL_MODModify event for filedescriptor
EPOLL_CTL_DELDelete event for filedescriptor
The events field in event_data is a bitmask of one or more of the following values:
EPOLLINThe file is ready for read operations

EPOLLOUTThe file is ready for write operations.
EPOLLPRIUrgent data is available for read operations.
EPOLLERRAn error condition is signaled on the file descriptor.
EPOLLHUPA Hang up happened on the file descriptor.
EPOLLETSet the Edge Triggered behaviour for the file descriptor.
EPOLLONESHOTSet One-Shot behaviour for the file descriptor. The event will be triggered only
once.
Errors: On error -1 is returned, and errno is set accordingly.

See also: epoll_create (884), epoll_wait (885), fpClose (159)
884
61.4.9 epoll_wait
Synopsis: Wait for an event on an epoll file descriptor.
Declaration: function epoll_wait(epfd: cint;events: PEpoll_Event;maxevents: cint;
timeout: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: epoll_wait waits for timeout milliseconds for an event to occur on epoll file descriptor epfd.
If timeout is -1, it waits indefinitely, if timeour is zero, it does not wait, but returns immediately,
even if no events were detected.
On return, data for at most maxevents will be returned in the memory pointed to by events. The
function returns the number of file descriptors for which events were reported. This can be zero if
the timeout was reached.
Errors: On error -1 is returned, and errno is set accordingly.
See also: epoll_create (884), epoll_ctl (884), fpClose (159)
61.4.10 fdatasync
Synopsis: Synchronize the data in memory with the data on storage device
Declaration: function fdatasync(fd: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: fdatasync does the same as fpfsync but does not flush the metadata, unless it is vital to the
correct reading/writing of the file. In practice, this means that unless the file size changed, the file
metadata will not be synced.
See also: #rtl.unix.fsync (1747)
61.4.11 futex
Synopsis: Perform a futex operation
Declaration: function futex(uaddr: pcint;op: cint;val: cint;timeout: ptimespec;
addr2: pcint;val3: cint) : cint
function futex(var uaddr;op: cint;val: cint;timeout: ptimespec;
var addr2;val3: cint) : cint
function futex(var uaddr;op: cint;val: cint;var timeout: TTimeSpec;
var addr2;val3: cint) : cint
function futex(uaddr: pcint;op: cint;val: cint;timeout: ptimespec)
: cint
function futex(var uaddr;op: cint;val: cint;timeout: ptimespec) : cint
function futex(var uaddr;op: cint;val: cint;var timeout: TTimeSpec)
: cint
Visibility: default
Description: futex performs an operation on a memory futex as described in the kernel manual page for futex.
The mutex is located at uaddr, the operation op is one of the following constants:
FUTEX_WAITFutex option: Wait on futex till wake call arrives.

FUTEX_WAKEFutex option: Wait on futex till wake call arrives.
885
FUTEX_FDFutex option: Associate file descriptor with futex.

FUTEX_REQUEUEFutex option: requeue waiting processes on other futex.
FUTEX_CMP_REQUEUEFutex option: requeue waiting processes on other futex, but check it’s
value first
The value to check for is indicated in val, and a timeout can be specified in timeout. The optional
arguments addr2 and val3 are used only with the FUTEX_REQUEUE and FUTEX_CMP_REQUEUE
operations.
In case of an error, -1 is return. All other return values must be interpreted according to the operation
performed.
This call directly interfaces with the Linux kernel, more information can be found in the kernel
manual pages.
Errors: On error, -1 is returned. Use #rtl.baseunix.fpgeterrno (169) to get the error code.
61.4.12 futex_op
Synopsis: Futex operation:
Declaration: function futex_op(op: cint;oparg: cint;cmp: cint;cmparg: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FUTEX_OP Performs an operation on a futex:
FUTEX_OP := ((op and $F) shl 28) or

((cmp and $F) shl 24) or
((oparg and $FFF) shl 12)
or (cmparg and $FFF);
61.4.13 inotify_add_watch
Synopsis: Add a watch to a notify file descriptor
Declaration: function inotify_add_watch(fd: cint;name: PChar;mask: cuint32) : cint

Visibility: default
Description: inotify_add_watch can be used to add a watch to an initialized inotify file descriptor (fd).
The file or directory to watch can be specified in the name parameter, and the events that must be
reported can be specified in mask. The following flags can be specified:
IN_ACCESSData was read from file.

IN_MODIFYData was written to file.
IN_ATTRIBFile attributes changed.
IN_CLOSE_WRITEFile opened for write was closed
IN_CLOSE_NOWRITEFile opened for read was closed
IN_CLOSEFile was closed (read or write)
IN_OPENFile was opened
IN_MOVED_FROMFile was moved away from watched directory
IN_MOVED_TOFile was moved into watched directory
886
IN_MOVEFile was moved (in or out of directory)

IN_CREATEA file was created in the directory.
IN_DELETEA file was deleted from the directory.
IN_DELETE_SELFDirectory or file under observation was deleted.
IN_MOVE_SELFDirectory or file under observation was moved.
IN_ALL_EVENTSAll possible events OR-ed together.
These events can be OR-ed with some flags, controlling the behaviour of the watch:
IN_ONLYDIROnly watch filename if it is a directory.

IN_ISDIREvent occurred against directory.
IN_DONT_FOLLOWDo not follow symlinks
IN_MASK_ADDAdd events to existing watch (OR-ing the sets) if one exists.
IN_ONESHOTOnly report one event, then remove the watch.
On return, the function returns a watch descriptor, which will be reported in the inotify_event (879)
structure’s wd.
See also: inotify_init (887), inotify_init1 (887), inotify_rm_watch (888), inotify_event (879)
61.4.14 inotify_init
Synopsis: Initialize a new inotify file descriptor
Declaration: function inotify_init : cint
Visibility: default
Description: inotify_init initializes a new INotify file descriptor. No options can be specified. On return,
the file descriptor is returned.
Errors: On Error, -1 is returned. fpgeterrno can be used to get more detailed error information
See also: inotify_init1 (887), inotify_add_watch (886), inotify_rm_watch (888)
61.4.15 inotify_init1
Synopsis: Initialize a new inotify file descriptor with extra options.
Declaration: function inotify_init1(flags: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: inotify_init1 initializes a new INotify file descriptor. The following options can be OR-ed
and passed in flags:
IN_NONBLOCKDo not block on read

IN_CLOEXECInotify close on exec flag.
See also: inotify_init (887), inotify_add_watch (886), inotify_rm_watch (888)
887
61.4.16 inotify_rm_watch
Synopsis: Remove watch from Inotify file descriptor.
Declaration: function inotify_rm_watch(fd: cint;wd: cint) : cint

Visibility: default
Description: inotify_rm_watch removes watch descriptor wd from inotify descriptor fd. On success, 0 is
returned.
See also: inotify_init (887), inotify_init1 (887), inotify_add_watch (886), inotify_event (879)
61.4.17 sched_yield
Synopsis: Yield the processor to another thread.
Declaration: procedure sched_yield

Visibility: default
Description: sched_yield yields the processor to another thread. The current thread is put at the back of its
queue. If there is only 1 thread in the application, the thread continues to run. The call always returns
zero.
61.4.18 setregid
Declaration: function setregid(rgid: uid_t;egid: uid_t) : cint
Visibility: default
61.4.19 setreuid
Declaration: function setreuid(ruid: uid_t;euid: uid_t) : cint
Visibility: default
61.4.20 sync_file_range
Synopsis: Force committing of data to disk
Declaration: function sync_file_range(fd: cint;offset: off64_t;nbytes: off64_t;

flags: cuint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: sync_file_range forces the linux kernel to write any data pages of a specified file (file descrip-
tor fd) to disk. The range of the file is specified by the offset offset and the number of bytes
nbytes. Options is an OR-ed combination of
SYNC_FILE_RANGE_WAIT_BEFOREWait for write-out of previously-submitted specified pages

before writing more data.
SYNC_FILE_RANGE_WRITEInitiate write of all dirty pages in the specified range.
888
SYNC_FILE_RANGE_WAIT_AFTERWait upon write-out of specified pages in the range after

performing any write.
If none is specified, the operation does nothing.

Errors: On return -1 is returned and fperrno is set to the actual error code. See the linux man page for more
on the error codes.
See also: fdatasync (885)
61.4.21 Sysinfo
Synopsis: Return kernel system information
Declaration: function Sysinfo(Info: PSysInfo) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: SysInfo returns system information in Info. Returned information in Info includes:
uptimeNumber of seconds since boot.

loads1, 5 and 15 minute load averages.
totalramtotal amount of main memory.
freeramamount of free memory.
sharedramamount of shared memory.
bufferramamount of memory used by buffers.
totalswaptotal amount of swapspace.
freeswapamount of free swapspace.
procsnumber of current processes.
Errors: None.
See also: #rtl.baseunix.fpUname (204)
Listing: ./linuxex/ex64.pp
program Example64 ;
{ Example t o demonstrate t h e S y s I n f o f u n c t i o n .
S y s i n f o i s Linux−o n l y . }
Uses L i n u x ;
Function Mb( L : L o n g i n t ) : l o n g i n t ;
begin
Mb: = L div ( 1 0 2 4 ∗ 1 0 2 4 ) ;
end ;
Var I n f o : TSysInfo ;
D,M, Secs ,H : l o n g i n t ;
{ $endif }
begin
889
I f Not S y s I n f o ( I n f o ) then
Halt ( 1 ) ;
With I n f o do
begin
D: = Uptime div ( 3 6 0 0 ∗ 2 4 ) ;
UpTime : = UpTime mod ( 3 6 0 0 ∗ 2 4 ) ;
h : = uptime div 3 6 0 0 ;
uptime : = uptime mod 3 6 0 0 ;
m: = uptime div 6 0 ;
secs : = uptime mod 6 0 ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Uptime : ’ , d , ’ days , ’ , h , ’ hours , ’ ,m, ’ min , ’ , secs , ’ s . ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Loads : ’ , Loads [ 1 ] , ’ / ’ , Loads [ 2 ] , ’ / ’ , Loads [ 3 ] ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ T o t a l Ram : ’ ,Mb( t o t a l r a m ) , ’Mb. ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Free Ram : ’ ,Mb( freeram ) , ’Mb. ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Shared Ram : ’ ,Mb( sharedram ) , ’Mb. ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ B u f f e r Ram : ’ ,Mb( b u f f e r r a m ) , ’Mb. ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ T o t a l Swap : ’ ,Mb( t o t a l s w a p ) , ’Mb. ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Free Swap : ’ ,Mb( freeswap ) , ’Mb. ’ ) ;
end ;
{ $endif }
end .
890
Chapter 62
Reference for unit ’lnfodwrf’
62.1 Overview
The lnfodwrf provides a routine that reads the debug information of an executable (if any exists) and
returns source code information about this address. It works with DWARF debug information. Note
that this unit is not thread-safe, and that its behaviour is undefined if multiple threads try to write a
backtrace at the same time.
For stabs debug information, the lineinfo (862) unit must be used.

62.2.1 GetLineInfo
Synopsis: Return source line information about an address.
Declaration: function GetLineInfo(addr: ptruint;var func: string;var source: string;

var line: LongInt) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: GetLineInfo returns source line information about the address addr. It searches this informa-
tion in the DWARF debugging information found in the binary: If the file was compiled without
debug information, nothing will be returned. Upon succesful retrieval of the debug information,
True is returned, and the func parameter is filled with the name of the function in which the ad-
dress is located. The source parameter contains the name of the file in which the function was
implemented, and line contains the line number in the source file for addr.
Errors: If no debug information is found, False is returned.
891
Chapter 63
Reference for unit ’math’
63.1 Used units
Table 63.1: Used units by unit ’math’
Name Page
System 1224
sysutils 1476
63.2 Overview
This document describes the math unit. The math unit was initially written by Florian Klaempfl. It
provides mathematical functions which aren’t covered by the system unit.
This chapter starts out with a definition of all types and constants that are defined, after which an
overview is presented of the available functions, grouped by category, and the last part contains a
complete explanation of each function.
The following things must be taken into account when using this unit:
1. This unit is compiled in Object Pascal mode so all integers are 32 bit.
2. Some overloaded functions exist for data arrays of integers and floats. When using the address
operator (@) to pass an array of data to such a function, make sure the address is typecasted to
the right type, or turn on the ’typed address operator’ feature. failing to do so, will cause the
compiler not be able to decide which function you want to call.
63.3 Cash flow functions

The cash flow functions in the math unit resolve the following equation:
FV + PV * q^n + PMT (q^n - 1) / (q - 1) = 0
In this formula, the following variables are present:
892
CHAPTER 63. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’MATH’
FV Future value
PV Present value
PMT Payment per period
n Number of payments (number of periods)
q> Interest Rate (return rate)
The financial functions FutureValue (909), NumberOfPeriods (925), Payment (925), PresentValue
(928) and InterestRate (912) solve this equation for one of the variables, when the other variables are
known.
See also: FutureValue (909), NumberOfPeriods (925), Payment (925), PresentValue (928), TPaymentTime
(898)
63.4 Geometrical functions
Table 63.2:
Name Description
hypot (911) Hypotenuse of triangle
norm (924) Euclidian norm
63.5 Statistical functions
Table 63.3:
Name Description
mean (919) Mean of values
meanandstddev (920) Mean and standard deviation of values
momentskewkurtosis (923) Moments, skew and kurtosis
popnstddev (925) Population standarddeviation
popnvariance (926) Population variance
randg (930) Gaussian distributed randum value
stddev (934) Standard deviation
sum (935) Sum of values
sumofsquares (936) Sum of squared values
sumsandsquares (937) Sum of values and squared values
totalvariance (939) Total variance of values
variance (940) variance of values
893
63.6 Number converting
Table 63.4:
Name Description
ceil (902) Round to infinity
floor (908) Round to minus infinity
frexp (908) Return mantissa and exponent
63.7 Exponential and logarithmic functions
Table 63.5:
Name Description
intpower (912) Raise float to integer power
ldexp (914) Calculate $2p̂ x$
lnxp1 (914) calculate log(x+1)
log10 (915) calculate 10-base log
log2 (915) calculate 2-base log
logn (916) calculate N-base log
power (927) raise float to arbitrary power
63.8 Hyperbolic functions
Table 63.6:
Name Description
arcosh (899) caculate reverse hyperbolic cosine
arsinh (901) caculate reverse hyperbolic sine
artanh (902) caculate reverse hyperbolic tangent
cosh (904) calculate hyperbolic cosine
sinh (934) calculate hyperbolic sine
tanh (939) calculate hyperbolic tangent
894
63.9 Trigoniometric functions
Table 63.7:
Name Description
arccos (898) calculate reverse cosine
arcsin (900) calculate reverse sine
arctan2 (901) calculate reverse tangent
cotan (905) calculate cotangent
sincos (933) calculate sine and cosine
tan (938) calculate tangent
63.10 Angle unit conversion

Routines to convert angles between different angle units.
Table 63.8:
Name Description
cycletorad (905) convert cycles to radians
degtograd (906) convert degrees to grads
degtorad (907) convert degrees to radians
gradtodeg (910) convert grads to degrees
gradtorad (910) convert grads to radians
radtocycle (928) convert radians to cycles
radtodeg (929) convert radians to degrees
radtograd (929) convert radians to grads
63.11 Min/max determination

Functions to determine the minimum or maximum of numbers:
Table 63.9:
Name Description
max (917) Maximum of 2 values
maxIntValue (917) Maximum of an array of integer values
maxvalue (918) Maximum of an array of values
min (921) Minimum of 2 values
minIntValue (921) Minimum of an array of integer values
minvalue (922) Minimum of an array of values
895

63.12.1 Constants
EqualsValue = 0
Values are the same
GreaterThanValue = (TValueRelationship)
First values is greater than second value
Infinity = 1.0 / 0.0
Value is infinity
LessThanValue = (TValueRelationship)
First value is less than second value
MaxComp = 9.223372036854775807e + 18
MaxDouble = 1.7e + 308
MaxExtended = 1.1e + 4932
Maximum value of extended type
MaxFloat = 0
Maximum value of float type
MaxSingle = 3.4e + 38
MinComp = -9.223372036854775807e + 18
MinDouble = 5.0e - 324
MinExtended = 3.4e - 4932
Minimum value (closest to zero) of extended type
MinFloat = 0
Minimum value (closest to zero) of float type
MinSingle = 1.5e - 45
896
NaN = 0.0 / 0.0
Value is Not a Number
NegativeValue = (TValueSign)
Value is negative
NegInfinity = (-1.0) / 0.0
Value is negative (minus) infinity
PositiveValue = (TValueSign)
Value is positive
ZeroValue = 0
Value is zero
63.12.2 Types
Float = MaxFloatType
All calculations are done with the Float type which is the largest float type available for the current
CPU. This allows to recompile the unit with a different float type to obtain a desired precision. The
pointer type PFloat (897) is used in functions that accept an array of values of arbitrary length.
Float = MaxFloatType
All calculations are done with the Float type which is the largest float type available for the current
CPU. This allows to recompile the unit with a different float type to obtain a desired precision. The
pointer type PFloat (897) is used in functions that accept an array of values of arbitrary length.
PFloat = ^Float
Pointer to Float (897) type.
PInteger = ObjPas.PInteger
Pointer to integer type
TFPUException = system.TFPUException
Type describing Floating Point processor exceptions.
TFPUExceptionMask = system.TFPUExceptionMask
Type to set the Floating Point Unit exception mask.
TFPUPrecisionMode = system.TFPUPrecisionMode
897
Type describing the default precision for the Floating Point processor.
TFPURoundingMode = system.TFPURoundingMode
Type describing the rounding mode for the Floating Point processor.
tpaymenttime = (ptendofperiod,ptstartofperiod)
Table 63.10: Enumeration values for type tpaymenttime
Value Explanation
ptendofperiod End of period.
ptstartofperiod Start of period.
Type used in financial (interest) calculations.
TRoundToRange = -37..37
TRoundToRange is the range of valid digits to be used in the RoundTo (931) function.
TValueRelationship = -1..1
Type to describe relational order between values
TValueSign = -1..1
Type indicating sign of a valuea

63.13.1 arccos
Synopsis: Return inverse cosine
Declaration: function arccos(x: Float) : Float

Visibility: default
Description: Arccos returns the inverse cosine of its argument x. The argument x should lie between -1 and 1
(borders included).
Errors: If the argument x is not in the allowed range, an EInvalidArgument exception is raised.
See also: arcsin (900), arcosh (899), arsinh (901), artanh (902)
Listing: ./mathex/ex1.pp
898
Program Example1 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e arccos f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
Procedure WriteRadDeg (X : f l o a t ) ;
begin
W r i t e l n (X : 8 : 5 , ’ rad = ’ , radtodeg ( x ) : 8 : 5 , ’ degrees . ’ )
end ;
begin
WriteRadDeg ( arccos ( 1 ) ) ;
WriteRadDeg ( arccos ( s q r t ( 3 ) / 2 ) ) ;
WriteRadDeg ( arccos ( s q r t ( 2 ) / 2 ) ) ;
WriteRadDeg ( arccos ( 1 / 2 ) ) ;
WriteRadDeg ( arccos ( 0 ) ) ;
WriteRadDeg ( arccos ( − 1 ) ) ;
end .
63.13.2 arccosh
Synopsis: Return inverse hyperbolic cosine
Declaration: function arccosh(x: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: arccosh returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of it’s argument x.

This function is an alias for arcosh (899), provided for Delphi compatibility.
See also: arcosh (899)
63.13.3 arcosh
Synopsis: Return inverse hyperbolic cosine
Declaration: function arcosh(x: Float) : Float

Visibility: default
Description: Arcosh returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of its argument x. The argument x should be larger
than 1. The arccosh variant of this function is supplied for Delphi compatibility.
See also: cosh (904), sinh (934), arcsin (900), arsinh (901), artanh (902), tanh (939)
Program Example3 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e arcosh f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
899
begin
W r i t e l n ( arcosh ( 1 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( arcosh ( 2 ) ) ;
end .
63.13.4 arcsin
Synopsis: Return inverse sine
Declaration: function arcsin(x: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Arcsin returns the inverse sine of its argument x. The argument x should lie between -1 and 1.
See also: arccos (898), arcosh (899), arsinh (901), artanh (902)
Program Example1 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e a r c s i n f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
end ;
begin
WriteRadDeg ( arcsin ( 1 ) ) ;
WriteRadDeg ( a r c s i n ( sqrt ( 3 ) / 2 ) ) ;
WriteRadDeg ( a r c s i n ( sqrt ( 2 ) / 2 ) ) ;
WriteRadDeg ( arcsin ( 1 / 2 ) ) ;
WriteRadDeg ( arcsin ( 0 ) ) ;
WriteRadDeg ( arcsin ( −1));
end .
63.13.5 arcsinh
Synopsis: Return inverse hyperbolic sine
Declaration: function arcsinh(x: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: arcsinh returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of it’s argument x.

This function is an alias for arsinh (901), provided for Delphi compatibility.
See also: arsinh (901)
900
63.13.6 arctan2
Synopsis: Return arctangent of (y/x)
Declaration: function arctan2(y: Float;x: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: arctan2 calculates arctan(y/x), and returns an angle in the correct quadrant. The returned
ˆ
angle will be in the range $-\pi$ to $\pi$ radians. The values of x and y must be between -2\{}64
ˆ
and 2\{}64, moreover x should be different from zero. On Intel systems this function is implemented
with the native intel fpatan instruction.
See also: arccos (898), arcosh (899), arsinh (901), artanh (902)
Program Example6 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e a r c t a n 2 f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
end ;
begin
WriteRadDeg ( a r c t a n 2 ( 2 , 1 ) ) ;
end .
63.13.7 arctanh
Synopsis: Return inverse hyperbolic tangent
Declaration: function arctanh(x: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: arcsinh returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of it’s argument x.
This function is an alias for artanh (902), provided for Delphi compatibility.
See also: artanh (902)
63.13.8 arsinh
Synopsis: Return inverse hyperbolic sine
Declaration: function arsinh(x: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: arsinh returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of its argument x. The arscsinh variant of this
function is supplied for Delphi compatibility.
Errors: None.
901
See also: arcosh (899), arccos (898), arcsin (900), artanh (902)
Program Example4 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e a r s i n h f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
Writeln ( arsinh ( 0 ) ) ;
Writeln ( arsinh ( 1 ) ) ;
end .
63.13.9 artanh
Synopsis: Return inverse hyperbolic tangent
Declaration: function artanh(x: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: artanh returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of its argument x, where x should lie in the interval
[-1,1], borders included. The arctanh variant of this function is supplied for Delphi compatibility.
Errors: In case x is not in the interval [-1,1], an EInvalidArgument exception is raised.
See also: arcosh (899), arccos (898), arcsin (900), artanh (902)
Program Example5 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e a r t a n h f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
Writeln ( artanh ( 0 ) ) ;
Writeln ( artanh ( 0 . 5 ) ) ;
end .
63.13.10 ceil
Synopsis: Return the lowest integer number greater than or equal to argument
Declaration: function ceil(x: Float) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: Ceil returns the lowest integer number greater than or equal to x. The absolute value of x should
be less than maxint.
Errors: If the asolute value of x is larger than maxint, an overflow error will occur.
See also: floor (908)
902
Program Example7 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e C e i l f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( C e i l ( − 3 . 7 ) ) ; / / should be −3
Writeln ( C e i l ( 3 . 7 ) ) ; / / should be 4
end .
63.13.11 ClearExceptions
Synopsis: Clear Floating Point Unit exceptions
Declaration: procedure ClearExceptions(RaisePending: Boolean)
Visibility: default
Description: Clear Floating Point Unit exceptions
63.13.12 CompareValue
Synopsis: Compare 2 values
Declaration: function CompareValue(const A: Integer;const B: Integer)
function CompareValue(const A: Int64;const B: Int64)
function CompareValue(const A: QWord;const B: QWord)
function CompareValue(const A: Single;const B: Single;delta: Single)
function CompareValue(const A: Double;const B: Double;delta: Double)
function CompareValue(const A: Extended;const B: Extended;
delta: Extended) : TValueRelationship
Visibility: default
Description: CompareValue compares 2 integer or floating point values A and B and returns one of the follow-
ing values:
-1if A<B
0if A=B
1if A>B
See also: TValueRelationship (898)
903
63.13.13 cosecant
Synopsis: Calculate cosecant
Declaration: function cosecant(x: Float) : Float

Visibility: default
Description: cosecant calculates the cosecant (1/sin(x)) of its argument x.
Errors: If 0 or 180 degrees is specified, an exception will be raised.

See also: secant (932)
63.13.14 cosh
Synopsis: Return hyperbolic cosine
Declaration: function cosh(x: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Cosh returns the hyperbolic cosine of it’s argument {x}.
Errors: None.
See also: arcosh (899), sinh (934), arsinh (901)
Program Example8 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e cosh f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( Cosh ( 0 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Cosh ( 1 ) ) ;
end .
63.13.15 cot
Synopsis: Alias for Cotan
Declaration: function cot(x: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: cot is an alias for the cotan (905) function.

See also: cotan (905)
904
63.13.16 cotan
Synopsis: Return cotangent
Declaration: function cotan(x: Float) : Float

Visibility: default
Description: Cotan returns the cotangent of it’s argument x. The argument x must be in radians. x should be
different from zero.
Errors: If x is zero then a overflow error will occur.

See also: tanh (939)
Program Example9 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e cotan f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
w r i t e l n ( cotan ( p i / 2 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( cotan ( p i / 3 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( cotan ( p i / 4 ) ) ;
end .
63.13.17 csc
Synopsis: Alias for cosecant
Declaration: function csc(x: Float) : Float

Visibility: default
Description: csc is an alias for the cosecant (904) function.
See also: cosecant (904)
63.13.18 cycletorad
Synopsis: Convert cycle angle to radians angle
Declaration: function cycletorad(cycle: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Cycletorad transforms it’s argument cycle (an angle expressed in cycles) to radians. (1 cycle
is $2 \pi$ radians).
Errors: None.
See also: degtograd (906), degtorad (907), radtodeg (929), radtograd (929), radtocycle (928)
905
Program Example10 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e c y c l e t o r a d f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
w r i t e l n ( cos ( c y c l e t o r a d ( 1 / 6 ) ) ) ; / / Should p r i n t 1 / 2
w r i t e l n ( cos ( c y c l e t o r a d ( 1 / 8 ) ) ) ; / / should be s q r t ( 2 ) / 2
end .
63.13.19 DegNormalize
Synopsis: Normalize an angle measured in degrees
Declaration: function DegNormalize(deg: single) : single
function DegNormalize(deg: Double) : Double
function DegNormalize(deg: extended) : extended
Visibility: default
Description: DegNormalize returns the angle deg as a positive angle between 0 and 360 degrees.
63.13.20 degtograd
Synopsis: Convert degree angle to grads angle
Declaration: function degtograd(deg: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Degtograd transforms it’s argument deg (an angle in degrees) to grads. (90 degrees is 100 grad.)
Errors: None.
See also: cycletorad (905), degtorad (907), radtodeg (929), radtograd (929), radtocycle (928)
Program Example11 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e degtograd f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
w r i t e l n ( degtograd ( 9 0 ) ) ;
w r i t e l n ( degtograd ( 1 8 0 ) ) ;
w r i t e l n ( degtograd ( 2 7 0 ) )
end .
906
63.13.21 degtorad
Synopsis: Convert degree angle to radians angle.
Declaration: function degtorad(deg: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Degtorad converts it’s argument deg (an angle in degrees) to radians. (pi radians is 180 degrees)
Errors: None.
See also: cycletorad (905), degtograd (906), radtodeg (929), radtograd (929), radtocycle (928)
Program Example12 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e degtorad f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
w r i t e l n ( degtorad ( 4 5 ) ) ;
w r i t e l n ( degtorad ( 9 0 ) ) ;
w r i t e l n ( degtorad ( 1 8 0 ) ) ;
end .
63.13.22 DivMod
Synopsis: Return DIV and MOD of arguments
Declaration: procedure DivMod(Dividend: LongInt;Divisor: Word;var Result: Word;
var Remainder: Word)
procedure DivMod(Dividend: LongInt;Divisor: Word;var Result: SmallInt;
var Remainder: SmallInt)
procedure DivMod(Dividend: DWord;Divisor: DWord;var Result: DWord;
var Remainder: DWord)
procedure DivMod(Dividend: LongInt;Divisor: LongInt;var Result: LongInt;
var Remainder: LongInt)
Visibility: default
Description: DivMod returns Dividend DIV Divisor in Result, and Dividend MOD Divisor in
Remainder
63.13.23 EnsureRange
Synopsis: Change value to it falls in specified range.
Declaration: function EnsureRange(const AValue: Integer;const AMin: Integer;
const AMax: Integer) : Integer; Overload
function EnsureRange(const AValue: Int64;const AMin: Int64;
const AMax: Int64) : Int64; Overload
function EnsureRange(const AValue: Double;const AMin: Double;
const AMax: Double) : Double; Overload
907
Visibility: default
Description: EnsureRange returns Value if AValue is in the range AMin..AMax. It returns AMin if the
value is less than AMin, or AMax if the value is larger than AMax.
See also: InRange (912)
63.13.24 floor
Synopsis: Return the largest integer smaller than or equal to argument
Declaration: function floor(x: Float) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: Floor returns the largest integer smaller than or equal to x. The absolute value of x should be less
than maxint.
Errors: If x is larger than maxint, an overflow will occur.
See also: ceil (902)
Program Example13 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e f l o o r f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
Writeln ( C e i l ( 3 . 7 ) ) ; / / should be 3
end .
63.13.25 Frexp
Synopsis: Return mantissa and exponent.
Declaration: procedure Frexp(X: Float;var Mantissa: Float;var Exponent: Integer)
Visibility: default
Description: Frexp returns the mantissa and exponent of it’s argument x in mantissa and exponent.
Errors: None
Program Example14 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e f r e x p f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
Procedure d o f r e x p ( Const X : extended ) ;
908
var man : extended ;

exp : l o n g i n t ;
begin
man : = 0 ;
exp : = 0 ;
f r e x p ( x , man , exp ) ;
w r i t e ( x , ’ has ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ mantissa ’ ,man , ’ and exponent ’ , exp ) ;
end ;
begin
// dofrexp ( 1 . 0 0 ) ;
d o f r e x p ( 1 . 0 2 e −1);
d o f r e x p ( 1 . 0 3 e −2);
d o f r e x p ( 1 . 0 2 e1 ) ;
d o f r e x p ( 1 . 0 3 e2 ) ;
end .
63.13.26 FutureValue
Synopsis: Calculate the future value of an investment.
Declaration: function FutureValue(ARate: Float;NPeriods: Integer;APayment: Float;
APresentValue: Float;APaymentTime: tpaymenttime)
: Float
Visibility: default
Description: FutureValue calculates the future value of an investment (FV) in the cash flow formula (see Cash-
FlowFunctions (892)) The function result is the future value of an investment of APresentValue
(PV), where APayment (PMT) is invested for NPeriods (n) at the rate of ARate (q) per period.
The APaymentTime parameter determines whether the investment (payment) is an ordinary annu-
ity or an annuity due: ptEndOfPeriod must be used if payments are at the end of each period. If
the payments are at the beginning of the periode, ptStartOfPeriod must be used.
See also: InterestRate (912), NumberOfPeriods (925), Payment (925), PresentValue (928), TPaymentTime
(898), CashFlowFunctions (892)
63.13.27 GetExceptionMask
Synopsis: Get the Floating Point Unit exception mask.
Declaration: function GetExceptionMask : TFPUExceptionMask

Visibility: default
Description: Get the Floating Point Unit exception mask.
63.13.28 GetPrecisionMode
Synopsis: Return the Floating Point Unit precision mode.
Declaration: function GetPrecisionMode : TFPUPrecisionMode
909
Visibility: default
Description: Return the Floating Point Unit precision mode.
63.13.29 GetRoundMode
Synopsis: Return the Floating Point Unit rounding mode.
Declaration: function GetRoundMode : TFPURoundingMode

Visibility: default
Description: Return the Floating Point Unit rounding mode.
63.13.30 gradtodeg
Synopsis: Convert grads angle to degrees angle
Declaration: function gradtodeg(grad: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Gradtodeg converts its argument grad (an angle in grads) to degrees. (100 grad is 90 degrees)
Errors: None.
See also: cycletorad (905), degtograd (906), radtodeg (929), radtograd (929), radtocycle (928), gradtorad
(910)
Program Example15 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e gradtodeg f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
w r i t e l n ( gradtodeg ( 1 0 0 ) ) ;
end .
63.13.31 gradtorad
Synopsis: Convert grads angle to radians angle
Declaration: function gradtorad(grad: Float) : Float

Visibility: default
Description: Gradtorad converts its argument grad (an angle in grads) to radians. (200 grad is pi degrees).
Errors: None.
See also: cycletorad (905), degtograd (906), radtodeg (929), radtograd (929), radtocycle (928), gradtodeg
(910)
910
Program Example16 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e g r a d t o r a d f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
writeln ( gradtorad ( 1 0 0 ) ) ;
end .
63.13.32 hypot
Synopsis: Return hypotenuse of triangle
Declaration: function hypot(x: Float;y: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Hypot returns the hypotenuse of the triangle where the sides adjacent to the square angle have
lengths x and y. The function uses Pythagoras’ rule for this.
Errors: None.
Program Example17 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e hypot f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( hypot ( 3 , 4 ) ) ; / / should be 5
end .
63.13.33 ifthen
Synopsis: Return one of two values, depending on a boolean condition
Declaration: function ifthen(val: Boolean;const iftrue: Integer;

const iffalse: Integer) : Integer; Overload
function ifthen(val: Boolean;const iftrue: Int64;const iffalse: Int64)
: Int64; Overload
function ifthen(val: Boolean;const iftrue: Double;const iffalse: Double)
: Double; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: ifthen returns iftrue if val is True, and iffalse if val is False.
This function can be used in expressions.
911
63.13.34 InRange
Synopsis: Check whether value is in range.
Declaration: function InRange(const AValue: Integer;const AMin: Integer;

const AMax: Integer) : Boolean; Overload
function InRange(const AValue: Int64;const AMin: Int64;
const AMax: Int64) : Boolean; Overload
function InRange(const AValue: Double;const AMin: Double;
const AMax: Double) : Boolean; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: InRange returns True if AValue is in the range AMin..AMax. It returns False if Value lies
outside the specified range.
See also: EnsureRange (907)
63.13.35 InterestRate
Synopsis: Calculate the interest rate value of an investment
Declaration: function InterestRate(NPeriods: Integer;APayment: Float;
APresentValue: Float;AFutureValue: Float;
APaymentTime: tpaymenttime) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: InterestRate calculates the future value of an investment (q) in the cash flow formula (see
CashFlowFunctions (892)). The function result is the interest rate value in case of a future value
AFutureValue for an investment of a start value APresentValue (PV), where APayment
(PMT) is invested for NPeriods (n).
See also: FutureValue (909), NumberOfPeriods (925), Payment (925), PresentValue (928), TPaymentTime
63.13.36 intpower
Synopsis: Return integer power.
Declaration: function intpower(base: Float;const exponent: Integer) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Intpower returns base to the power exponent, where exponent is an integer value.
Errors: If base is zero and the exponent is negative, then an overflow error will occur.
See also: power (927)
912
Program Example18 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e i n t p o w e r f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
Procedure DoIntpower ( X : extended ; Pow : I n t e g e r ) ;
begin
w r i t e l n (X : 8 : 4 , ’ ^ ’ ,Pow : 2 , ’ = ’ , i n t p o w e r ( X , pow ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
end ;
begin
d o i n t p o w er ( 0 . 0 , 0 ) ;
d o i n t p o w er ( 1 . 0 , 0 ) ;
d o i n t p o w er ( 2 . 0 , 5 ) ;
d o i n t p o w er ( 4 . 0 , 3 ) ;
d o i n t p o w er ( 2 . 0 , − 1 ) ;
d o i n t p o w er ( 2 . 0 , − 2 ) ;
d o i n t p o w er ( − 2 . 0 , 4 ) ;
d o i n t p o w er ( − 4 . 0 , 3 ) ;
end .
63.13.37 IsInfinite
Synopsis: Check whether value is infinite
Declaration: function IsInfinite(const d: Double) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: IsInfinite returns True if the double d contains the infinite value.
See also: IsZero (913), IsInfinite (913)
63.13.38 IsNan
Synopsis: Check whether value is Not a Number
Declaration: function IsNan(const d: Single) : Boolean; Overload
function IsNan(const d: Double) : Boolean; Overload
function IsNan(const d: Extended) : Boolean; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: IsNan returns True if the double d contains Not A Number (a value which cannot be represented
correctly in double format).
See also: IsZero (913), IsInfinite (913)
63.13.39 IsZero
Synopsis: Check whether value is zero
913
Declaration: function IsZero(const A: Single;Epsilon: Single) : Boolean; Overload

function IsZero(const A: Single) : Boolean; Overload
function IsZero(const A: Double;Epsilon: Double) : Boolean; Overload
function IsZero(const A: Double) : Boolean; Overload
function IsZero(const A: Extended;Epsilon: Extended) : Boolean
; Overload
function IsZero(const A: Extended) : Boolean; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: IsZero checks whether the float value A is zero, up to a precision of Epsilon. It returns True
if Abs(A) is less than Epsilon.
The default value for Epsilon depends on the type of the argument: it is 1E-4 for Single, 1E-12
for Double and 1E-16 for extended.
See also: IsNan (913), IsInfinite (913), SameValue (931)
63.13.40 ldexp
Synopsis: Return (2 to the power p) times x
Declaration: function ldexp(x: Float;const p: Integer) : Float

Visibility: default
Description: Ldexp returns (2 to the power p) times x.
Errors: None.
See also: lnxp1 (914), log10 (915), log2 (915), logn (916)
Program Example19 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e l d e x p f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
writeln ( ldexp ( 2 , 4 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
writeln ( ldexp ( 0 . 5 , 3 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
end .
63.13.41 lnxp1
Synopsis: Return natural logarithm of 1+X
Declaration: function lnxp1(x: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Lnxp1 returns the natural logarithm of 1+X. The result is more precise for small values of x. x
should be larger than -1.
Errors: If $x\leq -1$ then an EInvalidArgument exception will be raised.
914
See also: ldexp (914), log10 (915), log2 (915), logn (916)
Program Example20 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e l n x p 1 f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
writeln ( lnxp1 ( 0 ) ) ;
writeln ( lnxp1 ( 0 . 5 ) ) ;
writeln ( lnxp1 ( 1 ) ) ;
end .
63.13.42 log10
Synopsis: Return 10-Based logarithm.
Declaration: function log10(x: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Log10 returns the 10-base logarithm of X.
Errors: If x is less than or equal to 0 an ’invalid fpu operation’ error will occur.
See also: ldexp (914), lnxp1 (914), log2 (915), logn (916)
Program Example21 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e log10 f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( Log10 ( 1 0 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Log10 ( 1 0 0 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Log10 ( 1 0 0 0 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Log10 ( 1 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Log10 ( 0 . 1 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Log10 ( 0 . 0 1 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Log10 ( 0 . 0 0 1 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
end .
63.13.43 log2
Synopsis: Return 2-based logarithm
Declaration: function log2(x: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Log2 returns the 2-base logarithm of X.
915
See also: ldexp (914), lnxp1 (914), log10 (915), logn (916)
Program Example22 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e l o g 2 f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( Log2 ( 2 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Log2 ( 4 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Log2 ( 8 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Log2 ( 1 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Log2 ( 0 . 5 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Log2 ( 0 . 2 5 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Log2 ( 0 . 1 2 5 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
end .
63.13.44 logn
Synopsis: Return N-based logarithm.
Declaration: function logn(n: Float;x: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Logn returns the n-base logarithm of X.

See also: ldexp (914), lnxp1 (914), log10 (915), log2 (915)
Program Example23 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e l o g n f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( Logn ( 3 , 4 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Logn ( 2 , 4 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Logn ( 6 , 9 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Logn ( exp ( 1 ) , exp ( 1 ) ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Logn ( 0 . 5 , 1 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Logn ( 0 . 2 5 , 3 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Logn ( 0 . 1 2 5 , 5 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
end .
916
63.13.45 Max
Synopsis: Return largest of 2 values
Declaration: function Max(a: Integer;b: Integer) : Integer; Overload

function Max(a: Int64;b: Int64) : Int64; Overload
function Max(a: Single;b: Single) : Single; Overload
function Max(a: Double;b: Double) : Double; Overload
function Max(a: Extended;b: Extended) : Extended; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: Max returns the maximum of Int1 and Int2.
Errors: None.
See also: min (921), maxIntValue (917), maxvalue (918)
Program Example24 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e max f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
Var
A,B : Cardinal ;
begin
A: = 1 ; b : = 2 ;
w r i t e l n ( max ( a , b ) ) ;
end .
63.13.46 MaxIntValue
Synopsis: Return largest element in integer array
Declaration: function MaxIntValue(const Data: Array of Integer) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: MaxIntValue returns the largest integer out of the Data array.
This function is provided for Delphi compatibility, use the maxvalue (918) function instead.
Errors: None.
See also: maxvalue (918), minvalue (922), minIntValue (921)
Program Example25 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e MaxIntValue f u n c t i o n . }
{ Make sore i n t e g e r i s 3 2 b i t }
{ $mode o b j f p c }
917
Uses math ;
Type
TExArray = Array [ 1 . . 1 0 0 ] of I n t e g e r ;
Var
I : Integer ;
ExArray : TExArray ;
begin
Randomize ;
f o r I : = low ( e x a r r a y ) to high ( e x a r r a y ) do
ExArray [ i ] : = Random( I )−Random( 1 0 0 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( MaxIntValue ( ExArray ) ) ;
end .
63.13.47 maxvalue
Synopsis: Return largest value in array
Declaration: function maxvalue(const data: Array of Single) : Single
function maxvalue(const data: PSingle;const N: Integer) : Single
function maxvalue(const data: Array of Double) : Double
function maxvalue(const data: PDouble;const N: Integer) : Double
function maxvalue(const data: Array of Extended) : Extended
function maxvalue(const data: PExtended;const N: Integer) : Extended
function maxvalue(const data: Array of Integer) : Integer
function maxvalue(const data: PInteger;const N: Integer) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: Maxvalue returns the largest value in the data array with integer or float values. The return value
has the same type as the elements of the array.
The third and fourth forms accept a pointer to an array of N integer or float values.
Errors: None.
See also: maxIntValue (917), minvalue (922), minIntValue (921)
program Example26 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e MaxValue f u n c t i o n . }
uses math ;
var i : 1 . . 1 0 0 ;
f _ a r r a y : array [ 1 . . 1 0 0 ] of F l o a t ;
i _ a r r a y : array [ 1 . . 1 0 0 ] of I n t e g e r ;
Pf_array : P f l o a t ;
PI_array : Pinteger ;
begin
918
randomize ;
P f _ a r r a y : = @f_array [ 1 ] ;
P i _ a r r a y : = @i_array [ 1 ] ;
f o r i : = low ( f _ a r r a y ) to high ( f _ a r r a y ) do
f _ a r r a y [ i ] : = ( random−random ) ∗ 1 0 0 ;
f o r i : = low ( i _ a r r a y ) to high ( i _ a r r a y ) do
i _ a r r a y [ i ] : = random ( I )−random ( 1 0 0 ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Max Float : ’ , MaxValue ( f _ a r r a y ) : 8 : 4 ) ;

Writeln ( ’ Max Float (b ) : ’ , MaxValue ( P f _ a r r a y , 1 0 0 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Max Integer : ’ , MaxValue ( i _ a r r a y ) : 8 ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Max Integer ( b ) : ’ , MaxValue ( P i _ a r r a y , 1 0 0 ) : 8 ) ;
end .
63.13.48 mean
Synopsis: Return mean value of array
Declaration: function mean(const data: Array of Single) : Float
function mean(const data: PSingle;const N: LongInt) : Float
function mean(const data: Array of Double) : Float
function mean(const data: PDouble;const N: LongInt) : Float
function mean(const data: Array of Extended) : Float
function mean(const data: PExtended;const N: LongInt) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Mean returns the average value of data. The second form accepts a pointer to an array of N values.
Errors: None.
See also: meanandstddev (920), momentskewkurtosis (923), sum (935)
Program Example27 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Mean f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
Type
TExArray = Array [ 1 . . 1 0 0 ] of F l o a t ;
Var
I : Integer ;
begin
Randomize ;
f o r I : = low ( ExArray ) to high ( ExArray ) do
ExArray [ i ] : = ( Random−Random) ∗ 1 0 0 ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Max : ’ , MaxValue ( ExArray ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Min : ’ , MinValue ( ExArray ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Mean : ’ ,Mean ( ExArray ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
919
W r i t e l n ( ’ Mean ( b ) : ’ ,Mean ( @ExArray [ 1 ] , 1 0 0 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;

end .
63.13.49 meanandstddev
Synopsis: Return mean and standard deviation of array
Declaration: procedure meanandstddev(const data: Array of Single;var mean: Float;
var stddev: Float)
procedure meanandstddev(const data: PSingle;const N: LongInt;
var mean: Float;var stddev: Float)
procedure meanandstddev(const data: Array of Double;var mean: Float;
var stddev: Float)
procedure meanandstddev(const data: PDouble;const N: LongInt;
procedure meanandstddev(const data: Array of Extended;var mean: Float;
var stddev: Float)
procedure meanandstddev(const data: PExtended;const N: LongInt;
Visibility: default
Description: meanandstddev calculates the mean and standard deviation of data and returns the result in
mean and stddev, respectively. Stddev is zero if there is only one value. The second form accepts
a pointer to an array of N values.
Errors: None.
See also: mean (919), sum (935), sumofsquares (936), momentskewkurtosis (923)
Program Example28 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Meanandstddev f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
Type
TExArray = Array [ 1 . . 1 0 0 ] of Extended ;
Var
I : Integer ;
Mean , stddev : Extended ;
begin
Randomize ;
MeanAndStdDev ( ExArray , Mean , StdDev ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Mean : ’ ,Mean : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ StdDev : ’ , StdDev : 8 : 4 ) ;
MeanAndStdDev ( @ExArray [ 1 ] , 1 0 0 , Mean , StdDev ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Mean ( b ) : ’ ,Mean : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ StdDev ( b ) : ’ , StdDev : 8 : 4 ) ;
end .
920
63.13.50 Min
Synopsis: Return smallest of two values.
Declaration: function Min(a: Integer;b: Integer) : Integer; Overload

function Min(a: Int64;b: Int64) : Int64; Overload
function Min(a: Single;b: Single) : Single; Overload
function Min(a: Double;b: Double) : Double; Overload
function Min(a: Extended;b: Extended) : Extended; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: min returns the smallest value of Int1 and Int2;
Errors: None.
See also: max (917)
Program Example29 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e min f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
Var
A,B : Cardinal ;
begin
A: = 1 ; b : = 2 ;
w r i t e l n ( min ( a , b ) ) ;
end .
63.13.51 MinIntValue
Synopsis: Return smallest value in integer array
Declaration: function MinIntValue(const Data: Array of Integer) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: MinIntvalue returns the smallest value in the Data array.
This function is provided for Delphi compatibility, use minvalue instead.
Errors: None
See also: minvalue (922), maxIntValue (917), maxvalue (918)
Program Example30 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e M i n I n t V a l u e f u n c t i o n . }
921
Uses math ;
Type
TExArray = Array [ 1 . . 1 0 0 ] of I n t e g e r ;
Var
I : Integer ;
begin
Randomize ;
ExArray [ i ] : = Random( I )−Random( 1 0 0 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( M i n I n t V a l u e ( ExArray ) ) ;
end .
63.13.52 minvalue
Synopsis: Return smallest value in array
Declaration: function minvalue(const data: Array of Single) : Single
function minvalue(const data: PSingle;const N: Integer) : Single
function minvalue(const data: Array of Double) : Double
function minvalue(const data: PDouble;const N: Integer) : Double
function minvalue(const data: Array of Extended) : Extended
function minvalue(const data: PExtended;const N: Integer) : Extended
function minvalue(const data: Array of Integer) : Integer
function MinValue(const Data: PInteger;const N: Integer) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: Minvalue returns the smallest value in the data array with integer or float values. The return
value has the same type as the elements of the array.
The third and fourth forms accept a pointer to an array of N integer or float values.
Errors: None.
See also: maxIntValue (917), maxvalue (918), minIntValue (921)
program Example31 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e MinValue f u n c t i o n . }
{ Make sure i n t e g e r i s 3 2 b i t }
uses math ;
var i : 1 . . 1 0 0 ;
f _ a r r a y : array [ 1 . . 1 0 0 ] of F l o a t ;
i _ a r r a y : array [ 1 . . 1 0 0 ] of I n t e g e r ;
Pf_array : P f l o a t ;
PI_array : Pinteger ;
begin
922
randomize ;
P f _ a r r a y : = @f_array [ 1 ] ;
P i _ a r r a y : = @i_array [ 1 ] ;
f o r i : = low ( f _ a r r a y ) to high ( f _ a r r a y ) do
f _ a r r a y [ i ] : = ( random−random ) ∗ 1 0 0 ;
f o r i : = low ( i _ a r r a y ) to high ( i _ a r r a y ) do
i _ a r r a y [ i ] : = random ( I )−random ( 1 0 0 ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Min Float : ’ , MinValue ( f _ a r r a y ) : 8 : 4 ) ;

Writeln ( ’ Min Float (b ) : ’ , MinValue ( P f _ a r r a y , 1 0 0 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Min Integer : ’ , MinValue ( i _ a r r a y ) : 8 ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Min Integer ( b ) : ’ , MinValue ( P i _ a r r a y , 1 0 0 ) : 8 ) ;
end .
63.13.53 momentskewkurtosis
Synopsis: Return 4 first moments of distribution
Declaration: procedure momentskewkurtosis(const data: Array of Single;out m1: Float;
out m2: Float;out m3: Float;out m4: Float;
out skew: Float;out kurtosis: Float)
procedure momentskewkurtosis(const data: PSingle;const N: Integer;
out m4: Float;out skew: Float;
out kurtosis: Float)
procedure momentskewkurtosis(const data: Array of Double;out m1: Float;
out skew: Float;out kurtosis: Float)
procedure momentskewkurtosis(const data: PDouble;const N: Integer;
procedure momentskewkurtosis(const data: Array of Extended;
procedure momentskewkurtosis(const data: PExtended;const N: Integer;
Visibility: default
Description: momentskewkurtosis calculates the 4 first moments of the distribution of valuesin data and
returns them in m1,m2,m3 and m4, as well as the skew and kurtosis.
Errors: None.
See also: mean (919), meanandstddev (920)
program Example32 ;
923
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e momentskewkurtosis f u n c t i o n . }
uses math ;
var d i s t a r r a y : array [ 1 . . 1 0 0 0 ] of f l o a t ;
I : longint ;
m1, m2, m3, m4, skew , k u r t o s i s : f l o a t ;
begin
randomize ;
f o r I : = low ( d i s t a r r a y ) to high ( d i s t a r r a y ) do
d i s t a r r a y [ i ] : = random ;
momentskewkurtosis ( D i s t A r r a y , m1, m2, m3, m4, skew , k u r t o s i s ) ;
Writeln ( ’ 1 s t moment : ’ ,m1 : 8 : 6 ) ;

Writeln ( ’ 2nd moment : ’ ,m2 : 8 : 6 ) ;
Writeln ( ’ 3 r d moment : ’ ,m3 : 8 : 6 ) ;
Writeln ( ’ 4 t h moment : ’ ,m4 : 8 : 6 ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Skew : ’ , skew : 8 : 6 ) ;
Writeln ( ’ kurtosis : ’ , kurtosis :8:6);
end .
63.13.54 norm
Synopsis: Return Euclidian norm
Declaration: function norm(const data: Array of Single) : Float
function norm(const data: PSingle;const N: Integer) : Float
function norm(const data: Array of Double) : Float
function norm(const data: PDouble;const N: Integer) : Float
function norm(const data: Array of Extended) : Float
function norm(const data: PExtended;const N: Integer) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Norm calculates the Euclidian norm of the array of data. This equals sqrt(sumofsquares(data)).
The second form accepts a pointer to an array of N values.
Errors: None.
See also: sumofsquares (936)
program Example33 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e norm f u n c t i o n . }
uses math ;
var v : array [ 1 . . 1 0 ] of F l o a t ;
I :1..10;
begin
f o r I : = low ( v ) to high ( v ) do
v [ i ] : = random ;
w r i t e l n ( norm ( v ) ) ;
end .
924
63.13.55 NumberOfPeriods
Synopsis: Calculate the number of periods for an investment
Declaration: function NumberOfPeriods(ARate: Float;APayment: Float;

APresentValue: Float;AFutureValue: Float;
APaymentTime: tpaymenttime) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: NumberOfPeriods calculates the number of periods (n) needed to obtain future value of an
investment in the cash flow formula (see CashFlowFunctions (892)). The function result is the
number of periods a payment APayment (PMT) must be paid in order to obtain a future value
AFutureValue for an investment of a start value APresentValue (PV), where APayment
(PMT) is invested at a rate ARate (q).
ity or an annuity due: ptEndOfPeriod NumberOfPeriodsmust be used if payments are at the end
of each period. If the payments are at the beginning of the periode, ptStartOfPeriod must be
used.
See also: FutureValue (909), InterestRate (912), Payment (925), PresentValue (928), TPaymentTime (898),
CashFlowFunctions (892)
63.13.56 Payment
Synopsis: Calculate the payment for an investment
Declaration: function Payment(ARate: Float;NPeriods: Integer;APresentValue: Float;
AFutureValue: Float;APaymentTime: tpaymenttime) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Payment calculates the amount that must be payed (PMT) during number of periods (n) needed to
obtain future value of an investment in the cash flow formula (see CashFlowFunctions (892)). The
function result is the amount (PMT) that must be paid in order to obtain a future value AFutureValue
for an investment of a start value APresentValue (PV), where the amount must be payed NPeriods
(PMT) and the interest rate isARate (q).
ity or an annuity due: ptEndOfPeriod NumberOfPeriodsmust be used if payments are at the end
of each period. If the payments are at the beginning of the periode, ptStartOfPeriod must be
used.
See also: FutureValue (909), InterestRate (912), NumberOfPeriods (925), PresentValue (928), TPaymentTime
63.13.57 popnstddev
Synopsis: Return population variance
Declaration: function popnstddev(const data: Array of Single) : Float
function popnstddev(const data: PSingle;const N: Integer) : Float
function popnstddev(const data: Array of Double) : Float
function popnstddev(const data: PDouble;const N: Integer) : Float
function popnstddev(const data: Array of Extended) : Float
function popnstddev(const data: PExtended;const N: Integer) : Float
925
Visibility: default
Description: Popnstddev returns the square root of the population variance of the values in the Data array. It
returns zero if there is only one value.
The second form of this function accepts a pointer to an array of N values.
Errors: None.
See also: popnvariance (926), mean (919), meanandstddev (920), stddev (934), momentskewkurtosis (923)
Program Example35 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e PopnStdDev f u n c t i o n . }
Uses Math ;
Type
Var
I : Integer ;
begin
Randomize ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Pop . stddev . : ’ , PopnStdDev ( ExArray ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Pop . stddev . ( b ) : ’ , PopnStdDev ( @ExArray [ 1 ] , 1 0 0 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
end .
63.13.58 popnvariance
Synopsis: Return population variance
Declaration: function popnvariance(const data: PSingle;const N: Integer) : Float
function popnvariance(const data: Array of Single) : Float
function popnvariance(const data: PDouble;const N: Integer) : Float
function popnvariance(const data: Array of Double) : Float
function popnvariance(const data: PExtended;const N: Integer) : Float
function popnvariance(const data: Array of Extended) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Popnvariance the population variance of the values in the Data array. It returns zero if there is
only one value.
The second form of this function accepts a pointer to an array of N values.
Errors: None.
See also: popnstddev (925), mean (919), meanandstddev (920), stddev (934), momentskewkurtosis (923)
926
Program Example36 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e PopnVariance f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
Var
I : Integer ;
ExArray : Array [ 1 . . 1 0 0 ] of F l o a t ;
begin
Randomize ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Pop . v a r . : ’ , PopnVariance ( ExArray ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Pop . v a r . ( b ) : ’ , PopnVariance ( @ExArray [ 1 ] , 1 0 0 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
end .
63.13.59 power
Synopsis: Return real power.
Declaration: function power(base: Float;exponent: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: power raises base to the power power. This is equivalent to exp(power*ln(base)). There-
fore base should be non-negative.
Errors: None.
See also: intpower (912)
Program Example34 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e power f u n c t i o n . }
Uses Math ;
procedure dopower ( x , y : f l o a t ) ;
begin
w r i t e l n ( x : 8 : 6 , ’ ^ ’ , y : 8 : 6 , ’ = ’ , power ( x , y ) : 8 : 6 )
end ;
begin
dopower ( 2 , 2 ) ;
dopower ( 2 , − 2 ) ;
dopower ( 2 , 0 . 0 ) ;
end .
927
63.13.60 power(Float,Float):Float
Declaration: operator **(bas: Float;expo: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
63.13.61 power(Int64,Int64):Int64
Declaration: operator **(bas: Int64;expo: Int64) : Int64
Visibility: default
63.13.62 PresentValue
Synopsis: Calculate the present value given the future value of an investment.
Declaration: function PresentValue(ARate: Float;NPeriods: Integer;APayment: Float;
AFutureValue: Float;APaymentTime: tpaymenttime)
: Float
Visibility: default
Description: PresentValue calculates the present (start) value of an investment (PV) in the cash flow formula
(see CashFlowFunctions (892)) The function result is the start value of an investment, when the
future value is AFutureValue (FV) and APayment (PMT) is invested for NPeriods (n) at the
rate of ARate (q) per period.
See also: FutureValue (909), InterestRate (912), NumberOfPeriods (925), Payment (925), TPaymentTime
63.13.63 radtocycle
Synopsis: Convert radians angle to cycle angle
Declaration: function radtocycle(rad: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Radtocycle converts its argument rad (an angle expressed in radians) to an angle in cycles.
(1 cycle equals 2 pi radians)
Errors: None.
See also: degtograd (906), degtorad (907), radtodeg (929), radtograd (929), cycletorad (905)
Program Example37 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e r a d t o c y c l e f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
928
w r i t e l n ( r a d t o c y c l e (2∗ p i ) : 8 : 6 ) ;
writeln ( radtocycle ( pi ) : 8 : 6 ) ;
writeln ( radtocycle ( pi / 2 ) : 8 : 6 ) ;
end .
63.13.64 radtodeg
Synopsis: Convert radians angle to degrees angle
Declaration: function radtodeg(rad: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Radtodeg converts its argument rad (an angle expressed in radians) to an angle in degrees. (180
degrees equals pi radians)
Errors: None.
See also: degtograd (906), degtorad (907), radtocycle (928), radtograd (929), cycletorad (905)
Program Example38 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e radtodeg f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
w r i t e l n ( radtodeg (2∗ p i ) : 8 : 6 ) ;
w r i t e l n ( radtodeg ( p i ) : 8 : 6 ) ;
w r i t e l n ( radtodeg ( p i / 2 ) : 8 : 6 ) ;
end .
63.13.65 radtograd
Synopsis: Convert radians angle to grads angle
Declaration: function radtograd(rad: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Radtodeg converts its argument rad (an angle expressed in radians) to an angle in grads.
(200 grads equals pi radians)
Errors: None.
See also: degtograd (906), degtorad (907), radtocycle (928), radtodeg (929), cycletorad (905)
Program Example39 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e r a d t o g r a d f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
929
begin
w r i t e l n ( r a d t o g r a d (2∗ p i ) : 8 : 6 ) ;
writeln ( radtograd ( pi ) : 8 : 6 ) ;
writeln ( radtograd ( pi / 2 ) : 8 : 6 ) ;
end .
63.13.66 randg
Synopsis: Return gaussian distributed random number.
Declaration: function randg(mean: Float;stddev: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: randg returns a random number which - when produced in large quantities - has a Gaussian distri-
bution with mean mean and standarddeviation stddev.
Errors: None.
See also: mean (919), stddev (934), meanandstddev (920)
Program Example40 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e randg f u n c t i o n . }
Uses Math ;
Var
I : Integer ;
ExArray : Array [ 1 . . 1 0 0 0 0 ] of F l o a t ; ;
Mean , stddev : F l o a t ;
begin
Randomize ;
ExArray [ i ] : = Randg ( 1 , 0 . 2 ) ;
MeanAndStdDev ( ExArray , Mean , StdDev ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Mean : ’ ,Mean : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ StdDev : ’ , StdDev : 8 : 4 ) ;
end .
63.13.67 RandomFrom
Synopsis: Return a random element of an array of numbers
Declaration: function RandomFrom(const AValues: Array of Double) : Double; Overload
function RandomFrom(const AValues: Array of Integer) : Integer
; Overload
function RandomFrom(const AValues: Array of Int64) : Int64; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: RandomFrom returns a random element from the array AValues. The return value has the same
type as the type of the array elements.
See also: #rtl.system.Random (1398), RandomRange (931)
930
63.13.68 RandomRange
Synopsis: Return a random number in a range
Declaration: function RandomRange(const aFrom: Integer;const aTo: Integer) : Integer

function RandomRange(const aFrom: Int64;const aTo: Int64) : Int64
Visibility: default
Description: RandomRange returns a random value in the range AFrom to ATo. AFrom and ATo do not need
to be in increasing order. The upper border is not included in the generated value, but the lower
border is.
See also: #rtl.system.Random (1398), RandomFrom (930)
63.13.69 RoundTo
Synopsis: Round to the specified number of digits
Declaration: function RoundTo(const AValue: Double;const Digits: TRoundToRange)

: Double
function RoundTo(const AVAlue: Extended;const Digits: TRoundToRange)
: Extended
function RoundTo(const AValue: Single;const Digits: TRoundToRange)
: Single
Visibility: default
Description: RoundTo rounds the specified float AVAlue to the specified number of digits and returns the result.
This result is accurate to "10 to the power Digits". It uses the standard Round function for this.
See also: TRoundToRange (898), SimpleRoundTo (933)
63.13.70 SameValue
Synopsis: Check whether 2 float values are the same
Declaration: function SameValue(const A: Extended;const B: Extended) : Boolean
; Overload
function SameValue(const A: Double;const B: Double) : Boolean; Overload
function SameValue(const A: Single;const B: Single) : Boolean; Overload
function SameValue(const A: Extended;const B: Extended;
Epsilon: Extended) : Boolean; Overload
function SameValue(const A: Double;const B: Double;Epsilon: Double)
: Boolean; Overload
function SameValue(const A: Single;const B: Single;Epsilon: Single)
: Boolean; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: SameValue returns True if the floating-point values A and B are the same, i.e. whether the
absolute value of their their difference is smaller than Epsilon. If their difference is larger, then
False is returned.
If unspecified, the default value for Epsilon is 0.0.
See also: MinFloat (896), IsZero (913)
931
63.13.71 sec
Synopsis: Alias for secant
Declaration: function sec(x: Float) : Float

Visibility: default
Description: sec is an alias for the secant (932) function.
See also: secant (932)
63.13.72 secant
Synopsis: Calculate secant
Declaration: function secant(x: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Secant calculates the secant (1/cos(x)) of its argument x.

Errors: If 90 or 270 degrees is specified, an exception will be raised.
See also: cosecant (904)
63.13.73 SetExceptionMask
Synopsis: Set the Floating Point Unit exception mask.
Declaration: function SetExceptionMask(const Mask: TFPUExceptionMask)
: TFPUExceptionMask
Visibility: default
Description: Set the Floating Point Unit exception mask.
63.13.74 SetPrecisionMode
Synopsis: Set the Floating Point Unit precision mode.
Declaration: function SetPrecisionMode(const Precision: TFPUPrecisionMode)
: TFPUPrecisionMode
Visibility: default
Description: Set the Floating Point Unit precision mode.
63.13.75 SetRoundMode
Synopsis: Set the Floating Point Unit rounding mode.
Declaration: function SetRoundMode(const RoundMode: TFPURoundingMode)

: TFPURoundingMode
Visibility: default
Description: Set the Floating Point Unit rounding mode.
932
63.13.76 Sign
Synopsis: Return sign of argument
Declaration: function Sign(const AValue: Integer) : TValueSign; Overload

function Sign(const AValue: Int64) : TValueSign; Overload
function Sign(const AValue: Single) : TValueSign; Overload
function Sign(const AValue: Double) : TValueSign; Overload
function Sign(const AValue: Extended) : TValueSign; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: Sign returns the sign of it’s argument, which can be an Integer, 64 bit integer, or a double. The
returned value is an integer which is -1, 0 or 1, and can be used to do further calculations with.
63.13.77 SimpleRoundTo
Synopsis: Round to the specified number of digits (rounding up if needed)
Declaration: function SimpleRoundTo(const AValue: Single;const Digits: TRoundToRange)
: Single
function SimpleRoundTo(const AValue: Double;const Digits: TRoundToRange)
: Double
function SimpleRoundTo(const AValue: Extended;
const Digits: TRoundToRange) : Extended
Visibility: default
Description: SimpleRoundTo rounds the specified float AValue to the specified number of digits, but rounds
up, and returns the result. This result is accurate to "10 to the power Digits". It uses the standard
Round function for this.
See also: TRoundToRange (898), RoundTo (931)
63.13.78 sincos
Synopsis: Return sine and cosine of argument
Declaration: procedure sincos(theta: single;out sinus: single;out cosinus: single)

procedure sincos(theta: Double;out sinus: Double;out cosinus: Double)
procedure sincos(theta: extended;out sinus: extended;
out cosinus: extended)
Visibility: default
Description: Sincos calculates the sine and cosine of the angle theta, and returns the result in sinus and
cosinus.
On Intel hardware, This calculation will be faster than making 2 calls to calculate the sine and cosine
separately.
Errors: None.
See also: arcsin (900), arccos (898)
933
Program Example41 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e s i n c o s f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
Procedure dosincos ( Angle : F l o a t ) ;
Var
Sine , Cosine : F l o a t ;
begin
s i n c o s ( angle , sine , c o s i n e ) ;
Write ( ’ Angle : ’ , Angle : 8 : 6 ) ;
Write ( ’ Sine : ’ , s i n e : 8 : 6 ) ;
Write ( ’ Cosine : ’ , c o s i n e : 8 : 6 ) ;
end ;
begin
dosincos ( p i ) ;
dosincos ( p i / 2 ) ;
end .
63.13.79 sinh
Synopsis: Return hyperbolic sine
Declaration: function sinh(x: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Sinh returns the hyperbolic sine of its argument x.
See also: cosh (904), arsinh (901), tanh (939), artanh (902)
Program Example42 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e s i n h f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
writeln ( sinh ( 0 ) ) ;
writeln ( sinh ( 1 ) ) ;
writeln ( sinh ( −1));
end .
63.13.80 stddev
Synopsis: Return standard deviation of data
934
Declaration: function stddev(const data: Array of Single) : Float

function stddev(const data: PSingle;const N: Integer) : Float
function stddev(const data: Array of Double) : Float
function stddev(const data: PDouble;const N: Integer) : Float
function stddev(const data: Array of Extended) : Float
function stddev(const data: PExtended;const N: Integer) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Stddev returns the standard deviation of the values in Data. It returns zero if there is only one
value.
The second form of the function accepts a pointer to an array of N values.
Errors: None.
See also: mean (919), meanandstddev (920), variance (940), totalvariance (939)
Program Example40 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e stddev f u n c t i o n . }
Uses Math ;
Var
I : Integer ;
ExArray : Array [ 1 . . 1 0 0 0 0 ] of F l o a t ;
begin
Randomize ;
ExArray [ i ] : = Randg ( 1 , 0 . 2 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ StdDev : ’ , StdDev ( ExArray ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ StdDev ( b ) : ’ , StdDev ( @ExArray [ 0 ] , 1 0 0 0 0 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
end .
63.13.81 sum
Synopsis: Return sum of values
Declaration: function sum(const data: Array of Single) : Float
function sum(const data: PSingle;const N: LongInt) : Float
function sum(const data: Array of Double) : Float
function sum(const data: PDouble;const N: LongInt) : Float
function sum(const data: Array of Extended) : Float
function sum(const data: PExtended;const N: LongInt) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Sum returns the sum of the values in the data array.
Errors: None.
See also: sumofsquares (936), sumsandsquares (937), totalvariance (939), variance (940)
935
Program Example44 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Sum f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
Var
I : 1..100;
begin
Randomize ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Sum : ’ ,Sum( ExArray ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Sum ( b ) : ’ ,Sum( @ExArray [ 1 ] , 1 0 0 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
end .
63.13.82 sumInt
Synopsis: Return the sum of an array of integers
Declaration: function sumInt(const data: PInt64;const N: LongInt) : Int64
function sumInt(const data: Array of Int64) : Int64
Visibility: default
Description: SumInt returns the sum of the N integers in the Data array, where this can be an open array or a
pointer to an array.
Errors: An overflow may occur.
63.13.83 sumofsquares
Synopsis: Return sum of squares of values
Declaration: function sumofsquares(const data: Array of Single) : Float
function sumofsquares(const data: PSingle;const N: Integer) : Float
function sumofsquares(const data: Array of Double) : Float
function sumofsquares(const data: PDouble;const N: Integer) : Float
function sumofsquares(const data: Array of Extended) : Float
function sumofsquares(const data: PExtended;const N: Integer) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Sumofsquares returns the sum of the squares of the values in the data array.
Errors: None.
See also: sum (935), sumsandsquares (937), totalvariance (939), variance (940)
936
Program Example45 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e SumOfSquares f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
Var
I : 1..100;
begin
Randomize ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Sum squares : ’ , SumOfSquares ( ExArray ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Sum squares ( b ) : ’ , SumOfSquares ( @ExArray [ 1 ] , 1 0 0 ) : 8 : 4 ) ;
end .
63.13.84 sumsandsquares
Synopsis: Return sum and sum of squares of values.
Declaration: procedure sumsandsquares(const data: Array of Single;var sum: Float;
var sumofsquares: Float)
procedure sumsandsquares(const data: PSingle;const N: Integer;
var sum: Float;var sumofsquares: Float)
procedure sumsandsquares(const data: Array of Double;var sum: Float;
procedure sumsandsquares(const data: PDouble;const N: Integer;
procedure sumsandsquares(const data: Array of Extended;var sum: Float;
procedure sumsandsquares(const data: PExtended;const N: Integer;
Visibility: default
Description: sumsandsquares calculates the sum of the values and the sum of the squares of the values in the
data array and returns the results in sum and sumofsquares.
Errors: None.
See also: sum (935), sumofsquares (936), totalvariance (939), variance (940)
Program Example45 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e SumOfSquares f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
Var
937
I : 1..100;
ExArray : Array [ 1 . . 1 0 0 ] of F l o a t
s , ss : f l o a t ;
begin
Randomize ;
SumsAndSquares ( ExArray , S , SS ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Sum : ’ ,S : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Sum squares : ’ ,SS : 8 : 4 ) ;
SumsAndSquares ( @ExArray [ 1 ] , 1 0 0 , S , SS ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Sum ( b ) : ’ ,S : 8 : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Sum squares ( b ) : ’ ,SS : 8 : 4 ) ;
end .
63.13.85 tan
Synopsis: Return tangent
Declaration: function tan(x: Float) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Tan returns the tangent of x. The argument x must be in radians.

Errors: If x (normalized) is pi/2 or 3pi/2 then an overflow will occur.
See also: tanh (939), arcsin (900), sincos (933), arccos (898)
Program Example47 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Tan f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
Procedure DoTan ( Angle : F l o a t ) ;
begin
Write ( ’ Angle : ’ , RadToDeg ( Angle ) : 8 : 6 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Tangent : ’ , Tan ( Angle ) : 8 : 6 ) ;
end ;
begin
DoTan ( 0 ) ;
DoTan ( Pi ) ;
DoTan ( Pi / 3 ) ;
DoTAn ( Pi / 4 ) ;
DoTan ( Pi / 6 ) ;
end .
938
63.13.86 tanh
Synopsis: Return hyperbolic tangent
Declaration: function tanh(x: Float) : Float

Visibility: default
Description: Tanh returns the hyperbolic tangent of x.
Errors: None.
See also: arcsin (900), sincos (933), arccos (898)
Program Example48 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Tanh f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
begin
w r i t e l n ( tanh ( 0 ) ) ;
w r i t e l n ( tanh ( 1 ) ) ;
w r i t e l n ( tanh ( − 1 ) ) ;
end .
63.13.87 totalvariance
Synopsis: Return total varians of values
Declaration: function totalvariance(const data: Array of Single) : Float
function totalvariance(const data: PSingle;const N: Integer) : Float
function totalvariance(const data: Array of Double) : Float
function totalvariance(const data: PDouble;const N: Integer) : Float
function totalvariance(const data: Array of Extended) : Float
function totalvariance(const data: PExtended;const N: Integer) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: TotalVariance returns the total variance of the values in the data array. It returns zero if there
is only one value.
Errors: None.
See also: variance (940), stddev (934), mean (919)
Program Example49 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e T o t a l V a r i a n c e f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
Type
939
Var
I : Integer ;
TV : f l o a t ;
begin
Randomize ;
f o r I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
TV: = T o t a l V a r i a n c e ( ExArray ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Total variance : ’ ,TV : 8 : 4 ) ;
TV: = T o t a l V a r i a n c e ( @ExArray [ 1 ] , 1 0 0 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ T o t a l Variance ( b ) : ’ ,TV : 8 : 4 ) ;
end .
63.13.88 variance
Synopsis: Return variance of values
Declaration: function variance(const data: Array of Single) : Float
function variance(const data: PSingle;const N: Integer) : Float
function variance(const data: Array of Double) : Float
function variance(const data: PDouble;const N: Integer) : Float
function variance(const data: Array of Extended) : Float
function variance(const data: PExtended;const N: Integer) : Float
Visibility: default
Description: Variance returns the variance of the values in the data array. It returns zero if there is only one
value.
Errors: None.
See also: totalvariance (939), stddev (934), mean (919)
Program Example50 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Variance f u n c t i o n . }
Uses math ;
Var
I : 1..100;
V : float ;
begin
Randomize ;
V: = Variance ( ExArray ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Variance : ’ ,V : 8 : 4 ) ;
940
V: = Variance ( @ExArray [ 1 ] , 1 0 0 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Variance ( b ) : ’ ,V : 8 : 4 ) ;
end .
63.14 EInvalidArgument
63.14.1 Description
Exception raised when invalid arguments are passed to a function.
941
Chapter 64
Reference for unit ’matrix’
64.1 Overview
The unit matrix is a unit that provides objects for the common two, three and four dimensional
vectors matrixes. These vectors and matrixes are very common in computer graphics and are often
implemented from scratch by programmers while every implementation provides exactly the same
functionality.
It makes therefore sense to provide this functionality in the runtime library. This eliminates the need
for programmers to reinvent the wheel and also allows libraries that use matrix operations to become
more compatible.
The matrix unit does not provide n-dimensional matrixes. The functionality needs of a general matrix
unit varies from application to application; one can think of reduced memory usage tricks for matrixes
that only have data around the diagonal etc., desire for parallelization etc. etc. It is believed that
programmers that do use n-dimensional matrices would not necessarily benfit from such a unit in the
runtime library.
Design goals:
• Provide common dimensions, two three and four.
• Provide multiple floating point precisions, single, double, extended.

• Simple trivial binary representation; it is possible to typecast vectors into other implementa-
tions that use the same trivial representation.
• No dynamic memory management in the background. It must be possible to write expressions
like matrix A * B * C without worrying about memory management.
Design decisions:
• Class object model is ruled out. The objects object model, without virtual methods, is suitable.
• Operator overloading is a good way to allow programmers to write matrix expressions.
• 3 dimensions * 3 precision means 9 vector and 9 matrix objects. Macro’s have been used in
the source to take care of this.
942
CHAPTER 64. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’MATRIX’

64.2.1 Types
Tmatrix2_double_data = Array[0..1,0..1] of Double
This is the matrix internal data for a matrix. It uses a simple array structure so data from other
libraries that define their own matrix type as a simple array structure can simply be moved to and
from this data, or typecasted into it. As this is the only field in the object, the object itself can be used
just as fine for typecasting purposes etc.
Tmatrix2_extended_data = Array[0..1,0..1] of extended
Tmatrix2_single_data = Array[0..1,0..1] of single
943
Tvector2_double_data = Array[0..1] of Double
This is the vector internal data for a vector. It uses a simple array structure so data from other libraries
that define their own vector type as a simple array structure can simply be moved to and from this
data, or typecasted into it. As this is the only field in the object, the object itself can be used just as
fine for typecasting purposes etc.
Tvector2_extended_data = Array[0..1] of extended
Tvector2_single_data = Array[0..1] of single
944

64.3.1 add(Tmatrix2_double,Double):Tmatrix2_double
Synopsis: Add scalar to two-dimensional double precision matrix
Declaration: operator +(const m: Tmatrix2_double;const x: Double) : Tmatrix2_double

Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to add a scalar value to a matrix. The scalar is added to all elements of the
matrix, the result is returned as a new vector.
64.3.2 add(Tmatrix2_double,Tmatrix2_double):Tmatrix2_double
Synopsis: Add two two-dimensional double precision matrices together.
Declaration: operator +(const m1: Tmatrix2_double;const m2: Tmatrix2_double)
: Tmatrix2_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to add two two-dimensional double precision matrices together. A new
matrix is returned with all elements of the two matrices added together.
945
64.3.3 add(Tmatrix2_extended,extended):Tmatrix2_extended
Synopsis: Add scalar to two-dimensional extended precision matrix
Declaration: operator +(const m: Tmatrix2_extended;const x: extended)

: Tmatrix2_extended
Visibility: default
64.3.4 add(Tmatrix2_extended,Tmatrix2_extended):Tmatrix2_extended
Synopsis: Add two two-dimensional extended precision matrices together.
Declaration: operator +(const m1: Tmatrix2_extended;const m2: Tmatrix2_extended)
: Tmatrix2_extended
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to add two two-dimensional extended precision matrices together. A new
64.3.5 add(Tmatrix2_single,single):Tmatrix2_single
Synopsis: Add scalar to two-dimensional single precision matrix
Declaration: operator +(const m: Tmatrix2_single;const x: single) : Tmatrix2_single
Visibility: default
64.3.6 add(Tmatrix2_single,Tmatrix2_single):Tmatrix2_single
Synopsis: Add two two-dimensional single precision matrices together.
Declaration: operator +(const m1: Tmatrix2_single;const m2: Tmatrix2_single)
: Tmatrix2_single
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to add two two-dimensional single precision matrices together. A new
Synopsis: Add scalar to three-dimensional double precision matrix

Visibility: default
946
Synopsis: Add two three-dimensional double precision matrices together.
: Tmatrix3_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to add two three-dimensional double precision matrices together. A new
Synopsis: Add scalar to three-dimensional extended precision matrix
: Tmatrix3_extended
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Add two three-dimensional extended precision matrices together.
: Tmatrix3_extended
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to add two three-dimensional extended precision matrices together. A new
Synopsis: Add scalar to three-dimensional single precision matrix
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Add two three-dimensional single precision matrices together.
: Tmatrix3_single
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to add two three-dimensional single precision matrices together. A new
947
Synopsis: Add scalar to four-dimensional double precision matrix

Visibility: default
Synopsis: Add two four-dimensional double precision matrices together.
: Tmatrix4_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to add two four-dimensional double precision matrices together. A new
Synopsis: Add scalar to four-dimensional extended precision matrix

: Tmatrix4_extended
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Add two four-dimensional extended precision matrices together.
: Tmatrix4_extended
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to add two four-dimensional extended precision matrices together. A new
Synopsis: Add scalar to four-dimensional single precision matrix

Visibility: default
948
Synopsis: Add two four-dimensional single precision matrices together.

: Tmatrix4_single
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to add two four-dimensional single precision matrices together. A new
64.3.19 add(Tvector2_double,Double):Tvector2_double
Synopsis: Add scalar to two-dimensional double precision vector
Declaration: operator +(const x: Tvector2_double;y: Double) : Tvector2_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to add a scalar value to a vector. The scalar is added to all elements of the
vector, the result is returned as a new vector.
64.3.20 add(Tvector2_double,Tvector2_double):Tvector2_double
Synopsis: Add two-dimensional double precision vectors together
Declaration: operator +(const x: Tvector2_double;const y: Tvector2_double)

: Tvector2_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to add two two-dimensional vectors with double precision together. The
result is a new vector which consists of the sums of the individual elements of the two vectors.
64.3.21 add(Tvector2_extended,extended):Tvector2_extended
Synopsis: Add scalar to two-dimensional extended precision vector
Declaration: operator +(const x: Tvector2_extended;y: extended) : Tvector2_extended
Visibility: default
64.3.22 add(Tvector2_extended,Tvector2_extended):Tvector2_extended
Synopsis: Add two-dimensional extended precision vectors together
Declaration: operator +(const x: Tvector2_extended;const y: Tvector2_extended)

: Tvector2_extended
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to add two two-dimensional vectors with extended precision together. The
949
64.3.23 add(Tvector2_single,single):Tvector2_single
Synopsis: Add scalar to two-dimensional single precision vector
Declaration: operator +(const x: Tvector2_single;y: single) : Tvector2_single

Visibility: default
64.3.24 add(Tvector2_single,Tvector2_single):Tvector2_single
Synopsis: Add two-dimensional single precision vectors together
Declaration: operator +(const x: Tvector2_single;const y: Tvector2_single)
: Tvector2_single
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to add two two-dimensional vectors with single precision together. The
Synopsis: Add scalar to three-dimensional double precision vector

Visibility: default
Synopsis: Add three-dimensional double precision vectors together
: Tvector3_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to add two three-dimensional vectors with double precision together. The
Synopsis: Add scalar to three-dimensional extended precision vector

Visibility: default
950
Synopsis: Add three-dimensional extended precision vectors together

: Tvector3_extended
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to add two three-dimensional vectors with extended precision together.
The result is a new vector which consists of the sums of the individual elements of the two vectors.
Synopsis: Add scalar to three-dimensional single precision vector
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Add three-dimensional extended precision vectors together

: Tvector3_single
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to add two three-dimensional vectors with single precision together. The
Synopsis: Add scalar to four-dimensional double precision vector
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Add four-dimensional double precision vectors together

: Tvector4_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to add two four-dimensional vectors with single precision together. The
951
Synopsis: Add scalar to four-dimensional extended precision vector

Visibility: default
Synopsis: Add four-dimensional extended precision vectors together
: Tvector4_extended
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to add two two-dimensional vectors with extended precision together. The
Synopsis: Add scalar to four-dimensional single precision vector

Visibility: default
Synopsis: Add four-dimensional single precision vectors together
: Tvector4_single
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to add two four-dimensional vectors with single precision together. The
64.3.37 assign(Tmatrix2_double):Tmatrix2_extended
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional double precision matrix to two-dimensional extended preci-
sion matrix
Declaration: operator :=(const v: Tmatrix2_double) : Tmatrix2_extended

Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a two-dimensional matrix with double precision values wherever a
two-dimensional matrix with extended precision is expected.
952
64.3.38 assign(Tmatrix2_double):Tmatrix2_single
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional double precision matrix to two-dimensional single precision
matrix
Declaration: operator :=(const v: Tmatrix2_double) : Tmatrix2_single
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a two-dimensional matrix with double precision values wherever
a two-dimensional matrix with single precision is expected. Some accurace is lost because of the
conversion.
64.3.39 assign(Tmatrix2_double):Tmatrix3_double
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional double precision matrix to three-dimensional double preci-
sion matrix
Declaration: operator :=(const v: Tmatrix2_double) : Tmatrix3_double

Visibility: default
three-dimensional matrix with double precision is expected. The extra fields are set to 0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional double precision matrix to three-dimensional extended preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
three-dimensional matrix with extended precision is expected. The extra fields are set to 0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional single precision matrix to three-dimensional single precision
matrix

Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a two-dimensional matrix with single precision values wherever a
three-dimensional matrix with single precision is expected. The extra fields are set to 0 and some
accuracy is lost because of the conversion.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional double precision matrix to four-dimensional double precision
matrix
953
Visibility: default
four-dimensional matrix with double precision is expected. The extra fields are set to 0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional double precision matrix to four-dimensional extended preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
four-dimensional matrix with extended precision is expected. The extra fields are set to 0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional double precision matrix to four-dimensional single precision
matrix
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a two-dimensional matrix with double precision values wherever
a four-dimensional matrix with single precision is expected. The extra fields are set to 0 and some
precision is lost because of the conversion.
64.3.45 assign(Tmatrix2_extended):Tmatrix2_double
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional extended precision matrix to two-dimensional double preci-
sion matrix
Declaration: operator :=(const v: Tmatrix2_extended) : Tmatrix2_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a two-dimensional two with extended precision values wherever
a two-dimensional matrix with double precision is expected. Some accuracy is lost because of the
conversion.
64.3.46 assign(Tmatrix2_extended):Tmatrix2_single
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional extended precision matrix to two-dimensional single preci-
sion matrix
Declaration: operator :=(const v: Tmatrix2_extended) : Tmatrix2_single
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a two-dimensional matrix with extended precision values wherever
a two-dimensional matrix with single precision is expected. Some accuracy is lost because of the
conversion.
954
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional extended precision matrix to three-dimensional double preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
a three-dimensional matrix with double precision is expected. The extra fields are set to 0 and some
64.3.48 assign(Tmatrix2_extended):Tmatrix3_extended
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional extended precision matrix to three-dimensional extended pre-
cision matrix
Declaration: operator :=(const v: Tmatrix2_extended) : Tmatrix3_extended

Visibility: default
a three-dimensional matrix with extended precision is expected. The extra fields are set to 0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional extended precision matrix to three-dimensional single preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
a three-dimensional matrix with single precision is expected. The extra fields are set to 0 and some
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional extended precision matrix to four-dimensional double preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
a four-dimensional matrix with double precision is expected. The extra fields are set to 0 and some
955
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional extended precision matrix to four-dimensional extended pre-
cision matrix
Visibility: default
four-dimensional matrix with single precision is expected. The extra fields are set to 0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional extended precision matrix to four-dimensional single preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
a four-dimensional matrix with single precision is expected. The extra fields are set to 0 and some
precision is lost because of the conversion.
64.3.53 assign(Tmatrix2_single):Tmatrix2_double
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional single precision matrix to two-dimensional double precision
matrix
Declaration: operator :=(const v: Tmatrix2_single) : Tmatrix2_double
Visibility: default
two-dimensional matrix with double precision is expected.
64.3.54 assign(Tmatrix2_single):Tmatrix2_extended
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional single precision matrix to two-dimensional extended preci-
sion matrix
Declaration: operator :=(const v: Tmatrix2_single) : Tmatrix2_extended
Visibility: default
two-dimensional matrix with extended precision is expected.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional single precision matrix to three-dimensional double precision
matrix
Visibility: default
three-dimensional matrix with double precision is expected. The extra fields are set to 0.
956
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional single precision matrix to three-dimensional extended preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
three-dimensional matrix with extended precision is expected. The extra fields are set to 0.
64.3.57 assign(Tmatrix2_single):Tmatrix3_single
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional single precision matrix to three-dimensional single precision
matrix
Declaration: operator :=(const v: Tmatrix2_single) : Tmatrix3_single
Visibility: default
three-dimensional matrix with single precision is expected. The extra fields are set to 0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional single precision matrix to four-dimensional double precision
matrix
Visibility: default
four-dimensional matrix with double precision is expected. The extra fields are set to 0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional single precision matrix to four-dimensional extended preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
four-dimensional matrix with extended precision is expected. The extra fields are set to 0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional single precision matrix to four-dimensional single precision
matrix
Visibility: default
four-dimensional matrix with single precision is expected. The extra fields are set to 0.
957
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional double precision matrix to two-dimensional double preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a three-dimensional matrix with double precision values wherever a
two-dimensional matrix with double precision is expected. The surplus fields are thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional double precision matrix to two-dimensional extended preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
two-dimensional matrix with extended precision is expected. The surplus fields are thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional double precision matrix to two-dimensional single precision
matrix
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a three-dimensional matrix with double precision values wherever
a two-dimensional matrix with single precision is expected. The surplus fields are thrown away and
some accuracy is lost because of the conversion.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional double precision matrix to three-dimensional extended pre-
cision matrix

Visibility: default
three-dimensional matrix with extended precision is expected.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional double precision matrix to three-dimensional single preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
958
a three-dimensional matrix with single precision is expected. Some precision is lost because of the
conversion.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional double precision matrix to four-dimensional double preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
four-dimensional matrix with double precision is expected.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional double precision matrix to four-dimensional extended pre-
cision matrix
Visibility: default
four-dimensional matrix with extended precision is expected.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional double precision matrix to four-dimensional single precision
matrix
Visibility: default
a four-dimensional matrix with single precision is expected. Some precision is lost because of the
conversion.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional extended precision matrix to two-dimensional double preci-
sion matrix

Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a three-dimensional matrix with extended precision values wherever
a two-dimensional matrix with double precision is expected. The surplus fields are thrown away and
some accuracy is lost becuase of the conversion.
959
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional extended precision matrix to two-dimensional extended pre-
cision matrix
Visibility: default
a two-dimensional matrix with extended precision is expected. The surplus fields are thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional extended precision matrix to two-dimensional single preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
some precision is lost because of the conversion.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional extended precision matrix to three-dimensional double pre-
cision matrix
Visibility: default
a three-dimensional matrix with double precision is expected. Some precision is lost because of the
conversion.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional extended precision matrix to three-dimensional single pre-
cision matrix
Visibility: default
a three-dimensional matrix with single precision is expected. Some precision is lost because of the
conversion.
960
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional extended precision matrix to four-dimensional double pre-
cision matrix
Visibility: default
a four-dimensional matrix with double precision is expected. Some precision is lost because of the
conversion.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional extended precision matrix to four-dimensional extended pre-
cision matrix

Visibility: default
a four-dimensional matrix with extended precision is expected.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional extended precision matrix to four-dimensional single preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
conversion.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional single precision matrix to two-dimensional double precision
matrix
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a three-dimensional matrix with single precision values wherever a
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional single precision matrix to two-dimensional extended preci-
sion matrix
961
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional single precision matrix to two-dimensional single precision
matrix
Visibility: default
two-dimensional matrix with single precision is expected. The surplus fields are thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional single precision matrix to three-dimensional double preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
three-dimensional matrix with double precision is expected.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional single precision matrix to three-dimensional extended pre-
cision matrix
Visibility: default
three-dimensional matrix with extended precision is expected.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional single precision matrix to four-dimensional double precision
matrix

Visibility: default
962
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional single precision matrix to four-dimensional extended preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional single precision matrix to four-dimensional single precision
matrix
Visibility: default
four-dimensional matrix with single precision is expected.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional double precision matrix to two-dimensional double precision
matrix
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a four-dimensional matrix with double precision values wherever a
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional double precision matrix to two-dimensional extended preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional double precision matrix to two-dimensional single precision
matrix
Visibility: default
two-dimensional matrix with single precision is expected. The surplus fields are thrown away and
some precision is lost in the conversion.
963
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional double precision matrix to three-dimensional double preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
three-dimensional matrix with double precision is expected. The surplus fields are thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional double precision matrix to three-dimensional extended pre-
cision matrix
Visibility: default
three-dimensional matrix with extended precision is expected. The surplus fields are thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional double precision matrix to three-dimensional single precision
matrix
Visibility: default
three-dimensional matrix with single precision is expected. The surplus fields are thrown away and
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional double precision matrix to four-dimensional extended preci-
sion matrix

Visibility: default
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional single precision matrix to four-dimensional single precision
matrix
Visibility: default
964
Description: This operator allows you to use a four-dimensional matrix with double precision values wherever
conversion.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional extended precision matrix to two-dimensional double preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a four-dimensional matrix with extended precision values wherever
a two-dimensional matrix with double precision is expected. The surplus fields are thrown away and
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional extended precision matrix to two-dimensional extended pre-
cision matrix

Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a four-dimensional matrix with single precision values wherever a
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional extended precision matrix to two-dimensional single preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional extended precision matrix to three-dimensional double pre-
cision matrix
Visibility: default
a three-dimensional matrix with double precision is expected. The surplus fields are thrown away.
965
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional extended precision matrix to three-dimensional extended pre-
cision matrix
Visibility: default
a three-dimensional matrix with double precision is expected. The surplus fields are thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional extended precision matrix to three-dimensional single preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
a three-dimensional matrix with single precision is expected. The surplus fields are thrown away and
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional extended precision matrix to four-dimensional double preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
a four-dimensional matrix with double precision is expected.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional extended precision matrix to four-dimensional single preci-
sion matrix

Visibility: default
conversion.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional single precision matrix to two-dimensional double precision
matrix
966
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional single precision matrix to two-dimensional extended preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional single precision matrix to two-dimensional single precision
matrix
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional single precision matrix to three-dimensional double precision
matrix
Visibility: default
three-dimensional matrix with double precision is expected. The surplus fields are thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional single precision matrix to three-dimensional extended preci-
sion matrix

Visibility: default
three-dimensional matrix with extended precision is expected. The surplus fields are thrown away.
967
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional single precision matrix to three-dimensional single precision
matrix
Visibility: default
three-dimensional matrix with single precision is expected. The surplus fields are thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional single precision matrix to four-dimensional double precision
matrix
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional single precision matrix to four-dimensional extended preci-
sion matrix
Visibility: default
64.3.109 assign(Tvector2_double):Tvector2_extended
Synopsis: Allow assignment of double precision vector to extended precision vector
Declaration: operator :=(const v: Tvector2_double) : Tvector2_extended
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a vector with double precision values wherever an extended precision
vector is expected.
64.3.110 assign(Tvector2_double):Tvector2_single
Synopsis: Allow assignment of double precision vector to single precision vector
Declaration: operator :=(const v: Tvector2_double) : Tvector2_single

Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a vector with double precision values wherever a single precision
vector is expected, at the cost of loosing some precision.
968
64.3.111 assign(Tvector2_double):Tvector3_double
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional double precision vector to three-dimensional double precision
vector
Declaration: operator :=(const v: Tvector2_double) : Tvector3_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a two-dimensional vector with double precision values wherever a
three-dimensional vector with double precision is expected. The third dimension is set to 0.0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional double precision vector to three-dimensional extended preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
three-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected. The third dimension is set to 0.0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional double precision vector to three-dimensional single precision
vector
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a two-dimensional vector with double precision values wherever
a three-dimensional vector with single precision is expected. Some accuracy is lost because of the
conversion and the third dimension is set to 0.0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional double precision vector to four-dimensional double precision
vector

Visibility: default
four-dimensional vector with double precision is expected. The third and fourth dimensions are set
to 0.0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional double precision vector to four-dimensional extended preci-
sion vector
969
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a two-dimensional vector with single precision values wherever a
four-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected. The third and fourth dimensions are set
to 0.0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional double precision vector to four-dimensional single precision
vector
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a two-dimensional vector with double precision values wherever
a four-dimensional vector with single precision is expected. Some accurace is lost because of the
conversion and the third and fourth dimensions are set to 0.0.
64.3.117 assign(Tvector2_extended):Tvector2_double
Synopsis: Allow assignment of extended precision vector to double precision vector
Declaration: operator :=(const v: Tvector2_extended) : Tvector2_double

Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a vector with extended precision values wherever a double precision
64.3.118 assign(Tvector2_extended):Tvector2_single
Synopsis: Allow assignment of extended precision vector to single precision vector
Declaration: operator :=(const v: Tvector2_extended) : Tvector2_single
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a vector with extended precision values wherever a single precision
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional extended precision vector to three-dimensional double preci-
sion vector

Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a two-dimensional vector with extended precision values wherever
a three-dimensional vector with double precision is expected. Some accuracy is lost because of the
970
64.3.120 assign(Tvector2_extended):Tvector3_extended
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional extened precision vector to three-dimensional extended pre-
cision vector
Declaration: operator :=(const v: Tvector2_extended) : Tvector3_extended
Visibility: default
a three-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected. The third dimension is set to 0.0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional extended precision vector to three-dimensional single preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
a three-dimensional vector with single precision is expected. Some accuracy is lost because of the
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional extended precision vector to four-dimensional double preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
a four-dimensional vector with double precision is expected. Some accuracy is lost because of the
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensiona extended precision vector to four-dimensional extended pre-
cision vector
Visibility: default
a four-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected. The third and fourth dimensions are
set to 0.0.
971
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional extended precision vector to four-dimensional single preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
a four-dimensional vector with single precision is expected. Some accuracy is lost because of the
64.3.125 assign(Tvector2_single):Tvector2_double
Synopsis: Allow assignment of single precision vector to double precision vector
Declaration: operator :=(const v: Tvector2_single) : Tvector2_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a vector with single precision values wherever a double precision
vector is expected.
64.3.126 assign(Tvector2_single):Tvector2_extended
Synopsis: Allow assignment of single precision vector to extended precision vector
Declaration: operator :=(const v: Tvector2_single) : Tvector2_extended
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a vector with single precision values wherever an extended precision
vector is expected.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional single precision vector to three-dimensional double precision
vector
Visibility: default
three-dimensional vector with double precision is expected. The third dimension is set to 0.0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional single precision vector to three-dimensional extended preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
three-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected. The third dimension is set to 0.0.
972
64.3.129 assign(Tvector2_single):Tvector3_single
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional single precision vector to three-dimensional single precision
vector
Declaration: operator :=(const v: Tvector2_single) : Tvector3_single
Visibility: default
three-dimensional vector with single precision is expected. The third dimension is set to 0.0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional single precision vector to four-dimensional double precision
vector
Visibility: default
four-dimensional vector with double precision is expected. The third and fourth dimensions are set
to 0.0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional single precision vector to four-dimensional extended preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
four-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected. The third and fourth dimensions are set
to 0.0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of two-dimensional single precision vector to four-dimensional single precision
vector
Visibility: default
four-dimensional vector with single precision is expected. The third and fourth dimensions are set to
0.0.
973
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional double precision vector to two-dimensional double precision
vector
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a three-dimensional vector with double precision values wherever a
two-dimensional vector with double precision is expected. The third dimension is thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional double precision vector to two-dimensional extended preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
two-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected. The third dimension is thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional double precision vector to two-dimensional single precision
vector
Visibility: default
two-dimensional vector with single precision is expected. The third dimension is thrown away and
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional double precision vector to three-dimensional extended pre-
cision vector

Visibility: default
three-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional double precision vector to three-dimensional single preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
974
Description: This operator allows you to use a three-dimensional vector with double precision values wherever
a three-dimensional vector with single precision is expected. Some precision is lost because of the
conversion.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional double precision vector to four-dimensional double preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
four-dimensional vector with double precision is expected. The fourth dimension is set to 0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional double precision vector to four-dimensional extended preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
four-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected. The fourth dimension is set to 0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional double precision vector to four-dimensional single precision
vector
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a three-dimensional vector with single precision values wherever
a four-dimensional vector with double precision is expected. The fourth dimension is set to 0 and
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional extended precision vector to two-dimensional double preci-
sion vector

Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a three-dimensional vector with extended precision values wherever
a two-dimensional vector with double precision is expected. The third dimension is thrown away and
975
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional extended precision vector to two-dimensional extended pre-
cision vector
Visibility: default
a two-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected. The third dimension is thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional extended precision vector to two-dimensional single preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
a two-dimensional vector with single precision is expected. The third dimension is thrown away and
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional extended precision vector to three-dimensional double pre-
cision vector
Visibility: default
a three-dimensional vector with double precision is expected. Some precision is lost because of the
conversion.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional single precision vector to three-dimensional double preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a three-dimensional vector with single precision values wherever a
three-dimensional vector with double precision is expected. Some precision is lost because of the
conversion.
976
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional extended precision vector to four-dimensional double preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
a four-dimensional vector with double precision is expected. The fourth dimension is set to 0 and
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional extended precision vector to four-dimensional extended pre-
cision vector

Visibility: default
a four-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected. The fourth dimension is set to 0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional extended precision vector to four-dimensional single preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
a four-dimensional vector with single precision is expected. The fourth dimension is set to 0 and
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional single precision vector to two-dimensional double precision
vector
Visibility: default
two-dimensional vector with double precision is expected. The third dimension is thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional single precision vector to two-dimensional extended preci-
sion vector
977
Visibility: default
two-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected. The third dimension is thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional single precision vector to two-dimensional single precision
vector
Visibility: default
two-dimensional vector with single precision is expected. The third dimension is thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional single precision vector to three-dimensional double preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
three-dimensional vector with double precision is expected.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional single precision vector to three-dimensional extended preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
three-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional single precision vector to four-dimensional double precision
vector

Visibility: default
four-dimensional vector with double precision is expected. The fourth dimension is set to 0.
978
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional single precision vector to four-dimensional extended preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
four-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected. The fourth dimension is set to 0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of three-dimensional single precision vector to four-dimensional single precision
vector
Visibility: default
four-dimensional vector with single precision is expected. The fourth dimension is set to 0.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional double precision vector to two-dimensional double precision
vector
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a four-dimensional vector with double precision values wherever
a two-dimensional vector with double precision is expected. The third and fourth dimensions are
thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional double precision vector to two-dimensional extended preci-
sion vector

Visibility: default
a two-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected. The third and fourth dimensions are
thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional double precision vector to two-dimensional single precision
vector
979
Visibility: default
a two-dimensional vector with single precision is expected. The third and fourth dimensions are
thrown away and some accuracy is lost because of the conversion.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional double precision vector to three-dimensional double preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a four-dimensional vector with double precision values wherever a
three-dimensional vector with double precision is expected. The fourth dimension is thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional double precision vector to three-dimensional extended preci-
sion vector

Visibility: default
three-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected. The fourth dimension is thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional double precision vector to three-dimensional single precision
vector
Visibility: default
a three-dimensional vector with single precision is expected. The fourth dimension is thrown away
and some accuracy is lost because of the conversion.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional single precision vector to four-dimensional extended preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
four-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected.
980
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional double precision vector to four-dimensional single precision
vector
Visibility: default
conversion.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional extended precision vector to two-dimensional double preci-
sion vector

Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a four-dimensional vector with extended precision values wherever
thrown away and some accuracy is lost because of the conversion.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional extended precision vector to two-dimensional extended pre-
cision vector
Visibility: default
a two-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected. The third and fourth dimensions are
thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional extended precision vector to two-dimensional single preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
thrown away and some accuracy is los because of the conversion.
981
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional extended precision vector to three-dimensional double preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
a three-dimensional vector with double precision is expected. The fourth dimension is thrown away
and some accuracy is lost because of the conversion.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional extended precision vector to three-dimensional extended pre-
cision vector

Visibility: default
a three-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected. The fourth dimensions are thrown
away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional extended precision vector to three-dimensional single preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
a three-dimensional vector with single precision is expected. The fourth dimension is thrown away
and some accuracy is los because of the conversion.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional single precision vector to four-dimensional double precision
vector
Visibility: default
a four-dimensional vector with double precision is expected. Some accuracy is lost because of the
conversion.
982
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional extended precision vector to four-dimensional single preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
conversion.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional single precision vector to two-dimensional double precision
vector

Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a four-dimensional vector with single precision values wherever
thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional single precision vector to two-dimensional extended preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a four-dimensional vector with single precision values wherever a
two-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected. The third and fourth dimensions are
thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional single precision vector to two-dimensional single precision
vector
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to use a four-dimensional vector with single precision values wherever
thrown away.
983
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional single precision vector to three-dimensional double precision
vector
Visibility: default
three-dimensional vector with double precision is expected. The fourth dimension is thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional single precision vector to three-dimensional extended preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
three-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected. The fourth dimension is thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional single precision vector to three-dimensional single precision
vector
Visibility: default
three-dimensional vector with single precision is expected. The fourth dimension is thrown away.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional single precision vector to four-dimensional double precision
vector
Visibility: default
four-dimensional vector with double precision is expected.
Synopsis: Allow assignment of four-dimensional single precision vector to four-dimensional extended preci-
sion vector
Visibility: default
four-dimensional vector with extended precision is expected.
984
64.3.181 divide(Tmatrix2_double,Double):Tmatrix2_double
Synopsis: Divide a two-dimensional single precision matrix by a scalar
Declaration: operator /(const m: Tmatrix2_double;const x: Double) : Tmatrix2_double

Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to divide a matrix by a scalar. All elements in the matrix are divided by the
scalar, the result is returned as a new matrix.
64.3.182 divide(Tmatrix2_extended,extended):Tmatrix2_extended
Declaration: operator /(const m: Tmatrix2_extended;const x: extended)
: Tmatrix2_extended
Visibility: default
64.3.183 divide(Tmatrix2_single,single):Tmatrix2_single
Declaration: operator /(const m: Tmatrix2_single;const x: single) : Tmatrix2_single

Visibility: default
Visibility: default
: Tmatrix3_extended
Visibility: default
985

Visibility: default
Visibility: default
: Tmatrix4_extended
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
64.3.190 divide(Tvector2_double,Double):Tvector2_double
Synopsis: Divide a two-dimensional double precision vector by a scalar
Declaration: operator /(const x: Tvector2_double;y: Double) : Tvector2_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to divide a vector by a scalar value. Each vector element is divided by the
scalar value; the result is returned as a new vector.
986
64.3.191 divide(Tvector2_extended,extended):Tvector2_extended
Synopsis: Divide a two-dimensional extended precision vector by a scalar
Declaration: operator /(const x: Tvector2_extended;y: extended) : Tvector2_extended

Visibility: default
64.3.192 divide(Tvector2_single,single):Tvector2_single
Synopsis: Divide a two-dimensional single precision vector by a scalar
Declaration: operator /(const x: Tvector2_single;y: single) : Tvector2_single
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Divide a three-dimensional double precision vector by a scalar
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Divide a three-dimensional extended precision vector by a scalar
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Divide a three-dimensional single precision vector by a scalar
Visibility: default
987
Synopsis: Divide a four-dimensional double precision vector by a scalar

Visibility: default
Synopsis: Divide a four-dimensional extended precision vector by a scalar
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Divide a four-dimensional single precision vector by a scalar
Visibility: default
64.3.199 multiply(Tmatrix2_double,Double):Tmatrix2_double
Synopsis: Multiply a two-dimensional double precision matrix by a scalar
Declaration: operator *(const m: Tmatrix2_double;const x: Double) : Tmatrix2_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to multiply a matrix with a scalar. All elements in the matrix are multiplied
by the scalar, the result is returned as a new matrix.
64.3.200 multiply(Tmatrix2_double,Tmatrix2_double):Tmatrix2_double
Synopsis: Give product of two two-dimensional double precision matrices
Declaration: operator *(const m1: Tmatrix2_double;const m2: Tmatrix2_double)
: Tmatrix2_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to multipy two two-dimensional single precision matrices. A new matrix
is returned which is the product of both matrices. The product is calculated using the well known
matrix multiplication algorithm.
988
64.3.201 multiply(Tmatrix2_double,Tvector2_double):Tvector2_double
Synopsis: Give product of a two-dimendional double precision matrix and vector
Declaration: operator *(const m: Tmatrix2_double;const v: Tvector2_double)

: Tvector2_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to multipy a two-dimensional double precision matrices with a two dimen-
sional double precision vector. A new vector is returned which is the product of the matrix and the
vector. The product is calculated using the well known matrix-vector multiplication algorithm.
64.3.202 multiply(Tmatrix2_extended,extended):Tmatrix2_extended
Synopsis: Multiply a two-dimensional extended precision matrix by a scalar
Declaration: operator *(const m: Tmatrix2_extended;const x: extended)
: Tmatrix2_extended
Visibility: default
64.3.203 multiply(Tmatrix2_extended,Tmatrix2_extended):Tmatrix2_extended
Synopsis: Give product of two two-dimensional extended precision matrices
Declaration: operator *(const m1: Tmatrix2_extended;const m2: Tmatrix2_extended)
: Tmatrix2_extended
Visibility: default
64.3.204 multiply(Tmatrix2_extended,Tvector2_extended):Tvector2_extended
Synopsis: Give product of a two-dimendional extended precision matrix and vector
Declaration: operator *(const m: Tmatrix2_extended;const v: Tvector2_extended)

: Tvector2_extended
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to multipy a two-dimensional extended precision matrices with a two di-
mensional extended precision vector. A new vector is returned which is the product of the matrix and
the vector. The product is calculated using the well known matrix-vector multiplication algorithm.
989
64.3.205 multiply(Tmatrix2_single,single):Tmatrix2_single
Synopsis: Multiply a two-dimensional single precision matrix by a scalar
Declaration: operator *(const m: Tmatrix2_single;const x: single) : Tmatrix2_single
Visibility: default
64.3.206 multiply(Tmatrix2_single,Tmatrix2_single):Tmatrix2_single
Synopsis: Give product of two two-dimensional single precision matrices
Declaration: operator *(const m1: Tmatrix2_single;const m2: Tmatrix2_single)
: Tmatrix2_single
Visibility: default
64.3.207 multiply(Tmatrix2_single,Tvector2_single):Tvector2_single
Synopsis: Give product of a two-dimendional single precision matrix and vector
Declaration: operator *(const m: Tmatrix2_single;const v: Tvector2_single)
: Tvector2_single
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to multipy a two-dimensional single precision matrices with a two dimen-
sional single precision vector. A new vector is returned which is the product of the matrix and the
Synopsis: Multiply a three-dimensional double precision matrix by a scalar
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Give product of two three-dimensional double precision matrices
: Tmatrix3_double
Visibility: default
990
Synopsis: Give product of a three-dimendional double precision matrix and vector

: Tvector3_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to multipy a three-dimensional double precision matrices with a three
dimensional double precision vector. A new vector is returned which is the product of the matrix and
Synopsis: Multiply a three-dimensional extended precision matrix by a scalar
: Tmatrix3_extended
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Give product of two three-dimensional extended precision matrices
: Tmatrix3_extended
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Give product of a three-dimendional extended precision matrix and vector

: Tvector3_extended
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to multipy a three-dimensional extended precision matrices with a three di-
991
Synopsis: Multiply a three-dimensional single precision matrix by a scalar
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Give product of two three-dimensional single precision matrices
: Tmatrix3_single
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Give product of a three-dimendional single precision matrix and vector
: Tvector3_single
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to multipy a three-dimensional single precision matrices with a three di-
mensional single precision vector. A new vector is returned which is the product of the matrix and
Synopsis: Multiply a four-dimensional double precision matrix by a scalar
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Give product of two four-dimensional double precision matrices
: Tmatrix4_double
Visibility: default
992
Synopsis: Give product of a four-dimendional double precision matrix and vector

: Tvector4_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to multipy a four-dimensional double precision matrices with a four di-
mensional double precision vector. A new vector is returned which is the product of the matrix and
Synopsis: Multiply a four-dimensional extended precision matrix by a scalar
: Tmatrix4_extended
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Give product of two four-dimensional extended precision matrices
: Tmatrix4_extended
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Give product of a four-dimendional extended precision matrix and vector

: Tvector4_extended
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to multipy a four-dimensional extended precision matrices with a four di-
993
Synopsis: Multiply a four-dimensional single precision matrix by a scalar
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Give product of two four-dimensional single precision matrices
: Tmatrix4_single
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Give product of a four-dimendional single precision matrix and vector
: Tvector4_single
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to multipy a four-dimensional single precision matrices with a four dimen-
sional single precision vector. A new vector is returned which is the product of the matrix and the
64.3.226 multiply(Tvector2_double,Double):Tvector2_double
Synopsis: Multiply a two-dimensional double precision vector by a scalar
Declaration: operator *(const x: Tvector2_double;y: Double) : Tvector2_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to multiply a vector by a scalar value. Each vector element is multiplied
by the scalar value; the result is returned as a new vector.
64.3.227 multiply(Tvector2_double,Tvector2_double):Tvector2_double
Synopsis: Multiply two vectors element wise
Declaration: operator *(const x: Tvector2_double;const y: Tvector2_double)
: Tvector2_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator returns a vector that contains the element by element multiplication of the two multi-
plied vectors.
994
64.3.228 multiply(Tvector2_extended,extended):Tvector2_extended
Synopsis: Multiply a two-dimensional extended precision vector by a scalar
Declaration: operator *(const x: Tvector2_extended;y: extended) : Tvector2_extended

Visibility: default
64.3.229 multiply(Tvector2_extended,Tvector2_extended):Tvector2_extended
Declaration: operator *(const x: Tvector2_extended;const y: Tvector2_extended)
: Tvector2_extended
Visibility: default
plied vectors.
64.3.230 multiply(Tvector2_single,single):Tvector2_single
Synopsis: Multiply a two-dimensional single precision vector by a scalar
Declaration: operator *(const x: Tvector2_single;y: single) : Tvector2_single

Visibility: default
64.3.231 multiply(Tvector2_single,Tvector2_single):Tvector2_single
Declaration: operator *(const x: Tvector2_single;const y: Tvector2_single)
: Tvector2_single
Visibility: default
plied vectors.
Synopsis: Multiply a three-dimensional double precision vector by a scalar

Visibility: default
995

: Tvector3_double
Visibility: default
plied vectors.
Synopsis: Multiply a three-dimensional extended precision vector by a scalar
Visibility: default

: Tvector3_extended
Visibility: default
plied vectors.
Synopsis: Multiply a three-dimensional single precision vector by a scalar
Visibility: default

: Tvector3_single
Visibility: default
plied vectors.
996
Synopsis: Multiply a four-dimensional double precision vector by a scalar

Visibility: default
: Tvector4_double
Visibility: default
plied vectors.
Synopsis: Multiply a four-dimensional extended precision vector by a scalar

Visibility: default
: Tvector4_extended
Visibility: default
plied vectors.
Synopsis: Multiply a four-dimensional single precision vector by a scalar

Visibility: default
997

: Tvector4_single
Visibility: default
plied vectors.
64.3.244 negative(Tmatrix2_double):Tmatrix2_double
Synopsis: Negate two-dimensional double precision matrix.
Declaration: operator -(const m1: Tmatrix2_double) : Tmatrix2_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operation returns a matrix with all elements negated.
64.3.245 negative(Tmatrix2_extended):Tmatrix2_extended
Synopsis: Negate two-dimensional extended precision matrix.
Declaration: operator -(const m1: Tmatrix2_extended) : Tmatrix2_extended
Visibility: default
64.3.246 negative(Tmatrix2_single):Tmatrix2_single
Synopsis: Negate two-dimensional single precision matrix.
Declaration: operator -(const m1: Tmatrix2_single) : Tmatrix2_single

Visibility: default
Synopsis: Negate three-dimensional double precision matrix.
Visibility: default
998
Synopsis: Negate three-dimensional extended precision matrix.
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Negate three-dimensional single precision matrix.
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Negate four-dimensional double precision matrix.
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Negate four-dimensional extended precision matrix.
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Negate four-dimensional single precision matrix.
Visibility: default
64.3.253 negative(Tvector2_double):Tvector2_double
Synopsis: Negate two-dimensional vector.
Declaration: operator -(const x: Tvector2_double) : Tvector2_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operation returns a vector in the opposite direction of the vector that is passed. In order to do
so, all values in the vector are negated.
999
64.3.254 negative(Tvector2_extended):Tvector2_extended
Declaration: operator -(const x: Tvector2_extended) : Tvector2_extended

Visibility: default
64.3.255 negative(Tvector2_single):Tvector2_single
Declaration: operator -(const x: Tvector2_single) : Tvector2_single
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Negate three-dimensional vector.
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
1000
Synopsis: Negate four-dimensional vector.

Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
64.3.262 power(Tvector2_double,Tvector2_double):Double
Synopsis: Calculate the internal product of two vectors.
Declaration: operator **(const x: Tvector2_double;const y: Tvector2_double) : Double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator returns the internal product of the two vectors, that is, the elements of the two vectors
are element-wise multiplied, and then added together.
64.3.263 power(Tvector2_extended,Tvector2_extended):extended
Declaration: operator **(const x: Tvector2_extended;const y: Tvector2_extended)
: extended
Visibility: default
1001
64.3.264 power(Tvector2_single,Tvector2_single):single
Declaration: operator **(const x: Tvector2_single;const y: Tvector2_single) : single

Visibility: default
Visibility: default
: extended
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
1002

: extended
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
64.3.271 subtract(Tmatrix2_double,Double):Tmatrix2_double
Synopsis: Subtract scalar to two-dimensional double precision matrix
Declaration: operator -(const m: Tmatrix2_double;const x: Double) : Tmatrix2_double

Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to subtract a scalar value from a matrix. The scalar is subtracted from all
elements of the matrix, the result is returned as a new matrix.
64.3.272 subtract(Tmatrix2_double,Tmatrix2_double):Tmatrix2_double
Synopsis: Subtract a two-dimensional double precision matrix from another.
Declaration: operator -(const m1: Tmatrix2_double;const m2: Tmatrix2_double)
: Tmatrix2_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to subtract a two-dimensional double precision matrix from another. A
new matrix is returned with all elements of the two matrices subtracted from each other.
64.3.273 subtract(Tmatrix2_extended,extended):Tmatrix2_extended
Synopsis: Add scalar to two-dimensional extended precision matrix
Declaration: operator -(const m: Tmatrix2_extended;const x: extended)

: Tmatrix2_extended
Visibility: default
1003
64.3.274 subtract(Tmatrix2_extended,Tmatrix2_extended):Tmatrix2_extended
Synopsis: Subtract a two-dimensional extended precision matrix from another.
Declaration: operator -(const m1: Tmatrix2_extended;const m2: Tmatrix2_extended)

: Tmatrix2_extended
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to subtract a two-dimensional extended precision matrix from another. A
64.3.275 subtract(Tmatrix2_single,single):Tmatrix2_single
Synopsis: Subtract scalar to two-dimensional single precision matrix
Declaration: operator -(const m: Tmatrix2_single;const x: single) : Tmatrix2_single
Visibility: default
64.3.276 subtract(Tmatrix2_single,Tmatrix2_single):Tmatrix2_single
Synopsis: Subtract a two-dimensional single precision matrix from another.
Declaration: operator -(const m1: Tmatrix2_single;const m2: Tmatrix2_single)

: Tmatrix2_single
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to subtract a two-dimensional single precision matrix from another. A new
matrix is returned with all elements of the two matrices subtracted from each other.
Synopsis: Add scalar to three-dimensional double precision matrix
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Subtract a three-dimensional double precision matrix from another.

: Tmatrix3_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to subtract a three-dimensional double precision matrix from another. A
1004
Synopsis: Add scalar to three-dimensional extended precision matrix

: Tmatrix3_extended
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to substract a scalar value from a matrix. The scalar is subtracted from all
Synopsis: Subtract a three-dimensional extended precision matrix from another.
: Tmatrix3_extended
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to subtract a three-dimensional extended precision matrix from another. A
Synopsis: Add scalar to three-dimensional single precision matrix
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Subtract a three-dimensional single precision matrix from another.
: Tmatrix3_single
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to subtract a three-dimensional single precision matrix from another. A
Synopsis: Add scalar to four-dimensional double precision matrix

Visibility: default
1005
Synopsis: Subtract a four-dimensional double precision matrix from another.
: Tmatrix4_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to subtract a four-dimensional double precision matrix from another. A
Synopsis: Add scalar to four-dimensional extended precision matrix
: Tmatrix4_extended
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Subtract a four-dimensional extended precision matrix from another.
: Tmatrix4_extended
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to subtract a four-dimensional extended precision matrix from another. A
Synopsis: Add scalar to four-dimensional single precision matrix
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Subtract a four-dimensional single precision matrix from another.
: Tmatrix4_single
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to subtract a four-dimensional single precision matrix from another. A new
matrix is returned with all elements of the two matrices subtracted from each other.
1006
64.3.289 subtract(Tvector2_double,Double):Tvector2_double
Synopsis: Subtract scalar from two-dimensional double precision vector
Declaration: operator -(const x: Tvector2_double;y: Double) : Tvector2_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to subtract a scalar value from a vector. The scalar is subtracted from all
elements of the vector, the result is returned as a new vector.
64.3.290 subtract(Tvector2_double,Tvector2_double):Tvector2_double
Synopsis: Subtract two-dimensional double precision vectors from each other
Declaration: operator -(const x: Tvector2_double;const y: Tvector2_double)
: Tvector2_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to subtract two two-dimensional vectors with double precision from each
other. The result is a new vector which consists of the difference of the individual elements of the
two vectors.
64.3.291 subtract(Tvector2_extended,extended):Tvector2_extended
Synopsis: Subtract scalar from two-dimensional extended precision vector
Declaration: operator -(const x: Tvector2_extended;y: extended) : Tvector2_extended
Visibility: default
64.3.292 subtract(Tvector2_extended,Tvector2_extended):Tvector2_extended
Synopsis: Subtract two-dimensional extended precision vectors from each other
Declaration: operator -(const x: Tvector2_extended;const y: Tvector2_extended)
: Tvector2_extended
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to subtract two two-dimensional vectors with extended precision from each
two vectors.
64.3.293 subtract(Tvector2_single,single):Tvector2_single
Synopsis: Subtract scalar from two-dimensional single precision vector
Declaration: operator -(const x: Tvector2_single;y: single) : Tvector2_single
Visibility: default
1007
64.3.294 subtract(Tvector2_single,Tvector2_single):Tvector2_single
Synopsis: Subtract two-dimensional single precision vectors from each other
Declaration: operator -(const x: Tvector2_single;const y: Tvector2_single)
: Tvector2_single
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to subtract two two-dimensional vectors with single precision from each
two vectors.
Synopsis: Subtract scalar from three-dimensional double precision vector
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Subtract three-dimensional double precision vectors from each other
: Tvector3_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to subtract two two-dimensional vectors with double precision from each
two vectors.
Synopsis: Subtract scalar from three-dimensional extended precision vector
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Subtract three-dimensional extended precision vectors from each other
: Tvector3_extended
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to subtract two three-dimensional vectors with extended precision from
each other. The result is a new vector which consists of the difference of the individual elements of
the two vectors.
1008
Synopsis: Subtract scalar from three-dimensional single precision vector
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Subtract three-dimensional single precision vectors from each other
: Tvector3_single
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to subtract two three-dimensional vectors with single precision from each
two vectors.
Synopsis: Subtract scalar from four-dimensional double precision vector
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Subtract four-dimensional double precision vectors from each other
: Tvector4_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to subtract two four-dimensional vectors with double precision from each
two vectors.
Synopsis: Subtract scalar from four-dimensional extended precision vector
Visibility: default
1009
Synopsis: Subtract four-dimensional extended precision vectors from each other

: Tvector4_extended
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to subtract two four-dimensional vectors with extended precision from
each other. The result is a new vector which consists of the difference of the individual elements of
the two vectors.
Synopsis: Subtract scalar from four-dimensional single precision vector
Visibility: default
Synopsis: Subtract four-dimensional single precision vectors from each other
: Tvector4_single
Visibility: default
Description: This operator allows you to subtract two four-dimensional vectors with single precision from each
two vectors.
64.3.307 symmetricaldifference(Tvector3_double,Tvector3_double):Tvector3_double
Synopsis: Calculate the external product of two three-dimensional vectors
Declaration: operator ><(const x: Tvector3_double;const y: Tvector3_double)

: Tvector3_double
Visibility: default
Description: This operator returns the external product of two three dimensional vector. It is a vector orthonormal
to the two multiplied vectors. The length of that vector is equal to the surface area of a parallelogram
with the two vectors as sides.
The external product is often used to get a vector orthonormal to two other vectors, but of a predefined
length. In order to do so, the result vector from the external product, is divided by its length, and then
multiplied by the desired size.
1010
64.3.308 symmetricaldifference(Tvector3_extended,Tvector3_extended):Tvector3_exten
Declaration: operator ><(const x: Tvector3_extended;const y: Tvector3_extended)

: Tvector3_extended
Visibility: default
64.3.309 symmetricaldifference(Tvector3_single,Tvector3_single):Tvector3_single
Declaration: operator ><(const x: Tvector3_single;const y: Tvector3_single)
: Tvector3_single
Visibility: default
64.4 Tmatrix2_double
64.4.1 Description
The Tmatrix2_double object provides a matrix of 2*2 double precision scalars.

1013 determinant Calculates the determinant of the matrix.
1012 get\_column Returns the c-th column of the matrix as vector.
1012 get\_row Returns the r-th row of the matrix as vector.
1012 init Initializes the matrix, setting its elements to the values passed to the con-
structor.
1012 init\_identity Initializes the matrix and sets its elements to the identity matrix.
1012 init\_zero Initializes the matrix and sets its elements to zero
1013 inverse Calculates the inverse of the matrix.
1012 set\_column Sets c-th column of the matrix with a vector.
1013 set\_row Sets r-th row of the matrix with a vector.
1013 transpose Returns the transposition of the matrix.
1011
64.4.3 Tmatrix2_double.init_zero
Synopsis: Initializes the matrix and sets its elements to zero
Declaration: constructor init_zero
Visibility: default
64.4.4 Tmatrix2_double.init_identity
Synopsis: Initializes the matrix and sets its elements to the identity matrix.
Declaration: constructor init_identity
Visibility: default
Description: Initializes the matrix and sets its elements to the identity matrix, that is, elements to 1 on the left-
upper to right-lower diagonal, the rest zero.
64.4.5 Tmatrix2_double.init
Synopsis: Initializes the matrix, setting its elements to the values passed to the constructor.
Declaration: constructor init(aa: Double;ab: Double;ba: Double;bb: Double)
Visibility: default
Description: Initializes the matrix, setting its elements to the values passed to the constructor. The order of the
values is left to right, then top to bottom.
64.4.6 Tmatrix2_double.get_column
Synopsis: Returns the c-th column of the matrix as vector.
Declaration: function get_column(c: Byte) : Tvector2_double
Visibility: default
Description: Returns the c-th column of the matrix as vector. The column numbering starts at 0.
64.4.7 Tmatrix2_double.get_row
Synopsis: Returns the r-th row of the matrix as vector.
Declaration: function get_row(r: Byte) : Tvector2_double
Visibility: default
Description: Returns the r-th row of the matrix as vector. The row numbering starts at 0.
64.4.8 Tmatrix2_double.set_column
Synopsis: Sets c-th column of the matrix with a vector.
Declaration: procedure set_column(c: Byte;const v: Tvector2_double)
Visibility: default
Description: Replaces the c-th column of the matrix with vector v. The column numbering starts at 0.
1012
64.4.9 Tmatrix2_double.set_row
Synopsis: Sets r-th row of the matrix with a vector.
Declaration: procedure set_row(r: Byte;const v: Tvector2_double)

Visibility: default
Description: Replaces the r-th row of the matrix with vector v. The row numbering starts at 0.
64.4.10 Tmatrix2_double.determinant
Synopsis: Calculates the determinant of the matrix.
Declaration: function determinant : Double
Visibility: default
Description: Returns the determinant of the matrix.
64.4.11 Tmatrix2_double.inverse
Synopsis: Calculates the inverse of the matrix.
Declaration: function inverse(Adeterminant: Double) : Tmatrix2_double
Visibility: default
Description: Tmatrix2_double.inverse returns a new matrix that is the inverse of the matrix. You must pass the
determinant of the matrix as parameter.
64.4.12 Tmatrix2_double.transpose
Synopsis: Returns the transposition of the matrix.
Declaration: function transpose : Tmatrix2_double

Visibility: default
Description: Tmatrix2_double.transpose returns a new matrix that is the transposition of the matrix, that is, the
matrix with the x and y coordinates of the values swapped.
64.5 Tmatrix2_extended
64.5.1 Description
The Tmatrix2_extended object provides a matrix of 2*2 extended precision scalars.
1013

structor.
64.5.3 Tmatrix2_extended.init_zero
Visibility: default
64.5.4 Tmatrix2_extended.init_identity
Visibility: default
64.5.5 Tmatrix2_extended.init
Declaration: constructor init(aa: extended;ab: extended;ba: extended;bb: extended)

Visibility: default
64.5.6 Tmatrix2_extended.get_column
Declaration: function get_column(c: Byte) : Tvector2_extended
Visibility: default
1014
64.5.7 Tmatrix2_extended.get_row
Declaration: function get_row(r: Byte) : Tvector2_extended
Visibility: default
64.5.8 Tmatrix2_extended.set_column
Declaration: procedure set_column(c: Byte;const v: Tvector2_extended)
Visibility: default
64.5.9 Tmatrix2_extended.set_row
Declaration: procedure set_row(r: Byte;const v: Tvector2_extended)
Visibility: default
64.5.10 Tmatrix2_extended.determinant
Declaration: function determinant : extended
Visibility: default
64.5.11 Tmatrix2_extended.inverse
Declaration: function inverse(Adeterminant: extended) : Tmatrix2_extended
Visibility: default
Description: Tmatrix2_extended.inverse returns a new matrix that is the inverse of the matrix. You must pass the
64.5.12 Tmatrix2_extended.transpose
Declaration: function transpose : Tmatrix2_extended
Visibility: default
Description: Tmatrix2_extended.transpose returns a new matrix that is the transposition of the matrix, that is, the
1015
64.6 Tmatrix2_single
64.6.1 Description
The Tmatrix2_single object provides a matrix of 2*2 single precision scalars.

structor.
64.6.3 Tmatrix2_single.init_zero
Visibility: default
64.6.4 Tmatrix2_single.init_identity
Visibility: default
64.6.5 Tmatrix2_single.init
Declaration: constructor init(aa: single;ab: single;ba: single;bb: single)
Visibility: default
1016
64.6.6 Tmatrix2_single.get_column
Declaration: function get_column(c: Byte) : Tvector2_single
Visibility: default
64.6.7 Tmatrix2_single.get_row
Declaration: function get_row(r: Byte) : Tvector2_single
Visibility: default
64.6.8 Tmatrix2_single.set_column
Declaration: procedure set_column(c: Byte;const v: Tvector2_single)
Visibility: default
64.6.9 Tmatrix2_single.set_row
Declaration: procedure set_row(r: Byte;const v: Tvector2_single)
Visibility: default
64.6.10 Tmatrix2_single.determinant
Declaration: function determinant : single
Visibility: default
64.6.11 Tmatrix2_single.inverse
Declaration: function inverse(Adeterminant: single) : Tmatrix2_single
Visibility: default
Description: Tmatrix2_single.inverse returns a new matrix that is the inverse of the matrix. You must pass the
1017
64.6.12 Tmatrix2_single.transpose
Declaration: function transpose : Tmatrix2_single

Visibility: default
Description: Tmatrix2_single.transpose returns a new matrix that is the transposition of the matrix, that is, the
64.7.1 Description

structor.
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
1018
Declaration: constructor init(aa: Double;ab: Double;ac: Double;ba: Double;bb: Double;

bc: Double;ca: Double;cb: Double;cc: Double)
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Visibility: default

Visibility: default
Visibility: default
1019

Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
64.8.1 Description

structor.
1022 set\_column Sets r-th column of the matrix with a vector.
1020

Visibility: default

Visibility: default
Declaration: constructor init(aa: extended;ab: extended;ac: extended;ba: extended;
bb: extended;bc: extended;ca: extended;cb: extended;
cc: extended)
Visibility: default

Visibility: default
Visibility: default
1021
Synopsis: Sets r-th column of the matrix with a vector.
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
64.9.1 Description
1022

structor.
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Declaration: constructor init(aa: single;ab: single;ac: single;ba: single;bb: single;

bc: single;ca: single;cb: single;cc: single)
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
1023
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
1024
64.10.1 Description

structor.
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Declaration: constructor init(aa: Double;ab: Double;ac: Double;ad: Double;ba: Double;
bb: Double;bc: Double;bd: Double;ca: Double;cb: Double;
cc: Double;cd: Double;da: Double;db: Double;dc: Double;
dd: Double)
Visibility: default
1025

Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Visibility: default

Visibility: default
Description: Returns the determinant of the matrix. Note: Calculating the determinant of a 4*4 matrix requires
quite a few operations.
1026

Visibility: default
determinant of the matrix as parameter. Note: Calculating the inverse of a 4*4 matrix requires quite
a few operations.
Visibility: default
64.11.1 Description

structor.

Visibility: default
1027

Visibility: default
Declaration: constructor init(aa: extended;ab: extended;ac: extended;ad: extended;
ba: extended;bb: extended;bc: extended;bd: extended;
ca: extended;cb: extended;cc: extended;cd: extended;
da: extended;db: extended;dc: extended;dd: extended)
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
1028

Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
a few operations.
Visibility: default
64.12.1 Description
1029

structor.
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Declaration: constructor init(aa: single;ab: single;ac: single;ad: single;ba: single;
bb: single;bc: single;bd: single;ca: single;cb: single;
cc: single;cd: single;da: single;db: single;dc: single;
dd: single)
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
1030

Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Visibility: default

Visibility: default
a few operations.
1031

Visibility: default
64.13 Tvector2_double
64.13.1 Description
The Tvector2_double object provides a vector of two double precision scalars.

1032 init Initializes the vector, setting its elements to the values passed to the
constructor.
1032 init\_one Initializes the vector and sets its elements to one
1032 init\_zero Initializes the vector and sets its elements to zero
1033 length Calculates the length of the vector.
1033 squared\_length Calculates the squared length of the vector.
64.13.3 Tvector2_double.init_zero
Synopsis: Initializes the vector and sets its elements to zero
Visibility: default
64.13.4 Tvector2_double.init_one
Synopsis: Initializes the vector and sets its elements to one
Declaration: constructor init_one
Visibility: default
64.13.5 Tvector2_double.init
Synopsis: Initializes the vector, setting its elements to the values passed to the constructor.
Declaration: constructor init(a: Double;b: Double)
Visibility: default
1032
64.13.6 Tvector2_double.length
Synopsis: Calculates the length of the vector.
Declaration: function length : Double

Visibility: default
Description: Calculate the length of the vector: length=sqrt(data[0]**2+data[1]**2). Try to use squared_length
(1033) if you are able to, as it is faster.
64.13.7 Tvector2_double.squared_length
Synopsis: Calculates the squared length of the vector.
Declaration: function squared_length : Double
Visibility: default
Description: Calculate the squared length of the vector: squared_length=data[0]**2+data[1]**2.
64.14 Tvector2_extended
64.14.1 Description
The Tvector2_extended object provides a vector of two extended precision scalars.

constructor.
64.14.3 Tvector2_extended.init_zero

Visibility: default
64.14.4 Tvector2_extended.init_one
Visibility: default
1033
64.14.5 Tvector2_extended.init
Declaration: constructor init(a: extended;b: extended)

Visibility: default
64.14.6 Tvector2_extended.length
Declaration: function length : extended

Visibility: default
64.14.7 Tvector2_extended.squared_length
Declaration: function squared_length : extended
Visibility: default
64.15 Tvector2_single
64.15.1 Description
The Tvector2_single object provides a vector of two single precision scalars.

constructor.
64.15.3 Tvector2_single.init_zero
Visibility: default
1034
64.15.4 Tvector2_single.init_one

Visibility: default
64.15.5 Tvector2_single.init
Declaration: constructor init(a: single;b: single)

Visibility: default
64.15.6 Tvector2_single.length
Declaration: function length : single

Visibility: default
64.15.7 Tvector2_single.squared_length
Declaration: function squared_length : single
Visibility: default
64.16.1 Description
The Tvector3_double object provides a vector of three double precision scalars.

constructor.
1035

Visibility: default

Visibility: default
Declaration: constructor init(a: Double;b: Double;c: Double)

Visibility: default

Visibility: default
Description: Calculate the length of the vector: length=sqrt(data[0]**2+data[1]**2+data[2]**2). Try to use
squared_length (1036) if you are able to, as it is faster.
Visibility: default
Description: Calculate the squared length of the vector: squared_length=data[0]**2+data[1]**2+data[2]**2.
64.17.1 Description
The Tvector3_extended object provides a vector of three extended precision scalars.
1036

constructor.

Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Declaration: constructor init(a: extended;b: extended;c: extended)
Visibility: default
Visibility: default

Visibility: default
1037
64.18.1 Description
The Tvector3_single object provides a vector of three single precision scalars.

constructor.
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Declaration: constructor init(a: single;b: single;c: single)
Visibility: default
Visibility: default

1038

Visibility: default
64.19.1 Description
The Tvector4_double object provides a vector of four double precision scalars.

constructor.
Visibility: default
Visibility: default
Declaration: constructor init(a: Double;b: Double;c: Double;d: Double)
Visibility: default
1039

Visibility: default
Description: Calculate the length of the vector: length=sqrt(data[0]**2+data[1]**2+data[2]**2+data[3]**2). Try
to use squared_length (1040) if you are able to, as it is faster.
Visibility: default
Description: Calculate the squared length of the vector: squared_length=data[0]**2+data[1]**2+data[2]**2+data[3]**2.
64.20.1 Description
The Tvector4_extended object provides a vector of four extended precision scalars.

constructor.

Visibility: default
Visibility: default
1040
Declaration: constructor init(a: extended;b: extended;c: extended;d: extended)

Visibility: default

Visibility: default
Visibility: default
64.21.1 Description
The Tvector4_single object provides a vector of four single precision scalars.

constructor.
Visibility: default
1041

Visibility: default
Declaration: constructor init(a: single;b: single;c: single;d: single)

Visibility: default

Visibility: default
Visibility: default
1042
Chapter 65
Reference for unit ’mmx’
65.1 Overview
This document describes the MMX unit. This unit allows you to use the MMX capabilities of the Free
Pascal compiler. It was written by Florian Klaempfl for the I386 processor. It should work on all
platforms that use the Intel processor.

65.2.1 Constants
is_amd_3d_cpu : Boolean = False
The is_amd_3d_cpu initialized constant allows you to determine if the computer has the AMD
3D extensions. It is set correctly in the unit’s initialization code.
is_amd_3d_dsp_cpu : Boolean = False
The is_amd_3d_dsp_cpu initialized constant allows you to determine if the computer has the
AMD 3D DSP extensions. It is set correctly in the unit’s initialization code.
is_amd_3d_mmx_cpu : Boolean = False
The is_amd_3d_mmx_cpu initialized constant allows you to determine if the computer has the
AMD 3D MMX extensions. It is set correctly in the unit’s initialization code.
is_mmx_cpu : Boolean = False
The is_mmx_cpu initialized constant allows you to determine if the computer has MMX extensions.
It is set correctly in the unit’s initialization code.
is_sse2_cpu : Boolean = False
The is_sse2_cpu initialized constant allows you to determine if the computer has the SSE2 ex-
tensions. It is set correctly in the unit’s initialization code.
is_sse_cpu : Boolean = False
The is_sse_cpu initialized constant allows you to determine if the computer has the SSE exten-
sions. It is set correctly in the unit’s initialization code.
1043
CHAPTER 65. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’MMX’
65.2.2 Types
pmmxbyte = ^tmmxbyte
Pointer to tmmxbyte (1044) array type
pmmxcardinal = ^tmmxcardinal
Pointer to tmmxcardinal (1044) array type
pmmxinteger = ^tmmxinteger
Pointer to tmmxinteger (1044) array type
pmmxlongint = ^tmmxlongint
Pointer to tmmxlongint (1044) array type
pmmxshortint = ^tmmxshortint
Pointer to tmmxshortint (1044) array type
pmmxsingle = ^tmmxsingle
Pointer to tmmxsingle (1044) array type
pmmxword = ^tmmxword
Pointer to tmmxword (1044) array type
tmmxbyte = Array[0..7] of Byte
Array of bytes, 64 bits in size
tmmxcardinal = Array[0..1] of Cardinal
Array of cardinals, 64 bits in size
tmmxinteger = Array[0..3] of Integer
Array of integers, 64 bits in size
tmmxlongint = Array[0..1] of LongInt
Array of longint, 64 bits in size
tmmxshortint = Array[0..7] of ShortInt
Array of shortints, 64 bits in size
tmmxsingle = Array[0..1] of single
Array of singles, 64 bits in size
tmmxword = Array[0..3] of Word
Array of words, 64 bits in size
1044
CHAPTER 65. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’MMX’

65.3.1 emms
Synopsis: Reset floating point registers
Declaration: procedure emms
Visibility: default
Description: Emms sets all floating point registers to empty. This procedure must be called after you have used
any MMX instructions, if you want to use floating point arithmetic. If you just want to move floating
point data around, it isn’t necessary to call this function, the compiler doesn’t use the FPU registers
when moving data. Only when doing calculations, you should use this function. The following code
demonstrates this:
Program MMXDemo;
uses mmx;
var
d1 : double;
a : array[0..10000] of double;
i : longint;
begin
d1:=1.0;
{$mmx+}
{ floating point data is used, but we do _no_ arithmetic }
for i:=0 to 10000 do
a[i]:=d2; { this is done with 64 bit moves }
{$mmx-}
emms; { clear fpu }
{ now we can do floating point arithmetic again }
end.
See also: femms (1045)
65.3.2 femms
Synopsis: Reset floating point registers - AMD version
Declaration: procedure femms
Visibility: default
Description: femms executes the femms assembler instruction for AMD processors. it is not supported by all
assemblers, hence it is coded as byte codes.
See also: emms (1045)
1045
Chapter 66
Reference for unit ’Mouse’
66.1 Overview
The Mouse unit implements a platform independent mouse handling interface. It is implemented
identically on all platforms supported by Free Pascal and can be enhanced with custom drivers,
should this be needed. It is intended to be used only in text-based screens, for instance in conjunction
with the keyboard and video unit. No support for graphical screens is implemented, and there are
(currently) no plans to implement this.
66.2 Writing a custom mouse driver

The mouse unit has support for adding a custom mouse driver. This can be used to add support for
mouses not supported by the standard Free Pascal driver, but also to enhance an existing driver for
instance to log mouse events or to implement a record and playback function.
The following unit shows how a mouse driver can be enhanced by adding some logging capabilities
to the driver.
Listing: ./mouseex/logmouse.pp
u n i t logmouse ;
interface
Procedure StartMouseLogging ;
Procedure StopMouseLogging ;
Function IsMouseLogging : Boolean ;
Procedure SetMouseLogFileName ( FileName : S t r i n g ) ;
implementation
uses s y s u t i l s , Mouse ;
var
NewMouseDriver ,
OldMouseDriver : TMouseDriver ;
MouseLog : Text ;
1046
CHAPTER 66. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’MOUSE’
begin
end ;
Procedure StartMouseLogging ;
begin
Logging : = True ;
W r i t e l n ( MouseLog , ’ S t a r t l o g g i n g mouse events a t : ’ , TimeStamp ) ;
end ;
Procedure StopMouseLogging ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( MouseLog , ’ Stop l o g g i n g mouse events a t : ’ , TimeStamp ) ;
Logging : = False ;
end ;
Function IsMouseLogging : Boolean ;
begin
IsMouseLogging : = Logging ;
end ;
Procedure LogGetMouseEvent ( Var Event : TMouseEvent ) ;
Var
M : TMouseEvent ;
begin
OldMouseDriver . GetMouseEvent (M) ;
I f Logging then
begin
Write ( MouseLog , TimeStamp , ’ : Mouse ’ ) ;
With M do
begin
Case A c t i o n of
MouseActionDown : Write ( MouseLog , ’ down ’ ) ;
MouseActionUp : Write ( MouseLog , ’ up ’ ) ;
MouseActionMove : Write ( MouseLog , ’ move ’ ) ;
end ;
Write ( MouseLog , ’ event a t ’ ,X , ’ , ’ ,Y ) ;
I f ( Buttons < >0) then
begin
Write ( MouseLog , ’ f o r b u t t o n s : ’ ) ;
I f ( B u t t o n s and MouseLeftbutton ) < >0 then
Write ( MouseLog , ’ L e f t ’ ) ;
I f ( B u t t o n s and MouseRightbutton ) < >0 then
Write ( MouseLog , ’ R i g h t ’ ) ;
I f ( B u t t o n s and MouseMiddlebutton ) < >0 then
Write ( MouseLog , ’ Middle ’ ) ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( MouseLog ) ;
end ;
end ;
1047
end ;
Procedure LogInitMouse ;
begin
OldMouseDriver . I n i t D r i v e r ( ) ;
Assign ( MouseLog , logFileName ) ;
Rewrite ( MouseLog ) ;
StartMouseLogging ;
end ;
Procedure LogDoneMouse ;
begin
StopMouseLogging ;
Close ( MouseLog ) ;
OldMouseDriver . DoneDriver ( ) ;
end ;
Procedure SetMouseLogFileName ( FileName : S t r i n g ) ;
begin
end ;
Initialization
GetMouseDriver ( OldMouseDriver ) ;
NewMouseDriver : = OldMouseDriver ;
NewMouseDriver . GetMouseEvent : = @LogGetMouseEvent ;
NewMouseDriver . I n i t D r i v e r : = @LogInitMouse ;
NewMouseDriver . DoneDriver : =@LogDoneMouse ;
LogFileName : = ’ Mouse . l o g ’ ;
Logging : = False ;
SetMouseDriver ( NewMouseDriver ) ;
end .

66.3.1 Constants
errMouseBase = 1030
Base for mouse error codes.
errMouseInitError = errMouseBase + 0
Mouse initialization error
errMouseNotImplemented = errMouseBase + 1
Mouse driver not implemented.
1048
MouseActionDown = $0001
Mouse button down event signal.
MouseActionMove = $0004
Mouse cursor move event signal.
MouseActionUp = $0002
Mouse button up event signal.
MouseButton4 = $08
4th mouse button event
MouseButton5 = $10
5th mouse button event
MouseEventBufSize = 16
The mouse unit has a mechanism to buffer mouse events. This constant defines the size of the event
buffer.
MouseLeftButton = $01
Left mouse button event.
MouseMiddleButton = $04
Middle mouse button event.
MouseRightButton = $02
Right mouse button event.
66.3.2 Types
PMouseEvent = ^TMouseEvent
Pointer to TMouseEvent (1050) record.
TMouseDriver = record
UseDefaultQueue : Boolean;
DetectMouse : function : Byte;
ShowMouse : procedure;
HideMouse : procedure;
GetMouseX : function : Word;
1049
GetMouseY : function : Word;

GetMouseButtons : function : Word;
SetMouseXY : procedure(x: Word;y: Word);
GetMouseEvent : procedure(var MouseEvent: TMouseEvent);
PollMouseEvent : function(var MouseEvent: TMouseEvent) : Boolean;
PutMouseEvent : procedure(const MouseEvent: TMouseEvent);
end
The TMouseDriver record is used to implement a mouse driver in the SetMouseDriver (1055)
function. Its fields must be filled in before calling the SetMouseDriver (1055) function.
TMouseEvent = packed record

buttons : Word;
x : Word;
y : Word;
Action : Word;
end
The TMouseEvent is the central type of the mouse unit, it is used to describe all mouse events.
The Buttons field describes which buttons were down when the event occurred. The x,y fields
describe where the event occurred on the screen. The Action describes what action was going on
when the event occurred. The Buttons and Action field can be examined using the constants
defined in the unit interface.
66.3.3 Variables
MouseButtons : Byte
This variable keeps track of the last known mouse button state. Do not use.
MouseIntFlag : Byte
This variable keeps track of the last known internal mouse state. Do not use.
MouseWhereX : Word
This variable keeps track of the last known cursor position. Do not use.
MouseWhereY : Word
This variable keeps track of the last known cursor position. Do not use.

66.4.1 DetectMouse
Synopsis: Detect the presence of a mouse.
Declaration: function DetectMouse : Byte
1050
Visibility: default
Description: DetectMouse detects whether a mouse is attached to the system or not. If there is no mouse, then
zero is returned. If a mouse is attached, then the number of mouse buttons is returnead.
This function should be called after the mouse driver was initialized.
Errors: None.
See also: InitMouse (1054), DoneMouse (1051)
Listing: ./mouseex/ex1.pp
Program Example1 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e DetectMouse f u n c t i o n . }
Uses mouse ;
Var
B u t t o n s : Byte ;
begin
InitMouse ;
B u t t o n s : = DetectMouse ;
I f B u t t o n s =0 then
W r i t e l n ( ’No mouse p r e s e n t . ’ )
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ Found mouse w i t h ’ , Buttons , ’ b u t t o n s . ’ ) ;
DoneMouse ;
end .
66.4.2 DoneMouse
Synopsis: Deinitialize mouse driver.
Declaration: procedure DoneMouse

Visibility: default
Description: DoneMouse De-initializes the mouse driver. It cleans up any memory allocated when the mouse
was initialized, or removes possible mouse hooks from memory. The mouse functions will not
work after DoneMouse was called. If DoneMouse is called a second time, it will exit at once.
InitMouse should be called before DoneMouse can be called again.
For an example, see most other mouse functions.
Errors: None.
See also: DetectMouse (1050), InitMouse (1054)
66.4.3 GetMouseButtons
Synopsis: Get the state of the mouse buttons
Declaration: function GetMouseButtons : Word
Visibility: default
1051
Description: GetMouseButtons returns the current button state of the mouse, i.e. it returns a or-ed combina-
tion of the following constants:
MouseLeftButtonWhen the left mouse button is held down.

MouseRightButtonWhen the right mouse button is held down.
MouseMiddleButtonWhen the middle mouse button is held down.
Errors: None.
See also: GetMouseEvent (1052), GetMouseX (1053), GetMouseY (1053)
Program Example2 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GetMouseButtons f u n c t i o n . }
Uses mouse ;
begin
InitMouse ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Press r i g h t mouse b u t t o n t o e x i t program ’ ) ;
While ( GetMouseButtons <>MouseRightButton ) do ;
DoneMouse ;
end .
66.4.4 GetMouseDriver
Synopsis: Get a copy of the currently active mouse driver.
Declaration: procedure GetMouseDriver(var Driver: TMouseDriver)
Visibility: default
Description: GetMouseDriver returns the currently set mouse driver. It can be used to retrieve the current
mouse driver, and override certain callbacks.
A more detailed explanation about getting and setting mouse drivers can be found in mousedrv
(1046).
For an example, see the section on writing a custom mouse driver, mousedrv (1046)
Errors: None.
See also: SetMouseDriver (1055)
66.4.5 GetMouseEvent
Synopsis: Get next mouse event from the queue.
Declaration: procedure GetMouseEvent(var MouseEvent: TMouseEvent)
Visibility: default
Description: GetMouseEvent returns the next mouse event (a movement, button press or button release), and
waits for one if none is available in the queue.
Some mouse drivers can implement a mouse event queue which can hold multiple events till they
are fetched. Others don’t, and in that case, a one-event queue is implemented for use with Poll-
MouseEvent (1055).
1052
Errors: None.
See also: GetMouseButtons (1051), GetMouseX (1053), GetMouseY (1053)
66.4.6 GetMouseX
Synopsis: Query the current horizontal position of the mouse cursor.
Declaration: function GetMouseX : Word

Visibility: default
Description: GetMouseX returns the current X position of the mouse. X is measured in characters, starting at 0
for the left side of the screen.
Errors: None.
See also: GetMouseButtons (1051), GetMouseEvent (1052), GetMouseY (1053)
Program Example4 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GetMouseX , GetMouseY f u n c t i o n s . }
Uses mouse ;
Var
X , Y : Word ;
begin
InitMouse ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Move mouse c u r s o r t o square 1 0 , 1 0 t o end ’ ) ;
Repeat
X: = GetMouseX ;
Y: = GetMouseY ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ X , Y = ( ’ ,X , ’ , ’ ,Y , ’ ) ’ ) ;
U n t i l ( X= 9 ) and ( Y= 9 ) ;
DoneMouse ;
end .
66.4.7 GetMouseY
Synopsis: Query the current vertical position of the mouse cursor.
Declaration: function GetMouseY : Word

Visibility: default
Description: GetMouseY returns the current Y position of the mouse. Y is measured in characters, starting at 0
for the top of the screen.
For an example, see GetMouseX (1053)
Errors: None.
See also: GetMouseButtons (1051), GetMouseEvent (1052), GetMouseX (1053)
1053
66.4.8 HideMouse
Synopsis: Hide the mouse cursor.
Declaration: procedure HideMouse

Visibility: default
Description: HideMouse hides the mouse cursor. This may or may not be implemented on all systems, and
depends on the driver.
Errors: None.
See also: ShowMouse (1056)
Program Example5 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e HideMouse f u n c t i o n . }
Uses mouse ;
Var
Event : TMouseEvent ;
V i s i b l e : Boolean ;
begin
InitMouse ;
ShowMouse ;
V i s i b l e : = True ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Press l e f t mouse b u t t o n t o h i d e / show , r i g h t b u t t o n q u i t s ’ ) ;
Repeat
GetMouseEvent ( Event ) ;
With Event do
I f ( B u t t o n s = MouseLeftbutton ) and
( A c t i o n =MouseActionDown ) then
begin
I f V i s i b l e then
HideMouse
else
ShowMouse ;
V i s i b l e : = Not V i s i b l e ;
end ;
U n t i l ( Event . B u t t o n s =MouseRightButton ) and
( Event . A c t i o n =MouseActionDown ) ;
DoneMouse ;
end .
66.4.9 InitMouse
Synopsis: Initialize the FPC mouse driver.
Declaration: procedure InitMouse

Visibility: default
1054
Description: InitMouse Initializes the mouse driver. This will allocate any data structures needed for the
mouse to function. All mouse functions can be used after a call to InitMouse.
A call to InitMouse must always be followed by a call to DoneMouse (1051) at program exit.
Failing to do so may leave the mouse in an unusable state, or may result in memory leaks.
Errors: None.
See also: DoneMouse (1051), DetectMouse (1050)
66.4.10 PollMouseEvent
Synopsis: Query next mouse event. Do not wait if none available.
Declaration: function PollMouseEvent(var MouseEvent: TMouseEvent) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: PollMouseEvent checks whether a mouse event is available, and returns it in MouseEvent if
one is found. The function result is True in that case. If no mouse event is pending, the function
result is False, and the contents of MouseEvent is undefined.
Note that after a call to PollMouseEvent, the event should still be removed from the mouse event
queue with a call to GetMouseEvent.
Errors: None.
See also: GetMouseEvent (1052), PutMouseEvent (1055)
66.4.11 PutMouseEvent
Synopsis: Put a mouse event in the venet queue.
Declaration: procedure PutMouseEvent(const MouseEvent: TMouseEvent)
Visibility: default
Description: PutMouseEvent adds MouseEvent to the input queue. The next call to GetMouseEvent (1052)
or PollMouseEvent will then return MouseEvent.
Please note that depending on the implementation the mouse event queue can hold only one value.
Errors: None.
See also: GetMouseEvent (1052), PollMouseEvent (1055)
66.4.12 SetMouseDriver
Synopsis: Set a new mouse driver.
Declaration: procedure SetMouseDriver(const Driver: TMouseDriver)
Visibility: default
Description: SetMouseDriver sets the mouse driver to Driver. This function should be called before Init-
Mouse (1054) is called, or after DoneMouse is called. If it is called after the mouse has been
initialized, it does nothing.
For more information on setting the mouse driver, mousedrv (1046).
For an example, see mousedrv (1046)
1055
See also: InitMouse (1054), DoneMouse (1051), GetMouseDriver (1052)
66.4.13 SetMouseXY
Synopsis: Set the mouse cursor position.
Declaration: procedure SetMouseXY(x: Word;y: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: SetMouseXY places the mouse cursor on X,Y. X and Y are zero based character coordinates: 0,0
is the top-left corner of the screen, and the position is in character cells (i.e. not in pixels).
Errors: None.
See also: GetMouseX (1053), GetMouseY (1053)
Program Example7 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e SetMouseXY f u n c t i o n . }
Uses mouse ;
begin
InitMouse ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ C l i c k r i g h t mouse b u t t o n t o q u i t . ’ ) ;
SetMouseXY ( 4 0 , 1 2 ) ;
Repeat
W r i t e l n ( GetMouseX , ’ , ’ , GetMouseY ) ;
I f ( GetMouseX > 7 0 ) then
SetMouseXY ( 1 0 , GetMouseY ) ;
I f ( GetMouseY > 2 0 ) then
SetMouseXY ( GetMouseX , 5 ) ;
U n t i l ( GetMouseButtons=MouseRightButton ) ;
DoneMouse ;
end .
66.4.14 ShowMouse
Synopsis: Show the mouse cursor.
Declaration: procedure ShowMouse
Visibility: default
Description: ShowMouse shows the mouse cursor if it was previously hidden. The capability to hide or show
the mouse cursor depends on the driver.
For an example, see HideMouse (1054)
Errors: None.
See also: HideMouse (1054)
1056
Chapter 67
Reference for unit ’Objects’
67.1 Overview
This document documents the objects unit. The unit was implemented by many people, and was
mainly taken from the FreeVision sources. It has been ported to all supported platforms.
The methods and fields that are in a Private part of an object declaration have been left out of this
documentation.

67.2.1 Constants
coIndexError = -1
Collection list error: Index out of range
coOverflow = -2
Collection list error: Overflow
DefaultTPCompatible : Boolean = False
DefaultTPCompatible is used to initialize tstream.tpcompatible (??).
MaxBytes = 128 * 1024 * 128
Maximum data size (in bytes)
MaxCollectionSize = MaxBytes div (Pointer)
Maximum collection size (in items)
MaxPtrs = MaxBytes div (Pointer)
Maximum data size (in pointers)
1057
CHAPTER 67. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’OBJECTS’
MaxReadBytes = $7fffffff
Maximum data that can be read from a stream (not used)
MaxTPCompatibleCollectionSize = 65520 div 4
Maximum collection size (in items, same value as in TP)
MaxWords = MaxBytes div (Word)
Maximum data size (in words)
RCollection : TStreamRec = (ObjType: 50; VmtLink: (^(TCollection)); Load: @TCollectio
Default stream record for the TCollection (1074) object.
RStrCollection : TStreamRec = (ObjType: 69; VmtLink: (^(TStrCollection)); Load: @TStr
Default stream record for the TStrCollection (1113) object.
RStringCollection : TStreamRec = (ObjType: 51; VmtLink: (^(TStringCollection)); Load:
Default stream record for the TStringCollection (1123) object.
RStringList : TStreamRec = (ObjType: 52; VmtLink: (^(TStringList)); Load: @TStringLis
Default stream record for the TStringList (1125) object.
RStrListMaker : TStreamRec = (ObjType: 52; VmtLink: (^(TStrListMaker)); Load: Nil; St
Default stream record for the TStrListMaker (1127) object.
stCreate = $3C00
Stream initialization mode: Create new file
stError = -1
Stream error codes: Access error
stGetError = -5
Stream error codes: Get object error
stInitError = -2
Stream error codes: Initialize error
stOk = 0
Stream error codes: No error
1058
stOpen = $3D02
Stream initialization mode: Read/write access
stOpenError = -8
Stream error codes: Error opening stream
stOpenRead = $3D00
Stream initialization mode: Read access only
stOpenWrite = $3D01
Stream initialization mode: Write access only
stPutError = -6
Stream error codes: Put object error
stReadError = -3
Stream error codes: Stream read error
StreamError : CodePointer = Nil
Pointer to default stream error handler.
stSeekError = -7
Stream error codes: Seek error in stream
stWriteError = -4
Stream error codes: Stream write error
vmtHeaderSize = 8
Size of the VMT header in an object (not used).
67.2.2 Types
AsciiZ = Array[0..255] of Char
Filename - null terminated array of characters.
FNameStr = String
Filename - shortstring version.
1059
LongRec = packed record

Hi : Word;
Lo : Word;
end
Record describing a longint (in Words)
PBufStream = ^TBufStream
Pointer to TBufStream (1070) object.
PByteArray = ^TByteArray
Pointer to TByteArray (1062)
PCharSet = ^TCharSet
Pointer to TCharSet (1062).
PCollection = ^TCollection
Pointer to TCollection (1074) object.
PDosStream = ^TDosStream
Pointer to TDosStream (1088) object.
PItemList = ^TItemList
Pointer to TItemList (1062) object.
PMemoryStream = ^TMemoryStream
Pointer to TMemoryStream (1093) object.
PObject = ^TObject
Pointer to TObject (1095) object.
PPoint = ^TPoint
Pointer to TPoint (1097) record.
PPointerArray = ^TPointerArray
Pointer to TPointerArray (1062)
PRect = ^TRect
Pointer to TRect (1097) object.
1060
PResourceCollection = ^TResourceCollection
Pointer to TResourceCollection (1103) object.
PResourceFile = ^TResourceFile
Pointer to TResourceFile (1104) object.
PSortedCollection = ^TSortedCollection
Pointer to TSortedCollection (1107) object.
PStrCollection = ^TStrCollection
Pointer to TStrCollection (1113) object.
PStream = ^TStream
Pointer type to TStream (1115)
PStreamRec = ^TStreamRec
Pointer to TStreamRec (1062)
PStrIndex = ^TStrIndex
Pointer to TStrIndex (1062) array.
PString = PShortString
Pointer to a shortstring.
PStringCollection = ^TStringCollection
Pointer to TStringCollection (1123) object.
PStringList = ^TStringList
Pointer to TStringList (1125) object.
PStrListMaker = ^TStrListMaker
Pointer to TStrListMaker (1127) object.
PtrRec = packed record

Ofs : Word;
Seg : Word;
end
Record describing a pointer to a memory location.
1061
PUnSortedStrCollection = ^TUnSortedStrCollection
Pointer to TUnSortedStrCollection (1128) object.
PWordArray = ^TWordArray
Pointer to TWordArray (1063)
Sw_Integer = LongInt
Alias for longint
Sw_Word = Cardinal
Alias for Cardinal
TByteArray = Array[0..MaxBytes-1] of Byte
Array with maxmimum allowed number of bytes.
TCharSet = Set of Char
Generic set of characters type.
TItemList = Array[0..MaxCollectionSize-1] of Pointer
Pointer array type used in a TCollection (1074)
TPointerArray = Array[0..MaxPtrs-1] of Pointer
Array with maxmimum allowed number of pointers
TStreamRec = packed record

ObjType : Sw_Word;
VmtLink : pointer;
Load : CodePointer;
Store : CodePointer;
Next : PStreamRec;
end
TSreamRec is used by the Objects unit streaming mechanism: when an object is registered, a
TStreamRec record is added to a list of records. This list is used when objects need to be streamed
from/streamed to a stream. It contains all the information needed to stream the object.
TStrIndex = Array[0..9999] of TStrIndexRec
Pointer array type used in a TStringList (1125)
1062
TStrIndexRec = packed record

Key : Sw_Word;
Count : Word;
Offset : Word;
end
Record type used in a TStringList (1125) to store the strings
TWordArray = Array[0..MaxWords-1] of Word
Array with maxmimum allowed number of words.
WordRec = packed record

Hi : Byte;
Lo : Byte;
end
Record describing a Word (in bytes)
67.2.3 Variables
invalidhandle : THandle
Value for invalid handle. Initial value for file stream handles or when the stream is closed.

67.3.1 Abstract
Synopsis: Abstract error handler.
Declaration: procedure Abstract
Visibility: default
Description: When implementing abstract methods, do not declare them as abstract. Instead, define them sim-
ply as virtual. In the implementation of such abstract methods, call the Abstract procedure.
This allows explicit control of what happens when an abstract method is called.
The current implementation of Abstract terminates the program with a run-time error 211.
Errors: None.
67.3.2 CallPointerConstructor
Synopsis: Call a constructor with a pointer argument.
Declaration: function CallPointerConstructor(Ctor: codepointer;Obj: pointer;
VMT: pointer;Param1: pointer) : pointer
Visibility: default
1063
Description: CallVoidConstructor calls the constructor of an object. Ctor is the address of the construc-
tor, Obj is a pointer to the instance. If it is Nil, then a new instance is allocated. VMT is a pointer to
the object’s VMT. Param1 is passed to the constructor. The return value is a pointer to the instance.
Note that this can only be used on constructors that require a pointer as the sole argument. It can also
be used to call a constructor with a single argument by reference.
Errors: If the constructor expects other arguments than a pointer, the stack may be corrupted.
See also: CallVoidConstructor (1065), CallPointerMethod (1064), CallVoidLocal (1065), CallPointerLocal
(1064), CallVoidMethodLocal (1066), CallPointerMethodLocal (1064)
67.3.3 CallPointerLocal
Synopsis: Call a local nested function with a pointer argument
Declaration: function CallPointerLocal(Func: codepointer;Frame: Pointer;

Param1: pointer) : pointer
Visibility: default
Description: CallPointerLocal calls the local procedure with address Func, where Frame is the frame of
the wrapping function. It passes Param1 to the local function.
Errors: If the local function expects other parameters than a pointer, the stack may become corrupted.
See also: CallPointerMethod (1064), CallVoidMethod (1065), CallVoidLocal (1065), CallVoidMethodLocal
(1066), CallPointerMethodLocal (1064), CallVoidConstructor (1065), CallPointerConstructor (1063)
67.3.4 CallPointerMethod
Synopsis: Call a method with a single pointer argument
Declaration: function CallPointerMethod(Method: codepointer;Obj: pointer;
Param1: pointer) : pointer
Visibility: default
Description: CallPointerMethod calls the method with address Method for instance Obj. It passes Param1
to the method as the single argument. It returns a pointer to the instance.
Errors: If the method expects other parameters than a single pointer, the stack may become corrupted.
See also: CallVoidMethod (1065), CallVoidLocal (1065), CallPointerLocal (1064), CallVoidMethodLocal (1066),
CallPointerMethodLocal (1064), CallVoidConstructor (1065), CallPointerConstructor (1063)
67.3.5 CallPointerMethodLocal
Synopsis: Call a local procedure of a method with a pointer argument
Declaration: function CallPointerMethodLocal(Func: codepointer;Frame: Pointer;
Obj: pointer;Param1: pointer) : pointer
Visibility: default
Description: CallPointerMethodLocal calls the local procedure with address Func, where Frame is the
frame of the wrapping method. It passes Param1 to the local function.
1064
Errors: If the local function expects other parameters than a pointer, the stack may become corrupted.
See also: CallPointerMethod (1064), CallVoidMethod (1065), CallPointerLocal (1064), CallVoidLocal (1065),
CallVoidMethodLocal (1066), CallVoidConstructor (1065), CallPointerConstructor (1063)
67.3.6 CallVoidConstructor
Synopsis: Call a constructor with no arguments
Declaration: function CallVoidConstructor(Ctor: codepointer;Obj: pointer;

VMT: pointer) : pointer
Visibility: default
Description: CallVoidConstructor calls the constructor of an object. Ctor is the address of the construc-
tor, Obj is a pointer to the instance. If it is Nil, then a new instance is allocated. VMT is a pointer to
the object’s VMT. The return value is a pointer to the instance.
Note that this can only be used on constructors that require no arguments.
Errors: If the constructor expects arguments, the stack may be corrupted.
See also: CallPointerConstructor (1063), CallPointerMethod (1064), CallVoidLocal (1065), CallPointerLocal

(1064), CallVoidMethodLocal (1066), CallPointerMethodLocal (1064)
67.3.7 CallVoidLocal
Synopsis: Call a local nested procedure.
Declaration: function CallVoidLocal(Func: codepointer;Frame: Pointer) : pointer
Visibility: default
Description: CallVoidLocal calls the local procedure with address Func, where Frame is the frame of the
wrapping function.
Errors: If the local function expects parameters, the stack may become corrupted.
See also: CallPointerMethod (1064), CallVoidMethod (1065), CallPointerLocal (1064), CallVoidMethodLo-

cal (1066), CallPointerMethodLocal (1064), CallVoidConstructor (1065), CallPointerConstructor
(1063)
67.3.8 CallVoidMethod
Synopsis: Call an object method
Declaration: function CallVoidMethod(Method: codepointer;Obj: pointer) : pointer

Visibility: default
Description: CallVoidMethod calls the method with address Method for instance Obj. It returns a pointer
to the instance.
Errors: If the method expects parameters, the stack may become corrupted.
See also: CallPointerMethod (1064), CallVoidLocal (1065), CallPointerLocal (1064), CallVoidMethodLo-
cal (1066), CallPointerMethodLocal (1064), CallVoidConstructor (1065), CallPointerConstructor
(1063)
1065
67.3.9 CallVoidMethodLocal
Synopsis: Call a local procedure of a method
Declaration: function CallVoidMethodLocal(Func: codepointer;Frame: Pointer;
Obj: pointer) : pointer
Visibility: default
Description: CallVoidMethodLocal calls the local procedure with address Func, where Frame is the frame
of the wrapping method.
Errors: If the local function expects parameters, the stack may become corrupted.
See also: CallPointerMethod (1064), CallVoidMethod (1065), CallPointerLocal (1064), CallVoidLocal (1065),
CallPointerMethodLocal (1064), CallVoidConstructor (1065), CallPointerConstructor (1063)
67.3.10 DisposeStr
Synopsis: Dispose of a shortstring which was allocated on the heap.
Declaration: procedure DisposeStr(P: PString)
Visibility: default
Description: DisposeStr removes a dynamically allocated string from the heap.
For an example, see NewStr (1067).
Errors: None.
See also: NewStr (1067), SetStr (1069)
67.3.11 LongDiv
Synopsis: Overflow safe divide
Declaration: function LongDiv(X: LongInt;Y: Integer) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: LongDiv divides X by Y. The result is of type Integer instead of type Longint, as you would
get normally.
Errors: If Y is zero, a run-time error will be generated.
See also: LongMul (1066)
67.3.12 LongMul
Synopsis: Overflow safe multiply.
Declaration: function LongMul(X: Integer;Y: Integer) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: LongMul multiplies X with Y. The result is of type Longint. This avoids possible overflow errors
you would normally get when multiplying X and Y that are too big.
Errors: None.
See also: LongDiv (1066)
1066
67.3.13 NewStr
Synopsis: Allocate a copy of a shortstring on the heap.
Declaration: function NewStr(const S: string) : PString

Visibility: default
Description: NewStr makes a copy of the string S on the heap, and returns a pointer to this copy. If the string is
empty then Nil is returned.
The allocated memory is not based on the declared size of the string passed to NewStr, but is baed
on the actual length of the string.
Errors: If not enough memory is available, an ’out of memory’ error will occur.
See also: DisposeStr (1066), SetStr (1069)
Listing: ./objectex/ex40.pp
Program ex40 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e NewStr f u n c t i o n }
Uses O b j e c t s ;
Var S : S t r i n g ;
P : PString ;
begin
S: = ’Some r e a l l y c u t e s t r i n g ’ ;
P: = NewStr (S ) ;
I f P^<>S then
W r i t e l n ( ’Oh−oh . . . Something i s wrong ! ! ’ ) ;
DisposeStr (P ) ;
end .
67.3.14 RegisterObjects
Synopsis: Register standard objects.
Declaration: procedure RegisterObjects
Visibility: default
Description: RegisterObjects registers the following objects for streaming:
1.TCollection, see TCollection (1074).

2.TStringCollection, see TStringCollection (1123).
3.TStrCollection, see TStrCollection (1113).
Errors: None.
See also: RegisterType (1068)
1067
67.3.15 RegisterType
Synopsis: Register new object for streaming.
Declaration: procedure RegisterType(var S: TStreamRec)

Visibility: default
Description: RegisterType registers a new type for streaming. An object cannot be streamed unless it has
been registered first. The stream record S needs to have the following fields set:
ObjType: Sw_WordThis should be a unique identifier. Each possible type should have it’s own
identifier.
VmtLink: pointerThis should contain a pointer to the VMT (Virtual Method Table) of the object
you try to register.
Load : Pointeris a pointer to a method that initializes an instance of that object, and reads the ini-
tial values from a stream. This method should accept as it’s sole argument a PStream type
variable.
Store: Pointeris a pointer to a method that stores an instance of the object to a stream. This method
should accept as it’s sole argument a PStream type variable.
The VMT of the object can be retrieved with the following expression:
VmtLink: Ofs(TypeOf(MyType)^);
Errors: In case of error (if a object with the same ObjType) is already registered), run-time error 212
occurs.
Listing: ./objectex/myobject.pp
Unit MyObject ;
Interface
Type
PMyObject = ^ TMyObject ;
TMyObject = Object ( TObject )
Field : Longint ;
Constructor I n i t ;
Constructor Load ( Var Stream : TStream ) ;
Destructor Done ;
Procedure S t o r e ( Var Stream : TStream ) ;
Function G e t F i e l d : L o n g i n t ;
Procedure S e t F i e l d ( Value : L o n g i n t ) ;
end ;
Implementation
Constructor TMyobject . I n i t ;
begin
Inherited I n i t ;
F i e l d := −1;
end ;
1068
Constructor TMyobject . Load ( Var Stream : TStream ) ;
begin
Stream . Read ( F i e l d , Sizeof ( F i e l d ) ) ;
end ;
Destructor TMyObject . Done ;
begin
end ;
Function TMyObject . G e t F i e l d : L o n g i n t ;
begin
GetField := Field ;
end ;
Procedure TMyObject . S e t F i e l d ( Value : L o n g i n t ) ;
begin
F i e l d : = Value ;
end ;
Procedure TMyObject . S t o r e ( Var Stream : TStream ) ;
begin
Stream . Write ( F i e l d , SizeOf ( F i e l d ) ) ;
end ;
Const MyObjectRec : TStreamRec = (

Objtype : 6 6 6 ;
v m t l i n k : Ofs ( TypeOf ( TMyObject ) ^ ) ;
Load : @TMyObject . Load ;
S t o r e : @TMyObject . S t o r e ;
);
begin
RegisterObjects ;
RegisterType ( MyObjectRec ) ;
end .
67.3.16 SetStr
Synopsis: Allocate a copy of a shortstring on the heap.
Declaration: procedure SetStr(var p: PString;const s: string)

Visibility: default
Description: SetStr makes a copy of the string S on the heap and returns the pointer to this copy in P. If P
pointed to another string (i.e. was not Nil, the memory is released first. Contrary to NewStr (1067),
if the string is empty then a pointer to an empty string is returned.
The allocated memory is not based on the declared size of the string passed to NewStr, but is based
on the actual length of the string.
Errors: If not enough memory is available, an ’out of memory’ error will occur.
1069
See also: DisposeStr (1066), NewStr (1067)
67.4 TBufStream
67.4.1 Description
Bufstream implements a buffered file stream. That is, all data written to the stream is written to
memory first. Only when the buffer is full, or on explicit request, the data is written to disk.
Also, when reading from the stream, first the buffer is checked if there is any unread data in it. If so,
this is read first. If not the buffer is filled again, and then the data is read from the buffer.
The size of the buffer is fixed and is set when constructing the file.
This is useful if you need heavy throughput for your stream, because it speeds up operations.

1071 Close Flush data and Close the file.
1071 Done Close the file and cleans up the instance.
1071 Flush FLush data from buffer, and write it to stream.
1070 Init Initialize an instance of TBufStream and open the file.
1073 Open Open the file if it is closed.
1073 Read Read data from the file to a buffer in memory.
1072 Seek Set current position in file.
1072 Truncate Flush buffer, and truncate the file at current position.
1073 Write Write data to the file from a buffer in memory.
67.4.3 TBufStream.Init
Synopsis: Initialize an instance of TBufStream and open the file.
Declaration: constructor Init(FileName: FNameStr;Mode: Word;Size: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: Init instantiates an instance of TBufStream. The name of the file that contains (or will contain)
the data of the stream is given in FileName. The Mode parameter determines whether a new file
should be created and what access rights you have on the file. It can be one of the following constants:
stCreateCreates a new file.

stOpenReadRead access only.
stOpenWriteWrite access only.
stOpenRead and write access.
The Size parameter determines the size of the buffer that will be created. It should be different from
zero.
For an example see TBufStream.Flush (1071).
Errors: On error, Status is set to stInitError, and ErrorInfo is set to the dos error code.
See also: TDosStream.Init (1089), TBufStream.Done (1071)
1070
67.4.4 TBufStream.Done
Synopsis: Close the file and cleans up the instance.
Declaration: destructor Done; Virtual
Visibility: default
Description: Done flushes and closes the file if it was open and cleans up the instance of TBufStream.
Errors: None.
See also: TDosStream.Done (1089), TBufStream.Init (1070), TBufStream.Close (1071)
67.4.5 TBufStream.Close
Synopsis: Flush data and Close the file.
Declaration: procedure Close; Virtual
Visibility: default
Description: Close flushes and closes the file if it was open, and sets Handle to -1. Contrary to Done (1071) it
does not clean up the instance of TBufStream
Errors: None.
See also: TStream.Close (1119), TBufStream.Init (1070), TBufStream.Done (1071)
67.4.6 TBufStream.Flush
Synopsis: FLush data from buffer, and write it to stream.
Declaration: procedure Flush; Virtual
Visibility: default
Description: When the stream is in write mode, the contents of the buffer are written to disk, and the buffer
position is set to zero. When the stream is in read mode, the buffer position is set to zero.
Errors: Write errors may occur if the file was in write mode. see Write (1073) for more info on the errors.
See also: TStream.Close (1119), TBufStream.Init (1070), TBufStream.Done (1071)
Program ex15 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e TStream . Flush method }
Var L : S t r i n g ;
P : PString ;
S : PBufStream ; { Only one w i t h Flush implemented . }
begin
1071
L : = ’Some c o n s t a n t s t r i n g ’ ;
{ Buffer size of 100 }
S: =New( PBufStream , I n i t ( ’ t e s t . d a t ’ , s t c r e a t e , 1 0 0 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ W r i t i n g " ’ , L , ’ " t o stream w i t h handle ’ ,S ^ . Handle ) ;
S ^ . W r i t e S t r (@L) ;
{ At t h i s moment , t h e r e i s no data on d i s k y e t . }
S ^ . Flush ;
{ Now t h e r e i s . }
S ^ . W r i t e S t r (@L) ;
{ Close c a l l s f l u s h f i r s t }
S ^ . Close ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Closed stream . F i l e handle i s ’ ,S ^ . Handle ) ;
S ^ . Open ( stOpenRead ) ;
P: =S ^ . ReadStr ;
L : =P ^ ;
DisposeStr (P ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Read " ’ , L , ’ " from stream w i t h handle ’ ,S ^ . Handle ) ;
S ^ . Close ;
Dispose ( S , Done ) ;
end .
67.4.7 TBufStream.Truncate
Synopsis: Flush buffer, and truncate the file at current position.
Declaration: procedure Truncate; Virtual

Visibility: default
Description: If the status of the stream is stOK, then Truncate tries to flush the buffer, and then truncates the
stream size to the current file position.
For an example, see TDosStream.Truncate (1090).
Errors: Errors can be those of Flush (1071) or TDosStream.Truncate (1090).
See also: TStream.Truncate (1120), TDosStream.Truncate (1090), TStream.GetSize (1117)
67.4.8 TBufStream.Seek
Synopsis: Set current position in file.
Declaration: procedure Seek(Pos: LongInt); Virtual
Visibility: default
Description: If the stream’s status is stOK, then Seek sets the file position to Pos. Pos is a zero-based offset,
counted from the beginning of the file.
For an example, see TStream.Seek (1121);
Errors: In case an error occurs, the stream’s status is set to stSeekError, and the OS error code is stored
in ErrorInfo.
See also: TStream.Seek (1121), TStream.GetPos (1117)
1072
67.4.9 TBufStream.Open
Synopsis: Open the file if it is closed.
Declaration: procedure Open(OpenMode: Word); Virtual

Visibility: default
Description: If the stream’s status is stOK, and the stream is closed then Open re-opens the file stream with
mode OpenMode. This call can be used after a Close (1071) call.
For an example, see TDosStream.Open (1092).
Errors: If an error occurs when re-opening the file, then Status is set to stOpenError, and the OS error
code is stored in ErrorInfo
See also: TStream.Open (1119), TBufStream.Close (1071)
67.4.10 TBufStream.Read
Synopsis: Read data from the file to a buffer in memory.
Visibility: default
Description: If the Stream is open and the stream status is stOK then Read will read Count bytes from the
stream and place them in Buf.
Read will first try to read the data from the stream’s internal buffer. If insufficient data is available,
the buffer will be filled before contiunuing to read. This process is repeated until all needed data has
been read.
For an example, see TStream.Read (1122).
Errors: In case of an error, Status is set to StReadError, and ErrorInfo gets the OS specific error,
or 0 when an attempt was made to read beyond the end of the stream.
See also: TStream.Read (1122), TBufStream.Write (1073)
67.4.11 TBufStream.Write
Synopsis: Write data to the file from a buffer in memory.
Declaration: procedure Write(var Buf;Count: LongInt); Virtual
Visibility: default
Description: If the Stream is open and the stream status is stOK then Write will write Count bytes from Buf
and place them in the stream.
Write will first try to write the data to the stream’s internal buffer. When the internal buffer is full,
then the contents will be written to disk. This process is repeated until all data has been written.
Errors: In case of an error, Status is set to StWriteError, and ErrorInfo gets the OS specific error.
See also: TStream.Write (1122), TBufStream.Read (1073)
1073
67.5 TCollection
67.5.1 Description
The TCollection object manages a collection of pointers or objects. It also provides a series of
methods to manipulate these pointers or objects.
Whether or not objects are used depends on the kind of calls you use. All kinds come in 2 flavors,
one for objects, one for pointers.

1076 At Return the item at a certain index.
1084 AtDelete Delete item at certain position.
1083 AtFree Free an item at the indicates position, calling it’s destructor.
1087 AtInsert Insert an element at a certain position in the collection.
1087 AtPut Set collection item, overwriting an existing value.
1083 Delete Delete an item from the collection, but does not destroy it.
1081 DeleteAll Delete all elements from the collection. Objects are not destroyed.
1075 Done Clean up collection, release all memory.
1086 Error Set error code.
1078 FirstThat Return first item which matches a test.
1085 ForEach Execute procedure for each item in the list.
1082 Free Free item from collection, calling it’s destructor.
1080 FreeAll Release all objects from the collection.
1084 FreeItem Destroy a non-nil item.
1077 GetItem Read one item off the stream.
1076 IndexOf Find the position of a certain item.
1074 Init Instantiate a new collection.
1082 Insert Insert a new item in the collection at the end.
1078 LastThat Return last item which matches a test.
1075 Load Initialize a new collection and load collection from a stream.
1079 Pack Remove all >Nil pointers from the collection.
1088 PutItem Put one item on the stream
1086 SetLimit Set maximum number of elements in the collection.
1088 Store Write collection to a stream.
67.5.3 TCollection.Init
Synopsis: Instantiate a new collection.
Declaration: constructor Init(ALimit: Sw_Integer;ADelta: Sw_Integer)
Visibility: default
Description: Init initializes a new instance of a collection. It sets the (initial) maximum number of items in
the collection to ALimit. ADelta is the increase size : The number of memory places that will be
allocated in case ALimit is reached, and another element is added to the collection.
For an example, see TCollection.ForEach (1085).
Errors: None.
See also: TCollection.Load (1075), TCollection.Done (1075)
1074
67.5.4 TCollection.Load
Synopsis: Initialize a new collection and load collection from a stream.
Declaration: constructor Load(var S: TStream)

Visibility: default
Description: Load initializes a new instance of a collection. It reads from stream S the item count, the item limit
count, and the increase size. After that, it reads the specified number of items from the stream.
Errors: Errors returned can be those of GetItem (1077).

See also: TCollection.Init (1074), TCollection.GetItem (1077), TCollection.Done (1075)
Program ex22 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e T C o l l e c t i o n . Load method }
Uses Objects , MyObject ; { For TMyObject d e f i n i t i o n and r e g i s t r a t i o n }
Var C : PCollection ;
M : PMyObject ;
I : Longint ;
S : PMemoryStream ;
begin
C: =New( P C o l l e c t i o n , I n i t ( 1 0 0 , 1 0 ) ) ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
begin
M: =New( PMyObject , I n i t ) ;
M^ . S e t F i e l d (100− I ) ;
C^ . I n s e r t (M) ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ I n s e r t e d ’ ,C^ . Count , ’ o b j e c t s ’ ) ;
S: =New( PMemorySTream , I n i t ( 1 0 0 0 , 1 0 ) ) ;
C^ . S t o r e (S ^ ) ;
C^ . F r e e A l l ;
Dispose (C, Done ) ;
S ^ . Seek ( 0 ) ;
C^ . Load (S ^ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Read ’ ,C^ . Count , ’ o b j e c t s from stream . ’ ) ;
end .
67.5.5 TCollection.Done
Synopsis: Clean up collection, release all memory.

Visibility: default
Description: Done frees all objects in the collection, and then releases all memory occupied by the instance.
For an example, see TCollection.ForEach (1085).
1075
Errors: None.
See also: TCollection.Init (1074), TCollection.FreeAll (1080)
67.5.6 TCollection.At
Synopsis: Return the item at a certain index.
Declaration: function At(Index: Sw_Integer) : Pointer
Visibility: default
Description: At returns the item at position Index.
Errors: If Index is less than zero or larger than the number of items in the collection, seepl{Error}{TCollection.Error}
is called with coIndexError and Index as arguments, resulting in a run-time error.
See also: TCollection.Insert (1082)
Program ex23 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e T C o l l e c t i o n . At method }
Var C : P C o l l e c t i o n ;
M : PMyObject ;
I : Longint ;
begin
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
begin
M^ . S e t F i e l d (100− I ) ;
C^ . I n s e r t (M) ;
end ;
For I : = 0 to C^ . Count −1 do
begin
M: =C^ . At ( I ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ O b j e c t ’ , i , ’ has f i e l d : ’ ,M^ . G e t F i e l d ) ;
end ;
end .
67.5.7 TCollection.IndexOf
Synopsis: Find the position of a certain item.
Declaration: function IndexOf(Item: Pointer) : Sw_Integer; Virtual
Visibility: default
Description: IndexOf returns the index of Item in the collection. If Item isn’t present in the collection, -1 is
returned.
1076
Errors: If the item is not present, -1 is returned.

See also: TCollection.At (1076), TCollection.GetItem (1077), TCollection.Insert (1082)
Program ex24 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e T C o l l e c t i o n . IndexOf method }
M, Keep : PMyObject ;
I : Longint ;
begin
Randomize ;
Keep : = N i l ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
begin
M^ . S e t F i e l d ( I −1);
I f Random< 0 . 1 then
Keep : =M;
C^ . I n s e r t (M) ;
end ;
I f Keep= N i l then
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Please run again . No o b j e c t s e l e c t e d ’ ) ;
Halt ( 1 ) ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ S e l e c t e d o b j e c t has f i e l d : ’ , Keep ^ . G e t F i e l d ) ;
Write ( ’ S e l e c t e d o b j e c t has i n d e x : ’ ,C^ . IndexOf ( Keep ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ should match i t ’ ’ s f i e l d . ’ ) ;
end .
67.5.8 TCollection.GetItem
Synopsis: Read one item off the stream.
Declaration: function GetItem(var S: TStream) : Pointer; Virtual
Visibility: default
Description: GetItem reads a single item off the stream S, and returns a pointer to this item. This method is
used internally by the Load method, and should not be used directly.
Errors: Possible errors are the ones from TStream.Get (1115).
See also: TStream.Get (1115), TCollection.Store (1088)
1077
67.5.9 TCollection.LastThat
Synopsis: Return last item which matches a test.
Declaration: function LastThat(Test: CodePointer) : Pointer

Visibility: default
Description: This function returns the last item in the collection for which Test returns a non-nil result. Test
is a function that accepts 1 argument: a pointer to an object, and that returns a pointer as a result.
Errors: None.
See also: TCollection.FirstThat (1078)
Program ex21 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e T C o l l e c t i o n . Foreach method }
M : PMyObject ;
I : Longint ;
Function CheckField ( Dummy : P o i n t e r ; P : PMyObject ) : L o n g i n t ;
begin
I f P ^ . G e t F i e l d <56 then
C h e c k f i e l d :=1
else
CheckField : = 0 ;
end ;
begin
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
begin
M^ . S e t F i e l d ( I ) ;
C^ . I n s e r t (M) ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ L a s t one f o r which F i e l d <56 has i n d e x ( should be 5 4 ) : ’ ,
C^ . IndexOf (C^ . L a s t T h a t ( @CheckField ) ) ) ;
end .
67.5.10 TCollection.FirstThat
Synopsis: Return first item which matches a test.
Declaration: function FirstThat(Test: CodePointer) : Pointer
Visibility: default
1078
Description: This function returns the first item in the collection for which Test returns a non-nil result. Test
is a function that accepts 1 argument: a pointer to an object, and that returns a pointer as a result.
Errors: None.
See also: TCollection.LastThat (1078)
Program ex21 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e T C o l l e c t i o n . F i r s t T h a t method }
M : PMyObject ;
I : Longint ;
begin
I f P ^ . G e t F i e l d >56 then
else
CheckField : = 0 ;
end ;
begin
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
begin
M^ . S e t F i e l d ( I ) ;
C^ . I n s e r t (M) ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ f i r s t one f o r which F i e l d >56 has i n d e x ( should be 5 6 ) : ’ ,
C^ . IndexOf (C^ . F i r s t T h a t ( @CheckField ) ) ) ;
end .
67.5.11 TCollection.Pack
Synopsis: Remove all >Nil pointers from the collection.
Visibility: default
Description: Pack removes all Nil pointers from the collection, and adjusts Count to reflect this change. No
memory is freed as a result of this call. In order to free any memory, you can call SetLimit with
an argument of Count after a call to Pack.
Errors: None.
See also: TCollection.SetLimit (1086)
1079
Program ex21 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e T C o l l e c t i o n . F i r s t T h a t method }
M : PMyObject ;
I : Longint ;
begin
I f P ^ . G e t F i e l d >56 then
else
CheckField : = 0 ;
end ;
begin
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
begin
M^ . S e t F i e l d ( I ) ;
C^ . I n s e r t (M) ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ f i r s t one f o r which F i e l d >56 has i n d e x ( should be 5 6 ) : ’ ,
C^ . IndexOf (C^ . F i r s t T h a t ( @CheckField ) ) ) ;
end .
67.5.12 TCollection.FreeAll
Synopsis: Release all objects from the collection.
Declaration: procedure FreeAll
Visibility: default
Description: FreeAll calls the destructor of each object in the collection. It doesn’t release any memory oc-
cumpied by the collection itself, but it does set Count to zero.
See also: TCollection.DeleteAll (1081), TCollection.FreeItem (1084)
Program ex28 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e T C o l l e c t i o n . F r e e A l l method }
1080
M : PMyObject ;
I : Longint ;
begin
Randomize ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
begin
M^ . S e t F i e l d ( I −1);
C^ . I n s e r t (M) ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Added 1 0 0 Items . ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Freed a l l o b j e c t s . ’ ) ;
end .
67.5.13 TCollection.DeleteAll
Synopsis: Delete all elements from the collection. Objects are not destroyed.
Declaration: procedure DeleteAll
Visibility: default
Description: DeleteAll deletes all elements from the collection. It just sets the Count variable to zero. Con-
trary to FreeAll (1080), DeletAll doesn’t call the destructor of the objects.
Errors: None.
See also: TCollection.FreeAll (1080), TCollection.Delete (1083)
Program ex29 ;
{
Program t o demonstrate t h e T C o l l e c t i o n . D e l e t e A l l method
Compare w i t h example 2 8 , where F r e e A l l i s used .
}
M : PMyObject ;
I : Longint ;
begin
Randomize ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
begin
M^ . S e t F i e l d ( I −1);
C^ . I n s e r t (M) ;
end ;
1081
C^ . D e l e t e A l l ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Deleted a l l o b j e c t s . ’ ) ;
end .
67.5.14 TCollection.Free
Synopsis: Free item from collection, calling it’s destructor.
Declaration: procedure Free(Item: Pointer)
Visibility: default
Description: Free Deletes Item from the collection, and calls the destructor Done of the object.
Errors: If the Item is not in the collection, Error will be called with coIndexError.
See also: TCollection.FreeItem (1084)
Program ex30 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e T C o l l e c t i o n . Free method }
M : PMyObject ;
I : Longint ;
begin
Randomize ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
begin
M^ . S e t F i e l d ( I −1);
C^ . I n s e r t (M) ;
end ;
With C^ do
While Count >0 do Free ( At ( Count − 1 ) ) ;
end .
67.5.15 TCollection.Insert
Synopsis: Insert a new item in the collection at the end.
Declaration: procedure Insert(Item: Pointer); Virtual
Visibility: default
Description: Insert inserts Item in the collection. TCollection inserts this item at the end, but descendent
objects may insert it at another place.
1082
Errors: None.
See also: TCollection.AtInsert (1087), TCollection.AtPut (1087)
67.5.16 TCollection.Delete
Synopsis: Delete an item from the collection, but does not destroy it.
Declaration: procedure Delete(Item: Pointer)

Visibility: default
Description: Delete deletes Item from the collection. It doesn’t call the item’s destructor, though. For this the
Free (1082) call is provided.
Errors: If the Item is not in the collection, Error will be called with coIndexError.
See also: TCollection.AtDelete (1084), TCollection.Free (1082)
Program ex31 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e T C o l l e c t i o n . D e l e t e method }
M : PMyObject ;
I : Longint ;
begin
Randomize ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
begin
M^ . S e t F i e l d ( I −1);
C^ . I n s e r t (M) ;
end ;
With C^ do
While Count >0 do Delete ( At ( Count − 1 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Freed a l l o b j e c t s ’ ) ;
end .
67.5.17 TCollection.AtFree
Synopsis: Free an item at the indicates position, calling it’s destructor.
Declaration: procedure AtFree(Index: Sw_Integer)
Visibility: default
Description: AtFree deletes the item at position Index in the collection, and calls the item’s destructor if it is
not Nil.
1083
Errors: If Index isn’t valid then Error (1086) is called with CoIndexError.
See also: TCollection.Free (1082), TCollection.AtDelete (1084)
Program ex32 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e T C o l l e c t i o n . AtFree method }
M : PMyObject ;
I : Longint ;
begin
Randomize ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
begin
M^ . S e t F i e l d ( I −1);
C^ . I n s e r t (M) ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Added 1 0 0 Items ’ ) ;
With C^ do
While Count >0 do AtFree ( Count −1);
end .
67.5.18 TCollection.FreeItem
Synopsis: Destroy a non-nil item.
Declaration: procedure FreeItem(Item: Pointer); Virtual
Visibility: default
Description: FreeItem calls the destructor of Item if it is not nil.

Remark: This function is used internally by the TCollection object, and should not be called directly.
Errors: None.
See also: TCollection.Free (1082), TCollection.AtFree (1083)
67.5.19 TCollection.AtDelete
Synopsis: Delete item at certain position.
Declaration: procedure AtDelete(Index: Sw_Integer)
Visibility: default
Description: AtDelete deletes the pointer at position Index in the collection. It doesn’t call the object’s
destructor.
1084
See also: TCollection.Delete (1083)
Program ex33 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e T C o l l e c t i o n . A t D e l e t e method }
M : PMyObject ;
I : Longint ;
begin
Randomize ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
begin
M^ . S e t F i e l d ( I −1);
C^ . I n s e r t (M) ;
end ;
With C^ do
While Count >0 do A t D e l e t e ( Count −1);
end .
67.5.20 TCollection.ForEach
Synopsis: Execute procedure for each item in the list.
Declaration: procedure ForEach(Action: CodePointer)
Visibility: default
Description: ForEach calls Action for each element in the collection, and passes the element as an argument
to Action.
Action is a procedural type variable that accepts a pointer as an argument.
Errors: None.
See also: TCollection.FirstThat (1078), TCollection.LastThat (1078)
Program ex21 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e T C o l l e c t i o n . Foreach method }
1085
M : PMyObject ;
I : Longint ;
Procedure P r i n t F i e l d ( Dummy : P o i n t e r ; P : PMyObject ) ;
begin
Writeln ( ’ F i e l d : ’ ,P ^ . G e t F i e l d ) ;
end ;
begin
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
begin
M^ . S e t F i e l d (100− I ) ;
C^ . I n s e r t (M) ;
end ;
C^ . ForEach ( @ P r i n t F i e l d ) ;
end .
67.5.21 TCollection.SetLimit
Synopsis: Set maximum number of elements in the collection.
Declaration: procedure SetLimit(ALimit: Sw_Integer); Virtual

Visibility: default
Description: SetLimit sets the maximum number of elements in the collection. ALimit must not be less than
Count, and should not be larger than MaxCollectionSize
For an example, see Pack (1079).
Errors: None.
See also: TCollection.Init (1074)
67.5.22 TCollection.Error
Synopsis: Set error code.
Declaration: procedure Error(Code: Integer;Info: Integer); Virtual

Visibility: default
Description: Error is called by the various TCollection methods in case of an error condition. The default
behaviour is to make a call to RunError with an error of 212-Code.
This method can be overridden by descendent objects to implement a different error-handling.
See also: Abstract (1063)
1086
67.5.23 TCollection.AtPut
Synopsis: Set collection item, overwriting an existing value.
Declaration: procedure AtPut(Index: Sw_Integer;Item: Pointer)

Visibility: default
Description: AtPut sets the element at position Index in the collection to Item. Any previous value is over-
written.
For an example, see Pack (1079).
67.5.24 TCollection.AtInsert
Synopsis: Insert an element at a certain position in the collection.
Declaration: procedure AtInsert(Index: Sw_Integer;Item: Pointer)

Visibility: default
Description: AtInsert inserts Item in the collection at position Index, shifting all elements by one position.
In case the current limit is reached, the collection will try to expand with a call to SetLimit
Errors: If Index isn’t valid then Error (1086) is called with CoIndexError. If the collection fails to
expand, then coOverFlow is passd to Error.
Program ex34 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e T C o l l e c t i o n . A t I n s e r t method }
M : PMyObject ;
I : Longint ;
begin
end ;
begin
Randomize ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ I n s e r t i n g 1 0 0 r e c o r d s a t random p l a c e s . ’ ) ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
begin
M^ . S e t F i e l d ( I −1);
I f I =1 then
C^ . I n s e r t (M)
1087
else
With C^ do
A t I n s e r t (Random( Count ) ,M) ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Values : ’ ) ;
C^ . Foreach ( @ P r i n t F i e l d ) ;
end .
67.5.25 TCollection.Store
Synopsis: Write collection to a stream.
Declaration: procedure Store(var S: TStream)
Visibility: default
Description: Store writes the collection to the stream S. It does this by writeing the current Count, Limit
and Delta to the stream, and then writing each item to the stream.
The contents of the stream are then suitable for instantiating another collection with Load (1075).
For an example, see TCollection.Load (1075).
Errors: Errors returned are those by TStream.Put (1120).
See also: TCollection.Load (1075), TCollection.PutItem (1088)
67.5.26 TCollection.PutItem
Synopsis: Put one item on the stream
Declaration: procedure PutItem(var S: TStream;Item: Pointer); Virtual
Visibility: default
Description: PutItem writes Item to stream S. This method is used internaly by the TCollection object,
and should not be called directly.
Errors: Errors are those returned by TStream.Put (1120).
See also: Store (1088), GetItem (1077)
67.6 TDosStream
67.6.1 Description
TDosStream is a stream that stores it’s contents in a file. it overrides a couple of methods of
TStream (1115) for this.
In addition to the fields inherited from TStream (see TStream (1115)), there are some extra fields,
that describe the file. (mainly the name and the OS file handle)
No buffering in memory is done when using TDosStream. All data are written directly to the file.
For a stream that buffers in memory, see TBufStream (1070).
1088

1090 Close Close the file.
1089 Done Closes the file and cleans up the instance.
1089 Init Instantiate a new instance of TDosStream.
1092 Open Open the file stream
1092 Read Read data from the stream to a buffer.
1091 Seek Set file position.
1090 Truncate Truncate the file on the current position.
1093 Write Write data from a buffer to the stream.
67.6.3 TDosStream.Init
Synopsis: Instantiate a new instance of TDosStream.
Declaration: constructor Init(FileName: FNameStr;Mode: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: Init instantiates an instance of TDosStream. The name of the file that contains (or will contain)
the data of the stream is given in FileName. The Mode parameter determines whether a new file
should be created and what access rights you have on the file. It can be one of the following constants:
stCreateCreates a new file.

stOpenReadRead access only.
stOpenWriteWrite access only.
stOpenRead and write access.

Errors: On error, Status (??) is set to stInitError, and ErrorInfo is set to the dos error code.
See also: TDosStream.Done (1089)
67.6.4 TDosStream.Done
Synopsis: Closes the file and cleans up the instance.
Visibility: default
Description: Done closes the file if it was open and cleans up the instance of TDosStream.
for an example, see e.g. TDosStream.Truncate (1090).
Errors: None.
See also: TDosStream.Init (1089), TDosStream.Close (1090)
1089
67.6.5 TDosStream.Close
Synopsis: Close the file.

Visibility: default
Description: Close closes the file if it was open, and sets Handle to -1. Contrary to Done (1089) it does not
clean up the instance of TDosStream
Errors: None.
See also: TStream.Close (1119), TDosStream.Init (1089), TDosStream.Done (1089)
67.6.6 TDosStream.Truncate
Synopsis: Truncate the file on the current position.
Visibility: default
Description: If the status of the stream is stOK, then Truncate tries to truncate the stream size to the current
file position.
Errors: If an error occurs, the stream’s status is set to stError and ErrorInfo is set to the OS error
code.
See also: TStream.Truncate (1120), TStream.GetSize (1117)
Program ex16 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e TStream . Truncate method }
P : PString ;
S : PDosStream ; { Only one w i t h Truncate implemented . }
begin
S: =New( PDosStream , I n i t ( ’ t e s t . d a t ’ , s t c r e a t e ) ) ;
S ^ . W r i t e S t r (@L) ;
S ^ . W r i t e S t r (@L) ;
{ Close c a l l s f l u s h f i r s t }
S ^ . Close ;
S ^ . Open ( stOpen ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Size o f stream i s : ’ ,S ^ . GetSize ) ;
P: =S ^ . ReadStr ;
L : =P ^ ;
DisposeStr (P ) ;
1090
S ^ . Truncate ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Truncated stream . Size i s : ’ ,S ^ . GetSize ) ;
S ^ . Close ;
end .
67.6.7 TDosStream.Seek
Synopsis: Set file position.
Visibility: default
Description: If the stream’s status is stOK, then Seek sets the file position to Pos. Pos is a zero-based offset,
counted from the beginning of the file.
Errors: In case an error occurs, the stream’s status is set to stSeekError, and the OS error code is stored
in ErrorInfo.
Program ex17 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e TStream . Seek method }
Marker : Word ;
P : PString ;
S : PDosStream ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ W r i t i n g " ’ , L , ’ " t o stream . ’ ) ;
S ^ . W r i t e S t r (@L) ;
Marker : =S ^ . GetPos ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Set marker a t ’ , Marker ) ;
L : = ’Some o t h e r c o n s t a n t S t r i n g ’ ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ W r i t i n g " ’ , L , ’ " t o stream . ’ ) ;
S ^ . W r i t e S t r (@L) ;
S ^ . Close ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Size o f stream i s : ’ ,S ^ . GetSize ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Seeking t o marker ’ ) ;
S ^ . Seek ( Marker ) ;
P: =S ^ . ReadStr ;
L : =P ^ ;
DisposeStr (P ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Read " ’ , L , ’ " from stream . ’ ) ;
S ^ . Close ;
end .
1091
67.6.8 TDosStream.Open
Synopsis: Open the file stream
Visibility: default
Description: If the stream’s status is stOK, and the stream is closed then Open re-opens the file stream with
mode OpenMode. This call can be used after a Close (1090) call.
Errors: If an error occurs when re-opening the file, then Status is set to stOpenError, and the OS error
code is stored in ErrorInfo
See also: TStream.Open (1119), TDosStream.Close (1090)
Program ex14 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e TStream . Close method }
P : PString ;
S : PDosStream ; { Only one w i t h Close implemented . }
begin
S ^ . W r i t e S t r (@L) ;
S ^ . Close ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Closed stream . F i l e handle i s ’ ,S ^ . Handle ) ;
P: =S ^ . ReadStr ;
L : =P ^ ;
DisposeStr (P ) ;
S ^ . Close ;
end .
67.6.9 TDosStream.Read
Synopsis: Read data from the stream to a buffer.
Visibility: default
Description: If the Stream is open and the stream status is stOK then Read will read Count bytes from the
stream and place them in Buf.
Errors: In case of an error, Status is set to StReadError, and ErrorInfo gets the OS specific error,
or 0 when an attempt was made to read beyond the end of the stream.
See also: TStream.Read (1122), TDosStream.Write (1093)
1092
67.6.10 TDosStream.Write
Synopsis: Write data from a buffer to the stream.

Visibility: default
Description: If the Stream is open and the stream status is stOK then Write will write Count bytes from Buf
and place them in the stream.
Errors: In case of an error, Status is set to StWriteError, and ErrorInfo gets the OS specific error.
See also: TStream.Write (1122), TDosStream.Read (1092)
67.7 TMemoryStream
67.7.1 Description
The TMemoryStream object implements a stream that stores it’s data in memory. The data is stored
on the heap, with the possibility to specify the maximum amout of data, and the size of the memory
blocks being used.
See also: TStream (1115)

1094 Done Clean up memory and destroy the object instance.
1093 Init Initialize memory stream, reserves memory for stream data.
1095 Read Read data from the stream to a location in memory.
1094 Truncate Set the stream size to the current position.
1095 Write Write data to the stream.
67.7.3 TMemoryStream.Init
Synopsis: Initialize memory stream, reserves memory for stream data.
Declaration: constructor Init(ALimit: LongInt;ABlockSize: Word)

Visibility: default
Description: Init instantiates a new TMemoryStream object. The memorystreamobject will initially allocate
at least ALimit bytes memory, divided into memory blocks of size ABlockSize. The number of
blocks needed to get to ALimit bytes is rounded up.
By default, the number of blocks is 1, and the size of a block is 8192. This is selected if you specify
0 as the blocksize.
For an example, see e.g TStream.CopyFrom (1123).
Errors: If the stream cannot allocate the initial memory needed for the memory blocks, then the stream’s
status is set to stInitError.
See also: TMemoryStream.Done (1094)
1093
67.7.4 TMemoryStream.Done
Synopsis: Clean up memory and destroy the object instance.
Visibility: default
Description: Done releases the memory blocks used by the stream, and then cleans up the memory used by the
stream object itself.
For an example, see e.g TStream.CopyFrom (1123).
Errors: None.
See also: TMemoryStream.Init (1093)
67.7.5 TMemoryStream.Truncate
Synopsis: Set the stream size to the current position.
Visibility: default
Description: Truncate sets the size of the memory stream equal to the current position. It de-allocates any
memory-blocks that are no longer needed, so that the new size of the stream is the current position
in the stream, rounded up to the first multiple of the stream blocksize.
Errors: If an error occurs during memory de-allocation, the stream’s status is set to stError
See also: TStream.Truncate (1120)
Program ex20 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e TMemoryStream . Truncate method }
Var L : String ;
P : PString ;
S : PMemoryStream ;
I : Longint ;
begin
S: =New( PMemoryStream , I n i t ( 1 0 0 0 , 1 0 0 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ W r i t i n g 1 0 0 t i m e s " ’ , L , ’ " t o stream . ’ ) ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
S ^ . W r i t e S t r (@L) ;
Writeln ( ’ Finished . ’ ) ;
S ^ . Seek ( 1 0 0 ) ;
S ^ . Truncate ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Truncated a t b y t e 1 0 0 . ’ ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Finished . ’ ) ;
end .
1094
67.7.6 TMemoryStream.Read
Synopsis: Read data from the stream to a location in memory.

Visibility: default
Description: Read reads Count bytes from the stream to Buf. It updates the position of the stream.
Errors: If there is not enough data available, no data is read, and the stream’s status is set to stReadError.
See also: TStream.Read (1122), TMemoryStream.Write (1095)
67.7.7 TMemoryStream.Write
Synopsis: Write data to the stream.

Visibility: default
Description: Write copies Count bytes from Buf to the stream. It updates the position of the stream.
If not enough memory is available to hold the extra Count bytes, then the stream will try to expand,
by allocating as much blocks with size BlkSize (as specified in the constuctor call Init (1093)) as
needed.
Errors: If the stream cannot allocate more memory, then the status is set to stWriteError
See also: TStream.Write (1122), TMemoryStream.Read (1095)
67.8 TObject
67.8.1 Description
This type serves as the basic object for all other objects in the Objects unit.

1097 Done Destroy an object.
1096 Free Destroy an object and release all memory.
1095 Init Construct (initialize) a new object
1096 Is\_Object Check whether a pointer points to an object.
67.8.3 TObject.Init
Synopsis: Construct (initialize) a new object
Declaration: constructor Init
Visibility: default
1095
Description: Instantiates a new object of type TObject. It fills the instance up with Zero bytes.
For an example, see Free (1096)
Errors: None.
See also: TObject.Free (1096), TObject.Done (1097)
67.8.4 TObject.Free
Synopsis: Destroy an object and release all memory.
Declaration: procedure Free
Visibility: default
Description: Free calls the destructor of the object, and releases the memory occupied by the instance of the
object.
Errors: No checking is performed to see whether self is nil and whether the object is indeed allocated
on the heap.
See also: TObject.Init (1095), TObject.Done (1097)
program ex7 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e TObject . Free c a l l }
Var O : PObject ;
begin
/ / A l l o c a t e memory f o r o b j e c t .
O: =New( PObject , I n i t ) ;
/ / Free memory o f o b j e c t .
O^ . f r e e ;
end .
67.8.5 TObject.Is_Object
Synopsis: Check whether a pointer points to an object.
Declaration: function Is_Object(P: Pointer) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: Is_Object returns True if the pointer P points to an instance of a TObject descendent, it
returns false otherwise.
1096
67.8.6 TObject.Done
Synopsis: Destroy an object.
Visibility: default
Description: Done, the destructor of TObject does nothing. It is mainly intended to be used in the TObject.Free
(1096) method.
The destructore Done does not free the memory occupied by the object.
Errors: None.
See also: TObject.Free (1096), TObject.Init (1095)
program ex8 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e TObject . Done c a l l }
Var O : PObject ;
begin
/ / A l l o c a t e memory f o r o b j e c t .
O: =New( PObject , I n i t ) ;
O^ . Done ;
end .
67.9 TPoint
67.9.1 Description
Record describing a point in a 2 dimensional plane.
67.10 TRect
67.10.1 Description
Describes a rectangular region in a plane.

1102 Assign Set rectangle corners.
1099 Contains Determine if a point is inside the rectangle
1099 Copy Copy cornerpoints from another rectangle.
1098 Empty Is the surface of the rectangle zero
1099 Equals Do the corners of the rectangles match
1102 Grow Expand rectangle with certain size.
1100 Intersect Reduce rectangle to intersection with another rectangle
1101 Move Move rectangle along a vector.
1100 Union Enlarges rectangle to encompas another rectangle.
1097
67.10.3 TRect.Empty
Synopsis: Is the surface of the rectangle zero
Declaration: function Empty : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Empty returns True if the rectangle defined by the corner points A, B has zero or negative surface.
Errors: None.
See also: TRect.Equals (1099), TRect.Contains (1099)
Program ex1 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate TRect . Empty }
Uses o b j e c t s ;
Var ARect , BRect : TRect ;

P : TPoint ;
begin
With ARect . A do
begin
X: = 1 0 ;
Y: = 1 0 ;
end ;
With ARect . B do
begin
X: = 2 0 ;
Y: = 2 0 ;
end ;
{ O f f s e t B by ( 5 , 5 ) }
With BRect . A do
begin
X: = 1 5 ;
Y: = 1 5 ;
end ;
With BRect . B do
begin
X: = 2 5 ;
Y: = 2 5 ;
end ;
{ Point }
With P do
begin
X: = 1 5 ;
Y: = 1 5 ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’A empty : ’ , ARect . Empty ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’B empty : ’ , BRect . Empty ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’A Equals B : ’ , ARect . Equals ( BRect ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’A Contains ( 1 5 , 1 5 ) : ’ , ARect . Contains (P ) ) ;
end .
1098
67.10.4 TRect.Equals
Synopsis: Do the corners of the rectangles match
Declaration: function Equals(R: TRect) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: Equals returns True if the rectangle has the same corner points A,B as the rectangle R, and
False otherwise.
For an example, see TRect.Empty (1098)
Errors: None.
See also: TRect.Empty (1098), TRect.Contains (1099)
67.10.5 TRect.Contains
Synopsis: Determine if a point is inside the rectangle
Declaration: function Contains(P: TPoint) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Contains returns True if the point P is contained in the rectangle (including borders), False
otherwise.
Errors: None.
See also: TRect.Intersect (1100), TRect.Equals (1099)
67.10.6 TRect.Copy
Synopsis: Copy cornerpoints from another rectangle.
Declaration: procedure Copy(R: TRect)
Visibility: default
Description: Assigns the rectangle R to the object. After the call to Copy, the rectangle R has been copied to the
object that invoked Copy.
Errors: None.
See also: TRect.Assign (1102)
Program ex2 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate TRect . Copy }
Var ARect , BRect , CRect : TRect ;
begin
ARect . Assign ( 1 0 , 1 0 , 2 0 , 2 0 ) ;
BRect . Assign ( 1 5 , 1 5 , 2 5 , 2 5 ) ;
1099
CRect . Copy ( ARect ) ;

I f ARect . Equals ( CRect ) Then
W r i t e l n ( ’ ARect equals CRect ’ )
Else
W r i t e l n ( ’ ARect does n o t equal CRect ! ’ ) ;
end .
67.10.7 TRect.Union
Synopsis: Enlarges rectangle to encompas another rectangle.
Declaration: procedure Union(R: TRect)
Visibility: default
Description: Union enlarges the current rectangle so that it becomes the union of the current rectangle with the
rectangle R.
Errors: None.
See also: TRect.Intersect (1100)
Program ex3 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate TRect . Union }
begin
ARect . Assign ( 1 0 , 1 0 , 2 0 , 2 0 ) ;
BRect . Assign ( 1 5 , 1 5 , 2 5 , 2 5 ) ;
{ CRect i s union o f ARect and BRect }
CRect . Assign ( 1 0 , 1 0 , 2 5 , 2 5 ) ;
{ Calculate i t e x p l i c i t l y }
ARect . Union ( BRect ) ;
Else
end .
67.10.8 TRect.Intersect
Synopsis: Reduce rectangle to intersection with another rectangle
Declaration: procedure Intersect(R: TRect)
Visibility: default
Description: Intersect makes the intersection of the current rectangle with R. If the intersection is empty,
then the rectangle is set to the empty rectangle at coordinate (0,0).
1100
Errors: None.
See also: TRect.Union (1100)
Program ex4 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate TRect . I n t e r s e c t }
begin
ARect . Assign ( 1 0 , 1 0 , 2 0 , 2 0 ) ;
BRect . Assign ( 1 5 , 1 5 , 2 5 , 2 5 ) ;
{ CRect i s i n t e r s e c t i o n o f ARect and BRect }
CRect . Assign ( 1 5 , 1 5 , 2 0 , 2 0 ) ;
{ Calculate i t e x p l i c i t l y }
ARect . I n t e r s e c t ( BRect ) ;
Else
BRect . Assign ( 2 5 , 2 5 , 3 0 , 3 0 ) ;
A r e c t . I n t e r s e c t ( BRect ) ;
I f ARect . Empty Then
W r i t e l n ( ’ ARect i s empty ’ ) ;
end .
67.10.9 TRect.Move
Synopsis: Move rectangle along a vector.
Declaration: procedure Move(ADX: Sw_Integer;ADY: Sw_Integer)
Visibility: default
Description: Move moves the current rectangle along a vector with components (ADX,ADY). It adds ADX to the
X-coordinate of both corner points, and ADY to both end points.
Errors: None.
See also: TRect.Grow (1102)
Program ex5 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate TRect . Move }
1101
begin
ARect . Assign ( 1 0 , 1 0 , 2 0 , 2 0 ) ;
ARect . Move ( 5 , 5 ) ;
/ / B r e c t should be where new ARect i s .
BRect . Assign ( 1 5 , 1 5 , 2 5 , 2 5 ) ;
I f ARect . Equals ( BRect ) Then
W r i t e l n ( ’ ARect equals BRect ’ )
Else
W r i t e l n ( ’ ARect does n o t equal BRect ! ’ ) ;
end .
67.10.10 TRect.Grow
Synopsis: Expand rectangle with certain size.
Declaration: procedure Grow(ADX: Sw_Integer;ADY: Sw_Integer)

Visibility: default
Description: Grow expands the rectangle with an amount ADX in the X direction (both on the left and right side
of the rectangle, thus adding a length 2*ADX to the width of the rectangle), and an amount ADY in
the Y direction (both on the top and the bottom side of the rectangle, adding a length 2*ADY to the
height of the rectangle.
ADX and ADY can be negative. If the resulting rectangle is empty, it is set to the empty rectangle at
(0,0).
Errors: None.
See also: TRect.Move (1101)
Program ex6 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate TRect . Grow }
begin
ARect . Assign ( 1 0 , 1 0 , 2 0 , 2 0 ) ;
ARect . Grow ( 5 , 5 ) ;
/ / B r e c t should be where new ARect i s .
BRect . Assign ( 5 , 5 , 2 5 , 2 5 ) ;
I f ARect . Equals ( BRect ) Then
W r i t e l n ( ’ ARect equals BRect ’ )
Else
W r i t e l n ( ’ ARect does n o t equal BRect ! ’ ) ;
end .
67.10.11 TRect.Assign
Synopsis: Set rectangle corners.
1102
Declaration: procedure Assign(XA: Sw_Integer;YA: Sw_Integer;XB: Sw_Integer;

YB: Sw_Integer)
Visibility: default
Description: Assign sets the corner points of the rectangle to (XA,YA) and (Xb,Yb).
For an example, see TRect.Copy (1099).
Errors: None.
See also: TRect.Copy (1099)
67.11 TResourceCollection
67.11.1 Description
A TResourceCollection manages a collection of resource names. It stores the position and the
size of a resource, as well as the name of the resource. It stores these items in records that look like
this:
TYPE
TResourceItem = packed RECORD
Posn: LongInt;
Size: LongInt;
Key : String;
End;
PResourceItem = ^TResourceItem;
It overrides some methods of TStringCollection in order to accomplish this.

Remark: Remark that the TResourceCollection manages the names of the resources and their assiciated
positions and sizes, it doesn’t manage the resources themselves.

1104 FreeItem Release memory occupied by item.
1104 GetItem Read an item from the stream.
1103 KeyOf Return the key of an item in the collection.
1104 PutItem Write an item to the stream.
67.11.3 TResourceCollection.KeyOf
Synopsis: Return the key of an item in the collection.
Declaration: function KeyOf(Item: Pointer) : Pointer; Virtual
Visibility: default
Description: KeyOf returns the key of an item in the collection. For resources, the key is a pointer to the string
with the resource name.
Errors: None.
See also: TStringCollection.Compare (1124)
1103
67.11.4 TResourceCollection.GetItem
Synopsis: Read an item from the stream.

Visibility: default
Description: GetItem reads a resource item from the stream S. It reads the position, size and name from the
stream, in that order. It DOES NOT read the resource itself from the stream.
The resulting item is not inserted in the collection. This call is manly for internal use by the TCol-
lection.Load (1075) method.
Errors: Errors returned are those by TStream.Read (1122)
See also: TCollection.Load (1075), TStream.Read (1122)
67.11.5 TResourceCollection.FreeItem
Synopsis: Release memory occupied by item.
Visibility: default
Description: FreeItem releases the memory occupied by Item. It de-allocates the name, and then the resour-
ceitem record.
It does NOT remove the item from the collection.
Errors: None.
67.11.6 TResourceCollection.PutItem
Synopsis: Write an item to the stream.
Visibility: default
Description: PutItem writes Item to the stream S. It does this by writing the position and size and name of the
resource item to the stream.
This method is used primarily by the Store (1088) method.
Errors: Errors returned are those by TStream.Write (1122).
See also: TCollection.Store (1088)
67.12 TResourceFile
67.12.1 Description
TResourceFile (1104) represents the resources in a binary file image.
1104

1105 Count Number of resources in the file
1107 Delete Delete a resource from the file
1105 Done Destroy the instance and remove it from memory.
1106 Flush Writes the resources to the stream.
1106 Get Return a resource by key name.
1105 Init Instantiate a new instance.
1106 KeyAt Return the key of the item at a certain position.
1107 Put Set a resource by key name.
1106 SwitchTo Write resources to a new stream.
67.12.3 TResourceFile.Init
Synopsis: Instantiate a new instance.
Declaration: constructor Init(AStream: PStream)
Visibility: default
Description: Init instantiates a new instance of a TResourceFile object. If AStream is not nil then it is
considered as a stream describing an executable image on disk.
Init will try to position the stream on the start of the resources section, and read all resources from
the stream.
Errors: None.
See also: TResourceFile.Done (1105)
67.12.4 TResourceFile.Done
Synopsis: Destroy the instance and remove it from memory.
Visibility: default
Description: Done cleans up the instance of the TResourceFile Object. If Stream was specified at initial-
ization, then Stream is disposed of too.
Errors: None.
See also: TResourceFile.Init (1105)
67.12.5 TResourceFile.Count
Synopsis: Number of resources in the file
Declaration: function Count : Sw_Integer
Visibility: default
Description: Count returns the number of resources. If no resources were read, zero is returned.
Errors: None.
See also: TResourceFile.Init (1105)
1105
67.12.6 TResourceFile.KeyAt
Synopsis: Return the key of the item at a certain position.
Declaration: function KeyAt(I: Sw_Integer) : string
Visibility: default
Description: KeyAt returns the key (the name) of the I-th resource.
Errors: In case I is invalid, TCollection.Error will be executed.
See also: TResourceFile.Get (1106)
67.12.7 TResourceFile.Get
Synopsis: Return a resource by key name.
Declaration: function Get(Key: string) : PObject
Visibility: default
Description: Get returns a pointer to a instance of a resource identified by Key. If Key cannot be found in the
list of resources, then Nil is returned.
Errors: Errors returned may be those by TStream.Get
67.12.8 TResourceFile.SwitchTo
Synopsis: Write resources to a new stream.
Declaration: function SwitchTo(AStream: PStream;Pack: Boolean) : PStream
Visibility: default
Description: SwitchTo switches to a new stream to hold the resources in. AStream will be the new stream
after the call to SwitchTo.
If Pack is true, then all the known resources will be copied from the current stream to the new stream
(AStream). If Pack is False, then only the current resource is copied.
The return value is the value of the original stream: Stream.
The Modified flag is set as a consequence of this call.
Errors: Errors returned can be those of TStream.Read (1122) and TStream.Write (1122).
See also: TResourceFile.Flush (1106)
67.12.9 TResourceFile.Flush
Synopsis: Writes the resources to the stream.
Declaration: procedure Flush
Visibility: default
Description: If the Modified flag is set to True, then Flush writes the resources to the stream Stream. It
sets the Modified flag to true after that.
Errors: Errors can be those by TStream.Seek (1121) and TStream.Write (1122).
See also: TResourceFile.SwitchTo (1106)
1106
67.12.10 TResourceFile.Delete
Synopsis: Delete a resource from the file
Declaration: procedure Delete(Key: string)

Visibility: default
Description: Delete deletes the resource identified by Key from the collection. It sets the Modified flag to
true.
Errors: None.
See also: TResourceFile.Flush (1106)
67.12.11 TResourceFile.Put
Synopsis: Set a resource by key name.
Declaration: procedure Put(Item: PObject;Key: string)

Visibility: default
Description: Put sets the resource identified by Key to Item. If no such resource exists, a new one is created.
The item is written to the stream.
Errors: Errors returned may be those by TStream.Put (1120) and TStream.Seek

See also: Get (1106)
67.13 TSortedCollection
67.13.1 Description
TSortedCollection is an abstract class, implementing a sorted collection. You should never
use an instance of TSortedCollection directly, instead you should declare a descendent type,
and override the Compare (1109) method.
Because the collection is ordered, TSortedCollection overrides some TCollection meth-
ods, to provide faster routines for lookup.
The Compare (1109) method decides how elements in the collection should be ordered. Since
TCollection has no way of knowing how to order pointers, you must override the compare
method.
Additionally, TCollection provides a means to filter out duplicates. if you set Duplicates to
False (the default) then duplicates will not be allowed.
The example below defines a descendent of TSortedCollection which is used in the examples.
1107

1109 Compare Compare two items in the collection.
1109 IndexOf Return index of an item in the collection.
1108 Init Instantiates a new instance of a TSortedCollection
1111 Insert Insert new item in collection.
1108 KeyOf Return the key of an item
1108 Load Instantiates a new instance of a TSortedCollection and loads it from
stream.
1110 Search Search for item with given key.
1112 Store Write the collection to the stream.
67.13.3 TSortedCollection.Init
Synopsis: Instantiates a new instance of a TSortedCollection
Declaration: constructor Init(ALimit: Sw_Integer;ADelta: Sw_Integer)
Visibility: default
Description: Init calls the inherited constuctor (see TCollection.Init (1074)) and sets the Duplicates flag to
false.
You should not call this method directly, since TSortedCollection is a abstract class. Instead,
the descendent classes should call it via the inherited keyword.
Errors: None.
See also: TSortedCollection.Load (1108), TCollection.Done (1075)
67.13.4 TSortedCollection.Load
Synopsis: Instantiates a new instance of a TSortedCollection and loads it from stream.
Visibility: default
Description: Load calls the inherited constuctor (see TCollection.Load (1075)) and reads the Duplicates flag
from the stream..
You should not call this method directly, since TSortedCollection is a abstract class. Instead,
the descendent classes should call it via the inherited keyword.
Errors: None.
See also: TSortedCollection.Init (1108), TCollection.Done (1075)
67.13.5 TSortedCollection.KeyOf
Synopsis: Return the key of an item
Declaration: function KeyOf(Item: Pointer) : Pointer; Virtual
Visibility: default
1108
Description: KeyOf returns the key associated with Item. TSortedCollection returns the item itself as
the key, descendent objects can override this method to calculate a (unique) key based on the item
passed (such as hash values).
Keys are used to sort the objects, they are used to search and sort the items in the collection. If
descendent types override this method then it allows possibly for faster search/sort methods based on
keys rather than on the objects themselves.
Errors: None.
See also: TSortedCollection.IndexOf (1109), TSortedCollection.Compare (1109)
67.13.6 TSortedCollection.IndexOf
Synopsis: Return index of an item in the collection.
Declaration: function IndexOf(Item: Pointer) : Sw_Integer; Virtual

Visibility: default
Description: IndexOf returns the index of Item in the collection. It searches for the object based on it’s key.
If duplicates are allowed, then it returns the index of last object that matches Item.
In case Item is not found in the collection, -1 is returned.
For an example, see TCollection.IndexOf (1076)
Errors: None.
See also: TSortedCollection.Search (1110), TSortedCollection.Compare (1109)
67.13.7 TSortedCollection.Compare
Synopsis: Compare two items in the collection.
Declaration: function Compare(Key1: Pointer;Key2: Pointer) : Sw_Integer; Virtual
Visibility: default
Description: Compare is an abstract method that should be overridden by descendent objects in order to compare
two items in the collection. This method is used in the Search (1110) method and in the Insert (1111)
method to determine the ordering of the objects.
The function should compare the two keys of items and return the following function results:
Result < 0If Key1 is logically before Key2 (Key1<Key2)

Result = 0If Key1 and Key2 are equal. (Key1=Key2)
Result > 0If Key1 is logically after Key2 (Key1>Key2)
Errors: An ’abstract run-time error’ will be generated if you call TSortedCollection.Compare di-
rectly.
See also: TSortedCollection.IndexOf (1109), TSortedCollection.Search (1110)
Listing: ./objectex/mysortc.pp
1109
Unit MySortC ;
Interface
Type
PMySortedCollection = ^ TMySortedCollection ;
T M y S o r t e d C o l l e c t i o n = Object ( T S o r t e d C o l l e c t i o n )
Function Compare ( Key1 , Key2 : P o i n t e r ) : Sw_integer ; v i r t u a l ;
end ;
Implementation
Uses MyObject ;
Function T M y S o r t e d C o l l e c t i o n . Compare ( Key1 , Key2 : P o i n t e r ) : s w _ i n t e g e r ;
begin
Compare : = PMyobject ( Key1 ) ^ . G e t F i e l d − PMyObject ( Key2 ) ^ . G e t F i e l d ;
end ;
end .
67.13.8 TSortedCollection.Search
Synopsis: Search for item with given key.
Declaration: function Search(Key: Pointer;var Index: Sw_Integer) : Boolean; Virtual

Visibility: default
Description: Search looks for the item with key Key and returns the position of the item (if present) in the
collection in Index.
Instead of a linear search as TCollection does, TSortedCollection uses a binary search
based on the keys of the objects. It uses the Compare (1109) function to implement this search.
If the item is found, Search returns True, otherwise False is returned.
Errors: None.
See also: TCollection.IndexOf (1076)
Program ex36 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e T S o r t e d C o l l e c t i o n . I n s e r t method }
Uses Objects , MyObject , MySortC ;

{ For TMyObject , T M y S o r t e d C o l l e c t i o n d e f i n i t i o n and r e g i s t r a t i o n }
Var C : P S o r t e d C o l l e c t i o n ;
M : PMyObject ;
I : Longint ;
1110
begin
end ;
begin
Randomize ;
C: =New( PMySortedCollection , I n i t ( 1 2 0 , 1 0 ) ) ;
C^ . D u p l i c a t e s : = True ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
begin
M^ . S e t F i e l d (Random ( 1 0 0 ) ) ;
end ;
Repeat ;
Write ( ’ Value t o search f o r ( − 1 s t o p s ) : ’ ) ;
read ( I ) ;
I f I <>−1 then
begin
M^ . S e t F i e l d ( i ) ;
I f Not C^ . Search ( M, I ) then
W r i t e l n ( ’No such v a l u e found ’ )
else
begin
Write ( ’ Value ’ , PMyObject (C^ . At ( I ) ) ^ . G e t F i e l d ) ;
Writeln ( ’ present at p o s i t i o n ’ , I ) ;
end ;
end ;
U n t i l I =−1;
Dispose (M, Done ) ;
end .
67.13.9 TSortedCollection.Insert
Synopsis: Insert new item in collection.
Visibility: default
Description: Insert inserts an item in the collection at the correct position, such that the collection is ordered at
all times. You should never use Atinsert (1087), since then the collection ordering is not guaranteed.
If Item is already present in the collection, and Duplicates is False, the item will not be
inserted.
Errors: None.
See also: TCollection.AtInsert (1087)
1111
Program ex35 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e T S o r t e d C o l l e c t i o n . I n s e r t method }
Uses Objects , MyObject , MySortC ;

{ For TMyObject , T M y S o r t e d C o l l e c t i o n d e f i n i t i o n and r e g i s t r a t i o n }
Var C : P S o r t e d C o l l e c t i o n ;
M : PMyObject ;
I : Longint ;
begin
end ;
begin
Randomize ;
C: =New( PMySortedCollection , I n i t ( 1 2 0 , 1 0 ) ) ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
begin
M^ . S e t F i e l d (Random ( 1 0 0 ) ) ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Values : ’ ) ;
C^ . Foreach ( @ P r i n t F i e l d ) ;
end .
67.13.10 TSortedCollection.Store
Synopsis: Write the collection to the stream.
Visibility: default
Description: Store writes the collection to the stream S. It does this by calling the inherited TCollection.Store
(1088), and then writing the Duplicates flag to the stream.
After a Store, the collection can be loaded from the stream with the constructor Load (1108)
Errors: Errors can be those of TStream.Put (1120).
See also: TSortedCollection.Load (1108)
1112
67.14 TStrCollection
67.14.1 Description
The TStrCollection object manages a sorted collection of null-terminated strings (pchar strings).
To this end, it overrides the Compare (1109) method of TSortedCollection, and it introduces
methods to read/write strings from a stream.

1113 Compare Compare two strings in the collection.
1114 FreeItem Free null-terminated string from the collection.
1114 GetItem Read a null-terminated string from the stream.
1114 PutItem Write a null-terminated string to the stream.
67.14.3 TStrCollection.Compare
Synopsis: Compare two strings in the collection.
Visibility: default
Description: TStrCollection overrides the Compare function so it compares the two keys as if they were
pointers to strings. The compare is done case sensitive. It returns
-1if the first string is alphabetically earlier than the second string.
0if the two strings are equal.
1if the first string is alphabetically later than the second string.
Errors: None.
See also: TSortedCollection.Compare (1109)
Program ex38 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e T S t r C o l l e c t i o n . Compare method }
Uses Objects , S t r i n g s ;
Var C : PStrCollection ;
S : String ;
I : longint ;
P : Pchar ;
begin
Randomize ;
C: =New( P S t r C o l l e c t i o n , I n i t ( 1 2 0 , 1 0 ) ) ;
C^ . D u p l i c a t e s : = True ; { D u p l i c a t e s a l l o w e d }
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
begin
S t r (Random( 1 0 0 ) ,S ) ;
1113
S: = ’ S t r i n g w i t h v a l u e ’ +S ;
P: = S t r A l l o c ( Length (S ) + 1 ) ;
C^ . I n s e r t ( StrPCopy ( P , S ) ) ;
end ;
For I : = 0 to 9 8 do
With C^ do
I f Compare ( At ( I ) , At ( I + 1 ) ) = 0 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ D u p l i c a t e s t r i n g found a t p o s i t i o n ’ , I );
end .
67.14.4 TStrCollection.GetItem
Synopsis: Read a null-terminated string from the stream.

Visibility: default
Description: GetItem reads a null-terminated string from the stream S and returns a pointer to it. It doesn’t
insert the string in the collection.
This method is primarily introduced to be able to load and store the collection from and to a stream.
Errors: The errors returned are those of TStream.StrRead (1116).
See also: TStrCollection.PutItem (1114)
67.14.5 TStrCollection.FreeItem
Synopsis: Free null-terminated string from the collection.
Visibility: default
Description: TStrCollection overrides FreeItem so that the string pointed to by Item is disposed from
memory.
Errors: None.
67.14.6 TStrCollection.PutItem
Synopsis: Write a null-terminated string to the stream.
Visibility: default
Description: PutItem writes the string pointed to by Item to the stream S.
This method is primarily used in the Load and Store methods, and should not be used directly.
Errors: Errors are those of TStream.StrWrite (1121).
See also: TStrCollection.GetItem (1114)
1114
67.15 TStream
67.15.1 Description
The TStream object is the ancestor for all streaming objects, i.e. objects that have the capability to
store and retrieve data.
It defines a number of methods that are common to all objects that implement streaming, many of
them are virtual, and are only implemented in the descendent types.
Programs should not instantiate objects of type TStream directly, but instead instantiate a descendant
type, such as TDosStream, TMemoryStream.
See also: PStream (1061), TDosStream (1088), TMemoryStream (1093)

1119 Close Close the stream
1123 CopyFrom Copy data from another stream.
1121 Error Set stream status
1120 Flush Flush the stream data from the buffer, if any.
1115 Get Read an object definition from the stream.
1117 GetPos Return current position in the stream
1117 GetSize Return the size of the stream.
1115 Init Constructor for TStream instance
1119 Open Open the stream
1120 Put Write an object to the stream.
1122 Read Read data from stream to buffer.
1118 ReadStr Read a shortstring from the stream.
1119 Reset Reset the stream
1121 Seek Set stream position.
1116 StrRead Read a null-terminated string from the stream.
1121 StrWrite Write a null-terminated string to the stream.
1120 Truncate Truncate the stream size on current position.
1122 Write Write a number of bytes to the stream.
1121 WriteStr Write a pascal string to the stream.
67.15.3 TStream.Init
Synopsis: Constructor for TStream instance
Declaration: constructor Init
Visibility: default
Description: Init initializes a TStream instance. Descendent streams should always call the inherited Init.
67.15.4 TStream.Get
Synopsis: Read an object definition from the stream.
Declaration: function Get : PObject
Visibility: default
1115
Description: Get reads an object definition from a stream, and returns a pointer to an instance of this object.
Errors: On error, TStream.Status (??) is set, and NIL is returned.
See also: TStream.Put (1120)
Program ex9 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate TStream . Get and TStream . Put }
Uses Objects , MyObject ; { D e f i n i t i o n and r e g i s t r a t i o n o f TMyObject }
Var Obj : PMyObject ;

S : PStream ;
begin
Obj : =New( PMyObject , I n i t ) ;
Obj ^ . S e t F i e l d ( $1111 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ F i e l d v a l u e : ’ , Obj ^ . G e t F i e l d ) ;
{ Since Stream i s an a b s t r a c t type , we i n s t a n t i a t e a TMemoryStream }
S: =New( PMemoryStream , I n i t ( 1 0 0 , 1 0 ) ) ;
S ^ . Put ( Obj ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Disposing o b j e c t ’ ) ;
S ^ . Seek ( 0 ) ;
Dispose ( Obj , Done ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Reading o b j e c t ’ ) ;
Obj : = PMyObject (S ^ . Get ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ F i e l d Value : ’ , Obj ^ . G e t F i e l d ) ;
Dispose ( Obj , Done ) ;
end .
67.15.5 TStream.StrRead
Synopsis: Read a null-terminated string from the stream.
Declaration: function StrRead : PChar
Visibility: default
Description: StrRead reads a string from the stream, allocates memory for it, and returns a pointer to a null-
terminated copy of the string on the heap.
See also: TStream.StrWrite (1121), TStream.ReadStr (1118)
Program ex10 ;
{
Program t o demonstrate t h e TStream . StrRead TStream . S t r W r i t e f u n c t i o n s
}
1116
Var P : PChar ;
S : PStream ;
begin
P: = ’ Constant Pchar s t r i n g ’ ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ W r i t i n g t o stream : " ’ ,P , ’ " ’ ) ;
S ^ . S t r W r i t e (P ) ;
S ^ . Seek ( 0 ) ;
P: = N i l ;
P: =S ^ . StrRead ;
DisPose ( S , Done ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Read from stream : " ’ ,P , ’ " ’ ) ;
Freemem ( P , S t r l e n (P ) + 1 ) ;
end .
67.15.6 TStream.GetPos
Synopsis: Return current position in the stream
Declaration: function GetPos : LongInt; Virtual
Visibility: default
Description: If the stream’s status is stOk, GetPos returns the current position in the stream. Otherwise it
returns -1
Errors: -1 is returned if the status is an error condition.
See also: TStream.Seek (1121), TStream.GetSize (1117)
Program ex11 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e TStream . GetPos f u n c t i o n }
S : PStream ;
begin
L : = ’Some k i n d o f s t r i n g ’ ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Stream p o s i t i o n b e f o r e w r i t e : ’ ,S ^ . GetPos ) ;
S ^ . W r i t e S t r (@L) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Stream p o s i t i o n a f t e r w r i t e : ’ ,S ^ . GetPos ) ;
end .
67.15.7 TStream.GetSize
Synopsis: Return the size of the stream.
Declaration: function GetSize : LongInt; Virtual
1117
Visibility: default
Description: If the stream’s status is stOk then GetSize returns the size of the stream, otherwise it returns -1.
Errors: -1 is returned if the status is an error condition.
Program ex12 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e TStream . GetSize f u n c t i o n }
S : PStream ;
begin
L : = ’Some k i n d o f s t r i n g ’ ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Stream s i z e b e f o r e w r i t e : ’ ,S ^ . GetSize ) ;
S ^ . W r i t e S t r (@L) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Stream s i z e a f t e r w r i t e : ’ ,S ^ . GetSize ) ;
end .
67.15.8 TStream.ReadStr
Synopsis: Read a shortstring from the stream.
Declaration: function ReadStr : PString
Visibility: default
Description: ReadStr reads a string from the stream, copies it to the heap and returns a pointer to this copy.
The string is saved as a pascal string, and hence is NOT null terminated.
Errors: On error (e.g. not enough memory), Nil is returned.
See also: TStream.StrRead (1116)
Program ex13 ;
{
Program t o demonstrate t h e TStream . ReadStr TStream . W r i t e S t r f u n c t i o n s
}
Var P : P S t r i n g ;
L : String ;
S : PStream ;
begin
1118
L : = ’ Constant s t r i n g l i n e ’ ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ W r i t i n g t o stream : " ’ , L , ’ " ’ ) ;
S ^ . W r i t e S t r (@L) ;
S ^ . Seek ( 0 ) ;
P: =S ^ . ReadStr ;
L : =P ^ ;
DisposeStr (P ) ;
DisPose ( S , Done ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Read from stream : " ’ , L , ’ " ’ ) ;
end .
67.15.9 TStream.Open
Synopsis: Open the stream
Visibility: default
Description: Open is an abstract method, that should be overridden by descendent objects. Since opening a
stream depends on the stream’s type this is not surprising.
Errors: None.
See also: TStream.Close (1119), TStream.Reset (1119)
67.15.10 TStream.Close
Synopsis: Close the stream
Visibility: default
Description: Close is an abstract method, that should be overridden by descendent objects. Since Closing a
stream depends on the stream’s type this is not surprising.
for an example, see TDosStream.Open (1092).
Errors: None.
See also: TStream.Open (1119), TStream.Reset (1119)
67.15.11 TStream.Reset
Synopsis: Reset the stream
Declaration: procedure Reset
Visibility: default
Description: Reset sets the stream’s status to 0, as well as the ErrorInfo
Errors: None.
See also: TStream.Open (1119), TStream.Close (1119)
1119
67.15.12 TStream.Flush
Synopsis: Flush the stream data from the buffer, if any.
Declaration: procedure Flush; Virtual

Visibility: default
Description: Flush is an abstract method that should be overridden by descendent objects. It serves to enable
the programmer to tell streams that implement a buffer to clear the buffer.
for an example, see TBufStream.Flush (1071).
Errors: None.
See also: TStream.Truncate (1120)
67.15.13 TStream.Truncate
Synopsis: Truncate the stream size on current position.
Visibility: default
Description: Truncate is an abstract procedure that should be overridden by descendent objects. It serves to
enable the programmer to truncate the size of the stream to the current file position.
Errors: None.
See also: TStream.Seek (1121)
67.15.14 TStream.Put
Synopsis: Write an object to the stream.
Declaration: procedure Put(P: PObject)
Visibility: default
Description: Put writes the object pointed to by P. P should be non-nil. The object type must have been registered
with RegisterType (1068).
After the object has been written, it can be read again with Get (1115).
For an example, see TStream.Get (1115);
Errors: No check is done whether P is Nil or not. Passing Nil will cause a run-time error 216 to be
generated. If the object has not been registered, the status of the stream will be set to stPutError.
See also: TStream.Get (1115)
1120
67.15.15 TStream.StrWrite
Synopsis: Write a null-terminated string to the stream.
Declaration: procedure StrWrite(P: PChar)
Visibility: default
Description: StrWrite writes the null-terminated string P to the stream. P can only be 65355 bytes long.
For an example, see TStream.StrRead (1116).
Errors: None.
See also: TStream.WriteStr (1121), TStream.StrRead (1116), TStream.ReadStr (1118)
67.15.16 TStream.WriteStr
Synopsis: Write a pascal string to the stream.
Declaration: procedure WriteStr(P: PString)
Visibility: default
Description: StrWrite writes the pascal string pointed to by P to the stream.
For an example, see TStream.ReadStr (1118).
Errors: None.
See also: TStream.StrWrite (1121), TStream.StrRead (1116), TStream.ReadStr (1118)
67.15.17 TStream.Seek
Synopsis: Set stream position.
Visibility: default
Description: Seek sets the position to Pos. This position is counted from the beginning, and is zero based. (i.e.
seeek(0) sets the position pointer on the first byte of the stream)
For an example, see TDosStream.Seek (1091).
Errors: If Pos is larger than the stream size, Status is set to StSeekError.
See also: TStream.GetPos (1117), TStream.GetSize (1117)
67.15.18 TStream.Error
Synopsis: Set stream status
Declaration: procedure Error(Code: Integer;Info: Integer); Virtual
Visibility: default
Description: Error sets the stream’s status to Code and ErrorInfo to Info. If the StreamError proce-
dural variable is set, Error executes it, passing Self as an argument.
This method should not be called directly from a program. It is intended to be used in descendent
objects.
Errors: None.
1121
67.15.19 TStream.Read
Synopsis: Read data from stream to buffer.
Visibility: default
Description: Read is an abstract method that should be overridden by descendent objects.
Read reads Count bytes from the stream into Buf. It updates the position pointer, increasing it’s
value with Count. Buf must be large enough to contain Count bytes.
Errors: No checking is done to see if Buf is large enough to contain Count bytes.
See also: TStream.Write (1122), TStream.ReadStr (1118), TStream.StrRead (1116)
program ex18 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e TStream . Read method }
Var Buf1 , Buf2 : Array [ 1 . . 1 0 0 0 ] of Byte ;

I : longint ;
S : PMemorySTream ;
begin
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 0 do
Buf1 [ I ] : = Random( 1 0 0 0 ) ;
Buf2 : = Buf1 ;
S ^ . Write ( Buf1 , SizeOf ( Buf1 ) ) ;
S ^ . Seek ( 0 ) ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 0 do
Buf1 [ I ] : = 0 ;
S ^ . Read ( Buf1 , SizeOf ( Buf1 ) ) ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 0 do
I f Buf1 [ I ] < > buf2 [ i ] then
Writeln ( ’ B u f f e r d i f f e r s at p o s i t i o n ’ , I );
end .
67.15.20 TStream.Write
Synopsis: Write a number of bytes to the stream.
Visibility: default
Description: Write is an abstract method that should be overridden by descendent objects.
Write writes Count bytes to the stream from Buf. It updates the position pointer, increasing it’s
value with Count.
Errors: No checking is done to see if Buf actually contains Count bytes.
See also: TStream.Read (1122), TStream.WriteStr (1121), TStream.StrWrite (1121)
1122
67.15.21 TStream.CopyFrom
Synopsis: Copy data from another stream.
Declaration: procedure CopyFrom(var S: TStream;Count: LongInt)

Visibility: default
Description: CopyFrom reads Count bytes from stream S and stores them in the current stream. It uses the Read
(1122) method to read the data, and the Write (1122) method to write in the current stream.
Errors: None.
See also: Read (1122), Write (1122)
Program ex19 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e TStream . CopyFrom f u n c t i o n }
L : String ;
S1 , S2 : PStream ;
begin
L : = ’ Constant s t r i n g l i n e ’ ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ W r i t i n g t o stream 1 : " ’ , L , ’ " ’ ) ;
S1 : =New( PMemoryStream , I n i t ( 1 0 0 , 1 0 ) ) ;
S2 : =New( PMemoryStream , I n i t ( 1 0 0 , 1 0 ) ) ;
S1 ^ . W r i t e S t r (@L) ;
S1 ^ . Seek ( 0 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Copying c o n t e n t s o f stream 1 t o stream 2 ’ ) ;
S2 ^ . Copyfrom ( S1 ^ , S1 ^ . GetSize ) ;
S2 ^ . Seek ( 0 ) ;
P: = S2 ^ . ReadStr ;
L : =P ^ ;
DisposeStr (P ) ;
Dispose ( S1 , Done ) ;
Dispose ( S2 , Done ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Read from stream 2 : " ’ , L , ’ " ’ ) ;
end .
67.16 TStringCollection
67.16.1 Description
The TStringCollection object manages a sorted collection of pascal strings. To this end, it
overrides the Compare (1109) method of TSortedCollection, and it introduces methods to
read/write strings from a stream.
1123

1124 Compare Compare two strings in the collection.
1125 FreeItem Dispose a string in the collection from memory.
1124 GetItem Get string from the stream.
1125 PutItem Write a string to the stream.
67.16.3 TStringCollection.GetItem
Synopsis: Get string from the stream.
Visibility: default
Description: GetItem reads a string from the stream S and returns a pointer to it. It doesn’t insert the string in
the collection.
This method is primarily introduced to be able to load and store the collection from and to a stream.
Errors: The errors returned are those of TStream.ReadStr (1118).
See also: TStringCollection.PutItem (1125)
67.16.4 TStringCollection.Compare
Synopsis: Compare two strings in the collection.
Visibility: default
Description: TStringCollection overrides the Compare function so it compares the two keys as if they
were pointers to strings. The compare is done case sensitive. It returns the following results:
-1if the first string is alphabetically earlier than the second string.
0if the two strings are equal.
1if the first string is alphabetically later than the second string.
Errors: None.
See also: TSortedCollection.Compare (1109)
Program ex37 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e T S t r i n g C o l l e c t i o n . Compare method }
Var C : P S t r i n g C o l l e c t i o n ;
S : String ;
I : longint ;
begin
Randomize ;
1124
C: =New( P S t r i n g C o l l e c t i o n , I n i t ( 1 2 0 , 1 0 ) ) ;
C^ . D u p l i c a t e s : = True ; { D u p l i c a t e s a l l o w e d }
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
begin
S t r (Random( 1 0 0 ) ,S ) ;
C^ . I n s e r t ( NewStr (S ) ) ;
end ;
For I : = 0 to 9 8 do
With C^ do
I f Compare ( At ( i ) , At ( I + 1 ) ) = 0 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ D u p l i c a t e s t r i n g found a t p o s i t i o n ’ , i ) ;
end .
67.16.5 TStringCollection.FreeItem
Synopsis: Dispose a string in the collection from memory.
Visibility: default
Description: TStringCollection overrides FreeItem so that the string pointed to by Item is disposed
from memory.
Errors: None.
67.16.6 TStringCollection.PutItem
Synopsis: Write a string to the stream.
Visibility: default
Description: PutItem writes the string pointed to by Item to the stream S.

This method is primarily used in the Load and Store methods, and should not be used directly.
Errors: Errors are those of TStream.WriteStr (1121).
See also: TStringCollection.GetItem (1124)
67.17 TStringList
67.17.1 Description
A TStringList object can be used to read a collection of strings stored in a stream. If you register
this object with the RegisterType (1068) function, you cannot register the TStrListMaker object.
1125

1126 Done Clean up the instance
1126 Get Return a string by key name
1126 Load Load stringlist from stream.
67.17.3 TStringList.Load
Synopsis: Load stringlist from stream.
Visibility: default
Description: The Load constructor reads the TStringList object from the stream S. It also reads the descrip-
tions of the strings from the stream. The string descriptions are stored as an array of TstrIndexrec
records, where each record describes a string on the stream. These records are kept in memory.
Errors: If an error occurs, a stream error is triggered.
See also: TStringList.Done (1126)
67.17.4 TStringList.Done
Synopsis: Clean up the instance
Visibility: default
Description: The Done destructor frees the memory occupied by the string descriptions, and destroys the object.
Errors: None.
See also: Load (1126), TObject.Done (1097)
67.17.5 TStringList.Get
Synopsis: Return a string by key name
Declaration: function Get(Key: Sw_Word) : string
Visibility: default
Description: Get reads the string with key Key from the list of strings on the stream, and returns this string. If
there is no string with such a key, an empty string is returned.
Errors: If no string with key Key is found, an empty string is returned. A stream error may result if the
stream doesn’t contain the needed strings.
See also: TStrListMaker.Put (1127)
1126
67.18 TStrListMaker
67.18.1 Description
The TStrListMaker object can be used to generate a stream with strings, which can be read with
the TStringList object. If you register this object with the RegisterType (1068) function, you
cannot register the TStringList object.

1127 Done Clean up the instance and free all related memory.
1127 Init Instantiate a new instance of TStrListMaker
1127 Put Add a new string to the list with associated key.
1128 Store Write the strings to the stream.
67.18.3 TStrListMaker.Init
Synopsis: Instantiate a new instance of TStrListMaker
Declaration: constructor Init(AStrSize: Sw_Word;AIndexSize: Sw_Word)
Visibility: default
Description: The Init constructor creates a new instance of the TstrListMaker object. It allocates AStrSize
bytes on the heap to hold all the strings you wish to store. It also allocates enough room for
AIndexSize key description entries (of the type TStrIndexrec).
AStrSize must be large enough to contain all the strings you wish to store. If not enough memory
is allocated, other memory will be overwritten. The same is true for AIndexSize : maximally
AIndexSize strings can be written to the stream.
Errors: None.
See also: TObject.Init (1095), TStrListMaker.Done (1127)
67.18.4 TStrListMaker.Done
Synopsis: Clean up the instance and free all related memory.
Visibility: default
Description: The Done destructor de-allocates the memory for the index description records and the string data,
and then destroys the object.
Errors: None.
See also: TObject.Done (1097), TStrListMaker.Init (1127)
67.18.5 TStrListMaker.Put
Synopsis: Add a new string to the list with associated key.
Declaration: procedure Put(Key: Sw_Word;S: string)
1127
Visibility: default
Description: Put adds they string S with key Key to the collection of strings. This action doesn’t write the string
to a stream. To write the strings to the stream, see the Store (1128) method.
Errors: None.
See also: TStrListMaker.Store (1128)
67.18.6 TStrListMaker.Store
Synopsis: Write the strings to the stream.
Visibility: default
Description: Store writes the collection of strings to the stream S. The collection can then be read with the
TStringList object.
Errors: A stream error may occur when writing the strings to the stream.
See also: TStringList.Load (1126), TStrListMaker.Put (1127)
67.19 TUnSortedStrCollection
67.19.1 Description
The TUnSortedStrCollection object manages an unsorted list of strings. To this end, it over-
rides the TSortedCollection.Insert (1111) method to add strings at the end of the collection, rather
than in the alphabetically correct position.
Take care, the Search (1110) and IndexOf (1076) methods will not work on an unsorted string col-
lection.

1128 Insert Insert a new string in the collection.
67.19.3 TUnSortedStrCollection.Insert
Synopsis: Insert a new string in the collection.

Visibility: default
Description: Insert inserts a string at the end of the collection, instead of on it’s alphabetical place, resulting
in an unsorted collection of strings.
Errors: None.
1128
Program ex39 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e T U n s o r t e d S t r C o l l e c t i o n . I n s e r t method }
Uses Objects , S t r i n g s ;
Var C : PUnsortedStrCollection ;
S : String ;
I : longint ;
P : Pchar ;
begin
Randomize ;
C: =New( P U n s o r t e d S t r C o l l e c t i o n , I n i t ( 1 2 0 , 1 0 ) ) ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 0 do
begin
S t r (Random( 1 0 0 ) ,S ) ;
C^ . I n s e r t ( NewStr (S ) ) ;
end ;
For I : = 0 to 9 9 do
W r i t e l n ( I : 2 , ’ : ’ , P S t r i n g (C^ . At ( i ) ) ^ ) ;
end .
1129
Chapter 68
Reference for unit ’objpas’
68.1 Overview
The objpas unit is meant for compatibility with Object Pascal as implemented by Delphi. The unit
is loaded automatically by the Free Pascal compiler whenever the Delphi or objfpc mode is
entered, either through the command line switches -Sd or -Sh or with the {$MODE DELPHI} or
{$MODE OBJFPC} directives.
It redefines some basic pascal types, introduces some functions for compatibility with Delphi’s sys-
tem unit, and introduces some methods for the management of the resource string tables.

68.2.1 Constants
MaxInt = MaxLongint
Maximum value for Integer (1130) type.
68.2.2 Types
Integer = LongInt
In OBJPAS mode and in DELPHI mode, an Integer has a size of 32 bit. In TP or regular FPC
mode, an integer is 16 bit.
IntegerArray = Array[0..$effffff] of Integer
Generic array of integer (1130)
PInteger = Înteger
Pointer to Integer (1130) type.
PIntegerArray = ÎntegerArray
Pointer to TIntegerArray (1131) type.
1130
CHAPTER 68. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’OBJPAS’
PointerArray = Array[0..512*1024*1024-2] of Pointer
Generic Array of pointers.
PPointerArray = ^PointerArray
Pointer to PointerArray (1131)
PString = PAnsiString
Pointer to ansistring type.
TBoundArray = Array of Integer
Array of integer, used in interfaces.
TIntegerArray = IntegerArray
Alias for IntegerArray (1130)
TPointerArray = PointerArray
Alias for PointerArray (1131)
1131
Chapter 69
Reference for unit ’ports’
69.1 Overview
The ports unit implements the port constructs found in Turbo Pascal. It uses classes and default
array properties to do this.
The unit exists on linux, os/2 and dos. It is implemented only for compatibility with Turbo Pascal.
It’s usage is discouraged, because using ports is not portable programming, and the operating system
may not even allow it (for instance Windows).
Under linux, your program must be run as root, or the IOPerm call must be set in order to set
appropriate permissions on the port access.

69.2.1 Variables
port : tport
Default instance of type TPort (1133). Do not free. This variable is initialized in the unit initialization
code, and freed at finalization.
Since there is a default property for a variable of this type, a sentence as
port[221]:=12;
Will result in the integer 12 being written to port 221, if port is defined as a variable of type tport
portb : tport
Default instance of type TPort (1133). Do not free. This variable is initialized in the unit initialization
code, and freed at finalization.
portb[221]:=12;
Will result in the byte 12 being written to port 221, if port is defined as a variable of type tport
1132
CHAPTER 69. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’PORTS’
portl : tportl
Default instance of type TPortL (1134). Do not free. This variable is initialized in the unit initializa-
tion code, and freed at finalization.
portl[221]:=12;
Will result in the longint 12 being written to port 221, if port is defined as a variable of type tport
portw : tportw
Default instance of type TPortW (1134). Do not free. This variable is initialized in the unit initial-
ization code, and freed at finalization.
portw[221]:=12;
Will result in the word 12 being written to port 221, if port is defined as a variable of type tport
69.3 tport
69.3.1 Description
The TPort type is implemented specially for access to the ports in a TP compatible manner. There
is no need to create an instance of this type: the standard TP variables are instantiated at unit initial-
ization.
See also: port (1132), TPortW (1134), TPortL (1134)

1133 pp rw Access integer-sized port by port number
69.3.3 tport.pp
Synopsis: Access integer-sized port by port number
Declaration: Property pp[w: LongInt]: Byte; default

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Access integer-sized port by port number
1133
CHAPTER 69. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’PORTS’
69.4 tportl
69.4.1 Description
The TPortL type is implemented specially for access to the ports in a TP compatible manner.
There is no need to create an instance of this type: the standard TP variables are instantiated at unit
initialization.
See also: portw (1133), TPort (1133), TPortL (1134)

1134 pp rw Access Longint-sized port by port number
69.4.3 tportl.pp
Synopsis: Access Longint-sized port by port number
Declaration: Property pp[w: LongInt]: LongInt; default
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Access Longint-sized port by port number
69.5 tportw
69.5.1 Description
The TPortW type is implemented specially for access to the ports in a TP compatible manner.
There is no need to create an instance of this type: the standard TP variables are instantiated at unit
initialization.
See also: portw (1133), TPort (1133), TPortL (1134)

1134 pp rw Access word-sized port by port number
69.5.3 tportw.pp
Synopsis: Access word-sized port by port number
Declaration: Property pp[w: LongInt]: Word; default
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Access word-sized port by port number
1134
Chapter 70
Reference for unit ’printer’
70.1 Overview
This chapter describes the printer unit for Free Pascal. It was written for DOS by Florian Klaempfl,
and it was written for Linux by Michael Van Canneyt, and has been ported to Windows and OS/2 as
well. Its basic functionality is the same for all supported systems, although there are minor differ-
ences on Linux and UNIX.

70.2.1 Variables
Lst : text
Lst is the standard printing device.

On Linux, Lst is set up using AssignLst(’/tmp/PID.lst’).

70.3.1 AssignLst
Synopsis: Assign text file to printing device
Declaration: procedure AssignLst(var F: text;ToFile: string)
Visibility: default
Description: AssignLst assigns to F a printing device - UNIX only. ToFile is a string with the following
form:
•’|filename options’: This sets up a pipe with the program filename, with the given
options, such as in the popen() call.
•’filename’: Prints to file filename. Filename can contain the string ’PID’ (No Quotes),
which will be replaced by the PID of your program. When closing lst, the file will be sent to
lpr and deleted. (lpr should be in PATH)
•{’filename|’}: Same as previous, only the file is not sent to lpr, nor is it deleted. (useful
for opening /dev/printer or for later printing)
1135
CHAPTER 70. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’PRINTER’
See also: lst (1135)
Listing: ./printex/printex.pp
program t e s t p r n ;
uses p r i n t e r ;
var i : i n t e g e r ;
f : text ;
begin
w r i t e l n ( ’ Test o f p r i n t e r u n i t ’ ) ;
writeln ( ’ Writing to l s t . . . ’ ) ;
f o r i : = 1 to 8 0 do w r i t e l n ( l s t , ’ T h i s i s l i n e ’ , i , ’ . ’ # 1 3 ) ;
close ( l s t ) ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ Done . ’ ) ;
{ $ i f d e f Unix }
writeln ( ’ W r i t i n g to pipe . . . ’ ) ;
a s s i g n l s t ( f , ’ | / u s r / b i n / l p r −m ’ ) ;
rewrite ( f ) ;
f o r i : = 1 to 8 0 do w r i t e l n ( f , ’ T h i s i s l i n e ’ , i , ’ . ’ # 1 3 ) ;
close ( f ) ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ Done . ’ )
{ $endif }
end .
70.3.2 InitPrinter
Synopsis: Initialize the printer
Declaration: procedure InitPrinter(const PrinterName: string)
Visibility: default
Description: Initialize the printer
70.3.3 IsLstAvailable
Synopsis: Determine whether printer is available.
Declaration: function IsLstAvailable : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Determine whether printer is available.
1136
Chapter 71
Reference for unit ’sharemem’
71.1 Overview
sharemem implements a shared memory manager. Including this unit will replace the standard
memory manager with a memory manager which uses shared memory. This means the memory
allocated by this unit can be managed by a program and a DLL if they both use the shared memory
manager: it allows, amongst other things, to pass ansistrings or unicode strings from a program to a
DLL and vice versa.
This unit does not implement any routines: all actions to replace the memory manager are performed
in the initialization section of the unit. The unit should be placed as the first unit in a program or
DLL’s uses section, memory corruption may occur if the unit is not placed first.
This unit requires the fpcmemdll.dll library to be distributed with both program and dll that use this
unit. This DLL is distributed with the windows Free Pascal distribution.
1137
Chapter 72
Reference for unit ’Sockets’
72.1 Used units
Table 72.1: Used units by unit ’Sockets’
Name Page
BaseUnix 113
System 1224
unixtype 1784
72.2 Overview
This document describes the SOCKETS unit for Free Pascal. it was written for linux by Michael Van
Canneyt, and ported to Windows by Florian Klaempfl.

72.3.1 Constants
AF_APPLETALK = 5
Address family Appletalk DDP
AF_ASH = 18
Address family: Ash
AF_ATMPVC = 8
Address family: ATM PVCs
AF_ATMSVC = 20
Address family: ATM SVCs
1138
CHAPTER 72. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’SOCKETS’
AF_AX25 = 3
Address family Amateur Radio AX.25
AF_BLUETOOTH = 31
Address family: Bluetooth sockets
AF_BRIDGE = 7
Address family Multiprotocol bridge
AF_DECnet = 12
Address family: Reserved for DECnet project.
AF_ECONET = 19
Address family: Acorn Econet
AF_INET = 2
Address family Internet IP Protocol
AF_INET6 = 10
Address family IP version 6
AF_IPX = 4
Address family Novell IPX
AF_IRDA = 23
Address family: IRDA sockets
AF_KEY = 15
Address family: PF_KEY key management API
AF_LLC = 26
Address family: Linux LLC
AF_LOCAL = 1
Address family: Unix socket
AF_MAX = 32
Address family Maximum value
1139
AF_NETBEUI = 13
Address family: Reserved for 802.2LLC project
AF_NETLINK = 16
Address family: ?
AF_NETROM = 6
Address family Amateur radio NetROM
AF_PACKET = 17
Address family: Packet family
AF_PPPOX = 24
Address family: PPPoX sockets
AF_ROSE = 11
Address family: Amateur Radio X.25 PLP
AF_ROUTE = AF_NETLINK
Address family: Alias to emulate 4.4BSD.
AF_SECURITY = 14
Address family: Security callback pseudo AF
AF_SNA = 22
Addresss family: Linux SNA project
AF_TIPC = 30
Address family: TIPC sockets
AF_UNIX = 1
Address family Unix domain sockets
AF_UNSPEC = 0
Address family Not specified
AF_WANPIPE = 25
Address family: Wanpipe API Sockets
1140
AF_X25 = 9
Address family Reserved for X.25 project
EsockEACCESS = ESysEAcces
Access forbidden error
EsockEBADF = EsysEBADF
Alias: bad file descriptor
EsockEFAULT = EsysEFAULT
Alias: an error occurred
EsockEINTR = EsysEINTR
Alias : operation interrupted
EsockEINVAL = EsysEINVAL
Alias: Invalid value specified
EsockEMFILE = ESysEmfile
Error code ?
EsockEMSGSIZE = ESysEMsgSize
Wrong message size error
EsockENOBUFS = ESysENoBufs
No buffer space available error
EsockENOTCONN = ESysENotConn
Not connected error
EsockENOTSOCK = ESysENotSock
File descriptor is not a socket error
EsockEPROTONOSUPPORT = ESysEProtoNoSupport
Protocol not supported error
EsockEWOULDBLOCK = ESysEWouldBlock
Operation would block error
1141
INADDR_ANY = (0)
A bitmask matching any IP address on the local machine.
INADDR_NONE = ($FFFFFFFF)
A bitmask matching no valid IP address
IPPROTO_AH = 51
authentication header.
IPPROTO_COMP = 108
Compression Header Protocol.
IPPROTO_DSTOPTS = 60
IPv6 destination options.
IPPROTO_EGP = 8
Exterior Gateway Protocol.
IPPROTO_ENCAP = 98
Encapsulation Header.
IPPROTO_ESP = 50
encapsulating security payload.
IPPROTO_FRAGMENT = 44
IPv6 fragmentation header.
IPPROTO_GRE = 47
General Routing Encapsulation.
IPPROTO_HOPOPTS = 0
IPv6 Hop-by-Hop options.
IPPROTO_ICMP = 1
Internet Control Message Protocol.
IPPROTO_ICMPV6 = 58
ICMPv6.
1142
IPPROTO_IDP = 22
XNS IDP protocol.
IPPROTO_IGMP = 2
Internet Group Management Protocol.
IPPROTO_IP = 0
Dummy protocol for TCP.
IPPROTO_IPIP = 4
IPIP tunnels (older KA9Q tunnels use 94).
IPPROTO_IPV6 = 41
IPv6 header.
IPPROTO_MAX = 255
Maximum value for IPPROTO options
IPPROTO_MTP = 92
Multicast Transport Protocol.
IPPROTO_NONE = 59
IPv6 no next header.
IPPROTO_PIM = 103
Protocol Independent Multicast.
IPPROTO_PUP = 12
PUP protocol.
IPPROTO_RAW = 255
Raw IP packets.
IPPROTO_ROUTING = 43
IPv6 routing header.
IPPROTO_RSVP = 46
Reservation Protocol.
1143
IPPROTO_SCTP = 132
Stream Control Transmission Protocol.
IPPROTO_TCP = 6
Transmission Control Protocol.
IPPROTO_TP = 29
SO Transport Protocol Class 4.
IPPROTO_UDP = 17
User Datagram Protocol.
IPV6_ADDRFORM = 1
Change the IPV6 address into a different address family. Deprecated
IPV6_ADD_MEMBERSHIP = IPV6_JOIN_GROUP
Undocumented Getsockopt option ?
IPV6_AUTHHDR = 10
GetSockOpt/SetSockopt: Deliver authentication header messages
IPV6_CHECKSUM = 7
IPV6_DROP_MEMBERSHIP = IPV6_LEAVE_GROUP
IPV6_DSTOPTS = 4
Deliver destination option control messages
IPV6_HOPLIMIT = 8
Deliver an integer containing the HOP count
IPV6_HOPOPTS = 3
Deliver hop option control messages
IPV6_IPSEC_POLICY = 34
1144
IPV6_JOIN_ANYCAST = 27
IPV6_JOIN_GROUP = 20
GetSockOpt/SetSockopt: Control membership (join group) in multicast groups
IPV6_LEAVE_ANYCAST = 28
IPV6_LEAVE_GROUP = 21
GetSockOpt/SetSockopt: Control membership (leave group)in multicast groups
IPV6_MTU = 24
GetSockOpt/SetSockopt: Get/Set the MTU for the socket
IPV6_MTU_DISCOVER = 23
GetSockOpt/SetSockopt: Get/Set Control path MTU Discovery on the socket
IPV6_MULTICAST_HOPS = 18
GetSockOpt/SetSockopt: Get/Set the multicast hop limit.
IPV6_MULTICAST_IF = 17
GetSockOpt/SetSockopt: Get/Set device for multicast packages on the socket.
IPV6_MULTICAST_LOOP = 19
GetSockOpt/SetSockopt: Control whether socket sees multicast packages that it has sent itself
IPV6_NEXTHOP = 9
sendmsg: set next hop for IPV6 datagram
IPV6_PKTINFO = 2
Change delivery options for incoming IPV6 datagrams
IPV6_PKTOPTIONS = 6
IPV6_PMTUDISC_DO = 2
Always DF.
1145
IPV6_PMTUDISC_DONT = 0
Never send DF frames.
IPV6_PMTUDISC_WANT = 1
Use per route hints.
IPV6_RECVERR = 25
GetSockOpt/SetSockopt: Control receiving of asynchroneous error options
IPV6_ROUTER_ALERT = 22
GetSockOpt/SetSockopt: Get/Set Pass all forwarded packets containing router alert option
IPV6_RTHDR = 5
Deliver routing header control messages
IPV6_RTHDR_LOOSE = 0
Hop doesn’t need to be neighbour.
IPV6_RTHDR_STRICT = 1
Hop must be a neighbour.
IPV6_RTHDR_TYPE_0 = 0
IPv6 Routing header type 0.
IPV6_RXDSTOPTS = IPV6_DSTOPTS
IPV6_RXHOPOPTS = IPV6_HOPOPTS
IPV6_RXSRCRT = IPV6_RTHDR
IPV6_UNICAST_HOPS = 16
GetSockOpt/SetSockopt: Get/Set unicast hop limit
IPV6_V6ONLY = 26
GetSockOpt/SetSockopt: Handle IPV6 connections only
1146
IPV6_XFRM_POLICY = 35
IP_ADD_MEMBERSHIP = 35
add an IP group membership
IP_ADD_SOURCE_MEMBERSHIP = 39
join source group
IP_BLOCK_SOURCE = 38
block data from source
IP_DEFAULT_MULTICAST_LOOP = 1
Undocumented ?
IP_DEFAULT_MULTICAST_TTL = 1
Undocumented ?
IP_DROP_MEMBERSHIP = 36
drop an IP group membership
IP_DROP_SOURCE_MEMBERSHIP = 40
leave source group
IP_HDRINCL = 3
Header is included with data.
IP_MAX_MEMBERSHIPS = 20
Maximum group memberships for multicast messages
IP_MSFILTER = 41
Undocumented ?
IP_MTU_DISCOVER = 10
Undocumented ?
IP_MULTICAST_IF = 32
set/get IP multicast i/f
1147
IP_MULTICAST_LOOP = 34
set/get IP multicast loopback
IP_MULTICAST_TTL = 33
set/get IP multicast ttl
IP_OPTIONS = 4
IP per-packet options.
IP_PKTINFO = 8
Undocumented ?
IP_PKTOPTIONS = 9
Undocumented ?
IP_PMTUDISC = 10
Undocumented ?
IP_PMTUDISC_DO = 2
Always DF.
IP_PMTUDISC_DONT = 0
Never send DF frames.
IP_PMTUDISC_WANT = 1
Use per route hints.
IP_RECVERR = 11
Undocumented ?
IP_RECVOPTS = 6
Receive all IP options w/datagram.
IP_RECVRETOPTS = IP_RETOPTS
Receive IP options for response.
IP_RECVTOS = 13
Undocumented ?
1148
IP_RECVTTL = 12
Undocumented ?
IP_RETOPTS = 7
Set/get IP per-packet options.
IP_ROUTER_ALERT = 5
Undocumented ?
IP_TOS = 1
IP type of service and precedence.
IP_TTL = 2
IP time to live.
IP_UNBLOCK_SOURCE = 37
unblock data from source
MCAST_BLOCK_SOURCE = 43
block from given group
MCAST_EXCLUDE = 0
Undocumented ?
MCAST_INCLUDE = 1
Undocumented ?
MCAST_JOIN_GROUP = 42
join any-source group
MCAST_JOIN_SOURCE_GROUP = 46
join source-spec gruoup
MCAST_LEAVE_GROUP = 45
leave any-source group
MCAST_LEAVE_SOURCE_GROUP = 47
leave source-spec group
1149
MCAST_MSFILTER = 48
Undocumented ?
MCAST_UNBLOCK_SOURCE = 44
unblock from given group
MSG_CONFIRM = $0800
Send flags: Conform connection
MSG_CTRUNC = $0008
Receive flags: Control Data was discarded (buffer too small)
MSG_DONTROUTE = $0004
Send flags: don’t use gateway
MSG_DONTWAIT = $0040
Receive flags: Non-blocking operation request.
MSG_EOF = MSG_FIN
Alias for MSG_FIN
MSG_EOR = $0080
Receive flags: End of record
MSG_ERRQUERE = $2000
Receive flags: ?
MSG_FIN = $0200
Receive flags: ?
MSG_MORE = $8000
Receive flags: ?
MSG_NOSIGNAL = $4000
Receive flags: Suppress SIG_PIPE signal.
MSG_OOB = $0001
Receive flags: receive out-of-band data.
1150
MSG_PEEK = $0002
Receive flags: peek at data, don’t remove from buffer.
MSG_PROXY = $0010
Receive flags: ?
MSG_RST = $1000
Receive flags: ?
MSG_SYN = $0400
Receive flags: ?
MSG_TRUNC = $0020
Receive flags: packet Data was discarded (buffer too small)
MSG_TRYHARD = MSG_DONTROUTE
Receive flags: ?
MSG_WAITALL = $0100
Receive flags: Wait till operation completed.
NoAddress : in_addr = (s_addr: 0)
Constant indicating invalid (no) network address.
NoAddress6 : in6_addr = (u6_addr16: (0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0))
Constant indicating invalid (no) IPV6 network address.
NoNet : in_addr = (s_addr: 0)
Constant indicating invalid (no) network address.
NoNet6 : in6_addr = (u6_addr16: (0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0))
Constant indicating invalid (no) IPV6 network address.
PF_APPLETALK = AF_APPLETALK
Protocol family: Appletalk DDP
PF_ASH = AF_ASH
Protocol family: Ash
1151
PF_ATMPVC = AF_ATMPVC
Protocol family: ATM PVCs
PF_ATMSVC = AF_ATMSVC
Protocol family: ATM SVCs
PF_AX25 = AF_AX25
Protocol family: Amateur Radio AX.25
PF_BLUETOOTH = AF_BLUETOOTH
Protocol family: Bluetooth sockets
PF_BRIDGE = AF_BRIDGE
Protocol family: Multiprotocol bridge
PF_DECnet = AF_DECnet
Protocol Family: DECNET project
PF_ECONET = AF_ECONET
Protocol family: Acorn Econet
PF_INET = AF_INET
Protocol family: Internet IP Protocol
PF_INET6 = AF_INET6
Protocol family: IP version 6
PF_IPX = AF_IPX
Protocol family: Novell IPX
PF_IRDA = AF_IRDA
Protocol family: IRDA sockets
PF_KEY = AF_KEY
Protocol family: Key management API
PF_LLC = AF_LLC
Protocol family: Linux LLC
1152
PF_LOCAL = AF_LOCAL
Protocol family: Unix socket
PF_MAX = AF_MAX
Protocol family: Maximum value
PF_NETBEUI = AF_NETBEUI
Protocol family: Reserved for 802.2LLC project
PF_NETLINK = AF_NETLINK
Protocol family: ?
PF_NETROM = AF_NETROM
Protocol family:Amateur radio NetROM
PF_PACKET = AF_PACKET
Protocol family: Packet family
PF_PPPOX = AF_PPPOX
Protocol family: PPPoX sockets
PF_ROSE = AF_ROSE
Protocol family: Amateur Radio X.25 PLP
PF_ROUTE = AF_ROUTE
Protocol Family: ?
PF_SECURITY = AF_SECURITY
Protocol family: Security callback pseudo PF
PF_SNA = AF_SNA
Protocol Family: Linux SNA project
PF_TIPC = AF_TIPC
Protocol family: TIPC sockets
PF_UNIX = AF_UNIX
Protocol family: Unix domain sockets
1153
PF_UNSPEC = AF_UNSPEC
Protocol family: Unspecified
PF_WANPIPE = AF_WANPIPE
Protocol family: Wanpipe API Sockets
PF_X25 = AF_X25
Protocol family: Reserved for X.25 project
SCM_SRCRT = IPV6_RXSRCRT
SCM_TIMESTAMP = SO_TIMESTAMP
Socket option: ?
SHUT_RD = 0
Shutdown read part of full duplex socket
SHUT_RDWR = 2
Shutdown read and write part of full duplex socket
SHUT_WR = 1
Shutdown write part of full duplex socket
SOCK_DGRAM = 2
Type of socket: datagram (conn.less) socket (UDP)
SOCK_MAXADDRLEN = 255
Maximum socket address length for Bind (1164) call.
SOCK_RAW = 3
Type of socket: raw socket
SOCK_RDM = 4
Type of socket: reliably-delivered message
SOCK_SEQPACKET = 5
Type of socket: sequential packet socket
1154
SOCK_STREAM = 1
Type of socket: stream (connection) type socket (TCP)
SOL_ICMPV6 = 58
Socket level values for IPv6: ICMPV6
SOL_IP = 0
Undocumented ?
SOL_IPV6 = 41
Socket level values for IPv6: IPV6
SOL_SOCKET = 1
Socket option level: Socket level
SOMAXCONN = 128
Maximum queue length specifiable by listen.
SO_ACCEPTCONN = 30
Socket option: ?
SO_ATTACH_FILTER = 26
Socket option: ?
SO_BINDTODEVICE = 25
Socket option: ?
SO_BROADCAST = 6
Socket option: Broadcast
SO_BSDCOMPAT = 14
Socket option: ?
SO_DEBUG = 1
Socket option level: debug
SO_DETACH_FILTER = 27
Socket option: ?
1155
SO_DONTROUTE = 5
Socket option: Don’t route
SO_ERROR = 4
Socket option: Error
SO_KEEPALIVE = 9
Socket option: keep alive
SO_LINGER = 13
Socket option: ?
SO_NO_CHECK = 11
Socket option: ?
SO_OOBINLINE = 10
Socket option: ?
SO_PASSCRED = 16
Socket option: ?
SO_PEERCRED = 17
Socket option: ?
SO_PEERNAME = 28
Socket option: ?
SO_PRIORITY = 12
Socket option: ?
SO_RCVBUF = 8
Socket option: receive buffer
SO_RCVLOWAT = 18
Socket option: ?
SO_RCVTIMEO = 20
Socket option: ?
1156
SO_REUSEADDR = 2
Socket option: Reuse address
SO_SECURITY_AUTHENTICATION = 22
Socket option: ?
SO_SECURITY_ENCRYPTION_NETWORK = 24
Socket option: ?
SO_SECURITY_ENCRYPTION_TRANSPORT = 23
Socket option: ?
SO_SNDBUF = 7
Socket option: Send buffer
SO_SNDLOWAT = 19
Socket option: ?
SO_SNDTIMEO = 21
Socket option: ?
SO_TIMESTAMP = 29
Socket option: ?
SO_TYPE = 3
Socket option: Type
S_IN = 0
Input socket in socket pair.
S_OUT = 1
Output socket in socket pair
TCP_CONGESTION = 13
Get/set the congestion-control algorithm for this socket
TCP_CORK = 3
Get/Set CORK algorithm: Send only complete packets
1157
TCP_DEFER_ACCEPT = 9
Get/Set deferred accept on server socket
TCP_INFO = 11
Get TCP connection information (linux only)
TCP_KEEPCNT = 6
Get/Set retry count for unacknowledged KEEPALIVE transmissions.
TCP_KEEPIDLE = 4
Get/Set inactivity interval between KEEPALIVE transmissions.
TCP_KEEPINTVL = 5
Get/Set retry interval for unacknowledged KEEPALIVE transmissions.
TCP_LINGER2 = 8
Get/Set Linger2 flag
TCP_MAXSEG = 2
Get/Set Maximum segment size
TCP_MD5SIG = 14
Get/Set TCP MD5 signature option
TCP_NODELAY = 1
Get/Set No delay flag: disable Nagle algorithm
TCP_QUICKACK = 12
Get/Set quik ACK packet option.
TCP_SYNCNT = 7
Get/Set number of SYN packets to send before givin up on connection establishment
TCP_WINDOW_CLAMP = 10
Get/Set maximum packet size
UDP_CORK = 1
Get/Set UDP CORK algorithm on datagram sockets
1158
UDP_ENCAP = 100
Get/Set UDP encapsulation flag for IPSec datagram sockets
UDP_ENCAP_ESPINUDP = 2
? Undocumented datagram option, IPSec related
UDP_ENCAP_ESPINUDP_NON_IKE = 1
UDP_ENCAP_L2TPINUDP = 3
72.3.2 Types
in6_addr = packed record
case Byte of
0: (
u6_addr8 : Array[0..15] of Byte;
);
1: (
u6_addr16 : Array[0..7] of Word;
);
2: (
u6_addr32 : Array[0..3] of Cardinal;
);
3: (
s6_addr8 : Array[0..15] of ShortInt;
);
4: (
s6_addr : Array[0..15] of ShortInt;
);
5: (
s6_addr16 : Array[0..7] of SmallInt;
);
6: (
s6_addr32 : Array[0..3] of LongInt;
);
end
Record used to describe a general IPV6 address.
in_addr = packed record

case Boolean of
True: (
s_addr : cuint32;
);
False: (
1159
s_bytes : packed Array[1..4] of Byte;

);
end
General inet socket address.
linger = packed record

l_onoff : cint;
l_linger : cint;
end
This record is used in the fpsetsockopt (1174) call to specify linger options.
PIn6Addr = pin6_addr
Pointer to in6_addr (1159) type.
pin6_addr = în6_addr
Pointer to Tin6_addr (1162)
PInAddr = pin_addr
Alias for pin_addr (1160)
PInetSockAddr = psockaddr_in
Pointer to sockaddr_in (1161)
PInetSockAddr6 = psockaddr_in6
Pointer to sockaddr_in6 (1161) type
pin_addr = în_addr
Pointer to in_addr (1160) record.
plinger = ^linger
Pointer to linger (1160) type.
psockaddr = ^sockaddr
Pointer to TSockAddr (1162)
psockaddr_in = ^sockaddr_in
Pointer to sockaddr_in (1161)
1160
psockaddr_in6 = ^sockaddr_in6
Pointer to sockaddr_in6 (1161)
psockaddr_un = ^sockaddr_un
Pointer to sockaddr_un (1162) type.
sa_family_t = cushort
Address family type
sockaddr = packed record

case Integer of
0: (
sa_family : sa_family_t;
sa_data : packed Array[0..13] of cuint8;
);
1: (
sin_family : sa_family_t;
sin_port : cushort;
sin_addr : in_addr;
sin_zero : packed Array[0..7] of cuint8;
);
end
sockaddr is used to store a general socket addres for the FPBind (1168), FPRecv (1172) and
FPSend (1173) calls.
sockaddr_in = packed record

sin_family : sa_family_t;
sin_port : cushort;
sin_addr : in_addr;
xpad : Array[0..7] of Char;
end
sockaddr_in is used to store a INET socket addres for the FPBind (1168), FPRecv (1172) and
sockaddr_in6 = packed record

sin6_family : sa_family_t;
sin6_port : cuint16;
sin6_flowinfo : cuint32;
sin6_addr : in6_addr;
sin6_scope_id : cuint32;
end
Alias for sockaddr_in6 (1161)
1161
sockaddr_un = packed record

sun_family : sa_family_t;
sun_path : Array[0..107] of Char;
end
sockaddr_un is used to store a UNIX socket addres for the FPBind (1168), FPRecv (1172) and
TIn6Addr = in6_addr
Alias for in6_addr (1159) type.
Tin6_addr = in6_addr
TInAddr = in_addr
Alias for in_addr (1160) record type.
TInetSockAddr = sockaddr_in
Alias for sockaddr_in (1161)
TInetSockAddr6 = sockaddr_in6
TIn_addr = in_addr
Alias for in_addr (1160) record type.
TLinger = linger
Alias for linger (1160)
TSockAddr = sockaddr
TSockArray = Array[1..2] of LongInt
Type returned by the FPSocketPair (1175) call.
Tsocket = LongInt
Alias for easy kylix porting
TSockLen = BaseUnix.TSocklen
The actual type of TSockLen depends on the platform.
1162
TSockPairArray = Array[0..1] of LongInt
Array of sockets, used in FPSocketPair (1175) call.
TUnixSockAddr = packed record

family : sa_family_t;
path : Array[0..107] of Char;
end
Alias for sockaddr_un (1162)

72.4.1 Accept
Synopsis: Accept a connection from a socket (deprecated).
Declaration: function Accept(Sock: LongInt;var addr: TInetSockAddr;var SockIn: File;

var SockOut: File) : Boolean
function Accept(Sock: LongInt;var addr: TInetSockAddr;var SockIn: text;
var SockOut: text) : Boolean
function Accept(Sock: LongInt;var addr: string;var SockIn: text;
function Accept(Sock: LongInt;var addr: string;var SockIn: File;
Visibility: default
Description: Accept accepts a connection from a socket Sock, which was listening for a connection. If a
connection is accepted, a file descriptor is returned. On error -1 is returned. The returned socket
may NOT be used to accept more connections. The original socket remains open.
The Accept call fills the address of the connecting entity in Addr, and sets its length in Addrlen.
Addr should be pointing to enough space, and Addrlen should be set to the amount of space
available, prior to the call.
The alternate forms of the Accept (1163) command, with the Text or File parameters are equiva-
lent to subsequently calling the regular Accept (1163) function and the Sock2Text (1179) or Sock2File
(1179) functions. These functions return True if successful, False otherwise.
Errors: On error, -1 is returned, and errors are reported in SocketError, and include the following:
ESockEBADF (1141)The socket descriptor is invalid.

ESockENOTSOCK (1141)The descriptor is not a socket.
SYS_EOPNOTSUPPThe socket type doesn’t support the Listen operation.
ESockEFAULT (1141)Addr points outside your address space.
ESockEWOULDBLOCK (1141)The requested operation would block the process.
See also: FPListen (1172), Connect (1165), FPConnect (1169), FPBind (1168)
Listing: ./sockex/socksvr.pp
1163
Program s e r v e r ;
{
Program t o t e s t Sockets u n i t by Michael van Canneyt and P e t e r Vreman
Server Version , F i r s t Run sock_svr t o l e t i t c r e a t e a s o c k e t and then
s o c k _ c l i t o connect t o t h a t s o c k e t
}
{ $mode f p c }
uses Sockets ;
Var
FromName : string ;
Buffer : string [ 2 5 5 ] ;
S : Longint ;
Sin , Sout : Text ;
SAddr : TInetSockAddr ;
procedure p e r r o r ( const S : s t r i n g ) ;
begin
writeln ( S, SocketError ) ;
halt (100);
end ;
begin
S: = f p S o c k e t ( AF_INET ,SOCK_STREAM, 0 ) ;
i f S o c k e t E r r o r < >0 then
P e r r o r ( ’ Server : Socket : ’ ) ;
SAddr . s i n _ f a m i l y : = AF_INET ;
{ p o r t 5 0 0 0 0 i n network o r d e r }
SAddr . s i n _ p o r t : = htons ( 5 0 0 0 ) ;
SAddr . s i n _ a d d r . s_addr : = 0 ;
i f f p B i n d ( S , @SAddr , s i z e o f ( saddr ))= −1 then
P E r r o r ( ’ Server : Bind : ’ ) ;
i f f p L i s t e n ( S,1)= −1 then
P E r r o r ( ’ Server : L i s t e n : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ W a i t i n g f o r Connect from C l i e n t , run now s o c k _ c l i i n an o t h e r t t y ’ ) ;
i f Accept ( S , FromName , Sin , Sout ) then
P E r r o r ( ’ Server : Accept : ’ +fromname ) ;
Reset ( Sin ) ;
ReWrite ( Sout ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Sout , ’ Message From Server ’ ) ;
Flush ( SOut ) ;
while not eof ( sin ) do
begin
Readln ( Sin , B u f f e r ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Server : read : ’ , b u f f e r ) ;
end ;
end .
72.4.2 Bind
Synopsis: Alias for fpBind.
Declaration: function Bind(Sock: LongInt;const addr: string) : Boolean
Visibility: default
1164
Description: Bind is an alias for fpBind (1168) which binds to either a socket struct (Addr) or a string indicating
a unix socket file (unix socket).
This function is deprecated, use fpBind instead.
See also: FPBind (1168)
72.4.3 CloseSocket
Synopsis: Closes a socket handle.
Declaration: function CloseSocket(Sock: LongInt) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: CloseSocket closes a socket handle. It returns 0 if the socket was closed succesfully, -1 if it
failed.
See also: FPSocket (1175)
72.4.4 Connect
Synopsis: Open a connection to a server socket (deprecated).
Declaration: function Connect(Sock: LongInt;const addr: TInetSockAddr;
var SockIn: text;var SockOut: text) : Boolean
function Connect(Sock: LongInt;const addr: TInetSockAddr;
var SockIn: File;var SockOut: File) : Boolean
function Connect(Sock: LongInt;const addr: string;var SockIn: text;
function Connect(Sock: LongInt;const addr: string;var SockIn: File;
Visibility: default
Description: Connect opens a connection to a peer, whose address is described by Addr. AddrLen contains
the length of the address. The type of Addr depends on the kind of connection you’re trying to make,
but is generally one of TSockAddr or TUnixSockAddr.
The forms of the Connect (1165) command with the Text or File arguments are equivalent to
subsequently calling the regular Connect function and the Sock2Text (1179) or Sock2File (1179)
functions. These functions return True if successfull, False otherwise.
The Connect function returns a file descriptor if the call was successfull, -1 in case of error.
Errors: On error, -1 is returned and errors are reported in SocketError.
See also: FPListen (1172), FPBind (1168), Accept (1163), FPAccept (1167)
Listing: ./sockex/sockcli.pp
Program C l i e n t ;
{
C l i e n t Version , F i r s t Run sock_svr t o l e t i t c r e a t e a s o c k e t and then
1165
uses Sockets ;
procedure P E r r o r ( const S : s t r i n g ) ;
begin
writeln (S, SocketError ) ;
halt (100);
end ;
Var
S : Longint ;
Sin , Sout : Text ;
i : integer ;
begin
i f s=−1 then
P e r r o r ( ’ C l i e n t : Socket : ’ ) ;
{ l o c a l h o s t : 1 2 7 . 0 . 0 . 1 i n network o r d e r }
SAddr . s i n _ a d d r . s_addr : = HostToNet ( ( 1 2 7 shl 2 4 ) or 1 ) ;
i f not Connect ( S , SAddr , Sin , Sout ) then
P E r r o r ( ’ C l i e n t : Connect : ’ ) ;
Reset ( Sin ) ;
ReWrite ( Sout ) ;
B u f f e r : = ’ T h i s i s a t e x t s t r i n g s e n t by t h e C l i e n t . ’ ;
f o r i : = 1 to 1 0 do
W r i t e l n ( Sout , B u f f e r ) ;
Flush ( Sout ) ;
Readln ( SIn , B u f f e r ) ;
WriteLn ( B u f f e r ) ;
Close ( s o u t ) ;
end .
Listing: ./sockex/pfinger.pp
program p f i n g e r ;
uses sockets , e r r o r s ;
Var
Addr : TInetSockAddr ;
S : Longint ;
Sin , Sout : Text ;
Line : string ;
begin
Addr . s i n _ f a m i l y : = AF_INET ;
{ p o r t 7 9 i n network o r d e r }
Addr . s i n _ p o r t : = 7 9 shl 8 ;
Addr . s i n _ a d d r . s_addr : = ( ( 1 shl 2 4 ) or 1 2 7 ) ;
1166
I f Not Connect ( S ,ADDR, SIN ,SOUT ) Then

begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Couldn ’ ’ t connect t o l o c a l h o s t ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Socket e r r o r : ’ , s t r e r r o r ( S o c k e t E r r o r ) ) ;
halt ( 1 ) ;
end ;
rewrite ( sout ) ;
r e s e t ( sin ) ;
w r i t e l n ( sout , paramstr ( 1 ) ) ;
flush ( sout ) ;
begin
readln ( Sin , l i n e ) ;
writeln ( l i n e ) ;
end ;
fpShutdown ( s , 2 ) ;
c l o s e ( sin ) ;
close ( sout ) ;
end .
72.4.5 fpaccept
Synopsis: Accept a connection from a socket.
Declaration: function fpaccept(s: cint;addrx: psockaddr;addrlen: pSockLen) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: Accept accepts a connection from a socket S, which was listening for a connection. If a connection
is accepted, a file descriptor is returned (positive number). On error -1 is returned. The returned
socket may NOT be used to accept more connections. The original socket remains open.
The Accept call fills the address of the connecting entity in Addrx, and sets its length in Addrlen.
Addrx should be pointing to enough space, and Addrlen should be set to the amount of space
available, prior to the call.
Errors: On error, -1 is returned, and errors are reported in SocketError, and include the following:

See also: fpListen (1172), fpConnect (1169), fpBind (1168)
Listing: ./sockex/socksvr.pp
Program s e r v e r ;
{
Server Version , F i r s t Run sock_svr t o l e t i t c r e a t e a s o c k e t and then
}
{ $mode f p c }
1167
uses Sockets ;
Var
FromName : string ;
S : Longint ;
Sin , Sout : Text ;
procedure p e r r o r ( const S : s t r i n g ) ;
begin
writeln ( S, SocketError ) ;
halt (100);
end ;
begin
i f S o c k e t E r r o r < >0 then
P e r r o r ( ’ Server : Socket : ’ ) ;
SAddr . s i n _ a d d r . s_addr : = 0 ;
i f f p B i n d ( S , @SAddr , s i z e o f ( saddr ))= −1 then
P E r r o r ( ’ Server : Bind : ’ ) ;
i f f p L i s t e n ( S,1)= −1 then
P E r r o r ( ’ Server : L i s t e n : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ W a i t i n g f o r Connect from C l i e n t , run now s o c k _ c l i i n an o t h e r t t y ’ ) ;
i f Accept ( S , FromName , Sin , Sout ) then
P E r r o r ( ’ Server : Accept : ’ +fromname ) ;
Reset ( Sin ) ;
ReWrite ( Sout ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Sout , ’ Message From Server ’ ) ;
Flush ( SOut ) ;
begin
Readln ( Sin , B u f f e r ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Server : read : ’ , b u f f e r ) ;
end ;
end .
72.4.6 fpbind
Synopsis: Bind a socket to an address.
Declaration: function fpbind(s: cint;addrx: psockaddr;addrlen: TSockLen) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: fpBind binds the socket s to address Addrx. Addrx has length Addrlen. The function returns
0 if the call was succesful, -1 if not.
Errors: Errors are returned in SocketError and include the following:

ESockEINVAL (1141)The socket is already bound to an address,
ESockEACCESS (1141)Address is protected and you don’t have permission to open it.
1168
More errors can be found in the Unix man pages.

See also: FPSocket (1175)
72.4.7 fpconnect
Synopsis: Open a connection to a server socket.
Declaration: function fpconnect(s: cint;name: psockaddr;namelen: TSockLen) : cint

Visibility: default
Description: fpConnect uses the socket s to open a connection to a peer, whose address is described by Name.
NameLen contains the length of the address. The type of Name depends on the kind of connection
you are trying to make, but is generally one of TSockAddr or TUnixSockAddr.
The fpConnect function returns zero if the call was successfull, -1 in case of error.
Errors: On error, -1 is returned and errors are reported in SocketError.
See also: fpListen (1172), fpBind (1168), fpAccept (1167)
Listing: ./sockex/sockcli.pp
Program C l i e n t ;
{
C l i e n t Version , F i r s t Run sock_svr t o l e t i t c r e a t e a s o c k e t and then
}
uses Sockets ;
procedure P E r r o r ( const S : s t r i n g ) ;
begin
writeln (S, SocketError ) ;
halt (100);
end ;
Var
S : Longint ;
Sin , Sout : Text ;
i : integer ;
begin
i f s=−1 then
P e r r o r ( ’ C l i e n t : Socket : ’ ) ;
SAddr . s i n _ a d d r . s_addr : = HostToNet ( ( 1 2 7 shl 2 4 ) or 1 ) ;
i f not Connect ( S , SAddr , Sin , Sout ) then
P E r r o r ( ’ C l i e n t : Connect : ’ ) ;
1169
Reset ( Sin ) ;
ReWrite ( Sout ) ;
B u f f e r : = ’ T h i s i s a t e x t s t r i n g s e n t by t h e C l i e n t . ’ ;
f o r i : = 1 to 1 0 do
W r i t e l n ( Sout , B u f f e r ) ;
Flush ( Sout ) ;
Readln ( SIn , B u f f e r ) ;
WriteLn ( B u f f e r ) ;
Close ( s o u t ) ;
end .
Listing: ./sockex/pfinger.pp
program p f i n g e r ;
uses sockets , e r r o r s ;
Var
Addr : TInetSockAddr ;
S : Longint ;
Sin , Sout : Text ;
Line : string ;
begin
Addr . s i n _ f a m i l y : = AF_INET ;
{ p o r t 7 9 i n network o r d e r }
Addr . s i n _ p o r t : = 7 9 shl 8 ;
Addr . s i n _ a d d r . s_addr : = ( ( 1 shl 2 4 ) or 1 2 7 ) ;
I f Not Connect ( S ,ADDR, SIN ,SOUT ) Then
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Couldn ’ ’ t connect t o l o c a l h o s t ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Socket e r r o r : ’ , s t r e r r o r ( S o c k e t E r r o r ) ) ;
halt ( 1 ) ;
end ;
rewrite ( sout ) ;
r e s e t ( sin ) ;
w r i t e l n ( sout , paramstr ( 1 ) ) ;
flush ( sout ) ;
begin
readln ( Sin , l i n e ) ;
writeln ( l i n e ) ;
end ;
fpShutdown ( s , 2 ) ;
c l o s e ( sin ) ;
close ( sout ) ;
end .
72.4.8 fpgetpeername
Synopsis: Return the name (address) of the connected peer.
Declaration: function fpgetpeername(s: cint;name: psockaddr;namelen: pSockLen) : cint

Visibility: default
1170
Description: fpGetPeerName returns the name of the entity connected to the specified socket S. The Socket
must be connected for this call to work.
Name should point to enough space to store the name, the amount of space pointed to should be set
in Namelen. When the function returns succesfully, Name will be filled with the name, and Name
will be set to the length of Name.
Errors: Errors are reported in SocketError, and include the following:

ESockENOBUFS (1141)The system doesn’t have enough buffers to perform the operation.
ESockENOTCONN (1141)The socket isn’t connected.
See also: fpConnect (1169), fpSocket (1175)
72.4.9 fpgetsockname
Synopsis: Return name of socket.
Declaration: function fpgetsockname(s: cint;name: psockaddr;namelen: pSockLen) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: fpGetSockName returns the current name of the specified socket S. Name should point to enough
space to store the name, the amount of space pointed to should be set in Namelen. When the
function returns succesfully, Name will be filled with the name, and Namelen will be set to the
length of Name.

ESockENOBUFS (1141)The system doesn’t have enough buffers to perform the operation.
See also: fpBind (1168)
72.4.10 fpgetsockopt
Synopsis: Get current socket options
Declaration: function fpgetsockopt(s: cint;level: cint;optname: cint;optval: pointer;
optlen: pSockLen) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: fpGetSockOpt gets the connection option optname, for socket S. The socket may be obtained
from different levels, indicated by Level, which can be one of the following:
SOL_SOCKETFrom the socket itself.

XXXset Level to XXX, the protocol number of the protocol which should interpret the option.
1171
The options are stored in the memory location pointed to by optval. optlen should point to the
initial length of optval, and on return will contain the actual length of the stored data.
On success, 0 is returned. On Error, -1 is returned.

ESockEFAULT (1141)OptVal points outside your address space.
See also: fpSetSockOpt (1174)
72.4.11 fplisten
Synopsis: Listen for connections on a socket.
Declaration: function fplisten(s: cint;backlog: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: fpListen listens for up to backlog connections from socket S. The socket S must be of type
SOCK_STREAM or Sock_SEQPACKET.
The function returns 0 if a connection was accepted, -1 if an error occurred.

See also: fpSocket (1175), fpBind (1168), fpConnect (1169)
72.4.12 fprecv
Synopsis: Receive data on socket
Declaration: function fprecv(s: cint;buf: pointer;len: size_t;flags: cint) : ssize_t
Visibility: default
Description: fpRecv reads at most len bytes from socket S into address buf. The socket must be in a connected
state. Flags can be one of the following:
1Process out-of band data.

4Bypass routing, use a direct interface.
??Wait for full request or report an error.
The functions returns the number of bytes actually read from the socket, or -1 if a detectable error
occurred.

1172

ESockEFAULT (1141)The address is outside your address space.
ESockEMSGSIZE (1141)The message cannot be sent atomically.
ESockENOBUFS (1141)The system doesn’t have enough free buffers available.
See also: FPSend (1173)
72.4.13 fprecvfrom
Synopsis: Receive data from an unconnected socket
Declaration: function fprecvfrom(s: cint;buf: pointer;len: size_t;flags: cint;
from: psockaddr;fromlen: pSockLen) : ssize_t
Visibility: default
Description: fpRecvFrom receives data in buffer Buf with maximum length Len from socket S. Receipt is
controlled by options in Flags. The location pointed to by from will be filled with the address
from the sender, and it’s length will be stored in fromlen. The function returns the number of
bytes received, or -1 on error. AddrLen.

See also: fpSocket (1175), fprecv (1172)
72.4.14 fpsend
Synopsis: Send data through socket
Declaration: function fpsend(s: cint;msg: pointer;len: size_t;flags: cint) : ssize_t
Visibility: default
Description: fpSend sends Len bytes starting from address Msg to socket S. S must be in a connected state.
Options can be passed in Flags.
The function returns the number of bytes sent, or -1 if a detectable error occurred.
Flags can be one of the following:
1Process out-of band data.

4Bypass routing, use a direct interface.

ESockEFAULT (1141)The address is outside your address space.
ESockEMSGSIZE (1141)The message cannot be sent atomically.
ESockENOBUFS (1141)The system doesn’t have enough free buffers available.
See also: fpRecv (1172)
1173
72.4.15 fpsendto
Synopsis: Send data through an unconnected socket to an address.
Declaration: function fpsendto(s: cint;msg: pointer;len: size_t;flags: cint;

tox: psockaddr;tolen: TSockLen) : ssize_t
Visibility: default
Description: fpSendTo sends data from buffer Msg with length len through socket S with options Flags.
The data is sent to address tox, which has length toLen
See also: fpSocket (1175), fpSend (1173), fpRecvFrom (1173)
72.4.16 fpsetsockopt
Synopsis: Set socket options.
Declaration: function fpsetsockopt(s: cint;level: cint;optname: cint;optval: pointer;
optlen: TSockLen) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: fpSetSockOpt sets the connection options for socket S. The socket may be manipulated at dif-
ferent levels, indicated by Level, which can be one of the following:
SOL_SOCKETTo manipulate the socket itself.

XXXset Level to XXX, the protocol number of the protocol which should interprete the option.
The actual option is stored in a buffer pointed to by optval, with length optlen.
For more information on this call, refer to the unix manual page setsockopt

ESockEFAULT (1141)OptVal points outside your address space.
See also: fpGetSockOpt (1171)
72.4.17 fpshutdown
Synopsis: Close one end of full duplex connection.
Declaration: function fpshutdown(s: cint;how: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: fpShutDown closes one end of a full duplex socket connection, described by S. The parameter
How determines how the connection will be shut down, and can be one of the following:
0Further receives are disallowed.

1Further sends are disallowed.
2Sending nor receiving are allowed.
1174
On succes, the function returns 0, on error -1 is returned.

Errors: SocketError is used to report errors, and includes the following:

See also: fpSocket (1175), fpConnect (1169)
72.4.18 fpsocket
Synopsis: Create new socket
Declaration: function fpsocket(domain: cint;xtype: cint;protocol: cint) : cint

Visibility: default
Description: fpSocket creates a new socket in domain Domain, from type xType using protocol Protocol.
The Domain, Socket type and Protocol can be specified using predefined constants (see the section
on constants for available constants) If succesfull, the function returns a socket descriptor, which can
be passed to a subsequent fpBind (1168) call. If unsuccesfull, the function returns -1.
for an example, see Accept (1163).
Errors: Errors are returned in SocketError, and include the follwing:
ESockEPROTONOSUPPORT (1141)The protocol type or the specified protocol is not supported

within this domain.
ESockEMFILE (1141)The per-process descriptor table is full.
SYS_ENFILEThe system file table is full.
ESockEACCESS (1141)Permission to create a socket of the specified type and/or protocol is denied.
ESockENOBUFS (1141)Insufficient buffer space is available. The socket cannot be created until
sufficient resources are freed.
See also: FPSocketPair (1175)
72.4.19 fpsocketpair
Synopsis: Create socket pair.
Declaration: function fpsocketpair(d: cint;xtype: cint;protocol: cint;sv: pcint)

: cint
Visibility: default
Description: fpSocketPair creates 2 sockets in domain D, from type xType and using protocol Protocol.
The pair is returned in sv, and they are indistinguishable. The function returns -1 upon error and 0
upon success.
Errors: Errors are reported in SocketError, and are the same as in FPSocket (1175)
See also: Str2UnixSockAddr (1179)
1175
72.4.20 HostAddrToStr
Synopsis: Convert a host address to a string.
Declaration: function HostAddrToStr(Entry: in_addr) : AnsiString

Visibility: default
Description: HostAddrToStr converts the host address in Entry to a string representation in human-readable
form (a dotted quad).
Basically, it is the same as NetAddrToStr (1177), but with the bytes in correct order.
See also: NetAddrToStr (1177), StrToHostAddr (1180), StrToNetAddr (1180)
72.4.21 HostAddrToStr6
Synopsis: Convert a IPV6 host address to a string representation.
Declaration: function HostAddrToStr6(Entry: Tin6_addr) : AnsiString

Visibility: default
Description: HostAddrToStr6 converts the IPV6 host address in Entry to a string representation in human-
readable form.
Basically, it is the same as NetAddrToStr6 (1177), but with the bytes in correct order.
See also: NetAddrToStr (1177), StrToHostAddr (1180), StrToNetAddr (1180), StrToHostAddr6 (1180)
72.4.22 HostToNet
Synopsis: Convert a host address to a network address
Declaration: function HostToNet(Host: in_addr) : in_addr
function HostToNet(Host: LongInt) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: HostToNet converts a host address to a network address. It takes care of endianness of the host
machine. The address can be specified as a dotted quad or as a longint.
Errors: None.
See also: NetToHost (1177), NToHS (1178), HToNS (1177), ShortHostToNet (1178), ShortNetToHost (1178)
72.4.23 htonl
Synopsis: Convert long integer from host ordered to network ordered
Declaration: function htonl(host: Cardinal) : Cardinal; Overload

Visibility: default
Description: htonl makes sure that the bytes in host are ordered in the correct way for sending over the
network and returns the correctly ordered result.
See also: htons (1177), ntohl (1178), ntohs (1178)
1176
72.4.24 htons
Synopsis: Convert short integer from host ordered to network ordered
Declaration: function htons(host: Word) : Word

Visibility: default
Description: htons makes sure that the bytes in host are ordered in the correct way for sending over the
network and returns the correctly ordered result.
See also: htonl (1176), ntohl (1178), ntohs (1178)
72.4.25 NetAddrToStr
Synopsis: Convert a network address to a string.
Declaration: function NetAddrToStr(Entry: in_addr) : AnsiString
Visibility: default
Description: NetAddrToStr converts the network address in Entry to a string representation in human-
readable form (a dotted quad).
See also: HostAddrToStr (1176), StrToNetAddr (1180), StrToHostAddr (1180)
72.4.26 NetAddrToStr6
Synopsis: Convert a IPV6 network address to a string.
Declaration: function NetAddrToStr6(Entry: Tin6_addr) : AnsiString
Visibility: default
Description: NetAddrToStr6 converts the IPV6 network address in Entry to a string representation in human-
readable form.
Basically, it is the same as NetAddrToStr6 (1177), but with the bytes in correct order.
See also: NetAddrToStr (1177), StrToHostAddr (1180), StrToNetAddr (1180), StrToHostAddr6 (1180)
72.4.27 NetToHost
Synopsis: Convert a network address to a host address.
Declaration: function NetToHost(Net: in_addr) : in_addr
function NetToHost(Net: LongInt) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: NetToHost converts a network address to a host address. It takes care of endianness of the host
machine. The address can be specified as a dotted quad or as a longint.
Errors: None.
See also: HostToNet (1176), NToHS (1178), HToNS (1177), ShortHostToNet (1178), ShortNetToHost (1178)
1177
72.4.28 NToHl
Synopsis: Convert long integer from network ordered to host ordered
Declaration: function NToHl(Net: Cardinal) : Cardinal; Overload

Visibility: default
Description: ntohs makes sure that the bytes in Net, received from the network, are ordered in the correct way
for handling by the host machinen, and returns the correctly ordered result.
See also: htonl (1176), htons (1177), ntohs (1178)
72.4.29 NToHs
Synopsis: Convert short integer from network ordered to host ordered
Declaration: function NToHs(Net: Word) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: ntohs makes sure that the bytes in Net, received from the network, are ordered in the correct way
for handling by the host machinen, and returns the correctly ordered result.
See also: htonl (1176), htons (1177), ntohl (1178)
72.4.30 ShortHostToNet
Synopsis: Convert a host port number to a network port number
Declaration: function ShortHostToNet(Host: Word) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: ShortHostToNet converts a host port number to a network port number. It takes care of endian-
ness of the host machine.
Errors: None.
See also: ShortNetToHost (1178), HostToNet (1176), NToHS (1178), HToNS (1177)
72.4.31 ShortNetToHost
Synopsis: Convert a network port number to a host port number
Declaration: function ShortNetToHost(Net: Word) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: ShortNetToHost converts a network port number to a host port number. It takes care of endian-
ness of the host machine.
Errors: None.
See also: ShortNetToHost (1178), HostToNet (1176), NToHS (1178), HToNS (1177)
1178
72.4.32 Sock2File
Synopsis: Convert socket to untyped file descriptors
Declaration: procedure Sock2File(Sock: LongInt;var SockIn: File;var SockOut: File)

Visibility: default
Description: Sock2File transforms a socket Sock into 2 Pascal file descriptors of type File, one for reading
from the socket (SockIn), one for writing to the socket (SockOut).
Errors: None.
See also: FPSocket (1175), Sock2Text (1179)
72.4.33 Sock2Text
Synopsis: Convert socket to text file descriptors
Declaration: procedure Sock2Text(Sock: LongInt;var SockIn: Text;var SockOut: Text)

Visibility: default
Description: Sock2Text transforms a socket Sock into 2 Pascal file descriptors of type Text, one for reading
from the socket (SockIn), one for writing to the socket (SockOut).
Errors: None.
See also: FPSocket (1175), Sock2File (1179)
72.4.34 socketerror
Synopsis: Contains the error code for the last socket operation.
Declaration: function socketerror : cint

Visibility: default
Description: SocketError contains the error code for the last socket operation. It can be examined to return
the last socket error.
72.4.35 Str2UnixSockAddr
Synopsis: Convert path to TUnixSockAddr (1163)
Declaration: procedure Str2UnixSockAddr(const addr: string;var t: TUnixSockAddr;
var len: LongInt)
Visibility: default
Description: Str2UnixSockAddr transforms a Unix socket address in a string to a TUnixSockAddr struc-

ture which can be passed to the Bind (1164) call.
Errors: None.
See also: FPSocket (1175), FPBind (1168)
1179
72.4.36 StrToHostAddr
Synopsis: Convert a string to a host address.
Declaration: function StrToHostAddr(IP: AnsiString) : in_addr
Visibility: default
Description: StrToHostAddr converts the string representation in IP to a host address and returns the host
address.
Errors: On error, the host address is filled with zeroes.
See also: NetAddrToStr (1177), HostAddrToStr (1176), StrToNetAddr (1180)
72.4.37 StrToHostAddr6
Synopsis: Convert a string to a IPV6 host address.
Declaration: function StrToHostAddr6(IP: string) : Tin6_addr
Visibility: default
Description: StrToHostAddr6 converts the string representation in IP to a IPV6 host address and returns the
host address.
Errors: On error, the address is filled with zeroes.
See also: NetAddrToStr6 (1177), HostAddrToStr6 (1176), StrToHostAddr (1180)
72.4.38 StrToNetAddr
Synopsis: Convert a string to a network address.
Declaration: function StrToNetAddr(IP: AnsiString) : in_addr
Visibility: default
Description: StrToNetAddr converts the string representation in IP to a network address and returns the
network address.
Errors: On error, the network address is filled with zeroes.
See also: NetAddrToStr (1177), HostAddrToStr (1176), StrToHostAddr (1180)
72.4.39 StrToNetAddr6
Synopsis: Convert a string to a IPV6 network address
Declaration: function StrToNetAddr6(IP: AnsiString) : Tin6_addr
Visibility: default
Description: StrToNetAddr6 converts the string representation in IP to a IPV6 network address and returns
the network address.
Errors: On error, the address is filled with zeroes.
See also: NetAddrToStr6 (1177), HostAddrToStr6 (1176), StrToHostAddr6 (1180)
1180
Chapter 73
Reference for unit ’strings’
73.1 Overview
This chapter describes the STRINGS unit for Free Pascal. This unit is system independent, and
therefore works on all supported platforms.

73.2.1 stralloc
Synopsis: Allocate memory for a new null-terminated string on the heap
Declaration: function stralloc(L: SizeInt) : pchar
Visibility: default
Description: StrAlloc reserves memory on the heap for a string with length Len, terminating #0 included,
and returns a pointer to it.
Errors: If there is not enough memory, a run-time error occurs.
See also: StrNew (1190), StrPCopy (1191)
73.2.2 strcat
Synopsis: Concatenate 2 null-terminated strings.
Declaration: function strcat(dest: pchar;source: pchar) : pchar
Visibility: default
Description: Attaches Source to Dest and returns Dest.
Errors: No length checking is performed.

See also: StrLCat (1186)
Listing: ./stringex/ex11.pp
1181
CHAPTER 73. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’STRINGS’
Program Example11 ;
Uses s t r i n g s ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e S t r C a t f u n c t i o n . }
Const P1 : PChar = ’ T h i s i s a PChar S t r i n g . ’ ;
Var P2 : PChar ;
begin
P2 : = S t r A l l o c ( StrLen ( P1 ) ∗ 2 + 1 ) ;
StrMove ( P2 , P1 , StrLen ( P1 ) + 1 ) ; { P2=P1 }
StrCat ( P2 , P1 ) ; { Append P2 once more }
W r i t e l n ( ’ P2 : ’ ,P2 ) ;
StrDispose ( P2 ) ;
end .
73.2.3 strcomp
Synopsis: Compare 2 null-terminated strings, case sensitive.
Declaration: function strcomp(str1: pchar;str2: pchar) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: Compares the null-terminated strings S1 and S2. The result is
•A negative SizeInt when S1<S2.

•0 when S1=S2.
•A positive SizeInt when S1>S2.
For an example, see StrLComp (1187).

Errors: None.
See also: StrLComp (1187), StrIComp (1185), StrLIComp (1188)
73.2.4 strcopy
Synopsis: Copy a null-terminated string
Declaration: function strcopy(dest: pchar;source: pchar) : pchar; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: Copy the null terminated string in Source to Dest, and returns a pointer to Dest. Dest needs
enough room to contain Source, i.e. StrLen(Source)+1 bytes.
See also: StrPCopy (1191), StrLCopy (1187), StrECopy (1183)
1182
Program Example4 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrCopy f u n c t i o n . }
Const P : PCHar = ’ T h i s i s a PCHAR s t r i n g . ’ ;
var PP : PChar ;
begin
PP: = S t r A l l o c ( S t r l e n (P ) + 1 ) ;
STrCopy ( PP, P ) ;
I f StrComp ( PP, P) < >0 then
W r i t e l n ( ’Oh−oh problems . . . ’ )
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ A l l i s w e l l : PP= ’ ,PP ) ;
StrDispose (PP ) ;
end .
73.2.5 strdispose
Synopsis: disposes of a null-terminated string on the heap
Declaration: procedure strdispose(p: pchar)
Visibility: default
Description: Removes the string in P from the heap and releases the memory.
Errors: None.
See also: StrNew (1190)
Program Example17 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e S t r D i s po s e f u n c t i o n . }
Const P1 : PChar = ’ T h i s i s a PChar s t r i n g ’ ;
var P2 : PChar ;
begin
P2 : = StrNew ( P1 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ P2 : ’ ,P2 ) ;
StrDispose ( P2 ) ;
end .
73.2.6 strecopy
Synopsis: Copy a null-terminated string, return a pointer to the end.
1183
Declaration: function strecopy(dest: pchar;source: pchar) : pchar

Visibility: default
Description: Copies the Null-terminated string in Source to Dest, and returns a pointer to the end (i.e. the
terminating Null-character) of the copied string.
See also: StrLCopy (1187), StrCopy (1182)
Program Example6 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrECopy f u n c t i o n . }
Const P : PChar = ’ T h i s i s a PCHAR s t r i n g . ’ ;
Var PP : PChar ;
begin
PP: = S t r A l l o c ( StrLen (P ) + 1 ) ;
I f L o n g i n t ( StrECopy (PP, P)) − L o n g i n t (PP)<> StrLen (P ) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Something i s wrong here ! ’ )
else
W r i t e l n ( ’PP= ’ ,PP ) ;
StrDispose (PP ) ;
end .
73.2.7 strend
Synopsis: Return a pointer to the end of a null-terminated string
Declaration: function strend(p: pchar) : pchar
Visibility: default
Description: Returns a pointer to the end of P. (i.e. to the terminating null-character.
Errors: None.
See also: StrLen (1188)
Program Example6 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrEnd f u n c t i o n . }
begin
I f L o n g i n t ( StrEnd (P)) − L o n g i n t (P)<> StrLen (P ) then
1184
else
Writeln ( ’ A l l i s w e l l . . ’ ) ;
end .
73.2.8 stricomp
Synopsis: Compare 2 null-terminated strings, case insensitive.
Declaration: function stricomp(str1: pchar;str2: pchar) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: Compares the null-terminated strings S1 and S2, ignoring case. The result is

•0 when S1=S2.
Errors: None.
See also: StrLComp (1187), StrComp (1182), StrLIComp (1188)
Program Example8 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrLComp f u n c t i o n . }
Const P1 : PChar = ’ T h i s i s t h e f i r s t s t r i n g . ’ ;
P2 : PCHar = ’ T h i s i s t h e second s t r i n g . ’ ;
Var L : L o n g i n t ;
begin
Write ( ’ P1 and P2 are ’ ) ;
I f StrComp ( P1 , P2) < >0 then w r i t e ( ’NOT ’ ) ;
w r i t e ( ’ equal . The f i r s t ’ ) ;
L:=1;
While StrLComp ( P1 , P2 , L ) = 0 do inc ( L ) ;
dec ( l ) ;
W r i t e l n ( l , ’ c h a r a c t e r s are t h e same . ’ ) ;
end .
73.2.9 stripos
Synopsis: Return the position of a substring in a string, case insensitive.
Declaration: function stripos(str1: pchar;str2: pchar) : pchar
Visibility: default
Description: stripos returns the position of str2 in str1. It searches in a case-insensitive manner, and if it
finds a match, it returns a pointer to the location of the match. If no match is found, Nil is returned.
1185
Errors: No checks are done on the validity of the pointers, and the pointers are assumed to point to a properly
null-terminated string. If either of these conditions are not met, a run-time error may follow.
See also: striscan (1186), strpos (1192)
73.2.10 striscan
Synopsis: Scan a string for a character, case-insensitive
Declaration: function striscan(p: pchar;c: Char) : pchar

Visibility: default
Description: striscan does the same as strscan (1193) but compares the characters case-insensitively. It returns
a pointer to the first occurrence of the character c in the null-terminated string p, or Nil if c is not
present in the string.
See also: strscan (1193), strriscan (1192)
73.2.11 strlcat
Synopsis: Concatenate 2 null-terminated strings, with length boundary.
Declaration: function strlcat(dest: pchar;source: pchar;l: SizeInt) : pchar

Visibility: default
Description: Adds L characters from Source to Dest, and adds a terminating null-character. Returns Dest.
Errors: None.
See also: StrCat (1181)
Program Example12 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e S t r L C a t f u n c t i o n . }
Const P1 : PChar = ’ 1234567890 ’ ;
Var P2 : PChar ;
begin
P2 ^ : = # 0 ; { Zero l e n g t h }
StrCat ( P2 , P1 ) ;
StrLCat ( P2 , P1 , 5 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ P2 = ’ ,P2 ) ;
StrDispose ( P2 )
end .
1186
73.2.12 strlcomp
Synopsis: Compare limited number of characters of 2 null-terminated strings
Declaration: function strlcomp(str1: pchar;str2: pchar;l: SizeInt) : SizeInt

Visibility: default
Description: Compares maximum L characters of the null-terminated strings S1 and S2. The result is

•0 when S1=S2.
Errors: None.
See also: StrComp (1182), StrIComp (1185), StrLIComp (1188)
Program Example8 ;
begin
L:=1;
dec ( l ) ;
end .
73.2.13 strlcopy
Synopsis: Copy a null-terminated string, limited in length.
Declaration: function strlcopy(dest: pchar;source: pchar;maxlen: SizeInt) : pchar
; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: Copies MaxLen characters from Source to Dest, and makes Dest a null terminated string.
See also: StrCopy (1182), StrECopy (1183)
1187
Program Example5 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrLCopy f u n c t i o n . }
Const P : PCHar = ’ 123456789ABCDEF ’ ;
var PP : PCHar ;
begin
PP: = S t r A l l o c ( 1 1 ) ;
Writeln ( ’ F i r s t 1 0 characters of P : ’ , StrLCopy ( PP, P , 1 0 ) ) ;
StrDispose (PP ) ;
end .
73.2.14 strlen
Synopsis: Length of a null-terminated string.
Declaration: function strlen(p: pchar) : sizeint
Visibility: default
Description: Returns the length of the null-terminated string P. If P equals Nil, then zero (0) is returned.
Errors: None.
Program Example1 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrLen f u n c t i o n . }
Const P : PChar = ’ T h i s i s a c o n s t a n t pchar s t r i n g ’ ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’P : ’ ,p ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ l e n g t h (P ) : ’ , StrLen (P ) ) ;
end .
73.2.15 strlicomp
Synopsis: Compare limited number of characters in 2 null-terminated strings, ignoring case.
Declaration: function strlicomp(str1: pchar;str2: pchar;l: SizeInt) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: Compares maximum L characters of the null-terminated strings S1 and S2, ignoring case. The
result is
1188

•0 when S1=S2.
For an example, see StrIComp (1185)

Errors: None.
See also: StrLComp (1187), StrComp (1182), StrIComp (1185)
73.2.16 strlower
Synopsis: Convert null-terminated string to all-lowercase.
Declaration: function strlower(p: pchar) : pchar
Visibility: default
Description: Converts P to an all-lowercase string. Returns P.

Errors: None.
See also: StrUpper (1193)
Program Example14 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrLower and StrUpper f u n c t i o n s . }
Const
P1 : PChar = ’ THIS IS AN UPPERCASE PCHAR STRING ’ ;
P2 : PChar = ’ t h i s i s a lowercase s t r i n g ’ ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Uppercase : ’ , StrUpper ( P2 ) ) ;
StrLower ( P1 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Lowercase : ’ ,P1 ) ;
end .
73.2.17 strmove
Synopsis: Move a null-terminated string to new location.
Declaration: function strmove(dest: pchar;source: pchar;l: SizeInt) : pchar
Visibility: default
Description: Copies MaxLen characters from Source to Dest. No terminating null-character is copied. Re-
turns Dest
Errors: None.
1189
Program Example10 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrMove f u n c t i o n . }
Const P1 : PCHAR = ’ T h i s i s a pchar s t r i n g . ’ ;
Var P2 : Pchar ;
begin
P2 : = S t r A l l o c ( StrLen ( P1 ) + 1 ) ;
StrMove ( P2 , P1 , StrLen ( P1 ) + 1 ) ; { P2 : = P1 }
W r i t e l n ( ’ P2 = ’ ,P2 ) ;
StrDispose ( P2 ) ;
end .
73.2.18 strnew
Synopsis: Allocate room for new null-terminated string.
Declaration: function strnew(p: pchar) : pchar
Visibility: default
Description: Copies P to the Heap, and returns a pointer to the copy.
Errors: Returns Nil if no memory was available for the copy.
See also: StrCopy (1182), StrDispose (1183)
Program Example16 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrNew f u n c t i o n . }
var P2 : PChar ;
begin
P2 : = StrNew ( P1 ) ;
I f P1=P2 then
w r i t e l n ( ’ T h i s can ’ ’ t be happening . . . ’ )
else
w r i t e l n ( ’ P2 : ’ ,P2 ) ;
StrDispose ( P2 ) ;
end .
1190
73.2.19 strpas
Synopsis: Convert a null-terminated string to a shortstring.
Declaration: function strpas(p: pchar) : shortstring

Visibility: default
Description: Converts a null terminated string in P to a Pascal string, and returns this string. The string is truncated
at 255 characters.
Errors: None.
See also: StrPCopy (1191)
Program Example3 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrPas f u n c t i o n . }
Const P : PChar = ’ T h i s i s a PCHAR s t r i n g ’ ;
var S : s t r i n g ;
begin
S: = StrPas ( P ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’S : ’ ,S ) ;
end .
73.2.20 strpcopy
Synopsis: Copy a pascal string to a null-terminated string
Declaration: function strpcopy(d: pchar;const s: string) : pchar
Visibility: default
Description: Converts the Pascal string in Se to a Null-terminated string, and copies it to D. D needs enough room
to contain the string Source, i.e. Length(S)+1 bytes.
See also: StrPas (1191)
Program Example2 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrPCopy f u n c t i o n . }
Const S = ’ T h i s i s a normal s t r i n g . ’ ;
Var P : Pchar ;
1191
begin
p : = S t r A l l o c ( length (S ) + 1 ) ;
i f StrPCopy ( P , S)<>P then
Writeln ( ’ This i s impossible ! ! ’ )
else
writeln ( P ) ;
StrDispose (P ) ;
end .
73.2.21 strpos
Synopsis: Search for a null-terminated substring in a null-terminated string
Declaration: function strpos(str1: pchar;str2: pchar) : pchar
Visibility: default
Description: Returns a pointer to the first occurrence of S2 in S1. If S2 does not occur in S1, returns Nil.
Errors: None.
See also: StrScan (1193), StrRScan (1193)
Program Example15 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrPos f u n c t i o n . }
Const P : PChar = ’ T h i s i s a PChar s t r i n g . ’ ;

S : Pchar = ’ i s ’ ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ P o s i t i o n o f ’ ’ i s ’ ’ i n P : ’ , s i z e i n t ( StrPos ( P , S)) − s i z e i n t (P ) ) ;
end .
73.2.22 strriscan
Synopsis: Scan a string reversely for a character, case-insensitive
Declaration: function strriscan(p: pchar;c: Char) : pchar

Visibility: default
Description: strriscan does the same as strrscan (1193) but compares the characters case-insensitively. It
returns a pointer to the last occurrence of the character c in the null-terminated string p, or Nil if c
is not present in the string.
See also: strrscan (1193), striscan (1186)
1192
73.2.23 strrscan
Synopsis: Find last occurrence of a character in a null-terminated string.
Declaration: function strrscan(p: pchar;c: Char) : pchar
Visibility: default
Description: Returns a pointer to the last occurrence of the character C in the null-terminated string P. If C does
not occur, returns Nil.
For an example, see StrScan (1193).
Errors: None.
See also: StrScan (1193), StrPos (1192)
73.2.24 strscan
Synopsis: Find first occurrence of a character in a null-terminated string.
Declaration: function strscan(p: pchar;c: Char) : pchar
Visibility: default
Description: Returns a pointer to the first occurrence of the character C in the null-terminated string P. If C does
Errors: None.
See also: StrRScan (1193), StrPos (1192)
Program Example13 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrScan and StrRScan f u n c t i o n s . }

S : Char = ’ s ’ ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ P , s t a r t i n g from f i r s t ’ ’ s ’ ’ : ’ , StrScan ( P , s ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ P , s t a r t i n g from l a s t ’ ’ s ’ ’ : ’ , StrRScan ( P , s ) ) ;
end .
73.2.25 strupper
Synopsis: Convert null-terminated string to all-uppercase
Declaration: function strupper(p: pchar) : pchar
Visibility: default
Description: Converts P to an all-uppercase string. Returns P.
For an example, see StrLower (1189)
Errors: None.
See also: StrLower (1189)
1193
Chapter 74
Reference for unit ’strutils’
74.1 Used units
Table 74.1: Used units by unit ’strutils’
Name Page
System 1224
sysutils 1476

74.2.1 Resource strings
SErrAmountStrings = ’Amount of search and replace strings don’’t match’
Error message used in stringsreplace function
SInvalidRomanNumeral = ’%s is not a valid Roman numeral’
Error string shown in exception raised when invalid roman numeral is encountered
74.2.2 Constants
AnsiResemblesProc : TCompareTextProc = @SoundexProc
This procedural variable is standard set to SoundexProc (1219) but can be overriden with a user-
defined algorithm. This algorithm should return True if AText resembles AOtherText, or
False otherwise. The standard routine compares the soundexes of the two strings and returns
True if they are equal.
Brackets = [’(’, ’)’, ’[’, ’]’, ’{’, ’}’]
Set of characters that contain all possible bracket characters
DigitChars = [’0’..’9’]
1194
CHAPTER 74. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’STRUTILS’
Set of digit characters
StdSwitchChars = [’-’, ’/’]
Standard characters for the SwitchChars argument of GetCmdLineArg (1207).
StdWordDelims = [#0..’ ’, ’,’, ’.’, ’;’, ’/’, ’\’, ’:’, ’’’’, ’"’, ’‘’] + Brackets
Standard word delimiter values.
WordDelimiters : Set of Char = [#0..#255] - [’a’..’z’, ’A’..’Z’, ’1’..’9’, ’0’]
Standard word delimiters, used in the SearchBuf (1217) call.
74.2.3 Types
TCompareTextProc = function(const AText: string;const AOther: string)
: Boolean
Function prototype for comparing two string in AnsiResemblesText (1200)
TRomanConversionStrictness = (rcsStrict,rcsRelaxed,rcsDontCare)
Table 74.2: Enumeration values for type TRomanConversionStrictness
Value Explanation
rcsDontCare Do not check correctness
rcsRelaxed Like rcsStrict but allow more than 3 consecutive identical letters.
rcsStrict Only accept correct roman numerals.
TRomanConversionStrictness is an enumerated type that can be used to decide how to react

to invalid roman numerals.
rcsStrict Strict adherance to roman numerals. Up to 3 consecutive identical letters. No negative

numbers. Ordering must be correct.
rcsRelaxed Same as rcsStrict but allow more than 3 consecutive identical letters.
rcsDontCare Do not check validity at all
TSoundexIntLength = 1..8
Range of allowed integer soundex lengths.
TSoundexLength = 1..MaxInt
Range of allowed soundex lengths.
TStringSeachOption = TStringSearchOption
1195
There is an typo error in the original Borland StrUtils unit. This type just refers to the correct
TStringSearchOption (1196) and is provided for compatibility only.
TStringSearchOption = (soDown,soMatchCase,soWholeWord)
Table 74.3: Enumeration values for type TStringSearchOption
Value Explanation
soDown Search in down direction.
soMatchCase Match case
soWholeWord Search whole words only.
Possible options for SearchBuf (1217) call.
TStringSearchOptions = Set of TStringSearchOption
Set of options for SearchBuf (1217) call.

74.3.1 AddChar
Synopsis: Add characters to the left of a string till a certain length
Declaration: function AddChar(C: Char;const S: string;N: Integer) : string
Visibility: default
Description: AddChar adds characters (C) to the left of S till the length N is reached, and returns the resulting
string. If the length of S is already equal to or larger than N, then no characters are added. The
resulting string can be thought of as a right-aligned version of S, with length N.
Errors: None
See also: AddCharR (1196), PadLeft (1212), PadRight (1213), PadCenter (1212)
74.3.2 AddCharR
Synopsis: Add chars at the end of a string till it reaches a certain length
Declaration: function AddCharR(C: Char;const S: string;N: Integer) : string
Visibility: default
Description: AddCharR adds characters (C) to the right of S till the length N is reached, and returns the resulting
string. If the length of S is already equal to or larger than N, then no characters are added. The
resulting string can be thought of as a left-aligned version of S, with length N .
Errors: None
See also: AddChar (1196)
1196
74.3.3 AnsiContainsStr
Synopsis: Checks whether a string contains a given substring
Declaration: function AnsiContainsStr(const AText: string;const ASubText: string)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiContainsString checks whether AText contains ASubText, and returns True if this
is the case, or returns False otherwise. The search is performed case-sensitive.
Errors: None
See also: AnsiContainsText (1197), AnsiEndsStr (1197), AnsiIndexStr (1198), AnsiStartsStr (1201)
74.3.4 AnsiContainsText
Synopsis: Check whether a string contains a certain substring, ignoring case.
Declaration: function AnsiContainsText(const AText: string;const ASubText: string)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiContainsString checks whether AText contains ASubText, and returns True if this
is the case, or returns False otherwise. The search is performed case-insensitive.
See also: AnsiContainsStr (1197), AnsiEndsText (1197), AnsiIndexText (1198), AnsiStartsText (1201)
74.3.5 AnsiEndsStr
Synopsis: Check whether a string ends with a certain substring
Declaration: function AnsiEndsStr(const ASubText: string;const AText: string)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiEndsStr checks AText to see whether it ends with ASubText, and returns True if it does,
False if not. The check is performed case-sensitive. Basically, it checks whether the position of
ASubText equals the length of AText minus the length of ASubText plus one.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiEndsText (1197), AnsiStartsStr (1201), AnsiIndexStr (1198), AnsiContainsStr (1197)
74.3.6 AnsiEndsText
Synopsis: Check whether a string ends with a certain substring, ignoring case.
Declaration: function AnsiEndsText(const ASubText: string;const AText: string)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiEndsStr checks AText to see whether it ends with ASubText , and returns True if it does,
False if not. The check is performed case-insensitive. Basically, it checks whether the position of
ASubText equals the length of AText minus the length of ASubText plus one.
1197
Errors: None
See also: AnsiStartsText (1201), AnsiEndsStr (1197), AnsiIndexText (1198), AnsiContainsText (1197)
74.3.7 AnsiIndexStr
Synopsis: Searches, observing case, for a string in an array of strings.
Declaration: function AnsiIndexStr(const AText: string;

const AValues: Array of string) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiIndexStr matches AText against each string in AValues . If a match is found, the corre-
sponding index (zero-based) in the AValues array is returned. If no match is found, -1 is returned.
The strings are matched observing case.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiIndexText (1198), AnsiMatchStr (1199), AnsiMatchText (1199)
74.3.8 AnsiIndexText
Synopsis: Searches, case insensitive, for a string in an array of strings.
Declaration: function AnsiIndexText(const AText: string;
const AValues: Array of string) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiIndexStr matches AText against each string in AValues . If a match is found, the corre-
sponding index (zero-based) in the AValues array is returned. If no match is found, -1 is returned.
The strings are matched ignoring case.
Errors: None
See also: AnsiIndexStr (1198), AnsiMatchStr (1199), AnsiMatchText (1199)
74.3.9 AnsiLeftStr
Synopsis: Copies a number of characters starting at the left of a string
Declaration: function AnsiLeftStr(const AText: AnsiString;const ACount: Integer)
: AnsiString
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiLeftStr returns the ACount leftmost characters from AText. If ACount is larger than
the length of AText, only as much characters as available in AText will be copied. If ACount is
zero or negative, no characters will be copied. The characters are counted as characters, not as Bytes.
This function corresponds to the Visual Basic LeftStr function.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiMidStr (1199), AnsiRightStr (1201), LeftStr (1210), RightStr (1216), MidStr (1211), LeftBStr
(1210), RightBStr (1216), MidBStr (1211)
1198
74.3.10 AnsiMatchStr
Synopsis: Check whether a string occurs in an array of strings, observing case.
Declaration: function AnsiMatchStr(const AText: string;
const AValues: Array of string) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiIndexStr matches AText against each string in AValues. If a match is found, it returns
True, otherwise False is returned. The strings are matched observing case.
This function simply calls AnsiIndexStr (1198) and checks whether it returns -1 or not.
74.3.11 AnsiMatchText
Synopsis: Check whether a string occurs in an array of strings, disregarding case.
Declaration: function AnsiMatchText(const AText: string;
const AValues: Array of string) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiIndexStr matches AText against each string in AValues. If a match is found, it returns
True, otherwise False is returned. The strings are matched ignoring case.
This function simply calls AnsiIndexText (1198) and checks whether it returns -1 or not.
74.3.12 AnsiMidStr
Synopsis: Returns a number of characters copied from a given location in a string
Declaration: function AnsiMidStr(const AText: AnsiString;const AStart: Integer;
const ACount: Integer) : AnsiString
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiMidStr returns ACount characters from AText, starting at position AStart. If AStart+ACount
is larger than the length of AText, only as much characters as available in AText (starting from
AStart) will be copied. If ACount is zero or negative, no characters will be copied. The characters
are counted as characters, not as Bytes.
This function corresponds to the Visual Basic MidStr function.
Errors: None
See also: AnsiLeftStr (1198), AnsiRightStr (1201), LeftStr (1210), RightStr (1216), MidStr (1211), LeftBStr
74.3.13 AnsiProperCase
Synopsis: Pretty-Print a string: make lowercase and capitalize first letters of words
Declaration: function AnsiProperCase(const S: string;const WordDelims: TSysCharSet)
: string
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiProperCase converts S to an all lowercase string, but capitalizes the first letter of every
word in the string, and returns the resulting string. When searching for words, the characters in
WordDelimiters are used to determine the boundaries of words. The constant StdWordDelims
(1195) can be used for this.
1199
74.3.14 AnsiReplaceStr
Synopsis: Search and replace all occurrences of a string, case sensitive.
Declaration: function AnsiReplaceStr(const AText: string;const AFromText: string;
const AToText: string) : string
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiReplaceString searches AText for all occurrences of the string AFromText and re-
places them with AToText, and returns the resulting string. The search is performed observing
case.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiReplaceText (1200), SearchBuf (1217)
74.3.15 AnsiReplaceText
Synopsis: Search and replace all occurrences of a string, case insensitive.
Declaration: function AnsiReplaceText(const AText: string;const AFromText: string;
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiReplaceString searches AText for all occurrences of the string AFromText and re-
places them with AToText , and returns the resulting string. The search is performed ignoring
case.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiReplaceStr (1200), SearchBuf (1217)
74.3.16 AnsiResemblesText
Synopsis: Check whether 2 strings resemble each other.
Declaration: function AnsiResemblesText(const AText: string;const AOther: string)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiResemblesText will check whether AnsiResemblesProc (1194) is set. If it is not set,
False is returned. If it is set, AText and AOtherText are passed to it and it’s result is returned.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiResemblesProc (1194), SoundexProc (1219)
74.3.17 AnsiReverseString
Synopsis: Reverse the letters in a string.
Declaration: function AnsiReverseString(const AText: AnsiString) : AnsiString
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiReverseString returns a string with all characters of AText in reverse order.
if the result of this function equals AText, AText is called an anagram.
Errors: None.
1200
74.3.18 AnsiRightStr
Synopsis: Copies a number of characters starting at the right of a string
Declaration: function AnsiRightStr(const AText: AnsiString;const ACount: Integer)
: AnsiString
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiLeftStr returns the ACount rightmost characters from AText. If ACount is larger than
the length of AText, only as much characters as available in AText will be copied. If ACount is
zero or negative, no characters will be copied. The characters are counted as characters, not as Bytes.
This function corresponds to the Visual Basic RightStr function.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiLeftStr (1198), AnsiMidStr (1199), LeftStr (1210), RightStr (1216), MidStr (1211), LeftBStr
74.3.19 AnsiStartsStr
Synopsis: Check whether a string starts with a given substring, observing case
Declaration: function AnsiStartsStr(const ASubText: string;const AText: string)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiStartsStr checks AText to see whether it starts with ASubText , and returns True if it
does, False if not. The check is performed case-sensitive. Basically, it checks whether the position
of ASubText equals 1.
See also: AnsiEndsStr (1197), AnsiStartsStr (1201), AnsiIndexStr (1198), AnsiContainsStr (1197)
74.3.20 AnsiStartsText
Synopsis: Check whether a string starts with a given substring, ignoring case
Declaration: function AnsiStartsText(const ASubText: string;const AText: string)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiStartsText checks AText to see whether it starts with ASubText , and returns True
if it does, False if not. The check is performed case-insensitive. Basically, it checks whether the
position of ASubText equals 1.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiEndsText (1197), AnsiStartsStr (1201), AnsiIndexText (1198), AnsiContainsText (1197)
74.3.21 BinToHex
Synopsis: Convert a binary buffer to a hexadecimal string
Declaration: procedure BinToHex(BinValue: PChar;HexValue: PChar;BinBufSize: Integer)
Visibility: default
1201
Description: BinToHex converts the byte values in BinValue to a string consisting of 2-charachter hex-
adecimal strings in HexValue. BufSize specifies the length of BinValue, which means that
HexValue must have size 2*BufSize.
For example a buffer containing the byte values 255 and 0 will be converted to FF00.
See also: HexToBin (1208)
74.3.22 Copy2Space
Synopsis: Returns all characters in a string till the first space character (not included).
Declaration: function Copy2Space(const S: string) : string
Visibility: default
Description: Copy2Space determines the position of the first space in the string S and returns all characters up
to this position. The space character itself is not included in the result string. The string S is left
untouched. If there is no space in S, then the whole string S is returned.
This function simply calls Copy2Symb (1202) with the space (ASCII code 32) as the symbol argu-
ment.
Errors: None.
See also: Copy2Symb (1202), Copy2SpaceDel (1202)
74.3.23 Copy2SpaceDel
Synopsis: Deletes and returns all characters in a string till the first space character (not included).
Declaration: function Copy2SpaceDel(var S: string) : string
Visibility: default
Description: Copy2SpaceDel determines the position of the first space in the string S and returns all charac-
ters up to this position. The space character itself is not included in the result string. All returned
characters, including the space, are deleted from the string S, after which it is right-trimmed. If there
is no space in S, then the whole string S is returned, and S itself is emptied.
This function simply calls Copy2SymbDel (1203) with the space (ASCII code 32) as the symbol
argument.
Errors: None.
See also: Copy2SymbDel (1203), Copy2Space (1202)
74.3.24 Copy2Symb
Synopsis: Returns all characters in a string till a given character (not included).
Declaration: function Copy2Symb(const S: string;Symb: Char) : string
Visibility: default
Description: Copy2Symb determines the position of the first occurrence of Symb in the string S and returns all
characters up to this position. The Symb character itself is not included in the result string. The
string S is left untouched. If Symb does not appear in S, then the whole of S is returned.
1202
Errors: None.
See also: Copy2Space (1202), Copy2SymbDel (1203)
74.3.25 Copy2SymbDel
Synopsis: Deletes and returns all characters in a string till a given character (not included).
Declaration: function Copy2SymbDel(var S: string;Symb: Char) : string

Visibility: default
Description: Copy2SymbDel determines the position of the first occurrence of Symb in the string S and returns
all characters up to this position. The Symb character itself is not included in the result string. All
returned characters and the Symb character, are deleted from the string S, after which it is right-
trimmed. If Symb does not appear in S, then the whole of S is returned, and S itself is emptied.
Errors: None.
See also: Copy2SpaceDel (1202), Copy2Symb (1202)
74.3.26 Dec2Numb
Synopsis: Convert a decimal number to a string representation, using given a base.
Declaration: function Dec2Numb(N: LongInt;Len: Byte;Base: Byte) : string
Visibility: default
Description: Dec2Numb converts N to its representation using base Base. N must be a positive integer. The
resulting string is left-padded with zeroes till it has length Len. Base must be in the range 2-36 to
be meaningful, but no checking on this is performed.
Errors: If Base is out of range, the resulting string will contain unreadable (non-alphanumeric) characters.
See also: Hex2Dec (1207), IntToBin (1208), intToRoman (1209), RomanToInt (1216)
74.3.27 DecodeSoundexInt
Synopsis: Decodes the integer representation of a soundex code and returns the original soundex code.
Declaration: function DecodeSoundexInt(AValue: Integer) : string
Visibility: default
Description: DecodeSoundexInt converts the integer value AValue to a soundex string. It performs the
reverse operation of the SoundexInt (1219) function. The result is the soundex string corresponding
to AValue. .
Errors: None.
See also: SoundexInt (1219), DecodeSoundexWord (1204), Soundex (1218)
1203
74.3.28 DecodeSoundexWord
Synopsis: Decodes the word-sized representation of a soundex code and returns the original soundex code.
Declaration: function DecodeSoundexWord(AValue: Word) : string

Visibility: default
Description: DecodeSoundexWord converts the integer value AValue to a soundex string. It performs the re-
verse operation of the SoundexWord (1220) function. The result is the soundex string corresponding
to AValue .
Errors: None.
See also: SoundexInt (1219), DecodeSoundexInt (1203), Soundex (1218)
74.3.29 DelChars
Synopsis: Delete all occurrences of a given character from a string.
Declaration: function DelChars(const S: string;Chr: Char) : string
Visibility: default
Description: DelChars returns a copy of S with all Chr characters removed from it.
Errors: None.
See also: DelSpace (1204), DelSpace1 (1204)
74.3.30 DelSpace
Synopsis: Delete all occurrences of a space from a string.
Declaration: function DelSpace(const S: string) : string

Visibility: default
Description: DelSpace returns a copy of S with all spaces (ASCII code 32) removed from it.
Errors: None.
See also: DelChars (1204), DelSpace1 (1204)
74.3.31 DelSpace1
Synopsis: Reduces sequences of space characters to 1 space character.
Declaration: function DelSpace1(const S: string) : string
Visibility: default
Description: DelSpace1 returns a copy of S with all sequences of spaces reduced to 1 space.
Errors: None.
See also: DelChars (1204), DelSpace (1204)
1204
74.3.32 DupeString
Synopsis: Creates and concatenates N copies of a string
Declaration: function DupeString(const AText: string;ACount: Integer) : string
Visibility: default
Description: DupeString returns a string consisting of ACount concatenations of AText. Thus
DupeString(’1234567890’,3);
will produce a string
’123456789012345678901234567890’
Errors: None.
74.3.33 ExtractDelimited
Synopsis: Extract the N-th delimited part from a string.
Declaration: function ExtractDelimited(N: Integer;const S: string;
const Delims: TSysCharSet) : string
Visibility: default
Description: ExtractDelimited extracts the N-th part from the string S. The set of characters in Delims
are used to mark part boundaries. When a delimiter is encountered, a new part is started and the old
part is ended. Another way of stating this is that any (possibly empty) series of characters not in
Delims, situated between 2 characters in Delims, it is considered as piece of a part. This means
that if 2 delimiter characters appear next to each other, there is an empty part between it. If an N-th
part cannot be found, an empty string is returned. However, unlike ExtractWord (1206), an empty
string is a valid return value, i.e. a part can be empty.
The pre-defined constant StdWordDelims (1195) can be used for the Delims argument. The pre-
defined constant Brackets (1194) would be better suited the Delims argument e.g. in case factors
in a mathematical expression are searched.
Errors: None.
See also: ExtractSubStr (1205), ExtractWord (1206), ExtractWordPos (1206)
74.3.34 ExtractSubstr
Synopsis: Extract a word from a string, starting at a given position in the string.
Declaration: function ExtractSubstr(const S: string;var Pos: Integer;
const Delims: TSysCharSet) : string
Visibility: default
Description: ExtractSubStr returns all characters from S starting at position Pos till the first character in
Delims, or till the end of S is reached. The delimiter character is not included in the result. Pos is
then updated to point to the next first non-delimiter character in S. If Pos is larger than the Length
of S, an empty string is returned.
The pre-defined constant StdWordDelims (1195) can be used for the Delims argument.
Errors: None.
See also: ExtractDelimited (1205), ExtractWord (1206), ExtractWordPos (1206)
1205
74.3.35 ExtractWord
Synopsis: Extract the N-th word out of a string.
Declaration: function ExtractWord(N: Integer;const S: string;

const WordDelims: TSysCharSet) : string
Visibility: default
Description: ExtractWord extracts the N-th word from the string S. The set of characters in WordDelims are
used to mark word boundaries. A word is defined as any non-empty sequence of characters which
are not present in WordDelims: if a character is not in WordDelims, it is considered as part of a
word. If an N-th word cannot be found, an empty string is returned.
Unlike ExtractDelimited (1205), an empty string is not a valid return value, i.e. is not a word. If an
empty string is returned, the index N was out of range.
The pre-defined constant StdWordDelims (1195) can be used for the WordDelims argument.
Errors: None.
See also: ExtractWordPos (1206), ExtractSubStr (1205), ExtractDelimited (1205), IsWordPresent (1210), Word-
Count (1222), WordPosition (1222)
74.3.36 ExtractWordPos
Synopsis: Extract a word from a string, and return the position where it was located in the string.
Declaration: function ExtractWordPos(N: Integer;const S: string;
const WordDelims: TSysCharSet;var Pos: Integer)
: string
Visibility: default
Description: ExtractWordPos extracts the N-th word from the string S and returns the position of this word
in Pos. The set of characters in WordDelims are used to mark word boundaries. A word is defined
as any non-empty sequence of characters which are not present in WordDelims : if a character is
not in WordDelims , it is considered as part of a word. If an N -th word cannot be found, an empty
string is returned and Pos is zero.
Unlike ExtractDelimited (1205), an empty string is not a valid return value, i.e. is not a word. If an
empty string is returned, the index N was out of range.
The pre-defined constant StdWordDelims (1195) can be used for the WordDelims argument.
Errors: None.
See also: ExtractWord (1206), ExtractSubStr (1205), IsWordPresent (1210), WordCount (1222), WordPosi-
tion (1222)
74.3.37 FindPart
Synopsis: Search for a substring in a string, using wildcards.
Declaration: function FindPart(const HelpWilds: string;const InputStr: string)

: Integer
Visibility: default
1206
Description: FindPart searches the string InputStr and returns the first string that matches the wildcards
specification in HelpWilds . If no match is found, and empty string is returned. Currently, the only
valid wildcards is the "?" character.
Errors: None.
See also: SearchBuf (1217)
74.3.38 GetCmdLineArg
Synopsis: Returns the command-line argument following the given switch.
Declaration: function GetCmdLineArg(const Switch: string;SwitchChars: TSysCharSet)
: string
Visibility: default
Description: GetCmdLineArg returns the value for the Switch option on the command-line, if any is given.
Command-line arguments are considered switches if they start with one of the characters in the
SwitchChars set. The value is the command-line argument following the switch command-line
argument.
Gnu-style (long) Options of the form switch=value are not supported.
The StdSwitchChars (1195) constant can be used as value for the SwitchChars parameter.
Errors: The GetCmdLineArg does not check whether the value of the option does not start with a switch
character. i.e.
myprogram -option1 -option2
will result in "-option2" as the result of the GetCmdLineArg call for option1.
See also: StdSwitchChars (1195)
74.3.39 Hex2Dec
Synopsis: Converts a hexadecimal string to a decimal value
Declaration: function Hex2Dec(const S: string) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Hex2Dec converts the hexadecimal value in the string S to its decimal value. Unlike the standard
Valor StrToInt functions, there need not be a $ sign in front of the hexadecimal value to indicate
that it is indeed a hexadecimal value.
Errors: If S does not contain a valid hexadecimal value, an EConvertError exception will be raised.
See also: Dec2Numb (1203), IntToBin (1208), intToRoman (1209), RomanToInt (1216)
1207
74.3.40 HexToBin
Synopsis: Convert a hexadecimal string to a binary buffer
Declaration: function HexToBin(HexValue: PChar;BinValue: PChar;BinBufSize: Integer)

: Integer
Visibility: default
Description: HexToBin scans the hexadecimal string representation in HexValue and transforms every 2 char-
acter hexadecimal number to a byte and stores it in BinValue. The buffer size is the size of the
binary buffer. Scanning will stop if the size of the binary buffer is reached or when an invalid char-
acter is encountered. The return value is the number of stored bytes.
See also: BinToHex (1201)
74.3.41 IfThen
Synopsis: Returns one of two strings, depending on a boolean expression
Declaration: function IfThen(AValue: Boolean;const ATrue: string;
const AFalse: string) : string; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: IfThen returns ATrue if AValue is True, and returns AFalse if AValue is false.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiMatchStr (1199), AnsiMatchText (1199)
74.3.42 IntToBin
Synopsis: Converts an integer to a binary string representation, inserting spaces at fixed locations.
Declaration: function IntToBin(Value: LongInt;Digits: Integer;Spaces: Integer)
: string
function IntToBin(Value: LongInt;Digits: Integer) : string
function intToBin(Value: Int64;Digits: Integer) : string
Visibility: default
Description: IntToBin converts Value to a string with it’s binary (base 2) representation. The resulting string
contains at least Digits digits, with spaces inserted every Spaces digits. Spaces should be a
nonzero value. If Digits is larger than 32, it is truncated to 32.
Errors: If spaces is zero, a division by zero error will occur.
See also: Hex2Dec (1207), IntToRoman (1209)
1208
74.3.43 IntToRoman
Synopsis: Represent an integer with roman numerals
Declaration: function IntToRoman(Value: LongInt) : string

Visibility: default
Description: IntToRoman converts Value to a string with the Roman representation of Value. Number up
to 1 million can be represented this way.
Errors: None.
See also: RomanToInt (1216), Hex2Dec (1207), IntToBin (1208)
74.3.44 IsEmptyStr
Synopsis: Check whether a string is empty, disregaring whitespace characters
Declaration: function IsEmptyStr(const S: string;const EmptyChars: TSysCharSet)

: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IsEmptyStr returns True if the string S only contains characters whitespace characters, all
characters in EmptyChars are considered whitespace characters. If a character not present in
EmptyChars is found in S, False is returned.
Errors: None.
See also: IsWild (1209), FindPart (1206), IsWordPresent (1210)
74.3.45 IsWild
Synopsis: Check whether a string matches a wildcard search expression.
Declaration: function IsWild(InputStr: string;Wilds: string;IgnoreCase: Boolean)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IsWild checks InputStr for the presence of the Wilds string. Wilds may contain "?" and "*"
wildcard characters, which have their usual meaning: "*" matches any series of characters, possibly
empty. "?" matches any single character. The function returns True if a string is found that matches
Wilds, False otherwise.
If IgnoreCase is True, the non-wildcard characters are matched case insensitively. If it is False,
case is observed when searching.
Errors: None.
See also: SearchBuf (1217), FindPart (1206)
1209
74.3.46 IsWordPresent
Synopsis: Check for the presence of a word in a string.
Declaration: function IsWordPresent(const W: string;const S: string;

const WordDelims: TSysCharSet) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IsWordPresent checks for the presence of the word W in the string S. Words are delimited by
the characters found in WordDelims. The function returns True if a match is found, False
otherwise. The search is performed case sensitive.
This function is equivalent to the SearchBuf (1217) function with the soWholeWords option spec-
ified.
Errors: None.
See also: SearchBuf (1217)
74.3.47 LeftBStr
Synopsis: Copies Count characters starting at the left of a string.
Declaration: function LeftBStr(const AText: AnsiString;const AByteCount: Integer)
: AnsiString
Visibility: default
Description: LeftBStr returns a string containing the leftmost AByteCount bytes from the string AText .
If AByteCount is larger than the length (in bytes) of AText , only as many bytes as available are
returned.
Errors: None.
See also: LeftStr (1210), AnsiLeftStr (1198), RightBStr (1216), MidBStr (1211)
74.3.48 LeftStr
Synopsis: Copies Count characters starting at the left of a string.
Declaration: function LeftStr(const AText: AnsiString;const ACount: Integer)

: AnsiString
function LeftStr(const AText: WideString;const ACount: Integer)
: WideString
Visibility: default
Description: LeftStr returns a string containing the leftmost ACount characters from the string AText . If
ACount is larger than the length (in characters) of AText , only as many characters as available are
returned.
Errors: None.
See also: LeftBStr (1210), AnsiLeftStr (1198), RightStr (1216), MidStr (1211)
1210
74.3.49 MidBStr
Synopsis: Copies a number of characters starting at a given position in a string.
Declaration: function MidBStr(const AText: AnsiString;const AByteStart: Integer;

const AByteCount: Integer) : AnsiString
Visibility: default
Description: MidBStr returns a string containing the first AByteCount bytes from the string AText starting
at position AByteStart. If AByteStart+AByteCount is larger than the length (in bytes) of
AText, only as many bytes as available are returned. If AByteStart is less than 1 or larger than
the length of AText, then no characters are returned.
Errors: None.
See also: LeftBStr (1210), AnsiMidStr (1199), RightBStr (1216), MidStr (1211)
74.3.50 MidStr
Synopsis: Copies a number of characters starting at a given position in a string.
Declaration: function MidStr(const AText: AnsiString;const AStart: Integer;
const ACount: Integer) : AnsiString
function MidStr(const AText: WideString;const AStart: Integer;
const ACount: Integer) : WideString
Visibility: default
Description: MidStr returns a string containing the first ACount bytes from the string AText starting at posi-
tion AStart. If AStart+ACount is larger than the length (in characters) of AText, only as many
characters as available are returned. If AStart is less than 1 or larger than the length of AText,
then no characters are returned.
This function is equivalent to the standard Copy function, and is provided for completeness only.
Errors: None.
See also: LeftStr (1210), AnsiMidStr (1199), RightStr (1216), MidBStr (1211)
74.3.51 NPos
Synopsis: Returns the position of the N-th occurrence of a substring in a string.
Declaration: function NPos(const C: string;S: string;N: Integer) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: NPos checks S for the position of the N-th occurrence of C. If C occurs less than N times in S, or
does not occur in S at all, 0 is returned. If N is less than 1, zero is returned.
Errors: None.
See also: WordPosition (1222), FindPart (1206)
1211
74.3.52 Numb2Dec
Synopsis: Converts a string representation of a number to its numerical value, given a certain base.
Declaration: function Numb2Dec(S: string;Base: Byte) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Numb2Dec converts the number in string S to a decimal value. It assumes the number is represented
using Base as the base. No checking is performed to see whether S contains a valid number using
base Base.
Errors: None.
See also: Hex2Dec (1207), Numb2USA (1212)
74.3.53 Numb2USA
Synopsis: Insert thousand separators.
Declaration: function Numb2USA(const S: string) : string
Visibility: default
Description: Numb2USA inserts thousand separators in the string S at the places where they are supposed to be,
i.e. every 3 digits. The string S should contain a valid integer number, i.e. no digital number. No
checking on this is done.
Errors: None.
74.3.54 PadCenter
Synopsis: Pad the string to a certain length, so the string is centered.
Declaration: function PadCenter(const S: string;Len: Integer) : string
Visibility: default
Description: PadCenter add spaces to the left and right of the string S till the result reaches length Len. If
the number of spaces to add is odd, then the extra space will be added at the end. If the string S has
length equal to or largert than Len, no spaces are added, and the string S is returned as-is.
Errors: None.
See also: PadLeft (1212), PadRight (1213), AddChar (1196), AddCharR (1196)
74.3.55 PadLeft
Synopsis: Add spaces to the left of a string till a certain length is reached.
Declaration: function PadLeft(const S: string;N: Integer) : string
Visibility: default
Description: PadLeft add spaces to the left of the string S till the result reaches length Len. If the string S
has length equal to or largert than Len, no spaces are added, and the string S is returned as-is. The
resulting string is S, right-justified on length Len.
Errors: None.
See also: PadLeft (1212), PadCenter (1212), AddChar (1196), AddCharR (1196)
1212
74.3.56 PadRight
Synopsis: Add spaces to the right of a string till a certain length is reached.
Declaration: function PadRight(const S: string;N: Integer) : string
Visibility: default
Description: PadRight add spaces to the left of the string S till the result reaches length Len. If the string S
has length equal to or largert than Len, no spaces are added, and the string S is returned as-is. The
resulting string is S, left-justified on length Len.
Errors: None.
See also: PadLeft (1212), PadCenter (1212), AddChar (1196), AddCharR (1196)
74.3.57 PosEx
Synopsis: Search for the occurrence of a character in a string, starting at a certain position.
Declaration: function PosEx(const SubStr: string;const S: string;Offset: Cardinal)
: Integer
function PosEx(const SubStr: string;const S: string) : Integer
function PosEx(c: Char;const S: string;Offset: Cardinal) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: PosEx returns the position of the first occurrence of the character C or the substring SubStr in
the string S, starting the search at position Offset (default 1). If C or SubStr does not occur in S
after the given Offset, zero is returned. The position Offset is also searched.
Errors: None.
See also: NPos (1211), AnsiContainsText (1197), AnsiContainsStr (1197)
74.3.58 PosSet
Synopsis: Return the position in a string of any character out of a set of characters
Declaration: function PosSet(const c: TSysCharSet;const s: ansistring) : Integer
function PosSet(const c: string;const s: ansistring) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: PosSet returns the position in s of the first found character which is in the set c. If none of the
characters in c is found in s, then 0 is returned.
Errors: None.
See also: PosEx (1213), PosSetEx (1213), #rtl.system.pos (1394), RPosEx (1217)
74.3.59 PosSetEx
Synopsis: Return the position in a string of any character out of a set of characters, starting at a certain position
Declaration: function PosSetEx(const c: TSysCharSet;const s: ansistring;
count: Integer) : Integer
function PosSetEx(const c: string;const s: ansistring;count: Integer)
: Integer
1213
Visibility: default
Description: PosSetEx returns the position in s of the first found character which is in the set c, and starts
searching at character position Count. If none of the characters in c is found in s, then 0 is returned.
Errors: None.
See also: PosEx (1213), PosSet (1213), #rtl.system.pos (1394), RPosEx (1217)
74.3.60 RandomFrom
Synopsis: Choose a random string from an array of strings.
Declaration: function RandomFrom(const AValues: Array of string) : string; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: RandomFrom picks at random a valid index in the array AValues and returns the string at that
position in the array.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiMatchStr (1199), AnsiMatchText (1199)
74.3.61 Removeleadingchars
Synopsis: Remove any leading characters in a set from a string
Declaration: procedure Removeleadingchars(var S: AnsiString;const CSet: TSysCharSet)
Visibility: default
Description: Removeleadingchars removes any starting characters from S that appear in the set CSet. It
stops removing characters as soon as a character not in CSet is encountered. This is similar in
behaviour to TrimLeft (1628) which used whitespace as the set.
Errors: None.
See also: TrimLeft (1628), RemoveTrailingChars (1215), RemovePadChars (1214), TrimLeftSet (1221)
74.3.62 RemovePadChars
Synopsis: Remove any trailing or leading characters in a set from a string
Declaration: procedure RemovePadChars(var S: AnsiString;const CSet: TSysCharSet)
Visibility: default
Description: RemovePadChars removes any leading trailing characters from S that appear in the set CSet,
i.e. it starts with the last character and works its way to the start of the string, and it stops removing
characters as soon as a character not in CSet is encountered. Then the same procedure is repeated
starting from the beginning of the string. This is similar in behaviour to Trim (1627) which used
whitespace as the set.
Errors: None.
See also: Trim (1627), RemoveLeadingChars (1214), RemoveTrailingChars (1215), TrimSet (1221), Trim-
LeftSet (1221), TrimRightSet (1221)
1214
74.3.63 RemoveTrailingChars
Synopsis: Remove any trailing characters in a set from a string
Declaration: procedure RemoveTrailingChars(var S: AnsiString;const CSet: TSysCharSet)

Visibility: default
Description: RemoveTrailingChars removes any trailing characters from S that appear in the set CSet, i.e.
it starts with the last character and works its way to the start of the string. It stops removing characters
as soon as a character not in CSet is encountered. This is similar in behaviour to TrimRight (1628)
which used whitespace as the set.
See also: TrimRight (1628), RemoveLeadingChars (1214), TrimRightSet (1221)
74.3.64 ReplaceStr
Synopsis: Replace strings case-sensitively
Declaration: function ReplaceStr(const AText: string;const AFromText: string;

Visibility: default
Description: ReplaceStr is a utility function that scans AText and replaces all occurrences of AFromText
with AToText and returns the resulting string. It simply calls StringReplace (1605) with the appro-
priate options.
See also: StringReplace (1605), ReplaceText (1215)
74.3.65 ReplaceText
Synopsis: Replace strings case-insensitively
Declaration: function ReplaceText(const AText: string;const AFromText: string;

Visibility: default
Description: ReplaceText is a utility function that scans AText and replaces all occurrences of AFromText
(case insensitive) with AToTextand returns the resulting string. It simply calls StringReplace (1605)
with the appropriate options.
See also: StringReplace (1605), ReplaceText (1215)
74.3.66 ReverseString
Synopsis: Reverse characters in a string
Declaration: function ReverseString(const AText: string) : string

Visibility: default
Description: ReverseString returns a string, made up of the characters in string AText, in reverse order.
Errors: None.
See also: RandomFrom (1214)
1215
74.3.67 RightBStr
Synopsis: Copy a given number of characters (bytes), counting from the right of a string.
Declaration: function RightBStr(const AText: AnsiString;const AByteCount: Integer)

: AnsiString
Visibility: default
Description: RightBStr returns a string containing the rightmost AByteCount bytes from the string AText.
If AByteCount is larger than the length (in bytes) of AText, only as many bytes as available are
returned.
Errors: None.
See also: LeftBStr (1210), AnsiRightStr (1201), RightStr (1216), MidBStr (1211)
74.3.68 RightStr
Synopsis: Copy a given number of characters, counting from the right of a string.
Declaration: function RightStr(const AText: AnsiString;const ACount: Integer)
: AnsiString
function RightStr(const AText: WideString;const ACount: Integer)
: WideString
Visibility: default
Description: RightStr returns a string containing the rightmost ACount characters from the string AText .
If ACount is larger than the length (in characters) of AText , only as many characters as available
are returned.
Errors: None.
See also: LeftStr (1210), AnsiRightStr (1201), RightBStr (1216), MidStr (1211)
74.3.69 RomanToInt
Synopsis: Convert a string with a Roman number to it’s decimal value.
Declaration: function RomanToInt(const S: string;

Strictness: TRomanConversionStrictness) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: RomanToInt returns the decimal equivalent of the Roman numerals in the string S. Invalid char-
acters are dropped from S. A negative numeral is supported as well. The level of error checking is
determined by the strictness parameter, the values are described in the type TRomanConver-
sionStrictness (1195).
Errors: On error, a EConvertError (1194) exception is raised.
See also: TRomanConversionStrictness (1195), IntToRoman (1209), Hex2Dec (1207), Numb2Dec (1212)
1216
74.3.70 RomanToIntDef
Synopsis: Convert a roman numeral to an integer value
Declaration: function RomanToIntDef(const S: string;const ADefault: LongInt;
Strictness: TRomanConversionStrictness) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: RomanToInt converts the roman numeral in S to an integer and returns the integer value. The
strictness of the conversion algorithm is determined by Strictness. If the conversion fails,
ADefault is returned.
See also: TRomanConversionStrictness (1195), TryRomanToInt (1222), RomanToInt (1216), IntToRoman
(1209)
74.3.71 RPos
Synopsis: Find last occurrence of substring or character in a string
Declaration: function RPos(c: Char;const S: AnsiString) : Integer; Overload
function RPos(const Substr: AnsiString;const Source: AnsiString)
: Integer; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: RPos looks in S for the character C or the string SubStr. It starts looking at the end of the string,
and searches towards the beginning of the string. If a match is found, it returns the position of the
match.
See also: RPosEx (1217)
74.3.72 RPosex
Synopsis: Find last occurrence substring or character in a string, starting at a certain position
Declaration: function RPosEX(C: Char;const S: AnsiString;offs: Cardinal) : Integer
; Overload
function RPosex(const Substr: AnsiString;const Source: AnsiString;
offs: Cardinal) : Integer; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: RPos looks in S for the character C or the string SubStr. It starts looking at position Offs
(counted from the start of the string), and searches towards the beginning of the string. If a match is
found, it returns the position of the match.
See also: RPos (1217)
74.3.73 SearchBuf
Synopsis: Search a buffer for a certain string.
Declaration: function SearchBuf(Buf: PChar;BufLen: Integer;SelStart: Integer;
SelLength: Integer;SearchString: string;
Options: TStringSearchOptions) : PChar
function SearchBuf(Buf: PChar;BufLen: Integer;SelStart: Integer;
SelLength: Integer;SearchString: string) : PChar
1217
Visibility: default
Description: SearchBuf searches the buffer Buf for the occurrence of SearchString. At must Buflen
characters are searched, and the search is started at SelStart+SelLength. If a match is found,
a pointer to the position of the match is returned. The parameter Options (1196) specifies how the
search is conducted. It is a set of the following options:
Table 74.4:
Option Effect
soDown Searches forward, starting at the end of the selection. Default is searching up
soMatchCase Observe case when searching. Default is to ignore case.
soWholeWord Match only whole words. Default also returns parts of words
The standard constant WordDelimiters (1195) is used to mark the boundaries of words.
The SelStart parameter is zero based.
Errors: Buflen must be the real length of the string, no checking on this is performed.
See also: FindPart (1206), ExtractWord (1206), ExtractWordPos (1206), ExtractSubStr (1205), IsWordPresent
(1210)
74.3.74 Soundex
Synopsis: Compute the soundex of a string
Declaration: function Soundex(const AText: string;ALength: TSoundexLength) : string
function Soundex(const AText: string) : string
Visibility: default
Description: Soundex computes a soundex code for AText. The resulting code will at most have ALength
characters. The soundex code is computed according to the US system of soundex computing, which
may result in inaccurate results in other languages.
Note that AText may not contain null characters.
Errors: None.
See also: SoundexCompare (1218), SoundexInt (1219), SoundexProc (1219), SoundexWord (1220), SoundexSim-
ilar (1219)
74.3.75 SoundexCompare
Synopsis: Compare soundex values of 2 strings.
Declaration: function SoundexCompare(const AText: string;const AOther: string;
ALength: TSoundexLength) : Integer
function SoundexCompare(const AText: string;const AOther: string)
: Integer
Visibility: default
Description: SoundexCompare computes the soundex codes of AText and AOther and feeds these to CompareText.
It will return -1 if the soundex code of AText is less than the soundex code of AOther, 0 if they
are equal, and 1 if the code of AOther is larger than the code of AText.
1218
Errors: None.
See also: Soundex (1218), SoundexInt (1219), SoundexProc (1219), SoundexWord (1220), SoundexSimilar
(1219)
74.3.76 SoundexInt
Synopsis: Soundex value as an integer.
Declaration: function SoundexInt(const AText: string;ALength: TSoundexIntLength)
: Integer
function SoundexInt(const AText: string) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: SoundexInt computes the Soundex (1218) code (with length ALength, default 4) of AText,
and converts the code to an integer value.
Errors: None.
See also: Soundex (1218), SoundexCompare (1218), SoundexProc (1219), SoundexWord (1220), SoundexSim-
ilar (1219)
74.3.77 SoundexProc
Synopsis: Default AnsiResemblesText implementation.
Declaration: function SoundexProc(const AText: string;const AOther: string) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: SoundexProc is the standard implementation for the AnsiResemblesText (1200) procedure: By
default, AnsiResemblesProc is set to this function. It compares the soundex codes of AOther
and AText and returns True if they are equal, or False if they are not.
Errors: None.
See also: Soundex (1218), SoundexCompare (1218), SoundexInt (1219), SoundexWord (1220), SoundexSim-
ilar (1219)
74.3.78 SoundexSimilar
Synopsis: Check whether 2 strings have equal soundex values
Declaration: function SoundexSimilar(const AText: string;const AOther: string;
ALength: TSoundexLength) : Boolean
function SoundexSimilar(const AText: string;const AOther: string)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: SoundexSimilar returns True if the soundex codes (with length ALength) of AText and
AOther are equal, and False if they are not.
Errors: None.
See also: Soundex (1218), SoundexCompare (1218), SoundexInt (1219), SoundexProc (1219), SoundexWord
(1220), Soundex (1218)
1219
74.3.79 SoundexWord
Synopsis: Calculate a word-sized soundex value
Declaration: function SoundexWord(const AText: string) : Word

Visibility: default
Description: SoundexInt computes the Soundex (1218) code (with length 4) of AText, and converts the code
to a word-sized value.
AText may not contain null characters.
Errors: None.
See also: Soundex (1218), SoundexCompare (1218), SoundexInt (1219), SoundexProc (1219), SoundexSim-
ilar (1219)
74.3.80 StringsReplace
Synopsis: Replace occurrences of a set of strings to another set of strings
Declaration: function StringsReplace(const S: string;OldPattern: Array of string;
NewPattern: Array of string;Flags: TReplaceFlags)
: string
Visibility: default
Description: StringsReplace scans S for the occurrence of one of the strings in OldPattern and replaces
it with the corresponding string in NewPattern. It takes into account Flags, which has the same
meaning as in StringReplace (1605).
Corresponding strings are matched by location: the N-th string in OldPattern is replaced by the
N-th string in NewPattern. Note that this means that the number of strings in both arrays must be
the same.
Errors: If the number of strings in both arrays is different, then an exception is raised.
See also: StringReplace (1605), TReplaceFlags (1497)
74.3.81 StuffString
Synopsis: Replace part of a string with another string.
Declaration: function StuffString(const AText: string;AStart: Cardinal;
ALength: Cardinal;const ASubText: string) : string
Visibility: default
Description: StuffString returns a copy of AText with the segment starting at AStart with length ALength,
replaced with the string ASubText. Basically it deletes the segment of Atext and inserts the new
text in it’s place.
Errors: No checking on the validity of the AStart and ALength parameters is done. Providing invalid values
may result in access violation errors.
See also: FindPart (1206), DelChars (1204), DelSpace (1204), ExtractSubStr (1205), DupeString (1205)
1220
74.3.82 Tab2Space
Synopsis: Convert tab characters to a number of spaces
Declaration: function Tab2Space(const S: string;Numb: Byte) : string
Visibility: default
Description: Tab2Space returns a copy of S with all tab characters (ASCII character 9) converted to Numb
spaces.
Errors: None.
See also: StuffString (1220), FindPart (1206), ExtractWord (1206), DelChars (1204), DelSpace (1204), DelSpace1
(1204), DupeString (1205)
74.3.83 TrimLeftSet
Synopsis: Remove any leading characters in a set from a string and returns the result
Declaration: function TrimLeftSet(const S: string;const CSet: TSysCharSet) : string
Visibility: default
Description: TrimLeftSet performs the same action as RemoveLeadingChars (1214), but returns the resulting
string.
Errors: None.
See also: TrimLeft (1628), RemoveLeadingChars (1214), RemoveTrailingChars (1215), RemovePadChars
(1214), TrimSet (1221), TrimRightSet (1221)
74.3.84 TrimRightSet
Synopsis: Remove any trailing characters in a set from a string and returns the result
Declaration: function TrimRightSet(const S: string;const CSet: TSysCharSet) : string
Visibility: default
Description: TrimLeftSet performs the same action as RemoveTrailingChars (1215), but returns the resulting
string.
Errors: None.
See also: TrimRight (1628), RemoveLeadingChars (1214), RemoveTrailingChars (1215), RemovePadChars
(1214), TrimSet (1221), TrimLeftSet (1221)
74.3.85 TrimSet
Synopsis: Remove any leading or trailing characters in a set from a string and returns the result
Declaration: function TrimSet(const S: string;const CSet: TSysCharSet) : string
Visibility: default
Description: TrimSet performs the same action as RemovePadChars (1214), but returns the resulting string.
Errors: None.
See also: Trim (1627), RemoveLeadingChars (1214), RemoveTrailingChars (1215), RemovePadChars (1214),
TrimRightSet (1221), TrimLeftSet (1221)
1221
74.3.86 TryRomanToInt
Synopsis: Try to convert a roman numeral to an integer value.
Declaration: function TryRomanToInt(S: string;out N: LongInt;

Strictness: TRomanConversionStrictness) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: TryRomanToInt will try to convert the roman numeral in S to an integer and returns the inte-
ger value in N. The strictness of the conversion algorithm is determined by Strictness. If the
conversion succeeds, then True is returned, or else False.
See also: TRomanConversionStrictness (1195), RomanToIntDef (1217), RomanToInt (1216), IntToRoman
(1209)
74.3.87 WordCount
Synopsis: Count the number of words in a string.
Declaration: function WordCount(const S: string;const WordDelims: TSysCharSet)
: Integer
Visibility: default
Description: WordCount returns the number of words in the string S. A word is a non-empty string of characters
bounded by one of the characters in WordDelims.
The pre-defined StdWordDelims (1195) constant can be used for the WordDelims argument.
Errors: None.
See also: WordPosition (1222), StdWordDelims (1195), ExtractWord (1206), ExtractWordPos (1206)
74.3.88 WordPosition
Synopsis: Search position of Nth word in a string.
Declaration: function WordPosition(const N: Integer;const S: string;
const WordDelims: TSysCharSet) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: WordPosition returns the position (in characters) of the N-th word in the string S. A word is a
non-empty string of characters bounded by one of the characters in WordDelims. If N is out of
range, zero is returned.
The pre-defined StdWordDelims (1195) constant can be used for the WordDelims argument.
Errors: None
See also: WordCount (1222), StdWordDelims (1195), ExtractWord (1206), ExtractWordPos (1206)
1222
74.3.89 XorDecode
Synopsis: Decode a string encoded with XorEncode (1223)
Declaration: function XorDecode(const Key: string;const Source: string) : string
Visibility: default
Description: XorDecode decodes Source and returns the original string that was encrypted using XorEncode
(1223) with key Key. If a different key is used than the key used to encode the string, the result will
be unreadable.
Errors: If the string Source is not a valid XorEncode result (e.g. contains non-numerical characters), then
a EConversionError exception will be raised.
See also: XorEncode (1223), XorString (1223)
74.3.90 XorEncode
Synopsis: Encode a string by XOR-ing its characters using characters of a given key, representing the result as
hex values.
Declaration: function XorEncode(const Key: string;const Source: string) : string
Visibility: default
Description: XorEncode encodes the string Source by XOR-ing each character in Source with the cor-
responding character in Key (repeating Key as often as necessary) and representing the resulting
ASCII code as a hexadecimal number (of length 2). The result is therefore twice as long as the
original string, and every 2 bytes represent an ASCII code.
Feeding the resulting string with the same key Key to the XorDecode (1223) function will result in
the original Source string.
This function can be used e.g. to trivially encode a password in a configuration file.
Errors: None.
See also: XorDecode (1223), XorString (1223), Hex2Dec (1207)
74.3.91 XorString
Synopsis: Encode a string by XOR-ing its characters using characters of a given key.
Declaration: function XorString(const Key: ShortString;const Src: ShortString)
: ShortString
Visibility: default
Description: XorString encodes the string Src by XOR-ing each character in Source with the corresponding
character in Key, repeating Key as often as necessary. The resulting string may contain unreadable
characters and may even contain null characters. For this reason it may be a better idea to use
the XorEncode (1223) function instead, which will representing each resulting ASCII code as a
hexadecimal number (of length 2).
Feeding the result again to XorString with the same Key, will result in the original string Src.
Errors: None.
See also: XorEncode (1223), XorDecode (1223)
1223
Chapter 75
Reference for unit ’System’
75.1 Overview
The system unit contains the standard supported functions of Free Pascal. It is the same for all
platforms. Basically it is the same as the system unit provided with Borland or Turbo Pascal.
Functions are listed in alphabetical order. Arguments of functions or procedures that are optional are
put between square brackets.
The pre-defined constants and variables are listed in the first section. The second section contains
an overview of all functions, grouped by functionality, and the last section contains the supported
functions and procedures.
75.2 Unicode and codepage support

The system unit works with Short-, Ansi-, and UnicodeString routines for all string related opera-
tions.
Ansistrings are code-page aware, which means that code page information is associated with them.
For most routines, the support for converting these code pages is natural. For some routines, care
must be taken when converting from codepage-aware strings to widestring.
The codepage conversion support is influenced by the following variables:
Table 75.1:
Name Description
DefaultSystemCodePage (1289) Actual code page to use when CP_ACP (1230) is encountered
DefaultUnicodeCodePage (1289) Code page for new unicode strings
DefaultFileSystemCodePage (1288) Codepage to use when sending strings to single-byte OS filesystem routines.
DefaultRTLFileSystemCodePage (1288) Codepage to use when receiving strings from single-byte OS filesystem routines.
The windows code page identifiers are used. There are 3 special codepage identifiers:
1224
CHAPTER 75. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’SYSTEM’
Table 75.2:
Name Description
CP_ACP (1230) Currently set default syststem cpdepage
CP_OEMCP (1230) OEM (console) code page (only on windows)
CP_NONE (1230) Indicates absence of code page information for a string
DefaultRTLFileSystemCodePage (1288)
The following routines may perform code page conversions:
Table 75.3:
Name Description
LowerCase (1386) Return lowercase version of a string.
UpCase (1442) Convert a string to all uppercase.
GetDir (1357) Return the current directory
MkDir (1387) Create a new directory.
ChDir (1323) Change current working directory.
RmDir (1406) Remove directory when empty.
Assign (1296) Assign a name to a file
Erase (1343) Delete a file from disk
Rename (1403) Rename file on disk
Read (1399) Read from a text file into variable
ReadLn (1400) Read from a text file into variable and goto next line
Write (1448) Write variable to a text file
WriteLn (1449) Write variable to a text file and append newline
ReadStr (1400) Read variables from a string
WriteStr (1450) Write variables to a string
Insert (1374) Insert one string in another.
Copy (1331) Copy part of a string.
Delete (1334) Delete part of a string.
SetString (1419) Set length of a string and copy buffer.
All these routines exist also in Unicode versions.

Note that for conversion of codepages and unicode strings, a unicode manager must be present. On
windows, the system is used for this. On unix, one of the fpwidestring or cwstring units must be
used.
75.3 Miscellaneous functions

Functions that do not belong in one of the other categories.
1225
Table 75.4:
Name Description
Assert (1296) Conditionally abort program with error
Break (1319) Abort current loop
Continue (1330) Next cycle in current loop
Exclude (1344) Exclude an element from a set
Exit (1345) Exit current function or procedure
Include (1367) Include an element into a set
LongJmp (1385) Jump to execution point
Ord (1392) Return ordinal value of enumerated type
Pred (1396) Return previous value of ordinal type
SetJmp (1416) Mark execution point for jump
SizeOf (1423) Return size of variable or type
Succ (1431) Return next value of ordinal type
75.4 Operating System functions

Functions that are connected to the operating system.
Table 75.5:
Name Description
Chdir (1323) Change working directory
Getdir (1357) Return current working directory
Halt (1363) Halt program execution
Paramcount (1393) Number of parameters with which program was called
Paramstr (1393) Retrieve parameters with which program was called
Mkdir (1387) Make a directory
Rmdir (1406) Remove a directory
Runerror (1410) Abort program execution with error condition
75.5 String handling

All things connected to string handling.
1226
Table 75.6:
Name Description
BinStr (1317) Construct binary representation of integer
Chr (1323) Convert ASCII code to character
Concat (1329) Concatenate two strings
Copy (1331) Copy part of a string
Delete (1334) Delete part of a string
HexStr (1364) Construct hexadecimal representation of integer
Insert (1374) Insert one string in another
Length (1380) Return length of string
Lowercase (1386) Convert string to all-lowercase
OctStr (1390) Construct octal representation of integer
Pos (1394) Calculate position of one string in another
SetLength (1417) Set length of a string
SetString (1419) Set contents and length of a string
Str (1427) Convert number to string representation
StringOfChar (1428) Create string consisting of a number of characters
Upcase (1442) Convert string to all-uppercase
Val (1445) Convert string to number
75.6 Mathematical routines

Functions connected to calculating and coverting numbers.
Table 75.7:
Name Description
Abs (1292) Calculate absolute value
Arctan (1295) Calculate inverse tangent
Cos (1332) Calculate cosine of angle
Dec (1333) Decrease value of variable
Exp (1346) Exponentiate
Frac (1355) Return fractional part of floating point value
Hi (1364) Return high byte/word of value
Inc (1366) Increase value of variable
Int (1375) Calculate integer part of floating point value
Ln (1382) Calculate logarithm
Lo (1382) Return low byte/word of value
Odd (1391) Is a value odd or even ?
Pi (1394) Return the value of pi
Random (1398) Generate random number
Randomize (1398) Initialize random number generator
Round (1409) Round floating point value to nearest integer number
Sin (1423) Calculate sine of angle
Sqr (1425) Calculate the square of a value
Sqrt (1426) Calculate the square root of a value
Swap (1431) Swap high and low bytes/words of a variable
Trunc (1437) Truncate a floating point value
1227
75.7 Memory management functions

Functions concerning memory issues.
Table 75.8:
Name Description
Addr (1293) Return address of variable
Assigned (1315) Check if a pointer is valid
CompareByte (1324) Compare 2 memory buffers byte per byte
CompareChar (1325) Compare 2 memory buffers byte per byte
CompareDWord (1327) Compare 2 memory buffers byte per byte
CompareWord (1328) Compare 2 memory buffers byte per byte
CSeg (1332) Return code segment
Dispose (1335) Free dynamically allocated memory
DSeg (1337) Return data segment
FillByte (1349) Fill memory region with 8-bit pattern
FillChar (1350) Fill memory region with certain character
FillDWord (1350) Fill memory region with 32-bit pattern
FillQWord (1351) Fill memory region with 64-bit pattern
FillWord (1351) Fill memory region with 16-bit pattern
Freemem (1356) Release allocated memory
Getmem (1358) Allocate new memory
GetMemoryManager (1359) Return current memory manager
High (1365) Return highest index of open array or enumerated
IndexByte (1367) Find byte-sized value in a memory range
IndexChar (1368) Find char-sized value in a memory range
IndexDWord (1369) Find DWord-sized (32-bit) value in a memory range
IndexQWord (1370) Find QWord-sized value in a memory range
IndexWord (1370) Find word-sized value in a memory range
IsMemoryManagerSet (1379) Is the memory manager set
Low (1385) Return lowest index of open array or enumerated
Move (1387) Move data from one location in memory to another
MoveChar0 (1388) Move data till first zero character
New (1389) Dynamically allocate memory for variable
Ofs (1391) Return offset of variable
Ptr (1397) Combine segment and offset to pointer
ReAllocMem (1402) Resize a memory block on the heap
Seg (1414) Return segment
SetMemoryManager (1417) Set a memory manager
Sptr (1425) Return current stack pointer
SSeg (1426) Return stack segment register value
75.8 File handling functions

Functions concerning input and output from and to file.
1228
Table 75.9:
Name Description
Append (1295) Open a file in append mode
Assign (1296) Assign a name to a file
Blockread (1318) Read data from a file into memory
Blockwrite (1319) Write data from memory to a file
Close (1324) Close a file
Eof (1341) Check for end of file
Eoln (1342) Check for end of line
Erase (1343) Delete file from disk
Filepos (1347) Position in file
Filesize (1348) Size of file
Flush (1353) Write file buffers to disk
IOresult (1377) Return result of last file IO operation
Read (1399) Read from file into variable
Readln (1400) Read from file into variable and goto next line
Rename (1403) Rename file on disk
Reset (1403) Open file for reading
Rewrite (1404) Open file for writing
Seek (1412) Set file position
SeekEof (1413) Set file position to end of file
SeekEoln (1413) Set file position to end of line
SetTextBuf (1419) Set size of file buffer
Truncate (1438) Truncate the file at position
Write (1448) Write variable to file
WriteLn (1449) Write variable to file and append newline
75.9 Run-Time Error behaviour

The sytem unit handles errors by default by generating a run-time error, and halting the program with
an exit code equal to the run-time error number.
This behaviour changes when the SysUtils (1476) unit is used. In that case, all run-time errors are
converted to exceptions: most run-time errors have their own exception class.
If these exceptions are caught, the program code decides what to do with it. If the exception is not
caught, the program will exit through the default exception handler.
When the system unit documentation refers to run-time errors, the above should be kept in mind.

75.10.1 Constants
AbstractErrorProc : TAbstractErrorProc = Nil
If set, the AbstractErrorProc constant is used when an abstract error occurs. If it is not set,
then the standard error handling is done: A stack dump is performed, and the program exits with
error code 211.
The SysUtils unit sets this procedure and raises an exception in its handler.
1229
AllFilesMask = ’*’
AllFilesMask is the wildcard that can be used to return all files in a directory. Do not assume
that this is ’*’ or ’*.*’ based on the platform only. The actual value on DOS/Windows based systems
can be influenced by e.g. LFNSupport (1243).
AllowDirectorySeparators : Set of Char = [’\’, ’/’]
AllowDirectorySeparators is the set of characters which are considered directory separators

by the RTL units. By default, this is set to the most common directory separators: forward slash and
backslash, so routines will work in a cross-platform manner, no matter which character was used:
AllowDirectorySeparators : set of char = [’\’,’/’];
If a more strict behaviour is desired, then AllowDirectorySeparators can be set to the only
character allowed on the current operating system, and all RTL routines that handle filenames (split-
ting filenames, extracting parts of the filename and so on) will use that character only.
AllowDriveSeparators : Set of Char = []
AllowDriveSeparators are the characters which are considered to separate the drive part from
the directory part in a filename. This will be an empty set on systems that do not support drive letters.
Other systems (dos, windows and OS/2) will have the colon (:) character as the only member of this
set.
AssertErrorProc : TAssertErrorProc = @SysAssert
If set, the AbstractErrorProc constant is used when an assert error occurs. If it is not set, then
the standard error handling is done: The assertion error message is printed, together with the location
of the assertion, and A stack dump is performed, and the program exits with error code 227.
BackTraceStrFunc : TBackTraceStrFunc = @SysBackTraceStr
This handler is called to get a standard format for the backtrace routine.
CP_ACP = 0
CP_ACP is the default Windows codepage identifier.
CP_ASCII = 20127
CP_ASCII is the Windows ASCII encoding codepage identifier.
CP_NONE = $FFFF
CP_NONE is used when no code page information is available.
CP_OEMCP = 1
CP_ACP is the default Windows OEM (MS-DOS) codepage identifier.
1230
CP_UTF16 = 1200
CP_UTF16 is the default Windows unicode codepage identifier (little endian).
CP_UTF16BE = 1201
CP_UTF16BE is the Windows unicode codepage identifier (big endian).
CP_UTF7 = 65000
CP_UTF7 is the Windows unicode 7-Bit encoding codepage identifier.
CP_UTF8 = 65001
CP_UTF8 is the Windows unicode 8-Bit encoding codepage identifier.
CtrlZMarksEOF : Boolean = False
CtrlZMarksEOF indicates whether on this system, an CTRL-Z character (ordinal 26) in a file
marks the end of the file. This is False on most systems apart from DOS and Windows.
To get DOS/Windows-compatible behaviour, this constant can be set to True
DefaultStackSize = 4 * 1024 * 1024
Default size for a new thread’s stack (4MiB by default).
DefaultTextLineBreakStyle : TTextLineBreakStyle = tlbsLF
DefaultTextLineBreakStyle contains the default OS setting for the TTextLineBreakStyle

(1278) type. It is initizliaed by the system unit, and is used to determine the default line ending when
writing to text files.
This constant is part of a set of constants that describe the OS characteristics. These constants should
be used instead of hardcoding OS characteristics.
DirectorySeparator = ’/’
DirectorySeparator is the character used by the current operating system to separate directory
parts in a pathname. This constant is system dependent, and should not be set.
DriveSeparator = ’’
On systems that support driveletters, the DriveSeparator constant denotes the character that
separates the drive indicator from the directory part in a filename path.
Erroraddr : CodePointer = Nil
1231
Address where the last error occurred.
Errorcode : Word = 0
Last error code.
ErrorProc : TErrorProc = Nil
If set, the ErrorProc constant is used when a run-time error occurs. If it is not set, then the
standard error handling is done: a stack dump is performed, and the program exits with the indicated
error code.
ExceptClsProc : Pointer = Nil
ExceptClsProc is used in SEH (Structured Exception Support) to convert OS exception informa-

tion to FPC exception classes when filtering exceptions. It is set e.g. by the sysutils unit. If it is not
set, the exception is not handled.
ExceptObjProc : Pointer = Nil
ExceptObjProc is used in SEH (Structured Exception Support) to convert OS exception informa-

tion to FPC exceptions. It is set e.g. by the sysutils unit. If it is not set, a run-time error results when
OS exceptions are intercepted.
ExceptProc : TExceptProc = Nil
This constant points to the current exception handling procedure. This routine is called when an
unhandled exception occurs, i.e. an exception that is not stopped by a except block.
If the handler is not set, the RTL will emit a run-time error 217 when an unhandler exception occurs.
It is set by the sysutils (1476) unit.
ExitProc : CodePointer = Nil
Exit procedure pointer.
ExtensionSeparator = ’.’
ExtensionSeparator is the character which separates the filename from the file extension. On
all current platforms, this is the . (dot) character. All RTL filename handling routines use this
constant.
E_NOINTERFACE = ($80004002)
Interface call result: Error: not an interface
E_NOTIMPL = ($80004001)
Interface call result: Interface not implemented
1232
E_UNEXPECTED = ($8000FFFF)
Interface call result: Unexpected error
Filemode : Byte = 2
Default file mode for untyped files.
FileNameCasePreserving : Boolean = True
FileNameCasePreserving is True if case of letters in file and directory entries is preserved

and may be later retrieved exactly as supplied when creating or renaming these entries. Note that this
may depend on the filesystem: Unix operating systems that access a DOS or Windows partition will
have this constant set to true, but when writing to the DOS partition, all letters may be automatically
converted to uppercase.
FileNameCaseSensitive : Boolean = True
FileNameCaseSensitive is True if case is important when using filenames on the current OS.
In this case, the OS will treat files with different cased names as different files. Note that this may
depend on the filesystem: Unix operating systems that access a DOS or Windows partition will have
this constant set to true, but when writing to the DOS partition, the casing is ignored.
filerecnamelength = 255
filerecnamelength is the maximum filename size for untyped files.
float_flag_denormal = exDenormalized
IEC/IEEE floating-point exception flag: ?
float_flag_divbyzero = exZeroDivide
IEC/IEEE floating-point exception flag: Division by zero error
float_flag_inexact = exPrecision
IEC/IEEE floating-point exception flag: ?
float_flag_invalid = exInvalidOp
IEC/IEEE floating-point exception flag: Invalid operation error
float_flag_overflow = exOverflow
IEC/IEEE floating-point exception flag: Overflow error
1233
float_flag_underflow = exUnderflow
IEC/IEEE floating-point exception flag: Underflow error
float_round_down = rmDown
Round down
float_round_nearest_even = rmNearest
Round to nearest even number
float_round_to_zero = rmTruncate
Round in the direction of zero (down for positive, up for negative)
float_round_up = rmUp
Round up
fmAppend = $D7B4
File mode: File is open for writing, appending to the end.
fmClosed = $D7B0
File mode: File is closed.
fmInOut = $D7B3
File mode: File is open for reading and writing.
fmInput = $D7B1
File mode: File is open for reading.
fmOutput = $D7B2
File mode: File is open for writing.
fpc_in_abs_long = 64
Internal ABS function
fpc_in_abs_real = 127
FPC compiler internal procedure index: abs (real)
fpc_in_addr_x = 42
FPC compiler internal procedure index: addr
1234
fpc_in_aligned_x = 80
FPC compiler internal procedure index: aligned
fpc_in_arctan_real = 130
FPC compiler internal procedure index: arctan (real)
fpc_in_assert_x_y = 41
FPC compiler internal procedure index: assert
fpc_in_assigned_x = 19
FPC compiler internal procedure index: assigned
fpc_in_bitsizeof_x = 61
FPC compiler internal procedure index: bitsizeof
fpc_in_box_x = 77
FPC compiler internal procedure index: box
fpc_in_break = 39
FPC compiler internal procedure index: break
fpc_in_bsf_x = 74
FPC compiler internal procedure index: bsf_x
fpc_in_bsr_x = 75
FPC compiler internal procedure index: bsr_x
fpc_in_chr_byte = 7
FPC compiler internal procedure index: chr
fpc_in_concat_x = 18
FPC compiler internal procedure index: concat
fpc_in_const_abs = 101
FPC compiler internal procedure index: abs
fpc_in_const_odd = 102
FPC compiler internal procedure index: sqr
1235
fpc_in_const_ptr = 103
fpc_in_const_sqr = 100
fpc_in_const_swap_long = 105
FPC compiler internal procedure index: swap (long)
fpc_in_const_swap_qword = 108
FPC compiler internal procedure index: swap (qword)
fpc_in_const_swap_word = 104
FPC compiler internal procedure index: swap (word)
fpc_in_continue = 40
FPC compiler internal procedure index: continue
fpc_in_copy_x = 49
FPC compiler internal procedure index: copy
fpc_in_cos_real = 125
FPC compiler internal procedure index: cos (real)
fpc_in_cycle = 52
FPC compiler internal procedure index: cycle
fpc_in_dec_x = 36
FPC compiler internal procedure index: dec
fpc_in_default_x = 76
FPC compiler internal procedure index: default
fpc_in_dispose_x = 47
FPC compiler internal procedure index: dispose
fpc_in_exclude_x_y = 38
FPC compiler internal procedure index: exclude
1236
fpc_in_exit = 48
FPC compiler internal procedure index: exit
fpc_in_exp_real = 124
FPC internal compiler routine: in_exp_real
fpc_in_fillchar_x = 55
FPC internal compiler routine: in_fillchar_x
fpc_in_finalize_x = 45
FPC compiler internal procedure index: finalize
fpc_in_fma_double = 134
FPC compiler internal procedure index: fma (double)
fpc_in_fma_extended = 135
FPC compiler internal procedure index: fma (extended)
fpc_in_fma_float128 = 136
FPC compiler internal procedure index: fma (float 128)
fpc_in_fma_single = 133
FPC compiler internal procedure index: fma (single)
fpc_in_frac_real = 122
FPC internal compiler routine: in_frac_real
fpc_in_get_caller_addr = 57
FPC internal compiler routine: in_get_caller_addr
fpc_in_get_caller_frame = 58
FPC internal compiler routine: in_get_caller_frame
fpc_in_get_frame = 56
FPC internal compiler routine: in_get_frame
fpc_in_high_x = 28
FPC compiler internal procedure index: high
1237
fpc_in_hi_long = 4
FPC compiler internal procedure index: hi (long)
fpc_in_hi_qword = 107
FPC compiler internal procedure index: hi (qword)
fpc_in_hi_word = 2
FPC compiler internal procedure index: hi (word)
fpc_in_include_x_y = 37
FPC compiler internal procedure index: include
fpc_in_inc_x = 35
FPC compiler internal procedure index: inc
fpc_in_initialize_x = 50
FPC compiler internal procedure index: initialize
fpc_in_int_real = 123
FPC internal compiler routine: in_int_real
fpc_in_leave = 51
FPC compiler internal procedure index: leave
fpc_in_length_string = 6
FPC compiler internal procedure index: length
fpc_in_ln_real = 131
FPC compiler internal procedure index: ln (real)
fpc_in_low_x = 27
FPC compiler internal procedure index: low
fpc_in_lo_long = 3
FPC compiler internal procedure index: lo (long)
fpc_in_lo_qword = 106
FPC compiler internal procedure index: lo (qword)
1238
fpc_in_lo_word = 1
FPC compiler internal procedure index: lo (word)
fpc_in_mmx_pcmpeqb = 200
FPC compiler internal procedure index: MMX
fpc_in_mmx_pcmpeqd = 202
fpc_in_mmx_pcmpeqw = 201
fpc_in_mmx_pcmpgtb = 203
fpc_in_mmx_pcmpgtd = 205
fpc_in_mmx_pcmpgtw = 204
fpc_in_move_x = 54
FPC internal compiler routine: in_move_x
fpc_in_new_x = 46
FPC compiler internal procedure index: new
fpc_in_ofs_x = 21
FPC compiler internal procedure index: ofs
fpc_in_ord_x = 5
FPC compiler internal procedure index: ord
fpc_in_pack_x_y_z = 59
FPC compiler internal procedure index: pack
fpc_in_pi_real = 126
FPC internal compiler routine: in_pi_real
1239
fpc_in_popcnt_x = 79
FPC compiler internal procedure index: popcnt
fpc_in_pred_x = 30
FPC compiler internal procedure index: pred
fpc_in_prefetch_var = 109
FPC compiler internal procedure index: prefetch
fpc_in_readln_x = 17
FPC compiler internal procedure index: readln
fpc_in_readstr_x = 63
Internal read string procedure
fpc_in_read_x = 16
FPC compiler internal procedure index: read
fpc_in_reset_typedfile = 32
FPC compiler internal procedure index: reset
fpc_in_reset_x = 25
FPC compiler internal procedure index: reset
fpc_in_rewrite_typedfile = 33
FPC compiler internal procedure index: rewrite
fpc_in_rewrite_x = 26
FPC compiler internal procedure index: rewrite
fpc_in_rol_x = 67
fpc_in_rol_x_x = 68
fpc_in_ror_x = 65
fpc_in_ror_x_x = 66
1240
fpc_in_round_real = 121
FPC internal compiler routine: in_round_real
fpc_in_sar_x = 73
FPC compiler internal procedure index: sar_x
fpc_in_sar_x_y = 72
FPC compiler internal procedure index: sar_x_y
fpc_in_seg_x = 29
FPC compiler internal procedure index: seg
fpc_in_setlength_x = 44
FPC compiler internal procedure index: setlength
fpc_in_setstring_x_y_z = 81
FPC compiler internal procedure index: setstring
fpc_in_settextbuf_file_x = 34
FPC compiler internal procedure index: settextbuf
fpc_in_sin_real = 132
FPC compiler internal procedure index: sin (real)
fpc_in_sizeof_x = 22
FPC compiler internal procedure index: sizeof
fpc_in_slice = 53
FPC internal compiler routine: in_slice
fpc_in_sqrt_real = 129
FPC compiler internal procedure index: sqrt (real)
fpc_in_sqr_real = 128
FPC compiler internal procedure index: sqr (real)
fpc_in_str_x_string = 20
FPC compiler internal procedure index: str
1241
fpc_in_succ_x = 31
FPC compiler internal procedure index: succ
fpc_in_trunc_real = 120
FPC internal compiler routine: in_trunc_real
fpc_in_typeinfo_x = 43
FPC compiler internal procedure index: typeinfo
fpc_in_typeof_x = 23
FPC compiler internal procedure index: typeof
fpc_in_unbox_x_y = 78
FPC compiler internal procedure index: unbox
fpc_in_unpack_x_y_z = 60
FPC compiler internal procedure index: unpack
fpc_in_val_x = 24
FPC compiler internal procedure index: val
fpc_in_writeln_x = 15
FPC compiler internal procedure index: writeln
fpc_in_writestr_x = 62
Internal write string procedure
fpc_in_write_x = 14
FPC compiler internal procedure index: write
fpc_objc_encode_x = 71
FPC compiler internal procedure index: encode
fpc_objc_protocol_x = 70
FPC compiler internal procedure index: protocol
fpc_objc_selector_x = 69
1242
growheapsize1 : PtrUInt = 256 * 1024
Grow rate for block less than 256 Kb.
growheapsize2 : PtrUInt = 1024 * 1024
Grow rate for block larger than 256 Kb.
growheapsizesmall : PtrUInt = 32 * 1024
Fixed size small blocks grow rate
InitProc : CodePointer = Nil
InitProc is a routine that can be called after all units were initialized. It can be set by units to
execute code that can be initialized after all units were initialized.
Remark: When setting the value of InitProc, the previous value should always be saved, and called when
the installed initialization routine has finished executing.
IObjectInstance : TGuid = ’{D91C9AF4-3C93-420F-A303-BF5BA82BFD23}’
IObjectInstance is an internal GUID, which should not be used in end-user code. It is used in
the as operator.
IsMultiThread : longbool = False
Indicates whether more than one thread is running in the application.
LFNSupport = True
LFNSupport determines whether the current OS supports long file names, i.e. filenames that are
not of the form 8.3 as on ancient DOS systems. If the value of this constant is True then long
filenames are supported. If it is false, then not.
LineEnding = #10
LineEnding is a constant which contains the current line-ending character. This character is sys-
tem dependent, and is initialized by the system. It should not be set.
maxExitCode = 255
maxExitCode is the maximum value for the Halt (1363) call.
maxint = maxsmallint
Maximum integer value.
1243
MaxKeptOSChunks : DWord = 4
MaxKeptOSChunks tells the heap manager how many free chunks of OS-allocated memory it
should keep in memory. When freeing memory, it can happen that a memory block obtained from
the OS is completely free. If more than MaxKeptOSChunks such blocks are free, then the heap
manager will return them to the OS, to reduce memory requirements.
maxLongint = $7fffffff
Maximum longint value.
MaxPathLen = 4096
This constant is system dependent.
MaxSIntValue = (ValSInt)
Maximum String-size value.
maxSmallint = 32767
Maximum smallint value.
MaxUIntValue = (ValUInt)
Maximum unsigned integer value.
Max_Frame_Dump : Word = 8
Maximum number of frames to show in error frame dump.
ModuleIsCpp : Boolean = False
ModuleIsCpp is always false for FPC programs, it is provided for Delphi compatibility only.
ModuleIsLib : Boolean = False
ModuleIsLib is set by the compiler when linking a library, program or package, and determines
whether the current module is a library (or package) (True) or program (False).
ModuleIsPackage : Boolean = False
ModuleIsLib is set by the compiler when linking a library, program or package, and determines
whether the current module is a package (True) or a library or program (False).
PathSeparator = ’:’
PathSeparator is the character used commonly on the current operating system to separate paths
in a list of paths, such as the PATH environment variable.
1244
RaiseMaxFrameCount : LongInt = 16
Maximum number of frames to include in TExceptObject (1268)
RaiseProc : TExceptProc = Nil
Procedure to raise an exception.
RT_ACCELERATOR = (9)
Constant identifying an accelerator resouce
RT_ANICURSOR = (21)
This constant can be used to specify a resource of type "animated cursor".
RT_ANIICON = (22)
This constant can be used to specify a resource of type "animated icon".
RT_BITMAP = (2)
Constant identifying a bitmap resource
RT_CURSOR = (1)
Constant identifying a cursor resource
RT_DIALOG = (5)
Constant identifying a dialog resource
RT_FONT = (8)
Constant identifying a font resource
RT_FONTDIR = (7)
Constant identifying a font directory resource
RT_GROUP_CURSOR = (12)
Constant identifying a group cursor resource
RT_GROUP_ICON = (14)
Constant identifying a group icon resource
RT_HTML = (23)
This constant can be used to specify a resource of type "HTML data".
1245
RT_ICON = (3)
Constant identifying an icon resource
RT_MANIFEST = (24)
This constant can be used to specify a resource of type "Manifest".
RT_MENU = (4)
Constant identifying a menu resource
RT_MESSAGETABLE = (11)
Constant identifying a message data resource
RT_RCDATA = (10)
Constant identifying a binary data resource
RT_STRING = (6)
Constant identifying a string table resource
RT_VERSION = (16)
Constant identifying a version info resource
RuntimeErrorExitCodes : Array[TRuntimeError] of Byte = (0, 203, 204, 200, 201, 215, 2
This array is used by the Error (1344) routine to convert a TRuntimeError (1276) enumeration type
to a process exit code.
SafeCallErrorProc : TSafeCallErrorProc = Nil
SafeCallErrorProc is a Handler called in case of a safecall calling convention error. Error

is the error number (passed by the Windows operating system) and Addr is the address where the
error occurred.
sLineBreak = LineEnding
sLineBreak is an alias for LineEnding (1243) and is supplied for Delphi compatibility.
StackError : Boolean = False
Indicate whether there was a stack error.
StdErrorHandle = 2
1246
Value of the OS handle for the standard error-output file.
StdInputHandle = 0
Value of the OS handle for the standard input file.
StdOutputHandle = 1
Value of the OS handle for the standard output file.
S_FALSE = 1
Interface call result: Not OK
S_OK = 0
Interface call result: OK
TextRecBufSize = 256
TextRecBufSize is the default buffer size for text files. The actual buffer can be set to another
size using SetTextBuf (1419).
TextRecNameLength = 256
TextRecNameLength is the maximum filename size for text files.
ThreadingAlreadyUsed : Boolean = False
Internal constant for the threading system. Don’t use.
UnixGetModuleByAddrHook : procedure(addr: pointer;var baseaddr: pointer;var filename:
UnixGetModuleByAddrHook is used on unix systems to retrieve a module name based on an

address. It is used in the exeinfo (656) unit to map addresses to module (programs or library) names.
UnusedHandle = -1
Value indicating an unused file handle (as reported by the OS).
VarAddRefProc : procedure(var v: tvardata) = Nil
Callback to increase reference count of a variant.
varany = $101
Variant type: Any
vararray = $2000
Variant type: variant Array
1247
varboolean = 11
Variant type: Boolean type
varbyref = $4000
Variant type: By reference
varbyte = 17
Variant type: Byte (8 bit)
VarClearProc : procedure(var v: tvardata) = Nil
Callback to clear a variant.
VarCopyProc : procedure(var d: tvardata;const s: tvardata) = Nil
Callback to copy a variant
varcurrency = 6
Variant type: Currency
vardate = 7
Variant type: Date
vardecimal = 14
Variant type: Decimal (BCD)
vardispatch = 9
Variant type: dispatch interface
vardouble = 5
Variant type: Double float
varempty = 0
Variant type: Empty variant
varerror = 10
Variant type: Error type
varint64 = 20
Variant type: Integer (64-Bit)
1248
varinteger = 3
Variant type: Integer (32-bit)
varlongword = 19
Variant type: Word (32 bit)
varnull = 1
Variant type: Null (1390) variant
varolestr = 8
Variant type: OLE string (widestring)
varqword = 21
Variant type: Word (64-bit)
varrecord = 36
Record variant type
varshortint = 16
Variant type: Shortint (16 bit)
varsingle = 4
Variant type: Single float
varsmallint = 2
Variant type: smallint (8 bit)
varstrarg = $48
Variant type: String
varstring = $100
Variant type: String
VarToLStrProc : procedure(var d: AnsiString;const s: tvardata) = Nil
Callback to convert a variant to a ansistring.
VarToWStrProc : procedure(var d: WideString;const s: tvardata) = Nil
Callback to convert a variant to a widestring.
1249
vartypemask = $fff
Variant type: Mask to extract type
varuint64 = varqword
varuint64 denotes an unsigned 64-bit value in a variant. It is one of the values found in the
VType field of the variant record tvardata (1282).
varunknown = 13
Variant type: Unknown
varustrarg = $49
varustrarg denotes a unicode string argument in DispInvoke call. It will be converted to

varustring in a variant.
varustring = $102
varustring denotes a unicode string value in a variant. It is one of the values found in the VType
field of the variant record tvardata (1282).
varvariant = 12
Variant type: Variant (arrays only)
varword = 18
Variant type: Word (16 bit)
varword64 = varqword
Variant type: Word (64-bit)
vmtAfterConstruction = vmtMethodStart + ((codepointer) * 5)
VMT Layout: ?
vmtAutoTable = vmtParent + ((pointer) * 7)
VMT layout: ?
vmtBeforeDestruction = vmtMethodStart + ((codepointer) * 6)
VMT Layout: ?
vmtClassName = vmtParent + (pointer)
VMT Layout: location of class name.
1250
vmtDefaultHandler = vmtMethodStart + ((codepointer) * 4)
VMT Layout: ?
vmtDefaultHandlerStr = vmtMethodStart + ((codepointer) * 7)
VMT Layout: ?
vmtDestroy = vmtMethodStart
VMT Layout: Location of destructor pointer.
vmtDispatch = vmtMethodStart + ((codepointer) * 8)
vmtDispatch is the offset from the VMT start, in bytes to the dispatch table for a class.The
dispatch table is used when dispatching messages in TObject.Dispatch (1472)
vmtDispatchStr = vmtMethodStart + ((codepointer) * 9)
vmtDispatchStr is the offset from the VMT start, in bytes to the dispatch table for a class.The
dispatch table is used when dispatching messages in TObject.DispatchStr (1472)
vmtDynamicTable = vmtParent + ((pointer) * 2)
VMT Layout: location of dynamic methods table.
vmtEquals = vmtMethodStart + ((codepointer) * 10)
vmtEquals contains the offset from the VMT start, of the location of the TObject.Equals (1475)
method pointer.
vmtFieldTable = vmtParent + ((pointer) * 4)
VMT Layout: Location of fields table.
vmtFreeInstance = vmtMethodStart + ((codepointer) * 2)
VMT Layout: location of FreeInstance method.
vmtGetHashCode = vmtMethodStart + ((codepointer) * 11)
vmtGetHashCode contains the offset from the VMT start, of the location of the TObject.GetHashCode
(1475) method pointer.
vmtInitTable = vmtParent + ((pointer) * 6)
VMT Layout: ?
vmtInstanceSize = 0
VMT Layout: Location of class instance size in VMT
1251
vmtIntfTable = vmtParent + ((pointer) * 8)
VMT layout: Interface table
vmtMethodStart = vmtParent + ((pointer) * 10)
VMT layout: start of method table.
vmtMethodTable = vmtParent + ((pointer) * 3)
VMT Layout: Method table start.
vmtMsgStrPtr = vmtParent + ((pointer) * 9)
VMT layout: message strings table.
vmtNewInstance = vmtMethodStart + (codepointer)
VMT Layout: location of NewInstance method.
vmtParent = (SizeInt) * 2
VMT Layout: location of pointer to parent VMT.
vmtSafeCallException = vmtMethodStart + ((codepointer) * 3)
VMT Layout: ?
vmtToString = vmtMethodStart + ((codepointer) * 12)
vmtToString contains the offset from the VMT start, of the location of the TObject.ToString
(1475) method pointer.
vmtTypeInfo = vmtParent + ((pointer) * 5)
VMT Layout: Location of class type information.
vtAnsiString = 11
TVarRec type: Ansistring
vtBoolean = 1
TVarRec type: Boolean
vtChar = 2
TVarRec type: Char
vtClass = 8
1252
TVarRec type: Class type
vtCurrency = 12
TVarRec type: Currency
vtExtended = 3
TVarRec type: Extended
vtInt64 = 16
TVarRec type: Int64 (signed 64-bit integer)
vtInteger = 0
TVarRec type: Integer
vtInterface = 14
TVarRec type: Interface
vtObject = 7
TVarRec type: Object instance
vtPChar = 6
TVarRec type: PChar
vtPointer = 5
TVarRec type: pointer
vtPWideChar = 10
TVarRec type: PWideChar
vtQWord = 17
TVarRec type: QWord (unsigned 64-bit integer)
vtString = 4
TVarRec type: String
vtUnicodeString = 18
vtUnicodeString denotes a unicode string argument in the array of const. The TVarRec.VUnicodeString
field will contain the actual value.
1253
vtVariant = 13
TVarRec type: Variant
vtWideChar = 9
TVarRec type: Widechar
vtWideString = 15
TVarRec type: WideString
75.10.2 Types
AnsiChar = Char
Alias for 1-byte sized char.
Byte = 0..255
An unsigned 8-bits integer
Cardinal = LongWord
An unsigned 32-bits integer.
Char = #0..#255
Char is the basic ANSI character type, with a range of [#0..#255].
CodePointer = Pointer
CodePointer is used in 8/16-bit targets to indicate pointers to code segments. On all other plat-
forms this equals Pointer.
CodePtrInt = PtrInt
CodePtrInt is a signed integer with the same size as CodePointer (1254)
CodePtrUInt = PtrUInt
CodePtrUInt is an unsigned integer with the same size as CodePointer (1254)
DWord = LongWord
EnumResLangProc = function(ModuleHandle: TFPResourceHMODULE;

ResourceType: PChar;ResourceName: PChar;
IDLanguage: Word;lParam: PtrInt) : LongBool
1254
EnumResNameProcs used in the EnumResourceLanguages (1340) call. It is called for all lan-
guages for a resource of the specified type and name, and is passed the ModuleHandle, ResourceName,
ResourceName and IDLanguage values for each language encountered for the specified re-
source. Additionally, the lParam parameter from the EnumResourceLanguages is passed un-
altered.
EnumResNameProc = function(ModuleHandle: TFPResourceHMODULE;

lParam: PtrInt) : LongBool
EnumResNameProcs used in the EnumResourceNames (1341) call. It is called for all resources of
the specified type, and is passed the ModuleHandle, ResourceType, ResourceName values
for each resource encountered. Additionally, the lParam parameter from the EnumResourceNames
is passed unaltered.
EnumResTypeProc = function(ModuleHandle: TFPResourceHMODULE;

ResourceType: PChar;lParam: PtrInt)
: LongBool
EnumResTypeProc is used in the EnumResourceTypes (1341) call. It is called for all resources,
and is passed the ModuleHandle, ResourceType values for each resource encountered. Addi-
tionally, the lParam parameter from the EnumResourceTypes is passed unaltered.
FarPointer = Pointer
FarPointer is used in 8/16-bit targets to indicate far pointers (over segments). On all other plat-
forms this equals Pointer.
FileRec = record
Handle : THandle;
Mode : LongInt;
RecSize : SizeInt;
_private : Array[1..3*SizeOf(SizeInt)+5*SizeOf(pointer)] of Byte;
UserData : Array[1..32] of Byte;
name : Array[0..filerecnamelength] of TFileTextRecChar;
end
FileRec is the underlying type used in untyped files. It should be treated as opaque and never
manipulated directly.
HGLOBAL = PtrUInt
This is an opaque type.
HMODULE = PtrUInt
HRESULT = LongInt
32-Bit signed integer.
1255
IInterface = IUnknown
IInterface is the basic interface from which all COM style interfaces descend.
Int16 = SmallInt
A signed 16-bits integer
Int32 = LongInt
Int64 = -9223372036854775808..9223372036854775807
Int64 is a 64-bit, signed integer type, with range [-9223372036854775808..9223372036854775807].
Int8 = ShortInt
Integer = SmallInt
The system unit defines Integer as a signed 16-bit integer. But when DELPHI or OBJFPC mode
are active, then the objpas unit redefines Integer as a 32-bit integer.
IntegerArray = Array[0..$effffff] of Integer
Generic array of integer.
IntPtr = PtrInt
A signed integer with the same size in bytes as pointer
jmp_buf = packed record

ebx : LongInt;
esi : LongInt;
edi : LongInt;
bp : Pointer;
sp : Pointer;
pc : Pointer;
end
Record type to store processor information.
Longint = -2147483648..2147483647
Longword = 0..4294967295
1256
The base 32-bit unsigned type. See the reference manual for more details
MAKEINTRESOURCE = PChar
Alias for the PChar (1257) type.
NativeInt = PtrInt
NativeInt is defined for Delphi compatibility. It is a signed integer with the size of a pointer, so
32-bit on 32-bit platforms, 64-bit on 64-bit platforms.
NativeUInt = PtrUInt
NativeInt is defined for Delphi compatibility. It is an unsigned integer with the size of a pointer,
so 32-bit on 32-bit platforms, 64-bit on 64-bit platforms.
PAnsiChar = PChar
Alias for PChar (1257) type.
PAnsiString = ÂnsiString
Pointer to an ansistring type.
PBoolean = ^Boolean
Pointer to a Boolean type.
PByte = ^Byte
Pointer to byte (1254) type
pcalldesc = ^tcalldesc
Pointer to TCallDesc (1267) record.
PCardinal = ^Cardinal
Pointer to Cardinal (1254) type
PChar = ^Char
Or the same as a pointer to an array of char. See the reference manual for more information about
this type.
PClass = ^TClass
Pointer to TClass (1267)
PCodePointer = ^CodePointer
1257
PCodePointer is a typed pointer to CodePointer (1254).
PComp = ^Comp
PComp is a pointer to a complex type.
PCurrency = ^Currency
Pointer to currency type.
PDate = ^TDateTime
Pointer to a TDateTime (1267) type.
PDateTime = ^TDateTime
Pointer to TDatetime
PDispatch = ÎDispatch
Pointer to IDispatch (1458) interface type
pdispdesc = ^tdispdesc
Pointer to tdispdesc (1267) record
PDouble = ^Double
Pointer to double-sized float value.
PDWord = ^DWord
Pointer to DWord (1254) type
pdynarrayindex = ^tdynarrayindex
Pointer to tdynarrayindex (1268) type.
pdynarraytypeinfo = ^tdynarraytypeinfo
Pointer to TDynArrayTypeInfo (1268) type.
PError = ^TError
Pointer to an Error (1344) type.
PEventState = pointer
Pointer to EventState, which is an opaque type.
PExceptObject = ^TExceptObject
1258
Pointer to Exception handler procedural type TExceptProc (1269)
PExtended = Êxtended
Pointer to extended-sized float value.
PFileTextRecChar = ^TFileTextRecChar
PFileTextRecChar is a typed pointer to TFileTextRecChar (1269).
PGuid = ^TGuid
Pointer to TGUID (1272) type.
pInt16 = PSmallInt
Pointer to Int16 (1256) type
pInt32 = PLongint
PInt64 = Înt64
Pointer to Int64 type
pInt8 = PShortInt
PInteger = Înteger
Pointer to integer (1256) type
PIntegerArray = ÎntegerArray
Pointer to IntegerArray (1256) type
PInterface = PUnknown
Pointer to IInterface (1256) interface
pinterfaceentry = ^tinterfaceentry
Pointer to tinterfaceentry (1273) record.
pinterfacetable = ^tinterfacetable
Pointer to tinterfacetable (1273) record.
PIntPtr = PPtrInt
1259
Pointer to IntPtr (1256) type
PJmp_buf = ^jmp_buf
Pointer to jmp_buf (1256) record
PLongBool = ^LongBool
Pointer to a LongBool type.
PLongint = ^LongInt
Pointer to Longint (1256) type
PLongWord = ^LongWord
Pointer to LongWord type
PMemoryManager = ^TMemoryManager
Pointer to TMemoryManager (1274) record
PMsgStrTable = ^TMsgStrTable
Pointer to array of TMsgStrTable (1274) records.
PNativeInt = ^NativeInt
Pointer to NativeInt (1257) type
PNativeUInt = ^NativeUInt
Pointer to NativeInt (1257) type
PointerArray = Array[0..512*1024*1024-2] of Pointer
Generic pointer array.
POleVariant = ÔleVariant
Pointer to OleVariant type.
PPAnsiChar = PPChar
Alias for PPChar (1261) type.
PPByte = ^PByte
PPByte is a pointer to a PByte (1257) type.
PPChar = ^PChar
1260
Pointer to an array of pointers to null-terminated strings.
PPCharArray = ^TPCharArray
Pointer to TPCharArray (1274) type.
PPCodePointer = ^PCodePointer
PPCodePointer is a typed pointer to PCodePointer (1258).
PPDispatch = ^PDispatch
Pointer to PDispatch (1258) pointer type
PPDouble = ^PDouble
PPDouble is a pointer to a PDouble (1258) type.
PPLongint = ^PLongint
PPLongint is a pointer to a PLongint (1260) type.
PPointer = ^Pointer
Pointer to a pointer type.
PPointerArray = ^PointerArray
Pointer to PointerArray (1260) type
PPPAnsiChar = PPPChar
PPPAnsiChar is a typed pointer to PPAnsichar (1260).
PPPChar = ^PPChar
PPPChar is a pointer to a PPChar (1261)
PPPointer = ^PPointer
Pointer to a PPointer (1261) type.
PPPWideChar = ^PPWideChar
PPPWideChar is a pointer to a PPWideChar (1262) type.
PPtrInt = ^PtrInt
Pointer to PtrInt (1263) type.
PPtrUInt = ^PtrUInt
1261
Pointer to unsigned integer of pointer size
PPUnknown = ^PUnknown
Pointer to untyped pointer
PPWideChar = ^PWideChar
Pointer to link id="PWideChar"> type.
PQWord = ^QWord
Pointer to QWord type
PRTLCriticalSection = ^TRTLCriticalSection
Pointer to #rtl.system.TRTLCriticalSection (1275) type.
PRTLEvent = pointer
Pointer to RTLEvent, which is an opaque type.
PShortInt = ^ShortInt
Pointer to shortint (1265) type
PShortString = ^ShortString
Pointer to a shortstring type.
PSingle = ^Single
Pointer to single-sized float value.
PSizeInt = ^SizeInt
Pointer to a SizeInt (1265) type
PSmallInt = ^SmallInt
Pointer to smallint (1265) type
pstringmessagetable = ^TStringMessageTable
Pointer to TStringMessageTable (1277) record.
PText = ^Text
Pointer to text file.
PtrInt = LongInt
1262
Ptrint is a signed integer type which has always the same size as a pointer. Ptrint is considered
harmfull and should almost never be used in actual code, because pointers are normally unsigned.
For example, consider the following code:
getmem(p,2048); {Assume the address of p becomes $7ffffff0.}

q:=pointer(ptrint(p)+1024)); {Overflow error.}
writeln(q>p); {Incorrect answer.}
Ptrint might have a valid use when two pointers are substracted from each other if it is unknown
which pointer has the largest address. However, even in this case ptrint causes trouble in case the
distance is larger than high(ptrint) and must be used with great care.
The introduction of the ptrint type was a mistake. Please use ptruint (1263) instead.
PtrUInt = DWord
PtrUInt is an unsigned integer type which has always the same size as a pointer. When using
integers which will be cast to pointers and vice versa, use this type, never the regular Cardinal type.
PUCS2Char = PWideChar
Pointer to UCS2Char (1286) character.
PUCS4Char = ÛCS4Char
Pointer to UCS4Char (1286)
PUCS4CharArray = ^TUCS4CharArray
Pointer to array of UCS4Char (1286) characters.
pUInt16 = PWord
Pointer to UInt16 (1286) type
pUInt32 = PDWord
pUInt8 = PByte
PUintPtr = PPtrUInt
Pointer to UIntPtr (1287) type
PUnicodeChar = ÛnicodeChar
PUnicodeChar is a pointer to a unicode character, just like PChar is a pointer to a Char an-
sistring character.
1263
PUnicodeString = ÛnicodeString
PUnicodeString is a pointer to a UnicodeString string.
PUnknown = ÎUnknown
Untyped pointer
PUTF8String = ÛTF8String
Pointer to UTF8String (1287)
pvararray = ^tvararray
Pointer to TVarArray (1280) type.
pvararraybound = ^tvararraybound
Pointer to tvararraybound (1280) type.
pvararrayboundarray = ^tvararrayboundarray
Pointer to tvararrayboundarray (1281) type.
pvararraycoorarray = ^tvararraycoorarray
Pointer to tvararraycoorarray (1281) type.
pvardata = ^tvardata
Pointer to TVarData (1282) record.
PVariant = ^Variant
Pointer to Variant type.
pvariantmanager = ^tvariantmanager
Pointer to TVariantManager (1283) record.
PVarRec = ^TVarRec
Pointer to TVarRec (1285) type.
PVmt = ^TVmt
Pointer to TVMT (1286) record
PWideChar = ^WideChar
Pointer to WChar (1287).
1264
PWideString = ^WideString
Pointer to widestring type
PWord = ^Word
Pointer to word (1287) type
PWordBool = ^WordBool
Pointer to a WordBool type.
QWord = 0..18446744073709551615
QWord is a 64-bit, unsigned integer type, with range [0..18446744073709551615].
RawByteString = ansistring
RawByteString is a single-byte character string which does not have any codepage assigned it.
Assigning a single-byte character string to this kind of string will not change the codepage of the
string.
Real = Double
Alias for real type
real48 = Array[0..5] of Byte
TP compatible real type (6 bytes) definition
Shortint = -128..127
SizeInt = LongInt
SizeInt is used to describe sizes of structures in FPC using a signed integer. The actual type of this
type depends on the architecture: its size reflects the maximum addressable memory on the current
architecture, thus it is 64-bit on 64-bit platforms, 32-bit on 32-bit platforms, and 16 bit on 16 bit
platforms.
SizeUInt = DWord
SizeUInt is used to describe sizes of structures in FPC using an unsigned integer. The actual type
of this type depends on the architecture: its size reflects the maximum addressable memory on the
current architecture, thus it is 64-bit on 64-bit platforms, 32-bit on 32-bit platforms, and 16 bit on 16
bit platforms.
Smallint = -32768..32767
1265
TAbstractErrorProc = procedure
Abstract error handler procedural type.
TAllocateThreadVarsHandler = procedure
Threadvar allocation callback type for TThreadManager (1279).
TAnsiChar = Char
Alias for 1-byte sized char.
TAssertErrorProc = procedure(const msg: ShortString;

const fname: ShortString;lineno: LongInt;
erroraddr: pointer)
Assert error handler procedural type.
TBackTraceStrFunc = function(Addr: CodePointer) : ShortString
Type for formatting of backtrace dump.
TBasicEventCreateHandler = function(EventAttributes: Pointer;

AManualReset: Boolean;
InitialState: Boolean;
const Name: ansistring)
: PEventState
callback type for creating eventstate in TThreadManager (1279).
TBasicEventHandler = procedure(state: PEventState)
Generic callback type for handling eventstate in TThreadManager (1279).
TBasicEventWaitForHandler = function(timeout: Cardinal;

state: PEventState) : LongInt
Wait for basic event callback type for TThreadManager (1279).
TBeginThreadHandler = function(sa: Pointer;stacksize: PtrUInt;

ThreadFunction: TThreadFunc;p: pointer;
creationFlags: DWord;
var ThreadId: TThreadID) : TThreadID
Callback for thread start in TThreadManager (1279).
TBoundArray = Array of SizeInt
Dynamic array of integer.
1266
tcalldesc = packed record

calltype : Byte;
argcount : Byte;
namedargcount : Byte;
argtypes : Array[0..255] of Byte;
end
tcalldesc is used to encode the arguments to a dispatch call to an OLE dual interface. It is used
on windows only. It describes the arguments to a call.
TClass = Class of TObject
Class of TObject (1465).
TCriticalSectionHandler = procedure(var cs)
Generic callback type for critical section handling in TThreadManager (1279).
TCriticalSectionHandlerTryEnter = function(var cs) : LongInt
TCriticalSectionHandlerTryEnter is the function prototype for the TryEnterCriticalsec-

tion (1438) function, in the TThreadManager (1279) record’s TryEnterCriticalSection
field.
TCtrlBreakHandler = function(CtrlBreak: Boolean) : Boolean
TCtrlBreakHandler is the prototype for the CTRL-C handler. If CtrlBreak is True then
Ctrl-Break was hit, otherwise CTRL-C was hit. The handlers should return True to signal that the
key-combination was handled. If False is returned, then default handling will be used, which by
default means an exception will be raised if the sysutils unit is used.
TDate = TDateTime
TDate is defined for Delphi compatibility. This type is deprecated, use TDateTime (1267) instead.
TDateTime = Double
Encoded Date-Time type.
tdispdesc = packed record

dispid : LongInt;
restype : Byte;
calldesc : tcalldesc;
end
tcalldesc is used to encode a dispatch call to an OLE dispatch interface. It is used on windows
only. It describes the dispath call call.
tdynarrayindex = SizeInt
1267
A variable of type tdynarrayindex will always have the correct size, suitable for serving as an
index in a dynamic array.
tdynarraytypeinfo = packed record

kind : Byte;
namelen : Byte;
elesize : SizeInt;
eletype : pdynarraytypeinfo;
vartype : LongInt;
end
tdynarraytypeinfo describes the structure of a multi-dimensional dynamical array. It is used

in the DynArraySetLength (1339) call.
TEndThreadHandler = procedure(ExitCode: DWord)
Callback for thread end in TThreadManager (1279).
TEntryInformation = record
InitFinalTable : Pointer;
ThreadvarTablesTable : Pointer;
asm_exit : procedure;
PascalMain : procedure;
valgrind_used : Boolean;
end
TEntryInformation is used to initialize a Free Pascal program or library. Under normal cir-
cumstances, there should be no need to use this structure directly: it is used by the system unit and
special linking units.
TError = LongInt
Error type, used in variants.
TErrorProc = procedure(ErrNo: LongInt;Address: CodePointer;

Frame: Pointer)
Standard error handler procedural type.
TExceptObject = record
FObject : TObject;
Addr : CodePointer;
Next : PExceptObject;
refcount : LongInt;
Framecount : LongInt;
Frames : PCodePointer;
end
TExceptObject is the exception description record which is found on the exception stack.
1268
TExceptProc = procedure(Obj: TObject;Addr: CodePointer;

FrameCount: LongInt;Frame: PCodePointer)
Exception handler procedural type
TextBuf = Array[0..TextRecBufSize-1] of AnsiChar
TextBuf is a type for the default buffer used in TextRec (1269).
TextFile = Text
Alias for Text file type.
TextRec = record
Handle : THandle;
Mode : LongInt;
bufsize : SizeInt;
_private : SizeInt;
bufpos : SizeInt;
bufend : SizeInt;
bufptr : ^TextBuf;
openfunc : CodePointer;
inoutfunc : CodePointer;
flushfunc : CodePointer;
closefunc : CodePointer;
UserData : Array[1..32] of Byte;
name : Array[0..textrecnamelength-1] of TFileTextRecChar;
LineEnd : TLineEndStr;
buffer : TextBuf;
end
TextRec is the underlying type used in text files. It should be treated as opaque and never manipu-
lated directly.
TFileTextRecChar = UnicodeChar
TFileTextRecChar is the type of character used in TextRec (1269) or FileRec (1255) file types.
It is an alias type, depending on platform and RTL compilation flags. No assumptions should be
made on the actual character type.
TFloatSpecial = (fsZero,fsNZero,fsDenormal,fsNDenormal,fsPositive,
fsNegative,fsInf,fsNInf,fsNaN,fsInvalidOp)
1269
Table 75.10: Enumeration values for type TFloatSpecial
Value Explanation
fsDenormal Denormal value
fsInf Infinity
fsInvalidOp Invalid operation
fsNaN Not a number
fsNDenormal Negative enormal value
fsNegative Negative value
fsNInf Negative infinity
fsNZero Negative zero
fsPositive Positive value
fsZero Zero
TFloatSpecial enumerates a series of floating point value properties.
TFPCHeapStatus = record
MaxHeapSize : PtrUInt;
MaxHeapUsed : PtrUInt;
CurrHeapSize : PtrUInt;
CurrHeapUsed : PtrUInt;
CurrHeapFree : PtrUInt;
end
TFPCHeapStatus describes the state of the FPC heap manager. This is not equivalent to the
THeapStatus (1272) record defined by Delphi, which contains information not meaningful for the
FPC heap manager. The heap status can be retrieved by the GetFPCHeapStatus (1358) call.
TFPResourceHandle = PtrUInt
TFPResourceHandle represents a handle to a binary resource and is used in the various resource
calls. Its actual type and size may differ accross platforms.
TFPResourceHGLOBAL = PtrUInt
TFPResourceHGLOBAL represents a handle to the global module containing a resource. It is

used in the various resource calls. It is an opaque type: its actual type and size may differ accross
platforms.
TFPResourceHMODULE = PtrUInt
TFPResourceHMODULE represents a module (library, executable, other) in which a resource is

located. It is used in the various resource calls. It is an opaque type: its actual type and size may
differ accross platforms.
TFPUException = (exInvalidOp,exDenormalized,exZeroDivide,exOverflow,
exUnderflow,exPrecision)
1270
Table 75.11: Enumeration values for type TFPUException
Value Explanation
exDenormalized
exInvalidOp Invalid operation error
exOverflow Float overflow error
exPrecision Precision error
exUnderflow Float underflow error
exZeroDivide Division by zero error.
TFPUException describes what floating point errors raise exceptions. It has been moved here
from the Math unit.
TFPUExceptionMask = Set of TFPUException
TFPUExceptionMask is a set of TFPUException constants
TFPUPrecisionMode = (pmSingle,pmReserved,pmDouble,pmExtended)
Table 75.12: Enumeration values for type TFPUPrecisionMode
Value Explanation
pmDouble Double-type precision
pmExtended Extended-type precision
pmReserved ?
pmSingle Single-type precision
TFPUPrecisionMode describes the possible default precisions for the software Floating Point
math routines. It has been moved here from the math unit.
TFPURoundingMode = (rmNearest,rmDown,rmUp,rmTruncate)
Table 75.13: Enumeration values for type TFPURoundingMode
Value Explanation
rmDown Round to biggest integer smaller than value.
rmNearest Round to nearest integer
rmTruncate Cut off fractional part
rmUp Round to smallest integer larger than value
TFPURoundingMode enumerates the possible values for software floating point math rounding. It
has been moved here from the math unit.
TGetCurrentThreadIdHandler = function : TThreadID
Callback type for retrieving thread ID in TThreadManager (1279).
1271
TGuid = packed record

case Integer of
1: (
Data1 : DWord;
Data2 : Word;
Data3 : Word;
Data4 : Array[0..7] of Byte;
);
2: (
D1 : DWord;
D2 : Word;
D3 : Word;
D4 : Array[0..7] of Byte;
);
3: (
time_low : DWord;
time_mid : Word;
time_hi_and_version : Word;
clock_seq_hi_and_reserved : Byte;
clock_seq_low : Byte;
node : Array[0..5] of Byte;
);
end
Standard GUID representation type.
THandle = LongInt
This type should be considered opaque. It is used to describe file and other handles.
THeapStatus = record
TotalAddrSpace : Cardinal;
TotalUncommitted : Cardinal;
TotalCommitted : Cardinal;
TotalAllocated : Cardinal;
TotalFree : Cardinal;
FreeSmall : Cardinal;
FreeBig : Cardinal;
Unused : Cardinal;
Overhead : Cardinal;
HeapErrorCode : Cardinal;
end
THeapStatus is the record describing the current heap status. It is returned by the GetHeapStatus
(1358) call.
TInitThreadVarHandler = procedure(var offset: DWord;size: DWord)
Threadvar initialization callback type for TThreadManager (1279).
TInterfacedClass = Class of TInterfacedObject
1272
TInterfacedClass is a descendent of
tinterfaceentry = record
IID : PGuid;
VTable : Pointer;
IOffset : SizeUInt;
IIDStr : PShortString;
case Boolean of
True: (
IType : tinterfaceentrytype;
);
False: (
__pad_dummy : SizeInt;
);
end
tinterfaceentry is used to store the list of Interfaces of a class. This list is stored as an array
of tinterfaceentry records.
tinterfaceentrytype = (etStandard,etVirtualMethodResult,
etStaticMethodResult,etFieldValue,
etVirtualMethodClass,etStaticMethodClass,
etFieldValueClass)
Table 75.14: Enumeration values for type tinterfaceentrytype
Value Explanation
etFieldValue Field value
etFieldValueClass Interface provided by a class field
etStandard Standard entry
etStaticMethodClass Interface provided by a static class method
etStaticMethodResult Statis method
etVirtualMethodClass Interface provided by a virtual class method
etVirtualMethodResult Virtual method
This is an internal type for the compiler to encode calls to dispatch interfaces.
tinterfacetable = record
EntryCount : SizeUInt;
Entries : Array[0..0] of tinterfaceentry;
end
Record to store list of interfaces of a class.
TLineEndStr = string
TLineEndStr is an alias for the actual line ending string type, used in TextRec (1269). It should
be treated as opaque.
1273
TMemoryManager = record
NeedLock : Boolean;
Getmem : function(Size: PtrUInt) : Pointer;
Freemem : function(p: pointer) : PtrUInt;
FreememSize : function(p: pointer;Size: PtrUInt) : PtrUInt;
AllocMem : function(Size: PtrUInt) : Pointer;
ReAllocMem : function(var p: pointer;Size: PtrUInt) : Pointer;
MemSize : function(p: pointer) : PtrUInt;
InitThread : procedure;
DoneThread : procedure;
RelocateHeap : procedure;
GetHeapStatus : function : THeapStatus;
GetFPCHeapStatus : function : TFPCHeapStatus;
end
TMemoryManager describes the memory manager. For more information about the memory man-
ager, see the programmer’s reference.
TMethod = record
Code : CodePointer;
Data : Pointer;
end
TMethod describes a general method pointer, and is used in Run-Time Type Information handling.
TMsgStrTable = record
name : PShortString;
method : CodePointer;
end
Record used in string message handler table.
TPCharArray = packed Array[0..(MaxLongintdivSizeOf(PChar))-1] of PChar
Array of PChar
TProcedure = procedure
Simple procedural type.
TReleaseThreadVarsHandler = procedure
Threadvar release callback type for TThreadManager (1279).
TRelocateThreadVarHandler = function(offset: DWord) : pointer
Threadvar relocalization callback type for TThreadManager (1279).
TResourceHandle = PtrUInt
1274
TResourceManager = record
HINSTANCEFunc : function : TFPResourceHMODULE;
EnumResourceTypesFunc : function(ModuleHandle: TFPResourceHMODULE;EnumFunc: EnumRes
lParam: PtrInt) : LongBool;
EnumResourceNamesFunc : function(ModuleHandle: TFPResourceHMODULE;ResourceType: PCh
EnumFunc: EnumResNameProc;lParam: PtrInt) : LongBool;
EnumResourceLanguagesFunc : function(ModuleHandle: TFPResourceHMODULE;ResourceType:
ResourceName: PChar;EnumFunc: EnumResLangProc;lParam: PtrInt)
: LongBool;
FindResourceFunc : function(ModuleHandle: TFPResourceHMODULE;ResourceName: PChar;
ResourceType: PChar) : TFPResourceHandle;
FindResourceExFunc : function(ModuleHandle: TFPResourceHMODULE;ResourceType: PChar;
ResourceName: PChar;Language: Word) : TFPResourceHandle;
LoadResourceFunc : function(ModuleHandle: TFPResourceHMODULE;ResHandle: TFPResource
: TFPResourceHGLOBAL;
SizeofResourceFunc : function(ModuleHandle: TFPResourceHMODULE;ResHandle: TFPResour
: LongWord;
LockResourceFunc : function(ResData: TFPResourceHGLOBAL) : Pointer;
UnlockResourceFunc : function(ResData: TFPResourceHGLOBAL) : LongBool;
FreeResourceFunc : function(ResData: TFPResourceHGLOBAL) : LongBool;
end
TResourceManager is the record describing the resource manager. Depending on the kind of
resources (internal, external), another resource managing handler is installed by the system. The
resource manager record is used by all resource handling functions to do the actual work: for each
function in the API, a handler function is available. People wishing to implement their own resource
manager, must implement all handler functions in their implementation.
As soon as resources are used, the compiler will install a resource manager, depending on the plat-
form, this may be an internal or an external resource manager.
TRTLCreateEventHandler = function : PRTLEvent
Callback type for creating a TRTLEvent type in TThreadManager (1279).
TRTLCriticalSection = Opaque type
TRTLCriticalSection represents a critical section (a mutex). This is an opaque type, it can

differ from operating system to operating system. No assumptions should be made about it’s structure
or contents.
TRTLEventHandler = procedure(AEvent: PRTLEvent)
Generic TRTLEvent handling type for TThreadManager (1279).
TRTLEventHandlerTimeout = procedure(AEvent: PRTLEvent;timeout: LongInt)
TRTLEvent timeout handling type for TThreadManager (1279).
trtlmethod = procedure of object
1275
Callback type for synchronization event.
TRuntimeError = (reNone,reOutOfMemory,reInvalidPtr,reDivByZero,
reRangeError,reIntOverflow,reInvalidOp,reZeroDivide,
reOverflow,reUnderflow,reInvalidCast,reAccessViolation,
rePrivInstruction,reControlBreak,reStackOverflow,
reVarTypeCast,reVarInvalidOp,reVarDispatch,
reVarArrayCreate,reVarNotArray,reVarArrayBounds,
reAssertionFailed,reExternalException,reIntfCastError,
reSafeCallError,reQuit,reCodesetConversion)
Table 75.15: Enumeration values for type TRuntimeError
Value Explanation
reAccessViolation Access Violation
reAssertionFailed Assertion failed error
reCodesetConversion Code set conversion error
reControlBreak User pressed CTRL-C
reDivByZero Division by zero error
reExternalException An external exception occurred
reIntfCastError Interface typecast error
reIntOverflow Integer overflow error
reInvalidCast Invalid (class) typecast error
reInvalidOp Invalid operation error
reInvalidPtr Invalid pointer error
reNone No error
reOutOfMemory Out of memory error
reOverflow Overflow error
rePrivInstruction Privileged instruction error
reQuit Quit signal error
reRangeError Range check error
reSafeCallError Safecall (IDispInterface) error
reStackOverflow Stack overflow error
reUnderflow Underflow error
reVarArrayBounds Variant array bounds error
reVarArrayCreate Variant array creation error
reVarDispatch Variant Dispatch error.
reVarInvalidOp Invalid variant operation error
reVarNotArray Variant is not an array error.
reVarTypeCast Invalid typecase from variant
reZeroDivide Division by zero error
TRuntimeError is used in the Error (1344) procedure to indicate what kind of error should be
reported.
TSafeCallErrorProc = procedure(error: HRESULT;addr: pointer)
Prototype of a safecall error handler routine. Error is the error number (passed by the Windows
operating system) and Addr is the address where the error occurred.
TSemaphoreDestroyHandler = procedure(const sem: Pointer)
1276
TSemaphoreDestroyHandler is the function prototype to destroy an existing semaphore, as re-

turned by (ThreadManager.SemaphoreInit). It is used by the thread manager (ThreadManager.SemaphoreDestr
TSemaphorePostHandler = procedure(const sem: Pointer)
TSemaphorePostHandler is the function prototype to post an event to the semaphore. It should

handle a pointer as returned by the ThreadManager.SemaphoreInit procedure. it’s used by
the thread manager ThreadManager.SemaphorePost.
TSemaphoreWaitHandler = procedure(const sem: Pointer)
TSemaphoreWaitHandler is the function prototype to wait on an event on the semaphore (which

should be posted to the semaphore with ThreadManager.SemaphorePost). It should handle a
pointer as eturned by the ThreadManager.SemaphoreInit procedure. it’s used by the thread
manager ThreadManager.SemaphoreWait.
TSempahoreInitHandler = function : Pointer
TSempahoreInitHandler is the function prototype for initializing a semaphore. It is used by

the thread manager (ThreadManager.SemaphoreInit) to create semaphores. The function
should return a pointer, usable by the other semaphore functions of the thread manager.
TStandardCodePageEnum = (scpAnsi,scpConsoleInput,scpConsoleOutput,
scpFileSystemSingleByte)
Table 75.16: Enumeration values for type TStandardCodePageEnum
Value Explanation
scpAnsi Ansi codepage (CP_ACP)
scpConsoleInput Console input codepage
scpConsoleOutput Console output codepage
scpFileSystemSingleByte File system single byte codepage.
TStandardCodePageEnum describes several types of standard used codepages, which can be

queried by the unicode string manager TUnicodeStringManager (1280).
TStringMessageTable = record
count : LongInt;
msgstrtable : Array[0..0] of TMsgStrTable;
end
Record used to describe the string messages handled by a class. It consists of a count, followed by
an array of TMsgStrTable (1274) records.
TSystemCodePage = Word
TSystemCodePage is a type used to indicate code pages. It should be treated as an opaque type.
TTextBuf = TextBuf
1277
TTextBuf is an alias for TextBuf
TTextLineBreakStyle = (tlbsLF,tlbsCRLF,tlbsCR)
Table 75.17: Enumeration values for type TTextLineBreakStyle
Value Explanation
tlbsCR Carriage-return (#13, Mac-OS style)
tlbsCRLF Carriage-return, line-feed (#13#30, Windows style)
tlbsLF Line-feed only (#10, unix style)
Text line break style. (end of line character)
TThreadFunc = function(parameter: pointer) : PtrInt
Thread function prototype
TThreadGetPriorityHandler = function(threadHandle: TThreadID) : LongInt
Callback type for thread priority getting in TThreadManager (1279).
TThreadHandler = function(threadHandle: TThreadID) : DWord
Generic thread handler callback for TThreadManager (1279).
TThreadID = PtrUInt
This is an opaque type, it can differ from operating system to operating system.
TThreadManager = record
InitManager : function : Boolean;
DoneManager : function : Boolean;
BeginThread : TBeginThreadHandler;
EndThread : TEndThreadHandler;
SuspendThread : TThreadHandler;
ResumeThread : TThreadHandler;
KillThread : TThreadHandler;
CloseThread : TThreadHandler;
ThreadSwitch : TThreadSwitchHandler;
WaitForThreadTerminate : TWaitForThreadTerminateHandler;
ThreadSetPriority : TThreadSetPriorityHandler;
ThreadGetPriority : TThreadGetPriorityHandler;
GetCurrentThreadId : TGetCurrentThreadIdHandler;
InitCriticalSection : TCriticalSectionHandler;
DoneCriticalSection : TCriticalSectionHandler;
EnterCriticalSection : TCriticalSectionHandler;
TryEnterCriticalSection : TCriticalSectionHandlerTryEnter;
LeaveCriticalSection : TCriticalSectionHandler;
InitThreadVar : TInitThreadVarHandler;
RelocateThreadVar : TRelocateThreadVarHandler;
1278
AllocateThreadVars : TAllocateThreadVarsHandler;
ReleaseThreadVars : TReleaseThreadVarsHandler;
BasicEventCreate : TBasicEventCreateHandler;
BasicEventDestroy : TBasicEventHandler;
BasicEventResetEvent : TBasicEventHandler;
BasicEventSetEvent : TBasicEventHandler;
BasiceventWaitFOr : TBasicEventWaitForHandler;
RTLEventCreate : TRTLCreateEventHandler;
RTLEventDestroy : TRTLEventHandler;
RTLEventSetEvent : TRTLEventHandler;
RTLEventResetEvent : TRTLEventHandler;
RTLEventWaitFor : TRTLEventHandler;
RTLEventWaitForTimeout : TRTLEventHandlerTimeout;
SemaphoreInit : TSempahoreInitHandler;
SemaphoreDestroy : TSemaphoreDestroyHandler;
SemaphorePost : TSemaphorePostHandler;
SemaphoreWait : TSemaphoreWaitHandler;
end
TThreadManager is a record that contains all callbacks needed for the thread handling routines of
the Free Pascal Run-Time Library. The thread manager can be set by the SetThreadManager (1421)
procedure, and the current thread manager can be retrieved with the GetThreadManager (1360) pro-
cedure.
The Windows RTL will set the thread manager automatically to a system thread manager, based on
the Windows threading routines. Unix operating systems provide a unit cthreads which implements
threads based on the C library POSIX thread routines. It is not included by default, because it would
make the system unit dependent on the C library.
For more information about thread programming, see the programmer’s guide.
TThreadSetPriorityHandler = function(threadHandle: TThreadID;

Prio: LongInt) : Boolean
Callback type for thread priority setting in TThreadManager (1279).
TThreadSwitchHandler = procedure
Callback type for thread switch in TThreadManager (1279).
TTime = TDateTime
TTime is defined for Delphi compatibility. This type is deprecated, use TDateTime (1267) instead.
TUCS4CharArray = Array[0..$effffff] of UCS4Char
Array of UCS4Char (1286) characters.
TUnicodeStringManager = record
Wide2AnsiMoveProc : procedure(source: PWideChar;var dest: RawByteString;cp: TSystem
len: SizeInt);
Ansi2WideMoveProc : procedure(source: PChar;cp: TSystemCodePage;var dest: widestrin
len: SizeInt);
1279
UpperWideStringProc : function(const S: WideString) : WideString;

LowerWideStringProc : function(const S: WideString) : WideString;
CompareWideStringProc : function(const s1: WideString;const s2: WideString) : PtrIn
CompareTextWideStringProc : function(const s1: WideString;const s2: WideString) : P
CharLengthPCharProc : function(const Str: PChar) : PtrInt;
CodePointLengthProc : function(const Str: PChar;MaxLookAead: PtrInt) : PtrInt;
UpperAnsiStringProc : function(const s: ansistring) : ansistring;
LowerAnsiStringProc : function(const s: ansistring) : ansistring;
CompareStrAnsiStringProc : function(const S1: ansistring;const S2: ansistring) : Pt
CompareTextAnsiStringProc : function(const S1: ansistring;const S2: ansistring) : P
StrCompAnsiStringProc : function(S1: PChar;S2: PChar) : PtrInt;
StrICompAnsiStringProc : function(S1: PChar;S2: PChar) : PtrInt;
StrLCompAnsiStringProc : function(S1: PChar;S2: PChar;MaxLen: PtrUInt) : PtrInt;
StrLICompAnsiStringProc : function(S1: PChar;S2: PChar;MaxLen: PtrUInt) : PtrInt;
StrLowerAnsiStringProc : function(Str: PChar) : PChar;
StrUpperAnsiStringProc : function(Str: PChar) : PChar;
ThreadInitProc : procedure;
ThreadFiniProc : procedure;
Unicode2AnsiMoveProc : procedure(source: PUnicodeChar;var dest: RawByteString;
cp: TSystemCodePage;len: SizeInt);
Ansi2UnicodeMoveProc : procedure(source: PChar;cp: TSystemCodePage;var dest: unicod
len: SizeInt);
UpperUnicodeStringProc : function(const S: UnicodeString) : UnicodeString;
LowerUnicodeStringProc : function(const S: UnicodeString) : UnicodeString;
CompareUnicodeStringProc : function(const s1: UnicodeString;const s2: UnicodeString
CompareTextUnicodeStringProc : function(const s1: UnicodeString;const s2: UnicodeSt
GetStandardCodePageProc : function(const stdcp: TStandardCodePageEnum) : TSystemCod
end
TUnicodeStringManager is currently the same as the TUnicodeStringManager (1280) manager

record. It performs the same functions: converting unicode strings to ansistrings and vice-versa,
performing uppercase to lowercase transformations and comparing strings.
tvararray = record
dimcount : Word;
flags : Word;
elementsize : LongInt;
lockcount : LongInt;
data : pointer;
bounds : tvararrayboundarray;
end
tvararray is a record describing a variant array. It contains some general data, followed by a num-
ber of TVarArrayBound (1280) records equal to the number of dimensions in the array (dimcoun).
tvararraybound = record
elementcount : LongInt;
lowbound : LongInt;
end
tvararraybound is used to describe one dimension in a variant array.
1280
tvararrayboundarray = Array[0..0] of tvararraybound
array of tvararraybound (1280) records.
tvararraycoorarray = Array[0..0] of LongInt
Array of variant array coordinates
tvardata = packed record

vtype : tvartype;
case Integer of
0: (
res1 : Word;
case Integer of
0: (
res2 : Word;
res3 : Word;
case Word of
varsmallint: (
vsmallint : SmallInt;
);
varinteger: (
vinteger : LongInt;
);
varsingle: (
vsingle : single;
);
vardouble: (
vdouble : Double;
);
vardate: (
vdate : TDateTime;
);
varcurrency: (
vcurrency : currency;
);
varolestr: (
volestr : PWideChar;
);
vardispatch: (
vdispatch : pointer;
);
varerror: (
verror : HRESULT;
);
varboolean: (
vboolean : wordbool;
);
varunknown: (
vunknown : pointer;
);
varshortint: (
vshortint : ShortInt;
1281
);
varbyte: (
vbyte : Byte;
);
varword: (
vword : Word;
);
varlongword: (
vlongword : DWord;
);
varint64: (
vint64 : Int64;
);
varqword: (
vqword : QWord;
);
varword64: (
vword64 : QWord;
);
varstring: (
vstring : pointer;
);
varany: (
vany : pointer;
);
vararray: (
varray : pvararray;
);
varbyref: (
vpointer : pointer;
);
);
1: (
vlongs : Array[0..2] of LongInt;
);
);
1: (
vwords : Array[0..6] of Word;
);
2: (
vbytes : Array[0..13] of Byte;
);
end
TVarData is a record representation of a variant. It contains the internal structure of a variant and
is handled by the various variant handling routines.
tvariantmanager = record
vartoint : function(const v: variant) : LongInt;
vartoint64 : function(const v: variant) : Int64;
vartoword64 : function(const v: variant) : QWord;
vartobool : function(const v: variant) : Boolean;
vartoreal : function(const v: variant) : extended;
1282
vartotdatetime : function(const v: variant) : TDateTime;

vartocurr : function(const v: variant) : currency;
vartopstr : procedure(var s;const v: variant);
vartolstr : procedure(var s: ansistring;const v: variant);
vartowstr : procedure(var s: widestring;const v: variant);
vartointf : procedure(var intf: IInterface;const v: variant);
vartodisp : procedure(var disp: IDispatch;const v: variant);
vartodynarray : procedure(var dynarr: pointer;const v: variant;typeinfo: pointer);
varfrombool : procedure(var dest: variant;const source: Boolean);
varfromint : procedure(var dest: variant;const source: LongInt;const Range: LongInt
varfromint64 : procedure(var dest: variant;const source: Int64);
varfromword64 : procedure(var dest: variant;const source: QWord);
varfromreal : procedure(var dest: variant;const source: extended);
varfromtdatetime : procedure(var dest: Variant;const source: TDateTime);
varfromcurr : procedure(var dest: Variant;const source: Currency);
varfrompstr : procedure(var dest: variant;const source: ShortString);
varfromlstr : procedure(var dest: variant;const source: ansistring);
varfromwstr : procedure(var dest: variant;const source: WideString);
varfromintf : procedure(var dest: variant;const source: IInterface);
varfromdisp : procedure(var dest: variant;const source: IDispatch);
varfromdynarray : procedure(var dest: variant;const source: pointer;typeinfo: point
olevarfrompstr : procedure(var dest: olevariant;const source: shortstring);
olevarfromlstr : procedure(var dest: olevariant;const source: ansistring);
olevarfromvar : procedure(var dest: olevariant;const source: variant);
olevarfromint : procedure(var dest: olevariant;const source: LongInt;
const range: ShortInt);
varop : procedure(var left: variant;const right: variant;opcode: tvarop);
cmpop : function(const left: variant;const right: variant;const opcode: tvarop)
: Boolean;
varneg : procedure(var v: variant);
varnot : procedure(var v: variant);
varinit : procedure(var v: variant);
varclear : procedure(var v: variant);
varaddref : procedure(var v: variant);
varcopy : procedure(var dest: variant;const source: variant);
varcast : procedure(var dest: variant;const source: variant;vartype: LongInt);
varcastole : procedure(var dest: variant;const source: variant;vartype: LongInt);
dispinvoke : procedure(dest: pvardata;var source: tvardata;calldesc: pcalldesc;
params: pointer);
vararrayredim : procedure(var a: variant;highbound: SizeInt);
vararrayget : function(const a: variant;indexcount: SizeInt;indices: PLongint)
: variant;
vararrayput : procedure(var a: variant;const value: variant;indexcount: SizeInt;
indices: PLongint);
writevariant : function(var t: text;const v: variant;width: LongInt) : Pointer;
write0Variant : function(var t: text;const v: Variant) : Pointer;
end
TVariantManager describes the variant manager as expected by the SetVariantManager (1422)

call.
tvarop = (opadd,opsubtract,opmultiply,opdivide,opintdivide,opmodulus,
opshiftleft,opshiftright,opand,opor,opxor,opcompare,opnegate,
1283
opnot,opcmpeq,opcmpne,opcmplt,opcmple,opcmpgt,opcmpge,oppower)
Table 75.18: Enumeration values for type tvarop
Value Explanation
opadd Variant operation: Addition.
opand Variant operation: Binary AND operation
opcmpeq Variant operation: Compare equal.
opcmpge Variant operation: Compare larger than or equal
opcmpgt Variant operation: Compare larger than
opcmple Variant operation: Compare less than or equal to
opcmplt Variant operation: Compare less than.
opcmpne Variant operation: Compare not equal
opcompare Variant operation: Compare
opdivide Variant operation: division
opintdivide Variant operation: integer divide
opmodulus Variant operation: Modulus
opmultiply Variant operation: multiplication
opnegate Variant operation: negation.
opnot Variant operation: Binary NOT operation.
opor Variant operation: Binary OR operation
oppower Variant operation: Power
opshiftleft Variant operation: Shift left
opshiftright Variant operation: Shift right
opsubtract Variant operation: Substraction
opxor Variant operation: binary XOR operation.
tvarop describes a variant operation. It is mainly used for the variant manager to implement the
various conversions and mathematical operations on a variant.
TVarRec = record
case VType : SizeInt of
vtInteger: (
VInteger : LongInt;
);
vtBoolean: (
VBoolean : Boolean;
);
vtChar: (
VChar : Char;
);
vtWideChar: (
VWideChar : WideChar;
);
vtExtended: (
VExtended : PExtended;
);
vtString: (
VString : PShortString;
);
vtPointer: (
1284
VPointer : Pointer;
);
vtPChar: (
VPChar : PAnsiChar;
);
vtObject: (
VObject : TObject;
);
vtClass: (
VClass : TClass;
);
vtPWideChar: (
VPWideChar : PWideChar;
);
vtAnsiString: (
VAnsiString : Pointer;
);
vtCurrency: (
VCurrency : PCurrency;
);
vtVariant: (
VVariant : PVariant;
);
vtInterface: (
VInterface : Pointer;
);
vtWideString: (
VWideString : Pointer;
);
vtInt64: (
VInt64 : PInt64;
);
vtUnicodeString: (
VUnicodeString : Pointer;
);
vtQWord: (
VQWord : PQWord;
);
end
TVarRec is a record generated by the compiler for each element in a array of const call.
The procedure that receives the constant array receives an array of TVarRec elements, with lower
bound zero and high bound equal to the number of elements in the array minus one (as returned by
High(Args))
tvartype = Word
Type with size of variant type.
TVmt = record
vInstanceSize : SizeInt;
vInstanceSize2 : SizeInt;
1285
vParent : PVmt;
vClassName : PShortString;
vDynamicTable : Pointer;
vMethodTable : Pointer;
vFieldTable : Pointer;
vTypeInfo : Pointer;
vInitTable : Pointer;
vAutoTable : Pointer;
vIntfTable : pinterfacetable;
vMsgStrPtr : pstringmessagetable;
vDestroy : CodePointer;
vNewInstance : CodePointer;
vFreeInstance : CodePointer;
vSafeCallException : CodePointer;
vDefaultHandler : CodePointer;
vAfterConstruction : CodePointer;
vBeforeDestruction : CodePointer;
vDefaultHandlerStr : CodePointer;
vDispatch : CodePointer;
vDispatchStr : CodePointer;
vEquals : CodePointer;
vGetHashCode : CodePointer;
vToString : CodePointer;
end
TVMT is a record describing the VMT of a class. It’s various fields represent the available information
in the VMT, as far as it is common to all classes.
TWaitForThreadTerminateHandler = function(threadHandle: TThreadID;

TimeoutMs: LongInt) : DWord
Callback type for thread termination in TThreadManager (1279).
TWideStringManager = TUnicodeStringManager
TWideStringManager contains the definition of the widestring manager.
UCS2Char = WideChar
UCS2 unicode character.
UCS4Char =
UCS unicode character (unsigned 32 bit word)
UCS4String = Array of UCS4Char
String of UCS4Char (1286) characters.
UInt16 = Word
1286
UInt32 = Cardinal
UInt64 = QWord
Unsigned 64-bit integer
UInt8 = Byte
UIntPtr = PtrUInt
Alias for PtrUInt (1263) type for compatibility with later Delphi versions.
UnicodeChar = WideChar
UnicodeChar is a single character from a UnicodeString. It equals WideChar in all respects.
UnicodeString = UnicodeString
UnicodeString is a string of WideChars. The main difference with WideString is that unicode-
string is reference counted, and WideString is not reference counted on Windows.
UTF8String = ansistring
UTF-8 unicode (ansi) string.
ValReal = Extended
ValReal is an alias for the largest available floating point type on the architecture the program runs
on. On most processors, it should be one of Double or Extended.
ValSInt = LongInt
Integer with the same size as the return code of the Val (1445) function.
ValUInt = Cardinal
Integer with the same size as the return code of the Val (1445) function.
WChar = WideChar
Wide char (16-bit sized char)
WideChar = #$0000..#$FFFF
This type is the base unit for all two byte character types, like UnicodeString (1287) and WideString
(1287)
WideString = WideString
Word = 0..65535
1287
75.10.3 Variables
DefaultFileSystemCodePage : TSystemCodePage
DefaultFileSystemCodePage determines the code page to which file/path names are trans-
lated before they are passed to OS API calls, if the RTL uses a single byte OS API for this purpose
on the current platform.
This code page is also used for intermediate operations on file paths inside the RTL before making
OS API calls.
This variable does not exist in Delphi, and has been introduced in FPC to make it possible to change
the value of DefaultSystemCodePage without breaking RTL interfaces with the OS file system
API calls.
The initiali value of this variable depends on the platform:
• Windows: UTF-8, because the RTL uses UTF-16 OS API calls (so no data is lost in interme-
diate operations).
• OS X and iOS: UTF-8 (as defined by Apple)
• Unix (excluding OS X and iOS): equals DefaultSystemCodePage (1289). This is because the
encoding of file names is undefined on Unix platforms: it is an untyped array of bytes that can
be interpreted in any way; Specifically, it is not guaranteed to be valid UTF-8.
• Other platforms: same as DefaultSystemCodePage (1289).
The value of this variable may be changed using the SetMultiByteFileSystemCodePage (1418) pro-
cedure.
Remark: The Unix/OS X/iOS settings only apply in case the cwstring widestring manager is installed, oth-
erwise DefaultFileSystemCodePage will have the same value as DefaultSystemCodePage
after program startup.
DefaultRTLFileSystemCodePage : TSystemCodePage
DefaultRTLFileSystemCodePage determines the code page to which file/path names are

translated before they are returned from RawByteString (1265) file/path RTL routines.
Examples include the file/path names returned by the RawbyteString versions of SysUtils.FindFirst
(1224) and GetDir (1357).
The main reason for its existence is to enable the RTL to provide backward compatibility with earlier
versions of FPC, as these always returned strings encoded in whatever the OS’ single byte API used
(normally DefaultSystemCodePage (1289)).
The initial value of this variable depends on the platform:
• Windows: DefaultSystemCodePage, for backward compatibility.

• OS X and iOS: UTF-8, for backward compatibility. It was already always UTF-8 in the past,
since that’s what the OS file APIs returned, and the data was never converted.
• Other Unixes: DefaultSystemCodePage, for the same reason as DefaultFileSystem-

CodePage (1288). Setting this to a different value than DefaultFileSystemCodePage
is a bad idea on these platforms, since any code page conversion can corrupt these strings as
their initial encoding is unknown.
• Other platforms: same as DefaultSystemCodePage.
1288
The value of this variable can be set using the SetMultiByteRTLFileSystemCodePage (1418) call.
DefaultSystemCodePage : TSystemCodePage
DefaultSystemCodePage is used to determine how CP_ACP is interpreted; it is what the pro-

gram considers to be the current system codepage.
It is initialized to the default system codepage.
• On windows, this is the result of the GetACP operating call, which returns the Windows ANSI
code page.
• On iOS, this is UTF-8
• on other unixes this will be based on the currently set LANG or LC_CTYPE environment vari-
ables. Normally this is UTF-8, but that is not guaranteed to be the case.
• For all other platforms it is set to CP_ACP, as these platforms currently do not support multiple
code pages, and are hardcoded to use their OS-specific code page in all cases.
The DefaultSystemCodePage value may be set using SetMultiByteConversionCodePage (1417).

That means that it is not a good idea to use its value to determine the real OS "default system code
page".
DefaultUnicodeCodePage : TSystemCodePage
DefaultUnicodeCodePage is the unicode code page for a new unicode string. On most plat-
forms, this is CP_UTF16 (1231).
DispCallByIDProc : CodePointer
VarDispProc is called by the compiler if it needs to perform an interface call from a variant which
contains a dispatch interface. For instance, the following call:
Var
V : OleVariant;
begin
(V as IWord).OpenDocument(’c:\temp\mydoc.doc’);
end;
where IWord is a dispatch interface is encoded by the compiler and passed to DispCallByIDProc.
This pointer must be set by a routine that calls the OS COM handling routines.
ErrOutput : Text
ErrOutput is provided for Delphi compatibility.
ExitCode : LongInt;public name ’operatingsystem_result’
Exit code for the program, will be communicated to the OS on exit.
FirstDotAtFileNameStartIsExtension : Boolean = False
1289
FirstDotAtFileNameStartIsExtension determines what happens if a filename starts with

a dot (.) character. If True, then the whole file name will be treated as extension. If False, then
the extension is empty.
InOutRes : Word
Result of last I/O operation. Read-Only.
Input : Text
Standard input text file.
IsConsole : Boolean;public name ’operatingsystem_isconsole’ = False
True for console applications, False for GUI applications.
IsLibrary : Boolean;public name ’operatingsystem_islibrary’ = False
True if the current module is a library. Otherwise module is an excutable
mem : Array[0..$7fffffff-1] of Byte
mem is an array of bytes, representing the computer’s memory. This array is available only when
compiling for the Dos Go32V2 target. It’s use is not recommended, and it is not even available on
other platforms.
meml : Array[0..($7fffffffdivsizeof(longint))-1] of LongInt
memw is an array of longints, representing the computer’s memory as 32-bit signed integers. This
array is available only when compiling for the Dos Go32V2 target. It’s use is not recommended, and
it is not even available on other platforms.
memw : Array[0..($7fffffffdivsizeof(word))-1] of Word
memw is an array of words, representing the computer’s memory as 2-byte words. This array is
available only when compiling for the Dos Go32V2 target It’s use is not recommended, and it is not
even available on other platforms.
NoErrMsg : Boolean = Falseplatform
Unused, for Delphi compatibility
Output : Text
Standard output text file.
RandSeed : Cardinal
Seed for Random (1398) function.
ReturnNilIfGrowHeapFails : Boolean
1290
ReturnNilIfGrowHeapFails describes what happens if there is no more memory available

from the operating system. if set to True the memory manager will return Nil. If set to False
then a run-time error will occur.
softfloat_exception_flags : TFPUExceptionMask
Current soft float exception flags
softfloat_exception_mask : TFPUExceptionMask
Current soft float exception mask
softfloat_rounding_mode : TFPURoundingMode
softfloat_rounding_mode determines how the software floating-point emulation routines do

the rounding. The value can be one of the following:
float_round_nearest_even Round to nearest even number

float_round_down Round down
float_round_up Round up
float_round_to_zero Round in the direction of zero (down for positive, up for negative)
StackBottom : Pointer
Current stack bottom.
StackLength : SizeUInt
Maximum stack length.
StdErr : Text
Standard diagnostic output text file.
StdOut : Text
Alias for Output (1290).
ThreadID : TThreadID
Current Thread ID.
UTF8CompareLocale : TSystemCodePage
UTF8CompareLocale is currently present for Delphi compatibility only, it is not used in FPC
code.
widestringmanager : TUnicodeStringManager
Contains the current widestring manager. Do not use directly.
WriteErrorsToStdErr : Boolean = True
1291

75.11.1 abs
Synopsis: Calculate absolute value
Declaration: function abs(l: LongInt) : LongInt
function abs(l: Int64) : Int64
function abs(d: ValReal) : ValReal
Visibility: default
Description: Abs returns the absolute value of a variable. The result of the function has the same type as its
argument, which can be any numerical type.
Errors: None.
See also: Round (1409)
Listing: ./refex/ex1.pp
Program Example1 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Abs f u n c t i o n . }
Var
r : real ;
i : integer ;
begin
r : = abs ( − 1 . 0 ) ; { r :=1.0 }
i : = abs ( − 2 1 ) ; { i :=21 }
end .
75.11.2 AbstractError
Synopsis: Generate an abstract error.
Declaration: procedure AbstractError
Visibility: default
Description: AbstractError generates an abstract error (run-time error 211). If the AbstractErrorProc (1229)
constant is set, it will be called instead.
Errors: This routine causes a run-time error 211.
See also: AbstractErrorProc (1229)
75.11.3 AcquireExceptionObject
Synopsis: Obtain a reference to the current exception object
Declaration: function AcquireExceptionObject : Pointer
Visibility: default
1292
Description: AcquireExceptionObject returns the current exception object. It raises the reference count
of the exception object, so it will not be freed. Calling this method is only valid within an except
block.
The effect of this function is countered by re-raising an exception via raise;
To make sure that the exception object is released when it is no longer needed, ReleaseExceptionOb-
ject (1402) must be called when the reference is no longer needed.
Errors: If there is no current exception, a run-time error 231 will occur.
See also: ReleaseExceptionObject (1402)
75.11.4 add(variant,variant):variant
Synopsis: Implement addition (+) operation on variants.
Declaration: operator +(const op1: variant;const op2: variant) : variant
Visibility: default
Description: The implementation of the addition + operation is delegated to the variant manager with operation
opadd.
Errors: Execution of this operator may result in an exception if no variant manager is installed or if the types
of the operand are not suitable for the operation.
See also: operator -(variant, variant): variant (1224)
75.11.5 AddExitProc
Synopsis: Add an exit procedure to the exit procedure chain.
Declaration: procedure AddExitProc(Proc: TProcedure)
Visibility: default
Description: AddExitProc adds Proc to the exit procedure chain. At program exit, all procedures added in
this way will be called in reverse order.
Errors: None.
See also: ExitProc (1232)
75.11.6 Addr
Synopsis: Return address of a variable
Declaration: function Addr(X: TAnytype) : Pointer
Visibility: default
Description: Addr returns a pointer to its argument, which can be any type, or a function or procedure name. The
returned pointer isn’t typed. The same result can be obtained by the @ operator, which can return a
typed pointer (see the programmer’s guide).
Errors: None
See also: SizeOf (1423)
1293
Program Example2 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Addr f u n c t i o n . }
Const Zero : i n t e g e r = 0 ;
Var p : p o i n t e r ;
i : Integer ;
begin
p : = Addr ( p ) ; { P points to i t s e l f }
p : = Addr ( I ) ; { P points to I }
p : = Addr ( Zero ) ; { P p o i n t s t o ’ Zero ’ }
end .
75.11.7 Align
Synopsis: Return aligned version of an address
Declaration: function Align(Addr: PtrUInt;Alignment: PtrUInt) : PtrUInt
function Align(Addr: Pointer;Alignment: PtrUInt) : Pointer
Visibility: default
Description: Align returns Address, aligned to Alignment bytes.
Errors: None.
75.11.8 AllocMem
Synopsis: Allocate and clear memory.
Declaration: function AllocMem(Size: PtrUInt) : pointer
Visibility: default
Description: AllocMem calls getmem GetMem (1358), and clears the allocated memory, i.e. the allocated mem-
ory is filled with Size zero bytes.
See also: GetMem (1358)
75.11.9 AnsiToUtf8
Synopsis: Convert ansi string to UTF-8 string
Declaration: function AnsiToUtf8(const s: RawByteString) : RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiToUtf8 converts the ansistring S to a UTF-8 format, that is, it converts the string from what-
ever codepage is currently in use, to UTF-8.
The current codepage is fetched from the system, if internationalization support is enabled. It can be
UTF-8, in which case the function simply returns S.
Errors: None.
See also: Utf8toAnsi (1444)
1294
75.11.10 Append
Synopsis: Open a file in append mode
Declaration: procedure Append(var t: Text)
Visibility: default
Description: Append opens an existing file in append mode. Any data written to F will be appended to the file.
Only text files can be opened in append mode. After a call to Append, the file F becomes write-only.
File sharing is not taken into account when calling Append.
Errors: If the file doesn’t exist when appending, a run-time error will be generated. This behaviour has
changed on Windows and Linux platforms, where in versions prior to 1.0.6, the file would be created
in append mode.
See also: Rewrite (1404), Close (1324), Reset (1403)
Program Example3 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Append f u n c t i o n . }
Var f : t e x t ;
begin
Assign ( f , ’ t e s t . t x t ’ ) ;
Rewrite ( f ) ; { f i l e i s opened f o r w r i t e , and emptied }
Writeln ( F , ’ This i s the f i r s t l i n e of t e x t . t x t ’ ) ;
close ( f ) ;
Append ( f ) ; { f i l e i s opened f o r w r i t e , b u t NOT emptied .
any t e x t w r i t t e n t o i t i s appended . }
W r i t e l n ( f , ’ T h i s i s t h e second l i n e o f t e x t . t x t ’ ) ;
close ( f ) ;
end .
75.11.11 arctan
Synopsis: Calculate inverse tangent
Declaration: function arctan(d: ValReal) : ValReal
Visibility: default
Description: Arctan returns the Arctangent of X, which can be any Real type. The resulting angle is in radial
units.
Errors: None
See also: Sin (1423), Cos (1332)
Program Example4 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e ArcTan f u n c t i o n . }
Var R : Real ;
1295
begin
R: = ArcTan ( 0 ) ; { R: = 0 }
R: = ArcTan ( 1 ) / p i ; { R: = 0 . 2 5 }
end .
75.11.12 ArrayStringToPPchar
Synopsis: Concert an array of string to an array of null-terminated strings
Declaration: function ArrayStringToPPchar(const S: Array of AnsiString;
reserveentries: LongInt) : PPChar
Visibility: default
Description: ArrayStringToPPchar creates an array of null-terminated strings that point to strings which
are the same as the strings in the array S. The function returns a pointer to this array. The array and
the strings it contains must be disposed of after being used, because it they are allocated on the heap.
The ReserveEntries parameter tells ArrayStringToPPchar to allocate room at the end of
the array for another ReserveEntries entries.
Errors: If not enough memory is available, an error may occur.
See also: StringToPPChar (1429)
75.11.13 Assert
Synopsis: Check validity of a given condition.
Declaration: procedure Assert(Expr: Boolean)
procedure Assert(Expr: Boolean;const Msg: string)
Visibility: default
Description: With assertions on, Assert tests if expr is false, and if so, aborts the application with a Runtime
error 227 and an optional error message in msg. If expr is true, program execution continues
normally. If assertions are not enabled at compile time, this routine does nothing, and no code is
generated for the Assert call. Enabling and disabling assertions at compile time is done via the
\$C or \$ASSERTIONS compiler switches. These are global switches. The default behavior of the
assert call can be changed by setting a new handler in the AssertErrorProc variable. Sysutils
overrides the default handler to raise a EAssertionFailed exception.
Errors: None.
See also: Halt (1363), Runerror (1410)
75.11.14 Assign
Synopsis: Assign a name to a file
Declaration: procedure Assign(out f: File;const Name: ShortString)
procedure Assign(out f: File;const p: PAnsiChar)
procedure Assign(out f: File;const c: AnsiChar)
procedure Assign(out f: File;const Name: UnicodeString)
procedure Assign(out f: File;const Name: RawByteString)
1296
procedure Assign(out f: TypedFile;const Name: shortstring)

procedure Assign(out f: TypedFile;const p: PAnsiChar)
procedure Assign(out f: TypedFile;const c: AnsiChar)
procedure Assign(out f: TypedFile;const Name: unicodestring)
procedure Assign(out f: TypedFile;const Name: RawByteString)
procedure Assign(out t: Text;const s: shortstring)
procedure Assign(out t: Text;const p: PAnsiChar)
procedure Assign(out t: Text;const c: AnsiChar)
procedure Assign(out t: Text;const s: unicodestring)
procedure Assign(out t: Text;const s: RawByteString)
Visibility: default
Description: Assign assigns a name to F, which can be any file type. This call doesn’t open the file, it just
assigns a name to a file variable, and marks the file as closed.
Errors: None.
See also: Reset (1403), Rewrite (1404), Append (1295)
Program Example5 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Assign f u n c t i o n . }
Var F : t e x t ;
begin
Assign ( F , ’ ’ ) ;
Rewrite ( f ) ;
{ The f o l l o w i n g can be p u t i n any f i l e by r e d i r e c t i n g i t
from t h e command l i n e . }
W r i t e l n ( f , ’ T h i s goes t o s t a n d a r d o u t p u t ! ’ ) ;
Close ( f ) ;
Assign ( F , ’ Test . t x t ’ ) ;
rewrite ( f ) ;
w r i t e l n ( f , ’ T h i s doesn ’ ’ t go t o s t a n d a r d o u t p u t ! ’ ) ;
close ( f ) ;
end .
75.11.15 assign(ansistring):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: ansistring) : olevariant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.16 assign(ansistring):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: ansistring) : variant
1297
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.17 assign(Boolean):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: Boolean) : olevariant

Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.18 assign(Boolean):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: Boolean) : variant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.19 assign(Byte):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: Byte) : olevariant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.20 assign(Byte):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: Byte) : variant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.21 assign(Char):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: Char) : olevariant
Visibility: default
Description:
1298
75.11.22 assign(Char):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: Char) : variant

Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.23 assign(comp):olevariant
Declaration: operator :=(const source: comp) : olevariant
Visibility: default
75.11.24 assign(comp):variant
Declaration: operator :=(const source: comp) : variant
Visibility: default
75.11.25 assign(currency):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: currency) : olevariant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.26 assign(currency):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: currency) : variant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.27 assign(Double):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: Double) : olevariant

Visibility: default
Description:
1299
75.11.28 assign(Double):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: Double) : variant

Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.29 assign(DWord):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: DWord) : olevariant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.30 assign(DWord):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: DWord) : variant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.31 assign(extended):olevariant
Declaration: operator :=(const source: extended) : olevariant
Visibility: default
75.11.32 assign(extended):variant
Declaration: operator :=(const source: extended) : variant
Visibility: default
75.11.33 assign(Int64):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: Int64) : olevariant

Visibility: default
Description:
1300
75.11.34 assign(Int64):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: Int64) : variant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.35 assign(longbool):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: longbool) : olevariant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.36 assign(longbool):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: longbool) : variant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.37 assign(LongInt):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: LongInt) : olevariant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.38 assign(LongInt):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: LongInt) : variant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.39 assign(olevariant):ansistring
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : ansistring
Visibility: default
Description:
1301
75.11.40 assign(olevariant):Boolean
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.41 assign(olevariant):Byte
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : Byte
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.42 assign(olevariant):Char
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : Char
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.43 assign(olevariant):comp
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : comp
Visibility: default
75.11.44 assign(olevariant):currency
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : currency
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.45 assign(olevariant):Double
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : Double
Visibility: default
Description:
1302
75.11.46 assign(olevariant):DWord
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : DWord

Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.47 assign(olevariant):extended
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : extended
Visibility: default
75.11.48 assign(olevariant):Int64
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : Int64

Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.49 assign(olevariant):longbool
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : longbool
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.50 assign(olevariant):LongInt
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.51 assign(olevariant):QWord
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : QWord
Visibility: default
Description:
1303
75.11.52 assign(olevariant):Real
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : Real
Visibility: default
75.11.53 assign(olevariant):ShortInt
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : ShortInt
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.54 assign(olevariant):shortstring
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : shortstring

Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.55 assign(olevariant):single
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : single
Visibility: default
75.11.56 assign(olevariant):SmallInt
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : SmallInt
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.57 assign(olevariant):TDateTime
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : TDateTime

Visibility: default
Description:
1304
75.11.58 assign(olevariant):TError
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : TError

Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.59 assign(olevariant):UnicodeString
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : UnicodeString
Visibility: default
75.11.60 assign(olevariant):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : variant

Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.61 assign(olevariant):WideChar
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : WideChar
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.62 assign(olevariant):widestring
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : widestring
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.63 assign(olevariant):Word
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : Word
Visibility: default
Description:
1305
75.11.64 assign(olevariant):wordbool
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: olevariant) : wordbool
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.65 assign(QWord):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: QWord) : olevariant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.66 assign(QWord):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: QWord) : variant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.67 assign(Real):olevariant
Declaration: operator :=(const source: Real) : olevariant
Visibility: default
75.11.68 assign(Real):variant
Declaration: operator :=(const source: Real) : variant
Visibility: default
75.11.69 assign(real48):Double
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(b: real48) : Double
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.70 assign(real48):extended
Declaration: operator :=(b: real48) : extended
Visibility: default
1306
75.11.71 assign(ShortInt):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: ShortInt) : olevariant

Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.72 assign(ShortInt):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: ShortInt) : variant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.73 assign(shortstring):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: shortstring) : olevariant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.74 assign(shortstring):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: shortstring) : variant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.75 assign(single):olevariant
Declaration: operator :=(const source: single) : olevariant
Visibility: default
75.11.76 assign(single):variant
Declaration: operator :=(const source: single) : variant
Visibility: default
1307
75.11.77 assign(SmallInt):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: SmallInt) : olevariant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.78 assign(SmallInt):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: SmallInt) : variant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.79 assign(TDateTime):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: TDateTime) : olevariant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.80 assign(TDateTime):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: TDateTime) : variant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.81 assign(TError):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: TError) : olevariant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.82 assign(TError):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: TError) : variant
Visibility: default
Description:
1308
75.11.83 assign(UCS4String):variant
Declaration: operator :=(const source: UCS4String) : variant
Visibility: default
75.11.84 assign(UnicodeString):olevariant
Declaration: operator :=(const source: UnicodeString) : olevariant
Visibility: default
75.11.85 assign(UnicodeString):variant
Declaration: operator :=(const source: UnicodeString) : variant
Visibility: default
75.11.86 assign(UTF8String):variant
Declaration: operator :=(const source: UTF8String) : variant
Visibility: default
75.11.87 assign(variant):ansistring
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : ansistring
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.88 assign(variant):Boolean
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.89 assign(variant):Byte
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : Byte

Visibility: default
Description:
1309
75.11.90 assign(variant):Char
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : Char

Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.91 assign(variant):comp
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : comp
Visibility: default
75.11.92 assign(variant):currency
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : currency

Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.93 assign(variant):Double
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : Double
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.94 assign(variant):DWord
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : DWord
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.95 assign(variant):extended
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : extended
Visibility: default
1310
75.11.96 assign(variant):Int64
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : Int64

Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.97 assign(variant):longbool
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : longbool
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.98 assign(variant):LongInt
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.99 assign(variant):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : olevariant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.100 assign(variant):QWord
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : QWord

Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.101 assign(variant):Real
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : Real
Visibility: default
1311
75.11.102 assign(variant):ShortInt
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : ShortInt

Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.103 assign(variant):shortstring
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : shortstring
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.104 assign(variant):single
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : single
Visibility: default
75.11.105 assign(variant):SmallInt
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : SmallInt
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.106 assign(variant):TDateTime
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.107 assign(variant):TError
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : TError
Visibility: default
Description:
1312
75.11.108 assign(variant):unicodestring
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : unicodestring
Visibility: default
75.11.109 assign(variant):UTF8String
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : UTF8String
Visibility: default
75.11.110 assign(variant):WideChar
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : WideChar
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.111 assign(variant):widestring
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : widestring
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.112 assign(variant):Word
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : Word
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.113 assign(variant):wordbool
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: variant) : wordbool

Visibility: default
Description:
1313
75.11.114 assign(WideChar):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: WideChar) : olevariant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.115 assign(WideChar):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: WideChar) : variant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.116 assign(widestring):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: widestring) : olevariant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.117 assign(widestring):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: widestring) : variant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.118 assign(Word):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: Word) : olevariant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.119 assign(Word):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: Word) : variant
Visibility: default
Description:
1314
75.11.120 assign(wordbool):olevariant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: wordbool) : olevariant

Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.121 assign(wordbool):variant
Synopsis:
Declaration: operator :=(const source: wordbool) : variant
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.122 Assigned
Synopsis: Check if a pointer is valid
Declaration: function Assigned(P: Pointer) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Assigned returns True if P is non-nil and retuns False of P is nil. The main use of As-
signed is that Procedural variables, method variables and class-type variables also can be passed
to Assigned.
Errors: None
See also: New (1389)
Program Example96 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Assigned f u n c t i o n . }
Var P : P o i n t e r ;
begin
I f Not Assigned (P ) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ P o i n t e r i s i n i t i a l l y NIL ’ ) ;
P: =@P;
I f Not Assigned (P ) then
Writeln ( ’ I n t e r n a l inconsistency ’ )
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ A l l i s w e l l i n FPC ’ )
end .
1315
75.11.123 BasicEventCreate
Synopsis: Obsolete. Don’t use
Declaration: function BasicEventCreate(EventAttributes: Pointer;
AManualReset: Boolean;InitialState: Boolean;
const Name: ansistring) : PEventState
Visibility: default
Description: BasicEventCreate is obsolete, use RTLEventCreate (1409) instead.
See also: RTLEventCreate (1409)
75.11.124 basiceventdestroy
Declaration: procedure basiceventdestroy(state: PEventState)
Visibility: default
Description: basiceventdestroy is obsolete. Use RTLEventDestroy (1409) instead.
See also: RTLEventDestroy (1409)
75.11.125 basiceventResetEvent
Declaration: procedure basiceventResetEvent(state: PEventState)
Visibility: default
Description: basiceventResetEvent is obsolete. Use RTLEventResetEvent (1410) instead.
See also: RTLEventResetEvent (1410)
75.11.126 basiceventSetEvent
Declaration: procedure basiceventSetEvent(state: PEventState)
Visibility: default
Description: basiceventSetEvent is obsolete. Use RTLEventSetEvent (1410) instead.
See also: RTLEventSetEvent (1410)
75.11.127 basiceventWaitFor
Declaration: function basiceventWaitFor(Timeout: Cardinal;state: PEventState)
: LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: basiceventwaitfor is obsolete. Use RTLEventWaitFor (1410) instead.
See also: RTLEventWaitFor (1410)
1316
75.11.128 BeginThread
Synopsis: Start a new thread.
Declaration: function BeginThread(sa: Pointer;stacksize: SizeUInt;

ThreadFunction: TThreadFunc;p: pointer;
creationFlags: DWord;var ThreadId: TThreadID)
: TThreadID
function BeginThread(ThreadFunction: TThreadFunc) : TThreadID
function BeginThread(ThreadFunction: TThreadFunc;p: pointer) : TThreadID
function BeginThread(ThreadFunction: TThreadFunc;p: pointer;
var ThreadId: TThreadID) : TThreadID
function BeginThread(ThreadFunction: TThreadFunc;p: pointer;
var ThreadId: TThreadID;const stacksize: SizeUInt)
: TThreadID
Visibility: default
Description: BeginThread starts a new thread and executes ThreadFunction in the new thread. If P is
specified, then it is passed to ThreadFunction. If ThreadId is specified, it is filled with the
thread ID of the newly started thread. If StackSize is specified, it is set as the stack size for the
new thread. If none is specified, a default stack size of 4MiB is used.
The function returns the thread handle (or ID, on some other operating systems like Linux or \ostwo)
on success, or 0 if an error occurred. Note that the thread ID and handle are the same on unix
processes, and that the thread ID and thread handle are different on windows systems.
Errors: On error, the value "0" is returned.
See also: EndThread (1340)
75.11.129 BEtoN
Synopsis: Convert Big Endian-ordered integer to Native-ordered integer
Declaration: function BEtoN(const AValue: SmallInt) : SmallInt
function BEtoN(const AValue: Word) : Word
function BEtoN(const AValue: LongInt) : LongInt
function BEtoN(const AValue: DWord) : DWord
function BEtoN(const AValue: Int64) : Int64
function BEtoN(const AValue: QWord) : QWord
Visibility: default
Description: BEToN will rearrange the bytes in a Big-Endian number to the native order for the current processor.
That is, for a big-endian processor, it will do nothing, and for a little-endian processor, it will invert
the order of the bytes.
See also: LEtoN (1382), NtoBE (1389), NtoLE (1390)
75.11.130 binStr
Synopsis: Convert integer to string with binary representation.
Declaration: function binStr(Val: LongInt;cnt: Byte) : shortstring
function binStr(Val: Int64;cnt: Byte) : shortstring
function binStr(Val: QWord;cnt: Byte) : shortstring
1317
Visibility: default
Description: BinStr returns a string with the binary representation of Value. The string has at most cnt
characters. (i.e. only the cnt rightmost bits are taken into account) To have a complete representation
of any longint-type value, 32 bits are needed, i.e. cnt=32
Errors: None.
See also: Str (1427), Val (1445), HexStr (1364), OctStr (1390)
Program example82 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e B i n S t r f u n c t i o n }
Const Value = 4 5 6 7 8 ;
Var I : l o n g i n t ;
begin
For I : = 8 to 2 0 do
W r i t e l n ( B i n S t r ( Value , I ) : 2 0 ) ;
end .
75.11.131 BlockRead
Synopsis: Read data from an untyped file into memory
Declaration: procedure BlockRead(var f: File;var Buf;count: Int64;var Result: Int64)
procedure BlockRead(var f: File;var Buf;count: LongInt;
var Result: LongInt)
procedure BlockRead(var f: File;var Buf;count: Cardinal;
var Result: Cardinal)
procedure BlockRead(var f: File;var Buf;count: Word;var Result: Word)
procedure BlockRead(var f: File;var Buf;count: Word;var Result: Integer)
procedure BlockRead(var f: File;var Buf;count: Int64)
Visibility: default
Description: Blockread reads count or less records from file F. A record is a block of bytes with size specified
by the Rewrite (1404) or Reset (1403) statement. The result is placed in Buffer, which must contain
enough room for Count records. The function cannot read partial records. If Result is specified, it
contains the number of records actually read. If Result isn’t specified, and less than Count records
were read, a run-time error is generated. This behavior can be controlled by the {$I} switch.
Errors: Depending on the state of the {$I} switch, a runtime error can be generated if there is an error. In
the {$I-} state, use IOResult to check for errors.
See also: Blockwrite (1319), Close (1324), Reset (1403), Assign (1296)
Program Example6 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e BlockRead and B l o c k W r i t e f u n c t i o n s . }
1318
Var Fin , f o u t : F i l e ;
NumRead, NumWritten : Word ;
Buf : Array [ 1 . . 2 0 4 8 ] of b y t e ;
Total : Longint ;
begin
Assign ( Fin , Paramstr ( 1 ) ) ;
Assign ( Fout , Paramstr ( 2 ) ) ;
Reset ( Fin , 1 ) ;
Rewrite ( Fout , 1 ) ;
Total :=0;
Repeat
BlockRead ( Fin , buf , Sizeof ( b u f ) , NumRead ) ;
BlockWrite ( Fout , Buf , NumRead, NumWritten ) ;
inc ( T o t a l , NumWritten ) ;
U n t i l ( NumRead= 0 ) or ( NumWritten <>NumRead ) ;
Write ( ’ Copied ’ , T o t a l , ’ b y t e s from f i l e ’ , paramstr ( 1 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ t o f i l e ’ , paramstr ( 2 ) ) ;
close ( f i n ) ;
close ( f o u t ) ;
end .
75.11.132 BlockWrite
Synopsis: Write data from memory to an untyped file
Declaration: procedure BlockWrite(var f: File;const Buf;Count: Int64;

var Result: Int64)
procedure BlockWrite(var f: File;const Buf;Count: LongInt;
var Result: LongInt)
procedure BlockWrite(var f: File;const Buf;Count: Cardinal;
var Result: Cardinal)
procedure BlockWrite(var f: File;const Buf;Count: Word;var Result: Word)
procedure BlockWrite(var f: File;const Buf;Count: Word;
var Result: Integer)
procedure BlockWrite(var f: File;const Buf;Count: LongInt)
Visibility: default
Description: BlockWrite writes count records from buffer to the file F.A record is a block of bytes with
size specified by the Rewrite (1404) or Reset (1403) statement. If the records couldn’t be written to
disk, a run-time error is generated. This behavior can be controlled by the {$I} switch.
See also: Blockread (1318), Close (1324), Rewrite (1404), Assign (1296)
75.11.133 Break
Synopsis: Exit current loop construct.
Declaration: procedure Break

Visibility: default
1319
Description: Break jumps to the statement following the end of the current repetitive statement. The code
between the Break call and the end of the repetitive statement is skipped. The condition of the
repetitive statement is NOT evaluated.
This can be used with For, var{repeat} and While statements.
Note that while this is a procedure, Break is a reserved word and hence cannot be redefined.
Errors: None.
See also: Continue (1330), Exit (1345)
Program Example87 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Break f u n c t i o n . }
begin
I :=0;
While I <10 Do
begin
Inc ( I ) ;
I f I >5 Then
Break ;
Writeln ( i ) ;
end ;
I :=0;
Repeat
Inc ( I ) ;
I f I >5 Then
Break ;
Writeln ( i ) ;
U n t i l I >=10;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 do
begin
I f I >5 Then
Break ;
Writeln ( i ) ;
end ;
end .
75.11.134 BsfByte
Synopsis: Return the position of the rightmost set bit in an 8-bit value
Declaration: function BsfByte(const AValue: Byte) : Byte

Visibility: default
Description: BsfByte scans the byte AValue, starting at position 0 (rightmost position) and returns the index
of the first set bit. The position is measured from the 0-th, rightmost bit.
See also: BsrByte (1321), BsfWord (1321), BsfDWord (1321), BsfQWord (1321)
1320
75.11.135 BsfDWord
Synopsis: Return the position of the rightmost set bit in a 32-bit value
Declaration: function BsfDWord(const AValue: DWord) : Cardinal

Visibility: default
Description: BsfDWord scans the DWord AValue, starting at position 0 (rightmost position) , and returns the
index of the first set bit. The position is measured from the 0-th, rightmost bit.
See also: BsfByte (1320), BsfWord (1321), BsrDWord (1322), BsfQWord (1321)
75.11.136 BsfQWord
Declaration: function BsfQWord(const AValue: QWord) : Cardinal
Visibility: default
Description: BsfQWord scans the QWord AValue, starting at position 0 (rightmost position) , and returns the
index of the first set bit. The position is measured from the 0-th, rightmost bit.
See also: BsfByte (1320), BsfWord (1321), BsfDWord (1321), BsrQWord (1322)
75.11.137 BsfWord
Declaration: function BsfWord(const AValue: Word) : Cardinal
Visibility: default
Description: BsfWord scans the word AValue, starting at position 0 (rightmost position) , and returns the index
of the first set bit. The position is measured from the 0-th, rightmost bit.
See also: BsfByte (1320), BsrWord (1322), BsfDWord (1321), BsfQWord (1321)
75.11.138 BsrByte
Synopsis: Return the position of the leftmost set bit in an 8-bit value
Declaration: function BsrByte(const AValue: Byte) : Byte

Visibility: default
Description: BsfByte scans the byte AValue, starting at the leftmost position and working towards position 0,
and returns the index of the first set bit. The position is measured from the 0-th, rightmost bit.
See also: BsfByte (1320), BsrWord (1322), BsrDWord (1322), BsrQWord (1322)
1321
75.11.139 BsrDWord
Synopsis: Return the position of the leftmost set bit in a 32-bit value
Declaration: function BsrDWord(const AValue: DWord) : Cardinal

Visibility: default
Description: BsrDWord scans the DWord AValue, starting at the leftmost position and working towards posi-
tion 0, and returns the index of the first set bit. The position is measured from the 0-th, rightmost
bit.
See also: BsrByte (1321), BsrWord (1322), BsfDWord (1321), BsrQWord (1322)
75.11.140 BsrQWord
Declaration: function BsrQWord(const AValue: QWord) : Cardinal

Visibility: default
Description: BsfQWord scans the QWord AValue, starting at the leftmost position and working towards posi-
tion 0, and returns the index of the first set bit. The position is measured from the 0-th, rightmost
bit.
See also: BsfByte (1320), BsfWord (1321), BsfDWord (1321), BsrQWord (1322)
75.11.141 BsrWord
Declaration: function BsrWord(const AValue: Word) : Cardinal
Visibility: default
Description: BsrWord scans the word AValue, starting at the leftmost position and working towards position
0, and returns the index of the first set bit. The position is measured from the 0-th, rightmost bit.
See also: BsrByte (1321), BsfWord (1321), BsrDWord (1322), BsrQWord (1322)
75.11.142 CaptureBacktrace
Synopsis: Return stack trace
Declaration: function CaptureBacktrace(skipframes: SizeInt;count: SizeInt;
frames: PCodePointer) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: CaptureBacktrace will fill the array pointed to by frames with the addresses of a backtrace.
It will skip skipframes frames, and will write at most count addresses. Frames must point to
enough memory to hold the stacktrace, which is count*sizeof(codepointer) bytes.
See also: Get_pc_addr (1362), get_caller_stackinfo (1362), get_caller_addr (1361), get_caller_frame (1361)
1322
75.11.143 chdir
Synopsis: Change current working directory.
Declaration: procedure chdir(const s: shortstring); Overload
procedure chdir(const s: RawByteString); Overload
procedure chdir(const s: unicodestring); Overload
Visibility: default
Description: Chdir changes the working directory of the process to S.
See also: Mkdir (1387), Rmdir (1406)
Program Example7 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e ChDir f u n c t i o n . }
begin
{ $I−}
ChDir ( ParamStr ( 1 ) ) ;
i f I O r e s u l t < >0 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Cannot change t o d i r e c t o r y : ’ , paramstr ( 1 ) ) ;
end .
75.11.144 chr
Synopsis: Convert byte value to character value
Declaration: function chr(b: Byte) : Char
Visibility: default
Description: Chr returns the character which has ASCII value X.
Historical note:
Originally, Pascal did not have typecasts and chr was a necessary function in order to do certain
operations on ASCII values of characters. With the arrival of typecasting a generic approach became
possible, making chr mostly obselete. However, chr is not considered deprecated and remains in
wide use today.
Errors: None.
See also: Ord (1392), Str (1427)
Program Example8 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Chr f u n c t i o n . }
begin
Write ( chr ( 1 0 ) , chr ( 1 3 ) ) ; { The same e f f e c t as W r i t e l n ; }
end .
1323
75.11.145 Close
Synopsis: Close a file
Declaration: procedure Close(var f: File)

procedure Close(var t: Text)
Visibility: default
Description: Close flushes the buffer of the file F and closes F. After a call to Close, data can no longer be
read from or written to F. To reopen a file closed with Close, it isn’t necessary to assign the file
again. A call to Reset (1403) or Rewrite (1404) is sufficient.
See also: Assign (1296), Reset (1403), Rewrite (1404), Flush (1353)
Program Example9 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Close f u n c t i o n . }
Var F : t e x t ;
begin
Assign ( f , ’ Test . t x t ’ ) ;
ReWrite ( F ) ;
W r i t e l n ( F , ’Some t e x t w r i t t e n t o Test . t x t ’ ) ;
c l o s e ( f ) ; { Flushes c o n t e n t s o f b u f f e r t o d i s k ,
c l o s e s t h e f i l e . O m i t t i n g t h i s may
cause data NOT t o be w r i t t e n t o d i s k . }
end .
75.11.146 CloseThread
Synopsis: Close a thread and free up resources used by the thread
Declaration: function CloseThread(threadHandle: TThreadID) : DWord

Visibility: default
Description: CloseThread must be called on any thread started with BeginThread (1317). It must be called
after the thread has ended (either by exiting the thread function or after calling EndThread (1340)).
Errors: If no threadmanager is installed, an exception may be raised or runtime error 232 may occur if no
exceptions are used.
See also: BeginThread (1317), EndThread (1340)
75.11.147 CompareByte
Synopsis: Compare 2 memory buffers byte per byte
Declaration: function CompareByte(const buf1;const buf2;len: SizeInt) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
1324
Description: CompareByte compares two memory regions buf1,buf2 on a byte-per-byte basis for a total of
len bytes.
The function returns one of the following values:
less than 0if buf1 and buf2 contain different bytes in the first len bytes, and the first such byte is
smaller in buf1 than the byte at the same position in buf2.
0if the first len bytes in buf1 and buf2 are equal.
greater than 0if buf1 and buf2 contain different bytes in the first len bytes, and the first such
byte is larger in buf1 than the byte at the same position in buf2.
Errors: None.
See also: CompareChar (1325), CompareChar0 (1327), CompareWord (1328), CompareDWord (1327)
Program Example99 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e CompareByte f u n c t i o n . }
Const
ArraySize = 100;
H a l f A r r a y S i z e = A r r a y S i z e Div 2 ;
Var
Buf1 , Buf2 : Array [ 1 . . A r r a y S i z e ] of b y t e ;
I : longint ;
Procedure CheckPos ( Len : L o n g i n t ) ;
Begin
Write ( ’ F i r s t ’ , Len , ’ p o s i t i o n s are ’ ) ;
i f CompareByte ( Buf1 , Buf2 , Len ) < >0 then
Write ( ’NOT ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ equal ’ ) ;
end ;
begin
For I : = 1 to A r r a y S i z e do
begin
Buf1 [ i ] : = I ;
I f I <= H a l f A r r a y S i z e Then
Buf2 [ I ] : = I
else
Buf2 [ i ] : = H a l f A r r a y S i z e −I ;
end ;
CheckPos ( H a l f A r r a y S i z e div 2 ) ;
CheckPos ( H a l f A r r a y S i z e ) ;
CheckPos ( H a l f A r r a y S i z e + 1 ) ;
CheckPos ( H a l f A r r a y S i z e + H a l f A r r a y S i z e Div 2 ) ;
end .
75.11.148 CompareChar
Synopsis: ompare 2 memory buffers character per character
1325
Declaration: function CompareChar(const buf1;const buf2;len: SizeInt) : SizeInt

Visibility: default
Description: CompareChar compares two memory regions buf1,buf2 on a character-per-character basis for
a total of len characters.
The CompareChar0 variant compares len bytes, or until a zero character is found.
-1if buf1 and buf2 contain different characters in the first len positions, and the first such char-
acter is smaller in buf1 than the character at the same position in buf2.
0if the first len characters in buf1 and buf2 are equal.
1if buf1 and buf2 contain different characters in the first len positions, and the first such character
is larger in buf1 than the character at the same position in buf2.
Errors: None.
See also: CompareByte (1324), CompareChar0 (1327), CompareWord (1328), CompareDWord (1327)
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e CompareChar f u n c t i o n . }
Const
ArraySize = 100;
Var
Buf1 , Buf2 : Array [ 1 . . A r r a y S i z e ] of char ;
I : longint ;
Begin
Write ( ’ F i r s t ’ , Len , ’ c h a r a c t e r s are ’ ) ;
i f CompareChar ( Buf1 , Buf2 , Len ) < >0 then
end ;
Procedure CheckNullPos ( Len : L o n g i n t ) ;
Begin
Write ( ’ F i r s t ’ , Len , ’ non−n u l l c h a r a c t e r s are ’ ) ;
i f CompareChar0 ( Buf1 , Buf2 , Len ) < >0 then
end ;
begin
begin
Buf1 [ i ] : = chr ( I ) ;
Buf2 [ I ] : = chr ( I )
1326
else
Buf2 [ i ] : = chr ( H a l f A r r a y S i z e −I ) ;
end ;
For I : = 1 to 4 do
begin
buf1 [ Random( A r r a y S i z e ) + 1 ] : = Chr ( 0 ) ;
buf2 [ Random( A r r a y S i z e ) + 1 ] : = Chr ( 0 ) ;
end ;
Randomize ;
CheckNullPos ( H a l f A r r a y S i z e div 2 ) ;
CheckNullPos ( H a l f A r r a y S i z e ) ;
CheckNullPos ( H a l f A r r a y S i z e + 1 ) ;
CheckNullPos ( H a l f A r r a y S i z e + H a l f A r r a y S i z e Div 2 ) ;
end .
75.11.149 CompareChar0
Synopsis: Compare two buffers character by character till a null-character is reached.
Declaration: function CompareChar0(const buf1;const buf2;len: SizeInt) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: CompareChar0 compares 2 buffers buf1 and buf2 for a maximum length of len or till a null
character is reached in either buffer. The result depends on the contents of the buffers:
< 0If buf1 contains a character less than the corresponding character in buf2.
0If both buffers are equal
> 0If buf1 contains a character greater than the corresponding character in buf2.
Errors: None.
See also: CompareByte (1324), CompareChar (1325), CompareDWord (1327), CompareWord (1328)
75.11.150 CompareDWord
Synopsis: Compare 2 memory buffers DWord per DWord
Declaration: function CompareDWord(const buf1;const buf2;len: SizeInt) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: CompareDWord compares two memory regions buf1,buf2 on a DWord-per-DWord basis for a
total of len DWords. (A DWord is 4 bytes).
-1if buf1 and buf2 contain different DWords in the first len DWords, and the first such DWord is
smaller in buf1 than the DWord at the same position in buf2.
0if the first len DWords in buf1 and buf2 are equal.
1if buf1 and buf2 contain different DWords in the first len DWords, and the first such DWord is
larger in buf1 than the DWord at the same position in buf2.
1327
Errors: None.
See also: CompareChar (1325), CompareByte (1324), CompareWord (1328)
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e CompareDWord f u n c t i o n . }
Const
ArraySize = 100;
Var
Buf1 , Buf2 : Array [ 1 . . A r r a y S i z e ] of Dword ;
I : longint ;
Begin
Write ( ’ F i r s t ’ , Len , ’ DWords are ’ ) ;
i f CompareDWord ( Buf1 , Buf2 , Len ) < >0 then
end ;
begin
begin
Buf1 [ i ] : = I ;
Buf2 [ I ] : = I
else
end ;
end .
75.11.151 CompareWord
Synopsis: Compare 2 memory buffers word per word
Declaration: function CompareWord(const buf1;const buf2;len: SizeInt) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: CompareWord compares two memory regions buf1,buf2 on a Word-per-Word basis for a total
of len Words. (A Word is 2 bytes).
-1if buf1 and buf2 contain different Words in the first len Words, and the first such Word is
smaller in buf1 than the Word at the same position in buf2.
1328
0if the first len Words in buf1 and buf2 are equal.
1if buf1 and buf2 contain different Words in the first len Words, and the first such Word is larger
in buf1 than the Word at the same position in buf2.
Errors: None.
See also: CompareChar (1325), CompareByte (1324), CompareDWord (1327)
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e CompareWord f u n c t i o n . }
Const
ArraySize = 100;
Var
Buf1 , Buf2 : Array [ 1 . . A r r a y S i z e ] of Word ;
I : longint ;
Begin
Write ( ’ F i r s t ’ , Len , ’ words are ’ ) ;
i f CompareWord ( Buf1 , Buf2 , Len ) < >0 then
end ;
begin
begin
Buf1 [ i ] : = I ;
Buf2 [ I ] : = I
else
end ;
end .
75.11.152 Concat
Synopsis: Append one string to another.
Declaration: function Concat(const S1: string;const S2: string;const S3: string;
const Sn: string) : string
Visibility: default
Description: Concat concatenates the strings S1,S2 etc. to one long string. The resulting string is truncated at
a length of 255 bytes. The same operation can be performed with the + operation.
1329
Errors: None.
See also: Copy (1331), Delete (1334), Insert (1374), Pos (1394), Length (1380)
Program Example10 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Concat f u n c t i o n . }

Var
S : String ;
begin
S: = Concat ( ’ T h i s can be done ’ , ’ E a s i e r ’ , ’ w i t h t h e + o p e r a t o r ! ’ ) ;
end .
75.11.153 Continue
Synopsis: Continue with next loop cycle.
Declaration: procedure Continue
Visibility: default
Description: Continue jumps to the end of the current repetitive statement. The code between the Continue
call and the end of the repetitive statement is skipped. The condition of the repetitive statement is
then checked again.
This can be used with For, repeat and While statements.
Note that while this is a procedure, Continue is a reserved word and hence cannot be redefined.
Errors: None.
See also: Break (1319), Exit (1345)
Program Example86 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Continue f u n c t i o n . }
begin
I :=0;
While I <10 Do
begin
Inc ( I ) ;
I f I <5 Then
Continue ;
Writeln ( i ) ;
end ;
I :=0;
Repeat
Inc ( I ) ;
I f I <5 Then
Continue ;
Writeln ( i ) ;
1330
U n t i l I >=10;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 do
begin
I f I <5 Then
Continue ;
Writeln ( i ) ;
end ;
end .
75.11.154 Copy
Synopsis: Copy part of a string.
Declaration: function Copy(S: AStringType;Index: Integer;Count: Integer) : string
function Copy(A: DynArrayType;Index: Integer;Count: Integer) : DynArray
Visibility: default
Description: Copy returns a string which is a copy if the Count characters in S, starting at position Index. If
Count is larger than the length of the string S, the result is truncated. If Index is larger than the
length of the string S, then an empty string is returned. Index is 1-based.
For dynamical arrays, Copy returns a new dynamical array of the same type as the original one, and
copies Count elements from the old array, starting at position Index.
Errors: None.
See also: Delete (1334), Insert (1374), Pos (1394)
Program Example11 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Copy f u n c t i o n . }
Var S , T : S t r i n g ;
begin
T : = ’ 1234567 ’ ;
S: =Copy ( T , 1 , 2 ) ; { S: = ’12 ’ }
S: =Copy ( T , 4 , 2 ) ; { S: = ’45 ’ }
S: =Copy ( T , 4 , 8 ) ; { S: = ’ 4 5 6 7 ’ }
end .
75.11.155 CopyArray
Synopsis: Copy managed-type elements in array
Declaration: procedure CopyArray(dest: Pointer;source: Pointer;typeInfo: Pointer;
count: SizeInt)
Visibility: default
Description: CopyArray copies count elements containing managed types from the array pointed to by source
to the array pointed to by dest. For this, it uses the type information of the elements as specified in
typeinfo.
Under normal circumstances, this procedure should not be used, it is called automatically by the
compiler when an array-typed variables are assigned to each other.
1331
See also: InitializeArray (1373), FinalizeArray (1352), DynArraySize (1339), DynArrayClear (1338), Dy-
nArrayDim (1338), DynArrayBounds (1338)
75.11.156 cos
Synopsis: Calculate cosine of angle
Declaration: function cos(d: ValReal) : ValReal
Visibility: default
Description: Cos returns the cosine of X, where X is an angle, in radians. If the absolute value of the argument is
larger than 26̂3, then the result is undefined.
Errors: None.
See also: Arctan (1295), Sin (1423)
Program Example12 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Cos f u n c t i o n . }
Var R : Real ;
begin
R: =Cos ( Pi ) ; { R:= −1 }
R: =Cos ( Pi / 2 ) ; { R: = 0 }
R: =Cos ( 0 ) ; { R: = 1 }
end .
75.11.157 Cseg
Synopsis: Return code segment
Declaration: function Cseg : Word
Visibility: default
Description: CSeg returns the Code segment register. In Free Pascal, it returns always a zero, since Free Pascal
is a 32/64 bit compiler.
Errors: None.
See also: DSeg (1337), Seg (1414), Ofs (1391), Ptr (1397)
Program Example13 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e CSeg f u n c t i o n . }
var W : word ;
begin
W: =CSeg ; {W: = 0 , p r o v i d e d f o r c o m p a t i b i l i t y ,
FPC i s 3 2 b i t . }
end .
1332
75.11.158 Dec
Synopsis: Decrease value of variable
Declaration: procedure Dec(var X: TOrdinal)

procedure Dec(var X: TOrdinal;Decrement: TOrdinal)
Visibility: default
Description: Dec decreases the value of X with Decrement. If Decrement isn’t specified, then 1 is taken as
a default.
Errors: A range check can occur, or an underflow error, if an attempt is made to decrease X below its
minimum value.
See also: Inc (1366)
Program Example14 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Dec f u n c t i o n . }
Var
I : Integer ;
L : Longint ;
W : Word ;
B : Byte ;
Si : ShortInt ;
begin
I :=1;
L:=2;
W: = 3 ;
B: = 4 ;
Si : = 5 ;
Dec ( i ) ; { i :=0 }
Dec ( L , 2 ) ; { L:=0 }
Dec (W, 2 ) ; { W: = 1 }
Dec ( B, − 2 ) ; { B: = 6 }
Dec ( Si , 0 ) ; { Si : = 5 }
end .
75.11.159 Default
Synopsis: Return Default initialized value
Declaration: function Default(const T: AnyType) : AnyType

Visibility: default
Description: Default is a compiler intrinsic: it returns for every type T a default value. In essence, this is
a block of memory that is zeroed out. It can be used to correctly initialize any type, and more
importantly, a managed type. It also works using a generic type template.
This function cannot be used on any of the file types or complex types that contain a file type.
See also: TypeInfo (1439), Initialize (1371), Finalize (1352)
1333
75.11.160 DefaultAnsi2UnicodeMove
Synopsis: Standard widestring manager callback
Declaration: procedure DefaultAnsi2UnicodeMove(source: PChar;cp: TSystemCodePage;

var dest: unicodestring;len: SizeInt)
Visibility: default
Description: DefaultAnsi2UnicodeMove is the standard callback used for the widestring manager when
an ansistring must be converted to a unicodestring. It simply copies over all characters from the
ansistring to the unicodestring, no conversion whatsoever is performed.
75.11.161 DefaultAnsi2WideMove
Synopsis: Standard implementation of Ansi to Widestring conversion routine
Declaration: procedure DefaultAnsi2WideMove(source: PChar;cp: TSystemCodePage;
var dest: widestring;len: SizeInt)
Visibility: default
Description: DefaultAnsi2WideMove simply copies each character of the null-terminated ansi-string Source
to the corresponding WideChar in Dest. At most Len characters will be copied.
Errors: None.
See also: DefaultUnicode2AnsiMove (1334)
75.11.162 DefaultUnicode2AnsiMove
Synopsis: Standard widestring manager callback
Declaration: procedure DefaultUnicode2AnsiMove(source: PUnicodeChar;

var dest: RawByteString;
cp: TSystemCodePage;len: SizeInt)
Visibility: default
Description: DefaultUnicode2AnsiMove is the standard callback used for the widestring manager when a
unicode string must be converted to an ansistring. It replaces all words with value < 256 with their
value as ASCII code.
Errors: None.
See also: WidestringManager (1291)
75.11.163 Delete
Synopsis: Delete part of a string.
Declaration: procedure Delete(var s: shortstring;index: SizeInt;count: SizeInt)
procedure Delete(var S: RawByteString;Index: SizeInt;Size: SizeInt)
procedure Delete(var S: UnicodeString;Index: SizeInt;Size: SizeInt)
procedure Delete(var S: WideString;Index: SizeInt;Size: SizeInt)
Visibility: default
1334
Description: Delete removes Count characters from string S, starting at position Index. All characters after
the deleted characters are shifted Count positions to the left, and the length of the string is adjusted.
Errors: Shortstring variant’s third parameter is called Count, in other overloaded variants it is called Index
See also: Copy (1331), Pos (1394), Insert (1374)
Program Example15 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e D e l e t e f u n c t i o n . }
Var
S : String ;
begin
S: = ’ T h i s i s n o t easy ! ’ ;
Delete ( S , 9 , 4 ) ; { S : = ’ T h i s i s easy ! ’ }
end .
75.11.164 Dispose
Synopsis: Free dynamically allocated memory
Declaration: procedure Dispose(P: Pointer)
procedure Dispose(P: TypedPointer;Des: TProcedure)
Visibility: default
Description: The first form Dispose releases the memory allocated with a call to New (1389). The pointer P
must be typed. The released memory is returned to the heap.
The second form of Dispose accepts as a first parameter a pointer to an object type, and as a
second parameter the name of a destructor of this object. The destructor will be called, and the
memory allocated for the object will be freed.
Errors: An runtime error will occur if the pointer doesn’t point to a location in the heap.
See also: New (1389), Getmem (1358), Freemem (1356)
Program Example16 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Dispose and New f u n c t i o n s . }
Type SS = S t r i n g [ 2 0 ] ;
AnObj = Object
I : integer ;
Constructor I n i t ;
Destructor Done ;
end ;
Var
P : ^ SS ;
T : ^ AnObj ;
1335
Constructor Anobj . I n i t ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ I n i t i a l i z i n g an i n s t a n c e o f AnObj ! ’ ) ;
end ;
Destructor AnObj . Done ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ D e s t r o y i n g an i n s t a n c e o f AnObj ! ’ ) ;
end ;
begin
New ( P ) ;
P^ : = ’ H e l l o , World ! ’ ;
Dispose ( P ) ;
{ P i s u nd e f i ne d from here on ! }
New( T , I n i t ) ;
T^. i :=0;
Dispose ( T , Done ) ;
end .
75.11.165 divide(variant,variant):variant
Synopsis: Implement division (/) operation on variants.
Declaration: operator /(const op1: variant;const op2: variant) : variant

Visibility: default
Description: The implementation of the division / operation is delegated to the variant manager with operation
opDivide.
See also: operator *(variant, variant): variant (1224)
75.11.166 DoneCriticalsection
Synopsis: Clean up a critical section.
Declaration: procedure DoneCriticalsection(var cs: TRTLCriticalSection)

Visibility: default
Description: DoneCriticalsection cleans up the critical section CS. After a call to DoneCriticalsection,
the critical section can no longer be used with EnterCriticalsection (1340) or LeaveCriticalsection
(1380), unless it is again initialized with InitCriticalSection (1371)
See also: InitCriticalsection (1371), EnterCriticalsection (1340), LeaveCriticalsection (1380)
1336
75.11.167 DoneThread
Synopsis: End the current thread
Declaration: procedure DoneThread

Visibility: default
Description: DoneThread should be used to end the current thread. It performs the necessary housekeeping
before actually ending the thread. Using the operating system calls to end the thread may result in
data corruption or memory leaks.
See also: BeginThread (1317)
75.11.168 Dseg
Synopsis: Return data segment
Declaration: function Dseg : Word

Visibility: default
Description: DSeg returns the data segment register. In Free Pascal, it returns always a zero, since Free Pascal is
a 32/64 bit compiler.
Errors: None.
See also: CSeg (1332), Seg (1414), Ofs (1391), Ptr (1397)
Program Example17 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e DSeg f u n c t i o n . }
Var
W : Word ;
begin
W: =DSeg ; {W: = 0 , T h i s f u n c t i o n i s p r o v i d e d f o r c o m p a t i b i l i t y ,
FPC i s a 3 2 b i t c o m p i l e r . }
end .
75.11.169 DumpExceptionBackTrace
Synopsis: Create backtrace
Declaration: procedure DumpExceptionBackTrace(var f: text)
Visibility: default
Description: DumpExceptionBackTrace writes a backtrace of the current exception to the file f. If no
exception is currently being raised, nothing is written. As much frames as available are written. If
debug info is available, then file names and line numbers will be written as well.
Errors: No check is done to see whether f is opened for writing.

See also: dump_stack (1338)
1337
75.11.170 Dump_Stack
Synopsis: Dump stack to the given text file.
Declaration: procedure Dump_Stack(var f: text;fp: pointer;addr: CodePointer)

Visibility: default
Description: Dump_Stack prints a stack dump to the file f, with base frame pointer bp
Errors: The file f must be opened for writing or an error will occur.
See also: get_caller_addr (1361), get_caller_frame (1361), get_frame (1362)
75.11.171 DynArrayBounds
Synopsis: Return the bounds of the dynamic array
Declaration: function DynArrayBounds(a: Pointer;typeInfo: Pointer) : TBoundArray
Visibility: default
Description: DynArrayBounds returns the bounds of all the dimensions of the dynamic array a with type
information typeInfo.
The result is an array (zero-based) with the maximum valid index for each dimension in the array:
the lower bound is not present in the result, it is always zero.
See also: InitializeArray (1373), FinalizeArray (1352), CopyArray (1331), DynArraySize (1339), DynArray-
Clear (1338), DynArrayDim (1338)
75.11.172 DynArrayClear
Synopsis: Clear dynamical array
Declaration: procedure DynArrayClear(var a: Pointer;typeInfo: Pointer)

Visibility: default
Description: DynArrayClear clears the array (a) using its type info (typeInfo). It is equal to setting the
length to zero.
Dim (1338), DynArrayBounds (1338)
75.11.173 DynArrayDim
Synopsis: Return the number of dimensions in a dynamic array
Declaration: function DynArrayDim(typeInfo: Pointer) : Integer

Visibility: default
Description: DynArrayDim returns the number of dimensions in a dynamic array, using the type information
(typeInfo) of the array.
Clear (1338), DynArrayBounds (1338)
1338
75.11.174 DynArrayIndex
Synopsis: Return pointer to indicated element
Declaration: function DynArrayIndex(a: Pointer;const indices: Array of SizeInt;
typeInfo: Pointer) : Pointer
Visibility: default
Description: DynArrayIndex returns a pointer to the element indicated by indices in dynamic array a with
type information typinfo. The length of indices must equal the number of dimensions of the
array (as returned by DynArrayDim (1338)).
Errors: No bounds checking is performed, it is therefor possible to get an access violation if one of the
indexes is out of range.
Clear (1338), DynArrayBounds (1338), DynArrayDim (1338), IsDynArrayRectangular (1379)
75.11.175 DynArraySetLength
Synopsis: Set the length of a dynamic array
Declaration: procedure DynArraySetLength(var a: Pointer;typeInfo: Pointer;
dimCnt: SizeInt;lengthVec: PSizeInt)
Visibility: default
Description: DynArraySetLength sets the length of the dynamical array a to the first dimCnt lengths spec-
ified in the array lengthVec. The dynamical array type is described in typeInfo which points
to a record of type TDynArrayTypeInfo (1268)
It should never be necessary to call this function directly, the standard SetLength (1417) function
should be used instead.
Errors: If an invalid pointer is specified, an error may occur.
See also: SetLength (1417), tdynarraytypeinfo (1268)
75.11.176 DynArraySize
Synopsis: Return length of dynamic array
Declaration: function DynArraySize(a: pointer) : tdynarrayindex
Visibility: default
Description: DynArraySize gets the number of elements in the array (a) the result is equal to Length (1380)
for dynamic arrays.
See also: InitializeArray (1373), FinalizeArray (1352), CopyArray (1331), DynArrayClear (1338), DynAr-
rayDim (1338), DynArrayBounds (1338)
75.11.177 EmptyMethod
Synopsis: Empty method alias
Declaration: procedure EmptyMethod
Visibility: default
Description: Emptymethod is meant for the compiler only. It should not be used directly.
1339
75.11.178 EndThread
Synopsis: End the current thread.
Declaration: procedure EndThread(ExitCode: DWord)
procedure EndThread
Visibility: default
Description: EndThread ends the current thread. If ExitCode is supplied, it is returned as the exit code for
the thread to a function waiting for the thread to terminate (WaitForThreadTerminate (1447)). If it is
omitted, zero is used.
This function does not return.
See also: WaitForThreadTerminate (1447), BeginThread (1317)
75.11.179 EnterCriticalsection
Synopsis: Enter a critical section
Declaration: procedure EnterCriticalsection(var cs: TRTLCriticalSection)
Visibility: default
Description: EnterCriticalSection will suspend the current thread if another thread has currently entered
the critical section. When the other thread has left the critical section (through LeaveCriticalSection
(1380)), the current thread resumes execution. The result is that only 1 thread is executing code
which is protected by a EnterCriticalsection and LeaveCriticalSection pair.
The critical section must have been initialized with InitCriticalSection (1371) prior to a call to
EnterCriticalsection.
A call to EnterCriticalsection must always be matched by a call to LeaveCriticalSection
(1380). To avoid problems, it is best to include the code to be execute in a try...finally block,
as follows:
EnterCriticalSection(Section);
Try
// Code to be protected goes here.
Finally
LeaveCriticalSection(Section);
end;
For performance reasons it is best to limit the code between the entering and leaving of a critical
section as short as possible.
See also: InitCriticalsection (1371), DoneCriticalsection (1336), LeaveCriticalsection (1380)
75.11.180 EnumResourceLanguages
Synopsis: Enumerate available languages for a resource of given type and name
Declaration: function EnumResourceLanguages(ModuleHandle: TFPResourceHMODULE;
EnumFunc: EnumResLangProc;lParam: PtrInt)
: LongBool
Visibility: default
1340
Description: EnumResourceLanguages enumerates the available languages for a resource of given ResourceName
and type ResourceType in the module ModuleHandle. For each language availanle, it calls
EnumFunc and passes it ModuleHandle, the type of the resource ResourceType, the name of
the resource ResourceName, the language ID, and lParam. It returns False if no resources are
available for the specified resource type and module, or True if there are resources available.
Errors: None.
See also: EnumResourceTypes (1341), EnumResourceNames (1341), EnumResourceLanguages (1340)
75.11.181 EnumResourceNames
Synopsis: Enumerate available resource names for a specified resource type
Declaration: function EnumResourceNames(ModuleHandle: TFPResourceHMODULE;

ResourceType: PChar;EnumFunc: EnumResNameProc;
lParam: PtrInt) : LongBool
Visibility: default
Description: EnumResourceNames enumerates the names of all resources of type ResourceType in the
module ModuleHandle. For each resource available it calls EnumFunc and passes it ModuleHandle,
the type of the resource ResourceType, the name of the resource, and lParam. It returns False
if no resources are available for the specified resource type and module, or True if there are re-
sources available.
Errors: None.
See also: EnumResourceTypes (1341), EnumResourceLanguages (1340)
75.11.182 EnumResourceTypes
Synopsis: Enumerate available resource types
Declaration: function EnumResourceTypes(ModuleHandle: TFPResourceHMODULE;
EnumFunc: EnumResTypeProc;lParam: PtrInt)
: LongBool
Visibility: default
Description: EnumResourceTypes enumerates the types of all resources in the module ModuleHandle. For
each resource available it calls EnumFunc and passes it ModuleHandle, the type of the resource,
and lParam. It returns False if no resources are available for the specified module, or True if
there are resources available.
Errors: None.
See also: EnumResourceNames (1341), EnumResourceLanguages (1340)
75.11.183 EOF
Synopsis: Check for end of file
Declaration: function EOF(var f: File) : Boolean
function EOF(var t: Text) : Boolean
function EOF : Boolean
1341
Visibility: default
Description: Eof returns True if the file-pointer has reached the end of the file, or if the file is empty. In all
other cases Eof returns False. If no file F is specified, standard input is assumed.
Note that calling this function may cause your program to wait: to determine whether you are at
EOF, it is necessary to read data. If the file descriptor is not a real file (for instance for standard input
or sockets), then this call may seem to hang the program while it is waiting for data to appear or for
the file descriptor to be closed.
See also: Eoln (1342), Assign (1296), Reset (1403), Rewrite (1404)
Program Example18 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Eof f u n c t i o n . }
Var T1 , T2 : t e x t ;
C : Char ;
begin
{ Set f i l e t o read from . Empty means from s t a n d a r d i n p u t . }
a s s i g n ( t1 , paramstr ( 1 ) ) ;
reset ( t1 ) ;
{ Set f i l e t o w r i t e t o . Empty means t o s t a n d a r d o u t p u t . }
a s s i g n ( t2 , paramstr ( 2 ) ) ;
rewrite ( t2 ) ;
While not eof ( t 1 ) do
begin
read ( t1 ,C ) ;
w r i t e ( t2 ,C ) ;
end ;
Close ( t 1 ) ;
Close ( t 2 ) ;
end .
75.11.184 EOLn
Synopsis: Check for end of line
Declaration: function EOLn(var t: Text) : Boolean
function EOLn : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Eof returns True if the file pointer has reached the end of a line, which is demarcated by a line-feed
character (ASCII value 10), or if the end of the file is reached. In all other cases Eof returns False.
If no file F is specified, standard input is assumed. It can only be used on files of type Text.
Errors: None.
See also: Eof (1341), Assign (1296), Reset (1403), Rewrite (1404)
1342
Program Example19 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Eoln f u n c t i o n . }
begin
{ T h i s program w a i t s f o r keyboard i n p u t . }
{ I t w i l l p r i n t True when an empty l i n e i s p u t i n ,
and f a l s e when you t y p e a non−empty l i n e .
I t w i l l o n l y s t o p when you press e n t e r . }
While not Eoln do
W r i t e l n ( eoln ) ;
end .
75.11.185 equal(variant,variant):Boolean
Synopsis: Implement = (equality) operation on variants.
Declaration: operator =(const op1: variant;const op2: variant) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: The implementation of the equality (=) operation is delegated to the variant manager with operation
opcmpeq.
See also: operator <(variant, variant): boolean (1224)
75.11.186 Erase
Synopsis: Delete a file from disk
Declaration: procedure Erase(var f: File)
procedure Erase(var t: Text)
Visibility: default
Description: Erase removes an unopened file from disk. The file should be assigned with Assign, but not
opened with Reset or Rewrite
See also: Assign (1296)
Program Example20 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Erase f u n c t i o n . }
Var F : Text ;
begin
{ Create a f i l e w i t h a l i n e o f t e x t i n i t }
Assign ( F , ’ t e s t . t x t ’ ) ;
1343
Rewrite ( F ) ;
W r i t e l n ( F , ’ Try and f i n d t h i s when I ’ ’m f i n i s h e d ! ’ ) ;
close ( f ) ;
{ Now remove t h e f i l e }
Erase ( f ) ;
end .
75.11.187 Error
Synopsis: Generate run-time error
Declaration: procedure Error(RunTimeError: TRuntimeError)
Visibility: default
Description: Error generates a run-time error with an exit code corresponding to RunTimeError. This func-
tion is implemented for Delphi compatibility, and is not used by the Free Pascal Run-Time Library.
See also: RunError (1410), Halt (1363)
75.11.188 Exclude
Synopsis: Exlude element from a set if it is present.
Declaration: procedure Exclude(var S: TSetType;E: TSetElement)
Visibility: default
Description: Exclude removes E from the set S if it is included inthe set. E should be of the same type as the
base type of the set S.
Thus, the two following statements do the same thing:
S:=S-[E];
Exclude(S,E);
Errors: If the type of the element E is not equal to the base type of the set S, the compiler will generate an
error.
See also: Include (1367)
program Example111 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e I n c l u d e / Exclude f u n c t i o n s }
Type
TEnumA = ( aOne , aTwo , aThree ) ;
TEnumAs = Set of TEnumA ;
Var
SA : TEnumAs ;
Procedure P r i n t S e t (S : TEnumAs ) ;
var
1344
B : Boolean ;
procedure DoEl (A : TEnumA ; Desc : S t r i n g ) ;
begin
I f A i n S then
begin
I f B then
Write ( ’ , ’ ) ;
B: = True ;
Write ( Desc ) ;
end ;
end ;
begin
Write ( ’ [ ’ ) ;
B: = False ;
DoEl ( aOne , ’ aOne ’ ) ;
DoEl ( aTwo , ’ aTwo ’ ) ;
DoEl ( aThree , ’ aThree ’ ) ;
Writeln ( ’ ] ’ )
end ;
begin
SA : = [ ] ;
Include (SA, aOne ) ;
P r i n t S e t (SA ) ;
Include (SA, aThree ) ;
Exclude (SA, aOne ) ;
Exclude (SA, aTwo ) ;
Exclude (SA, aThree ) ;
end .
75.11.189 Exit
Synopsis: Exit current subroutine.
Declaration: procedure Exit(const X: TAnyType)
procedure Exit
Visibility: default
Description: Exit exits the current subroutine, and returns control to the calling routine. If invoked in the main
program routine, exit stops the program. The optional argument X allows to specify a return value,
in the case Exit is invoked in a function. The function result will then be equal to X.
In Object Pascal or Delphi modes, if the Exit statement is surrounded by one or more Try ..
Finally constructs, the Finally blocks are executed, which means that if the finally blocks are
used to free resources, then these resources will also be freed when Exit is called.
Errors: None.
See also: Halt (1363)
1345
Program Example21 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e E x i t f u n c t i o n . }
Procedure DoAnExit ( Yes : Boolean ) ;
{ T h i s procedure demonstrates t h e normal E x i t }
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ H e l l o from DoAnExit ! ’ ) ;
I f Yes then
begin
Writeln ( ’ B a i l i n g out e a r l y . ’ ) ;
exit ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ C o n t i n u i n g t o t h e end . ’ ) ;
end ;
Function P o s i t i v e ( Which : I n t e g e r ) : Boolean ;
{ T h i s f u n c t i o n demonstrates t h e e x t r a FPC f e a t u r e o f E x i t :
You can s p e c i f y a r e t u r n v a l u e f o r t h e f u n c t i o n }
begin
i f Which >0 then
e x i t ( True )
else
e x i t ( False ) ;
end ;
begin
{ T h i s c a l l w i l l go t o t h e end }
DoAnExit ( False ) ;
{ This c a l l w i l l b a i l out e a r l y }
DoAnExit ( True ) ;
i f P o s i t i v e ( − 1 ) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ The c o m p i l e r i s nuts , − 1 i s n o t p o s i t i v e . ’ )
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ The c o m p i l e r i s n o t so bad , − 1 seems t o be n e g a t i v e . ’ ) ;
end .
75.11.190 exp
Synopsis: Exponentiate
Declaration: function exp(d: ValReal) : ValReal
Visibility: default
Description: Exp returns the exponent of X, i.e. the number e to the power X.
Errors: None.
See also: Ln (1382), Power (1395)
1346
Program Example22 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Exp f u n c t i o n . }
begin
W r i t e l n ( Exp ( 1 ) : 8 : 2 ) ; { Should p r i n t 2 . 7 2 }
end .
75.11.191 Fail
Synopsis: Fail a constructor
Declaration: procedure Fail
Visibility: default
Description: Fail can be used in a constructor for an object or class. It will exit the constructor at once, and the
memory allocated for the constructor is freed. This mean that for objects allocated with New (1389),
the resulting pointer is Nil and for classes, the object instance will be Nil.
See also: TypeOf (1439), New (1389), Initialize (1371), Finalize (1352)
program t e s t f a i l ;
Type
TMyClass = Class
Constructor Create ;
end ;
Constructor TMyClass . Create ;
begin
Fail ;
end ;
var
M : TMyClass ;
begin
M: = TMyClass . Create ;
W r i t e l n ( ’M i s n i l : ’ , Not Assigned (M) ) ;
end .
75.11.192 FilePos
Synopsis: Get position in file
Declaration: function FilePos(var f: File) : Int64

Visibility: default
1347
Description: Filepos returns the current record position of the file-pointer in file F. It cannot be invoked with
a file of type Text. A compiler error will be generated if this is attempted. Untyped files have a
default record size of 128, if the second parameter to Reset (1403) isn’t specified.
See also: Filesize (1348)
Program Example23 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e F i l e P o s f u n c t i o n . }
Var F : F i l e of L o n g i n t ;
L , FP : l o n g i n t ;
begin
{ F i l l a f i l e w i t h data :
Each p o s i t i o n c o n t a i n s t h e p o s i t i o n ! }
Assign ( F , ’ t e s t . tmp ’ ) ;
Rewrite ( F ) ;
For L : = 0 to 1 0 0 do
begin
FP: = FilePos ( F ) ;
Write ( F , FP ) ;
end ;
Close ( F ) ;
Reset ( F ) ;
{ I f a l l goes w e l l , n o t h i n g i s d i s p l a y e d here . }
While not ( Eof ( F ) ) do
begin
FP: = FilePos ( F ) ;
Read ( F , L ) ;
i f L<>FP then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Something wrong : Got ’ , l , ’ on pos ’ ,FP ) ;
end ;
Close ( F ) ;
Erase ( f ) ;
end .
75.11.193 FileSize
Synopsis: Size of file
Declaration: function FileSize(var f: File) : Int64
Visibility: default
Description: Filesize returns the total number of records in file F. It cannot be invoked with a file of type
Text. (under linux and unix, this also means that it cannot be invoked on pipes). If F is empty, 0
is returned. Untyped files have a default record size of 128, if the second parameter to Reset (1403)
isn’t specified.
1348
See also: Filepos (1347)
Program Example24 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e F i l e S i z e f u n c t i o n . }
Var F : F i l e Of b y t e ;
L : F i l e Of L o n g i n t ;
begin
Assign ( F , paramstr ( 1 ) ) ;
Reset ( F ) ;
Writeln ( ’ F i l e size i n bytes : ’ , FileSize (F ) ) ;
Close ( F ) ;
Assign ( L , paramstr ( 1 ) ) ;
Reset ( L ) ;
Writeln ( ’ F i l e size i n Longints : ’ , FileSize ( L ) ) ;
Close ( f ) ;
end .
75.11.194 FillByte
Synopsis: Fill memory region with 8-bit pattern
Declaration: procedure FillByte(var x;count: SizeInt;value: Byte)
Visibility: default
Description: FillByte fills the memory starting at X with Count bytes with value equal to Value. This is
useful for quickly zeroing out a memory location. When the size of the memory location to be filled
out is a multiple of 2 bytes, it is better to use Fillword (1351), and if it is a multiple of 4 bytes it is
better to use FillDWord (1350), these routines are optimized for their respective sizes.
Errors: No checking on the size of X is done.
See also: Fillchar (1350), FillDWord (1350), Fillword (1351), Move (1387)
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e F i l l B y t e f u n c t i o n . }
Var S : S t r i n g [ 1 0 ] ;
I : Byte ;
begin
For i : = 1 0 downto 0 do
begin
{ F i l l S with i bytes }
F i l l B y t e ( S , SizeOf (S ) , 3 2 ) ;
{ Set Length }
SetLength ( S , I ) ;
Writeln ( s , ’ ∗ ’ ) ;
end ;
end .
1349
75.11.195 FillChar
Synopsis: Fill memory region with certain character
Declaration: procedure FillChar(var x;count: SizeInt;Value: Byte)
procedure FillChar(var x;count: SizeInt;Value: Boolean)
procedure FillChar(var x;count: SizeInt;Value: Char)
Visibility: default
Description: Fillchar fills the memory starting at X with Count bytes or characters with value equal to
Value.
See also: Fillword (1351), Move (1387), FillByte (1349), FillDWord (1350)
Program Example25 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e F i l l C h a r f u n c t i o n . }
Var S : S t r i n g [ 1 0 ] ;
I : Byte ;
begin
For i : = 1 0 downto 0 do
begin
{ F i l l S w i t h i spaces }
F i l l C h a r ( S , SizeOf (S ) , ’ ’ ) ;
{ Set Length }
SetLength ( S , I ) ;
Writeln ( s , ’ ∗ ’ ) ;
end ;
end .
75.11.196 FillDWord
Declaration: procedure FillDWord(var x;count: SizeInt;value: DWord)
Visibility: default
Description: Fillword fills the memory starting at X with Count DWords with value equal to Value. A
DWord is 4 bytes in size.
See also: FillByte (1349), Fillchar (1350), Fillword (1351), Move (1387)
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e F i l l D W o r d f u n c t i o n . }
Const
ArraySize = 1000;
1350
Var
S : Array [ 1 . . A r r a y S i z e ] of DWord ;
I : longint ;
begin
F i l l D W o r d ( S , ArraySize , 0 ) ;
I f S [ i ] < >0 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ P o s i t i o n ’ , i , ’ n o t zeroed o u t ’ ) ;
end .
75.11.197 FillQWord
Synopsis: Fill memory range with QWord (64-bit) values
Declaration: procedure FillQWord(var x;count: SizeInt;value: QWord)

Visibility: default
Description: FillQWord fills the memory location of x with Count times value. The size of the filled
memory location is therefor 8*count bytes.
Errors: No checks are made to see if X actually has a minimum size of (Count*8) bytes. Therefor, other
variables can be overwritten or the memory may be out of the accessible memory for the program.
In the latter case a run-error or exception may be triggered.
See also: FillChar (1350), FillWord (1351)
75.11.198 FillWord
Declaration: procedure FillWord(var x;count: SizeInt;Value: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: Fillword fills the memory starting at X with Count words with value equal to Value. A word
is 2 bytes in size.
See also: Fillchar (1350), Move (1387)
Program Example76 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e F i l l W o r d f u n c t i o n . }
Var W : Array [ 1 . . 1 0 0 ] of Word ;
begin
{ Quick i n i t i a l i z a t i o n o f a r r a y W }
F i l l W o r d (W, 1 0 0 , 0 ) ;
end .
1351
75.11.199 Finalize
Synopsis: Finalize (clean up) memory block using RTTI
Declaration: procedure Finalize(var T: TAnyType;ACount: Integer)

Visibility: default
Description: Finalize is a compiler intrinsic: it cleans up (finalizes) a memory area T for any kind of managed
variable. Finalizing means decreasing reference counts where necessaru and generally zeroeing out
the memory area. It performs the opposite operation of initialize (1371).
The optional ACount parameter can be used to initialize an array.
For examples, see initialize (1371).
See also: initialize (1371), Default (1333), TypeInfo (1439)
75.11.200 FinalizeArray
Synopsis: Finalize managed-type elements in array
Declaration: procedure FinalizeArray(p: Pointer;typeInfo: Pointer;count: SizeInt)
Visibility: default
Description: FinalizeArray dereferences and clears managed types in the array pointed to by p. For this, it
uses the type information of the elements as specified in typeinfo.
compiler when an array-typed variable containing managed types goes out of scope.
See also: InitializeArray (1373), CopyArray (1331), DynArraySize (1339), DynArrayClear (1338), DynAr-
rayDim (1338), DynArrayBounds (1338)
75.11.201 FindResource
Synopsis: Locate a resource and return a handle to it.
Declaration: function FindResource(ModuleHandle: TFPResourceHMODULE;
ResourceName: PChar;ResourceType: PChar)
: TFPResourceHandle
function FindResource(ModuleHandle: TFPResourceHMODULE;
ResourceName: AnsiString;ResourceType: AnsiString)
: TFPResourceHandle
Visibility: default
Description: FindResource searches for a resource with name ResourceName and of type ResourceType
in the executable or library identified by ModuleHandle. It returns a TResourceHandle which
can be used to load the resource with LoadResource (1383).
Errors: None. In case the resource was not found, 0 is returned.
See also: FreeResource (1357), LoadResource (1383), SizeofResource (1424), LockResource (1383), Un-
lockResource (1442), FreeResource (1357)
1352
75.11.202 FindResourceEx
Synopsis: Find a resource based on type, name, language
Declaration: function FindResourceEx(ModuleHandle: TFPResourceHMODULE;
Language: Word) : TFPResourceHandle
function FindResourceEx(ModuleHandle: TFPResourceHMODULE;
ResourceType: AnsiString;
ResourceName: AnsiString;Language: Word)
: TFPResourceHandle
Visibility: default
Description: FindResourceEx looks in module ModuleHandle for a resource of type ResourceType
and name ResourceName with languague ID Language. Both Resourcename and ResourceName
can be specified as a null-terminated array of characters, or as an AnsiString.
If the requested language/sublanguage is not found, then the search is conducted
1.with only primary language.

2.with the neutral language (LANG_NEUTRAL)
3.with the english language
If none of these has returned a match, then the first available language is returned.
If a match is found, a handle to the resource is returned. If none is found, an empty handle (nil or 0)
is returned.
Errors: None.
75.11.203 float_raise
Synopsis: Raise floating point exception
Declaration: procedure float_raise(i: TFPUException)
procedure float_raise(i: TFPUExceptionMask)
Visibility: default
Description: float_raise raises the floating point exceptions specified by softfloat_exception_flags (1291).
See also: softfloat_exception_flags (1291), softfloat_exception_mask (1291)
75.11.204 Flush
Synopsis: Write file buffers to disk
Declaration: procedure Flush(var t: Text)
Visibility: default
Description: Flush empties the internal buffer of an opened file F and writes the contents to disk. The file is
\textit{not} closed as a result of this call.
See also: Close (1324)
1353
Program Example26 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Flush f u n c t i o n . }
Var F : Text ;
begin
{ Assign F t o s t a n d a r d o u t p u t }
Assign ( F , ’ ’ ) ;
Rewrite ( F ) ;
W r i t e l n ( F , ’ T h i s l i n e i s w r i t t e n f i r s t , b u t appears l a t e r ! ’ ) ;
{ At t h i s p o i n t t h e t e x t i s i n t h e i n t e r n a l p a s c a l b u f f e r ,
and n o t y e t w r i t t e n t o s t a n d a r d o u t p u t }
W r i t e l n ( ’ T h i s l i n e appears f i r s t , b u t i s w r i t t e n l a t e r ! ’ ) ;
{ A w r i t e l n t o ’ o u t p u t ’ always causes a f l u s h − so t h i s t e x t i s
w r i t t e n t o screen }
Flush ( f ) ;
{ At t h i s p o i n t , t h e t e x t w r i t t e n t o F i s w r i t t e n t o screen . }
Write ( F , ’ F i n i s h i n g ’ ) ;
Close ( f ) ; { C l o s i n g a f i l e always causes a f l u s h f i r s t }
Writeln ( ’ o f f . ’ ) ;
end .
75.11.205 FlushThread
Synopsis: Flush all standard files
Declaration: procedure FlushThread
Visibility: default
Description: FlushThread flushes any buffers from standard file descriptors such as standard input/output/er-
ror. It should normally not be called by user code, but is executed when a thread exits.
See also: EndThread (1340)
75.11.206 FMADouble
Synopsis: Internal function, do not use
Declaration: function FMADouble(d1: Double;d2: Double;d3: Double) : Double

Visibility: default
75.11.207 FMAExtended
Declaration: function FMAExtended(e1: extended;e2: extended;e3: extended) : extended
Visibility: default
1354
75.11.208 FMASingle
Declaration: function FMASingle(s1: single;s2: single;s3: single) : single

Visibility: default
75.11.209 fpc_dynarray_rangecheck
Synopsis: Auxiliary compiler routine
Declaration: procedure fpc_dynarray_rangecheck(p: pointer;i: tdynarrayindex)

Visibility: default
Description: fpc_dynarray_rangecheck is an auxiliary routine for checking whether an array index is in
range for the array.
75.11.210 fpc_SarInt64
Synopsis: SAR (int64)
Declaration: function fpc_SarInt64(const AValue: Int64;const Shift: Byte) : Int64
Visibility: default
Description: fpc_SarInt64 is a FPC helper function which should not be used directly.
75.11.211 FPower10
Synopsis: Fast multiply with a power of 10
Declaration: function FPower10(val: Extended;Power: LongInt) : Extended
Visibility: default
Description: FPower10 multplies val with 10 to the power Power. It uses a fast algorithm to calculate the
result.
75.11.212 frac
Synopsis: Return fractional part of floating point value.
Declaration: function frac(d: ValReal) : ValReal

Visibility: default
Description: Frac returns the non-integer part of X.
Errors: None.
See also: Round (1409), Int (1375)
1355
Program Example27 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Frac f u n c t i o n . }
Var R : Real ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( Frac ( 1 2 3 . 4 5 6 ) : 0 : 3 ) ; { P r i n t s O. 4 5 6 }
W r i t e l n ( Frac ( − 1 2 3 . 4 5 6 ) : 0 : 3 ) ; { P r i n t s −O. 4 5 6 }
end .
75.11.213 Freemem
Synopsis: Release allocated memory
Declaration: procedure Freemem(p: pointer;Size: PtrUInt)
function Freemem(p: pointer) : PtrUInt
Visibility: default
Description: Freemem releases the memory occupied by the pointer P, of size Count (in bytes), and returns it
to the heap. P should point to the memory allocated to a dynamic variable.
Errors: An error will occur when P doesn’t point to the heap.
See also: Getmem (1358), New (1389), Dispose (1335)
Program Example28 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e FreeMem and GetMem f u n c t i o n s . }
MM : L o n g i n t ;
begin
{ Get memory f o r P }
GetMem ( P , 8 0 ) ;
F i l l C h a r ( P^ , 8 0 , ’ ’ ) ;
FreeMem ( P , 8 0 ) ;
end .
75.11.214 Freememory
Synopsis: Alias for FreeMem (1356)
Declaration: procedure Freememory(p: pointer;Size: PtrUInt)

function Freememory(p: pointer) : PtrUInt
Visibility: default
Description: FreeMemory is an alias for FreeMem (1356).
See also: FreeMem (1356)
1356
75.11.215 FreeResource
Synopsis: Free a loaded resource
Declaration: function FreeResource(ResData: TFPResourceHGLOBAL) : LongBool

Visibility: default
Description: FreeResource unloads the resource identified by ResData from memory. The resource must
have been loaded by LoadResource (1383). It returns True if the operation was succesful, False
otherwise.
See also: FindResource (1352), LoadResource (1383), SizeofResource (1424), LockResource (1383), Un-
lockResource (1442), FreeResource (1357)
75.11.216 GetCPUCount
Synopsis: Return the number of cores on the system
Declaration: function GetCPUCount : LongWord
Visibility: default
Description: GetCPUCount returns the number of CPU cores on the system. Whether these are physically
separate CPUs or cores on a single CPU is deliberately undefined.
See also: CPUCount (1224)
75.11.217 GetCurrentThreadId
Synopsis: Return the id of the currently running thread.
Declaration: function GetCurrentThreadId : TThreadID

Visibility: default
Description: GetCurrentThreadId returns the ID of the currently running thread. It can be used in calls
such as KillThread (1379) or ThreadSetPriority (1436)
Errors: None.
See also: KillThread (1379), ThreadSetPriority (1436)
75.11.218 getdir
Synopsis: Return the current directory
Declaration: procedure getdir(drivenr: Byte;var dir: shortstring); Overload

procedure getdir(drivenr: Byte;var dir: RawByteString); Overload
procedure getdir(drivenr: Byte;var dir: unicodestring); Overload
Visibility: default
Description: Getdir returns in dir the current directory on the drive drivenr, where {drivenr} is 1 for the
first floppy drive, 3 for the first hard disk etc. A value of 0 returns the directory on the current disk.
On linux and unix systems, drivenr is ignored, as there is only one directory tree.
1357
Errors: An error is returned under dos, if the drive requested isn’t ready.
See also: Chdir (1323)
Program Example29 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e G e t D i r f u n c t i o n . }
begin
GetDir ( 0 , S ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Current d i r e c t o r y i s : ’ ,S ) ;
end .
75.11.219 GetFPCHeapStatus
Synopsis: Return FPC heap manager status information
Declaration: function GetFPCHeapStatus : TFPCHeapStatus

Visibility: default
Description: Return FPC heap manager status information
75.11.220 GetHeapStatus
Synopsis: Return the memory manager heap status.
Declaration: function GetHeapStatus : THeapStatus

Visibility: default
75.11.221 GetMem
Synopsis: Allocate new memory on the heap
Declaration: procedure Getmem(out p: pointer;Size: PtrUInt)

function GetMem(size: PtrUInt) : pointer
Visibility: default
Description: Getmem reserves Size bytes memory on the heap, and returns a pointer to this memory in p. What
happens if no more memory is available, depends on the value of the variable ReturnNilIfGrowHeap-
fails (1291): if the variable is True then Nil is returned. If the variable is False, a run-time error
is generated. The default value is False, so by default an error is generated.
The newly allocated memory is not initialized in any way, and may contain garbage data. It must be
cleared with a call to FillChar (1350) or FillWord (1351).
For an example, see Freemem (1356).
Errors: None.
See also: Freemem (1356), Dispose (1335), New (1389), returnnilifgrowheapfails (1291)
1358
75.11.222 GetMemory
Synopsis: Alias for GetMem (1358)
Declaration: procedure Getmemory(out p: pointer;Size: PtrUInt)

function GetMemory(size: PtrUInt) : pointer
Visibility: default
Description: Getmemory is an alias for GetMem (1358).
See also: GetMem (1358)
75.11.223 GetMemoryManager
Synopsis: Return current memory manager
Declaration: procedure GetMemoryManager(var MemMgr: TMemoryManager)
Visibility: default
Description: GetMemoryManager stores the current Memory Manager record in MemMgr.
For an example, see the programmer’s guide.
Errors: None.
See also: SetMemoryManager (1417), IsMemoryManagerSet (1379)
75.11.224 GetProcessID
Synopsis: Get the current process ID
Declaration: function GetProcessID : SizeUInt
Visibility: default
Description: GetProcessID returns the current process ID. The meaning of the return value of this call is
system dependent.
Errors: None.
See also: GetThreadID (1360)
75.11.225 GetResourceManager
Synopsis: Return the currently active resource manager
Declaration: procedure GetResourceManager(var Manager: TResourceManager)
Visibility: default
Description: GetResourceManager returns the currently active resource manager record in Manager. There
is always an active resource manager record.
Errors: None.
See also: TResourceManager (1275), SetResourceManager (1419)
1359
75.11.226 GetTextCodePage
Synopsis: Get the codepage used in a text file.
Declaration: function GetTextCodePage(var T: Text) : TSystemCodePage
Visibility: default
Description: GetTextCodePage returns the codepage that the text file T uses. All strings written to the file
will be converted to the indicated codepage. By default, the codepage is set to CP_ACP.
Errors: None.
See also: TextRec (1269), SetTextCodePage (1420)
75.11.227 GetThreadID
Synopsis: Get the current Thread ID.
Declaration: function GetThreadID : TThreadID
Visibility: default
Description: GetThreadID returns the current process ID. The meaning of the return value of this call is system
dependent.
See also: GetProcessID (1359)
75.11.228 GetThreadManager
Synopsis: Return the current thread manager
Declaration: function GetThreadManager(var TM: TThreadManager) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: GetThreadManager returns the currently used thread manager in TM.
See also: SetThreadManager (1421), TThreadManager (1279)
75.11.229 GetUnicodeStringManager
Synopsis: Return a copy of the currently active unicodetring manager.
Declaration: procedure GetUnicodeStringManager(var Manager: TUnicodeStringManager)
Visibility: default
Description: GetUnicodeStringManager returns a copy of the currently active unicode string manager in
Old
UnicodeStrings are implemented in different ways on different platforms. Therefore, the Free Pascal
Runtime library has no fixed implementation of widestring routines. Instead, it defines a Unicode-
StringManager record, with callbacks that can be set to an implementation which is most efficient on
the current platform. On windows, standard Windows routines will be used. On Unix and Linux, an
implementation based on the C library is available (in unit cwstring).
It is possible to implement a custom unicodestring manager, optimized for the current application,
without having to recompile the complete Run-Time Library.
See also: SetUnicodeStringManager (1421), TUnicodeStringManager (1280)
1360
75.11.230 GetVariantManager
Synopsis: Return the current variant manager.
Declaration: procedure GetVariantManager(var VarMgr: tvariantmanager)

Visibility: default
Description: GetVariantManager returns the current variant manager in varmgr.
See also: SetVariantManager (1422)
75.11.231 GetWideStringManager
Synopsis: Return a copy of the currently active widestring manager.
Declaration: procedure GetWideStringManager(var Manager: TUnicodeStringManager)
Visibility: default
Description: GetWideStringManager returns a copy of the currently active heap manager in Old
WideStrings are implemented in different ways on different platforms. Therefore, the Free Pascal
Runtime library has no fixed implementation of widestring routines. Instead, it defines a WideString
manager record, with callbacks that can be set to an implementation which is most efficient on the
current platform. On windows, standard Windows routines will be used. On Unix and Linux, an
It is possible to implement a custom widestring manager, optimized for the current application, with-
out having to recompile the complete Run-Time Library.
See also: SetWideStringManager (1422), TWideStringManager (1286)
75.11.232 get_caller_addr
Synopsis: Return the address of the caller.
Declaration: function get_caller_addr(framebp: pointer;addr: CodePointer)
: CodePointer
Visibility: default
Description: get_caller_frame returns a pointer to address ( the return address) of the caller of the routine
which has as frame framebp.
See also: get_frame (1362), get_caller_frame (1361), Dump_Stack (1338)
75.11.233 get_caller_frame
Synopsis: Return the frame pointer of the caller
Declaration: function get_caller_frame(framebp: pointer;addr: CodePointer) : pointer
Visibility: default
Description: get_caller_frame returns a pointer to the frame of the caller of the routine which has as frame
framebp.
See also: get_caller_addr (1361), get_frame (1362), Dump_Stack (1338)
1361
75.11.234 get_caller_stackinfo
Synopsis: Return caller stack infomation
Declaration: procedure get_caller_stackinfo(var framebp: pointer;

var addr: CodePointer)
Visibility: default
Description: get_caller_stackinfo returns caller address in addr and frame base pointer in framebp.
See also: CaptureBacktrace (1322), Get_pc_addr (1362), get_caller_addr (1361), get_caller_frame (1361)
75.11.235 get_cmdline
Synopsis: Return the command-line as a null-terminated string
Declaration: function get_cmdline : PChar
Visibility: default
Description: get_cmdline returns the complete command-line as a null-terminated string. It is not recom-
mended to use this function, since it builds a complete value from the actual command-line argu-
ments. Instead, ParamCount (1393) and ParamStr (1393) should be used.
See also: ParamCount (1393), ParamStr (1393)
75.11.236 get_frame
Synopsis: Return the current frame
Declaration: function get_frame : pointer
Visibility: default
Description: get_frame returns a pointer to the current stack frame.

See also: get_caller_addr (1361), get_caller_frame (1361)
75.11.237 Get_pc_addr
Synopsis: Get Program Counter address
Declaration: function Get_pc_addr : CodePointer

Visibility: default
Description: Get_pc_addr returns the program counter address (current execution address).
See also: CaptureBacktrace (1322), get_caller_stackinfo (1362), get_caller_addr (1361), get_caller_frame

(1361)
1362
75.11.238 greaterthan(variant,variant):Boolean
Synopsis: Implement > (greater than) operation on variants.
Declaration: operator >(const op1: variant;const op2: variant) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: The implementation of the "greater than" comparison (>) operation is delegated to the variant
manager with operation opcmpgt.
75.11.239 greaterthanorequal(variant,variant):Boolean
Synopsis: Implement >= (greater than or equal) operation on variants.
Declaration: operator >=(const op1: variant;const op2: variant) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: The implementation of the "greater than or equal" comparison (>=) operation is delegated to the
variant manager with operation opcmpge.
75.11.240 halt
Synopsis: Stop program execution.
Declaration: procedure halt(errnum: LongInt)
procedure halt
Visibility: default
Description: Halt stops program execution and returns control to the calling program. The optional argument
Errnum specifies an exit value. If omitted, zero is returned.
Errors: None.
See also: Exit (1345)
Program Example30 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e H a l t f u n c t i o n . }
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Before H a l t . ’ ) ;
H a l t ( 1 ) ; { Stop w i t h e x i t code 1 }
W r i t e l n ( ’ A f t e r H a l t doesn ’ ’ t g e t executed . ’ ) ;
end .
1363
75.11.241 hexStr
Synopsis: Convert integer value to string with hexadecimal representation.
Declaration: function hexStr(Val: LongInt;cnt: Byte) : shortstring

function hexStr(Val: Int64;cnt: Byte) : shortstring
function hexStr(Val: QWord;cnt: Byte) : shortstring
function hexStr(Val: Pointer) : shortstring
Visibility: default
Description: HexStr returns a string with the hexadecimal representation of Value. The string has exactly
cnt charaters. (i.e. only the cnt rightmost nibbles are taken into account) To have a complete
representation of a Longint-type value, 8 nibbles are needed, i.e. cnt=8.
Errors: None.
See also: Str (1427), Val (1445), BinStr (1317)
Program example81 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e HexStr f u n c t i o n }
begin
For I : = 1 to 1 0 do
W r i t e l n ( HexStr ( Value , I ) ) ;
end .
75.11.242 hi
Synopsis: Return high byte/word/nibble of value.
Declaration: function hi(b: Byte) : Byte
function hi(i: Integer) : Byte
function hi(w: Word) : Byte
function hi(l: LongInt) : Word
function hi(l: DWord) : Word
function hi(i: Int64) : DWord
function hi(q: QWord) : DWord
Visibility: default
Description: Hi returns the high nibble, byte or word from X, depending on the size of X. If the size of X is 4,
then the high word is returned. If the size is 2 then the high byte is returned. If the size is 1, the high
nibble is returned.
Errors: None
See also: Lo (1382)
1364
Program Example31 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Hi f u n c t i o n . }
var
L : Longint ;
W : Word ;
B : Byte ;
begin
L : = 1 Shl 1 6 ; { = $10000 }
W: = 1 Shl 8 ; { = $100 }
B : = 1 Shl 4 ; { = $10 }
W r i t e l n ( Hi ( L ) ) ; { Prints 1 }
W r i t e l n ( Hi (W) ) ; { Prints 1 }
W r i t e l n ( Hi (B ) ) ; { Prints 1 }
end .
75.11.243 High
Synopsis: Return highest index of open array or enumerated
Declaration: function High(Arg: TypeOrVariable) : TOrdinal
Visibility: default
Description: The return value of High depends on it’s argument:
1.If the argument is an ordinal type, High returns the highest value in the range of the given
ordinal type.
2.If the argument is an array type or an array type variable then High returns the highest possible
value of it’s index. For dynamic arrays, it returns the same as Length -1, meaning that it
reports -1 for empty arrays.
3.If the argument is an open array identifier in a function or procedure, then High returns the
highest index of the array, as if the array has a zero-based index. If the array is empty, then -1
is returned.
4.If the argument is a set type then it returns the highest value of the underlying ordinal type.
The return type is always the same type as the type of the argument (This can lead to some nasty
surprises !).
Errors: None.
See also: Low (1385), Ord (1392), Pred (1396), Succ (1431)
Program example80 ;
{ Example t o demonstrate t h e High and Low f u n c t i o n s . }
Type TEnum = ( North , East , South , West ) ;

TRange = 1 4 . . 5 5 ;
TArray = Array [ 2 . . 1 0 ] of L o n g i n t ;
1365
Function Average ( Row : Array of L o n g i n t ) : Real ;
Temp : Real ;
begin
Temp : = Row [ 0 ] ;
For I : = 1 to High (Row ) do
Temp : = Temp + Row [ i ] ;
Average : = Temp / ( High (Row ) + 1 ) ;
end ;
Var A : TEnum ;
B : TRange ;
C : TArray ;
I : longint ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’TEnum goes from : ’ , Ord (Low(TEnum ) ) , ’ t o ’ , Ord ( high (TEnum ) ) , ’ . ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’A goes from : ’ , Ord (Low(A ) ) , ’ t o ’ , Ord ( high (A ) ) , ’ . ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ TRange goes from : ’ , Ord (Low( TRange ) ) , ’ t o ’ , Ord ( high ( TRange ) ) , ’ . ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’B goes from : ’ , Ord (Low(B ) ) , ’ t o ’ , Ord ( high (B ) ) , ’ . ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ TArray i n d e x goes from : ’ , Ord (Low( TArray ) ) , ’ t o ’ , Ord ( high ( TArray ) ) , ’ . ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’C i n d e x goes from : ’ ,Low(C) , ’ t o ’ , high (C) , ’ . ’ ) ;
For I : =Low(C ) to High (C ) do
C[ i ] : = I ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Average : ’ , Average ( c ) ) ;
Write ( ’ Type o f r e t u r n v a l u e i s always same as t y p e o f argument : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( high ( high ( word ) ) ) ;
end .
75.11.244 HINSTANCE
Synopsis: Windows compatibility type for use in resources
Declaration: function HINSTANCE : TFPResourceHMODULE

Visibility: default
Description: This is an opaque type.
75.11.245 Inc
Synopsis: Increase value of integer variable
Declaration: procedure Inc(var X: TOrdinal)
procedure Inc(var X: TOrdinal;Increment: TOrdinal)
Visibility: default
Description: Inc increases the value of X with Increment. If Increment isn’t specified, then 1 is taken as a
default.
Errors: If range checking is on, then A range check can occur, or an overflow error, when an attempt is made
to increase X over its maximum value.
1366
See also: Dec (1333)
Program Example32 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e I n c f u n c t i o n . }
Const
C : Cardinal = 1;
L : Longint = 1;
I : Integer = 1;
W : Word = 1;
B : Byte = 1;
SI : S h o r t I n t = 1;
CH : Char = ’A ’ ;
begin
Inc (C) ; { C: = 2 }
Inc (L,5); { L:=6 }
Inc ( I , −3); { I := −2 }
Inc (W, 3 ) ; { W: = 4 }
Inc ( B, 1 0 0 ) ; { B: = 1 0 1 }
Inc ( SI , − 3 ) ; { S i := −2 }
Inc ( CH, 1 ) ; { ch : = ’ B ’ }
end .
75.11.246 Include
Synopsis: Include element in set if it was not yet present.
Declaration: procedure Include(var S: TSetType;E: TSetElement)
Visibility: default
Description: Include includes E in the set S if it is not yet part of the set. E should be of the same type as the
base type of the set S.
Thus, the two following statements do the same thing:
S:=S+[E];
Include(S,E);
For an example, see Exclude (1344)

Errors: If the type of the element E is not equal to the base type of the set S, the compiler will generate an
error.
See also: Exclude (1344)
75.11.247 IndexByte
Synopsis: Search for a byte in a memory range.
Declaration: function IndexByte(const buf;len: SizeInt;b: Byte) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
1367
Description: IndexByte searches the memory at buf for maximally len positions for the byte b and returns
it’s position if it found one. If b is not found then -1 is returned. The position is zero-based.
Errors: Buf and Len are not checked to see if they are valid values.
See also: IndexChar (1368), IndexDWord (1369), IndexWord (1370), CompareByte (1324)
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e IndexByte f u n c t i o n . }
Const
ArraySize = 2 5 6 ;
MaxValue = 2 5 6 ;
Var
B u f f e r : Array [ 1 . . A r r a y S i z e ] of Byte ;
I , J : longint ;
K : Byte ;
begin
Randomize ;
For I : = 1 To A r r a y S i z e do
B u f f e r [ I ] : = Random( MaxValue ) ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 do
begin
K: =Random( MaxValue ) ;
J : = IndexByte ( B u f f e r , ArraySize , K ) ;
i f J=−1 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Value ’ ,K , ’ was n o t found i n b u f f e r . ’ )
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ Found ’ ,K , ’ a t p o s i t i o n ’ , J , ’ i n b u f f e r ’ ) ;
end ;
end .
75.11.248 IndexChar
Synopsis: Search for a character in a memory range.
Declaration: function IndexChar(const buf;len: SizeInt;b: Char) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: IndexChar searches the memory at buf for maximally len positions for the character b and
returns it’s position if it found one. If b is not found then -1 is returned. The position is zero-based.
The IndexChar0 variant stops looking if a null character is found, and returns -1 in that case.
See also: IndexByte (1367), IndexDWord (1369), IndexWord (1370), CompareChar (1325)
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e IndexChar f u n c t i o n . }
1368
Const
ArraySize = 1000;
MaxValue = 2 6 ;
Var
B u f f e r : Array [ 1 . . A r r a y S i z e ] of Char ;
I , J : longint ;
K : Char ;
begin
Randomize ;
B u f f e r [ I ] : = chr ( Ord ( ’A ’ )+Random( MaxValue ) ) ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 do
begin
K: = chr ( Ord ( ’A ’ )+Random( MaxValue ) ) ;
J : = IndexChar ( B u f f e r , ArraySize , K ) ;
i f J=−1 then
else
end ;
end .
75.11.249 IndexChar0
Synopsis: Return index of a character in null-terminated array of char.
Declaration: function IndexChar0(const buf;len: SizeInt;b: Char) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: IndexChar0 returns the index of the character b in the null-terminated array Buf. At most len
characters will be searched, or the null character if it is encountered first. If the character is not found,
-1 is returned.

See also: IndexByte (1367), IndexChar (1368), IndexWord (1370), IndexDWord (1369), CompareChar0 (1327)
75.11.250 IndexDWord
Synopsis: Search for a DWord value in a memory range.
Declaration: function IndexDWord(const buf;len: SizeInt;b: DWord) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: IndexDWord searches the memory at buf for maximally len positions for the DWord DW and
returns it’s position if it found one. If DW is not found then -1 is returned. The position is zero-based.
See also: IndexByte (1367), IndexChar (1368), IndexWord (1370), CompareDWord (1327)
1369
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e IndexDWord f u n c t i o n . }
Const
ArraySize = 1000;
MaxValue = 1 0 0 0 ;
Var
B u f f e r : Array [ 1 . . A r r a y S i z e ] of DWord ;
I , J : longint ;
K : DWord ;
begin
Randomize ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 do
begin
J : = IndexDWord ( B u f f e r , ArraySize , K ) ;
i f J=−1 then
else
end ;
end .
75.11.251 IndexQWord
Synopsis: Return the position of a QWord in a memory range
Declaration: function IndexQWord(const buf;len: SizeInt;b: QWord) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: IndexQWord checks the first len qwords starting at Buf, and returns the position (zero-based) of
b. If b does not appear in the first len qwords, then -1 is returned.
Note that the search is done on QWord boundaries, but that the address of buf need not be on a
QWord boundary.
Errors: No check is done to see whether the indicated memory range is valid. If it is not, a run-error or
exception may be triggered.
See also: IndexDWord (1369)
75.11.252 Indexword
Synopsis: Search for a WORD value in a memory range.
Declaration: function Indexword(const buf;len: SizeInt;b: Word) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: IndexWord searches the memory at buf for maximally len positions for the Word W and returns
it’s position if it found one. If W is not found then -1 is returned.
1370
See also: IndexByte (1367), IndexDWord (1369), IndexChar (1368), CompareWord (1328)
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e IndexWord f u n c t i o n . }
Const
ArraySize = 1000;
MaxValue = 1 0 0 0 ;
Var
B u f f e r : Array [ 1 . . A r r a y S i z e ] of Word ;
I , J : longint ;
K : Word ;
begin
Randomize ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 do
begin
J : = IndexWord ( B u f f e r , ArraySize , K ) ;
i f J=−1 then
else
end ;
end .
75.11.253 InitCriticalSection
Synopsis: Initialize a critical section
Declaration: procedure InitCriticalSection(var cs: TRTLCriticalSection)
Visibility: default
Description: InitCriticalSection initializes a critical section CS for use. Before using a critical section
with EnterCriticalsection (1340) or LeaveCriticalsection (1380) the critical section should be initial-
ized with InitCriticalSection.
When a critical section is no longer used, it should be disposed of with DoneCriticalsection (1336)
See also: DoneCriticalsection (1336), EnterCriticalsection (1340), LeaveCriticalsection (1380)
75.11.254 Initialize
Synopsis: Initialize memory block using RTTI
Declaration: procedure Initialize(var T: TAnyType;ACount: Integer)
Visibility: default
1371
Description: Initialize is a compiler intrinsic: it initializes a memory area T for any kind of managed vari-
able. Initializing means zeroeing out the memory area. In this sense it is close in functionality to
Default (1333), but Default requires an already initialized variable. It performs the opposite op-
eration of finalize (1352), which should be used to clean up the memory block when it is no longer
needed.
The optional ACount parameter can be used to initialize an array. It then specifies the number of
elements in the array.
See also: finalize (1352), Default (1333), TypeInfo (1439)
{
T h i s example demonstrates t h e use o f t h e I n i t i a l i z e and F i n a l i z e f u n c t i o n s
used t o i n i t i a l i z e ( and c l e a n up ) any RTTI−enabled data n o t a l l o c a t e d w i t h
New o r Create .
}
{ $h+ } / / use a n s i s t r i n g s , t h e y need t o be i n i t i a l i z e d .
Type
PData = ^ TData ;
TData = record
S t r e e t , C i t y , Zip , Country , T e l : S t r i n g ;
StreetNumber : I n t e g e r ;
end ;
var
Data : PData ;
begin
/ / Do n o t use New .
GetMem( Data , SizeOf ( TData ) ) ;
Try
{ I n i t i a l i z e t h e s t r u c t u r e i n memory , u s i n g Run−Time Type I n f o r m a t i o n }
I n i t i a l i z e ( Data ^ ) ;
{ Assign some s t r i n g data t o t h e a n s i s t r i n g c o n t e n t s .
Note t h a t t h i s o n l y works because t h e r e c o r d was zeroed o u t by I n i t i a l i z e }
Data ^ . S t r e e t : = ’ Sesame S t r e e t ’ ;
Data ^ . C i t y : = ’ Heaven ’ ;
Data ^ . Z i p : = ’ 7777777 ’ ;
Data ^ . Country : = ’ Spain ’ ;
Data ^ . StreetNumber : = 3 ;
Finally
{ Clean up t h e r e c o r d c o n t e n t s .
Again , t h e s t r u c t u r e o f t h e r e c o r d i s d e t e c t e d t h r o u g h
Run−t i m e Type I n f o r m a t i o n }
F i n a l i z e ( Data ^ ) ;
FreeMem ( Data ) ;
end ;
end .
{
T h i s example demonstrates t h e use o f t h e I n i t i a l i z e and F i n a l i z e f u n c t i o n s
used t o i n i t i a l i z e ( and c l e a n up ) any RTTI−enabled data n o t a l l o c a t e d w i t h
New o r Create .
1372
{ $h+ } / / use a n s i s t r i n g s , t h e y need t o be i n i t i a l i z e d .
Type
PData = ^ TData ;
TData = record
S t r e e t , C i t y , Zip , Country , T e l : S t r i n g ;
StreetNumber : I n t e g e r ;
end ;
var
Data : PData ;
begin
/ / We use t h e f a c t t h a t a p o i n t e r i s a l s o usable as an a r r a y .
GetMem( Data , SizeOf ( TData ) ∗ 2 ) ;
Try
{ I n i t i a l i z e t h e s t r u c t u r e i n memory , u s i n g Run−Time Type I n f o r m a t i o n }
I n i t i a l i z e ( Data ^ , 2 ) ;
{ Assign some s t r i n g data t o t h e a n s i s t r i n g c o n t e n t s .
Note t h a t t h i s o n l y works because t h e r e c o r d was zeroed o u t by I n i t i a l i z e }
Data [ 0 ] . S t r e e t : = ’ Sesame S t r e e t ’ ;
Data [ 0 ] . C i t y : = ’ Heaven ’ ;
Data [ 0 ] . Z i p : = ’ 7777777 ’ ;
Data [ 0 ] . Country : = ’ Spain ’ ;
Data [ 0 ] . StreetNumber : = 3 ;
/ / Second , w e l l known s t r e e t
Data [ 1 ] . S t r e e t : = ’ Wall S t r e e t ’ ;
Data [ 1 ] . C i t y : = ’New York ’ ;
Data [ 1 ] . Z i p : = ’ 10005 ’ ;
Data [ 1 ] . Country : = ’USA ’ ;
Data [ 1 ] . StreetNumber : = 1 1 ;
Finally
{ Clean up t h e r e c o r d c o n t e n t s .
Again , t h e s t r u c t u r e o f t h e r e c o r d i s d e t e c t e d t h r o u g h
Run−t i m e Type I n f o r m a t i o n }
F i n a l i z e ( Data ^ ) ;
FreeMem ( Data ) ;
end ;
end .
75.11.255 InitializeArray
Synopsis: Initialize managed-type elements in array
Declaration: procedure InitializeArray(p: Pointer;typeInfo: Pointer;count: SizeInt)
Visibility: default
Description: InitializeArray initializes managed types in the array pointed to by p. For this, it uses the
type information of the elements as specified in typeinfo.
compiler when an array-typed variable is declared and the array contains elements with managed
types.
See also: FinalizeArray (1352), CopyArray (1331)
1373
75.11.256 InitThread
Synopsis: Initialize a thread
Declaration: procedure InitThread(stklen: SizeUInt)
Visibility: default
Description: Do not use, this is used internally by the thread manager.
75.11.257 InitThreadVars
Synopsis: Initialize threadvars
Declaration: procedure InitThreadVars(RelocProc: TRelocateThreadVarHandler)
Visibility: default
Description: This routine should be called when threading is started. It is called by the compiler and should never
be called manually, only from a thread manager.
Errors: None.
See also: TThreadManager (1279)
75.11.258 Insert
Synopsis: Insert one string in another.
Declaration: procedure Insert(const source: shortstring;var s: shortstring;
index: SizeInt)
procedure Insert(source: Char;var s: shortstring;index: SizeInt)
procedure Insert(const Source: RawByteString;var S: RawByteString;
Index: SizeInt)
procedure Insert(const Source: UnicodeString;var S: UnicodeString;
Index: SizeInt)
procedure Insert(const Source: WideString;var S: WideString;
Index: SizeInt)
Visibility: default
Description: Insert inserts string Source in string S, at position Index, shifting all characters after Index
to the right. The resulting string is truncated at 255 characters, if needed. (i.e. for shortstrings)
Errors: None.
See also: Delete (1334), Copy (1331), Pos (1394)
Program Example33 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e I n s e r t f u n c t i o n . }
begin
S: = ’ Free Pascal i s d i f f i c u l t t o use ! ’ ;
I n s e r t ( ’NOT ’ ,S , pos ( ’ d i f f i c u l t ’ ,S ) ) ;
1374
writeln ( s ) ;
end .
75.11.259 int
Synopsis: Calculate integer part of floating point value.
Declaration: function int(d: ValReal) : ValReal
Visibility: default
Description: Int returns the integer part of any Real X, as a Real.
Errors: None.
See also: Frac (1355), Round (1409)
Program Example34 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e I n t f u n c t i o n . }
begin
Writeln ( I n t ( 1 2 3 . 4 5 6 ) : 0 : 1 ) ; { P r i n t s 123.0 }
W r i t e l n ( I n t ( − 1 2 3 . 4 5 6 ) : 0 : 1 ) ; { P r i n t s −123.0 }
end .
75.11.260 intdivide(variant,variant):variant
Synopsis: Implement div (integer division) operation on variants.
Declaration: operator div(const op1: variant;const op2: variant) : variant
Visibility: default
Description: The implementation of the integer division Div operation is delegated to the variant manager with
operation opintdivide.
See also: operator mod(variant, variant): variant (1224)
75.11.261 InterlockedCompareExchange
Synopsis: Conditional exchange
Declaration: function InterlockedCompareExchange(var Target: LongInt;
NewValue: LongInt;Comperand: LongInt)
: LongInt
function InterlockedCompareExchange(var Target: Pointer;
NewValue: Pointer;Comperand: Pointer)
: Pointer
function InterlockedCompareExchange(var Target: Cardinal;
NewValue: Cardinal;
Comperand: Cardinal) : Cardinal
1375
Visibility: default
Description: InterlockedCompareExchange does an compare-and-exchange operation on the specified
values in a thread-safe way. The function compares Target and Comparand and exchanges
Target with NewValue if Target and Comparand are equal. It returns the old value of
Target. This is done in a thread-safe way, i.e., only one processor is accessing the Target variable
at a time.
Errors: None.
See also: InterLockedDecrement (1376), InterLockedIncrement (1377), InterLockedExchange (1376), Inter-
LockedExchangeAdd (1377)
75.11.262 InterLockedDecrement
Synopsis: Thread-safe decrement
Declaration: function InterLockedDecrement(var Target: LongInt) : LongInt
function InterLockedDecrement(var Target: Pointer) : Pointer
function InterLockedDecrement(var Target: Cardinal) : Cardinal
Visibility: default
Description: InterLockedDecrement decrements Target with 1 and returns the result. This is done in a
thread-safe way. (i.e. only one processor is accessing the variable at a time).
Errors: None.
See also: InterLockedIncrement (1377), InterLockedExchange (1376), InterLockedExchangeAdd (1377), In-

terlockedCompareExchange (1375)
75.11.263 InterLockedExchange
Synopsis: Exchange 2 integers in a thread-safe way
Declaration: function InterLockedExchange(var Target: LongInt;Source: LongInt)
: LongInt
function InterLockedExchange(var Target: Pointer;Source: Pointer)
: Pointer
function InterLockedExchange(var Target: Cardinal;Source: Cardinal)
: Cardinal
Visibility: default
Description: InterLockedExchange stores Source in Target and returns the old value of Target. This
is done in a thread-safe way, i.e., only one processor is accessing the Target variable at a time.
Errors: None.
See also: InterLockedDecrement (1376), InterLockedIncrement (1377), InterLockedExchangeAdd (1377), In-

1376
75.11.264 InterLockedExchangeAdd
Synopsis: Thread-safe add and exchange of 2 values
Declaration: function InterLockedExchangeAdd(var Target: LongInt;Source: LongInt)
: LongInt
function InterLockedExchangeAdd(var Target: Pointer;Source: Pointer)
: Pointer
function InterLockedExchangeAdd(var Target: Cardinal;Source: Cardinal)
: Cardinal
Visibility: default
Description: InterLockedExchangeAdd adds to Target the value of Source in a thread-safe way, and
returns the old value of Target.This is done in a thread-safe way, i.e., only one processor is access-
ing the Target variable at a time.
Errors: None.
See also: InterLockedDecrement (1376), InterLockedIncrement (1377), InterLockedExchange (1376), Inter-
lockedCompareExchange (1375)
75.11.265 InterLockedIncrement
Synopsis: Thread-safe increment
Declaration: function InterLockedIncrement(var Target: LongInt) : LongInt
function InterLockedIncrement(var Target: Pointer) : Pointer
function InterLockedIncrement(var Target: Cardinal) : Cardinal
Visibility: default
Description: InterLockedIncrement increments Target with 1 and returns the result. This is done in a
thread-safe way (i.e. only one processor is accessing the variable at a time).
Errors: None.
See also: InterLockedDecrement (1376), InterLockedExchange (1376), InterLockedExchangeAdd (1377), In-
75.11.266 IOResult
Synopsis: Return result of last file IO operation
Declaration: function IOResult : Word
Visibility: default
Description: IOresult contains the result of any input/output call, when the {\$i-} compiler directive is active,
disabling IO checking. When the flag is read, it is reset to zero. If IOresult is zero, the operation
completed successfully. If non-zero, an error occurred. The following errors can occur:
dos errors :
2File not found.

3Path not found.
4Too many open files.
5Access denied.
1377
6Invalid file handle.

12Invalid file-access mode.
15Invalid disk number.
16Cannot remove current directory.
17Cannot rename across volumes.
I/O errors :
100Error when reading from disk.
101Error when writing to disk.
102File not assigned.
103File not open.
104File not opened for input.
105File not opened for output.
106Invalid number.
Fatal errors :
150Disk is write protected.
151Unknown device.
152Drive not ready.
153Unknown command.
154CRC check failed.
155Invalid drive specified..
156Seek error on disk.
157Invalid media type.
158Sector not found.
159Printer out of paper.
160Error when writing to device.
161Error when reading from device.
162Hardware failure.
Errors: None.
Program Example35 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e I O R e s u l t f u n c t i o n . }
Var F : t e x t ;
begin
Assign ( f , paramstr ( 1 ) ) ;
{ $ i −}
Reset ( f ) ;
{ $i+}
I f I O r e s u l t < >0 then
w r i t e l n ( ’ F i l e ’ , paramstr ( 1 ) , ’ doesn ’ ’ t e x i s t ’ )
else
w r i t e l n ( ’ F i l e ’ , paramstr ( 1 ) , ’ e x i s t s ’ ) ;
end .
1378
75.11.267 IsDynArrayRectangular
Synopsis: Check whether all dimensions have the same size
Declaration: function IsDynArrayRectangular(a: Pointer;typeInfo: Pointer) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: IsDynArrayRectangular returns True if all dimensions of the dynamic array a with type
information typinfo have the same bounds. It returns True if the array is empty.
Clear (1338), DynArrayBounds (1338), DynArrayDim (1338)
75.11.268 IsMemoryManagerSet
Synopsis: Is the memory manager set
Declaration: function IsMemoryManagerSet : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: IsMemoryManagerSet will return True if the memory manager has been set to another value
than the system heap manager, it will return False otherwise.
Errors: None.
See also: SetMemoryManager (1417), GetMemoryManager (1359)
75.11.269 Is_IntResource
Synopsis: Check whether a resource is an internal resource
Declaration: function Is_IntResource(aStr: PChar) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Is_IntResource returns True if the resource type is internal (system predefined) resource or
false if it is a user-defined resource type.
Errors: None.
75.11.270 KillThread
Synopsis: Kill a running thread
Declaration: function KillThread(threadHandle: TThreadID) : DWord
Visibility: default
Description: KillThread causes a running thread to be aborted. The thread is identified by it’s handle or ID
threadHandle.
The function returns zero if succesful. A nonzero return value indicates failure.
Errors: If a failure occurred, a nonzero result is returned. The meaning is system dependent.
See also: WaitForThreadTerminate (1447), EndThread (1340), SuspendThread (1431)
1379
75.11.271 LeaveCriticalsection
Synopsis: Leave a critical section
Declaration: procedure LeaveCriticalsection(var cs: TRTLCriticalSection)

Visibility: default
Description: LeaveCriticalSection signals that the current thread is exiting the critical section CS it has
entered with EnterCriticalSection (1340).
The critical section must have been initialized with InitCriticalSection (1371) prior to a call to
EnterCriticalsection and LeaveCriticalSection.
See also: InitCriticalsection (1371), DoneCriticalsection (1336), EnterCriticalsection (1340)
75.11.272 leftshift(variant,variant):variant
Synopsis: Implement binary shl operation on variants.
Declaration: operator shl(const op1: variant;const op2: variant) : variant
Visibility: default
Description: The implementation of the shl operation is delegated to the variant manager with operation opshiftleft.
See also: operator shr(variant, variant): variant (1224)
75.11.273 Length
Synopsis: Returns length of a string or array.
Declaration: function Length(S: AStringType) : Integer

function Length(A: DynArrayType) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: Length returns the length of the string or array S, which is limited to 255 for shortstrings. If the
string S is empty, 0 is returned.
Note: The length of the string S is stored in S[0] for shortstrings only. The Length function
should always be used on ansistrings and widestrings.
For dynamical or statical arrays, the function returns the number of elements in the array.
Length also supports arguments of type PCharand PWideChar, in which case it is identical to
the StrLen and WStrLen functions, respectively. In this case, the function actually calculates the
length of the null-terminated string, and its execution time is proportional to the string length because
the terminating null character is searched through a linear scan.
Errors: None.
See also: Pos (1394), SetLength (1417)
1380
Program Example36 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Length f u n c t i o n . }
type
somebytes = array [ 6 . . 1 0 ] of b y t e ;
somewords = array [ 3 . . 1 0 ] of word ;
Var
S : String ;
I : Integer ;
b y t e s : somebytes ;
words : somewords ;
begin
S: = ’ ’ ;
f o r i : = 1 to 1 0 do
begin
S: =S+ ’ ∗ ’ ;
W r i t e l n ( Length (S ) : 2 , ’ : ’ , s ) ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Bytes : ’ , length ( b y t e s ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Words : ’ , length ( words ) ) ;
end .
75.11.274 lessthan(variant,variant):Boolean
Synopsis: Implement < (less than) operation on variants.
Declaration: operator <(const op1: variant;const op2: variant) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: The implementation of the "less than" comparison (<) operation is delegated to the variant manager
with operation opcmplt.
See also: operator >(variant, variant): boolean (1224)
75.11.275 lessthanorequal(variant,variant):Boolean
Synopsis: Implement <= (less than or equal) operation on variants.
Declaration: operator <=(const op1: variant;const op2: variant) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: The implementation of the "less than or equal" comparison (<=) operation is delegated to the
variant manager with operation opcmple.
1381
75.11.276 LEtoN
Synopsis: Convert Little Endian-ordered integer to Native-ordered integer
Declaration: function LEtoN(const AValue: SmallInt) : SmallInt

function LEtoN(const AValue: Word) : Word
function LEtoN(const AValue: LongInt) : LongInt
function LEtoN(const AValue: DWord) : DWord
function LEtoN(const AValue: Int64) : Int64
function LEtoN(const AValue: QWord) : QWord
Visibility: default
Description: LEToN will rearrange the bytes in a Little-Endian number to the native order for the current proces-
sor. That is, for a little-endian processor, it will do nothing, and for a big-endian processor, it will
invert the order of the bytes.
See also: BEtoN (1317), NtoBE (1389), NtoLE (1390)
75.11.277 ln
Synopsis: Calculate logarithm
Declaration: function ln(d: ValReal) : ValReal
Visibility: default
Description: Ln returns the natural logarithm of the Real parameter X. X must be positive.
Errors: An run-time error will occur when X is negative.
See also: Exp (1346), Power (1395)
Program Example37 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Ln f u n c t i o n . }
begin
W r i t e l n ( Ln ( 1 ) ) ; { Prints 0 }
W r i t e l n ( Ln ( Exp ( 1 ) ) ) ; { P r i n t s 1 }
end .
75.11.278 lo
Synopsis: Return low nibble/byte/word of value.
Declaration: function lo(B: Byte) : Byte
function lo(i: Integer) : Byte
function lo(w: Word) : Byte
function lo(l: LongInt) : Word
function lo(l: DWord) : Word
function lo(i: Int64) : DWord
function lo(q: QWord) : DWord
Visibility: default
1382
Description: Lo returns the low byte of its argument if this is of size 2 (such as Word or SmallInt), or the
low nibble if the size is 1 (such as byte). It returns the low word of its argument if this is of type
Longint or Cardinal.
Errors: None.
See also: Ord (1392), Chr (1323), Hi (1364)
Program Example38 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Lo f u n c t i o n . }
W : Word ;
B : Byte ;
begin
L : = ( 1 Shl 1 6 ) + ( 1 Shl 4 ) ; { $10010 }
W r i t e l n ( Lo ( L ) ) ; { Prints 16 }
W: = ( 1 Shl 8 ) + ( 1 Shl 4 ) ; { $110 }
W r i t e l n ( Lo (W) ) ; { Prints 16 }
B: = $EF ;
W r i t e l n ( Lo (B ) ) ; { Prints 15 }
end .
75.11.279 LoadResource
Synopsis: Load a resource for use
Declaration: function LoadResource(ModuleHandle: TFPResourceHMODULE;

ResHandle: TFPResourceHandle) : TFPResourceHGLOBAL
Visibility: default
Description: LoadResource loads a resource identified by ResHandle from a module identified by ModuleHandleinto
memory. It returns a handle to the resource.
Loaded resources must be unloaded again using the FreeResource (1357) function.
Errors: On error, 0 is returned.
See also: FindResource (1352), FreeResource (1357), SizeofResource (1424), LockResource (1383), Unlock-
Resource (1442), FreeResource (1357)
75.11.280 LockResource
Synopsis: Lock a resource
Declaration: function LockResource(ResData: TFPResourceHGLOBAL) : Pointer
Visibility: default
Description: LockResource locks a resource previously loaded by LoadResource into memory. This
means that any attempt to modify the resource will fail while it is locked. The function returns a
pointer to the resource location in memory.
The resource can be freed again using the UnlockResource (1442) function.
1383
Errors: if the function fails, Nil is returned.

See also: FindResource (1352), FreeResource (1357), SizeofResource (1424), LoadResource (1383), Unlock-
75.11.281 logicaland(variant,variant):variant
Synopsis: Implement logical/binary and operation on variants
Declaration: operator and(const op1: variant;const op2: variant) : variant

Visibility: default
Description: The implementation of the and operation is delegated to the variant manager with operation opand.
See also: operator or(variant, variant): variant (1224), operator xor(variant, variant): variant (1224), operator
not(variant): variant (1224)
75.11.282 logicalnot(variant):variant
Synopsis: Implement logical/binary not operation on variants
Declaration: operator not(const op: variant) : variant
Visibility: default
Description: The implementation of the not operation is delegated to the variant manager with operation opnot.
See also: operator and(variant, variant): variant (1224), operator or(variant, variant): variant (1224), operator
xor(variant, variant): variant (1224)
75.11.283 logicalor(variant,variant):variant
Synopsis: Implement logical/binary or operation on variants
Declaration: operator or(const op1: variant;const op2: variant) : variant
Visibility: default
Description: The implementation of the or operation is delegated to the variant manager with operation opor.
See also: operator and(variant, variant): variant (1224), operator xor(variant, variant): variant (1224), operator
1384
75.11.284 logicalxor(variant,variant):variant
Synopsis: Implement logical/binary xor operation on variants
Declaration: operator xor(const op1: variant;const op2: variant) : variant
Visibility: default
Description: The implementation of the xor operation is delegated to the variant manager with operation opxor.
See also: operator or(variant, variant): variant (1224), operator and(variant, variant): variant (1224), operator
75.11.285 longjmp
Synopsis: Jump to address.
Declaration: procedure longjmp(var S: jmp_buf;value: LongInt)
Visibility: default
Description: LongJmp jumps to the adress in the envjmp_buf, and restores the registers that were stored in it
at the corresponding SetJmp (1416) call. In effect, program flow will continue at the SetJmp call,
which will return value instead of 0. If a value equal to zero is passed, it will be converted to 1
before passing it on. The call will not return, so it must be used with extreme care. This can be used
for error recovery, for instance when a segmentation fault occurred.
For an example, see SetJmp (1416)
Errors: None.
See also: SetJmp (1416)
75.11.286 Low
Synopsis: Return lowest index of open array or enumerated
Declaration: function Low(Arg: TypeOrVariable) : TOrdinal
Visibility: default
Description: The return value of Low depends on it’s argument:
1.If the argument is an ordinal type, Low returns the lowest value in the range of the given ordinal
type.
2.If the argument is an array type or an array type variable then Low returns the lowest possible
value of it’s index.
3.If the argument is an open array identifier in a function or procedure, then Low returns the
lowest element of the array, which is always zero.
4.If the argument is a set type then it returns the lowest value of the underlying ordinal type.
The return type is always the same type as the type of the argument.
for an example, see High (1365).
Errors: None.
See also: High (1365), Ord (1392), Pred (1396), Succ (1431)
1385
75.11.287 lowerCase
Synopsis: Return lowercase version of a string.
Declaration: function lowerCase(const s: shortstring) : shortstring; Overload
function lowerCase(c: Char) : Char; Overload
function lowercase(const s: ansistring) : ansistring
function LowerCase(const s: UnicodeString) : UnicodeString
function LowerCase(c: UnicodeChar) : UnicodeChar
Visibility: default
Description: Lowercase returns the lowercase version of its argument C. If its argument is a string, then the
complete string is converted to lowercase. The type of the returned value is the same as the type of
the argument.
Lowercase does not change the number of characters (or bytes) in an ansistring.
Errors: None.
See also: Upcase (1442)
program Example73 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Lowercase f u n c t i o n . }
var c : char ;
begin
f o r c : = ’A ’ to ’ Z ’ do
w r i t e ( lowercase ( c ) ) ;
Writeln ;
W r i t e l n ( Lowercase ( ’ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ ’ ) ) ;
end .
75.11.288 MakeLangID
Synopsis: Create a langauge ID
Declaration: function MakeLangID(primary: Word;sub: Word) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: MakeLangID creates a language ID from the primary and sub language IDS.
75.11.289 MemSize
Synopsis: Return the size of a memory block.
Declaration: function MemSize(p: pointer) : PtrUInt
Visibility: default
Description: MemSize returns the size of a memory block on the heap.
Errors: Passing an invalid pointer may lead to run-time errors (access violations).
See also: GetMem (1358), FreeMem (1356)
1386
75.11.290 mkdir
Synopsis: Create a new directory.
Declaration: procedure mkdir(const s: shortstring); Overload

procedure mkdir(const s: RawByteString); Overload
procedure mkdir(const s: unicodestring); Overload
Visibility: default
Description: Mkdir creates a new directory S.

For an example, see Rmdir (1406).
See also: Chdir (1323), Rmdir (1406)
75.11.291 modulus(variant,variant):variant
Synopsis: Implement mod (modulo) operation on variants.
Declaration: operator mod(const op1: variant;const op2: variant) : variant
Visibility: default
Description: The implementation of the modulo Mod operation is delegated to the variant manager with operation
opModulus.
See also: operator div(variant, variant): variant (1224)
75.11.292 Move
Synopsis: Move data from one location in memory to another
Declaration: procedure Move(const source;var dest;count: SizeInt)
Visibility: default
Description: Move moves Count bytes from Source to Dest.
Errors: If either Dest or Source is outside the accessible memory for the process, then a run-time error
will be generated.
See also: Fillword (1351), Fillchar (1350)
Program Example42 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Move f u n c t i o n . }
Var S1 , S2 : S t r i n g [ 3 0 ] ;
begin
S1 : = ’ H e l l o World ! ’ ;
1387
S2 : = ’ Bye , bye ! ’;
Move ( S1 , S2 , Sizeof ( S1 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( S2 ) ;
end .
75.11.293 MoveChar0
Synopsis: Move data till first zero character
Declaration: procedure MoveChar0(const buf1;var buf2;len: SizeInt)
Visibility: default
Description: MoveChar0 moves Count bytes from buf1 to buf2, and stops moving if a zero character is
found.
Errors: No checking is done to see if Count stays within the memory allocated to the process.
See also: Move (1387)
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e MoveChar0 f u n c t i o n . }
Var
Buf1 , Buf2 : Array [ 1 . . 8 0 ] of char ;
I : longint ;
begin
Randomize ;
For I : = low ( buf1 ) to high ( buf1 ) do
Buf1 [ i ] : = chr (Random( 1 6 ) + Ord ( ’A ’ ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ O r i g i n a l b u f f e r ’ ) ;
w r i t e l n ( Buf1 ) ;
Buf1 [ Random( 8 0 ) + 1 ] : = # 0 ;
MoveChar0 ( Buf1 , Buf2 , 8 0 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Randomly zero−t e r m i n a t e d B u f f e r ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Buf2 ) ;
end .
75.11.294 multiply(variant,variant):variant
Synopsis: Implement multiplication (*) operation on variants.
Declaration: operator *(const op1: variant;const op2: variant) : variant
Visibility: default
Description: The implementation of the multiplication * operation is delegated to the variant manager with oper-
ation opMultiply.
See also: operator /(variant, variant): variant (1224)
1388
75.11.295 negative(variant):variant
Synopsis: Implement - (unary minus, negation) operation on variants.
Declaration: operator -(const op: variant) : variant

Visibility: default
Description: The implementation of the unary minus (-) operation is delegated to the variant manager with
operation varNeg.
75.11.296 New
Synopsis: Dynamically allocate memory for variable
Declaration: procedure New(var P: Pointer)
procedure New(var P: Pointer;Cons: TProcedure)
Visibility: default
Description: New allocates a new instance of the type pointed to by P, and puts the address in P. If P is an object,
then it is possible to specify the name of the constructor with which the instance will be created.
The newly allocated memory is not initialized in any way, and may contain garbage data. It must be
cleared with a call to FillChar (1350) or FillWord (1351).
For an example, see Dispose (1335).
Errors: What happens if no more memory is available, depends on the value of the variable ReturnNilIf-
GrowHeapfails (1291): if the variable is True then Nil is returned. If the variable is False, a
run-time error is generated.
See also: Dispose (1335), Freemem (1356), Getmem (1358), ReturnNilIfGrowHeapfails (1291)
75.11.297 NtoBE
Synopsis: Convert Native-ordered integer to a Big Endian-ordered integer
Declaration: function NtoBE(const AValue: SmallInt) : SmallInt
function NtoBE(const AValue: Word) : Word
function NtoBE(const AValue: LongInt) : LongInt
function NtoBE(const AValue: DWord) : DWord
function NtoBE(const AValue: Int64) : Int64
function NtoBE(const AValue: QWord) : QWord
Visibility: default
Description: NToBE will rearrange the bytes in a natively-ordered number to the Big-Endian order. That is, for a
Little-Endian processor, it will invert the order of the bytes and for a big-endian processor, it will do
nothing.
See also: BEtoN (1317), LEtoN (1382), NtoLE (1390)
1389
75.11.298 NtoLE
Synopsis: Convert Native-ordered integer to a Little Endian-ordered integer
Declaration: function NtoLE(const AValue: SmallInt) : SmallInt
function NtoLE(const AValue: Word) : Word
function NtoLE(const AValue: LongInt) : LongInt
function NtoLE(const AValue: DWord) : DWord
function NtoLE(const AValue: Int64) : Int64
function NtoLE(const AValue: QWord) : QWord
Visibility: default
Description: NToLE will rearrange the bytes in a natively-ordered number to the little-Endian order. That is, for
a Big-Endian processor, it will invert the order of the bytes and for a Little-Endian processor, it will
do nothing.
See also: BEtoN (1317), LEtoN (1382), NtoBE (1389)
75.11.299 Null
Synopsis: Null variant
Declaration: function Null : Variant
Visibility: default
75.11.300 OctStr
Synopsis: Convert integer to a string with octal representation.
Declaration: function OctStr(Val: LongInt;cnt: Byte) : shortstring
function OctStr(Val: Int64;cnt: Byte) : shortstring
function OctStr(Val: QWord;cnt: Byte) : shortstring
Visibility: default
Description: OctStr returns a string with the octal representation of Value. The string has exactly cnt
charaters.
Errors: None.
See also: Str (1427), Val (1445), BinStr (1317), HexStr (1364)
Program example112 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e O c t S t r f u n c t i o n }
begin
For I : = 1 to 1 0 do
W r i t e l n ( O c t S t r ( Value , I ) ) ;
For I : = 1 to 1 6 do
Writeln ( OctStr ( I , 3 ) ) ;
end .
1390
75.11.301 odd
Synopsis: Is a value odd or even ?
Declaration: function odd(l: LongInt) : Boolean
function odd(l: LongWord) : Boolean
function odd(l: Int64) : Boolean
function odd(l: QWord) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: Odd returns True if X is odd, or False otherwise.
Errors: None.
See also: Abs (1292), Ord (1392)
Program Example43 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Odd f u n c t i o n . }
begin
I f Odd ( 1 ) Then
W r i t e l n ( ’ E v e r y t h i n g OK w i t h 1 ! ’ ) ;
I f Not Odd ( 2 ) Then
W r i t e l n ( ’ E v e r y t h i n g OK w i t h 2 ! ’ ) ;
end .
75.11.302 Ofs
Synopsis: Return offset of a variable.
Declaration: function Ofs(var X) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Ofs returns the offset of the address of a variable. This function is only supported for compatibility.
In Free Pascal, it returns always the complete address of the variable, since Free Pascal is a 32/64 bit
compiler.
Errors: None.
See also: DSeg (1337), CSeg (1332), Seg (1414), Ptr (1397)
Program Example44 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Ofs f u n c t i o n . }
Var W : P o i n t e r ;
begin
W: = P o i n t e r ( Ofs (W) ) ; { W c o n t a i n s i t s own o f f s e t . }
end .
1391
75.11.303 Ord
Synopsis: Return ordinal value of an ordinal type.
Declaration: function Ord(X: TOrdinal) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Ord returns the Ordinal value of a ordinal-type variable X.
Historical note:
Originally, Pascal did not have typecasts and ord was a necessary function in order to do certain
operations on non-integer ordinal types. With the arrival of typecasting a generic approach became
possible, making ord mostly obselete. However ord is not considered deprecated and remains in wide
use today.
Errors: None.
See also: Chr (1323), Succ (1431), Pred (1396), High (1365), Low (1385)
Program Example45 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Ord , Pred , Succ f u n c t i o n s . }
Type
TEnum = ( Zero , One , Two , Three , Four ) ;
Var
X : Longint ;
Y : TEnum ;
begin
X: = 1 2 5 ;
W r i t e l n ( Ord (X ) ) ; { Prints 125 }
X: = Pred (X ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Ord (X ) ) ; { prints 124 }
Y : = One ;
W r i t e l n ( Ord ( y ) ) ; { Prints 1 }
Y: = Succ (Y ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Ord (Y ) ) ; { Prints 2 }
end .
75.11.304 Pack
Synopsis: Create packed array from normal array
Declaration: procedure Pack(const A: UnpackedArrayType;StartIndex: TIndexType;
out Z: PackedArrayType)
Visibility: default
Description: Pack will copy the elements of an unpacked array (A) to a packed array (Z). It will start the copy at
the index denoted by StartIndex. The type of the index variable StartIndex must match the
type of the index of A. The elements are always transferred to the beginning of the packed array Z.
(i.e. it starts at Low(Z)).
Obviously, the type of the elements of the arrays A and Z must match.
See also: unpack (1442)
1392
75.11.305 Paramcount
Synopsis: Return number of command-line parameters passed to the program.
Declaration: function Paramcount : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Paramcount returns the number of command-line arguments. If no arguments were given to the
running program, 0 is returned.
Errors: None.
See also: Paramstr (1393)
Program Example46 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e ParamCount and ParamStr f u n c t i o n s . }

Var
I : Longint ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( paramstr ( 0 ) , ’ : Got ’ , ParamCount , ’ command−l i n e parameters : ’ ) ;
For i : = 1 to ParamCount do
W r i t e l n ( ParamStr ( i ) ) ;
end .
75.11.306 ParamStr
Synopsis: Return value of a command-line argument.
Declaration: function ParamStr(l: LongInt) : string
Visibility: default
Description: Paramstr returns the L-th command-line argument. L must be between 0 and Paramcount,
these values included. The zeroth argument is the path and file name with which the program was
started.
The command-line parameters will be truncated to a length of 255, even though the operating system
may support bigger command-lines. The Objpas unit (used in objfpc or delphi mode) defines
versions of Paramstr which return the full-length command-line arguments, using ansistrings.
In the interest of portability, the ParamStr function tries to behave the same on all operating sys-
tems: like the original ParamStr function in Turbo Pascal. This means even on Unix, paramstr(0)
returns the full path to the program executable. A notable exception is Mac OS X, where the return
value depends on how the application was started. It may be that just the name of the application is
returned (in case of a command-line launch)
In general, it’s a bad idea to rely on the location of the binary. Often, this goes against best OS prac-
tices. Configuration data should (or can) not be stored next to the binary, but on designated locations.
What locations these are, is very much operating system dependent. Therefore, ParamStr(0)
should be used with care.
For an example, see Paramcount (1393).
Errors: None.
See also: Paramcount (1393)
1393
75.11.307 pi
Synopsis: Return the value of PI.
Declaration: function pi : ValReal
Visibility: default
Description: Pi returns the value of Pi (3.1415926535897932385).
Errors: None.
See also: Cos (1332), Sin (1423)
Program Example47 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e P i f u n c t i o n . }
begin
W r i t e l n ( Pi ) ; { 3.1415926 }
W r i t e l n ( Sin ( Pi ) ) ;
end .
75.11.308 PopCnt
Synopsis: Count number of set bits
Declaration: function PopCnt(const AValue: Byte) : Byte
function PopCnt(const AValue: Word) : Word
function PopCnt(const AValue: DWord) : DWord
function PopCnt(const AValue: QWord) : QWord
Visibility: default
Description: PopCnt (population count) counts the number of set bits in AValue.
75.11.309 Pos
Synopsis: Search for substring in a string.
Declaration: function Pos(const substr: shortstring;const s: shortstring) : SizeInt
function Pos(C: Char;const s: shortstring) : SizeInt
function Pos(const Substr: ShortString;const Source: RawByteString)
: SizeInt
function pos(const substr: shortstring;c: Char) : SizeInt
function Pos(const Substr: RawByteString;const Source: RawByteString)
: SizeInt
function Pos(c: AnsiChar;const s: RawByteString) : SizeInt
function Pos(const Substr: UnicodeString;const Source: UnicodeString)
: SizeInt
function Pos(c: Char;const s: UnicodeString) : SizeInt
function Pos(c: UnicodeChar;const s: UnicodeString) : SizeInt
function Pos(const c: RawByteString;const s: UnicodeString) : SizeInt
function Pos(const c: UnicodeString;const s: RawByteString) : SizeInt
function Pos(const c: ShortString;const s: UnicodeString) : SizeInt
1394
function Pos(const Substr: WideString;const Source: WideString)

: SizeInt
function Pos(c: Char;const s: WideString) : SizeInt
function Pos(c: WideChar;const s: WideString) : SizeInt
function Pos(c: WideChar;const s: RawByteString) : SizeInt
function Pos(const c: RawByteString;const s: WideString) : SizeInt
function Pos(const c: WideString;const s: RawByteString) : SizeInt
function Pos(const c: ShortString;const s: WideString) : SizeInt
function Pos(c: Char;const v: Variant) : SizeInt
function Pos(s: ShortString;const v: Variant) : SizeInt
function Pos(const a: AnsiString;const v: Variant) : SizeInt
function Pos(const w: WideString;const v: Variant) : SizeInt
function Pos(const w: UnicodeString;const v: Variant) : SizeInt
function Pos(const v: Variant;const c: Char) : SizeInt
function Pos(const v: Variant;const s: ShortString) : SizeInt
function Pos(const v: Variant;const a: AnsiString) : SizeInt
function Pos(const v: Variant;const w: WideString) : SizeInt
function Pos(const v: Variant;const w: UnicodeString) : SizeInt
function Pos(const v1: Variant;const v2: Variant) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: Pos returns the index of Substr in S, if S contains Substr. In case Substr isn’t found, 0 is
returned. The search is case-sensitive.
Errors: None
See also: Length (1380), Copy (1331), Delete (1334), Insert (1374)
Program Example48 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Pos f u n c t i o n . }
Var
S : String ;
begin
S: = ’ The f i r s t space i n t h i s sentence i s a t p o s i t i o n : ’ ;
W r i t e l n ( S , pos ( ’ ’ ,S ) ) ;
S: = ’ The l a s t l e t t e r o f t h e a l p h a b e t doesn ’ ’ t appear i n t h i s sentence ’ ;
I f ( Pos ( ’ Z ’ ,S ) = 0 ) and ( Pos ( ’ z ’ ,S ) = 0 ) then
Writeln ( S ) ;
end .
75.11.310 Power
Synopsis: Raise float to integer power
Declaration: function Power(Base: Double;expon: Double) : Double
function Power(Base: LongInt;expon: LongInt) : LongInt
Visibility: default
1395
Description: Power returns the value of base to the power expon. Base and expon can be of type Longint,
in which case the result will also be a Longint.
The function actually returns Exp(expon*Ln(base))
Errors: None.
See also: Exp (1346), Ln (1382)
Program Example78 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Power f u n c t i o n . }
begin
W r i t e l n ( Power ( exp ( 1 . 0 ) , 1 . 0 ) : 8 : 2 ) ; { Should p r i n t 2 . 7 2 }
end .
75.11.311 power(variant,variant):variant
Synopsis: Implement power (**) operation on variants.
Declaration: operator **(const op1: variant;const op2: variant) : variant
Visibility: default
Description: The implementation of the power ** operation is delegated to the variant manager with operation
opPower.
See also: operator *(variant, variant): variant (1224)
75.11.312 Pred
Synopsis: Return previous element for an ordinal type.
Declaration: function Pred(X: TOrdinal) : TOrdinal

Visibility: default
Description: Pred returns the element that precedes the element that was passed to it. If it is applied to the first
value of the ordinal type, and the program was compiled with range checking on ({$R+}), then a
run-time error will be generated.
For an example, see Ord (1392)
Errors: Run-time error 201 is generated when the result is out of range.
See also: Ord (1392), Succ (1431), High (1365), Low (1385)
1396
75.11.313 prefetch
Synopsis: Prefetch a memory location
Declaration: procedure prefetch(const mem)
Visibility: default
Description: Prefetch can be used to optimize the CPU behaviour by already loading a memory location. It is
mainly used as a hint for those processors that support it.
Errors: None.
75.11.314 ptr
Synopsis: Combine segment and offset to pointer
Declaration: function ptr(sel: LongInt;off: LongInt) : FarPointer
Visibility: default
Description: Ptr returns a pointer, pointing to the address specified by segment Sel and offset Off.
Remark:
1.In the 32/64-bit flat-memory model supported by Free Pascal, this function is obsolete.
2.The returned address is simply the offset.
Errors: None.
See also: Addr (1293)
Program Example59 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e P t r ( c o m p a t i b i l i t y ) f u n c t i o n . }
type p S t r i n g = ^ S t r i n g ;
Var P : p S t r i n g ;
S : String ;
begin
S: = ’ H e l l o , World ! ’ ;
P: = p S t r i n g ( P t r ( Seg (S ) , L o n g i n t ( Ofs (S ) ) ) ) ;
{P now p o i n t s t o S ! }
Writeln ( P ^ ) ;
end .
75.11.315 RaiseList
Synopsis: List of currently raised exceptions.
Declaration: function RaiseList : PExceptObject
Visibility: default
Description: RaiseList returns a pointer to the list of currently raised exceptions (i.e. a pointer to the first
exception block.
1397
75.11.316 Random
Synopsis: Generate random number
Declaration: function Random(l: LongInt) : LongInt
function Random(l: Int64) : Int64
function Random : extended
Visibility: default
Description: Random returns a random number larger or equal to 0 and strictly less than L. If the argument L is
omitted, a Real number between 0 and 1 is returned (0 included, 1 excluded).
Remark: The Free Pascal implementation of the Random routine uses the Mersenne Twister to simulate
randomness. This implementation has a better statistical distribution than for example a Linear Con-
gruential generator algorithm, but is considerably slower than the latter. If speed is an issue, then
alternate random number generators should be considered.
Errors: None.
See also: Randomize (1398)
Program Example49 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Random and Randomize f u n c t i o n s . }
Var I , Count , guess : L o n g i n t ;

R : Real ;
begin
Randomize ; { T h i s way we generate a new sequence every t i m e
t h e program i s run }
Count : = 0 ;
For i : = 1 to 1 0 0 0 do
I f Random> 0 . 5 then inc ( Count ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Generated ’ , Count , ’ numbers > 0 . 5 ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ o u t o f 1 0 0 0 generated numbers . ’ ) ;
count : = 0 ;
For i : = 1 to 5 do
begin
w r i t e ( ’ Guess a number between 1 and 5 : ’ ) ;
readln ( Guess ) ;
I f Guess=Random( 5 ) + 1 then inc ( count ) ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ You guessed ’ , Count , ’ o u t o f 5 c o r r e c t . ’ ) ;
end .
75.11.317 Randomize
Synopsis: Initialize random number generator
Declaration: procedure Randomize
Visibility: default
Description: Randomize initializes the random number generator of Free Pascal, by giving a value to Randseed,
calculated with the system clock.
For an example, see Random (1398).
1398
Errors: None.
See also: Random (1398)
75.11.318 Read
Synopsis: Read from a text file into variable
Declaration: procedure Read(var F: Text;Args: Arguments)

procedure Read(Args: Arguments)
Visibility: default
Description: Read reads one or more values from a file F, and stores the result in V1, V2, etc.; If no file F is
specified, then standard input is read. If F is of type Text, then the variables V1, V2 etc. must be
of type Char, Integer, Real, String. If F is a typed file, then each of the variables must be of
the type specified in the declaration of F. Untyped files are not allowed as an argument.
In earlier versions of FPC, it was also allowed to read Pchar null-terminated strings, but this has
been removed, since there is no buffer checking possible.
Errors: If no data is available, empty values are returned (0 for ordinal values, empty strings for string
values)
See also: Readln (1400), Blockread (1318), Write (1448), Blockwrite (1319)
Program Example50 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Read ( Ln ) f u n c t i o n . }
C : Char ;
F : F i l e of char ;
begin
Assign ( F , ’ ex50 . pp ’ ) ;
Reset ( F ) ;
C: = ’A ’ ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ The c h a r a c t e r s b e f o r e t h e f i r s t space i n ex50 . pp are : ’ );
While not Eof ( f ) and ( C<> ’ ’ ) do
Begin
Read ( F ,C ) ;
Write ( C ) ;
end ;
Writeln ;
Close ( F ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Type some words . An empty l i n e ends t h e program . ’ ) ;
repeat
Readln ( S ) ;
u n t i l S= ’ ’ ;
end .
75.11.319 ReadBarrier
Synopsis: Memory Read Barrier
1399
Declaration: procedure ReadBarrier

Visibility: default
Description: ReadBarrier is a low-level instruction to force a read barrier in the CPU: all memory reads before
the instruction will be finished before this instruction, before memory reads after the instruction
occur.
See also: ReadDependencyBarrier (1400), ReadWriteBarrier (1401), WriteBarrier (1449)
75.11.320 ReadDependencyBarrier
Synopsis: Memory Read Dependency Barrier
Declaration: procedure ReadDependencyBarrier
Visibility: default
Description: ReadDependencyBarrier is a low-level instruction to force a read barrier in the CPU: all mem-
ory reads (loads) depending on previous loads are separate from the ones following the instruction.
See also: ReadBarrier (1399), ReadWriteBarrier (1401), WriteBarrier (1449)
75.11.321 ReadLn
Synopsis: Read from a text file into variable and goto next line
Declaration: procedure ReadLn(var F: Text;Args: Arguments)
procedure ReadLn(Args: Arguments)
Visibility: default
Description: Read reads one or more values from a file F, and stores the result in V1, V2, etc. After that it goes
to the next line in the file. The end of the line is marked by any of the supported line ending styles,
independent of the platform on which the code is running (supported line ending styles are CRLF,
LF or CR). The end-of-line marker is not considered part of the line and is ignored.
If no file F is specified, then standard input is read. The variables V1, V2 etc. must be of type
Char, Integer, Real, String or PChar.
For an example, see Read (1399).
Errors: If no data is available, empty values are returned (0 for ordinal values, empty strings for string
values)
See also: Read (1399), Blockread (1318), Write (1448), Blockwrite (1319)
75.11.322 ReadStr
Synopsis: Read variables from a string
Declaration: procedure ReadStr(const S: string;Args: Arguments)
Visibility: default
Description: ReadStr behaves like Read (1399), except that it reads its input from the string variable S instead
of a file. Semantically, the ReadStr call is equivalent to writing the string to a file using the Write
call, and then reading them into the various arguments Arg using the Read call from the same file:
1400
var
F : Text;
begin
Rewrite(F);
Write(F,S);
Close(F);
Reset(F);
Read(F,Args);
Close(F);
end;
Obviously, the ReadStr call does not use a temporary file.

ReadStr is defined in the ISO Extended Pascal standard. More information on the allowed argu-
ments and the behaviour of the arguments can be found in the description of Read (1399).
See also: Read (1399), WriteStr (1450), Write (1448)
75.11.323 ReadWriteBarrier
Synopsis: Memory read/write barrier
Declaration: procedure ReadWriteBarrier
Visibility: default
Description: ReadWriteBarrier is a low-level instruction to force a read/write barrier in the CPU: both read
(Loads) and write (stores) operations before and after the barrier are separate.
See also: ReadBarrier (1399), ReadDependencyBarrier (1400), WriteBarrier (1449)
75.11.324 Real2Double
Synopsis: Convert Turbo Pascal style real to double.
Declaration: function Real2Double(r: real48) : Double
Visibility: default
Description: The Real2Double function converts a Turbo Pascal style real (6 bytes long) to a native Free Pascal
double type. It can be used e.g. to read old binary TP files with FPC and convert them to Free Pacal
binary files.
Note that the assignment operator has been overloaded so a Real48 type can be assigned directly
to a double or extended.
Errors: None.
program Example110 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Real2Double f u n c t i o n . }
Var
i : integer ;
R : Real48 ;
D : Double ;
1401
E : Extended ;
F : F i l e of Real48 ;
begin
Assign ( F , ’ r e a l s . d a t ’ ) ;
Reset ( f ) ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 do
begin
Read ( F ,R ) ;
D: = Real2Double (R ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Real ’ , i , ’ : ’ ,D ) ;
D: =R;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Real ( d i r e c t t o double ) ’ , i , ’ : ’ ,D ) ;
E: =R;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Real ( d i r e c t t o Extended ) ’ , i , ’ : ’ ,E ) ;
end ;
Close ( f ) ;
end .
75.11.325 ReAllocMem
Synopsis: Re-allocate memory on the heap
Declaration: function ReAllocMem(var p: pointer;Size: PtrUInt) : pointer
Visibility: default
Description: ReAllocMem resizes the memory pointed to by P so it has size Size. The value of P may change
during this operation. The contents of the memory pointed to by P (if any) will be copied to the new
location, but may be truncated if the newly allocated memory block is smaller in size. If a larger
block is allocated, only the used memory is initialized, extra memory will not be zeroed out.
Note that P may be nil, in that case the behaviour of ReAllocMem is equivalent to Getmem.
See also: GetMem (1358), FreeMem (1356)
75.11.326 ReAllocMemory
Synopsis: Alias for ReAllocMem (1402)
Declaration: function ReAllocMemory(p: pointer;Size: PtrUInt) : pointer
Visibility: default
Description: ReAllocMemory is an alias for ReAllocMem (1402).

See also: ReAllocMem (1402)
75.11.327 ReleaseExceptionObject
Synopsis: Decrease the reference count of the current exception object.
Declaration: procedure ReleaseExceptionObject

Visibility: default
1402
Description: ReleaseExceptionObject decreases the reference count of the current exception object. This
should be called whenever a reference to the exception object was obtained via the AcquireExcep-
tionObject (1292) call.
Calling this method is only valid within an except block.
Errors: If there is no current exception object, a run-time error 231 will occur.
See also: AcquireExceptionObject (1292)
75.11.328 Rename
Synopsis: Rename file on disk
Declaration: procedure Rename(var f: File;const s: ShortString)
procedure Rename(var f: File;const p: PAnsiChar)
procedure Rename(var f: File;const c: AnsiChar)
procedure Rename(var f: File;const s: UnicodeString)
procedure Rename(var f: File;const s: RawByteString)
procedure Rename(var t: Text;const s: shortstring)
procedure Rename(var t: Text;const p: PAnsiChar)
procedure Rename(var t: Text;const c: AnsiChar)
procedure Rename(var t: Text;const s: unicodestring)
procedure Rename(var t: Text;const s: RawByteString)
Visibility: default
Description: Rename changes the name of the assigned file F to S. F must be assigned, but not opened.
See also: Erase (1343)
Program Example77 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Rename f u n c t i o n . }

Var F : Text ;
begin
Assign ( F , paramstr ( 1 ) ) ;
Rename ( F , paramstr ( 2 ) ) ;
end .
75.11.329 Reset
Synopsis: Open file for reading
Declaration: procedure Reset(var f: File;l: LongInt)
procedure Reset(var f: File)
procedure Reset(var f: TypedFile)
procedure Reset(var t: Text)
Visibility: default
1403
Description: Reset opens a file F for reading. F can be any file type. If F is a text file, or refers to standard I/O
(e.g : ”) then it is opened read-only, otherwise it is opened using the mode specified in filemode.
If F is an untyped file, the record size can be specified in the optional parameter L. A default value
of 128 is used. File sharing is not taken into account when calling Reset.
See also: Rewrite (1404), Assign (1296), Close (1324), Append (1295)
Program Example51 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Reset f u n c t i o n . }
Function F i l e E x i s t s ( Name : S t r i n g ) : boolean ;
Var F : F i l e ;
begin
{ $ i −}
Assign ( F ,Name ) ;
Reset ( F ) ;
{ $I+}
F i l e E x i s t s : = ( IoResult = 0 ) and ( Name<> ’ ’ ) ;
Close ( f ) ;
end ;
begin
I f F i l e E x i s t s ( Paramstr ( 1 ) ) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ F i l e found ’ )
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ F i l e NOT found ’ ) ;
end .
75.11.330 ResumeThread
Synopsis: Resume a suspended thread.
Declaration: function ResumeThread(threadHandle: TThreadID) : DWord
Visibility: default
Description: ResumeThread causes a suspended thread (using SuspendThread (1431)) to resume it’s execution.
The thread is identified with it’s handle or ID threadHandle.
See also: SuspendThread (1431), KillThread (1379)
75.11.331 Rewrite
Synopsis: Open file for writing
1404
Declaration: procedure Rewrite(var f: File;l: LongInt)

procedure Rewrite(var f: File)
procedure Rewrite(var f: TypedFile)
procedure Rewrite(var t: Text)
Visibility: default
Description: Rewrite opens a file F for writing. F can be any file type. If F is an untyped or typed file, then
it is opened for reading and writing. If F is an untyped file, the record size can be specified in the
optional parameter L. Default a value of 128 is used. if Rewrite finds a file with the same name
as F, this file is truncated to length 0. If it doesn’t find such a file, a new file is created. Contrary to
Turbo Pascal, Free Pascal opens the file with mode fmoutput. If it should be opened in fminout
mode, an extra call to Reset (1403) is needed. File sharing is not taken into account when calling
Rewrite.
See also: Reset (1403), Assign (1296), Close (1324), Flush (1353), Append (1295)
Program Example52 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e R e w r i t e f u n c t i o n . }
Var F : F i l e ;
I : longint ;
begin
Assign ( F , ’ Test . tmp ’ ) ;
{ Create t h e f i l e . Recordsize i s 4 }
Rewrite ( F , Sizeof ( I ) ) ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 do
BlockWrite ( F , I , 1 ) ;
close ( f ) ;
{ F c o n t a i n s now a b i n a r y r e p r e s e n t a t i o n o f
1 0 l o n g i n t s going from 1 t o 1 0 }
end .
75.11.332 rightshift(variant,variant):variant
Synopsis: Implement binary shr operation on variants.
Declaration: operator shr(const op1: variant;const op2: variant) : variant
Visibility: default
Description: The implementation of the shr operation is delegated to the variant manager with operation opshiftright.
See also: operator shl(variant, variant): variant (1224)
1405
75.11.333 rmdir
Synopsis: Remove directory when empty.
Declaration: procedure rmdir(const s: shortstring); Overload

procedure rmdir(const s: RawByteString); Overload
procedure rmdir(const s: unicodestring); Overload
Visibility: default
Description: Rmdir removes the directory S.

See also: Chdir (1323), Mkdir (1387)
Program Example53 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e MkDir and RmDir f u n c t i o n s . }
Const D : S t r i n g [ 8 ] = ’TEST . DIR ’ ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Making d i r e c t o r y ’ ,D ) ;
Mkdir ( D ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Changing d i r e c t o r y t o ’ ,D ) ;
ChDir ( D ) ;
GetDir ( 0 , S ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ C u r r e n t D i r e c t o r y i s : ’ ,S ) ;
WRiteln ( ’ Going back ’ ) ;
ChDir ( ’ . . ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Removing d i r e c t o r y ’ ,D ) ;
RmDir ( D ) ;
end .
75.11.334 RolByte
Synopsis: Rotate bits of a byte value to the left
Declaration: function RolByte(const AValue: Byte) : Byte
function RolByte(const AValue: Byte;const Dist: Byte) : Byte
Visibility: default
Description: RolByte rotates the bits of the byte AValue with Dist positions to the left. If Dist is not
specified, then 1 is assumed.
Errors: None.
See also: RorByte (1407), RolWord (1407), RolDWord (1407), RolQWord (1407)
1406
75.11.335 RolDWord
Synopsis: Rotate bits of a DWord (cardinal) value to the left
Declaration: function RolDWord(const AValue: DWord) : DWord
function RolDWord(const AValue: DWord;const Dist: Byte) : DWord
Visibility: default
Description: RolDWord rotates the bits of the DWord (cardinal) AValue with Dist positions to the left. If
Dist is not specified, then 1 is assumed.
Errors: None.
See also: RolByte (1406), RolWord (1407), RorDWord (1408), RolQWord (1407)
75.11.336 RolQWord
Synopsis: Rotate bits of a QWord (64-bit) value to the left
Declaration: function RolQWord(const AValue: QWord) : QWord
function RolQWord(const AValue: QWord;const Dist: Byte) : QWord
Visibility: default
Description: RorQWord rotates the bits of the QWord (64-bit) AValue with Dist positions to the left. If Dist
is not specified, then 1 is assumed.
Errors: None.
See also: RolByte (1406), RolWord (1407), RolDWord (1407), RorQWord (1408)
75.11.337 RolWord
Synopsis: Rotate bits of a word value to the left
Declaration: function RolWord(const AValue: Word) : Word
function RolWord(const AValue: Word;const Dist: Byte) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: RolWord rotates the bits of the word AValue with Dist positions to the right. If Dist is not
Errors: None.
See also: RolByte (1406), RorWord (1408), RolDWord (1407), RolQWord (1407)
75.11.338 RorByte
Synopsis: Rotate bits of a byte value to the right
Declaration: function RorByte(const AValue: Byte) : Byte
function RorByte(const AValue: Byte;const Dist: Byte) : Byte
Visibility: default
Description: RorByte rotates the bits of the byte AValue with Dist positions to the right. If Dist is not
1407
Errors: None.
See also: RolByte (1406), RorWord (1408), RorDWord (1408), RorQWord (1408)
75.11.339 RorDWord
Synopsis: Rotate bits of a DWord (cardinal) value to the right
Declaration: function RorDWord(const AValue: DWord) : DWord

function RorDWord(const AValue: DWord;const Dist: Byte) : DWord
Visibility: default
Description: RorDWord rotates the bits of the DWord (cardinal) AValue with Dist positions to the right. If
Errors: None.
See also: RorByte (1407), RolDWord (1407), RorWord (1408), RorQWord (1408)
75.11.340 RorQWord
Synopsis: Rotate bits of a QWord (64-bit) value to the right
Declaration: function RorQWord(const AValue: QWord) : QWord

function RorQWord(const AValue: QWord;const Dist: Byte) : QWord
Visibility: default
Description: RorQWord rotates the bits of the QWord (64-bit) AValue with Dist positions to the right. If
Errors: None.
See also: RorByte (1407), RorWord (1408), RorDWord (1408), RolQWord (1407)
75.11.341 RorWord
Synopsis: Rotate bits of a word value to the right
Declaration: function RorWord(const AValue: Word) : Word
function RorWord(const AValue: Word;const Dist: Byte) : Word
Visibility: default
Description: RorWord rotates the bits of the word AValue with Dist positions to the right. If Dist is not
Errors: None.
See also: RorByte (1407), RolWord (1407), RorDWord (1408), RorQWord (1408)
1408
75.11.342 round
Synopsis: Round floating point value to nearest integer number.
Declaration: function round(d: ValReal) : Int64
Visibility: default
Description: Round rounds X to the closest integer, which may be bigger or smaller than X.
In the case of .5, the algorithm uses "banker’s rounding": .5 values are always rounded towards the
even number.
Errors: None.
See also: Frac (1355), Int (1375), Trunc (1437)
Program Example54 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Round f u n c t i o n . }
begin
Writeln ( Round ( 1 2 3 4 . 5 6 ) ) ; { Prints 1235 }
Writeln ( Round( − 1 2 3 4 . 5 6 ) ) ; { Prints −1235 }
Writeln ( Round ( 1 2 . 3 4 5 6 ) ) ; { Prints 12 }
Writeln ( Round( − 1 2 . 3 4 5 6 ) ) ; { Prints −12 }
Writeln ( Round ( 2 . 5 ) ) ; { Prints 2 ( down ) }
Writeln ( Round ( 3 . 5 ) ) ; { Prints 4 ( up ) }
end .
75.11.343 RTLEventCreate
Synopsis: Create a new RTL event
Declaration: function RTLEventCreate : PRTLEvent
Visibility: default
Description: RTLEventCreate creates and initializes a new RTL event. RTL events are used to notify other
threads that a certain condition is met, and to notify other threads of condition changes (conditional
variables).
The function returns an initialized RTL event, which must be disposed of with RTLEventdestroy
(1409)
RTLEvent is used mainly for the synchronize method.
See also: RTLEventDestroy (1409), RTLEventSetEvent (1410), RTLEventReSetEvent (1410), RTLEvent-
WaitFor (1410)
75.11.344 RTLeventdestroy
Synopsis: Destroy a RTL Event
Declaration: procedure RTLeventdestroy(state: PRTLEvent)
Visibility: default
1409
Description: RTLeventdestroy destroys the RTL event State. After a call to RTLeventdestroy, the
State RTL event may no longer be used.
See also: RTLEventCreate (1409), RTLEventResetEvent (1410), RTLEventSetEvent (1410)
75.11.345 RTLeventResetEvent
Synopsis: Reset an event
Declaration: procedure RTLeventResetEvent(state: PRTLEvent)
Visibility: default
Description: RTLeventResetEvent resets the event: this should be used to undo the signaled state of an
event. Resetting an event that is not set (or was already reset) has no effect.
See also: RTLEventCreate (1409), RTLEventDestroy (1409), RTLEventSetEvent (1410), RTLEventWaitFor
(1410)
75.11.346 RTLeventSetEvent
Synopsis: Notify threads of the event.
Declaration: procedure RTLeventSetEvent(state: PRTLEvent)
Visibility: default
Description: RTLeventSetEvent notifies other threads which are listening, that the event has occurred.
See also: RTLEventCreate (1409), RTLEventResetEvent (1410), RTLEventDestroy (1409), RTLEventWait-
For (1410)
75.11.347 RTLeventWaitFor
Synopsis: Wait for an event.
Declaration: procedure RTLeventWaitFor(state: PRTLEvent)
procedure RTLeventWaitFor(state: PRTLEvent;timeout: LongInt)
Visibility: default
Description: RTLeventWaitFor suspends the thread till the event occurs. The event will occur when another
thread calls RTLEventSetEvent (1410) on State.
By default, the thread will be suspended indefinitely. However, if TimeOut is specified, then the
thread will resume after timeout milliseconds have elapsed.
See also: RTLEventCreate (1409), RTLEventDestroy (1409), RTLEventSetEvent (1410), RTLEventWaitFor
(1410)
75.11.348 RunError
Synopsis: Generate a run-time error.
Declaration: procedure RunError(w: Word)
procedure RunError
Visibility: default
1410
Description: Runerror stops the execution of the program, and generates a run-time error ErrorCode.
Errors: None.
See also: Exit (1345), Halt (1363)
Program Example55 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e RunError f u n c t i o n . }
begin
{ The program w i l l s t o p end e m i t a run−e r r o r 1 0 6 }
RunError ( 1 0 6 ) ;
end .
75.11.349 SarInt64
Synopsis: 64-bit Shift Arithmetic Right
Declaration: function SarInt64(const AValue: Int64) : Int64
function SarInt64(const AValue: Int64;Shift: Byte) : Int64
Visibility: default
Description: SarInt64 performs an arithmetic right shift for Shift positions on a 64-bit integer AValue and
returns the result. Shift is optional, and is 1 by default. The difference with the regular Shr shift
operation is that the leftmost bit is preserved during the shift operation.
See also: SarShortInt (1411), SarSmallInt (1412), SarLongInt (1411)
75.11.350 SarLongint
Declaration: function SarLongint(const AValue: LongInt;const Shift: Byte) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: SarLongint performs an arithmetic right shift for Shift positions on a 32-bit integer AValue
and returns the result. Shift is optional, and is 1 by default. The difference with the regular Shr
shift operation is that the leftmost bit is preserved during the shift operation.
See also: SarShortInt (1411), SarSmallInt (1412), SarInt64 (1411)
75.11.351 SarShortint
Declaration: function SarShortint(const AValue: ShortInt;const Shift: Byte)
: ShortInt
Visibility: default
Description: SarShortint performs an arithmetic right shift for Shift positions on an 8-bit integer AValue
See also: SarSmallint (1412), SarLongint (1411), SarInt64 (1411)
1411
75.11.352 SarSmallint
Declaration: function SarSmallint(const AValue: SmallInt;const Shift: Byte)

: SmallInt
Visibility: default
Description: SarSmallint performs an arithmetic right shift for Shift positions on an 16-bit integer AValue
See also: SarShortint (1411), SarLongint (1411), SarInt64 (1411)
75.11.353 Seek
Synopsis: Set file position
Declaration: procedure Seek(var f: File;Pos: Int64)

Visibility: default
Description: Seek sets the file-pointer for file F to record Nr. Count. The first record in a file has Count=0.
F can be any file type, except Text. If F is an untyped file, with no record size specified in Reset
(1403) or Rewrite (1404), 128 is assumed.
See also: Eof (1341), SeekEof (1413), SeekEoln (1413)
Program Example56 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Seek f u n c t i o n . }
Var
F : File ;
I , j : longint ;
begin
{ Create a f i l e and f i l l i t w i t h data }
Rewrite ( F ) ; { Create f i l e }
Close ( f ) ;
FileMode : = 2 ;
ReSet ( F , Sizeof ( i ) ) ; { Opened read / w r i t e }
For I : = 0 to 1 0 do
BlockWrite ( F , I , 1 ) ;
{ Go Back t o t h e b e g i n i n g o f t h e f i l e }
Seek ( F , 0 ) ;
For I : = 0 to 1 0 do
begin
BlockRead ( F , J , 1 ) ;
I f J<> I then
W r i t e l n ( ’ E r r o r : expected ’ , i , ’ , g o t ’ , j ) ;
end ;
1412
Close ( f ) ;
end .
75.11.354 SeekEOF
Synopsis: Set file position to end of file
Declaration: function SeekEOF(var t: Text) : Boolean
function SeekEOF : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: SeekEof returns True is the file-pointer is at the end of the file. It ignores all whitespace. Calling
this function has the effect that the file-position is advanced until the first non-whitespace character
or the end-of-file marker is reached.
If the end-of-file marker is reached, True is returned. Otherwise, False is returned.
If the parameter F is omitted, standard Input is assumed.
Remark: The SeekEOF function can only be used on real textfiles: when assigning the file to other kinds of
(virtual) text files, the function may fail, although it will perform a number of tests to guard against
wrong usage.
Errors: A run-time error is generated if the file F isn’t opened.
See also: Eof (1341), SeekEoln (1413), Seek (1412)
Program Example57 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e SeekEof f u n c t i o n . }

Var C : Char ;
begin
{ t h i s w i l l p r i n t a l l c h a r a c t e r s from s t a n d a r d i n p u t except
Whitespace c h a r a c t e r s . }
While Not SeekEof do
begin
Read ( C ) ;
Write ( C ) ;
end ;
end .
75.11.355 SeekEOLn
Synopsis: Set file position to end of line
Declaration: function SeekEOLn(var t: Text) : Boolean
function SeekEOLn : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: SeekEoln returns True is the file-pointer is at the end of the current line. It ignores all whitespace.
Calling this function has the effect that the file-position is advanced until the first non-whitespace
character or the end-of-line marker is reached. If the end-of-line marker is reached, True is returned.
Otherwise, False is returned. The end-of-line marker is defined as #10, the LineFeed character. If
the parameter F is omitted, standard Input is assumed.
1413
Errors: A run-time error is generated if the file F isn’t opened.

See also: Eof (1341), SeekEof (1413), Seek (1412)
Program Example58 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e SeekEoln f u n c t i o n . }

Var
C : Char ;
begin
{ T h i s w i l l read t h e f i r s t l i n e o f s t a n d a r d o u t p u t and p r i n t
a l l c h a r a c t e r s except whitespace . }
While not SeekEoln do
Begin
Read ( c ) ;
Write ( c ) ;
end ;
end .
75.11.356 Seg
Synopsis: Return segment
Declaration: function Seg(var X) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Seg returns the segment of the address of a variable. This function is only supported for compati-
bility. In Free Pascal, it returns always 0, since Free Pascal uses a flat 32/64 bit memory model. In
such a memory model segments have no meaning.
Errors: None.
See also: DSeg (1337), CSeg (1332), Ofs (1391), Ptr (1397)
Program Example60 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Seg f u n c t i o n . }

Var
W : Word ;
begin
W: = Seg (W) ; { W c o n t a i n s i t s own Segment }
end .
75.11.357 SemaphoreDestroy
Synopsis: Destroy a semaphore
Declaration: procedure SemaphoreDestroy(const sem: Pointer)
Visibility: default
1414
Description: SemaphoreDestroy destroys a semaphore, created with SemaphoreInit (1415).

The use of semaphores requires thread support (use #rtl.cthreads (519) unit on unices).
Errors: If no thread support is compiled in, then calling this function will result in a run-time error 232.
See also: #rtl.cthreads (519), SemaphoreWait (1415), SemaphorePost (1415), SemaphoreInit (1415)
75.11.358 SemaphoreInit
Synopsis: Create a new semaphore
Declaration: function SemaphoreInit : Pointer
Visibility: default
Description: SemaphoreInit creates a new semaphore, which can be used in thread synchronization. The
semaphore can be used with SemaphoreWait (1415) and SemaphorePost (1415), and must be de-
stroyed with SemaphoreDestroy (1414).
The result is an untyped pointer (thread support is platform dependent).
Errors: On error, Pointer(-1) is returned. If no thread support is compiled in, then calling this function
will result in a run-time error 232.
See also: #rtl.cthreads (519), SemaphoreWait (1415), SemaphorePost (1415), SemaphoreDestroy (1414)
75.11.359 SemaphorePost
Synopsis: Make semaphore available
Declaration: procedure SemaphorePost(const sem: Pointer)
Visibility: default
Description: SemaphorePost makes the semaphore FSem to available. Any threads that were waiting for the
semaphore FSem to become available (using SemaphoreWait (1415), will continue to execute.
See also: #rtl.cthreads (519), SemaphoreInit (1415), SemaphoreWait (1415), SemaphoreDestroy (1414)
75.11.360 SemaphoreWait
Synopsis: Wait for semaphore to become available
Declaration: procedure SemaphoreWait(const sem: Pointer)
Visibility: default
Description: SemaphoreWait waits (indefinitely) for the semaphore FSem to become available.
See also: #rtl.cthreads (519), SemaphoreInit (1415), SemaphorePost (1415), SemaphoreDestroy (1414)
1415
75.11.361 SetCodePage
Synopsis: Set the codepage of a string
Declaration: procedure SetCodePage(var s: RawByteString;CodePage: TSystemCodePage;

Convert: Boolean)
Visibility: default
Description: SetCodePage sets the codepage of a string S to CodePage. If Convert is True then the string
will be transcoded to the new codepage. The resulting string will have reference count 1.
See also: StringCodePage (1427)
75.11.362 Setjmp
Synopsis: Save current execution point.
Declaration: function Setjmp(var S: jmp_buf) : LongInt

Visibility: default
Description: SetJmp fills env with the necessary data for a jump back to the point where it was called. It returns
zero if called in this way. If the function returns nonzero, then it means that a call to LongJmp (1385)
with env as an argument was made somewhere in the program.
Errors: None.
See also: LongJmp (1385)
program example79 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e setjmp , longjmp f u n c t i o n s }
procedure dojmp ( var env : jmp_buf ; v a l u e : l o n g i n t ) ;
begin
value : = 2 ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Going t o jump ! ’ ) ;
{ T h i s w i l l r e t u r n t o t h e setjmp c a l l ,
and r e t u r n v a l u e i n s t e a d o f 0 }
longjmp ( env , v a l u e ) ;
end ;
var env : jmp_buf ;
begin
i f setjmp ( env ) = 0 then
begin
w r i t e l n ( ’ Passed f i r s t t i m e . ’ ) ;
dojmp ( env , 2 ) ;
end
else
w r i t e l n ( ’ Passed second t i m e . ’ ) ;
end .
1416
75.11.363 SetLength
Synopsis: Set length of a string.
Declaration: procedure SetLength(var S: AStringType;Len: Integer)

procedure SetLength(var A: DynArrayType;Len: Integer)
Visibility: default
Description: SetLength sets the length of the string S to Len. S can be an ansistring, a short string or a
widestring. For ShortStrings, Len can maximally be 255. For AnsiStrings it can have any
value. For AnsiString strings, SetLength \emph{must} be used to set the length of the string.
In the case of a dynamical array A, setlength sets the number of elements. The elements are numbered
from index 0, so the count runs from 0 to Len-1. If Zero is specified, the array is cleared.
Errors: None.
See also: Length (1380)
Program Example85 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e SetLength f u n c t i o n . }
begin
Setlength (S, 1 0 0 ) ;
F i l l C h a r (S [ 1 ] , 1 0 0 , # 3 2 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ " ’ ,S , ’ " ’ ) ;
end .
75.11.364 SetMemoryManager
Synopsis: Set a memory manager
Declaration: procedure SetMemoryManager(const MemMgr: TMemoryManager)
Visibility: default
Description: SetMemoryManager sets the current memory manager record to MemMgr.
For an example, see the programmer’s guide.
Errors: None.
See also: GetMemoryManager (1359), IsMemoryManagerSet (1379)
75.11.365 SetMultiByteConversionCodePage
Synopsis: Set codepage for conversions from multi-byte strings to single-byte strings
Declaration: procedure SetMultiByteConversionCodePage(CodePage: TSystemCodePage)
Visibility: default
1417
Description: SetMultiByteConversionCodePage sets DefaultSystemCodePage (1289) to CodePage.

The effect of this change is that the default codepage used to translate multi-byte (UTF-16) strings
to single-byte codepage-aware strings changes, and code page conversions will be done to the new
codepage.
Do not set DefaultSystemCodePage directly, as additional actions may need to be done when
changing the code page.
See also: DefaultSystemCodePage (1289), SetMultiByteFileSystemCodePage (1418), SetMultiByteRTLFileSys-
temCodePage (1418)
75.11.366 SetMultiByteFileSystemCodePage
Synopsis: Set codepage used when passing strings to OS single-byte filesystem APIs
Declaration: procedure SetMultiByteFileSystemCodePage(CodePage: TSystemCodePage)

Visibility: default
Description: SetMultiByteFileSystemCodePage sets the codepage used in single-byte OS filesystem
APIs to CodePage. The effect of this change is that the default codepage used to translate multi-
byte (UTF-16) strings to single-byte codepage-aware strings used in Filesystem APIs changes, and
strings passed to the codepage-aware filesystem APIs will be passed using the new codepage.
This constant is not used if the filesystem API of the OS is multi-byte (such as on Windows).
Do not set DefaultFileSystemCodePage directly, as additional actions may need to be done
when changing the code page.
See also: DefaultFileSystemCodePage (1288), SetMultiByteConversionCodePage (1417), SetMultiByteRTL-

FileSystemCodePage (1418)
75.11.367 SetMultiByteRTLFileSystemCodePage
Synopsis: Set codepage used when interpreting strings from OS single-byte filesystem APIs
Declaration: procedure SetMultiByteRTLFileSystemCodePage(CodePage: TSystemCodePage)
Visibility: default
Description: SetMultiByteRTLFileSystemCodePage sets the codepage used to interprete strings re-
turned by single-byte OS filesystem APIs to CodePage.
The effect of this change is that the default codepage used to translate single byte strings obtained
from the OS to single-byte codepage-aware strings or multi-byte strings changes, and strings obtained
from the codepage-aware filesystem APIs will be interpreted using the new codepage.
his constant is not used if the filesystem API of the OS is multi-byte (such as on Windows).
Do not set DefaultRTLFileSystemCodePage directly, as additional actions may need to be
done when changing the code page.
See also: SetMultiByteFileSystemCodePage (1418), SetMultiByteConversionCodePage (1417), SetMultiByteRTL-

FileSystemCodePage (1418)
1418
75.11.368 SetResourceManager
Synopsis: Set the resource manager
Declaration: procedure SetResourceManager(const New: TResourceManager)

Visibility: default
Description: SetResourceManager sets the active resource manager to Manager. After a call to SetResourceManager,
the functions in the Manager record will be used to handle resources.
Note that it is not supported to change resource managers on-the-fly: any resources or information
about resources obtained should be discareded prior to a call to SetResourceManager. Typi-
cally, SetResourceManager should be called once, at program startup.
Errors: None.
See also: TResourceManager (1275), GetResourceManager (1359)
75.11.369 SetString
Synopsis: Set length of a string and copy buffer.
Declaration: procedure SetString(out S: AnsiString;Buf: PAnsiChar;Len: SizeInt)
procedure SetString(out S: AnsiString;Buf: PWideChar;Len: SizeInt)
procedure SetString(out S: Shortstring;Buf: PChar;Len: SizeInt)
procedure SetString(out S: UnicodeString;Buf: PUnicodeChar;Len: SizeInt)
procedure SetString(out S: UnicodeString;Buf: PChar;Len: SizeInt)
procedure SetString(out S: WideString;Buf: PWideChar;Len: SizeInt)
procedure SetString(out S: WideString;Buf: PChar;Len: SizeInt)
Visibility: default
Description: SetString sets the length of the string S to Len and if Buf is non-nil, copies Len characters
from Buf into S. S can be an ansistring, a short string or a widestring. For ShortStrings, Len
can maximally be 255.
Errors: None.
See also: SetLength (1417)
75.11.370 SetTextBuf
Synopsis: Set size of text file internal buffer
Declaration: procedure SetTextBuf(var f: Text;var Buf)
procedure SetTextBuf(var f: Text;var Buf;Size: SizeInt)
Visibility: default
Description: SetTextBuf assigns an I/O buffer to a text file. The new buffer is located at Buf and is Size
bytes long. If Size is omitted, then SizeOf(Buf) is assumed. The standard buffer of any text file
is 128 bytes long. For heavy I/O operations this may prove too slow. The SetTextBuf procedure
allows to set a bigger buffer for the I/O of the application, thus reducing the number of system calls,
and thus reducing the load on the system resources. The maximum size of the newly assigned buffer
is 65355 bytes.
Remark:
1419
•Never assign a new buffer to an opened file. A new buffer can be assigned immediately after
a call to Rewrite (1404), Reset (1403) or Append, but not after the file was read from/written
to. This may cause loss of data. If a new buffer must be assigned after read/write operations
have been performed, the file should be flushed first. This will ensure that the current buffer is
emptied.
•Take care that the assigned buffer is always valid. If a local variable is assigned as a buffer, then
after the program exits the local program block, the buffer will no longer be valid, and stack
problems may occur.
Errors: No checking on Size is done.
See also: Assign (1296), Reset (1403), Rewrite (1404), Append (1295)
Program Example61 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e SetTextBuf f u n c t i o n . }
Var
Fin , Fout : Text ;
Ch : Char ;
B u f i n , B u f o u t : Array [ 1 . . 1 0 0 0 0 ] of b y t e ;
begin
Assign ( Fin , paramstr ( 1 ) ) ;
Reset ( F i n ) ;
Assign ( Fout , paramstr ( 2 ) ) ;
Rewrite ( Fout ) ;
{ T h i s i s harmless b e f o r e IO has begun }
{ Try t h i s program again on a b i g f i l e ,
a f t e r commenting o u t t h e f o l l o w i n g 2
l i n e s and r e c o m p i l i n g i t . }
SetTextBuf ( Fin , B u f i n ) ;
SetTextBuf ( Fout , B u f o u t ) ;
While not eof ( F i n ) do
begin
Read ( Fin , ch ) ;
w r i t e ( Fout , ch ) ;
end ;
Close ( F i n ) ;
Close ( Fout ) ;
end .
75.11.371 SetTextCodePage
Synopsis: Set the codepage used in a text file.
Declaration: procedure SetTextCodePage(var T: Text;CodePage: TSystemCodePage)
Visibility: default
Description: GetTextCodePage sets the codepage that the text file T uses. All strings written to the file will
be converted to the indicated codepage. By default, the codepage is set to CP_ACP.
Errors: None.
See also: TextRec (1269), GetTextCodePage (1360)
1420
75.11.372 SetTextLineEnding
Synopsis: Set the end-of-line character for the given text file.
Declaration: procedure SetTextLineEnding(var f: Text;Ending: string)

Visibility: default
Description: SetTextLineEnding sets the end-of-line character for the text file F to Ending. By default,
this is the string indicated by DefaultTextLineBreakStyle (1231).
Errors: None.
See also: DefaultTextLineBreakStyle (1231), TTextLineBreakStyle (1278)
75.11.373 SetThreadManager
Synopsis: Set the thread manager, optionally return the current thread manager.
Declaration: function SetThreadManager(const NewTM: TThreadManager;

var OldTM: TThreadManager) : Boolean
function SetThreadManager(const NewTM: TThreadManager) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: SetThreadManager sets the thread manager to NewTM. If OldTM is given, SetThreadManager
uses it to return the previously used thread manager.
The function returns True if the threadmanager was set succesfully, False if an error occurred.
Errors: If an error occurred cleaning up the previous manager, or an error occurred initializing the new
manager, False is returned.
See also: GetThreadManager (1360), TThreadManager (1279)
75.11.374 SetUnicodeStringManager
Synopsis: Set the unicodestring manager
Declaration: procedure SetUnicodeStringManager(const New: TUnicodeStringManager)

procedure SetUnicodeStringManager(const New: TUnicodeStringManager;
var Old: TUnicodeStringManager)
Visibility: default
Description: SetUnicodeStringManager sets the current unicodestring manager to New. Optionally, it
returns the currently active widestring manager in Old.
UnicodeStrings are implemented in different ways on different platforms. Therefore, the Free Pascal
Runtime library has no fixed implementation of widestring routines. Instead, it defines a Unicode-
String manager record, with callbacks that can be set to an implementation which is most efficient
on the current platform. On windows, standard Windows routines will be used. On Unix and Linux,
an implementation based on the C library is available (in unit cwstring).
It is possible to implement a custom unicodestring manager, optimized for the current application,
without having to recompile the complete Run-Time Library.
See also: TUnicodeStringManager (1280)
1421
75.11.375 SetVariantManager
Synopsis: Set the current variant manager.
Declaration: procedure SetVariantManager(const VarMgr: tvariantmanager)

Visibility: default
Description: SetVariantManager sets the variant manager to varmgr.
See also: GetVariantManager (1361)
75.11.376 SetWideStringManager
Synopsis: Set the widestring manager
Declaration: procedure SetWideStringManager(const New: TUnicodeStringManager)
procedure SetWideStringManager(const New: TUnicodeStringManager;
var Old: TUnicodeStringManager)
Visibility: default
Description: SetWideStringManager sets the current widestring manager to New. Optionally, it returns the
currently active widestring manager in Old.
WideStrings are implemented in different ways on different platforms. Therefore, the Free Pascal
Runtime library has no fixed implementation of widestring routines. Instead, it defines a WideString
manager record, with callbacks that can be set to an implementation which is most efficient on the
current platform. On windows, standard Windows routines will be used. On Unix and Linux, an
It is possible to implement a custom widestring manager, optimized for the current application, with-
out having to recompile the complete Run-Time Library.
See also: TWideStringManager (1286)
75.11.377 ShortCompareText
Synopsis: Compare 2 shortstrings
Declaration: function ShortCompareText(const S1: shortstring;const S2: shortstring)

: SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: ShortCompareText compares two shortstrings, S1 and S2, and returns the following result:
<0if S1<S2.
0if S1=S2.
>0if S1>S2.
The comparision of the two strings is case-insensitive. The function does not take internationalization
settings into account, it simply compares ASCII values.
Errors: None.
See also: CompareText (1526)
1422
75.11.378 sin
Synopsis: Calculate sine of angle
Declaration: function sin(d: ValReal) : ValReal

Visibility: default
Description: Sin returns the sine of its argument X, where X is an angle in radians. If the absolute value of the
argument is larger than 26̂3, then the result is undefined.
Errors: None.
See also: Cos (1332), Pi (1394), Exp (1346), Ln (1382)
Program Example62 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Sin f u n c t i o n . }
begin
W r i t e l n ( Sin ( Pi ) : 0 : 1 ) ; { Prints 0.0 }
W r i t e l n ( Sin ( Pi / 2 ) : 0 : 1 ) ; { P r i n t s 1 . 0 }
end .
75.11.379 SizeOf
Synopsis: Return size of a variable or type.
Declaration: function SizeOf(X: TAnyType) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: SizeOf returns the size, in bytes, of any variable or type-identifier.
Remark: This isn’t really a RTL function. Its result is calculated at compile-time, and hard-coded in the
executable.
Errors: None.
See also: Addr (1293)
Program Example63 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e SizeOf f u n c t i o n . }

Var
I : Longint ;
S : String [ 1 0 ] ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( SizeOf ( I ) ) ; { Prints 4 }
W r i t e l n ( SizeOf (S ) ) ; { Prints 11 }
end .
1423
75.11.380 SizeofResource
Synopsis: Return the size of a particular resource
Declaration: function SizeofResource(ModuleHandle: TFPResourceHMODULE;
ResHandle: TFPResourceHandle) : LongWord
Visibility: default
Description: SizeOfResource returns the size of the resource identified by ResHandle in module identified
by ModuleHandle. ResHandle should be obtained from a call to LoadResource (1383)
Errors: In case of an error, 0 is returned.
See also: FindResource (1352), FreeResource (1357), LoadResource (1383), LockResource (1383), Unlock-
75.11.381 Slice
Synopsis: Return part of an array
Declaration: function Slice(const A: ArrayType;ACount: Integer) : ArrayType2
Visibility: default
Description: Slice returns the first ACount elements from the array A. It returns an array with the same element
type as A, but this array is not assignment compatible to any other array, and can therefor only be
used in open array arguments to functions.
See also: Length (1380), SetLength (1417)
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e S l i c e f u n c t i o n . }
procedure ShowArray ( const A : array of I n t e g e r ) ;

var
I : Integer ;
begin
f o r I : = Low(A ) to High (A ) do
WriteLn ( I , ’ : ’ , A [ I ] ) ;
end ;
begin
ShowArray ( S l i c e ( [ 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 ] , 2 ) ) ;
end .
75.11.382 Space
Synopsis: Return a string of spaces
Declaration: function Space(b: Byte) : shortstring
Visibility: default
Description: Space returns a shortstring with length B, consisting of spaces.
See also: StringOfChar (1428)
1424
75.11.383 Sptr
Synopsis: Return current stack pointer
Declaration: function Sptr : Pointer

Visibility: default
Description: Sptr returns the current stack pointer.
Errors: None.
See also: SSeg (1426)
program Example64 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e s p t r f u n c t i o n . }
var p : p t r u i n t ;
begin
p : = ofs ( s p t r ) ; { P Contains now t h e c u r r e n t s t a c k p o s i t i o n . }
end .
75.11.384 sqr
Synopsis: Calculate the square of a value.
Declaration: function sqr(l: LongInt) : LongInt

function sqr(l: Int64) : Int64
function sqr(l: QWord) : QWord
function sqr(d: ValReal) : ValReal
Visibility: default
Description: Sqr returns the square of its argument X.

Errors: None.
See also: Sqrt (1426), Ln (1382), Exp (1346)
Program Example65 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Sqr f u n c t i o n . }

Var i : I n t e g e r ;
begin
For i : = 1 to 1 0 do
w r i t e l n ( Sqr ( i ) : 3 ) ;
end .
1425
75.11.385 sqrt
Synopsis: Calculate the square root of a value
Declaration: function sqrt(d: ValReal) : ValReal
Visibility: default
Description: Sqrt returns the square root of its argument X, which must be positive.
Errors: If X is negative, then a run-time error is generated.
See also: Sqr (1425), Ln (1382), Exp (1346)
Program Example66 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e S q r t f u n c t i o n . }
begin
W r i t e l n ( Sqrt ( 4 ) : 0 : 3 ) ; { P r i n t s 2 . 0 0 0 }
W r i t e l n ( Sqrt ( 2 ) : 0 : 3 ) ; { P r i n t s 1 . 4 1 4 }
end .
75.11.386 Sseg
Synopsis: Return stack segment register value.
Declaration: function Sseg : Word
Visibility: default
Description: SSeg returns the Stack Segment. This function is only supported for compatibility reasons, as Sptr
returns the correct contents of the stackpointer.
Errors: None.
See also: Sptr (1425)
Program Example67 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e SSeg f u n c t i o n . }

Var W : L o n g i n t ;
begin
W: =SSeg ;
end .
75.11.387 StackTop
Synopsis: Top location of the stack.
Declaration: function StackTop : Pointer
Visibility: default
1426
Description: StackTop contains the top of the stack for the current process. It is used to check the heap on
some operating systems, and is set by the system unit initialization code. Do not use or modify this
value.
See also: StackBottom (1291), StackLength (1291)
75.11.388 Str
Synopsis: Convert a numerical value to a string.
Declaration: procedure Str(var X: TNumericType;var S: string)
Visibility: default
Description: Str returns a string which represents the value of X. X can be any numerical type. The actual
declaration of Str is not according to pascal syntax, and should be
procedure Str(var X: TNumericType[:NumPlaces[:Decimals]];var S: String)
Where the optional NumPlaces and Decimals specifiers control the formatting of the string:
NumPlaces gives the total width of the string, and Decimals the number of decimals after the
decimal separator char.
Errors: None.
See also: Val (1445)
Program Example68 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e S t r f u n c t i o n . }
Function I n t T o S t r ( I : L o n g i n t ) : S t r i n g ;
begin
Str ( I ,S ) ;
I n t T o S t r : =S ;
end ;
begin
S: = ’ ∗ ’ + I n t T o S t r ( −233)+ ’ ∗ ’ ;
Writeln ( S ) ;
end .
75.11.389 StringCodePage
Synopsis: Get the code page of a string
Declaration: function StringCodePage(const S: RawByteString) : TSystemCodePage
; Overload
function StringCodePage(const S: UnicodeString) : TSystemCodePage
; Overload
1427
Visibility: default
Description: StringCodePage returns the code page of a string (S), regardless of the string type. It accesses
the internal structures of the string to retrieve this information. For an empty string, DefaultSystem-
CodePage (1289) is returned.
See also: DefaultSystemCodePage (1289), StringElementSize (1428), StringRefCount (1429), SetCodePage
(1416)
75.11.390 StringElementSize
Synopsis: Get the character size of a string.
Declaration: function StringElementSize(const S: RawByteString) : Word; Overload
function StringElementSize(const S: UnicodeString) : Word; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: StringCodePage returns the character size of a string (S), regardless of the string type. It ac-
cesses the internal structures of the string to retrieve this information. For an empty string, SizeOf(AnsiChar)
(normally 1) is returned.
See also: StringCodePage (1427), StringRefCount (1429)
75.11.391 StringOfChar
Synopsis: Return a string consisting of 1 character repeated N times.
Declaration: function StringOfChar(c: AnsiChar;l: SizeInt) : AnsiString
Visibility: default
Description: StringOfChar creates a new String of length l and fills it with the character c.
It is equivalent to the following calls:
SetLength(StringOfChar,l);
FillChar(Pointer(StringOfChar)^,Length(StringOfChar),c);
Errors: None.
See also: SetLength (1417)
Program Example97 ;
{ $H+ }
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e S t r i n g O f C h a r f u n c t i o n . }
begin
S: = S t r i n g O f C h a r ( ’ ’ ,40)+ ’ A l i g n e d a t column 4 1 . ’ ;
Writeln ( s ) ;
end .
1428
75.11.392 StringRefCount
Synopsis: Get the reference count of a string
Declaration: function StringRefCount(const S: RawByteString) : SizeInt; Overload

function StringRefCount(const S: UnicodeString) : SizeInt; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: StringRefCount returns the reference count of a string (S), regardless of the string type. It
accesses the internal structures of the string to retrieve this information. For an empty string, 0 is
returned.
See also: StringCodePage (1427), StringElementSize (1428)
75.11.393 StringToPPChar
Synopsis: Split string in list of null-terminated strings
Declaration: function StringToPPChar(var S: AnsiString;ReserveEntries: Integer)

: PPChar
function StringToPPChar(S: PChar;ReserveEntries: Integer) : PPChar
Visibility: default
Description: StringToPPChar splits the string S in words, replacing any whitespace with zero characters. It
returns a pointer to an array of pchars that point to the first letters of the words in S. This array is
terminated by a Nil pointer.
The function does not add a zero character to the end of the string unless it ends on whitespace.
The function reserves memory on the heap to store the array of PChar; The caller is responsible for
freeing this memory.
This function is only available on certain platforms.
Errors: None.
See also: ArrayStringToPPchar (1296)
75.11.394 StringToUnicodeChar
Synopsis: Convert an ansistring to a null-terminated array of unicode characters.
Declaration: function StringToUnicodeChar(const Src: RawByteString;
Dest: PUnicodeChar;DestSize: SizeInt)
: PUnicodeChar
Visibility: default
Description: StringToUnicodeChar converts the ansistring S to a unicodestring and places the result in
Dest. The size of the memory location pointed to by Dest must be given in DestSize. If the
result string is longer than the available size, the result string will be truncated.
The function always returns Dest.
Errors: No check is performed to see whether Dest points to a valid memory location.
See also: UnicodeCharToString (1440), UnicodeCharLenToString (1440)
1429
75.11.395 StringToWideChar
Synopsis: Convert a string to an array of widechars.
Declaration: function StringToWideChar(const Src: RawByteString;Dest: PWideChar;

DestSize: SizeInt) : PWideChar
Visibility: default
Description: StringToWideChar converts an ansistring Src to a null-terminated array of WideChars. The
destination for this array is pointed to by Dest, and contains room for at least DestSize widechars.
Errors: No validity checking is performed on Dest.
See also: WideCharToString (1448), WideCharToStrVar (1448), WideCharLenToStrVar (1447), WideCharLen-
ToString (1447)
75.11.396 strlen
Declaration: function strlen(p: PChar) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: Returns the length of the null-terminated string P.

Errors: None.
75.11.397 strpas
Synopsis: Convert a null-terminated string to a shortstring.
Declaration: function strpas(p: PChar) : shortstring

Visibility: default
Description: Converts a null terminated string in P to a Pascal string, and returns this string. The string is truncated
at 255 characters.
Errors: None.
75.11.398 subtract(variant,variant):variant
Synopsis: Implement subtraction (-) operation on variants.
Declaration: operator -(const op1: variant;const op2: variant) : variant
Visibility: default
Description: The implementation of the subtraction - operation is delegated to the variant manager with operation
opSubtract.
1430
75.11.399 Succ
Synopsis: Return next element of ordinal type.
Declaration: function Succ(X: TOrdinal) : TOrdinal

Visibility: default
Description: Succ returns the element that succeeds the element that was passed to it. If it is applied to the last
value of the ordinal type, and the program was compiled with range checking on ({$R+}), then a
run-time error will be generated.
for an example, see Ord (1392).
Errors: Run-time error 201 is generated when the result is out of range.
See also: Ord (1392), Pred (1396), High (1365), Low (1385)
75.11.400 SuspendThread
Synopsis: Suspend a running thread.
Declaration: function SuspendThread(threadHandle: TThreadID) : DWord
Visibility: default
Description: SuspendThread suspends a running thread. The thread is identified with it’s handle or ID
threadHandle.
See also: ResumeThread (1404), KillThread (1379)
75.11.401 Swap
Synopsis: Swap high and low bytes/words of a variable
Declaration: function swap(X: Word) : Word
function Swap(X: Integer) : Integer
function swap(X: LongInt) : LongInt
function Swap(X: Cardinal) : Cardinal
function Swap(X: QWord) : QWord
function swap(X: Int64) : Int64
Visibility: default
Description: Swap swaps the high and low order bytes of X if X is of type Word or Integer, or swaps the high
and low order words of X if X is of type Longint or Cardinal. The return type is the type of X
Errors: None.
See also: Lo (1382), Hi (1364)
1431
Program Example69 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Swap f u n c t i o n . }

Var W : Word ;
L : Longint ;
begin
W: = $1234 ;
W: =Swap(W) ;
i f W<>$3412 then
w r i t e l n ( ’ E r r o r when swapping word ! ’ ) ;
L : = $12345678 ;
L : =Swap( L ) ;
i f L<>$56781234 then
w r i t e l n ( ’ E r r o r when swapping L o n g i n t ! ’ ) ;
end .
75.11.402 SwapEndian
Synopsis: Swap endianness of the argument
Declaration: function SwapEndian(const AValue: SmallInt) : SmallInt
function SwapEndian(const AValue: Word) : Word
function SwapEndian(const AValue: LongInt) : LongInt
function SwapEndian(const AValue: DWord) : DWord
function SwapEndian(const AValue: Int64) : Int64
function SwapEndian(const AValue: QWord) : QWord
Visibility: default
Description: SwapEndian will swap the endianness of the bytes in its argument.
Errors: None.
See also: hi (1364), lo (1382), swap (1431), BEToN (1317), NToBE (1389), NToLE (1390), LEToN (1382)
75.11.403 SysAllocMem
Synopsis: System memory manager: Allocate memory
Declaration: function SysAllocMem(size: PtrUInt) : Pointer
Visibility: default
Description: SysFreemSize is the system memory manager implementation for AllocMem (1294)
See also: AllocMem (1294)
75.11.404 SysAssert
Synopsis: Standard Assert failure implementation
Declaration: procedure SysAssert(const Msg: ShortString;const FName: ShortString;
LineNo: LongInt;ErrorAddr: Pointer)
Visibility: default
1432
Description: SysAssert is the standard implementation of the assertion failed code. It is the default value of
the AssertErrorProc constant. It will print the assert message Msg together with the filename
FName and linenumber LineNo to standard error output (StdErr) and will halt the program with
exit code 227. The error address ErrorAddr is ignored.
See also: AssertErrorProc (1230)
75.11.405 SysBackTraceStr
Synopsis: Format an address suitable for inclusion in a backtrace
Declaration: function SysBackTraceStr(Addr: CodePointer) : ShortString
Visibility: default
Description: SysBackTraceStr will create a string representation of the address Addr, suitable for inclusion
in a stack backtrace.
Errors: None.
75.11.406 SysFlushStdIO
Synopsis:
Declaration: procedure SysFlushStdIO

Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.407 SysFreemem
Synopsis: System memory manager free routine.
Declaration: function SysFreemem(p: pointer) : PtrUInt
Visibility: default
Description: SysFreeem is the system memory manager implementation for FreeMem (1356)
See also: FreeMem (1356)
75.11.408 SysFreememSize
Synopsis: System memory manager free routine.
Declaration: function SysFreememSize(p: pointer;Size: PtrUInt) : PtrUInt
Visibility: default
Description: SysFreemSize is the system memory manager implementation for FreeMem (1356)
See also: MemSize (1386)
1433
75.11.409 SysGetFPCHeapStatus
Synopsis: Return the status of the FPC heapmanager
Declaration: function SysGetFPCHeapStatus : TFPCHeapStatus

Visibility: default
Description: SysGetFPCHeapStatus returns the status of the default FPC heapmanager. It is set as the default
value of the corresponding GetFPCHeapStatus (1358) function.
Errors: None. The result of this function is bogus information if the current heapmanager is not the standard
FPC heapmanager.
See also: GetFPCHeapStatus (1358)
75.11.410 SysGetHeapStatus
Synopsis: System implementation of GetHeapStatus (1358)
Declaration: function SysGetHeapStatus : THeapStatus
Visibility: default
Description: SysGetHeapStatus is the system implementation of the GetHeapStatus (1358) call.
See also: GetHeapStatus (1358)
75.11.411 SysGetmem
Synopsis: System memory manager memory allocator.
Declaration: function SysGetmem(Size: PtrUInt) : Pointer
Visibility: default
Description: SysGetmem is the system memory manager implementation for GetMem (1358)
See also: GetMem (1358), GetMemory (1359)
75.11.412 SysInitExceptions
Synopsis: Initialize exceptions.
Declaration: procedure SysInitExceptions
Visibility: default
Description: SysInitExceptions initializes the exception system. This procedure should never be called
directly, it is taken care of by the RTL.
1434
75.11.413 SysInitFPU
Synopsis: Initialize the FPU
Declaration: procedure SysInitFPU
Visibility: default
Description: SysInitFPU initializes (resets) the floating point unit, if one is available. It is called for instance
when a new thread is started.
See also: BeginThread (1317)
75.11.414 SysInitStdIO
Synopsis: Initialize standard input and output.
Declaration: procedure SysInitStdIO
Visibility: default
Description: SysInitStdIO initializes the standard input and output files: Output (1290), Input (1290) and
StdErr (1291). This routine is called by the initialization code of the system unit, there should be no
need to call it directly.
75.11.415 SysMemSize
Synopsis: System memory manager: free size.
Declaration: function SysMemSize(p: pointer) : PtrUInt
Visibility: default
Description: SysFreemSize is the system memory manager implementation for MemSize (1386)
See also: MemSize (1386)
75.11.416 SysReAllocMem
Synopsis: System memory manager: Reallocate memory
Declaration: function SysReAllocMem(var p: pointer;size: PtrUInt) : Pointer
Visibility: default
Description: SysReallocMem is a help routine for the system memory manager implementation for ReAl-
locMem (1402).
See also: ReAllocMem (1402)
75.11.417 SysResetFPU
Synopsis: Reset the floating point unit.
Declaration: procedure SysResetFPU
Visibility: default
Description: SysResetFPU resets the floating point unit. There should normally be no need to call this unit;
the compiler itself takes care of this.
1435
75.11.418 SysSetCtrlBreakHandler
Synopsis: System CTRL-C handler
Declaration: function SysSetCtrlBreakHandler(Handler: TCtrlBreakHandler)

: TCtrlBreakHandler
Visibility: default
Description: SysSetCtrlBreakHandler sets the CTRL-C handler to the Handler callback, and returns
the previous value of the handler.
See also: TCtrlBreakHandler (1267)
75.11.419 SysTryResizeMem
Synopsis: System memory manager: attempt to resize memory.
Declaration: function SysTryResizeMem(var p: pointer;size: PtrUInt) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: SysTryResizeMem is a help routine for the system memory manager implementation for ReAl-
locMem (1402), SysReAllocMem (1435)
See also: SysReAllocMem (1435), ReAllocMem (1402)
75.11.420 ThreadGetPriority
Synopsis: Return the priority of a thread.
Declaration: function ThreadGetPriority(threadHandle: TThreadID) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: ThreadGetPriority returns the priority of thread TThreadID to Prio. The returned priority
is a value between -15 and 15.
Errors: None.
See also: ThreadSetPriority (1436)
75.11.421 ThreadSetPriority
Synopsis: Set the priority of a thread.
Declaration: function ThreadSetPriority(threadHandle: TThreadID;Prio: LongInt)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: ThreadSetPriority sets the priority of thread TThreadID to Prio. Priority is a value be-
tween -15 and 15.
Errors: None.
See also: ThreadGetPriority (1436)
1436
75.11.422 ThreadSwitch
Synopsis: Signal possibility of thread switch
Declaration: procedure ThreadSwitch
Visibility: default
Description: ThreadSwitch signals the operating system that the thread should be suspended and that another
thread should be executed.
This call is a hint only, and may be ignored.
See also: SuspendThread (1431), ResumeThread (1404), KillThread (1379)
75.11.423 ToSingleByteFileSystemEncodedFileName
Synopsis: Convert string to encoding for use in single-byte filesystem API
Declaration: function ToSingleByteFileSystemEncodedFileName(const Str: UnicodeString)
: RawByteString
function ToSingleByteFileSystemEncodedFileName
(const arr: Array of WideChar)
: RawByteString
function ToSingleByteFileSystemEncodedFileName(const Str: RawByteString)
: RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: ToSingleByteFileSystemEncodedFileName converts the argument (Str or Arr) to a
single-byte string, encoded using the codepage used by the single-byte filesystem API.
This routine is simply an auxiliary routine, which converts the argument to a single-byte string using
DefaultFileSystemCodePage (1288) as a codepage.
See also: DefaultFileSystemCodePage (1288)
75.11.424 trunc
Synopsis: Truncate a floating point value.
Declaration: function trunc(d: ValReal) : Int64
Visibility: default
Description: Trunc returns the integer part of X, which is always smaller than (or equal to) X in absolute value.
Errors: None.
See also: Frac (1355), Int (1375), Round (1409)
Program Example70 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Trunc f u n c t i o n . }
begin
W r i t e l n ( Trunc ( 1 2 3 . 4 5 6 ) ) ; { P r i n t s 1 2 3 }
W r i t e l n ( Trunc ( − 1 2 3 . 4 5 6 ) ) ; { P r i n t s −123 }
1437
W r i t e l n ( Trunc ( 1 2 . 3 4 5 6 ) ) ; { P r i n t s 1 2 }
W r i t e l n ( Trunc ( − 1 2 . 3 4 5 6 ) ) ; { P r i n t s −12 }
end .
75.11.425 Truncate
Synopsis: Truncate the file at position
Declaration: procedure Truncate(var F: File)
Visibility: default
Description: Truncate truncates the (opened) file F at the current file position.
See also: Append (1295), Filepos (1347), Seek (1412)
Program Example71 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Truncate f u n c t i o n . }
Var F : F i l e of l o n g i n t ;
I , L : Longint ;
begin
Rewrite ( F ) ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 Do
Write ( F , I ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ F i l e s i z e b e f o r e Truncate : ’ , F i l e S i z e ( F ) ) ;
Close ( f ) ;
Reset ( F ) ;
Repeat
Read ( F , I ) ;
U n t i l i =5;
Truncate ( F ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ F i l e s i z e a f t e r Truncate : ’ , Filesize (F ) ) ;
Close ( f ) ;
end .
75.11.426 TryEnterCriticalsection
Synopsis: Try entering a critical section
Declaration: function TryEnterCriticalsection(var cs: TRTLCriticalSection) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: TryEnterCriticalsection attempts to enter critical section cs. It returns at once. The return
value is zero if another thread owns the critical section, or nonzero if the current thread already owns
or succesfully obtained the critical section.
1438
75.11.427 TypeInfo
Synopsis: Return pointer to type information for type
Declaration: function TypeInfo(const T: AnyType) : Pointer

Visibility: default
Description: TypeInfo is a compiler intrinsic: it returns a pointer to the generated type information (RTTI) for
the type T. If no type information was yet generated for the type, this statement will ensure that type
information is available, i.e. the result is always non-nil.
See also: Default (1333), TypeOf (1439), Initialize (1371), Finalize (1352)
75.11.428 TypeOf
Synopsis: Return pointer to VMT of an object
Declaration: function TypeOf(T: TObjectType) : Pointer

Visibility: default
Description: TypeOf is a compiler intrinsic: it returns a pointer to the VMT of the object type T.
See also: Default (1333), TypeInfo (1439)
75.11.429 UCS4StringToUnicodeString
Synopsis: Convert a UCS-4 encoded string to a unicode string
Declaration: function UCS4StringToUnicodeString(const s: UCS4String) : UnicodeString
Visibility: default
Description: UCS4StringToUnicodeString converts the UCS-4 encoded string S to a unicode string and
returns the resulting string.
This function requires the widestring manager.
See also: UnicodeStringToUCS4String (1441)
75.11.430 UCS4StringToWideString
Synopsis:
Declaration: function UCS4StringToWideString(const s: UCS4String) : WideString
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.431 Unassigned
Synopsis: Unassigned variant.
Declaration: function Unassigned : Variant
Visibility: default
1439
75.11.432 UnicodeCharLenToString
Synopsis: Convert a memory buffer with unicode characters to an ansistring
Declaration: function UnicodeCharLenToString(S: PUnicodeChar;Len: SizeInt)

: UnicodeString
Visibility: default
Description: UnicodeCharLenToString converts the unicode characters in buffer S with at most len bytes
length, to an ansistring and returns the result.
This function requires the use of a widestring manager.
Errors: No checking is done to see if the pointer S or length len are valid.
See also: StringToUnicodeChar (1429), UnicodeCharToString (1440)
75.11.433 UnicodeCharLenToStrVar
Synopsis: Convert a memory buffer with unicode characters to an ansistring
Declaration: procedure UnicodeCharLenToStrVar(Src: PUnicodeChar;Len: SizeInt;
out Dest: UnicodeString)
procedure UnicodeCharLenToStrVar(Src: PUnicodeChar;Len: SizeInt;
out Dest: AnsiString)
Visibility: default
Description: UnicodeCharLenToString converts the unicode characters in buffer S with at most len bytes
length, to an ansistring and returns the result in Dest
This function does the same as UnicodeCharLenToString (1440).
Errors: No checking is done to see if the pointer S or length len are valid.
See also: StringToUnicodeChar (1429), UnicodeCharToString (1440), UnicodeCharLenToString (1440), Uni-
codeCharToStrVar (1441)
75.11.434 UnicodeCharToString
Synopsis: Convert unicode character to string
Declaration: function UnicodeCharToString(S: PUnicodeChar) : UnicodeString
Visibility: default
Description: UnicodeCharToString converts a null-word-terminated array of unicode characters in S to an
AnsiString value. It simply calls UnicodeCharLenToString (1440) with the length of the string S.
This function requires the use of a widestring manager.
Errors: No checking is done to see if the pointer S is valid.
See also: StringToUnicodeChar (1429), UnicodeCharLenToString (1440), WidestringManager (1291)
1440
75.11.435 UnicodeCharToStrVar
Synopsis: Convert a null-terminated memory buffer with unicode characters to an ansistring
Declaration: procedure UnicodeCharToStrVar(S: PUnicodeChar;out Dest: AnsiString)
Visibility: default
Description: UnicodeCharLenToString converts the unicode characters in buffer S up to the first null word,
to an ansistring and returns the result in Dest
This function does the same as UnicodeCharToString (1440).
Errors: No checking is done to see if the pointer S is valid.
See also: StringToUnicodeChar (1429), UnicodeCharToString (1440), UnicodeCharLenToString (1440), Uni-
codeCharToString (1440)
75.11.436 UnicodeStringToUCS4String
Synopsis: Convert a unicode string to a UCS-4 string.
Declaration: function UnicodeStringToUCS4String(const s: UnicodeString) : UCS4String
Visibility: default
Description: UnicodeStringToUCS4String converts a unicode string S to a UCS-4 encoded string, and
returns the resulting string.
This function requires the widestring manager.
See also: UCS4StringToUnicodeString (1439)
75.11.437 UnicodeToUtf8
Synopsis:
Declaration: function UnicodeToUtf8(Dest: PChar;Source: PUnicodeChar;
MaxBytes: SizeInt) : SizeInt
function UnicodeToUtf8(Dest: PChar;MaxDestBytes: SizeUInt;
Source: PUnicodeChar;SourceChars: SizeUInt)
: SizeUInt
Visibility: default
Description:
75.11.438 UniqueString
Synopsis: Make sure reference count of string is 1
Declaration: procedure UniqueString(var S: RawByteString)
procedure UniqueString(var S: UnicodeString)
procedure UniqueString(var S: WideString)
Visibility: default
Description: UniqueString ensures that the ansistring S has reference count 1. It makes a copy of S if this is
necesary, and returns the copy in S
Errors: None.
1441
75.11.439 UnlockResource
Synopsis: Unlock a previously locked resource
Declaration: function UnlockResource(ResData: TFPResourceHGLOBAL) : LongBool

Visibility: default
Description: UnlockResource unlocks a previously locked resource. Note that this function does not exist on
windows, it’s only needed on other platforms.
Errors: The function returns False if it failed.

See also: FindResource (1352), FreeResource (1357), SizeofResource (1424), LoadResource (1383), lockRe-
source (1383), FreeResource (1357)
75.11.440 UnPack
Synopsis: Create unpacked array from packed array
Declaration: procedure UnPack(const Z: PackedArrayType;out A: UnpackedArrayType;
StartIndex: TIndexType)
Visibility: default
Description: UnPack will copy the elements of a packed array (Z) to an unpacked array (A). All elements in Z
are copied to A, starting at index StartIndex in A. The type of the index variable StartIndex
must match the type of the index of A.
Obviously, the type of the elements of the arrays A and Z must match.
See also: Pack (1392)
75.11.441 upCase
Synopsis: Convert a string to all uppercase.
Declaration: function upCase(const s: shortstring) : shortstring
function upCase(c: Char) : Char
function upcase(const s: ansistring) : ansistring
function UpCase(const s: UnicodeString) : UnicodeString
function UpCase(c: UnicodeChar) : UnicodeChar
function UpCase(const s: WideString) : WideString
Visibility: default
Description: Upcase returns the uppercase version of its argument C. If its argument is a string, then the com-
plete string is converted to uppercase. The type of the returned value is the same as the type of the
argument.
UpCase does not change the number of characters in the string.
Errors: None.
See also: Lowercase (1386)
1442
program Example72 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e upcase f u n c t i o n . }
var c : char ;
begin
f o r c : = ’ a ’ to ’ z ’ do
w r i t e ( upcase ( c ) ) ;
Writeln ;
{ T h i s doesn ’ t work i n TP , b u t i t does i n Free Pascal }
W r i t e l n ( upcase ( ’ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z ’ ) ) ;
end .
75.11.442 Utf8CodePointLen
Synopsis: Length of an UTF-8 codepoint.
Declaration: function Utf8CodePointLen(P: PAnsiChar;MaxLookAhead: SizeInt;

IncludeCombiningDiacriticalMarks: Boolean)
: SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: Utf8CodePointLen returns the length of the UTF-8 codepoint starting at the beginning of P. It
will look at at most MaxLookAhead bytes to do create this codepoint. If IncludeCombiningDiacriticalMarks
is true, combining diacritical marks trailing the first codepoint (which itself can also be such a mark)
will be considered to be part of the codepoint.
If the function returns a value > 0, then this is the number of bytes occupied by the codepoint and, if
requested, the trailing combining diacritical marks. If the result = 0, this means that all bytes within
the requested MaxLookAhead could be part of a single valid codepoint and, if requested, its trailing
diacritical marks, but that the codepoint is incomplete and more bytes need to be looked at. If the
result is < 0, then the function determined that the codepoint was invalid after processing the number
of bytes equal to the absolute value of the function result.
If IncludeCombiningDiacriticalMarks is True, then
•If the function processes all MaxLookAhead bytes, it will return the value MaxLookAhead
rather than 0, even though in theory more combining diacritical marks might follow if more
bytes would be looked at. Therefore, in order to ascertain that all combining diacritical marks
are processed, pass all bytes at once to this function.
•If an invalid sequence is detected while processing a potential combining diacritical mark after
a valid codepoint has been found already, the function will return the length of this valid code-
point (plus that of any preceding valid combining diacritical marks) as a positive value. The
idea is that this invalid sequence at the end is by definition not a combining diacritical mark
(since all of those are valid sequences) and hence should not render the preceding codepoint
invalid.
Errors: None.
75.11.443 UTF8Decode
Synopsis: Convert an UTF-8 encoded ansistring to a unicodestring
1443
Declaration: function UTF8Decode(const s: RawByteString) : UnicodeString

Visibility: default
Description: UTF8Decode converts the UTF-8 encoded ansistring S to a unicodestring and returns the resulting
string. It calls the low-level Utf8ToUnicode (1444) function to do the actual work.
See also: UTF8Encode (1444), Utf8ToAnsi (1444), SetWideStringManager (1422), Utf8ToUnicode (1444)
75.11.444 UTF8Encode
Synopsis: Convert a widestring or unicodestring to an UTF-8 encoded ansistring
Declaration: function UTF8Encode(const s: RawByteString) : RawByteString
function UTF8Encode(const s: UnicodeString) : RawByteString
function UTF8Encode(const s: WideString) : RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: UTF8Encode converts an ansistring or widestring S to the equivalent UTF-8 encoded unicode
string and returns this resulting string. It calls the low-level UnicodeToUTF8 (1441) function to do
the actual work.
The resulting string has code page CP_UTF8.
See also: UTF8Decode (1443), Utf8ToAnsi (1444), UnicodeToUtf8 (1441), SetWideStringManager (1422)
75.11.445 Utf8ToAnsi
Synopsis: Convert a UTF-8 encoded unicode string to an ansistring
Declaration: function Utf8ToAnsi(const s: RawByteString) : RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: Utf8ToAnsi converts an utf8-encode unicode string to an ansistring. It converts the string to a
widestring and then converts the widestring to an ansistring.
For this function to work, a widestring manager must be installed.
See also: UTF8Encode (1444), UTF8Decode (1443), SetWideStringManager (1422)
75.11.446 Utf8ToUnicode
Synopsis: Convert a buffer with UTF-8 characters to widestring characters
Declaration: function Utf8ToUnicode(Dest: PUnicodeChar;Source: PChar;
MaxChars: SizeInt) : SizeInt
function Utf8ToUnicode(Dest: PUnicodeChar;MaxDestChars: SizeUInt;
Source: PChar;SourceBytes: SizeUInt) : SizeUInt
Visibility: default
Description: Utf8ToUnicode converts the buffer in Source with a length of SourceBytes or for a maxi-
mum length of MaxChars (or MaxDestChars) widestring characters to the buffer pointed to by
Dest.
The function returns the number of copied widestring characters.
For this function to work, a widestring manager must be installed.
1444

See also: UTF8Encode (1444), UTF8Decode (1443), Utf8ToAnsi (1444), SetWideStringManager (1422)
75.11.447 Val
Synopsis: Calculate numerical/enumerated value of a string.
Declaration: procedure Val(const S: string;var V;var Code: Word)

Visibility: default
Description: Val converts the value represented in the string S to a numerical value or an enumerated value,
and stores this value in the variable V, which can be of type Longint, Real and Byte or any
enumerated type. If the conversion isn’t succesfull, then the parameter Code contains the index of
the character in S which prevented the conversion. The string S is allowed to contain spaces in the
beginning.
The string S can contain a number in decimal, hexadecimal, binary or octal format, as described in
the language reference. For enumerated values, the string must be the name of the enumerated value.
The name is searched case insensitively.
For hexadecimal values, the prefix ’0x’ or ’x’ (case insensitive) may be used as well.
The conversion to enumerated exists only as of version 2.3.1 (or later) of the compiler.
Errors: If the conversion doesn’t succeed, the value of Code indicates the position where the conversion
went wrong. The value of V is then undefined.
See also: Str (1427)
Program Example74 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Val f u n c t i o n . }

Var I , Code : I n t e g e r ;
begin
Val ( ParamStr ( 1 ) , I , Code ) ;
I f Code< >0 then
Writeln ( ’ Error at p o s i t i o n ’ , code , ’ : ’ , Paramstr ( 1 ) [ Code ] )
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ Value : ’ , I ) ;
end .
75.11.448 VarArrayGet
Synopsis:
Declaration: function VarArrayGet(const A: Variant;const Indices: Array of LongInt)
: Variant
Visibility: default
Description:
1445
75.11.449 VarArrayPut
Synopsis: Put a value in a single cell of a variant array
Declaration: procedure VarArrayPut(var A: Variant;const Value: Variant;

const Indices: Array of LongInt)
Visibility: default
Description: VarArrayPut puts Value in the variant array A at the location indicated by Indices. Thus the
statement
VarArrayPut(A,B,[2,1]);
is equivalent to
A[2,1]:=B;
The difference is that the previous is usable when the amount of indices is not known at compile
time.
Errors: If the number of indices is wrong (or out of range) an exception may be raised.
See also: VarArrayGet (1445)
75.11.450 VarArrayRedim
Synopsis: Redimension a variant array
Declaration: procedure VarArrayRedim(var A: Variant;HighBound: SizeInt)
Visibility: default
Description: VarArrayRedim re-sizes the first dimension of the variant array A, giving it a new high bound
HighBound. Obviously, A must be a variant array for this function to work.
75.11.451 VarCast
Synopsis: Cast a variant to a certain type
Declaration: procedure VarCast(var dest: variant;const source: variant;
vartype: LongInt)
Visibility: default
Description: VarCast converts the variant in Source to the type indicated in VarType and returns the result
in dest. The VarType must be one of the pre-defined VarNNN constants.
Errors: If the conversion is not possible because the value cannot be correctly casted, then a run-time error
or an exception may occur.
1446
75.11.452 WaitForThreadTerminate
Synopsis: Wait for a thread to terminate.
Declaration: function WaitForThreadTerminate(threadHandle: TThreadID;

TimeoutMs: LongInt) : DWord
Visibility: default
Description: WaitForThreadTerminate waits for a thread to finish its execution. The thread is identified
by it’s handle or ID threadHandle. If the thread does not exit within TimeoutMs milliseconds,
the function will return with an error value.
The function returns the exit code of the thread.
Not all platforms support the timeout parameter: the unix platforms (with threads support based on
pthreads) do not support timeout, and will wait indefinitely for the thread to exit.
See also: EndThread (1340), KillThread (1379)
75.11.453 WideCharLenToString
Synopsis: Convert a length-limited array of widechar to an ansistring
Declaration: function WideCharLenToString(S: PWideChar;Len: SizeInt) : UnicodeString
Visibility: default
Description: WideCharLenToString converts at most Len widecharacters from the null-terminated widechar
array S to an ansistring, and returns the ansistring.
Errors: No validity checking is performed on S. Passing an invalid pointer may lead to access violations.
See also: StringToWideChar (1430), WideCharToString (1448), WideCharToStrVar (1448), WideCharLen-

ToStrVar (1447)
75.11.454 WideCharLenToStrVar
Synopsis: Convert a length-limited array of widechar to an ansistring
Declaration: procedure WideCharLenToStrVar(Src: PWideChar;Len: SizeInt;
out Dest: UnicodeString)
procedure WideCharLenToStrVar(Src: PWideChar;Len: SizeInt;
out Dest: AnsiString)
Visibility: default
Description: WideCharLenToString converts at most Len widecharacters from the null-terminated widechar
array Src to an ansistring, and returns the ansistring in Dest.
Errors: No validity checking is performed on Src. Passing an invalid pointer may lead to access violations.
ToString (1447)
1447
75.11.455 WideCharToString
Synopsis: Convert a null-terminated array of widechar to an ansistring
Declaration: function WideCharToString(S: PWideChar) : UnicodeString

Visibility: default
Description: WideCharToString converts the null-terminated widechar array S to an ansistring, and returns
the ansistring.
Errors: No validity checking is performed on Src. Passing an invalid pointer, or an improperly terminated
array may lead to access violations.
See also: StringToWideChar (1430), WideCharToStrVar (1448), WideCharLenToStrVar (1447), WideCharLen-
ToString (1447)
75.11.456 WideCharToStrVar
Synopsis: Convert a null-terminated array of widechar to an ansistring
Declaration: procedure WideCharToStrVar(S: PWideChar;out Dest: UnicodeString)
procedure WideCharToStrVar(S: PWideChar;out Dest: AnsiString)
Visibility: default
Description: WideCharToString converts the null-terminated widechar array S to an ansistring, and returns
the ansistring in Dest.
Errors: No validity checking is performed on S. Passing an invalid pointer, or an improperly terminated
array may lead to access violations.

ToString (1447)
75.11.457 WideStringToUCS4String
Synopsis: Convert a widestring to a UCS-4 encoded string.
Declaration: function WideStringToUCS4String(const s: WideString) : UCS4String
Visibility: default
Description: Convert a widestring to a UCS-4 encoded string.
75.11.458 Write
Synopsis: Write variable to a text file
Declaration: procedure Write(Args: Arguments)

procedure Write(var F: Text;Args: Arguments)
Visibility: default
Description: Write writes the contents of the variables V1, V2 etc. to the file F. F can be a typed file, or a Text
file. If F is a typed file, then the variables V1, V2 etc. must be of the same type as the type in the
declaration of F. Untyped files are not allowed.
1448
If the parameter F is omitted, standard output is assumed. If F is of type Text, then the necessary
conversions are done such that the output of the variables is in human-readable format. This conver-
sion is done for all numerical types. Strings are printed exactly as they are in memory, as well as
PChar types.
The format of the numerical conversions can be influenced through the following modifiers: OutputVariable:
NumChars [: Decimals ] This will print the value of OutputVariable with a minimum
of NumChars characters, from which Decimals are reserved for the decimals. If the number
cannot be represented with NumChars characters, NumChars will be increased, until the represen-
tation fits. If the representation requires less than NumChars characters then the output is filled up
with spaces, to the left of the generated string, thus resulting in a right-aligned representation. If no
formatting is specified, then the number is written using its natural length, with nothing in front of
it if it’s positive, and a minus sign if it’s negative. Real numbers are, by default, written in scientific
notation.
Remark: When writing string variables, no codepage conversions are done. The string is copied as-is to the
file descriptor. In particular, for console output, it is the programmer’s responsibility to make sure
that the codepage of the string matches the codepage of the console.
Errors: If an error occurs, a run-time error is generated. This behavior can be controlled with the {$I}
switch.
See also: WriteLn (1449), Read (1399), Readln (1400), Blockwrite (1319)
75.11.459 WriteBarrier
Synopsis: Memory write barrier
Declaration: procedure WriteBarrier

Visibility: default
Description: WriteBarrier is a low-level instruction to force a write barrier in the CPU: write (store) opera-
tions before and after the barrier are separate.
See also: ReadBarrier (1399), ReadDependencyBarrier (1400), ReadWriteBarrier (1401)
75.11.460 WriteLn
Synopsis: Write variable to a text file and append newline
Declaration: procedure Writeln(Args: Arguments)
procedure WriteLn(var F: Text;Args: Arguments)
Visibility: default
Description: WriteLn does the same as Write (1448) for text files, and emits a Carriage Return - LineFeed
character pair after that. If the parameter F is omitted, standard output is assumed. If no variables
are specified, a newline character sequence is emitted, resulting in a new line in the file F.
Remark: The newline character is determined by the slinebreak (1246) constant.
Remark: When writing string variables, no codepage conversions are done. The string is copied as-is to the
file descriptor. In particular, for console output, it is the programmer’s responsibility to make sure
that the codepage of the string matches the codepage of the console.
Errors: If an error occurs, a run-time error is generated. This behavior can be controlled with the {$I}
switch.
1449
See also: Write (1448), Read (1399), Readln (1400), Blockwrite (1319), slinebreak (1246)
Program Example75 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e W r i t e ( l n ) f u n c t i o n . }
Var
F : F i l e of L o n g i n t ;
L : Longint ;
begin
Write ( ’ T h i s i s on t h e f i r s t l i n e ! ’ ) ; { No CR/ LF p a i r ! }
W r i t e l n ( ’ And t h i s t o o . . . ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ But t h i s i s a l r e a d y on t h e second l i n e . . . ’ ) ;
Assign ( f , ’ t e s t . tmp ’ ) ;
Rewrite ( f ) ;
For L : = 1 to 1 0 do
w r i t e ( F , L ) ; { No w r i t e l n a l l o w e d here ! }
Close ( f ) ;
end .
75.11.461 WriteStr
Synopsis: Write variables to a string
Declaration: procedure WriteStr(out S: string;Args: Arguments)
Visibility: default
Description: WriteStr behaves like Write (1448), except that it stores its output in the string variable S instead
of a file. Semantically, the WriteStr call is equivalent to writing the arguments to a file using the
Write call, and then reading them into S using the Read call from the same file:
var
F : Text;
begin
Rewrite(F);
Write(F,Args);
Close(F);
Reset(F);
Read(F,S);
Close(F);
end;
Obviously, the WriteStr call does not use a temporary file.

WriteStr is defined in the ISO Extended Pascal standard. More information on the allowed argu-
ments and the possible formatting can be found in the description of Write (1448).
See also: Write (1448), ReadStr (1400), Read (1399)
1450
75.12 TDoubleRec
TDoubleRec = packed record
private
function GetExp : QWord;
procedure SetExp(e: QWord);
function GetSign : Boolean;
procedure SetSign(s: Boolean);
function GetFrac : QWord;
procedure SetFrac(e: QWord);
public
function Mantissa : QWord;
function Fraction : ValReal;
function Exponent : LongInt;
property Sign : Boolean;
property Exp : QWord;
property Frac : QWord;
function SpecialType : TFloatSpecial;
case Byte of
0: (
Bytes : Array[0..7] of Byte;
);
1: (
Words : Array[0..3] of Word;
);
2: (
Data : QWord;
);
3: (
Value : Double;
);
end
TDoubleRec models the memory layout of a double value when using software floating point math.

1452 Exponent Exponent of the floating point value
1452 Fraction Fraction of the floating point value
1452 Mantissa Mantissa of the floating point value
1452 SpecialType Is the floating point value special ?

1453 Exp rw Exponent
1453 Frac rw
1452 Sign rw Sign of the floating point value
1451
75.12.3 TDoubleRec.Mantissa
Synopsis: Mantissa of the floating point value
Declaration: function Mantissa : QWord

Visibility: public
Description: Mantissa returns the Mantissa part (before decimal) of the floating point value.
See also: TDoubleRec.Fraction (1452), TDoubleRec.Exponent (1452), TDoubleRec.SpecialType (1452)
75.12.4 TDoubleRec.Fraction
Synopsis: Fraction of the floating point value
Declaration: function Fraction : ValReal
Visibility: public
Description: Fraction returns the fraction (after decimal) of the floating point value.
See also: TDoubleRec.Mantissa (1452), TDoubleRec.Exponent (1452), TDoubleRec.SpecialType (1452)
75.12.5 TDoubleRec.Exponent
Synopsis: Exponent of the floating point value
Declaration: function Exponent : LongInt

Visibility: public
Description: Exponent returns the fraction (after decimal) of the floating point value.
See also: TDoubleRec.Fraction (1452), TDoubleRec.Mantissa (1452), TDoubleRec.SpecialType (1452)
75.12.6 TDoubleRec.SpecialType
Synopsis: Is the floating point value special ?
Declaration: function SpecialType : TFloatSpecial
Visibility: public
Description: SpecialType returns special characteristics of the floating point value, if any.
See also: TDoubleRec.Fraction (1452), TDoubleRec.Mantissa (1452), TDoubleRec.Exponent (1452)
75.12.7 TDoubleRec.Sign
Synopsis: Sign of the floating point value
Declaration: Property Sign : Boolean

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
1452
75.12.8 TDoubleRec.Exp
Synopsis: Exponent
Declaration: Property Exp : QWord
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: ?
See also: TDoubleRec.Sign (1452), TDoubleRec.Exponent (1452)
75.12.9 TDoubleRec.Frac
Declaration: Property Frac : QWord
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
75.13 TExtended80Rec
TExtended80Rec = packed record
private
public
function Fraction : Extended;
case Byte of
0: (
);
1: (
);
2: (
_Exp : Word;
Frac : QWord;
);
3: (
Value : Extended;
);
end
TExtended80Rec models the memory layout of an extended value when using software floating
point math.
1453


75.13.3 TExtended80Rec.Mantissa

Visibility: public
See also: TExtended80Rec.Fraction (1454), TExtended80Rec.Exponent (1454), TExtended80Rec.SpecialType

(1455)
75.13.4 TExtended80Rec.Fraction
Declaration: function Fraction : Extended
Visibility: public
See also: TExtended80Rec.Mantissa (1454), TExtended80Rec.Exponent (1454), TExtended80Rec.SpecialType
(1455)
75.13.5 TExtended80Rec.Exponent
Visibility: public
See also: TExtended80Rec.Fraction (1454), TExtended80Rec.Mantissa (1454), TExtended80Rec.SpecialType
(1455)
1454
75.13.6 TExtended80Rec.SpecialType

Visibility: public
See also: TExtended80Rec.Fraction (1454), TExtended80Rec.Mantissa (1454), TExtended80Rec.Exponent

(1454)
75.13.7 TExtended80Rec.Sign
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
75.13.8 TExtended80Rec.Exp
Synopsis: Exponent

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: ?
See also: TExtended80Rec.Sign (1455), TExtended80Rec.Exponent (1454)
75.14 TSingleRec
TSingleRec = packed record
private
function GetFrac : QWord;
procedure SetFrac(e: QWord);
public
function Fraction : ValReal;
property Frac : QWord;
case Byte of
1455
0: (
);
1: (
);
2: (
Data : DWord;
);
3: (
Value : Single;
);
end
TsingleRec models the memory layout of a double value when using software floating point math.


1457 Frac rw
75.14.3 TSingleRec.Mantissa
Visibility: public
See also: TsingleRec.Fraction (1456), TsingleRec.Exponent (1457), TsingleRec.SpecialType (1457)
75.14.4 TSingleRec.Fraction
Declaration: function Fraction : ValReal
Visibility: public
See also: TsingleRec.Mantissa (1456), TsingleRec.Exponent (1457), TsingleRec.SpecialType (1457)
1456
75.14.5 TSingleRec.Exponent

Visibility: public
See also: TsingleRec.Fraction (1456), TsingleRec.Mantissa (1456), TsingleRec.SpecialType (1457)
75.14.6 TSingleRec.SpecialType
Visibility: public
See also: TsingleRec.Fraction (1456), TsingleRec.Mantissa (1456), TsingleRec.Exponent (1457)
75.14.7 TSingleRec.Sign

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
75.14.8 TSingleRec.Exp
Synopsis: Exponent
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: ?
See also: TsingleRec.Sign (1457), TsingleRec.Exponent (1457)
75.14.9 TSingleRec.Frac
Declaration: Property Frac : QWord
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
1457
75.15 IDispatch
75.15.1 Description
IDispatch is the pascal definition of the Windows Dispatch interface definition.
See also: IUnknown (1461)

1458 GetIDsOfNames Return IDs of named procedures
1458 GetTypeInfo Return type information about properties
1458 GetTypeInfoCount Return number of properties.
1458 Invoke Invoke a dispatch method
75.15.3 IDispatch.GetTypeInfoCount
Synopsis: Return number of properties.
Declaration: function GetTypeInfoCount(out count: LongInt) : HRESULT

Visibility: default
75.15.4 IDispatch.GetTypeInfo
Synopsis: Return type information about properties
Declaration: function GetTypeInfo(Index: LongInt;LocaleID: LongInt;out TypeInfo)

: HRESULT
Visibility: default
75.15.5 IDispatch.GetIDsOfNames
Synopsis: Return IDs of named procedures
Declaration: function GetIDsOfNames(const iid: TGuid;names: Pointer;

NameCount: LongInt;LocaleID: LongInt;
DispIDs: Pointer) : HRESULT
Visibility: default
Description: Return the ID of a procedure.
75.15.6 IDispatch.Invoke
Synopsis: Invoke a dispatch method
Declaration: function Invoke(DispID: LongInt;const iid: TGuid;LocaleID: LongInt;
Flags: Word;var params;VarResult: pointer;
ExcepInfo: pointer;ArgErr: pointer) : HRESULT
Visibility: default
1458
75.16 IEnumerable
75.16.1 Description
IEnumerable can be used to get an enumerator from a class. If a class implements IEnumerable,
it can return an enumerator interface IEnumerator (1459).
See also: IEnumerator (1459)

1459 GetEnumerator Return an enumerator interface for this class
75.16.3 IEnumerable.GetEnumerator
Synopsis: Return an enumerator interface for this class
Declaration: function GetEnumerator : IEnumerator
Visibility: default
Description: GetEnumerator returns a new IEnumerator (1459) interface for this class. This is called by the
compiler whenever a for in loop is encountered in the source code to retrieve the enumerator
instance.
See also: IEnumerator (1459)
75.17 IEnumerator
75.17.1 Description
IEnumerator is the interface needed by the For ... in ... language construct, when
operating on classes. It contains all methods that the compiler needs to implement a loop.
A for in loop like the following:
For O in MyObject do
begin
// do things
end;
is treated by the compiler as equivalent to the following code:
Var
I : IEnumerator;
O : TObject;
begin
I:=MyObject.GetEnumerator;
While I.MoveNext do
begin
O:=I.GetCurrent;
// Do things
1459
end;
end.
Any class that implements the IEnumerable interface must be able to return an IEnumerator
instance for the compiler to use in a For in loop.
See also: IEnumerable (1459)

1460 GetCurrent Returns the current element in the iteration cycle
1460 MoveNext Move to the next value
1461 Reset Reset the pointer

1461 Current r Return the current item
75.17.4 IEnumerator.GetCurrent
Synopsis: Returns the current element in the iteration cycle
Declaration: function GetCurrent : TObject

Visibility: default
Description: getCurrent should return the object instance representing the current value in the for in
loop. GetCurrent will always be called immediately after IEnumerator.MoveNext (1460) re-
turned True.
Remark: The actual return type of the interface should not necessarily be TObject, it can be any type. The
compiler will check the actual return type with the type of the loop variable, and they should match.
See also: IEnumerator.MoveNext (1460), IEnumerator.Reset (1461)
75.17.5 IEnumerator.MoveNext
Synopsis: Move to the next value
Visibility: default
Description: MoveNext should move the current item pointer to the next available item. It should return True if
an item is available, False if no more items are available. The first time it is called It will be called
at the beginning of the for loop, so it should position the enumerator on the first value (if there is one).
After MoveNext has returned True, IEnumerator.GetCurrent (1460) will be called to retrieve the
item.
See also: IEnumerator.Reset (1461), IEnumerator.GetCurrent (1460)
1460
75.17.6 IEnumerator.Reset
Synopsis: Reset the pointer
Declaration: procedure Reset

Visibility: default
Description: Reset can be implemented to put the pointer at the start of the list. It is not mandatory to implement
this method, the compiler does not use it.
See also: IEnumerator.GetCurrent (1460), IEnumerator.MoveNext (1460)
75.17.7 IEnumerator.Current
Synopsis: Return the current item
Declaration: Property Current : TObject
Visibility: default
Access: Read
Description: Current simply is the redefinition of IEnumerator.GetCurrent (1460) as a property. It is read-only.
See also: IEnumerator.GetCurrent (1460), IEnumerator.MoveNext (1460)
75.18 IInvokable
75.18.1 Description
IInvokable is a descendent of IInterface (1256), compiled in the {$M+} state, so Run-Time Type
Information (RTTI) is generated for it.
See also: IDispatch (1458), IInterface (1256)
75.19 IUnknown
75.19.1 Description
IUnknown is defined by windows. It’s the basic interface which all COM objects must implement.
The definition does not contain any code.
See also: IInterface (1256), IDispatch (1458), IInvokable (1461)

1462 \_AddRef Increase reference count of the interface
1462 QueryInterface Return pointer to VMT table of interface
1462 \_Release Decrease reference count of the interface
1461
75.19.3 IUnknown.QueryInterface
Synopsis: Return pointer to VMT table of interface
Declaration: function QueryInterface(const iid: TGuid;out obj) : LongInt

Visibility: default
75.19.4 IUnknown._AddRef
Synopsis: Increase reference count of the interface
Declaration: function _AddRef : LongInt

Visibility: default
See also: IUnknown._Release (1462)
75.19.5 IUnknown._Release
Synopsis: Decrease reference count of the interface
Declaration: function _Release : LongInt
Visibility: default
See also: IUnknown._AddRef (1462)
75.20 TAggregatedObject
75.20.1 Description
TAggregatedObject implements an object whose lifetime is governed by an external object (or
interface). It does not implement the IUnknown interface by itself, but delegates all methods to the
controller object, as exposed in the Controller (1463) property. In effect, the reference count of the
aggregated object is the same as that of it’s controller, and additionally, all interfaces of the controller
are exposed by the aggregated object.
Note that the aggregated object maintains a non-counted reference to the controller.
Aggregated objects should be used when using delegation to implement reference counted objects:
the delegated interfaces can be implemented safely by TAggregatedObject descendents.
See also: Create (1463), Controller (1463)

1463 Create Create a new instance of TAggregatedObject

1463 Controller r Controlling instance
1462
75.20.4 TAggregatedObject.Create
Synopsis: Create a new instance of TAggregatedObject
Declaration: constructor Create(const aController: IUnknown)
Visibility: public
Description: Create creates a new instance of TAggregatedObject on the heap, and stores a reference to
aController, so it can be exposed in the Controller (1463) property.
Errors: If not enough memory is present on the heap, an exception will be raised. If the aController
is Nil, exceptions will occur when any of the TAggregatedObject methods (actually, the
IUnknown methods) are used.
See also: Controller (1463)
75.20.5 TAggregatedObject.Controller
Synopsis: Controlling instance
Declaration: Property Controller : IUnknown
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Controller exposes the controlling object, with all interfaces it has.
The value of the controller is set when the TAggregatedObject instance is created.
See also: TAggregatedObject.Create (1463)
75.21 TContainedObject
75.21.1 Description
TContainedObject is the base class for contained objects, i.e. objects that do not implement a
reference counting mechanism themselves, but are owned by some other object which handles the
reference counting mechanism. It implements the IUnknown interface and, more specifically, the
QueryInterface method of IUnknown.
See also: IInterface (1256)

1256 IInterface Basic interface for all COM based interfaces
75.22 TInterfacedObject
75.22.1 Description
TInterfacedObject is a descendent of TObject (1465) which implements the IUnknown (1461)
interface. It can be used as a base class for all classes which need reference counting.
See also: IUnknown (1461), TObject (1465)
1463

1461 IUnknown Basic interface for all COM-based interfaces

1464 AfterConstruction Handle reference count properly.
1464 BeforeDestruction Check reference count.
1464 NewInstance Create a new instance

1465 RefCount r Return the current reference count
75.22.5 TInterfacedObject.AfterConstruction
Synopsis: Handle reference count properly.
Visibility: public
Description: AfterConstruction overrides the basic method in TObject and adds some additional refer-
ence count handling.
Errors: None.
See also: BeforeDestruction (1464)
75.22.6 TInterfacedObject.BeforeDestruction
Synopsis: Check reference count.
Visibility: public
Description: AfterConstruction overrides the basic method in TObject and adds a reference count check:
if the reference count is not zero, an error occurs.
Errors: A runtime-error 204 will be generated if the reference count is nonzero when the object is destroyed.
See also: AfterConstruction (1464)
75.22.7 TInterfacedObject.NewInstance
Synopsis: Create a new instance
Declaration: class function NewInstance; Override
Visibility: public
Description: NewInstance initializes a new instance of TInterfacedObject (1463)
Errors: None.
1464
75.22.8 TInterfacedObject.RefCount
Synopsis: Return the current reference count
Declaration: Property RefCount : LongInt

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: RefCount returns the current reference count. This reference count cannot be manipulated, except
through the methods of IUnknown (1461). When it reaches zero, the class instance is destroyed.
See also: IUnknown (1461)
75.23 TObject
75.23.1 Description
TObject is the parent root class for all classes in Object Pascal. If a class has no parent class
explicitly declared, it is dependent on TObject. TObject introduces class methods that deal with
the class’ type information, and contains all necessary methods to create an instance at runtime, and
to dispatch messages to the correct method (both string and integer messages).
See also: TClass (1267)
1465

1471 AfterConstruction Method called after the constructor was called.
1472 BeforeDestruction Method called before the destructor is called.
1469 ClassInfo Return a pointer to the type information for this class.
1469 ClassName Return the current class name.
1469 ClassNameIs Check whether the class name equals the given name.
1470 ClassParent Return the parent class.
1469 ClassType Return a "class of" pointer for the current class
1468 CleanupInstance Finalize the class instance.
1466 Create TObject Constructor
1468 DefaultHandler Default handler for integer message handlers.
1472 DefaultHandlerStr Default handler for string messages.
1467 Destroy TObject destructor.
1472 Dispatch Dispatch an integer message
1472 DispatchStr Dispatch a string message.
1475 Equals Check if two objects are equal.
1471 FieldAddress Return the address of a field.
1468 Free Check for Nil and call destructor.
1467 FreeInstance Clean up instance and free the memory reserved for the in-
stance.
1475 GetHashCode Return a hash code for the object
1473 GetInterface Return a reference to an interface
1473 GetInterfaceByStr Return an interface based on its GUID
1474 GetInterfaceEntry Return the interface table entry by GUID
1474 GetInterfaceEntryByStr Return the interface table entry by string
1474 GetInterfaceTable Return a pointer to the table of implemented interfaces for a
class
1473 GetInterfaceWeak Get a reference to an interface, not increasing the reference
count
1470 InheritsFrom Check whether class is an ancestor.
1468 InitInstance Initialize a new class instance.
1470 InstanceSize Return the size of an instance.
1471 MethodAddress Return the address of a method
1471 MethodName Return the name of a method.
1467 newinstance Allocate memory on the heap for a new instance
1467 SafeCallException Handle exception object
1470 StringMessageTable Return a pointer to the string message table.
1475 ToString Return a string representation for the object
1474 UnitName Unit name
75.23.3 TObject.Create
Synopsis: TObject Constructor
Visibility: public
Description: Create creates a new instance of TObject. Currently it does nothing. It is also not virtual, so
there is in principle no need to call it directly.
1466
75.23.4 TObject.Destroy
Synopsis: TObject destructor.
Declaration: destructor Destroy; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: Destroy is the destructor of TObject. It will clean up the memory assigned to the instance. De-
scendent classes should override destroy if they want to do additional clean-up. No other destructor
should be implemented.
It is bad programming practice to call Destroy directly. It is better to call the Free (1468) method,
because that one will check first if Self is different from Nil.
To clean up an instance and reset the refence to the instance, it is best to use the FreeAndNil (1577)
function.
See also: Create (1466), Free (1468)
75.23.5 TObject.newinstance
Synopsis: Allocate memory on the heap for a new instance
Declaration: class function newinstance; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: NewInstance allocates memory on the heap for a new instance of the current class. If the memory
was allocated, the class will be initialized by a call to InitInstance (1468). The function returns the
newly initialized instance.
Errors: If not enough memory is available, a Nil pointer may be returned, or an exception may be raised.
See also: Create (1466), InitInstance (1468), InstanceSize (1470), FreeInstance (1467)
75.23.6 TObject.FreeInstance
Synopsis: Clean up instance and free the memory reserved for the instance.
Declaration: procedure FreeInstance; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: FreeInstance cleans up an instance of the current class, and releases the heap memory occupied
by the class instance.
See also: Destroy (1467), InitInstance (1468), NewInstance (1467)
75.23.7 TObject.SafeCallException
Synopsis: Handle exception object
Declaration: function SafeCallException(exceptobject: TObject;
exceptaddr: CodePointer) : HRESULT; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: SafeCallException should be overridden to handle exceptions in a method marked with the
savecall directive. The implementation in TObject simply returns zero.
1467
75.23.8 TObject.DefaultHandler
Synopsis: Default handler for integer message handlers.
Declaration: procedure DefaultHandler(var message); Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: DefaultHandler is the default handler for messages. If a message has an unknown message
ID (i.e. does not appear in the table with integer message handlers), then it will be passed to
DefaultHandler by the Dispatch (1472) method.
See also: Dispatch (1472), DefaultHandlerStr (1472)
75.23.9 TObject.Free
Synopsis: Check for Nil and call destructor.
Declaration: procedure Free
Visibility: public
Description: Free will check the Self pointer and calls Destroy (1467) if it is different from Nil. This is a
safer method than calling Destroy directly. If a reference to the object must be reset as well (a
recommended technque), then the function FreeAndNil (1577) should be called.
Errors: None.
See also: Destroy (1467), FreeAndNil (1577)
75.23.10 TObject.InitInstance
Synopsis: Initialize a new class instance.
Declaration: class function InitInstance(instance: pointer)
Visibility: public
Description: InitInstance initializes the memory pointer to by Instance. This means that the VMT is
initialized, and the interface pointers are set up correctly. The function returns the newly initialized
instance.
See also: NewInstance (1467), Create (1466)
75.23.11 TObject.CleanupInstance
Synopsis: Finalize the class instance.
Declaration: procedure CleanupInstance
Visibility: public
Description: CleanUpinstance finalizes the instance, i.e. takes care of all reference counted objects, by
decreasing their reference count by 1, and freeing them if their count reaches zero.
Normally, CleanupInstance should never be called, it is called automatically when the object is
freed with it’s constructor.
Errors: None.
See also: Destroy (1467), Free (1468), InitInstance (1468)
1468
75.23.12 TObject.ClassType
Synopsis: Return a "class of" pointer for the current class
Declaration: class function ClassType

Visibility: public
Description: ClassType returns a TClass (1267) class type reference for the current class.
See also: TClass (1267), ClassInfo (1469), ClassName (1469)
75.23.13 TObject.ClassInfo
Synopsis: Return a pointer to the type information for this class.
Declaration: class function ClassInfo
Visibility: public
Description: ClassInfo returns a pointer to the type information for this class. This pointer can be used in the
various type information routines.
75.23.14 TObject.ClassName
Synopsis: Return the current class name.
Declaration: class function ClassName

Visibility: public
Description: ClassName returns the class name for the current class, in all-uppercase letters. To check for the
class name, use the ClassNameIs (1469) class method.
Errors: None.
See also: ClassInfo (1469), ClassType (1469), ClassNameIs (1469)
75.23.15 TObject.ClassNameIs
Synopsis: Check whether the class name equals the given name.
Declaration: class function ClassNameIs(const name: string)

Visibility: public
Description: ClassNameIs checks whether Name equals the class name. It takes of case sensitivity, i.e. it
converts both names to uppercase before comparing.
See also: ClassInfo (1469), ClassType (1469), ClassName (1469)
1469
75.23.16 TObject.ClassParent
Synopsis: Return the parent class.
Declaration: class function ClassParent

Visibility: public
Description: ClassParent returns the class of the parent class of the current class. This is always different
from Nil, except for TObject.
Errors: None.
See also: ClassInfo (1469), ClassType (1469), ClassNameIs (1469)
75.23.17 TObject.InstanceSize
Synopsis: Return the size of an instance.
Declaration: class function InstanceSize

Visibility: public
Description: InstanceSize returns the number of bytes an instance takes in memory. This is Just the memory
occupied by the class structure, and does not take into account any additional memory that might be
allocated by the constructor of the class.
Errors: None.
See also: InitInstance (1468), ClassName (1469), ClassInfo (1469), ClassType (1469)
75.23.18 TObject.InheritsFrom
Synopsis: Check whether class is an ancestor.
Declaration: class function InheritsFrom(aclass: TClass)
Visibility: public
Description: InheritsFrom returns True if AClass is an ancestor class from the current class, and returns
false if it is not.
See also: ClassName (1469), ClassInfo (1469), ClassType (1469), TClass (1267)
75.23.19 TObject.StringMessageTable
Synopsis: Return a pointer to the string message table.
Declaration: class function StringMessageTable
Visibility: public
Description: StringMessageTable returns a pointer to the string message table, which can be used to look
up methods for dispatching a string message. It is used by the DispatchStr (1472) method.
Errors: If there are no string message handlers, nil is returned.
See also: DispatchStr (1472), Dispatch (1472)
1470
75.23.20 TObject.MethodAddress
Synopsis: Return the address of a method
Declaration: class function MethodAddress(const name: shortstring)
Visibility: public
Description: MethodAddress returns the address of a method, searching the method by its name. The Name
parameter specifies which method should be taken. The search is conducted in a case-insensitive
manner.
Errors: If no matching method is found, Nil is returned.
See also: MethodName (1471), FieldAddress (1471)
75.23.21 TObject.MethodName
Synopsis: Return the name of a method.
Declaration: class function MethodName(address: CodePointer)
Visibility: public
Description: MethodName searches the VMT for a method with the specified address and returns the name
of the method.
Errors: If no method with the matching address is found, an empty string is returned.
See also: MethodAddress (1471), FieldAddress (1471)
75.23.22 TObject.FieldAddress
Synopsis: Return the address of a field.
Declaration: function FieldAddress(const name: shortstring) : pointer
Visibility: public
Description: FieldAddress returns the address of the field with name name. The address is the address of
the field in the current class instance.
Errors: If no field with the specified name is found, Nil is returned.
See also: MethodAddress (1471), MethodName (1471)
75.23.23 TObject.AfterConstruction
Synopsis: Method called after the constructor was called.
Declaration: procedure AfterConstruction; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: AfterConstruction is a method called after the constructor was called. It does nothing in
the implementation of TObject and must be overridden by descendent classes to provide specific
behaviour that is executed after the constructor has finished executing. (for instance, call an event
handler)
Errors: None.
See also: BeforeDestruction (1472), Create (1466)
1471
75.23.24 TObject.BeforeDestruction
Synopsis: Method called before the destructor is called.
Declaration: procedure BeforeDestruction; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: BeforeDestruction is a method called before the destructor is called. It does nothing in the
implementation of TObject and must be overridden by descendent classes to provide specific be-
haviour that is executed before the destructor has finished executing. (for instance, call an event
handler)
Errors: None.
See also: AfterConstruction (1471), Destroy (1467), Free (1468)
75.23.25 TObject.DefaultHandlerStr
Synopsis: Default handler for string messages.
Declaration: procedure DefaultHandlerStr(var message); Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: DefaultHandlerStr is called for string messages which have no handler associated with them
in the string message handler table. The implementation of DefaultHandlerStr in TObject
does nothing and mut be overridden by descendent classes to provide specific message handling
behaviour.
See also: DispatchStr (1472), Dispatch (1472), DefaultHandler (1468)
75.23.26 TObject.Dispatch
Synopsis: Dispatch an integer message
Declaration: procedure Dispatch(var message); Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: Dispatch looks in the message handler table for a handler that handles message. The message
is identified by the first dword (cardinal) in the message structure.
If no matching message handler is found, the message is passed to the DefaultHandler (1468) method,
which can be overridden by descendent classes to add custom handling of messages.
See also: DispatchStr (1472), DefaultHandler (1468)
75.23.27 TObject.DispatchStr
Synopsis: Dispatch a string message.
Declaration: procedure DispatchStr(var message); Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: DispatchStr extracts the message identifier from Message and checks the message handler
table to see if a handler for the message is found, and calls the handler, passing along the message.
If no handler is found, the default DefaultHandlerStr (1472) is called.
1472
Errors: None.
See also: DefaultHandlerStr (1472), Dispatch (1472), DefaultHandler (1468)
75.23.28 TObject.GetInterface
Synopsis: Return a reference to an interface
Declaration: function GetInterface(const iid: TGuid;out obj) : Boolean

function GetInterface(const iidstr: shortstring;out obj) : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: GetInterface scans the interface tables and returns a reference to the interface iid. The ref-
erence is stored in Obj which should be an interface reference. It returns True if the interface was
found, False if not.
The reference count of the interface is increased by this call.
Errors: If no interface was found, False is returned.
See also: GetInterfaceByStr (1473)
75.23.29 TObject.GetInterfaceByStr
Synopsis: Return an interface based on its GUID
Declaration: function GetInterfaceByStr(const iidstr: shortstring;out obj) : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: GetInterfaceByStr returns in obj a pointer to the interface identified by iidstr. The func-
tion returns True if the interface is indeed implemented by the class, or False otherwise.
The iidstr is the unique GUID by which the interface was declared.
Errors: The function returns false if the requested interface is not implemented.
See also: TObject.GetInterfaceEntry (1474), TObject.GetInterfaceEntryByStr (1474)
75.23.30 TObject.GetInterfaceWeak
Synopsis: Get a reference to an interface, not increasing the reference count
Declaration: function GetInterfaceWeak(const iid: TGuid;out obj) : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: GetInterfaceWeak performs the same function as Getinterface (1473), but unlike the latter, it
will not increase the reference count of the interface.
See also: TObject.GetInterface (1473)
1473
75.23.31 TObject.GetInterfaceEntry
Synopsis: Return the interface table entry by GUID
Declaration: class function GetInterfaceEntry(const iid: TGuid)

Visibility: public
Description: GetInterfaceEntry returns the internal interface table entry for the interface identified by iid
(the GUID used in the declaration of the interface). If the interface is not implemented by the class,
the function returns Nil.
See also: TObject.GetInterfaceByStr (1473), TObject.GetInterfaceEntryByStr (1474)
75.23.32 TObject.GetInterfaceEntryByStr
Synopsis: Return the interface table entry by string
Declaration: class function GetInterfaceEntryByStr(const iidstr: shortstring)

Visibility: public
Description: GetInterfaceEntryByStr returns the internal interface table entry for the interface identified
by iidstr (A string representation of the GUID used in the declaration of the interface). If the
interface is not implemented by the class, the function returns Nil.
See also: TObject.GetInterfaceByStr (1473), TObject.GetInterfaceEntry (1474)
75.23.33 TObject.GetInterfaceTable
Synopsis: Return a pointer to the table of implemented interfaces for a class
Declaration: class function GetInterfaceTable
Visibility: public
Description: GetInterfaceTable returns a pointer to the internal table of implemented interfaces for a
class. The result will always point to a valid address, if the class implements no interfaces the
EntryCount field of the interface table will be zero.
See also: TObject.GetInterfaceByStr (1473), TObject.GetInterfaceEntry (1474)
75.23.34 TObject.UnitName
Synopsis: Unit name
Declaration: class function UnitName
Visibility: public
Description: UnitName returns the unit name in which the class was defined. The name is obtained from the
class definition data the compiler generates for each class.
1474
75.23.35 TObject.Equals
Synopsis: Check if two objects are equal.
Declaration: function Equals(Obj: TObject) : Boolean; Virtual

Visibility: public
Description: Equals returns True if the object instance pointer (Self) equals the instance pointer Obj.
Descendent classes can override to check properties etc. in case the instance pointers are different.
See also: TObject.GetHashCode (1475), TObject.ToString (1475)
75.23.36 TObject.GetHashCode
Synopsis: Return a hash code for the object
Declaration: function GetHashCode : PtrInt; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: GetHashCode should return a hash code for the object. By default, the numerical (integer) address
of Self is returned.
Descendent classes can use this to generate better suitable values to be used in a hash table.
See also: TObject.ToString (1475), TObject.Equals (1475)
75.23.37 TObject.ToString
Synopsis: Return a string representation for the object
Declaration: function ToString : ansistring; Virtual
Visibility: public
Description: ToString returns by default the class name of the object. It is useful during sending of debug
messages.
Descendent classes can override this method to give a better description of the object than just the
class name.
See also: TObject.GetHashCode (1475), TObject.Equals (1475)
1475
Chapter 76
Reference for unit ’sysutils’
76.1 Used units
Table 76.1: Used units by unit ’sysutils’
Name Page
errors 654
Linux 864
sysconst ??
System 1224
Unix 1747
unixtype 1784
76.2 Overview
This documentation describes the sysutils unit. The sysutils unit was started by Gertjan Schouten,
and completed by Michael Van Canneyt. It aims to be compatible to the Delphi sysutils unit, but
in contrast with the latter, it is designed to work on multiple platforms. It is implemented on all
supported platforms.
76.3 Localization support

Localization support depends on various constants and structures being initialized correctly. On
Windows and OS/2 this is done automatically: a widestring manager is installed by default which
helps taking care of the current locale when performing various operations on strings. The various
internationalization settings (date/time format, currency, language etc) are also initialized correctly
on these platforms.
On unixes, the widestring support is in a separate unit: cwstring, which loads the various needed
functions from the C library. It should be added manually to the uses clause of your program. No
internationalization (or localisation) settings are applied by this unit, these must be initialized sepa-
rately by including the clocale unit in the uses clause of your program.
1476
CHAPTER 76. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’SYSUTILS’
76.4 Unicode and codepage awareness

The many functions that deal with filenames in the sysutils routines have been changed from AnsiString
to RawByteString so they do not perform implict codepage conversions to the ansi code page. At the
same time, overloaded versions that accept a unicode string have been created.
For routines that access actual OS functions using single-byte string APIS, the strings are converted
to ensure that the OS routine receives a string with the correct encoding when using single-byte
strings. This encoding is normally the DefaultFileSystemCodePage (1288) encoding.
On systems with a unicode I/O API (2-byte strings), the native API is used, meaning that unicode
strings will be passed on as-is, but single-byte strings will be converted (implicitly) to Unicode.
The following is a minimal list of functions that have been changed and duplicated:
Table 76.2:
Name Description
FileCreate (1550) Create a new file and return a handle to it.
FileOpen (1554) Open an existing file and return a filehandle
FileExists (1551) Check whether a particular file exists in the filesystem.
DirectoryExists (1536) Check whether a directory exists in the file system.
FileSetDate (1557) Set the date of a file.
FileGetAttr (1552) Return attributes of a file.
FileSetAttr (1557) Set the attributes of a file.
DeleteFile (1536) Delete a file from the filesystem.
RenameFile (1595) Rename a file.
FileSearch (1555) Search for a file in a path.
ExeSearch (1543) Search for an executable
FindFirst (1559) Start a file search and return a findhandle
FindNext (1560) Find the next entry in a findhandle.
FindClose (1558) Close a find handle
FileIsReadOnly (1554) Check whether a file is read-only.
GetCurrentDir (1578) Return the current working directory of the application.
SetCurrentDir (1598) Set the current directory of the application.
The following functions do not interact with the OS, but may nevertheless change the codepage of
the strings involved in their operation:
1477
Table 76.3:
Name Description
ChangeFileExt (1523) Change the extension of a filename.
ExtractFilePath (1547) Extract the path from a filename.
ExtractFileDrive (1546) Extract the drive part from a filename.
ExtractFileName (1547) Extract the filename part from a full path filename.
ExtractFileExt (1546) Return the extension from a filename.
ExtractFileDir (1545) Extract the drive and directory part of a filename.
ExtractShortPathName (1548) Returns a 8.3 path name
ExpandFileName (1543) Expand a relative filename to an absolute filename.
ExpandFileNameCase (1544) Expand a filename entered as case insensitive to the full path as stored on the disk.
ExtractRelativepath (1547) Extract a relative path from a filename, given a base directory.
ExpandUNCFileName (1545) Expand a relative filename to an absolute UNC filename.
IncludeTrailingPathDelimiter (1586) Add trailing directory separator to a pathname, if needed.
IncludeTrailingBackslash (1586) Add trailing directory separator to a pathname, if needed.
ExcludeTrailingBackslash (1542) Strip trailing directory separator from a pathname, if needed.
ExcludeTrailingPathDelimiter (1542) Strip trailing directory separator from a pathname, if needed.
IncludeLeadingPathDelimiter (1585) Prepend a path delimiter if there is not already one.
ExcludeLeadingPathDelimiter (1541) Strip the leading path delimiter of a path
IsPathDelimiter (1590) Is the character at the given position a pathdelimiter ?
DoDirSeparators (1538) Convert known directory separators to the current directory separator.
SetDirSeparators (1598) Set the directory separators to the known directory separators.
GetDirs (1579) Return a list of directory names from a path.
ConcatPaths (1527) Concatenate an array of paths to form a single path
GetEnvironmentVariable (1580) Return the value of an environment variable.
76.5 Miscellaneous conversion routines

Functions for various conversions.
Table 76.4:
Name Description
BCDToInt (1520) Convert BCD number to integer
CompareMem (1524) Compare two memory regions
FloatToStrF (1563) Convert float to formatted string
FloatToStr (1562) Convert float to string
FloatToText (1565) Convert float to string
FormatFloat (1575) Format a floating point value
GetDirs (1579) Split string in list of directories
IntToHex (1587) return hexadecimal representation of integer
IntToStr (1588) return decumal representation of integer
StrToIntDef (1620) Convert string to integer with default value
StrToInt (1618) Convert string to integer
StrToFloat (1617) Convert string to float
TextToFloat (1624) Convert null-terminated string to float
1478
76.6 Date/time routines

Functions for date and time handling.
Table 76.5:
Name Description
DateTimeToFileDate (1530) Convert DateTime type to file date
DateTimeToStr (1530) Construct string representation of DateTime
DateTimeToString (1531) Construct string representation of DateTime
DateTimeToSystemTime (1532) Convert DateTime to system time
DateTimeToTimeStamp (1533) Convert DateTime to timestamp
DateToStr (1533) Construct string representation of date
Date (1529) Get current date
DayOfWeek (1534) Get day of week
DecodeDate (1534) Decode DateTime to year month and day
DecodeTime (1535) Decode DateTime to hours, minutes and seconds
EncodeDate (1539) Encode year, day and month to DateTime
EncodeTime (1539) Encode hours, minutes and seconds to DateTime
FormatDateTime (1575) Return string representation of DateTime
IncMonth (1586) Add 1 to month
IsLeapYear (1589) Determine if year is leap year
MSecsToTimeStamp (1592) Convert nr of milliseconds to timestamp
Now (1593) Get current date and time
StrToDateTime (1616) Convert string to DateTime
StrToDate (1615) Convert string to date
StrToTime (1621) Convert string to time
SystemTimeToDateTime (1623) Convert system time to datetime
TimeStampToDateTime (1626) Convert time stamp to DateTime
TimeStampToMSecs (1626) Convert Timestamp to number of millicseconds
TimeToStr (1627) return string representation of Time
Time (1625) Get current time
76.7 FileName handling routines

Functions for file manipulation.
1479
Table 76.6:
Name Description
AnsiCompareFileName (1506) Compare 2 filenames
AnsiLowerCaseFileName (1511) Create lowercase filename
AnsiUpperCaseFileName (1519) Create uppercase filename
AddDisk (1505) Add disk to list of disk drives
ChangeFileExt (1523) Change extension of file name
CreateDir (1527) Create a directory
DeleteFile (1536) Delete a file
DiskFree (1537) Free space on disk
DiskSize (1537) Total size of disk
ExpandFileName (1543) Create full file name
ExpandFileNameCase (1544) Create full file name case insensitively
ExpandUNCFileName (1545) Create full UNC file name
ExtractFileDir (1545) Extract drive and directory part of filename
ExtractFileDrive (1546) Extract drive part of filename
ExtractFileExt (1546) Extract extension part of filename
ExtractFileName (1547) Extract name part of filename
ExtractFilePath (1547) Extrct path part of filename
ExtractRelativePath (1547) Construct relative path between two files
FileAge (1548) Return file age
FileDateToDateTime (1551) Convert file date to system date
FileExists (1551) Determine whether a file exists on disk
FileGetAttr (1552) Get attributes of file
FileGetDate (1553) Get date of last file modification
FileSearch (1555) Search for file in path
FileSetAttr (1557) Get file attributes
FileSetDate (1557) Get file dates
FindFirst (1559) Start finding a file
FindNext (1560) Find next file
GetCurrentDir (1578) Return current working directory
RemoveDir (1595) Remove a directory from disk
RenameFile (1595) Rename a file on disk
SameFileName (1597) Check whether 2 filenames are the same
SetCurrentDir (1598) Set current working directory
SetDirSeparators (1598) Set directory separator characters
FindClose (1558) Stop searching a file
DoDirSeparators (1538) Replace directory separator characters
76.8 File input/output routines

Functions for reading/writing to file.
1480
Table 76.7:
Name Description
FileCreate (1550) Create a file and return handle
FileOpen (1554) Open file end return handle
FileRead (1555) Read from file
FileSeek (1556) Set file position
FileTruncate (1558) Truncate file length
FileWrite (1558) Write to file
FileClose (1549) Close file handle
76.9 PChar related functions

Most PChar functions are the same as their counterparts in the STRINGS unit. The following func-
tions are the same :
1. StrCat (1601) : Concatenates two PChar strings.

2. StrComp (1602) : Compares two PChar strings.
3. StrCopy (1602) : Copies a PChar string.
4. StrECopy (1603) : Copies a PChar string and returns a pointer to the terminating null byte.
5. StrEnd (1603) : Returns a pointer to the terminating null byte.

6. StrIComp (1605) : Case insensitive compare of 2 PChar strings.
7. StrLCat (1606) : Appends at most L characters from one PChar to another PChar.
8. StrLComp (1607) : Case sensitive compare of at most L characters of 2 PChar strings.

9. StrLCopy (1607) : Copies at most L characters from one PChar to another.
10. StrLen (1608) : Returns the length (exclusive terminating null byte) of a PChar string.
11. StrLIComp (1609) : Case insensitive compare of at most L characters of 2 PChar strings.
12. StrLower (1609) : Converts a PChar to all lowercase letters.

13. StrMove (1610) : Moves one PChar to another.
14. StrNew (1611) : Makes a copy of a PChar on the heap, and returns a pointer to this copy.
15. StrPos (1612) : Returns the position of one PChar string in another?
16. StrRScan (1613) : returns a pointer to the last occurrence of on PChar string in another one.
17. StrScan (1613) : returns a pointer to the first occurrence of on PChar string in another one.
18. StrUpper (1622) : Converts a PChar to all uppercase letters.
The subsequent functions are different from their counterparts in STRINGS, although the same
examples can be used.
1481
76.10 Date and time formatting characters

Various date and time formatting routines accept a format string to format the date and or time. The
following characters can be used to control the date and time formatting:
c Formats date using shortdateformat and formats time using longtimeformat if the time
is not zero.
f Same as c, but adds the time even if it is zero.
d day of month
dd day of month (leading zero)
ddd day of week (abbreviation)
dddd day of week (full)
ddddd shortdateformat
dddddd longdateformat
m month
mm month (leading zero)
mmm month (abbreviation)
mmmm month (full)
y year (2 digits)
yy year (two digits)
yyyy year (with century)
h hour
hh hour (leading zero)
n minute
nn minute (leading zero)
s second
ss second (leading zero)
t shorttimeformat
tt longtimeformat
am/pm use 12 hour clock and display am and pm accordingly
a/p use 12 hour clock and display a and p accordingly
/ insert date seperator
: insert time seperator
"xx" literal text
’xx’ literal text
1482
z milliseconds
zzz milliseconds(leading zero)
The date and time separators are taken from the DefaultFormatSettings (1500) record, unless a TFor-
matSettings (1496) record is passed to the FormatDateTime (1575) function.
Note that to include any of the above characters literally in the result string, they must be enclosed in
double quotes.
See also: DefaultFormatSettings (1500), TFormatSettings (1496), FormatDateTime (1575)
76.11 Formatting strings

Functions for formatting strings.
Table 76.8:
Name Description
AdjustLineBreaks (1506) Convert line breaks to line breaks for system
FormatBuf (1574) Format a buffer
Format (1567) Format arguments in string
FmtStr (1566) Format buffer
QuotedStr (1594) Quote a string
StrFmt (1604) Format arguments in a string
StrLFmt (1608) Format maximum L characters in a string
TrimLeft (1628) Remove whitespace at the left of a string
TrimRight (1628) Remove whitespace at the right of a string
Trim (1627) Remove whitespace at both ends of a string
76.12 String functions

Functions for handling strings.
1483
Table 76.9:
Name Description
AnsiCompareStr (1507) Compare two strings
AnsiCompareText (1508) Compare two strings, case insensitive
AnsiExtractQuotedStr (1509) Removes quotes from string
AnsiLastChar (1509) Get last character of string
AnsiLowerCase (1510) Convert string to all-lowercase
AnsiQuotedStr (1511) Qoutes a string
AnsiStrComp (1512) Compare strings case-sensitive
AnsiStrIComp (1513) Compare strings case-insensitive
AnsiStrLComp (1514) Compare L characters of strings case sensitive
AnsiStrLIComp (1515) Compare L characters of strings case insensitive
AnsiStrLastChar (1514) Get last character of string
AnsiStrLower (1516) Convert string to all-lowercase
AnsiStrUpper (1517) Convert string to all-uppercase
AnsiUpperCase (1518) Convert string to all-uppercase
AppendStr (1519) Append 2 strings
AssignStr (1520) Assign value of strings on heap
CompareStr (1525) Compare two strings case sensitive
CompareText (1526) Compare two strings case insensitive
DisposeStr (1538) Remove string from heap
IsValidIdent (1590) Is string a valid pascal identifier
LastDelimiter (1591) Last occurance of character in a string
LeftStr (1591) Get first N characters of a string
LoadStr (1592) Load string from resources
LowerCase (1592) Convert string to all-lowercase
NewStr (1593) Allocate new string on heap
RightStr (1596) Get last N characters of a string
StrAlloc (1600) Allocate memory for string
StrBufSize (1600) Reserve memory for a string
StrDispose (1603) Remove string from heap
StrPas (1611) Convert PChar to pascal string
StrPCopy (1612) Copy pascal string
StrPLCopy (1612) Copy N bytes of pascal string
UpperCase (1634) Convert string to all-uppercase

76.13.1 Constants
ConfigExtension : string = ’.cfg’
ConfigExtension is the default extension used by the GetAppConfigFile (1578) call. It can be
set to any valid extension for the current OS.
DateDelta = 693594
Days between 1/1/0001 and 12/31/1899
DriveDelim = DriveSeparator
1484
DriveDelim refers to the system unit’s DriveSeparator constant, it is for Delphi compatibility
only.
EmptyStr : string = ’’
Empty String Constant
EmptyWideStr : WideString = ’’
Empty wide string.
faAnyFile = $0000003f
Use this attribute in the FindFirst (1559) call to find all matching files.
faArchive = $00000020
Attribute of a file, meaning the file has the archive bit set. Used in TSearchRec (1497) and FindFirst
(1559)
faDirectory = $00000010
Attribute of a file, meaning the file is a directory. Used in TSearchRec (1497) and FindFirst (1559)
faHidden = $00000002
Attribute of a file, meaning the file is read-only. Used in TSearchRec (1497) and FindFirst (1559)
faReadOnly = $00000001
Attribute of a file, meaning the file is read-only. Used in TSearchRec (1497) and FindFirst (1559)
faSymLink = $00000040
faSymLink means the file (as returned e.g. by FindFirst (1559)/FindNext (1560)), is a symlink.
It’s ignored under Windows.
faSysFile = $00000004
Attribute of a file, meaning the file is a system file. Used in TSearchRec (1497) and FindFirst (1559)
faVolumeId = $00000008
Attribute of a file, meaning the entry contains the volume ID. Used in TSearchRec (1497) and Find-
First (1559)
feInvalidHandle : THandle = (-1)
feInvalidHandle is the return value of FileOpen (1554) in case of an error.
fmOpenRead = $0000
1485
fmOpenRead is used in the FileOpen (1554) call to open a file in read-only mode.
fmOpenReadWrite = $0002
fmOpenReadWrite is used in the FileOpen (1554) call to open a file in read-write mode.
fmOpenWrite = $0001
fmOpenWrite is used in the FileOpen (1554) call to open a file in write-only mode.
fmShareCompat = $0000
fmOpenShareCompat is used in the FileOpen (1554) call OR-ed together with one of fmOpen-
ReadWrite (1486), fmOpenRead (1486) or fmOpenWrite (1486),to open a file in a sharing modus
that is equivalent to sharing implemented in MS-DOS.
fmShareDenyNone = $0040
fmShareDenyNone is used in the FileOpen (1554) call OR-ed together with one of fmOpenRead-
Write (1486), fmOpenRead (1486) or fmOpenWrite (1486), to open a file so other processes can
read/write the file as well.
fmShareDenyRead = $0030
fmOpenShareRead is used in the FileOpen (1554) call OR-ed together with one of fmOpenRead-
Write (1486), fmOpenRead (1486) or fmOpenWrite (1486), to open a file so other processes cannot
read from it.
This constant only works on Windows, because other operating systems do not support this constants.
fmShareDenyWrite = $0020
fmOpenShareWrite is used in the FileOpen (1554) call OR-ed together with one of fmOpen-
ReadWrite (1486), fmOpenRead (1486) or fmOpenWrite (1486), to open a file so other processes
cannot write to it, they can only read.
fmShareExclusive = $0010
fmOpenShareExclusive is used in the FileOpen (1554) call OR-ed together with one of fmOpen-
ReadWrite (1486), fmOpenRead (1486) or fmOpenWrite (1486), to open a file exclusively.
fsFromBeginning = 0
fsFromBeginning is used to indicate in the FileSeek (1556) call that a seek operation should be
started at the start of the file.
fsFromCurrent = 1
started at the current position in the file.
fsFromEnd = 2
1486
started at the last position in the file.
GUID_NULL : TGuid = ’{00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000}’
NULL GUID constant
HexDisplayPrefix : string = ’$’
HexDisplayPrefix is used by the formatting routines to indicate that the number which follows
the prefix is in Hexadecimal notation.
HoursPerDay = 24
Number of hours in a day.
JulianEpoch = (-2415018.5)
Starting point of the Julian calendar
LeadBytes : Set of Char = []
LeadBytes contains the set of bytes that serve as lead byte in a MBCS string.
MaxCurrency : Currency = 922337203685477.0000
Maximum currency value
MaxDateTime : TDateTime = 2958465.99999
Maximum TDateTime value.
MAX_PATH = MaxPathLen
MAX_PATH is the maximum number of characters that a filename (including path) can contain on
the current operating system.
MinCurrency : Currency = -922337203685477.0000
Minimum Currency value
MinDateTime : TDateTime = -693593.0
Minimum TDateTime value.
MinsPerDay = HoursPerDay * MinsPerHour
Number of minutes per day.
MinsPerHour = 60
1487
Number of minutes per hour.
MonthDays : Array[Boolean] of TDayTable = ((31, 28, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31, 31, 30, 31, 3
Array with number of days in the months for leap and non-leap years.
MSecsPerDay = SecsPerDay * MSecsPerSec
Number of milliseconds per day
MSecsPerSec = 1000
Number of milliseconds per second
NullStr : PString = @EmptyStr
Pointer to an empty string
PathDelim = DirectorySeparator
PathDelim refers to the system unit’s DirectorySeparator constant, it is for Delphi com-
patibility only.
PathSep = PathSeparator
PathSep refers to the system unit’s PathSeparator constant, it is for Delphi compatibility only.
pfBCB4Produced = $08000000
Not used in Free Pascal.
pfDelphi4Produced = $0C000000
pfDesignOnly = $00000002
Package is a design-time only package
pfExeModule = $00000000
Package is an executable
pfIgnoreDupUnits = $00000008
Ignore duplicate units in package
pfLibraryModule = $80000000
Package is a library
1488
pfModuleTypeMask = $C0000000
Mask for module type flags
pfNeverBuild = $00000001
Never-build flag was specified when compiling package
pfPackageModule = $40000000
Package is a real package (not exe)
pfProducerMask = $0C000000
Mask for producer flags
pfProducerUndefined = $04000000
pfRunOnly = $00000004
Package is a run-time only package
pfV3Produced = $00000000
RTL_SIGBUS = 4
Bus error signal number (Unix only)
RTL_SIGDEFAULT = -1
Default signal handler (Unix only)
RTL_SIGFPE = 1
Floating Point Error signal number (Unix only)
RTL_SIGILL = 3
Illegal instruction signal number (Unix only)
RTL_SIGINT = 0
INTERRUPT signal number (Unix only)
RTL_SIGLAST = RTL_SIGQUIT
Last signal number (Unix only)
1489
RTL_SIGQUIT = 5
QUIT signal number (Unix only)
RTL_SIGSEGV = 2
Segmentation fault signal number (Unix only)
SecsPerDay = MinsPerDay * SecsPerMin
Number of seconds per day
SecsPerMin = 60
Number of seconds per minute
SwitchChars = [’-’]
The characters in this set will be used by the FindCmdLineSwitch (1559) function to determine
whether a command-line argument is a switch (an option) or a value. If the first character of an
argument is in SwitchChars, it will be considered an option or switch.
SysConfigDir : string = ’’
SysConfigDir is the default system configuration directory. It is set at application startup by the
sysutils initialization routines.
This directory may be returned by the GetAppConfigDir (1577) call on some systems.
ufImplicitUnit = $10
Unit was implicitly imported into package (did not appear in package contains list)
ufMainUnit = $01
Unit is the main unit of the package
ufOrgWeakUnit = $08
Unit is the original weak packaged unit
ufPackageUnit = $02
Unit is a packaged unit (appeared in package contains list)
ufWeakPackageUnit = ufPackageUnit or ufWeakUnit
Weak (original or not) packaged unit
ufWeakUnit = $04
Unit is a weak packaged unit
UnixDateDelta = (UnixEpoch)
Number of days between 1.1.1900 and 1.1.1970
UnixEpoch = JulianEpoch + (2440587.5)
Starting point of the unix calendar (1/1/1970)
1490
76.13.2 Types
EHeapException = EHeapMemoryError
EHeapMemoryError is raised when an error occurs in the heap management routines.
ExceptClass = Class of Exception
ExceptClass is a Exception (1645) class reference.
Int128Rec = packed record

case Integer of
0: (
Hi : QWord;
Lo : QWord;
);
1: (
DWords : Array[0..3] of DWord;
);
2: (
);
3: (
);
end
Int128Rec is a record defining a 128-bit integer. It is made up of 2 QWords or 4 DWords or 8

words or 16 bytes.
Int64Rec = packed record

case Integer of
0: (
Hi : Cardinal;
Lo : Cardinal;
);
1: (
);
2: (
);
end
Int64Rec can be used to extract the parts of a Int64: the high and low cardinal, or a zero-based
array of 4 words, or a zero based array of 8 bytes. Note that the meaning of the High and Low parts
are different on various CPUs.
LongRec = packed record

case Integer of
0: (
1491
Hi : Word;
Lo : Word;
);
1: (
);
end
LongRec can be used to extract the parts of an long Integer: the high and low word, or the 4 separate
bytes as a zero-based array of bytes. Note that the meaning of High and Low parts are different on
various CPUs.
OWordRec = packed record

case Integer of
0: (
Hi : QWord;
Lo : QWord;
);
1: (
DWords : Array[0..3] of DWord;
);
2: (
);
3: (
);
end
OWordRec is a record defining a 128-bit integer. It is made up of 2 QWords or 4 DWords or 8 words

or 16 bytes.
PByteArray = ^TByteArray
Generic pointer to TByteArray (1493). Use to access memory regions as a byte array.
PDayTable = ^TDayTable
Pointer to TDayTable type.
PString = ^string
Pointer to a ansistring
PSysCharSet = ^TSysCharSet
Pointer to TSysCharSet (1498) type.
PWordarray = ^TWordArray
Generic pointer to TWordArray (1499). Use to access memory regions as a word array.
1492
TBeepHandler = procedure
TBeepHandler is the prototype used by the OnBeep (1502) handler. This in turn is called by the
Beep (1521) call to actually implement the beep functionality. The call takes no arguments.
TByteArray = Array[0..32767] of Byte
TByteArray is a generic array definition, mostly for use as a base type of the PByteArray (1492)
type.
TBytes = Array of Byte
TBytes defines a dynamic array of bytes. This can be used to typecast e.g. strings to manipulate
them byte for byte.
TCreateGUIDFunc = function(out GUID: TGuid) : Integer
TCreateGUIDFunc is the prototype for a GUID creation handler. On return, the GUID argument
should contain a new (unique) GUID. The return value of the function should be zero for success,
nonzero for failure.
TDayTable = Array[1..12] of Word
Array of day names.
TEventType = (etCustom,etInfo,etWarning,etError,etDebug)
Table 76.10: Enumeration values for type TEventType
Value Explanation
etCustom Custom log event, with application-specific meaning
etDebug Debug message.
etError Error condition message
etInfo General information event message
etWarning Warning message
TEventType is a type to be used by logging mechanisms (in particular, the TCustomApplication

and TEventLog classes. It can be used to filter events, and write only certain types of event to the
event log.
TEventTypes = Set of TEventType
TEventTypes is a set type of TEventType, defined for convenience. It is used in the custom
application classes for logging purposes.
TExecuteFlags= Set of (ExecInheritsHandles)
1493
Value Explanation
ExecInheritsHandles The new process inherits all (file) handles owned by the current process
TExecuteFlags is a set of flags to influence the behaviour of the ExecuteProcess (1543) call.
TFilename = String
TFileName is used in the TSearchRec (1497) definition.
TFileRec = FileRec
Alias for FileRec (1476) for Delphi compatibility.
TFileSearchOption = (sfoImplicitCurrentDir,sfoStripQuotes)
Table 76.12: Enumeration values for type TFileSearchOption
Value Explanation
sfoImplicitCurrentDir Always search the current directory first, even if it is not specified.
sfoStripQuotes Strip quotes from the components in the search path.
TFileSearchOption enumerates the options that can be used in the FileSearch call to con-
trol the behaviour of the search mechanism
TFileSearchOptions = Set of TFileSearchOption
TFileSearchOptions is a set of TFileSearchOption (1494) values, used in the FileSearch (1555)

call when searching for files.
TFloatFormat = (ffGeneral,ffExponent,ffFixed,ffNumber,ffCurrency)
Table 76.13: Enumeration values for type TFloatFormat
Value Explanation
ffCurrency Monetary format.
ffExponent Scientific format.
ffFixed Fixed point format.
ffGeneral General number format.
ffNumber Fixed point format with thousand separatord
TFloatFormat is used to determine how a float value should be formatted in the FloatToText
(1565) function.
1494
TFloatRec = record
Exponent : Integer;
Negative : Boolean;
Digits : Array[0..18] of Char;
end
TFloatRec is used to descibe a floating point value by the FloatToDecimal (1561) function.
TFloatValue = (fvExtended,fvCurrency,fvSingle,fvReal,fvDouble,fvComp)
Table 76.14: Enumeration values for type TFloatValue
Value Explanation
fvComp Comp value
fvCurrency Currency value
fvDouble Double value
fvExtended Extended value
fvReal Real value
fvSingle Single value
TFloatValue determines which kind of value should be returned in the (untyped) buffer used by
the TextToFloat (1624) function.
TFormatDateTimeOption = (fdoInterval)
Table 76.15: Enumeration values for type TFormatDateTimeOption
Value Explanation
fdoInterval Format the time as an interval, 24+hours are presented as such
TFormatDateTimeOption enumerates possible options to the FormatDateTime (1575) routine.
TFormatDateTimeOptions = Set of TFormatDateTimeOption
TFormatDateTimeOptions is a set of TFormatDateTimeOptions (1495), and is used in the last

argument of FormatDateTime (1575)
TFormatSettings = record
CurrencyFormat : Byte;
NegCurrFormat : Byte;
ThousandSeparator : Char;
DecimalSeparator : Char;
CurrencyDecimals : Byte;
DateSeparator : Char;
TimeSeparator : Char;
ListSeparator : Char;
CurrencyString : string;
1495
ShortDateFormat : string;
LongDateFormat : string;
TimeAMString : string;
TimePMString : string;
ShortTimeFormat : string;
LongTimeFormat : string;
ShortMonthNames : TMonthNameArray;
LongMonthNames : TMonthNameArray;
ShortDayNames : TWeekNameArray;
LongDayNames : TWeekNameArray;
TwoDigitYearCenturyWindow : Word;
end
TFormatSettings is a record that contains a copy of all variables which determine formatting
in the various string formatting routines. It is used to pass local copies of these values to the various
formatting routines in a thread-safe way.
TGetAppNameEvent = function : string
This callback type is used by the OnGetApplicationName (1502) to return an alternative application
name.
TGetTempDirEvent = function(Global: Boolean) : string
Function prototype for OnGetTempDir (1503) handler.
TGetTempFileEvent = function(const Dir: string;const Prefix: string)

: string
Function prototype for OnGetTempFile (1503) handler.
TGetVendorNameEvent = function : string
TGetVendorNameEvent is the function prototype for the OnGetVendorName (1503) callback,

used by the VendorName (1634) function.
THandle = System.THandle
THandle refers to the definition of THandle in the system unit, and is provided for backward
compatibility only.
TIntegerSet = Set of
TIntegerSet is a generic integer subrange set definition whose size fits in a single integer.
TMbcsByteType = (mbSingleByte,mbLeadByte,mbTrailByte)
Table 76.16: Enumeration values for type TMbcsByteType
Value Explanation
mbLeadByte Uses lead-byte
mbSingleByte Single bytes
mbTrailByte Uses trailing byte
1496
Type of multi-byte character set.
TMonthNameArray = Array[1..12] of string
TMonthNameArray is used in the month long and short name arrays.
TProcedure = procedure
TProcedure is a general definition of a procedural callback.
TRawbyteSearchRec = record
Time : LongInt;
Size : Int64;
Attr : LongInt;
Name : RawByteString;
ExcludeAttr : LongInt;
FindHandle : THandle;
Mode : TMode;
end
TRawbyteSearchRec is a search handle description record using single-byte strings. It is ini-

tialized by a call to FindFirst (1559) and can be used to do subsequent calls to FindNext (1560). It
contains the result of these function calls. It must be used to close the search sequence with a call to
FindClose (1558).
Remark: Not all fields of this record should be used. Some of the fields are for internal use only. (PathOnly
for example, is only provided for Kylix compatibility)
Remark: Note that for files with unicode filenames this is a converted value from the unicode filename.
Depending on the codepage, this may or may not be a correct rendering of the correct unicode
filename.
TReplaceFlags= Set of (rfReplaceAll,rfIgnoreCase)
Value Explanation
rfIgnoreCase Search case insensitive.
rfReplaceAll Replace all occurrences of the search string with the replacement string.
TReplaceFlags determines the behaviour of the StringReplace (1605) function.
TSearchRec = TRawbyteSearchRec
TSearchRec is a search handle description record. It is initialized by a call to FindFirst (1559) and
can be used to do subsequent calls to FindNext (1560). It contains the result of these function calls.
It must be used to close the search sequence with a call to FindClose (1558).
1497
TSignalState = (ssNotHooked,ssHooked,ssOverridden)
Table 76.18: Enumeration values for type TSignalState
Value Explanation
ssHooked A signal handler is set by the RTL code for the signal.
ssNotHooked No signal handler is set for the signal.
ssOverridden A signal handler was set for the signal by third-party code.
TSignalState indicates the state of a signal handler in a unix system for a particular signal.
TSysCharSet = Set of AnsiChar
Generic set of characters type.
TSysLocale = record
DefaultLCID : Integer;
PriLangID : Integer;
SubLangID : Integer;
case Byte of
1: (
FarEast : Boolean;
MiddleEast : Boolean;
);
2: (
MBCS : Boolean;
RightToLeft : Boolean;
);
end
TSysLocale describes the current locale. If Fareast or MBCS is True, then the current locale
uses a Multi-Byte Character Set. If MiddleEast or RightToLeft is True then words and
sentences are read from right to left.
TSystemTime = record
Year : Word;
Month : Word;
Day : Word;
DayOfWeek : Word;
Hour : Word;
Minute : Word;
Second : Word;
MilliSecond : Word;
end
The System time structure contains the date/time in a human-understandable format.
TTerminateProc = function : Boolean
1498
TTerminateProc is the procedural type which should be used when adding exit procedures.
TTextRec = TextRec
Alias for TextRec (1476) for Delphi compatibility.
TTimeStamp = record
Time : LongInt;
Date : LongInt;
end
TTimeStamp contains a timestamp, with the date and time parts specified as separate TDateTime
values.
TUnicodeSearchRec = record
Time : LongInt;
Size : Int64;
Attr : LongInt;
Name : UnicodeString;
ExcludeAttr : LongInt;
FindHandle : THandle;
Mode : TMode;
end
TRawbyteSearchRec is a search handle description record using multi-byte strings. It is initial-

ized by a call to FindFirst (1559) and can be used to do subsequent calls to FindNext (1560). It
contains the result of these function calls. It must be used to close the search sequence with a call to
FindClose (1558).
TWeekNameArray = Array[1..7] of string
TWeekNameArray is used in the day long and short name arrays.
TWordArray = Array[0..16383] of Word
TWordArray is a generic array definition, mostly for use as a base type of the PWordArray (1492)
type.
WordRec = packed record

Hi : Byte;
Lo : Byte;
end
LongRec can be used to extract the parts of a word: the high and low byte. Note that the meaning
of the High and Low parts are different on various CPUs.
1499
76.13.3 Variables
CurrencyDecimals : Bytedeprecated
CurrencyDecimals is the number of decimals to be used when formatting a currency. It is used

by the float formatting routines. The initialization routines of the SysUtils unit initialize this string
with a value conforming to the regional preferences of the user or system regional default.
This constant is deprecated. You should use DefaultFormatSettings.CurrencyFormat (1500) instead.
CurrencyFormat : Bytedeprecated
CurrencyFormat is the default format string for positive currencies. It is used by the float for-
matting routines. The initialization routines of the SysUtils unit initialize this string with a value
conforming to the regional preferences of the user or system regional default.
This constant is deprecated. You should use DefaultFormatSettings.CurrencyFormat (1500) instead.
CurrencyString : stringdeprecated
CurrencyString is the currency symbol for the current locale. It is used by the float formatting
routines. The initialization routines of the SysUtils unit initialize this string with a value conforming
to the regional preferences of the user or system regional default.
This constant is deprecated. You should use DefaultFormatSettings.CurrencyString (1500) instead.
DateSeparator : Chardeprecated
DateSeparator is the character used by various date/time conversion routines as the character
that separates the day from the month and the month from the year in a date notation. It is used by
the date formatting routines. The initialization routines of the SysUtils unit initialize this string with
a value conforming to the regional preferences of the user or system regional default.
This constant is deprecated. You should use DefaultFormatSettings.DateSeparator (1500) instead.
DecimalSeparator : Chardeprecated
DecimalSeparator is used to display the decimal symbol in floating point numbers or curren-
cies. It is used by the float formatting routines. The initialization routines of the SysUtils unit ini-
tialize this string with a value conforming to the regional preferences of the user or system regional
default.
This constant is deprecated. You should use DefaultFormatSettings.DecimalSeparator (1500) in-
stead.
DefaultFormatSettings : TFormatSettings = (CurrencyFormat: 1; NegCurrFormat: 5; Thous
DefaultFormatSettings contains the default settings for all type of formatting constants. If
no thread-specific values are specified when a formatting function is called, this record is used as a
default.
All other formatting constants refer to the fields of this variable using absolute addressing.
FalseBoolStrs : Array of string
FalseBoolStrs contains the strings that will result in a False return value by StrToBool (1613).
1500
FormatSettings : TFormatSettings
FormatSettings is provided for Delphi compatibility, and refers to the DefaultFormatSettings

(1500) variable.
ListSeparator : Chardeprecated
ListSeparator is the character used in lists of values. It is locale dependent.
LongDateFormat : stringdeprecated
LongDateFormat contains a template to format a date in a long format. It is used by the date
formatting routines. The initialization routines of the SysUtils unit initialize this string with a value
This constant is deprecated. You should use DefaultFormatSettings.LongDateFormat (1500) instead.
LongDayNames : TWeekNameArraydeprecated
LongDayNames is an array with the full names of days. It is used by the date formatting routines.
The initialization routines of the SysUtils unit initialize this string with a value conforming to the
regional preferences of the user or system regional default.
The array is indexed by values as returned by the DayOfWeek function.
This constant is deprecated. You should use DefaultFormatSettings.LongDayNames (1500) instead.
LongMonthNames : TMonthNameArraydeprecated
LongMonthNames is an array with the full names of months. It is used by the date formatting
This constant is deprecated. You should use DefaultFormatSettings.LongMonthNames (1500) in-
stead.
LongTimeFormat : stringdeprecated
LongTimeFormat contains a template to format a time in full notation. It is used by the time
This constant is deprecated. You should use DefaultFormatSettings.LongTimeFormat (1500) instead.
NegCurrFormat : Bytedeprecated
CurrencyFormat is the default format string for negative currencies. It is used by the float for-
matting routines. The initialization routines of the SysUtils unit initialize this string with a value
conforming to the regional preferences of the user or system regional default:
0 Left parenthesis, currency symbol, amount, right parenthesis. Ex: ($1.2)

1 Negative sign, currency symbol, amount. Ex: -$1.2
2 Monetary symbol, negative sign, amount. Ex: $-1.2
1501
3 Monetary symbol, amount, negative sign. Ex: $1.2-

4 Left parenthesis, amount, currency symbol, right parenthesis. Ex: (1.2$)
5 Negative sign, amount, currency symbol. Ex: -1.2$
5 6Amount, negative sign, currency symbol. Ex: 1.2-$
5 7Amount, currency symbol, negative sign. Ex: 1.2$-

5 8Negative sign, amount, space, currency symbol (as #5, adding a space before the currency sym-
bol). Ex: -1.2 $
9 Negative sign, currency symbol, space, amount (as #1, adding a space after the currency symbol).
Ex: -$ 1.2
10 Amount, space, currency symbol, negative sign (as #7, adding a space before the currency sym-
bol). Ex: 1.2 $-
11 Monetary symbol, space, amount, negative sign (as #3, adding a space after the currency symbol).
Ex: $ 1.2-
12 Monetary symbol, space, negative sign, amount (as #2, adding a space after the currency symbol).
Ex: $ -1.2
13 Amount, negative sign, space, currency symbol (as #6, adding a space before the currency sym-
bol). Ex: 1.2- $
14 Left parenthesis, currency symbol, space, amount, right parenthesis (as #0, adding a space after
the currency symbol). Ex: ($ 1.2)
15 Left parenthesis, amount, space, currency symbol, right parenthesis (as ##4, adding a space be-
fore the currency symbol). Ex: (1.2 $)
OnBeep : TBeepHandler = Nil
OnBeep is calles whenever Beep is called. Beep contains no implementation to actually produce a
beep, since there is no way to implement beep in a meaningful way for all possible implementations.
OnCreateGUID : TCreateGUIDFunc = Nil
OnCreateGUID can be set to point to a custom routine that creates GUID values. If set, the Cre-
ateGUID (1528) function will use it to obtain a GUID value. If it is not set, a default implementation
using random values will be used to create the unique value. The function should return a valid GUID
in the GUID parameter, and should return zero in case of success.
OnGetApplicationName : TGetAppNameEvent
By default, the configuration file routines GetAppConfigDir (1577) and GetAppConfigFile (1578)
use a default application name to construct a directory or filename. This callback can be used to
provide an alternative application name.
Since the result of this callback will be used to construct a filename, care should be taken that the
returned name does not contain directory separator characters or characters that cannot appear in a
filename.
OnGetTempDir : TGetTempDirEvent
1502
OnGetTempDir can be used to provide custom behaviour for the GetTempDir (1582) function.
Note that the returned name should have a trailing directory delimiter character.
OnGetTempFile : TGetTempFileEvent
OnGetTempDir can be used to provide custom behaviour for the GetTempFileName (1583) func-
tion. Note that the values for Prefix and Dir should be observed.
OnGetVendorName : TGetVendorNameEvent
OnGetVendorName must be set in order for VendorName (1634) to return a value. It will then
be used in GetAppConfigDir (1577) and GetAppConfigFile (1578) to determine the configuration
directory. Set it to a callback that returns the actual vendor name for the application.
OnShowException : procedure(Msg: ShortString)
OnShowException is the callback that ShowException (1598) uses to display a message in a GUI
application. For GUI applications, this variable should always be set. Note that no memory may
be available when this callback is called, so the callback should already have all resources it needs,
when the callback is set.
ShortDateFormat : stringdeprecated
ShortDateFormat contains a template to format a date in a short format. It is used by the date
This constant is deprecated. You should use DefaultFormatSettings.ShortDateFormat (1500) instead.
ShortDayNames : TWeekNameArraydeprecated
ShortDayNames is an array with the abbreviated names of days. It is used by the date formatting
The array is indexed by values as returned by the DayOfWeek function.
This constant is deprecated. You should use DefaultFormatSettings.ShortDayNames (1500) instead.
ShortMonthNames : TMonthNameArraydeprecated
ShortMonthNames is an array with the abbreviated names of months. It is used by the date
This constant is deprecated. You should use DefaultFormatSettings.ShortMonthNames (1500) in-
stead.
ShortTimeFormat : stringdeprecated
ShortTimeFormat contains a template to format a time in a short notation. It is used by the time
This constant is deprecated. You should use DefaultFormatSettings.ShortTimeFormat (1500) instead.
1503
SysLocale : TSysLocale
SysLocale is initialized by the initialization code of the SysUtils unit. For an explanation of the
fields, see TSysLocale (1498)
ThousandSeparator : Chardeprecated
ThousandSeparator is used to separate groups of thousands in floating point numbers or cur-

rencies. It is used by the float formatting routines. The initialization routines of the SysUtils unit
initialize this string with a value conforming to the regional preferences of the user or system regional
default.
This constant is deprecated. You should use DefaultFormatSettings.ThousandSeparator (1500) in-
stead.
TimeAMString : stringdeprecated
TimeAMString is used to display the AM symbol in the time formatting routines. It is used by the
time formatting routines. The initialization routines of the SysUtils unit initialize this string with a
value conforming to the regional preferences of the user or system regional default.
This constant is deprecated. You should use DefaultFormatSettings.TimeAMString (1500) instead.
TimePMString : stringdeprecated
TimePMString is used to display the PM symbol in the time formatting routines. It is used by the
time formatting routines. The initialization routines of the SysUtils unit initialize this string with a
value conforming to the regional preferences of the user or system regional default.
This constant is deprecated. You should use DefaultFormatSettings.TimePMString (1500) instead.
TimeSeparator : Chardeprecated
TimeSeparator is used by the time formatting routines to separate the hours from the minutes and
the minutes from the seconds. It is used by the time formatting routines. The initialization routines
of the SysUtils unit initialize this string with a value conforming to the regional preferences of the
user or system regional default.
TrueBoolStrs : Array of string
TrueBoolStrs contains the strings that will result in a True return value by StrToBool (1613).
TwoDigitYearCenturyWindow : Word
Window to determine what century 2 digit years are in.

76.14.1 AbandonSignalHandler
Synopsis: Abandon the signal handler
Declaration: procedure AbandonSignalHandler(RtlSigNum: Integer)
1504
Visibility: default
Description: AbandonSignalHandler tells the system routines that they should not re-install the signal han-
dler for signal RtlSigNum under any circumstances. Normally, signal handlers are re-set when
they are called. If AbandonSignalHandler has been called for a signal that is handled by the
system code, the signal will not be re-set again.
76.14.2 Abort
Synopsis: Abort program execution.
Declaration: procedure Abort
Visibility: default
Description: Abort raises an EAbort (1638) exception.
See also: EAbort (1638)
76.14.3 AddDisk
Synopsis: Add a disk to the list of known disks (Unix only)
Declaration: function AddDisk(const path: string) : Byte
Visibility: default
Description: On Unix-like platforms both the DiskFree (1537) and DiskSize (1537) functions need a file on the
specified drive, since is required for the statfs system call.
These filenames are set in drivestr[0..26], and the first 4 have been preset to :
Disk 0’.’ default drive - hence current directory is used.
Disk 1’/fd0/.’ floppy drive 1.
Disk 2’/fd1/.’ floppy drive 2.
Disk 3’/’C: equivalent of DOS is the root partition.
Drives 4..26 can be set by your own applications with the AddDisk call.
The AddDisk call adds Path to the names of drive files, and returns the number of the disk that
corresponds to this drive. If you add more than 21 drives, the count is wrapped to 4.
Errors: None.
See also: DiskFree (1537), DiskSize (1537)
76.14.4 AddTerminateProc
Synopsis: Add a procedure to the exit chain.
Declaration: procedure AddTerminateProc(TermProc: TTerminateProc)
Visibility: default
Description: AddTerminateProc adds TermProc to the list of exit procedures. When the program exits, the
list of exit procedures is run over, and all procedures are called one by one, in the reverse order that
they were added to the exit chain.
Errors: If no memory is available on the heap, an exception may be raised.
See also: TTerminateProc (1499), CallTerminateProcs (1522)
1505
76.14.5 AdjustLineBreaks
Synopsis: Convert possible line-endings to the currently valid line ending.
Declaration: function AdjustLineBreaks(const S: string) : string

function AdjustLineBreaks(const S: string;Style: TTextLineBreakStyle)
: string
Visibility: default
Description: AdjustLineBreaks will change all occurrences of #13 and #10 characters with the correct
line-ending characters for the current platform. This is #13#10 on Windows and Dos. On Unix-like
platforms, this is #10 and for Mac OS X it is #13.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiCompareStr (1507), AnsiCompareText (1508)
Listing: ./sysutex/ex48.pp
Program Example48 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e A d j u s t L i n e B r e a k s f u n c t i o n }
Uses s y s u t i l s ;
Const
S = ’ T h i s i s a s t r i n g ’ #13 ’ w i t h embedded ’ #10 ’ l i n e f e e d and ’ +
#13 ’CR c h a r a c t e r s ’ ;
Begin
W r i t e l n ( A d j u s t L i n e B r e a k s (S ) ) ;
End .
76.14.6 AnsiCompareFileName
Synopsis: Compare 2 filenames.
Declaration: function AnsiCompareFileName(const S1: string;const S2: string)
: SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiCompareFileName compares 2 filenames S1 and S2, and returns
< 0if S1<S2.

= 0if S1=S2.
> 0if S1>S2.
The function actually checks FileNameCaseSensitive and returns the result of AnsiCom-
pareStr (1507) or AnsiCompareText (1508) depending on whether FileNameCaseSensitive is
True or False
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiCompareStr (1507), AnsiCompareText (1508), AnsiLowerCaseFileName (1511)
1506
76.14.7 AnsiCompareStr
Synopsis: Compare 2 ansistrings, case sensitive, ignoring accents characters.
Declaration: function AnsiCompareStr(const S1: string;const S2: string) : Integer

Visibility: default
Description: AnsiCompareStr compares two strings and returns the following result:
< 0if S1<S2.

0if S1=S2.
> 0if S1>S2.
The comparision takes into account Ansi characters, i.e. it takes care of strange accented characters.
Contrary to AnsiCompareText (1508), the comparision is case sensitive.
Remark: A widestring manager must be installed in order for this function to work correctly with various
character sets.
Errors: None.
See also: AdjustLineBreaks (1506), AnsiCompareText (1508)
Program Example49 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e AnsiCompareStr f u n c t i o n }

{ $H+ }
Procedure T e s t I t ( S1 , S2 : S t r i n g ) ;
Var R : L o n g i n t ;
begin
R: = AnsiCompareStr ( S1 , S2 ) ;
Write ( ’ " ’ , S1 , ’ " i s ’ ) ;
I f R<0 then
w r i t e ( ’ l e s s than ’ )
else I f R=0 then
Write ( ’ equal t o ’ )
else
Write ( ’ l a r g e r than ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ " ’ , S2 , ’ " ’ ) ;
end ;
Begin
Testit ( ’ One string ’ , ’ One smaller s t r i n g ’ ) ;
Testit ( ’ One string ’ , ’ one string ’ );
Testit ( ’ One string ’ , ’ One string ’ );
Testit ( ’ One string ’ , ’ One t a l l string ’ );
End .
1507
76.14.8 AnsiCompareText
Synopsis: Compare 2 ansistrings, case insensitive, ignoring accents characters.
Declaration: function AnsiCompareText(const S1: string;const S2: string) : Integer

Visibility: default
Description: AnsiCompareText compares two strings and returns the following result:
<0if S1<S2.
0if S1=S2.
>0if S1>S2.
the comparision takes into account Ansi characters, i.e. it takes care of strange accented characters.
Contrary to AnsiCompareStr (1507), the comparision is case insensitive.
character sets.
Errors: None.
See also: AdjustLineBreaks (1506), AnsiCompareText (1508)
Program Example49 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e AnsiCompareText f u n c t i o n }

{ $H+ }
begin
R: = AnsiCompareText ( S1 , S2 ) ;
Write ( ’ " ’ , S1 , ’ " i s ’ ) ;
I f R<0 then
else I f R=0 then
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ " ’ , S2 , ’ " ’ ) ;
end ;
Begin
End .
1508
76.14.9 AnsiDequotedStr
Synopsis:
Declaration: function AnsiDequotedStr(const S: string;AQuote: Char) : string

Visibility: default
Description:
76.14.10 AnsiExtractQuotedStr
Synopsis: Removes the first quoted string from a string.
Declaration: function AnsiExtractQuotedStr(var Src: PChar;Quote: Char) : string
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiExtractQuotedStr returns the first quoted string in Src, and deletes the result from Src.
The resulting string has with Quote characters removed from the beginning and end of the string (if
they are present), and double Quote characters replaced by a single Quote characters. As such, it
revereses the action of AnsiQuotedStr (1511).
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiQuotedStr (1511)
Program Example51 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e AnsiQuotedStr f u n c t i o n }
Var
S : AnsiString ;
P : PChar ;
Begin
S: = ’ He s a i d " H e l l o " and walked on ’ ;
P: = Pchar (S ) ;
S: = AnsiQuotedStr ( P , ’ " ’ ) ;
Writeln ( S ) ;
P: = Pchar (S ) ;
Writeln ( AnsiExtractQuotedStr (P, ’ " ’ ) ) ;
End .
76.14.11 AnsiLastChar
Synopsis: Return a pointer to the last character of a string.
Declaration: function AnsiLastChar(const S: string) : PChar

Visibility: default
Description: This function returns a pointer to the last character of S.
character sets. If none is installed, this function is the same as @S[Length[S]].
1509
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiStrLastChar (1514)
Program Example52 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e AnsiLastChar f u n c t i o n }
Var S : A n s i S t r i n g ;
L : Longint ;
Begin
S: = ’ T h i s i s an a n s i s t r i n g . ’ ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ L a s t c h a r a c t e r o f S i s : ’ , AnsiLastChar (S ) ) ;
L : = L o n g i n t ( AnsiLastChar (S)) − L o n g i n t (@S[ 1 ] ) + 1 ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Length o f S i s : ’ , L ) ;
End .
76.14.12 AnsiLowerCase
Synopsis: Return a lowercase version of a string.
Declaration: function AnsiLowerCase(const s: string) : string
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiLowerCase converts the string S to lowercase characters and returns the resulting string. It
takes into account the operating system language settings when doing this, so special characters are
converted correctly as well.
character sets.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiUpperCase (1518), AnsiStrLower (1516), AnsiStrUpper (1517)
Program Example53 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e AnsiLowerCase f u n c t i o n }
Procedure T e s t i t ( S : S t r i n g ) ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( S , ’ − > ’ , AnsiLowerCase (S ) )
end ;
Begin
T e s t i t ( ’AN UPPERCASE STRING ’ ) ;
T e s t i t ( ’Some mixed STring ’ ) ;
T e s t i t ( ’ a lowercase s t r i n g ’ ) ;
End .
1510
76.14.13 AnsiLowerCaseFileName
Synopsis: Convert filename to lowercase.
Declaration: function AnsiLowerCaseFileName(const s: string) : string
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiLowerCaseFileName simply returns the result of
AnsiLowerCase(S);
See also: AnsiLowerCase (1510), AnsiCompareFileName (1506), AnsiUpperCaseFileName (1519)
76.14.14 AnsiPos
Synopsis: Return Position of one ansistring in another.
Declaration: function AnsiPos(const substr: string;const s: string) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiPos does the same as the standard Pos function.
See also: AnsiStrPos (1516), AnsiStrScan (1517), AnsiStrRScan (1517)
76.14.15 AnsiQuotedStr
Synopsis: Return a quoted version of a string.
Declaration: function AnsiQuotedStr(const S: string;Quote: Char) : string
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiQuotedString quotes the string S and returns the result. This means that it puts the Quote
character at both the beginning and end of the string and replaces any occurrence of Quote in S with
2 Quote characters. The action of AnsiQuotedString can be reversed by AnsiExtractQuotedStr
(1509).
For an example, see AnsiExtractQuotedStr (1509)
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiExtractQuotedStr (1509)
76.14.16 AnsiSameStr
Synopsis: Checks whether 2 strings are the same (case sensitive)
Declaration: function AnsiSameStr(const s1: string;const s2: string) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: SameText calls AnsiCompareStr (1507) with S1 and S2 as parameters and returns True if the
result of that call is zero, or False otherwise.
character sets.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiCompareStr (1507), SameText (1597), AnsiSameText (1512)
1511
76.14.17 AnsiSameText
Synopsis: Checks whether 2 strings are the same (case insensitive)
Declaration: function AnsiSameText(const s1: string;const s2: string) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: SameText calls AnsiCompareText (1508) with S1 and S2 as parameters and returns True if the
result of that call is zero, or False otherwise.
See also: AnsiCompareText (1508), SameText (1597), AnsiSameStr (1511)
76.14.18 AnsiStrComp
Synopsis: Compare two null-terminated strings. Case sensitive.
Declaration: function AnsiStrComp(S1: PChar;S2: PChar) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiStrComp compares 2 PChar strings, and returns the following result:
<0if S1<S2.
0if S1=S2.
>0if S1>S2.
The comparision of the two strings is case-sensitive.

character sets.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiCompareText (1508), AnsiCompareStr (1507)
Program Example54 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e AnsiStrComp f u n c t i o n }
Procedure T e s t I t ( S1 , S2 : Pchar ) ;
begin
R: = AnsiStrComp ( S1 , S2 ) ;
Write ( ’ " ’ , S1 , ’ " i s ’ ) ;
I f R<0 then
else I f R=0 then
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ " ’ , S2 , ’ " ’ ) ;
end ;
1512
Begin
End .
76.14.19 AnsiStrIComp
Synopsis: Compare two null-terminated strings. Case insensitive.
Declaration: function AnsiStrIComp(S1: PChar;S2: PChar) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiStrIComp compares 2 PChar strings, and returns the following result:
<0if S1<S2.
0if S1=S2.
>0if S1>S2.
The comparision of the two strings is case-insensitive.

character sets.
Errors: None.
Program Example55 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e AnsiStrIComp f u n c t i o n }
Procedure T e s t I t ( S1 , S2 : Pchar ) ;
begin
R: = AnsiStrIComp ( S1 , S2 ) ;
Write ( ’ " ’ , S1 , ’ " i s ’ ) ;
I f R<0 then
else I f R=0 then
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ " ’ , S2 , ’ " ’ ) ;
end ;
Begin
T e s t i t ( ’ One s t r i n g ’ , ’ One s m a l l e r s t r i n g ’ ) ;
1513
T e s t i t ( ’ One s t r i n g ’ , ’ one s t r i n g ’ ) ;
T e s t i t ( ’ One s t r i n g ’ , ’ One s t r i n g ’ ) ;
T e s t i t ( ’ One s t r i n g ’ , ’ One t a l l s t r i n g ’ ) ;
End .
76.14.20 AnsiStrLastChar
Synopsis: Return a pointer to the last character of a string.
Declaration: function AnsiStrLastChar(Str: PChar) : PChar
Visibility: default
Description: Return a pointer to the last character of the null-terminated string.
character sets. If none is installed, this function is the same as @S[Length[S]].
Errors: None.
Program Example56 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e AnsiStrLComp f u n c t i o n }
Procedure T e s t I t ( S1 , S2 : Pchar ; L : l o n g i n t ) ;
begin
R: = AnsiStrLComp ( S1 , S2 , L ) ;
Write ( ’ F i r s t ’ , L , ’ c h a r a c t e r s o f " ’ , S1 , ’ " are ’ ) ;
I f R<0 then
else I f R=0 then
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ those o f " ’ , S2 , ’ " ’ ) ;
end ;
Begin
Testit ( ’ One string ’ , ’ One s m a l l e r s t r i n g ’ , 2 5 5 ) ;
Testit ( ’ One string ’ , ’ One S t r i n g ’ , 4 ) ;
Testit ( ’ One string ’ , ’ 1 string ’ ,0);
Testit ( ’ One string ’ , ’ One s t r i n g . ’ , 9 ) ;
End .
76.14.21 AnsiStrLComp
Synopsis: Compare a limited number of characters of 2 strings
1514
Declaration: function AnsiStrLComp(S1: PChar;S2: PChar;MaxLen: Cardinal) : Integer

Visibility: default
Description: AnsiStrLComp functions the same as AnsiStrComp (1512), but compares at most MaxLen char-
acters. If the first MaxLen characters in both strings are the same, then zero is returned.
Note that this function processes embedded null characters, treating them as a normal character.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiStrComp (1512), AnsiStrIComp (1513), AnsiStrLIComp (1515)
76.14.22 AnsiStrLIComp
Synopsis: Compares a given number of characters of a string, case insensitive.
Declaration: function AnsiStrLIComp(S1: PChar;S2: PChar;MaxLen: Cardinal) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiStrLIComp compares the first Maxlen characters of 2 PChar strings, S1 and S2, and
returns the following result:
<0if S1<S2.
0if S1=S2.
>0if S1>S2.
The comparision of the two strings is case-insensitive.

character sets.
Errors: None.
Program Example57 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e AnsiStrLIComp f u n c t i o n }
Procedure T e s t I t ( S1 , S2 : Pchar ; L : l o n g i n t ) ;
begin
R: = AnsiStrLIComp ( S1 , S2 , L ) ;
Write ( ’ F i r s t ’ , L , ’ c h a r a c t e r s o f " ’ , S1 , ’ " are ’ ) ;
I f R<0 then
else I f R=0 then
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ those o f " ’ , S2 , ’ " ’ ) ;
1515
end ;
Begin
Testit ( ’ One string ’ , ’ One s m a l l e r s t r i n g ’ , 2 5 5 ) ;
Testit ( ’ONE STRING ’ , ’ one S t r i n g ’ , 4 ) ;
Testit ( ’ One string ’ , ’ 1 STRING ’ , 0 ) ;
Testit ( ’ One STRING ’ , ’ one s t r i n g . ’ , 9 ) ;
End .
76.14.23 AnsiStrLower
Synopsis: Convert a null-terminated string to all-lowercase characters.
Declaration: function AnsiStrLower(Str: PChar) : PChar
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiStrLower converts the PChar Str to lowercase characters and returns the resulting pchar.
Note that Str itself is modified, not a copy, as in the case of AnsiLowerCase (1510). It takes into
account the operating system language settings when doing this, so special characters are converted
correctly as well.
character sets.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiStrUpper (1517), AnsiLowerCase (1510)
Program Example59 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e AnsiStrLower f u n c t i o n }
Procedure T e s t i t ( S : Pchar ) ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( S , ’ − > ’ , AnsiStrLower (S ) )
end ;
Begin
End .
76.14.24 AnsiStrPos
Synopsis: Return position of one null-terminated substring in another
Declaration: function AnsiStrPos(str: PChar;substr: PChar) : PChar
Visibility: default
1516
Description: AnsiStrPos returns a pointer to the first occurrence of SubStr in Str. If SubStr does not
occur in Str then Nil is returned.
Errors: An access violation may occur if either Str or SubStr point to invalid memory.
See also: AnsiPos (1511), AnsiStrScan (1517), AnsiStrRScan (1517)
76.14.25 AnsiStrRScan
Declaration: function AnsiStrRScan(Str: PChar;Chr: Char) : PChar
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiStrPos returns a pointer to the last occurrence of the character Chr in Str. If Chr does not
occur in Str then Nil is returned.
Errors: An access violation may occur if Str points to invalid memory.
See also: AnsiPos (1511), AnsiStrScan (1517), AnsiStrPos (1516)
76.14.26 AnsiStrScan
Declaration: function AnsiStrScan(Str: PChar;Chr: Char) : PChar
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiStrPos returns a pointer to the first occurrence of the character Chr in Str. If Chr does
not occur in Str then Nil is returned.
Errors: An access violation may occur if Str points to invalid memory.
See also: AnsiPos (1511), AnsiStrScan (1517), AnsiStrPos (1516)
76.14.27 AnsiStrUpper
Synopsis: Convert a null-terminated string to all-uppercase characters.
Declaration: function AnsiStrUpper(Str: PChar) : PChar
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiStrUpper converts the PCharStr to uppercase characters and returns the resulting string.
Note that Str itself is modified, not a copy, as in the case of AnsiUpperCase (1518). It takes into
account the operating system language settings when doing this, so special characters are converted
correctly as well.
character sets.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiUpperCase (1518), AnsiStrLower (1516), AnsiLowerCase (1510)
1517
Program Example60 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e AnsiStrUpper f u n c t i o n }
Procedure T e s t i t ( S : Pchar ) ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( S , ’ − > ’ , AnsiStrUpper (S ) )
end ;
Begin
End .
76.14.28 AnsiUpperCase
Synopsis: Return an uppercase version of a string, taking into account special characters.
Declaration: function AnsiUpperCase(const s: string) : string
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiUpperCase converts the string S to uppercase characters and returns the resulting string. It
character sets.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiStrUpper (1517), AnsiStrLower (1516), AnsiLowerCase (1510)
Program Example60 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e AnsiUpperCase f u n c t i o n }
begin
W r i t e l n ( S , ’ − > ’ , AnsiUpperCase (S ) )
end ;
Begin
End .
1518
76.14.29 AnsiUpperCaseFileName
Synopsis: Convert filename to uppercase.
Declaration: function AnsiUpperCaseFileName(const s: string) : string
Visibility: default
Description: AnsiUpperCaseFileName simply returns the result of
AnsiUpperCase(S);
See also: AnsiUpperCase (1518), AnsiCompareFileName (1506), AnsiLowerCaseFileName (1511)
76.14.30 AppendStr
Synopsis: Append one ansistring to another.
Declaration: procedure AppendStr(var Dest: string;const S: string)
Visibility: default
Description: AppendStr appends S to Dest.
This function is provided for Delphi compatibility only, since it is completely equivalent to Dest:=Dest+S.
Errors: None.
See also: AssignStr (1520), NewStr (1593), DisposeStr (1538)
Program Example62 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e AppendStr f u n c t i o n }
Begin
S: = ’ T h i s i s an ’ ;
AppendStr ( S , ’ A n s i S t r i n g ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’S = " ’ ,S , ’ " ’ ) ;
End .
76.14.31 ApplicationName
Synopsis: Return a default application name
Declaration: function ApplicationName : string
Visibility: default
Description: ApplicationName returns the name of the current application. Standard this is equal to the
filename part minus extension of ParamStr(0), but it can be customized by setting the OnGetAp-
plicationName (1502) callback.
Note that the returned value is only the name portion. It does not contain any path or file extension.
1519
Errors: None.
See also: GetAppConfigDir (1577), OnGetApplicationName (1502), GetAppConfigFile (1578), ConfigExten-
sion (1484)
76.14.32 AssignStr
Synopsis: Assigns an ansistring to a null-terminated string.
Declaration: procedure AssignStr(var P: PString;const S: string)

Visibility: default
Description: AssignStr allocates S to P. The old value of P is disposed of.
This function is provided for Delphi compatibility only. AnsiStrings are managed on the heap
and should be preferred to the mechanism of dynamically allocated strings.
Errors: None.
See also: NewStr (1593), AppendStr (1519), DisposeStr (1538)
Program Example63 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e A s s i g n S t r f u n c t i o n }
{ $H+ }
Begin
P: = NewStr ( ’A f i r s t A n s i S t r i n g ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Before : P = " ’ ,P^ , ’ " ’ ) ;
A s s i g n S t r ( P , ’A Second a n s i s t r i n g ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ A f t e r : P = " ’ ,P^ , ’ " ’ ) ;
DisposeStr (P ) ;
End .
76.14.33 BCDToInt
Synopsis: Convert a BCD coded integer to a normal integer.
Declaration: function BCDToInt(Value: Integer) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: BCDToInt converts a BCD coded integer to a normal integer.
Errors: None.
See also: StrToInt (1618), IntToStr (1588)
1520
Program Example64 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e BCDToInt f u n c t i o n }
Procedure T e s t i t ( L : l o n g i n t ) ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( L , ’ − > ’ , BCDToInt ( L ) ) ;
end ;
Begin
Testit (10);
Testit (100);
TestIt (23);
End .
76.14.34 Beep
Synopsis: Sound the system bell.
Declaration: procedure Beep
Visibility: default
Description: Beep sounds the system bell, if one is available. The actual beep is produced by the OnBeep (1502)
callback. The Sysutils unit itself contains no implementation of this call.
76.14.35 BoolToStr
Synopsis: Convert a boolean value to a string.
Declaration: function BoolToStr(B: Boolean;UseBoolStrs: Boolean) : string
function BoolToStr(B: Boolean;const TrueS: string;const FalseS: string)
: string
Visibility: default
Description: BoolToStr converts the boolean B to one of the strings ’TRUE’ or ’FALSE’
Errors: None.
See also: StrToBool (1613)
76.14.36 BytesOf
Synopsis: Return the bytes in a string
Declaration: function BytesOf(const Val: RawByteString) : TBytes
function BytesOf(const Val: AnsiChar) : TBytes
Visibility: default
Description: BytesOf returns a copy of the string’s content as an array of bytes. For an empty string, zero bytes
are returned (i.e. length(BytesOf(S))=0).
See also: TBytes (1493)
1521
76.14.37 ByteToCharIndex
Synopsis: Convert a character index in Bytes to an Index in characters
Declaration: function ByteToCharIndex(const S: string;Index: Integer) : Integer

Visibility: default
Description: ByteToCharIndex returns the index (in characters) of the Index-th byte in S.
Errors: This function does not take into account MBCS yet.
See also: CharToByteLen (1523), ByteToCharLen (1522)
76.14.38 ByteToCharLen
Synopsis: Convert a length in bytes to a length in characters.
Declaration: function ByteToCharLen(const S: string;MaxLen: Integer) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: ByteToCharLen returns the number of bytes in S, but limits the result to MaxLen
See also: CharToByteLen (1523), ByteToCharIndex (1522)
76.14.39 ByteType
Synopsis: Return the type of byte in an ansistring for a multi-byte character set
Declaration: function ByteType(const S: string;Index: Integer) : TMbcsByteType
Visibility: default
Description: ByteType returns the type of byte in the ansistring S at (1-based) position Index.
Errors: No checking on the index is performed.
See also: TMbcsByteType (1496), StrByteType (1601)
76.14.40 CallTerminateProcs
Synopsis: Call the exit chain procedures.
Declaration: function CallTerminateProcs : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: CallTerminateProcs is run on program exit. It executes all terminate procedures that were
added to the exit chain with AddTerminateProc (1505), and does this in reverse order.
Errors: If one of the exit procedure raises an exception, it is not caught, and the remaining exit procedures
will not be executed.
See also: TTerminateProc (1499), AddTerminateProc (1505)
1522
76.14.41 ChangeFileExt
Synopsis: Change the extension of a filename.
Declaration: function ChangeFileExt(const FileName: UnicodeString;

const Extension: UnicodeString) : UnicodeString
function ChangeFileExt(const FileName: RawByteString;
const Extension: RawByteString) : RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: ChangeFileExt changes the file extension in FileName to Extension. The extension Extension
includes the starting . (dot). The previous extension of FileName are all characters after the last
., the . character included.
If FileName doesn’t have an extension, Extension is just appended.
Errors: None.
See also: ExtractFileExt (1546), ExtractFileName (1547), ExtractFilePath (1547), ExpandFileName (1543)
76.14.42 CharInSet
Synopsis: Check whether a char is in a set of characters
Declaration: function CharInSet(Ch: AnsiChar;const CSet: TSysCharSet) : Boolean

function CharInSet(Ch: WideChar;const CSet: TSysCharSet) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: CharInSet returns True if Ch matches one of the characters in CSet, it returns False other-
wise. It is equivalent to
Ch in CSet
Later versions of this function may take WideChar into account.
76.14.43 CharToByteLen
Synopsis: Convert a length in characters to a length in bytes.
Declaration: function CharToByteLen(const S: string;MaxLen: Integer) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: CharToByteLen returns the number of bytes in S, but limits the result to MaxLen
See also: ByteToCharLen (1522), ByteToCharIndex (1522)
1523
76.14.44 CodePageNameToCodePage
Synopsis: Return a numeric identifier for the codepage.
Declaration: function CodePageNameToCodePage(const cpname: AnsiString)
: TSystemCodePage
Visibility: default
Description: CodePageNameToCodePage returns the code page number for the specified codepage cpname.
Errors: If the code page is not found in the list of code pages, $FFFF is returned.
See also: CodePageToCodePageName (1524)
76.14.45 CodePageToCodePageName
Synopsis: Convert a numeric codepage identifier to a codepage name
Declaration: function CodePageToCodePageName(cp: TSystemCodePage) : AnsiString
Visibility: default
Description: CodePageToCodePageName returns the name of the codepage cp.
Errors: If no matching codepage is found in the list of codepages, an empty string is returned.
See also: CodePageNameToCodePage (1524)
76.14.46 CompareMem
Synopsis: Compare two memory areas.
Declaration: function CompareMem(P1: Pointer;P2: Pointer;Length: PtrUInt) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: CompareMem compares, byte by byte, 2 memory areas pointed to by P1 and P2, for a length of L
bytes.
The function returns True if all L bytes are the same, and False otherwise.
76.14.47 CompareMemRange
Synopsis: Compare 2 memory locations
Declaration: function CompareMemRange(P1: Pointer;P2: Pointer;Length: PtrUInt)
: Integer
Visibility: default
Description: CompareMemRange compares the 2 memory locations pointed to by P1 and P2 byte per byte. It
stops comparing after Length bytes have been compared, or when it has encountered 2 different
bytes. The result is then
>0if a byte in range P1 was found that is bigger than the corresponding byte in range P2.
0if all bytes in range P1 are the same as the corresponding bytes in range P2.
<0if a byte in range P1 was found that is less than the corresponding byte in range P2.
Errors: None.
See also: SameText (1597)
1524
76.14.48 CompareStr
Synopsis: Compare 2 ansistrings case-sensitively, ignoring special characters.
Declaration: function CompareStr(const S1: string;const S2: string) : Integer

; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: CompareStr compares two strings, S1 and S2, and returns the following result:
<0if S1<S2.
0if S1=S2.
>0if S1>S2.
The comparision of the two strings is case-sensitive. The function does not take internationalization
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiCompareText (1508), AnsiCompareStr (1507), CompareText (1526)
Program Example65 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e CompareStr f u n c t i o n }

{ $H+ }
begin
R: = CompareStr ( S1 , S2 ) ;
Write ( ’ " ’ , S1 , ’ " i s ’ ) ;
I f R<0 then
else I f R=0 then
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ " ’ , S2 , ’ " ’ ) ;
end ;
Begin
End .
1525
76.14.49 CompareText
Synopsis: Compare 2 ansistrings case insensitive.
Declaration: function CompareText(const S1: string;const S2: string) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: CompareText compares two strings, S1 and S2, and returns the following result:
<0if S1<S2.
0if S1=S2.
>0if S1>S2.
The comparision of the two strings is case-insensitive. The function does not take internationalization
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiCompareText (1508), AnsiCompareStr (1507), CompareStr (1525)
Program Example66 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e CompareText f u n c t i o n }

{ $H+ }
begin
R: = CompareText ( S1 , S2 ) ;
Write ( ’ " ’ , S1 , ’ " i s ’ ) ;
I f R<0 then
else I f R=0 then
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ " ’ , S2 , ’ " ’ ) ;
end ;
Begin
End .
76.14.50 ComposeDateTime
Synopsis: Add a date and time
Declaration: function ComposeDateTime(Date: TDateTime;Time: TDateTime) : TDateTime
1526
Visibility: default
Description: ComposeDateTime correctly adds Date and Time, also for dates before 1899-12-31. For dates
after this date, it is just the mathematical addition.
Errors: None.
See also: #rtl.dateutils.EncodeDateTime (547)
76.14.51 ConcatPaths
Synopsis: Concatenate an array of paths to form a single path
Declaration: function ConcatPaths(const Paths: Array of UnicodeString)
: UnicodeString
function ConcatPaths(const Paths: Array of RawByteString)
: RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: ConcatPaths will concatenate the different path components in Paths to a single path. It will
insert directory separators between the various components of the path as needed. No directory
separators will be added to the beginning or the end of the path, and none will be taken away.
See also: IncludeTrailingPathDelimiter (1586), IncludeLeadingPathDelimiter (1585), ExcludeTrailingPathDe-
limiter (1542), IncludeTrailingPathDelimiter (1586)
program ex96 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e Concatpaths f u n c t i o n }
uses s y s u t i l s ;
begin
/ / w i l l w r i t e / t h i s / path / more / l e v e l s /
W r i t e l n ( ConcatPaths ( [ ’ / t h i s / ’ , ’ path ’ , ’ more / l e v e l s / ’ ] ) ) ;
/ / w i l l w r i t e t h i s / path / more / l e v e l s /
W r i t e l n ( ConcatPaths ( [ ’ t h i s / ’ , ’ path ’ , ’ more / l e v e l s / ’ ] ) ) ;
/ / w i l l w r i t e t h i s / path / more / l e v e l s
W r i t e l n ( ConcatPaths ( [ ’ t h i s / ’ , ’ path ’ , ’ more / l e v e l s ’ ] ) ) ;
end .
76.14.52 CreateDir
Synopsis: Create a new directory
Declaration: function CreateDir(const NewDir: RawByteString) : Boolean
function CreateDir(const NewDir: UnicodeString) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: CreateDir creates a new directory with name NewDir. If the directory doesn’t contain an abso-
lute path, then the directory is created below the current working directory.
The function returns True if the directory was successfully created, False otherwise.
1527
Errors: In case of an error, the function returns False.

See also: RemoveDir (1595)
Program Example26 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e C r e a t e D i r and RemoveDir f u n c t i o n s }

{ Run t h i s program t w i c e i n t h e same d i r e c t o r y }
Begin
I f Not D i r e c t o r y E x i s t s ( ’ NewDir ’ ) then
I f Not C r e a t e D i r ( ’ NewDir ’ ) Then
Writeln ( ’ Failed to create d i r e c t o r y ! ’)
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ Created " NewDir " d i r e c t o r y ’)
Else
I f Not RemoveDir ( ’ NewDir ’ ) Then
W r i t e l n ( ’ F a i l e d t o remove d i r e c t o r y ! ’)
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ Removed " NewDir " d i r e c t o r y ’ );
End .
76.14.53 CreateGUID
Synopsis: Create a new GUID
Declaration: function CreateGUID(out GUID: TGuid) : Integer

Visibility: default
Description: CreateGUID can be called to create a new GUID (Globally Unique Identifier) value. The function
returns the new GUID value in GUID and returns zero in case the GUID was created succesfully. If
no GUID was created, a nonzero error code is returned.
The default mechanism for creating a new GUID is system dependent. If operating system support
is available, it is used. If none is available, a default implementation using random numbers is used.
The OnCreateGUID callback can be set to hook a custom mechanism behind the CreateGUID
function. This can be used to lt the GUID be created by an external GUID creation library.
Errors: On error, a nonzero return value is returned.

See also: GUIDCase (1584), IsEqualGUID (1589), StringToGUID (1606), TryStringToGUID (1630), GUID-
ToString (1584)
76.14.54 CurrentYear
Synopsis: Return the current year
Declaration: function CurrentYear : Word

Visibility: default
Description: CurrentYear returns the current year as a 4-digit number.
1528
Errors: None.
See also: Date (1529), Time (1625), Now (1593)
76.14.55 CurrToStr
Synopsis: Convert a currency value to a string.
Declaration: function CurrToStr(Value: Currency) : string

function CurrToStr(Value: Currency;
const FormatSettings: TFormatSettings) : string
Visibility: default
Description: CurrToStr will convert a currency value to a string with a maximum of 15 digits, and precision
2. Calling CurrToStr is equivalent to calling FloatToStrF (1563):
FloatToStrF(Value,ffNumber,15,2);
Errors: None.
See also: FloatToStrF (1563), StrToCurr (1614)
76.14.56 CurrToStrF
Synopsis: Format a currency to a string
Declaration: function CurrToStrF(Value: Currency;Format: TFloatFormat;
Digits: Integer) : string
function CurrToStrF(Value: Currency;Format: TFloatFormat;
Digits: Integer;
Visibility: default
Description: CurrToStrF formats the currency Value according to the value in Format, using the number
of digits specified in Digits, and a precision of 19. This function simply calls FloatToStrF (1563).
See also: FloatToStrF (1563)
76.14.57 Date
Synopsis: Return the current date.
Declaration: function Date : TDateTime

Visibility: default
Description: Date returns the current date in TDateTime format.
Errors: None.
See also: Time (1625), Now (1593)
1529
Program Example1 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e Date f u n c t i o n }
Var YY,MM,DD : Word ;
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Date : ’ , Date ) ;
DeCodeDate ( Date , YY,MM,DD ) ;
W r i t e l n ( format ( ’ Date i s ( DD/MM/ YY) : % d/%d/%d ’ , [ dd ,mm, yy ] ) ) ;
End .
76.14.58 DateTimeToFileDate
Synopsis: Convert a TDateTime value to a file age (integer)
Declaration: function DateTimeToFileDate(DateTime: TDateTime) : LongInt

Visibility: default
Description: DateTimeToFileDate function converts a date/time indication in TDateTime format to a file-
date function, such as returned for instance by the FileAge (1548) function.
Errors: None.
See also: Time (1625), Date (1529), FileDateToDateTime (1551), DateTimeToSystemTime (1532), Date-
TimeToTimeStamp (1533)
Program Example2 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DateTimeToFileDate f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ F i l e T i m e o f now would be : ’ , DateTimeToFileDate ( Now ) ) ;
End .
76.14.59 DateTimeToStr
Synopsis: Converts a TDateTime value to a string using a predefined format.
Declaration: function DateTimeToStr(DateTime: TDateTime;ForceTimeIfZero: Boolean)
: string
function DateTimeToStr(DateTime: TDateTime;
const FormatSettings: TFormatSettings;
ForceTimeIfZero: Boolean) : string
Visibility: default
1530
Description: DateTimeToStr returns a string representation of DateTime using the formatting specified in
LongDateTimeFormat. It corresponds to a call to FormatDateTime(’c’,DateTime) (see
formatchars (1482)).
Note that if the time part is 0 (i.e. midnight), no time is appended.
Errors: None.
See also: FormatDateTime (1575)
Program Example3 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DateTimeToStr f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Today i s : ’ , DateTimeToStr (Now ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Today i s : ’ , FormatDateTime ( ’ c ’ ,Now ) ) ;
End .
76.14.60 DateTimeToString
Synopsis: Converts a TDateTime value to a string with a given format.
Declaration: procedure DateTimeToString(out Result: string;const FormatStr: string;
const DateTime: TDateTime;
Options: TFormatDateTimeOptions)
procedure DateTimeToString(out Result: string;const FormatStr: string;
const DateTime: TDateTime;
Options: TFormatDateTimeOptions)
Visibility: default
Description: DateTimeToString returns in Result a string representation of DateTime using the format-
ting specified in FormatStr.
for a list of characters that can be used in the FormatStr formatting string, see formatchars (1482).
Note that for ’c’, if the time part is 0 (i.e. midnight), no time is appended.
Errors: In case a wrong formatting character is found, an EConvertError is raised.
See also: FormatDateTime (1575), formatchars (1482)
Program Example4 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DateTimeToString f u n c t i o n }
Procedure today ( Fmt : s t r i n g ) ;
1531
begin
DateTimeToString ( S , Fmt , Date ) ;
Writeln ( S ) ;
end ;
Procedure Now ( Fmt : s t r i n g ) ;
begin
DateTimeToString ( S , Fmt , Time ) ;
Writeln ( S ) ;
end ;
Begin
Today ( ’ " Today i s " dddd dd mmmm y ’ ) ;
Today ( ’ " Today i s " d mmm yy ’ ) ;
Today ( ’ " Today i s " d /mmm/ yy ’ ) ;
Now ( ’ ’ ’ The t i m e i s ’ ’am/ pmh : n : s ’ ) ;
Now ( ’ ’ ’ The t i m e i s ’ ’ hh : nn : ssam /pm ’ ) ;
Now ( ’ ’ ’ The t i m e is ’ ’ t t ’ );
End .
76.14.61 DateTimeToSystemTime
Synopsis: Converts a TDateTime value to a systemtime structure.
Declaration: procedure DateTimeToSystemTime(DateTime: TDateTime;
out SystemTime: TSystemTime)
Visibility: default
Description: DateTimeToSystemTime converts a date/time pair in DateTime, with TDateTime format to
a system time SystemTime.
Errors: None.
See also: DateTimeToFileDate (1530), SystemTimeToDateTime (1623), DateTimeToTimeStamp (1533)
Program Example5 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DateTimeToSystemTime f u n c t i o n }
Var ST : TSystemTime ;
Begin
DateTimeToSystemTime (Now, ST ) ;
With St do
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Today i s ’ , year , ’ / ’ , month , ’ / ’ , Day ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ The t i m e i s ’ , Hour , ’ : ’ , minute , ’ : ’ , Second , ’ . ’ , M i l l i S e c o n d ) ;
end ;
1532
End .
76.14.62 DateTimeToTimeStamp
Synopsis: Converts a TDateTime value to a TimeStamp structure.
Declaration: function DateTimeToTimeStamp(DateTime: TDateTime) : TTimeStamp

Visibility: default
Description: DateTimeToSystemTime converts a date/time pair in DateTime, with TDateTime format to
a TTimeStamp format.
Errors: None.
See also: DateTimeToFileDate (1530), SystemTimeToDateTime (1623), DateTimeToSystemTime (1532)
Program Example6 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DateTimeToTimeStamp f u n c t i o n }
Var TS : TTimeStamp ;
Begin
TS: = DateTimeToTimeStamp ( Now ) ;
With TS do
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’Now i s ’ , time , ’ m i l l i s e c o n d p a s t m i d n i g h t ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Today i s ’ , Date , ’ days p a s t 1 / 1 / 0 0 0 1 ’ ) ;
end ;
End .
76.14.63 DateToStr
Synopsis: Converts a TDateTime value to a date string with a predefined format.
Declaration: function DateToStr(Date: TDateTime) : string
function DateToStr(Date: TDateTime;
Visibility: default
Description: DateToStr converts Date to a string representation. It uses ShortDateFormat as it’s format-
ting string. It is hence completely equivalent to a FormatDateTime(’ddddd’, Date).
Errors: None.
See also: TimeToStr (1627), DateTimeToStr (1530), FormatDateTime (1575), StrToDate (1615)
1533
Program Example7 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DateToStr f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( Format ( ’ Today i s : % s ’ , [ DateToStr ( Date ) ] ) ) ;
End .
76.14.64 DayOfWeek
Synopsis: Returns the day of the week.
Declaration: function DayOfWeek(DateTime: TDateTime) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: DayOfWeek returns the day of the week from DateTime. Sunday is counted as day 1, Saturday
is counted as day 7. The result of DayOfWeek can serve as an index to the LongDayNames con-
stant array, to retrieve the name of the day.
Errors: None.
See also: Date (1529), DateToStr (1533)
Program Example8 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DayOfWeek f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Today ’ ’ s day i s ’ , LongDayNames [ DayOfWeek ( Date ) ] ) ;
End .
76.14.65 DecodeDate
Synopsis: Decode a TDateTime to a year,month,day triplet
Declaration: procedure DecodeDate(Date: TDateTime;out Year: Word;out Month: Word;
out Day: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: DecodeDate decodes the Year, Month and Day stored in Date, and returns them in the Year,
Month and Day variables.
Errors: None.
See also: EncodeDate (1539), DecodeTime (1535)
1534
Program Example9 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DecodeDate f u n c t i o n }
Begin
DecodeDate ( Date , YY,MM,DD ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Format ( ’ Today i s %d/%d/%d ’ , [ dd ,mm, yy ] ) ) ;
End .
76.14.66 DecodeDateFully
Synopsis: Decode a date with additional date of the week.
Declaration: function DecodeDateFully(const DateTime: TDateTime;out Year: Word;
out Month: Word;out Day: Word;out DOW: Word)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: DecodeDateFully, like DecodeDate (1534), decodes DateTime in its parts and returns these
in Year, Month, Day but in addition returns the day of the week in DOW.
Errors: None.
See also: EncodeDate (1539), TryEncodeDate (1629), DecodeDate (1534)
76.14.67 DecodeTime
Synopsis: Decode a TDateTime to a hour,minute,second,millisec quartet
Declaration: procedure DecodeTime(Time: TDateTime;out Hour: Word;out Minute: Word;
out Second: Word;out MilliSecond: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: DecodeDate decodes the hours, minutes, second and milliseconds stored in Time, and returns
them in the Hour, Minute and Second and MilliSecond variables.
Errors: None.
See also: EncodeTime (1539), DecodeDate (1534)
Program Example10 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DecodeTime f u n c t i o n }
Var HH,MM, SS,MS : Word ;
Begin
1535
DecodeTime ( Time ,HH,MM, SS,MS) ;

W r i t e l n ( format ( ’ The t i m e i s %d:%d:%d.%d ’ , [ hh ,mm, ss , ms ] ) ) ;
End .
76.14.68 DeleteFile
Synopsis: Delete a file from the filesystem.
Declaration: function DeleteFile(const FileName: UnicodeString) : Boolean
function DeleteFile(const FileName: RawByteString) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: DeleteFile deletes file FileName from disk. The function returns True if the file was suc-
cessfully removed, False otherwise.

See also: FileCreate (1550), FileExists (1551)
Program Example31 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e D e l e t e F i l e f u n c t i o n }
Var
Line : String ;
F , I : Longint ;
Begin
F:= FileCreate ( ’ t e s t . t x t ’ ) ;
L i n e : = ’Some s t r i n g l i n e . ’ #10;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 do
F i l e W r i t e ( F , L i n e [ 1 ] , Length ( L i n e ) ) ;
FileClose ( F ) ;
DeleteFile ( ’ t e s t . t x t ’ ) ;
End .
76.14.69 DirectoryExists
Synopsis: Check whether a directory exists in the file system.
Declaration: function DirectoryExists(const Directory: UnicodeString) : Boolean

function DirectoryExists(const Directory: RawByteString) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: DirectoryExists checks whether Directory exists in the filesystem and is actually a direc-
tory. If this is the case, the function returns True, otherwise False is returned.
See also: FileExists (1551)
1536
76.14.70 DiskFree
Synopsis: Return the amount of free diskspace
Declaration: function DiskFree(drive: Byte) : Int64
Visibility: default
Description: DiskFree returns the free space (in bytes) on disk Drive. Drive is the number of the disk drive:
0for the current drive.

1for the first floppy drive.
2for the second floppy drive.
3for the first hard-disk partition.
4-26for all other drives and partitions.
Remark: Under Linux, and Unix in general, the concept of disk is different than the dos one, since the
filesystem is seen as one big directory tree. For this reason, the DiskFree and DiskSize (1537)
functions must be mimicked using filenames that reside on the partitions. For more information, see
AddDisk (1505).
See also: DiskSize (1537), AddDisk (1505)
Program Example27 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DiskFree f u n c t i o n }
Begin
Write ( ’ Size o f c u r r e n t d i s k : ’ , DiskSize ( 0 ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ ( = ’ , DiskSize ( 0 ) div 1 0 2 4 , ’k) ’ );
Write ( ’ Free space o f c u r r e n t d i s k : ’ , Diskfree ( 0 ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ ( = ’ , Diskfree ( 0 ) div 1 0 2 4 , ’k) ’ );
End .
76.14.71 DiskSize
Synopsis: Return the total amount of diskspace.
Declaration: function DiskSize(drive: Byte) : Int64
Visibility: default
Description: DiskSize returns the size (in bytes) of disk Drive. Drive is the number of the disk drive:
0for the current drive.

1for the first floppy drive.
2for the second floppy drive.
3for the first hard-disk parttion.
4-26for all other drives and partitions.
1537
Remark: Under Linux, and Unix in general, the concept of disk is different than the dos one, since the
filesystem is seen as one big directory tree. For this reason, the DiskFree (1537) and DiskSize
functions must be mimicked using filenames that reside on the partitions. For more information, see
AddDisk (1505)
For an example, see DiskFree (1537).
See also: DiskFree (1537), AddDisk (1505)
76.14.72 DisposeStr
Synopsis: Dispose an ansistring from the heap.
Declaration: procedure DisposeStr(S: PString); Overload
procedure DisposeStr(S: PShortString); Overload
Visibility: default
Description: DisposeStr removes the dynamically allocated string S from the heap, and releases the occupied
memory.
This function is provided for Delphi compatibility only. AnsiStrings are managed on the heap
and should be preferred to the mechanism of dynamically allocated strings.
For an example, see DisposeStr (1538).
Errors: None.
See also: NewStr (1593), AppendStr (1519), AssignStr (1520)
76.14.73 DoDirSeparators
Synopsis: Convert known directory separators to the current directory separator.
Declaration: procedure DoDirSeparators(var FileName: UnicodeString)
procedure DoDirSeparators(var FileName: RawByteString)
Visibility: default
Description: This function replaces all known directory separators in FileName to the directory separator char-
acter for the current system. The list of known separators is specified in the AllowDirectorySepara-
tors (1230) constant.
Errors: None.
See also: ExtractFileName (1547), ExtractFilePath (1547)
Program Example32 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e DoDirSeparators f u n c t i o n }

{ $H+ }
Procedure T e s t i t ( F : S t r i n g ) ;
1538
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Before : ’ , F ) ;
DoDirSeparators ( F ) ;
Writeln ( ’ A f t e r : ’ ,F ) ;
end ;
Begin
Testit ( GetCurrentDir ) ;
Testit ( ’ c : \ pp \ b i n \ win32 ’ ) ;
Testit ( ’ / usr / l i b / fpc ’ ) ;
Testit ( ’ \ usr \ l i b \ fpc ’ ) ;
End .
76.14.74 EncodeDate
Synopsis: Encode a Year,Month,Day to a TDateTime value.
Declaration: function EncodeDate(Year: Word;Month: Word;Day: Word) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: EncodeDate encodes the Year, Month and Day variables to a date in TDateTime format. It
does the opposite of the DecodeDate (1534) procedure.
The parameters must lie withing valid ranges (boundaries included):
Yearmust be between 1 and 9999.

Monthmust be within the range 1-12.
Daymsut be between 1 and 31.
Errors: In case one of the parameters is out of it’s valid range, an EConvertError (1639) exception is raised.
See also: EncodeTime (1539), DecodeDate (1534)
Program Example11 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e EncodeDate f u n c t i o n }
Begin
DecodeDate ( Date , YY,MM,DD ) ;
WriteLn ( ’ Today i s : ’ , FormatDateTime ( ’ dd mmmm yyyy ’ , EnCodeDate (YY,Mm, Dd ) ) ) ;
End .
76.14.75 EncodeTime
Synopsis: Encode a Hour,Min,Sec,millisec to a TDateTime value.
Declaration: function EncodeTime(Hour: Word;Minute: Word;Second: Word;
MilliSecond: Word) : TDateTime
1539
Visibility: default
Description: EncodeTime encodes the Hour, Minute, Second, MilliSecond variables to a TDateTime
format result. It does the opposite of the DecodeTime (1535) procedure.
The parameters must have a valid range (boundaries included):
Hourmust be between 0 and 23.

Minute,secondmust both be between 0 and 59.
Millisecondmust be between 0 and 999.
Errors: In case one of the parameters is out of it’s valid range, an EConvertError (1639) exception is raised.
See also: EncodeDate (1539), DecodeTime (1535)
Program Example12 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e EncodeTime f u n c t i o n }
Var Hh ,MM, SS,MS : Word ;
Begin
DeCodeTime ( Time , Hh ,MM, SS,MS) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Present Time i s : ’ , FormatDateTime ( ’ hh :mm: ss ’ ,EnCodeTime ( HH,MM, SS,MS ) ) ) ;
End .
76.14.76 ExceptAddr
Synopsis: Current exception address.
Declaration: function ExceptAddr : CodePointer
Visibility: default
Description: ExceptAddr returns the address from the currently treated exception object when an exception is
raised, and the stack is unwound.
See also: ExceptObject (1541), ExceptionErrorMessage (1541), ShowException (1598)
76.14.77 ExceptFrameCount
Synopsis: Number of frames included in an exception backtrace
Declaration: function ExceptFrameCount : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: ExceptFrameCount returns the number of frames that are included in an exception stack frame
backtrace. The function returns 0 if there is currently no exception being handled. (i.e. it only makes
sense to call this function in an finally..end or except..end block.
Errors: None.
See also: ExceptFrames (1541), ExceptAddr (1540), ExceptObject (1541), #rtl.system.ExceptProc (1232)
1540
76.14.78 ExceptFrames
Synopsis:
Declaration: function ExceptFrames : PCodePointer
Visibility: default
Description:
See also: ExceptFrameCount (1540), ExceptAddr (1540), ExceptObject (1541), #rtl.system.ExceptProc (1232)
76.14.79 ExceptionErrorMessage
Synopsis: Return a message describing the exception.
Declaration: function ExceptionErrorMessage(ExceptObject: TObject;
ExceptAddr: Pointer;Buffer: PChar;
Size: Integer) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: ExceptionErrorMessage creates a string that describes the exception object ExceptObject
at address ExceptAddr. It can be used to display exception messages. The string will be stored in
the memory pointed to by Buffer, and will at most have Size characters.
The routine checks whether ExceptObject is a Exception (1645) object or not, and adapts the
output accordingly.
See also: ExceptObject (1541), ExceptAddr (1540), ShowException (1598)
76.14.80 ExceptObject
Synopsis: Current Exception object.
Declaration: function ExceptObject : TObject
Visibility: default
Description: ExceptObject returns the currently treated exception object when an exception is raised, and the
stack is unwound.
Errors: If there is no exception, the function returns Nil
See also: ExceptAddr (1540), ExceptionErrorMessage (1541), ShowException (1598)
76.14.81 ExcludeLeadingPathDelimiter
Synopsis: Strip the leading path delimiter of a path
Declaration: function ExcludeLeadingPathDelimiter(const Path: UnicodeString)
: UnicodeString
function ExcludeLeadingPathDelimiter(const Path: RawByteString)
: RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: ExcludeLeadingPathDelimiter will remove any path delimiter on the first position of Path
if there is one. if there is none (or the path is empty), it is left untouched.
1541
See also: IncludeTrailingPathDelimiter (1586), IncludeLeadingPathDelimiter (1585), ExcludeTrailingPathDe-

limiter (1542), ConcatPaths (1527)
Program Example95 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e I n c l u d e L e a d i n g P a t h D e l i m i t e r f u n c t i o n }
Begin
/ / W i l l p r i n t " / t h i s / path "
W r i t e l n ( I n c l u d e L e a d i n g P a t h D e l i m i t e r ( ’ t h i s / path ’ ) ) ;
/ / The same r e s u l t
W r i t e l n ( I n c l u d e L e a d i n g P a t h D e l i m i t e r ( ’ / t h i s / path ’ ) ) ;
End .
76.14.82 ExcludeTrailingBackslash
Synopsis: Strip trailing directory separator from a pathname, if needed.
Declaration: function ExcludeTrailingBackslash(const Path: UnicodeString)
: UnicodeString
function ExcludeTrailingBackslash(const Path: RawByteString)
: RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: ExcludeTrailingBackslash is provided for backwards compatibility with Delphi. Use Ex-
cludeTrailingPathDelimiter (1542) instead.
See also: IncludeTrailingPathDelimiter (1586), ExcludeTrailingPathDelimiter (1542), PathDelim (1488), Is-

PathDelimiter (1590)
76.14.83 ExcludeTrailingPathDelimiter
Synopsis: Strip trailing directory separator from a pathname, if needed.
Declaration: function ExcludeTrailingPathDelimiter(const Path: UnicodeString)

: UnicodeString
function ExcludeTrailingPathDelimiter(const Path: RawByteString)
: RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: ExcludeTrailingPathDelimiter removes the trailing path delimiter character (PathDelim

(1488)) from Path if it is present, and returns the result.
See also: ExcludeTrailingBackslash (1542), IncludeTrailingPathDelimiter (1586), PathDelim (1488), IsPathDe-
limiter (1590)
1542
76.14.84 ExecuteProcess
Synopsis: Execute another process (program).
Declaration: function ExecuteProcess(const Path: AnsiString;
const ComLine: AnsiString;Flags: TExecuteFlags)
: Integer
function ExecuteProcess(const Path: AnsiString;
const ComLine: Array of AnsiString;
Flags: TExecuteFlags) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: ExecuteProcess will execute the program in Path, passing it the arguments in ComLine.
ExecuteProcess will then wait for the program to finish, and will return the exit code of the
executed program. In case ComLine is a single string, it will be split out in an array of strings,
taking into account common whitespace and quote rules.
The program specified in Path is not searched in the searchpath specified in the PATH environment
variable, so the full path to the executable must be specified in Path, although some operating
systems may perform this search anyway (notably, windows)
Flags can be used to control the passing of file handles: if ExecInheritsHandles is included,
the file handles of the current process will be passed on to the newly executed process.
Errors: In case the program could not be executed or an other error occurs, an EOSError (1643) exception
will be raised.
See also: TExecuteFlags (1494), EOSError (1643)
76.14.85 ExeSearch
Synopsis: Search for an executable
Declaration: function ExeSearch(const Name: UnicodeString;
const DirList: UnicodeString) : UnicodeString
function ExeSearch(const Name: RawByteString;
const DirList: RawByteString) : RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: ExeSearch searches for an executable Name in the list of directories DirList (a list of direc-
tories, separator by PathSeparator (1244). If the current OS also searches implicitly in the current
working directory, the current directory is searched in the first place.
If the executable is found, then the full path of the executable is returned. If it is not found, an empty
string is returned.
No check is performed whether the found file is actually executable.
See also: FileSearch (1555)
76.14.86 ExpandFileName
Synopsis: Expand a relative filename to an absolute filename.
Declaration: function ExpandFileName(const FileName: UnicodeString) : UnicodeString
function ExpandFileName(const FileName: RawByteString) : RawByteString
Visibility: default
1543
Description: ExpandFileName expands the filename to an absolute filename. It changes all directory separator
characters to the one appropriate for the system first.
If an empty filename is passed, it is expanded to the current directory.
Errors: None.
See also: ExpandFileNameCase (1544), ExtractFileName (1547), ExtractFilePath (1547), ExtractFileDir (1545),
ExtractFileDrive (1546), ExtractFileExt (1546), ExtractRelativePath (1547)
Program Example33 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e ExpandFileName f u n c t i o n }
begin
W r i t e l n ( F , ’ expands t o : ’ , ExpandFileName ( F ) ) ;
end ;
Begin
T e s t i t ( ’ ex33 . pp ’ ) ;
T e s t i t ( ParamStr ( 0 ) ) ;
T e s t i t ( ’ / pp / b i n / win32 / ppc386 ’ ) ;
T e s t i t ( ’ \ pp \ b i n \ win32 \ ppc386 ’ ) ;
Testit ( ’ . ’ );
End .
76.14.87 ExpandFileNameCase
Synopsis: Expand a filename entered as case insensitive to the full path as stored on the disk.
Declaration: function ExpandFileNameCase(const FileName: UnicodeString;
out MatchFound: TFilenameCaseMatch)
: UnicodeString
function ExpandFileNameCase(const FileName: RawByteString;
out MatchFound: TFilenameCaseMatch)
: RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: On case insensitive platforms, ExpandFileNameCase behaves similarly to ExpandFileName
(1543) except for the fact that it returns the final part of the path with the same case of letters as
found on the disk (if it exists - otherwise the case equals the one provided on input). On case sensitive
platforms it also checks whether one or more full paths exist on disk which would correspond to the
provided input if treated case insensitively and returns the first such match found and information
whether the match is unique or not.
Note that the behaviour is basically undefined if the input includes wildcards characters. Normally,
wildcards in the last part of path provided on input are resolved to the first corresponding item found
on the disk, but it is better not to rely on that and use other more suitable functions if working with
wildcards like FindFirst (1559)/FindNext (1560).
Errors: None.
1544
See also: ExpandFileName (1543), ExtractFileName (1547), ExtractFilePath (1547), ExtractFileDir (1545),
Program Example33 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e ExpandFileName f u n c t i o n }
begin
W r i t e l n ( F , ’ expands t o : ’ , ExpandFileName ( F ) ) ;
end ;
Begin
T e s t i t ( ’ ex33 . pp ’ ) ;
T e s t i t ( ParamStr ( 0 ) ) ;
T e s t i t ( ’ / pp / b i n / win32 / ppc386 ’ ) ;
T e s t i t ( ’ \ pp \ b i n \ win32 \ ppc386 ’ ) ;
Testit ( ’ . ’ );
End .
76.14.88 ExpandUNCFileName
Synopsis: Expand a relative filename to an absolute UNC filename.
Declaration: function ExpandUNCFileName(const FileName: UnicodeString)
: UnicodeString
function ExpandUNCFileName(const FileName: RawByteString)
: RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: ExpandUNCFileName runs ExpandFileName (1543) on FileName and then attempts to replace
the drive letter by the name of a shared disk.
Errors: None.
See also: ExpandFileName (1543), ExtractFileName (1547), ExtractFilePath (1547), ExtractFileDir (1545),
76.14.89 ExtractFileDir
Synopsis: Extract the drive and directory part of a filename.
Declaration: function ExtractFileDir(const FileName: UnicodeString) : UnicodeString
function ExtractFileDir(const FileName: RawByteString) : RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: ExtractFileDir returns only the directory part of FileName, including a driveletter. The
directory name has NO ending directory separator, in difference with ExtractFilePath (1547).
Errors: None.
1545
See also: ExtractFileName (1547), ExtractFilePath (1547), ExtractFileDir (1545), ExtractFileDrive (1546),
ExtractFileExt (1546), ExtractRelativePath (1547)
Program Example34 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e Ex t ra c tF il e Na m e f u n c t i o n }
{ $H+ }
begin
Writeln ( ’ FileName : ’ ,F ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Has Name : ’ , ExtractFileName ( F ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Has Path : ’ , ExtractFilePath (F ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Has E x t e n s i on : ’ , ExtractFileExt (F ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Has D i r e c t o r y : ’ , ExtractFileDir (F ) ) ;
Writeln ( ’ Has D r i v e : ’ , ExtractFileDrive (F ) ) ;
end ;
Begin
Testit ( Paramstr ( 0 ) ) ;
Testit ( ’ / u s r / l o c a l / b i n / mysqld ’ ) ;
Testit ( ’ c : \ pp \ b i n \ win32 \ ppc386 . exe ’ ) ;
Testit ( ’ / pp / b i n / win32 / ppc386 . exe ’ ) ;
End .
76.14.90 ExtractFileDrive
Synopsis: Extract the drive part from a filename.
Declaration: function ExtractFileDrive(const FileName: UnicodeString) : UnicodeString
function ExtractFileDrive(const FileName: RawByteString) : RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: Extracts the drive letter from a filename. Note that some operating systems do not support drive
letters.
For an example, see ExtractFileDir (1545).
76.14.91 ExtractFileExt
Synopsis: Return the extension from a filename.
Declaration: function ExtractFileExt(const FileName: UnicodeString) : UnicodeString
function ExtractFileExt(const FileName: RawByteString) : RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: ExtractFileExt returns the extension (including the .(dot) character) of FileName.
1546
Errors: None.
See also: ChangeFileExt (1523), ExtractFileName (1547), ExtractFilePath (1547), ExtractFileDir (1545), Ex-
tractFileDrive (1546), ExtractFileExt (1546), ExtractRelativePath (1547)
76.14.92 ExtractFileName
Synopsis: Extract the filename part from a full path filename.
Declaration: function ExtractFileName(const FileName: UnicodeString) : UnicodeString
function ExtractFileName(const FileName: RawByteString) : RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: ExtractFileName returns the filename part from FileName. The filename consists of all char-
acters after the last directory separator character (’/’ or ’\’) or drive letter.
The full filename can always be reconstucted by concatenating the result of ExtractFilePath (1547)
and ExtractFileName.
Errors: None.
76.14.93 ExtractFilePath
Synopsis: Extract the path from a filename.
Declaration: function ExtractFilePath(const FileName: UnicodeString) : UnicodeString
function ExtractFilePath(const FileName: RawByteString) : RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: ExtractFilePath returns the path part (including driveletter) from FileName. The path con-
sists of all characters before the last directory separator character (’/’ or ’\’), including the directory
separator itself. In case there is only a drive letter, that will be returned.
The full filename can always be reconstucted by concatenating the result of ExtractFilePath
and ExtractFileName (1547).
Errors: None.
76.14.94 ExtractRelativepath
Synopsis: Extract a relative path from a filename, given a base directory.
Declaration: function ExtractRelativepath(const BaseName: UnicodeString;
const DestNAme: UnicodeString)
: UnicodeString
function ExtractRelativepath(const BaseName: RawByteString;
const DestNAme: RawByteString)
: RawByteString
1547
Visibility: default
Description: ExtractRelativePath constructs a relative path to go from BaseName to DestName. If
DestName is on another drive (Not on Unix-like platforms) then the whole Destname is returned.
Note: This function does not exist in the Delphi unit.
Errors: None.
ExtractFileExt (1546)
Program Example35 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e E x t r a c t R e l a t i v e P a t h f u n c t i o n }
Procedure T e s t i t ( FromDir , ToDir : S t r i n g ) ;
begin
Write ( ’ From " ’ , FromDir , ’ " t o " ’ , ToDir , ’ " v i a " ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( E x t r a c t R e l a t i v e P a t h ( FromDir , ToDir ) , ’ " ’ ) ;
end ;
Begin
Testit ( ’ / pp / s r c / c o m p i l e r ’ , ’ / pp / b i n / win32 / ppc386 ’ ) ;
Testit ( ’ / pp / b i n / win32 / ppc386 ’ , ’ / pp / s r c / c o m p i l e r ’ ) ;
Testit ( ’ e : / pp / b i n / win32 / ppc386 ’ , ’ d : / pp / s r c / c o m p i l e r ’ ) ;
Testit ( ’ e : \ pp \ b i n \ win32 \ ppc386 ’ , ’ d : \ pp \ s r c \ c o m p i l e r ’ ) ;
End .
76.14.95 ExtractShortPathName
Synopsis: Returns a 8.3 path name
Declaration: function ExtractShortPathName(const FileName: UnicodeString)

: UnicodeString
function ExtractShortPathName(const FileName: RawByteString)
: RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: ExtractShortPathName returns a 8.3 compliant filename that represents the same file as FileName.
On platforms other than windows, this is FileName itself.
See also: ExtractFilePath (1547), ExtractFileName (1547)
76.14.96 FileAge
Synopsis: Return the timestamp of a file.
Declaration: function FileAge(const FileName: UnicodeString) : LongInt
function FileAge(const FileName: UnicodeString;
out FileDateTime: TDateTime;FollowLink: Boolean)
1548
: Boolean
function FileAge(const FileName: RawByteString;
out FileDateTime: TDateTime;FollowLink: Boolean)
: Boolean
function FileAge(const FileName: RawByteString) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: FileAge returns the last modification time of file FileName. The FileDate format can be trans-
formed to TDateTime format with the FileDateToDateTime (1551) function.
Fileage cannot be used on directories, it will return -1 if FileName indicates a directory.
Errors: In case of errors, -1 is returned.

See also: FileDateToDateTime (1551), FileExists (1551), FileGetAttr (1552)
Program Example36 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e F i l e A g e f u n c t i o n }
Var S : TDateTime ;
fa : Longint ;
Begin
f a : = FileAge ( ’ ex36 . pp ’ ) ;
I f Fa<>−1 then
begin
S: = FileDateTodateTime ( f a ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ I ’ ’m from ’ , DateTimeToStr (S ) )
end ;
End .
76.14.97 FileClose
Synopsis: Close a file handle.
Declaration: procedure FileClose(Handle: THandle)
Visibility: default
Description: FileClose closes the file handle Handle. After this call, attempting to read or write from the
handle will result in an error.
For an example, see FileCreate (1550)
Errors: None.
See also: FileCreate (1550), FileWrite (1558), FileOpen (1554), FileRead (1555), FileTruncate (1558), File-
Seek (1556)
1549
76.14.98 FileCreate
Synopsis: Create a new file and return a handle to it.
Declaration: function FileCreate(const FileName: UnicodeString) : THandle

function FileCreate(const FileName: UnicodeString;Rights: Integer)
: THandle
function FileCreate(const FileName: UnicodeString;ShareMode: Integer;
Rights: Integer) : THandle
function FileCreate(const FileName: RawByteString) : THandle
function FileCreate(const FileName: RawByteString;Rights: Integer)
: THandle
function FileCreate(const FileName: RawByteString;ShareMode: Integer;
Rights: Integer) : THandle
Visibility: default
Description: FileCreate creates a new file with name FileName on the disk and returns a file handle which
can be used to read or write from the file with the FileRead (1555) and FileWrite (1558) functions.
If a file with name FileName already existed on the disk, it is overwritten.
The optional Mode parameter only has an effect under unix, where it can be used to set the mode
(read, write, execute, sticky bit, setgid and setuid flags) of the created file to the specified custom
value. On other platfors, the Mode parameter is ignored.
Errors: If an error occurs (e.g. disk full or non-existent path), the function returns THandle(-1).
See also: FileClose (1549), FileWrite (1558), FileOpen (1554), FileRead (1555), FileTruncate (1558), File-
Seek (1556)
Program Example37 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e F i l e C r e a t e f u n c t i o n }
Var I , J , F : L o n g i n t ;
Begin
F:= FileCreate ( ’ t e s t . dat ’ ) ;
I f F=−1 then
Halt ( 1 ) ;
For I : = 0 to 1 0 0 do
F i l e W r i t e ( F , I , SizeOf ( i ) ) ;
FileClose ( f ) ;
F : = FileOpen ( ’ t e s t . d a t ’ , fmOpenRead ) ;
For I : = 0 to 1 0 0 do
begin
FileRead ( F , J , SizeOF ( J ) ) ;
I f J<> I then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Mismatch a t f i l e p o s i t i o n ’ , I )
end ;
FileSeek ( F , 0 , fsFromBeginning ) ;
Randomize ;
Repeat
FileSeek ( F , Random( 1 0 0 ) ∗ 4 , fsFromBeginning ) ;
FileRead ( F , J , SizeOf ( J ) ) ;
1550
W r i t e l n ( ’ Random read : ’ , j ) ;
U n t i l J >80;
FileClose ( F ) ;
F : = FileOpen ( ’ t e s t . d a t ’ , fmOpenWrite ) ;
I :=50∗ SizeOf ( L o n g i n t ) ;
I f F i l e T r u n c a t e ( F , I ) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ S u c ce s s Fu l l y t r u n c a t e d f i l e t o ’ , I , ’ b y t e s . ’ ) ;
FileClose ( F ) ;
End .
76.14.99 FileDateToDateTime
Synopsis: Convert a FileDate value to a TDateTime value.
Declaration: function FileDateToDateTime(Filedate: LongInt) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: FileDateToDateTime converts the date/time encoded in filedate to a TDateTime en-
coded form. It can be used to convert date/time values returned by the FileAge (1548) or FindFirst
(1559)/FindNext (1560) functions to TDateTime form.
Errors: None.
See also: DateTimeToFileDate (1530)
Program Example13 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e FileDateToDateTime f u n c t i o n }
Var
ThisAge : L o n g i n t ;
Begin
Write ( ’ ex13 . pp c r e a t e d on : ’ ) ;
ThisAge : = FileAge ( ’ ex13 . pp ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( DateTimeToStr ( FileDateToDateTime ( ThisAge ) ) ) ;
End .
76.14.100 FileExists
Synopsis: Check whether a particular file exists in the filesystem.
Declaration: function FileExists(const FileName: UnicodeString) : Boolean
function FileExists(const FileName: RawByteString) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: FileExists returns True if a file with name FileName exists on the disk, False otherwise.
On windows, this function will return False if a directory is passed as FileName. On unices,
passing a directory name will result in True. The rationale is that on unix, a directory is a file as
well.
1551
Note that this function accepts a single filename as an argument, without wildcards. To check for the
existence of multiple files, see the FindFirst (1559) function.
Errors: None.
See also: FindFirst (1559), FileAge (1548), FileGetAttr (1552), FileSetAttr (1557)
Program Example38 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e F i l e E x i s t s f u n c t i o n }
Begin
I f F i l e E x i s t s ( ParamStr ( 0 ) ) Then
W r i t e l n ( ’ A l l i s w e l l , I seem t o e x i s t . ’ ) ;
End .
76.14.101 FileGetAttr
Synopsis: Return attributes of a file.
Declaration: function FileGetAttr(const FileName: UnicodeString) : LongInt
function FileGetAttr(const FileName: RawByteString) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: FileGetAttr returns the attribute settings of file FileName. The attribute is a OR-ed combina-
tion of the following constants:
faReadOnlyThe file is read-only.

faHiddenThe file is hidden. (On unix, this means that the filename starts with a dot)
faSysFileThe file is a system file (On unix, this means that the file is a character, block or FIFO file).
faVolumeIdVolume Label. Only for DOS/Windows on a plain FAT (not VFAT or Fat32) filesystem.
faDirectoryFile is a directory.
faArchivefile should be archived. Not possible on Unix
Errors: In case of error, -1 is returned.

See also: FileSetAttr (1557), FileAge (1548), FileGetDate (1553)
Program Example40 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e F i l e G e t A t t r f u n c t i o n }
Procedure T e s t i t ( Name : S t r i n g ) ;
Var F : L o n g i n t ;
Begin
1552
F : = F i l e G e t A t t r (Name ) ;
I f F<>−1 then
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ T e s t i n g : ’ ,Name ) ;
I f ( F and faReadOnly ) < >0 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ F i l e i s ReadOnly ’ ) ;
I f ( F and faHidden ) < >0 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ F i l e i s hidden ’ ) ;
I f ( F and f a S y s F i l e ) < >0 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ F i l e i s a system f i l e ’ ) ;
I f ( F and faVolumeID ) < >0 then
Writeln ( ’ F i l e i s a disk l a b e l ’ ) ;
I f ( F and f a A r c h i v e ) < >0 then
Writeln ( ’ F i l e i s a r t c h i v e f i l e ’ ) ;
I f ( F and f a D i r e c t o r y ) < >0 then
Writeln ( ’ F i l e i s a d i r e c t o r y ’ ) ;
end
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ E r r o r r e a d i n g a t t r i b u t e s o f ’ ,Name ) ;
end ;
begin
testit ( ’ ex40 . pp ’ ) ;
testit ( ParamStr ( 0 ) ) ;
testit ( ’ . ’ );
testit ( ’ / ’ );
End .
76.14.102 FileGetDate
Synopsis: Return the file time of an opened file.
Declaration: function FileGetDate(Handle: THandle) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: FileGetdate returns the filetime of the opened file with filehandle Handle. It is the same as
FileAge (1548), with this difference that FileAge only needs the file name, while FilegetDate
needs an open file handle.
See also: FileAge (1548)
Program Example39 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e F i l e G e t D a t e f u n c t i o n }
Var F , D : L o n g i n t ;
Begin
F:= FileCreate ( ’ t e s t . dat ’ ) ;
D: = FileGetDate ( F ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ F i l e c r e a t e d on ’ , DateTimeToStr ( FileDateToDateTime (D ) ) ) ;
1553
FileClose ( F ) ;
DeleteFile ( ’ t e s t . dat ’ ) ;
End .
76.14.103 FileIsReadOnly
Synopsis: Check whether a file is read-only.
Declaration: function FileIsReadOnly(const FileName: UnicodeString) : Boolean
function FileIsReadOnly(const FileName: RawByteString) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: FileIsReadOnly checks whether FileName exists in the filesystem and is a read-only file. If
this is the case, the function returns True, otherwise False is returned.
See also: FileExists (1551)
76.14.104 FileOpen
Synopsis: Open an existing file and return a filehandle
Declaration: function FileOpen(const FileName: UnicodeString;Mode: Integer) : THandle
function FileOpen(const FileName: RawByteString;Mode: Integer) : THandle
Visibility: default
Description: FileOpen opens a file with name FileName with mode Mode. Mode can be one of the following
constants:
fmOpenReadOpen file in read-only mode

fmOpenWriteOpen file in write-only mode
fmOpenReadWriteOpen file in read/write mode.
Under Windows and Unix, the above mode can be or-ed with one of the following sharing/locking
flags:
fmShareCompatOpen file in DOS share-compatibility mode

fmShareExclusiveLock file for exclusive use
fmShareDenyWriteLock file so other processes can only read.
fmShareDenyReadLock file so other processes cannot read.
fmShareDenyNoneDo not lock file.
If the file has been successfully opened, it can be read from or written to (depending on the Mode
parameter) with the FileRead (1555) and FileWrite functions.
Remark: Remark that you cannot open a file if it doesn’t exist yet, i.e. it will not be created for you. If you
want tp create a new file, or overwrite an old one, use the FileCreate (1550) function.
There are some limitations to the sharing modes.
1.Sharing modes are only available on Unix and Windows platforms.

2.Unix only support sharing modes as of 2.4.0.
3.fmShareDenyRead only works under Windows at this time, and will always result in an error
on Unix platforms because its file locking APIs do not support this concept.
1554
4.File locking is advisory on Unix platforms. This means that the locks are only checked when
a file is opened using a file locking mode. In other cases, existing locks are simply ignored.
In particular, this means that fmShareDenyNone has no effect under Unix, because this can
only be implemented as “use no locking” on those platforms. As a result, opening a file using
this mode will always succeed under Unix as far as the locking is concerned, even if the file has
already been opened using fmShareExclusive.
5.Under Solaris, closing a single file handle associated with a file will result in all locks on that
file (even via other handles) being destroyed due to the behaviour of the underlying API (fcntl).
Because of the same reason, on Solaris you cannot use fmShareDenyWrite in combina-
tion with fmOpenWrite, nor fmShareExclusive in combination with fmOpenRead
although both work with fmOpenReadWrite.

Errors: On Error, THandle(-1) is returned.
See also: fmOpenRead (1486), fmOpenWrite (1486), fmOpenReadWrite (1486), fmShareDenyWrite (1486),
fmShareExclusive (1486), fmShareDenyRead (1486), fmShareDenyNone (1486), fmShareCompat
(1486), FileClose (1549), FileWrite (1558), FileCreate (1550), FileRead (1555), FileTruncate (1558),
FileSeek (1556)
76.14.105 FileRead
Synopsis: Read data from a filehandle in a buffer.
Declaration: function FileRead(Handle: THandle;out Buffer;Count: LongInt) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: FileRead reads Count bytes from file-handle Handle and stores them into Buffer. Buffer
must be at least Count bytes long. No checking on this is performed, so be careful not to overwrite
any memory. Handle must be the result of a FileOpen (1554) call.
The function returns the number of bytes actually read, or -1 on error.
See also: FileClose (1549), FileWrite (1558), FileCreate (1550), FileOpen (1554), FileTruncate (1558), File-
Seek (1556)
76.14.106 FileSearch
Synopsis: Search for a file in a path.
Declaration: function FileSearch(const Name: UnicodeString;
const DirList: UnicodeString;
Options: TFileSearchOptions) : UnicodeString
function FileSearch(const Name: UnicodeString;
const DirList: UnicodeString;
ImplicitCurrentDir: Boolean) : UnicodeString
function FileSearch(const Name: RawByteString;
const DirList: RawByteString;
Options: TFileSearchOptions) : RawByteString
function FileSearch(const Name: RawByteString;
const DirList: RawByteString;
ImplicitCurrentDir: Boolean) : RawByteString
1555
Visibility: default
Description: FileSearch looks for the file Name in DirList, where dirlist is a list of directories, separated
by semicolons or colons. It returns the full filename of the first match found. The optional Options
parameter may be specified to influence the behaviour of the search algorithm. It is a set of the
following options:
sfoImplicitCurrentDirAlways search the current directory first, even if it is not specified.

sfoStripQuotesStrip quotes from the components in the search path.
A deprecated form of the function allowed to specify using the boolean ImplicitCurrentDir
parameter whether the current directory was searched implicitly or not. By default, the current direc-
tory is searched.
Errors: On error, an empty string is returned.
See also: ExpandFileName (1543), FindFirst (1559)
Program Example41 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e F i l e S e a r c h f u n c t i o n . }
Uses S y s u t i l s ;
Const
{ $ i f d e f unix }
FN = ’ f i n d ’ ;
P = ’ . : / bin : / usr / bin ’ ;
{ $else }
FN = ’ f i n d . exe ’ ;
P = ’ c : \ dos ; c : \ windows ; c : \ windows \ system ; c : \ windows \ system32 ’ ;
{ $endif }
begin
Writeln ( ’ f i n d i s i n : ’ , FileSearch ( FN, P ) ) ;
end .
76.14.107 FileSeek
Synopsis: Set the current file position on a file handle.
Declaration: function FileSeek(Handle: THandle;FOffset: LongInt;Origin: LongInt)
: LongInt
function FileSeek(Handle: THandle;FOffset: Int64;Origin: LongInt)
: Int64
Visibility: default
Description: FileSeek sets the file pointer on position Offset, starting from Origin. Origin can be one of
the following values:
fsFromBeginningOffset is relative to the first byte of the file. This position is zero-based. i.e. the
first byte is at offset 0.
fsFromCurrentOffset is relative to the current position.
1556
fsFromEndOffset is relative to the end of the file. This means that Offset can only be zero or
negative in this case.
If successfull, the function returns the new file position, relative to the beginning of the file.
Remark: The abovementioned constants do not exist in Delphi.
See also: FileClose (1549), FileWrite (1558), FileCreate (1550), FileOpen (1554), FileRead (1555), FileTrun-
cate (1558)
Program Example42 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e F i l e S e t A t t r f u n c t i o n }
Begin
I f F i l e S e t A t t r ( ’ ex40 . pp ’ , faReadOnly or faHidden ) = 0 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ S u c c e s s f u l l y made f i l e hidden and read−o n l y . ’ )
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ Coulnd ’ ’ t make f i l e hidden and read−o n l y . ’ ) ;
End .
76.14.108 FileSetAttr
Synopsis: Set the attributes of a file.
Declaration: function FileSetAttr(const Filename: UnicodeString;Attr: LongInt)
: LongInt
function FileSetAttr(const Filename: RawByteString;Attr: LongInt)
: LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: FileSetAttr sets the attributes of FileName to Attr. If the function was successful, 0 is re-
turned, -1 otherwise. Attr can be set to an OR-ed combination of the pre-defined faXXX constants.
This function is not implemented on Unixes.
Errors: On error, -1 is returned (always on Unixes).
See also: FileGetAttr (1552), FileGetDate (1553), FileSetDate (1557)
76.14.109 FileSetDate
Synopsis: Set the date of a file.
Declaration: function FileSetDate(const FileName: UnicodeString;Age: LongInt)
: LongInt
function FileSetDate(const FileName: RawByteString;Age: LongInt)
: LongInt
function FileSetDate(Handle: THandle;Age: LongInt) : LongInt
Visibility: default
1557
Description: FileSetDate sets the file date of the open file with handle Handle or to Age, where Age is a
DOS date-and-time stamp value.
Alternatively, the filename may be specified with the FileName argument. This variant of the call
is mandatory on unices, since there is no OS support for setting a file timestamp based on a handle.
(the handle may not be a real file at all).
The function returns zero if successfull.
Errors: On Unix, the handle variant always returns -1, since this is impossible to implement. On Windows
and DOS, a negative error code is returned.
76.14.110 FileTruncate
Synopsis: Truncate an open file to a given size.
Declaration: function FileTruncate(Handle: THandle;Size: Int64) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: FileTruncate truncates the file with handle Handle to Size bytes. The file must have been
opened for writing prior to this call. The function returns True is successful, False otherwise.
For an example, see FileCreate (1550).
Errors: On error, the function returns False.
See also: FileClose (1549), FileWrite (1558), FileCreate (1550), FileOpen (1554), FileRead (1555), FileSeek
(1556)
76.14.111 FileWrite
Synopsis: Write data from a buffer to a given filehandle.
Declaration: function FileWrite(Handle: THandle;const Buffer;Count: LongInt)
: LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: FileWrite writes Count bytes from Buffer to the file with handle Handle. Prior to this
call, the file must have been opened for writing. Buffer must be at least Count bytes large, or a
memory access error may occur.
The function returns the number of bytes written, or -1 in case of an error.
For an example, see FileCreate (1550).
Errors: In case of error, -1 is returned.
See also: FileClose (1549), FileCreate (1550), FileOpen (1554), FileRead (1555), FileTruncate (1558), File-
Seek (1556)
76.14.112 FindClose
Synopsis: Close a find handle
Declaration: procedure FindClose(var F: TUnicodeSearchRec)
procedure FindClose(var F: TRawbyteSearchRec)
Visibility: default
1558
Description: FindClose ends a series of FindFirst (1559)/FindNext (1560) calls, and frees any memory used
by these calls. It is absolutely necessary to do this call, or huge memory losses may occur.
For an example, see FindFirst (1559).
Errors: None.
See also: FindFirst (1559), FindNext (1560)
76.14.113 FindCmdLineSwitch
Synopsis: Check whether a certain switch is present on the command-line.
Declaration: function FindCmdLineSwitch(const Switch: string;
const Chars: TSysCharSet;IgnoreCase: Boolean)
: Boolean
function FindCmdLineSwitch(const Switch: string;IgnoreCase: Boolean)
: Boolean
function FindCmdLineSwitch(const Switch: string) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: FindCmdLineSwitch will check all command-line arguments for the presence of the option
Switch. It will return True if it was found, False otherwise. Characters that appear in Chars
(default is SwitchChars (1490)) are assumed to indicate an option (switch). If the parameter IgnoreCase
is True, case will be ignored when looking for the switch. Default is to search case sensitive.
Errors: None.
See also: SwitchChars (1490)
76.14.114 FindFirst
Synopsis: Start a file search and return a findhandle
Declaration: function FindFirst(const Path: UnicodeString;Attr: LongInt;
out Rslt: TUnicodeSearchRec) : LongInt
function FindFirst(const Path: RawByteString;Attr: LongInt;
out Rslt: TRawbyteSearchRec) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: FindFirst looks for files that match the name (possibly with wildcards) in Path and extra at-
tributes Attr. It then fills up the Rslt record with data gathered about the file. It returns 0 if a file
matching the specified criteria is found, a nonzero value (-1 on Unix-like platforms) otherwise.
Attr is an or-ed combination of the following constants:
faReadOnlyThe file is read-only.

faHiddenThe file is hidden. (On unix, this means that the filename starts with a dot)
faSysFileThe file is a system file (On unix, this means that the file is a character, block or FIFO file).
faVolumeIdDrive volume Label. Not possible under unix, and on Windows-like systems, this works
only for plan FAT (not Fat32 of VFAT) filesystems.
faDirectoryFile is a directory.
faArchivefile needs to be archived. Not possible on Unix
1559
It is a common misconception that Attr specifies a set of attributes which must be matched in order
for a file to be included in the list. This is not so: The value of Attr specifies additional attributes,
this means that the returned files are either normal files or have an attribute which is present in Attr.
Specifically: specifying faDirectory as a value for Attr does not mean that only directories
will be returned. Normal files and directories will be returned.
The Rslt record can be fed to subsequent calls to FindNext, in order to find other files matching
the specifications.
Remark: A FindFirst call must always be followed by a FindClose (1558) call with the same Rslt record.
Failure to do so will result in memory loss.
Errors: On error the function returns -1 on Unix-like platforms, a nonzero error code on Windows.
See also: FindClose (1558), FindNext (1560)
Program Example43 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e F i n d F i r s t f u n c t i o n }
Uses S y s U t i l s ;
Var I n f o : TSearchRec ;
Count : L o n g i n t ;
Begin
Count : = 0 ;
I f F i n d F i r s t ( ’ ∗ ’ , f a A n y F i l e and f a D i r e c t o r y , I n f o ) = 0 then
begin
Repeat
Inc ( Count ) ;
With I n f o do
begin
I f ( A t t r and f a D i r e c t o r y ) = f a D i r e c t o r y then
Write ( ’ D i r : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Name: 4 0 , Size : 1 5 ) ;
end ;
U n t i l FindNext ( i n f o ) < >0;
end ;
FindClose ( I n f o ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ F i n i s h e d search . Found ’ , Count , ’ matches ’ ) ;
End .
76.14.115 FindNext
Synopsis: Find the next entry in a findhandle.
Declaration: function FindNext(var Rslt: TUnicodeSearchRec) : LongInt

function FindNext(var Rslt: TRawbyteSearchRec) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: FindNext finds a next occurrence of a search sequence initiated by FindFirst. If another record
matching the criteria in Rslt is found, 0 is returned, a nonzero constant is returned otherwise.
1560
Remark: The last FindNext call must always be followed by a FindClose call with the same Rslt
record. Failure to do so will result in memory loss.
For an example, see FindFirst (1559)
Errors: On error (no more file is found), a nonzero constant is returned.
See also: FindFirst (1559), FindClose (1558)
76.14.116 FloattoCurr
Synopsis: Convert a float to a Currency value.
Declaration: function FloattoCurr(const Value: Extended) : Currency
Visibility: default
Description: FloatToCurr converts the Value floating point value to a Currency value. It checks whether
Value is in the valid range of currencies (determined by MinCurrency (1487) and MaxCurrency
(1487)). If not, an EConvertError (1639) exception is raised.
Errors: If Value is out of range, an EConvertError (1639) exception is raised.
See also: EConvertError (1639), TryFloatToCurr (1630), MinCurrency (1487), MaxCurrency (1487)
76.14.117 FloatToDateTime
Synopsis: Convert a float to a TDateTime value.
Declaration: function FloatToDateTime(const Value: Extended) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: FloatToDateTime converts the Value floating point value to a TDateTime value. It checks
whether Value is in the valid range of dates (determined by MinDateTime (1487) and MaxDateTime
(1487)). If not, an EConvertError (1639) exception is raised.
Errors: If Value is out of range, an EConvertError (1639) exception is raised.
See also: EConvertError (1639), MinDateTime (1487), MaxDateTime (1487)
76.14.118 FloatToDecimal
Synopsis: Convert a float value to a TFloatRec value.
Declaration: procedure FloatToDecimal(out Result: TFloatRec;const Value;
ValueType: TFloatValue;Precision: Integer;
Decimals: Integer)
procedure FloatToDecimal(out Result: TFloatRec;Value: Extended;
Precision: Integer;Decimals: Integer)
Visibility: default
Description: FloatToDecimal converts the float Value to a float description in the ResultTFloatRec
(1495) format. It will store Precision digits in the Digits field, of which at most Decimal
decimals.
Errors: None.
See also: TFloatRec (1495)
1561
76.14.119 FloatToStr
Synopsis: Convert a float value to a string using a fixed format.
Declaration: function FloatToStr(Value: Double) : string

function FloatToStr(Value: Double;const FormatSettings: TFormatSettings)
: string
function FloatToStr(Value: Single) : string
function FloatToStr(Value: Single;const FormatSettings: TFormatSettings)
: string
function FloatToStr(Value: Currency) : string
function FloatToStr(Value: Currency;
function FloatToStr(Value: Comp) : string
function FloatToStr(Value: Comp;const FormatSettings: TFormatSettings)
: string
function FloatToStr(Value: Int64) : string
function FloatToStr(Value: Int64;const FormatSettings: TFormatSettings)
: string
Visibility: default
Description: FloatToStr converts the floating point variable Value to a string representation. It will choose
the shortest possible notation of the two following formats:
Fixed formatwill represent the string in fixed notation,

Decimal formatwill represent the string in scientific notation.
More information on these formats can be found in FloatToStrF (1563). FloatToStr is completely
equivalent to the following call:
FloatToStrF(Value, ffGeneral,15, 0);
Errors: None.
See also: FloatToStrF (1563), FormatFloat (1575), StrToFloat (1617)
Program Example67 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e F l o a t T o S t r f u n c t i o n }
Procedure T e s t i t ( Value : Extended ) ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( Value , ’ − > ’ , FloatToStr ( Value ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( − Value , ’ − > ’ , FloatToStr (−Value ) ) ;
end ;
Begin
Testit (0.0);
Testit (1.1);
Testit ( 1 . 1 e −3);
Testit ( 1 . 1 e −20);
1562
Testit ( 1 . 1 e −200);
Testit (1.1 e+3);
Testit ( 1 . 1 e+20);
Testit ( 1 . 1 e+200);
End .
76.14.120 FloatToStrF
Synopsis: Convert a float value to a string using a given format.
Declaration: function FloatToStrF(Value: Double;format: TFloatFormat;
Precision: Integer;Digits: Integer) : string
function FloatToStrF(Value: Double;format: TFloatFormat;
Precision: Integer;Digits: Integer;
function FloatToStrF(Value: Single;format: TFloatFormat;
function FloatToStrF(Value: Single;format: TFloatFormat;
function FloatToStrF(Value: Comp;format: TFloatFormat;
function FloatToStrF(Value: Comp;format: TFloatFormat;
function FloatToStrF(Value: Currency;format: TFloatFormat;
function FloatToStrF(Value: Currency;format: TFloatFormat;
function FloatToStrF(Value: Int64;format: TFloatFormat;
function FloatToStrF(Value: Int64;format: TFloatFormat;
Visibility: default
Description: FloatToStrF converts the floating point number value to a string representation, according to
the settings of the parameters Format, Precision and Digits.
The meaning of the Precision and Digits parameter depends on the Format parameter. The
format is controlled mainly by the Format parameter. It can have one of the following values:
ffcurrencyMoney format. Value is converted to a string using the global variables CurrencyString,
CurrencyFormat and NegCurrFormat. The Digits paramater specifies the number of
digits following the decimal point and should be in the range -1 to 18. If Digits equals -1,
CurrencyDecimals is assumed. The Precision parameter is ignored.
ffExponentScientific format. Value is converted to a string using scientific notation: 1 digit before
the decimal point, possibly preceded by a minus sign if Value is negative. The number of
digits after the decimal point is controlled by Precision and must lie in the range 0 to 15.
ffFixedFixed point format. Value is converted to a string using fixed point notation. The result
is composed of all digits of the integer part of Value, preceded by a minus sign if Value is
negative. Following the integer part is DecimalSeparator and then the fractional part of
1563
Value, rounded off to Digits numbers. If the number is too large then the result will be in
scientific notation.
ffGeneralGeneral number format. The argument is converted to a string using ffExponent or
ffFixed format, depending on wich one gives the shortest string. There will be no trailing
zeroes. If Value is less than 0.00001 or if the number of decimals left of the decimal point is
larger than Precision then scientific notation is used, and Digits is the minimum number
of digits in the exponent. Otherwise Digits is ignored.
ffnumberIs the same as ffFixed, except that thousand separators are inserted in the resulting
string.
Errors: None.
See also: FloatToStr (1562), FloatToText (1565)
Program Example68 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e F l o a t T o S t r F f u n c t i o n }
Const Fmt : Array [ TFloatFormat ] of s t r i n g [ 1 0 ] =

( ’ g e n e r a l ’ , ’ exponent ’ , ’ f i x e d ’ , ’ number ’ , ’ Currency ’ ) ;
Var I , J : l o n g i n t ;
FF : TFloatFormat ;
begin
For I : = 5 to 1 5 do
For J : = 1 to 4 do
For FF : = f f g e n e r a l to f f c u r r e n c y do
begin
Write ( Value , ’ ( Prec : ’ , I : 2 , ’ , Dig : ’ , J , ’ , f m t : ’ , Fmt [ f f ] , ’ ) : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( F l o a t T o S t r f ( Value , FF , I , J ) ) ;
Write ( − Value , ’ ( Prec : ’ , I : 2 , ’ , Dig : ’ , J , ’ , f m t : ’ , Fmt [ f f ] , ’ ) : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( F l o a t T o S t r f (−Value , FF , I , J ) ) ;
end ;
end ;
Begin
Testit (1.1);
Testit ( 1 . 1 E1 ) ;
Testit ( 1 . 1 E−1);
Testit ( 1 . 1 E5 ) ;
Testit ( 1 . 1 E−5);
Testit ( 1 . 1 E10 ) ;
Testit ( 1 . 1 E−10);
Testit ( 1 . 1 E15 ) ;
Testit ( 1 . 1 E−15);
Testit ( 1 . 1 E100 ) ;
Testit ( 1 . 1 E−100);
End .
1564
76.14.121 FloatToText
Synopsis: Return a string representation of a float, with a given format.
Declaration: function FloatToText(Buffer: PChar;Value: Extended;format: TFloatFormat;

Precision: Integer;Digits: Integer) : LongInt
function FloatToText(Buffer: PChar;Value: Extended;format: TFloatFormat;
const FormatSettings: TFormatSettings) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: FloatToText converts the floating point variable Value to a string representation and stores it in
Buffer. The conversion is governed by format, Precisison and Digits. more information
on these parameters can be found in FloatToStrF (1563). Buffer should point to enough space to
hold the result. No checking on this is performed.
The result is the number of characters that was copied in Buffer.
Errors: None.
See also: FloatToStr (1562), FloatToStrF (1563)
Program Example68 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e F l o a t T o S t r F f u n c t i o n }
Const Fmt : Array [ TFloatFormat ] of s t r i n g [ 1 0 ] =

( ’ g e n e r a l ’ , ’ exponent ’ , ’ f i x e d ’ , ’ number ’ , ’ Currency ’ ) ;
Var I , J : l o n g i n t ;
FF : TFloatFormat ;
S : ShortString ;
begin
For I : = 5 to 1 5 do
For J : = 1 to 4 do
For FF : = f f g e n e r a l to f f c u r r e n c y do
begin
Write ( Value , ’ ( Prec : ’ , I : 2 , ’ , Dig : ’ , J , ’ , f m t : ’ , Fmt [ f f ] , ’ ) : ’ ) ;
SetLength ( S , FloatToText (@S[ 1 ] , Value , FF , I , J ) ) ;
Writeln ( S ) ;
Write ( − Value , ’ ( Prec : ’ , I : 2 , ’ , Dig : ’ , J , ’ , f m t : ’ , Fmt [ f f ] , ’ ) : ’ ) ;
SetLength ( S , FloatToText (@S[ 1 ] , − Value , FF , I , J ) ) ;
Writeln ( S ) ;
end ;
end ;
Begin
Testit (1.1);
Testit ( 1 . 1 E1 ) ;
Testit ( 1 . 1 E−1);
Testit ( 1 . 1 E5 ) ;
Testit ( 1 . 1 E−5);
1565
Testit ( 1 . 1 E10 ) ;
Testit ( 1 . 1 E−10);
Testit ( 1 . 1 E15 ) ;
Testit ( 1 . 1 E−15);
Testit ( 1 . 1 E100 ) ;
Testit ( 1 . 1 E−100);
End .
76.14.122 FloatToTextFmt
Synopsis: Convert a float value to a string using a given mask.
Declaration: function FloatToTextFmt(Buffer: PChar;Value: Extended;format: PChar;
FormatSettings: TFormatSettings) : Integer
function FloatToTextFmt(Buffer: PChar;Value: Extended;format: PChar)
: Integer
Visibility: default
Description: FloatToTextFmt returns a textual representation of Value in the memory location pointed to by
Buffer. it uses the formatting specification in Format to do this. The return value is the number
of characters that were written in the buffer.
For a list of valid formatting characters, see FormatFloat (1575)
Errors: No length checking is performed on the buffer. The buffer should point to enough memory to hold
the complete string. If this is not the case, an access violation may occur.
See also: FormatFloat (1575)
76.14.123 FmtStr
Synopsis: Format a string with given arguments.
Declaration: procedure FmtStr(var Res: string;const Fmt: string;
const args: Array of const)
procedure FmtStr(var Res: string;const Fmt: string;
const args: Array of const;
const FormatSettings: TFormatSettings)
Visibility: default
Description: FmtStr calls Format (1567) with Fmt and Args as arguments, and stores the result in Res. For
more information on how the resulting string is composed, see Format (1567).
Errors: In case of error, a EConvertError exception is raised.

See also: Format (1567), FormatBuf (1574)
Program Example70 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e FmtStr f u n c t i o n }
1566
Begin
S: = ’ ’ ;
FmtStr ( S , ’ For some n i c e examples o f f o m a t t i n g see %s . ’ , [ ’ Format ’ ] ) ;
Writeln ( S ) ;
End .
76.14.124 ForceDirectories
Synopsis: Create a chain of directories
Declaration: function ForceDirectories(const Dir: RawByteString) : Boolean
function ForceDirectories(const Dir: UnicodeString) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: ForceDirectories tries to create any missing directories in Dir till the whole path in Dir
exists. It returns True if Dir already existed or was created succesfully. If it failed to create any of
the parts, False is returned.
76.14.125 Format
Synopsis: Format a string with given arguments.
Declaration: function Format(const Fmt: string;const Args: Array of const) : string

function Format(const Fmt: string;const Args: Array of const;
Visibility: default
Description: Format replaces all placeholders inFmt with the arguments passed in Args and returns the resulting
string. A placeholder looks as follows:
’%’ [[Index]’:’] [’-’] [Width] [’.’ Precision] ArgType
elements between single quotes must be typed as shown without the quotes, and elements between
square brackets [ ] are optional. The meaning of the different elements are shown below:
’%’starts the placeholder. If you want to insert a literal % character, then you must insert two of them
: %%.
Index ’:’takes the Index-th element in the argument array as the element to insert. If index is
omitted, then the zeroth argument is taken.
’-’tells Format to left-align the inserted text. The default behaviour is to right-align inserted text.
This can only take effect if the Width element is also specified.
Widththe inserted string must have at least Width characters. If not, the inserted string will be
padded with spaces. By default, the string is left-padded, resulting in a right-aligned string.
This behaviour can be changed by the usage of the ’-’ character.
’.’ PrecisionIndicates the precision to be used when converting the argument. The exact meaning of
this parameter depends on ArgType.
1567
The Index, Width and Precision parameters can be replaced by *, in which case their value
will be read from the next element in the Args array. This value must be an integer, or an EConvertError
exception will be raised.
The argument type is determined from ArgType. It can have one of the following values (case
insensitive):
DDecimal format. The next argument in the Args array should be an integer. The argument
is converted to a decimal string. If precision is specified, then the string will have at least
Precision digits in it. If needed, the string is (left) padded with zeroes.
EScientific format. The next argument in the Args array should be a Floating point value. The
argument is converted to a decimal string using scientific notation, using FloatToStrF (1563),
where the optional precision is used to specify the total number of decimals. (defalt a valueof
15 is used). The exponent is formatted using maximally 3 digits.
In short, the E specifier formats it’s argument as follows:
FloatToStrF(Argument,ffexponent,Precision,3)
FFixed point format. The next argument in the Args array should be a floating point value. The argu-
ment is converted to a decimal string, using fixed notation (see FloatToStrF (1563)). Precision
indicates the number of digits following the decimal point.
In short, the F specifier formats it’s argument as follows:
FloatToStrF(Argument,ffFixed,ffixed,9999,Precision)
GGeneral number format. The next argument in the Args array should be a floating point value.
The argument is converted to a decimal string using fixed point notation or scientific notation,
depending on which gives the shortest result. Precision is used to determine the number of
digits after the decimal point.
In short, the G specifier formats it’s argument as follows:
FloatToStrF(Argument,ffGeneral,Precision,3)
MCurrency format. the next argument in the Args array must be a floating point value. The ar-
gument is converted to a decimal string using currency notation. This means that fixed-point
notation is used, but that the currency symbol is appended. If precision is specified, then then it
overrides the CurrencyDecimals global variable used in the FloatToStrF (1563)
In short, the M specifier formats it’s argument as follows:
FloatToStrF(Argument,ffCurrency,9999,Precision)
NNumber format. This is the same as fixed point format, except that thousand separators are inserted
in the resulting string.
PPointer format. The next argument in the Args array must be a pointer (typed or untyped). The
pointer value is converted to a string of length 8, representing the hexadecimal value of the
pointer.
SString format. The next argument in the Args array must be a string. The argument is simply
copied to the result string. If Precision is specified, then only Precision characters are
copied to the result string.
UUnsigned decimal format. The next argument in the Args array should be an unsigned integer.
The argument is converted to a decimal string. If precision is specified, then the string will have
at least Precision digits in it. If needed, the string is (left) padded with zeroes.
Xhexadecimal format. The next argument in the Args array must be an integer. The argument
is converted to a hexadecimal string with just enough characters to contain the value of the
integer. If Precision is specified then the resulting hexadecimal representation will have at
least Precision characters in it (with a maximum value of 32).
1568
Errors: In case of error, an EConversionError exception is raised. Possible errors are:
1.Errors in the format specifiers.

2.The next argument is not of the type needed by a specifier.
3.The number of arguments is not sufficient for all format specifiers.
See also: FormatBuf (1574)
Program example71 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e Format f u n c t i o n }
fmt , S : s t r i n g ;
{ Expected o u t p u t :
[%d ] = > [ 1 0 ]
[%%] = > [%]
[%10d ] = > [ 10]
[%.4 d ] = > [ 0 0 1 0 ]
[%10.4d ] = > [ 0010]
[%0: d ] = > [ 1 0 ]
[%0:10d ] = > [ 10]
[%0:10.4 d ] = > [ 0010]
[%0:−10d ] = > [ 1 0 ]
[%0: −10.4d ] = > [ 0 0 1 0 ]
[%−∗.∗d ] = > [ 0 0 0 1 0 ]
}
Procedure T e s t I n t e g e r ;
begin
Try
Fmt : = ’ [%d ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 0 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%%] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 0 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%10d ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 0 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
f m t : = ’ [%.4 d ] ’ ; S: = Format ( fmt , [ 1 0 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%10.4d ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 0 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0: d ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 0 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0:10d ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 0 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0:10.4 d ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 0 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0:−10d ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 0 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0: −10.4d ] ’ ; S: = Format ( fmt , [ 1 0 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%−∗.∗d ] ’ ; S: = Format ( fmt , [ 4 , 5 , 1 0 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
except
On E : E x c e p t i o n do
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ E x c e p t i o n caught : ’ ,E . Message ) ;
end ;
end ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ Press e n t e r ’ ) ;
readln ;
end ;
1569
[%x ] = > [ A ]
[%10x ] = > [ A]
[%10.4 x ] = > [ 000A ]
[%0: x ] = > [ A ]
[%0:10 x ] = > [ A]
[%0:10.4 x ] = > [ 000A ]
[%0:−10x ] = > [ A ]
[%0: −10.4 x ] = > [ 0 0 0A ]
[%−∗.∗x ] = > [ 0 0 0 0A ]
}
Procedure TestHexaDecimal ;
begin
try
Fmt : = ’ [%x ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 0 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%10x ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 0 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%10.4 x ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 0 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0: x ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 0 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0:10 x ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 0 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0:10.4 x ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 0 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0:−10x ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 0 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0: −10.4 x ] ’ ; S: = Format ( fmt , [ 1 0 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%−∗.∗x ] ’ ; S: = Format ( fmt , [ 4 , 5 , 1 0 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
except
begin
end ;
end ;
readln ;
end ;
[ 0 x%p ] = > [ 0 x0012D687 ]
[ 0 x%10p ] = > [ 0 x 0012D687 ]
[ 0 x%10.4p ] = > [ 0 x 0012D687 ]
[ 0 x%0:p ] = > [ 0 x0012D687 ]
[ 0 x%0:10p ] = > [ 0 x 0012D687 ]
[ 0 x %0:10.4p ] = > [ 0 x 0012D687 ]
[ 0 x%0:−10p ] = > [ 0 x0012D687 ]
[ 0 x%0:−10.4p ] = > [ 0 x0012D687 ]
[%−∗.∗p ] = > [ 0 0 1 2 D687 ]
}
Procedure T e s t P o i n t e r ;
begin
P: = P o i n t e r ( 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ) ;
try
Fmt : = ’ [ 0 x%p ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ P ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [ 0 x%10p ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ P ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [ 0 x%10.4p ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ P ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [ 0 x%0:p ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ P ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [ 0 x%0:10p ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ P ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [ 0 x %0:10.4p ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ P ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [ 0 x%0:−10p ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ P ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [ 0 x%0:−10.4p ] ’ ; S: = Format ( fmt , [ P ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%−∗.∗p ] ’ ; S: = Format ( fmt , [ 4 , 5 , P ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
except
1570
begin
end ;
end ;
readln ;
end ;
[%s ] = > [ T h i s i s a s t r i n g ]
[%0: s ] = > [ T h i s i s a s t r i n g ]
[%0:18 s ] = > [ T h i s i s a s t r i n g ]
[%0:−18s ] = > [ T h i s i s a s t r i n g ]
[%0:18.12 s ] = > [ This i s a s t ]
[%−∗.∗s ] = > [ T h i s i s a s t ]
}
Procedure T e s t S t r i n g ;
begin
try
Fmt : = ’ [%s ] ’ ; S: = Format ( fmt , [ ’ T h i s i s a s t r i n g ’ ] ) ; W r i t e l n ( f m t : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
f m t : = ’ [%0: s ] ’ ; s : = Format ( fmt , [ ’ T h i s i s a s t r i n g ’ ] ) ; W r i t e l n ( f m t : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
f m t : = ’ [%0:18 s ] ’ ; s : = Format ( fmt , [ ’ T h i s i s a s t r i n g ’ ] ) ; W r i t e l n ( f m t : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
f m t : = ’ [%0:−18s ] ’ ; s : = Format ( fmt , [ ’ T h i s i s a s t r i n g ’ ] ) ; W r i t e l n ( f m t : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
f m t : = ’ [%0:18.12 s ] ’ ; s : = Format ( fmt , [ ’ T h i s i s a s t r i n g ’ ] ) ; W r i t e l n ( f m t : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
f m t : = ’ [%−∗.∗s ] ’ ; s : = Format ( fmt , [ 1 8 , 1 2 , ’ T h i s i s a s t r i n g ’ ] ) ; W r i t e l n ( f m t : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
except
begin
end ;
end ;
readln ;
end ;
[%e ] = > [1.2340000000000000E+000]
[%10e ] = > [1.2340000000000000E+000]
[%10.4e ] = > [ 1 . 2 3 4 E+000]
[%0: e ] = > [1.2340000000000000E+000]
[%0:10e ] = > [1.2340000000000000E+000]
[%0:10.4 e ] = > [ 1 . 2 3 4 E+000]
[%0:−10e ] = > [1.2340000000000000E+000]
[%0: −10.4e ] = > [ 1 . 2 3 4 E+000]
[%−∗.∗e ] = > [ 1 . 2 3 4 0E+000]
}
Procedure T e s t E x p o n e n t i a l ;
begin
Try
Fmt : = ’ [%e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 . 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%10e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 . 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%10.4e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 . 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0: e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 . 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0:10e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 . 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0:10.4 e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 . 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0:−10e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 1 . 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0: −10.4e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( fmt , [ 1 . 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
1571
Fmt : = ’ [%−∗.∗e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( fmt , [ 4 , 5 , 1 . 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;

except
begin
end ;
end ;
readln ;
end ;
[%e] = > [ −1.2340000000000000E+000]
[%10e] = > [ −1.2340000000000000E+000]
[%10.4e ] = > [ − 1 . 2 3 4E+000]
[%0: e] = > [ −1.2340000000000000E+000]
[%0:10e ] = > [ −1.2340000000000000E+000]
[%0:10.4 e ] = > [ − 1 . 2 3 4E+000]
[%0:−10e] = > [ −1.2340000000000000E+000]
[%0: −10.4e ] = > [ − 1 . 2 3 4E+000]
[%−∗.∗e ] = > [ − 1 . 2 3 4 0E+000]
}
Procedure T e s t N e g a t i v e E x p o n e n t i a l ;
begin
Try
Fmt : = ’ [%e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ − 1 . 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%10e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ − 1 . 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%10.4e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ − 1 . 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0: e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ − 1 . 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0:10e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ − 1 . 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0:10.4 e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ − 1 . 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0:−10e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ − 1 . 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0: −10.4e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( fmt , [ − 1 . 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%−∗.∗e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( fmt , [ 4 , 5 , − 1 . 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
except
begin
end ;
end ;
readln ;
end ;
[%e ] = > [1.2340000000000000E−002]
[%10e ] = > [1.2340000000000000E−002]
[%10.4e ] = > [ 1 . 2 3 4 E−002]
[%0: e ] = > [1.2340000000000000E−002]
[%0:10e ] = > [1.2340000000000000E−002]
[%0:10.4 e ] = > [ 1 . 2 3 4 E−002]
[%0:−10e ] = > [1.2300000000000000E−002]
[%0: −10.4e ] = > [ 1 . 2 3 4 E−002]
[%−∗.∗e ] = > [ 1 . 2 3 4 0 E−002]
}
Procedure T e s t S m a l l E x p o n e n t i a l ;
begin
Try
1572
Fmt : = ’ [%e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 0 . 0 1 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;

Fmt : = ’ [%10e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 0 . 0 1 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%10.4e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 0 . 0 1 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0: e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 0 . 0 1 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0:10e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 0 . 0 1 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0:10.4 e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 0 . 0 1 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0:−10e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ 0 . 0 1 2 3 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0: −10.4e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( fmt , [ 0 . 0 1 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%−∗.∗e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( fmt , [ 4 , 5 , 0 . 0 1 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
except
begin
end ;
end ;
readln ;
end ;
[%e] = > [ −1.2340000000000000E−002]
[%10e] = > [ −1.2340000000000000E−002]
[%10.4e ] = > [ − 1 . 2 3 4E−002]
[%0: e] = > [ −1.2340000000000000E−002]
[%0:10e ] = > [ −1.2340000000000000E−002]
[%0:10.4 e ] = > [ − 1 . 2 3 4E−002]
[%0:−10e] = > [ −1.2340000000000000E−002]
[%0: −10.4e ] = > [ − 1 . 2 3 4E−002]
[%−∗.∗e ] = > [ − 1 . 2 3 4 0E−002]
}
Procedure TestSmallNegExponential ;
begin
Try
Fmt : = ’ [%e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ − 0 . 0 1 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%10e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ − 0 . 0 1 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%10.4e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ − 0 . 0 1 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0: e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ − 0 . 0 1 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0:10e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ − 0 . 0 1 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0:10.4 e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ − 0 . 0 1 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0:−10e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( Fmt , [ − 0 . 0 1 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%0: −10.4e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( fmt , [ − 0 . 0 1 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
Fmt : = ’ [%−∗.∗e ] ’ ; S: = Format ( fmt , [ 4 , 5 , − 0 . 0 1 2 3 4 ] ) ; w r i t e l n ( Fmt : 1 2 , ’ = > ’ , s ) ;
except
begin
end ;
end ;
readln ;
end ;
begin
TestInteger ;
TestHexadecimal ;
TestPointer ;
teststring ;
TestExponential ;
1573
TestNegativeExponential ;
TestSmallExponential ;
TestSmallNegExponential ;
end .
76.14.126 FormatBuf
Synopsis: Format a string with given arguments and store the result in a buffer.
Declaration: function FormatBuf(var Buffer;BufLen: Cardinal;const Fmt;
fmtLen: Cardinal;const Args: Array of const)
: Cardinal
function FormatBuf(var Buffer;BufLen: Cardinal;const Fmt;
fmtLen: Cardinal;const Args: Array of const;
const FormatSettings: TFormatSettings) : Cardinal
Visibility: default
Description: FormatBuf calls Format (1567) and stores the result in Buf.
See also: Format (1567)
Program Example72 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e FormatBuf f u n c t i o n }
Var
S : ShortString ;
Const
Fmt : S h o r t S t r i n g = ’ For some n i c e examples o f f o m a t t i n g see %s . ’ ;
Begin
S: = ’ ’ ;
SetLength ( S , FormatBuf ( S[ 1 ] , 2 5 5 , Fmt [ 1 ] , Length ( Fmt ) , [ ’ Format ’ ] ) ) ;
Writeln ( S ) ;
End .
76.14.127 FormatCurr
Synopsis: Format a currency
Declaration: function FormatCurr(const Format: string;Value: Currency) : string
function FormatCurr(const Format: string;Value: Currency;
Visibility: default
Description: FormatCurr formats the currency Value according to the formatting rule in the Format param-
eter, and returns the resulting string.
For an explanation of the formatting characters usable in the Format parameter, see FormatFloat
(1575).
1574
See also: FormatFloat (1575), FloatToText (1565)
76.14.128 FormatDateTime
Synopsis: Return a string representation of a TDateTime value with a given format.
Declaration: function FormatDateTime(const FormatStr: string;DateTime: TDateTime;
Options: TFormatDateTimeOptions) : string
function FormatDateTime(const FormatStr: string;DateTime: TDateTime;
Options: TFormatDateTimeOptions) : string
Visibility: default
Description: FormatDateTime formats the date and time encoded in DateTime according to the format-
ting given in FormatStr. The complete list of formatting characters can be found in formatchars
(1482).
Errors: On error (such as an invalid character in the formatting string), and EConvertError exception is
raised.
See also: DateTimeToStr (1530), DateToStr (1533), TimeToStr (1627), StrToDateTime (1616)
Program Example14 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e FormatDateTime f u n c t i o n }
Var ThisMoment : TDateTime ;
Begin
ThisMoment : =Now;
W r i t e l n ( ’Now : ’ , FormatDateTime ( ’ hh : nn ’ , ThisMoment ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Now : ’ , FormatDateTime ( ’DD MM YYYY ’ , ThisMoment ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Now : ’ , FormatDateTime ( ’ c ’ , ThisMoment ) ) ;
End .
76.14.129 FormatFloat
Synopsis: Format a float according to a certain mask.
Declaration: function FormatFloat(const Format: string;Value: Extended) : string
function FormatFloat(const Format: string;Value: Extended;
Visibility: default
Description: FormatFloat formats the floating-point value given by Value using the format specifications in
Format. The format specifier can give format specifications for positive, negative or zero values
(separated by a semicolon).
If the formatspecifier is empty or the value needs more than 18 digits to be correctly represented, the
result is formatted with a call to FloatToStrF (1563) with the ffGeneral format option.
The following format specifiers are supported:
1575
0is a digit place holder. If there is a corresponding digit in the value being formatted, then it replaces
the 0. If not, the 0 is left as-is.
#is also a digit place holder. If there is a corresponding digit in the value being formatted, then it
replaces the #. If not, it is removed. by a space.
.determines the location of the decimal point. Only the first ’.’ character is taken into account.
If the value contains digits after the decimal point, then it is replaced by the value of the
DecimalSeparator character.
,determines the use of the thousand separator character in the output string. If the format string con-
tains one or more ’,’ charactes, then thousand separators will be used. The ThousandSeparator
character is used.
E+determines the use of scientific notation. If ’E+’ or ’E-’ (or their lowercase counterparts) are
present then scientific notation is used. The number of digits in the output string is determined
by the number of 0 characters after the ’E+’
;This character separates sections for positive, negative, and zero numbers in the format string.
Errors: If an error occurs, an exception is raised.

See also: FloatToStr (1562)
Program Example89 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e F o r ma t F l o at f u n c t i o n }
Const
NrFormat =9;
F o r m a t S t r i n g s : Array [ 1 . . NrFormat ] of s t r i n g = (
’’,
’0 ’ ,
’ 0.00 ’ ,
’ #.## ’ ,
’ # ,##0.00 ’ ,
’ # ,##0.00;(# ,##0.00) ’ ,
’ # , # # 0 . 0 0 ; ; Zero ’ ,
’ 0.000E+00 ’ ,
’ #.###E−0 ’ ) ;
NrValue = 5 ;
FormatValues : Array [ 1 . . NrValue ] of Double =
(1234 , −1234 ,0.5 ,0 , −0.5);
Width = 1 2 ;
FWidth = 2 0 ;
Var
I , J : Integer ;
S : String ;
begin
Write ( ’ Format ’ : FWidth ) ;
For I : = 1 to NrValue do
Write ( FormatValues [ i ] : Width : 2 ) ;
Writeln ;
For I : = 1 to NrFormat do
1576
begin
Write ( F o r m a t S t r i n g s [ i ] : FWidth ) ;
For J : = 1 to NrValue do
begin
S: = FormatFloat ( F o r m a t S t r i n g s [ I ] , FormatValues [ j ] ) ;
Write (S : Width ) ;
end ;
Writeln ;
end ;
End .
76.14.130 FreeAndNil
Synopsis: Free object if needed, and set object reference to Nil
Declaration: procedure FreeAndNil(var obj)

Visibility: default
Description: FreeAndNil will free the object in Obj and will set the reference in Obj to Nil. The reference
is set to Nil first, so if an exception occurs in the destructor of the object, the reference will be Nil
anyway.
Errors: Exceptions that occur during the destruction of Obj are not caught.
76.14.131 GetAppConfigDir
Synopsis: Return the appropriate directory for the application’s configuration files.
Declaration: function GetAppConfigDir(Global: Boolean) : string

Visibility: default
Description: GetAppConfigDir returns the name of a directory in which the application should store its con-
figuration files on the current OS. If the parameter Global is True then the directory returned is
a global directory, i.e. valid for all users on the system. If the parameter Global is false, then
the directory is specific for the user who is executing the program. On systems that do not support
multi-user environments, these two directories may be the same.
The directory which is returned is the name of the directory where the application is supposed to
store files. This does not mean that the directory exists, or that the user can write in this directory
(especially if Global=True). It just returns the name of the appropriate location. Also note that
the returned name always contains an ending path delimiter.
On systems where the operating system provides a call to determine this location, this call will be
used. On systems where there is no such call, an algorithm is used which reflects common practice
on that system.
The application name is deduced from the binary name via the ApplicationName (1519) call, but can
be configured by means of the OnGetApplicationName (1502) callback.
If VendorName (1634) is not-empty, then VendorName will also be inserted before the application-
specific directory.
Errors: None.
See also: GetAppConfigFile (1578), ApplicationName (1519), OnGetApplicationName (1502), CreateDir
(1527), SysConfigDir (1490), VendorName (1634)
1577
76.14.132 GetAppConfigFile
Synopsis: Return an appropriate name for an application configuration file.
Declaration: function GetAppConfigFile(Global: Boolean) : string

function GetAppConfigFile(Global: Boolean;SubDir: Boolean) : string
Visibility: default
Description: GetAppConfigFile returns the name of a file in which the application can store its configuration
parameters. The exact name and location of the file depends on the customs of the operating system.
The Global parameter determines whether it is a global configuration file (value True) or a per-
sonal configuration file (value False).
The parameter SubDir, in case it is set to True, will insert the name of a directory before the
filename. This can be used in case the application needs to store other data than configuration data
in an application-specific directory. Default behaviour is to set this to False.
Note that on Windows, even when Subdir is False, a subdirectory is created for the application
configuration files, as per the windows specifications. Specifying true will create a subdirectory of
the application settings subdirectory.
The default file extension of the returned file is: .cfg
No assumptions should be made about the existence or writeability of this file, or the directory where
the file should reside. It is best to call ForceDirectories (1567) prior to opening a file with the resulting
filename.
On systems where the operating system provides a call to determine the location of configuration
files, this call will be used. On systems where there is no such call, an algorithm is used which
reflects common practice on that system.
The application name is deduced from the binary name via the ApplicationName (1519) call, but can
be configured by means of the OnGetApplicationName (1502) callback.
If VendorName (1634) is not-empty, then VendorName will be inserted in the path for the config
file directory.
Errors: None.
See also: GetAppConfigDir (1577), OnGetApplicationName (1502), ApplicationName (1519), CreateDir (1527),
ConfigExtension (1484), SysConfigDir (1490), VendorName (1634)
76.14.133 GetCurrentDir
Synopsis: Return the current working directory of the application.
Declaration: function GetCurrentDir : AnsiString

Visibility: default
Description: GetCurrentDir returns the current working directory.
Errors: None.
See also: SetCurrentDir (1598), DiskFree (1537), DiskSize (1537)
1578
Program Example28 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e G e t C u r r e n t D i r f u n c t i o n }
Begin
Writeln ( ’ Current D i r e c t o r y i s : ’ , GetCurrentDir ) ;
End .
76.14.134 GetDirs
Synopsis: Return a list of directory names from a path.
Declaration: function GetDirs(var DirName: UnicodeString;
var Dirs: Array of PWideChar) : LongInt
function GetDirs(var DirName: RawByteString;
var Dirs: Array of PAnsiChar) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: GetDirs splits DirName in a null-byte separated list of directory names, Dirs is an array of
PChars, pointing to these directory names. The function returns the number of directories found,
or -1 if none were found. DirName must contain only OSDirSeparator as Directory separator chars.
Errors: None.
See also: ExtractRelativePath (1547)
Program Example45 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e G e t D i r s f u n c t i o n }
{ $H+ }
Var D i r s : Array [ 0 . . 1 2 7 ] of pchar ;

I , Count : l o n g i n t ;
D i r , NewDir : S t r i n g ;
Begin
Dir := GetCurrentDir ;
Writeln ( ’ Dir : ’ , Dir ) ;
NewDir : = ’ ’ ;
count : = G e t D i r s ( D i r , D i r s ) ;
For I : = 0 to Count −1 do
begin
NewDir : = NewDir+ ’ / ’ +StrPas ( D i r s [ I ] ) ;
W r i t e l n ( NewDir ) ;
end ;
End .
1579
76.14.135 GetEnvironmentString
Synopsis: Return an environment variable by index.
Declaration: function GetEnvironmentString(Index: Integer) : AnsiString

Visibility: default
Description: GetEnvironmentString returns the Index-th environment variable. The index is 1 based,
and is bounded from above by the result of GetEnvironmentVariableCount (1580).
For an example, GetEnvironmentVariableCount (1580).
Remark: Note that on Windows, environment strings can start with an equal sign (=). This is a trick used
to pass the current working directory to a newly created proces. In this case, extracting the variable
name as the characters before the first equal sign will result in an empty name.
Errors: If there is no environment, an empty string is returned.

See also: GetEnvironmentVariable (1580), GetEnvironmentVariableCount (1580)
76.14.136 GetEnvironmentVariable
Synopsis: Return the value of an environment variable.
Declaration: function GetEnvironmentVariable(const EnvVar: AnsiString) : AnsiString
function GetEnvironmentVariable(const EnvVar: UnicodeString)
: UnicodeString
Visibility: default
Description: GetEnvironmentVariable returns the value of the EnvVar environment variable. If the spec-
ified variable does not exist or EnvVar is empty, an empty string is returned.
See also: GetEnvironmentString (1580), GetEnvironmentVariableCount (1580)
76.14.137 GetEnvironmentVariableCount
Synopsis: Return the number of variables in the environment.
Declaration: function GetEnvironmentVariableCount : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: GetEnvironmentVariableCount returns the number of variables in the environment. The
number is 1 based, but the result may be zero if there are no environment variables.
Errors: If there is no environment, -1 may be returned.
See also: GetEnvironmentString (1580), GetEnvironmentVariable (1580)
{ $h+ }
program example92 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e
GetEnvironmentVariableCount f u n c t i o n }
1580
Var
I : Integer ;
begin
For I : = 1 to GetEnvironmentVariableCount do
Writeln ( i : 3 , ’ : ’ , GetEnvironmentString ( i ) ) ;
end .
76.14.138 GetFileHandle
Synopsis: Extract OS handle from an untyped file or text file.
Declaration: function GetFileHandle(var f: File) : THandle
function GetFileHandle(var f: Text) : THandle
Visibility: default
Description: GetFileHandle returns the operating system handle for the file descriptor F. It can be used in
various file operations which are not directly supported by the pascal language.
76.14.139 GetLastOSError
Synopsis: Return the last code from the OS.
Declaration: function GetLastOSError : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: GetLastOSError returns the error code from the last operating system call. It does not reset this
code. In general, it should be called when an operating system call reported an error condition. In
that case, GetLastOSError gives extended information about the error.
No assumptions should be made about the resetting of the error code by subsequent OS calls. This
may be platform dependent.
See also: RaiseLastOSError (1595)
76.14.140 GetLocalTime
Synopsis: Get the local time.
Declaration: procedure GetLocalTime(var SystemTime: TSystemTime)

Visibility: default
Description: GetLocalTime returns the system time in a TSystemTime (1498) format.
Errors: None.
See also: Now (1593), Date (1529), Time (1625), TSystemTime (1498)
1581
76.14.141 GetLocalTimeOffset
Synopsis: Return local timezone offset
Declaration: function GetLocalTimeOffset : Integer

Visibility: default
Description: GetLocalTimeOffset returns the local timezone offset in minutes. This is the difference be-
tween UTC time and local time:
UTC = LocalTime + GetLocalTimeOffset
Note that on Linux/Unix, this information may be inaccurate around the DST time changes (for
optimization). In that case, the unix.ReReadLocalTime (1777) unit must be used to re-initialize the
timezone information.
See also: unix.ReReadLocalTime (1777), Date (1529), Time (1625), Now (1593)
76.14.142 GetModuleName
Synopsis: Return the name of the current module
Declaration: function GetModuleName(Module: HMODULE) : string
Visibility: default
Description: GetModuleName returns the name of the current module. On windows, this is the name of the
executable when executed in an executable, or the name of the library when executed in a library.
On all other platforms, the result is always empty, since they provide no such functionality.
76.14.143 GetTempDir
Synopsis: Return name of system’s temporary directory
Declaration: function GetTempDir(Global: Boolean) : string
function GetTempDir : string
Visibility: default
Description: GetTempDir returns the temporary directory of the system. If Global is True (the default
value) it returns the system temporary directory, if it is False then a directory private to the user is
returned. The returned name will end with a directory delimiter character.
These directories may be the same. No guarantee is made that this directory exists or is writeable by
the user.
The OnGetTempDir (1503) handler may be set to provide custom handling of this routine: One could
implement callbacks which take into consideration frameworks like KDE or GNOME, and return a
different value from the default system implementation.
See also: OnGetTempDir (1503), GetTempFileName (1583)
1582
76.14.144 GetTempFileName
Synopsis: Return the name of a temporary file.
Declaration: function GetTempFileName(const Dir: string;const Prefix: string)

: string
function GetTempFileName : string
function GetTempFileName(Dir: PChar;Prefix: PChar;uUnique: DWord;
TempFileName: PChar) : DWord
Visibility: default
Description: GetTempFileName returns the name of a temporary file in directory Dir. The name of the file
starts with Prefix.
If Dir is empty, the value returned by GetTempDir is used, and if Prefix is empty, ’TMP’ is
used.
The OnGetTempFile (1503) handler may be set to provide custom handling of this routine: One could
implement callbacks which take into consideration frameworks like KDE or GNOME, and return a
different value from the default system implementation.
See also: GetTempDir (1582), OnGetTempFile (1503)
76.14.145 GetTickCount
Synopsis: Get tick count (32-bit, deprecated)
Declaration: function GetTickCount : LongWord
Visibility: default
Description: GetTickCount returns an increasing clock tick count. It is useful for time measurements, but no
assumtions should be made as to the interval between the ticks. This function is provided for Delphi
compatibility, use GetTickCount64 (1583) instead.
See also: GetTickCount64 (1583), Now (1593), Time (1625), Sleep (1599)
76.14.146 GetTickCount64
Synopsis: Get tick count (64-bit)
Declaration: function GetTickCount64 : QWord
Visibility: default
Description: GetTickCount64 returns an increasing clock tick count. It is useful for time measurements, but
no assumtions should be made as to the interval between the ticks.
See also: Now (1593), Time (1625), Sleep (1599)
1583
76.14.147 GetUserDir
Synopsis: Returns the current user’s home directory.
Declaration: function GetUserDir : string

Visibility: default
Description: GetUserDir returns the home directory of the current user. On Unix-like systems (that includes
Mac OS X), this is the value of the HOME environment variable. On Windows, this is the PROFILE
special folder. On all other platforms, the application installation directory is returned.
If non-empty, it contains a trailing path delimiter.
See also: GetAppConfigDir (1577)
76.14.148 GuidCase
Synopsis: Return the index of a GUID in an array of GUID values
Declaration: function GuidCase(const GUID: TGuid;const List: Array of TGuid)
: Integer
Visibility: default
Description: GuidCase returns the index of GUID in the array List, where 0 denotes the first element in the
list. If GUID is not present in the list, -1 is returned.
See also: IsEqualGUID (1589)
76.14.149 GUIDToString
Synopsis: Convert a TGUID to a string representation.
Declaration: function GUIDToString(const GUID: TGuid) : string

Visibility: default
Description: GUIDToString converts the GUID identifier in GUID to a string representation in the form
{XXXXXXXX-XXXX-XXXX-XXXX-XXXXXXXXXXXX}
Where each X is a hexadecimal digit.

Errors: None.
See also: Supports (1622), #rtl.system.TGUID (1272), StringToGUID (1606), IsEqualGuid (1589)
76.14.150 HashName
Synopsis: Calculate a hash from a null-terminated string
Declaration: function HashName(Name: PAnsiChar) : LongWord
Visibility: default
Description: HashName calculates a hash value from a null terminated string. The hash value is calculated in
such a way that it returns the same value for strings that only differ in case.
1584
76.14.151 HookSignal
Synopsis: Hook a specified signal
Declaration: procedure HookSignal(RtlSigNum: Integer)

Visibility: default
Description: HookSignal installs the RTL default signal handler for signal RtlSigNum. It does not check
whether the signal is already handled, and should therefor only be called if InquireSignal re-
turns ssNotHooked.
76.14.152 IncAMonth
Synopsis: Increase a date with a certain amount of months
Declaration: procedure IncAMonth(var Year: Word;var Month: Word;var Day: Word;
NumberOfMonths: Integer)
Visibility: default
Description: IncAMonth increases the date as specified by Year, Month, Day with NumberOfMonths. It
takes care of the number of days in a month when calculating the result.
This function does the same as IncMonth (1586), but operates on an already decoded date.
See also: IncMonth (1586)
76.14.153 IncludeLeadingPathDelimiter
Synopsis: Prepend a path delimiter if there is not already one.
Declaration: function IncludeLeadingPathDelimiter(const Path: UnicodeString)
: UnicodeString
function IncludeLeadingPathDelimiter(const Path: RawByteString)
: RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: IncludeLeadingPathDelimiter will insert a path delimiter (#rtl.system.DirectorySeparator
(1231)) in the first position of Path, if there is not already a directory separator at that position.
It will return the resulting string. If the path is empty, a DirectorySeparator character is
returned.
See also: IncludeTrailingPathDelimiter (1586), ExcludeLeadingPathDelimiter (1541), ExcludeTrailingPathDe-
limiter (1542), ConcatPaths (1527)
Program Example94 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e I n c l u d e L e a d i n g P a t h D e l i m i t e r f u n c t i o n }
Begin
End .
1585
76.14.154 IncludeTrailingBackslash
Synopsis: Add trailing directory separator to a pathname, if needed.
Declaration: function IncludeTrailingBackslash(const Path: UnicodeString)

: UnicodeString
function IncludeTrailingBackslash(const Path: RawByteString)
: RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: IncludeTrailingBackslash is provided for backwards compatibility with Delphi. Use In-
cludeTrailingPathDelimiter (1586) instead.
See also: IncludeTrailingPathDelimiter (1586), ExcludeTrailingPathDelimiter (1542), PathDelim (1488), Is-
PathDelimiter (1590)
76.14.155 IncludeTrailingPathDelimiter
Synopsis: Add trailing directory separator to a pathname, if needed.
Declaration: function IncludeTrailingPathDelimiter(const Path: UnicodeString)
: UnicodeString
function IncludeTrailingPathDelimiter(const Path: RawByteString)
: RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: IncludeTrailingPathDelimiter adds a trailing path delimiter character (PathDelim (1488))
to Path if none is present yet, and returns the result.
If Path is empty, a path delimiter is returned, for Delphi compatibility.
See also: IncludeTrailingBackslash (1586), ExcludeTrailingPathDelimiter (1542), PathDelim (1488), IsPathDe-
limiter (1590)
76.14.156 IncMonth
Synopsis: Increases the month in a TDateTime value with a given amount.
Declaration: function IncMonth(const DateTime: TDateTime;NumberOfMonths: Integer)

: TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: IncMonth increases the month number in DateTime with NumberOfMonths. It wraps the
result as to get a month between 1 and 12, and updates the year accordingly. NumberOfMonths
can be negative, and can be larger than 12 (in absolute value).
Errors: None.
See also: Date (1529), Time (1625), Now (1593)
1586
Program Example15 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e IncMonth f u n c t i o n }
Var ThisDay : TDateTime ;
Begin
ThisDay : = Date ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ ThisDay : ’ , DateToStr ( ThisDay ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ 6 months ago : ’ , DateToStr ( IncMonth ( ThisDay , − 6 ) ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ 6 months from now : ’ , DateToStr ( IncMonth ( ThisDay , 6 ) ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ 1 2 months ago : ’ , DateToStr ( IncMonth ( ThisDay , − 1 2 ) ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ 1 2 months from now : ’ , DateToStr ( IncMonth ( ThisDay , 1 2 ) ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ 1 8 months ago : ’ , DateToStr ( IncMonth ( ThisDay , − 1 8 ) ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ 1 8 months from now : ’ , DateToStr ( IncMonth ( ThisDay , 1 8 ) ) ) ;
End .
76.14.157 InquireSignal
Synopsis: Check whether a signal handler is set (unix only)
Declaration: function InquireSignal(RtlSigNum: Integer) : TSignalState
Visibility: default
Description: RtlSigNum will check whether the signal RtlSigNum is being handled, and by whom. It returns
a TSignalState result to report the state of the signal, which can be one of the following values:
ssNotHookedNo signal handler is set for the signal.

ssHookedA signal handler is set by the RTL code for the signal.
ssOverriddenA signal handler was set for the signal by third-party code.
This routine works by resetting the signal handlers, so it is risky to call.
76.14.158 IntToHex
Synopsis: Convert an integer value to a hexadecimal string.
Declaration: function IntToHex(Value: LongInt;Digits: Integer) : string

function IntToHex(Value: Int64;Digits: Integer) : string
function IntToHex(Value: QWord;Digits: Integer) : string
Visibility: default
Description: IntToHex converts Value to a hexadecimal string representation. The result will contain at least
Digits characters. If Digits is less than the needed number of characters, the string will NOT
be truncated. If Digits is larger than the needed number of characters, the result is padded with
zeroes.
Errors: None.
See also: IntToStr (1588)
1587
Program Example73 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e IntToHex f u n c t i o n }
Begin
For I : = 0 to 3 1 do
begin
W r i t e l n ( IntToHex ( 1 shl I , 8 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( IntToHex ( 1 5 shl I , 8 ) )
end ;
End .
76.14.159 IntToStr
Synopsis: Convert an integer value to a decimal string.
Declaration: function IntToStr(Value: LongInt) : string

function IntToStr(Value: Int64) : string
function IntToStr(Value: QWord) : string
Visibility: default
Description: IntToStr coverts Value to it’s string representation. The resulting string has only as much
characters as needed to represent the value. If the value is negative a minus sign is prepended to the
string.
Errors: None.
See also: IntToHex (1587), StrToInt (1618)
Program Example74 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e I n t T o S t r f u n c t i o n }
Begin
For I : = 0 to 3 1 do
begin
W r i t e l n ( I n t T o S t r ( 1 shl I ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( I n t T o S t r ( 1 5 shl I ) ) ;
end ;
End .
1588
76.14.160 IsDelimiter
Synopsis: Check whether a given string is a delimiter character.
Declaration: function IsDelimiter(const Delimiters: string;const S: string;
Index: Integer) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IsDelimiter checks whether the Index-th character in the string S is a delimiter character as
passed in Delimiters. If Index is out of range, False is returned.
Errors: None.
See also: LastDelimiter (1591)
76.14.161 IsEqualGUID
Synopsis: Check whether two TGUID variables are equal.
Declaration: function IsEqualGUID(const guid1: TGuid;const guid2: TGuid) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IsEqualGUID checks whether guid1 and guid2 are equal, and returns True if this is the case,
or False otherwise.
See also: Supports (1622), #rtl.system.TGUID (1272), StringToGUID (1606), GuidToString (1584)
76.14.162 IsLeapYear
Synopsis: Determine whether a year is a leap year.
Declaration: function IsLeapYear(Year: Word) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IsLeapYear returns True if Year is a leap year, False otherwise.
Errors: None.
See also: IncMonth (1586), Date (1529)
Program Example16 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e IsLeapYear f u n c t i o n }
Var YY,MM, dd : Word ;
Procedure TestYear ( Y : Word ) ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( Y , ’ i s l e a p year : ’ , IsLeapYear (Y ) ) ;
end ;
Begin
1589
DeCodeDate ( Date , YY,mm, dd ) ;

TestYear ( yy ) ;
TestYear ( 2 0 0 0 ) ;
TestYear ( 1 9 0 0 ) ;
TestYear ( 1 6 0 0 ) ;
TestYear ( 1 9 9 2 ) ;
TestYear ( 1 9 9 5 ) ;
End .
76.14.163 IsPathDelimiter
Synopsis: Is the character at the given position a pathdelimiter ?
Declaration: function IsPathDelimiter(const Path: UnicodeString;Index: Integer)
: Boolean
function IsPathDelimiter(const Path: RawByteString;Index: Integer)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IsPathDelimiter returns True if the character at position Index equals PathDelim (1488),
i.e. if it is a path delimiter character for the current platform.
Errors: IncludeTrailingPathDelimiter (1586)ExcludeTrailingPathDelimiter (1542)PathDelim (1488)
76.14.164 IsValidIdent
Synopsis: Check whether a string is a valid identifier name.
Declaration: function IsValidIdent(const Ident: string) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IsValidIdent returns True if Ident can be used as a compoent name. It returns False
otherwise. Ident must consist of a letter or underscore, followed by a combination of letters,
numbers or underscores to be a valid identifier.
Errors: None.
Program Example75 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e I s V a l i d I d e n t f u n c t i o n }
begin
Write ( ’ " ’ ,S , ’ " i s ’ ) ;
I f not I s V A l i d I d e n t (S ) then
Writeln ( ’ a v a l i d i d e n t i f i e r ’ ) ;
end ;
Begin
1590
Testit ( ’ _MyObj ’ ) ;
Testit ( ’ My__Obj1 ’ ) ;
Testit ( ’ My_1_Obj ’ ) ;
Testit ( ’ 1MyObject ’ ) ;
Testit ( ’ My@Object ’ ) ;
Testit ( ’ M123 ’ ) ;
End .
76.14.165 LastDelimiter
Synopsis: Return the last occurrence of a set of delimiters in a string.
Declaration: function LastDelimiter(const Delimiters: string;const S: string)
: Integer
Visibility: default
Description: LastDelimiter returns the last occurrence of any character in the set Delimiters in the string
S.
Program example88 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e L a s t D e l i m i t e r f u n c t i o n }
uses S y s U t i l s ;
begin
Writeln ( L a s t D e l i m i t e r ( ’ \ . : ’ , ’ c : \ filename . ext ’ ) ) ;
end .
76.14.166 LeftStr
Synopsis: Return a number of characters starting at the left of a string.
Declaration: function LeftStr(const S: string;Count: Integer) : string

Visibility: default
Description: LeftStr returns the Count leftmost characters of S. It is equivalent to a call to Copy(S,1,Count).
Errors: None.
See also: RightStr (1596), TrimLeft (1628), TrimRight (1628), Trim (1627)
Program Example76 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e L e f t S t r f u n c t i o n }
Begin
Writeln ( L e f t S t r ( ’ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz ’ , 2 0 ) ) ;
1591
Writeln ( L e f t S t r ( ’ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz ’ , 1 5 ) ) ;
Writeln ( L e f t S t r ( ’ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz ’ , 1 ) ) ;
Writeln ( L e f t S t r ( ’ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz ’ , 2 0 0 ) ) ;
End .
76.14.167 LoadStr
Synopsis: Load a string from the resource tables.
Declaration: function LoadStr(Ident: Integer) : string
Visibility: default
Description: This function is not yet implemented. resources are not yet supported.
76.14.168 LowerCase
Synopsis: Return a lowercase version of a string.
Declaration: function LowerCase(const s: string) : string; Overload
function LowerCase(const V: variant) : string; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: LowerCase returns the lowercase equivalent of S. Ansi characters are not taken into account, only
ASCII codes below 127 are converted. It is completely equivalent to the lowercase function of the
system unit, and is provided for compatibility only.
Lowercase does not change the number of characters (or bytes) in an ansistring or shortstring.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiLowerCase (1510), UpperCase (1634), AnsiUpperCase (1518)
Program Example77 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e LowerCase f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( LowerCase ( ’ THIS WILL COME o u t a l l LoWeRcAsE ! ’ ) ) ;
End .
76.14.169 MSecsToTimeStamp
Synopsis: Convert a number of milliseconds to a TDateTime value.
Declaration: function MSecsToTimeStamp(MSecs: Comp) : TTimeStamp
Visibility: default
Description: MSecsTiTimeStamp converts the given number of milliseconds to a TTimeStamp date/time
notation.
Use TTimeStamp variables if you need to keep very precise track of time.
1592
Errors: None.
See also: TimeStampToMSecs (1626), DateTimeToTimeStamp (1533)
Program Example17 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e MSecsToTimeStamp f u n c t i o n }
Var MS : Comp ;
TS : TTimeStamp ;
DT : TDateTime ;
Begin
TS: = DateTimeToTimeStamp (Now ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Now i n days s i n c e 1 / 1 / 0 0 0 1 : ’ ,TS . Date ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Now i n m i l l i s e c s s i n c e m i d n i g h t : ’ ,TS . Time ) ;
MS: = TimeStampToMSecs ( TS ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Now i n m i l l i s e c s s i n c e 1 / 1 / 0 0 0 1 : ’ ,MS) ;
MS: =MS−1000∗3600∗2;
TS: = MSecsToTimeStamp (MS) ;
DT: = TimeStampToDateTime ( TS ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Now minus 1 day : ’ , DateTimeToStr (DT ) ) ;
End .
76.14.170 NewStr
Synopsis: Allocate a new ansistring on the heap.
Declaration: function NewStr(const S: string) : PString; Overload

Visibility: default
Description: NewStr assigns a new dynamic string on the heap, copies S into it, and returns a pointer to the
newly assigned string.
This function is obsolete, and shouldn’t be used any more. The AnsiString mechanism also
allocates ansistrings on the heap, and should be preferred over this mechanism.
For an example, see AssignStr (1520).
Errors: If not enough memory is present, an EOutOfMemory exception will be raised.
See also: AssignStr (1520), DisposeStr (1538)
76.14.171 Now
Synopsis: Returns the current date and time.
Declaration: function Now : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: Now returns the current date and time. It is equivalent to Date+Time.
Errors: None.
1593
See also: Date (1529), Time (1625)
Program Example18 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e Now f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’Now : ’ , DateTimeToStr (Now ) ) ;
End .
76.14.172 OutOfMemoryError
Synopsis: Raise an EOutOfMemory exception
Declaration: procedure OutOfMemoryError
Visibility: default
Description: OutOfMemoryError raises an EOutOfMemory (1643) exception, with an exception object that
has been allocated on the heap at program startup. The program should neved create an EOutOfMem-
ory (1643) exception, but always call this routine.
See also: EOutOfMemory (1643)
76.14.173 QuotedStr
Synopsis: Return a quotes version of a string.
Declaration: function QuotedStr(const S: string) : string
Visibility: default
Description: QuotedStr returns the string S, quoted with single quotes. This means that S is enclosed in single
quotes, and every single quote in S is doubled. It is equivalent to a call to AnsiQuotedStr(s,
””).
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiQuotedStr (1511), AnsiExtractQuotedStr (1509)
Program Example78 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e QuotedStr f u n c t i o n }
Begin
S: = ’ He s a i d ’ ’ H e l l o ’ ’ and walked on ’ ;
Writeln ( S ) ;
1594
W r i t e l n ( ’ becomes ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( QuotedStr (S ) ) ;
End .
76.14.174 RaiseLastOSError
Synopsis: Raise an exception with the last Operating System error code.
Declaration: procedure RaiseLastOSError; Overload
procedure RaiseLastOSError(LastError: Integer); Overload
Visibility: default
Description: RaiseLastOSError raises an EOSError (1643) exception with the error code returned by GetLastOSError.
If the Error code is nonzero, then the corresponding error message will be returned. If the error code
is zero, a standard message will be returned.
Errors: This procedure may not be implemented on all platforms. If it is not, then a normal Exception (1645)
will be raised.
See also: EOSError (1643), GetLastOSError (1581), Exception (1645)
76.14.175 RemoveDir
Synopsis: Remove a directory from the filesystem.
Declaration: function RemoveDir(const Dir: RawByteString) : Boolean
function RemoveDir(const Dir: UnicodeString) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: RemoveDir removes directory Dir from the disk. If the directory is not absolue, it is appended to
the current working directory.
For an example, see CreateDir (1527).
Errors: In case of error (e.g. the directory isn’t empty) the function returns False. If successful, True is
returned.
76.14.176 RenameFile
Synopsis: Rename a file.
Declaration: function RenameFile(const OldName: UnicodeString;
const NewName: UnicodeString) : Boolean
function RenameFile(const OldName: RawByteString;
const NewName: RawByteString) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: RenameFile renames a file from OldName to NewName. The function returns True if success-
ful, False otherwise. For safety, the new name must be a full path specification, including the
directory, otherwise it will be assumed to be a filename relative to the current working directory.
Remark: The implementation of RenameFile relies on the undelying OS’s support for renaming/-
moving a file. Whether or not a file can be renamed accros disks or partitions depends entirely on the
OS. On unix-like OS-es, the rename function will fail when used accross partitions. On Windows, it
will work.
1595
Errors: On Error, False is returned.

See also: DeleteFile (1536)
Program Example44 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e RenameFile f u n c t i o n }
Var F : L o n g i n t ;
S : String ;
Begin
S: = ’Some s h o r t f i l e . ’ ;
F : = F i l e C r e a t e ( ’ t e s t . dap ’ ) ;
F i l e W r i t e ( F , S [ 1 ] , Length (S ) ) ;
FileClose ( F ) ;
I f RenameFile ( ’ t e s t . dap ’ , ’ t e s t . d a t ’ ) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ S u c c e s s f u l l y renamed f i l e s . ’ ) ;
End .
76.14.177 ReplaceDate
Synopsis: Replace the date part of a date/time stamp
Declaration: procedure ReplaceDate(var DateTime: TDateTime;const NewDate: TDateTime)
Visibility: default
Description: ReplaceDate replaces the date part of DateTime with NewDate. The time part is left un-
changed.
See also: ReplaceTime (1596)
76.14.178 ReplaceTime
Synopsis: Replace the time part
Declaration: procedure ReplaceTime(var dati: TDateTime;NewTime: TDateTime)
Visibility: default
Description: ReplaceTime replaces the time part in dati with NewTime. The date part remains untouched.
76.14.179 RightStr
Synopsis: Return a number of characters from a string, starting at the end.
Declaration: function RightStr(const S: string;Count: Integer) : string
Visibility: default
Description: RightStr returns the Count rightmost characters of S. It is equivalent to a call to Copy(S,Length(S)+1-Count,Coun
If Count is larger than the actual length of S only the real length will be used.
1596
Errors: None.
See also: LeftStr (1591), Trim (1627), TrimLeft (1628), TrimRight (1628)
Program Example79 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e R i g h t S t r f u n c t i o n }
Begin
Writeln ( RightStr ( ’ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz ’ ,20));
End .
76.14.180 SafeLoadLibrary
Synopsis: Load a library safely
Declaration: function SafeLoadLibrary(const FileName: AnsiString;ErrorMode: DWord)
: HMODULE
Visibility: default
Description: SafeLoadLibrary saves and restores some registers before and after issuing a call to LoadLibrary.
Errors: None.
76.14.181 SameFileName
Synopsis: Are two filenames referring to the same file ?
Declaration: function SameFileName(const S1: string;const S2: string) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: SameFileName returns True if calling AnsiCompareFileName (1506) with arguments S1 and
S2 returns 0, and returns False otherwise.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiCompareFileName (1506)
76.14.182 SameText
Synopsis: Checks whether 2 strings are the same (case insensitive)
Declaration: function SameText(const s1: string;const s2: string) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: SameText calls CompareText (1526) with S1 and S2 as parameters and returns True if the result
of that call is zero, or False otherwise.
Errors: None.
See also: CompareText (1526), AnsiSameText (1512), AnsiSameStr (1511)
1597
76.14.183 SetCurrentDir
Synopsis: Set the current directory of the application.
Declaration: function SetCurrentDir(const NewDir: RawByteString) : Boolean

function SetCurrentDir(const NewDir: UnicodeString) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: SetCurrentDir sets the current working directory of your program to NewDir. It returns True
if the function was successfull, False otherwise.
Errors: In case of error, False is returned.
See also: GetCurrentDir (1578)
76.14.184 SetDirSeparators
Synopsis: Set the directory separators to the known directory separators.
Declaration: function SetDirSeparators(const FileName: UnicodeString) : UnicodeString
function SetDirSeparators(const FileName: RawByteString) : RawByteString
Visibility: default
Description: SetDirSeparators returns FileName with all possible DirSeparators replaced by OSDirSeparator.
Errors: None.
See also: ExpandFileName (1543), ExtractFilePath (1547), ExtractFileDir (1545)
Program Example47 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e S e t D i r S e p a r a t o r s f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( S e t D i r S e p a r a t o r s ( ’ / pp \ b i n / win32 \ ppc386 ’ ) ) ;
End .
76.14.185 ShowException
Synopsis: Show the current exception to the user.
Declaration: procedure ShowException(ExceptObject: TObject;ExceptAddr: Pointer)
Visibility: default
Description: ShowException shows a message stating that a ExceptObject was raised at address ExceptAddr.
It uses ExceptionErrorMessage (1541) to create the message, and is aware of the fact whether the
application is a console application or a GUI application. For a console application, the message is
written to standard error output. For a GUI application, OnShowException (1503) is executed.
1598
Errors: If, for a GUI application, OnShowException (1503) is not set, no message will be displayed to the
user.
The exception message can be at most 255 characters long: It is possible that no memory can be
allocated on the heap, so ansistrings are not available, so a shortstring is used to display the message.
See also: ExceptObject (1541), ExceptAddr (1540), ExceptionErrorMessage (1541)
76.14.186 Sleep
Synopsis: Suspend execution of a program for a certain time.
Declaration: procedure Sleep(milliseconds: Cardinal)
Visibility: default
Description: Sleep suspends the execution of the program for the specified number of milliseconds (milliseconds).
After the specified period has expired, program execution resumes.
Remark: The indicated time is not exact, i.e. it is a minimum time. No guarantees are made as to the exact
duration of the suspension.
76.14.187 SScanf
Synopsis: Scan a string for substrings and return the substrings
Declaration: function SScanf(const s: string;const fmt: string;
const Pointers: Array of Pointer) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: SSCanF scans the string S for the elements specified in Fmt, and returns the elements in the pointers
in Pointers. The Fmt can contain placeholders of the form %X where X can be one of the following
characters:
dPlaceholder for a decimal number.

fPlaceholder for a floating point number (an extended)
sPlaceholder for a string of arbitrary length.
cPlaceholder for a single character
The Pointers array contains a list of pointers, each pointer should point to a memory location of
a type that corresponds to the type of placeholder in that position:
dA pointer to an integer.
fA pointer to an extended.
sA pointer to an ansistring.
cA pointer to a single character.
Errors: No error checking is performed on the type of the memory location.

1599
76.14.188 StrAlloc
Synopsis: Allocate a null-terminated string on the heap.
Declaration: function StrAlloc(Size: Cardinal) : PChar

Visibility: default
Description: StrAlloc reserves memory on the heap for a string with length Len, terminating #0 included,
and returns a pointer to it.
Additionally, StrAlloc allocates 4 extra bytes to store the size of the allocated memory. Therefore
this function is NOT compatible with the StrAlloc (1181) function of the Strings unit.
For an example, see StrBufSize (1600).
Errors: None.
See also: StrBufSize (1600), StrDispose (1603), StrAlloc (1181)
76.14.189 StrBufSize
Synopsis: Return the size of a null-terminated string allocated on the heap.
Declaration: function StrBufSize(Str: PChar) : Cardinal
Visibility: default
Description: StrBufSize returns the memory allocated for Str. This function ONLY gives the correct result
if Str was allocated using StrAlloc (1600).
Errors: If no more memory is available, a runtime error occurs.
See also: StrAlloc (1600), StrDispose (1603)
Program Example46 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e S t r B u f S i z e f u n c t i o n }
{ $H+ }
Const S = ’Some n i c e s t r i n g ’ ;
Var P : Pchar ;
Begin
P: = S t r A l l o c ( Length (S ) + 1 ) ;
StrPCopy ( P , S ) ;
Write ( P , ’ has l e n g t h ’ , length (S ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ and b u f f e r s i z e ’ , S t r B u f S i z e (P ) ) ;
StrDispose (P ) ;
End .
1600
76.14.190 StrByteType
Synopsis: Return the type of byte in a null-terminated string for a multi-byte character set
Declaration: function StrByteType(Str: PChar;Index: Cardinal) : TMbcsByteType
Visibility: default
Description: StrByteType returns the type of byte in the null-terminated string Str at (0-based) position
Index.
Errors: No checking on the index is performed.
See also: TMbcsByteType (1496), ByteType (1522)
76.14.191 strcat
Synopsis: Concatenate 2 null-terminated strings.
Declaration: function strcat(dest: PChar;source: PChar) : PChar
Visibility: default
Description: Attaches Source to Dest and returns Dest.
See also: StrLCat (1606)
Program Example11 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e S t r C a t f u n c t i o n . }
Const P1 : PChar = ’ T h i s i s a PChar S t r i n g . ’ ;
Var P2 : PChar ;
begin
StrMove ( P2 , P1 , StrLen ( P1 ) + 1 ) ; { P2=P1 }
StrCat ( P2 , P1 ) ; { Append P2 once more }
W r i t e l n ( ’ P2 : ’ ,P2 ) ;
StrDispose ( P2 ) ;
end .
76.14.192 StrCharLength
Synopsis: Return the length of a null-terminated string in characters.
Declaration: function StrCharLength(const Str: PChar) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: StrCharLength returns the length of the null-terminated string Str (a widestring) in characters
(not in bytes). It uses the widestring manager to do this.
1601
76.14.193 strcomp
Synopsis: Compare 2 null-terminated strings, case sensitive.
Declaration: function strcomp(str1: PChar;str2: PChar) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: Compares the null-terminated strings S1 and S2. The result is
•A negative Longint when S1<S2.

•0 when S1=S2.
•A positive Longint when S1>S2.
For an example, see StrLComp (1607).

Errors: None.
See also: StrLComp (1607), StrIComp (1605), StrLIComp (1609)
76.14.194 StrCopy
Synopsis: Copy a null-terminated string
Declaration: function strcopy(dest: PChar;source: PChar) : PChar; Overload
function StrCopy(Dest: PWideChar;Source: PWideChar) : PWideChar
; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: Copy the null terminated string in Source to Dest, and returns a pointer to Dest. Dest needs
enough room to contain Source, i.e. StrLen(Source)+1 bytes.
See also: StrPCopy (1612), StrLCopy (1607), StrECopy (1603)
Program Example4 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrCopy f u n c t i o n . }
Const P : PCHar = ’ T h i s i s a PCHAR s t r i n g . ’ ;
var PP : PChar ;
begin
PP: = S t r A l l o c ( S t r l e n (P ) + 1 ) ;
STrCopy ( PP, P ) ;
I f StrComp ( PP, P) < >0 then
W r i t e l n ( ’Oh−oh problems . . . ’ )
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ A l l i s w e l l : PP= ’ ,PP ) ;
StrDispose (PP ) ;
end .
1602
76.14.195 StrDispose
Synopsis: Dispose of a null-terminated string on the heap.
Declaration: procedure StrDispose(Str: PChar)

Visibility: default
Description: StrDispose frees any memory allocated for Str. This function will only function correctly if
Str has been allocated using StrAlloc (1600) from the SysUtils unit.
For an example, see StrBufSize (1600).
Errors: If an invalid pointer is passed, or a pointer not allocated with StrAlloc, an error may occur.
See also: StrBufSize (1600), StrAlloc (1600), StrDispose (1603)
76.14.196 strecopy
Synopsis: Copy a null-terminated string, return a pointer to the end.
Declaration: function strecopy(dest: PChar;source: PChar) : PChar
Visibility: default
Description: Copies the Null-terminated string in Source to Dest, and returns a pointer to the end (i.e. the
terminating Null-character) of the copied string.
Program Example6 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrECopy f u n c t i o n . }
Var PP : PChar ;
begin
PP: = S t r A l l o c ( StrLen (P ) + 1 ) ;
I f L o n g i n t ( StrECopy (PP, P)) − L o n g i n t (PP)<> StrLen (P ) then
else
W r i t e l n ( ’PP= ’ ,PP ) ;
StrDispose (PP ) ;
end .
76.14.197 strend
Synopsis: Return a pointer to the end of a null-terminated string
Declaration: function strend(p: PChar) : PChar
1603
Visibility: default
Description: Returns a pointer to the end of P. (i.e. to the terminating null-character.
Errors: None.
See also: StrLen (1608)
Program Example6 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrEnd f u n c t i o n . }
begin
I f L o n g i n t ( StrEnd (P)) − L o n g i n t (P)<> StrLen (P ) then
else
Writeln ( ’ A l l i s w e l l . . ’ ) ;
end .
76.14.198 StrFmt
Synopsis: Format a string with given arguments, store the result in a buffer.
Declaration: function StrFmt(Buffer: PChar;Fmt: PChar;const args: Array of const)
: PChar
function StrFmt(Buffer: PChar;Fmt: PChar;const Args: Array of const;
const FormatSettings: TFormatSettings) : PChar
Visibility: default
Description: StrFmt will format fmt with Args, as the Format (1567) function does, and it will store the result
in Buffer. The function returns Buffer. Buffer should point to enough space to contain the
whole result.
Errors: for a list of errors, see Format (1567).
See also: StrLFmt (1608), FmtStr (1566), Format (1567), FormatBuf (1574)
Program Example80 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e StrFmt f u n c t i o n }
Begin
SetLEngth ( S , 8 0 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( StrFmt (@S[ 1 ] , ’ For some n i c e examples o f f o m a t t i n g see %s . ’ , [ ’ Format ’ ] ) ) ;
End .
1604
76.14.199 stricomp
Synopsis: Compare 2 null-terminated strings, case insensitive.
Declaration: function stricomp(str1: PChar;str2: PChar) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: Compares the null-terminated strings S1 and S2, ignoring case. The result is

•0 when S1=S2.
Errors: None.
See also: StrLComp (1607), StrComp (1602), StrLIComp (1609)
Program Example8 ;
begin
L:=1;
dec ( l ) ;
end .
76.14.200 StringReplace
Synopsis: Replace occurrences of one substring with another in a string.
Declaration: function StringReplace(const S: string;const OldPattern: string;
const NewPattern: string;Flags: TReplaceFlags)
: string
Visibility: default
Description: StringReplace searches the string S for occurrences of the string OldPattern and, if it is
found, replaces it with NewPattern. It returns the resulting string. The behaviour of StringReplace
can be runed with Flags, which is of type TReplaceFlags (1497). Standard behaviour is to replace
only the first occurrence of OldPattern, and to search case sensitively.
Errors: None.
See also: TReplaceFlags (1497)
1605
76.14.201 StringToGUID
Synopsis: Convert a string to a native TGUID type.
Declaration: function StringToGUID(const S: string) : TGuid

Visibility: default
Description: StringToGUID converts the string S to a valid GUID. The string S should be of the form
{XXXXXXXX-XXXX-XXXX-XXXX-XXXXXXXXXXXX}
Where each X is a hexadecimal digit. The dashes and braces are required.
Errors: In case S contains an invalid GUID representation, a EConvertError (1639) exception is raised.
See also: Supports (1622), #rtl.system.TGUID (1272), GUIDToString (1584), IsEqualGuid (1589)
76.14.202 strlcat
Synopsis: Concatenate 2 null-terminated strings, with length boundary.
Declaration: function strlcat(dest: PChar;source: PChar;l: SizeInt) : PChar
Visibility: default
Description: Adds MaxLen characters from Source to Dest, and adds a terminating null-character. Returns
Dest.
Errors: None.
See also: StrCat (1601)
Program Example12 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e S t r L C a t f u n c t i o n . }
Const P1 : PChar = ’ 1234567890 ’ ;
Var P2 : PChar ;
begin
P2 ^ : = # 0 ; { Zero l e n g t h }
StrCat ( P2 , P1 ) ;
StrLCat ( P2 , P1 , 5 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ P2 = ’ ,P2 ) ;
StrDispose ( P2 )
end .
1606
76.14.203 strlcomp
Synopsis: Compare limited number of characters of 2 null-terminated strings
Declaration: function strlcomp(str1: PChar;str2: PChar;l: SizeInt) : SizeInt

Visibility: default
Description: Compares maximum L characters of the null-terminated strings S1 and S2. The result is

•0 when S1=S2.
Errors: None.
See also: StrComp (1602), StrIComp (1605), StrLIComp (1609)
Program Example8 ;
begin
L:=1;
dec ( l ) ;
end .
76.14.204 StrLCopy
Synopsis: Copy a null-terminated string, limited in length.
Declaration: function strlcopy(dest: PChar;source: PChar;maxlen: SizeInt) : PChar
; Overload
function StrLCopy(Dest: PWideChar;Source: PWideChar;MaxLen: SizeInt)
: PWideChar; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: Copies MaxLen characters from Source to Dest, and makes Dest a null terminated string.

See also: StrCopy (1602), StrECopy (1603)
1607
Program Example5 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrLCopy f u n c t i o n . }
Const P : PCHar = ’ 123456789ABCDEF ’ ;
var PP : PCHar ;
begin
PP: = S t r A l l o c ( 1 1 ) ;
Writeln ( ’ F i r s t 1 0 characters of P : ’ , StrLCopy ( PP, P , 1 0 ) ) ;
StrDispose (PP ) ;
end .
76.14.205 StrLen
Declaration: function strlen(p: PChar) : SizeInt; Overload
function StrLen(p: PWideChar) : SizeInt; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: Returns the length of the null-terminated string P. If P equals Nil then zero (0) is returned.
Errors: None.
Program Example1 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrLen f u n c t i o n . }
Const P : PChar = ’ T h i s i s a c o n s t a n t pchar s t r i n g ’ ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’P : ’ ,p ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ l e n g t h (P ) : ’ , StrLen (P ) ) ;
end .
76.14.206 StrLFmt
Synopsis: Format a string with given arguments, but with limited length.
Declaration: function StrLFmt(Buffer: PChar;Maxlen: Cardinal;Fmt: PChar;
const args: Array of const) : PChar
function StrLFmt(Buffer: PChar;Maxlen: Cardinal;Fmt: PChar;
const FormatSettings: TFormatSettings) : PChar
1608
Visibility: default
Description: StrLFmt will format fmt with Args, as the Format (1567) function does, and it will store max-
imally Maxlen characters of the result in Buffer. The function returns Buffer. Buffer
should point to enough space to contain MaxLen characters.
Errors: for a list of errors, see Format (1567).

See also: StrFmt (1604), FmtStr (1566), Format (1567), FormatBuf (1574)
Program Example80 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e StrFmt f u n c t i o n }
Begin
SetLEngth ( S , 8 0 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( StrLFmt (@S[ 1 ] , 8 0 , ’ For some n i c e examples o f f o m a t t i n g see %s . ’ , [ ’ Format ’ ] ) ) ;
End .
76.14.207 strlicomp
Synopsis: Compare limited number of characters in 2 null-terminated strings, ignoring case.
Declaration: function strlicomp(str1: PChar;str2: PChar;l: SizeInt) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: Compares maximum L characters of the null-terminated strings S1 and S2, ignoring case. The
result is

•0 when S1=S2.
For an example, see StrIComp (1605)

Errors: None.
See also: StrLComp (1607), StrComp (1602), StrIComp (1605)
76.14.208 strlower
Synopsis: Convert null-terminated string to all-lowercase.
Declaration: function strlower(p: PChar) : PChar
Visibility: default
Description: Converts P to an all-lowercase string. Returns P.

Errors: None.
1609
See also: StrUpper (1622)
Program Example14 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrLower and StrUpper f u n c t i o n s . }
Const
P1 : PChar = ’ THIS IS AN UPPERCASE PCHAR STRING ’ ;
P2 : PChar = ’ t h i s i s a lowercase s t r i n g ’ ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Uppercase : ’ , StrUpper ( P2 ) ) ;
StrLower ( P1 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Lowercase : ’ ,P1 ) ;
end .
76.14.209 strmove
Synopsis: Move a null-terminated string to new location.
Declaration: function strmove(dest: PChar;source: PChar;l: SizeInt) : PChar

; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: Copies MaxLen characters from Source to Dest. No terminating null-character is copied. Re-
turns Dest
Errors: None.
Program Example10 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrMove f u n c t i o n . }
Const P1 : PCHAR = ’ T h i s i s a pchar s t r i n g . ’ ;
Var P2 : Pchar ;
begin
P2 : = S t r A l l o c ( StrLen ( P1 ) + 1 ) ;
StrMove ( P2 , P1 , StrLen ( P1 ) + 1 ) ; { P2 : = P1 }
W r i t e l n ( ’ P2 = ’ ,P2 ) ;
StrDispose ( P2 ) ;
end .
1610
76.14.210 strnew
Synopsis: Allocate room for new null-terminated string.
Declaration: function strnew(p: PChar) : PChar; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: Copies P to the Heap, and returns a pointer to the copy.
Errors: Returns Nil if no memory was available for the copy.
See also: StrCopy (1602), StrDispose (1603)
Program Example16 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrNew f u n c t i o n . }
var P2 : PChar ;
begin
P2 : = StrNew ( P1 ) ;
I f P1=P2 then
w r i t e l n ( ’ T h i s can ’ ’ t be happening . . . ’ )
else
w r i t e l n ( ’ P2 : ’ ,P2 ) ;
StrDispose ( P2 ) ;
end .
76.14.211 StrNextChar
Synopsis: Returns a pointer to the location of the next empty character in a null-terminated string
Declaration: function StrNextChar(const Str: PChar) : PChar
Visibility: default
Description: StrNextChar returns a pointer to the null-character that terminates the string Str
Errors: if Str is not properly terminated, an access violation may occur.
76.14.212 StrPas
Synopsis: Convert a null-terminated string to an ansistring.
Declaration: function StrPas(Str: PChar) : string; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: Converts a null terminated string in Str to an Ansitring, and returns this string. This string is NOT
truncated at 255 characters as is the system unit’s version.
Errors: None.
See also: StrPCopy (1612), StrPLCopy (1612)
1611
76.14.213 StrPCopy
Synopsis: Copy an ansistring to a null-terminated string.
Declaration: function StrPCopy(Dest: PChar;const Source: string) : PChar; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: StrPCopy Converts the Ansistring in Source to a Null-terminated string, and copies it to Dest.
Dest needs enough room to contain the string Source, i.e. Length(Source)+1 bytes.
Errors: No checking is performed to see whether Dest points to enough memory to contain Source.
See also: StrPLCopy (1612), StrPas (1611)
76.14.214 StrPLCopy
Synopsis: Copy a limited number of characters from an ansistring to a null-terminated string.
Declaration: function StrPLCopy(Dest: PChar;const Source: string;MaxLen: SizeUInt)
: PChar; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: StrPLCopy Converts maximally MaxLen characters of the Ansistring in Source to a Null-
terminated string, and copies it to Dest. Dest needs enough room to contain the characters.
Errors: No checking is performed to see whether Dest points to enough memory to contain L characters of
Source.
See also: StrPCopy (1612)
76.14.215 strpos
Synopsis: Find position of one null-terminated substring in another.
Declaration: function strpos(str1: PChar;str2: PChar) : PChar
Visibility: default
Description: Returns a pointer to the first occurrence of S2 in S1. If S2 does not occur in S1, returns Nil.
Errors: None.
See also: StrScan (1613), StrRScan (1613)
Program Example15 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrPos f u n c t i o n . }
Const P : PChar = ’ T h i s i s a PChar s t r i n g . ’ ;

S : Pchar = ’ i s ’ ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ P o s i t i o n o f ’ ’ i s ’ ’ i n P : ’ , s i z e i n t ( StrPos ( P , S)) − s i z e i n t (P ) ) ;
end .
1612
76.14.216 strrscan
Declaration: function strrscan(p: PChar;c: Char) : PChar
Visibility: default
Description: Returns a pointer to the last occurrence of the character C in the null-terminated string P. If C does
For an example, see StrScan (1613).
Errors: None.
See also: StrScan (1613), StrPos (1612)
76.14.217 strscan
Declaration: function strscan(p: PChar;c: Char) : PChar; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: Returns a pointer to the first occurrence of the character C in the null-terminated string P. If C does
Errors: None.
See also: StrRScan (1613), StrPos (1612)
Program Example13 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StrScan and StrRScan f u n c t i o n s . }

S : Char = ’ s ’ ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ P , s t a r t i n g from f i r s t ’ ’ s ’ ’ : ’ , StrScan ( P , s ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ P , s t a r t i n g from l a s t ’ ’ s ’ ’ : ’ , StrRScan ( P , s ) ) ;
end .
76.14.218 StrToBool
Synopsis: Convert a string to a boolean value
Declaration: function StrToBool(const S: string) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: StrToBool will convert the string S to a boolean value. The string S can contain one of ’True’,
’False’ (case is ignored) or a numerical value. If it contains a numerical value, 0 is converted to
False, all other values result in True. If the string S contains no valid boolean, then an EConvert-
Error (1639) exception is raised.
1613
Errors: On error, an EConvertError (1639) exception is raised.

See also: BoolToStr (1521)
76.14.219 StrToBoolDef
Synopsis: Convert string to boolean value, returning default in case of error
Declaration: function StrToBoolDef(const S: string;Default: Boolean) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: StrToBoolDef tries to convert the string S to a boolean value, and returns the boolean value in
case of success. In case S does not contain a valid boolean string, Default is returned.
See also: StrToBool (1613), TryStrToBool (1630)
76.14.220 StrToCurr
Synopsis: Convert a string to a currency value
Declaration: function StrToCurr(const S: string) : Currency
function StrToCurr(const S: string;
const FormatSettings: TFormatSettings) : Currency
Visibility: default
Description: StrToCurr converts a string to a currency value and returns the value. The string should contain
a valid currency amount, without currency symbol. If the conversion fails, an EConvertError (1639)
Errors: On error, an EConvertError (1639) exception is raised.

See also: CurrToStr (1529), StrToCurrDef (1614)
76.14.221 StrToCurrDef
Synopsis: Convert a string to a currency value, using a default value
Declaration: function StrToCurrDef(const S: string;Default: Currency) : Currency

function StrToCurrDef(const S: string;Default: Currency;
const FormatSettings: TFormatSettings) : Currency
Visibility: default
Description: StrToCurrDef converts a string to a currency value and returns the value. The string should
contain a valid currency amount, without currency symbol. If the conversion fails, the fallback
Default value is returned.
Errors: On error, the Default value is returned.
See also: CurrToStr (1529), StrToCurr (1614)
1614
76.14.222 StrToDate
Synopsis: Convert a date string to a TDateTime value.
Declaration: function StrToDate(const S: ShortString) : TDateTime

function StrToDate(const S: Ansistring) : TDateTime
function StrToDate(const S: ShortString;separator: Char) : TDateTime
function StrToDate(const S: AnsiString;separator: Char) : TDateTime
function StrToDate(const S: string;FormatSettings: TFormatSettings)
: TDateTime
function StrToDate(const S: ShortString;const useformat: string;
separator: Char) : TDateTime
function StrToDate(const S: AnsiString;const useformat: string;
function StrToDate(const S: PChar;Len: Integer;const useformat: string;
Visibility: default
Description: StrToDate converts the string S to a TDateTime date value. The Date must consist of 1 to three
digits, separated by the DateSeparator character. If two numbers are given, they are supposed to
form the day and month of the current year. If only one number is given, it is supposed to represent
the day of the current month. (This is not supported in Delphi)
The order of the digits (y/m/d, m/d/y, d/m/y) is determined from the ShortDateFormat variable.
Errors: On error (e.g. an invalid date or invalid character), an EConvertError exception is raised.
See also: StrToTime (1621), DateToStr (1533), TimeToStr (1627)
Program Example19 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e StrToDate f u n c t i o n }
Procedure T e s t S t r ( S : S t r i n g ) ;
begin
Writeln ( S, ’ : ’ , DateToStr ( StrToDate (S ) ) ) ;
end ;
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ ShortDateFormat ’ , ShortDateFormat ) ;
T e s t S t r ( DateTimeToStr ( Date ) ) ;
T e s t S t r ( ’ 05 ’ + DateSeparator + ’ 05 ’ + DateSeparator+ ’ 1999 ’ ) ;
T e s t S t r ( ’ 5 ’ + DateSeparator + ’ 5 ’ ) ;
TestStr ( ’5 ’ ) ;
End .
76.14.223 StrToDateDef
Synopsis: Convert string to date, returning a default value
1615
Declaration: function StrToDateDef(const S: ShortString;const Defvalue: TDateTime)

: TDateTime
function StrToDateDef(const S: ShortString;const Defvalue: TDateTime;
function StrToDateDef(const S: AnsiString;const Defvalue: TDateTime)
: TDateTime
function StrToDateDef(const S: AnsiString;const Defvalue: TDateTime;
Visibility: default
Description: StrToDateDef tries to convert the string S to a valid TDateTime date value, and returns
DefValue if S does not contain a valid date indication.
Errors: None.
See also: StrToDate (1615), TryStrToDate (1631), StrToTimeDef (1622)
76.14.224 StrToDateTime
Synopsis: Convert a date/time string to a TDateTime value.
Declaration: function StrToDateTime(const S: AnsiString) : TDateTime
function StrToDateTime(const s: ShortString;
const FormatSettings: TFormatSettings) : TDateTime
function StrToDateTime(const s: AnsiString;
const FormatSettings: TFormatSettings) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: StrToDateTime converts the string S to a TDateTime date and time value. The date and time
parts must be separated by a space.
For the date part, the same restrictions apply as for the StrToDate (1615) function: The Date must
consist of 1 to three numbers, separated by the DateSeparator character. If two numbers are
given, they are supposed to form the day and month of the current year. If only one number is given,
it is supposed to represent the day of the current month. (This is not supported in Delphi)
The order of the 3 numbers (y/m/d, m/d/y, d/m/y) is determined from the ShortDateFormat
variable.
See also: StrToDate (1615), StrToTime (1621), DateTimeToStr (1530)
Program Example20 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e StrToDateTime f u n c t i o n }
begin
Writeln ( S, ’ : ’ , DateTimeToStr ( StrToDateTime (S ) ) ) ;
end ;
1616
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ ShortDateFormat ’ , ShortDateFormat ) ;
T e s t S t r ( DateTimeToStr (Now ) ) ;
T e s t S t r ( ’ 05−05−1999 15:50 ’ ) ;
T e s t S t r ( ’ 5 −5 13:30 ’ ) ;
T e s t S t r ( ’ 5 1 : 3 0PM ’ ) ;
End .
76.14.225 StrToDateTimeDef
Synopsis: Convert string to date/time, returning a default value
Declaration: function StrToDateTimeDef(const S: ShortString;
const Defvalue: TDateTime) : TDateTime
function StrToDateTimeDef(const S: AnsiString;const Defvalue: TDateTime)
: TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: StrToDateTimeDef tries to convert the string S to a valid TDateTime date and time value, and
returns DefValue if S does not contain a valid date-time indication.
Errors: None.
See also: StrToTimeDef (1622), StrToDateDef (1615), TryStrToDateTime (1631), StrToDateTime (1616)
76.14.226 StrToFloat
Synopsis: Convert a string to a floating-point value.
Declaration: function StrToFloat(const S: string) : Extended
function StrToFloat(const S: string;
const FormatSettings: TFormatSettings) : Extended
Visibility: default
Description: StrToFloat converts the string S to a floating point value. S should contain a valid string repre-
sentation of a floating point value (either in decimal or scientific notation). The thousandseparator
character may however not be used.
Up to and including version 2.2.2 of the compiler, if the string contains a decimal value, then the
decimal separator character can either be a ’.’ or the value of the DecimalSeparator variable.
As of version 2.3.1, the string may contain only the DecimalSeparator character. The dot (’.’)
can no longer be used instead of the DecimalSeparator.
Errors: If the string S doesn’t contain a valid floating point string, then an exception will be raised.
See also: TextToFloat (1624), FloatToStr (1562), FormatFloat (1575), StrToInt (1618)
Program Example90 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e S t r T o F l o a t f u n c t i o n }
{ $h + }
1617
Const
NrValues = 5 ;
T e s t S t r : Array [ 1 . . NrValues ] of s t r i n g =
( ’ 1 ,1 ’ , ’ −0,2 ’ , ’ 1 ,2E−4 ’ , ’ 0 ’ , ’ 1E4 ’ ) ;
Procedure T e s t i t ;
Var
I : Integer ;
E : Extended ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Using DecimalSeparator : ’ , DecimalSeparator ) ;
For I : = 1 to NrValues do
begin
Writeln ( ’ Converting : ’ , TestStr [ i ] ) ;
Try
E: = StrToFloat ( T e s t S t r [ i ] ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Converted v a l u e : ’ ,E ) ;
except
W r i t e l n ( ’ E x c e p t i o n when c o n v e r t i n g : ’ ,E . Message ) ;
end ;
end ;
end ;
Begin
DecimalSeparator : = ’ , ’ ;
Testit ;
DecimalSeparator : = ’ . ’ ;
Testit ;
End .
76.14.227 StrToFloatDef
Synopsis: Convert a string to a float, with a default value.
Declaration: function StrToFloatDef(const S: string;const Default: Extended)
: Extended
function StrToFloatDef(const S: string;const Default: Extended;
const FormatSettings: TFormatSettings) : Extended
Visibility: default
Description: StrToFloatDef tries to convert the string S to a floating point value, and returns this value. If
the conversion fails for some reason, the value Default is returned instead.
Errors: None. On error, the Default value is returned.
76.14.228 StrToInt
Synopsis: Convert a string to an integer value.
Declaration: function StrToInt(const s: string) : LongInt
1618
Visibility: default
Description: StrToInt will convert the string Sto an integer. If the string contains invalid characters or has an
invalid format, then an EConvertError is raised.
To be successfully converted, a string can contain a combination of numerical characters, possibly
preceded by a minus sign (-). Spaces are not allowed.
The string S can contain a number in decimal, hexadecimal, binary or octal format, as described in
the language reference. For enumerated values, the string must be the name of the enumerated value.
The name is searched case insensitively.
For hexadecimal values, the prefix ’0x’ or ’x’ (case insensitive) may be used as well.
Errors: In case of error, an EConvertError is raised.

See also: IntToStr (1588), StrToIntDef (1620)
Program Example82 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e S t r T o I n t f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( S t r T o I n t ( ’ 1234 ’ ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( S t r T o I n t ( ’ −1234 ’ ) ) ;
Writeln ( StrToInt ( ’ 0 ’ ) ) ;
Try
W r i t e l n ( S t r T o I n t ( ’ 12345678901234567890 ’ ) ) ;
except
On E : E C on v e rt E rr o r do
W r i t e l n ( ’ I n v a l i d number encountered ’ ) ;
end ;
End .
76.14.229 StrToInt64
Synopsis: Convert a string to an Int64 value.
Declaration: function StrToInt64(const s: string) : Int64

Visibility: default
Description: StrToInt64 converts the string S to a Int64 value, and returns this value. The string can only
contain numerical characters, and optionally a minus sign as the first character. Whitespace is not
allowed.
Hexadecimal values (starting with the $ character) are supported.
Errors: On error, a EConvertError (1639) exception is raised.
See also: TryStrToInt64 (1633), StrToInt64Def (1620), StrToInt (1618), TryStrToInt (1632), StrToIntDef (1620)
1619
76.14.230 StrToInt64Def
Synopsis: Convert a string to an Int64 value, with a default value
Declaration: function StrToInt64Def(const S: string;Default: Int64) : Int64

Visibility: default
Description: StrToInt64Def tries to convert the string S to a Int64 value, and returns this value. If the
conversion fails for some reason, the value Default is returned instead.
Errors: None. On error, the Default value is returned.

See also: StrToInt64 (1619), TryStrToInt64 (1633), StrToInt (1618), TryStrToInt (1632), StrToIntDef (1620)
76.14.231 StrToIntDef
Synopsis: Convert a string to an integer value, with a default value.
Declaration: function StrToIntDef(const S: string;Default: LongInt) : LongInt

Visibility: default
Description: StrToIntDef will convert a string to an integer. If the string contains invalid characters or has an
invalid format, then Default is returned.
To be successfully converted, a string can contain a combination of numerical characters, possibly
preceded by a minus sign (-). Spaces are not allowed.
Errors: None.
See also: IntToStr (1588), StrToInt (1618)
Program Example82 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e S t r T o I n t f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( StrToIntDef ( ’ 1234 ’ , 0 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( StrToIntDef ( ’ −1234 ’ , 0 ) ) ;
Try
except
On E : E C on v e rt E rr o r do
W r i t e l n ( ’ I n v a l i d number encountered ’ ) ;
end ;
End .
1620
76.14.232 StrToQWord
Synopsis: Convert a string to a QWord.
Declaration: function StrToQWord(const s: string) : QWord
Visibility: default
Description: TryStrToQWord converts the string S to a valid QWord (unsigned 64-bit) value, and returns the
result.
Errors: If the string S does not contain a valid QWord value, a EConvertError (1639) exception is raised.
See also: TryStrToQWord (1633), StrToQWordDef (1621), StrToInt64 (1619), StrToInt (1618)
76.14.233 StrToQWordDef
Synopsis: Try to convert a string to a QWord, returning a default value in case of failure.
Declaration: function StrToQWordDef(const S: string;Default: QWord) : QWord
Visibility: default
Description: StrToQWordDef tries to convert the string S to a valid QWord (unsigned 64-bit) value, and returns
the result. If the conversion fails, the function returns the value passed in Def.
See also: StrToQWord (1621), TryStrToQWord (1633), StrToInt64Def (1620), StrToIntDef (1620)
76.14.234 StrToTime
Synopsis: Convert a time string to a TDateTime value.
Declaration: function StrToTime(const S: Shortstring) : TDateTime
function StrToTime(const S: Ansistring) : TDateTime
function StrToTime(const S: ShortString;separator: Char) : TDateTime
function StrToTime(const S: AnsiString;separator: Char) : TDateTime
function StrToTime(const S: string;FormatSettings: TFormatSettings)
: TDateTime
function StrToTime(const S: PChar;Len: Integer;separator: Char)
: TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: StrToTime converts the string S to a TDateTime time value. The time must consist of 1 to 4
digits, separated by the TimeSeparator character. If two numbers are given, they are supposed
to form the hour and minutes.
See also: StrToDate (1615), StrToDateTime (1616), TimeToStr (1627)
Program Example21 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e StrToTime f u n c t i o n }
1621
begin
Writeln ( S, ’ : ’ , TimeToStr ( StrToTime (S ) ) ) ;
end ;
Begin
teststr ( TimeToStr ( Time ) ) ;
teststr ( ’ 12:00 ’ ) ;
teststr ( ’ 15:30 ’ ) ;
teststr ( ’ 3:30PM ’ ) ;
End .
76.14.235 StrToTimeDef
Synopsis: Convert string to time, returning a default value
Declaration: function StrToTimeDef(const S: ShortString;const Defvalue: TDateTime)
: TDateTime
function StrToTimeDef(const S: ShortString;const Defvalue: TDateTime;
function StrToTimeDef(const S: AnsiString;const Defvalue: TDateTime)
: TDateTime
function StrToTimeDef(const S: AnsiString;const Defvalue: TDateTime;
Visibility: default
Description: StrToTimeDef tries to convert the string S to a valid TDateTime time value, and returns
DefValue if S does not contain a valid time indication.
Errors: None.
See also: StrToTime (1621), TryStrToTime (1633), StrToDateDef (1615)
76.14.236 strupper
Synopsis: Convert null-terminated string to all-uppercase
Declaration: function strupper(p: PChar) : PChar

Visibility: default
Description: Converts P to an all-uppercase string. Returns P.
For an example, see StrLower (1609)
Errors: None.
See also: StrLower (1609)
76.14.237 Supports
Synopsis: Check whether a class or given interface supports an interface
1622
Declaration: function Supports(const Instance: IInterface;const AClass: TClass;

out Obj) : Boolean; Overload
function Supports(const Instance: IInterface;const IID: TGuid;out Intf)
: Boolean; Overload
function Supports(const Instance: TObject;const IID: TGuid;out Intf)
: Boolean; Overload
function Supports(const Instance: TObject;const IID: Shortstring;
out Intf) : Boolean; Overload
function Supports(const Instance: IInterface;const AClass: TClass)
: Boolean; Overload
function Supports(const Instance: IInterface;const IID: TGuid) : Boolean
; Overload
function Supports(const Instance: TObject;const IID: TGuid) : Boolean
; Overload
function Supports(const Instance: TObject;const IID: Shortstring)
: Boolean; Overload
function Supports(const AClass: TClass;const IID: TGuid) : Boolean
; Overload
function Supports(const AClass: TClass;const IID: Shortstring) : Boolean
; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: Supports checks whether Instance supports the interface identified by IID. It returns True
if it is supported, False. Optionally, a pointer to the interface is returned to Intf.
Errors: None.
See also: StringToGUID (1606)
76.14.238 SysErrorMessage
Synopsis: Format a system error message.
Declaration: function SysErrorMessage(ErrorCode: Integer) : string
Visibility: default
Description: SysErrorMessage returns a string that describes the operating system error code ErrorCode.
Errors: This routine may not be implemented on all platforms.
See also: EOSError (1643)
76.14.239 SystemTimeToDateTime
Synopsis: Convert a system time to a TDateTime value.
Declaration: function SystemTimeToDateTime(const SystemTime: TSystemTime) : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: SystemTimeToDateTime converts a TSystemTime record to a TDateTime style date/time
indication.
Errors: None.
See also: DateTimeToSystemTime (1532)
1623
Program Example22 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e SystemTimeToDateTime f u n c t i o n }
Var ST : TSystemTime ;
Begin
DateTimeToSystemTime (Now, ST ) ;
With St do
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Today i s ’ , year , ’ / ’ , month , ’ / ’ , Day ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ The t i m e i s ’ , Hour , ’ : ’ , minute , ’ : ’ , Second , ’ . ’ , M i l l i S e c o n d ) ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Converted : ’ , DateTimeToStr ( SystemTimeToDateTime ( ST ) ) ) ;
End .
76.14.240 TextToFloat
Synopsis: Convert a buffer to a float value.
Declaration: function TextToFloat(Buffer: PChar;out Value: Extended) : Boolean
function TextToFloat(Buffer: PChar;out Value: Extended;
const FormatSettings: TFormatSettings) : Boolean
function TextToFloat(Buffer: PChar;out Value;ValueType: TFloatValue)
: Boolean
function TextToFloat(Buffer: PChar;out Value;ValueType: TFloatValue;
Visibility: default
Description: TextToFloat converts the string in Buffer to a floating point value. Buffer should contain a
valid stroing representation of a floating point value (either in decimal or scientific notation). If the
buffer contains a decimal value, then the decimal separator character can either be a ’.’ or the value
of the DecimalSeparator variable.
The function returns True if the conversion was successful.
Errors: If there is an invalid character in the buffer, then the function returns False
See also: StrToFloat (1617), FloatToStr (1562), FormatFloat (1575)
Program Example91 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e T e x t T o F l o a t f u n c t i o n }
{ $h + }
Const
NrValues = 5 ;
T e s t S t r : Array [ 1 . . NrValues ] of pchar =
1624
( ’ 1 ,1 ’ , ’ −0,2 ’ , ’ 1 ,2E−4 ’ , ’ 0 ’ , ’ 1E4 ’ ) ;
Procedure T e s t i t ;
Var
I : Integer ;
E : Extended ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Using DecimalSeparator : ’ , DecimalSeparator ) ;
For I : = 1 to NrValues do
begin
Writeln ( ’ Converting : ’ , TestStr [ i ] ) ;
I f TextToFloat ( T e s t S t r [ i ] , E ) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Converted v a l u e : ’ ,E)
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ Unable t o c o n v e r t v a l u e . ’ ) ;
end ;
end ;
Begin
DecimalSeparator : = ’ , ’ ;
Testit ;
DecimalSeparator : = ’ . ’ ;
Testit ;
End .
76.14.241 Time
Synopsis: Returns the current time.
Declaration: function Time : TDateTime
Visibility: default
Description: Time returns the current time in TDateTime format. The date part of the TDateTimeValue is
set to zero.
Errors: None.
See also: Now (1593), Date (1529)
Program Example23 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e Time f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ The t i m e i s : ’ , TimeToStr ( Time ) ) ;
End .
1625
76.14.242 TimeStampToDateTime
Synopsis: Convert a TimeStamp value to a TDateTime value.
Declaration: function TimeStampToDateTime(const TimeStamp: TTimeStamp) : TDateTime

Visibility: default
Description: TimeStampToDateTime converts TimeStamp to a TDateTime format variable. It is the in-
verse operation of DateTimeToTimeStamp (1533).
Errors: None.
See also: DateTimeToTimeStamp (1533), TimeStampToMSecs (1626)
Program Example24 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e TimeStampToDateTime f u n c t i o n }
Var TS : TTimeStamp ;
DT : TDateTime ;
Begin
TS: = DateTimeToTimeStamp ( Now ) ;
With TS do
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’Now i s ’ , time , ’ m i l l i s e c o n d p a s t m i d n i g h t ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Today i s ’ , Date , ’ days p a s t 1 / 1 / 0 0 0 1 ’ ) ;
end ;
DT: = TimeStampToDateTime ( TS ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Together t h i s i s : ’ , DateTimeToStr (DT ) ) ;
End .
76.14.243 TimeStampToMSecs
Synopsis: Converts a timestamp to a number of milliseconds.
Declaration: function TimeStampToMSecs(const TimeStamp: TTimeStamp) : comp

Visibility: default
Description: TimeStampToMSecs converts TimeStamp to the number of seconds since 1/1/0001.
Use TTimeStamp variables if you need to keep very precise track of time.
For an example, see MSecsToTimeStamp (1592).
Errors: None.
See also: MSecsToTimeStamp (1592), TimeStampToDateTime (1626)
1626
76.14.244 TimeToStr
Synopsis: Convert a TDateTime time to a string using a predefined format.
Declaration: function TimeToStr(Time: TDateTime) : string
function TimeToStr(Time: TDateTime;
Visibility: default
Description: TimeToStr converts the time in Time to a string. It uses the LongTimeFormat variable to see
what formatting needs to be applied. It is therefor entirely equivalent to a FormatDateTime(’tt’,Time)
call.
Errors: None.
Program Example25 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e TimeToStr f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ The c u r r e n t t i m e i s : ’ , TimeToStr ( Time ) ) ;
End .
76.14.245 Trim
Synopsis: Trim whitespace from the ends of a string.
Declaration: function Trim(const S: string) : string
function Trim(const S: WideString) : WideString
Visibility: default
Description: Trim strips blank characters (spaces and control characters) at the beginning and end of S and
returns the resulting string. All characters with ordinal values less than or equal to 32 (a space) are
stripped.
If the string contains only spaces, an empty string is returned.
Errors: None.
See also: TrimLeft (1628), TrimRight (1628)
Program Example84 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e Trim f u n c t i o n }
{ $H+ }
begin
1627
W r i t e l n ( ’ " ’ , Trim (S ) , ’ " ’ ) ;

end ;
Begin
T e s t i t ( ’ ha ha what g e t s l o s t ? ’ ) ;
T e s t i t (#10#13 ’ haha ’ ) ;
Testit ( ’ ’ );
End .
76.14.246 TrimLeft
Synopsis: Trim whitespace from the beginning of a string.
Declaration: function TrimLeft(const S: string) : string
function TrimLeft(const S: WideString) : WideString
Visibility: default
Description: Trim strips blank characters (spaces and control characters) at the beginning of S and returns the
resulting string. All characters with ordinal values less than or equal to 32 (a space) are stripped.
Errors: None.
See also: Trim (1627), TrimRight (1628)
Program Example85 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e T r i m L e f t f u n c t i o n }
{ $H+ }
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ " ’ , T r i m L e f t (S ) , ’ " ’ ) ;
end ;
Begin
T e s t i t (#10#13 ’ haha ’ ) ;
Testit ( ’ ’ );
End .
76.14.247 TrimRight
Synopsis: Trim whitespace from the end of a string.
Declaration: function TrimRight(const S: string) : string
function TrimRight(const S: WideString) : WideString
Visibility: default
1628
Description: Trim strips blank characters (spaces and control characters) at the end of S and returns the resulting
string. All characters with ordinal values less than or equal to 32 (a space) are stripped.
Errors: None.
See also: Trim (1627), TrimLeft (1628)
Program Example86 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e T r i m R i g h t f u n c t i o n }
{ $H+ }
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ " ’ , T r i m R i g h t (S ) , ’ " ’ ) ;
end ;
Begin
T e s t i t (#10#13 ’ haha ’ ) ;
Testit ( ’ ’ );
End .
76.14.248 TryEncodeDate
Synopsis: Try to encode a date, and indicate success.
Declaration: function TryEncodeDate(Year: Word;Month: Word;Day: Word;
out Date: TDateTime) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: TryEncodeDate will check the validity of the Year, Month and Day arguments, and if they are
all valid, then they will be encoded as a TDateTime value and returned in Date. The function will
return True in this case. If an invalid argument is passed, then False will be returned.
Errors: None. If an error occurs during the encoding, False is returned.
See also: EncodeDate (1539), DecodeDateFully (1535), DecodeDate (1534), TryEncodeTime (1629)
76.14.249 TryEncodeTime
Synopsis: Try to encode a time, and indicate success.
Declaration: function TryEncodeTime(Hour: Word;Min: Word;Sec: Word;MSec: Word;
out Time: TDateTime) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: TryEncodeTime will check the validity of the Hour, Min, Sec and MSec arguments, and will
encode them in a TDateTime value which is returned in Time. If the arguments are valid, then
True is returned, otherwise False is returned.
1629
Errors: None. If an error occurs during the encoding, False is returned.

See also: EncodeTime (1539), DecodeTime (1535), TryEncodeDate (1629)
76.14.250 TryFloatToCurr
Synopsis: Try to convert a float value to a currency value and report on success.
Declaration: function TryFloatToCurr(const Value: Extended;var AResult: Currency)

: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: TryFloatToCurr tries convert the Value floating point value to a Currency value. If suc-
cessful, the function returns True and the resulting currency value is returned in AResult. It
checks whether Value is in the valid range of currencies (determined by MinCurrency (1487) and
MaxCurrency (1487)). If not, False is returned.
Errors: If Value is out of range, False is returned.
See also: FloatToCurr (1561), MinCurrency (1487), MaxCurrency (1487)
76.14.251 TryStringToGUID
Synopsis: Try to transform a string to a GUID
Declaration: function TryStringToGUID(const S: string;out Guid: TGuid) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: TryStringToGUID tries to convert the string S to a TGUID value, returned in GUID. It returns
True if the conversion succeeds, and False if the string S does not contain a valid GUID notation.
The string S must be 38 characters long, must start with { and end on }, and contain a valid GUID
string (hex number grouped using 8-4-4-4-12 digits).
Errors: In case S does not contain a valid GUID number, False is returned.
See also: StringToGUID (1606)
76.14.252 TryStrToBool
Synopsis: Try to convert a string to a boolean value
Declaration: function TryStrToBool(const S: string;out Value: Boolean) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: TryStrToBool tries to convert the string S to a boolean value, and returns this value in Value.
In this case, the function returns True. If S does not contain a valid boolean string, the function
returns False, and the contents of Value is indetermined.
Valid boolean string constants are in the FalseBoolStrs (1500) (for False values) and TrueBoolStrs
(1504) (for True values) variables.
See also: StrToBool (1613), StrToBoolDef (1614)
1630
76.14.253 TryStrToCurr
Synopsis: Try to convert a string to a currency
Declaration: function TryStrToCurr(const S: string;out Value: Currency) : Boolean

function TryStrToCurr(const S: string;out Value: Currency;
Visibility: default
Description: TryStrToCurr converts the string S to a currency value and returns the value in Value. The
function returns True if it was successful, False if not. This is contrary to StrToCurr (1614),
which raises an exception when the conversion fails.
The function takes into account locale information.
See also: StrToCurr (1614), TextToFloat (1624)
76.14.254 TryStrToDate
Synopsis: Try to convert a string with a date indication to a TDateTime value
Declaration: function TryStrToDate(const S: ShortString;out Value: TDateTime)
: Boolean
function TryStrToDate(const S: AnsiString;out Value: TDateTime)
: Boolean
function TryStrToDate(const S: ShortString;out Value: TDateTime;
separator: Char) : Boolean
function TryStrToDate(const S: AnsiString;out Value: TDateTime;
function TryStrToDate(const S: ShortString;out Value: TDateTime;
const useformat: string;separator: Char) : Boolean
function TryStrToDate(const S: AnsiString;out Value: TDateTime;
const useformat: string;separator: Char) : Boolean
function TryStrToDate(const S: string;out Value: TDateTime;
Visibility: default
Description: TryStrToDate tries to convert the string S to a TDateTime date value, and stores the date in
Value. The Date must consist of 1 to three digits, separated by the DateSeparator character. If
two numbers are given, they are supposed to form the day and month of the current year. If only one
number is given, it is supposed to represent the day of the current month. (This is not supported in
Delphi)
The order of the digits (y/m/d, m/d/y, d/m/y) is determined from the ShortDateFormat variable.
The function returns True if the string contained a valid date indication, False otherwise.
See also: StrToDate (1615), StrToTime (1621), TryStrToTime (1633), TryStrToDateTime (1631), DateToStr
(1533), TimeToStr (1627)
76.14.255 TryStrToDateTime
Synopsis: Try to convert a string with date/time indication to a TDateTime value
Declaration: function TryStrToDateTime(const S: ShortString;out Value: TDateTime)
: Boolean
1631
function TryStrToDateTime(const S: AnsiString;out Value: TDateTime)

: Boolean
function TryStrToDateTime(const S: string;out Value: TDateTime;
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: TryStrToDateTime tries to convert the string S to a TDateTime date and time value, and stores
the result in Value. The date must consist of 1 to three digits, separated by the DateSeparator
character. If two numbers are given, they are supposed to form the day and month of the current
year. If only one number is given, it is supposed to represent the day of the current month (This is
not supported in Delphi). The time must consist of 1 to 4 digits, separated by the TimeSeparator
character. If two numbers are given, they are supposed to form the hour and minutes.
The function returns True if the string contained a valid date and time indication, False otherwise.
See also: TryStrToDate (1631), TryStrToTime (1633), StrToDateTime (1616), StrToTime (1621), DateToStr
(1533), TimeToStr (1627)
76.14.256 TryStrToFloat
Synopsis: Try to convert a string to a float.
Declaration: function TryStrToFloat(const S: string;out Value: Single) : Boolean
function TryStrToFloat(const S: string;out Value: Single;
function TryStrToFloat(const S: string;out Value: Double) : Boolean
function TryStrToFloat(const S: string;out Value: Double;
Visibility: default
Description: TryStrToFloat tries to convert the string S to a floating point value, and stores the result in
Value. It returns True if the operation was succesful, and False if it failed. This operation takes
into account the system settings for floating point representations.
See also: StrToFloat (1617)
76.14.257 TryStrToInt
Synopsis: Try to convert a string to an integer, and report on success.
Declaration: function TryStrToInt(const s: string;out i: LongInt) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: TryStrToInt tries to convert the string S to an integer, and returns True if this was succesful.
In that case the converted integer is returned in I. If the conversion failed, (an invalid string, or the
value is out of range) then False is returned.
Errors: None. On error, False is returned.
See also: StrToInt (1618), TryStrToInt64 (1633), StrToIntDef (1620), StrToInt64 (1619), StrToInt64Def (1620)
1632
76.14.258 TryStrToInt64
Synopsis: Try to convert a string to an int64 value, and report on success.
Declaration: function TryStrToInt64(const s: string;out i: Int64) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: TryStrToInt64 tries to convert the string S to a Int64 value, and returns this value in I if suc-
cessful. If the conversion was succesful, the function result is True, or False otherwise. The string
can only contain numerical characters, and optionally a minus sign as the first character. Whitespace
is not allowed.
Hexadecimal values (starting with the $ character) are supported.
Errors: None. On error, False is returned.
See also: StrToInt64 (1619), StrToInt64Def (1620), StrToInt (1618), TryStrToInt (1632), StrToIntDef (1620)
76.14.259 TryStrToQWord
Synopsis: Try to convert a string to a QWord value, and report on success
Declaration: function TryStrToQWord(const s: string;out Q: QWord) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: TryStrToQWord tries to convert the string S to a valid QWord (unsigned 64-bit) value, and stores
the result in I. If the conversion fails, the function returns False, else it returns True.
See also: StrToQWord (1621), StrToQWordDef (1621), TryStrToInt64 (1633), TryStrToInt (1632)
76.14.260 TryStrToTime
Synopsis: Try to convert a string with a time indication to a TDateTime value
Declaration: function TryStrToTime(const S: ShortString;out Value: TDateTime)
: Boolean
function TryStrToTime(const S: AnsiString;out Value: TDateTime)
: Boolean
function TryStrToTime(const S: ShortString;out Value: TDateTime;
function TryStrToTime(const S: AnsiString;out Value: TDateTime;
function TryStrToTime(const S: string;out Value: TDateTime;
Visibility: default
Description: TryStrToTime tries to convert the string S to a TDateTime time value, and stores the result in
Value. The time must consist of 1 to 4 digits, separated by the TimeSeparator character. If two
numbers are given, they are supposed to form the hour and minutes.
The function returns True if the string contained a valid time indication, False otherwise.
See also: TryStrToDate (1631), TryStrToDateTime (1631), StrToDate (1615), StrToTime (1621), DateToStr
(1533), TimeToStr (1627)
1633
76.14.261 UnhookSignal
Synopsis: UnHook a specified signal
Declaration: procedure UnhookSignal(RtlSigNum: Integer;OnlyIfHooked: Boolean)

Visibility: default
Description: UnHookSignal de-installs the RTL default signal handler for signal RtlSigNum. If OnlyIfHooked
is True then UnhookSignal will first check if the signal was hooked by the RTL routines, and
has not been overridden since.
76.14.262 UpperCase
Synopsis: Return an uppercase version of a string.
Declaration: function UpperCase(const s: string) : string; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: UpperCase returns the uppercase equivalent of S. Ansi characters are not taken into account, only
ASCII codes below 127 are converted. It is completely equivalent to the UpCase function of the
system unit, and is provided for compatiibility only.
Errors: None.
See also: AnsiLowerCase (1510), LowerCase (1592), AnsiUpperCase (1518)
Program Example87 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e UpperCase f u n c t i o n }
Begin
W r i t e l n ( UpperCase ( ’ t h i s w i l l come OUT ALL uPpErCaSe ! ’ ) ) ;
End .
76.14.263 VendorName
Synopsis: Return Application vendor Name
Declaration: function VendorName : string
Visibility: default
Description: VendorName returns the application vendor name. In order to set the application vendor name,
the OnGetVendorName (1503) event must be set, and an appropriate return value must be returned.
The Vendor name is used in GetAppConfigDir (1577) and GetAppConfigFile (1578) to determine
the configuration directory.
Errors: If OnGetVendorName (1503) is not set, an empty string is returned.

See also: OnGetVendorName (1503), GetAppConfigDir (1577), GetAppConfigFile (1578)
1634
76.14.264 WideCompareStr
Synopsis: Compare two widestrings (case sensitive)
Declaration: function WideCompareStr(const s1: WideString;const s2: WideString)
: PtrInt
Visibility: default
Description: WideCompareStr compares two widestrings and returns the following result:
< 0if S1<S2.

0if S1=S2.
> 0if S1>S2.
The comparision takes into account wide characters, i.e. it takes care of strange accented characters.
Contrary to WideCompareText (1635), the comparision is case sensitive.
Errors: None.
See also: WideCompareText (1635), WideSameStr (1637), WideSameText (1637)
76.14.265 WideCompareText
Synopsis: Compare two widestrings (ignoring case).
Declaration: function WideCompareText(const s1: WideString;const s2: WideString)
: PtrInt
Visibility: default
Description: WideCompareStr compares two widestrings and returns the following result:
< 0if S1<S2.

0if S1=S2.
> 0if S1>S2.
The comparision takes into account wide characters, i.e. it takes care of strange accented characters.
Contrary to WideCompareStr (1635), the comparision is case insensitive.
Errors: None.
See also: WideCompareStr (1635), WideSameStr (1637), WideSameText (1637)
76.14.266 WideFmtStr
Synopsis: Widestring format
Declaration: procedure WideFmtStr(var Res: WideString;const Fmt: WideString;
const args: Array of const)
procedure WideFmtStr(var Res: WideString;const Fmt: WideString;
Visibility: default
Description: WideFmtStr formats Args according to the format string in Fmt and returns the resulting string
in Res.
See also: WideFormat (1636), WideFormatBuf (1636), Format (1567)
1635
76.14.267 WideFormat
Synopsis: Format a wide string.
Declaration: function WideFormat(const Fmt: WideString;const Args: Array of const)

: WideString
function WideFormat(const Fmt: WideString;const Args: Array of const;
const FormatSettings: TFormatSettings) : WideString
Visibility: default
Description: WideFormat does the same as Format (1567) but accepts as a formatting string a WideString. The
resulting string is also a WideString.
For more information about the used formatting characters, see the Format (1567) string.
76.14.268 WideFormatBuf
Synopsis: Format widestring in a buffer.
Declaration: function WideFormatBuf(var Buffer;BufLen: Cardinal;const Fmt;
fmtLen: Cardinal;const Args: Array of const)
: Cardinal
function WideFormatBuf(var Buffer;BufLen: Cardinal;const Fmt;
fmtLen: Cardinal;const Args: Array of const;
const FormatSettings: TFormatSettings) : Cardinal
Visibility: default
Description: WideFormatBuf calls simply WideFormat (1636) with Fmt (with length FmtLen bytes) and
stores maximum BufLen bytes in the buffer buf. It returns the number of copied bytes.
See also: WideFmtStr (1635), WideFormat (1636), Format (1567), FormatBuf (1574)
76.14.269 WideLowerCase
Synopsis: Change a widestring to all-lowercase.
Declaration: function WideLowerCase(const s: WideString) : WideString

Visibility: default
Description: WideLowerCase converts the string S to lowercase characters and returns the resulting string. It
Remark: On Unix-like platforms, a widestring manager must be installed for this function to work correctly.
Errors: None.
See also: WideUpperCase (1637)
1636
76.14.270 WideSameStr
Synopsis: Check whether two widestrings are the same (case sensitive)
Declaration: function WideSameStr(const s1: WideString;const s2: WideString)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: WideSameStr returns True if WideCompareStr (1635) returns 0 (zero), i.e. when S1 and S2 are
the same string (taking into account case).
See also: WideSameText (1637), WideCompareStr (1635), WideCompareText (1635), AnsiSameStr (1511)
76.14.271 WideSameText
Synopsis: Check whether two widestrings are the same (ignoring case)
Declaration: function WideSameText(const s1: WideString;const s2: WideString)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: WideSameText returns True if WideCompareText (1635) returns 0 (zero), i.e. when S1 and S2
are the same string (taking into account case).
See also: WideSameStr (1637), WideCompareStr (1635), WideCompareText (1635), AnsiSameText (1512)
76.14.272 WideUpperCase
Synopsis: Change a widestring to all-uppercase.
Declaration: function WideUpperCase(const s: WideString) : WideString
Visibility: default
Description: WideUpperCase converts the string S to uppercase characters and returns the resulting string. It
Remark: On Unix-like platforms, a widestring manager must be installed for this function to work correctly.
Errors: None.
See also: WideLowerCase (1636)
76.14.273 WrapText
Synopsis: Word-wrap a text.
Declaration: function WrapText(const Line: string;const BreakStr: string;
const BreakChars: TSysCharSet;MaxCol: Integer) : string
function WrapText(const Line: string;MaxCol: Integer) : string
Visibility: default
Description: WrapText does a wordwrap at column MaxCol of the string in Line. It breaks the string only at
characters which are in BreakChars (default whitespace and hyphen) and inserts then the string
BreakStr (default the lineending character for the current OS).
See also: StringReplace (1605)
1637
76.15 EAbort
76.15.1 Description
Abort is raised by the Abort (1505) procedure. It is not displayed in GUI applications, and serves
only to immediately abort the current procedure, and return control to the main program loop.
See also: Abort (1505)
76.16 EAbstractError
76.16.1 Description
EAbstractError is raised when an abstract error occurs, i.e. when an unimplemented abstract
method is called.
76.17 EAccessViolation
76.17.1 Description
EAccessViolation is raised when the OS reports an Access Violation, i.e. when invalid memory
is accessed.
See also: EObjectCheck (1642)
76.18 EArgumentException
76.18.1 Description
EArgumentException is raised by many character conversion/handling routines to indicate an
erroneous argument was passed to the function (usually indicating an invalid codepoint in a unicode
string).
See also: EArgumentOutOfRangeException (1638)
76.19 EArgumentOutOfRangeException
76.19.1 Description
EArgumentOutOfRangeException is raised by many character conversion/handling routines
to indicate an erroneous argument was passed to the function (indicating an invalid character index
in a unicode string).
See also: EArgumentException (1638)
1638
76.20 EAssertionFailed
76.20.1 Description
EAssertionFailed is raised when an application that is compiled with assertions, encounters an
invalid assertion.
76.21 EBusError
76.21.1 Description
EBusError is raised in case of a bus error.
76.22 EControlC
76.22.1 Description
EControlC is raised when the user has pressed CTRL-C in a console application.
76.23 EConvertError
76.23.1 Description
EConvertError is raised by the various conversion routines in the SysUtils unit. The message
will contain more specific error information.
76.24 EDivByZero
76.24.1 Description
EDivByZero is used when the operating system or CPU signals a division by zero error.
76.25 EExternal
76.25.1 Description
EExternal is the base exception for all external exceptions, as reported by the CPU or operating
system, as opposed to internal exceptions, which are raised by the program itself. The SysUtils unit
converts all operating system errors to descendents of EExternal.
See also: EInterror (1640), EExternal (1639), EMathError (1642), EExternalException (1639), EAccessVio-
lation (1638), EPrivilege (1643), EStackOverflow (1644), EControlC (1639)
76.26 EExternalException
76.26.1 Description
EExternalException is raised when an external routine raises an exception.
1639
See also: EExternal (1639)
76.27 EFormatError
76.27.1 Description
EformatError is raised in case of an error in one of the various Format (1567) functions.
76.28 EHeapMemoryError
76.28.1 Description
EHeapMemoryError is raised when an error occurs in heap (dynamically allocated) memory.
See also: EHeapException (1491), EoutOfMemory (1643), EInvalidPointer (1641)

1640 FreeInstance Free the exception instance
76.28.3 EHeapMemoryError.FreeInstance
Synopsis: Free the exception instance
Declaration: procedure FreeInstance; Override
Visibility: public
Description: FreeInstance checks whether the exception instance may be freed prior to calling the inherited
FreeInstance. The exception is only freed in case of normal program shutdown, if a heap error
occured, the exception instance is not freed.
76.29 EInOutError
76.29.1 Description
EInOutError is raised when a IO routine of Free Pascal returns an error. The error is converted to
an EInOutError only if the input/output checking feature of FPC is turned on. The error code of
the input/output operation is returned in ErrorCode (??).
See also: EInOutError.ErrorCode (??)
76.30 EInterror
76.30.1 Description
EInterror is used when the operating system or CPU signals an integer operation error, e.g., an
overflow.
1640
76.31 EIntfCastError
76.31.1 Description
EIntfCastError is raised when an invalid interface cast is encountered.
See also: EInvalidCast (1641)
76.32 EIntOverflow
76.32.1 Description
EIntOverflow is used when the operating system or CPU signals a integer overflow error.
See also: EIntError (1640), EDivByZero (1639), ERangeError (1644)
76.33 EInvalidCast
76.33.1 Description
EInvalidCast is raised when an invalid typecast error (using the as operator) is encountered.
See also: EIntfCastError (1641)
76.34 EInvalidContainer
76.34.1 Description
EInvalidContainer is not yet used by Free Pascal, and is provided for Delphi compatibility
only.
76.35 EInvalidInsert
76.35.1 Description
EInvalidInsert is not yet used by Free Pascal, and is provided for Delphi compatibility only.
76.36 EInvalidOp
76.36.1 Description
EInvalidOp is raised when an invalid operation is encountered.
76.37 EInvalidPointer
76.37.1 Description
EInvalidPointer is raised when an invalid heap pointer is used.
1641
See also: EHeapException (1491), EHeapMemoryError (1640), EOutOfMemory (1643)
76.38 EMathError
76.38.1 Description
EMathError is used when the operating system or CPU signals a floating point overflow error.
See also: EIntError (1640), EIntOverflow (1641), EDivByZero (1639), ERangeError (1644)
76.39 ENoConstructException
76.39.1 Description
ENoConstructException is the exception raised when an instance of type TCharacter is
being created. The TCharacter class only contains static methods, no instances of this class should
be instantiated.
76.40 ENoThreadSupport
76.40.1 Description
ENoThreadSupport is raised when some thread routines are invoked, and thread support was not
enabled when the program was compiled.
76.41 ENotImplemented
76.41.1 Description
ENotImplemented can be used to raise an exception when a particular call had been defined, but
was not implemented.
76.42 ENoWideStringSupport
76.42.1 Description
ENoWideStringSupport is the exception raised when a run-time 233 occurs, i.e. when widestring
routines are called and the application does not contain widestring support.
76.43 EObjectCheck
76.43.1 Description
EObjectCheck is raised when the -CR (check object references) command-line option or {$OBJECTCHECKS
ON} directive is in effect and a Nil reference to an object or class was encountered.
See also: EAccessViolation (1638)
1642
76.44 EOSError
76.44.1 Description
EOSError is raised when some Operating System call fails. The ErrorCode (??) property contains
the operating system error code.
See also: EOSError.ErrorCode (??)
76.45 EOutOfMemory
76.45.1 Description
EOutOfMemory occurs when memory can no longer be allocated on the heap. An instance of
EOutOfMemory is allocated on the heap at program startup, so it is available when needed.
See also: EHeapException (1491), EHeapMemoryError (1640), EInvalidPointer (1641)
76.46 EOverflow
76.46.1 Description
EOverflow occurs when a float operation overflows. (i.e. result is too big to represent).
See also: EIntError (1640), EIntOverflow (1641), EDivByZero (1639), ERangeError (1644), EUnderFlow
(1644)
76.47 EPackageError
76.47.1 Description
EPackageError is not yet used by Free Pascal, and is provided for Delphi compatibility only.
76.48 EPrivilege
76.48.1 Description
EPrivilege is raised when the OS reports that an invalid instruction was executed.
76.49 EPropReadOnly
76.49.1 Description
EPropReadOnly is raised when an attempt is made to write to a read-only property.
1643
76.50 EPropWriteOnly
76.50.1 Description
EPropWriteOnly is raised when an attempt is made to read from a write-only property.
See also: EPropReadOnly (1643)
76.51 ERangeError
76.51.1 Description
ERangeError is raised by the Free Pascal runtime library if range checking is on, and a range
check error occurs.
See also: EIntError (1640), EDivByZero (1639), EIntOverflow (1641)
76.52 ESafecallException
76.52.1 Description
ESafecallException is not yet used by Free Pascal, and is provided for Delphi compatibility
only.
76.53 EStackOverflow
76.53.1 Description
EStackOverflow occurs when the stack has grown too big (e.g. by infinite recursion).
76.54 EUnderflow
76.54.1 Description
EOverflow occurs when a float operation underflows (i.e. result is too small to represent).
See also: EIntError (1640), EIntOverflow (1641), EDivByZero (1639), ERangeError (1644), EOverFlow (1643)
76.55 EVariantError
76.55.1 Description
EVariantError is raised by the internal variant routines.

1645 CreateCode Create an instance of EVariantError with a particular error code.
1644
76.55.3 EVariantError.CreateCode
Synopsis: Create an instance of EVariantError with a particular error code.
Declaration: constructor CreateCode(Code: LongInt)

Visibility: default
Description: CreateCode calls the inherited constructor, and sets the ErrCode (??) property to Code.
See also: ErrCode (??)
76.56 Exception
76.56.1 Description
Exception is the base class for all exception handling routines in the RTL and FCL. While it is
possible to raise an exception with any class descending from TObject, it is recommended to use
Exception as the basis of exception class objects: the Exception class introduces properties to
associate a message and a help context with the exception being raised. What is more, the SysUtils
unit sets the necessary hooks to catch and display unhandled exceptions: in such cases, the message
displayed to the end user, will be the message stored in the exception class.
See also: ExceptObject (1541), ExceptAddr (1540), ExceptionErrorMessage (1541), ShowException (1598),
Abort (1505)

1645 Create Constructs a new exception object with a given message.
1646 CreateFmt Constructs a new exception object and formats a new message.
1647 CreateFmtHelp Constructs a new exception object and sets the help context and
formats the message
1646 CreateHelp Constructs a new exception object and sets the help context.
1646 CreateRes Constructs a new exception object and gets the message from a re-
source.
1646 CreateResFmt Constructs a new exception object and formats the message from a
reasource.
1647 CreateResFmtHelp Constructs a new exception object and sets the help context and
formats the message from a resource
1647 CreateResHelp Constructs a new exception object and sets the help context and gets
the message from a resource
1647 ToString Nicely formatted version of the exception message

1648 HelpContext rw Help context associated with the exception.
1648 Message rw Message associated with the exception.
76.56.4 Exception.Create
Synopsis: Constructs a new exception object with a given message.
1645
Declaration: constructor Create(const msg: string)

Visibility: public
Errors: Construction may fail if there is not enough memory on the heap.
See also: Exception.CreateFmt (1646), Exception.Message (1648)
76.56.5 Exception.CreateFmt
Synopsis: Constructs a new exception object and formats a new message.
Declaration: constructor CreateFmt(const msg: string;const args: Array of const)
Visibility: public
See also: Exception.Create (1645), Exception.Message (1648), Format (1567)
76.56.6 Exception.CreateRes
Synopsis: Constructs a new exception object and gets the message from a resource.
Declaration: constructor CreateRes(ResString: PString)
Visibility: public
See also: Exception.Create (1645), Exception.CreateFmt (1646), Exception.CreateResFmt (1646), Excep-
tion.Message (1648)
76.56.7 Exception.CreateResFmt
Synopsis: Constructs a new exception object and formats the message from a reasource.
Declaration: constructor CreateResFmt(ResString: PString;const Args: Array of const)
Visibility: public
Description: CreateResFmt does the same as CreateFmt (1646), but fetches the message from the resource
string ResString.
See also: Exception.Create (1645), Exception.CreateFmt (1646), Exception.CreateRes (1646), Exception.Message
(1648)
76.56.8 Exception.CreateHelp
Synopsis: Constructs a new exception object and sets the help context.
Declaration: constructor CreateHelp(const Msg: string;AHelpContext: LongInt)
Visibility: public
Description: CreateHelp does the same as the Create (1645) constructor, but additionally stores AHelpContext
in the HelpContext (1648) property.
See also: Exception.Create (1645)
1646
76.56.9 Exception.CreateFmtHelp
Synopsis: Constructs a new exception object and sets the help context and formats the message
Declaration: constructor CreateFmtHelp(const Msg: string;const Args: Array of const;

AHelpContext: LongInt)
Visibility: public
Description: CreateFmtHelp does the same as the CreateFmt (1646) constructor, but additionally stores
AHelpContext in the HelpContext (1648) property.
See also: Exception.CreateFmt (1646)
76.56.10 Exception.CreateResHelp
Synopsis: Constructs a new exception object and sets the help context and gets the message from a resource
Declaration: constructor CreateResHelp(ResString: PString;AHelpContext: LongInt)

Visibility: public
Description: CreateResHelp does the same as the CreateRes (1646) constructor, but additionally stores AHelpContext
in the HelpContext (1648) property.
See also: Exception.CreateRes (1646)
76.56.11 Exception.CreateResFmtHelp
Synopsis: Constructs a new exception object and sets the help context and formats the message from a resource
Declaration: constructor CreateResFmtHelp(ResString: PString;
const Args: Array of const;
AHelpContext: LongInt)
Visibility: public
Description: CreateResFmtHelp does the same as the CreateResFmt (1646) constructor, but additionally
stores AHelpContext in the HelpContext (1648) property.
See also: Exception.CreateResFmt (1646)
76.56.12 Exception.ToString
Synopsis: Nicely formatted version of the exception message
Declaration: function ToString : string; Override
Visibility: public
Description: ToString overrides the ToString method to return a concatenation of classname and Excep-
tion.Message (1648).
See also: Exception.Message (1648)
1647
76.56.13 Exception.HelpContext
Synopsis: Help context associated with the exception.
Declaration: Property HelpContext : LongInt
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: HelpContext is the help context associated with the exception, and can be used to provide
context-sensitive help when the exception error message is displayed. It should be set in the ex-
ception constructor.
See also: Exception.CreateHelp (1646), Exception.Message (1648)
76.56.14 Exception.Message
Synopsis: Message associated with the exception.
Declaration: Property Message : string
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Message provides additional information about the exception. It is shown to the user in e.g. the
ShowException (1598) routine, and should be set in the constructor when the exception is raised.
See also: Exception.Create (1645), Exception.HelpContext (1648)
76.57 EZeroDivide
76.57.1 Description
EZeroDivide occurs when a float division by zero occurs.
See also: EIntError (1640), EIntOverflow (1641), EDivByZero (1639), ERangeError (1644)
76.58 IReadWriteSync
76.58.1 Description
IReadWriteSync is an interface for synchronizing read/write operations. Writers are always
guaranteed to have exclusive access: readers may or may not have simultaneous access, depending
on the implementation.
76.59 TMultiReadExclusiveWriteSynchronizer
76.59.1 Description
TMultiReadExclusiveWriteSynchronizer is a default implementation of the IReadWriteSync
(1648) interface. It uses a single mutex to protect access to the read/write resource, resulting in a sin-
gle thread having access to the resource.
See also: IReadWriteSync (1648)
1648

1648 IReadWriteSync Read/Write synchronizer
76.60 TSimpleRWSync
76.60.1 Description
TSimpleRWSync implements a simple read/write locking mechanism. It controls access to an
object: only a single thread is allowed access to an object for either read or write operations.
Access is controlled through a single critical section.
See also: TMultiReadExclusiveWriteSynchronizer (1648)

1648 IReadWriteSync Read/Write synchronizer
1649
Chapter 77
Reference for unit ’Types’
77.1 Overview
Starting with D6, types from Windows specific units that were needed in Kylix were extracted to this
unit. So it mostly contains type of Windows origin that are needed in the VCL framework.

77.2.1 Constants
E_FAIL = ($80004005)
Defined for Delphi compatibility, this should not be used.
E_INVALIDARG = ($80070057)
GUID_NULL : TGUID = ’{00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000}’
GUID_NULL is the definition of the NULL (empty) GUID.
LOCK_EXCLUSIVE = 2
LOCK_ONLYONCE = 4
LOCK_WRITE = 1
STATFLAG_DEFAULT = 0
1650
CHAPTER 77. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’TYPES’
STATFLAG_NONAME = 1
STATFLAG_NOOPEN = 2
STGTY_LOCKBYTES = 3
STGTY_PROPERTY = 4
STGTY_STORAGE = 1
STGTY_STREAM = 2
STG_E_ABNORMALAPIEXIT = ($800300FA)
STG_E_ACCESSDENIED = ($80030005)
STG_E_BADBASEADDRESS = ($80030110)
STG_E_CANTSAVE = ($80030103)
STG_E_DISKISWRITEPROTECTED = ($80030013)
STG_E_DOCFILECORRUPT = ($80030109)
STG_E_EXTANTMARSHALLINGS = ($80030108)
1651
STG_E_FILEALREADYEXISTS = ($80030050)
STG_E_FILENOTFOUND = ($80030002)
STG_E_INCOMPLETE = ($80030201)
STG_E_INSUFFICIENTMEMORY = ($80030008)
STG_E_INUSE = ($80030100)
STG_E_INVALIDFLAG = ($800300FF)
STG_E_INVALIDFUNCTION = ($80030001)
STG_E_INVALIDHANDLE = ($80030006)
STG_E_INVALIDHEADER = ($800300FB)
STG_E_INVALIDNAME = ($800300FC)
STG_E_INVALIDPARAMETER = ($80030057)
STG_E_INVALIDPOINTER = ($80030009)
STG_E_LOCKVIOLATION = ($80030021)
1652
STG_E_MEDIUMFULL = ($80030070)
STG_E_NOMOREFILES = ($80030012)
STG_E_NOTCURRENT = ($80030101)
STG_E_OLDDLL = ($80030105)
STG_E_OLDFORMAT = ($80030104)
STG_E_PATHNOTFOUND = ($80030003)
STG_E_PROPSETMISMATCHED = ($800300F0)
STG_E_READFAULT = ($8003001E)
STG_E_REVERTED = ($80030102)
STG_E_SEEKERROR = ($80030019)
STG_E_SHAREREQUIRED = ($80030106)
STG_E_SHAREVIOLATION = ($80030020)
STG_E_TERMINATED = ($80030202)
1653
STG_E_TOOMANYOPENFILES = ($80030004)
STG_E_UNIMPLEMENTEDFUNCTION = ($800300FE)
STG_E_UNKNOWN = ($800300FD)
STG_E_WRITEFAULT = ($8003001D)
STG_S_BLOCK = $00030201
STG_S_CONVERTED = $00030200
STG_S_MONITORING = $00030203
STG_S_RETRYNOW = $00030202
STREAM_SEEK_CUR = 1
STREAM_SEEK_END = 2
STREAM_SEEK_SET = 0
1654
77.2.2 Types
ArgList = Pointer
ArgList is defined for Delphi/Kylix compatibility and should not be used.
DWORD = LongWord
Alias for cardinal type
FILETIME = _FILETIME
Alias for the _FILETIME type
Largeint = Int64
Largeint is an alias for the Int64 type defined in the system unit. This is an alias for Delphi/Kylix
compatibility.
LargeUint = QWord
LargeUInt is an alias for the QWord type defined in the system unit. This is an alias for Del-
phi/Kylix compatibility.
LARGE_INT = Largeint
LARGE_INT is an alias for the Int64 type defined in the system unit. This is an alias for Delphi/Kylix
compatibility.
LARGE_UINT = LargeUint
LARGE_UINT is an alias for the QWord type defined in the system unit. This is an alias for Del-
PByte = System.PByte
PByte is defined in the system unit. This is an alias for Delphi/Kylix compatibility.
PCLSID = PGUID
PCLSID is a pointer to a TCLSID type.
PDisplay = Pointer
PDisplay is defined for Delphi/Kylix compatibility and should not be used.
PDouble = System.PDouble
PDouble is defined in the system unit. This is an alias for Delphi/Kylix compatibility.
PDWord = ^DWORD
1655
PDWord is equivalent to the PCardinal type.
PEvent = Pointer
PEvent is defined for Delphi/Kylix compatibility and should not be used.
PFileTime = ^TFileTime
Pointer to TFileTime type
PLargeInt = ^Largeint
PLargeInt is an alias for the PInt64 type defined in the system unit. This is an alias for Del-
PLargeuInt = ^LargeUint
PLargeUInt is an alias for the PQWord type defined in the system unit. This is an alias for
Delphi/Kylix compatibility.
PLongint = System.PLongint
PLongint is defined in the system unit. This is an alias for Delphi/Kylix compatibility.
POleStr = PWideChar
POleStr is a pointer to a (double) null-terminated array of TOleChar characters.
PPoint = ^TPoint
PPoint is a typed pointer to the TPoint (1659) type.
PPOleStr = ^POleStr
PPOleStr is a typed pointer to a POleStr variable.
PRect = ^TRect
PRect is a typed pointer to the TRect (1660) type.
PSize = ^TSize
PSize is a typed pointer to the TSize (1660) type.
PSmallInt = System.PSmallInt
PSmallInt is defined in the system unit. This is an alias for Delphi/Kylix compatibility.
PSmallPoint = ^TSmallPoint
PSmallPoint is a typed pointer to the TSmallPoint (1660) record.
1656
PStatStg = ^TStatStg
Pointer to TStatStg record.
PXrmOptionDescRec = ^TXrmOptionDescRec
PXrmOptionDescRec is defined for Delphi/Kylix compatibility and should not be used.
Region = Pointer
Region is defined for Delphi/Kylix compatibility and should not be used.
STATSTG = TStatStg
Alias for the TStatStg type.
tagPOINT = TPoint
tagPOINT is a simple alias for TPoint (1659)
tagSIZE = TSize
tagSize is an alias for the TSize (1660) type.
tagSTATSTG = record
pwcsName : POleStr;
dwType : DWORD;
cbSize : LARGE_UINT;
mtime : TFileTime;
ctime : TFileTime;
atime : TFileTime;
grfMode : DWORD;
grfLocksSupported : DWORD;
clsid : TCLSID;
grfStateBits : DWORD;
reserved : DWORD;
end
tagSTATSTG is used in the IStream.Stat (1668) call. It describes a storage medium (typically a
file).
TBooleanDynArray = Array of Boolean
TBooleanDynArray is a standard definition of a dynamical array of booleans.
TByteDynArray = Array of Byte
TByteDynArray is a standard definition of a dynamical array of (8-bit, unsigned) bytes.
TCardinalDynArray = Array of Cardinal
1657
TCardinalDynArray is a standard definition of a dynamical array of (32-bit, unsigned) cardinals.
TCLSID = TGUID
TCLSID is an alias for the #rtl.system.TGUID (1272) type.
TDoubleDynArray = Array of Double
TSoubleDynArray is a standard definition of a dynamical array of doubles. (regular floating point

type)
TDuplicates = (dupIgnore,dupAccept,dupError)
Table 77.1: Enumeration values for type TDuplicates
Value Explanation
dupAccept Accept duplicates, adding them to the list.
dupError Raise an error when an attempt is made to add a duplicate.
dupIgnore Ignore the new item, do not add it to the list.
TDuplicates can be used to indicate how a list structure acts on the addition of a duplicate item
to the list.
dupIgnore Ignore the new item, do not add it to the list.

dupAccept Accept duplicates, adding them to the list.
dupError Raise an error when an attempt is made to add a duplicate.
TFileTime = _FILETIME
Alias for the _FILETIME type
TInt64DynArray = Array of Int64
TInt64DynArray is a standard definition of a dynamical array of (64-bit, signed) int64s.
TIntegerDynArray = Array of Integer
TIntegerDynArray is a standard definition of a dynamical array of (32-bit, signed) integers.
TListCallback = procedure(data: pointer;arg: pointer) of object
TListCallback is the prototype for a Foreach operation on a list. It will be called with as
Data the pointer in the list, and Arg will contain the extra user data added to the Foreach call.
It can be used in methods of objects; for a version that can be used as a global procedure, see
TListStaticCallback (1659)
TListStaticCallback = procedure(data: pointer;arg: pointer)
1658
TListStaticCallback is the prototype for a Foreach operation on a list. It will be called

with as Data the pointer in the list, and Arg will contain the extra user data added to the Foreach
call. It can be used in plain procedures; for a version that can be used as a method, see TListCallback
(1658)
TLongWordDynArray = Array of LongWord
TLongWordDynArray is a standard definition of a dynamical array of (32-bit, unsigned) Long-

Words.
TOleChar = WideChar
TOleChar is an alias for the WideChar type, defined in the system unit.
TPoint = packed record

X : LongInt;
Y : LongInt;
end
TPoint is a generic definition of a point in a 2-dimensional discrete plane, where X indicates the
horizontal position, and Y the vertical position (positions usually measured in pixels), and 0,0 is the
origin of the plane.
Usually, the origin is the upper-left corner of the screen, with Y increasing as one moves further down
the screen - this is opposite to the mathematical view where Y increases as one moves upwards.
The coordinates are integers, (32-bit, signed) so the coordinate system runs from -MaxInt to
MaxInt.
TPointerDynArray = Array of Pointer
Dynamic array of untyped pointers
TQWordDynArray = Array of QWord
TQWordDynArray is a standard definition of a dynamical array of (64-bit, unsigned) QWords.
TRect = packed record

case Integer of
0: (
Left : LongInt;
Top : LongInt;
Right : LongInt;
Bottom : LongInt;
);
1: (
TopLeft : TPoint;
BottomRight : TPoint;
);
end
1659
TRect defines a rectangle in a discrete plane. It is described by the horizontal (left, right) or
vertical (top, Bottom) positions (in pixels) of the edges, or, alternatively, by the coordinates of the
top left (TopLeft) and bottom right (BottomRight) corners.
TShortIntDynArray = Array of ShortInt
TShortintDynArray is a standard definition of a dynamical array of (8-bit, signed) shortints.
TSingleDynArray = Array of Single
TSingleDynArray is a standard definition of a dynamical array of singles. (smallest floating

point type)
TSize = packed record

cx : LongInt;
cy : LongInt;
end
TSize is a type to describe the size of a rectangular area, where cx is the width, cy is the height (in
pixels) of the rectangle.
TSmallIntDynArray = Array of SmallInt
TSmallintDynArray is a standard definition of a dynamical array of (16-bit, unsigned) integers.
TSmallPoint = packed record

x : SmallInt;
y : SmallInt;
end
TSmallPoint defines a point in a 2-dimensional plane, just like TPoint (1659), but the coor-
dinates have a smaller range: The coordinates are smallints (16-bit, signed) and they run from
-MaxSmallInt to maxSmallint.
TStatStg = tagSTATSTG
TStatStg is a record type describing a storage medium. It is uses in the IStream.Stat (1668)
function.
TStringDynArray = Array of AnsiString
TStringDynArray is a standard definition of a dynamical array of Ansistrings.
TWideStringDynArray = Array of WideString
TWideStringDynArray is a standard definition of a dynamical array of WideStrings.
TWordDynArray = Array of Word
TWordDynArray is a standard definition of a dynamical array of (16-bit, unsigned) words.
1660
TXrmOptionDescRec = record
end
TXrmOptionDescRec is defined for Delphi/Kylix compatibility and should not be used.
Widget = Pointer
Widget is defined for Delphi/Kylix compatibility and should not be used.
WidgetClass = Pointer
WidgetClass is defined for Delphi/Kylix compatibility and should not be used.
XrmOptionDescRec = TXrmOptionDescRec
XrmOptionDescRec is defined for Delphi/Kylix compatibility and should not be used.
_FILETIME = packed record

dwLowDateTime : DWORD;
dwHighDateTime : DWORD;
end
_FILETIME describes a file time stamp. It is defined or Delphi/Kylix compatibility and should not
be used except when implementing or accessing the IStream interface. The TDateTime type
should be used instead.

77.3.1 Bounds
Synopsis: Create a rectangle, given a position and size
Declaration: function Bounds(ALeft: Integer;ATop: Integer;AWidth: Integer;
AHeight: Integer) : TRect
Visibility: default
Description: Bounds returns a TRect structure with the indicated position (Left=ALeft and Top=ATop)
and size (Right=ALeft+AWidth and Bottom=ATop+AHeight)
See also: Rect (1663), PtInRect (1663), IntersectRect (1662), UnionRect (1664)
77.3.2 CenterPoint
Synopsis: Return the center point of a rectangle
Declaration: function CenterPoint(const Rect: TRect) : TPoint
Visibility: default
Description: CenterPoint returns the center point of the rectangle Rect.
See also: PtinRect (1663), IntersectRect (1662), IsRectEmpty (1662), OffsetRect (1663), InflateRect (1662),
Size (1664), IsRectEmpty (1662)
1661
77.3.3 EqualRect
Synopsis: Check if two rectangles are equal.
Declaration: function EqualRect(const r1: TRect;const r2: TRect) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: EqualRect returns True if the rectangles R1 and R2 are equal (i.e. have the position and size).
If the rectangles differ, the function returns False
See also: Rect (1663), Bounds (1661), PtInRect (1663), IntersectRect (1662), UnionRect (1664), IsRectEmpty
(1662), OffsetRect (1663), InflateRect (1662), Size (1664)
77.3.4 InflateRect
Synopsis: Increase the rectangle in size, keeping it centered
Declaration: function InflateRect(var Rect: TRect;dx: Integer;dy: Integer) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: InflateRect inflates the rectangle horizontally with dx pixels on each side, and vertically with
dy pixels, thus keeping its center point on the same location. It returns true if the operation was
succesfully, False if it was not (only possible if the address of Rect is Nil).
See also: PtinRect (1663), IntersectRect (1662), IsRectEmpty (1662), OffsetRect (1663), CenterPoint (1661),
77.3.5 IntersectRect
Synopsis: Return the intersection of 2 rectangles
Declaration: function IntersectRect(var Rect: TRect;const R1: TRect;const R2: TRect)

: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IntersectRect returns the intersection of the 2 rectangles R1 and R2 in Rect. It returns True
if the 2 rectangles have an intersection, otherwise False is returned, and Rect is filled with zero.
See also: PtinRect (1663), UnionRect (1664), IsRectEmpty (1662), OffsetRect (1663), InflateRect (1662),
Size (1664)
77.3.6 IsRectEmpty
Synopsis: Check whether a rectangle is empty
Declaration: function IsRectEmpty(const Rect: TRect) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: IsRectEmpty returns true if the rectangle is empty, i.e. has a zero or negative width or height.
Size (1664)
1662
77.3.7 OffsetRect
Synopsis: Offset the rectangle
Declaration: function OffsetRect(var Rect: TRect;DX: Integer;DY: Integer) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: OffsetRect offsets the rectangle Rect by a horizontal distance DX and a vertical distance DY.
The operation returns True if the operation was successfull, false if it was not (only possible if
the address of Rect is Nil).
77.3.8 Point
Synopsis: Create a point
Declaration: function Point(x: Integer;y: Integer) : TPoint
Visibility: default
Description: Point returns a TPoint structure with the given position (X, Y).
See also: Rect (1663), PtInRect (1663)
77.3.9 PtInRect
Synopsis: Check whether a point is inside a rectangle.
Declaration: function PtInRect(const Rect: TRect;const p: TPoint) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: PtInRect returns True if p is located inside Rect, and False if it is located outside the rect-
angle.
Remark: Note that the bottom, right edges are not considered part of the rectangle, therefor a point lo-
cated on one of these edges will not be considered part of the rectangle, meaning that for a record
(10,10,100,100) the point (90,100) will not be considered part of the record, but 90,10 will be.
See also: IntersectRect (1662), UnionRect (1664), IsRectEmpty (1662), OffsetRect (1663), InflateRect (1662),
Size (1664)
77.3.10 Rect
Synopsis: Create a rectangle record
Declaration: function Rect(Left: Integer;Top: Integer;Right: Integer;Bottom: Integer)
: TRect
Visibility: default
Description: Rect returns a rectangle structure with the 4 members Left, Top, Right and Bottom as passed
in the arguments.
See also: Bounds (1661), PtInRect (1663), IntersectRect (1662), UnionRect (1664), IsRectEmpty (1662), Off-
setRect (1663), InflateRect (1662), Size (1664)
1663
77.3.11 Size
Synopsis: Return the size of the rectangle
Declaration: function Size(AWidth: Integer;AHeight: Integer) : TSize

function Size(const ARect: TRect) : TSize
Visibility: default
Description: Size returns a TSize record with the indicated AWidth, AHeight. In the case ARect is
passed, the width and height are calculated (taking into account that the right, bottom are not consid-
ered part of the rectangle).
CenterPoint (1661), IsRectEmpty (1662)
77.3.12 UnionRect
Synopsis: Return the union of 2 rectangles.
Declaration: function UnionRect(var Rect: TRect;const R1: TRect;const R2: TRect)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: UnionRect retuns the rectangle that encompasses both R1 and R2 in Rect. It returns True if the
resulting rectangle is not empty, False if the result is an empty rectangle (in which case the result
is filled with zeroes)
Size (1664)
77.4 IClassFactory
77.4.1 Description
IClassFactory is defined for Delphi/Kylix compatibility and should not be used.

1664 CreateInstance Create a new instance of an interface.
1665 LockServer Lock ActiveX server object.
77.4.3 IClassFactory.CreateInstance
Synopsis: Create a new instance of an interface.
Declaration: function CreateInstance(const unkOuter: IUnknown;const riid: TGUID;

out vObject) : HResult
Visibility: default
Description: IClassFactory.CreateInstance is defined for Delphi/Kylix compatibility and should not
be used.
1664
77.4.4 IClassFactory.LockServer
Synopsis: Lock ActiveX server object.
Declaration: function LockServer(fLock: LongBool) : HResult
Visibility: default
Description: IClassFactory.LocksServer is defined for Delphi/Kylix compatibility and should not be
used.
77.5 ISequentialStream
77.5.1 Description
ISequentialStream is the interface for streams which only support sequential reading of chunks
of data. It is defined for Delphi/Kylix compatibility and should not be used.
See also: IStream (1665)

1665 Read Read data from the stream
1665 Write Write data to the stream
77.5.3 ISequentialStream.Read
Synopsis: Read data from the stream
Declaration: function Read(pv: Pointer;cb: DWORD;pcbRead: PDWord) : HRESULT
Visibility: default
Description: Read reads cbCount bytes from the stream into the memory pointed to by pv and returns the
number of bytes read in pcbread. The result is zero for success or an error code.
See also: ISequentialStream.Write (1665)
77.5.4 ISequentialStream.Write
Synopsis: Write data to the stream
Declaration: function Write(pv: Pointer;cb: DWORD;pcbWritten: PDWord) : HRESULT
Visibility: default
Description: Write writes cbCount bytes from the memory pointed to by pv to the stream and returns the
number of bytes written in pcbwritten. The result is zero for success or an error code.
See also: ISequentialStream.Read (1665)
77.6 IStream
77.6.1 Description
An abstract interface for an external (non pascal) stream, as defined in Microsoft COM interfaces
1665

1668 Clone Clone the stream instance
1667 Commit Commit data to the stream
1666 CopyTo Copy data from one stream to another
1667 LockRegion Lock a region of bytes in the stream
1667 Revert Revert changes
1666 Seek Set the stream position
1666 SetSize Set the stream size
1668 Stat return information about the stream.
1667 UnlockRegion Unlocks a previously locked region of bytes in the stream
77.6.3 IStream.Seek
Synopsis: Set the stream position
Declaration: function Seek(dlibMove: Largeint;dwOrigin: LongInt;
out libNewPosition: Largeint) : HResult
Visibility: default
Description: Seek sets the stream position at dlibMove bytes from dwOrigin (one of the SEEK_* constants)
and returns the new absolute position in libNewPosition. The function returns zero on success,
or an error code.
Errors: On error, a nonzero exit code is returned.
77.6.4 IStream.SetSize
Synopsis: Set the stream size
Declaration: function SetSize(libNewSize: Largeint) : HRESULT
Visibility: default
Description: SetSize sets the size of the stream to libNewSize bytes, if the stream allows it. On sucess, zero
is returned.
77.6.5 IStream.CopyTo
Synopsis: Copy data from one stream to another
Declaration: function CopyTo(stm: IStream;cb: Largeint;out cbRead: Largeint;

out cbWritten: Largeint) : HRESULT
Visibility: default
Description: CopyTo copies cb bytes from the stream to target stream stm. cbRead returns how many bytes
were read from the stream, cbwrite returns how many bytes were actually written to the destination
stream. The function returns zero on success.
1666
77.6.6 IStream.Commit
Synopsis: Commit data to the stream
Declaration: function Commit(grfCommitFlags: LongInt) : HRESULT

Visibility: default
Description: Commit commits the data in the stream to the underlying medium. Flags is a set of options to
control the commit operation (see MSDN for the possible flags).
77.6.7 IStream.Revert
Synopsis: Revert changes
Declaration: function Revert : HRESULT
Visibility: default
Description: Revert reverts all changes that were done to a transacted stream, i.e. all changes since the last
commit. The function returns zero on success.
77.6.8 IStream.LockRegion
Synopsis: Lock a region of bytes in the stream
Declaration: function LockRegion(libOffset: Largeint;cb: Largeint;
dwLockType: LongInt) : HRESULT
Visibility: default
Description: LockRegion locks a region of the storage, starting at libOffset, for cbCount bytes. The
applied lock is of type dwLockType. The function returns zero if the lock was succesfully applied.
77.6.9 IStream.UnlockRegion
Synopsis: Unlocks a previously locked region of bytes in the stream
Declaration: function UnlockRegion(libOffset: Largeint;cb: Largeint;
dwLockType: LongInt) : HRESULT
Visibility: default
Description: UnlockRegion removes the lock on a region of the storage, starting at libOffset, for cbCount
bytes. The lock must be of type dwLockType. The function returns zero if the lock was succesfully
removed.
1667
77.6.10 IStream.Stat
Synopsis: return information about the stream.
Declaration: function Stat(out statstg: TStatStg;grfStatFlag: LongInt) : HRESULT

Visibility: default
Description: Stat returns information about the stream in statstg, taking into account the flags in grfStatFlag
(one of the STATFLAG_ constants). The function returns zero if the call was successful.
77.6.11 IStream.Clone
Synopsis: Clone the stream instance
Declaration: function Clone(out stm: IStream) : HRESULT
Visibility: default
Description: Clone returns an independent but initially equal copy of the stream in stm. The function returns
zero if the call was successful.
1668
Chapter 78
Reference for unit ’typinfo’
78.1 Used units
Table 78.1: Used units by unit ’typinfo’
Name Page
System 1224
sysutils 1476
78.2 Overview
The TypeInfo unit contains many routines which can be used for the querying of the Run-Time
Type Information (RTTI) which is generated by the compiler for classes that are compiled under the
{$M+} switch. This information can be used to retrieve or set property values for published proper-
ties for totally unknown classes. In particular, it can be used to stream classes. The TPersistent
class in the Classes unit is compiled in the {$M+} state and serves as the base class for all classes
that need to be streamed.
The unit should be compatible to the Delphi 5 unit with the same name. The only calls that are still
missing are the Variant calls, since Free Pascal does not support the variant type yet.
The examples in this chapter use a rttiobj auxiliary unit, which contains an object that has a published
property for all supported types. It also contains some auxiliary routines and definitions. This unit is
included in the documentation sources, in the directory typinfex.
78.3 Auxiliary functions

Other typinfo related functions.
1669
CHAPTER 78. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’TYPINFO’
Table 78.2:
Name Description
GetEnumName (1687) Get an enumerated type element name
GetEnumValue (1689) Get ordinal number of an enumerated type, based on the name.
GetEnumNameCount (1688) Get number of elements in an enumerated type.
GetTypeData (1701) Skip type name and return a pointer to the type data
SetToString (1711) Convert a set to its string representation
StringToSet (1713) Convert a string representation of a set to a set
78.4 Getting or setting property values

Functions to set or set a property’s value.
Table 78.3:
Name Description
GetEnumProp (1688) Return the value of an enumerated type property
GetFloatProp (1689) Return the value of a float property
GetInt64Prop (1690) Return the value of an Int64 property
GetMethodProp (1691) Return the value of a procedural type property
GetObjectProp (1693) Return the value of an object property
GetOrdProp (1695) Return the value of an ordinal type property
GetPropValue (1698) Return the value of a property as a variant
GetSetProp (1699) Return the value of a set property
GetStrProp (1700) Return the value of a string property
GetWideStrProp (1702) Return the value of a widestring property
GetVariantProp (1702) Return the value of a variant property
SetEnumProp (1706) Set the value of an enumerated type property
SetFloatProp (1706) Set the value of a float property
SetInt64Prop (1707) Set the value of an Int64 property
SetMethodProp (1708) Set the value of a procedural type property
SetObjectProp (1708) Set the value of an object property
SetOrdProp (1709) Set the value of an ordinal type property
SetPropValue (1709) Set the value of a property trhough a variant
SetSetProp (1710) Set the value of a set property
SetStrProp (1710) Set the value of a string property
SetWideStrProp (1712) Set the value of a widestring property
SetVariantProp (1712) Set the value of a variant property
78.5 Examining published property information

Functions for retrieving or examining property information
1670
Table 78.4:
Name Description
FindPropInfo (1686) Getting property type information, With error checking.
GetPropInfo (1696) Getting property type information, No error checking.
GetPropInfos (1696) Find property information of a certain kind
GetObjectPropClass (1694) Return the declared class of an object property
GetPropList (1697) Get a list of all published properties
IsPublishedProp (1703) Is a property published
IsStoredProp (1703) Is a property stored
PropIsType (1704) Is a property of a certain kind
PropType (1705) Return the type of a property

78.6.1 Constants
BooleanIdents : Array[Boolean] of string = (’False’, ’True’)
Names for boolean values
DotSep : string = ’.’
Name separator character
OnGetPropValue : TGetPropValue = Nil
This callback is set by the variants unit to enable reading of properties as a variant. If set, it is called
by the GetPropValue (1698) function.
OnGetVariantprop : TGetVariantProp = Nil
This callback is set by the variants unit to enable reading of variant properties If set, it is called by
the GetVariantProp (1702) function.
OnSetPropValue : TSetPropValue = Nil
This callback is set by the variants unit to enable writing of properties as a variant. If set, it is called
by the SetPropValue (1709) function.
OnSetVariantprop : TSetVariantProp = Nil
This callback is set by the variants unit to enable writing of variant properties. If set, it is called by
the GetVariantProp (1702) function.
ptConst = 3
Constant used in acces method
ptField = 0
1671
Property acces directly from field
ptStatic = 1
Property acces via static method
ptVirtual = 2
Property acces via virtual method
tkAny = [(TTypeKind)..(TTypeKind)]
Any property type
tkMethods = [tkMethod]
Only method properties. (event handlers)
tkProcedure = tkProcVar
Procedure kind
tkProperties = tkAny - tkMethods - [tkUnknown]
Real properties. (not methods)
tkString = tkSString
Alias for the tsSString enumeration value
78.6.2 Types
PManagedField = ^TManagedField
PManagedField is a pointer to TManagedField (1675). It is used to describe automatically man-

aged fields in records when the type kind is tkRecord.
PProcedureParam = ^TProcedureParam
PProcedureParam is a pointer to TProcedureParam. It is used in TProcedureSignature

(1713).
PPropInfo = ^TPropInfo
Pointer to TPropInfo (1677) record
PPropList = ^TPropList
Pointer to TPropList (1677)
PPTypeInfo = ^PTypeInfo
1672
Pointer to PTypeInfo (1673) pointer
PTypeData = ^TTypeData
Pointer to TTypeData (1684) record.
PTypeInfo = ^TTypeInfo
Pointer to TTypeInfo (1684) record
PVmtFieldEntry = ^TVmtFieldEntry
Pointer to #rtl.typinfo.TVmtFieldEntry (1685) type.
PVmtFieldTable = ^TVmtFieldTable
Pointer to #rtl.typinfo.TVmtFieldTable (1686) type.
ShortStringBase = string
ShortStringBase is the base definition of a short string.
TArrayTypeData = packed record

Size : SizeInt;
ElCount : SizeInt;
ElType : PTypeInfo;
DimCount : Byte;
Dims : Array[0..255] of PTypeInfo;
end
TArrayTypeData is used to describe arrays in RTTI. It can be encountered when the type kind
is tkArray, and is used for both static and dynamic arrays and single or multi-dimensional arrays.
The type of the array elements is described in elType, and the ranges for each of the dimensions
(specified in DimCount in Dims.
TCallConv = (ccReg,ccCdecl,ccPascal,ccStdCall,ccSafeCall,ccCppdecl,
ccFar16,ccOldFPCCall,ccInternProc,ccSysCall,ccSoftFloat,
ccMWPascal)
Table 78.5: Enumeration values for type TCallConv
Value Explanation
ccCdecl Cdecl calling convention.
ccCppdecl Cppdecl calling convention
ccFar16 Far16 calling convention (Delphi compatibility)
ccInternProc InternProc calling convention (compiler internal)
ccMWPascal MWPascal (MetroWerks Pascal) calling convention.
ccOldFPCCall OldFPCCall calling convention (deprecated)
ccPascal Pascal calling convention.
ccReg Register calling convention
ccSafeCall SafeCall calling convention.
ccSoftFloat Softfloat calling convention.
ccStdCall stdcall calling convention.
ccSysCall SysCall calling convention.
1673
TCallConv is a type describing the calling convention used by a method. It contains an element
for all supported calling conventions.
TFloatType = (ftSingle,ftDouble,ftExtended,ftComp,ftCurr)
Table 78.6: Enumeration values for type TFloatType
Value Explanation
ftComp Comp-type float
ftCurr Currency-type float
ftDouble Double-sized float
ftExtended Extended-size float
ftSingle Single-sized float
The size of a float type.
TGetPropValue = function(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;

PreferStrings: Boolean) : Variant
The callback function must return the property with name PropName of instance Instance. If
PreferStrings is true, it should favour converting the property to a string value. The function
needs to return the variant with the property value.
TGetVariantProp = function(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo)

: Variant
The callback function must return the variant property with name PropName of instance Instance.
TIntfFlag = (ifHasGuid,ifDispInterface,ifDispatch,ifHasStrGUID)
Table 78.7: Enumeration values for type TIntfFlag
Value Explanation
ifDispatch Interface is a dispatch interface
ifDispInterface Interface is a dual dispatch interface
ifHasGuid Interface has GUID identifier
ifHasStrGUID Interface has a string GUID identifier
Type of interface.
TIntfFlags = Set of TIntfFlag
Set of TIntfFlag (1674).
TIntfFlagsBase = Set of TIntfFlag
Set of TIntfFlag (1674).
1674
TManagedField = packed record

TypeRef : PTypeInfo;
FldOffset : SizeInt;
end
TManagedField describes 1 managed field in a record. It consists of type information (TypeRef)

and an offset in the record’s memory layout (FldOffset). Size can be determined from the type
information.
TMethodKind = (mkProcedure,mkFunction,mkConstructor,mkDestructor,
mkClassProcedure,mkClassFunction,mkClassConstructor,
mkClassDestructor,mkOperatorOverload)
Table 78.8: Enumeration values for type TMethodKind
Value Explanation
mkClassConstructor Class constructor method.
mkClassDestructor Class destructor method.
mkClassFunction Class function
mkClassProcedure Class procedure
mkConstructor Class constructor
mkDestructor Class Desctructor
mkFunction Function method
mkOperatorOverload Operator overloader
mkProcedure Procedure method.
Method type description
TOrdType = (otSByte,otUByte,otSWord,otUWord,otSLong,otULong)
Table 78.9: Enumeration values for type TOrdType
Value Explanation
otSByte Signed byte
otSLong Signed longint
otSWord Signed word
otUByte Unsigned byte
otULong Unsigned longing (Cardinal)
otUWord Unsigned word
If the property is and ordinal type, then TOrdType determines the size and sign of the ordinal type:
TParamFlag = (pfVar,pfConst,pfArray,pfAddress,pfReference,pfOut)
1675
Table 78.10: Enumeration values for type TParamFlag
Value Explanation
pfAddress Parameter is passed by address
pfArray Parameter is an array parameter
pfConst Parameter is a const parameter (i.e. cannot be modified)
pfOut Parameter is a string parameter
pfReference Parameter is passed by reference
pfVar Parameter is a var parameter (passed by reference)
TParamFlag describes a parameter.
TParamFlags = Set of TParamFlag
The kind of parameter for a method
TProcedureParam = packed record

Flags : Byte;
ParamType : PTypeInfo;
Name : ShortString;
end
TProcedureParam describes a single parameter to a procedure (or function).
TProcInfoProc = procedure(PropInfo: PPropInfo) of object
Property info callback method
TPropData = packed record

PropCount : Word;
PropList : record
_alignmentdummy : PtrInt;
end;
end
The TPropData record is not used, but is provided for completeness and compatibility with Delphi.
TPropInfo = packed record

PropType : PTypeInfo;
GetProc : CodePointer;
SetProc : CodePointer;
StoredProc : CodePointer;
Index : Integer;
Default : LongInt;
NameIndex : SmallInt;
PropProcs : Byte;
Name : ShortString;
end
1676
The TPropInfo record describes one published property of a class. The property information of a
class are stored as an array of TPropInfo records.
The Name field is stored not with 255 characters, but with just as many characters as required to store
the name.
TPropList = Array[0..65535] of PPropInfo
Array of property information pointers
TSetPropValue = procedure(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;

const Value: Variant)
The callback function must set the property with name PropName of instance Instance to Value.
TSetVariantProp = procedure(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo;

The callback function must set the variant property with name PropName of instance to Value.
TTypeData = packed record

case TTypeKind of
tkUnKnown: (
);, tkLString: (
);, tkWString: (
);, tkVariant: (
);, tkUString: (
);
tkAString: (
CodePage : Word;
);
tkInteger: (
OrdType : TOrdType;
case TTypeKind of
tkInteger: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
BaseType : PTypeInfo;
NameList : ShortString;
);
);, tkChar: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);, tkEnumeration: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
1677
tkEnumeration: (
);
);, tkBool: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);, tkWChar: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);
tkSet: (
CompType : PTypeInfo;
);
);, tkChar: (
OrdType : TOrdType;
case TTypeKind of
tkInteger: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);, tkChar: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);, tkBool: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
1678
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);, tkWChar: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);
tkSet: (
);
OrdType : TOrdType;
case TTypeKind of
tkInteger: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);, tkChar: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);, tkBool: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);, tkWChar: (
MinValue : LongInt;
1679
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);
tkSet: (
);
);, tkBool: (
OrdType : TOrdType;
case TTypeKind of
tkInteger: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);, tkChar: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);, tkBool: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);, tkWChar: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);
1680
tkSet: (
);
);, tkWChar: (
OrdType : TOrdType;
case TTypeKind of
tkInteger: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);, tkChar: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);, tkBool: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);, tkWChar: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);
tkSet: (
);
);, tkSet: (
OrdType : TOrdType;
case TTypeKind of
tkInteger: (
1681
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);, tkChar: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);, tkBool: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);, tkWChar: (
MinValue : LongInt;
MaxValue : LongInt;
case TTypeKind of
tkEnumeration: (
);
);
tkSet: (
);
);
tkFloat: (
FloatType : TFloatType;
);
tkSString: (
MaxLength : Byte;
);
tkClass: (
ClassType : TClass;
ParentInfo : PTypeInfo;
PropCount : SmallInt;
1682
UnitName : ShortString;
);
tkRecord: (
RecSize : Integer;
ManagedFldCount : Integer;
);
tkHelper: (
HelperParent : PTypeInfo;
ExtendedInfo : PTypeInfo;
HelperProps : SmallInt;
HelperUnit : ShortString;
);
tkMethod: (
MethodKind : TMethodKind;
ParamCount : Byte;
ParamList : Array[0..1023] of Char;
);
tkProcVar: (
ProcSig : TProcedureSignature;
);
tkInt64: (
MinInt64Value : Int64;
MaxInt64Value : Int64;
);
tkQWord: (
MinQWordValue : QWord;
MaxQWordValue : QWord;
);
tkInterface: (
IntfParent : PTypeInfo;
IntfFlags : TIntfFlagsBase;
GUID : TGuid;
IntfUnit : ShortString;
);
tkInterfaceRaw: (
RawIntfParent : PTypeInfo;
RawIntfFlags : TIntfFlagsBase;
IID : TGuid;
RawIntfUnit : ShortString;
IIDStr : ShortString;
);
tkArray: (
ArrayData : TArrayTypeData;
);
tkDynArray: (
elSize : PtrUInt;
elType2 : PTypeInfo;
varType : LongInt;
elType : PTypeInfo;
DynUnitName : ShortStringBase;
);
tkClassRef: (
InstanceType : PTypeInfo;
);
1683
tkPointer: (
RefType : PTypeInfo;
);
end
If the typeinfo kind is tkClass, then the property information follows the UnitName string, as an
array of TPropInfo (1677) records.
TTypeInfo = record
Kind : TTypeKind;
Name : ShortString;
end
The TypeInfo function returns a pointer to a TTypeInfo record.

Note that the Name field is stored with as much bytes as needed to store the name, it is not padded to
255 characters. The type data immediately follows the TTypeInfo record as a TTypeData (1684)
record.
TTypeKind = (tkUnknown,tkInteger,tkChar,tkEnumeration,tkFloat,tkSet,
tkMethod,tkSString,tkLString,tkAString,tkWString,tkVariant,
tkArray,tkRecord,tkInterface,tkClass,tkObject,tkWChar,
tkBool,tkInt64,tkQWord,tkDynArray,tkInterfaceRaw,tkProcVar,
tkUString,tkUChar,tkHelper,tkFile,tkClassRef,tkPointer)
1684
Table 78.11: Enumeration values for type TTypeKind
Value Explanation
tkArray Array property.
tkAString Ansistring property.
tkBool Boolean property.
tkChar Char property.
tkClass Class property.
tkClassRef Class of type
tkDynArray Dynamical array property.
tkEnumeration Enumeration type property.
tkFile File type (both text and binary)
tkFloat Float property.
tkHelper Helper class type.
tkInt64 Int64 property.
tkInteger Integer property.
tkInterface Interface property.
tkInterfaceRaw Raw interface property.
tkLString Longstring property.
tkMethod Method property.
tkObject Object property.
tkPointer Pointer type
tkProcVar Procedural variable
tkQWord QWord property.
tkRecord Record property.
tkSet Set property.
tkSString Shortstring property.
tkUChar Unicode character
tkUnknown Unknown property type.
tkUString Unicode string
tkVariant Variant property.
tkWChar Widechar property.
tkWString Widestring property.
Type of a property.
TTypeKinds = Set of TTypeKind
Set of TTypeKind (1684) enumeration.
TVmtFieldEntry = packed record

FieldOffset : PtrUInt;
TypeIndex : Word;
Name : ShortString;
end
TVmtFieldEntry records are generated by the compiler for all fields of a record or class that have
RTTI associated with them. They describe the field as known to the compiler.
TVmtFieldTable = packed record
1685
Count : Word;
ClassTab : Pointer;
Fields : Array[0..0] of TVmtFieldEntry;
end
TVmtFieldTable describes the fields for which RTTI was generated. A TVmtFieldTable
entry is generated by the compiler in the RTI information, it is not something one creates manually.
Basically it contains a list of TVmtFieldEntry (1685) values.

78.7.1 FindPropInfo
Synopsis: Return property information by property name.
Declaration: function FindPropInfo(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string)
: PPropInfo
function FindPropInfo(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;
AKinds: TTypeKinds) : PPropInfo
function FindPropInfo(AClass: TClass;const PropName: string) : PPropInfo
function FindPropInfo(AClass: TClass;const PropName: string;
Visibility: default
Description: FindPropInfo examines the published property information of a class and returns a pointer to
the property information for property PropName. The class to be examined can be specified in one
of two ways:
AClassa class pointer.

Instancean instance of the class to be investigated.
If the property does not exist, a EPropertyError exception will be raised. The GetPropInfo
(1696) function has the same function as the FindPropInfo function, but returns Nil if the
property does not exist.
Errors: Specifying an invalid property name in PropName will result in an EPropertyError exception.
See also: GetPropInfo (1696), GetPropList (1697), GetPropInfos (1696)
Listing: ./typinfex/ex14.pp
Program example13 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e F i n d P r o p I n f o f u n c t i o n }
uses
r t t i o b j , typinfo , sysutils ;
Var
O : TMyTestObject ;
PT : PTypeData ;
1686
PI : PPropInfo ;
I ,J : Longint ;
PP : PPropList ;
prI : PPropInfo ;
begin
O: = TMyTestObject . Create ;
PI : = F i n d P r o p I n f o (O, ’ B o o l e a n F i e l d ’ ) ;
Writeln ( ’ FindPropInfo ( Instance , BooleanField ) : ’ , PI ^ .Name ) ;
PI : = F i n d P r o p I n f o (O. ClassType , ’ B y t e F i e l d ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ F i n d P r o p I n f o ( Class , B y t e F i e l d ) : ’ , PI ^ .Name ) ;
Write ( ’ F i n d P r o p I n f o ( Class , NonExistingProp ) : ’ );
Try
PI : = F i n d P r o p I n f o (O, ’ NonExistingProp ’ ) ;
except
W r i t e l n ( ’ Caught e x c e p t i o n " ’ ,E . ClassName , ’ " w i t h message : ’ ,E . Message ) ;
end ;
O. Free ;
end .
78.7.2 GetEnumName
Synopsis: Return name of enumeration constant.
Declaration: function GetEnumName(TypeInfo: PTypeInfo;Value: Integer) : string
Visibility: default
Description: GetEnumName scans the type information for the enumeration type described by TypeInfo and
returns the name of the enumeration constant for the element with ordinal value equal to Value.
If Value is out of range, the first element of the enumeration type is returned. The result is lower-
cased, but this may change in the future.
This can be used in combination with GetOrdProp to stream a property of an enumerated type.
Errors: No check is done to determine whether TypeInfo really points to the type information for an
enumerated type.
See also: GetOrdProp (1695), GetEnumValue (1689)
program example9 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e GetEnumName , GetEnumValue f u n c t i o n s }
uses r t t i o b j , t y p i n f o ;
Var
O : TMyTestObject ;
T I : PTypeInfo ;
begin
T I : = G et P ro p In f o (O, ’ MyEnumField ’ ) ^ . PropType ;
1687
W r i t e l n ( ’ GetEnumName : ’ ,GetEnumName ( TI , Ord (O. MyEnumField ) ) ) ;

W r i t e l n ( ’ GetEnumValue ( m e f i r s t ) : ’ ,GetEnumName ( TI , GetEnumValue ( TI , ’ m e f i r s t ’ ) ) ) ;
O. Free ;
end .
78.7.3 GetEnumNameCount
Synopsis: Return number of names in an enumerated type
Declaration: function GetEnumNameCount(enum1: PTypeInfo) : SizeInt
Visibility: default
Description: GetEnumNameCount returns the number of values (names) in the enumerated type, described by
enum1
Errors: No checking is done to see whether Enum1 is really type information of an enumerated type.
See also: GetEnumValue (1689), GetEnumName (1687)
78.7.4 GetEnumProp
Synopsis: Return the value of an enumeration type property.
Declaration: function GetEnumProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string) : string
function GetEnumProp(Instance: TObject;const PropInfo: PPropInfo)
: string
Visibility: default
Description: GetEnumProp returns the value of an property of an enumerated type and returns the name of the
enumerated value for the objetc Instance. The property whose value must be returned can be
specified by its property info in PropInfo or by its name in PropName
Errors: No check is done to determine whether PropInfo really points to the property information for an
enumerated type. Specifying an invalid property name in PropName will result in an EPropertyError
exception.
See also: SetEnumProp (1706), GetOrdProp (1695), GetStrProp (1700), GetInt64Prop (1690), GetMethod-
Prop (1691), GetSetProp (1699), GetObjectProp (1693), GetEnumProp (1688)
program example2 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e GetEnumProp f u n c t i o n }
Var
O : TMyTestObject ;
PI : PPropInfo ;
T I : PTypeInfo ;
begin
1688
PI : = G et P ro p In f o (O, ’ MyEnumField ’ ) ;
T I : = PI ^ . PropType ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Enum p r o p e r t y : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( ’ Value : ’ ,GetEnumName ( TI , Ord (O. MyEnumField ) ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Get ( name ) : ’ , GetEnumProp (O, ’ MyEnumField ’ ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Get ( p r o p i n f o ) : ’ , GetEnumProp (O, PI ) ) ;
SetEnumProp (O, ’ MyEnumField ’ , ’ m e F i r s t ’ );
W r i t e l n ( ’ Set ( name , m e F i r s t ) : ’ ,GetEnumName ( TI , Ord (O. MyEnumField ) ) ) ;
SetEnumProp (O, PI , ’ meSecond ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Set ( p r o p i n f o , meSecond ) : ’ ,GetEnumName ( TI , Ord (O. MyEnumField ) ) ) ;
O. Free ;
end .
78.7.5 GetEnumValue
Synopsis: Get ordinal value for enumerated type by name
Declaration: function GetEnumValue(TypeInfo: PTypeInfo;const Name: string) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: GetEnumValue scans the type information for the enumeration type described by TypeInfo
and returns the ordinal value for the element in the enumerated type that has identifier Name. The
identifier is searched in a case-insensitive manner.
This can be used to set the value of enumerated properties from a stream.
For an example, see GetEnumName (1687).
Errors: If Name is not found in the list of enumerated values, then -1 is returned. No check is done whether
TypeInfo points to the type information for an enumerated type.
See also: GetEnumName (1687), SetOrdProp (1709)
78.7.6 GetFloatProp
Synopsis: Return value of floating point property
Declaration: function GetFloatProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo) : Extended
function GetFloatProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string)
: Extended
Visibility: default
Description: GetFloatProp returns the value of the float property described by PropInfo or with name
Propname for the object Instance. All float types are converted to extended.
Errors: No checking is done whether Instance is non-nil, or whether PropInfo describes a valid
float property of Instance. Specifying an invalid property name in PropName will result in
an EPropertyError exception.
See also: SetFloatProp (1706), GetOrdProp (1695), GetStrProp (1700), GetInt64Prop (1690), GetMethodProp
(1691), GetSetProp (1699), GetObjectProp (1693), GetEnumProp (1688)
1689
program example4 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e GetFloatProp f u n c t i o n }
Var
O : TMyTestObject ;
PI : PPropInfo ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Real p r o p e r t y : ’ ) ;
PI : = G et P ro p In f o (O, ’ R e a l F i e l d ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Value : ’ ,O. R e a l F i e l d ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Get ( name ) : ’ , GetFloatProp (O, ’ R e a l F i e l d ’ ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Get ( p r o p i n f o ) : ’ , GetFloatProp (O, PI ) ) ;
S e t F l o a t P r o p (O, ’ R e a l F i e l d ’ , system . Pi ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Set ( name , p i ) : ’ ,O. R e a l F i e l d ) ;
S e t F l o a t P r o p (O, PI , exp ( 1 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Set ( p r o p i n f o , e ) : ’ ,O. R e a l F i e l d ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Extended p r o p e r t y : ’ ) ;
PI : = G et P ro p In f o (O, ’ E xt en de d Fi el d ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Value : ’ ,O. E xt e nd ed Fi e ld ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Get ( name ) : ’ , GetFloatProp (O, ’ E xt e nd ed Fi e ld ’ ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Get ( p r o p i n f o ) : ’ , GetFloatProp (O, PI ) ) ;
S e t F l o a t P r o p (O, ’ Ex te n de dF ie l d ’ , system . Pi ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Set ( name , p i ) : ’ ,O. E xt e nd ed Fi e ld ) ;
S e t F l o a t P r o p (O, PI , exp ( 1 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Set ( p r o p i n f o , e ) : ’ ,O. E xt e nd ed Fi e ld ) ;
O. Free ;
end .
78.7.7 GetInt64Prop
Synopsis: return value of an Int64 property
Declaration: function GetInt64Prop(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo) : Int64

function GetInt64Prop(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string) : Int64
Visibility: default
Description:
Remark: Publishing of Int64 properties is not yet supported by Free Pascal. This function is provided for
Delphi compatibility only at the moment.
GetInt64Prop returns the value of the property of type Int64 that is described by PropInfo
or with name Propname for the object Instance.
Int64 property of Instance. Specifying an invalid property name in PropName will result
in an EPropertyError exception
See also: SetInt64Prop (1707), GetOrdProp (1695), GetStrProp (1700), GetFloatProp (1689), GetMethodProp
1690
program example15 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e GetInt64Prop f u n c t i o n }
Var
O : TMyTestObject ;
PI : PPropInfo ;
begin
Writeln ( ’ Int64 property : ’ ) ;
PI : = G et P ro p In f o (O, ’ I n t 6 4 F i e l d ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Value : ’ ,O. I n t 6 4 F i e l d ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Get ( name ) : ’ , GetInt64Prop (O, ’ I n t 6 4 F i e l d ’ ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Get ( p r o p i n f o ) : ’ , GetInt64Prop (O, PI ) ) ;
S e t I n t 6 4 P r o p (O, ’ I n t 6 4 F i e l d ’ , 1 2 3 4 5 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Set ( name, 1 2 3 4 5 ) : ’ ,O. I n t 6 4 F i e l d ) ;
S e t I n t 6 4 P r o p (O, PI , 5 4 3 2 1 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Set ( p r o p i n f o , 5 4 3 2 1 ) : ’ ,O. I n t 6 4 F i e l d ) ;
O. Free ;
end .
78.7.8 GetInterfaceProp
Synopsis: Return interface-typed property
Declaration: function GetInterfaceProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string)

: IInterface
function GetInterfaceProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo)
: IInterface
Visibility: default
Description: GetInterfaceProp returns the interface which the property described by PropInfo or with
name Propname points to for object Instance.
method property of Instance. Specifying an invalid property name in PropName will result
in an EPropertyError exception.
See also: SetInterfaceProp (1707), GetOrdProp (1695), GetStrProp (1700), GetFloatProp (1689), GetInt64Prop
78.7.9 GetMethodProp
Synopsis: Return value of a method property
Declaration: function GetMethodProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo) : TMethod

function GetMethodProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string)
: TMethod
1691
Visibility: default
Description: GetMethodProp returns the method the property described by PropInfo or with name Propname
for object Instance. The return type TMethod is defined in the SysUtils unit as:
TMethod = packed record

Code, Data: Pointer;
end;
Data points to the instance of the class with the method Code.
See also: SetMethodProp (1708), GetOrdProp (1695), GetStrProp (1700), GetFloatProp (1689), GetInt64Prop
program example6 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e GetMethodProp f u n c t i o n }
uses r t t i o b j , t y p i n f o , s y s u t i l s ;
Type
T N o t i f y O b j e c t = Class ( TObject )
Procedure N o t i f i c a t i o n 1 ( Sender : TObject ) ;
Procedure N o t i f i c a t i o n 2 ( Sender : TObject ) ;
end ;
Procedure T N o t i f y O b j e c t . N o t i f i c a t i o n 1 ( Sender : TObject ) ;
begin
Write ( ’ Received n o t i f i c a t i o n 1 o f o b j e c t w i t h c l a s s : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Sender . ClassName ) ;
end ;
Procedure T N o t i f y O b j e c t . N o t i f i c a t i o n 2 ( Sender : TObject ) ;
begin
Write ( ’ Received n o t i f i c a t i o n 2 o f o b j e c t w i t h c l a s s : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( Sender . ClassName ) ;
end ;
Var
O : TMyTestObject ;
PI : PPropInfo ;
NO : TNotifyObject ;
M : TMethod ;
Procedure P r in t M et h o d ( Const M : TMethod ) ;
begin
I f (M. Data= P o i n t e r (NO ) ) Then
1692
I f (M. Code= P o i n t e r ( @TNotifyObject . N o t i f i c a t i o n 1 ) ) then

Writeln ( ’ N o t i f i c a t i o n 1 ’ )
else I f (M. Code= P o i n t e r ( @TNotifyObject . N o t i f i c a t i o n 2 ) ) then
Writeln ( ’ N o t i f i c a t i o n 2 ’ )
else
begin
Write ( ’ Unknown method adress ( data : ’ ) ;
Write ( h e x S t r ( L o n g i n t (M. data ) , 8 ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ , code : ’ , h e x s t r ( L o n g i n t (M. Code ) , 8 ) , ’ ) ’ ) ;
end ;
end ;
begin
NO: = T N o t i f y O b j e c t . Create ;
O. N o t i f y E v e n t : =@NO. N o t i f i c a t i o n 1 ;
PI : = G et P ro p In f o (O, ’ N o t i f y E v e n t ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Method p r o p e r t y : ’ ) ;
Write ( ’ N o t i f y i n g : ’ );
O. N o t i f y ;
Write ( ’ Get ( name ) : ’ );
M: = GetMethodProp (O, ’ N o t i f y E v e n t ’ ) ;
P r i n t M et h o d (M) ;
O. N o t i f y ;
Write ( ’ Get ( p r o p i n f o ) : ’ );
M: = GetMethodProp (O, PI ) ;
M: = TMethod (@NO. N o t i f i c a t i o n 2 ) ;
SetMethodProp (O, ’ N o t i f y E v e n t ’ ,M) ;
Write ( ’ Set ( name , N o t i f i c a t i o n 2 ) : ’ );
O. N o t i f y ;
Write ( ’ Set ( p r o p i n f o , N o t i f i c a t i o n 1 ) : ’ );
M: = TMethod (@NO. N o t i f i c a t i o n 1 ) ;
SetMethodProp (O, PI ,M) ;
O. N o t i f y ;
O. Free ;
end .
78.7.10 GetObjectProp
Synopsis: Return value of an object-type property.
Declaration: function GetObjectProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string)
: TObject
function GetObjectProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;
MinClass: TClass) : TObject
function GetObjectProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo) : TObject
function GetObjectProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo;
MinClass: TClass) : TObject
1693
Visibility: default
Description: GetObjectProp returns the object which the property described by PropInfo with name Propname
points to for object Instance.
If MinClass is specified, then if the object is not descendent of class MinClass, then Nil is
returned.
program example5 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e GetObjectProp f u n c t i o n }
Var
O : TMyTestObject ;
PI : PPropInfo ;
NO1,NO2 : TNamedObject ;
begin
NO1: = TNamedObject . Create ;
NO1. ObjectName : = ’ F i r s t named o b j e c t ’ ;
NO2: = TNamedObject . Create ;
NO2. ObjectName : = ’ Second named o b j e c t ’ ;
O. O b j F i e l d : =NO1;
Writeln ( ’ Object property : ’ ) ;
PI : = G et P ro p In f o (O, ’ O b j F i e l d ’ ) ;
Write ( ’ P r o p e r t y c l a s s : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( GetObjectPropClass (O, ’ O b j F i e l d ’ ) . ClassName ) ;
Write ( ’ Value : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( (O. O b j F i e l d as TNamedObject ) . ObjectName ) ;
Write ( ’ Get ( name ) : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( ( GetObjectProp (O, ’ O b j F i e l d ’ ) As TNamedObject ) . ObjectName ) ;
Write ( ’ Get ( p r o p i n f o ) : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( ( GetObjectProp (O, PI , TObject ) as TNamedObject ) . ObjectName ) ;
SetObjectProp (O, ’ O b j F i e l d ’ ,NO2 ) ;
Write ( ’ Set ( name ,NO2 ) : ’ );
SetObjectProp (O, PI ,NO1 ) ;
Write ( ’ Set ( p r o p i n f o ,NO1 ) : ’ ) ;
O. Free ;
end .
78.7.11 GetObjectPropClass
Synopsis: Return class of property.
1694
Declaration: function GetObjectPropClass(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string)

: TClass
function GetObjectPropClass(AClass: TClass;const PropName: string)
: TClass
Visibility: default
Description: GetObjectPropClass returns the declared class of the property with name PropName. This
may not be the actual class of the property value.
For an example, see GetObjectProp (1693).
Errors: No checking is done whether Instance is non-nil. Specifying an invalid property name in PropName
will result in an EPropertyError exception.
(1690)
78.7.12 GetOrdProp
Synopsis: Get the value of an ordinal property
Declaration: function GetOrdProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo) : Int64

function GetOrdProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string) : Int64
Visibility: default
Description: GetOrdProp returns the value of the ordinal property described by PropInfo or with name
PropName for the object Instance. The value is returned as a longint, which should be typecasted
to the needed type.
Ordinal properties that can be retrieved include:
Integers and subranges of integersThe value of the integer will be returned.

Enumerated types and subranges of enumerated typesThe ordinal value of the enumerated type
will be returned.
SetsIf the base type of the set has less than 31 possible values. If a bit is set in the return value, then
the corresponding element of the base ordinal class of the set type must be included in the set.
Errors: No checking is done whether Instance is non-nil, or whether PropInfo describes a valid or-
dinal property of Instance Specifying an invalid property name in PropName will result in an
EPropertyError exception.
See also: SetOrdProp (1709), GetStrProp (1700), GetFloatProp (1689), GetInt64Prop (1690), GetMethodProp
program example1 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e GetOrdProp f u n c t i o n }
Var
O : TMyTestObject ;
1695
PI : PPropInfo ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Boolean p r o p e r t y : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( ’ Value : ’ ,O. B o o l e a n F i e l d ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Ord ( Value ) : ’ , Ord (O. B o o l e a n F i e l d ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Get ( name ) : ’ , GetOrdProp (O, ’ B o o l e a n F i e l d ’ ) ) ;
PI : = G et P ro p In f o (O, ’ B o o l e a n F i e l d ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Get ( p r o p i n f o ) : ’ , GetOrdProp (O, PI ) ) ;
SetOrdProp (O, ’ B o o l e a n F i e l d ’ , Ord ( False ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Set ( name , f a l s e ) : ’ ,O. B o o l e a n F i e l d ) ;
SetOrdProp (O, PI , Ord ( True ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Set ( p r o p i n f o , t r u e ) : ’ ,O. B o o l e a n F i e l d ) ;
O. Free ;
end .
78.7.13 GetPropInfo
Synopsis: Return property type information, by property name.
Declaration: function GetPropInfo(TypeInfo: PTypeInfo;const PropName: string)
: PPropInfo
function GetPropInfo(TypeInfo: PTypeInfo;const PropName: string;
function GetPropInfo(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string)
: PPropInfo
function GetPropInfo(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;
function GetPropInfo(AClass: TClass;const PropName: string) : PPropInfo
function GetPropInfo(AClass: TClass;const PropName: string;
Visibility: default
Description: GetPropInfo returns a pointer to the TPropInfo record for the PropName property of a class.
The class to examine can be specified in one of three ways:
InstanceAn instance of the class.

AClassA class pointer to the class.
TypeInfoA pointer to the type information of the class.
In each of these three ways, if AKinds is specified, if the property has TypeKind which is not
included in Akinds, Nil will be returned.
For an example, see most of the other functions.
Errors: If the property PropName does not exist, Nil is returned.
See also: GetPropInfos (1696), GetPropList (1697)
78.7.14 GetPropInfos
Synopsis: Return a list of published properties.
Declaration: procedure GetPropInfos(TypeInfo: PTypeInfo;PropList: PPropList)
1696
Visibility: default
Description: GetPropInfos stores pointers to the property information of all published properties of a class
with class info TypeInfo in the list pointed to by Proplist. The PropList pointer must point
to a memory location that contains enough space to hold all properties of the class and its parent
classes.
Errors: No checks are done to see whether PropList points to a memory area that is big enough to hold
all pointers.
See also: GetPropInfo (1696), GetPropList (1697)
Program example12 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e Ge t Pr o pI nf o s f u n c t i o n }
uses
rttiobj , typinfo ;
Var
O : TMyTestObject ;
PT : PTypeData ;
PI : PTypeInfo ;
I , J : Longint ;
PP : P P r o p L i s t ;
p r I : PPropInfo ;
begin
PI : =O. C l a s s I n f o ;
PT: = GetTypeData ( PI ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ P r o p e r t y Count : ’ ,PT ^ . PropCount ) ;
GetMem ( PP, PT ^ . PropCount ∗ SizeOf ( P o i n t e r ) ) ;
G e t P r o pI n fo s ( PI , PP ) ;
For I : = 0 to PT ^ . PropCount −1 do
begin
With PP ^ [ i ] ^ do
begin
Write ( ’ P r o p e r t y ’ , i + 1 : 3 , ’ : ’ ,name : 3 0 ) ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ Type : ’ , TypeNames [ t y p i n f o . PropType (O,Name ) ] ) ;
end ;
end ;
FreeMem (PP ) ;
O. Free ;
end .
78.7.15 GetPropList
Synopsis: Return a list of a certain type of published properties.
Declaration: function GetPropList(TypeInfo: PTypeInfo;TypeKinds: TTypeKinds;
PropList: PPropList;Sorted: Boolean) : LongInt
function GetPropList(TypeInfo: PTypeInfo;out PropList: PPropList)
: SizeInt
1697
function GetPropList(AClass: TClass;out PropList: PPropList) : Integer

function GetPropList(Instance: TObject;out PropList: PPropList)
: Integer
Visibility: default
Description: GetPropList stores pointers to property information of the class with class info TypeInfo for
properties of kind TypeKinds in the list pointed to by Proplist. PropList must contain
enough space to hold all properties.
The function returns the number of pointers that matched the criteria and were stored in PropList.
Errors: No checks are done to see whether PropList points to a memory area that is big enough to hold
all pointers.
See also: GetPropInfos (1696), GetPropInfo (1696)
Program example13 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e G e t P r o p L i s t f u n c t i o n }
uses
rttiobj , typinfo ;
Var
O : TMyTestObject ;
PT : PTypeData ;
PI : PTypeInfo ;
I , J : Longint ;
PP : P P r o p L i s t ;
p r I : PPropInfo ;
begin
PI : =O. C l a s s I n f o ;
PT: = GetTypeData ( PI ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ T o t a l p r o p e r t y Count : ’ ,PT ^ . PropCount ) ;
GetMem ( PP, PT ^ . PropCount ∗ SizeOf ( P o i n t e r ) ) ;
J : = G e t P r o p L i s t ( PI , OrdinalTypes , PP ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ O r d i n a l p r o p e r t y Count : ’ , J ) ;
For I : = 0 to J −1 do
begin
With PP ^ [ i ] ^ do
begin
Write ( ’ P r o p e r t y ’ , i + 1 : 3 , ’ : ’ ,name : 3 0 ) ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ Type : ’ , TypeNames [ t y p i n f o . PropType (O,Name ) ] ) ;
end ;
end ;
FreeMem (PP ) ;
O. Free ;
end .
78.7.16 GetPropValue
Synopsis: Get property value as a string.
1698
Declaration: function GetPropValue(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string)

: Variant
function GetPropValue(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;
PreferStrings: Boolean) : Variant
Visibility: default
Description: Due to missing Variant support, GetPropValue is not yet implemented. The declaration is
provided for compatibility with Delphi.
78.7.17 GetRawInterfaceProp
Synopsis: Get a raw (CORBA) interface property.
Declaration: function GetRawInterfaceProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string)

: Pointer
function GetRawInterfaceProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo)
: Pointer
Visibility: default
Description: GetRawInterfaceProp can be used to retrieve the value of a published CORBA interface prop-
erty with name PropName from object Instance. Alternatively, the required property information
can be specified by PropInfo instead of the property name. In difference with the GetInterfaceProp
(1691) function, no reference counting is done.
Errors: If the property PropName does not exist, an EPropertyError exception is raised.
See also: GetInterfaceProp (1691), SetRawInterfaceProp (1709)
78.7.18 GetSetProp
Synopsis: Return the value of a set property.
Declaration: function GetSetProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string) : string
function GetSetProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;
Brackets: Boolean) : string
function GetSetProp(Instance: TObject;const PropInfo: PPropInfo;
Visibility: default
Description: GetSetProp returns the contents of a set property as a string. The property to be returned can be
specified by it’s name in PropName or by its property information in PropInfo.
The returned set is a string representation of the elements in the set as returned by SetToString (1711).
The Brackets option can be used to enclose the string representation in square brackets.
Errors: No checking is done whether Instance is non-nil, or whether PropInfo describes a valid or-
dinal property of Instance Specifying an invalid property name in PropName will result in an
See also: SetSetProp (1710), GetStrProp (1700), GetFloatProp (1689), GetInt64Prop (1690), GetMethodProp
(1691)
1699
program example7 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e GetSetProp f u n c t i o n }
Var
O : TMyTestObject ;
PI : PPropInfo ;
Function S e t A s S t r i n g ( ASet : TMyEnums ) : S t r i n g ;
Var
i : TmyEnum ;
begin
r e s u l t := ’ ’ ;
For i : = m e f i r s t to m e t h i r d do
I f i i n ASet then
begin
I f ( Result <> ’ ’ ) then
Result := Result+ ’ , ’ ;
R e s u l t : = R e s u l t +MyEnumNames [ i ] ;
end ;
end ;
Var
S : TMyEnums ;
begin
O. S e t F i e l d : = [ m e f i r s t , meSecond , meThird ] ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Set p r o p e r t y : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( ’ Value : ’ , S e t A s S t r i n g (O. S e t F i e l d ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Ord ( Value ) : ’ , L o n g i n t (O. S e t F i e l d ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Get ( name ) : ’ , GetSetProp (O, ’ S e t F i e l d ’ ) ) ;
PI : = G et P ro p In f o (O, ’ S e t F i e l d ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Get ( p r o p i n f o ) : ’ , GetSetProp (O, PI , f a l s e ) ) ;
S : = [ meFirst , meThird ] ;
SetOrdProp (O, ’ S e t F i e l d ’ , I n t e g e r (S ) ) ;
Write ( ’ Set ( name , [ m e f i r s t , m e t h i r d ] ) : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( S e t A s S t r i n g (O. S e t F i e l d ) ) ;
S : = [ meSecond ] ;
SetOrdProp (O, PI , I n t e g e r (S ) ) ;
Write ( ’ Set ( p r o p i n f o , [ meSecond ] ) : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( S e t A s S t r i n g (O. S e t F i e l d ) ) ;
O. Free ;
end .
78.7.19 GetStrProp
Synopsis: Return the value of a string property.
Declaration: function GetStrProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo) : Ansistring
1700
function GetStrProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string) : string

Visibility: default
Description: GetStrProp returns the value of the string property described by PropInfo or with name
PropName for object Instance.
string property of Instance. Specifying an invalid property name in PropName will result in
See also: SetStrProp (1710), SetWideStrProp (1712), GetOrdProp (1695), GetFloatProp (1689), GetInt64Prop
(1690), GetMethodProp (1691)
program example3 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e GetStrProp f u n c t i o n }
Var
O : TMyTestObject ;
PI : PPropInfo ;
begin
PI : = G et P ro p In f o (O, ’ A n s i S t r i n g F i e l d ’ ) ;
Writeln ( ’ S t r i n g property : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Value : ’ ,O. A n s i S t r i n g F i e l d ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Get ( name ) : ’ , GetStrProp (O, ’ A n s i S t r i n g F i e l d ’ ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Get ( p r o p i n f o ) : ’ , GetStrProp (O, PI ) ) ;
S e t S t r P r op (O, ’ A n s i S t r i n g F i e l d ’ , ’ F i r s t ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Set ( name , ’ ’ F i r s t ’ ’ ) : ’ ,O. A n s i S t r i n g F i e l d ) ;
S e t S t r P r op (O, PI , ’ Second ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Set ( p r o p i n f o , ’ ’ Second ’ ’ ) : ’ ,O. A n s i S t r i n g F i e l d ) ;
O. Free ;
end .
78.7.20 GetTypeData
Synopsis: Return a pointer to type data, based on type information.
Declaration: function GetTypeData(TypeInfo: PTypeInfo) : PTypeData

Visibility: default
Description: GetTypeData returns a pointer to the TTypeData record that follows after the TTypeInfo
record pointed to by TypeInfo. It essentially skips the Kind and Name fields in the TTypeInfo
record.
Errors: None.
1701
78.7.21 GetUnicodeStrProp
Synopsis: Get UnicodeString-valued property
Declaration: function GetUnicodeStrProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo)

: UnicodeString
function GetUnicodeStrProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string)
: UnicodeString
Visibility: default
Description: GetUnicodeStrProp returns the UnicodeString property from Instance, where the property
is identified by the PropInfo pointer or the PropertyName.
Errors: If no property of the indicated name exists, or the value is not a unicode string, an exception will
occur.
See also: GetStrProp (1700), SetUnicodeStrProp (1712)
78.7.22 GetVariantProp
Synopsis: Return the value of a variant property.
Declaration: function GetVariantProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo) : Variant
function GetVariantProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string)
: Variant
Visibility: default
Description: Due to missing Variant support, the GetVariantProp function is not yet implemented. Provided
for Delphi compatibility only.
See also: SetVariantProp (1712)
78.7.23 GetWideStrProp
Synopsis: Read a widestring property
Declaration: function GetWideStrProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo)
: WideString
function GetWideStrProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string)
: WideString
Visibility: default
Description: GetWideStrProp returns the value of the widestring property described by PropInfo or with
name PropName for object Instance.
widestring property of Instance. Specifying an invalid property name in PropName will result
See also: GetStrProp (1700), SetWideStrProp (1712), GetOrdProp (1695), GetFloatProp (1689), GetInt64Prop
(1690), GetMethodProp (1691)
1702
78.7.24 IsPublishedProp
Synopsis: Check whether a published property exists.
Declaration: function IsPublishedProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string)

: Boolean
function IsPublishedProp(AClass: TClass;const PropName: string)
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: IsPublishedProp returns true if a class has a published property with name PropName. The
class can be specfied in one of two ways:
AClassA class pointer to the class.

Errors: No checks are done to ensure Instance or AClass are valid pointers. Specifying an invalid
property name in PropName will result in an EPropertyError exception.
See also: IsStoredProp (1703), PropIsType (1704)
program example10 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e I s P u b l i s h e d P r o p f u n c t i o n }
Var
O : TMyTestObject ;
PI : PPropInfo ;
begin
Writeln ( ’ Property t e s t s : ’ );
Write ( ’ I s P u b l i s h e d P r o p (O, B o o l e a n F i e l d ) : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( I s P u b l i s h e d P r o p (O, ’ B o o l e a n F i e l d ’ ) ) ;
Write ( ’ I s P u b l i s h e d P r o p ( Class , B o o l e a n F i e l d ) : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( I s P u b l i s h e d P r o p (O. ClassType , ’ B o o l e a n F i e l d ’ ) ) ;
Write ( ’ I s P u b l i s h e d P r o p (O, SomeField ) : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( I s P u b l i s h e d P r o p (O, ’ SomeField ’ ) ) ;
Write ( ’ I s P u b l i s h e d P r o p ( Class , SomeField ) : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( I s P u b l i s h e d P r o p (O. ClassType , ’ SomeField ’ ) ) ;
O. Free ;
end .
78.7.25 IsStoredProp
Synopsis: Check whether a property is stored.
Declaration: function IsStoredProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo) : Boolean
function IsStoredProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string)
: Boolean
1703
Visibility: default
Description: IsStoredProp returns True if the Stored modifier evaluates to True for the property de-
scribed by PropInfo or with name PropName for object Instance. It returns False other-
wise. If the function returns True, this indicates that the property should be written when streaming
the object Instance.
If there was no stored modifier in the declaration of the property, True will be returned.
property of Instance. Specifying an invalid property name in PropName will result in an
See also: IsPublishedProp (1703), PropIsType (1704)
program example11 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e I s S t o r e d P r o p f u n c t i o n }
Var
O : TMyTestObject ;
PI : PPropInfo ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Stored t e s t s : ’ );
Write ( ’ I s S t o r e d P r o p (O, S t o r e d I n t e g e r C o n s t F a l s e ) : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( I s S t o r e d P r o p (O, ’ S t o r e d I n t e g e r C o n s t F a l s e ’ ) ) ;
Write ( ’ I s S t o r e d P r o p (O, S t o r e d I n t e g e r C o n s t T r u e ) : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( I s S t o r e d P r o p (O, ’ S t o r e d I n t e g e r C o n s t T r u e ’ ) ) ;
Write ( ’ I s S t o r e d P r o p (O, St ored Int ege rMe thod ) : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( I s S t o r e d P r o p (O, ’ St ored Int ege rMe thod ’ ) ) ;
Write ( ’ I s S t o r e d P r o p (O, S t o r e d I n t e g e r V i r t u a l M e t h o d ) : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( I s S t o r e d P r o p (O, ’ S t o r e d I n t e g e r V i r t u a l M e t h o d ’ ));
O. Free ;
end .
78.7.26 PropIsType
Synopsis: Check the type of a published property.
Declaration: function PropIsType(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;
TypeKind: TTypeKind) : Boolean
function PropIsType(AClass: TClass;const PropName: string;
TypeKind: TTypeKind) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: PropIsType returns True if the property with name PropName has type TypeKind. It returns
False otherwise. The class to be examined can be specified in one of two ways:
AClassA class pointer.
1704
Errors: No checks are done to ensure Instance or AClass are valid pointers.Specifying an invalid prop-
erty name in PropName will result in an EPropertyError exception.
See also: IsPublishedProp (1703), IsStoredProp (1703), PropType (1705)
program example16 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e PropIsType f u n c t i o n }
Var
O : TMyTestObject ;
begin
Write ( ’ PropIsType (O, BooleanField , t k B o o l ) : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( PropIsType (O, ’ B o o l e a n F i e l d ’ , t k B o o l ) ) ;
Write ( ’ PropIsType ( Class , BooleanField , t k B o o l ) : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( PropIsType (O. ClassType , ’ B o o l e a n F i e l d ’ , t k B o o l ) ) ;
Write ( ’ PropIsType (O, B y t e F i e l d , t k S t r i n g ) : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( PropisType (O, ’ B y t e F i e l d ’ , t k S t r i n g ) ) ;
Write ( ’ PropIsType ( Class , B y t e F i e l d , t k S t r i n g ) : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( PropIsType (O. ClassType , ’ B y t e F i e l d ’ , t k S t r i n g ) ) ;
O. Free ;
end .
78.7.27 PropType
Synopsis: Return the type of a property
Declaration: function PropType(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string) : TTypeKind
function PropType(AClass: TClass;const PropName: string) : TTypeKind
Visibility: default
Description: Proptype returns the type of the property PropName for a class. The class to be examined can
be specified in one of 2 ways:
AClassA class pointer.

Errors: No checks are done to ensure Instance or AClass are valid pointers. Specifying an invalid
See also: IsPublishedProp (1703), IsStoredProp (1703), PropIsType (1704)
1705
program example17 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e PropType f u n c t i o n }
Var
O : TMyTestObject ;
begin
Write ( ’ PropType (O, B o o l e a n F i e l d ) : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( TypeNames [ PropType (O, ’ B o o l e a n F i e l d ’ ) ] ) ;
Write ( ’ PropType ( Class , B o o l e a n F i e l d ) : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( TypeNames [ PropType (O. ClassType , ’ B o o l e a n F i e l d ’ ) ] ) ;
Write ( ’ PropType (O, B y t e F i e l d ) : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( TypeNames [ PropType (O, ’ B y t e F i e l d ’ ) ] ) ;
Write ( ’ PropType ( Class , B y t e F i e l d ) : ’ );
W r i t e l n ( TypeNames [ PropType (O. ClassType , ’ B y t e F i e l d ’ ) ] ) ;
O. Free ;
end .
78.7.28 SetEnumProp
Synopsis: Set value of an enumerated-type property
Declaration: procedure SetEnumProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;

const Value: string)
procedure SetEnumProp(Instance: TObject;const PropInfo: PPropInfo;
Visibility: default
Description: SetEnumProp sets the property described by PropInfo or with name PropName to Value.
Value must be a string with the name of the enumerate value, i.e. it can be used as an argument to
GetEnumValue (1689).
For an example, see GetEnumProp (1688).
Errors: No checks are done to ensure Instance or PropInfo are valid pointers. Specifying an invalid
See also: GetEnumProp (1688), SetStrProp (1710), SetFloatProp (1706), SetInt64Prop (1707), SetMethod-
Prop (1708)
78.7.29 SetFloatProp
Synopsis: Set value of a float property.
Declaration: procedure SetFloatProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;

Value: Extended)
procedure SetFloatProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo;
Value: Extended)
1706
Visibility: default
Description: SetFloatProp assigns Value to the property described by PropInfo or with name Propname
for the object Instance.
For an example, see GetFloatProp (1689).
float property of Instance. Specifying an invalid property name in PropName will result in
See also: GetFloatProp (1689), SetOrdProp (1709), SetStrProp (1710), SetInt64Prop (1707), SetMethodProp
(1708)
78.7.30 SetInt64Prop
Synopsis: Set value of a Int64 property
Declaration: procedure SetInt64Prop(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo;
const Value: Int64)
procedure SetInt64Prop(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;
const Value: Int64)
Visibility: default
Description: SetInt64Prop assigns Value to the property of type Int64 that is described by PropInfo
or with name Propname for the object Instance.
For an example, see GetInt64Prop (1690).
Int64 property of Instance. Specifying an invalid property name in PropName will result
See also: GetInt64Prop (1690), GetMethodProp (1691), SetOrdProp (1709), SetStrProp (1710), SetFloatProp
(1706)
78.7.31 SetInterfaceProp
Synopsis: Set interface-valued property
Declaration: procedure SetInterfaceProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;
const Value: IInterface)
procedure SetInterfaceProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo;
const Value: IInterface)
Visibility: default
Description: SetInterfaceProp assigns Value to the object property described by PropInfo or with
name Propname for the object Instance.
Errors: No checking is done whether Instance is non-nil, or whether PropInfo describes a valid inter-
face property of Instance. Specifying an invalid property name in PropName will result in an
See also: GetInterfaceProp (1691), SetObjectProp (1708), SetOrdProp (1709), SetStrProp (1710), SetFloat-
Prop (1706), SetInt64Prop (1707), SetMethodProp (1708)
1707
78.7.32 SetMethodProp
Synopsis: Set the value of a method property
Declaration: procedure SetMethodProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo;

const Value: TMethod)
procedure SetMethodProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;
const Value: TMethod)
Visibility: default
Description: SetMethodProp assigns Value to the method the property described by PropInfo or with
name Propname for object Instance.
The type TMethod of the Value parameter is defined in the SysUtils unit as:
TMethod = packed record

Code, Data: Pointer;
end;
Data should point to the instance of the class with the method Code.
For an example, see GetMethodProp (1691).
See also: GetMethodProp (1691), SetOrdProp (1709), SetStrProp (1710), SetFloatProp (1706), SetInt64Prop
(1707)
78.7.33 SetObjectProp
Synopsis: Set the value of an object-type property.
Declaration: procedure SetObjectProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;
Value: TObject)
procedure SetObjectProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo;
Value: TObject)
Visibility: default
Description: SetObjectProp assigns Value to the object property described by PropInfo or with name
Propname for the object Instance.
For an example, see GetObjectProp (1693).
Errors: No checking is done whether Instance is non-nil, or whether PropInfo describes a valid ob-
ject property of Instance. Specifying an invalid property name in PropName will result in an
See also: GetObjectProp (1693), SetOrdProp (1709), SetStrProp (1710), SetFloatProp (1706), SetInt64Prop
(1707), SetMethodProp (1708)
1708
78.7.34 SetOrdProp
Synopsis: Set value of an ordinal property
Declaration: procedure SetOrdProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo;Value: Int64)
procedure SetOrdProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;
Value: Int64)
Visibility: default
Description: SetOrdProp assigns Value to the ordinal property described by PropInfo or with name
Propname for the object Instance.
Ordinal properties that can be set include:
Integers and subranges of integersThe actual value of the integer must be passed.
Enumerated types and subranges of enumerated typesThe ordinal value of the enumerated type
must be passed.
Subrange typesof integers or enumerated types. Here the ordinal value must be passed.
SetsIf the base type of the set has less than 31 possible values. For each possible value; the corre-
sponding bit of Value must be set.
For an example, see GetOrdProp (1695).

Errors: No checking is done whether Instance is non-nil, or whether PropInfo describes a valid ordinal
property of Instance. No range checking is performed. Specifying an invalid property name in
PropName will result in an EPropertyError exception.
See also: GetOrdProp (1695), SetStrProp (1710), SetFloatProp (1706), SetInt64Prop (1707), SetMethodProp
(1708)
78.7.35 SetPropValue
Synopsis: Set property value as variant
Declaration: procedure SetPropValue(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;
Visibility: default
Description: Due to missing Variant support, this function is not yet implemented; it is provided for Delphi
compatibility only.
78.7.36 SetRawInterfaceProp
Synopsis: Set a raw (CORBA) interface property.
Declaration: procedure SetRawInterfaceProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;
const Value: Pointer)
procedure SetRawInterfaceProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo;
const Value: Pointer)
Visibility: default
Description: SetRawInterfaceProp can be used to set the value of a published CORBA interface with name
PropName from object Instance to Value. Alternatively, the required property information can
be specified by PropInfo instead of the property name. In difference with the SetInterfaceProp
(1707) procedure, no reference counting is done.
1709
Errors: If the property PropName does not exist, an EPropertyError exception is raised.
See also: SetInterfaceProp (1707), GetRawInterfaceProp (1699)
78.7.37 SetSetProp
Synopsis: Set value of set-typed property.
Declaration: procedure SetSetProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;

procedure SetSetProp(Instance: TObject;const PropInfo: PPropInfo;
Visibility: default
Description: SetSetProp sets the property specified by PropInfo or PropName for object Instance to
Value. Value is a string which contains a comma-separated list of values, each value being a
string-representation of the enumerated value that should be included in the set. The value should be
accepted by the StringToSet (1713) function.
The value can be formed using the SetToString (1711) function.
For an example, see GetSetProp (1699).
Errors: No checking is done whether Instance is non-nil, or whether PropInfo describes a valid ordinal
property of Instance. No range checking is performed. Specifying an invalid property name in
PropName will result in an EPropertyError exception.
See also: GetSetProp (1699), SetOrdProp (1709), SetStrProp (1710), SetFloatProp (1706), SetInt64Prop (1707),
SetMethodProp (1708), SetToString (1711), StringToSet (1713)
78.7.38 SetStrProp
Synopsis: Set value of a string property
Declaration: procedure SetStrProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;
const Value: AnsiString)
procedure SetStrProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo;
const Value: Ansistring)
Visibility: default
Description: SetStrProp assigns Value to the string property described by PropInfo or with name Propname
for object Instance.
For an example, see GetStrProp (1700)
string property of Instance. Specifying an invalid property name in PropName will result in
See also: GetStrProp (1700), SetWideStrProp (1712), SetOrdProp (1709), SetFloatProp (1706), SetInt64Prop
1710
78.7.39 SetToString
Synopsis: Convert set to a string description
Declaration: function SetToString(TypeInfo: PTypeInfo;Value: Integer;
function SetToString(PropInfo: PPropInfo;Value: Integer;
function SetToString(PropInfo: PPropInfo;Value: Integer) : string
Visibility: default
Description: SetToString takes an integer representation of a set (as received e.g. by GetOrdProp) and
turns it into a string representing the elements in the set, based on the type information found in the
PropInfo property information. By default, the string representation is not surrounded by square
brackets. Setting the Brackets parameter to True will surround the string representation with
brackets.
The function returns the string representation of the set.
Errors: No checking is done to see whether PropInfo points to valid property information.
See also: GetEnumName (1687), GetEnumValue (1689), StringToSet (1713)
program example18 ;
{ T h i s program demonstrates t h e S e t T o S t r i n g f u n c t i o n }
Var
O : TMyTestObject ;
PI : PPropInfo ;
I : longint ;
begin
PI : = G et P ro p In f o (O, ’ S e t F i e l d ’ ) ;
O. S e t F i e l d : = [ m e f i r s t , meSecond , meThird ] ;
I : = GetOrdProp (O, PI ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Set p r o p e r t y t o s t r i n g : ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Value : ’ , S e t T o S t r i n g ( PI , I , False ) ) ;
O. S e t F i e l d : = [ m e f i r s t , meSecond ] ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Value : ’ , S e t T o S t r i n g ( PI , I , True ) ) ;
I : = S t r i n g T o S e t ( PI , ’ m e f i r s t ’ ) ;
SetOrdProp (O, PI , I ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Value : ’ , S e t T o S t r i n g ( PI , I , False ) ) ;
I : = S t r i n g T o S e t ( PI , ’ [ mesecond , m e t h i r d ] ’ ) ;
SetOrdProp (O, PI , I ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Value : ’ , S e t T o S t r i n g ( PI , I , True ) ) ;
O. Free ;
end .
1711
78.7.40 SetUnicodeStrProp
Synopsis: Set UnicodeString-valued property
Declaration: procedure SetUnicodeStrProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;

const Value: UnicodeString)
procedure SetUnicodeStrProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo;
const Value: UnicodeString)
Visibility: default
Description: SetUnicodeStrProp sets the UnicodeString property from Instance to Value, where the
property is identified by the PropInfo pointer or the PropertyName.
Errors: If no property of the indicated name exists, or it is not of type unicodestring, an exception will occur.
See also: SetStrProp (1710), GetUnicodeStrProp (1702)
78.7.41 SetVariantProp
Synopsis: Set value of a variant property
Declaration: procedure SetVariantProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;
procedure SetVariantProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo;
Visibility: default
Description: Due to missing Variant support, this function is not yet implemented. Provided for Delphi compati-
bility only.
78.7.42 SetWideStrProp
Synopsis: Set a widestring property
Declaration: procedure SetWideStrProp(Instance: TObject;const PropName: string;
const Value: WideString)
procedure SetWideStrProp(Instance: TObject;PropInfo: PPropInfo;
const Value: WideString)
Visibility: default
Description: SetWideStrProp assigns Value to the widestring property described by PropInfo or with
name Propname for object Instance.
widestring property of Instance. Specifying an invalid property name in PropName will result
See also: GetWideStrProp (1702), SetStrProp (1710), SetOrdProp (1709), SetFloatProp (1706), SetInt64Prop
1712
78.7.43 StringToSet
Synopsis: Convert string description to a set.
Declaration: function StringToSet(PropInfo: PPropInfo;const Value: string) : Integer

function StringToSet(TypeInfo: PTypeInfo;const Value: string) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: StringToSet converts the string representation of a set in Value to a integer representation of
the set, using the property information found in PropInfo. This property information should point
to the property information of a set property. The function returns the integer representation of the
set. (i.e, the set value, typecast to an integer)
The string representation can be surrounded with square brackets, and must consist of the names of
the elements of the base type of the set. The base type of the set should be an enumerated type. The
elements should be separated by commas, and may be surrounded by spaces. each of the names will
be fed to the GetEnumValue (1689) function.
For an example, see SetToString (1711).
Errors: No checking is done to see whether PropInfo points to valid property information. If a wrong
name is given for an enumerated value, then an EPropertyError will be raised.
See also: GetEnumName (1687), GetEnumValue (1689), SetToString (1711)
78.8 TProcedureSignature
TProcedureSignature = packed record
Flags : Byte;
CC : TCallConv;
ResultType : PTypeInfo;
ParamCount : Byte;
function GetParam(ParamIndex: Integer) : PProcedureParam;
end
TProcedureSignature describes a procedure/method call signature. It consists of some flags

(Flags), a calling convention (CC), the result type (ResultType) if any, and a list of ParamCount
parameters (of type TProcedureParam (1676)).

1713 GetParam Get parameter signature
78.8.2 TProcedureSignature.GetParam
Synopsis: Get parameter signature
Declaration: function GetParam(ParamIndex: Integer) : PProcedureParam
Visibility: default
Description: GetParam can be used to retrieve a pointer to the description of a parameter. The index ParamIndex
is zero-based.
1713
Errors: In case of an invalid parameter index, Nil is returned.

See also: TProcedureParam (1676)
78.9 EPropertyConvertError
78.9.1 Description
EPropertyConvertError is not used in the Free Pascal implementation of the typinfo unit, but
is declared for Delphi compatibility.
78.10 EPropertyError
78.10.1 Description
Exception raised in case of an error in one of the functions.
1714
Chapter 79
Reference for unit ’unicodedata’
79.1 Overview
The fpwidestring (1715) unit relies on having relevant unicode collation data linked in the binary. The
unicode data is managed using the routines in the unicodedata unit. The FPC project distributes
some unicode collation data in .bco files which can be loaded using the LoadCollation (1724)
routines. The LoadCollation is the main routine of this unit.
All collation data requires at least the Default Unicode Collation Element Table to be registered
(called DUCET). The DUCET encoding is provided by the unicodeducet unit, part of the rtl-unicode
package.
There are two ways to register collations :
1. at compile time: by including the desired collation unit, for example for Russian and Japanese
languages to be available you will have to include collation_ru and collation_ja from package
"rtl-unicode".
2. at runtime using the abovementioned LoadCollation function.
The two ways can co-exist: some collations may be compile time included (for example for most
used collations) and others can be loaded at runtime in the same application.
The binary collation files are endian sensitive:
• there are files for little endian systems named collation__le.bco (such as collation_ru_le.bco
and collation_ja_le.bco)
• there are files for big endian systems named collation__be.bco (such as collation_ru_be.bco
and collation_ja_be.bco).
Note that the compile time units collation units (collation_lang.pas) include already the unicode-
ducet.pas (DUCET) unit so it is not necessary to include it manually, contrary to the binary files. So
an application that only uses the binary collation files should at least include the unicodeducet unit
or manually load the binary collation collation_ducet_le.bco or collation_ducet_be.bco, depending
on the endianness of the platform. The LoadCollation (1724) call using a directory and the language
ducet automatically select the correct file.
1715
CHAPTER 79. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’UNICODEDATA’

79.2.1 Resource strings
SCollationNotFound = ’Collation not found : "%s".’
Error message when a collation is not found.
79.2.2 Constants
ENDIAN_SUFFIX : Array[TEndianKind] of string = (’le’, ’be’)
ENDIAN_SUFFIX contains the suffixes used in LoadCollation (1724) when constructing a collation
filename for a language.
ERROR_INVALID_CODEPOINT_SEQUENCE = 1
Error exit code for UnicodeToLower/UnicodeToUpper
HIGH_SURROGATE_BEGIN = ($D800)
First value for high surrogate values.
HIGH_SURROGATE_COUNT = HIGH_SURROGATE_END - HIGH_SURROGATE_BEGIN + 1
Number of high surrogate values.
HIGH_SURROGATE_END = ($DBFF)
Last value for high surrogate values.
LOW_SURROGATE_BEGIN = ($DC00)
First value for low surrogate values.
LOW_SURROGATE_END = ($DFFF)
Last value for low surrogate values.
MAX_LEGAL_UTF32 = $10FFFF
Maximum value of a legally encoded UTF32 value (currently unused)
MAX_WORD = (Word)
MAX_WORD is the maximum value of a WORD typed value.
ROOT_COLLATION_NAME = ’DUCET’
Name of the root collation (used if no collation name is given)
1716
UCS4_HALF_BASE = ($10000)
Offset for UCS4 character encoding
UCS4_HALF_MASK = ($3FF)
Unused currently
UGC_ClosePunctuation = 14
Unicode token category: Close punctuation
UGC_CombiningMark = 6
Unicode token category: Uppercase letter
UGC_ConnectPunctuation = 11
Unicode token category: Connect punctuation
UGC_Control = 25
Unicode token category: control token
UGC_CurrencySymbol = 19
Unicode token category: Currency symbol
UGC_DashPunctuation = 12
Unicode token category: Dash punctuation
UGC_DecimalNumber = 8
UGC_EnclosingMark = 7
UGC_FinalPunctuation = 16
Unicode token category: Final punctuation
UGC_Format = 26
Unicode token category: Formatting token
UGC_InitialPunctuation = 15
Unicode token category: Initial punctuation
1717
UGC_LetterNumber = 9
Unicode token category: Letter-number
UGC_LineSeparator = 23
Unicode token category: Line separator
UGC_LowercaseLetter = 1
Unicode general category: Lowercase letter
UGC_MathSymbol = 18
Unicode token category: Math symbol
UGC_ModifierLetter = 3
Unicode general category: modifier letter
UGC_ModifierSymbol = 20
Unicode token category: modifier symbol
UGC_NonSpacingMark = 5
Unicode general category: Non-spacing mark
UGC_OpenPunctuation = 13
Unicode token category: Open puntctuation
UGC_OtherLetter = 4
Unicode general category: Other letter
UGC_OtherNumber = 10
Unicode token category: Other number
UGC_OtherPunctuation = 17
Unicode token category: Other punctuation
UGC_OtherSymbol = 21
Unicode token category: Other symbol
UGC_ParagraphSeparator = 24
Unicode token category: Paragraph separator
1718
UGC_PrivateUse = 28
Unicode token category: For private use
UGC_SpaceSeparator = 22
Unicode token category: Space separator
UGC_Surrogate = 27
Unicode token category: Surrogate token
UGC_TitlecaseLetter = 2
Unicode general category: Titlecase letter
UGC_Unassigned = 29
Unicode token category: As yet unassigned
UGC_UppercaseLetter = 0
Unicode general category: Uppercase letter
ZERO_UINT24 : UInt24 = (byte2: 0; byte1: 0; byte0: 0)
TUInt24Rec value with all bytes zero.
79.2.3 Types
PUCA_DataBook = ^TUCA_DataBook
Pointer to TUCA_DataBook type.
PUCA_PropItemContextRec = ^TUCA_PropItemContextRec
Pointer to TUCA_PropItemContextRec
PUCA_PropItemContextTreeNodeRec = ^TUCA_PropItemContextTreeNodeRec
Pointer to TUCA_PropItemContextTreeNodeRec
PUCA_PropItemContextTreeRec = ^TUCA_PropItemContextTreeRec
Pointer to TUCA_PropItemContextTreeRec
PUCA_PropItemRec = ^TUCA_PropItemRec
Pointer to TUCA_PropItemRec
1719
PUCA_PropWeights = ^TUCA_PropWeights
Pointer to TUCA_PropWeights
PUC_Prop = ^TUC_Prop
Pointer to TUC_Prop record
PUInt24 = ÛInt24
Pointer to TUInt24Rec
TCollationField = (BackWard,VariableLowLimit,VariableHighLimit)
Table 79.1: Enumeration values for type TCollationField
Value Explanation
BackWard Backwards encoded
VariableHighLimit Has upper bound on variable weights
VariableLowLimit Has lower bound on variable weights
TCollationField describes some properties of the collation data items.
TCollationFields = Set of TCollationField
Set of TCollationField
TCollationName = string
Collation name string type (fixed lenght)
TEndianKind = (Little,Big)
Table 79.2: Enumeration values for type TEndianKind
Value Explanation
Big Big-endian platform
Little Little-endian platform
TEndianKind is an auxiliary enumerated type to enumerate the endianness of platforms.
TUCASortKey = Array of TUCASortKeyItem
Array of TUCASortKeyItem
TUCASortKeyItem = Word
1720
Alias for WORD
TUCA_PropWeights = packed record

Weights : Array[0..2] of Word;
end
TUC_PropWeights describes the weights of collation characteristics of a unicode character. It is

an internal structure which should not be used directly, the actual structure is subject to change.
TUCA_VariableKind = (ucaShifted,ucaNonIgnorable,ucaBlanked,
ucaShiftedTrimmed,ucaIgnoreSP)
Table 79.3: Enumeration values for type TUCA_VariableKind
Value Explanation
ucaBlanked Variable collation elements and any subsequent ignorable collation elements are reset so that all weigh
ucaIgnoreSP Not implemented (variant of Shifted that reduces the set of variable collation elements to include only
ucaNonIgnorable Variable collation elements are not reset to be quaternary collation elements
ucaShifted Variable collation elements are reset to zero at levels one through three
ucaShiftedTrimmed This option is the same as Shifted, except that all trailing FFFFs are trimmed from the sort key.
Options for weighting data
UInt24 = TUInt24Rec
Alias for TUInt24Rec

79.3.1 CanonicalOrder
Synopsis: Put unicode string in canonical order.
Declaration: procedure CanonicalOrder(var AString: UnicodeString); Overload

procedure CanonicalOrder(AStr: PUnicodeChar;const ALength: SizeInt)
; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: CanonicalOrder transforms a unicode string AString (or the alternate form using a null-
terminated AStr with length Alength) so it is in canonical order (as defined by the unicode spec-
ification). A string needs to be in canonical order to be able to compare strings. This function is
called as part of NormalizeNFD (1725).
See also: NormalizeNFD (1725)
1721
79.3.2 CompareSortKey
Synopsis: Compare two sort keys.
Declaration: function CompareSortKey(const A: TUCASortKey;const B: TUCASortKey)

: Integer; Overload
function CompareSortKey(const A: TUCASortKey;const B: Array of Word)
: Integer; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: CompareSortKey compares 2 sort keys A and B. It returns
•a negative number if A comes alphabetically ordered before B.

•Zero if A is alphabetically identical to B.
•A positive number iff A is alphabetically ordered after B.
Sort keys can be constructed from unicode strings using ComputeSortKey (1722).
See also: ComputeSortKey (1722)
79.3.3 ComputeSortKey
Synopsis: Compute the sort key for a string
Declaration: function ComputeSortKey(const AString: UnicodeString;
const ACollation: PUCA_DataBook) : TUCASortKey
; Overload
function ComputeSortKey(const AStr: PUnicodeChar;const ALength: SizeInt;
const ACollation: PUCA_DataBook) : TUCASortKey
; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: ComputeSortKey computes the sort key for a unicode string AString (or the alternate form
using a null-terminated AStr with length Alength) using the Unicode Collation Algorithm dat in
ACollation. This key can then be used in CompareSortKey (1722) to compare unicode strings.
See also: CompareSortKey (1722)
79.3.4 FindCollation
Synopsis: Find a collation by name
Declaration: function FindCollation(const AName: ansistring) : PUCA_DataBook

; Overload
function FindCollation(const AIndex: Integer) : PUCA_DataBook; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: FindCollection searches a collation with name AName or index AIndex in the list of known
collations and returns a pointer to the collation data. If the requested collation is not known, i.e. the
name is not found, or the index is out of range, then Nil is returned. The valid index range is 0 to
GetCollationCount-1.
See also: GetCollationCount (1723)
1722
79.3.5 FreeCollation
Synopsis: Free collation data.
Declaration: procedure FreeCollation(AItem: PUCA_DataBook)
Visibility: default
Description: FreeCollation removes all structures in the collation data from memory. It will not do anything
when the header field Dynamic is false. (collations loaded and registered using LoadCollation
(1724) are always dynamic and must be freed).
See also: LoadCollation (1724)
79.3.6 FromUCS4
Synopsis: Convert UCS4 to UNicodeChar
Declaration: procedure FromUCS4(const AValue: UCS4Char;var AHighS: UnicodeChar;
var ALowS: UnicodeChar)
Visibility: default
Description: FromUCS4 converts the UCS4 encoded unicode character AValue to a set of unicode (surrogate
pair) characters encoded in UTF16: AHighS, ALowS.
See also: ToUCS4 (1726), UnicodeIsHighSurrogate (1726), UnicodeIsLowSurrogate (1726), UnicodeIsSur-
rogatePair (1727)
79.3.7 GetCollationCount
Synopsis: Return the number of known collations.
Declaration: function GetCollationCount : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: GetCollationCount returns the number of registered collations. The collation data can be re-
trieved by index using the FindCollation (1722). The maximum index is GetCollationCount-1.
See also: FindCollation (1722)
79.3.8 GetProps
Synopsis: Get unicode character data
Declaration: function GetProps(const ACodePoint: Word) : PUC_Prop; Overload
function GetProps(const AHighS: UnicodeChar;const ALowS: UnicodeChar)
: PUC_Prop; Overload
function GetProps(const ACodePoint: Cardinal) : PUC_Prop; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: GetProps returns a pointer to a general unicode character property data structure. The charac-
ter can be specified using a word or cardinal sized codepoint (ACodePoint), or using a UTF16
encoded surrogate pair (AHighS,ALowS).
The returned pointer must not be freed, it points to part of a static structure.
See also: GetPropUCA (1724)
1723
79.3.9 GetPropUCA
Synopsis: Get unicode collation algorithm properties for a unicode character
Declaration: function GetPropUCA(const AHighS: UnicodeChar;const ALowS: UnicodeChar;
const ABook: PUCA_DataBook) : PUCA_PropItemRec
; Overload
function GetPropUCA(const AChar: UnicodeChar;const ABook: PUCA_DataBook)
: PUCA_PropItemRec; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: GetPropUCA returns UCA data for the unicode character (AChar) or surrogate pair AHighS,
ALowS) in the collation data book ABook. If no data is available, Nil is returned.
Errors: if an invalid ABook is specified, an access violation may occur.
See also: GetProps (1723)
79.3.10 IncrementalCompareString
Synopsis: Compare 2 strings using the specified collation
Declaration: function IncrementalCompareString(const AStrA: PUnicodeChar;
const ALengthA: SizeInt;
const AStrB: PUnicodeChar;
const ALengthB: SizeInt;
const ACollation: PUCA_DataBook)
: Integer; Overload
function IncrementalCompareString(const AStrA: UnicodeString;
const AStrB: UnicodeString;
const ACollation: PUCA_DataBook)
: Integer; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: IncrementalCompareString creates 2 compare keys from the strings AStrA and AStrB
using collation data in ACollation. The keys are computed only to the point where the two
strings differ. This means the keys cannot be reused for other comparisons if the strings differ. The
two strings can be specified as a unicode string or as a pointer to a null-terminated character array
with a length (ALengthA and ALengthB). It returns then the result of CompareSortKey (1722).
Errors: None.
See also: ComputeSortKey (1722), CompareSortKey (1722)
79.3.11 LoadCollation
Synopsis: Load a binary collation data file from file
Declaration: function LoadCollation(const AData: Pointer;const ADataLength: Integer)
: PUCA_DataBook; Overload
function LoadCollation(const AFileName: string) : PUCA_DataBook
; Overload
function LoadCollation(const ADirectory: string;const ALanguage: string)
: PUCA_DataBook; Overload
Visibility: default
1724
Description: LoadCollation loads collation data from file AFileName, or from a memory block AData
with length ADataLength. If successful, it returns a pointer which can be used to register the
collation using RegisterCollation (1725). if there is a problem with the data, Nil is returned.
The filename can also be specified as a Directory and language name ALanguage. The latter is
prepended with collation_ and appended with the native endianness of the current platform, and
has extension .bco
Errors: If the file containing data does not exist or has a size which is less than the encoded header size, Nil
is returned.
See also: RegisterCollation (1725)
79.3.12 NormalizeNFD
Synopsis: Perform unicode normalization D on a string
Declaration: function NormalizeNFD(const AString: UnicodeString) : UnicodeString
; Overload
function NormalizeNFD(const AStr: PUnicodeChar;ALength: SizeInt)
: UnicodeString; Overload
Visibility: default
Description: NormalizeNFD normalizes the string AString (or the alternate form using a null-terminated
AStr with length Alength) to Unicode Normalization Form D. The resulting string can be used to
determine equivalence of unicode strings.
See also: CanonicalOrder (1721)
79.3.13 PrepareCollation
Synopsis: Prepare a collation for use in the list
Declaration: procedure PrepareCollation(ACollation: PUCA_DataBook;
const ABaseName: ansistring;
const AChangedFields: TCollationFields)
Visibility: default
Description: PrepareCollation will link collation definition ACollation to the base collection with
name ABaseName (if empty, it defaults to the root collation). It will also initialize some fields in the
definition, copying them from the base collation, but excludes the fields enumerated in AChangedFields.
It should normally not be needed to call this function, it is called as part of LoadCollation (1724).
See also: LoadCollation (1724)
79.3.14 RegisterCollation
Synopsis: Register a new collation
Declaration: function RegisterCollation(const ACollation: PUCA_DataBook) : Boolean
; Overload
function RegisterCollation(const ADirectory: string;
const ALanguage: string) : Boolean; Overload
Visibility: default
1725
Description: RegisterCollation registers a new collation ACollation in the list of known collations.
The collation data can be specified directly (ACollation) or a name of a language (ALanguage)
in a directory (ADirectory). The latter option will load the binary encodeded collation from file
using LoadCollation (1724).
If the collation is loaded correctly, True is returned, otherwise False is returned (for instance when
a collation with the same name is already loaded).
See also: UnRegisterCollation (1728), UnRegisterCollations (1728), LoadCollation (1724)
79.3.15 ToUCS4
Synopsis: Encode unicode UTF16 surrogate pair to UCS4 character
Declaration: function ToUCS4(const AHighS: UnicodeChar;const ALowS: UnicodeChar)
: UCS4Char
Visibility: default
Description: ToUCS4 converts set of unicode (surrogate pair) characters encoded in UTF16: AHighS, ALowS
to a UCS4 encoded unicode character.
See also: FromUCS4 (1723), UnicodeIsHighSurrogate (1726), UnicodeIsLowSurrogate (1726), UnicodeIs-

SurrogatePair (1727)
79.3.16 UnicodeIsHighSurrogate
Synopsis: Check if a UTF16 character is the high character in a surrogate pair.
Declaration: function UnicodeIsHighSurrogate(const AValue: UnicodeChar) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: UnicodeIsHighSurrogate checks whether AValue is a valid high character of a surrogate
pair, and returns True if this is the case. It does this by checking whether the values are within the
bounds for high characters in surrogate pairs.
See also: FromUCS4 (1723), ToUCS4 (1726), UnicodeIsHighSurrogate (1726), UnicodeIsLowSurrogate (1726),
UnicodeIsSurrogatePair (1727)
79.3.17 UnicodeIsLowSurrogate
Synopsis: Check if a UTF16 character is the low character in a surrogate pair.
Declaration: function UnicodeIsLowSurrogate(const AValue: UnicodeChar) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: UnicodeIsHighSurrogate checks whether AValue is a valid high character of a surrogate
pair, and returns True if this is the case. It does this by checking whether the values are within the
bounds for high characters in surrogate pairs.
See also: FromUCS4 (1723), ToUCS4 (1726), UnicodeIsHighSurrogate (1726), UnicodeIsSurrogatePair (1727)
1726
79.3.18 UnicodeIsSurrogatePair
Synopsis: Check if a pair of UTF16 encoded characters is a valid surrogate pair.
Declaration: function UnicodeIsSurrogatePair(const AHighSurrogate: UnicodeChar;
: Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: UnicodeIsSurrogatePair checks whether AHighSurrogate,ALowSurrogate consti-
tute a valid surrogate pair, and returns True if this is the case. It does this by checking whether the
values are within the bounds for high and low surrogate pairs.
See also: FromUCS4 (1723), ToUCS4 (1726), UnicodeIsHighSurrogate (1726), UnicodeIsLowSurrogate (1726)
79.3.19 UnicodeToLower
Synopsis: Transform unicode string to lowercase
Declaration: function UnicodeToLower(const AString: UnicodeString;
const AIgnoreInvalidSequence: Boolean;
out AResultString: UnicodeString) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: UnicodeToLower transforms a UTF16 unicode string AString to its lowercase equivalent and
returns this in AResultString. If the transformation was succesful, then the function returns 0.
A nonzero return value means an error occurred. AResultString will remain untouched in that
case.
If a character in AString cannot be found in the unicode data tables, an error will be reported,
unless AIgnoreInvalidSequence is set to True, in which case the character will be copied
as-is to the output.
Unicode collation data can be loaded using RegisterCollation (1725) or LoadCollation (1724)
Errors: On error, a nonzero value will be returned.
See also: UnicodeToUpper (1727), RegisterCollation (1725), LoadCollation (1724)
79.3.20 UnicodeToUpper
Synopsis: Transform unicode string to uppercase
Declaration: function UnicodeToUpper(const AString: UnicodeString;
const AIgnoreInvalidSequence: Boolean;
out AResultString: UnicodeString) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: UnicodeToUpper transforms a UTF16 unicode string AString to its uppercase equivalent and
returns this in AResultString. If the transformation was succesful, then the function returns 0.
A nonzero return value means an error occurred. AResultString will remain untouched in that
case.
If a character in AString cannot be found in the unicode data tables, an error will be reported,
unless AIgnoreInvalidSequence is set to True, in which case the character will be copied
as-is to the output.
Unicode collation data can be loaded using RegisterCollation (1725) or LoadCollation (1724)
1727
Errors: On error, a nonzero value will be returned.

See also: UnicodeToLower (1727), RegisterCollation (1725), LoadCollation (1724)
79.3.21 UnregisterCollation
Synopsis: Remove a collation from the list of known collections.
Declaration: function UnregisterCollation(const AName: ansistring) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: UnRegisterCollation removes a collation AName from the list of known collations. It returns
True if the collation was found and succesfully removed.
Errors: If the collation was not found, False is returned.

See also: RegisterCollation (1725), UnRegisterCollations (1728), LoadCollation (1724)
79.3.22 UnregisterCollations
Synopsis: Unregister all collations.
Declaration: procedure UnregisterCollations(const AFreeDynamicCollations: Boolean)

Visibility: default
Description: UnregisterCollations unregisters all known collations. If AFreeDynamicCollations
is True, then dynamic collations will be removed from memory using FreeCollation (1723). This
must normally be set to true.
See also: RegisterCollation (1725), UnRegisterCollation (1728), LoadCollation (1724), FreeCollation (1723)
79.4 TUCA_DataBook
TUCA_DataBook = record
public
Base : PUCA_DataBook;
Version : TCollationName;
CollationName : TCollationName;
VariableWeight : TUCA_VariableKind;
Backwards : Array[0..3] of Boolean;
BMP_Table1 : PByte;
BMP_Table2 : PUInt24;
OBMP_Table1 : PWord;
OBMP_Table2 : PUInt24;
PropCount : Integer;
Props : PUCA_PropItemRec;
VariableLowLimit : Word;
VariableHighLimit : Word;
Dynamic : Boolean;
function IsVariable(const AWeight: PUCA_PropWeights) : Boolean;
end
1728
TUCA_DataBook describes a Unicode Collation Alghorithm data set. data sets can be registered
using the RegisterCollation (1725) function or loaded from file using LoadCollation (1724). A col-
lation data book must be specified when comparing unicode strings.

1729 IsVariable Check if a weight is a variable weight
79.4.2 TUCA_DataBook.IsVariable
Synopsis: Check if a weight is a variable weight
Declaration: function IsVariable(const AWeight: PUCA_PropWeights) : Boolean

Visibility: public
Description: IsVariable checks whether AWeight is between the VariableLowLimit and VariableHighLimit
limits.
79.5 TUCA_PropItemContextRec
TUCA_PropItemContextRec = packed record
public
CodePointCount : Byte;
WeightCount : Byte;
function GetCodePoints : PUInt24;
function GetWeights : PUCA_PropWeights;
end
This is an internal structure which should not be used directly, the actual structure is subject to
change.

1729 GetCodePoints get the address of actual code points.
1730 GetWeights Get the Address of actual weights.
79.5.2 TUCA_PropItemContextRec.GetCodePoints
Synopsis: get the address of actual code points.
Declaration: function GetCodePoints : PUInt24
Visibility: public
1729
79.5.3 TUCA_PropItemContextRec.GetWeights
Synopsis: Get the Address of actual weights.
Declaration: function GetWeights : PUCA_PropWeights

Visibility: public
79.6 TUCA_PropItemContextTreeNodeRec
TUCA_PropItemContextTreeNodeRec = packed record
public
Left : Word;
Right : Word;
Data : TUCA_PropItemContextRec;
function GetLeftNode : PUCA_PropItemContextTreeNodeRec;
function GetRightNode : PUCA_PropItemContextTreeNodeRec;
end
This is an internal structure for the tree which should not be used directly, the actual structure is
subject to change.

1730 GetLeftNode Access to left tree node data
1730 GetRightNode Access to right tree node data
79.6.2 TUCA_PropItemContextTreeNodeRec.GetLeftNode
Synopsis: Access to left tree node data
Declaration: function GetLeftNode : PUCA_PropItemContextTreeNodeRec

Visibility: public
79.6.3 TUCA_PropItemContextTreeNodeRec.GetRightNode
Synopsis: Access to right tree node data
Declaration: function GetRightNode : PUCA_PropItemContextTreeNodeRec

Visibility: public
79.7 TUCA_PropItemContextTreeRec
TUCA_PropItemContextTreeRec = packed record
public
Size : UInt24;
function GetData : PUCA_PropItemContextTreeNodeRec;
property Data : PUCA_PropItemContextTreeNodeRec;
1730
function Find(const AChars: PUInt24;const ACharCount: Integer;

out ANode: PUCA_PropItemContextTreeNodeRec) : Boolean;
end
This is an internal tree structure for storing unicode collation data which should not be used directly,
the actual structure is subject to change.

1731 Find Find data for encoded character
1731 GetData Access to tree data (getter for Data property)

1731 Data r Read-only access to tree data
79.7.3 TUCA_PropItemContextTreeRec.GetData
Synopsis: Access to tree data (getter for Data property)
Declaration: function GetData : PUCA_PropItemContextTreeNodeRec

Visibility: public
79.7.4 TUCA_PropItemContextTreeRec.Find
Synopsis: Find data for encoded character
Declaration: function Find(const AChars: PUInt24;const ACharCount: Integer;

out ANode: PUCA_PropItemContextTreeNodeRec) : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: Find searches the tree for the collation data for the character encoded in AChars (ACharCount).
It returns true if the data was found, false if not. A pointer to the collation data is returned in ANode.
79.7.5 TUCA_PropItemContextTreeRec.Data
Synopsis: Read-only access to tree data
Declaration: Property Data : PUCA_PropItemContextTreeNodeRec
Visibility: public
Access: Read
1731
79.8 TUCA_PropItemRec
TUCA_PropItemRec = packed record
private
FLAG_VALID = 0;
FLAG_CODEPOINT = 1;
FLAG_CONTEXTUAL = 2;
FLAG_DELETION = 3;
FLAG_COMPRESS_WEIGHT_1 = 6;
FLAG_COMPRESS_WEIGHT_2 = 7;
function GetCodePoint : UInt24;
public
WeightLength : Byte;
ChildCount : Byte;
Size : Word;
Flags : Byte;
function HasCodePoint : Boolean;
property CodePoint : UInt24;
function IsValid : Boolean;
procedure GetWeightArray(ADest: PUCA_PropWeights);
function GetSelfOnlySize : Cardinal;
function GetContextual : Boolean;
property Contextual : Boolean;
function GetContext : PUCA_PropItemContextTreeRec;
function IsDeleted : Boolean;
function IsWeightCompress_1 : Boolean;
function IsWeightCompress_2 : Boolean;
end
TUCA_PropItemRec encodes 1 entry from the Unicode Collation data in an encoded form.

1733 GetContext Access to context data
1733 GetContextual Check if the contextual bit is set in the flags (getter for Contex-
tual)
1733 GetSelfOnlySize Size of this item data (in bytes).
1733 GetWeightArray Return an array of weights
1733 HasCodePoint Check flags whether a codepoint is present.
1734 IsDeleted Check flags if deleted bit is set
1733 IsValid Check flags for validity
1734 IsWeightCompress\_1 Check whether weight compression flag 1 is set
1734 IsWeightCompress\_2 Check whether weight compression flag 2 is set

1734 CodePoint r Get the codepoint
1734 Contextual r Check if the contextual bit is set in the flags
1732
79.8.3 TUCA_PropItemRec.HasCodePoint
Synopsis: Check flags whether a codepoint is present.
Declaration: function HasCodePoint : Boolean

Visibility: public
79.8.4 TUCA_PropItemRec.IsValid
Synopsis: Check flags for validity
Declaration: function IsValid : Boolean

Visibility: public
79.8.5 TUCA_PropItemRec.GetWeightArray
Synopsis: Return an array of weights
Declaration: procedure GetWeightArray(ADest: PUCA_PropWeights)

Visibility: public
Description: GetWeightArray returns an array with the weights in ADest. ADest must point to enough
room for WeightLength weights.
79.8.6 TUCA_PropItemRec.GetSelfOnlySize
Synopsis: Size of this item data (in bytes).
Declaration: function GetSelfOnlySize : Cardinal
Visibility: public
Description: Return the size of the item’s data and properties.
79.8.7 TUCA_PropItemRec.GetContextual
Synopsis: Check if the contextual bit is set in the flags (getter for Contextual)
Declaration: function GetContextual : Boolean
Visibility: public
79.8.8 TUCA_PropItemRec.GetContext
Synopsis: Access to context data
Declaration: function GetContext : PUCA_PropItemContextTreeRec
Visibility: public
Description: GetContext returns a pointer to the context data. It is Nil if the context flag is not set.
1733
79.8.9 TUCA_PropItemRec.IsDeleted
Synopsis: Check flags if deleted bit is set
Declaration: function IsDeleted : Boolean

Visibility: public
79.8.10 TUCA_PropItemRec.IsWeightCompress_1
Synopsis: Check whether weight compression flag 1 is set
Declaration: function IsWeightCompress_1 : Boolean

Visibility: public
79.8.11 TUCA_PropItemRec.IsWeightCompress_2
Synopsis: Check whether weight compression flag 2 is set
Declaration: function IsWeightCompress_2 : Boolean

Visibility: public
79.8.12 TUCA_PropItemRec.CodePoint
Synopsis: Get the codepoint
Declaration: Property CodePoint : UInt24

Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: Access to codepoint if HasCodePoint returns true. If HasCodePoint returns false, an excep-
tion will be raised.
79.8.13 TUCA_PropItemRec.Contextual
Synopsis: Check if the contextual bit is set in the flags
Declaration: Property Contextual : Boolean
Visibility: public
Access: Read
79.9 TUC_Prop
TUC_Prop = packed record
private
function GetCategory : Byte;
procedure SetCategory(AValue: Byte);
function GetWhiteSpace : Boolean;
procedure SetWhiteSpace(AValue: Boolean);
1734
function GetHangulSyllable : Boolean;

procedure SetHangulSyllable(AValue: Boolean);
function GetNumericValue : Double;
public
CategoryData : Byte;
CCC : Byte;
NumericIndex : Byte;
SimpleUpperCase : UInt24;
SimpleLowerCase : UInt24;
DecompositionID : SmallInt;
property Category : Byte;
property WhiteSpace : Boolean;
property HangulSyllable : Boolean;
property NumericValue : Double;
end
TUC_Prop describes the collation characteristics of a unicode character. It is an internal structure

which should not be used directly, the actual structure is subject to change.

1735 Category rw Get the category
1736 HangulSyllable rw Is the character a hangul syllable
1736 NumericValue r Numeric value
1735 WhiteSpace rw Is the character considered whitespace
79.9.2 TUC_Prop.Category
Synopsis: Get the category
Declaration: Property Category : Byte
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: CategoryData provides access to the category part of CategoryData (encoded).
79.9.3 TUC_Prop.WhiteSpace
Synopsis: Is the character considered whitespace
Declaration: Property WhiteSpace : Boolean
Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Whitespace provides easy access to the Whitespace part of CategoryData (encoded).
1735
79.9.4 TUC_Prop.HangulSyllable
Synopsis: Is the character a hangul syllable
Declaration: Property HangulSyllable : Boolean

Visibility: public
Access: Read,Write
Description: Whitespace provides easy access to the HangulSyllable part of CategoryData (encoded).
79.9.5 TUC_Prop.NumericValue
Synopsis: Numeric value
Declaration: Property NumericValue : Double
Visibility: public
Access: Read
Description: NumericValue uses numericalindex to get the numerical value.
79.10 TUInt24Rec
TUInt24Rec = packed record
public
byte2 : Byte;
byte1 : Byte;
byte0 : Byte;
TUInt24Rec.class operator implicit(a: TUInt24Rec) : Cardinal;
TUInt24Rec.class operator implicit(a: TUInt24Rec) : LongInt;
TUInt24Rec.class operator implicit(a: TUInt24Rec) : Word;
TUInt24Rec.class operator implicit(a: TUInt24Rec) : Byte;
TUInt24Rec.class operator implicit(a: Cardinal) : TUInt24Rec;
TUInt24Rec.class operator equal(a: TUInt24Rec;b: TUInt24Rec) : Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator equal(a: TUInt24Rec;b: Cardinal) : Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator equal(a: Cardinal;b: TUInt24Rec) : Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator equal(a: TUInt24Rec;b: LongInt) : Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator equal(a: LongInt;b: TUInt24Rec) : Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator equal(a: TUInt24Rec;b: Word) : Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator equal(a: Word;b: TUInt24Rec) : Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator equal(a: TUInt24Rec;b: Byte) : Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator equal(a: Byte;b: TUInt24Rec) : Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator notequal(a: TUInt24Rec;b: TUInt24Rec)
: Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator notequal(a: TUInt24Rec;b: Cardinal) : Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator notequal(a: Cardinal;b: TUInt24Rec) : Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator greaterthan(a: TUInt24Rec;b: TUInt24Rec)
: Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator greaterthan(a: TUInt24Rec;b: Cardinal)
: Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator greaterthan(a: Cardinal;b: TUInt24Rec)
: Boolean;
1736
TUInt24Rec.class operator greaterthanorequal(a: TUInt24Rec;

b: TUInt24Rec) : Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator greaterthanorequal(a: TUInt24Rec;b: Cardinal)
: Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator greaterthanorequal(a: Cardinal;b: TUInt24Rec)
: Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator lessthan(a: TUInt24Rec;b: TUInt24Rec)
: Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator lessthan(a: TUInt24Rec;b: Cardinal) : Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator lessthan(a: Cardinal;b: TUInt24Rec) : Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator lessthanorequal(a: TUInt24Rec;b: TUInt24Rec)
: Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator lessthanorequal(a: TUInt24Rec;b: Cardinal)
: Boolean;
TUInt24Rec.class operator lessthanorequal(a: Cardinal;b: TUInt24Rec)
: Boolean;
end
Unicode data exists mostly of 24-bit data (3 bytes). This type is meant to deal efficiently with this
data. it has members to split out the data in bytes, and functions to query the various properties stored
in the data.
1737
1738

1742 equal(Byte,TUInt24Rec):Boolean Check whether a
TUInt24Rec value equals a
byte value.
1741 equal(Cardinal,TUInt24Rec):Boolean Check whether a
cardinal value.
1742 equal(LongInt,TUInt24Rec):Boolean Check whether a
longint value.
1742 equal(TUInt24Rec,Byte):Boolean Check whether a
byte value.
1741 equal(TUInt24Rec,Cardinal):Boolean Check if cardinal and
TUInt24Rec are equal
1741 equal(TUInt24Rec,LongInt):Boolean Check whether a
longint value.
1741 equal(TUInt24Rec,TUInt24Rec):Boolean Determine equality of 2
TUInt24Rec records
1742 equal(TUInt24Rec,Word):Boolean Check whether a
word value.
1742 equal(Word,TUInt24Rec):Boolean Check whether a
word value.
1743 greaterthan(Cardinal,TUInt24Rec):Boolean Check whether a cardinal value
is greater than a TUInt24Rec
value
1744 greaterthanorequal(Cardinal,TUInt24Rec):Boolean Check whether a cardinal value
is greater than or equal to a
TUInt24Rec value
1744 greaterthanorequal(TUInt24Rec,Cardinal):Boolean Check whether a
TUInt24Rec value is
greater than or equal to a
cardinal value
1744 greaterthanorequal(TUInt24Rec,TUInt24Rec):Boolean Check whether a
TUInt24Rec value is
greater than or equal to a
cardinal value
1743 greaterthan(TUInt24Rec,Cardinal):Boolean Check whether a
TUInt24Rec value is
greater than a cardinal value
1743 greaterthan(TUInt24Rec,TUInt24Rec):Boolean Check whether a
TUInt24Rec value is greater
than another TUInt24Rec
value
1741 implicit(Cardinal):TUInt24Rec Assign TUInt24Recfrom
Cardinal
1740 implicit(TUInt24Rec):Byte Assign TUInt24Rec to byte
1740 implicit(TUInt24Rec):Cardinal Assign TUInt24Rec to car-
dinal
1740 implicit(TUInt24Rec):LongInt Assign TUInt24Rec to
longint
1740 implicit(TUInt24Rec):Word 1739 Assign TUInt24Rec to word
1745 lessthan(Cardinal,TUInt24Rec):Boolean Check whether a cardinal value
is less than a TUInt24Rec
value
1745 lessthanorequal(Cardinal,TUInt24Rec):Boolean Check whether a cardinal value
is less than or equal to a
79.10.2 TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):Cardinal
Synopsis: Assign TUInt24Rec to cardinal
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator implicit(a: TUInt24Rec) : Cardinal
Visibility: public
Description: Assign to cardinal, byte0 to MSB and so on.
See also: TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):LongInt (1740), TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):Word (1740),
TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):Byte (1740), TUInt24Rec.implicit(Cardinal):TUInt24Rec (1741),
TUInt24Rec.implicit(Longint):TUInt24Rec (1737), TUInt24Rec.implicit(Word):TUInt24Rec (1737),
TUInt24Rec.implicit(Byte):TUInt24Rec (1737)
79.10.3 TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):LongInt
Synopsis: Assign TUInt24Rec to longint
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator implicit(a: TUInt24Rec) : LongInt
Visibility: public
Description: Assign to cardinal, byte0 to MSB and so on.
See also: TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):Cardinal (1740), TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):Word (1740),
TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):Byte (1740)
79.10.4 TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):Word
Synopsis: Assign TUInt24Rec to word
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator implicit(a: TUInt24Rec) : Word
Visibility: public
Description: Assign to word, byte0 to MSB, byte1 to MSB.
Errors: If the value is too big (>$FFFF) to be assigned, an overflow error occurs.
See also: TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):Cardinal (1740), TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):Longint (1740),
TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):Byte (1740), TUInt24Rec.implicit(Cardinal):TUInt24Rec (1741),
79.10.5 TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):Byte
Synopsis: Assign TUInt24Rec to byte
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator implicit(a: TUInt24Rec) : Byte
Visibility: public
Description: Assign to byte, byte0 is assigned.
Errors: If the value is too big (>$FF) to be assigned, an overflow error occurs.
See also: TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):Cardinal (1740), TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):Longint (1740),
TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):Word (1740), TUInt24Rec.implicit(Cardinal):TUInt24Rec (1741),
1740
79.10.6 TUInt24Rec.implicit(Cardinal):TUInt24Rec
Synopsis: Assign TUInt24Recfrom Cardinal
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator implicit(a: Cardinal) : TUInt24Rec
Visibility: public
Description: Assign from cardinal, byte0 to MSB.
Errors: If the value is too big (>$FFFFFF) to be assigned, an overflow error occurs.
See also: TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):Longint (1740), TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):Word (1740),
TUInt24Rec.implicit(TUInt24Rec):Byte (1740), TUInt24Rec.implicit(Longint):TUInt24Rec (1737),
TUInt24Rec.implicit(Word):TUInt24Rec (1737), TUInt24Rec.implicit(Byte):TUInt24Rec (1737)
79.10.7 TUInt24Rec.equal(TUInt24Rec,TUInt24Rec):Boolean
Synopsis: Determine equality of 2 TUInt24Rec records
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator equal(a: TUInt24Rec;b: TUInt24Rec) : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: The 2 records are considered equal if the 3 bytes are equal.
79.10.8 TUInt24Rec.equal(TUInt24Rec,Cardinal):Boolean
Synopsis: Check if cardinal and TUInt24Rec are equal
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator equal(a: TUInt24Rec;b: Cardinal) : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: The cardinal b is considered equal to a if the fourth byte (LSB) is zero, and the first three bytes
equal byte0, byte1, and byte2.
79.10.9 TUInt24Rec.equal(Cardinal,TUInt24Rec):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a TUInt24Rec value equals a cardinal value.
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator equal(a: Cardinal;b: TUInt24Rec) : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: The cardinal a is considered equal to b if the fourth byte (LSB) is zero, and the first three bytes
equal byte0, byte1, and byte2.
79.10.10 TUInt24Rec.equal(TUInt24Rec,LongInt):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a TUInt24Rec value equals a longint value.
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator equal(a: TUInt24Rec;b: LongInt) : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: The longint b is considered equal to a if the fourth byte (LSB) is zero, and the first three bytes equal
byte0, byte1, and byte2.
1741
79.10.11 TUInt24Rec.equal(LongInt,TUInt24Rec):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a TUInt24Rec value equals a longint value.
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator equal(a: LongInt;b: TUInt24Rec) : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: The longint a is considered equal to b if the fourth byte (LSB) is zero, and the first three bytes equal
byte0, byte1, and byte2.
79.10.12 TUInt24Rec.equal(TUInt24Rec,Word):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a TUInt24Rec value equals a word value.
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator equal(a: TUInt24Rec;b: Word) : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: The word b is considered equal to a if its 2 bytes equal byte0, byte1 and byte2 is zero.
79.10.13 TUInt24Rec.equal(Word,TUInt24Rec):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a TUInt24Rec value equals a word value.
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator equal(a: Word;b: TUInt24Rec) : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: The word a is considered equal to b if its 2 bytes equal byte0, byte1 and byte2 is zero.
79.10.14 TUInt24Rec.equal(TUInt24Rec,Byte):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a TUInt24Rec value equals a byte value.
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator equal(a: TUInt24Rec;b: Byte) : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: The byte b is considered equal to a if it equals byte0 and byte1 and byte1 are zero.
79.10.15 TUInt24Rec.equal(Byte,TUInt24Rec):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a TUInt24Rec value equals a byte value.
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator equal(a: Byte;b: TUInt24Rec) : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: The byte b is considered equal to a if it equals byte0 and byte1 and byte1 are zero.
79.10.16 TUInt24Rec.notequal(TUInt24Rec,TUInt24Rec):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether 2 TUInt24Rec values differ.
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator notequal(a: TUInt24Rec;b: TUInt24Rec)
: Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: The comparison is done by comparing byte0, byte1 and byte2.
1742
79.10.17 TUInt24Rec.notequal(TUInt24Rec,Cardinal):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a TUInt24Rec value differs from a cardinal value.
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator notequal(a: TUInt24Rec;b: Cardinal) : Boolean

Visibility: public
Description: The cardinal a is considered not equal to b if the fourth byte (LSB) is nonzero, or one of the first
three bytes differ from byte0, byte1, and byte2.
79.10.18 TUInt24Rec.notequal(Cardinal,TUInt24Rec):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a TUInt24Rec value differs from a cardinal value.
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator notequal(a: Cardinal;b: TUInt24Rec) : Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: The cardinal a is considered not equal to b if the fourth byte (LSB) is nonzero, or one of the first
three bytes differ from byte0, byte1, and byte2.
79.10.19 TUInt24Rec.greaterthan(TUInt24Rec,TUInt24Rec):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a TUInt24Rec value is greater than another TUInt24Rec value
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator greaterthan(a: TUInt24Rec;b: TUInt24Rec)
: Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: The comparison is done by comparing 3 bytes byte0, byte1 and byte2
79.10.20 TUInt24Rec.greaterthan(TUInt24Rec,Cardinal):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a TUInt24Rec value is greater than a cardinal value
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator greaterthan(a: TUInt24Rec;b: Cardinal)
: Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: The comparison is done by comparing 3 first bytes of the cardinal value with bytes byte0, byte1
and byte2.
79.10.21 TUInt24Rec.greaterthan(Cardinal,TUInt24Rec):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a cardinal value is greater than a TUInt24Rec value
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator greaterthan(a: Cardinal;b: TUInt24Rec)
: Boolean
Visibility: public
and byte2.
1743
79.10.22 TUInt24Rec.greaterthanorequal(TUInt24Rec,TUInt24Rec):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a TUInt24Rec value is greater than or equal to a cardinal value
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator greaterthanorequal(a: TUInt24Rec;

b: TUInt24Rec) : Boolean
Visibility: public
and byte2.
79.10.23 TUInt24Rec.greaterthanorequal(TUInt24Rec,Cardinal):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a TUInt24Rec value is greater than or equal to a cardinal value
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator greaterthanorequal(a: TUInt24Rec;b: Cardinal)
: Boolean
Visibility: public
and byte2.
79.10.24 TUInt24Rec.greaterthanorequal(Cardinal,TUInt24Rec):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a cardinal value is greater than or equal to a TUInt24Rec value
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator greaterthanorequal(a: Cardinal;b: TUInt24Rec)
: Boolean
Visibility: public
and byte2.
79.10.25 TUInt24Rec.lessthan(TUInt24Rec,TUInt24Rec):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a TUInt24Rec value is less than another TUInt24Rec value
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator lessthan(a: TUInt24Rec;b: TUInt24Rec)
: Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: The comparison is done by comparing the bytes byte0, byte1 and byte2.
79.10.26 TUInt24Rec.lessthan(TUInt24Rec,Cardinal):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a TUInt24Rec value is less than a cardinal value
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator lessthan(a: TUInt24Rec;b: Cardinal) : Boolean

Visibility: public
and byte2.
1744
79.10.27 TUInt24Rec.lessthan(Cardinal,TUInt24Rec):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a cardinal value is less than a TUInt24Rec value
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator lessthan(a: Cardinal;b: TUInt24Rec) : Boolean

Visibility: public
Description: Check whether a cardinal value is less than a TUInt24Rec value
79.10.28 TUInt24Rec.lessthanorequal(TUInt24Rec,TUInt24Rec):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a TUInt24Rec value is less than or equal to another TUInt24Rec value
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator lessthanorequal(a: TUInt24Rec;b: TUInt24Rec)
: Boolean
Visibility: public
Description: The comparison is done by comparing the bytes byte0, byte1 and byte2.
79.10.29 TUInt24Rec.lessthanorequal(TUInt24Rec,Cardinal):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a TUInt24Rec value is less than or equal to a cardinal value
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator lessthanorequal(a: TUInt24Rec;b: Cardinal)
: Boolean
Visibility: public
and byte2.
79.10.30 TUInt24Rec.lessthanorequal(Cardinal,TUInt24Rec):Boolean
Synopsis: Check whether a cardinal value is less than or equal to a TUInt24Rec value
Declaration: TUInt24Rec.class operator lessthanorequal(a: Cardinal;b: TUInt24Rec)
: Boolean
Visibility: public
and byte2.
1745
Chapter 80
Reference for unit ’unicodeducet’
80.1 Overview
The unicodeducet unit registers the root Unicode collation (DUCET). This collation is needed by
all other collations, so any collation unit will include this file.
1746
Chapter 81
Reference for unit ’Unix’
81.1 Used units
Table 81.1: Used units by unit ’Unix’
Name Page
BaseUnix 113
System 1224
unixtype 1784

81.2.1 Constants
ARG_MAX = UnixType . ARG_MAX
Maximum number of arguments to a program.
fs_ext = $137d
File system type (TStatFS (1762)): (ext) Extended
fs_ext2 = $ef53
File system type (TStatFS (1762)): (ext2) Second extended
fs_iso = $9660
File system type (TStatFS (1762)): ISO 9660
fs_minix = $137f
File system type (TStatFS (1762)): Minix
fs_minix_30 = $138f
1747
CHAPTER 81. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’UNIX’
File system type (TStatFS (1762)): Minix 3.0
fs_minux_V2 = $2468
File system type (TStatFS (1762)): Minix V2
fs_msdos = $4d44
File system type (TStatFS (1762)): MSDOS (FAT)
fs_nfs = $6969
File system type (TStatFS (1762)): NFS
fs_old_ext2 = $ef51
File system type (TStatFS (1762)): (ext2) Old second extended
fs_proc = $9fa0
File system type (TStatFS (1762)): PROC fs
fs_xia = $012FD16D
File system type (TStatFS (1762)): XIA
IOCtl_TCGETS = $5401
IOCTL call number: get Terminal Control settings
LOCK_EX = 2
FpFLock (1771) Exclusive lock
LOCK_NB = 4
FpFLock (1771) Non-blocking operation
LOCK_SH = 1
FpFLock (1771) Shared lock
LOCK_UN = 8
FpFLock (1771) unlock
MAP_FAILED = baseunix . MAP_FAILED
Error return value for mmap: mmap operation failed.
MAP_FIXED = baseunix . MAP_FIXED
1748
#rtl.baseunix.FpMMap (178) map type: Interpret addr exactly
MAP_PRIVATE = baseunix . MAP_PRIVATE
#rtl.baseunix.FpMMap (178) map type: Changes are private
MAP_SHARED = baseunix . MAP_SHARED
#rtl.baseunix.FpMMap (178) map type: Share changes
MAP_TYPE = baseunix . MAP_TYPE
#rtl.baseunix.FpMMap (178) map type: Bitmask for type of mapping
MS_ASYNC = 1deprecated
Asynchronous operation flag for msync call
MS_INVALIDATE = 2deprecated
Invalidate other mappings of file flag for msync call
MS_SYNC = 4deprecated
Synchronous operation flag for msync call
NAME_MAX = UnixType . NAME_MAX
Maximum filename length.
Open_Accmode = 3
Bitmask to determine access mode in open flags.
Open_Append = 2 shl 9
File open mode: Append to file
Open_Creat = 1 shl 6
File open mode: Create if file does not yet exist.
Open_Direct = 4 shl 12
File open mode: Minimize caching effects
Open_Directory = 2 shl 15
File open mode: File must be directory.
Open_Excl = 2 shl 6
1749
File open mode: Open exclusively
Open_LargeFile = 1 shl 15
File open mode: Open for 64-bit I/O
Open_NDelay = Open_NonBlock
File open mode: Alias for Open_NonBlock (1750)
Open_NoCtty = 4 shl 6
File open mode: No TTY control.
Open_NoFollow = 4 shl 15
File open mode: Fail if file is symbolic link.
Open_NonBlock = 4 shl 9
File open mode: Open in non-blocking mode
Open_RdOnly = 0
File open mode: Read only
Open_RdWr = 2
File open mode: Read/Write
Open_Sync = 1 shl 12
File open mode: Write to disc at once
Open_Trunc = 1 shl 9
File open mode: Truncate file to length 0
Open_WrOnly = 1
File open mode: Write only
PATH_MAX = UnixType . PATH_MAX
Maximum pathname length.
PRIO_PGRP = UnixType . PRIO_PGRP
#rtl.baseunix.fpGetPriority (172) option: Get process group priority.
PRIO_PROCESS = UnixType . PRIO_PROCESS
1750
#rtl.baseunix.fpGetPriority (172) option: Get process priority.
PRIO_USER = UnixType . PRIO_USER
#rtl.baseunix.fpGetPriority (172) option: Get user priority.
PROT_EXEC = baseunix . PROT_EXEC
#rtl.baseunix.FpMMap (178) memory access: page can be executed
PROT_NONE = baseunix . PROT_NONE
#rtl.baseunix.FpMMap (178) memory access: page can not be accessed
PROT_READ = baseunix . PROT_READ
#rtl.baseunix.FpMMap (178) memory access: page can be read
PROT_WRITE = baseunix . PROT_WRITE
#rtl.baseunix.FpMMap (178) memory access: page can be written
P_IN = 1
Input file descriptor of pipe pair.
P_OUT = 2
Output file descriptor of pipe pair.
SIG_MAXSIG = UnixType . SIG_MAXSIG
Maximum system signal number.
STAT_IFBLK = $6000
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Block device
STAT_IFCHR = $2000
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Character device
STAT_IFDIR = $4000
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Directory
STAT_IFIFO = $1000
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: FIFO
STAT_IFLNK = $a000
1751
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Link
STAT_IFMT = $f000
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: File type bit mask
STAT_IFREG = $8000
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Regular file
STAT_IFSOCK = $c000
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Socket
STAT_IRGRP = STAT_IROTH shl 3
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Group read permission
STAT_IROTH = $4
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Other read permission
STAT_IRUSR = STAT_IROTH shl 6
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Owner read permission
STAT_IRWXG = STAT_IRWXO shl 3
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Group permission bits mask
STAT_IRWXO = $7
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Other permission bits mask
STAT_IRWXU = STAT_IRWXO shl 6
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Owner permission bits mask
STAT_ISGID = $0400
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: GID bit set
STAT_ISUID = $0800
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: UID bit set
STAT_ISVTX = $0200
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Sticky bit set
STAT_IWGRP = STAT_IWOTH shl 3
1752
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Group write permission
STAT_IWOTH = $2
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Other write permission
STAT_IWUSR = STAT_IWOTH shl 6
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Owner write permission
STAT_IXGRP = STAT_IXOTH shl 3
File (#rtl.baseunix.stat (148) record) mode: Others execute permission
STAT_IXOTH = $1
STAT_IXUSR = STAT_IXOTH shl 6
SYS_NMLN = UnixType . SYS_NMLN
Max system name length.
Wait_Any = -1
#rtl.baseunix.fpWaitPID (206): Wait on any process
Wait_Clone = $80000000
#rtl.baseunix.fpWaitPID (206): Wait on clone processes only.
Wait_MyPGRP = 0
#rtl.baseunix.fpWaitPID (206): Wait processes from current process group
Wait_NoHang = 1
#rtl.baseunix.fpWaitPID (206): Do not wait
Wait_UnTraced = 2
#rtl.baseunix.fpWaitPID (206): Also report stopped but untraced processes
1753
81.2.2 Types
Boolean type
Alias for #rtl.UnixType.cchar (1786)
clock_t = UnixType.clock_t
Clock ticks type
1754
character offset type.
Signed integer
Character size type.
Alias for #rtl.UnixType.cuchar (1787)
1755
Alias for #rtl.unixtype.cunsigned (1788)
dev_t = UnixType.dev_t
gid_t = UnixType.gid_t
Group ID type.
ino_t = UnixType.ino_t
Inode type.
mode_t = UnixType.mode_t
Inode mode type.
nlink_t = UnixType.nlink_t
off_t = UnixType.off_t
Offset type.
1756
Alias for #rtl.UnixType.pcchar (1789)
pClock = UnixType.pClock
1757
Pointer to character size type pcsize_t.
Alias for #rtl.UnixType.pcuchar (1791)
1758
Alias for #rtl.unixtype.pcunsigned (1791)
pDev = UnixType.pDev
pGid = UnixType.pGid
pid_t = UnixType.pid_t
Process ID type.
pIno = UnixType.pIno
pMode = UnixType.pMode
pnLink = UnixType.pnLink
pOff = UnixType.pOff
pPid = UnixType.pPid
pSize = UnixType.pSize
pSize_t = UnixType.pSize_t
Pointer to type Size_t.
pSocklen = UnixType.pSocklen
1759
psSize = UnixType.psSize
pstatfs = UnixType.PStatFs
Pointer to statfs type
pthread_cond_t = UnixType.pthread_cond_t
Thread conditional variable type.
pthread_mutex_t = UnixType.pthread_mutex_t
Thread mutex type.
pthread_t = UnixType.pthread_t
Posix thread type.
pTime = UnixType.pTime
ptimespec = UnixType.ptimespec
Pointer to timespec (1761) type.
ptimeval = UnixType.ptimeval
Pointer to timeval (1761) type.
ptime_t = UnixType.ptime_t
pUid = UnixType.pUid
size_t = UnixType.size_t
socklen_t = UnixType.socklen_t
ssize_t = UnixType.ssize_t
1760
Small size type.
TClock = UnixType.TClock
TDev = UnixType.TDev
TFSearchOption = (NoCurrentDirectory,CurrentDirectoryFirst,
CurrentDirectoryLast)
Table 81.2: Enumeration values for type TFSearchOption
Value Explanation
CurrentDirectoryFirst Search the current directory first, before all directories in the search path.
CurrentDirectoryLast Search the current directory last, after all directories in the search path
NoCurrentDirectory Do not search the current directory unless it is specified in the search path.
Describes the search strategy used by FSearch (1773)
TGid = UnixType.TGid
timespec = UnixType.timespec
Short time specification type.
timeval = UnixType.timeval
time_t = UnixType.time_t
Time span type
TIno = UnixType.TIno
TIOCtlRequest = UnixType.TIOCtlRequest
Alias for the TIOCtlRequest (1796) type in unixtypes
TMode = UnixType.TMode
1761
TnLink = UnixType.TnLink
TOff = UnixType.TOff
TPid = UnixType.TPid
Tpipe = baseunix.tfildes deprecated
Array describing a pipe pair of filedescriptors.
TSize = UnixType.TSize
TSocklen = UnixType.TSocklen
TsSize = UnixType.TsSize
tstatfs = UnixType.TStatFs
StatFS returns in Info information about the filesystem on which the file Path resides. Info is
of type TStatFS (1797).
The function returns zero if the call was succesful, a nonzero value is returned if the call failed.
TTime = UnixType.TTime
Ttimespec = UnixType.Ttimespec
TTimeVal = UnixType.TTimeVal
Alias for timeval (1761) type.
TUid = UnixType.TUid
uid_t = UnixType.uid_t
User ID type
1762
81.2.3 Variables
tzdaylight : Boolean
Indicates whether daylight savings time is active.
tzname : Array[boolean] of PChar
Timezone name.

81.3.1 AssignPipe
Synopsis: Create a set of pipe file handlers
Declaration: function AssignPipe(var pipe_in: cint;var pipe_out: cint) : cint
function AssignPipe(var pipe_in: text;var pipe_out: text) : cint
function AssignPipe(var pipe_in: File;var pipe_out: File) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: AssignePipe creates a pipe, i.e. two file objects, one for input, one for output. What is written to
Pipe_out, can be read from Pipe_in.
This call is overloaded. The in and out pipe can take three forms: an typed or untyped file, a text file
or a file descriptor.
If a text file is passed then reading and writing from/to the pipe can be done through the usual
Readln(Pipe_in,...) and Writeln(Pipe_out,...) procedures.
The function returns True if everything went succesfully, False otherwise.
Errors: In case the function fails and returns False, extended error information is returned by the FpGetEr-
rno (169) function:

See also: POpen (1776), #rtl.baseunix.FpMkFifo (178)
Program Example36 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e AssignPipe f u n c t i o n . }
Var p i p i , p i p o : Text ;
s : String ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ A s s i g n i n g Pipes . ’ ) ;
I f a s s i g n p i p e ( p i p i , p i p o ) < >0 then
Writeln ( ’ Error assigning pipes ! ’ , fpgeterr no ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ W r i t i n g t o pipe , and f l u s h i n g . ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( pipo , ’ T h i s i s a t e x t s t r i n g ’ ) ; c l o s e ( p i p o ) ;
1763
W r i t e l n ( ’ Reading from p i p e . ’ ) ;
While not eof ( p i p i ) do
begin
Readln ( p i p i , s ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Read from p i p e : ’ , s ) ;
end ;
close ( p i p i ) ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ Closed p i p e s . ’ ) ;
writeln
end .
81.3.2 AssignStream
Synopsis: Assign stream for in and output to a program
Declaration: function AssignStream(var StreamIn: text;var Streamout: text;
const Prog: ansiString;
const args: Array of ansistring) : cint
function AssignStream(var StreamIn: text;var Streamout: text;
var streamerr: text;const Prog: ansiString;
const args: Array of ansistring) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: AssignStream creates a 2 or 3 pipes, i.e. two (or three) file objects, one for input, one for
output,(and one for standard error) the other ends of these pipes are connected to standard input and
output (and standard error) of Prog. Prog is the path of a program (including path). The options
for the program can be specified in Args.
What is written to StreamOut, will go to the standard input of Prog. Whatever is written by Prog
to it’s standard output can be read from StreamIn. Whatever is written by Prog to it’s standard
error read from StreamErr, if present.
Reading and writing happens through the usual Readln(StreamIn,...) and Writeln (StreamOut,...)
procedures.
Remark: You should not use Reset or Rewrite on a file opened with POpen. This will close the file
before re-opening it again, thereby closing the connection with the program.
The function returns the process ID of the spawned process, or -1 in case of error.

Other errors include the ones by the fork and exec programs
See also: AssignPipe (1763), POpen (1776)
Program Example38 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e AssignStream f u n c t i o n . }
Var Si , So : Text ;
1764
S : String ;
i : longint ;
begin
i f not ( paramstr ( 1 ) = ’−son ’ ) then
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ C a l l i n g son ’ ) ;
Assignstream ( Si , So , ’ . / ex38 ’ , [ ’−son ’ ] ) ;
i f f p g e t e r r n o < >0 then
begin
w r i t e l n ( ’ AssignStream f a i l e d ! ’ ) ;
halt ( 1 ) ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Speaking t o son ’ ) ;
For i : = 1 to 1 0 do
begin
w r i t e l n ( so , ’ H e l l o son ! ’ ) ;
i f i o r e s u l t < >0 then w r i t e l n ( ’ Can ’ ’ t speak t o son . . . ’ ) ;
end ;
For i : = 1 to 3 do w r i t e l n ( so , ’ H e l l o chap ! ’ ) ;
c l o s e ( so ) ;
while not eof ( s i ) do
begin
readln ( s i , s ) ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ F a t h e r : Son s a i d : ’ ,S ) ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Stopped c o n v e r s a t i o n ’ ) ;
Close ( S i ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Put down phone ’ ) ;
end
Else
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ T h i s i s t h e son ’ ) ;
While not eof ( i n p u t ) do
begin
readln ( s ) ;
i f pos ( ’ H e l l o son ! ’ ,S) < >0 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ H e l l o Dad ! ’ )
else
w r i t e l n ( ’Who are you ? ’ ) ;
end ;
close ( output ) ;
end
end .
81.3.3 FpExecL
Synopsis: Execute process (using argument list, environment)
Declaration: function FpExecL(const PathName: AnsiString;
const S: Array of AnsiString) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpExecL replaces the currently running program with the program, specified in PathName. S is
an array of command options. The executable in PathName must be an absolute pathname. The
current process’ environment is passed to the program. On success, FpExecL does not return.
1765
Errors: Extended error information is returned by the FpGetErrno (169) function:
search permission.
sys_epermThe file system is mounted noexec.
sys_enomemNot enough memory for kernel, or to split command line.
See also: FpExecve (163), FpExecv (1768), FpExecvp (1769), FpExecle (1766), FpExeclp (1767), FpFork
(166)
Program Example77 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e FPExecL f u n c t i o n . }
begin
{ Execute ’ l s − l ’ , w i t h c u r r e n t environment . }
{ ’ l s ’ i s NOT looked f o r i n PATH environment v a r i a b l e . }
FpExecL ( ’ / b i n / l s ’ , [ ’− l ’ ] ) ;
end .
81.3.4 FpExecLE
Synopsis: Execute process (using argument list, environment)
Declaration: function FpExecLE(const PathName: AnsiString;
const S: Array of AnsiString;MyEnv: PPChar) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpExecLE replaces the currently running program with the program, specified in PathName. S
is an array of command options. The executable in PathName must be an absolute pathname. The
environment in MyEnv is passed to the program. On success, FpExecLE does not return.
search permission.
1766
See also: FpExecve (163), FpExecv (1768), FpExecvp (1769), FpExecl (1765), FpExeclp (1767), FpFork
(166)
Program Example11 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Execle f u n c t i o n . }
begin
{ ’ l s ’ i s NOT looked f o r i n PATH environment v a r i a b l e . }
{ envp i s d e f i n e d i n t h e system u n i t . }
Execle ( ’ / b i n / l s − l ’ , envp ) ;
end .
81.3.5 FpExecLP
Synopsis: Execute process (using argument list, environment; search path)
Declaration: function FpExecLP(const PathName: AnsiString;
const S: Array of AnsiString) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpExecLP replaces the currently running program with the program, specified in PathName. S
is an array of command options. The executable in PathName is searched in the path, if it isn’t an
absolute filename. The current environment is passed to the program. On success, FpExecLP does
not return.
search permission.
See also: FpExecve (163), FpExecv (1768), FpExecvp (1769), FpExecle (1766), FpExecl (1765), FpFork
(166)
1767
Program Example76 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e FpExeclp f u n c t i o n . }
begin
{ ’ l s ’ i s looked f o r i n PATH environment v a r i a b l e . }
{ envp i s d e f i n e d i n t h e system u n i t . }
FpExeclp ( ’ l s ’ , [ ’− l ’ ] ) ;
end .
81.3.6 FpExecLPE
Synopsis: Execute a program in the path, and pass it an environment
Declaration: function FpExecLPE(const PathName: AnsiString;

const S: Array of AnsiString;env: PPChar) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpExecLPE does the same as FpExecLP (1767), but additionally it specifies the environment for
the new process in env, a pointer to a null-terminated array of null-terminated strings.
Errors: On success, this function does not return.
See also: FpExecLP (1767), FpExecLE (1766)
81.3.7 FpExecV
Synopsis: Execute process
Declaration: function FpExecV(const PathName: AnsiString;args: PPChar) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpExecV replaces the currently running program with the program, specified in PathName. It
gives the program the options in args. This is a pointer to an array of pointers to null-terminated
strings. The last pointer in this array should be nil. The current environment is passed to the program.
On success, FpExecV does not return.
search permission.
1768
See also: FpExecve (163), FpExecvp (1769), FpExecle (1766), FpExecl (1765), FpExeclp (1767), FpFork
(166)
Program Example8 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Execv f u n c t i o n . }

Arg1 : Pchar = ’− l ’ ;
Var PP : PPchar ;
begin
PP [ 0 ] : = Arg0 ;
PP [ 1 ] : = Arg1 ;
PP [ 3 ] : = N i l ;
fpExecv ( ’ / b i n / l s ’ , pp ) ;
end .
81.3.8 FpExecVP
Synopsis: Execute process, search path
Declaration: function FpExecVP(const PathName: AnsiString;args: PPChar) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpExecVP replaces the currently running program with the program, specified in PathName. The
executable in path is searched in the path, if it isn’t an absolute filename. It gives the program the
options in args. This is a pointer to an array of pointers to null-terminated strings. The last pointer
in this array should be nil. The current environment is passed to the program. On success, execvp
does not return.
search permission.
See also: FpExecve (163), FpExecv (1768), FpExecle (1766), FpExecl (1765), FpExeclp (1767), FpFork (166)
1769
Program Example79 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e FpExecVP f u n c t i o n . }
Const Arg0 : PChar = ’ l s ’ ;

Arg1 : Pchar = ’− l ’ ;
Var PP : PPchar ;
begin
PP [ 0 ] : = Arg0 ;
PP [ 1 ] : = Arg1 ;
PP [ 2 ] : = N i l ;
fpExecvp ( ’ l s ’ , pp ) ;
end .
81.3.9 FpExecVPE
Synopsis: Execute process, search path using environment
Declaration: function FpExecVPE(const PathName: AnsiString;args: PPChar;env: PPChar)
: cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpExecVP replaces the currently running program with the program, specified in PathName. The
executable in path is searched in the path, if it isn’t an absolute filename. It gives the program the
options in args. This is a pointer to an array of pointers to null-terminated strings. The last pointer
in this array should be nil. The environment in Env is passed to the program. On success, execvp
does not return.
search permission.
See also: FpExecve (163), FpExecv (1768), FpExecle (1766), FpExecl (1765), FpExeclp (1767), FpFork (166)
1770
Program Example79 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e FpExecVP f u n c t i o n . }
Const Arg0 : PChar = ’ l s ’ ;

Arg1 : Pchar = ’− l ’ ;
Var PP : PPchar ;
begin
PP [ 0 ] : = Arg0 ;
PP [ 1 ] : = Arg1 ;
PP [ 2 ] : = N i l ;
fpExecvp ( ’ l s ’ , pp ) ;
end .
81.3.10 fpFlock
Synopsis: Lock a file (advisory lock)
Declaration: function fpFlock(var T: text;mode: cint) : cint
function fpFlock(var F: File;mode: cint) : cint
function fpFlock(fd: cint;mode: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpFLock implements file locking. it sets or removes a lock on the file F. F can be of type Text or
File, or it can be a linux filedescriptor (a longint) Mode can be one of the following constants :
LOCK_SHsets a shared lock.

LOCK_EXsets an exclusive lock.
LOCK_UNunlocks the file.
LOCK_NBThis can be OR-ed together with the other. If this is done the application doesn’t block
when locking.
The function returns zero if successful, a nonzero return value indicates an error.

See also: #rtl.baseunix.FpFcntl (164), FSync (1747)
81.3.11 fpfStatFS
Synopsis: Retrieve filesystem information.
Declaration: function fpfStatFS(Fd: cint;Info: pstatfs) : cint

Visibility: default
1771
Description: fpStatFS returns in Info information about the filesystem on which the open file descriptor fd
resides. Info is of type tstatfs. The function returns 0 if the call was succesfull, or an error code
if the call failed.
Errors: On error, a non-zero error code is returned
See also: fpStatFS (1772), #rtl.baseunix.fpfStat (166)
81.3.12 fpfsync
Synopsis: Flush cached data to disk
Declaration: function fpfsync(fd: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: fpfsync forces the system to write all paged (in-memory) changes to file descriptor fd to disk. If
the call was succesful, 0 is returned.
Errors: On error, a nonzero error-code is returned.
81.3.13 fpgettimeofday
Synopsis: Return kernel time of day in GMT
Declaration: function fpgettimeofday(tp: ptimeval;tzp: ptimezone) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpGetTimeOfDay returns the number of seconds since 00:00, January 1 1970, GMT in a timeval
record. This time NOT corrected any way, not taking into account timezones, daylight savings time
and so on.
It is simply a wrapper to the kernel system call.
Errors: None.
81.3.14 fpStatFS
Synopsis: Retrieve filesystem information.
Declaration: function fpStatFS(Path: PChar;Info: pstatfs) : cint
function fpStatFS(Path: ansistring;Info: pstatfs) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: fpStatFS returns in Info information about the filesystem on which the file or path Path resides.
Info is of type tstatfs. The function returns 0 if the call was succesfull, or an error code if the
call failed.
Errors: On error, a non-zero error code is returned
See also: fpFStatFS (1771), #rtl.baseunix.fpStat (198)
1772
81.3.15 fpSystem
Synopsis: Execute and feed command to system shell
Declaration: function fpSystem(const Command: string) : cint
function fpSystem(const Command: AnsiString) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: Shell invokes the bash shell (/bin/sh), and feeds it the command Command (using the -c option).
The function then waits for the command to complete, and then returns the exit status of the command
in wait(3) format, or 127 if it could not complete the FpFork (166) or FpExecve (163) calls. To
convert the return value of fpsystem to the real return value use WEXITSTATUS() (208).
Errors: Errors are reported in (fpget)ErrNo (169)
See also: POpen (1776), FpFork (166), FpExecve (163)
program example56 ;
uses Unix ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e S h e l l f u n c t i o n }
Var S : L o n g i n t ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Output o f l s − l ∗ . pp ’ ) ;
S: = fpSystem ( ’ l s − l ∗ . pp ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’Command e x i t e d wwith s t a t u s : ’ ,S ) ;
end .
81.3.16 FSearch
Synopsis: Search for file in search path.
Declaration: function FSearch(const path: AnsiString;dirlist: Ansistring;
CurrentDirStrategy: TFSearchOption) : AnsiString
function FSearch(const path: AnsiString;dirlist: AnsiString)
: AnsiString
Visibility: default
Description: FSearch searches in DirList, a colon separated list of directories, for a file named Path. It
then returns a path to the found file.
The CurrentDirStrategy determines how the current directory is treated when searching:
NoCurrentDirectoryDo not search the current directory unless it is specified in the search path.
CurrentDirectoryFirstSearch the current directory first, before all directories in the search path.
CurrentDirectoryLastSearch the current directory last, after all directories in the search path
It is mainly provided to mimic DOS search path behaviour. Default behaviour is to search the current
directory first.
Errors: An empty string if no such file was found.
1773
See also: #rtl.unixutil.FNMatch (1799)
Program Example46 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e FSearch f u n c t i o n . }
Uses BaseUnix , Unix , S t r i n g s ;
begin
Writeln ( ’ l s i s i n : ’ , FSearch ( ’ l s ’ , strpas ( fpGetenv ( ’PATH ’ ) ) ) ) ;
end .
81.3.17 GetDomainName
Synopsis: Return current domain name
Declaration: function GetDomainName : string
Visibility: default
Description: Get the domain name of the machine on which the process is running. An empty string is returned
if the domain is not set.
Errors: None.
See also: GetHostName (1774)
Program Example39 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GetDomainName f u n c t i o n . }
Uses Unix ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Domain name o f t h i s machine i s : ’ , GetDomainName ) ;
end .
81.3.18 GetHostName
Synopsis: Return host name
Declaration: function GetHostName : string
Visibility: default
Description: Get the hostname of the machine on which the process is running. An empty string is returned if
hostname is not set.
Errors: None.
See also: GetDomainName (1774)
1774
Program Example40 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GetHostName f u n c t i o n . }
Uses u n i x ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’Name o f t h i s machine i s : ’ , GetHostName ) ;
end .
81.3.19 GetLocalTimezone
Synopsis: Return local timzeone information
Declaration: procedure GetLocalTimezone(timer: cint;var leap_correct: cint;
var leap_hit: cint)
procedure GetLocalTimezone(timer: cint)
Visibility: default
Description: GetLocalTimeZone returns the local timezone information. It also initializes the TZSeconds
variable, which is used to correct the epoch time to local time.
There should never be any need to call this function directly. It is called by the initialization routines
of the Linux unit.
See also: GetTimezoneFile (1775), ReadTimezoneFile (1777)
81.3.20 GetTimezoneFile
Synopsis: Return name of timezone information file
Declaration: function GetTimezoneFile : string
Visibility: default
Description: GetTimezoneFile returns the location of the current timezone file. The location of file is deter-
mined as follows:
1.If /etc/timezone exists, it is read, and the contents of this file is returned. This should work on
Debian systems.
2.If /usr/lib/zoneinfo/localtime exists, then it is returned. (this file is a symlink to the timezone
file on SuSE systems)
3.If /etc/localtime exists, then it is returned. (this file is a symlink to the timezone file on RedHat
systems)
Errors: If no file was found, an empty string is returned.

See also: ReadTimezoneFile (1777)
1775
81.3.21 PClose
Synopsis: Close file opened with POpen (1776)
Declaration: function PClose(var F: File) : cint

function PClose(var F: text) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: PClose closes a file opened with POpen (1776). It waits for the command to complete, and then
returns the exit status of the command.
For an example, see POpen (1776)
See also: POpen (1776)
81.3.22 POpen
Synopsis: Pipe file to standard input/output of program
Declaration: function POpen(var F: text;const Prog: RawByteString;rw: Char) : cint
function POpen(var F: File;const Prog: RawByteString;rw: Char) : cint
function POpen(var F: text;const Prog: UnicodeString;rw: Char) : cint
function POpen(var F: File;const Prog: UnicodeString;rw: Char) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: POpen runs the command specified in Prog, and redirects the standard in or output of the command
to the other end of the pipe F. The parameter rw indicates the direction of the pipe. If it is set to ’W’,
then F can be used to write data, which will then be read by the command from stdinput. If it is set
to ’R’, then the standard output of the command can be read from F. F should be reset or rewritten
prior to using it. F can be of type Text or File. A file opened with POpen can be closed with
Close, but also with PClose (1776). The result is the same, but PClose returns the exit status of
the command Prog.
Errors: Extended error information is returned by the FpGetErrno (169) function. Errors are essentially
those of the Execve, Dup and AssignPipe commands.
See also: AssignPipe (1763), PClose (1776)
Program Example37 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e Popen f u n c t i o n . }
uses BaseUnix , Unix ;
var f : t e x t ;
i : longint ;
begin
writeln ( ’ C r e a t i n g a s h e l l s c r i p t t o which echoes i t s arguments ’ ) ;
writeln ( ’ and i n p u t back t o s t d o u t ’ ) ;
assign ( f , ’ test21a ’ ) ;
rewrite ( f );
writeln ( f , ’ # ! / b i n / sh ’ ) ;
1776
w r i t e l n ( f , ’ echo t h i s i s t h e c h i l d speaking . . . . ’ ) ;
w r i t e l n ( f , ’ echo g o t arguments \ ∗ " $ ∗ " \ ∗ ’ ) ;
writeln ( f , ’ cat ’ ) ;
writeln ( f , ’ e x i t 2 ’ ) ;
writeln ( f ) ;
close ( f ) ;
fpchmod ( ’ t e s t 2 1 a ’ , & 7 5 5 ) ;
popen ( f , ’ . / t e s t 2 1 a arg1 arg2 ’ , ’W’ ) ;
i f f p g e t e r r n o < >0 then
w r i t e l n ( ’ e r r o r from POpen : e r r n o : ’ , f p g e t e r r n o ) ;
f o r i : = 1 to 1 0 do
w r i t e l n ( f , ’ T h i s i s w r i t t e n t o t h e pipe , and should appear on s t d o u t . ’ ) ;
Flush ( f ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ The s c r i p t e x i t e d w i t h s t a t u s : ’ , PClose ( f ) ) ;
writeln ;
w r i t e l n ( ’ Press < r e t u r n > t o remove s h e l l s c r i p t . ’ ) ;
readln ;
assign ( f , ’ test21a ’ ) ;
erase ( f )
end .
81.3.23 ReadTimezoneFile
Synopsis: Read the timezone file and initialize time routines
Declaration: procedure ReadTimezoneFile(fn: string)

Visibility: default
Description: ReadTimeZoneFile reads the timezone file fn and initializes the local time routines based on
the information found there.
There should be no need to call this function. The initialization routines of the linux unit call this
routine at unit startup.
Errors: None.
See also: GetTimezoneFile (1775), GetLocalTimezone (1775)
81.3.24 ReReadLocalTime
Synopsis: Re-Read the local time files.
Declaration: procedure ReReadLocalTime
Visibility: default
Description: ReReadLocalTime can be used to re-initialize the local timezone information.

To speed up conversion of epoch (UTC) time to local time, the timezone information is loaded
only once, at program startup. Calling this routine re-reads the timezone information using current
timezone settings.
The EpochToLocal (1800) function uses timezone information to transform epoch time to local time.
This timezone information does not change while the application is running: in particular, on DST
transitions or when the timezone files change, the time returned by local time routines will be wrong.
See also: Date (1529), Time (1625), Now (1593), EpochToLocal (1800)
1777
81.3.25 SeekDir
Synopsis: Seek to position in directory
Declaration: procedure SeekDir(p: pDir;loc: clong)

Visibility: default
Description: SeekDir sets the directory pointer to the loc-th entry in the directory structure pointed to by p.
For an example, see #rtl.baseunix.fpOpenDir (183).
See also: #rtl.baseunix.fpCloseDir (160), #rtl.baseunix.fpReadDir (187), #rtl.baseunix.fpOpenDir (183), TellDir
(1779)
81.3.26 SelectText
Synopsis: Wait for event on text file.
Declaration: function SelectText(var T: Text;TimeOut: ptimeval) : cint
function SelectText(var T: Text;TimeOut: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: SelectText executes the FpSelect (190) call on a file of type Text. You can specify a timeout in
TimeOut. The SelectText call determines itself whether it should check for read or write, depending
on how the file was opened : With Reset it is checked for reading, with Rewrite and Append it
is checked for writing.
Errors: See #rtl.baseunix.FpSelect (190). SYS_EBADF can also mean that the file wasn’t opened.
See also: #rtl.baseunix.FpSelect (190)
81.3.27 SigRaise
Synopsis: Raise a signal (send to current process)
Declaration: procedure SigRaise(sig: Integer)
Visibility: default
Description: SigRaise sends a Sig signal to the current process.
Errors: None.
See also: #rtl.baseunix.FpKill (174), #rtl.baseunix.FpGetPid (171)
Program example64 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e SigRaise f u n c t i o n . }
uses Unix , BaseUnix ;
Var
oa , na : P S i g A c t i o n r e c ;
1778
Procedure DoSig ( s i g : L o n g i n t ) ; cdecl ;
begin
end ;
begin
new( na ) ;
new( oa ) ;
na ^ . sa_handler : = S i g A c t i o n H a n d l e r ( @DoSig ) ;
f i l l c h a r ( na ^ . Sa_Mask , s i z e o f ( na ^ . Sa_Mask ) , # 0 ) ;
na ^ . Sa_Flags : = 0 ;
/ / t h i s member i s l i n u x only , and a f a i k even t h e r e arcane
na ^ . Sa_Restorer : = N i l ;
{ $endif }
i f f p S i g A c t i o n ( SigUsr1 , na , oa ) < >0 then
begin
writeln ( ’ Error : ’ , fpgeterrno ) ;
halt ( 1 ) ;
end ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Sending USR1 ( ’ , s i g u s r 1 , ’ ) s i g n a l t o s e l f . ’ ) ;
SigRaise ( s i g u s r 1 ) ;
end .
81.3.28 TellDir
Synopsis: Return current location in a directory
Declaration: function TellDir(p: pDir) : TOff
Visibility: default
Description: TellDir returns the current location in the directory structure pointed to by p. It returns -1 on
failure.
For an example, see #rtl.baseunix.fpOpenDir (183).
See also: #rtl.baseunix.fpCloseDir (160), #rtl.baseunix.fpReadDir (187), #rtl.baseunix.fpOpenDir (183), SeekDir

(1778)
81.3.29 WaitProcess
Synopsis: Wait for process to terminate.
Declaration: function WaitProcess(Pid: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: WaitProcess waits for process PID to exit. WaitProcess is equivalent to the #rtl.baseunix.FpWaitPID
(206) call:
FpWaitPid(PID,@result,0)
Handles of Signal interrupts (errno=EINTR), and returns the Exitcode of Process PID (>=0) or -
Status if it was terminated
1779
Errors: None.
See also: #rtl.baseunix.FpWaitPID (206), #rtl.baseunix.WTERMSIG (209), #rtl.baseunix.WSTOPSIG (208),
#rtl.baseunix.WIFEXITED (208), WIFSTOPPED (1780), #rtl.baseunix.WIFSIGNALED (208), W_EXITCODE
(1780), W_STOPCODE (1780), #rtl.baseunix.WEXITSTATUS (208)
81.3.30 WIFSTOPPED
Synopsis: Check whether the process is currently stopped.
Declaration: function WIFSTOPPED(Status: Integer) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: WIFSTOPPED checks Status and returns true if the process is currently stopped. This is only
possible if WUNTRACED was specified in the options of FpWaitPID (206).
See also: #rtl.baseunix.FpWaitPID (206), WaitProcess (1779), #rtl.baseunix.WTERMSIG (209), #rtl.baseunix.WSTOPSIG
(208), #rtl.baseunix.WIFEXITED (208), #rtl.baseunix.WIFSIGNALED (208), W_EXITCODE (1780),
W_STOPCODE (1780), #rtl.baseunix.WEXITSTATUS (208)
81.3.31 W_EXITCODE
Synopsis: Construct an exit status based on an return code and signal.
Declaration: function W_EXITCODE(ReturnCode: Integer;Signal: Integer) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: W_EXITCODE combines ReturnCode and Signal to a status code fit for WaitPid.
(208), #rtl.baseunix.WIFEXITED (208), WIFSTOPPED (1780), #rtl.baseunix.WIFSIGNALED (208),
W_EXITCODE (1780), W_STOPCODE (1780), #rtl.baseunix.WEXITSTATUS (208)
81.3.32 W_STOPCODE
Synopsis: Construct an exit status based on a signal.
Declaration: function W_STOPCODE(Signal: Integer) : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: W_STOPCODE constructs an exit status based on Signal, which will cause WIFSIGNALED (208)
to return True
(208), #rtl.baseunix.WIFEXITED (208), WIFSTOPPED (1780), #rtl.baseunix.WIFSIGNALED (208),
W_EXITCODE (1780), #rtl.baseunix.WEXITSTATUS (208)
1780
Chapter 82
Reference for unit ’unixcp’
82.1 Used units
Table 82.1: Used units by unit ’unixcp’
Name Page
BaseUnix 113
System 1224
82.2 Overview
The unixcp unit provides routines to handle mapping of code page names to numerical values as
used in libiconv>. The GetCodepageByName (1782) function is the main function for this. The
GetCodepageData (1782) can be used to map a code page number to a name. These function can be
used for instance to map code page information in environment variables to code page numbers used
in string encodings. The supported code page names are the ones commonly in use in libiconv.
This unit is used for example in unit cwstring (530).

82.3.1 Constants
UnixCpMap : Array[-1..UnixCpMapLimit] of TUnixCpData = ((cp: 0; name: ’UTF-8’), (cp:
UnixCpMap is a fixed structure with codepage number/codepage name pairs. It is used in GetCode-
pageData (1782), GetSystemCodepage (1782) and GetCodepageByName (1782) to map code page
names to numbers and vice versa.
The map is ordered on code page number, and for equal code page numbers, the names are ordered
so the most common one is used first.
UnixCpMapLimit = 406 - 83
Number of code pages in map UnixCpMap.
1781
CHAPTER 82. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’UNIXCP’
82.3.2 Types
TUnixCpData = record
cp : Word;
name : ansistring;
end
TUnixCpData contains 2 fields necessary to construct a map between code page number (cp) and
name (name).

82.4.1 GetCodepageByName
Synopsis: Find code page by name
Declaration: function GetCodepageByName(cpname: RawByteString) : TSystemCodePage
Visibility: default
Description: GetCodepageByName returns the code page number matching cpname. The supported code
page names are the ones commonly in use in libiconv. Names are searched case-sentively, with the
exception that ’cpN’ is converted to ’CPN’, where N is a digit.
Errors: If no matching code page name is found, CP_NONE is returned.
See also: UnixCpMap (1781), GetSystemCodepage (1782), GetCodepageData (1782)
82.4.2 GetCodepageData
Synopsis: Return index of codepage.
Declaration: function GetCodepageData(cp: TSystemCodePage) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: GetCodepageData returns the index of the first entry in UnixCpMap (1781) which matches cp.
Since the entries are ordered by code page number, this means the entries can be scanned for alternate
code names starting at this index.
Errors: If no matching code page is found, -1 is returned.

See also: UnixCpMap (1781), GetSystemCodepage (1782), GetCodepageByName (1782)
82.4.3 GetSystemCodepage
Synopsis: Return the system code page based on the program environment.
Declaration: function GetSystemCodepage : TSystemCodePage
Visibility: default
Description: GetSystemCodepage returns the system code page, based on one of the environment variables
LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE or LANG. The first non-empty variable (in the order mentioned here) is used.
1782
CHAPTER 82. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’UNIXCP’
Errors: If none is found, then a system default is used: Linux and Darwin use CP_UTF8, others use
CP_ASCII.
See also: UnixCpMap (1781), GetSystemCodepage (1782), GetCodepageByName (1782)
1783
Chapter 83
Reference for unit ’unixtype’
83.1 Overview
The unixtype unit contains the definitions of basic unix types. It was initially implemented by Marco
van de Voort.
When porting to a new unix platform, this unit should be adapted to the sizes and conventions of the
platform to which the compiler is ported.

83.2.1 Constants
ARG_MAX = 131072
Max number of command-line arguments.
NAME_MAX = 255
Max length (in bytes) of filename
PATH_MAX = 4095
Max length (in bytes) of pathname
Prio_PGrp = 1
#rtl.baseunix.fpGetPriority (172) option: Get process group priority.
Prio_Process = 0
#rtl.baseunix.fpGetPriority (172) option: Get process priority.
Prio_User = 2
#rtl.baseunix.fpGetPriority (172) option: Get user priority.
1784
CHAPTER 83. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’UNIXTYPE’
pthreadrwlocksize = 56
Size of pthread_rwlock_t _data structure
SIG_MAXSIG = 128
Maximum signal number.
SYS_NMLN = 65
Max system namelength
_PTHREAD_MUTEX_ADAPTIVE_NP = 3
Mutex options:
_PTHREAD_MUTEX_DEFAULT = _PTHREAD_MUTEX_NORMAL
Mutex options:
_PTHREAD_MUTEX_ERRORCHECK = _PTHREAD_MUTEX_ERRORCHECK_NP
Mutex options:
_PTHREAD_MUTEX_ERRORCHECK_NP = 2
Mutex options: double lock returns an error code.
_PTHREAD_MUTEX_FAST_NP = _PTHREAD_MUTEX_ADAPTIVE_NP
Mutex options: Fast mutex
_PTHREAD_MUTEX_NORMAL = _PTHREAD_MUTEX_TIMED_NP
Mutex options:
_PTHREAD_MUTEX_RECURSIVE = _PTHREAD_MUTEX_RECURSIVE_NP
Mutex options:
_PTHREAD_MUTEX_RECURSIVE_NP = 1
Mutex options: recursive mutex
_PTHREAD_MUTEX_TIMED_NP = 0
Mutex options: ?
1785
83.2.2 Types
cbool = longbool
Boolean type
cchar = cint8
C type: 8-bit signed integer
cdouble = Double
cfloat = single
cint = cint32
cint16 = SmallInt
cint32 = LongInt
cint64 = Int64
cint8 = ShortInt
clock_t = cuint64
Clock ticks type
clong = Int64
clongdouble = extended
Usually translates to an extended, but is CPU dependent.
clonglong = cint64
1786
cschar = cint8
cshort = cint16
csigned = cint
csint = cint32
Signed integer
cslong = Int64
cslonglong = cint64
csshort = cint16
cuchar = cuint8
C type: 8-bit unsigned integer
cuint = cuint32
cuint16 = Word
cuint32 = LongWord
cuint64 = QWord
cuint8 = Byte
1787
culong = QWord
culonglong = cuint64
cunsigned = cuint
Alias for #rtl.unixtype.cuint (1787)
cushort = cuint16
dev_t = cuint64
gid_t = cuint32
Group ID type.
ino64_t = cuint64
ino64_t is an inode type capable of containing 64-bit inodes.
ino_t = clong
Inode type.
ipc_pid_t = cint
Process ID
kDev_t = cushort
Kernel device type
mbstate_t = record
__count : cint;
__value : mbstate_value_t;
end
This type should never be used directly.
1788
mbstate_value_t = record
case Byte of
0: (
__wch : wint_t;
);
1: (
__wchb : Array[0..3] of Char;
);
end
This type should never be used directly. It is part of the mbstate_t (1788) type.
mode_t = cint
Inode mode type.
nlink_t = cuint32
off64_t = cint64
64-bit offset type.
off_t = cint
Offset type.
pcbool = ^cbool
pcchar = ^cchar
Pointer to #rtl.UnixType.cchar (1786)
pcdouble = ^cdouble
pcfloat = ^cfloat
pcint = ^cint
pcint16 = ^cint16
1789
pcint32 = ^cint32
pcint64 = ^cint64
pcint8 = ^cint8
pClock = ^clock_t
pclong = ^clong
pclongdouble = ^clongdouble
Pointer to the long double type clongdouble (1786)
pclonglong = ^clonglong
pcschar = ^cschar
pcshort = ^cshort
pcsigned = ^csigned
pcsint = ^csint
pcslong = ^cslong
pcslonglong = ^cslonglong
1790
pcsshort = ^csshort
pcuchar = ^cuchar
Pointer to #rtl.UnixType.cuchar (1787)
pcuint = ^cuint
pcuint16 = ^cuint16
pcuint32 = ^cuint32
pcuint64 = ^cuint64
pcuint8 = ^cuint8
pculong = ^culong
pculonglong = ^culonglong
pcunsigned = ^cunsigned
Pointer to #rtl.unixtype.cunsigned (1788)
pcushort = ^cushort
pDev = ^dev_t
pGid = ^gid_t
1791
pid_t = cint
Process ID type.
pIno = îno_t
pIno64 = îno64_t
Pointer to ino64_t (1788)
pkDev = ^kDev_t
Pointer to TkDev (1796) type.
pmbstate_t = ^mbstate_t
Pointer to mbstate_t (1788) type
pMode = ^mode_t
pnLink = ^nlink_t
pOff = ôff_t
pOff64 = ôff64_t
Pointer to off64_t type
pPid = ^pid_t
pSize = ^size_t
psize_t = pSize
Pointer to size_t (1795) type.
pSockLen = ^socklen_t
1792
pSSize = ^ssize_t
PStatFS = ^TStatfs
Pointer to TStatFS (1797) type.
pthread_attr_t = record
__detachstate : cint;
__schedpolicy : cint;
__schedparam : sched_param;
__inheritsched : cint;
__scope : cint;
__guardsize : size_t;
__stackaddr_set : cint;
__stackaddr : pointer;
__stacksize : size_t;
end
pthread_attr_t describes the thread attributes. It should be considered an opaque record, the
names of the fields can change anytime. Use the appropriate functions to set the thread attributes.
pthread_condattr_t = record
__dummy : cint;
end
pthread_condattr_t describes the attributes of a thread mutex. It should be considered an

opaque record, the names of the fields can change anytime.
pthread_cond_t = record
__c_lock : _pthread_fastlock;
__c_waiting : pointer;
__padding : Array[0..48-1-sizeof(_pthread_fastlock)-sizeof(pointer)-sizeof(clonglon
__align : clonglong;
end
pthread_cond_t describes a thread conditional variable. It should be considered an opaque

record, the names of the fields can change anytime.
pthread_key_t = cuint
Thread local storage key (opaque)
pthread_mutexattr_t = record
__mutexkind : cint;
end
1793
pthread_mutexattr_t describes the attributes of a thread mutex. It should be considered an

opaque record, the names of the fields can change anytime.
pthread_mutex_t = record
__m_reserved : cint;
__m_count : cint;
__m_owner : pointer;
__m_kind : cint;
__m_lock : _pthread_fastlock;
end
_pthread_mutex_t describes a thread mutex. It should be considered an opaque record, the

names of the fields can change anytime.
pthread_rwlockattr_t = record
__lockkind : cint;
__pshared : cint;
end
pthread_rwlockattr_t describes the attributes of a lock. It should be considered an opaque

record, the names of the fields can change anytime.
pthread_rwlock_t = record
case Boolean of
False: (
_data : Array[0..pthreadrwlocksize-1] of Char;
);
True: (
align : clong;
);
end
pthread_rwlock_t describes a lock. It should be considered an opaque record, the names of the
fields can change anytime.
pthread_t = culong
Thread description record
pTime = ^time_t
ptimespec = ^timespec
Pointer to timespec (1796) record.
ptimeval = ^timeval
1794
Pointer to timeval (1796) record.
ptime_t = ^time_t
pUid = ûid_t
pwchar_t = ^wchar_t
Pointer to wchar_t (1798) type.
sched_param = record
__sched_priority : cint;
end
Scheduling parameter description record.
sem_t = record
__sem_lock : _pthread_fastlock;
__sem_value : cint;
__sem_waiting : pointer;
end
sem_t describes a thread semaphore. It should be considered an opaque record, the names of the
fields can change anytime.
size_t = cuint64
socklen_t = cuint32
ssize_t = cint64
Small size type.
TClock = clock_t
TDev = dev_t
1795
TGid = gid_t
timespec = record
tv_sec : time_t;
tv_nsec : clong;
end
Record specifying time interval.
timeval = record
tv_sec : time_t;
tv_usec : clong;
end
time_t = cint64
Time span type
TIno = ino_t
TIno64 = ino64_t
Alias for ino64_t (1788)
TIOCtlRequest = cint
Opaque type used in FpIOCtl (173)
TkDev = kDev_t
Alias for kDev_t (1788) type.
TMode = mode_t
TnLink = nlink_t
TOff = off_t
1796
TOff64 = off64_t
Alias for off64_t type.
TPid = pid_t
TSize = size_t
TSockLen = socklen_t
TSSize = ssize_t
TStatfs = record
fstype : clong;
bsize : clong;
blocks : culong;
bfree : culong;
bavail : culong;
files : culong;
ffree : culong;
fsid : Array[0..1] of cint;
namelen : clong;
frsize : clong;
spare : Array[0..4] of clong;
end
Record describing a file system in the unix.fpstatfs (1784) call.
TTime = time_t
TTimeSpec = timespec
TTimeVal = timeval
Alias for TimeVal (1796) record.
TUid = uid_t
1797
uid_t = cuint32
User ID type
wchar_t = cint32
Wide character type.
wint_t = cint32
Wide character size type.
_pthread_fastlock = record
__status : clong;
__spinlock : cint;
end
_pthread_fastlock describes a thread mutex. It should be considered an opaque record, the

names of the fields can change anytime.
1798
Chapter 84
Reference for unit ’unixutil’
84.1 Overview
The UnixUtil unit contains some of the routines that were present in the old Linux unit, but which do
not really belong in the unix (1747) or baseunix (113) units.
Most of the functions described here have cross-platform counterparts in the SysUtils (1476) unit. It
is therefore recommended to use that unit.

84.2.1 Types
ComStr = string deprecated
Command-line string type.
DirStr = string deprecated
Filename directory part string type.
ExtStr = string deprecated
Filename extension part string type.
NameStr = string deprecated
Filename name part string type.
PathStr = string deprecated
Filename full path string type.
84.2.2 Variables
Tzseconds : LongInt
Seconds west of GMT
1799
CHAPTER 84. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’UNIXUTIL’

84.3.1 ArrayStringToPPchar
Synopsis: Concert an array of string to an array of null-terminated strings
Declaration: function ArrayStringToPPchar(const S: Array of AnsiString;
reserveentries: LongInt) : ppchar
Visibility: default
Description: ArrayStringToPPchar creates an array of null-terminated strings that point to strings which
are the same as the strings in the array S. The function returns a pointer to this array. The array and
the strings it contains must be disposed of after being used, because it they are allocated on the heap.
The ReserveEntries parameter tells ArrayStringToPPchar to allocate room at the end of
the array for another ReserveEntries entries.
Errors: If not enough memory is available, an error may occur.
See also: StringToPPChar (1802)
84.3.2 EpochToLocal
Synopsis: Convert epoch time to local time
Declaration: procedure EpochToLocal(epoch: LongInt;var year: Word;var month: Word;
var day: Word;var hour: Word;var minute: Word;
var second: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: Converts the epoch time (=Number of seconds since 00:00:00, January 1, 1970, corrected for your
time zone) to local date and time.
This function takes into account the timzeone settings of your system.
Errors: None
See also: LocalToEpoch (1802)
Listing: ./unutilex/ex3.pp
Program Example3 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e EpochToLocal f u n c t i o n . }
Uses BaseUnix , Unix , U n i x U t i l ;
Var Year , month , day , hour , minute , seconds : Word ;
begin
EpochToLocal ( FPTime , Year , month , day , hour , minute , seconds ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ C u r r e n t date : ’ , Day : 2 , ’ / ’ , Month : 2 , ’ / ’ , Year : 4 ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ C u r r e n t t i m e : ’ , Hour : 2 , ’ : ’ , minute : 2 , ’ : ’ , seconds : 2 ) ;
end .
1800
84.3.3 GetFS
Synopsis: Return file selector
Declaration: function GetFS(var T: Text) : LongInt

function GetFS(var F: File) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: GetFS returns the file selector that the kernel provided for your file. In principle you don’ need this
file selector. Only for some calls it is needed, such as the #rtl.baseunix.fpSelect (190) call or so.
Errors: In case the file was not opened, then -1 is returned.
See also: #rtl.baseunix.fpSelect (190)
Program Example33 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e S e l e c t T e x t f u n c t i o n . }
Uses Unix ;
Var t v : TimeVal ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Press t h e <ENTER> t o c o n t i n u e t h e program . ’ ) ;
{ Wait u n t i l F i l e d e s c r i p t o r 0 ( = I n p u t ) changes }
SelectText ( Input , n i l ) ;
{ Get r i d o f <ENTER> i n b u f f e r }
readln ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Press <ENTER> key i n l e s s than 2 seconds . . . ’ ) ;
t v . tv_sec : = 2 ;
t v . tv_sec : = 0 ;
i f S e l e c t T e x t ( I n p u t , @tv ) > 0 then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Thank you ! ’ )
else
W r i t e l n ( ’ Too l a t e ! ’ ) ;
end .
84.3.4 GregorianToJulian
Synopsis: Converts a gregorian date to a julian date
Declaration: function GregorianToJulian(Year: LongInt;Month: LongInt;Day: LongInt)

: LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: GregorianToJulian takes a gregorian date and converts it to a Julian day.
Errors: None.
See also: JulianToGregorian (1802)
1801
84.3.5 JulianToGregorian
Synopsis: Converts a julian date to a gregorian date
Declaration: procedure JulianToGregorian(JulianDN: LongInt;var Year: Word;

var Month: Word;var Day: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: JulianToGregorian takes a julian day and converts it to a gregorian date. (Start of the Julian
Date count is from 0 at 12 noon 1 JAN -4712 (4713 BC),)
Errors: None.
See also: GregorianToJulian (1801)
84.3.6 LocalToEpoch
Synopsis: Convert local time to epoch (unix) time
Declaration: function LocalToEpoch(year: Word;month: Word;day: Word;hour: Word;
minute: Word;second: Word) : LongInt
Visibility: default
Description: Converts the Local time to epoch time (=Number of seconds since 00:00:00, January 1, 1970).
Errors: None
See also: EpochToLocal (1800)
Program Example4 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e LocalToEpoch f u n c t i o n . }
Uses U n i x U t i l ;
Var year , month , day , hour , minute , second : Word ;
begin
Write ( ’ Year : ’ ) ; readln ( Year ) ;
Write ( ’ Month : ’ ) ; readln ( Month ) ;
Write ( ’ Day : ’ ) ; readln ( Day ) ;
Write ( ’ Hour : ’ ) ; readln ( Hour ) ;
Write ( ’ Minute : ’ ) ; readln ( Minute ) ;
Write ( ’ Seonds : ’ ) ; readln ( Second ) ;
Write ( ’ T h i s i s : ’ ) ;
Write ( LocalToEpoch ( year , month , day , hour , minute , second ) ) ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ seconds p a s t 0 0 : 0 0 1 / 1 / 1 9 8 0 ’ ) ;
end .
84.3.7 StringToPPChar
Synopsis: Split string in list of null-terminated strings
1802
Declaration: function StringToPPChar(S: PChar;ReserveEntries: Integer) : ppchar

function StringToPPChar(var S: AnsiString;ReserveEntries: Integer)
: ppchar
Visibility: default
Description: StringToPPChar splits the string S in words, replacing any whitespace with zero characters. It
returns a pointer to an array of pchars that point to the first letters of the words in S. This array is
terminated by a Nil pointer.
The function does not add a zero character to the end of the string unless it ends on whitespace.
The function reserves memory on the heap to store the array of PChar; The caller is responsible for
freeing this memory.
This function can be called to create arguments for the various Exec calls.
Errors: None.
See also: ArrayStringToPPchar (1800), #rtl.baseunix.FpExecve (163)
Program Example70 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e StringToPPchar f u n c t i o n . }
Uses U n i x U t i l ;
P : PPChar ;
I : longint ;
begin
/ / remark whitespace a t end .
S: = ’ T h i s i s a s t r i n g w i t h words . ’ ;
P: = StringToPPChar ( S , 0 ) ;
I :=0;
While P [ i ] < > N i l do
begin
W r i t e l n ( ’ Word ’ , i , ’ : ’ ,P [ i ] ) ;
Inc ( I ) ;
end ;
FreeMem ( P , i ∗ SizeOf ( Pchar ) ) ;
end .
1803
Chapter 85
Reference for unit ’video’
85.1 Overview
The Video unit implements a screen access layer which is system independent. It can be used to
write on the screen in a system-independent way, which should be optimal on all platforms for which
the unit is implemented.
The working of the Video is simple: After calling InitVideo (1822), the array VideoBuf contains
a representation of the video screen of size ScreenWidth*ScreenHeight, going from left to
right and top to bottom when walking the array elements: VideoBuf[0] contains the character
and color code of the top-left character on the screen. VideoBuf[ScreenWidth] contains the
data for the character in the first column of the second row on the screen, and so on.
To write to the ’screen’, the text to be written should be written to the VideoBuf array. Calling
UpdateScreen (1825) will then cp the text to the screen in the most optimal way. (an example can be
found further on).
The color attribute is a combination of the foreground and background color, plus the blink bit. The
bits describe the various color combinations:
bits 0-3 The foreground color. Can be set using all color constants.
bits 4-6 The background color. Can be set using a subset of the color constants.
bit 7 The blinking bit. If this bit is set, the character will appear blinking.
Each possible color has a constant associated with it, see the constants section for a list of constants.
The foreground and background color can be combined to a color attribute with the following code:
Attr:=ForeGroundColor + (BackGroundColor shl 4);
The color attribute can be logically or-ed with the blink attribute to produce a blinking character:
Atrr:=Attr or blink;
But not all drivers may support this.

The contents of the VideoBuf array may be modified: This is ’writing’ to the screen. As soon as
everything that needs to be written in the array is in the VideoBuf array, calling UpdateScreen
will copy the contents of the array screen to the screen, in a manner that is as efficient as possible.
1804
CHAPTER 85. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’VIDEO’
The updating of the screen can be prohibited to optimize performance; To this end, the LockScreenUp-
date (1822) function can be used: This will increment an internal counter. As long as the counter
differs from zero, calling UpdateScreen (1825) will not do anything. The counter can be lowered
with UnlockScreenUpdate (1825). When it reaches zero, the next call to UpdateScreen (1825) will
actually update the screen. This is useful when having nested procedures that do a lot of screen
writing.
The video unit also presents an interface for custom screen drivers, thus it is possible to override the
default screen driver with a custom screen driver, see the SetVideoDriver (1824) call. The current
video driver can be retrieved using the GetVideoDriver (1820) call.
Remark: The video unit should not be used together with the crt unit. Doing so will result in very strange
behaviour, possibly program crashes.
85.2 Examples utility unit

The examples in this section make use of the unit vidutil, which contains the TextOut function.
This function writes a text to the screen at a given location. It looks as follows:
Listing: ./videoex/vidutil.pp
unit v i d u t i l ;
Interface
uses
video ;
Procedure TextOut ( X , Y : Word ; Const S : S t r i n g ) ;
Implementation
Procedure TextOut ( X , Y : Word ; Const S : S t r i n g ) ;
Var
W, P , I ,M : Word ;
begin
P : = ( ( X−1)+(Y−1)∗ ScreenWidth ) ;
M: = Length (S ) ;
I f P+M>ScreenWidth ∗ ScreenHeight then
M: = ScreenWidth ∗ ScreenHeight−P ;
For I : = 1 to M do
VideoBuf ^ [ P+ I −1]:=Ord (S [ i ] ) + ( $07 shl 8 ) ;
end ;
end .
85.3 Writing a custom video driver

Writing a custom video driver is not difficult, and generally means implementing a couple of func-
tions, which whould be registered with the SetVideoDriver (1824) function. The various functions
that can be implemented are located in the TVideoDriver (1814) record:
TVideoDriver = Record
1805
InitDriver : Procedure;
DoneDriver : Procedure;
UpdateScreen : Procedure(Force : Boolean);
ClearScreen : Procedure;
SetVideoMode : Function (Const Mode : TVideoMode) : Boolean;
GetVideoModeCount : Function : Word;
GetVideoModeData : Function(Index : Word; Var Data : TVideoMode) : Boolean;
SetCursorPos : procedure (NewCursorX, NewCursorY: Word);
GetCursorType : function : Word;
SetCursorType : procedure (NewType: Word);
GetCapabilities : Function : Word;
end;
Not all of these functions must be implemented. In fact, the only absolutely necessary function to
write a functioning driver is the UpdateScreen function. The general calls in the Video unit will
check which functionality is implemented by the driver.
The functionality of these calls is the same as the functionality of the calls in the video unit, so the
expected behaviour can be found in the previous section. Some of the calls, however, need some
additional remarks.
InitDriver Called by InitVideo, this function should initialize any data structures needed for the
functionality of the driver, maybe do some screen initializations. The function is guaranteed
to be called only once; It can only be called again after a call to DoneVideo. The variables
ScreenWidth and ScreenHeight should be initialized correctly after a call to this func-
tion, as the InitVideo call will initialize the VideoBuf and OldVideoBuf arrays based
on their values.
DoneDriver This should clean up any structures that have been initialized in the InitDriver
function. It should possibly also restore the screen as it was before the driver was initialized.
The VideoBuf and OldVideoBuf arrays will be disposed of by the general DoneVideo
call.
UpdateScreen This is the only required function of the driver. It should update the screen based
on the VideoBuf array’s contents. It can optimize this process by comparing the values
with values in the OldVideoBuf array. After updating the screen, the UpdateScreen
procedure should update the OldVideoBuf by itself. If the Force parameter is True, the
whole screen should be updated, not just the changed values.
ClearScreen If there is a faster way to clear the screen than to write spaces in all character cells, then
it can be implemented here. If the driver does not implement this function, then the general
routines will write spaces in all video cells, and will call UpdateScreen(True).
SetVideoMode Should set the desired video mode, if available. It should return True if the mode
was set, False if not.
GetVideoModeCount Should return the number of supported video modes. If no modes are sup-
ported, this function should not be implemented; the general routines will return 1. (for the
current mode)
GetVideoModeData Should return the data for the Index-th mode; Index is zero based. The
function should return true if the data was returned correctly, false if Index contains an invalid
index. If this is not implemented, then the general routine will return the current video mode
when Index equals 0.
GetCapabilities If this function is not implemented, zero (i.e. no capabilities) will be returned by
the general function.
1806
The following unit shows how to override a video driver, with a driver that writes debug information
to a file. The unit can be used in any of the demonstration programs, by simply including it in the
uses clause. Setting DetailedVideoLogging to True will create a more detailed log (but will
also slow down functioning)
Listing: ./videoex/viddbg.pp
u n i t viddbg ;
Interface
uses v i d e o ;
Procedure S t a r t V i d e o L o g g i n g ;
Procedure StopVideoLogging ;
Function Is Vi de oL og gi ng : Boolean ;
Procedure SetVideoLogFileName ( FileName : S t r i n g ) ;
Const
D e t a i l e d V i d e o L o g g i n g : Boolean = False ;
Implementation
uses s y s u t i l s , keyboard ;
var
NewVideoDriver ,
OldVideoDriver : TVideoDriver ;
VideoLog : Text ;
begin
end ;
Procedure S t a r t V i d e o L o g g i n g ;
begin
Logging : = True ;
W r i t e l n ( VideoLog , ’ S t a r t l o g g i n g v i d e o o p e r a t i o n s a t : ’ , TimeStamp ) ;
end ;
Procedure StopVideoLogging ;
begin
W r i t e l n ( VideoLog , ’ Stop l o g g i n g v i d e o o p e r a t i o n s a t : ’ , TimeStamp ) ;
Logging : = False ;
end ;
Function Is Vi de oL og gi ng : Boolean ;
begin
I s V i de oL og gi ng : = Logging ;
end ;
1807
Var
ColUpd , RowUpd : Array [ 0 . . 1 0 2 4 ] of I n t e g e r ;
Procedure D u m p S c r e e n S t a t i s t i c s ( Force : Boolean ) ;
Var
I , Count : I n t e g e r ;
begin
I f Force then
Write ( VideoLog , ’ f o r c e d ’ ) ;
W r i t e l n ( VideoLog , ’ v i d e o update a t ’ , TimeStamp , ’ : ’ ) ;
F i l l C h a r ( Colupd , SizeOf ( ColUpd ) , # 0 ) ;
F i l l C h a r ( Rowupd , SizeOf (RowUpd ) , # 0 ) ;
Count : = 0 ;
For I : = 0 to VideoBufSize div SizeOf ( T V i d e o C e l l ) do
begin
I f VideoBuf ^ [ i ] < > OldVideoBuf ^ [ i ] then
begin
Inc ( Count ) ;
Inc ( ColUpd [ I mod ScreenWidth ] ) ;
Inc (RowUpd [ I div ScreenHeight ] ) ;
end ;
end ;
Write ( VideoLog , Count , ’ v i d e o c e l l s d i f f e r e d d i v i d e d over ’ ) ;
Count : = 0 ;
For I : = 0 to ScreenWidth −1 do
I f ColUpd [ I ] < >0 then
Inc ( Count ) ;
Write ( VideoLog , Count , ’ columns and ’ ) ;
Count : = 0 ;
For I : = 0 to ScreenHeight −1 do
I f RowUpd [ I ] < >0 then
Inc ( Count ) ;
W r i t e l n ( VideoLog , Count , ’ rows . ’ ) ;
I f D e t a i l e d V i d e o L o g g i n g Then
begin
For I : = 0 to ScreenWidth −1 do
I f ( ColUpd [ I ] < > 0 ) then
W r i t e l n ( VideoLog , ’ Col ’ , i , ’ : ’ , ColUpd [ I ] : 3 , ’ rows changed ’ ) ;
For I : = 0 to ScreenHeight −1 do
I f ( RowUpd [ I ] < > 0 ) then
W r i t e l n ( VideoLog , ’Row ’ , i , ’ : ’ ,RowUpd [ I ] : 3 , ’ colums changed ’ ) ;
end ;
end ;
Procedure LogUpdateScreen ( Force : Boolean ) ;
begin
I f Logging then
D u m p S c r e e n S t a t i s t i c s ( Force ) ;
O l d V i d e o D r i v e r . UpdateScreen ( Force ) ;
end ;
Procedure L o g I n i t V i d e o ;
begin
OldVideoDriver . I n i t D r i v e r ( ) ;
1808
Assign ( VideoLog , logFileName ) ;

Rewrite ( VideoLog ) ;
StartVideoLogging ;
end ;
Procedure LogDoneVideo ;
begin
StopVideoLogging ;
Close ( VideoLog ) ;
O l d V i d e o D r i v e r . DoneDriver ( ) ;
end ;
Procedure SetVideoLogFileName ( FileName : S t r i n g ) ;
begin
end ;
Initialization
GetVideoDriver ( OldVideoDriver ) ;
NewVideoDriver : = O l d V i d e o D r i v e r ;
NewVideoDriver . UpdateScreen : = @LogUpdateScreen ;
NewVideoDriver . I n i t D r i v e r : = @LogInitVideo ;
NewVideoDriver . DoneDriver : = @LogDoneVideo ;
LogFileName : = ’ Video . l o g ’ ;
Logging : = False ;
S e t V i d e o D r i v e r ( NewVideoDriver ) ;
end .

85.4.1 Constants
Black = 0
Black color attribute
Blink = 128
Blink attribute
Blue = 1
Blue color attribute
Brown = 6
Brown color attribute
cpBlink = $0002
1809
Video driver supports blink attribute
cpChangeCursor = $0020
Video driver supports changing cursor shape.
cpChangeFont = $0008
Video driver supports changing screen font.
cpChangeMode = $0010
Video driver supports changing mode
cpColor = $0004
Video driver supports color
cpUnderLine = $0001
Video driver supports underline attribute
crBlock = 2
Block cursor
crHalfBlock = 3
Half block cursor
crHidden = 0
Hide cursor
crUnderLine = 1
Underline cursor
Cyan = 3
Cyan color attribute
DarkGray = 8
Dark gray color attribute
errOk = 0
No error
ErrorCode : LongInt = ErrOK
1810
Error code returned by the last operation.
ErrorHandler : TErrorHandler = @DefaultErrorHandler
The ErrorHandler variable can be set to a custom-error handling function. It is set by default to
the DefaultErrorHandler (1816) function.
ErrorInfo : Pointer = Nil
Pointer to extended error information.
errVioBase = 1000
Base value for video errors
errVioInit = errVioBase + 1
Video driver initialization error.
errVioNoSuchMode = errVioBase + 3
Invalid video mode
errVioNotSupported = errVioBase + 2
Unsupported video function
FVMaxWidth = 240
Maximum screen buffer width.
Green = 2
Green color attribute
iso_codepages = [iso01, iso02, iso03, iso04, iso05, iso06, iso07, iso08, iso09, iso10
iso_codepages is a set containing all code pages that use an ISO encoding.
LightBlue = 9
Light Blue color attribute
LightCyan = 11
Light cyan color attribute
LightGray = 7
Light gray color attribute
1811
LightGreen = 10
Light green color attribute
LightMagenta = 13
Light magenta color attribute
LightRed = 12
Light red color attribute
LowAscii = True
On some systems, the low 32 values of the DOS code page are necessary for the ASCII control codes
and cannot be displayed by programs. If LowAscii is true, you can use the low 32 ASCII values. If
it is false, you must avoid using them.
LowAscii can be implemented either through a constant, variable or property. You should under no
circumstances assume that you can write to LowAscii, or take its address.
Magenta = 5
Magenta color attribute
NoExtendedFrame = False
The VT100 character set only has line drawing characters consisting of a single line. If this value is
true, the line drawing characters with two lines will be automatically converted to single lines.
NoExtendedFrame can be implemented either through a constant, variable or property. You should
under no circumstances assume that you can write to NoExtendedFrame, or take its address.
Red = 4
Red color attribute
ScreenHeight : Word = 0
Current screen height
ScreenWidth : Word = 0
Current screen Width
vga_codepages = [cp437, cp850, cp852, cp866]
vga_codepages is a set containing all code pages that can be considered a normal vga font (as in
use on early VGA cards) Note that KOI8-R has line drawing characters in wrong place.
vioOK = 0
No errors occurred
White = 15
White color attribute
Yellow = 14
Yellow color attribute
1812
85.4.2 Types
PVideoBuf = ^TVideoBuf
Pointer type to TVideoBuf (1814)
PVideoCell = ^TVideoCell
Pointer type to TVideoCell (1814)
PVideoMode = ^TVideoMode
Pointer to TVideoMode (1814) record.
Tencoding = (cp437,cp850,cp852,cp866,koi8r,iso01,iso02,iso03,iso04,
iso05,iso06,iso07,iso08,iso09,iso10,iso13,iso14,iso15,utf8)
Table 85.1: Enumeration values for type Tencoding
Value Explanation
cp437 Codepage 437
cp850 Codepage 850
cp852 Codepage 852
cp866 Codepage 866
iso01 ISO 8859-1
iso02 ISO 8859-2
iso03 ISO 8859-3
iso04 ISO 8859-4
iso05 ISO 8859-5
iso06 ISO 8859-6
iso07 ISO 8859-7
iso08 ISO 8859-8
iso09 ISO 8859-9
iso10 ISO 8859-10
iso13 ISO 8859-13
iso14 ISO 8859-14
iso15 ISO 8859-15
koi8r KOI8-R codepage
utf8 UTF-8 encoding
This type is available under Unix-like operating systems only.
TErrorHandler = function(Code: LongInt;Info: Pointer)

: TErrorHandlerReturnValue
The TErrorHandler function is used to register an own error handling function. It should be used
when installing a custom error handling function, and must return one of the above values.
Code should contain the error code for the error condition, and the Info parameter may contain
any data type specific to the error code passed to the function.
TErrorHandlerReturnValue = (errRetry,errAbort,errContinue)
1813
Table 85.2: Enumeration values for type TErrorHandlerReturnValue
Value Explanation
errAbort abort and return error code
errContinue abort without returning an errorcode.
errRetry retry the operation
Type used to report and respond to error conditions
TVideoBuf = Array[0..32759] of TVideoCell
The TVideoBuf type represents the screen.
TVideoCell = Word
TVideoCell describes one character on the screen. One of the bytes contains the color attribute
with which the character is drawn on the screen, and the other byte contains the ASCII code of the
character to be drawn. The exact position of the different bytes in the record is operating system
specific. On most little-endian systems, the high byte represents the color attribute, while the low-
byte represents the ASCII code of the character to be drawn.
TVideoDriver = record
UpdateScreen : procedure(Force: Boolean);
ClearScreen : procedure;
SetVideoMode : function(const Mode: TVideoMode) : Boolean;
GetVideoModeCount : function : Word;
GetVideoModeData : function(Index: Word;var Data: TVideoMode) : Boolean;
SetCursorPos : procedure(NewCursorX: Word;NewCursorY: Word);
GetCursorType : function : Word;
SetCursorType : procedure(NewType: Word);
GetCapabilities : function : Word;
end
TVideoDriver record can be used to install a custom video driver, with the SetVideoDriver (1824)
call.
An explanation of all fields can be found there.
TVideoMode = record
Col : Word;
Row : Word;
Color : Boolean;
end
The TVideoMode record describes a videomode. Its fields are self-explaining: Col,Row describe
the number of columns and rows on the screen for this mode. Color is True if this mode supports
colors, or False if not.
1814
TVideoModeSelector = function(const VideoMode: TVideoMode;

Params: LongInt) : Boolean
Video mode selection callback prototype.
85.4.3 Variables
CursorLines : Byte
CursorLines is a bitmask which determines which cursor lines are visible and which are not.
Each set bit corresponds to a cursorline being shown.
This variable is not supported on all platforms, so it should be used sparingly.
CursorX : Word
Current horizontal position in the screen where items will be written.
CursorY : Word
Current vertical position in the screen where items will be written.
external_codepage : Tencoding
This variable is for internal use only and should not be used.
internal_codepage : Tencoding
This variable is for internal use only and should not be used.
OldVideoBuf : PVideoBuf
The OldVideoBuf contains the state of the video screen after the last screen update. The Update-
Screen (1825) function uses this array to decide which characters on screen should be updated, and
which not.
Note that the OldVideoBuf array may be ignored by some drivers, so it should not be used. The
Array is in the interface section of the video unit mainly so drivers that need it can make use of it.
ScreenColor : Boolean
ScreenColor indicates whether the current screen supports colors.
VideoBuf : PVideoBuf
VideoBuf forms the heart of the Video unit: This variable represents the physical screen. Writing
to this array and calling UpdateScreen (1825) will write the actual characters to the screen.
VideoBufSize : LongInt
Current size of the video buffer pointed to by VideoBuf (1815)
1815

85.5.1 ClearScreen
Synopsis: Clear the video screen.
Declaration: procedure ClearScreen
Visibility: default
Description: ClearScreen clears the entire screen, and calls UpdateScreen (1825) after that. This is done by
writing spaces to all character cells of the video buffer in the default color (lightgray on black, color
attribute \$07).
Errors: None.
See also: InitVideo (1822), UpdateScreen (1825)
Listing: ./videoex/ex3.pp
program t e s t v i d e o ;
uses video , keyboard , v i d u t i l ;
Var
i : longint ;
k : TkeyEvent ;
begin
InitVideo ;
InitKeyboard ;
For I : = 1 to 1 0 do
TextOut ( i , i , ’ Press any key t o c l e a r screen ’ ) ;
UpdateScreen ( f a l s e ) ;
K: = GetKeyEvent ;
ClearScreen ;
TextOut ( 1 , 1 , ’ Cleared screen . Press any key t o end ’ ) ;
UpdateScreen ( t r u e ) ;
K: = GetKeyEvent ;
DoneKeyBoard ;
DoneVideo ;
end .
85.5.2 DefaultErrorHandler
Synopsis: Default error handling routine.
Declaration: function DefaultErrorHandler(AErrorCode: LongInt;AErrorInfo: Pointer)
: TErrorHandlerReturnValue
Visibility: default
Description: DefaultErrorHandler is the default error handler used by the video driver. It simply sets the
error code AErrorCode and AErrorInfo in the global variables ErrorCode and ErrorInfo
and returns errContinue.
Errors: None.
1816
85.5.3 DoneVideo
Synopsis: Disable video driver.
Declaration: procedure DoneVideo
Visibility: default
Description: DoneVideo disables the Video driver if the video driver is active. If the videodriver was already
disabled or not yet initialized, it does nothing. Disabling the driver means it will clean up any allo-
cated resources, possibly restore the screen in the state it was before InitVideo was called. Par-
ticularly, the VideoBuf and OldVideoBuf arrays are no longer valid after a call to DoneVideo.
The DoneVideo should always be called if InitVideo was called. Failing to do so may leave
the screen in an unusable state after the program exits.
Errors: Normally none. If the driver reports an error, this is done through the ErrorCode variable.
See also: InitVideo (1822)
85.5.4 GetCapabilities
Synopsis: Get current driver capabilities.
Declaration: function GetCapabilities : Word
Visibility: default
Description: GetCapabilities returns the capabilities of the current driver. It is an or-ed combination of the
following constants:
cpUnderLineVideo driver supports underline attribute

cpBlinkVideo driver supports blink attribute
cpColorVideo driver supports color
cpChangeFontVideo driver supports changing screen font.
cpChangeModeVideo driver supports changing mode
cpChangeCursorVideo driver supports changing cursor shape.
Note that the video driver should not yet be initialized to use this function. It is a property of the
driver.
Errors: None.
See also: GetCursorType (1818), GetVideoDriver (1820)
Program Example4 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e G e t C a p a b i l i t i e s f u n c t i o n . }
Uses v i d e o ;
Var
W: Word ;
Procedure TestCap ( Cap : Word ; Msg : S t r i n g ) ;
1817
begin
Write ( Msg , ’ : ’ ) ;
I f (W and Cap=Cap ) then
W r i t e l n ( ’ Yes ’ )
else
W r i t e l n ( ’No ’ ) ;
end ;
begin
W: = G e t C a p a b i l i t i e s ;
W r i t e l n ( ’ Video d r i v e r s u p p o r t s f o l l o w i n g f u n c t i o n a l i t y ’ ) ;
TestCap ( cpUnderLine , ’ U n d e r l i n e d c h a r a c t e r s ’ ) ;
TestCap ( c p B l i n k , ’ B l i n k i n g c h a r a c t e r s ’ ) ;
TestCap ( cpColor , ’ C o l o r c h a r a c t e r s ’ ) ;
TestCap ( cpChangeFont , ’ Changing f o n t ’ ) ;
TestCap ( cpChangeMode , ’ Changing v i d e o mode ’ ) ;
TestCap ( cpChangeCursor , ’ Changing c u r s o r shape ’ ) ;
end .
85.5.5 GetCursorType
Synopsis: Get screen cursor type
Declaration: function GetCursorType : Word
Visibility: default
Description: GetCursorType returns the current cursor type. It is one of the following values:
crHiddenHide cursor
crUnderLineUnderline cursor
crBlockBlock cursor
crHalfBlockHalf block cursor
Note that not all drivers support all types of cursors.

Errors: None.
See also: SetCursorType (1824), GetCapabilities (1817)
Program Example5 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GetCursorType f u n c t i o n . }
Uses video , keyboard , v i d u t i l ;
Const
C u r s o r t y p es : Array [ crHidden . . c r H a l f B l o c k ] of s t r i n g =
( ’ Hidden ’ , ’ UnderLine ’ , ’ Block ’ , ’ H a l f B l o c k ’ ) ;
begin
InitVideo ;
InitKeyboard ;
TextOut ( 1 , 1 , ’ Cursor t y p e : ’ +CursorTypes [ GetCursorType ] ) ;
1818
TextOut ( 1 , 2 , ’ Press any key t o e x i t . ’ ) ;

UpdateScreen ( False ) ;
GetKeyEvent ;
DoneKeyboard ;
DoneVideo ;
end .
85.5.6 GetLockScreenCount
Synopsis: Get the screen lock update count.
Declaration: function GetLockScreenCount : Integer
Visibility: default
Description: GetLockScreenCount returns the current lock level. When the lock level is zero, a call to
UpdateScreen (1825) will actually update the screen.
Errors: None.
See also: LockScreenUpdate (1822), UnlockScreenUpdate (1825), UpdateScreen (1825)
Program Example6 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GetLockScreenCount f u n c t i o n . }
Var
I : Longint ;
S : String ;
begin
InitVideo ;
InitKeyboard ;
TextOut ( 1 , 1 , ’ Press key t i l l new t e x t appears . ’ ) ;
Randomize ;
For I : = 0 to Random( 1 0 ) + 1 do
LockScreenUpdate ;
I :=0;
While GetLockScreenCount < >0 do
begin
Inc ( I ) ;
Str ( I ,S ) ;
UnlockScreenUpdate ;
GetKeyEvent ;
TextOut ( 1 , 1 , ’ UnLockScreenUpdate had t o be c a l l e d ’ +S+ ’ t i m e s ’ ) ;
end ;
TextOut ( 1 , 2 , ’ Press any key t o end . ’ ) ;
GetKeyEvent ;
DoneKeyboard ;
DoneVideo ;
end .
1819
85.5.7 GetVideoDriver
Synopsis: Get a copy of the current video driver.
Declaration: procedure GetVideoDriver(var Driver: TVideoDriver)
Visibility: default
Description: GetVideoDriver returns the currently active video driver record in Driver. It can be used to
clone the current video driver, or to override certain parts of it using the SetVideoDriver (1824) call.
Errors: None.
See also: SetVideoDriver (1824)
85.5.8 GetVideoMode
Synopsis: Return current video mode
Declaration: procedure GetVideoMode(var Mode: TVideoMode)
Visibility: default
Description: GetVideoMode returns the settings of the currently active video mode. The row,col fields
indicate the dimensions of the current video mode, and Color is true if the current video supports
colors.
See also: SetVideoMode (1825), GetVideoModeData (1822)
Program Example7 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GetVideoMode f u n c t i o n . }
Var
M : TVideoMode ;
S : String ;
begin
InitVideo ;
InitKeyboard ;
GetVideoMode (M) ;
i f M. C o l o r then
TextOut ( 1 , 1 , ’ C u r r e n t mode has c o l o r ’ )
else
TextOut ( 1 , 1 , ’ C u r r e n t mode does n o t have c o l o r ’ ) ;
S t r (M. Row, S ) ;
TextOut ( 1 , 2 , ’ Number o f rows : ’ +S ) ;
S t r (M. Col , S ) ;
TextOut ( 1 , 3 , ’ Number o f columns : ’ +S ) ;
T e x t o u t ( 1 , 4 , ’ Press any key t o e x i t . ’ ) ;
GetKeyEvent ;
DoneKeyboard ;
DoneVideo ;
end .
1820
85.5.9 GetVideoModeCount
Synopsis: Get the number of video modes supported by the driver.
Declaration: function GetVideoModeCount : Word

Visibility: default
Description: GetVideoModeCount returns the number of video modes that the current driver supports. If the
driver does not support switching of modes, then 1 is returned.
This function can be used in conjunction with the GetVideoModeData (1822) function to retrieve
data for the supported video modes.
Errors: None.
See also: GetVideoModeData (1822), GetVideoMode (1820)
Program Example8 ;
{ Program t o demonstrate t h e GetVideoModeCount f u n c t i o n . }
Procedure DumpMode (M : TVideoMode ; Index : I n t e g e r ) ;
Var
S : String ;
begin
S t r ( Index : 2 , S ) ;
inc ( Index ) ;
TextOut ( 1 , Index , ’ Data f o r mode ’ +S+ ’ : ’ ) ;
i f M. C o l o r then
TextOut ( 1 9 , Index , ’ color , ’ )
else
TextOut ( 1 9 , Index , ’No c o l o r , ’ ) ;
S t r (M. Row: 3 , S ) ;
TextOut ( 2 8 , Index , S+ ’ rows ’ ) ;
S t r (M. Col : 3 , S ) ;
TextOut ( 3 6 , index , S+ ’ columns ’ ) ;
end ;
Var
i , Count : I n t e g e r ;
m : TVideoMode ;
begin
InitVideo ;
InitKeyboard ;
Count : = GetVideoModeCount ;
For I : = 1 to Count do
begin
GetVideoModeData ( I −1,M) ;
DumpMode(M, I −1);
end ;
TextOut ( 1 , Count +1 , ’ Press any key t o e x i t ’ ) ;
1821
GetKeyEvent ;
DoneKeyboard ;
DoneVideo ;
end .
85.5.10 GetVideoModeData
Synopsis: Get the specifications for a video mode
Declaration: function GetVideoModeData(Index: Word;var Data: TVideoMode) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: GetVideoModeData returns the characteristics of the Index-th video mode in Data. Index
is zero based, and has a maximum value of GetVideoModeCount-1. If the current driver does
not support setting of modes (GetVideoModeCount=1) and Index is zero, the current mode is
returned.
The function returns True if the mode data was retrieved succesfully, False otherwise.
For an example, see GetVideoModeCount (1821).
Errors: In case Index has a wrong value, False is returned.
See also: GetVideoModeCount (1821), SetVideoMode (1825), GetVideoMode (1820)
85.5.11 InitVideo
Synopsis: Initialize video driver.
Declaration: procedure InitVideo
Visibility: default
Description: InitVideo Initializes the video subsystem. If the video system was already initialized, it does
nothing. After the driver has been initialized, the VideoBuf and OldVideoBuf pointers are
initialized, based on the ScreenWidth and ScreenHeight variables. When this is done, the
screen is cleared.
Errors: if the driver fails to initialize, the ErrorCode variable is set.

See also: DoneVideo (1817)
85.5.12 LockScreenUpdate
Synopsis: Prevent further screen updates.
Declaration: procedure LockScreenUpdate

Visibility: default
Description: LockScreenUpdate increments the screen update lock count with one. As long as the screen
update lock count is not zero, UpdateScreen (1825) will not actually update the screen.
This function can be used to optimize screen updating: If a lot of writing on the screen needs to
be done (by possibly unknown functions), calling LockScreenUpdate before the drawing, and
1822
UnlockScreenUpdate (1825) after the drawing, followed by a UpdateScreen (1825) call, all writing
will be shown on screen at once.
For an example, see GetLockScreenCount (1819).
Errors: None.
See also: UpdateScreen (1825), UnlockScreenUpdate (1825), GetLockScreenCount (1819)
85.5.13 SetCursorPos
Synopsis: Set write cursor position.
Declaration: procedure SetCursorPos(NewCursorX: Word;NewCursorY: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: SetCursorPos positions the cursor on the given position: Column NewCursorX and row NewCursorY.
The origin of the screen is the upper left corner, and has coordinates (0,0).
The current position is stored in the CursorX and CursorY variables.
Errors: None.
See also: SetCursorType (1824)
program example2 ;
uses video , keyboard ;
Var
P , PP,D : I n t e g e r ;
K : TKeyEvent ;
Procedure PutSquare ( P : I N t e g e r ; C : Char ) ;
begin
VideoBuf ^ [ P ] : = Ord (C) + ( $07 shl 8 ) ;
VideoBuf ^ [ P+ScreenWidth ] : = Ord ( c ) + ( $07 shl 8 ) ;
VideoBuf ^ [ P+ 1 ] : = Ord ( c ) + ( $07 shl 8 ) ;
VideoBuf ^ [ P+ScreenWidth + 1 ] : = Ord ( c ) + ( $07 shl 8 ) ;
end ;
begin
InitVideo ;
InitKeyBoard ;
P: = 0 ;
PP:= −1;
Repeat
I f PP<>−1 then
PutSquare (PP, ’ ’ ) ;
PutSquare ( P , ’ # ’ ) ;
SetCursorPos ( P Mod ScreenWidth , P div ScreenWidth ) ;
PP: =P ;
Repeat
D: = 0 ;
K: = TranslateKeyEvent ( GetKeyEvent ) ;
1823
Case GetKeyEventCode (K ) of
k b d L e f t : I f ( P Mod ScreenWidth ) < >0 then
D:= −1;
kbdUp : I f P>=ScreenWidth then
D:=− ScreenWidth ;
kbdRight : I f ( ( P+ 2 ) Mod ScreenWidth ) < >0 then
D: = 1 ;
kbdDown : i f ( P<( VideoBufSize div 2) − ( ScreenWidth ∗ 2 ) ) then
D: = ScreenWidth ;
end ;
U n t i l ( D< >0) or ( GetKeyEventChar (K)= ’ q ’ ) ;
P: =P+D;
u n t i l GetKeyEventChar (K)= ’ q ’ ;
DoneKeyBoard ;
DoneVideo ;
end .
85.5.14 SetCursorType
Synopsis: Set cursor type
Declaration: procedure SetCursorType(NewType: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: SetCursorType sets the cursor to the type specified in NewType.
crHiddenHide cursor
crUnderLineUnderline cursor
crBlockBlock cursor
crHalfBlockHalf block cursor
Errors: None.
See also: SetCursorPos (1823)
85.5.15 SetVideoDriver
Synopsis: Install a new video driver.
Declaration: function SetVideoDriver(const Driver: TVideoDriver) : Boolean
Visibility: default
Description: SetVideoDriver sets the videodriver to be used to Driver. If the current videodriver is initial-
ized (after a call to InitVideo) then it does nothing and returns False.
A new driver can only be installed if the previous driver was not yet activated (i.e. before a call to
InitVideo (1822)) or after it was deactivated (i.e after a call to DoneVideo).
For more information about installing a videodriver, see viddriver (1805).
For an example, see the section on writing a custom video driver.
Errors: If the current driver is initialized, then False is returned.

See also: viddriver (1805)
1824
85.5.16 SetVideoMode
Synopsis: Set current video mode.
Declaration: function SetVideoMode(const Mode: TVideoMode) : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: SetVideoMode sets the video mode to the mode specified in Mode:
If the call was succesful, then the screen will have Col columns and Row rows, and will be displaying
in color if Color is True.
The function returns True if the mode was set succesfully, False otherwise.
Note that the video mode may not always be set. E.g. a console on Linux or a telnet session cannot
always set the mode. It is important to check the error value returned by this function if it was not
succesful.
The mode can be set when the video driver has not yet been initialized (i.e. before InitVideo (1822)
was called) In that case, the video mode will be stored, and after the driver was initialized, an attempt
will be made to set the requested mode. Changing the video driver before the call to InitVideo
will clear the stored video mode.
To know which modes are valid, use the GetVideoModeCount (1821) and GetVideoModeData (1822)
functions. To retrieve the current video mode, use the GetVideoMode (1820) procedure.
Errors: If the specified mode cannot be set, then errVioNoSuchMode may be set in ErrorCode
See also: GetVideoModeCount (1821), GetVideoModeData (1822), GetVideoMode (1820)
85.5.17 UnlockScreenUpdate
Synopsis: Unlock screen update.
Declaration: procedure UnlockScreenUpdate
Visibility: default
Description: UnlockScreenUpdate decrements the screen update lock count with one if it is larger than zero.
When the lock count reaches zero, the UpdateScreen (1825) will actually update the screen. No
screen update will be performed as long as the screen update lock count is nonzero. This mechanism
can be used to increase screen performance in case a lot of writing is done.
It is important to make sure that each call to LockScreenUpdate (1822) is matched by exactly one
call to UnlockScreenUpdate
For an example, see GetLockScreenCount (1819).
Errors: None.
See also: LockScreenUpdate (1822), GetLockScreenCount (1819), UpdateScreen (1825)
85.5.18 UpdateScreen
Synopsis: Update physical screen with internal screen image.
Declaration: procedure UpdateScreen(Force: Boolean)

Visibility: default
1825
Description: UpdateScreen synchronizes the actual screen with the contents of the VideoBuf internal buffer.
The parameter Force specifies whether the whole screen has to be redrawn (Force=True) or only
parts that have changed since the last update of the screen.
The Video unit keeps an internal copy of the screen as it last wrote it to the screen (in the OldVideoBuf
array). The current contents of VideoBuf are examined to see what locations on the screen need to
be updated. On slow terminals (e.g. a linux telnet session) this mechanism can speed up the screen
redraw considerably.
On platforms where mouse cursor visibility is not guaranteed to be preserved during screen updates
this routine has to restore the mouse cursor after the update (usually by calling HideMouse from unit
Mouse before the real update and ShowMouse afterwards).
Errors: None.
See also: ClearScreen (1816)
1826
Chapter 86
Reference for unit ’wincrt’
86.1 Overview
The wincrt unit provides some auxiliary routines for use with the graph (760) unit, namely keyboard
support. It has no connection with the crt (503) unit, nor with the Turbo-Pascal for Windows WinCrt
unit. As such, it should not be used by end users. Refer to the crt (503) unit instead.

86.2.1 Variables
directvideo : Boolean
On windows, this variable is ignored.
lastmode : Word
Is supposed to contain the last used video mode, but is actually unused.

86.3.1 delay
Synopsis: Pause program execution
Declaration: procedure delay(ms: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: Delay stops program execution for the indicated number ms of milliseconds.
See also: sound (1828), nosound (1828)
86.3.2 keypressed
Synopsis: Check if a key was pressed.
1827
CHAPTER 86. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’WINCRT’
Declaration: function keypressed : Boolean

Visibility: default
Description: KeyPressed returns True if the user pressed a key, or False if not. It does not wait for the user
to press a key.
See also: readkey (1828)
86.3.3 nosound
Synopsis: Stop the speaker
Declaration: procedure nosound
Visibility: default
Description: NoSound does nothing, windows does not support this.
See also: sound (1828)
86.3.4 readkey
Synopsis: Read a key from the keyboard
Declaration: function readkey : Char
Visibility: default
Description: ReadKey reads a key from the keyboard, and returns the ASCII value of the key, or the scancode
of the key in case it is a special key.
The function waits until a key is pressed.
See also: KeyPressed (1827)
86.3.5 sound
Synopsis: Sound PC speaker
Declaration: procedure sound(hz: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: Sound sounds the PC speaker. It emits a tone with frequency Hz for 500 milliseconds. (the time
argument is required by the windows API)
See also: nosound (1828)
86.3.6 textmode
Synopsis: Set indicated text mode
Declaration: procedure textmode(mode: Integer)
Visibility: default
Description: TextMode does nothing.
1828
Chapter 87
Reference for unit ’windirs’
87.1 Used units
Table 87.1: Used units by unit ’windirs’
Name Page
System 1224
windows ??
87.2 Overview
This unit contains only one function: GetWindowsSpecialDir (1832). It is a simple pascal wrapper
around the shfolder.dll library, and is available under Windows only.

87.3.1 Constants
CSIDL_ADMINTOOLS = $0030
ID for the personal "Start Menu\Programs\Administrative tools" folder (In the user’s personal folder)
CSIDL_APPDATA = $001A
ID for the roaming "Application Data" folder (in the user’s personal folder)
CSIDL_CDBURN_AREA = $003B
ID for the personal "Local Settings\Application Data\Microsoft\CD Burning" folder (Under "All
users" folder)
CSIDL_COMMON_ADMINTOOLS = $002F
ID for the common "Start Menu\Programs\Administrative tools" folder (Under "All users" folder)
1829
CHAPTER 87. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’WINDIRS’
CSIDL_COMMON_APPDATA = $0023
ID for the common "Application Data" folder (Under "All users" folder)
CSIDL_COMMON_DESKTOPDIRECTORY = $0019
ID for the public "Desktop" folder (Under "All users" folder)
CSIDL_COMMON_DOCUMENTS = $002E
ID for the common "Documents" folder (Under "All users" folder)
CSIDL_COMMON_FAVORITES = $001F
ID for the public "Favorites" folder (Under "All users" folder)
CSIDL_COMMON_MUSIC = $0035
ID for the common "Documents\My Music" folder (Under "All users" folder)
CSIDL_COMMON_PICTURES = $0036
ID for the common "Documents\My Pictures" folder (Under "All users" folder)
CSIDL_COMMON_PROGRAMS = $0017
ID for the public "Programs" folder (Under "All users" Start menu folder)
CSIDL_COMMON_STARTMENU = $0016
ID for the public "Start Menu" folder (Under "All users")
CSIDL_COMMON_STARTUP = $0018
ID for the public "Startup" folder (Under "All users\Start menu\Programs" folder)
CSIDL_COMMON_TEMPLATES = $002D
ID for the common "Templates" folder (Under "All users" folder)
CSIDL_COMMON_VIDEO = $0037
ID for the common "Documents\My Video" folder (Under "All users" folder)
CSIDL_COOKIES = $0021
ID for the "Cookies" folder (in the user’s personal folder)
CSIDL_DESKTOPDIRECTORY = $0010
ID for the "Desktop" folder (in the user’s personal folder)
1830
CSIDL_FAVORITES = $0006
ID for the "Favourites" folder (in the user’s personal folder)
CSIDL_FLAG_CREATE = $8000
Flag to specify if the requested folder must be created if it didn’t exist yet.
CSIDL_HISTORY = $0022
ID for the "History" folder (in the user’s personal folder)
CSIDL_INTERNET_CACHE = $0020
ID for the "Temporary Internet Files" folder (in the user’s personal folder)
CSIDL_LOCAL_APPDATA = $001C
ID for the local "Application Data" folder (in the user’s personal folder)
CSIDL_MYMUSIC = $000D
ID for the "My Music" folder (in the user’s personal folder)
CSIDL_MYPICTURES = $0027
ID for the "My Pictures" folder (in the user’s personal folder)
CSIDL_MYVIDEO = $000E
ID for the "My Videos" folder (in the user’s personal folder)
CSIDL_NETHOOD = $0013
ID for the "Nethood" folder (in the user’s personal folder)
CSIDL_PERSONAL = $0005
ID for the "My Documents" folder (in the user’s personal folder)
CSIDL_PRINTHOOD = $001B
ID for the "Printhood" folder (in the user’s personal folder)
CSIDL_PROFILE = $0028
ID for the user’s personal folder
CSIDL_PROFILES = $003E
ID for the parent folder for the user’s folders
1831
CSIDL_PROGRAMS = $0002
ID for the "Program files" folder
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILES = $0026
ID for the "Program Files" folder (alias for CSIDL_PROGRAMS)
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILES_COMMON = $002B
ID for the Common folder under the "Program Files" folder.
CSIDL_RECENT = $0008
ID for the "Recent" folder (in the user’s personal folder)
CSIDL_SENDTO = $0009
ID for the "Send to" folder (in the user’s personal folder)
CSIDL_STARTMENU = $000B
ID for the "Start menu" folder (in the user’s personal folder)
CSIDL_STARTUP = $0007
ID for the "Startup" menu folder (in the user’s personal folder)
CSIDL_SYSTEM = $0025
ID for the Windows System32 dir.
CSIDL_TEMPLATES = $0015
ID for the "Templates" folder (in the user’s personal folder)
CSIDL_WINDOWS = $0024
ID for the Windows installation dir.

87.4.1 GetWindowsSpecialDir
Synopsis: Get the location of a special directory.
Declaration: function GetWindowsSpecialDir(ID: Integer) : string
Visibility: default
Description: GetWindowsSpecialDir can be used to to get the path of special folders on the Windows
system. The locations are identified using one of the CSIDL_* constants. If the ID of a location is
or-ed with the CSIDL_FLAG_CREATE constant, then the directory will be created if it didn’t exist
yet (and the user has sufficient rights to do so).
1832
Chapter 88
Reference for unit ’x86’
88.1 Used units
Table 88.1: Used units by unit ’x86’
Name Page
BaseUnix 113
System 1224
88.2 Overview
The x86 unit contains some of the routines that were present in the 1.0.X Linux unit, and which were
Intel (PC) architecture specific.
These calls have been preserved for compatibility, but should be considered deprecated: they are not
portable and may not even work on future linux versions.

88.3.1 fpIOperm
Synopsis: Set permission on IO ports
Declaration: function fpIOperm(From: Cardinal;Num: Cardinal;Value: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpIOperm sets permissions on Num ports starting with port From to Value. The function returns
zero if the call was successfull, a nonzero value otherwise.
Note:
•This works ONLY as root.

•Only the first 0x03ff ports can be set.
•When doing a FpFork (166), the permissions are reset. When doing a FpExecVE (163) they are
kept.
1833
CHAPTER 88. REFERENCE FOR UNIT ’X86’
Errors: Extended error information can be retrieved with FpGetErrno (169)
88.3.2 fpIoPL
Synopsis: Set I/O privilege level
Declaration: function fpIoPL(Level: cint) : cint
Visibility: default
Description: FpIoPL sets the I/O privilige level. It is intended for completeness only, one should normally not
use it.
88.3.3 ReadPort
Synopsis: Read data from a PC port
Declaration: procedure ReadPort(Port: LongInt;var Value: Byte)

procedure ReadPort(Port: LongInt;var Value: LongInt)
procedure ReadPort(Port: LongInt;var Value: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: ReadPort reads one Byte, Word or Longint from port Port into Value.
Note that you need permission to read a port. This permission can be set by the root user with the
FpIOPerm (1833) call.
Errors: In case of an error (not enough permissions read this port), runtime 216 (Access Violation) will
occur.
See also: FpIOPerm (1833), ReadPortB (1834), ReadPortW (1835), ReadPortL (1835), WritePort (1835),
WritePortB (1836), WritePortL (1836), WritePortW (1836)
88.3.4 ReadPortB
Synopsis: Read bytes from a PC port
Declaration: function ReadPortB(Port: LongInt) : Byte

procedure ReadPortB(Port: LongInt;var Buf;Count: LongInt)
Visibility: default
Description: The procedural form of ReadPortB reads Count bytes from port Port and stores them in Buf.
There must be enough memory allocated at Buf to store Count bytes.
The functional form of ReadPortB reads 1 byte from port B and returns the byte that was read.
occur.
See also: FpIOPerm (1833), ReadPort (1834), ReadPortW (1835), ReadPortL (1835), WritePort (1835), WritePortB
(1836), WritePortL (1836), WritePortW (1836)
1834
88.3.5 ReadPortL
Synopsis: Read longints from a PC port
Declaration: function ReadPortL(Port: LongInt) : LongInt

procedure ReadPortL(Port: LongInt;var Buf;Count: LongInt)
Visibility: default
Description: The procedural form of ReadPortL reads Count longints from port Port and stores them in
Buf. There must be enough memory allocated at Buf to store Count Longints.
The functional form of ReadPortL reads 1 longint from port B and returns the longint that was
read.
occur.
See also: FpIOPerm (1833), ReadPort (1834), ReadPortW (1835), ReadPortB (1834), WritePort (1835), WritePortB
88.3.6 ReadPortW
Synopsis: Read Words from a PC port
Declaration: function ReadPortW(Port: LongInt) : Word
procedure ReadPortW(Port: LongInt;var Buf;Count: LongInt)
Visibility: default
Description: The procedural form of ReadPortW reads Count words from port Port and stores them in Buf.
There must be enough memory allocated at Buf to store Count words.
The functional form of ReadPortW reads 1 word from port B and returns the word that was read.
occur.
See also: FpIOPerm (1833), ReadPort (1834), ReadPortB (1834), ReadPortL (1835), WritePort (1835), WritePortB
88.3.7 WritePort
Synopsis: Write data to PC port
Declaration: procedure WritePort(Port: LongInt;Value: Byte)
procedure WritePort(Port: LongInt;Value: LongInt)
procedure WritePort(Port: LongInt;Value: Word)
Visibility: default
Description: WritePort writes Value – 1 byte, Word or longint – to port Port.
Remark: You need permission to write to a port. This permission can be set with root permission with the
1835
Errors: In case of an error (not enough permissions to write to this port), runtime 216 (Access Violation) will
occur.
See also: FpIOPerm (1833), WritePortB (1836), WritePortL (1836), WritePortW (1836), ReadPortB (1834),
ReadPortL (1835), ReadPortW (1835)
88.3.8 WritePortB
Synopsis: Write byte to PC port
Declaration: procedure WritePortB(Port: LongInt;Value: Byte)
procedure WritePortB(Port: LongInt;var Buf;Count: LongInt)
Visibility: default
Description: The first form of WritePortB writes 1 byte to port Port. The second form writes Count bytes
from Buf to port Port.
occur.
See also: FpIOPerm (1833), WritePort (1835), WritePortL (1836), WritePortW (1836), ReadPortB (1834),
88.3.9 WritePortl
Synopsis: Write longint to PC port.
Declaration: procedure WritePortL(Port: LongInt;Value: LongInt)
procedure WritePortl(Port: LongInt;var Buf;Count: LongInt)
Visibility: default
occur.
See also: FpIOPerm (1833), WritePort (1835), WritePortB (1836), WritePortW (1836), ReadPortB (1834),
88.3.10 WritePortW
Synopsis: Write Word to PC port
Declaration: procedure WritePortW(Port: LongInt;Value: Word)

procedure WritePortW(Port: LongInt;var Buf;Count: LongInt)
Visibility: default
1836
occur.
See also: FpIOPerm (1833), WritePort (1835), WritePortL (1836), WritePortB (1836), ReadPortB (1834),
1837

RTL PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RTL PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RTL PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Run-Time Library (RTL) :

Michaël Van Canneyt

0.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

1 Reference for unit ’BaseUnix’ 113

1.4.23 FpGetcwd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

1.4.63 FpSetgid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

1.4.103 wifsignaled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

2 Reference for unit ’character’ 210

2.5.9 TCharacter.IsDigit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

3 Reference for unit ’charset’ 228

4 Reference for unit ’Classes’ 233

4.4.2 BeginGlobalLoading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

4.4.42 RegisterComponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

4.17.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

4.30.4 IInterfaceList.Get . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

4.34.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

4.35.14 TAbstractObjectWriter.WriteSingle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

4.38.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

4.39.13 TBinaryObjectWriter.WriteBinary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

4.41 TBytesStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

4.44.4 TCollectionItem.Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

4.45.33 TComponent.ComponentStyle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

4.49.3 Property overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

4.51.26 TFPList.Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

4.55.14 TInterfaceList.Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

4.57.23 TList.Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

4.62.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

4.65.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

4.65.41 TReader.Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

4.68.13 TStream.WriteComponentRes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

4.70.2 Method overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

4.71.22 TStrings.Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

4.73.5 TStringStream.Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

4.75.32 TThread.Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

4.77.22 TWriter.WriteListBegin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

5 Reference for unit ’clocale’ 467

6 Reference for unit ’cmem’ 468

7 Reference for unit ’collation_de’ 470

8 Reference for unit ’collation_es’ 471

9 Reference for unit ’collation_fr_ca’ 472

10 Reference for unit ’collation_ja’ 473

11 Reference for unit ’collation_ko’ 474

12 Reference for unit ’collation_ru’ 475

13 Reference for unit ’collation_sv’ 476

14 Reference for unit ’collation_zh’ 477

15 Reference for unit ’cp1250’ 478

16 Reference for unit ’cp1251’ 479

17 Reference for unit ’cp1252’ 480

18 Reference for unit ’cp1253’ 481

19 Reference for unit ’cp1254’ 482

20 Reference for unit ’cp1255’ 483

21 Reference for unit ’cp1256’ 484

22 Reference for unit ’cp1257’ 485

23 Reference for unit ’cp1258’ 486

24 Reference for unit ’cp437’ 487

25 Reference for unit ’cp646’ 488

26 Reference for unit ’cp850’ 489

27 Reference for unit ’cp852’ 490

28 Reference for unit ’cp856’ 491